Skip to main content

Full text of "Proceedings of the Royal Society of London"

See other formats 


arte (Re thy as hi, Ch Oe ait th 
eh atlanta nee sor rym Aerotek UE ated eid AM eda ted lt ie £ Wha Hs tt oaths Wie ants ska Abe te iow Wye ares 
pe A la tad edd tals iba Ht GAM ie Mh shhh thy Wists 1 At Gh tt Aan, het acd Ub ob 0 et) Way Mia berth 
ent er WE Habe A AHO thet eR HME oe ge Fig da dea Nd ood HALA ioe hte ede etd a Ce 
‘ sie eet an dda a died dos dcde Grek Oded weld Anal wee ae 


Werth ewe rmwrii ah ek Madea lit Ged @ Bd Me dei dae he ae a 
~tody alent ore: A etna teste enh shortlisted fel et Ai Ab ott Ue oad ahs be 
Hh Bite seabed te 
+ dette eh etl ew 


Ad Al A eet de doth) deus ibe 
Ab tad th Bae eel eked be 


ved wide 
BE Med einen dt bet be =A ote Holt hotell et AD chad edc the teak Wedd ait Abed 


Hara aide 


te Weal le eit 


fet te sa “Visti apy mote be te teha 


Se, Heriot dathett att eed (a 


hehe thE otic ey Re hdd olka he der ot DME abe EL Ak dethath a Us Gall LAD Ue eRe orf ode abt rthelt del cera Hoth the Waid iinet Watt Ube deled Af atl ea hat ak 
ons A a arin be yan dened AE 8 he hh ME BML nth Che TREO ohio Uy ak eth ke Le {421 Ae Afb eth Uh a he ts HA-a2 GR ohn ibaah agi Us the | ih atin a 
Las Hama on, ” pae Fe had ea vic rp of Sart Pater ave (aeh «i ane Prec et et meee by | aif Tia: Wad bee te EAT Ne had Ge BE te phe fhe dinette beste tl Abe iets i ile W 
A 


rir ae rt ee | 


died haa Pervert val hatha 
diate 1 


Nae ete ibaidh iba Qbesbe dn Deal) the thaolds tho dath: He eth & Miho eat Hale se eve eles 

Nios yt cH at es Hach dag A Meio ds ibe tke Wald fh oO Hog Meld ah: tar Goh g Dh Dy ch ha lD beth (he ye Mate 

dak, et baie AWD ed Mold edad: aided Ul 1 Rei ee ke beth ghee Let 

WE att ts abe Doves a ths i, desk he fas Meads ie Hs at resi bane pei yelts rat a reg 
‘ Ay h deaiaibs theta dl cat be the Ae thy Pye haw 

4 OL ee ht ian he 

tad Prentice het Hheded 


sire 
dite oe it 
" A bs 


Carri A reread na ibetjath (Wats att atte it rtestae a tu 
Won bi Ha Aa Ole ma 


it i 


yaeaei aU IS 
Ae Me 4 Wetisd Gos ett (haa edie age Gal ihm 
PDA ED dekh ot Hh 8 Ci 
Wheel) ered ee ae 4“ Geet « f« us 
dbl e TOA AAR eh 
fed eth dea iri die 
tal at lew 
Rw ari mri tbe oe i aR 
BL rie hie Meth att p 
beh OD doth pe beh ao hath ye) 
SMW tid Maeda Wd 
Cit et Mele ibe’ 
WE Uw Qa wand 
tthe da 1d ie dah tenet ead 
ads had adh thee Aid Piiedailet 84 
de Watt Ue dag wet sO Watt Matic 
ar ets aa Nethot dodkid Melpew Fob J 
“into 4s ow eed aa 
ior ot 


8 es W ety We dshanih veneae tide 
Wak 8 Gait-ti-wh Rade then earls . si West AB alk ibe of Sooitsibs ad ha he rel at Vane 
Fttkens dod itd Reed a tay “ Fan Peden feted Rue i ri CN Mt i * Ae At ‘ia a bank 
Wind edad ded athe he We Lotte Hest ath thee ah a bi rey ae 
Ae tbat Melt, Ho Mertel egal sib bes 


th tae Rede ath ea With the aide = 
a ans thie nite 


wl grat ara be 
niet 
x 


btaare tl 


HG <r etb ik v4 au 
7 MEO Mires. Reh Hod di doth fod 
“i 7 ah need OH t Wad Rou 

teria th EL ited 
ae Pivats eo ndind (ell A eg at hal 
Res Biot iia idog 

. ee at) a ‘ 


etal HN 4: 
rah if iach ty Un bdeet PW athe pat 
tt ie lit Cpe rey a sheen fis ens 


ai 
Wee 
ee 


Sania Chile it Bl i a aA nae 
Hate ees bn de ol Maths ipa had 


iy Senate aerate 

sat ina eae ete 8) aba 
¢ Cr yt 
fa ih 


ded d We ede ett rs ieee 


ATM haath th Wai alt t 


heen 

i Gr shell di Fi 
‘ “A Pie Ds dlotte Senbed oe at on 
Ua FW pe eth albe sib thee UAE Ly ead fh 

Malerba Ae de ACh Nic re de chan dt Whe bath Pe Ua edie 4x rd 
legen eaeee 4E WB ek Os Me Bef elt ib oak Te a ea neh dathate bts eter it ay is 
LB ERC tad aad an wy UREA dad lee te de Aoite tee dad cai thet 8 Fey Paik iy #8 

fed PC ea athe Balew uy ad 


oft ak Baty et W aha ie We Oe oe 


ofa) vy iby 4 


wy LeU ae nat 


ne ioe 


iidhasdoas 


r rn 
” 20 Mictban AW al coe Nii dak 
Vegi gees stp tet We tedededodt at a 


aed 
Mibere- doer 9 Uadce Sco ieiek.sh do Gea ebatbedolt, b act 
a Pa a ok Mad etl te SUE Greed ba F dat Myeuxe Bi plead Barman iy ie Sa habs hale oH 
c tale dopactath eal ic tame WA Sheena: 8, oa iPeit iyielg Me ted rhe 
j OO» SiN a Mi Misadestetl& bik wads ae ay li Uy a fhe gett tiNieeesain 
6s ake dave i) sexi LO sioHE at WP sbesdinthl d Hntbs del: ei wire dash thaw : besa th i 
or > Pe il Or pag ram 


ai 
Ache ae wl 


feohine belt 
paid oe Heide Uy et «if ni 4 ait etd oon tests 


oe ftir 


be oy ie iy a oy cae 
ag 4.8. aie Me ee i) 


edad ads brthe bad 
othe tedden ie baal | fe nth 
r tat ¥; bn f Cy fe} 


ob 
FM aaa a ae t a d ek 
ECM Ae nae oer He 1 f 


CBSGO-H Mad ded tt 
yy ered tM tke & 4a ped 
Wed Mi edd gd 
Daal Ruth Saari! Ny « 
sono pre A) edo ol Pa dak do ded ne 
Oth Mei athe ed beady a 


wks ti 
Cee Cs ear aa? 
LA ey oa ae 
def ded aoe 


ia A 
ABs ded ag 
a ed oan 3 


te ee) a | 
CMO. ot 
) 


ede cooked ei Ae 
nok Vi & Hedads ny 4 ile 4 ok tw 


rin ‘ 
14 Wuledaaed PR er ee erie nT ted Ivica Ve 
a4 sta wel tea Wisk daa Ve ee 
OY Ahh dint has 


ead Y 


y 
i 
ahead ry i 
Aan tt aw vik te wa HY i ea: Aa Ns 
bid et rary wd * * 
i aed “4 Mit per ' a 
nets a What Han Xe es a 


Rey © UMM datiad Maeda Hd db ide New dai) Sie 
ia GAM Ar hc-dod G4 Goede ead Gedad [fe tidied 
fi NVM dedi A Roe Hehe drt ded 
Stet -Heedt a bed o 
ee “ae xed Widoeeea a 
a WM Conk eat +H HE I he De eh) Rw 
Louie VR Halter Wha Hidden Baal ls 


as + 
A og Es thaw oP cate 
se ”" Hedrste hed 


Neh beh i 
eek aa 


ee vf 


add cteth 
i inaare ha ey 
Au da) ede aiid 


: <i fly dhe > 7 
HAN Rats i isieded t oh " 
EE be hi ette Bs eater 

Het E ok Das Vig et ALS ny. 
shy 4 et : iy’ i. i 
Cig et ‘ Wobwh 
Wet th Bi yh Ue ribs Gn dbet he be abs had 
babi 4 eds Peet | ied 1 He 


ats 


Wi ivi ite 

¥ é on it 

xe ied Ee ie! vy ia a miiatestha 

ane as yk dhs (ui UBS Ante Ee i et) iat § 

yariedsi Wath i eda ea tate fai 

Uidarbads ans iMate pA ne be He sy i 

Sh i AN Sah te did rf aN) Wits 

HO SEATSAE Me Ba oly! Hae atte oh 
sa 9 ih Worth ehette h 


had 


is mF ry “ backs death Wo se 
i GATE Feb bess ibe 0b he 
ry Lhe bron i beta) (i a3 
Pitta dail baad a Md 
far Ree Mtoe rect a Pe Dw vibe 

Py eae te 2055 da We tie ind! Db sib 
shin a4 hae th alas hn Font 
feds tals 


ae Ned Oe dad 
= ihokt at dod “ Wedd vba § R 

“ Peruri rae ie raver 
Kod eo Mabrgasd ide ed ek D : Hteh dela aet 
Wow j 5 Sie had 


fier: Yo J 
ib is tad aa 
Mili en ha ie viboat eit 

\ slits bate oil 


+ aioe at La 
ip Uae ads e 


j MSA dl A 


ea vedeiow mata we Gai 
Sia dia a 


oi Rca 
hear de aati 

ty He veday de. 

: Ay aa ita Ft oo r) 
pet * ae ‘ 

iH Leena ve Ay ae aay ata tibet 


ee es 


i 
ted Write ot owed ge tde 
rey heed We dud cts d-udl tle ld 
Pee Oe adie Ea ek kD pik ded dei de 
Pin th Oe Ht ethnnde eb 4 dot kes asad ae Wat iu 
bor WMA HN cna aie We 
ord a Naw Arata Nailed denied ye, 
DA eC et at eRe areca" as GING) a ra st oy 4 
AWA Mh dod he RW whl i lis VU RaNunis Ratueoh net dsj 
wea Ge Wedsedices Ged arth 9 Mid Gade hae Ua.) 
aH MEW Move Meg eds | Weii dud bales he deaieeeh Dad: ha eat 
eh wed nt abode Hol ehaWod | elisa Weil Wierd Ve Medd, dann’ 
\ phe sie arate ad uA ety Cha ah eS tl ee 

Wee odode MANA Rit 
eeoe CO Sc see or Markie 
Swit Al Anise aided dike 
We Rod tee 
(ribet 


Taide at 
oo 
i 


ued vau 
v3 ws) thaed biti fel 
Py “al Hidedst Sided Ged 
heh irdeto Oe dat iedes 
athe Uo 4 dats 
“ 


yes Waa asteets Wile 
a ele dind chegk: 4b 


De gk Wein 
HD ed) iad deiedy ends te fa 
Fhe Wee Se ee etd ‘ 

J Ata U4 Reta a 
AW Ph i heed Crt 


AMR ee eter 
Cistratets 
i 


Bement sa 
+ Witte ether « 


Colds altos 4 thf yaks <a, 
Yea did 


Th Une vee Gira ye “Wy + 
“ RETA Sey rh ie he arr a orn we arr) ; HU Wee as ised te Yb Adie att nyabitate oo i tan ee ea sent 
: 1m deeeds ane ball . siya Lat abe Dadi wadecbeth, Mowiiieda dd 1 ede Bf Fatty ete retro rt ot tet 
Hho we tor igri Pad od My Ai " ihe dasha th inn wee gag fpr a haat tes rity Widdth, 


: “ a PE OO Nr WP Behn Ut 
WAREMAN Ged detent Fe Ranta eco Un Hag 
wool th dette Zod ten dew i toot od we , 
Haha Vy Wel Ai Welsh woke NW Ge od oy 
Wom Fall te tant Wesbede td ter dod hd deed Wa) dee 
elie ho 4 Aa ho di ged SS tet 
AW det ow ty Orde deg 


oie a CIN apt my 


iiss a 


be “ M 
nnes pits 


he ‘ Hee 


; atid Gade uals Ciiedannd 
« FOG Hat 4A he ded eit a Wat ‘: AW gediai' 4b eh dotted Paro or aint mice) bier 
id-deda douse qrisuedeaeeededne WRU Thiet ciated Sadathide re desacttayt uct ie 
SAG NAR As Fea tia a indeed oo Wi desta gH Ue aria hectare hr 
J Y hee yang seeded 


tt pata Reta 
Hiatt! i 
Hal Whang io 


every v 


thei’ ar GOuee. ike Mh ine Ot 


tried 


+ + rats PAWN hae Wh Webeed oy ay a, 
te Cea aie dane Ha wi 


4 
ih ie a id peor sp ith 


Pe et AWG aided Lae 


We thie) ech, Pete ete neon eats 
Se tutualnea i a azote! Pew a Y et Ce viene vee hdl iat 
un hae woes Wad sdeibs dewawe tied a ist dn ait 8 Ud WALT SHO de da Ua We hed ie net dat Ue 4 
“ a 4 


Pate | ia WoW he taed he ew saya ba etl 


bere 
a AS We pet ety 


ae rib 
rae eta dee seb 


a fi? Wy 
iT wed ed Biers 


wea ea “y 
Wb PHAR lode ded 
V6 Gi tae fal rept id Saas 
by eka are tra hb 


dod dedeu Rode dep 
WH wo eet 
4 


Pathe 
at rat tet rented 


rN “We 


rae 3 de ke bei aH LHA hee 


# # 
. afte Pararern the Mattes He ard ee emiieed Phe Habe ie et 


1 eG eed dl? Cy Tere aie 
Om heel ade Wed MB Medoe 


Ah 
Hate 


a 


aes) erie td, 

Wales ? q 

ath ASE pret ie otieta 
i 


hed hehe (ites dai & we ys 


HAAN I ie tel! ok Heb edad ede de adel 


Tattle Gib oe 


{ 
A Nave tlett de aM 


ve + thas We a 
otek edd ie Athol Hah Wate A ie Wade & Aaali Wn de rheth Mh: aa tea rae ca 
“ nent toe Mrtigde Ob AH Wate Wabi iede a Sa Br alawesAts a Yh: Weel Abe odd by inhaling stiny GN ea eee? Gaol wan iva bane 
i SMa wad oh Qld Sede Bethe) : ee eke) Asta a ag Erte eH A ikgie i iLaP eth de pa he thee Ra sic bin Li eat ts hed ete 
or had’ Wid dovod d “gh Wide SAE Re rete yt) ee ttith netted pve wen {ined vee 


(ed A ah ee dy dy 


We Feb aih be Sy, 
Rishont ai gue al: Poe ” nue ae UW Utded ad aes 

ie je dileG- ded teas ha We Mf ba eb ohh Mave lion aay 
Be dee tod hk Made aU 


W 
w Ahi ohe bee thet) Oise diate He tede ge 
a Pie iy! paris ed eee ay Nays sy fir 


Pgh suse tl 
Atle 


W bee g Vea 
itaibeetays Se et 


vee ai. 


Se i edad Go ee be ; it RAs ri Raley Ween (oe 
Ved ek Read (te » Te Perver gore wera ied w at 
ey ye a eZ) {) arsbhnba ty wah Ae sei tbau acento 1h Ge danias ew, 

PUM bee titer ote it) v4 Neha lene 


Per eet ey Gade: Wa 
hy wy few Wi gail 2 We 


Pe Wage bey 
Veet Wie eee 
nae eati i 
af dawned 

Ria reese 


did 
el dea aed kidd 
WN edt dala a 
iM Ping bad van 


We Gaede ais if 

yedwcte Orvadeied 

eid he Web he Hare Hat abe iyeg 
& 


Herd) it by eh et 
aw een tan 
fede ae " 


: “ lal > ‘ in 
Medetili dt ded 1 ded Shae Wig Y CTY tied 
ee Meme Hamed iy ded hed A arid i HA ode er) Wikihinwnbery 
ac ‘ ter th) Vowan hth Crea et a ay ay ae 
Le. 


Herat Rr We a 


sn aihrean el a 
fea ib A alk ih ine be that aS satire Pore) i ‘ 
dalle Whar Ad Haye Cetin es hy heis ie ean ery etfs Wey atty seine! rw ite ev pista 
eh et oe do A eu ci dite 4 Lak Va \aiiy Ae) a ai Galea ket” hid oe, wa ‘ 

Mn tea ate eta ; iy iicceneinesy 
f “¥ a ey « He (Oe eigen ee 
bh ddad fae er Ay Py Se oh te ded te PaO Waite we te tailet eben “ Z ( ol is Hee ent OU eae et 
RNA TG Heirktoob! de shealiad ae Haan Ub Ga Ad pishine Conor Mee ty eine \ ra 
ni peers dba snes it Ds Phe Bai te Ri se ted i ee ee AA FAB Ge bork he empties a fi 
oie we aod tae 


sve HB Qortdord eet dk Heme eal g athe alee be 

Bev aite dW oe Wein th be Webs at hedge vee femow att 8 ied 

be path ee Corer} Weil ews We ends ee eee oa atetrel | 2 iesee Ae 

one Hah ie thea if eek Le eb Rec sey Sit vire ett tek ma oesaann Lis 

ar ey ab ese dao diibanbeait) alae Hae ike er « 

jad nt hi 4 AOA erie (depends Aaihiiod path Eanets Waa eed \ 
owed atiib edie il pe fh 


ep heRe bared ane 
BG AG A eked didn ‘ a 
Poke he Wid Cie ete hed a did ei 
tM W Hied ut tats (ed ode 
Poder tet hat de dq ded Wh 
He 1 Tedd We ke Us dowd ¥eMyeb 
a deed dea Soden Wa 
hide 6 Hanh hs eo de ie wh aha Me Ah 
ne ates 


We WR Ae lee ay 
WE datetialt cow 


Dhl 
eae in 


A, . 
4d erie ei deus 
ete Web yal raeiiteied RU ee CLIN a 
row it eM The eet ite) ye We Ne ead ed det p ad yp 
HLH rheate ve tb et dea sien Vari Roh ted alae 
SRG a WW dete Wetatiaak | 
He Woda hed ete 


U) cf Alp 
Callie ile Rega day) Vi deue wad: Tawa te 
> ore The byhe Cate Reg ie Wis sis at 

oh ode , 


WBA dake 
at A ed a Md MW eign 
HN Wied Hee dedadoe a 


Moa 


fee eyo ey 


® Hee Whew Ve ee ee " we WENA fii 
eerdey ba hasan Hie ieee a wold ete ceed r Lh a WW lew 4s Hh he the Meet ela theft 
et OR Met) beh et Gund Wade be Bek bet wh We pow vie ied ee } di Oh Vig sae Ni in tk aati we tae he EAS ta dh TU ened 
Hath ier Ae OB te dew oder se be ee 


eet ee Ath ted G Hod ee Ay ei ete doabitbaly 
PO ea degli a daa 
hed ede Dd ie 


FW Ber held ewe He aew aie Gekeas yevavanucieds HOLE iE abet Leal Welty ce 
UU H eMart oak eal deen a Wenbaibei AL A MHL Ge ah neva diet} ike Wah 8 tbo ne 
SPS AEA te Hed ot rates Ne nude ST dee thdeiit  AE Het) 
aided PA Wed "ike dani We ees 
Het bait Rei wel 
ew te he ve 
SM ihe n ded 


We wed a OR dea. 

Done ete ty Wes ee 
Heat EL ded Mod Mb Geode ded Gi 
weed Hs hs Mh oe 
eM e Wedet Ui 


4 
apt amit " 
yee ae aaat- 
OW Orr art Ode 
hips onthe Si eet dott od 


we 
Sima Wwe 
aAew ay ie 
“ 


Wea ae thee 
CCMA ICOU ES Mae MT erareerr an het ae yas 
Fe a Wh Hah de ah oaks Wate ad Gir edad 
Pet ide Gedo WG he belle Mee G di Wena wo ibe 
oft teh th Betty he Mtr bead 


WeMiwencibel 4a ( 
a | 
Cetera 
Heth a be 


ae prey 
hath Feed ast ovt 
en nena edad 
tee at 


eronecent 
Pian ee 


iY 
peta be ce haW ded 
Hen Ce Vere ee 


at asl cred gis < th 4 ) 
Se sh hoe eB thei Hk eg Bab a Bedi: 
WHat tate tp nande Qed ae ddl Raihodemen Wohin Ab 
dat ihe id wow ee AL ke nd 
PE SCOU SUEUR EO et MOU M@eat tir et et ern weeti atts an ee 
eh hey ox HHA he et BM CA, HM Ob be Wa eT ie lob ihe 
Y a  thedebed Cal Rett etre A ha dide bed wed atid ueied & ply Hee fee thee de ee KM Eee eee 
PO eth ert hei bal an oA te Miett He Cie de oe BOM AND HL Ged bette ME DPD Sia hn nb he gs 
Fe tbeid vy rebel ted dada ae be dad Hi kaldoig Wishemens Wee A fo idete Wk FN tot AE het agp chet 
he Rabe We eet rk fee he otha ld eth Wee ek eg ee eae wey tefl, Ot Aue NCL tT a ea ea 
OD eth ed Me the Heed a nn Litas he psavart ele ae Coo Ay rhe st a 
wb dant Bae, gf ACM a ho iba Blt abs ast otc UO MLR bahar bo lh ite 


ee Wodidedeg , 
“ Hat abe ibe tod owe) 
aatlien « ae he dot Cie 


ih Me we dee 
NE eH HD dae se ot ede . 
Neda W deol dude oe dedsibeus Hen ancy aed iyi) dedeae 
ted denen dit) MMW UE ke Va dawn ad ae 


oh Bai. 


hy 


naw a 
reais, 
¥ i 
- se 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF THE 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 


From January 11, 1866, to May 23, 1867, inclusive. 


. 4 té Pa 


P Co 
ap iss ¥ 


LONDON: 
PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, 


RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. 
MDCCCLXVITI. 


CON TEN Ls. 


VOL. XY. 


————— 


nwa. TI Sbs gas odoin Gono 0 150 O Om anid doin Ooi s tae doo mos On 
Sixth Memoir on Radiation and Absorption. By Professor J. Tyndall, F.R.S. 
On the Spectrum of Comet 1, 1866. By William Huggins, F.R.S. ...... 


Note on the Secular Change of Magnetic Dip, as recorded at the Kew Ob- 
servatory. By Balfour Stewart, M.A., LL.D, F.R.S., Superintendent of 
ULE DReRvanGIar Seine Seine son eo socom bo mnb dour s ORG oom opmod- 


On the Specific Gravity of Mercury. By Balfour Stewart, M.A., LL.D., 
F.R.S., Superintendent of the Kew Observatory 


On the Forms of Graphitoidal Silicon and Graphitoidal Boron. By W. H. 
Miller, M.A., For. Sec. R.S., and Professor of Mineralogy in the Univer- 
sity of Cambridge 


oooere@eoee ee ofFe oe eeeooeoe eee ee eo eee ove evee ae eevee ee @ 


On the Viscosity or Internal Friction of Air and other Gases, being the Ba- 
kerian Lecture, delivered by James Clerk Maxwell, M.A., F.R.S....... 


Further Observations on the Spectra of some of the Nebule, with a Mode 
of determining the Brightness of these Bodies. By William Huggins, 
BEERS eee ai feat, cee oro honey sia eo 6 be s%0) he's hate ohelepsiot a Iake Sunsorsselviotoragand elehet dl 


Account of Experiments on the Flexural and Torsional Rigidity of a Glass 
Rod, leading to the determination of the Rigidity of Glass. By Joseph 
D. Everett, D.C.L., Assistant to the Professor of Mathematics in the Uni- 
MOUSER MOM ChLASSOW: vai tha ate Sliialole:/sial sleet aislenes evel abelehel tet austlehtudd lars aod 


Note on the relative Chemical Intensities of direct Sunlight and diffuse 
Daylight at Different Altitudes ofthe Sun. By Henry E. Roscoe, F.R.S., 
mudwosep ht Baxendeolly HRAALS, i.e wicks sib Nira POET a 


Researches on Acids of the Lactic Series.—No. I. Synthesis of Acids of the 
Lactic Series. By E. Frankland, F.R.S., and B, F. Duppa, Esq. ...... 


Note on a Correspondence between Her Majesty’s Government and the Pre- 
sident and Council of the Royal Society regarding Meteorological Obser- 


sevens to be made by Sea and Land. By Lieutenant-General Sabine, 
1 Bio] Ras Ba NRMeg 9885 to. ood Ger Resa. oar tee OM OORT ee 


On the Action of Compasses in Iron Ships. By Mr. John Lilley ........ 


On the Tidal Currents on the West Coast of Scotland. By Archibald 
SAMUI Vee MBE MSDs hc ahs cco leibh bee avaye in of s) eM ehgh «sai tha ale ash ecole dintoye oseeaee 


age 


P 
On the Colouring and Extractive Matters of Urine.—Part I. By Edward 


wb. 


10 


11 


14 


17 


19 


20 


25 


29 
38 


42 


lv 


Page 
On a possible Geological Cause of Changes in the Position of the Axis of 
the Earth’s Crust. By John Evans, F.R.S., Sec. G.S.... 2... cee eee 46 
On the Action of Trichloride of Phosphorus on the Salts of the Aromatic 
Monamines. By A. W. Hofmann, LED., FOR.S., &e.... 1. pee 55 
Notice of a Zone of Spots.on the Sun. By John Phillips, M.A., LL.D., 
F.R.S., Professor of Geology in the University of Oxford...........+-. 63 
On Uniform Rotation. By C. W. Siemens, F.R.S.........0.00e02 homer 71 
On a Fluorescent Substance, resembling Quinine, in Animals ; and on the 
Rate of Passage of Quinine into the Vascular and Non-vascular Textures 
of the Body. By H. Bence Jones, M.D., F.R.S., and A. Dupré, Ph.D.,: 
Ie sao ode Seine Wie lia etaje sq aldkara Are wMbees 6 ea wie atans aps Gina ee rrr 73 
Account of the Discovery of the Body of a Mammoth, in Arctic Siberia, in 
a Letter from Dr. Carl Ernst von Baer, of St. Petersburgh, For. Mem. R.S. 93 
On the Bursa Fabricii. By John Davy; M.D. FR:S., &¢.. a. . eee 94 
Researches on Gun-cotton.—Memoir I. Manufacture and me of 
‘“Gun-cotton, By F,:A. Abel, PAGS. V.PIGS: . 7 cen5 tks age 102 
On the Dentition of Rhinoceros leptorhinus (Owen). By W. Boyd Dawkins, 
MBA. Oxon, Gio oh Se fad: baie de> dda orodet- aye ae ae 106 
Experimental Researches in Magnetism and Electricity —Part I. By H. 
Wilde, Msq). fess ei a er re, Seem ae wei he 107 
Extract of a Letter from Charles Chambers, Esq., Acting Superintendent 
of the Bombay Magnetic Observatory, to the President. -«si.i<s cee ae lil 
On the Tides of the Arctic Seas.—Part III. On the Semidiurnal Tides of 
Frederiksdal, near Cape Farewell, in Greenland. By the Rey. 8S. Haugh- 
GOW BTSs ig ahaw'ss 5 4 ene 9 Sane Bi aaceel ahere wsponetll 4s 63, Puoranudis) Tie a nr 114 
On the Mysteries of Numbers alluded to by Fermat. By the Rt. Hon. Sir 
Frederick Pollock, Lord Chief. Baron, F.R.S., &e.... 2.22.2 00950083 wae 115 
Report on the Levelling from the Mediterranean to the Dead Sea. By Co- 
donel ‘Sir-Henry: James; “Rel, FHS. 0.51 atoietate stele senor ee 128 
Note on the Amyl-compounds derived from Petroleum. By C. Schor- 
RO TDMRE TE Se 2b ee oa alee ane ote Ws 6 ec 0 agente gue eas eaeeash ars Caer 07s cae 131 
On a New Series of Hydrocarbons derived from Coal-tar. By C. Schor- 
NOTIDTIOR Celene an 6 go viens are noe ove plate Sieve aGgeteens aiken a 132 
The Calculus of Chemical Operations; being a Method for the Investiga- 
tion, by means of Symbols, of the Laws of the Distribution of Weight in 
Chemical Change. Part IL—On the Construction of Chemical Symbols. 
By Sir B. C. Brodie, Bart., F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry in the Univer- 
pity or Oxford. fo eet tele See oe eee ob Os aes oe 136 
On the Motion of a Rigid Body moving freely about a Fixed Point. By J. 
Je coylvester, EID) OR. Be ok CR ees es ast e's one 139 
On Appold’s Apparatus for regulating Temperature and keeping the Air 
in a pe at any desired degree of Moisture. By J. P. Gassiot, 
BN Se SER i ho That, AS se Sa caa dela des ae clita bot te ae ae 144 


On the Spectrum of a New Star in Corona Borealis. By William Huggins, 


F.R. 8., and VW :A; Miller, ‘MED. ; V.-P. and Preas: RAS 20 se. ee ee 146 


v ~ 


Page 
Condensation of Determinants, being a new and brief Method for computing 
their arithmetical values. By the Rev. C. L. Dodgson, M.A., Student of 
ieee mucctr, Oxford ys vet wesc te cet Ose Sous ae ohlia we ee ra heen 150 


An Account of Experiments in some of which Electroscopic Indications of 
Animal Electricity were detected for the first time by a new method of 
experimenting. By Charles Bland Radcliffe, M.D., Fellow of the Royal 
College of Physicians in London, Physician to the Westminster Hospital 
and to the National Hospital for Paralysis and Epilepsy, &. .......... 156 


On the Dynamical Theory of Gases. By J. Clerk Maxwell, F.R.S. L. & E. 167 


On the Means of increasing the Quantity of Electricity given by Induction- 
Machines. By the Rev. T. Romney Robinson, D.D., F.R.S. .......... 171 


On the Stability of Domes. By E. Wyndham Tarn, M.A............... 182 


On the Anatomy of the Fovea centralis of the Human Retina. By J. W. 
Hulke, F.R.C.S., Assistant Surgeon to the Middlesex and Royal London 


i sreem MCP LOS MLAS a rs rats oc pis alta cs ches a elenbamie + uri S 189 
Second Memoir on “Plane Stigmatics.” By Alexander J. Ellis, F.R.S., 
upc! cSt! oc chek ecienegtine Raila ae ara tile Pc a SL ra a ia ae Saree ALA 192 
Fundamental Views regarding Mechanics. By Professor Julius Pliicker, of 
POEM BE OLIVE CTY, ECO eit Tats e a ate tetera eta lsc Mien eee ee Che Rene hes 204 
Contributions to Terrestrial Magnetism.—No. X. By Lieut.-General Ed- 
ward Sabine, R.A., President of the Royal Society ...............00- 209 
On the Relation of Rosaniline to Rosolic Acid. By H. Caro and J. Alfred 
Wanklyn, Professor of Chemistry at the London Institution .......... 210 


On the Chemical and Mineralogical Composition of the Dhurmsalla Meteo- 
ric Stone. By the Rev. Samuel Haughton, M.D., F.R.S., Fellow of Tri- 


nee Le Sere U MTN Ge A as eile a se gy ates ge igs oa akg nie os sw ae 214 
On the Preparation of Ethylamine. By J. Alfred Wanklyn and Ernest T. 
METIS. oie soft rietns & are eee eA BIR ACSIA, Ae: Mica pei Pusu 218 


On the Expansion by Heat of Metals and Alloys. By A. Matthiessen, F.R.S. 220 


On the Colouring and Extractive Matters of the Urine.—Part II. By Ed- 
mGMOC MUNCH WE... fais ee oe eee 5 oe SERCO ORE Senn REESE Ie oe Ba por 222 


On the Absorption and Dialytic Separation of Gases by Colloid Septa.— 
Part I. Action of a Septum of Caoutchouc.—Part II. Action of Metallic 
Septa at a Red Heat. By Thomas Graham, F'.R.S., Master of the Mint. 223 


Notes on the Rearing of Tenia echinococcus in the Dog, from Hydatids, with 
some Observations on the Anatomy of the adult Worm. By Edward 
MCPs iip Mem, tno, vemie, (COU. cae vue yaaa mse 4 \aisildndualalss a « 224 


Observations on the Ovum of Osseous Fishes. By W. H. Ransom, M.D... 226 


Variations in Human Myology observed during the Winter Session of 
1865-66 at King’s College, London. By John Wood, F.R.C.S........ 229 


On the Muscular Arrangements ofthe Bladder and Prostate, and the manner 
in which the Ureters and Urethra are closed. By J. B. Pettigrew, M.D. 
PGETI “rt tns htc ses « Ce Eee MOE COM fe ole ce aandebies ereretere ene ba fsa 244 


V1 


ate : | Page 
Results of the Magnetic Observations at the Kew Observatory.—No. II. 
Lunar Diurnal Variation of the three Magnetic Elements. By Lieut- 


General Sabine, PUR.S. "2. ie kw ee ec ate + te 249 
On the Congelation of Animals. By John Davy, M.D., F.RB.S., &....... 250 
Letter to the President from Lieut.-Colonel Walker, R.E., F.R.S., Super- 

intendent of the Trigonometrical Survey of India ...............000: 254 


Spectroscopic Observations of the Sun. By J. Norman Lockyer, F.R.A.S. 286 
On a Crystalline Fatty Acid from Human Urine. By E. Schunck, F.R.S. 258 


On Oxalurate of Ammonia as a Constituent of Human Urine. By E. 
schunck, HN.S.5.). ais «sone oboe eel ey eb p Gaui: ae er ee 209 


On the Structure of the Optic Lobes of the Cuttle-Fish. By J. Lockhart 
Clarke, THRAS. 0 eine os Saleh soles o0 62 ial cle 5 ohne oe 5 ee 260 


On the Laws of Connexion between the conditions of a Chemical Change 
and its Amount.—No. II. On the Reaction of Hydric Peroxide and Hy- 


dric Iodide. -By A. Vernon Harcourt, M.A., and W. Esson, M.A....... 262 
On the Stability of Domes.—Part Il. By EK. Wyndham Tarn, M.A., Mem. 
moy. Inst. Brit, Architects ........s. 0008s esse ote be 266 
A Supplementary Memoir on Caustics. By A. Cayley, 1 5.8. .o eee 268 
Anniversary Meeting: 
MLOPOrb Or AUAILONS. cee es eerie © eva cee ts +e apn eet 268 
List.of Fellows deceased, &e. 2. 5s. us ste ce es +a ee ee 269 
elected since last Anniversary .°... =... eee 270 
Address of the President: 0... 04... ss me tse) ee ab. 
Presentation of the Medals” 5... 0.0. 2s .0e.. eee: see 278 
Election of Council and Officets 25.0 i. . see os «1 ee 285 
Financial Statement: Jz..°...54 2 «77. « <0 + a): cee: he ee eee 286 & 287 
Changes and present state of the number of Fellows................ 288 
Discussion of Tide Observations at Bristol. By T. G. Bunt, Esq......... 289 


On the Heating of a Disk by rapid Rotation 7m vacuo. By Balfour Stewart, 
IMOAG, ERS; and P.'G."Baits MAG ergs eases 290 


On the Bones of Birds at different Periods of their Growth. By John Davy, 
IVES Ol Sid 8 ss es CA i Ll hl fet Agere ARIE Go. oa sa on 299 


On Poisson’s Solution of the Accurate Equations applicable to the Trans- 
mission of Sound through a Cylindrical Tube; and on the General Solu- 
tion of Partial Differential Equations. By R. Moon, M.A., late Fellow of 
Qucen's College (Cambridge: +*s2 22g «1 eee een cee Ts 306 


Abstract of the Results of the Comparisons of the Standards of Length of 
England, France, Belgium, Prussia, Russia, India, Australia, made at the ~ 
Ordnance Survey Office, Southampton. By Capt. A. R. Clarke, R.E., 
F.R.S., &c., under the Direction of Colonel Sir Henry James, R.E., F.R.S., 
&e.4ivector of the Ordnance Survey) s:.). «4's,. iy wicpenaieeigee eee ee ee 311 


On the Formation of “ Cells” in Animal Bodies, By E. Montgomery, M.D, 314 


Vil 
Page 


Preliminary Notice of Results of Pendulum Experiments made in India. 
bye ireut.-Col. Walker PiRiOi e506 1 Sel ds gets wedcoedveed Clee te ees 318 


eoesvevereeeeevoeveteeveeeeeee ee se* ee tose eveereeeosoee es eeeeseeoe see ode 


Actinometrical Observations among the Alps, with the Description of a New 
Acinometer. By the Rev. George C. Hodgkinson’. <...5........06-- 321 


An Eighth Memoir on Quantics.. By Professor Cayley, F.R.S. ........ 330 


On a New Method of Calculating the Statical Stability of a Ship. By C. 
W. Merrifield, F.R.S., Principal of the Royal School of Naval: Architec- 
SEPB go 6 Lee TRG Cr RR ECCI 1 a oer arin oR er eel ye 332 


Transformation of the Aromatic Monamines into Acids richer in Carbon. 
ayeueustus, W. Fofmann, LD, FAR:S., &ce. 2... cece ces buns ae 335 


On the Elimination of Nitrogen by the Kidneys and Intestines during Rest 
- and Exercise, on a Diet without Nitrogen. By EH. A. Parkes, M.D.,F.R.S. 839 


Account of Experiments on Torsion and Flexure for the Determination of 


Rigidities. By J. D. Everett, D.C.L. ....... eco dic 60 meee Blue x 356 
On the Relation of Insolation to Atmospheric Humidity. By J. Park Har- 

eR eee Fay oc eet 8or re cnc sa esa i0 oe ie. a. veld vt ie Win, of Lb Saray es that hese oe ab. 
On the Conversion of Dynamical into Electrical Force without the aid of 

Permanent Magnetism. By C. W. Siemens, F.R.S...0...ee5 00. 00s. 367 


On the Augmentation of the Power of a Magnet by the reaction thereon of 
Currents induced by the Magnet itself. By Charles Wheatstone, F.R.S. 369 


A brief Account of the ‘ Thesaurus Siluricus,’ with a few facts and inferences. 
et See cw Nene ss ts st thle eu aad Masao gdb eit 372 


On a Transit-Instrument and a Zenith Sector, to be used on the Great Tri- 
gonometrical Survey of India for the determination, respectively, of Lon- 
gitude and Latitude. By Lieut.-Colonel A. Strange, F.R.S........... 385 


On the Orders and Genera of Ternary Quadratic Forms. By Henry J. 
SESMMemMonivle, MV APE Oak s.). se sain. dares Woratolepyh Wath w ed. ia Reval 387 


On the Influence exerted by the Movements of Respiration on the Circula- 
tion of the Blood. Being the Croonian Lecture for 1867, delivered by 


irae ed Pa VhE CM ATVCLCTS OM eS aw lahsia'nys « alawentrse geste of ities 0 6 ¥t aie qi bucnin'e 391 
Note on Mr. Merrifield’s New Method of calculating the Statical Stability 
of a Ship. By W. J. Macquorn Rankine, C.E., LL.D., F.R.S. ........ 396 


On the Theory of the Maintenance of Electric Currents by Mechanical 
Work without the Use of Permanent Magnets. By J. Clerk Maxwell, 
Mle Seer N cite ec erae ei lev cin rue meres Sawn ee sf ke sala mere wl dene 397 


On certain Points in the Theory of the Magneto-electric Machines of Wilde, 
Wheatstone, and Siemens. By C.F. Varley. Ina Letter to Professor 
eee: SCC r lta Sueel tit LHe aisles cialaiae oe she ge eeoiG soe 0 dis. siaen dere «ft aontare 403 


On a Magneto-electric Machine. By William Ladd, F.R.MLS........... 404 


Computation of the Lengths of the Waves of Light corresponding to the 
Lines in the Dispersion-Spectrum measured by Kirchhoff. By George 
PIdGeU Aun, i iv,o., Astronomer NOVA: ve ys ses ese ccs ste eeeenees 405 


Vill 
Page 


On a remarkable Alteration of Appearance and Structure of the Human 
Hair, . By Hrasmus Wilson, PF R.S.. 0.5 ces.5c. obs) sae 406 


Remarks on the Nature of Electric Energy, and on the Means by which it 
is transmitted. By Charles Brooke, M.A., F.R.S., P.MLS., &......... 408 


A Comparison between some of the simultaneous Records of the Barographs 
at Oxford and at Kew. By Balfour Stewart, LL.D., F.R.S., Superinten- 


dent of the Kew Observatory ..csicdcsveseecsevenes oi icaguache vivéon Ale 
On the Lunar-diurnal Variation of the Magnetic Declination, with special 
regard to the Moon’s Declination. By Dr. G. Neumayer ............ 414 


The Bakerian Lecture. Researches on Gun-cotton.—Second Memoir. On 
the Stability of Gun-cotton. By F. A. Abel, F.R.S., V.P.C.8......... 417 


Observations of Temperature during two Hclipses of the Sun (in 1858 and 
1867). By Jobn Phillips, M.A., LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S., Professor of 
Geology in the Untversity of Gxford. swe soy we tice vol = oun oe » 421 


A new fact relating to Binocular Vision. By A. Claudet, F.R.S. ........ 424 


On the Calculation of the Numerical Value of Euler’s Constant, which Pro- 
fessor Price, of Oxford, calls KE. By William Shanks, Esq., Houghton- 
le-Spring, Durham ys. occ cede see sees obs ese oe. 6 0 ee 429 . 


On a Definite Method of Qualitative Analysis of Animal and Vegetable 
' Colouring-matters by means of the Spectrum-Microscope. By H. C. 
Sorby ERS. Ge. oi. sic jeie oles wrels net 2 stoceiaia's cual sis w seis eee ae en 433 


Optics of Photography.—On a Self-acting Focus-Hqualizer, or the means of 
pees the Differential Movement of the two Lenses of a Photographic 
ptical Combination, which is capable, during the exposure, of bringing 
consecutively all the Planes of a Solid Figure into Focus, without alte- 
ring the size of the various images superposed. By A. Claudet, F.R.S. 456 


On the Genera Heterophylhia, Battersbyia, Paleocyclus, and Asterosmilia ; 
' the Anatomy of their Species, and their Position in the Classification of 
the Sclerodermic Zoantharia. By Dr. P. M. Duncan, Sec. G.S......... 460 


Contribution to the Anatomy of Hatteria (Rhynchocephalus, Owen). By 
Albert Gunther, M.A... Pin. MID ie sco ee eco ss 460 


On the Curves which satisfy given conditions. By Prof. Cayley, F.R.S... 462 — 


Second Memoir on the Curves which satisfy given conditions; the Principle 
of Correspondence. By Professor Cayley, F.R.S.........00.se cess ... 463 


On the Development and Succession of the Teeth in the Marsupialia. By 
William Henry Flower, F.R.S., F.R.C.8., &c., Conservator of the Mu- 


seum of the Royal College of Surgeons of England .......... MN Be Bebe 464 

: oo OD Ph 
On a Property of Curves which fulfil the condition Ea Gene By W. : 
J. Maecquorn Rankine, C.E., LL.D, FR.SSaL. & EB. ... 0... ee , 468 


A Tabular Form of Analysis, to aid in tracing the Possible Influence of 
Past and Present upon future states of Weather. By 8. Elliott Hoskins, 
IF ARB OCH Ai ahh 849 ede de L Leie-2 4's a dE ahh Hayannkicenge® Que Fon ae eee 470 


Monthly Magnetic Determinations, from June to November 1866 inclusive, 


1x 
Page 


made at the Observatory at Coimbra, by Professor J. A. de Souza, Direc- 
tor of the Observatory. With a Note by the President .............. AT4 


On the Internal Distribution of Matter which shall produce a given Poten- 
tial at the Surface of a Gravitating Mass. By G. G. Stokes, M.A., Sec. ee 
Bere tie pe PENN ooo er aititate laser ski siaiye ge este e eeice Say ely ela weer es 


On the Integrability of certain Partial Differential Equations proposed by 
Mr. Airy. By R. Moon, M.A., late Fellow of Queen’s College, Cam- 
PRON SMM eee cece Sector eye itaal care rele Wat) iy eale\ wi dicdaliece @viotare ecaies 486 


On the Lunar Atmospheric Tide ‘at Melbourne. By Dr. G. Neumayer.... 489 


On the Occlusion of Hydrogen Gas by Meteoric Iron. By Thomas Graham, 
EPA erg cee ere leroy Ah Larwits suselelom de Aon ane URS ve Shnkalela seal e ahelNhe hg es 502 


Further Observations on the Structure and Affinities of Hozoon Canadense. 
In a Letter to the President. By William B. Carpenter, M.D., F.R.S., 


IP Law Shag dA GSS ian One Oana MOREE Gs OSLOFT CVA ERE ERED Groat enn 503 
On the Intimate Structure of the Brain—Second Series. By J. Lockhart 
TESS, TETRIS Cg ies RET aaa RU Sak ca ge RN Hi Ny er 509 


On Pyrophosphoric Acid with the Pyro- and Tetra-phosphoric Amides. By 
epterG, ladatoney Ene URLS. G0 gal wa cas aa ss ayitie aee a Ma ee oe wien 510 


Ovibos moschatus (Blainyille). By W. Boyd Dawkins, M.A., F.G.S. .... 516 


Variations in Human Myology observed during the Winter Session of 
1866-67 at King’s College, London. By John Wood, F.R.C.S., Demon- 


SUPE OD GUE JRUTEIROLION TT: SIR y, pn IAG Ren ane oa RnR RMR ahah 518 
Obituary Notices of Deceased Fellows : 

Berane Oe MAPOMET este le «stk sens ei snimsls aid se 4a ss sae ae i 
POOPER LCE aA Gas gee Ren Ina Gn Ory as nee re v1 
Pomanelmihumrer @bristiey. 1 1 ty aa fa ore cfc. . ee tc cpw deca lcs lees xl 
ELUNE oABIENIG OTIS ees mm noes ee REE ae an X1V 
Mice-Admiral Robert FitzRoy ............-. a sah 5, «fon ths sh aps XX 
Hae MMe CHOTMNOT I races et tcc yy es Stes ae tae oe XXiil 
eae My AMMEN WOOG, aa way. sa diy lvlem se esa 8s ce eie fans selene XXIV 
SEEN iltanin lackeom booker. «oss. Jet! Sas ss apciae assis «018 <0) ahe. pasate XXV 
cL, 2 Lansi CIOS eh ea epee aN lire iment AU OS ean A Ae RE NE OK 
poi romn WWallaam: Wubbock, Wart. we cece. 56s. eres co's 8 ances wee es XXXii 
Sie TIGL TERTCE RC Ont aaa cree rl ee ee XXXVil 
Ins Wali lenny Smyth Yew ne sc dct eaves cs duns nes aes xia 
lohan inazyhmelio? eles.) MR ENE Ss ole wee, ate xliv 
mAote Theodor vor Kupier 2) ee) a Ye He Wl) ont e 8) xvi 


ERRATA. 


Page 25, last line (and throughout the same paper), for oxalyl read oxatyl. 

— 27, fifteenth line from bottom, for alcohol hydrogen read alcohol radical. 

— 169, fifth line from bottom, after dynamical theory insert comma. 

— 169, fourth line from bottom, after specific heats omit comma. 

— 171, sixth line oe top, omit specific gravity is -0069. 

we Gael 

— 184, line 12, for - read —_ ; 
— 185, line 24, for ¢1— cos @) read ¢(1— cos @). 
— 185, line 29, for (R3—r°). read (R?—r?) wr. 
— 196, thirteenth line from top, omi¢ and in an opposite direction of rotation. 
—- 199, last line, for asy read asym. 
— 200, top line, for vy read oy. 
— 200, third line from bottom, for o'e 
— 200, bottom line, for o'v read o’v’. 
— 222, line 3 from bottom, for Extraction Matters of the Urine read Extractive 

Matters of Urine. 

— 324, line 13, for Chianenna read Chiavenna. 
— 326, line 15 of column O, for 8112 read 1182. 
— 330, line 17, for clean read clear. 


2 read o'e2. 


NOTICE TO THE BINDER. 
In this Volume the following pages are to be cancelled :—9, 225, 319, 309 and 389. 


ERRATA. 
Vol. XV. page 469, line 6 from bottom, the expression in brackets { } should be 


raised to the mth power. 


: : d. d. 
Vol. XV. p. 486, in equation (1) for i read a 
The equation which occurs at the foot of page 488 is limited to the case where 
a=x-+a const. 


Vol. XV. page 497, line 12 from bottom, for +0:00631 read +:000631. 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF 


Pot ROYAL  SOCTHTY. 


FARRER EPL ILLLIL LILLIE 


January 11, 1866. 
Lieutenant-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 
The following communication was read :— 


< Qn the Colouring and Extractive Matters of Urine.—Part I.” 
By Epwarp Scuunck, F.R.S. Received June 29, 1865. 


(Abstract.) 


Notwithstanding the labour bestowed by many eminent men on the 
chemistry of urine during the last sixty years, there are portions of the 
subject of which we have but a very imperfect knowledge. Of all the 
properties of urine, none is more obvious, even to the ordinary observer, 
than its colour; and yet very little is known concerning the chemical na- 
ture of the substances to which its colour is due. Our ignorance in this 
respect. may be ascribed to various causes, among which may be mentioned 
the extremely minute quantities of these substances occurring in the se- 
cretion, the facility with which some of them are decomposed, their che- 
mical and physical properties (which present to our notice very little that 
is characteristic), and, lastly, the little interest which they possess for the 
chemist, notwithstanding their importance from a physiological and patho- 
logical point of view. According to the author, the colouring-matters 
peculiar to urine may be divided into three classes, viz.— 

Ist. Those which are only found occasionally in it, in consequence 
either of disease or of some abnormal state of the system. 

2udly. Those which are produced by spontaneous decomposition, or by 
the action of reagents on substances, either coloured or colourless, pre- 
existing in the urine. 

ordly. The colourmg-matter or matters occurring in normal urine, and 
to which its usual colour is due. 

VOL: XV. B 


2 Mr. E. Schunck on the Colouring [Jan. 11, 


‘The first class is again subdivided by the author into blue, purple or 
red, and black or brown colouring-matters. The appearance of a blue 
colouring-matter in urine has been frequently observed, both in ancient 
‘and modern times. By some it has been taken for indigo-blue, by others 
for prussian blue, while several chemists maintain that it consists of a pe- 
culiar substance, to which the name of cyanourine has been applied. The 
red colouring-matter is generally found in association with deposits of 
urate of ammonia and urate of soda, to which it communicates a pink or 
carmine tinge. Proust called it rosacic acid, while recent observers have 
given it other names, such as uroerythrine and purpurine. Very little is 
known regarding its true chemical nature. Prout, indeed, suggested that 
it might be identical with purpurate of ammonia; but he advanced no 
good grounds in support of this view, and it was proved to be erroneous 
by Berzelius. Instances of black urine are even of rarer occurrence than 
those of urine coloured blue. Indeed in many cases the black colour 
appears to have been due to red or purple pigments which communicated 
to the urine so deep a tint as to make it appear black. The melanic acid 
of Prout seems, however, to have been a peculiar substance, though closely 
resembling, as remarked by Berzelius, the black pulverulent substance 
which is formed by the action of concentrated acids on the extractive 
matters of urine. 

The second class of urinary colouring-matters, comprising these which 
are formed by artificial means and therefore do not preexist in the secre- 
tion, may also be subdivided according to colour—those which have hitherto 
been observed being either blue, red, or brown. The author concedes 
to Heller the merit of having first obtained from urine by artificial means 
colouring-matters of a pure blue or red tint; but the true nature of these 
colouring-matters, as well as of the process by which they are formed, was 
not understood by him. Subsequent researches have proved that the 
uroglaucine and urorhodine of Heller are identical with the indigo-blue and 
indigo-red obtained from vegetables. After mentioning the experiments 
of Hassall, who observed the formation in morbid urine of a blue colour- 
ing-matter which he showed to be indigo-blue, the author refers to his 
own researches. Ina paper published several years ago, he showed that 
urine contained as a never-failing constituent a body closely resembling if 
not identical with indican, the indigo-producing body of- vegetables, and 
that hence the formation of indigo-blue and indigo-red from urine might 
easily be explained. This result has been confirmed by Carter and others. 
The formation of brown colouring-matters by the action of acids on urine 
was first observed by Proust, who obtained by this means a brown resinous 
body and a black pulverulent substance. The same or similar bodies 
were obtained by Scharling and Liebig, as well as the author, who gave a 
- general account of them in the memoir just referred to. The simultaneous 
formation of glucose, or at least of a body having the same action on oxide 
of copper as glucose, is a fact first observed by the author. From an exa- 


1866. ] and Extractive Matters of Urine. 3 


mination of the composition of the brown pulverulent substance resulting 
from the action of strong acids on urine, the author infers that it may be 
expressed by the formula C,, H,NO,, which is also that of anthranilic 
acid, a product of decomposition of indigo-blue. All these products (the 
resin, the brown pulverulent substance which has received the name of 
uromelanine, and the glucose) are, in the author’s opinion, derived from the 
extractive matter of urine, which by decomposition with acids yields these 
and perhaps other products. The conclusion formerly arrived at by the 
author, viz. “that the indigo-producing body will be found, as regards 
its formation and composition, to occupy a place between the substance of 
the tissues and the ordinary extractive matter of urine,’’ is one which fur- 
ther research, as the author thinks, has only tended to confirm. 

The urinary colouring-matters belonging to the third class, consisting of 
those to which the ordinary colour of the secretion is due, have been less fre- 
quently submitted to investigation than those which make their appearance 
only exceptionally or in consequence of some artificial process of decompo- 
sition. This circumstance may easily be accounted for. These so-called co- 
louring-matters are all amorphous, and possess few characteristic properties ; 
hence their separation from the other constituents of urine is attended with 
great difficulties, and has even been pronounced impossible. They are also 
compounds of very little stability—-so much so that mere evaporation of 
the urine seems to produce a complete change in their composition, as is seen 
by the marked change of colour which takes place during the process. 
The opinions entertained on the subject by the earlier chemists, such as 
Fourcroy and Vauquelin and Proust, having been referred to, the author 
gives a short account of the experiments of Berzelius, Duvernoy, Lehmann, 
Scherer, Harley, Tichborne, and Thudichum. Berzelius and Lehmann 
both found the substance to which healthy urine owes its colour to be 
completely soluble in water. Subsequently, however, most of the attempts 
which were made to isolate the colouring-matter of urime ended in the 
separation of substances quite insoluble in water. ‘These must in all cases 
have been products of decomposition ; for the author considers it quite cer-_ 
tain that the colouring-matters derived from urime which are insoluble in 
water are not contained as such in the secretion, provided the latter is in 
its normally acid state. 

Having concluded his summary of the results obtained in previous re- 
searches, the author proceeds to give an account of his own experiments. 
Before doing so, he states that he shall apply the term “ colouring-matter ”” 
to those bodies only which, occurring naturally in urine or else formed by 
processes of decomposition, are insoluble or not easily soluble in water, 
while the substances easily soluble in water to which the colour of normal — 
urine is due, he shall continue for the present to call “‘ extractive matters.” 
The extractive matters being, in the author’s opinion, the source whence 
most of the colouring-matters of urine are derived, he resolved to com- 
mence the investigation by a careful examination of their properties and 

B2 


4 On the Colouring and Extractive Matters of Urine. [Jan. 18, 


composition. Indeed the first step which he thought it necessary to take, 
before proceeding with the investigation at all, was to ascertain whether — 
these extractive matters are bodies of a definite chemical nature, or 
whether they are merely accidental ;mixtures of various excrementitious 
substances thrown out by the system, and differing in their nature accord- 
ing to circumstances. In order to arrive at a positive conclusion on this 
point, several series of experiments were undertaken. The method devised 
for the purpose of separating the extractive matters from the other con- 
stituents of urine, and obtaining them in a state of purity, presents few 
features of novelty as compared with those previously employed. The ex- 
periments necessarily occupied a considerable time, since the author con- 
sidered it essential, in order to avoid decomposition, to evaporate all the 
solutions at the ordinary temperature by means of a current of air. The 
certainty of the conclusions arrived at afforded, however, ample compen- 
sation for the loss of time and additional labour thus occasioned. The 
composition of the extractive matters was determined by analyzing their 
lead compounds, since the substances themselves cannot be obtained in a 
state fit for analysis. 

From the experiments described in this part of his paper the author 
thinks he is justified in drawing the following conclusions :— 

1. Human urine contains at least two peculiar and distinct extractive 
matters, one of which is soluble in alcohol and ether, while the other is 
soluble in alcohol, but insoluble in ether. The existence of an extractive 
matter insoluble both in alcohol and in ether is extremely doubtful. 

2. The composition of these extractive matters varies slightly, without 
any corresponding difference in their appearance and properties being per- 
ceptible ; but these variations are not due to any difference in the quality 
of the ure or the source whence it was derived, but rather to the de- 
composition which takes place during the process employed in their prepa- 
ration, and which cannot be entirely avoided. 

3. When quite pure, the extractive matter soluble in alcohol and ether 
has a composition corresponding with the formula C,, H, , NO; while that 
of the extractive matter soluble in alcohol but jasolables in ether is ex- 
pressed. by the formula C,, H,, NO.,,. 


January 18, 1866, 


Lieutenant-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The President stated that Dr. William Bird Herapath, who by reason 
of non-payment of his annual contribution ceased to be a Fellow of the 
Society at the last Anniversary, had applied for readmission. The Statute 
relating to the case was read, and, in accordance therewith, notice was 
given that the question of Dr. Herapath’s readmission would be put to 
the vote at the next meeting. 

The following communications were read :— 


Or 


1866. | Prof. Tyndall on Radiation and Absorption. 


I. “Sixth Memoir on Radiation and Absorption.” By Prof. J. 
Tynpaut, F.R.S. Received December 21, 1865. 


(Abstract.) 


In this paper the author considers the deportment of certain additional 
elementary bodies towards Radiant Heat. He exposes powders and liquids 
of the same physical character, but differing from each other chemically, 
at a focus of dark rays, and describes the different effects produced. He 
examines and explains the experiments of Franklin on the absorption of 
solar heat. He then determines the radiative power of a great number 
of substances in the state of fine powder, and finds, contrary to the current 
belief, that in this state also chemical constitution exercises a paramount 
influence. ‘The results obtained by previous experimenters in connexion 
with this subject are illustrated and explained. ‘The reciprocity of radia- 
tion and absorption on the part of fine powders is also illustrated. It is 
moreover shown that the heat emitted from different sources, at a tem- 
perature of 100° C., varies in quality, this being proved by its unequal 
transmission through plates of rock-salt of perfect purity. The absorption 
by such plates varies from 4 to 30 per cent. of the incident radiation. 


II. “On the Spectrum of Comet 1, 1866.” By Witttam Hveerns, 
F.R.S. Received January 11, 1866. 


The successful application of prismatic analysis to the light of the ne- 
bulee showed the great importance of subjecting the light of comets to a 
similar examination, especially as we possess no certain knowledge of the 
intimate nature of those singular and enigmatical bodies, or of the cosmi- 
cal relations which they sustain to our system. ‘The importance of a pris- 
matic analysis of cometary light is enhanced by the consideration of the 
general resemblance which some of the nebulee present to the nearly round 
vaporous masses of which some comets, in some positions at least in their 
orbits, appear to consist,—a resemblance which suggests the possible ex- 
istence of a close relation between nebulous and cometary matter. 

I made several unsuccessful attempts to obtain a prismatic observation 
of Comet 1, 1864. The position of the comet and the weather were un- 
favourable. M. Donati succeeded in making an examination of the spec- 
trum of this comet. ‘‘ It resembles,”’ says M. Donati, “the spectra of the 
metals ; in fact the dark portions are broader than those which are more 
lumimous, and we may say these spectra are composed of three bright 
ies’ *. 

Yesterday evening, January 9, 1866, I observed the spectrum of Comet 


* Monthly Notices, Royal Astronomical Society, vol. xxv. p. 114. 


6 Mr. Huggins on the Spectrum [Jan. 18, 


1, 1866. The telescope and spectrum-apparatus which I employed are 
described in my paper “ On the Spectra of some of the Nebule ” *. 

The appearance of this comet in the telescope was that of an oval nebu- 
lous mass surrounding a very minute and not very bright nucleus. The 
length of the slit of the spectrum-apparatus was greater than the diameter 
of the telescopic image of the comet. : 

The appearance presented in the instrument when the centre of the 
comet was brought nearly upon the middle of the slit, was that of a broad 
continuous spectrum fading away gradually at both edges. These fainter 
parts of the spectrnm corresponded to the more diffused marginal portions 
of the comet. Nearly in the middle of this broad and faint spectrum, and 
in a position in the spectrum about midway between 6 and F of the solar 
spectrum, a bright point was seen. The absence of breadth of this bright 
point in a direction at right angles to that of the dispersion showed that 
this monochromatic light was emitted from an object possessing no sensible 
magnitude in the telescope, 

This observation gives to us the saforination that the light of the coma 
of this comet is different from that of the minute nucleus. The nucleus 
is self-luminous, and the matter of which it consists is in the state of 
ignited gas. As we cannot suppose the coma to consist of incandescent 
solid matter, the continuous spectrum of its light probably indicates that 
it shines by reflected solar light. 

Since the spectrum of the light of the coma is unlike that which cha- 
racterizes the light emitted by the nucleus, it is evident that the nucleus is 
not the source of the light by which the coma is rendered visible to us. It 
does not seem probable that matter in the state of extreme tenuity and 
diffusion in which we know the material of the come and tails of comets 
to be, could retain the degree of heat necessary for the incandescence of 
solid or liquid matter within them. We must conclude, therefore, that 
the coma of this comet reflects light received from without ; and the only 
available foreign source of light is the sunt. Ifa very bright comet were 
to visit our system, it might be possible to observe whether the spectra of 
the coma and the tail contain the dark lines which distinguish solar light. 
If the continuous spectrum of the coma of Comet 1, 1866, be interpreted 
to indicate that it shines by reflecting solar light, then the prism gives no 
information of the state of the matter which forms the coma, whether it be 
solid, liquid, or gaseous. Terrestrial phenomena would suggest that the 
parts of a comet which are bright by reflecting the sun’s light, are pro- 
bably in the condition of fog or cloud. 


* Phil. Trans. 1861, p. 421. 

+ This conclusion is in accordance with the results of observations on the polariza- 
tion of the light of the tails of some comets. Some of these observations appear to 
have been made with the necessary care. See J. P. Bond’s “Account of the Great 
Comet of 1858,” Annals of the Astronomical Observatory of Harvard College, 
vol, ui. pp. 305-310. 


1866. | of Comet 1, 1866. 7 


We know, from observation, that the comee and tails of comets are formed 
from the matter contained in the nucleus. 

The usual order of the phenomena which attend the formation of a tail 
appears to be that, as the comet approaches the sun, material is thrown 
off, at intervals, from the nucleus in the direction towards the sun. This 
material is not at once driven into the tail, but usualiy forms in front of 
the nucleus a dense luminous cloud, into which for a time the bright mat- 
ter of the nucleus continues to stream. In this way a succession of enve- 
lopes may be formed, the material of which afterwards is dissipated in a 
direction opposite to the sun, and forms the tail. Between these envelopes 
dark spaces are usually seen. 

If the matter of the nucleus is capable of forming by condensation a 
cloud-like mass, there must be an intermediate state in which the matter 
ceases to be self-luminous, but yet retains its gaseous state, and reflects but 
little light. Such a non-luminous and transparent condition of the come- 
tary matter may possibly be represented by some at least of the dark spaces 
which, in some comets, separate the cloud-like envelopes from the nucleus 
and from each other. 

Several of the nebule which J have examined give a spectrum of one line 
only, corresponding in refrangibility with the bright line of the nucleus of 
the comet referred to in this paper. Other nebulee give one and two fainter 
lines besides this bright line. Whether either or both of these were also 
present in the spectrum of this comet I was unable to determine. The light 
of the comet was feeble, and the presence of the continuous spectrum made 
the detection of these lines more difficult. I suspected the existence of the 
brighter of these lines. I employed different eyepieces, and also gave 
breadth to the bright point by the use of the cylindrical lens, but I was 
not able to obtain satisfactory evidence of more lines than the bright one 
already described. 

In my paper “‘On the Spectra of the Nebule,’’? I showed that this 
bright line corresponds in refrangibility with the brightest of the lines of 
nitrogen. This line may perhaps be interpreted as an indication that - 
cometary matter consists chiefly of nitrogen, or of a more elementary sub- 
stance existing in nitrogen. 

The great varieties of structure which may exist among comets, as well 
as the remarkable changes which the same comet undergoes at different 
epochs, will cause all those who are interested in the advance of our know- 
ledge of the cosmical relations of these bodies, and of the gaseous nebule, 
to wait with some impatience the visit of a comet of sufficient splendour 
to permit a satisfactory prismatic examination of the physical state of 
cometary matter during the various changes which are dependent upon 
the perihelion passage of the comet. 


8 Mr. Balfour Stewart on the [Jan. 25, 


January 25, 1866. 
Lieutenant-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


In accordance with the announcement made from the Chair at the last 
Meeting, the President read letters from Dr. William Bird Herapath, ex- 
plaining the reason for non-payment of his annual contribution ; and the 
question of his readmission was put to the vote, and was decided in 
the affirmative. The President accordingly declared that Dr. Herapath 
was readmitted into the Society. 


The following communication was read :— 


“Note on the Secular Change of Magnetic Dip, as recorded at 
the Kew Observatory.” By Batrour Strwart, M.A., LL.D., 
F.R.S., Supermtendent of the Observatory. Received January 
10, 1866. 


The President of this Society has already called the attention of the 
Fellows to the annual values of the magnetic inclination at Toronto, as de- 
duced. from the monthly determinations. In doing so he remarked that 
‘the general effect of the disturbances of the inclination at Toronto is to 
increase what would otherwise be the amount of that element; therefore, 
if the disturbances have a decennial period, the absolute values of the in- 
clination (if observed with sufficient delicacy) ought to show in their 
annual means a corresponding decennial variation, of which the minimum 
should coincide with the year of minimum disturbance, and the maximum 
with the year of maximum disturbance.” At Toronto, where the true 
secular change is very small, the effect of this superimposed variation is 
very visible, so that the yearly values of the inclination appear to increase 
up to the period of maximum disturbance and to decrease after it. At Kew 
the general effect of disturbances is probably the same as at 'Toronto—that 
is to say, tending to increase the inclination; but the secular change being 
considerable, and tending to decrease the inclination, the joint effect of the 
secular change and the superposed variation might be expected to appear 
in a diminution of the yearly secular change for those years during which 
the disturbances are increasing from their minimum to their maximum 
value, and in an increase of the yearly secular change for those years during 
which the disturbances are decreasing from their maximum to their 
minimum. 

The Kew records appear to exhibit a variation of thisnature. Observa- 
tions of dip were commenced at the Kew Observatory in 1854; and by 
comparing a good number of observations taken during the latter months 
of 1854, with two circles and four needles, with observations taken with the 
same circles and needles during the same months of 1855, we obtain a yearly 
secular change of 2’°24. 


1866. | Secular Change of Magnetic Dip at Kew. | 9 


During the years from 1856 to 1859 inclusive, monthly observations 
were made with a circle known as the Kew circle, two needles being 
always used, and the mean of the two results taken as the true value of 


the dip. 
From this circle we have the following results :— 
Year. Mean dip. Yearly secular change. 
1856. 68 27°67 
1837. 24°36 ool 
1858. 22°80 1°56 
1859. 20°73 2°07 


If we take the mean of these three values of yearly secular change, and 
also include that between 1854 and 1855, we have a mean value of yearly 
secular change, for the period between 1854 and 1859, amounting to 
2'-29, and this value will not be sensibly altered if we omit the observa- 
tions between 1854 and 1855. 

In 1859 it was resolved to substitute another circle for the Kew circle, 
as the action of the latter was not considered to be quite satisfactory ; and 
accordingly since this date Barrow’s circle No. 33 has been employed, 
and monthly observations have been made with it, generally in the after- 
noon—two needles being used, as before. 

From this circle we have the following results :— 


Year. Mean dip. Yearly secular change. 
1860. 68 20-21 

1861. lo-Zt 2°00 

1862. 15°58 2°63 

1863. . 12°66 2°92 

1864. 9°88 2°78 


exhibiting between 1860 and 1864 a mean secular change of 2'58. 

It will be noticed from this, that the mean yearly secular change of 
dip at Kew appears to be greater from 1860 to 1864, a period of increasing 
disturbances, than from 1854 to 1859, a period of decreasing disturbances. 
Possibly the yearly decrement of dip has again begun to diminish, since 
the change from 1864 to 1865 is only 1°32. It is, however, premature 
to assert that this is the case, and it can only be decided by continuing 
the monthly observations. At all events the Kew observations agree with 
those at Toronto in indicating that the yearly change of dip contains the 
combined result of two things—namely, the true secular change and the 
change due to disturbance; and this ought to be borne in mind by future 
observers of this magnetic element. 


VOL. XV. Cc 


10 Mr. B. Stewart on the Specific Gravity of Mercury. [¥eb. 1, 


February 1, 1866. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “On the Specific Gravity of Mercury.” By Batrour Srewarr, - 
M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., Superintendent of the Kew Observatory. 
Received January 25, 1866. 


Some time since, in connexion with a research on the fusing-point of 
mercury, several observations were made at Kew of the specific gravity of 
this fluid. | 

A specific-gravity bottle was used for this purpose and it was washed, 
in the first place with sulphuric acid, secondly with distilled water, and 
thirdly with alcohol ; when this was done it was found to contain mercury 
without any air-specks or any diminution of that metallic lustre which pure 
mercury exhibits when in contact with a vessel of clean glass. Three dif- 
ferent specimens of pure mercury were used and were separately weighed 
in the specific-gravity bottle at 62° Fahr. The following results were 


obtained :— 
Weighed in air. 


Mercury from the cistern of the old Kew ors. 
standard barometer, filling the bottle, 13591°36 
weighed ‘atiO2° aoe te eee } 

Mercury from the cistern of the new Kew 13591°66 
standard barometer weighed at 62° F. 


Mercury used in experiments with air- | 13591-96 
thermometer weighed at 62° F...... 


the mean of these will be 13591°66 ers. 

It was found that the specific-gravity bottle had an internal volume equal 
very nearly to 4 cubic inches, and assuming that a cubic inch of air weighs 
0°31 gr., then the air displaced by the liquid filling the bottle would weigh 
1°24 gr. 

In like manner the air displaced by the Kew standard weights (sp. gr. 
8°2) would have the volume of 6-6 cubic inches, and would weigh 2°04 grs. 

From these premises we find that the real weight of the mercury 2” vacuo 
would have been 13590°86 grs. 

Again, the amount of water which the same bottle held at 62° F. weighed 
in air 1000°53 grs. 

Here the air displaced by the bottle is, as before, 1:24 grs., while that 
displaced by the weights is only 0:15 gr. 

_ From this we find that the real weight of water filling the bottle at 62° 
F. would be zm vacuo 1001°62 grs. We have thus— 

True weight of mercury filling the bottle at 62° F. = 13590°86 grs. 

True weight of the same volume of water at 62° F. = 1001°62 grs. 


.1866.] Prof. W.H. Miller on Graphitoidal Silicon and Boron. 11 


And hence the specific gravity of mercury at 62° F., as compared with 
water at the same temperature, will be 13-569 nearly. 

Again, if we assume the correctness of Regnault’s Table of the absolute 
dilatation of mercury, and also that of Despretz’s Table of the absolute dila- 
tation of water, we shall find that the weight at 32° I. of a volume of mer- 
cury weighing 13590°86 grs. at 62° F. will be 

13590°86 x 1°00298=13631-361 grs. 


Also the volume at 4° C., or 39°-2 F., of a volume of water weighing at 
62° F. 1001-62 grs., will be | 


1001-62 x 1:0011437=1002-766 ers. 


Hence the specific gravity of mercury, according to the French method of 
determining it, will be 
13631°361 
1002°766 
A determination by Regnault gives 13°596. 

These two results agree very nearly with one another; and this agree- 
ment tends not only to verify the correctness of Regnault’s determination, 
but to show that Regnault’s Table of the dilatation of mercury, and Des- 
pretz’s Table of the dilatation of water, agree together; a remark that had 
been previously made by Dr. Matthiessen in a paper which he recently 
presented to the Society. 


=13°594. 


II. “On the Forms of Graphitoidal Silicon and Graphitoidal Boron.” 
By W. H. Mitier, M.A., For. Sec. R.S., and Professor of Mi- 
neralogy in the University of Cambridge. Received February 1, 
1866. 

Graphitoidal Silicon. 


- It has been so confidently assumed that jgraphitoidal silicon is an allo- 
tropic condition of silicon crystallized in octahedrons, that on ascertaining 
by measurement of angles that some graphitoidal silicon given me by 
Dr. Matthiessen was in simple and twin octahedrons, I at once concluded 
that the substance had been wrongly named. Later, however, I obtained 
from Dr. Perey a supply of graphitoidal silicon of unquestionable authen- 
ticity. Its lustre was that of the crystals I had previously examined. It 
occurred in small scales, having for the most part the appearance of crystals 
of the obliqtie system. On measurement, however, they proved to be 
octahedrons in which two parallel faces were much larger than any of the 
other faces, and two other parallel faces were either too small to be observed 
or were altogether wanting. One of the scales had all the faces of a twin 
octahedron. It appears, then, that there is no reason, founded on a differ- 


ence of form, for separating graphitoidal from octahedral silicon, the sole 
c2 


12 Prof. W. H. Miller on Graphitoidal Silicon and Boron. [Feb.1, 


distinction being that the crystals of the latter are more perfect than those 
of the former. 
| Graphitoidal Boron. 

The forms of boron have been described by the Commendatore Quintino 
Sella in two papers read before the Royal Academy of Turin on the 4th of 
January and the 14th of June, 1857, and by the Baron Sartorius v. Walters- 
hausen in a paper presented to the Royal Society of Gottingen on the Ist. 
of August of the same year. They found independently that the adaman- 
tine Woeen of Wohler and Deville, containing a variable and not inconsider- 
able amount of aluminium and carbon, peeled by Sella as possibly a 
definite compound of boron with aluminium and carbon with a mechanical 
mixture of pure boron, crystallizes in forms belonging to the pyramidal 
system. 

Boron containing 2°4 per cent. of carbon, the boro semplice of Sella, is 
described by him as occurring in crystals, the faces of which are not so 
perfect as to admit of a very accurate determination of the angles they 
make with one another. The angles approximate to some of the angles of 
crystals of the cubic system, but the aspect of the crystals, which are usually 
twins, leads to the supposition that they belong to the oblique system, and 
that the angle between the oblique axes differs but little from 99°. 


The forms observed by Sella, considered as belonging to the oblique 
system, are :— 
£100, €001, ¢013, m023, 6101, 1504, p 508, 4203, f201, 

£110, 7210, 711 ati2, @ it eee 

Of these, I have since reobserved all, with the exception of a, d, J, and 
perhaps p, the corresponding reflexion being too faint to enable me to 
affirm the existence of that face in the crystals I examined. I have also 
observed the following forms in which the distribution of the faces is in 
most cases, probably in all, the same as in the prismatic system, or as if 


the oblique form 4 £1 were always accompanied by the oblique form 2 4/: 
u301, w 104, v 403, «305, s 223, ¢332, 2221. 
On the same supposition regarding the distribution of the faces, the an- 


(1866.] Prof. W. H, Miller on Graphitoidal Silicon and Boron. 18 


nexed figure represents an octant of the sphere of projection, the poles of 
some of the faces not wanted for comparison with those of graphitoidal 
boron being omitted. The principal angles taken or computed from the 
angles provisionally adopted by Sella, are :— 


ec 39 14 ek 90 0O 
em 58 31 km 90 0O 
ew 19 28 kh 60 0O 
ex 40 19 ea 54 44 
eq 43 21 es 62 4 
eb 54 44 eg 70 32 
ev 62 4 | et 76 44 
ef FO! 32 | es F9N59 
ctu PG Attias jo coehw90° 20 


Besides the two forms already mentioned, Wohler and Deville obtained 
boron in extremely thin scales, which were supposed to be a different modi- 
fication of boron, and was accordingly called graphitoidal. Sella, however, 
relying apparently upon the evidence afforded by the lustre and colour of 
the scales, for he was unable to obtain any measurements, expresses his 
conviction that they are not different from pure boron, Some scales of this 
substance, for which, as well as a supply of crystals of pure boron, I am in- 
debted to Dr. Matthiessen, have faces on their edges, but so narrow that 
the reflected image of the bright signal is diffracted into a line of consider- 
able length, and therefore difficult to bisect. For this reason it is not pos- 
sible to determine the positions of the faces with accuracy. 

One of them, about 2 millims. wide and 0°014 millim. thick, of the 
shape of half a hexagon divided by a line at right angles to two opposite 
sides, exhibited faces agreeing in position very fairly, considering the un- 
avoidable errors of observation, with two of the faces &, two of the faces e, 
c, m, three of the faces 4, two of the faces x, g, three of the faces A, and 
four of the faces a. Another, smaller and thinner, of the shape of a 
hexagon, had faces coinciding with two of the faces 4, two of the faces e, ¢, 
m, f, v, and four of the faces A. The agreement in position of so many of 
the faces with those of pure boron appears to leave but little doubt of the 
identity of the forms of the two substances, 


4 | Mr. Maxwell on the Viscosity of Air, &c. [Feb. 8. 


February 8, 1866. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The Baxertan Lecture was delivered by Jamus Crerk Maxwe t, 
M.A., F.R.S., “ On the Viscosity or Internal Friction of Air and 
other Gases.”? The following is an abstract. 


All bodies which are capable of having their form indefinitely altered, 
and which resist the change of form with a force depending on the rate of 
deformation, may be called Viscous Bodies. Taking tar or treacle as an 
instance in which both the change of form and the resistance opposed to 
it are easily observed, we may pass in one direction through the series of 
soft solids up to the materials. commonly supposed to be most unyielding, 
such as glass and steel, and in the other direction through the series of 
liquids of various degrees of mobility to the gases, of which oxygen is the 
most viscous, and hydrogen the least. 

The viscosity of elastic solids has been investigated by M. F. Kohl- 
rausch* and Professor W. Thomsont; that of gases by Professor Stokesf, 
M. O. E. Meyer§, and Mr. Graham 

The author has investigated the laws of viscosity in air by causing three 
horizontal glass disks, 10°56 inches diameter, to perform rotatory oscilla- 
tions about a vertical axis by means of the elasticity of a steel suspension 
wire about 4 feet long. The period of a complete oscillation was 72 
seconds, and the maximum velocity of the edge of the disks was about 
+; inch per second. | 

The three disks were placed at known intervals on the vertical axis, and 
four larger fixed disks were so adjusted above and below them and in the 
intervals between them, that strata of air of known thickness were inter- 
cepted between the surfaces of the moving disks and the fixed disks. 
During the oscillations of the moveable disks, the viscosity of the air in 
these six strata caused a gradual diminution of the amplitude of oscilla- 
tion, which was measured by means of the reflexion of a circular scale in a 
mirror attached to the axis. 

The whole apparatus was enclosed in an air-tight case, so that the air 
might be exhausted or exchanged for another gas, or heated by a current 
of steam round the receiver. ‘The observed diminution in the are of oscil- 
lation is in part due to the viscosity of the suspending wire. ‘To eliminate 
the effect of the wire from that of the air, the arrangement of the disks 
was altered, and the three disks, placed in contact, were made to oscillate 
midway between two fixed glass disks, at distances sometimes of | inch, 
and sometimes of °5 inch. 

* Pogg. Ann. cxix. (1863). + Proceedings of the Royal Society, May 18, 1865. 

+ Cambridge Philosophical Transactions, 1850. § Pogg. Ann. cxiii. (1861). 

\| Phil. Trans. 1846 & 1849. 


e 


1866. | : Mr. Maxwell on the Viscosity of Air, &e. 15. 


From these experiments on two strata of air, combined with three sets of 
experiments on six strata of thicknesses °683, °425, and -1847 inches re- 
spectively, the value of the coefficient of viscosity or internal friction was 
determined. 

Let two infinite planes be separated by a stratum of air whose thickness 
is unity. Let one of these planes be fixed, while the other moves in its 
own plane with a uniform velocity unity; then, if the air in immediate 
contact with either plane has the same velocity as the plane, every unit of 
surface of either plane will experience a tangential force pp, where p is the 
coefficient of viscosity of the air between the planes. 

The force » is understood to be measured by the velocity which it 
would communicate in unit of time to unit of mass. 

If L, M, T be the units of length, mass, and time, then the dimensions 
op are LMT. 

In the actual experiment, the motion of the surfaces is rotatory instead 
of rectilinear, oscillatory instead of uniform, and the surfaces are bounded 
instead of infinite. These considerations introduce certam complications 
into the theory, which are separately considered. 

The conclusions which are drawn from the experiments agree, as far as 
they go, with those of Mr. Graham on the Transpiration of Gases*. They 
are as follows :— 

1. The coefficient of viscosity is independent of the density, the tem- 
perature being constant. No deviation from this law is observed between 
the atmospheric density and that corresponding to a pressure of half an 
inch of mercury. 

This remarkable result was shown by the author in 1860+ to be a 
consequence of the Dynamical Theory of Gases. It agrees with the con- 
clusions of Mr. Graham, deduced from experiments on the transpiration 
of gases through capillary tubes. The considerable thickness of the strata 
of air in the present experiments shows that the property of air, to be 
equally viscous at all densities, is quite independent of any molecular action 
between its particles and those of solid surfaces, such as those of the capil- 
lary tubes employed by Graham. 

2. The coefficient of viscosity increases with the temperature, and is 
proportional to 1+ a0, where 6 is the temperature and «@ is the coefficient 
of expansion per degree for air. 

This result cannot be considered so well established as the former, 
owing to the difficulty of maintaining a high temperature constant in so 
large an apparatus, and measuring it without interfering with the motion. 
Experiments, in which the temperature ranged from 50° to 185° F., agreed 
with the theory to within 0°8 per cent., so that it is exceedingly probable 
that this is the true relation to the temperature. 

The experiments of Graham led him to this conclusion also. 

3. The coefficient of viscosity of hydrogen is much less than that of 


* Phil. Trans. 1846: + Phil. Mag.-Jan. 1860. 


16 Mr. Maxwell on. the Viscosity of Air, &c. [Feb. 8, 


air. Ihave never succeeded in filling my apparatus with perfectly pure 
hydrogen, for air leaks into the vacuum during the admission of so large 
a quantity of hydrogen as is required to fill it. The ratio of the viscosity 
of my hydrogen to that of air was 5156. That obtained by Graham was 
4855. | 

4. The ratio for carbonic acid was found to be 859. Graham makes 
it 807. It is probable that the comparative results of Graham are more 
exact than those of this paper, owing to the difficulty of introducing so 
large a volume of gas without letting in any air during the time of filling 
the receiver. I find also that a very small proportion of air causes a con- 
siderable increase in the viscosity of hydrogen. This result also agrees 
with those of Mr. Graham. 

5. Forty experiments on dry air were investigated to determine whether 
any slipping takes place between the glass and the air in immediate con- 
tact with it. 

The result was, that if there were any slipping, it is of exceedingly small 
amount; and that the evidence in favour of the indicated amount being 
real is very precarious. 

The results of the hypothesis, that there is no slipping, agree decidedly 
better with the experiments. 

6. The actual value of the cocfficient of viscosity of dry air was deter- 
mined, from forty experiments of five different kinds, to be 

| p=-0000149 (461°+8), 
where the inch, the grain, and the second are the units, and the tempera- 
ture is on Fahrenhcit’s scale. 

At 62° this gives p= °007802. 

Professor Stokes, from the experiments of Baily on pendulums, has 
found 


[La 
p 


which, with the average temperature and density of air, would give 
7 p='00417, 
a much smaller value than that here found. 

If the value of ,: is expressed in feet instead of inches, so as to be uni- 
form with the British measures of magnetic and electric phenomena, as 
recorded at the observatories, 

p='000179 (461+ 6) 
='08826 at 32°. 
In metre-gramme-second measure and Centigrade temperature, 
p='01878 (1+ °00366 6). 

M. O. E. Meyer (Pogg. Ann, exiii. (1861) p. 383) makes p at 18°C. 
= ‘(00360 in centimetres, cubic centimetres of water, and seconds as units, 
or in metrical units,  ,=*0360. . 

According to the experiments here described, p at 18° C,=:02. 


1866. ] Mr. Huggins on the Spectra of Nebula, &c. 17 


_M. Meyer’s value is therefore nearly twice as great as that of this 
paper, while that of Professor Stokes is only half as great. 

In M. Meyer’s experiments, which were with one disk at a time in an 
open space of air, the influence of the air near the edge of the disk is very 
considerable; but M. Meyer (Crelle, 59; Pogg. exiii. 76) seems to have 
arrived at the conclusion that the additional effect of the air at the edge is 
proportional to the thickness of the disk. If the additional force near the 
edge is underestimated, the resulting value of the viscosity will be in 
excess. 

7. Each of the forty experiments on dry air was calculated from the 
concluded values of the viscosity of the air and of the wire, and the result 
compared with the observed result. In this way the error of mean square of 
each observation was determined, and from this the ‘‘ probable error”’ of 
p was found to be ‘036 per cent. of its value. These experiments, it must 
be remembered, were made with five different arrangements of the disks, 
at pressures ranging from 0°5 inch to 30 inches, and at temperatures from 
51° to 74° F.; so that their agreement does not arise from a mere repetition 
of the same conditions, but from an agreement between the properties of 
air and the theory made use of in the calculations, 


February 15, 1866. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The following communication was read :— 


“ Further Observations on the Spectra of some of the Nebule, with 
a Mode of determining the Brightness of these Bodies.” By 
Wituram IIveerns, F.R.S. Received January 30, 1866. 


(Abstract. ) 


In the first part of this paper the author continues his observations on 
the spectra of nebulze and clusters. ‘The results already presented by him 
to the Royal Society are confirmed by his new observations, namely, that 
with his apparatus clusters and nebule -give either a continuous spec- 
trum or a spectrum consisting of one, two, or three bright lines. The 
positions in the spectrum of these lines are the same as those of the bright 
lines of the nebulze described in his former papers. 

On account of the faintness of these objects the author was not able to 
ascertain whether the continuous spectra which some of the nebulz give 
are interrupted by dark lines in a manner similar to the spectra of the 
sun and fixed stars. Some of these spectra appear irregularly bright in 
some parts of the spectrum. 

The nebulee which follow have a spectrum of one, two, or three bright 
lines; in addition to which, in the case of some of them, a faint con- 


18 Mr. Huggins on the Spectra of Nebula, &c. [Feb. 15, 


tinuous spectrum was visible. These bodies are probably gaseous in 
constitution. | 


No le ie. .c.. of Vs No. 4499 ...... 388 HIV. 
21742 aera se NOD) Creme 705 H.T1. 
eS ee eV 4627. .... 6.) 19 eee 
4572 16 HAY: 

The following nebulee and clusters give a continuous spectrum :— 

Bice 410s, oc): 18 H.V. No. 4315. cog . 14M. 

3) A oer Lod A ‘ BOOT shinee eee 190 H. II. 

519. oe, WOO Eva, | AABT scans 11M. 
1a es es 81 M. aA eae 47 H.1. 
5 Ussing 82 M. AAT 3. hess wae Auw.N.44. 
BOMD oct - be 51M. ip 4A8oy ee eee 56 M. 
DOAN 6. ote puna AS TA6Y.. ao eee nr es 2081 h. 
BA/4 ns 0 sh 63 M. AD 2D eae &l. i. f. 
OOO eu ae ia 3M A627 sates ee 192 H.I 
AIG. go cunie 215 H.I ADO gS ao cue 15.11, Y, 
ANDO) oe che as 1945 h 4760 207 H.II 
4230 13 M AS TO. sce So ot 
DINO ate cate as 12 M. ASO) oe 233 H.IT 
AAG oe es oe 50 H.IV. AST) ES 251 H.IT. 
AD SOR Aes 10 M. AS88380) aS 212 HII. 


The second part of the paper contains an account of a mode of deter- 
mining approximatively the intrinsic brightness of some of the nebulz. _ 

Analysis by the prisms shows that some of the nebulee consist of lu- 
minous gas existing in masses, which are probably continuous; and the 
nebule in the telescope present not points, but surfaces, in some cases, 
subtending a considerable angle. As long as an cbject remains of sensible 
size in the telescope it retains its original brightness, except as this may 
be diminished by a possible power of extinction belonging to celestial 
space, and by the absorptive power of the earth’s atmosphere. 

By means of a special apparatus the light of three nebulz was com- 
pared with the light emitted by a sperm candle, burning at the rate of 
158 grs. per hour. The results are that— 


1508 
ey sees annular nebulain Lyra =;,55nd is, 


SE Dumb-bell nebula 


The estimation in each case refers to the brightest part of the nebula. 
The amounts are too small by the unknown corrections for the loss which 
the light has sustained in its passage through space and through the 
earth’s atmosphere. These values have an importance in connexion with 
the gaseous nature of the source of the light, which the spectroscope in- 


The intensity of nebula, No.46281 H.IV.= +) <th part of that of thecandle. 


33 


Fe ee) | aE 
19604 39 3) 


1866. | Mr. Everett on the Rigidity of a Glass Rod, &c. 19 


dicates. Similar estimations made at considerable intervals of time might 
show whether the brightness of these bodies is undergoing increase, dimi- 
nution, or a periodic variation. 

The paper concludes with some observations on the measures of the 
diameters of some of the planetary nebule. A very careful set of mea- 
sures of 4232, 5 3, by the Rev. W. R. Dawes, F.R.S., is given, which 
makes the equatorial diameter=15"-9. Also measures by the author of 
(1414, 73 H. IV. which give its diameter in R. A.=30'8. 


February 22, 1866. 
J. P. GASSIOT, Esq., Vice-President, in the Chair. 


The followmg communications were read :— 


I. “ Account of Experiments on the Flexural and Torsional Rigidity 
of a Glass Rod, leading to the Determination of the Rigidity of 
Glass.” By Jossru D. Everert, D.C.L., Assistant to the 
Professor of Mathematics in the University of Glasgow. Com- 
municated by Professor W1tu1am THomson, F.R.S. Received 
February 1, 1866. 

(Abstract.) 


In these experiments a cylindrical rod of glass is subjected to a bending 
couple of known moment, applied near its ends. The amount of bending 
produced in the central portion of the rod is measured by means of two 
mirrors, rigidly attached to the rod at distances of several diameters from 
each end, which form by reflexion upon a screen two images of a fine wire 
placed in front of a lamp-flame. The separation or approach of these 
two images, which takes place on applying the bending couple, serves to 
determine the amount of flexure. 

In like manner, when a twisting couple is applied, the separation or 
approach of the images serves to determine the amount of torsion. 

The flexural and torsional rigidities, f and ¢, which are thus found by ex- 
periment, lead to the determination of Young’s Modulus of Elasticity, M 
(or the resistance to longitudinal extension), and the absolute rigidity, x (or 
resistance to shearing); M being equal to f divided by the moment of 
inertia of a circular section of the rod about a diameter, and m being 
equal to ¢ divided by the moment of inertia of a circular section about the 
centre. The “resistance to compression,” #, is then determined by 
the formula 


and the “‘ ratio of the lateral contraction to longitudinal extension,” o, by 
the formula 


20 Messrs. Roscoe and Baxendell on the relative [ Feb. 22, 


The values found for the flint-glass rod experimented on were, in 
grammes’ weight per square centimetre, 
M= 614,330,000, 
n =244,170,000, 
k =423,010,000, 
ol ==nheeoee 


The mode of experimenting is somewhat similar to that by which 
Kirchhoff investigated the value of o for steel and brass; but there are 
several points of difference, especially this—-that the portion of the glass 
rod, whose flexure and torsion are measured, is sufficiently distant from 
the places where external forces are applied, to eliminate the local irregu- 
larities produced by their application. | 


II. “ Note on the relative Chemical Intensities of direct Sunlight 
and diffuse Daylight at different altitudes of the Sun.” ,By 
Henry E. Roscor, F.R.S., and Josrrn Baxunpe 1, F.R.A.S. 
Received february 8, 1866. 


The method of determining the chemical intensity of daylight described 
by one of us* presents a convenient means of experimentally comparing 
the intensity of the chemically active rays which reach the earth’s hori- 
zontal surface directly from the sun with that of the same rays reflected 
from the atmosphere and constituting diffuse daylight. For this purpose 
it is only necessary alternately to expose pieces of the standard sensitive 
paper, according to the method described in the memoir above mentioned, 
to the action of the total hight of day, and to the diffuse daylight alone, 
which is easily done by cutting off the sun’s direct rays from the sensitive 
paper, by throwing upon the paper a shadow cast by a small screen, hay- 
ing an apparent diameter slightly greater than that of the solar disk. In 
the first case the chemical intensity of the total daylight, in the second 
that of the diffuse light is determined; the difference between these two 
observations giving the chemical intensity of the direct sunlight. As the 
experiments which we have already made in this direction have led us to 
conclusions differing altogether from those derived from theoretical con- 
siderations concerning the relative chemical intensities of direct and diffuse 
sunlight, we think that, although this investigation is incomplete, the results 
are worthy of the attention of the Society. No direct photometrical de- 
terminations of the relative intensity of sun and diffuse light have up to 
this time been made; but Clausius has calculated this relation for vary- 
ing altitudes of the sun, founding his calculations upon the hypothesis 
(generally adopted by meteorologists to explain the red tints of the morn- 
ing and evening sky) that the diffused light is reflected, not from the par- 


* Bakerian Lecture, 1865. Phil. Trans. 1865, p. 605. 
t+ Poggendorff’s ‘ Annalen,’ Bd. Ixxii. p. 294. 


1866. | Intensities of Sunlight and Daylight, &c. 21 


ticles of air or solid floating material, but from the minute vesicles of water 
which are supposed to be always contained in large quantities in the atmo- 
sphere. According to this hypothesis, Clausius obtained the following 
numbers as expressing the intensities of direct sunlight and diffused day- 
light for altitudes varying from 20° to 60° :— 


Calculated Intensities of 


ao ae 2a yee nO GT ERS ee ae 
Sun’s Altitudes. Total Daylight. Diffuse Light. Direct Sunlight. 

20° 0:10049 0:06736 0:03313 

25° 0:17808 0:09291 0:08517 

30° 0:25933 011184 0:14749 

ao”. 0:34049 0:12654 0:21395 

40° 0:41957 0:13832 0:28125 

50° 0:56686 0°15599 0:41087 

\60° 069442 0-16822 0-52620 


(The intensity of sunlight at an altitude of 90°, unweakened by atmospheric absorption, 
is taken as the unit.) 

The measurement of the relative chemical intensities were made at three 
localities : (1) Owens College, Manchester, 53° 29' N., and 0" 9™0° W.; 
(2) the Observatory, Cheetham Till, near Manchester; and (3) the 
summit of the Konigstuhl, near Heidelberg, 1900 feet above the sea, in 
49° 24' N., and 34™48" E. We are indebted for the latter observations 
to Dr. Wolkoff, who kindly forwarded us his results through Professor 
Bunsen. 

The following experimental numbers, obtained at Owens College, may 
serve to illustrate the method adopted; in most cases several (four or five) 
observations of the intensities of the total and diffuse light were made 
quickly one after the other, and the mean of all the readings taken. 


Taste I.—Observations at Owens College, Manchester, 
Hoe 2a. OO OW, 


Greenwich eae IT ; Number | Intensity; Number | Intensity 
Neon, Tite un’s Sun’ s |Intensity of of of 
Date. of Observa- ie rs os ie ee Observa-| diffused | Observa-| direct 
tion. mgre. | bude. eayis™'| tions. | Light. | tions. | Sunlight. 
Mob P mMelyy ae 
Oct. 6.) 12 O | 0 44W./31 17) :073 3 068 4 005 
ve 9 30 (|36 42 4./23 23] -060 1 056 ih 004 
12 O | O 48W.) 30 54; -0638 l ‘057 1 “006 
TS) TE * 25 CASE, (26 30) 7075 2 ‘056 2 ‘O01 
ll. 45 217E.| 26 46) -111 2 ‘O89 2 022 
12 30 | 8 58W./26 20| -088 +4 ‘087 + ‘001 
ft 19" 2h t3 W.) 24 15-071 4 ‘O67 5 004 
2 45 \42 48W.117 8! :062 2- 053 2 ‘009 
24, 0 45 |12 51W.) 25 42) -139 3 hls 5 026 
1. 20 21 40 W222. 4 123 5 Seley 4 008 
Nov.15}) 12 O Pisa Wirt? oo) TOL 5 ‘082 4 ‘019 
12. 40 {11 83W./17 15| -065 4 063 5) 002 
1 15. 20,18 Wi. 25 50),..:063 4 058 5 005 
2 FZ TO 3 43W./16 27} -056 5 055 + ‘001 
12 30 | 8 43W./16 8| ‘066 4 058 5 008 
12 45 |12 28W.)15 44! -058 4 °050 5 "008 


22 Messrs. Roscoe and Baxendell on the relative [Feb. 22, 


As the altitudes here observed vary only from 15° 44! to 31° 47', we 
thought it best to collect the results into two groups, containing the ae 
highest and eight lowest observed altitudes. 


Tase II.—Results of Observations at Owens College. 


Number of M Intensity Tatsnewe 

Observations. oes of Sky or ntensity | Ratio of 
Altitude. A of direct Sk 
of Sun. used | Sunlight, [Pum HAPKy- 

Sky. ‘Sun. Daylight. ; : 
ee —————— a 
Group 1 33 34 NE fagae= 6% ‘066 ‘007 0-106 
2 


20 24. 26 38 ‘O74 008 0-108 


The determinations made at Cheetham Hill (53° 30’ 50” N., and 
0" 8™ 56° W.) were sixty-three in number, in which the altitude varies 
from 16° 8’ to 46° 14’, and these are divided into three groups, as follows :— 


TABLE IIJ].—Results of Observations at Cheetham Hill. 


Number of M Intensity baa 
Observations. se of Sky or Neenste¥ | hp atie of 
Altitude dimtisad of direct : 
of Sun ee Sunlicht Sun to Sky. 
Sky. Sun. " | Daylight | Se 
Group | 23 24 19° 30 064 012 0-187 
2 22, DD, Dail ‘O91 019 0:208 
3 18 17 34 «68 104 026 0:250 


The range of altitude in the Heidelberg experiments being a much wider 
one (viz. from 0° to 63° 49'), we have been able to arrange these (con- 
taining ninety-nine observations) in five groups, as follows :— 


TaBLE LV.—Results of Observations at Heidelberg. 


Intensity 
Number of | Range of Mean Intensity 
Observa- | Altitude of| Altitade | SEY °F | of direct |. mee 


tions. of Sun. of Sun. Dayheht: Sunlight. Sante Bee: 
Group 1 10 02 to fae oa, 048 ‘002 - 0-041 
gee 19 15 —30 | 24 43 134 ‘066 0-472 
3 31 30 —45 | 34 34 ‘170 "136 0-800 
4 22 45 —60 | 53 37 nas ‘263 1511 
5 17 above 60 | 62 30 a9 ‘319 1-603 


The curves on Pl. I. fig. 1 are derived from the foregoing numbers, 
the ordinates representing the intensities and the abscissee denoting the 
corresponding altitudes. The curves marked a, 4, ¢ give respectively the 
observations at Heidelberg, Cheetham Hill, and Owens College; the dotted 
curves represent the intensities of the diffuse light, the black curves those 
of the direct sunlight. The ratio of the sun and se a for the same 
places is E pacnenied by the curves a, 6, and ¢, fig. 2 


In the following Table the experimental ratios are sacri with thease 
calculated by Clausius. 


S q 
Proc-Roy. Soc. VUXV PUT 4 


RATIO OF DIRECT TO DIFFUSED LIGHT AT DIFFERENT 
ALTITUDES OF THE SUN. 


aia Gs ane PS SS 


—-—— +| 


eles eee meen sien een TP enon een ser ' 


[lee Bean Pe oa here) 


310° 6 j 


a Skidldeloeg. i 
4 Cheetham Fill, "5 
© Owens’ College. 


CHEMICAL INTENSITY OF DiFFUSED AND DIRECT SUN-LIGHT 
AT DIFFERENT ALTITUDES OF THE SuN. 


Coe aan eam eset Kal 


5 
S 
[bata wee sor et st ier ie Cs 


‘a 
t uh . | 
0-300 a 1 he Loins SISTA i Ls ee als dN Ea aa Ge a 
ae 40° o° ‘ 3\0° 4\0° 510° 60° ] 


a Haldelberg Sky, trom 99 observations. | 6 Cheetham HAL San trom 63 observations. 


, 


Nigh Bias alate DOOR) (PONE SOAS’ | aon ae SRR SRE © Owens College dtc; ae, aan 
b Cheetham Tht dky, 63 | (eile eee 2 A Seay oe 


1866.]. —-_ Intensities of Sunlight and Daylight, &c. 23 


Tas.LE V.—Ratio of Chemical Intensities of direct Sunlight to diffuse 


Light. 
Experiments. 
Sun’s Calculated — as 
Altitude. (Clausius). Heidelberg. Cheetham Hill. Owens College. 
20° 0-491 0:350 0-19 0-10 
25 0-896 0-480 0:20 O11 
30 1320 0:650 0:23 
35 1-690: »<- 0820 0:26 
40 2:032. 1:00 — 
50 2-634 1:37 — 
60 3'129 1:60 — 


These numbers show that whilst at 20° of altitude, according to theory, 
the relation of the intensities of diffuse light to direct sunlight is as 100 to 
49-1, the experiments at Heidelberg give a relation of 100 to 35; those 
at Cheetham Hill 100 to 19, and those in Manchester 100 to 10. If we 
compare the theoretical ratio for higher altitudes, we find that in our 
latitudes the ratio even at 35° of altitude is only as 100 for diffuse light to 
26 for sunlight, whereas theory gives the relation as 100 to 169. The 
Heidelberg observations show indeed a more rapid rise in the intensity of 
the direct sun’s rays, the ratio reaching 100 to 82 for 35° of altitude. 
The great difference between these and the other experimental results must 
doubtless be ascribed to the considerable elevation (1900 feet above the 
sea) at which these observations were made. 

Even at Heidelberg, however, no less than eight observations show that 
at low elevations the chemical action of the sun becomes altogether inap- 
preciable, whilst that of the diffuse light is still considerable ; and the same 
inactive condition of direct sunlight at low altitudes has been frequently 
observed both at Owens College and Cheetham Hill. In these cases the 
intensity of the sun’s direct visual rays was considerable, and a strong 
shadow was cast; but the more highly refrangible rays were altogether 
absent, and the ratio became infinite. 


Heidelberg Observations. 


Altitude. Direct Sun. Diffuse Light. 
0° 34’ 0-000 0-026 
1 32 0-000 0-024 
2 29 0-000 0-038 
3 27 0-000 0-028 
G 0 0-000 0-030 
10 40 0-000 0-083 
ll 51 0-000 0-079 
12 58 0-000 0-080 


In some of the experiments made at Cheetham Hill the shadow of a 
small disk was thrown on a horizontal surface of white paper, and careful 
estimations made of the relative brightness of the shaded and unshaded 
portions of the surface. A comparison of these results with those obtained 
at the same time for the chemical rays showed that with the sun at a mean 


24 On the Relative Intensities of Sunlight and Daylight, &c. 


altitude of 25° 16', the mean ratio of the chemical intensities of direct and 
diffused light being 0:23, that of the luminous intensities was 4:00, or that 
the action of the atmosphere was 17°4 times greater on the chemically 
active than on the luminous rays of sunlight. A series of photometrical 
experiments made afterwards at Owens College gave the following re- 
sults :— 

Mean altitude of the sun.......... 12°.3' 

Mean ratio of chemical intensity.... 0°053 

Mean ratio of luminous intensity.... 1°400 

It appears therefore that with the sun at an altitude of 12° 3’, the action 
of the atmosphere was 26°4 greater on the chemical than on the luminous 
rays. | 

The foregoing experiments appear to prove— 

I. That the effect of the atmosphere upon the highly refrangible and 
chemically active solar rays is regulated by totally different laws from 
those founded upon the hypothesis of the reflexion by means of hollow 
vesicles of water. 

IJ. That the ratio of the chemical intensity of direct to diffuse sunlight 
for a given altitude of the sun at different localities is not constant, vary- 
ing with the transparency, &c., of the atmosphere. 

III. That this ratio of “chemical” intensity does not in the least cor- 
respond to the ratio of “ visible’? intensity as estimated by the eye; the 
action of the atmosphere being 17'4 times greater upon the chemical than 
on the luminous rays when the sun’s altitude is about 25° 16’, and 26°4 
times greater when the sun’s altitude is 12° 3’. 


1866.] 


Oa the Acids of the Lactic Series. 25 


March 1, 1856. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


In accordance with the Statutes, the names of the Candidates for 
election into the Society were read, as follows :— 


Patrick Adie, Esq. 

Alexander Armstrong, M.D. 

George Bishop, Esq. 

Sir Charles Tilstone Bright. 

Samuel Brown, Esq. 

Francis T. Buckland, Esq. 

John Charles Buckuill, M.D. 

Lieut.-Col. John Cameron, R.E. 

Sir Thomas Edward Colebrook, 
P. R. Asiat. Soc. 

W. Boyd Dawkins, Esq. 

Henry Dircks, Esq. 

Thomas Rowe Edmonds, Esq. 

Rey. Frederick William Farrar, 
M.A. 

Alexander Fleming, M.D. 

Peter Le Neve Foster, Esq. 

Sir Charles Fox. 

William Withey Gull, M.D. 

William Augustus Guy, M.B. 

Julius Haast, Ph.D. 

Capt. Robert Wolseley Haig, R.A. 

James Hector, M.D. 

Jabez Hogg, Esq. 


Edward Hull, Esq. 

John William Kaye, Esq. 

John Robinson M°Clean, Esq. 

Hugo Miller, Ph.D. 

Charles Murchison, M.D. 

James Robert Napier, Esq. 

Rear-Admiral Erasmus Ommaney. 

George Wareing Ormerod, Esq. 

William Henry Perkin, Esq. 

Thomas Lambe Phipson, Ph.D. 

Ven. Archdeacon Pratt, M.A. 

Charles Bland Radcliffe, M.D. 

Capt. George Henry Richards, R.N. 

Benjamin Ward Richardson, M.D. 

Thomas Richardson, M.A. 

William Henry Leighton Russell, 
Esq. 

Rey. William Selwyn, D.D. 

Rev. Richard Townsend, M.A. 

Rev. Henry Baker Tristram. 

Edward John Waring, M.D. 

Henry Watts, Esq. 

Charles Wye Williams, Esq. 

Henry Worms, Hsq. 


The following communication was read :— 


* Researches on Acids of the Lactic Series—No. I. Synthesis of 
Acids of the Lactic Series.”\ By H. Franxuanp, F.R.S., and 
B. F. Duppa, Esq. Received February 14, 1866. 


Abstract.) 


In the first part of this paper the authors give the details of the synthe- 
tical production of numerous acids of the lactic family, which have been 
briefly described im a series of notes already published in these Proceedings 
during the years 1863, 1864, and 1865. In the concluding portion of the 
present paper, they discuss the theoretical considerations which arise out 
of these investigations. They call attention to the existence of a group of 
elements, to which they give the name oxalyl and the formula (C O Ho), 

VOL, XV. D 


26 Frankland and Duppa—On the Acids | Mar. 1, 


and which exists not only in all acids of the lactic series, but also in nearly 
every known organic acid. The isolated molecule of this radical is oxalic 
acid, 


CO Ho 
CO Ho, 


in proof of which they show that when oxalic ether is acted upon by 
nascent amyl, it is converted into caproic ether : 


COEto, (CBuH,_, {CBull, 
CO Eto C Bu H, C O Eto. 
Oxalic ether. Amyl. Caproic ether. 


Oxalyl is closely related to cyanogen, the two radicals passing into each 
other in a host of reactions; hence the production of cyanides from the 
ammonium-salts of the fatty acids on the one hand, and the synthesis of 
acids from certain cyanogen compounds on the other,—a reaction first 
pointed out by Kolbe and Frankland*, and which has of late yielded such 
important results in the hands of Maxwell Simpson+ and of Kolbe and 
of Hugo Millert. 


CN” CO Ho 
CN” CO Ho. 
Cyanogen. Oxalyl. 


The researches of these chemists prove that the introduction of cyanogen 
into an organic compound, and its subsequent transformation into oxalyl, 
converts that compound into an acid, or, if already an acid, increases its 
basicity by unity (for each atom of oxalyl so developed), this result being 
apparently quite independent of the position of the oxalyl in the molecule. 
The atom of oxalyl (as the above molecular formula shows) may be regarded 
as methyl (C H,), in which two atoms of hydrogen have been replaced by 
one of oxygen, and the third by hydroxyl (Ho). 

It may be objected that the group of elements, which is thus invested 
with radical functions, lacks one of the fundamental characteristics of a 
radical by its proneness to change; but this characteristic is exhibited by 
the commonly received radicals in a very varied degree. And even methyl 
itself, which certainly possesses it in the most marked manner, readily 
permits of its hydrogen being replaced by chlorine or bromine on the one 
hand, and by sodium on the other. All compound radicals, the authors 
remark, are purely conventional groupings of elements intended to simplify 
the expression of chemical change; and in this respect they believe the 
group oxalyl, entering as it does into the constitution of nearly every 
organic acid, has as valid a claim to a distinct name as the most universally 
recognized radical. Its admission renders possible the following very 
simple expression of the law governing the basicity of nearly all organic 
acids—an organic acid containing n atoms of oxalyl is u basic. 

The authors classify all acids of the lactic series at present known, or 

* Memoirs of Chem. Soc. vol. iii. (1847) p. 386. 


Tt Phil. Trans. 1861, p. 61; and Journ. Chem. Soc. vol. xviii. 
t Journ. Chem. Soc. vol. xvii. p. 109. 


1866. ] of the Lactic Series. 27 


which could be obtained by obvious processes, into the following eight 


divisions :— 
General formula. 


2 -Normial Seids © Oe oo oo Se eG 
2. Etheric normal acids .........-+--- 
ee DEEOUUAFY SCIUS Sc wa en ss a ss 


4. Etheric secondary acids............ | CO Ho 


5. Normal olefine acids . oe Ded aie a 


qyeecondary olehne acids*.... 0.0... 


8. Etheric secondary olefine acids...... 


A normal acid of the lactic series may be defined as one in which an 
atom of carbon is united with oxalyl, hydroxyl, and at least one atom of 


hydrogen. In the above general formula for these acids R may be either 
hydrogen, or any alcohol hydrogen. 

An etheric normal acid is constituted like a normal acid, but contains a 
monatomic organic radical, chlorous or basylous, in the place of the 
hydrogen of the hydroxyl. 

A secondary acid is one in which an atom of carbon is united with 
oxalyl, hydroxyl, and ¢wo atoms of an alcohol radical. 

An etheric secondary acid stands in the same relation to a secondary, as 
an etheric normal does to a normal acid. 

A normal olefine acid is one in which tke atom of carbon united with 
oxalyl is xo¢ united with hydroxy], and in which the atom of carbon united 
with hydroxy] is combined with not less than one atom of hydrogen. In 


+ 
this formula R may be either hydrogen or a monatomic alcohol radical, and 
the olefine, or diatomic radical of these acids, may belong to either the 
ethylene, or the ethylidene series. 
An etheric normal olefine acid differs from a normal olefine acid only in 


D2 


28 On the Acids of the Lactic Series. _ [Mar. 1 


having the hydrogen of the hydroxyl replaced by an organic radical 
positive or negative. 

A secondary olefine acid is one in which the atom of carbon united with 
oxalyl is not combined with hydroxyl, and in which the atom of carbon 
united with hydroxyl 1s also combined with two monatomic alcohol radicals. 


In the above formula R must be a monatomic alcohol radical. 

An etheric secondary olefine acid is related to the secondary olefine 
acids in the same way as the etheric normal olefine acids are related to the 
normal olefine acids. 

The numerous cases of isomerism in the lactic series are next examined 
and explained; and the authors then show how the radicals which are 
employed for the production of the synthesized acids may again be sepa- 
rated, thus affording analytical as well as synthetical proof of the constitu- 
tion of these acids. 

These investigations have conducted the authors to the following conclu- 
sions :— 

1. All acids of the lactic series are essentially monobasic. 

2. These acids are of four species, viz. normal, secondary, normal ole- _ 
fine, and secondary olefine acids ; and each of these species has its own 
etheric series of acids, in which the hydrogen of the hydroxyl contained in 
the positive or basylous constituent of the acid is replaced by a compound 
organic radical, either positive or negative. 

3. The normal acids are derived from oxalic acid by the replacement of 
one atom of oxygen, either by two atoms of hydrogen, or by one atom of 
hydrogen and one atom of an alcohol radical. 

4, The secondary acids are derived from oxalic acid by the replacement 
of one atom of oxygen by two atoms of monatomic alcohol radicals. 

Ee 5 The olefine acids are derived from oxalic acid by a like substitution 
of two monatomic positive radicals for one atom of oxygen, with the addi- 
tion of a diatomic radical (C, H,,) between the two atoms of oxalyl. 

6. The acids of the lactic series stand in the very simple relation to the 
acids of the acetic series first pointed out by Kolbe, viz. that by the re- 
placement, by hydrogen, of the hydroxyl, ethoxyl, &c. contained in the 
positive radical of an acid of the lactic series, that acid becomes converted 
into a member of the acetic series. 

7. The acids of the lactic series stand in an almost equally simple rela- 
tion to those of the acrylic series, as is seen on comparing the two follow- 
ing formule :— 

ie (CH,) H Ho C(CH,)"H 
CO Ho | CO Ho. 


Lactic acid. - Acrylic acid. 


1866.] General Sabine—WNote on Meteorological Correspondence. 29 


March 8, 1866. 


Tacae Genet SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


Mr. Archibald Geikie was admitted into the Society. 
The following communications were read :— 


I. “Note on a Correspondence between Her Majesty’s Government 
-and the President and Council of the Royal Society regarding 
Meteorological Observations to be made by Sea and Land.” By 
Lieutenant-General Sapinz, P.R.S. Received March 8, 1866. 


Her Majesty’s Government having been pleased to consult the Royal 
Society on several occasions in the last few years regarding the proper steps 
to be taken by this country, under the sanction and authority of its Go- 
yernment, for the prosecution, in cooperation with the Governments of other 
States in Europe and America, of systematically conducted meteorological 
observations by Land and Sea, it may be desirable to offer to the Fellows a 
résumé of the correspondence, aud of the suggestions which from time to 
time have been tendered on the part of the Society to the several depart. 
ments of the State. 

The correspondence commenced by a communication from the Foreign 
Office in March 1852, transmitting, by direction of the Earl of Malmesbury, 
several documents received from foreign governments in reply to a propo- 
sition which had been made to them by Her Majesty’s Government, for 
their cooperation in establishing a uniform system of recording meteorolo- 
gical observations ; and requesting the opmion of the President and Council 
of the Royal Society in reference to these documents, and more especially - 
in reference toa communication from the Government of the United States 
of America respecting the manner in which the proposed cooperation might 
be carried out. 

The reply of the President and Council was dated May 10, 1852. It 
recognized fully the importance of well-directed and systematically con- 
ducted meteorological observations, not only for their scientific value, but 
also on account of the important bearing which correct climatological know- 
ledge has on the welfare and material interests of the people of every 
country. With reference to a specific proposal for the adoption, by all 
countries, of a uniform plan in respect to instruments and modes of obser- 
vation in meteorological researches on land, the President and Council ex- 
pressed a doubt whether any practical advantage was likely to be gained by 
pressing such a recommendation in the then state of meteorological science. 
Many of the principal Governments of the European Continent had already 


30 General Sabine—Note on Meteorological Correspondence. | Mar. 8, 


organized systematic climatological researches throughout their respective 
States under the superintendence of men eminently qualified by theoretical 
and practical knowledge, and whose previous publications had obtained for 
them a general European reputation. The instruments employed in each 
country had been constructed under the care of the Superintendents, and 
the instructions for their use drawn up and published by them; the obser- 
vations were also received by them and reduced and coordinated, and were 
in this state published periodically by the respective governments. To 
call on countries so advanced in systematically conducted meteorological 
observations to remodel their instructions and instruments with the view of 
establishing uniformity in these respects, was scarcely likely to be successful, 
especially if the request proceeded from a country which ‘had no similarly 
organized system extending over its own area. Moreover the discussions 
which had taken place at the Magnetical and Meteorological Congress 
assembled at the Cambridge Meeting of the British Association in 1845, 
which was attended by the Superintendents of the different continental 
systems, had manifested so marked a disposition on the part of the meteo- 
rologists of the different countries to adhere to their respective arrange- 
ments in regard to instruments, times of observation, and modes of publi- 
cation, as to produce a strong conviction that the suitable time for pressing 
a proposal for the substitution of a uniform scheme, however advantageous 
in some respects, had not then arrived. 

But in respect to Marine Meteorology the case was widely different; and 
the suggestions which the President and Council felt it their duty to offer 
on that subject had a much more positive character, and were directed to 
immediate action. An application had been made by the Government of 
the United States to that of our own country to give a greater extension 
and a more systematic direction to meteorological observations made at sea. 
Apart from the important scientific bearing of such researches, the well- 
known publications of Lieutenant Maury had given to the Government of 
the United States a fair claim to make such an application to that of our 
own country, to whose commercial interests a practical knowledge of the 
meteorological statistics of the ocean was not less important than to those 
of the United States. Accordingly, in their reply to the Foreign Office, 
the President and Council did not fail to express emphatically their hope 
that the application for cooperation, thus earnestly addressed by the Go- 
vernment of the United States, might not be addressed in vain. 


The following extracts from a memoir addressed by Lieutenant Maury 
to the Secretary of the United States Navy, printed in ‘‘ Papers presented 
to the House of Lords by command of Her Majesty, pursuant to an address 
dated February 21, 1853,”’ will show that the suggestions thus made by the 
President and Council, both in regard to Land and to Sea Meteorological 
Observations, were fully concurred in by Lieutenant Maury, on his return 
from an official mission to visit and report upon the meteorological esta- 


1866.] General Sabine—WNote on Meteorological Correspondence. 31 


blishments of the principal States of Europe. Lieutenant Maury’s memoir 
is dated November 6, 1852. 

“‘T would recommend that the United States should abandon, for the 
present at least, that part of the ‘ Universal System’ which relates to the 
Land, and that we should direct our efforts mainly to the Sea, where there 
is such a rich harvest to be gathered for navigation and commerce. ... . I 
am induced to make this recommendation in consequence of the evident 
reluctance with which Russia, Austria, Bavaria, Belgium, and other powers 
seem to regard any change in their systems of meteorological observations 
on shore..... Each country seems to have adopted a system of its own, 
according to which its labourers have been accustomed to work, and to 
which its meteorologists are more or less partial. Any proposition having 
in view for these systems a change so radical as to bring them to uniformity, 
and reduce them to one for all the world, would, I have reason to believe, 
be regarded with more or less jealousy by many..... Not so, however, 
with regard to the Sea; that proposal meets with decided favour and 
warmest support.” 


Lieutenant Maury then quotes largely from the Report of the President 
and Council of the Royal Society (already referred to), and from the anni- 
versary address of the President of the British Association at the Belfast 
Meeting in 1852, in illustration of the advantages which navigation and 
commerce may derive from the extension of maritime researches by the 
proposed cooperation of Great Britain and the United States. 


In June 1854 the Board of Trade informed the President and Council 
by letter that they were about to submit to Parliament an estimate for an 
office for the discussion of observations on Meteorology to be made at Sea 
in all parts of the globe, in conformity with the recommendation of a con- 
ference held at Brussels in the preceding year; and that it was their inten- 
tion to publish from time to time, and to circulate, such statistical results, 
obtamed by means of the observations referred to, as might be considered 
most desirable by men versed in the science of meteorology, in addition to 
such other information as might be required for the purposes of navigation. 
To this end, the Board of Trade were desirous of obtaining the opinion of 
the Royal Society as to what were the great desiderata in that science, and 
as to tHe forms which may he best calculated to exhibit the great atmo- 
spheric laws which it may be most desirable to develope. 

The Board further stated that, “as it may possibly happen that obser- 
vations on land upon an extended scale may hereafter be made and dis- 
eussed in the same office, it is desirable that the reply of the Royal Society 
should keep in view and provide for such a contingency.” 

In their reply to this communication, dated February 22, 1855, the 
President and Council kept carefully in view the relative importance which 
the Board of Trade attached to the suggestions which might be offered 


32 General Sabine—Note on Meteorological Correspondence. { Mar. 8, 


respecting observations to be made at sea, and observations to be made on 
land; the immediate bearing of the one, and the contingent and eventual 
bearing of the other. Their reply consequently bore chiefly on points to 
be investigated by marine observations,—under the several heads of baro- 
metric variations ; of those of the dry air and of aqueous vapour; of the 
mean temperature of the air; of the temperature of the sea, and investiga- 
tions regarding currents; of storms and gales; thunderstorms; auroras 
and falling stars; and charts of the magnetic variation. (Proc. Roy. Soc., 
vol. vil. pp. 342-361.) 

These were treated of in their generality, as subjects of investigation to 
be made (in the words of the Board of Trade) “at sea in ail parts of the 
globe.’ Nor was the contingency of observations to be made on land upon 
an extended scale, “‘ which may hereafter be made and discussed in the 
same office,” overlooked; and to enable the Royal Society to be more 
fully prepared, and to be ready ‘‘ to provide for the contingency ”? whenever 
it should present itself, the President and Council put themselves in com- 
munication with several of their foreign members who were known as dis- 
tinguished cultivators of meteorological science,—having always in view 
the possibility that, when the occasion should occur, they might be 
prepared to offer such suggestions as might facilitate the purpose which 
had been deemed so desirable by Her Majesty’s Government in the pre- 
ceding year. The chief difficulty which had then presented itself had 
been the desire shown by the meteorologists of the different European 
States to adhere to the instruments, and more particularly to the hours 
of observation, to which they had been accustomed. The hours had been 
selected partly on grounds of convenience, and partly in the belief that 
they were those best suited to receive the corrections required in different 
localities for diurnal and casual! variations. The most hopeful way of sur- 
mounting the difficulties in question would obviously be the introduc- 
tion of instruments which should be continuously self-recording ; such in- 
struments would in addition supply the exact instants of the maxima and 
minima of the different phenomena—points greatly required in the diseus- 
sion of the laws of extensive atmospherical disturbances. At the epoch of 
the Cambridge Congress in 1845 it was understood that no perfectly reli- 
able instruments for continuous record were in use amongst the continental 
observers. The self-recording instruments of M. Kreil, employed at the 
observatories of Prague, Senftenberg, Vienna, and Munich, and which had 
also been in use for many months at the Kew Observatory, were not conti- 
nuously self-recording, and were also, in the opinion of many, not altogether 
free from objections. The construction of instruments both in magnetism 
and me oroloey which should serve this important purpose and at the same 
time be free from causes of error in other ways, had been a cherished object 
of the Committce of the Kew Observatory from the commencement of that 
institution. The advance which lad been accomplished at a very early 
period may perhaps best be stated in the following extract from the fourth 


-1866.] General Sabine—Note on Meteorological Correspondence, 38 


report of Mr. Ronalds, its Director, published in the volume of the British 
Association for 1847, Trans. of Sections, page 30. ‘The preliminary 
experiments on the photographic registration of the atmospheric electro- 
meter, the thermometer, the barometer, and the declination-magnet having 
been long since completed and. published, and their results having warranted 
the cost and trouble of constructing apparatus of a durable and convenient 
character, a declination-magnet and a barometer have been mounted at Kew 
which scrupulously fulfil the requisite conditions without the intervention of 
those friction-rollers, levers, pivots, or other mechanism which have hitherto 
rendered self-registering apparatus so objectionable.” Mr. Ronalds added 
that it was his “intention to provide during the ensuing year complete 
apparatus on like principles for registermg as many of the other meteoro- 
logical and magnetical instruments as funds will permit.” 

The instruments which would be required for a complete equipment of a 
meteorological observatory would be those which should automatically and 
continuously record (1) the variations of the atmospheric pressure; (2) 
those of the dry and wet thermometers; (3) those of the force and direc- 
tion of the wind; and (4) those of the atmospheric electricity. Of these, 
Nos. 1 and 2, as has been already said, had been devised at Kew in or 
before 1847. Dr. Robinson’s hemispherical-cup anemometer, of which a 
description was published in 1851 in the Transactions of the Royal Irish 
Academy, and which was immediately adopted at Kew, records, in a man- 
ner which I believe is universally held to be unexceptionable, the direction 
and force of the wind at every instant. The electrometer to which Mr. 
Ronalds referred in his report of 1847, though highly ingenious and yield- 
ing very instructive results, was not continuously self-recording. An 
electrometer fulfilling this condition was consequently a desideratum until 
Professor William Thomson devised, and caused to be constructed under 
his own superintendence at Kew, in the spring of 1861, the self-recording 
electrometer which has been subsequently in successful work at that ob- 
servatory; thus supplying the fourth apparatus required for a complete 
meteorological record. It may be added that the Kew Barograph photo- 
graphs its records self-compensated for temperature; its curves conse- 
quently are in immediate readiness for the lithographer or engraver. 

Such was the state of instrumental preparation at the Kew Observatory 
when the untimely death of Admiral FitzRoy, who had been placed by the 
Board of Trade in charge of the meteorological office established in 1855, 
occasioned a renewal of the communications which had taken place on the 
formation of the office, between the Board of Trade and the Royal Society. 
In a letter dated May 26, 1865, the Board of Trade recalled to the recol- 
lection of the Royal Society the recommendations regarding marine meteo- 
rology contained in the letter of the President and Council of February 
22, 1855, stating that those recommendations had been adopted by the 
Board as the basis of the proceedings of the meteorological department ; 
and that in conformity therewith instruments and logs had been prepared 


34 General Sabine—Note on Meteorological Correspondence. [Mar. 8, 


and furnished to ships proceeding on distant voyages, and had been returned 
to the office; and that some progress had been made in carrying into effect 
the original programme of tabulating these in readiness for statistical 
charts. 

It was further stated that .“‘in 1859 or 1860, the French Government 
having adopted a system of telegraphing and publishing the actual state of 
the weather from one place to another, in which Admiral FitzRoy’s coopera- 
tion had been sanctioned, a considerable part of the vote previously applied 
to obtaining and digesting observations was devoted to these telegrams ; 
and further, that in 1861, Admiral FitzRoy having grafted on this system 
of telegraphic communication a system of forecasting the weather, and, on 
occasions of anticipated storms, the giving of special warnings, communi- 
cated by telegraph to the different ports and there made known by hoisting 
certain signals, —the whole or almost the whole of the funds originally voted 
for the purpose of observations had thus been diverted from their original 
scientific purpose to an object deemed more immediately practical.” 

The decease of Admiral FitzRoy afforded, in the judgment of the Board 
of T'rade, a fitting opportunity to review the past proceedings and present 
state of the meteorological department, and rendered them desirous of again 
consulting the Royal Society on the constitution and objects of the depart- 
ment, and the mode in which those objects might be most effectually 
attained. 

The points on which the opinion of the Royal Society was specially re- 
quested were the following :— 

1. Are the points specified in the apse of the Royal Society of the 22nd 
of February 1855 still deemed as important for the interests of science and 
navigation as they were then considered ? 

2. To what extent have any of these objects been answered by what has 
already been done by the meteorological department ? 

3. What steps should be taken for making use of the abso 
already collected ? 

4. Is it desirable to make any, and what, further observations on any of 
the subjects mentioned in the Royal Society’s letter of the 22nd of Febru- 
ary 1855 ? 

5. What is the nature of the basis on which the system of daily forecasts 
and storm-warnings established by Admiral FitzRoy rests? Are they 
founded on scientific principles, so that they, or any part of them, may be 
carried on satisfactorily notwithstanding Admiral FitzRoy’s decease ? 

6. Can the Royal Society suggest any improvement in the form and 
manner of the process pursued in forecasts and storm-warnings ? 

7. Have the Royal Society any general suggestions to make as to the mode, 
place, or establishment in, at, or by which the duties of the meteorological 
department can best be performed? it being understood that the Admi- 
ralty are willing to undertake to place in the hands of the Hydrographer all 
those observations which can properly be used in framing charts for the 


1866.] General Sabine—Note on Meteorological Correspondence. 35 


purposes of navigation, but not those which relate to meteorology proper 
or meteorological observations on land. 

Several documents accompanied this communication,—amongst them a 
statement by Mr. Babington, chief clerk m Admiral FitzRoy’s office, regard- 
ing the method adopted in the department in regard to forecasts and storm- 
warnings; and returns, exhibiting a comparison of the probable force of the 
wind indicated by signals in the years ending March 31, 1864, and March 
31, 1865, and its actual state as reported in the three days following the 
exhibition of the signals. 

The reply of the President and Council was dated June 15, 1865. It 
suggested the continuance, for the present, of the practice of forecasts and 
storm-warnings as before, and the continued issue of instructions and forms 
to such masters of vessels proceeding on distant voyages as might be ex- 
pected to make a profitable use of them ; both these duties to be continued 
under Mr. Babington’s superintendence, by whom in effect they had been 
carried on for some time previous to Admiral FitzRoy’s decease. And it 
was further recommended that both the system under which the forecasts 
and storm-warnings had been hitherto carried on, and the extent and value 
of the information regarding ocean-statistics which had been accumulated 
in the office of the Board of Trade, should be subjected to a careful exami- 
nation. These recommendations were adopted ; and a Committee has been 
appointed, of three members, one nominated by the Board of Trade, a second 
by the Admiralty, and a third by the Royal Society, to report on what has 
been done, and to suggest any modifications which may appear desirable for 
the future. The report of this Committee is expected to appear very shortly. 

With reference to the subject of Land Meteorology, the President and 
Council had been apprized by the Board of Trade, in February 1855, that 
‘‘observations on land upon an extended scale might hereafter be made 
and discussed in the meteorological department of the Board,’ and 
had been requested to be “prepared for such a contingency.’ In the 
more recent correspondence in 1865, the subject of land observations was 
again brought forward, and the Royal Society was invited to offer sugges- 
tions in reference to it. Thus appealed to, the President and Council 
would have failed in their duty if they had not replied fully and expli- 
citly to a request proceeding from Her Majesty’s Government,—care- 
fully restricting themselves, in their reply, to such suggestions as their 
own knowledge enabled them to affirm with confidence could be carried 
into practical operation, and which at the same time enabled them to re- 
spond to the more general inquiry in the letter from the Board of the 26th 
of May 1865, viz. **‘ Have the Royal Society any suggestions to make as 
to the mode, place, or establishment in, at, or by which the duties of the 
meteorological department can best be performed? ”’ 

The reply of the President and Council was as follows :—“ There remain, 
therefore, to be noticed solely the considerations which relate to ‘ Meteo- 
rology proper,’ 7. e. to the Land Meteorology of the British Islands. We 


36 General Sabine—Note on Meteorological Correspondence. | Mar. 8, 


find that the principal states of the European Continent have almost with- 
out exception formed establishments for the collection and publication peri- 
odically of the meteorology of their respective countries. The arrange- 
ments consist usually of a central office, at which instruments and instruc- 
tions are provided for a number of stations, greater or less, according to the 
area which they represent; at which stations observations are made and 
transmitted to the central office, where the results of all are reduced, coor- 
dinated, and published. The small extent of the area comprised by the 
British Islands in comparison with the territories of many of the European 
States may require fewer stations; but in a matter now so generally at- 
tended to and provided for, it seems scarcely fitting that our country should 
be behind others. There is, moreover, a peculiarity in the meteorological 
position of the British Islands in respect to Europe generally as its north- 
western outpost, in consequence of which an especial duty appears to 
devolve upon us. M. Matteucci, in a very recent publication, has already 
made the important remark that extensive atmospheric disturbances which 
first invade Ireland and England are those which, in winter more especially, 
extend to and pass the Alps (although somewhat retarded by them), and 
spread over Italy ; and that storms so telegraphed from Mngland have 
actually reached Italy, and have been found to correspond with the accounts 
subsequently received from Italian Mediterranean Ports. 

“A few stations—say six, distributed at nearly equal distances im a meri- 
dional direction from the south of England to the north of Scotland, fur- 
nished with self-recording instruments supplied from and duly verified 
at one of the stations regarded as a central station, and exhibiting a conti- 
nuous record of the temperature, pressure, electric and hygrometric state 
of the atmosphere, and of the force and direction of the wind—might per- 
haps be sufficient to supply authoritative knowledge of those peculiarities 
in the meteorology of our country which would be viewed as of the most 
importance to other countries, and would at the same time form authentic 
points of reference for the use of our own meteorologists. The scientific 
progress of meteorology from this time forward requires indeed such con- 
tinuous records—first, for the sake of the knowledge which they alone can 
effectively supply, and, next, for comparison with the results of dependent 
observation not continuous. The actual photograms or other mechanical 
representations, transmitted weekly by post to the central station, would 
constitute a lithographed page for each day in the year, comprehending 
the phenomena at all the six stations, each separate curve admitting of 
exact measurement from its own base-line, the precise value of which might 
in every case be specified. 

“The President and Council suggest that the observatory of the British 
Association at Kew might with much propriety and public advantage be 
adopted as the central meteorological station.” 


It has been already shown, in the earlier part of this communication, 


1866.] General Sabine—WNote on Meteorological Correspondence. 387 


that the Kew Observatory possesses all the instruments required in a com- 
plete system of continuous self-recording meteorclogical observation. These 
are well known to the Directors of many meteorological observatories both 
at home and abroad, who in several instauces, after personal examination, 
have applied for and obtained for their own establishments similar instru- 
ments prepared under the Superintendent of the Kew Observatory, Mr. 
Balfour Stewart. Thus, Barographs on the Kew pattern have been sup- 
plied to Oxford, St. Petersburgh, and Coimbra; Anemometers to St. Pe- 
tersburgh, Odessa, Melbourne, Coimbra, Ascension, Madras, Agra, and 
two meteorological stations established by Admiral FitzRoy; Electro- 
graphs to Lisbon and Coimbra. ‘There would be no difficulty (as was stated 
in the letter to the Board of Trade) in preparing instruments at Kew for 
affiliated meteorological stations in Britain, and in arranging for their veri- 
fication and comparison with the Kew standards, as well as in giving to those 
in whose hands they may be placed such instructions as may ensure unifor- 
mity of operation. Such functions constitute in fact part of the original 
purposes of the Institution at Kew, and are in continual exercise both for 
magnetism and for meteorology. 

It is not unreasonable to anticipate that the success of such a system of 
continuous self-recording meteorological observation, exemplified over the 
limited area of the British Islands, might occasion its wider extension, and 
thus contribute to the virtual fulfilment of the desire expressed by Her 
Majesty's Government in 1852 “ for the adoption of a general and uniform 
plan of making and recording meteorological observations.”’ 


Postscript, March 23.—Since this ‘‘ Note” was communicated to 
the Royal Society, I have read with great satisfaction the opinion ex- 
pressed in the following extract from the “ Report of a Committee assem- 
bled at the Board of Trade to consider certain questions relating to the 
Meteorological Department of the Board,” pages 52, 53 :— 

“There is no doubt that self-recording instruments are urgently needed 
in the present state of meteorological science, and that they will soon in all — 
probability be largely employed both in this country and abroad. Their 
advantages are manifest. By reason of the continuity of their records, no 
wave or variation of any description in any of the meteorological elements 
can escape notice, and the course of that wave or variation can be tracked 
with certainty from station to station, and its modification at the time of 
reaching each station in succession can be accordingly observed. For the 
same reason one difficulty, now seriously felt, in charting the weather, viz. 
that which arises from observers in different places and countries adopting 
different hours of observation, would wholly disappear; and a further 
difficulty, viz. that which arises from observers being unpunctual to their 
professed hours of observation, would disappear also. The unvarying 
accuracy of the record is an advantage of still greater importance than 
might be expected by those who have had no experience of the frequent 


38 Mr. J. Lilley on the Action of [March 8, 


errors to be found in meteorological registers. Hach error creates con- 
siderable confusion ; it throws doubt on the observations accurately made 
at neighbouring places ; and that doubt cannot be removed except by the 
continuity of the records at those places. This continuity is unattainable 
unless the weather happens to be uniform over a wide district, or unless 
observations are made at many more places than would be needed, if reli- 
ance could be placed upon the accuracy of the observers. Another advan- 
tage of self-recording instruments is that their records are independent of 
particular scales. Their notation is in lines and curves that can be mea- 
sured with equal facility according to any desired scale. The thermometer 
lines could be measured at pleasure according to Fahrenheit’s scale, as 
used in England; to the Centigrade, as in France; or to Reaumur’s, as in 
Germany. The barometer lines could be measured with equal ease in 
English inches, in millimetres, or in Paris feet. For the various reasons 
we have mentioned, self-recording instruments are of eminent local and 
international utility. The establishment of a series of them in England 
would confer a wide benefit. ‘They would give precision and fulness to 
the charts of our own weather; they would set an example that foreign 
governments would soon follow; and they would afford material in a very 
acceptable form to meteorologists at home and abroad for the discussion of 
the weather of Europe at large.” 


II. “On the Action of Compasses in Iron Ships.” By Mr. Joun 
Littey. Communicated by Sir W. Snow Harris, F.R.S. Re- 
ceived February 9, 1866. 


Although many ably-written papers upon this subject have at various 
times appeared, none of them seem to be of that simple practical character 
as to supersede the necessity of any further investigation of the subject, or 


deter the author from submitting to the Royal Society the results of many 
years’ practical experience in the construction of the mariner’s compass, and 
its adjustment in iron ships. These results are given with a view to ad- 
vance our knowledge of this important and great practical scientific ques- 
tion, and to add still more to the security of life and property. In the 
present day, when iron shipbuilding is so widely extending, it is presumed 
that the most humble offering tending to place the directive action of the 
compass beyond. the reach of disturbing magnetic forces may not be unac- 
ceptable. 

It is unnecessary here to enter into a mathematical investigation of the 
properties or magnetic condition of iron ships, this part of the subject 
having been already fully treated and developed by many learned men. 
The author rather proposes to confine himself to the consideration of the 
probable causes of the disasters so frequently attendant on the navigation 
of iron and other ships, through defective compass guidance ; such disasters, 
according to the author’s experience, may be traced, in a large majority of 
cases, to one or other of the following causes :— 


1866. | Compasses in Lron Ships. 39 


J. The improper construction and position of the steering binnacle 
and compass. 

2. The too frequent habit of placing all reliance upon the steering 
binnacle compass. 

3. Allowing the compasses to be too long in use without due exa- 
mination. 

4. The improper manner in which the compasses have been adjusted. 


1. The construction of the compass is at all times a matter of great im- 
portance, but when applied to the case of an cron ship its value is increased 
tenfold; it is most essential that the compass should be of the best attaimable 
description, and so constructed that its centre and pivot should be subject 
to the smailest possible amount of friction, in order that the needles may be 
entirely free to follow the directive force of the earth, and have at the same 
time great retentive power. Some years since the author observed, when 
adjusting an iron steamer’s compass furnished by him with very powerful 
needles, discarded from some previous experiments in magnetism, and 
which were only 4 inches in length, that more than usually satisfactory 
results were obtained ; the deviations were of a smaller value, and far more 
uniform than when using needles of greater length. He has since adopted 
the practice of employing needles not exceeding 6 inches in length, even 
for cards of the largest diameter. 

The position of the compass is also important; it is an objectionable 
practice of too frequent occurrence, even with the ordinary plane spindle 
and barrel, to place the binnacle near the steering-wheel ; with the screw 
apparatus, arms, and levers the practice becomes extremely dangerous, the 

whole mass, from the process of manufacture, being found highly magnetic. 

The idea, however, prevails that all this is a matter of indifference, since the 
counteracting magnets are supposed to neutralize all magnetic disturbance. 
The reverse, however, is the case; many instances have come under the 
author’s notice practically in which errors have arisen solely from this 
cause, but which ceased to exist on the removal of the binnacle to a distance 
of 4 feet from the spindle, or twice the original distance. 

It would be far better, in all cases, if the steering-wheel could be placed 
before the mizen-mast of ships, instead of abaft and close to the stern, as is 
generally the case ; compasses would invariably act better and be subject 
to smaller changes. 

2. It is too frequently the practice to place exclusive reliance upon the 
steertng-compass ; this may be attended with less trouble to the navigator, 
but is, as regards the safety of the ship, very perilous. As ships are now 
fitted, the steering-compass is placed very near the stern ; and since in iron 
ships the magnetic forces are generally concentrated at the two ends of the 
vessel, it must be obvious that it is placed at that spot where the greatest 
variations may be expected. very iron ship should be furnished with a 
properly constructed standard binnacle not less than 5 feet high above the 
deck, suitably placed, and containing a compass fitted in the most con- 


40 Mr. J. Lilley on the Action of Compasses in Iron Ships. [March 8, 


venient manner for taking observations without the aid of compensating 
magnets. By this compass alone should the ship be navigated ; the 
steering-compass is simply the helmsman’s guide. Many iron ships have 
been fitted with two navigating binnacles, the one for steering, and the 
other at the fore part of the poop, both furnished with compensating 
magnets, and obviously both subject to the same changes incident to the 
change of hemisphere; cases of ships thus fitted have come under the 
author’s notice, in which many providential escapes from wreck have 
occurred on the return passage from India ; in one particular instance, land 
was made on the coast of Ireland when the commander imagined he was 
entering the channel, an error that could not have arisen had the ship been 
furnished with an uncompensated standard compass instead of a compen- 
sated compass. 

In the uncompensated compass, the changes of deviation are far less than 
would be found in a compensated compass placed not more than 2 feet 
above iron beams. Very full directions on this subject will be found in 
the valuable work of the late Capt. EK. J. Johnson, R.N., and it is much to 
be regretted that this work is not more studied by commanders and officers 
of iron ships. 

3. Frequent disasters have been found to occur in consequence of allow- 
ing the compass to be too long in use without due examination, more par- 
ticularly in steam-vessels going short voyages; the author is led to this con- 
clusion from the fact of having readjusted iron vessels’ compasses stated to 
be largely in error, but subsequently found, on swinging the ship, to have 
a comparatively small error, the supposed error being referable to a 
defective centre and pivot in thecompass itself, which prevented the needle 
from reaching its meridional position. In such cases an error of 8° or 10° 
has been often observed; the importance of such an error in narrow 
channels is tuo obvious to require comment. 

There are valuable and simple appliances which to a very great extent 
remove this difficulty, and which are comparatively inexpensive ; it is to 
be much regretted that a great indifference to the state of vessels’ com- 
passes exists in the minds of those under whose care the compasses are 
often placed, and who, it might be expected, would from experience have — 
been more sensitively alive to the absolute necessity of keeping the com- 
passes, as far as possible, in a state of efficiency. Ifa compass looks clean 
upon its surface, it is believed to be in a perfect state, although it may have 
been stowed away with the card upon the pivot without any protection, 
thus interfering with the most important of its working parts; as a conse- 
quence, the card, when required for use, will be sluggish upon its pivot, and a 
false indication of the direction of the vessel’s head is an unavoidable result. 

4, A defective adjustment of the compass is again a vital source of 
error. This mainly depends, 1, on the locality in which the vessel is 
swung, which is too often a dock, where other iron vessels lie in dangerous 
proximity ; 2, a want of due precaution on the part of the adjuster, in the 


1866.] Mr. J. Lilley on the Action of Compasses in Iron Ships. 41 


place selected for the shore-compass. ‘This is a matter of great importance, 
far more than is often supposed. As the corrections made on beard neces- 
sarily depend upon the bearings given from the shore, if these are faulty, the 
ship’s compass cannot be otherwise than incorrect. 

The author has more than once seen a shore-compass within a very short 
distance of an iron shed. The prevailing practice of swinging a ship in 
the short space of two hours is also very objectionable ; it is utterly im- 
possible to regulate compensating magnets, and to make the requisite ob- 
servations for the use of soft iron, in so short a time; it does not allow the 
vessel to be stayed upon the several points for a sufficient scrutiny of the 
compasses, sometimes three in number, and the results are too often merely 
guessed at, and thus all the advantages of that admirable system of adjust- 
ing iron vessels’ compasses, introduced by the Astronomer Royal, and 
which are invaluable to our coasting and short voyage vessels, are, to a 
great extent, negatived. 

London is unfortunately very badly provided with the means of adjusting 
the compasses of iron vessels, and, as their number is so much increasing, 
this subject is daily becoming more important ; the docks are crowded, and 
it is by mere chance that in the Victoria Dock, the only available dock at 
our command, a sufficiently clear space is to be met with. Greenhithe 
remains as the last resource in this dilemma; here moorings have been laid 
down by the City authorities for the use of merchant-vessels, but they are 
too near the edge of the tide. A very strong down current exists; the 
entire space of slack water in the Reach is occupied by ¢wo sets of moorings 
for the use of the Royal Navy. It would be a very great boon if one of 
these sets of moorings were allowed to be used by the merchant service, 
when not required for Her Majesty’s Navy. It rarely happens that both 
sets of moorings are at the same time required foruse. As the swinging a 
ship, moreover, at Greenhithe is entirely dependent upon the tide, it must 
be commenced with the flood, added to which, the operation is often much 
impeded by the wind, so that in the winter months, when the days are short, 
and the seven hours of ebb occur during nearly the whole of daylight, 
much serious delay is the result; the author has often occupied three days 
in adjusting a ship’s compasses. 

The construction of a dock for this purpose would be very desirable ; the 
expense may be urged against the proposal; but surely in London, one of 
the greatest mercantile cities in Europe, such an undertaking should be 
regarded as a national matter, and it is believed that shipowners would not 
object to pay a small rate of charge for the use of such a dock which might 
render it self-supporting. 

An opportunity for constructing such a dock may possibly arise in the 
formation of the new docks at Dagenham, where the expense of an entrance 
would be saved by simply making a basin from the dock large enough to 
swing a ship 400 feet in length round a dolphin placed in the centre, and 
well supplied with mooring-posts for ropes to be made fast to, and a suitable 

VOL. XV. E 


42 Mr. A. Smith on the Tidal Currents on (Mar. 8, 


spot for the shore observer—of course removed from all possibility of attrae- 
tion by iron in the immediate vicinity ; such basin to be kept exclusively 
for this purpose, and known as “ The Ship-swinging,” or “The Compass- 
adjusting’ Dock. 

With the view of deducing a practical result from what has been 
advanced in the foregoing remarks, the author would most strongly urge 
the necessity of some official inspection of iron vessels with reference to 
their compass-fittings. A code of rules and instructions might be laid down 
for this purpose; this would be essential in the cases of new ships; old 
ships should be examined at stated times, and certificates of compass 
adjustment be recognized by the appointed officer solely from those who 
can furnish evidence of having been properly instructed by competent per- 
sons, so that such an important work should not be allowed to be taken 
up and carried on by any amateur as his fancy may dictate. 

It may be a question how far a Government mspection would be 
cordially received by shipowners or public companies ; it might by some be 
regarded as an undue interference ; the Government also might be indis- 
posed to incur the cost of an extra office, with all its details; it might be 
more properly thought a matter for the consideration of Lloyd’s. It isa 
question assuredly in which underwriters are largely and personally inter- 
ested, and they already hold arbitrary powers as concerns the construction 
of the hull of a ship. The simple question of the compass as a means of 
safety is comparatively disregarded. 

The above suggestions are offered with great deference, and the author 
would rather leave the subject in the hands of those more conversant with 
legislation than himself; but he cannot refrain from repeating that the 
results of his own practical experience (which has been of no small amount) 
convince him that an official supervision of the compass-fittings of iron 
ships has become, from various causes, absolutely requisite. 


IIIf. “On the Tidal Currents on the West Coast of Scotland.’ By 
ArcHIBALD Situ, M.A., F.R.S. Received March 1, 1866. 


The tidal currents on that part of the west coast of Scotland which is 
comprised between the Mull of Cantyre and the Island of Mull run in 
general with great velocity. Their velocity, direction, and the time of their 
change, or of slack water, are therefore matters of great importance to 
navigators. On the other hand, the rise and fall of the tide is so small, 
and the depth of water in the channels and the harbours so considerable, 
that the times of high and low water are of comparatively small import- 
ance. 

While the laws of the currents are thus of more importance than the 
laws of the rise and fall of the tide, they are also much moresimple. The 
times of high and low water are very different at different parts of the 


1866. | the West Coast of Scotland. 43 


coast, while the times of slack water are nearly the same throughout the 
whole region in question. In a great part of this region the current, which 
sets for six hours in one direction, has no distinct title to be considered 
either a flood tide or an ebb tide. ‘The consequence is, that to describe 
the laws of the currents by reference to the time of high and low water, 
introduces great and unnecessary complexity. The application to the 
currents of the method first applied by Admiral Beechey to the tidal 
stream of the English Channel and German Ocean (Phil. Trans. 1851, 
p- 703) introduces at once order and simplicity, and makes that intelligible 
which before was only a confused maze. 

In the following paper an attempt is made, from the materials to be 
found in the charts of the Admiralty Survey of the west coast of Scotland, 
now nearly completed, to obtain a first approximation to a tidal chart of 
the west coast of Scotland. For this purpose I have, with the kind assis- 
‘tance ef Commander Evans, F.R.S., the first Naval Assistant to the 
Hydrographer of the Navy, deduced from the charts all the information 
to be there found as to the direction and times of change of the tidal 
streams, as well as the times of high and low water. The latter are indi- 
cated in the usual way by Roman numerals, which, to avoid ‘confusion, are 
always within the land. The times of change and direction of the currents 
are described by a particular symbol which I have found convenient for 
the purpose, and which I will now describe. 

In the seas which we are considering, the stream at any point generally 
flows for six hours in one direction and for-six hours in the opposite diree- 
tion. This may be conveniently indicated by the following symbol :— 


which indicates a stream flowing from XII. o’clock to VI. towards the east, 
and from VI. to XII. towards the west. 

In this notation, for simplicity, the interval of the tide is considered as 
12 hours instead, as it really is, about 12" 25". The hours are expressed 
in Greenwich mean time. 

The same symbol is adapted to the case of a stream flowing longer in one 
direction than in the other. Thus in the Sound of Sanda the stream at full 
and change may be indicated by 


i ae ae 
es ee 
indicating that it flows seven hours towards the west and five hours to the 
east. 

The velocity of the stream may be expressed by the length of the figure, 
or sometimes more conveniently by separate lines, the terminations of which 
are well marked as |———-|, the length of the lines indicating either the 
velocity at the middle of the stream, or, if it is found more convenient, the 
whole distance which a particle of water moves in one tide. 


E 2 


44: Mr. A. Smith on the Tidal Currents on [Mar. 8, 


I may observe that an analogous symbol may be used to express the 
more complicated tides which occur where different streams meet. Thus 
near the Eddystone the stream may be expressed by a symbol of this kind :— 


the bearing and distance of the centre of the diagram from any numeral 
indicating the direction and rate of stream at that hour. 

The time of high and low water in the region which we are considering 
may be thus described. Near the two extremities, viz. the Giant’s Cause- 
way and the Island of Eysdill, the time of high water at full and change is 
nearly V4 Greenwich time, being very nearly that due to the Great Atlantic 
tidal wave propagated from S.W. to N.E., and the same is very nearly 
the hour of high water on the chain of islands of which Isla, Jura and 
Scarba are the chief. But along the coast of the mainland of Ireland and 
Scotland the case is very different. Between these two countries is the 
great opening into the Liverpool basin, in which it is high water about XI. 
The change in the time of high water takes place by the followimg grada- 
tions :—At Giant’s Causeway it is high water about VI., at Ballyeastle VIT., 
Torpoint X., Mull of Cantyre XI., Gigha IT., Loch Killispoint 1V., Eys- 
dill and Scarba V, Jura and Islay V3. But while the hour of high water 
varies, the stream through nearly the whole of the region runs from X. to 
IV. in one direction and from IV. to X. in the other. 

Between the Mull of Cantyre and the N.H. coast of Ireland, the X. to 
IV. stream runs to the north. 

The most westerly part turns to the west, and runs through the Sound 
of Rathlin along the north coast of Ireland; the central part flows to the 
N.W. past the Rhynns of Islay ; the easterly part, which has flowed partly 
through the Sound of Sanda, turns sharply round the Mull of Cantyre, 
and flows to the northward, pouring with great velocity through the nar- 
row openings in the chain of islands, viz., the Sound of Islay between Islay 
and Jura, the Gulf of Corry Vreckan between Jura and Scarba, the little 
Corry Vreckan between Scarba and Lunga, the Slate Isles and the Cuan 
Sound ; of these the little Corry Vreckan is quite impassable ;.and Corry 
Vreckan and the Cuan Sound are seldom attempted except near slack 

vater. 

These channels open into the basin which lies between Jura and lona— 
a comparatively tideless sea, owing apparently to the circumstance of the 
ocean tide from the outside of Isla rising to nearly the same height as that 


1866. | } the West Coast of Scotland. 4.5 


which pours through the openings, so that the tidal stream would be little 
altered by building a dam from Islay to the Ross of Mull. 

The question may now be asked, Is the great X. to IV. stream which 
has just been described a flood or an ebb tide? So far as regards the 
Mull of Cantyre, Fairhead, and all that lies to the south or east, it is a true 
ebb tide. So far as regards Jura, Scarba, and the coast to the north and 
east, it is a true flood tide; but as regards a great part of the region in 
question, it cannot be called either a flood or an ebb tide, and much con- 
fusion is occasioned in the Charts by attempting so to distinguish it. 

At the south end of Gigha in the Admiralty charts an arrow is laid 
down, indicating that the flood tide runs to the northward ; anda few miles 
south of this, another arrow is laid down, indicating that the flood tide runs 
to the southward. From these arrows we might expect to find at this 
place a meeting of the tide and a sudden change in the direction of the flood 
stream. But the stream which is indicated by these arrows is nothing more 
than the great X.to IV. northerly current which we have described. The 
spot which is treated as a meeting of the tides, is merely that at which it is 
igh water at I. North of this, for more than three hours of the X. to IV. 
stream, the tide is rising, and it is indicated as a flood tide. South for 
more than three hours the tide is falling, and it is indicated as an ebb tide. 

On the south and west coast.of Isla the confusion is greater. In some 
of the charts, the incoming stream is marked as the flood, in others, and 
perhaps with better reason, the outgoing tide. It is in truth neither the 
one nor the other. 

The extreme complication which arises from describing the time of change 
of the stream by reference to the time of high and low water will now 
appear; thus we should have to say that in the Sound of Sanda, the ebb 
stream begins two hours before high water; at the Mull of Cantyre, one 
hour before high water ; a little north of this again two hours before high 
water. At the south of Gigha we might say indifferently, that the flood 
tide runs to the south and begins three hours before low water, or that it 
runs to the north and begins three hours after low water; in the Sounds 
of Islay and the Gulf of Corry Vreckan that it begins an hour before low 
water; and in describing the streams along BAe north coast of Ireland, we 
have even greater complication. 

The direction of the tidal streams on the rest of the west coast of Scot- 
land is easily described. The X. to IV. stream, through the course which 
I have described, becomes an XI. to V. stream at the outside of Isla, and 
through the Sound of Iona. The stream which sets to the northward up 
the Sound of Jura fills the Linnhe Loch, and causes high water at the south 
end of the Sound of Mull at half-past V., whilst the high water caused by 
the ocean tide at the north end of the Sound of Mull is an hour later; 
the consequence, as may easily be seen, is that nearly the whole flood tide 
through the Sound of Mull runs to the northward, and the nearly whole 
ebb tide runs to the southward. 


46 Mr. J. Evans on Geological Changes in the . [Mar 15, 


The tides round the island of Skye are comparatively simple. The V. 
to XI. tide from the outside of Mull is gradually retarded to a VI. to XIE. 
stream at the outside of Skye, and then as it rounds the north end of Skye, 
it is met by the tidal stream which has rounded the north end of the island 
of Lewis, and bends round into the mner Sound of Skve, where it becomes 
a VII. to I. tide; the course of both streams being nearly the same as if 
there were an embankment from Loch Shell in the island of Lewis to Ru 
Rea on the coast of Ross-shire. At the same time, another branch of the 
tide which has rounded the point of Ardnamurchan flows through the 
Sound of Skve as a XII. to VI. tide, and being an hour earlier than the 
tide which has rounded the north end of Skye, it pours with great velocity 
through Kyle Rea, but only to fill Loch Alsh and Loch Duich; the retar- 
dation which it meets with in so doing, making the rise inside of the nar- 
rows at Kyle Akin so nearly contemporaneous with the rise outside, that 
there is little stream through that narrow opening; the flood stream, as I 
am informed, sometimes flowing in one direction and sometimes in the 
other, according to the prevailing winds. 

There are many more minute details in these streams which have features 
of great interest. I have not, however, ventured in the present mperfect 
state of the data which we possess to enter upon these. I venture, how- 
ever, to express a hope that before the survey is completed, the data may 
be obtained for showing, and that the charts may show the direction and 
rate of the stream at every place and at any time. 


March 15, 1866. 
Tieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 
The following communication was read :— 


“On a possible Geolcgical Cause of Changes in the Position of 
the Axis of the Earth’s Crust.” By Joun Evans, F.R.S., See. 
G.S. Received February 28, 1866. 


At a time when the causes which have led to climatal changes in various 
parts of the globe are the subject of so much discussion, but little apology 
is needed for calling the attention of this Society to what possibly may 
have been one of these causes, though it has apparently hitherto escaped 
observation. 

That great changes of climate have taken place, at all events in the 
northern hemisphere of the globe, is one of the best established facts of 
geology, and that corresponding changes have not been noticed to the 
same extent in the southern hemisphere may possibly be considered as 
due, rather to a more limited amount of geological observation, than to an 
absence of the phenomena indicative of such alterations in climatal con- 
ditions having occurred. 


1866. ] Position of the Aats of the Earil’s Crust. 47 


The evidence of the extreme refrigeration of this portion of the earth at 
the Glacial Period is constantly receiving fresh corroboration, and various 
theories have been proposed which account for this accession of cold in a 
more or less satisfactory manner. 

Variations in the distribution of land and water, changes in the direction 
of the Gulf-stream, the greater or less eccentricity of the earth’s orbit, 
the passage of the Solar System through acold region in space, fluctuations 
in the amount of heat radiated by the sun, alternations of heat and cold 
in the northern and southern hemispheres, as consequent upon the precession 
of the equinoxes, and even changes in the position of the centre of gravity 
of the earth and consequent displacements of the polar axis, have all been 
adduced as causes calculated to produce the effects observed; and the 
reasoning founded on each of these data is no doubt familiar to all. 

The possibility of any material change in the axis of rotation of the 
earth has been so distinctly denied by Laplace* and all succeeding astro- 
nomers, that any theory involving such a change, however tempting as 
affording a solution of certain difficulties, has been rejected by nearly all 
geologists as untenable. 

Sir Henry Jamest, however, writing to the ‘Athenzeum’ newspaper in 
1860, stated that he had long since arrived at the conclusion that there 
was no possible explanation of some of the geological phenomena testifying 
to the climate at certain spots having greatly varied at different periods, 
without the supposition of constant changes in the position of the axis of 
the earth’s rotation. He then, assuming as an admitted fact that the 
earth is at present a fluid mass with a hardened crust, showed that slaty 
cleavage, dislocations, and undulations in the various strata are results 
which might be expected from the crust of the earth having to assume a 
new external form, if caused to revolve on a new axis, and advanced the 
theory that the elevation of mountain-chains of larger extent than at 
present known produced these changes in the position of the poles. 

The subject was discussed in further letters from Sir Henry James, the 
Astronomer Royal, Professors Beete Jukes and Hennessy, and others, but 
throughout the discussion the principal question at issue seems to have 
been whether any elevation of a mountain-mass could sensibly affect the 
position of the axis of rotation of the globe as a whole, and the general 
verdict was in the negative. 

At an earlier period (1848) the late Sir John Lubbock, in a short but 
conclusive paper in the ‘Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society ’ + 
pointed out what would have been the efiect had the axis of rotation of the 
earth not originally corresponded with the axis of figure, and also mentioned 
some considerations which appear to have been absent from Laplace’s 
calculations. 


* Méc. Cél., vol. v. p. 14. +t Atheneum, Aug. 25, 1860, &e. 
{ Vol. v. p. 5. 


48 Mr. J. Evans on Geological Changes in the [Mar. 15, 


Sir John Lubbock, however, in common with other astronomers, appears 
to have regarded the earth as consisting of a solid nucleus with a body of 
water distributed over a portion of its surface; and there can be but little 
doubt that, on this assumption of the solidity of the earth, the usually 
received doctrines as to the general persistence of the direction of the 
poles are almost unassailable. 

Directly, however, that we argue from the contrary assumption that the 
solid portion of the globe consists of a comparatively thin, but to some 
extent rigid crust with a fluid nucleus of incandescent mineral matter 
within, and that this crust, from various causes, is lable to changes 
disturbing its equilibrium, it becomes apparent that such disturbances may 
lead, if not to a change in the position of the general axis of the globe, yet 
at all events to a change in the relative positions of the solid crust and the 
fluid nucleus, and in consequence to a change in the axis of rotation, so far 
as the former is concerned. ? 

The existence in the centre of the globe of a mass of matter fluid by 
heat, though accepted as a fact by many, if not most geologists, has no 
doubt been called in question by some, and among them a few of great 
eminence. The gradual increase of temperature, however, which is found 
to take place as we descend beneath the surface of the earth, and which 
has been observed in mines and deep borings all over the world, the 
existence of hot springs, some of the temperature of boiling water, and 
the traces of volcanic action, either extinct or still in operation, which occur 
in all parts of the globe, afford strong arguments in favour of the hypothesis 
of central heat. 

And though we are at present unacquainted with the exact law of the 
increment of heat at different depths, and though, no doubt, under enormous 
pressure the temperature of the fusing-point of all substances may be con- 
siderably raised, yet the fact of the heat increasing with the depth from 
the surface seems so well established that it is highly probable that at a 
certain depth such a degree of heat must be attained as would reduce all 
mineral matter with which we are acquainted into a state of fusion. When 
once this point was attained, it seems probable that there would be no very 
great variation in the temperature of the internal mass; but whether the 
whole is in one uniform state of fluidity, or whether there is a mass of solid 
matter in the centre of the fluid nucleus, are questions which do not affect 
the hypothesis about to be considered. 

Those who are inclined to regard the earth as a solid or nearly solid 
mass throughout, consider that many volcanic phenomena may be accounted 
for on the chemical theory, which has received the support, among others, 
of Sir Charles Lyell. But apart from the consideration that such chemical 
action must of necessity be limited in its duration, the existence of local 
seas of fluid matter, resulting from the heat generated by intense chemical 
action, would hardly account for the increase of heat at great depths in 
places remote from volcanic centres ; and the rapid transmission of shocks 


1866. ] Position of the Axis of the Harth’s Crust. 49 


of earthquakes and the enormous amount of upheaval and subsidence as 
evidenced by the thickness of the sedimentary strata, seem inconsistent 
either witb the general solidity of the globe or any very great thickness of 
its crust. 

The supposition that the gradual oscillations of the surface of the earth, 
of which we have evidence all over the world as having taken place ever 
since the formation of the earliest known strata up to the present time, are 
due to the alternate inflation by gas and the subsequent depletion of certain 
vast bladdery cavities in the crust of the earth, can hardly be generally 
accepted. 

Those who wish to see the arguments for and against the theory of there 
being a fluid nucleus within the earth’s crust, will find them well and fairly 
stated in Naumann’s ‘Lehrbuch der Geognosie’*. My object is, not to 
discuss that question, but to point out what, assuming the theory to be 
true, would be some of the effects resulting from such a condition of things, 
more especially as affecting climatal changes. The agreement or disagree- 
ment between these hypothetical results and observed facts may ultimately 
assist in testing the truth of the assumption. 

The simplest form in which we can conceive of the relations to each 
other of a solid crust and a fluid nucleus in rotation together is that of a 
sphere. 

Let ACBD be a hollow sphere composed of solid materials and of 
perfectly uniform thickness and density, and let it be filled with the fluid 
matter I, over which the solid shell can freely move, and let the whole be 
in uniform rotation about an axis F G, the line C D representing the equator. 


Tr 


G 
7, 
Lz 
Z 
roy 


B 


G 
It is evident that m such a case, the hollow sphere being in perfect equi- 
librium, its axis and that of its fluid contents would perpetually coincide. 


* 2nd edit., 1858, vol. i. p. 36. 


50 Mr. J. Evans on Geological Changes in the [ Mar. 15, 


Tf, however, the equilibrium of the shell or crust be destroyed, as, for 
instance, by the addition of a mass of extraneous matter at H, midway 
between the pole and the equator, not only would the position of the axis 
of rotation be slightly affected by the alteration in the position of the 
centre of gravity of the now irregular sphere, but the centrifugal force of 
the excess of matter at H would gradually draw over the shell towards D 
until, by sliding over the nucleus, it attained its greatest possible distance 
from-the centre of revolution by arriving at the equator. The resultant 
effect would be that though the whole sphere continued to revolve around 
an axis as nearly as possible in the line FG, yet the position of the pole 
of the hollow shell would have been changed by 45°, as by the passage 
of H to the equator the points I and K would have been brought to the 
poles by spirals constantly decreasing in diameter, while A and B, by spirals 
constantly increasing, would have at last come to describe circles midway 
between the poles and the equator. 

The axis of rotation of the hollow sphere and that of its fluid contents 
would now again coincide, and would continue to do so perpetually unless 
some fresh disturbance in the equilibrium of the shell tock place. 

If instead of the addition of fresh matter at H we had supposed an 
excavation or removal of some portion of the shell, a movement im the axis 
of rotation of the shell would also have ensued, since from the diminished 
centrifugal force of that portion of the hollow sphere where the excavation 
had idken place, it would no longer equipoise the corresponding portion on 
the opposite side at J, and the excavated spot would eventually find its 
way to the pole. 

In order more clearly to exhibit these effects, I have prepared a model 
in accordance with a suggestion of Mr. Francis Galton, F.R.S., in which 
a wheel representing a section of a hollow sphere has its axis, upon which 
it can freely turn, fixed in a frame, which is itself made to revolve in’ such 
a manner that the axis of its rotation passes through one of the diameters 
of the wheel, and coincides with what would be the axis of the sphere of 
which the wheel is a section. 

In the periphery of the wheel are a number of adjustable screws with 
heavy heads, so that, by serewing any of them in or out, the addition of 
matter or its abstraction at any part of the sphere may be represented. 

If by adjusting these screws the wheel could be brought into perfect equi- 
librium, its position upon its own axis would remain unchanged in whatever 
position it was originally placed, notwithstanding any amount of rotation 
being given to the frame in which it is hung; but practically it is found 
that with a certain given position of the screws a certain part of the wheel 
coincides with the axis of the frame, or becomes the pole around which the - 
sphere revolves. The rim of the wheel is graduated so as to show the 
position of the peles in all cases, and generally speaking the wheel always 
settles down after rotation with the pole within three or four degrees of 
the same spot, if no alteration has been made in the adjustment of the 


1866. | Position of the Axis of the Karth’s Crust. 5A 


screws, though of course what was the uppermost pole may become the 
lower one; and in some cases the wheel may be zn equilibrio with a 
projecting screw either above or below the equator, in which ease there 
may be four readings on the circle at the index-point, according as the one 
pole or the other is uppermost, and the projecting screw is above or below 
the equator. 

With the screws on the wheel evenly balanced, a slight alteration in the 
adjustment of any of them immediately tells upon the position of what, 
for convenience sake, may be called the poles, except, indeed, in such 
cases as screwing outwards those already at the equator, or making similar 
alterations in the adjustment of two screws at equal distances on either side 
of one of the poles. If a screw be turned outwards so as notably to 
project at any spot, no matter how near to the pole, it will be found, after 
the machine has been:a short time im revolution, in the region of the 
equator. Or again, if one or, better still, two opposite screws at the 
equator be turned inwards, they will be found after a short period of 
revolution at the poles. 

Now let us assume for a moment that, though the crust was partially 
covered by water, the earth, instead of bemg a spheroid, was a perfect 
sphere, consisting of a hardened crust of moderate thickness supported on 
a fluid nucleus over which the crust could travel freely m any direction, 
but both impressed with the same original rotatory motion, so that without 
some disturbing cause they would continue to revolve for ever upon the 
same axis, and as if they were one homogeneous body. Let us assume, 
moreover, that this crust, though in perfect equilibrium on its centre of 
rotation, was not evenly spherical externally, but had certain projecting 
portions, such as would be represented in Nature by continents and islands 
rising above the level of the sea. 

It is evident that so long as those continents and islands remained 
unaltered in their condition and extent, the relative position of the crust to 
the enclosed fluid nucleus would remain unaltered also. But supposing 
those projecting masses were either further upheaved from some internal 
cause, or worn down and ground away by the sea or by subaérial agency 
and deposited elsewhere, it seems impossible but that the same effects 
must ensue as we see resulting upon the model from the elevation and 
depression of certain screws, and that the axis of rotation of the crust of 
the sphere would be changed in consequence of its having assumed a fresh 
position upon its fluid nucleus, though the axis of the whole sphere might 
have retained its original direction, or have altered from it only in the 
slightest degree. 

An irregular accumulation of ice at one or both of the poles, such as 
supposed by M. Adhémar, would act in the same manner as an elevation 
of the land; and even assuming that the whole land had disappeared from 
above the surface of the sea, yet if by marine currents the shallower 
parts of the universal ocean were deepened and the deeper parts filled up, 


52 Mr. J. Evans on Geological Changes in the [ Mar. 15, 


there would, owing to the different specific gravity of the transported soil 
and the displaced water, be a disturbance in the equilibrium of the crust, 
and a consequent change in the position of its axis of rotation. 

Now if all this be true of a sphere, it will also, subject to certain 
modifications, be true of a spheroid so slightly oblate as our globe, 

The main difference in the two cases is, that in a sphere the crust may 
assume any position upon the nucleus without any alteration in its struc- 
ture, while in the case of the movement of a spheroidal crust over a 
similar spheroidal nucleus, every portion of its internal structure must 
be more or less disturbed as the curvature at each point will be slightly 
altered. 

The extent of the resistance to an alteration of position arising from this 
cause will depend upon the oblateness of the spheroid and the thickness 
and rigidity of the crust; while the thicker the latter is, the less also will 
be the proportionate effect of such elevations, subsidences, and denudations 
as those with which we are acquainted. The question of friction upon the 
nucleus is also one that would have to be considered, as the internal matter 
though fluid might be viscous. 

It will of course be borne in mind that the elevations and depressions of 
the surface of the globe are not, on the theory now under consideration, 
regarded according to the proportion they bear to the earth’s radius, but 
according to their relation to the thickness of the earth’s crust; and that, 
even assuming Mr. Hopkins’s extreme estimate to be true, yet elevations 
or depressions, such as we know to have taken place, of 8000 or 10,000 
feet, bear an appreciable ratio to the 800 or 1000 miles which he assigns 
as the thickness of the earth’s crust. 

It is, however, to be remarked that the extremely ingenious speculations 
of Mr. Hopkins are based on the phenomena of precession and nutation, 
and that if once the possibility of a change in the position of the axis of 
rotation of the earth’s crust be admitted, it is not improbable that the 
value of some of the data upon which the calculations of these movements 
are founded may be affected. 

The supposition of the thickness of the crust being so great seems also 
not only entirely at variance with observed facts as to the increase of heat 
on descending beneath the surface of the earth, but to have been felt by 
Mr. Hopkins himself to offer such obstacles to any communication between 
the surface of the globe and its interior, that he has had recourse to an 
hypothesis of large spaces in the crust at no great depth from the surface, 
and filled with easily-fusible materials, in order to account for voleanic and 
other phenomena. 

But though it may be possible to account for voleanoes upon such an 
assumption, yet, as already observed, the phenomena of elevation and 
depression, such as we find to have taken place, and more especially the 
existence of vast geclogical faults, cannot without enormous difficulty be 
reconciled with such a theory. 


1866.] Position of the Awis of the Karth’s Crust. | 53 


Taking the increment of heat as 1° Fahrenheit for every 55 or 60 feet * 
in descent, a temperature of 2400° Fahr. would be reached at about 25 miles, 
sufficient to keep in fusion such rocks as basalt, greenstone, and porphyry ; 
and such a thickness appears much more consistent with the fluctuations in 
level, and the internal contortions and fractures of the crust which are 
everywhere to be observed. Sir William Armstrong, on the assumption of 
the temperature of subterranean fusion being 3000° Fahr., considers that 
the thickness of the film which separates us from the fiery ocean beneath 
would be about 34 miles. 

Even assuming a thickness of 50 miles, so as to make still greater 
allowance for the increased difficulty of fusion under heavy pressure, the 
thickness of the crust would only form one-eightietb part of the radius of 
the earth; or if we represent the earth by a globe 13 feet in diameter, 
the crust would be one inch in thickness, while the difference between the 
polar and equatorial diameters would be half an inch. 

In such a case, the elevation or wearing away of continents such as are 
at present in existence, rising, as some of them do, nearly a quarter of a 
mile on an average above the mean sea-level, would cause a great dis- 
turbance in the equilibrium of the crust, sufficient to overcome considerable 
resistance in its attempts to regain a state of equilibrium by a movement 
over its fluid nucleus. 

Whether the thickness of the earth’s crust was not in early geological 
times less than at present, so as to render it more susceptible of alterations 
in position—whether the spheroid of the fluid mineral nucleus corresponds 
in form with the spheroid of water which gives the general contour of 
the globe—whether or no there are elevations and depressions upon the 
nucleus corresponding to some extent with the configuration of the outer 
erust, and whether the motion of the crust upon it, besides effecting 
climatal changes, might not also lead to some elevations and depressions of 
the land, and produce some of the other phenomena mentioned by Sir 
Henry James, are questions which I will leave for others to discuss. 

My object is simply to call attention to what appears to me the fact, 
that if, as there seems reason to suppose, our globe consists of a solid crust 
of no great thickness resting on a fluid nucleus, either with or without a 
solid central core, and if this crust, as there is abundant evidence to prove, 
is hable to great disturbances in its equilibrium, then it of necessity follows 
that changes take place in the position of the crust with regard to the 
nucleus, and an alteration in the position of the axis of rotation, so far as 
the surface of the earth is concerned, ensues. 

Without in the slightest degree undervaluing other causes which may 
lead to climatal changes, I think that possibly we may have here a vera 
causa such as would account for extreme variations from a Tropical to an 
Arctic temperature at the same spot, in a simpler and more satisfactory 
manner than any other hypothesis. 

* Page, ‘ Advanced Text-book of Geology,’ p. 30. 


54: Geological Changes in Position of the Earths Crust. [Mar. 22, 


The former existence of cold in what are now warm latitudes might, and 
probably did in part, arise from other causes than a change in the axis of 
rotation, but no other hypothesis can well account for the existence of 
traces of an almost tropical vegetation within the Arctic circle. 

Of the former existence of such a vegetation, the evidence, though 
strong, is not conclusive. But if the fossil plants of Melville Island, in 
lat. 75° N.*, which appear to agree generically with those from the 
English coal-measures, really grew upon the spot where they were now 
discovered, they seem to afford conclusive evidence of a change in the 
position of the pole since the period at which they grew, as such veggies 
must be considered impossible in so high a latitude. 

The corals and Orthoceratites Hon Griffiths Island and Cornwallis 
Island, and the liassic Ammonites from Point Wilkie, Prince Patrick’s 
Island, tell the same story of the former existence of something like a sub- 
tropical climate at places at present well within the Arctic circle. 

To use the words of the Rev. Samuel Haughton‘, in describing the fossils 
collected by Sir F. L. M¢Clintock, “‘The diseovery of such fossils cm situ, 
in 76° N. latitude, is calculated to throw considerable doubt upon the 
theories of elimate, which would account for all past changes of temperature 
by changes in the relative position of land and water on the earth’s 
surface ; and I think that all geologists will agree with this remark, and 
feel that if the possibility of a change in the position of the axis of rotation 
of the crust of the earth were once admitted, it would smooth over many 
difficulties they now encounter. 

That some such ehange is indeed taking place at the present moment 
may not unreasonably be inferred from the observations of the Astronomer ~ 
Royal, who, in his Report to the Board of Visitors for 1861, makes use of 
the following language, though ‘‘only for the sake of embodying his 
description of the observed facts,’ as he refers the discrepancies noticed 
to “some peculiarity of the instrument. .... The Transit Circle and Colli- 
mators still present those appearances of agreement between themselves 
and of change with respect to the stars which seem explicable only on one 
of two suppositions—that the ground itself shifts with respect to the 
general Earth, or that the Axis of Rotation changes its position.” 


March 22, 1866. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 
The following communications were read :— 


* Lyell, ‘ Principles of Geology,’ 1853, p. 88. 
+ Journal of the Royal Dublin Society, vol. i. p. 244. 


1866. | On the Action of Trichloride of Phosphorus. 55 


I. “On the Action of Trichloride of Phosphorus on the Salts of 
the Aromatic Monamines.” By A. W. Hormann, LL.D., F.RB.S., 
&e. Received March 3, 1866. 


The starting-point of the following experiments was an accidental obser- 
vation. Whilst investigating the chlorine-, bromine-, and nitro-derivatives 
of aniline, I had prepared a large quantity of phenylacetamide by the action 
of chloride of acetyl on aniline. From the hydrochlorate of aniline, abun- 
dantly produced as a by-product in this reaction, the aniline was recovered 
by treating the mother-liquors with hydrate of sodium. During the distil- 
lation, after the greater part of the aniline had passed overand collected in 
the receiver, a tenacious oily fluid began to come over, adhering to the tube 
of the condenser and gradually becoming a crystalline mass. It was easily 
purified by washing with cold, and crystallization from hot alcohol. 

Beautiful white leafy crystals were thus obtained, fusible at 137°, and 
volatile without decomposition at a temperature beyond the range of the 
mercury-thermometer. These crystals are almost insoluble in water, diffi- 
eultly soluble in cold, but soluble in hot alcohol, and also soluble in ether, 
The solutions are neutral. 

In acids the crystals are also easily soluble; an alkali precipitates the 
original substance unaltered from the solutions. The hydrochloric-acid 
solution yields, with tetrachloride of platinum, a difficultly soluble crystal- 
line precipitate. The new substance thus exhibits the deportment of a 
well-characterized base. Its composition was readily determined by com- 
bustion with oxide of copper, the analytical results pointing unequivocally 
to the formula 

C, WN 

as the simplest atomic expression for the new body. But the whole beha- 
viour of the substance, and more especially its transformation, by means 
of concentrated sulphuric acid, mto aniline and acetic acid, leave no doubt 
that the above expression must be doubled, and that the new base is repre- 
sented by the formula 

C,, H,, N,. 
This formula was confirmed by the analysis of the platinum-salt already 
mentioned, and that of the nitrate which separates from the solution as 
an oily fluid, gradually changing to a beautiful crystalline compound; the 
former contains 

2(C,, H,, N, HCl), Pt*Cl,, 
the latter 
C,, H,, N,, HNO,. 

Whence is this body derived? and how is its formula to be interpreted ? 
An answer to these questions was furnished by examining the chloride of 
acetyl employed in preparing the phenylacetamide. When on distilling 
the chloride the principal product had passed over, the thermometer gra- 


= Pt 198. 


56 Dr. Hofmann on the Action of Trichloride. [ Mar, 22, 


dually rose from 55° to 78°. The last portion which came over was pure 
trichloride of phosphorus. It was obvious that this substance must have 
played a part in the formation of the new compound. 

I therefore submitted phenylacetamide to the action of trichloride of 
phosphorus. The new body was formed, but in very unsatisfactory quan- 
tity. The result of the experiment was essentially different when phenyl- 
acetamide and aniline in varying proportions were jointly submitted to the 
action of trichloride of phosphorus. The amount of substance obtained 
varied with the composition of the mixture, and appeared greatest when 
the mixture was made in the proportion of one part of trichloride of phos- 
phorus, two parts of aniline, and three parts of phenylacetamide. Hence 
the reaction had taken place according to the following equation : 


3C, H, N+3C, H, NO+PCI,=3C,, H,, N,+H, PO,+3HCl. 


Perfectly similar results were obtained when a proportionate quantity of 
hydrochlorate of aniline was employed instead of aniline in this expe- 
riment. 

The idea naturally presented itself to produce the same result without 
taking the trouble of preparing and purifying the phenylacetamide by in- 
cluding its preparation in the very process of forming the new compound. 
For this purpose 6 molecules of aniline were added to 3 molecules of chlo- 
ride of acetyl, and the dense liquid thus ‘obtained mixed with 1 molecule 
of trichloride of phosphorus. The result could not have been better: 


6C, H,N+3C, H, OCl+PCl,=3C,, H,, N, +H, PO,+6HCI. 


A simple additional step and the true mode of preparing the substance, 
and with it the general method for the production of an endless variety of 
analogous bodies, was found. Evidently it was not even necessary to pre- 
pare the chloride of acetyl separately. The new body must be as easily 
obtained by the direct action of trichloride of phosphorus on aniline and 
acetic acid. The mixture had only to be made in such a manner that, after 
transforming the acetic acid into chloride of acetyl, there was a sufficient 
amount of trichloride of phosphorus left to perform the rest of the work. 
In this case, therefore, 6 molecules of aniline and 3 molecules of acetic acid 
had to be added to 2 molecules of trichloride of phosphorus, 


6C, H,N+3C,H,0,+2PCl,=3C,,H,, N,+2H, PO,+ 6HCI. 


The reaction is violent, and the operation must be performed with care. 
The substances are mixed according to the above equation. For this 
purpose three parts by weight of aniline are added to one part of acetic 
acid and into the mixture surrounded by cold water two parts of trichioride 
of phosphorus are slowly poured; in which proportion the latter compound 
is in slight excess. The tenacious fluid thus obtained is then heated for a 
couple of hours to 160°. On cooling, it solidifies to a hard, friable, trans- 
lucent, resinous mass of a light-brown colour, which dissolves in boiling 
water almost without residue, leaving only traces of an amorphous yellow 


1866. ] of Phosphorus on the Aromatic Monamines. 57 


substance containing phosphorus behind. The clear filtered solution, 
after cooling, yields, on the addition of soda, a white crystalline precipitate, 
which requires only to be washed and recrystallized from alcohol. 

The foregoing equations give a pretty clear idea of the qualitative and 
quantitative nature of the experiment, but they do not afford us an insight 
into the true mechanism of the reaction. ‘This, nevertheless, is a very 
simple one. ‘Trichloride of phosphorus acts water-generating and water- 
withdrawing. The oxygen required for this purpose is supplied by the 
phenylacetamide ; as, however, the molecule of this compound contains 
but one atom of hydrogen belonging to the original ammonia skeleton, a 
molecule of aniline is required in addition to supply the second atom of 
hydrogen. In this manner a diamine is formed, in which two atoms of the 
hydrogen of the double ammonia type are replaced by two univalent phe- 
nyl-residues, and three of the remaining hydrogen atoms by the trivalent 
group C, H., to which the term e¢henyl * may for the present be applied. 

The new body would thus become ethenyldiphenyldiamine, the forma- 
tion of which in the most simple form would depend upon the removal of 
1 mol. of water from 1 mol. of phenylacetamide and 1 mol. of aniline. 


emo on yo (C, H,)" 
C, O, No Nai} O76; HO), N,. 
H. H H 


4 


I was anxious to test this assumption by experiment. 


* The term et¢henyl proposed for the group C, H,, which in the new compound functions 
with the value of 3 atoms of hydrogen, is framed according to a system of nomenclature 
to which { have occasionally resorted, in the boundless confusion of names now prevail- 
ing in organic chemistry, as a means of communication with my pupils. Perhaps this 
system is capable of further development. 

It is a peculiar feature of the development of modern chemistry that more than ever 
before is felt the necessity of grouping the organic compounds round the hydrocar- 
bons. The question therefore may be said to reduce itself to the discovery of a good 
principle of nomenclature for the compounds of hydrogen and carbon. Many attempts 
have been made in this direction, as yet without any acceptable results. 

For the purpose of framing my names I fuse the method originally employed by 
Laurent with the principle proposed by Gerhardt, and more or less adopted by his 
successors. 

An example will illustrate my mode of proceeding. Let us consider the most import- 
ant of all the series of hydrocarbons, the homologues of marsh-gas. All the members of 
this series I make terminate in ane, distinguishing the order of succession by prefixing the 
first syllable of the Latin numeral corresponding to the number of carbon atoms in 
the molecule. From this rule the first three members of the series are conveniently 
excepted, their names having been so long in use as to render it desirable to embody 
them in the system. 

By the removal of 1 atom of hydrogen from the hydrocarbon, the latter ceases to 
be a saturated compound, and the remaining group of atoms becomes univalent. The 
termination y/ now takes the place of ane. A second atom of hydrogen is removed, 
the group becomes dzvalen¢t and now terminates in ene; a third hydrogen atom is sepa- 
rated, the group is again raised in value by one becoming in fact ¢riva/ent, and acquires 
the termination enyl. By the removal of the fourth and fifth atom of hydrogen the 

VOL. XV. F 


58 Dr. Hofmann on the Action of Trichloride [Mar. 22, 


At 100° iodide of ethyl has no action on ethenyldiphenyldiamine, but 
at about 150° the two bodies react on one another. The mixture, after 
being heated for five or-six hours, yielded, upon cooling, beautiful crystals 
of an iodide. By treatment with chloride of silver this iodide was converted 
into the corresponding chloride, and then into the platinum-salt. Analysis 
of this salt showed that the ethyl group had been once taken up. On 
the addition of caustic soda the corresponding base was separated. It 
is a thick oily fluid, which, when shaken with water, does not impart to it 
the slightest alkaline reaction. By renewed treatment with iodide of ethyl 
an iodide, it is true, was separated, but it was proved on examination that 
the ethyl group had not been assimilated a second time. In the sense of 
the above assumption, this nevertheless ought to have taken place. The 
experiment was therefore repeated with iodide of methyl which is well 
known to act much more powerfully than the ethyl-compound. This body 
attacks the ethylated base even at 100°. The iodide thus obtained, when 
decomposed by oxide of silver, yielded a strongly alkaline liquid, whence 


quantivalence of the residuary group again increases, the groups becoming guadri- 
valent and guintivalent, and acquiring the terminations ine and inyl, &c. 
According to this principle the following names are formed : 


Methane, (C H, )° Sextane, (C, H,,)° 
Ethane, -(C,H, )° Septane, (C, H,,)° 
Propane, ‘(C; Hg )° Octane, (C, H,,)° 
Quartane, (C, H,,)° Nonane, (C, H,,)° 
-Quintane, (C, H,5)° Decane; (Cj He)" 


And further : 


Methane, (G:H,)° |Ethane, (C;H,)° | Propane, (C, H,)° | Quartane, (C,H,,)° 
Methyl, (C:H,)' |Ethyl, (C,H,)' | Propyl, (C,H,)' | Quartyl, (C,H,)’ 
Methene, (C-H,)" |Ethene, (C,H,)’ | Propene, (C,H,)'| Quartene, (C, H,)" 
Methenyl(@;H )'’ |Ethenyl, (C,H,)'" | Propenyl, (C,H,)'") Quartenyl, (C, Bey? 
Ethine, (C,H,)* | Propine, (C,H,)¥| Quartine, (C,H,)" 
Ethinyl, (C,H )’ | Propinyl, (C,H,)*%| Quartinyl, (C,H;)* 
Propone, (C,H,)%i| Quartone, (C, H,)" 
Proponyl, (C,H)vi} Quartonyl, (C, H,)”# 
Quartune, (C, H,)yii 
Quartunyl, (C,H )* 


This is not the place to develope this subject further. The short notice 1 have given 
must suffice. A superficial examination of the system shows, however, how large a 
number of groups of atoms may be clearly and succinctly expressed in it. 

It appeared convenient to submit the plan to a provisional test by framing some 
of the names required for the substances which were furnished by the above expe- 
riments. 

Bodies containing oxygen may be as simply nominated according to this plan. 

The acid derived from ethylic alcohol is ethoxylic acid (acetic acid), the first acid cor- 
responding to ethenic alcohol would be ethoxenic acid (glycolic acid), the second being 
ethdioxenic acid (oxalic acid). We speak of the oxylic, owenic, and dioxenic acids of 
a series, of the guartane series, for instance, and any one would understand that by 
these expressions are meant butyric, butylactic, and succinic acids. 


1866. | of Phosphorus on the Aromatic Monamines. 59 


it was at once inferred that the methyl group had been added to the ethyl 
group already present in the substance. This conclusion was amply corro- 
borated by the analysis of the platinum-salt precipitated from the liquid. 
By this experiment the nature of ethenyldiphenyldiamine is most satis- 

torily elucidated. The action of iodide of ethyl had converted this base 
into the tertiary diamine ethenylethyldiphenyldiamine, 

(C, H,)” 

(C, H,) N,; 

(C, H,). 
the latter, under the influence of iodide of methyl, yielding the compound 


[(C, H,)” (C, H,) (C, H,), Na](C Hs) } 0, 


which is soluble in water with a strongly-marked alkaline reaction. 
The stability of ethenyldiphenyldiamine is remarkable. As I have 
already mentioned, this base distils at a very high temperature without 
decomposition. It is moreover scarcely attacked by fusion with hy- 
drate of potassium. Concentrated sulphuric acid, on the other hand, 
decomposes it easily. When gently heated, the solution of ethenyldiphe- 
nyldiamine in sulphuric acid evolves acetic acid, and, on addition of water, 
the slightly-coloured liquid solidifies to a white crystalline mass of sulph- 
anilic acid, 
(C, ae C.H.O C,H, 4 
(C, He N,+2H, SO,= 7 Hl } O+2 - N, $0, | 


It need scarcely be mentioned that, by reactions similar to that- of tri- 
chloride of phosphorus on acetate of aniline, an almost endless variety of 
new compounds may be obtained. By changing the acid, or base, or both, 
a series of substances is formed, the composition of which in each case 
is fixed in advance by theory. I have worked only very little in this 
direction. 

Toluidine acts in a manner precisely similar to that of aniline. The 
base formed can scarcely be distinguished from the phenyl base. Analysis 
of the platinum-salt has led to the formula 


(C, H, Wh 
Cr H,. N= (C, Ls N,. 
H 


With naphthylamine the reaction is less smooth. The product obtained 
by acting with 1 molecule of trichloride of phosphorus on 3 molecules of 
chloride of acetyl and 6 molecules of naphthylamine, was an unenjoyably 
viscous scarcely crystalline mass which retained, after repeated solution 
and precipitation, its amorphous character. An analysis of the platinum- 
salt led, however, to the formula 


; (C, Hy we 
pe H,, N,= (CS, Ds N.. 


60 Dr. Hofmann on the Action of Trichloride [ Mar. 22, 


Aniline, toluidine, and naphthylamine being primary monamines, it 
seemed of interest also to extend the examination to a secondary one. For 
this purpose I selected diphenylamine. When a mixture of diphenylamine 
and phenylacetamide, in the proportion of their moiecular weights, was 
submitted to the action of trichloride of phosphorus, the reaction took 
place in the ordinary way, but the mass precipitated from the solution of 
the chloride by ammonia could not be crystallized. It had therefore to be 
analyzed as platinum-salt. Determination of the platinum as well as com- 
bustion showed, however, that the expected ethenyltriphenyldiamine had 
been formed, 

C, H, O ! C, H, | H (C, eh ge 
GH. Nhe Ht N= a: 604.(C BH) tae 
Bey H (C, H,) 

An entirely unexpected result, on the other hand, was obtained by the 
action of trichloride of phosphorus on a mixture of acetic acid and methyl- 
aniline. Working, as I did, exclusively with a secondary monamine, I had 
expected to see the reaction take place according to the following equation: — 


CCH, (C, H,)” 
3| C,H, n ]+° ee o=2| Hlo| +(C H,), +N, 
TE H si (C, H.). 


But this was not the case; the action was found to have been very ire- 
gular; and amongst the products a chloride was observed, the base of 
which, when liberated by oxide of silver, dissolved in water with an alka- 
. line reaction. When analyzed in the form of a platinum-salt, this body 
proved to be ethenyldiphenyldiamine, which had twice appropriated the 
methyl-group, having the composition 


[(C, H3)" (G, H,), (C H,) N.] C A, 
i) NS 2 Hi O. 


In this case evidently chloride of methyl had been eliminated from one of 
the molecules of methylaniline; which, acting on the ethenyldiphenylme- 
thyldiamine, had given rise to the formation of the chloride corresponding 
to the above-mentioned oxide, 
2((C, H,) (C H,) HN|]+C, H, O CI=H, O 
+ ((C, H,)” (C, H;), (C H,) N,] (C H,) Cl. 
A few experiments made with the derivatives of valeric and benzoic acids 
are still to be mentioned. . 
Quintenyldiphenyldiamine.—For the preparation of this substance, 3 mo- 
lecules of valeric acid were mixed with 6 molecules of aniline, and to the 
higuid, after cooling, 2 molecules of trichloride of phosphorus were added. 
This mixture, on being submitted for a couple of hours to a temperature of 
150°, yielded a viscous mass soluble in water. From the solution hydrate 
of sodium precipitated a crystalline base almost insoluble in water, which 
was recrystallized from alcohol. This substance fused at 111°. The com- 


1866. ] of Phosphorus on the Aromatic Monamines. 61 


bustion of the body and the analysis of its platinum-salt, which crystallized 
in rhombic plates difficultly soluble in water and almost insoluble in alco- 
hol, led to the formula 


(C, Hy" 
Gs, 1a N,=(C, H,), Nas 
H 

Benzyldiphenyldiamine.—By substituting benzoic acid for valeric acid in 
the reaction just described, the corresponding benzyl-compound is obtained. 
I have prepared this substance by the action of 1 molecule of trichloride of 
phosphorus on a mixture of 3 molecules of phenylbenzamide and 3 molecules 
of hydrochlorate of aniline. The reaction takes place in the ordinary way. 
The product is a very weak base crystallizing in fine silky needles. The 
hydrochlorate forms thin brilliant plates difficultly soluble in water, which 
upon re-crystallization lose their acid. The analysis led to the formula 


(C, Et eS 
GF, N.C, “oN: 
H 


This compound has been already observed by Gerhardt. He obtained it 
whilst examining the action of pentachloride of phosphorus on the amides, 
the last experiments which he performed before his death. A short notice 
of this investigation, found after his death, has been published by M. 
Cahours*. 

The phenyl-compounds of the acetic and valeric groups above described 
are naturally linked with a compound which several years ago I procured 
by an essentially different reaction. This substance, which at the time 
I described under the name of formyldiphenyldiaminey, but to which, 
in accordance with my present ideas on nomenclature, I would give the 
name methenyldiphenyldiamine, is obtained by the action of chloroform on 
aniline ; its relation to the compounds before mentioned is seen by a glance 
at the following formule :— 

(CB) 
Methenyldiphenyldiamine, C,, H,, N,=(C, H,), ne 
Lat 


ie (C, Hy" 
Ethenyldiphenyldiamine, C,, H,,N,=(C,H,), ?N,. 
H 


Quintenyldiphenyldiamine, C,, H,, N,= 


It seemed worth while to establish bya special experiment the analogy of 
methenyldiphenyldiamine, obtained in so different a reaction, with the 
substances just described. For this purpose I submitted phenylform- 


* Ann. Ch. Phys. [3], vol. liii. p. 302. 
Tt Proceedings of the Royal Society, vol. ix. p. 229. 


62 Dr. Hofmann on the Action of Monamines. [ Mar. 22, 


amide* to the action of a mixture of aniline and trichloride of phosphorus. 
The result proved that the methenyl-compound can be thus prepared even 
more easily than by means of chloroform. 

In conclusion, the relation must be mentioned which the compounds just 
described bear to the base obtained by Professor Strecker +, when acting 
with gaseous hydrochloric acid on acetamide. The body thus formed is 

C,H, n,=(@ ae } Nis 
ore 
and has been called acediamine, for which name, in accordance with the 
proposed nomenclature, I would now substitute the term ethenyldiamine. 
When compared with the analogous aniline-compound, the very slight 
stability of acediamine, which splits up with the greatest facility into acetic 
acid and ammonia, deserves to be noticed. 

A quintenyldiamine, corresponding to the quintenyldiphenyldiamine, has 
not as yet been prepared. Methenyldiamine, on the other hand, is known, 
although the compound which I have in view has scarcely been looked 
upon as such. The body in question is no other than cyanide of ammo- 
nium. 


ERE ke CH)" Methenyl- (C H)!" 

Methenyldiamine ( 

(Cyanide of ammonium) H, ?N, diphenyl- (C,H), ?N,. 
H diamine H 


The facility with which this substance decomposes is well known; 
amongst the products formic acid and ammonia are invariably found. 

It is further known that by heating ammonia with chloroform (trichlo- 
ride of methenyl), cyanide of ammonium is formed, a reaction which is 
perfectly similar to that by which the analogous phenyl-base was origi- 
nally obtained in the corresponding experiment with aniline. 

In conclusion, [ beg to thank Messrs. Tingle and Fischer for their valu- 
able assistance during the performance of the experiments described. 


* On this occasion I prepared larger quantities of phenylformamide, which can 
be produced much more easily by digesting formic ether with aniline than by the process 
hitherto employed (distillation of oxalate of aniline). Phenylformamide has the remark- 
able property (not as yet observed) of being precipitated from its aqueous solution as a 
solid scarcely crystalline mass on addition of a strong solution of caustic soda. By 
separating this compound from the liquid, and purifying it as far as possible by rapid 
pressure between folds of bibulous paper, it was possible to make an analysis of it. 
Its composition was found to be 


CHO 
C,H,N NaO=C,H, }N. 
Na 
By the action of water upon it phenylformamide and hydrate of sodium are repro- 


duced. 
t Ann. Chem. Pharm., vol. ciii. p. 321. 


1866. | Prof. Phillips on a Zone of Spots on the Sun. 63 


II. “ Notice of a Zone of Spots on the Sun.” By Joun Puitrips, 
M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., Professor of Geology in the University 
of Oxford. Received March 22, 1866. 


During the latter half of February and the first half of March, spots of 
extremely varied character have appeared on the sun, and have been seen 
with great distinctness, in good observing weather, through the whole or 
parts of two semi-rotations. On the 13th of February, at 10° 25™, four 
spots were visible on the disk, in the situations marked Z, A, B, C in the dia- 
gram No. 1. In that diagram the apparent course of the sun’s equator is 


Diagram No. 1. 


marked by the curved line e, and the pole of rotation at P. Thus the four 
spots indicated for observation being all on the same side of the sun’s 
equator, and all within the latitude of 10°, constitute a zone of spots. 
Since that date a fifth spot, D, still in the same zone, has appeared, fol- 
lowing C. Of these Z was about to disappear; its reappearance was 
noted, and several remarkable changes in form were observed while it 
traversed half the disk, till its contraction to a black speck 1000 miles in 
diameter, after which it was obliterated. The spot B had advanced some 
distance on the disk, and was followed till the 21st of February, when it ap- 
proached the edge, with indications of being a shallow concavity. It was 
not observed to reappear. The spots A and C require longer notice, both 
on account of their persistence through more than a rotation-period, and 
because of the remarkable changes which they have undergone. 

The spot D is now under observation. 

The spot A, visible from the 4th to the 16th of February, and again 
reappearing early in March, was solitary, and approximately round, mea- 
suring, on February 10, about 23,000 miles across the penumbra, and 
about 8000 across the umbra. 

It had a clear brown tint over the whole penumbra, the body of the sun 
appearing fairly white, and a deeper brown tint over part of the umbra, 
the remaining and larger space of the umbra being black. The penumbral 
space was marked with the broken structure represented in a former com- 


64. Prof. Phillips on a Zone of Spots on the Sun. [ Mar. 22, 


munication*. 'The edges of the umbra and penumbra were much broken, 
the former running out into a sharp point on the apparent left, and in- 
cluding a lighter bt own space. 

Except in this part, the dark umbra was uniformly and ogi distant 
from the penumbral border, so that it offered an excellent object, large 
enough and distinct enough to be employed with confidence as a test of 
the depth of the umbra beneath the luminous photosphere. 

In a former communication I assigned to an umbra of good figure, 
carefully observed, a depth of only 300 milesy. Since then M. Chacornact 
has given the depth of 400 miles as an approach to average, though in 
some cases 1000 miles might be nearer. That the spots are most frequently 
sunk below the photosphere, as Wilson long since asserted, can no longer 
be doubted, since Mr. De la Rue, Mr. Stewart, and Mr. Loewy have re- 
corded, after many measures of photographs taken at Kew, as the general 
result that the interior parts of the solar spot are sunk below the general 
surface §. 

The spot now under consideration approached the edge of the disk on 
the 15th of February, when the umbra seemed nearly bridged across by a 
lighter part, and was perceptibly but very slightly nearer to the following, 
or left-hand side. 

The reappearance of this spot was anxiously looked for. It came into 
view on the morning of March 3, having when observed passed the limb 
about 6° 16/. Its appearance was sketched on this occasion, and again on 
successive days to the 14th of March. Its apparent magnitude was dimi- 
nished, but the main features were less altered than is usual with sun- 
spots. The umbra still appeared in such relation to the penumbral border 
as to confirm the opinion of its being but very little depressed below the 
photosphere. Remarkable changes happened between the 7th and 10th of 
March. On the 8th two broad penumbral extensions appeared; on the 9th 
these were separated into two detached masses, and much altered in figure. 


Diagram No. 2. 


The path of spot A in February and March. 


% Proc. Roy. Soc. Nov. 23, 1865. t Ibid. Jan. 26, 1865. 
+ Bull. des Obs. 1865. § Researches in Solar Physies, 1865. 


1866. ] Prof. Phillips on a Zone of Spots on the Sun. 65 

The great spot, or rather aggregation of spots, marked C, was observed 
from the 13th to the 24th of February, as often as good opportunities 
occurred in the extremely variable weather. When fully expanded, about 
the 17th, 18th, and 19th of February, it measured about 12° on the surface 
of the sun, and occupied a space about 100,000 miles long, lying not 
quite parallel to his equator, and including forty or more black, dark, and 
dusky umbral tracts, in a complicated penumbral area. The definition 
was often excellent, so as to show the granular surface of the photosphere 
with more than ordinary distinctness. 

The same fine brown tint already referred to was observed in the pe- 
numbral spaces, and there was every gradation of depth in this tint 
observable in the many specks and spots, till in a few only it seemed to be 
black. The penumbral tracts were plainly broken up into a kind of net- 
work of granulation; and the largest spot, chosen for special study, threw 
out long black digitations into the surrounding granulated space of the 
penumbra, like slits in a solid substance, 1000 or 2000 miles in length. 

These characters of the largest spot in the group C became very pro- 
minent on the 19th of February, and were accompanied by others of an 
unusual character, which seem to deserve special attention in the question 
of the nature and history of these black spaces. In the drawing for this 
date these appearances are sketched with a power of 135. The spot was 
somewhat rhomboidal, the extreme length from angle to angle being about 
15,000 miles, the least breadth about 4500. On the right the boundary 
was gently convex; parallel to it was a bright facular tract of uniform 
breadth; this was margined on the right by a nearly continuous very 
narrow black band, 17,500 miles long, extending in both directions be- 
yond the spot, and slightly ramose in the (apparently) upper part. Pa- 
rallel to this again was a curiously interrupted series of black angularly 
bent sharp cuts, ending upwards in a larger subdigitated mass, near which 
were some other small spots, forming broken chains, which turned off in 
curves to the right for about 40,000 miles (Pl. II. fig. 7). 

On the 20th of February the appearances had changed to those repre- 
sented in another sketch (Pl. II. fig. 8), where the great spot, something 
reduced in magnitude and altered in figure, shows very long digitations 
on all sides; the facular space on the right is broader; the long very 
narrow black band shows two internal extensions ; the outer crested ridge 
has gathered itself into a shorter figure, 10,000 miles long, and has lost 
the character of angular tegulation which was so remarkable on the 19th. 

On the 21st the spot had approached enough toward the limb to un- 
dergo some apparent change of general figure, by contraction perpendicular 
to the edge; the facular space on the right was entirely free from the 
narrow curved black divisional band ; and the summit of the outer broader 
band was bent away from the great spot, to which it had been parallel 
(Pl. II. fig. 9). The disappearance of the spot amidst large elevated 
bright faculee and depressed broader shaded tracts, was sketched on the 

VOL. XV. G 


66 Prof: Phillips on a Zone of Spots on the Sun. [ Mar. 22, 


24th of February. Reappearing with similar splendid companion ridges 
of mountainous clouds, but much reduced in size, and altered in every 
part, it was observed again from the 12th to the 17th of March, after 
which the weather allowed no further opportunity. Two sets of drawings 
of this remarkable spot are presented to show its growth, development, 
and decay (Pl. II. figs. 7, 8, 9, and 10, 11, 12). The apparent path on 
the sun’s disk is given for each period of appearance—the two paths 
differing by reason of the change in the apparent place of the sun’s equator 
(see Diagram No. 3). 


Diagram No. 3. 


But few examples occur of such Jarge penumbral tracts grouped about 
so many dark and half-darkened umbre. On the sun they occupied, as 
already stated, a tract about 12° in length, not quite parallel to the 
equator ; and may be compared to some of those which are most conspi- 
cuous in Mr. Carrington’s plates. 

From what has been observed, it appears that, in a given zone of spots, 
not only are the aspects of the particular spots much diversified, but 
further, that the changes to which they are subject offer much variety. 
These circumstances seem to point to particular local conditions as the 
cause of the diversity of appearance, though it may be possible to refer to 
other influences the frequency of their occurrence, if not the fact of their 
occurring at all. 

The five spots now under review lie within an are of longitude of 205°, 
leaving 155° in which as yet no spot has lately been seen. In 1864, during 
the months of March and April, a zone of spots, also five in number, and on 
the same side of the equator, was contained within an arc of longitude of 
243°, leaving 117° at that time free from spots. There was then within 
the same arc of 243° a pair of spots in about the same latitude, but in the 
opposite hemisphere. Taking these into account, the average of the ares 
of longitude between the spots was about 49°. In the case of the spots 
lately passing it was 51°. Twenty-six revoiutions would have brought the 
middle of that zone of activity of 1864 to nearly the same place on the 
sun’s disk, as the group now under consideration. 

To whatever cause we may ascribe the fact of the breaking out of these 


1866.] Prof. Philips on a Zone of Spots on the Sun. 67 


spots, there would appear reason for expectation that spots of like cha- 
racter may be expected to recur again in the same parts of the sun’s 
surface. In the great work of Mr. Carrington we find several examples 
of the appearance of new spots in nearly the same places as those which 
had been so occupied before. Those who think with M. Chacornac that 
sun-spots are due to volcanic eruptions, and regard their changes of ap- 
pearance as effects of the displacement of solid and gaseous bodies about 
the region of disturbance, must naturally look for repetitions of these phe- 
nomena in the same parts of the solar surface. 

The greater frequency of spots between the parallels of 10° and 30° 
lat. N. and S., the comparative rarity of them on the equator, and the 
almost entire absence cf them from the circumpolar regions is well esta- 
blished. If we take the data from Mr. Carrington’s register and suppose 
in all 1000 spots to be observed, 178 will be found between the parallels of 

0° and 10° from the equator, 450 between 10° and 20°, 324 between 
20° and 30°, and 48 above 30°. 

The proportionate numbers for the northern and Tone hemispheres 
are 450 in North latitude, 550 in South latitude. 

If now we inquire, by the aid of the same invaluable book, as to the re- 
lative frequeney of spots in different longitudes, we shall obtain a result of 
considerable interest in reference to the question of the place of the 
eruptions. Mr. Carrington has registered his observations through 99 
rotations, and has arranged them in groups which can be tabulated tor 
longitude. Assuming the rotation-period to be exact enough for fixing 
the longitudes in the course of seven years and 142 days, we may repre- 
sent the relative frequency of the spots on different meridians as follows :— 


ce) oO 
Longitude 10 to 20 .... 320 maximum ; 
A 60 to 70 .... 220 minimum ; 
40200 tor P10? 83 lStinmeximums 
160 talb70 oe oe, 250 emmimtm ; 
:; 190 to 200 .... 366 maximum ; 
3» 300 to S10 2222173 minimum ; 


showing three maxima at intervals of 90°, 90°, and 180°, and three mi- 
nima at intervals of 100°, 140°, and 120°. Or if we take the circumference 
of the sun in three meridional compartments of 120° each, and suppose 
1000 spots in all, we shall find 


Ota 1206 a 07 
BOta 240°... 368 
240 to 360 .... 274 


I am at present of opinion that this result may be trusted so far as to 
show that certain tracts of the sun’s surface are more liable to eruption 
than other tracts, by reason of local peculiarity only. 


68 Prof. Phillips on a Zone of Spots on the Sun. [ Mar. 22, 


Luminosity of the Sun. 


Attentive observation shows the light of the sun to be feeblest toward the 
edges of the disk, strongest about the centre. By M. Chacornac’s measure 
the ratio of the central to the marginal light is 100 to 45. Looking 
directly on the central regions, the light is found to be much the brightest 
on the apparent summits of the undulations of the photosphere (“ rice- 
grains”); and looking to the limb, it is the faculee which are the brightest 
parts. In each case it is the outermost parts of the photosphere which 
are the brightest, and it is the innermost parts which are the darkest. 
The depth of shade appears to be in direct proportion to the depth 
below the outer surface of the photosphere. It appears to me that such 
appearances would follow naturally from the hypothesis mentioned in my 
first communication on this subject *. The hypothesis is that the lowest 
parts of the umbral spaces yield the least refrangible and least luminous 
rays, such as belong to the space about the red end of the spectrum. 
These spaces may not be black, not even very dark, except by comparison 
with the brilliant spaces around; where the rays from them pass into the 
photosphere, they heat it, as the dark rays separated by sulphuret of 
carbon in Tyndall’s experiment heat the platinum foil, and other solid 
bodies. Bodies thus heated emit new rays according to their nature ; the 
solar photosphere is of such a nature as to send to us the mingled pencils 
which we receive; the principal effect of this kind being at a maximum on 
the outermost layer. The effect of this will be to cause streams of the 
most luminous rays from the most elevated parts of the photosphere, which 
will be seen directly in front, about the sun’s centre, while toward the edges 
the sides of the undulations alone will be seen, and the rays which they 
yield will be less luminous—the only parts which are there very bright © 
being the high ridges of the faculee. : 

Another view has presented itself to me. If we admit the depressed 
part to be the body of the sun disclosed from below the luminous envelope, 
we may suppose its darkness to be due simply to radiation. For however 
hot the sun may be, if its composition be like that of the earth, the fused 
parts would be cooled and darkened at the surface where it may be 
uncovered—very much darkened where the exposure is complete (the 
umbra), partially so where the envelope is not wholly removed (the pe- 
numbra). It might be some test of this view, if the hourly changes of the 
umbra, immediately after its first appearance, could be accurately noted 
in respect of the degree of darkness as well as of the change of form. 
The umbra ought to grow darker and darker, never lighter and lighter, 
except by the overspreading of photosphere, which would be indicated 
independently by changes on the penumbral area. 

From what I have seen in the course of these observations, I infer that 
the study of the physical condition of the solar spots cannot be regarded 
as likely to yield data of sufficient weight, if it do not include determina- 

* Proc. Roy. Soc. January 1865. 


Proc Ray. Soc VolXV. Plate II. 


J Basure lith. 


J Phillips. ad, not. det. 


1866.] Prof. Phillips on a Zone of Spots on the Sun. 69 


tions at short intervals, as twice a day for the whole penumbral outline, 
and once an hour for selected critical parts of the umbra. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE II. 


{the figures are all drawn to represent the objects as they appeared in a 6-inch 
achromatic furnished with the glass mirror set to”reflect the rays in the equatorial 
plane to the westward. The motion of the spot is from left to right.] 


Fig. 1. Appearance of the spot A, nearly on the central meridian, on Feb. 10th, 1866, 
at 11> 15™, The darkest part of the umbra was to the right; on the left a 
sharp excurrent part like a fissure; between this and the larger and darker 
part was a lighter brown tract. Small dots on the penumbra in the upper 
part to the left. Diameter 23,000 miles. 

Fig. 2. First sketch of the spot A after its reappearance, March 5th, 108 30™. The 
long excurrent parts at the extremities of the elliptical figure (elliptical by 
reason of the proximity of the spot to the edge of the disk) are frequent ap- 
pearances in this position of the spots. This figure is rather too small in 
proportion to 4, 5, and 6. 

Fig. 3. Spot A, further on the disk. The figure is rather too small. Note the 
peculiar shapes of the small fissure-like extensions on the left. March 6th, 
ie ee 

Fig. 4. Spot A, still further on the disk, March 7th, 10'O". The ramifications from 
the umbra haye changed in appearance. 

Fig. 5. Spot A, near the central meridian, March 8th, 125 30". The two extensions 
of the penumbra on the left have come into sight since yesterday. Note the 
little dot at their common origin, and, directed towards it, the longest of the 
excurrent umbral fissures. 

Fig. 6. Spot A, March 9th, 12" 0". Here the excurrent penumbral tracts are found 
to be separated from the spot, and from each other, and changed in direction, 
The umbra is much altered, and has a deep emargination, in place, appa- 
rently, of a small white speck, seen in fig. 5. Note also a black speck on the 
right upper edge of the umbra. 

Fig. 7. Spot C, the largest umbral tract with its border on the right, Feb. 19th, 
108 45", On account of the remarkable aspect which the umbra wore on 
this occasion, it was drawn repeatedly with great care. Note in particular 
the digitations of the large umbra, the broad facular space to the right, and 
the parallel very narrow, interrupted, and tegulated umbral bands, which 
are part of a system of interrupted small dark tracts, traceable through nearly 
all the length of the penumbra, which on this occasion was about 100,000 
miles from end to end. The umbra itself measured about 15,000 miles be- 
tween the extremities of the digitations. 

Fig. 8. The same parts as they appeared on Feb. 20th, 10" 20™. The general figure 
of the umbra is changed; the long parallel narrow black space, and the 
broader tract on the outside of it are greatly altered ; the latter, turning away 
from the umbra, appears to have gathered into itself the detached spots which 
appear in fig. 7, and to have lost the angular tegulation which then was con- 
spicuous. 

Fig. 9. In this figure the approach toward the edge of the sun is sensible in the elon- 
gation of the large umbra and its companion. Feb. 21st, 2" 30™. 

Fig. 10 shows the reappearance of this spot C, near the edge, with a divided umbral 
tract, of different shades of darkness; the whole figure compressed ellipti- 
cally by proximity to the edge. March 12th, 12. 10™, 


70 Prof. Phillips on a@ Zone of Spots on the Sun. [Mar. 22. 


Fig. 11. The same spot after it had proceeded on the disk, so as to allow of all parts 
being seen in their true proportions. March 13th, 2? 30™. The change of 
figure in the whole penumbral space, and in the darkest parts, is so great that 
it is difficult to be assured of the identity of any one point now visible with 
the appearance shown on any occasion in February. Yet, in fact, on search- 
ing carefully the neighbouring tracts of photosphere, we can discern what 
appear to be traces of the spaces occupied by the old penumbra. This im- 
portant observation was made, not by myself only, but also by friends who 
were quite unaware of the interesting changes of form which had occurred. 

Fig. 12. Mareh 14th, 11" 30™,. Here the spot is seen further modified; gathered up 
into a smaller and more regular shape, with a deep slit through the penumbra 
into the umbra; the detached penumbra on the left was lost after a further 
day’s motion. 


The Society then adjourned over the Haster Vacation to Thursday, 
April 12. 


1866. ] Mr. C. W. Siemens on Uniform Rotation. | 71 


April 12, 1866. 
Lieut-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “On Uniform Rotation.” By C. W. Stmmens, F.R.S. Received 
March 10, 1866. 


(Abstract. ) 


The paper sets out with an inquiry into the conditions of the conical 
pendulum as a means of obtaining uniform rotation. This instrument, as 
applied by Watt to regulate the velocity of his steam-engines, is shown 
to be defective,—first, because the regulated position of the valve depends 
upon the angular position of the pendulums, and therefore upon the velocity 
of rotation, which must be permanently changed in order to effect an ad- 
justment of the valve; and secondly, because when the balance between force 
and resistance of the engine at a given velocity is disturbed, the angular 
position of the pendulums will not change until a power has been created 
in them, through acceleration of the engine, sufficient to overcome the me- 
chanical resistance of the valve, giving rise to a series of fluctuations before 
a balance between the power and resistance of the engine is reestablished. 

These defects in Watt’s centrifugal governor are shown to be obviated 
in the chronometric governor, an instrument which was proposed by the 
author of the paper twenty-three years ago, and which consists of a conical 
pendulum proceeding at a wniform angle of rotation, and therefore at 
uniform speed, which is made to act upon the regulating-valve by means 
of a differential motion between itself and the engine to be regulated, which 
latter has to accommodate itself to the rotations imposed by the indepen- 
dent pendulum. The differential-motion wheels are taken advantage of 
for imparting independent driving- or sustaining-power to the pendulum ; 
and a constancy of the angle of rotation, notwithstanding unavoidable 
fluctuations in the sustaining-power, is secured (within certain limits) by 
calling into play a break, or fluid resistance, at the moment when the angle 
of rotation reaches a maximum, which maximum position is perpetuated by 
increasing the sustaining-power beyond what is strictly necessary to over- 
come the ordinary resistance of the pendulum. 

The chronometric governor is used by the Astronomer Royal to regulate 
the motion of the large equatorial telescope and recording apparatus at 
Greenwich, in which application a very high degree of regularity is at- 
tained ; but the instrument proved to be too delicate in its adjustments for 
ordinary steam-engine use, 

After a short allusion to M. Foucault’s governor, the paper enters upon 
the description of a new apparatus which the writer has imagined for ob- 
taining uniform rotation, notwithstanding great variations in the driving- 


power, and which consists, in the main, of a parabolic cup, open at top and 
VOL, XV. H 


72 Mr. ©. W. Siemens on Uniform Rotation. [Apr. 12, 


bottom and mounted upon a vertical axis, which cup dips with its smaller 
opening into a liquid contained within a casing completely enclosing the 
cup. It is shown that a certain angular velocity of the cup will raise the 
liquid (entering from below) in a parabolic curve to its upper edge or brim, 
and that a very slight increase of the velocity will cause actual overflow, in 
the form of a sheet of liquid, which, being raised and projected against the 
sides of the outer chamber, descends to the bath below, whence fresh 
liquid continually enters the cup. Without the overflow scarcely any 
power is required to maintain the cup, with the liquid it contains, in motion ; 
but the moment an overflow ensues, a considerable amount of power is 
absorbed in raising and projecting a continuous stream of the liquid, 
whereby further acceleration is prevented, and nearly uniform velocity is 
the result. When absolute uniformity is required, the cup is not fixed 
upon the rotating axis, but is suspended from it by a spiral spring, which 
not only supports its weight, but also transmits the driving-power by its 
torsional moment. ‘The cup is guided in the centre upon a helical surface, 
which arrangement has for its result that an increase of resistance or of 
driving-power produces an increased torsional action of the spring, and 
with it an automatic descent of the cup, sufficient to make up for the 
thickness of overflow required to effect the readjustment between power 
and resistance, without permanent increase of angular velocity. 

It is shown that the density of the liquid exercises no influence upon the 
velocity of the cup, which velocity is expressed by the following formula, 


/ 29+ = Sag =) 


=— 
Orr 


in which 
m signifies the number of revolutions per second, 
fh the height of liquid from the surface to the brim of cup, 
7 the radius of the brim, and 
p the radius of lower orifice of cup ; 


only the rigidity of the spring must be greater when a comparatively dense 
liquid is employed. 

In order to test the principle ne action here involved, Mr. Sieacae has 
constructed a clock consisting of a galvanic battery, an electro-magnet, and 
his gyrometric cup, besides the necessary reducing-wheels and hands upon 
a dial face, which proceeds at a uniform rate, although the driving-power 
may be varied between wide limits, by the introduction of artificial resis- 
tances into the electrical circuit. The instrument appears, therefore, well 
calculated for regulating the speed of all kinds of philosophical apparatus, 
and also for obtaining synchronous rotations at different places for tele- 
graphic purposes. One of its most interesting applications is embodied in 
the “ Gyrometric Governor” for steam-engines, of which an illustration is 
given. ‘This consists of a cup of 200 millimetres diameter and the same 


1866.] On a Substance, resembling Quinine, in Animals, &c. ia 


height, which is fixed upon its vertical axis of rotation, and is enclosed in 
an outer chamber, containing water in such quantity that the lower ex- 
tremity of the cup dips below its surface. The upper edge of the rotating 
cup is, in this application, surrounded by a stationary ring armed with 
vertical vanes, by which the overflowing liquid is arrested and directed 
downward, causing it to fall through a space or zone which is traversed 
by a number of radial and vertical blades projecting from the external sur- 
face of the rotating cup, which, in striking the falling liquid, project it with 
considerable force against the sides of the outer vessel, at the expense of a 
corresponding retarding effect on the cup, increasing its regulating-power. 

The cup-spindle carries at its lower extremity a pinion, which gears into 
two planet-wheels at opposite points, which on their part gear into an 
inverted wheel surrounding the whole, which latter is fastened upon a 
vertical shaft in continuation of the cup-spindle, and is driven round by the 
engine in the opposite direction to the motion of the cup. The two inter- 
mediate or planet-wheels are attached to a rocking frame supported, but 
not fixed, upon the central axis, which wheels, in rotating upon their studs, 
are also free to follow the impulse of either the pinion or the inverted 
wheel to the extent of the differential motion arising between them. The 
rocking frame is connected to the regulating valve of the engine, and also 
to a weight suspended from a horizontal arm upon the valve-spindle, 
tending to open the valve and at the same time to accelerate the cup to the 
extent of the pressure produced between the teeth of the planet-wheels and 
the pinion, while the engine is constantly employed to raise the weight 
and to cut off the supply of steam. The result is that the engine has to 
conform absolutely to the regular motion imposed by the cup, which will 
be precisely the same when the engine is charged with its maximum or its 
minimum of resisting load. 

The paper shows that the action upon the valve must take place at the 
moment when the balance between the power and load of the engine is 
disturbed, and that the readjustment will he effected notwithstanding a 
resistance of the valve exceeding 100 kilogrammes—a result tending towards 
the attainment of several important objects. 


If. “On a Fluorescent Substance, resembling Quinine, in Animals; 
and on the Rate of Passage of Quinine into the Vascular and Non- 
vascular Textures of the Body.” By H. Bencr Jonzs, M.D., 
F.R.S., and A. Dupri, Ph.D., F.C.8S. Received March 14,1866. 


Parr I. 
On a Fluorescent Substance, resembling Quinine, in Animals. 

The term fluorescence in the last few years has found a place in physio- 
logical works because different substances that occur in the body have been 
said to possess the property of fluorescence. Of these the solution of bile- 
acids in concentrated sulphuric acid, the white of egg when kept for a 


H 2 


74 Messrs. Jones and Dupré on a Substance, [Apr. 12, 


short time, and the urine sometimes, are the best-known fluorescing 
substances. 

But as long since as 1845, Professor Briicke, in Miller’s ‘ Archiv,’ stated 
that he had found in many and very frequently repeated experiments, that 
the lens absorbed the blue rays of light to a very great extent, and that the 
cornea and the aqueous humour did so to a less extent, but that the lens 
together with these other media absorbed these rays to the greatest de- 
gree. He used the eyes of oxen and of rabbits, and the lens of a pike’s 
eye, which last, when dried with care, preserved its transparency, and allowed 
the light to fall on a porcelain plate covered with tincture of sania and 
pack a portion of the green surface. 

Professor Stokes, in his well-known paper ‘On the Change of the Re- 
frangibility of Light,”’ in the Philosophical Transactions a 1852, says 
(p. 512), “It is found that the property of change of refrangibility in the 
incident light is extremely common.” ‘To make a list of sensitive sub- 
stances would be useless work ; for it is very rare to meet with a white or 
light-coloured organic substance which is not more or less sensitive.” 
Among others he mentions horn, bone, ivory, white shells, leather, quills, 
white feathers, white bristles, the skin of the hand, and the nails. And in 
his conclusion (p. 557), he says, ‘‘ The phenomenon of change of refrangi- 
bility proves to be extremely common, especially in the case of organic 
substances, such as those ordinarily met with, in which it is almost always 
manifested to a greater or less degree.” 

When speaking of the fluorescence of sulphate of quinine, he says 
(p. 541), ‘When quinine was dissolved in dilute hydrochloric acid, the 
blue colour was not exhibited, not even when the fluid was held in the 
sunlight and examined by superficial projection.” 

In 1855 Helmholtz published a paper in Poggendorff’s ‘Annalen,’ vol. xciv. 
p- 205, in which he says that, as far as quinine paper showed that the 
Spectrum extended, so far the eye could perceive light *, 

He then proposes this question, Does the retina see the rays eye the 
violet directly as it sees other colours of the spectrum, or does it fluoresce 
under the influence of these rays? and is the blue colour of the rays beyond 
the violet light of less refrangibility which shows itself in the retina ws 
under the influence of the violet rays? 

To determine this question, he says, I examined for fluorescence the 
retina of the eye of a man who had been dead for eighteen hours. The first 
experiment showed that it was very feebly fluorescent. The retina was 
less fluorescent than paper, linen, and ivory, but more than porcelain. 


* In 1853 Prof. Donders, in a paper in Miiller’s ‘ Archiv,’ p. 471, “ On the Action of 
the Invisible Rays of high Refrangibility on the Media of the Hye,” says that “ most, 
if not all, the rays of higher refrangibility than the violet reach the retina, and are not 
absorbed by the different media through which the light passes;’ and Dr. Kessler, in 
‘Archiv fir Ophthalmologie,’ 1854, vol. I. p. 449, says that ‘the crystalline lens is not 
the cause of the invisibility of the rays of high refrangibility; for when the lens is 
removed by operation these rays are not more visible. 


1866. ] resembling Quinine, in Animals, &c. a 


The colour of the light dispersed through the retina is greenish white, 
very different from that which the direct perception of these rays usually 
gives. 

In 1858, in the Comptes Rendus des Séances de la Société de Biologie 
pendant le mois de Novembre 1858, pp. 166 & 167, there is a short 
notice headed “ Analyse et conclusions d’un travail sur la fluorescence des 
milieux de lceil, par M. Jules Regnauld.”’ 

He used sunlight, and found in man and the mammifera that the cornea 
fluoresced in a very slight degree. In the sheep, dog, cat, and rabbit, the 
crystalline lens possessed in the highest degree fluorescent properties. In 
these animals, and also in many birds, the central part of the lens (endo- 
phaine of MM. Valenciennes and Fremy), preserved by desiccation at a 
low temperature, retained this property. | 

The central portion of the crystailine of many aquatic vertebrata and 
mollusca (phaconine of MM. Valenciennes and Fremy) is almost entirely 
without fluorescence. 

The hyaloid body possesses only a very feeble fluorescence, due to the 
hyaline membranes ; for the vitreous humour itself is not fluorescent. 

The retina, as M. Helmholtz discovered, possesses a certain fluorescence 
which is not at all comparable in intensity to that of the crystalline lens of 
mammifera. t 

Finally, M. Regnauld concludes that, if we must attribute the accidents 
caused by feebly luminous radiations of the electric light to the phenomena 
of fluorescence, it is above all in the energetic action on the crystalline that 
it is natural to look for an explanation. The impression which the cornea 
undergoes must nevertheless not be neglected. . 

In 1859, in the ‘ Archiv fir Ophthalmologie,’ vol. v. part 11. p. 205, 
there is a paper by J. Setschenow of Moscow, ‘‘ On the Fluorescence of the 
Transparent Media of the Eyes of Man and some other Animals.” He 
undertook the examination at Professor Helmholtz’s request, because it was 
possible that the phenomena of fluorescence observed by Helmholtz might 
have been modified by a post-mortem change in the eye. 

He experimented on the eyes of oxen and rabbits. The fresh retina 
showed the same phenomena as the dead human retina. It diffused a 
greenish-white light, which, examined by a prism, gives a spectrum in which 
the red is wanting. 

The vitreous humour in a thin glass vessel showed only traces of fluo- 
rescence. The lens, on the contrary, fluoresced very strongly: the colour of 
the dispersed light is white-blue, exactly like quinine; only the quinine was 
a little stronger. Examined by a prism, the dispersed light gave a spectrum 
in which the red was wanting, and in which the blue tone predominated. 
The fluorescence begins, as in quinine solutions, between G and H, and is 
strongest at the outer edge of the violet rays, and extends into the ultra- 
violet to the same distance in the case of the lens as in the case of the 
quinine solution. 


76 Messrs. Jones and Dupré on a Substance, [Apr. 12, 


When the cornea was cut out, it fluoresced much feebler than the lens ; 
the aqueous humour did not fluoresce at all. 

The appearances in the three last media, he says, can be shown with 
the greatest ease, even in the eye of a living man. When the eye is brought 
into the focus of the ultra-violet rays, immediately the cornea and the lens 
begin to glimmer with a white-blue light. The cornea in the living eye is 
much more strongly fluorescent than when dissected out, probably from 
the loss of transparency consequent on contraction of the texture and from 
evaporation. 

The question how and why our eyes perceive the ultra-violet spectrum 
is still undetermined. The fluorescence of the lens would be rather a 
hindrance than a help; only the general sensibility to the light which the 
ultra-violet rays produce in our eyes can be explained by the fluorescence 
of the media lying before the retina. 

In 1862, ‘ Zeitschrift fir Rationelle Medicin,’ 3rd series, vol. xii. p. 270, 
Pfluger, by mixing fresh ox-gall with concentrated sulphuric acid, saw a 
clear dichrotic solution form. It had a deep red colour by transmitted 
light, and a beautiful green colour by reflected light. This was seen 
very beautifully when dried bile was put into sulphuric acid ; and then the 
dichroism increased by standing. It is desirable to separate the choles- | 
terin and the bile-fats. | 

The green fluorescence appeared when only blue or green light fell on 
the sulphuric-acid solution of the bile. On the contrary, it did not appear’ 
when the light was only yellow or red. 

The sulphuric-acid solution of the bile absorbed all the rays of the spec- 
trum except the yellow and the red. 

In the ‘ Journal fiir Prakt. Chem.’ vol. xcii. p. 167, Schénbein has the fol- 
lowing remarks on the formation of a fluorescing substance in the putrefac- 
tion of human urine :— 

If urine is left to stand in the air until it becomes covered on the 
surface with a thick layer of fungus, the alkaline fluid that filters from 
it shows a very strong fluorescence of a greenish colour. Small quanti-. 
ties of the stronger organic or inorganic acids take away this fluorescence, 
which, however, by alkalies can be again reproduced. This substance 
has a reaction like esculine, and, like this, is the opposite to quinine, the 
fluorescence of which is increased by those acids. The hydrobromic, 
hydriodic, and hydrochloric acids lessen the fluorescence of the solution of 
quinine almost to entire removal. Schonbein also remarked that fresh 
urine had a feeble fluorescence, and also that a weak solution of albumen, 
by standing long in the air, became fluorescent to a considerable degree. 

This was the state of our knowledge of fluorescence in animals when, 
having traced the rate of passage of chloride of lithium and other mineral 
substances into and out of the textures by means of the spectrum analysis, 
we endeavoured to find some method of determining the rate at which 
organic substances passed into and out of the same structures. 


1866. | resembling Quinine, in Animals, &c. rare 


Among all the delicate tests for different organic substances, the fluo- 
rescence of sulphate of quinine appeared likely to afford good results; for 
the following experiments on the delicacy of this test for sulphate of quinine 
show that this method of tracing sulphate of quinine into and out of the 
body, though inferior to the spectrum determinations of lithium, was supe- 
rior in delicacy to the spectrum determinations of many other substances. 


On the Delicacy of the Fluorescent Test of Sulphate of Quinine when a 
Ruhmkorf coil was used as the source of light. 

One grain of sulphate of quinine was dissolved in five ounces of acidified 
water, and this was again and again diluted until one grain of quinine-salt 
was present in 1,500,000 parts of water. This, when examined in a quartz 
cell by the induction-spark, showed blue fluorescence distinctly in tw me 
grains of solution. 

_ Another grain, dissolved in a litre and diluted until one grain of salt was 
present in 1,440,000 parts of water, when acidified, also showed the fluo- 
rescence distinctly in twenty grains of solution. 

The same quantity, dissolved in one litre of water, was diluted to 512, 
litres. This was equal to one part in 7,200,000 parts of water; as the 
fluorescence could be seen in twenty grains of this solution, sont of a 
grain of sulphate of quinine aN the fluorescence. 

In another experiment, 3-599 a5 of sulphate of quinine, in fifty minims of 
water acidified, showed the fluorescence strongly, and even ae of a 
grain of sulphate of quinine in fifty minims of water showed the fluores- 
cence feebly. As the fluorescence could be seen in twenty grains of this 
solution, =e of a grain of sulphate of quinine gives the fluorescence. 

In the last two sets of experiments the light of a bright induction-spark 
was concentrated by a'small quartz lens. 

One grain of disulphate of quinine, dissolved in 256 litres of water acidu- 
lated with one-eighth of sulphuric acid (1 to 8), shows fluorescence feebly in 
a quartz cell containing twelve grains of the solution. Hence -a= grain 
gives the fluorescence feebly. 

If one grain of disulphate of quinine is dissolved in a thousand litres, or 
one part of quinine te 15,440,000 of water, the fluorescence is still percep- 
tible in one ounce of the solution. 


On the Existence of an extractable Fluorescent Substance in Animals 

and Man. 

Immediately on trying to apply this reaction to test the different tex- 
tures of guineapigs, after and before they had taken quinine, we found that 
in health no part of any of the tissues of the guineapig was free from blue 
fluorescence. It became desirable, therefore, to separate the fluorescence 
produced by some fluorescing substance normally present in the tissues 
from that produced after quinine was given. After very many attempts 
to extract these substances separately from the tissues, and many more to 
separate them when they were conjointly extracted, all of which proved 


78 Messrs. Jones and Dupré on a Substance, _[ Apr. 12, 


unsuccessful, we resorted to the plan of determining the amount of natural 
fluorescence by comparing it with standard solutions of sulphate of quinine ; 
and by the same means we measured the increase that occurred in the — 
amount of fluorescence from the same organs after quinine had been taken. 

The following plan was adopted for the extraction of the fluorescent sub- 
stance from the textures, both before and after quinine was taken. 

The part to be examined was treated on a water-bath with very dilute 
sulphuric acid, either directly or after previous drying in a water-oven. 
This extraction was repeated again and again. The acid extracts were 
mixed, filtered after cooling, neutralized with caustic soda, and repeatedly 
shaken up with their own bulk of ether. The residue left after evapora- 
tion of the ether was taken up by dilute sulphuric acid, filtered, and 
tested for the amount of fluorescence after having been made up to a cer- 
tain bulk, generally twenty-five minims. | 

When a large quantity of material, as two or three pounds of liver, was 
employed, the acid extract was a second time neutralized and treated with 
ether; the residue from the second ethereal solution was then taken up 
with dilute sulphuric acid and tested. 

In very dilute solutions the fluorescence of the animal substance cannot 
be distinguished from that produced by quinine ; if the solution is more 
eoieememed the fluorescence of the animal substance is confined much 
more to the surface, the fluorescence in a solution of quinine passmg much 
further into the liquid; and in still more concentrated solutions, the colour 
of the light given out is of a decidedly greenish hue. The fluorescence 
also of the animal substance begins to appear somewhat nearer to the red 
end of the spectrum than is the case with quinine; but both extend to the 
same distance beyond the violet end. 

From two to three pounds of liver, only about fifty minims of a solution 
was obtained showing a fluorescence equal to that produced by two or 
three grains of quinine to the litre of water; and when slightly acidified, 
the following reactions were obtained with the solution. It gives a preci- 
pitate with solution of iodine, with a solution of iodide of mercury in iodide 
of potassium, and also with phosphomolybdie acid, bichloride of platinum, 
and terchloride of gold: this last precipitate is soluble i in alcohol, like that 
produced in solutions of quinine. 

A weak solution of quinine interposed in a quartz cell before the solu- 
tion of the natural fluorescing substance, did not stop the fluorescence of 
this latter substance entirely ; but when the solution of animal substance 
was placed before the solution of quinine, no fluorescence whatever could 
be perceived in the quinine. Ether is unable to extract the animal sub- 
stance from an acid solution; the acid solution may be shaken up several 
times with ether ; but the ethereal solution on evaporation yields a residue 
which, when taken up by dilute sulphuric acid, gives no blue fluorescence 
whatever. 

The fluorescence of this animal substance is much less strong in hydro- 
chloric acid solutions by the light of the coil-spark, and it is almost destroyed 


1866. | resembling Quinine, in Animals, &¢. 79 


by alkalies. The substance does not lose its fluorescence when treated 
with dilute sulphuric acid ‘on a water-bath, nor even on the addition of a 
dilute solution of permanganate of potash. In an alkaline solution with 
permanganate of potash it is immediately destroyed. Quinine behaves in 
a precisely similar way. 

Parts of the brain, kidney, liver, and heart, and the crystalline lens of a 
human subject dead for many hours, were boiled with dilute sulphuric acid, 
neutralized with carbonate of soda, and extracted with ether. The ethereal 
residue, dissolved in dilute sulphuric acid, was examined by the spark: of 
the Ruhmkorf coil for fluorescence. From every part the extract fluoresced 
distinctly but very feebly. The fluorescence closely resembled that caused 
by a very weak solution of quinine. 

The lenses from sheep’s, bullocks’, pikes’, eagles’ eyes, gave a distinctly 
fluorescent substance, and the extract from the sheep’s liver fluoresced 
very strongly. Cod-liver oil also fluoresced very distinctly. The so-called 
pills of cod-liver oil gave no fluorescence. 

The fluorescent substance could be extracted by treating the finely 
divided substance with alcohol, and the residue of the alcohol solution by 
ether, and finally dissolving the ethereal residue in water acidulated with 
‘sulphuric acid. 

It follows from these experiments that there exists in the body of man 
and animals, fishes, and birds a substance which can be extracted from any 
of the tissues by the same process as quinine when present can be extracted. 
This substance has the same reactions with chemical agents as quinine has, 
and the action of light upon this substance is almost, although not alto- 
gether, identical with its action on quinine. 

This substance is visible in the lens of the human eye during life. It is, 
from its mode of separation and reactions, an alkaloid bearing a close re- 
semblance in its properties to quinine. 

For the present we shall call this animal quinoidine. It is the cause of 
the blue fluorescence of weak acid extracts from any of the tissues of the 
body of men and animals. When concentrated, the fluorescent substance 
is bluish green. 


On the Fluorescent Substance produced by treating Bile with strong Sul- 
phurie Acid. 

We were unable to insulate and extract the substance which causes the 
green fluorescence in bile when it is treated with strong sulphuric acid ; nor 
could we separate that which forms in white of egg when a solution in 
water is exposed to the air. 

The bile dissolved in strong sulphuric acid was transparent by trans- 
mitted light, and appeared as a brownish-yellow solution; by reflected 
light, even with the ordinary gaslight, it showed a strong green fluorescence, 
in much larger quantity than, and entirely different in appearance from, the 
blue fluorescent substance of the liver. Thus it was destroyed by diluting 
the acid with water, but returned on the addition of a larger quantity of 
strong sulphuric acid. 


80 Messrs. Jones and Dupré on a Substance, [Apr. 12, 


The solution of egg-albumen, exposed to the air, gradually after some 
days showed a strong green fluorescence, which, like esculine, disappeared 
on the addition of an acid, but was not destroyed by alkalies. The fluo- 
rescence gradually disappeared when the albumen began to putrefy. 


Part II. 


On the Increase of Fluorescence in the Textures of Animals and Man after 
Quinine had been taken. 


Having proved that in all the different textures of an animal a natural 
alkaloid fluorescent substance was present when no quinine had been taken, 
and as no means could be found for separating the natural fluorescent 
substance from the quinine when it passed into the textures, it became: 
necessary to make our analyses quantitative instead of qualitative. 

For this purpose it was necessary to determine, by means of standard 
solutions of quinine, what was the greatest amount of naturally fluorescent 
substance that usually occurred and could be extracted from the tissues. 
Deducting this from the amount of fluorescence that could be extracted 
after quinine was given, we were enabled to measure the rapidity of pas- 
sage of the quinine into or out of the tissues, the animals being destroyed 
at different periods after different quantities of sulphate of quinine had. 
been taken. m 

So also by determining the amount of natural fluorescent substance in the’ 
textures, lenses, and urine of man before quinine was taken, and deducting 
this from the amount obtained after quinine was taken, we were enabled 
to show that quinine does pass into the textures and lenses, and how 
quickly it appeared in the urine and reached its maximum and began to 
disappear and entirely vanished. 

First. Examinations of different textures of guineapigs when no quinine 
was taken, and comparison of the amount of natural fluorescent substance 
with standard solutions of sulphate of quinine. The amount of the dif- 
ferent parts examined was as nearly as possible always the same :-— 

1. A guineapig that had taken no quinine was killed ; the extract of the 
brain and nerves only was measured. The fluorescence of the nerves was 
very feeble, and about equal to one-twentieth of a grain of sulphate of 
quinine in a litre of water. The extract of the brain was exceedingly feeble, 
and. it was less than one-thirtieth of a grain of sulphate of quinine ina litre 
of water. 

2. In another guineapig the lenses and the nerves were dried, and boiled 
three times with dilute sulphuric acid. The acid solution was rendered 
alkaline by caustic potass, and it was then shaken up with ether three 
times. The ethereal solution was evaporated, and the residue dissolved in. 
dilute sulphuric acid. The acid solution was made up to twenty-five 
minims. The solutions of the lenses and of the nerves showed some 
fluorescence. 

These acid solutions were now again rendered alkaline and were shaken 
up with ether, and the ethereal solution was evaporated and the residue 


1866. | resembling Quinine, in Animals, &c. 81 


dissolved in acetic acid, and the excess of the acid evaporated in a water- 
bath; the residue was dissolved in a little water, and the solutions were 
divided into two parts. The half of the solution from the lenses and 
nerves, when tested with a solution of iodine and a solution of iodide of 
mercury, remained perfectly clear. ‘The bile, brain, and liver, tested in 
the same way, gave no precipitates with these reagents, although they also 
gave slight fluorescence. 

The different parts of this pig were compared with the corresponding 
parts of two other pigs, one of which took sixteen grains of sulphate of 
quinine in nine doses in four days, and the other twenty-six grains in 
fourteen doses in six days. 

3. Another guineapig had the different organs treated in exactly the 
same way; the liver, lenses, kidneys, urine, blood, brain, nerves, and 
muscle gave a fluorescence which varied from about one-twentieth to one- 
thirty-second part of a grain of quinine im a litre of water. This pig was 
bought at the same time and place, and fed in the same way as two other 
pigs (18 and 23), that were given six grains of sulphate of quinine in three 
doses with twenty minutes’ interval. One pig was killed between five and 
six hours after the quinine, and the other in twenty-four hours. 

4, Another pig was also treated in the same way, for comparison with 
three other pigs which took five grains of quinine, and were killed four 
hours, eight hours, and thirty-two hours afterwards. The lenses, humours, 
brain, blood, nerves, and muscle gave a fluorescence varying from one- 
twenty-fifth to one-fiftieth of a grain of quinine in a litre of water. 

5. Another pig had taken no guinine. The brain gave a fluorescence 
equal to one-thirtieth of a grain of quinine, and the nerves fluoresced equal 
to one-twentieth of a grain of quinine. 

6. Another guineapig had equal quantities of the liver, bile, kidney, 
urine, brain, lenses, humours, nerves, blood, and muscle treated in the 
same way. The fluorescence obtained from the liver was from one-thirty- 
second to one-sixteenth part of a grain of quinine. The fluorescence 
of all other parts was less than one-thirty-second part of a grain of quinine. 
The fluorescence of the humours was least of all. 

7. Another guineapig was given no quinine. Equal quantities of dry 
liver, blood, bile, kidney, brain, nerves, lenses, muscle, and humours were 
taken. Of the bile and humours, which were taken entire, rather less than 
half a grain, of the other parts half a grain was used ; the liver fluoresced 
equal to one-sixteenth of a grain of quinine. The bile, blood, kidney, brain, 
nerves, lens, and muscle showed somewhat less than one-sixty-fourth part of 
a grain to a litre ; the humours of the eye rather more than one-sixty- 
fourth part. 

8. Another pig, bought at the same time and place as 17, was given 
no quinine; and the fluorescence of every part was less than one-sixty- 
fourth of a grain of quinine in a litre of water. The fluorescence of each 
solution was rendered still less by the addition of common salt. 


82 Messrs. Jones and Dupré on a Substance, [Apr. 12, 


Secondly. On the increase of fluorescence that was observed when dif- 
ferent quantities of sulphate of quinine were given to animals at different 
periods before they were killed :— 

9. A guineapig was given sixteen grains of sulphate of quinine, in nine 
doses, in the course of four days. It was found dead more than twelve 
hours after the last dose. Its fluorescence was compared with pig 2, 
which had taken no quinine; the lenses and the nerves, treated the same 
way, showed much more fluorescence in the pig that had taken quinine 
than in the other which had had no quinine. The solutions of the lenses 
and the nerves also gave a distinct precipitate, which was least in the solu- 
tion of the lenses with solutions of iodine and of iodide of mercury ; whilst 
the solutions of the lenses and the nerves of the pig that had taken no 
quinine remained clear. The bile and the brain fluoresced brightly. The 
solution of the liver, when diluted even to one hundred minims, fluoresced 
distinctly in daylight, and very strongly in the light of the spark. The 
brain-solution gave a distinct precipitate with iodine and iodide of mercury. 
The bile gave a very faint turbidity. The liver gave an abundant preci- 
pitate, and moreover gave Herapath’s test for quinine very distinctly. 

10. Another pig took twenty-six grains of quinine, in fourteen doses, 
during six days. It was killed nineteen hours after the last dose, being ap- 
parently partially paralyzed. The solutions of the different organs were 
prepared in the same way as 9 and 2, and they were examined at the same 
time. The lenses showed the fluorescence very strongly when a cone of 
sunlight was thrown into them with a quartz lens. The humours showed no 
fluorescence at all in this manner. The solutions of the bile, brain, urine, 
nerves, lenses, spinal marrow, liver, gave more or less distinct fluores- 
. cence. The solution of the brain gave no precipitate with iodine or 
iodide of mercury; nor did the bile give a precipitate, but the liver gave 
a slight precipitate with both reagents. 

Having thus satisfied ourselves that quinine does pass into the vasenliod 
and non-vascular tissues, we proceeded to determine how quickly four, five, 
or six grains of sulphate of quinine given to guineapigs could be detected 
in the different textures of their bodies. 

11. A guineapig was given four grains of sulphate of quinine, and it was 
killed in one quarter of an hour; all the extracts from the different parts 
of the body were mixed with one-eighth of their bulk of dilute sulphuric 
acid, and were made up to twenty-five minims. The amount of fluorescence 
was compared with the fluorescence obtained in pig 6, and with standard 
solutions of sulphate of quinine with one-eighth of dilute sulphuric acid, 
containing one grain, three-quarters, half, one-eighth, one-sixteenth, and 
one-thirty-second of a grain of sulphate of quinine. The solutions of the 
extracts of pigs 19, 22, 25, and 26, which had taken four grains of sulphate 
of quinine and were killed six hours, twenty-four hours, forty-eight hours, 
and seventy-two hours after the quinine was taken, were examined at the 
same time. 


1866. | resembling Quinine, in Animals, &c. 83 | 


The urine and the blood gave a fluorescence equal to half a grain of 
quinine to a litre of water; the extract of the kidney and the liver gave a 
fluorescence equal to three-fourths of a grain of quinine; the extract of the 
muscle gave a fluorescence between half a grain and one-fourth of a grain. 
The extract of the bile and the brain gave a fluorescence nearly equal to 
one-eighth of a grain of quinine toa litre. The nerves gave rather more 
fluorescence than one-sixteenth of a grain of quinine, and the lenses gave 
between one-sixteenth and one-thirty-second of a grain. 

Comparing these numbers with pig 6, in which the fluorescence of the 
liver was greatest, amounting to from one-thirty-second to one-sixteenth of 
a grain of quinine to a litre of water, whilst in all other parts, urine, blood, 
kidney, muscle, bile, brain, nerves, and lenses, the natural fluorescence 
was less than one-thirty-second of a grain, it is evident that in a quarter of 
an hour sulphate of quinine passes into all the vascular and non-vascular 
structures of the body. 

12, Another guineapig was given four grains of sulphate of quinine, and 
it was killed in half an hour ; the nerves and brain were compared with pig 
1, which had taken no quinine. The extract of the liver and kidneys gave 
a fluorescence equal to two-fifths of a grain of sulphate of quinine in a 
litre ; the biood, the bile, and the muscle gave a fluorescence equal to one- 
fifth ; the urine gave a fluorescence between one-fifth and one-tenth; the 
brain between one-tenth and one-twentieth ; the humours of the eye fluo- 
resced feebly, but a little more than the lenses, about one-twentieth ; the 
lenses and the nerves less than one-twentieth of a grain of quinine. 

13. Another guineapig took four grains of sulphate of quinine, and was 
killed one hour afterwards. The blood, the kidney, and the urine gave a 
fluorescence equal to, or rather more than, one-fifth of a grain of quinine 
to a litre; the liver fluoresced equal to between one-fifth and two-fifths 
of a grain of quinine; the bile and the muscles gave a fluorescence equal 
to one-twentieth of a grain of quinine; the brain fluoresced between one- 
twentieth and one-thirtieth ; the humours fluoresced rather more than the 
lenses; and the nerves gave the slightest fluorescence. 

14. Another guineapig was given four grains of sulphate of quinine; after 
three hours it was killed. It had been strongly affected, and the brain was 
much congested. The liver, kidney, blood, urine, bile, brain, and muscle 
gave very strong fluorescence, equal to between one and two grains of qui- 
nine in a litre of water; the nerves gave a fluorescence equal to one-six- 
teenth of a grain of quinine; the humours gave a fluorescence between 
one-sixteenth and one-thirty-second part of a grain; the lenses less than 
one-thirty-second part of a grain of quinine to a litre of water. 

15. Another guineapig was given four grains of sulphate of quinine; after 
three hours it was killed. Of every part half of the dry substance was taken, 
except the aqueous humour, bile, and urine, of which the whole was taken ; 
but when dry each of these was less than half a grain. Half the muscle 
gave a fluorescence equal nearly to one-sixteenth of a grain of quinine in a 
litre ; half the brain fluoresced a little more than one-thirty-second ; 


‘ 


84: Messrs. Jones and Dupré on a Substance, [ Apr. 12, 


half the kidney one-eighth to one-fourth of a grain; all the urime one- 
eighth; half the blood fluoresced one-sixty-fourth to one-thirty-second ; 
half the liver a little more than one-sixteenth; all the bile a little less 
than one-fourth ; half the lenses a little less than one-sixty-fourth ; all 
the humours a little-more than one-sixteenth ; half the nerves one-sixty- 
fourth to one-thirty-second of a grain of quinine to a litre of water. 

16. Another guineapig was killed four hours after five grains of sulphate 
of quinine, in two doses, with half an hour’s interval. The fluorescence of 
the different extracts of the tissues was compared with that of pig 4, that 
had taken no quinine, and with pigs 21 and 24, that were killed after 
taking a dose of five grains eight and thirty-two hours previously. The 
liver, the kidney, the brain, and the muscle gave a fluorescence about equal 
to one grain of quinine in a litre of water; the blood rather less; the nerves 
rather more than the blood; the lenses and the humours less than the 
blood. 

17. Another pig was killed four hours and a half after four grains of 
quinine. The whole of each organ was taken; the muscle gave a fluores- 
cence equalling from one-half to one grain of quinine to a litre of water; the 
brain one-sixteenth to one-eighth of a grain ; the kidney fluoresced nearly 
equal to one grain; the urine rather more than one grain; the blood one- 
eighth to one-fourth ; the liver nearly one ; the bile a little more than one- | 
eighth ; the lenses, humours, and nerves fluoresced less than one-sixty- 
fourth of a grain of quinine to a litre of water. 

This pig was compared with one which was given no quinine. 

18. Another pig was killed five hours and a half after six grains of sul- 
phate of quinine, given in three doses, with twenty minutes’ interval. It 
was very much affected. The extract of its tissues was compared with 
pig 3, which had taken no quinine ; the liver, kidney, and muscle fluoresced 
very strongly ; the brain fluoresced strongly ; the blood fluoresced between 
one-fifth and two-fifths of a grain to a litre of water; the nerves and the 
lenses fluoresced much less. 

19. Another pig was killed six hours after four grains of sulphate of 
quinine. The liver and kidney fluoresced equal to from one-half to one- 
fourth of a grain of sulphate of quinine to alitre of water; the urine from 
one-eighth to one-quarter; the blood fluoresced about one-eighth, the 
muscle a little more ; the brain and the humours of the eye about one-six- 
teenth of a grain of quinine; the lenses between one-sixteenth and one- 
thirty-second, and the nerves rather less than one-thirty-second part of a 
grain of quinine ; the fluorescence was compared with pig 6, that had taken 
no quinine. 

20. Another pig was killed six hours after four grains of sulphate of 
quinine. The liver gave a fluorescence equal to between one and two grains 
of sulphate of quinine; the kidney and the urine gave a fluorescence 
equal to one grain of quinine ; the blood fluoresced between one grain and 
half a grain ; the bile equalled three-quarters of a grain; the muscles and 
the brain one-quarter of a grain; the nerves one-sixteenth of a grain ; the 


1866. | resembling Quinine, in Animals, &c. 85 


humours rather more than one-thirty-second of a grain ; and the lenses be- 
tween one-thirty-second and one-sixty-fourth of a grain to a litre of water. 

21. Another guineapig was killed in eight hours after taking five grains 
of sulphate of quinine, in two doses, with half an hour’sinterval. The ex- 
tract of its tissues was compared with pig 8, which had taken no quinine, and 
with pig 16 and pig 24, which were killed four hours and thirty-two hours 
after taking five grains of quinine; the fluorescence of the liver was very 
strong ; the muscles, the brain, and the kidneys showed the fluorescence 
very distinctly ; the fluorescence of the urine equalled from two-fifths to 
three-fifths of a grain of quinine ; the bile was not more than one-twentieth 
of a grain of quinine ; the blood fluoresced more distinctly ; the lenses and 
the humours not so much, and the nerves least of all. 

This pig was with young when killed, and the fluorescence of the foetus 
was distinct ; the fluorescence of the liquor amnii was, less than that of 
the foetus. 

22. Another pig was killed in twenty-four hours after taking four grains 
of sulphate of quinine. The fluorescence of its textures was compared with 
pig 6, that had taken no quinine ; the fluorescence of the liver and kid- 
ney was equal to half a grain of quinine; the blood and bile fluoresced 
equal to one-eighth of a grain; the urine between one-eighth and one-six- 
teenth; the muscle the same; the brain and the humours rather less than 
one-sixteenth of a grain; the lenses and the nerves about one-thirty-second 
of a grain of quinine to a litre of water. 

23. Another pig was killed twenty-four hours after taking six grains of 
quinine, in three doses, with 20 minutes’ interval. The fluorescence was 
compared with pig 3, which had taken no quinine; the liver showed the 
most fluorescence ; the muscles, the kidney, and the brain were next ; the 
nerves and blood equalled about one-tenth of a grain of quinine, and the 
lenses fluoresced least of all. 

24, Another pig was killed thirty-two hours after taking five grains of 
sulphate of quinine. The fluorescence was compared with pig 4, which had 
taken no quinine ; the liver fluoresced scarcely more than that of the pig 
that had taken no quinine, about one-twenty-fifth of a grain to a litre of 
water; the kidney fluoresced a little more than that of the pig without 
quinine ; the fluorescence of the urine was scarcely perceptible, less than 
one-fiftieth of a grain of quinine ; the muscles a little less than the pig 
without quinine ; the blood, the nerves, the brain fluoresced very slightly; 
the lens and the humours more than any other part. 

25. Another pig was killed forty-eight hours after four grains of sul- 
phate of quinine. The fluorescence was compared with pig 6, which had 
taken ne quinine; the extract of the liver and of the blood had a fluo- 
rescence equal to one-sixteenth of a grain of quinine in a litre of water ; 
the bile, the kidney, the urine, the brain, the lenses, the humours, the 
nerves, and the muscles had each a fluorescence less than one-thirty-second 
part of a grain of quinine. 


86 Messrs. Jones and Dupré on a Substance, [Apr. 12, 


26. Another pig was killed seventy-two hours after four grains of sul- 
phate of quinine. The fluorescence was compared‘also with pig 6, which 
had taken no quinine; the extract of the liver and of the brain had a 
fluorescence equal to one-sixteeuth of a grain of sulphate of quinine; the 
lenses had a fluorescence equal to one-thirty-second part of a grain ; the bile, 
kidney, urine, the nerves, blood, and muscle had a fluorescence less than one- 
thirty-second part of a grain; and the humours fluoresced much less than 
one-thirty-second part of a grain of sulphate of quinine im a litre of water. 


Fluorescence without quinine, measured by the number of grains of 
quinine in 100 litres of water (176 pints). 


Pigl. | Piet | Pied. | Peo | Pie? | Pigs. | 
iver’... oe ce hci : 6to3 | less 62 | Jess 1°6 
Lenses .. 2 less 3 3 kG eee ee 
Kidney .. : Pali!) , 2S Sa 
Urine Ke 20% ts 3: Aned og, 1 ae 
Be es. lee aie see Btet sits olen 39 3 oy) 1°6 ce) 1°6 
Blood nae sueiene 4 to2 seatiolte cy) 3 oy) 1°6 ” 1°6 
Brain less 3 4 to2 33 aes 2. Dd cas Se 
Nerves .. 5 4 to2 5 ae 9 LAO ae alee 
Muscles . 4to2 3 » Por >. as 
Humours 4 to 2 least {more 1°6 Pe 

Fluorescence after quinine. 
Pig. 11. | Pig12. | Pig13. | Pig14. | Pig 15. |Pigl6|. Pig 17 
15 min. | 30 min. | | hour. 3 hours. | 3 hours. |4 hrs.| 43 hours 
Liver .. 75 40 |20to40|100 to 200} 6:2 100 100 
Lenses .| 6t03 5 ue 3 1°6 : 1°6 
Kidney . 795 40 20 100 to 200} 12 to 25 100 100 
Urine .. 50 20 to 10 20 100 to 200) 12 100 
Bile.... 12 20 5 100 to 200| 25 12°5 
Blood .. 50 20 20 100 to 200} 1°6 YT 2 ore 
Brain .. ye 10to3 | 5to3 | 100 to 200 3 109 | 6tol12 
Nerves . 6 5 least 6 1-6 to 3 ee 16 
Muscles |50t025/} 20 5 100 to 200} 6°2 100 |50 te 100 
Humours 5 6 to 3 6°2 1:6 
Pig 18. , Pig 19. Pig 21. | Pig 22.) Pig 23. \Pig 24.|Pig 25, Pig 26. 
53 hours.| 6 hours. | 6 hours. |8 hours. 24 hrs. | 52 hrs.| 48 hrs.| 72 hrs. 
Liver .. 50 to 25 |100 to 200 50 4 6 6 
Lenses . 6 to 3 3 tock 3 3 ° 
Kidney . 50 to 25 100 me 50 3 3 
Urine... 25 to 12 100 Afo'6.)12t0:6)) 2 3 3 
Biles’. «:.. ee a 79 5 12 s 3 
Blood .. | 20 to 40 i, 100 to 50 12 6 5] 
Brain .. 6 yas 6 ah oS 
Narves. 3 6 3 5 3 
Muscles 12 25 12 to6 3 3 
6 3 6 3 | least 


Humours 


1866. |] resembling Quinine, in Animals, &c. 87 


From these experiments it is seen that the fluorescent substance which 
exists naturally in the tissues, at the very highest reaches to 6 grains in 
100 litres of water, and usually is between 4 and 13 grains of quinine 
dissolved in this quantity of water. 

When quinine has been taken, even in a quarter of an hour the fluo- 
rescence may become equal to 75 grains of quinine in 100 litres of water. 
It is found to be in greatest quantity in the liver and the kidney, and 
somewhat less in the blood, urine, and muscles; still less in the brain, 
nerves, and bile ; and the increase is slightly perceptible even in the lenses. 
In three hours the maximum effect of the quinine may be reached, the 
fluorescence being then from 100 to 200 grains of quinine in 100 litres of 
water. This amount was found in the liver, kidney, urine, bile, blood, 
brain, and muscles. The increase was much less perceptible in the nerves 
and in the aqueous humour, and was least in the lenses, 

In six hours the amount of fluorescence was rather less than in three 
hours ; in twenty-four hours it was considerably less than half as much as 
in three hours ; in forty-eight hours there was but little more fluorescent 
substance than naturally exists in the textures, except in the liver and the 
blood ; and in seventy-two hours there was no increase except in the liver. 
Hence, in guineapigs, in fifteen minutes the quinine has passed to all the 
vascular and probably to the extravascular textures. In three hours the 
amount of quinine in the textures may be at the maximum, and for six 
hours it remains in excess; in twenty-four hours the quinine is much 
diminished, and in forty-eight hours it is scarcely perceptible anywhere. 

In order, if possible, to obtain very decisive proof that quinine passed 
into the non-vascular texture of the lens, we gave two pigs three grains of 
sulphate of quinine, and half an hour afterwards three grains more; the 
animals were killed five hours after the first dose. One lens of each pig 
was put into glycerine, to be compared with the lenses of two other pigs 
bought at the same time and place, to which no quinine was given. In 
the electric light there was no apparent difference, either in the colour 
or in the brightness of the fluorescence, between the pigs that had taken 
quinine and those that had taken none. Examined by the spark of the 
coil, the fluorescence of all four lenses was less than one-sixty-fourth of a 
grain of quinine in a litre of water; and scarcely any difference was per- 
ceptible, though the fluorescence of the lenses of the pigs that had taken 
quinine was slightly the strongest. In all, the fluorescence was rendered 
less strong by the addition of a strong solution of common salt to the 
solution. 

Two pigs were both given fifteen grains of sulphate of quinine in five 
doses of three grains each, with the interval of one hour between each dose. 
They were killed one hour after the last dose, being, however, almost dead 
from the effects of the quinine. One lens of each animal was examined in 
the usual way. The fluorescence in both was equal to one-thirty-second 
of a grain of quinine in a litre of water, or three grains per 100 litres. 

VOL. XY, I 


88 Messrs. Jones and Dupré on a Substance, [Apr. 12, 


Professor Donders has carefully investigated the time in which atropine 
and Old Calabar bean begin and cease to act on the iris in man. 

A solution of atropine dropped upon the cornea began to act in fifteen 
minutes, and attained its maximum in from twenty to twenty-five minutes. 
In forty-two hours the pupil was rather smaller; and even after thirteen days 
the pupil had not returned to its natural size. 

The solution of Calabar bean began to act in from five to ten minutes. 
It attained its maximum in from thirty to forty minutes. At the end of 
three hours it began to diminish, and its effect disappeared entirely in from 
two to four days. | 

After continued applications of belladonna to the eye of a rabbit, it was 
thoroughly washed by a full current of water. The aqueous humour was 
then evacuated and brought into contact for a long time with the eye of a 
dog (De Graefe injected the aqueous humour into the anterior chamber) ; ; 
then a notable dilatation of the pupil was observed. As one part in 
120,000 of water acts very energetically, the quantity must be very little 
that produced the dilatation of the pupil. 

When belladonna used internally produces the dilatation, the aqueous 
humour which is taken from the anterior chamber is inactive. | : 

Thirdly. The fluorescence that naturally occurs in different parts of the 
human body when no quinine had been taken before death was determined, 
in order that the effect of quinine on the fluorescence in the same parts 
might be estimated :— 

The different parts were dried in a water-bath, and equal noose of 
the dried substance were taken, amounting to 0°6 grain, that being the 
weight of the dry lens. The same method’ of extraction was followed. 
The solution was in all cases made up to twenty-five grains. 


Extract from per 100 litres. 
Cartilage fluoresced one 32nd of a grain of quinine to alitre.. =3-1 
Nerves fluoresced a littie more than one 64th of a grain a 

Hume 10,2. GR... Lt. win m opeet meee mere Ege es eee =1°6 
Liver fluoresced a little more than one 64th of a grain of 

pummme toa Je. ee ee Cel: ee tee ee ee eee eee == 1-6 
Kidney fluoresced a little more than one 64th of a grain of 

AUDUNOT CLS eR i ULE et elec een gee nr .. =1°6 
Lens fluoresced a little ie thas one oan we a ee ain wee. nae 

BQpe IGT! ,. capi eG rh oR ASRS cas a ae open meee +2) == 156 
Lungs fluoresced one 128th to one 64th of a grain of ifr: : 

‘SOOTY NG aaa ae See sine ces 5, Oe tres 
Muscle dnaiesced a little more dies one 128th og a grain of 

quinine to a litre:...:.:.. : ae 
Spleen fiuoresced one 128th ae a Poa er ie to a litre... =0°8 


In another patient, who died after a surgical operation, the same quan- 
tity of eee treated in exactly the same way, gave— 


1866.) - resembling Quinine, in Animals, &c. 89: 


Extract from ~ per 100 litres | 
Cartilage fluoresced a little less than one 128th of a grain of 

uiaines £0 a WikCray pineivcns Se weertn-g fe cdwel wee Hs =0°'8 
Nerves fluoresced a little less than one 128th of a grain of 

Quininecta-dlitres dou die hdaaa AS ware “AS Saas Be yib yp date =0°8 
Liver fluoresced a little less than one 64th of a grain of = 

eRe eRe ais ee Ai pekry Ge Sl /bes wipe oe REM 5's =—=list) 
Kidney fluoresced a little less than one 64th of a era e 

OURS Sins c chung ots wm, «sys. bie Sa) ores, a Nae wip bte pote =1-6 
Lungs fluoresced one 128th of a grain of quinine to a litre... =0°8 
Muscle fluoresced between one 128th and one 64th of a grain 

Be rapmimmme Aare litre’y) dino Gaeid (cave: neds os fs anete < eee =0°8 to 1°6 
Spleen fluoresced a little less than one 128th of a grain of 

quinine to a litre........ MS wien p=0"8 
Heart fluoresced one 128th e a eal ha faite a a litre.. =0:8 


When a much larger quantity of each organ was taken oe from 
loss or destruction of substance in the process of preparation), no great 
increase of fluorescence was obtained. 

Thus, of the different parts of a man who died of apoplexy, six grains 
were taken and treated as in the previous cases. 


Extract from per 100 litres. 
Cartilage fluoresced. one 128th to one 64th of a grain of qui- 

mCmMMCEeH LSS ki ee aise 8 ue ew eR was - =0°8 to 1°6 
Nerves fluoresced one 64th of a grain of quinine to a litre .. =1°6 
Liver fluoresced one 64th of a grain of quinine to a litre.... =1°6 
Kidney fluoresced one 64th to one 32nd of a grain of quinine 

DURMUReEy baticew as! $0. ky. s.r. % Sits, 6)- hye bas VA AEs ways =1°6 to 3:1 


Lungs fluoresced one 64th of a grain of quinine to a litre .. =1°6 
Muscle fluoresced a little less than one 64th of a oe of 


quinine to a litre......... =1°6 
Spleen fluoresced one 64th fo one e 32nd af a tia ‘of. anitiak 
CE Gy LIMES 5), 2 SRRIEM IG Gi Ee RI a ea ara En =1°6 to 31 


Heart fluoresced one 32nd of a grain of quinine to a litre .. =3°1 
Brain fluoresced one 64th to one 32nd of a grain of quinine 
to a litre . Eee omen edhe ay tan suas veins <i a6 Pe Sie eh) epgvars a's =1°6 to 3:1 


Ina peel anil way Fae atten oaeth of the tissues -of a woman 
who had.taken small doses of quinine up to geen hours of her death, 
were examined. 

The tissues were deed; ma f Fabeosbach, and 0: 6 grain of the dry sub- 
stance was taken for examination. 


Extract from ies ) . per 100 litres, 
Kidney fluoresced one 32nd to one 16th of a grain of quinine 
to allitre.. Sie) @ Jos as UNTO i ete ai\enan era qhaneayelalekd ave 6) aiele (é)-c =3°'l to 6°3 


" ne | | ‘9 


90 Messrs. Jones and Dupré on a Substance, [Apr. 12, 


Nerves fluoresced a little more than one 64th of a grain of 
quinine to a (tte. 3s. es. Bhs Seen tabs. es ots 
Liver fluoresced one 64th of a grain of quinine to a litre.... =1°6 
Muscle fluoresced one 64th of a grain of quinine to a litre.. =1°6 
Spleen fluoresced a little less than one 32nd of a grain of qui- 


mune toa ditte £2208 es tee ee eee ee 29% 55 eee .. =dl1 
Lungs fluoresced one 128th to one 64th of a grain of quinine 
tom litre: foe wa ee See ee Reece Fes eee «. =0°Stetl 5 


Fourthly. au the increase of fluorescent substance in the human lens 
after different quantities of sulphate of quinine had been taken at different 
periods before the operation for cataract (for the means of making these 
experiments we are indebted to the great kindness of Mr. Bowman) :— 

The fluorescence of the human lens without cataract was about equal to 
one 64th of a grain of quinine in a litre of water ; ers. per 100 litres. 
That is, natural fluorescence about............ 00.202 cece —= IG 
Sulphate of quinine was given for many days previous to the 

extraction of a cataract. After the operation the fluores- 

cence was found to be less than one 16th and more than 

one 32nd of a grain of quinine to a litre of water........ =6'2 to 3°1 
‘In four patients, aged respectively 75, 60, 60, and 72 :— 

the lens removed | hour after 5 grains of quinine, fluorescence =1°6 


” 17 ” ” =1°6 
9 2 ” 9 =1°6 
33 2s 9 ry == 2°] to 1°6 


Fifthly. On the rate of increase of fluorescent substance in the urine 
after quinine was taken, or on the rapidity of the passage of quinine, when 
taken by the stomach, into and out of the urine of man :— 

A healthy man breakfasted at 8.30 a.m.; at 12 he emptied the bladder, 
and took four grains of sulphate of quinine in solution. The fluorescence 
of the urine at different periods after the quinine was taken was examined ~ 
by rendering it alkaline with caustic potash and shaking it up three times 
with its own bulk of ether. Half an ounce of urine was taken for each 
examination. 


Urine passed at er. of quinine. water. 
12 (just before taking the quinine), fluorescence 4, to <, to 1 litre. 
120, thiorescence* 24 Ga Ss Raa = a a 
12.20 ae te SRO Cie ty ee: ATES ; f= to 5 
12.30 en OR er Creer, niet, See = tod 5, 

1 aot MO ret eke eee ee ocr = ito4 

2 iyit aE Be eh, a es a= 2 toll es 
4 alates aialatait rae ota Sayles Pal — ae 3 
8 OMIM poietic on! EMME ha, Pacis aes = 3 
24 hours after quinine, fluorescence....... =15 little less. 
48 ” go: da haar ao A =), little more. 


72 23 cy) pe opdbdeenee about shy > 


1866.] resembling Quinine, in Animals, &c. 91 


: The same man breakfasted at 8.30 a.m.; at 12 took four grains of 
sulphate of quinine. - 


Urine passed at gr. of quinine. water. 
12 (just before taking the quinine), fluorescence = 74; to ¢, to | litre. 
LO MOMADIOTESCENCE Guin icc cites ee cee cee =, to |, = 
12.20 = de ok Nhs = - os 
12.30 PR et ab sc ig ae Uo walle Bn. 5 = titolt PS 
1 a Ne Oe Ce LIES nee = + a 
2 oo ET: Bae Aes TP MPP Ree eee eae = 4, rather more, 
3 se ise oll TOS stacy coe a cleo DB cae alo == Ito f- 

4 Ne srt NE thd ot ae “gh : ; -= itod4 ne 
ire: POEM hie, Moly dete an cly owas te ae = I a 
24 hours after quinine, fluorescence ......... .= ;;tol ia 
48 & ANT gan OME phe ele = 7 43 

72 » Pe ak a onidils ster: scarcely perceptible. 


The same man, at 12 at noon, took four grains of sulphate of quinine. 
The same quantity of urine (half an ounce) was taken for each examination. 


Urine passed at er. of quinine. water. 
12 noon (just before taking the quinine), fluorescence =;1, to _; to | litre. 
PP PEAIMOTESCENCE! 6032 cc etc eee cele = ie 
12.20 a SS SA ER ae E ARE ta ents Ee Lane 
12.30 Re PT aCe es is oh oy ex de Gh A op abet =m z Be 
1 sd SO Ne Lee oe eiape sda 21 tO LAS 

nie i aE A sg BN ww tied oat ‘ag c'est —— ] an 
Di Lo SURE, ERE IR AL Gea ne eee eae Se bOy i. as 
4 i ON ea ols ay cat, fa Pd. Sigel bo Bo on een tis == ARSE TON 
8 oo he as Hine ee a Se ee a Te AE NE COTE Pe 
24 hours after quinine, fluorescence ............ = q 
48 aa SSUES a aR ACA ey Phare = 4, to ds re 
72 i peasant MELE ¢ <a i: scarcely perceptible. 


Hence in from ten to twenty minutes the quinine is detectable in the urine, 
and in from two to three hours after four grains have been taken it is in 
greatest amount in the urine; and even in three or four hours the quantity 
in the urine may be diminishing, and for more than forty-eight hours it 
will continue to pass off. Before seventy-two hours are passed not a trace 
will be perceptible. 

A boy passed urine at 12, and immediately took four grains of sulphate 
of quinine. The fluorescence was observed at different periods after the 
quinine was taken, half an ounce being taken for each determination. 


Urine passed at gr. of quinine. water. 
12 (just before the quinine), fluorescence not perceptible. 
PZabOodnipnescenee Gelow. 2s... apc des owas « zis to 1 litre, 
12.20, P eh alk aa A zz «ito <9 


92 Ona Substance, resembling Quinine, in Animals, &c. [Apr.12, 


Urine passed at gr. of quinine. water. 
12.30, fluorescence below ........... es neon 4° to 01, libre. 
1, Re oe aS ae Ona oe Itot Nee 
Pe PRS! sic Waser 7 AIRS NE SNE + tol a R 
3 a asi ica at IRE sys MRIS a. 4 tol Ae 
A Pipi Ci a Nae ona WR AE RAD ay 4 tol a 
Se. Yah ela ein ie ay gh a aps ne em i 4 Ke 
24, Fe tee a re ee et ee ers «zi tot 53 
48, PIR Sa a ole Sriheg Api Se ng cn ge —- E 
V2: Fe EL OE eens 0 + | BCBIFEE lyase nt eisai 


The same boy breakfasted at 8.30, passed urine -at 12 noon, and imme- 
diately took four grains of sulphate of quinine. The fluorescence was ob- 
served in half an ounce of the urine passed at different periods after the 
quinine was taken. 


Urine passed at ae _ gy. of quinine. . water. 
12 (just before taking the quinine), fluorescence ; 2 =, little more, to | litre. 
1251.5.) fimoreseences. 4.8 wri eae 7, tot 
12.30, Wa nits ara age Een Ae AC 3 if ies 
1, x BU bed oa boweua et 
Ds nphaiee LPs AORaNe ec enuee aie at SSDOME UI a 
35 ie thee aseesvences ces above T (was at Wiaxnmnman)e. 
Anite fe 5 Re he ive ee Oe a 3 
Soak Ly ia ene eh Rate Bye te Ai SS 5 
24, PR, Siku la ich a fy es ds ‘inal 
ASR SN eras er aed PARR R SAS shes to 2+ | Pe 
72, SE OUT, ic SR Oe 2 Vals 2.58 mot pereepiible: 


Hence in fifteen minutes quinine is detectable in the urine, and in three 
hours the maximum quantity is present in the urine. In eight hours it 
begins to decrease; in forty-eight hours it is much decreased ; and in 
seventy-two hours it has entirely disappeared. 


ConcLusions. 
Part I. 

From every texture of man and of some animals a fluorescent sub- 
stance can be extracted, which is identical with the fluorescent substance 
that for some years has been known to exist in the lenses of man and 
animals. 

This fluorescent substance, when extracted, has a very close optical and _ - 
chemical resemblance to quinine, and when mixed with quinine it cannot 
be separated from it; we have therefore called it ‘‘ animal quinoidine.”’ 

Part II. - 

By quantitative determinations of the amount of fluorescent substances 
naturally existing in the textures, we were able to determine the rate and 
time of increase of fluorescent substance in the vascular and non-vas- 


1866.] Von Baer on a Mammoth recently discovered in Siberia. 93. 


cular textures of animals, and in the urine of man after quinine had been 
taken. By this means we have shown that in guineapigs, in fifteen mi- 
-nutes, the quinine has certainly passed into all the vascular, and most pro- 
bably into the extra-vascular textures. In three hours the amount of qui- 
nine in the textures may be at the maximum; and for six hours it does 
not much diminish. In twenty-four hours the quinine sinks very consider- 
ably, and in forty-eight hours it is scarcely perceptible anywhere. 

By similar experiments on cataracts in man, it appears that in two hours 
and a quarter traces of quinine may he found in the lens. : 

After quinine has been taken, it begins to appear in the urime in from 
ten to twenty minutes; in from two to three hours it has reached its 
maximum ; in from three or four, or at longest eight hours, it begins to 
decrease ; in twenty-four hours it has very much decreased ; in forty- 
eight hours its presence is still detectable; but in seventy-two hace not a 
trace of it can be found. 


April 19, 1866. , 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The following communications were read :— 
I. “ Account of the Diseovery of the Body of a Mammoth, in Arctic 
Siberia,” in a Letter from Dr. Cart Ernst von Baz, of St. 
Petersburgh, For. Mem. R.S. Received April 17, 1866. 


A la Société Boyale de Londres. 


Présumant que la Société Royale de Londres prendra peut-étre quelque 
intéret a la découverte nouvelle d’un mammouth avec sa peau et ses poils 
dans le sol gelé de la Sibérie arctique, je ne veux pas manquer de lui faire 
cette communication. : 

Déja en 1864 ce mammouth a été trouvé par un Samoicde dans les 
environs de la baie du Tas, bras oriental du grand golfe de ’Obi. Ce n’est 
que vers la fin de Pan 1865, que j’en ai recu la nouvelle. Mais comme — 
dans ces régions les corps des grandes bétes se conservent longtemps, 
sils ne sont pas plemement mis 4 découvert, et que ce mammouth, au 
moins en 1864, restait encore enchassé dans les terres gelées, l Académie 
de St. Pétershourg a expédid, avec Paide du gouvernement, au mois de 
février de l'année courante, M. Fréd. Schmidt, paléontologue distingué, 
pour examiner non-seulement Vanimal, mais aussi sa position dans la 
localité. Nous esperons ue ® M. Schmidt arrivera avant que la destruction 
soit trop avancée, et qu’on aura non-seulement connaissance compléte de 
Yextérieur de Panimal, mais aussi de sa nourriture par la dissection de 
Yestomac. Ce serait la premiére fois qu’un naturaliste soit venu 4 temps 
pour ces recherches, car Adams, comme on sait, est arrivé trop tard. Ila 
trouvé les crins tombés de la peau et a pleinement négligé d’examiner la 
nourriture. 

Un rapport plus détaillé sur la trouvaille de ce mammouth et sur l’expé- 


94 Dr. Davy on the Bursa Fabricii. [Apr. 19, 


dition est sous presse et j’aurai ’honneur de la transmettre & la Société 
Royale. Mais les nouvelles de ce qu’a trouvé M. Schmidt ne peuvent 


arriver qu’aprés quelques mois. Dr. Cu. Ern. pe Barr. 
phe _ 30 Mars 

St. Pétersbourg, SA wAczal 1866. 

II. “On the Bursa Fabric.” By Joun Davy, M.D., F.RS., &e. 


Received March 24, 1866. 


In this paper I have the honour to submit to the Society some observa- 
tions which I have made on the Bursa Fabricii—an organ respecting the 
function of which so little has yet been determined with any certainty, 
some physiologists regarding it, after the manner of the author who first 
described it, as a receptaculum seminis, others as the analogue of Cowper’s 
glands, others as that of the prostate ; and one as that of the urinary bladder 
of fishes. 

For the sake of order and to save some repetition, before entering into 
particulars it may not be amiss to state briefly that this peculiar organ, in 
every instance it is met with, is found to lie low in the cavity of the pelvis, 
behind the intestine, either directly in the median line, or a little on one 
side of it; that it 1s covered anteriorly by the reflected peritoneum ; is 
composed mainly of two coats, one an outer muscular, the other an inner 
mucous, the latter in the instances of most development abounding in 
follicles ; that it communicates with the cloaca by an opening, in the female, 
close to the entrance of the oviduct, in the male between and a little infe- 
rior to that of each vas deferens, in both inferior to the termination of the 
ureters™ ; and that it has over its orifice, when most perfect, a slight val- 
vular fold,’affording some, but not perfect, security against the entrance into 
its cavity of feecal matter whilst passing in the act of expulsion. 

What is remarkable in this organ, giving rise to much of the obscurity 
adverted to, is the different aspects which it exhibits in the same animal 
according to age, and the differences as to form and proportional size and 
degree of persistence which it presents in different species. 

The number of birds in which I have sought for the organ, and have ex- 
amined it when found, has been considerable, at least thirty different species, 
all of them, with the exception of the skylark, belonging to or frequenters 
of the Lake district. 

I may further briefly premise that, when the microscope has been used, 
the power employed has been that of 1th inch focal distance, and that, when 


* The ureters in those birds in which they are most easily traced, such as the common 
_ fowl, turkey, goose, I have found not to terminate in the cloaca, but just above it, near, 
or in the margin of the inner anal aperture (anus interne of M. Milne-Edwards), 7. e. the 
orifice of the rectum into the cloaca; and, in consequence, the urinary excretion is voided 
adhering to the inferior portion of the fecal mass which accumulates in the lower rectum— 
which is unusually capacious and glandular; accordingly, from such observations as I 
have made, I cannot but entertain great doubt of the cloaca being the proper place for 
the reception of the urine before its expulsion. 


1866. | Dr. Davy on the Bursa Fabrici, 95 


spermatozoa have been sought for, a drop of a solution of common salt of 
the sp. gr. 1038, has been added to the fluid to be examined. 

In the descriptive part which follows, I propose to confine myself to the 
more striking examples illustrative of the peculiarities adverted to and likely 
to aid in accounting for them, passing over the several species, or very briefly 
noticing them, when displaying no marked difference. 

I. Common Fowl (Gallus domesticus).—I begin with this bird, as I have 
had the best opportunity of examining it at different ages. 

1. Of a-chicken four days old, the bursa was about the size of a small 
pea; it communicated with the cloaca, and was empty. 

2. Of another chicken, seventeen days old, found dead on the 10th 
of March from cold, the bursa measured °3 by °2 inch; it was distinctly 
plicated internally ; it was empty. 

3. Of a young cock, eleven weeks old, examined on the 16th of June, 
the bursa, of a globular form, was 1:1 inch in diameter; it communicated 
with the cloaca by a narrow neck about *15 inch in width; internally it 
was strongly plicated; the projecting laminze were of a crescentic form, 
about twenty in number, and their width, where widest, was about ‘4 inch. 
It contained some turbid fiuid, in which were numerous mucus-like cor- 
puscles and a few well-defined spermatozoa. ‘The testes were large; besides 

sperm-cells, they contained some spermatozoa. 
4. Of another cock, hatched in July, examimed when nineteen weeks 
_and six days old, the bursa, 12 inch in diameter, weighed 74 grs.; it 
was similar to the preceding in structure, and was empty. 

5. Of a third male, hatched on the 19th of September, examined when 
twenty-one weeks and one day old, weighing six pounds, the bursa was 1°5 
inch in diameter ; its plicze like the preceding, its opening into the cloaca 
large; many spermatozoa were found in the little turbid fluid with which 
they were moistened. The testes were large; the left weighed 144 gers.,. 
the right 130 grs.; the vasa deferentia were small. 

6. Of a fourth, hatched on the 18th of October, examined on the 20th 
of March, when seventeen weeks and seven days old, weight five pounds, 
the bursa, compared with the preceding, was of diminished size; its dia- 
meter only -6 inch, its plicee few, short and thick, and bloodshot; its 
opening into the cloaca large and exposed, without any valvular protection. 
It contained a little thick mucus, in which there was commingled an ap- 
pearance of spermatozoa. The testes were large, and abounded in sperm- 
cells and spermatozoa; and the vasa deferentia were well developed, and 
contained a cream-like fluid rich in delicate spermatozoa*. 


* The examination was made whilst the fowl was still warm. The fluid of the testes 
had a distinct alkaline reaction. In other instances I have obtained the same result, 
showing thus a marked difference when compared with the ovum, the yelk of which, 
when fresh, I have always found to exhibit an acid reaction, proper precautions being | 
taken to avoid contact with the alkaline white. See the author’s ‘ Physiological Re- 
searches’ (1863), p. 426. 


96 Dr. Davy on the Bursa Fabrieii, [Apr. 19, 


7. Ina fifth, a cock of about six years old, weighing four pounds and a 
half, no traces of a bursa could be found. The vasa deferentia were large, 
and were distended with a cream-like fiuid abounding in spermatozoa. 
They terminated well apart in the cloaca, and had neither of them a visible 
papilla*. The right testis weighed 93°7 grs., the left 119-7 grs. 

8. Of a young hen, hatched on the 17th of May, examined when eleven 
weeks old, the bursa was more flask-like than globular; it measured 1°7 
by 15 inch. Its plicze were large, and their glandular structure so well 
developed that the orifices of the follicles, as puncta, were seen with the 
naked eye. ‘The bursa was empty, merely moistened with mucous fluid. 

9. Of a hen hatched on the 17th of March, examined when seventeen 
weeks and five days old, the bursa was about the same size and form as 
that of the preceding; it contained a small quantity .of turbid mucous 
fluid, in which were seen delicate filaments bearing a resemblance to 
Spermatozoa. 

10. Of another, hatched in Maja and which, like the preceding, had 
never laid, examined when nineteen weeks old, the bursa, which was empty, 
measured 1°7 by 1°5 inch. 

11. Ofa fourth, hatched on the 19th of September, said to have laid 
and known to have been trod, examined when twenty-four weeks old, the 
bursa was of shrunken appearance; it was ‘5 inch in diameter ; its parietes 
thick (‘2 inch thick); there were no plicz ; it communicated freely 
with the cloaca, and contained a little mucous fluid in which were seen 
filaments like spermatozoa, but not unmistakeably such. There was a large 
ovum nearly ready to be detached from the ovary. A very few tolerably 
distinct spermatozoa were found in the oviduct, which was well deve- 
loped. 

12. In afifth, hatched on the 19th “a July, examined when twenty weeks 
and five days old, after having laid about twenty-five eggs, no vestige of 
a bursa could be detected +. 

_ 13. Of ancther, about eight months old, examined on the 17th of March, 
after having laid three or four eggs, the bursa was of a tubular form, -9 inch 
long by 1 wide; its walls were exceedingly thin, and it did not communi- — 
cate with the cloaca. In the little turbid mucous fluid it contained, a single 
spermatozoon was detected. There was a fully formed egg in the oviduct, 
the incrustation of which had begun. Nearest the infundibulum many 
spermatozoa were found. 

_ 14. In a laying hen about three years old the mre was reduced to a 
small hard mass, hardly equal to a pea in size. It contained a minute 
cavity without an opening into the cloaca. 


* After immersion in water for forty-eight hours, then from distention the papillz 
appeared, each about °24 inch in length. 

This was a clucking hen, and the day before had been trod. The ova in the ovary 
were small, the largest °2 inch in diameter. There was no egg in the oviduct ; sperma- 
tozoa were found in different parts of it. 


1866.] - Dr. Davy on the Bursa Fabricit. 97 


15. In another, about three years and a half old, no traces of a bursa 
could be detected. Its cloaca and oviduct were very large, as were also 
those of the preceding. _ 

II. Pheasant (Phasianus colchicus).—In ten examined (seven males, 
three females), with the exception of three (inferred to be old birds), the 
organ in question was found. It resembled in structure that of the com- 
mon fowl of from four to eight months old. In each instance it was empty, 
merely wet with mucous fluid. These birds were shot in November, Decem- 
ber, January, and February. Not knowing their precise age, but supposing 
them to have been hatched in the spring, their bursa as to size was some- 
what less than that of the common fowl. The smallest, that of a hen shot 
in February, measured °3 inch by ‘2; it retained its plicated structure, and 
freely communicated with the cloaca. 

Ill. Partridge (Perdix cinerea).—Of this bird three specimens have 
been examined. In one, apparently old, no trace could be found of a bursa. 
In the other two, in which it occurred, it resembled in form and structure 
that of the common fowl; it measured °4 inch by °3. These were young 
birds which had taken wing. 

IV. Turkey (Meleagris gallopavo).—In three instances of this bird, all 
hatched in spring, one examined in October, one in December, one in 
January, the bursa was found similar to that of the common fowl}, and in 
each nearly of the same size, about 1°5 inch by °7. 

V. Grouse (Tetrao scoticus).—In a young bird, not fully fledged, just 
capable of a short flight, shot in the island of Lewis on the 12th of August, 
expressly for the purpose of examination, the bursa was found small, about 
the size of a pea. Air was found in its humeri, but only partially in its 
femora. In two, both from Scotland, later in the season, no bursa could 
be detected. Their femora contained air as well as their humeri. 

VI. Pigeon (Columba domestica).—In two full-grown males examined 
in September, no trace was found of a bursa; in other two (these younger 
birds) the bursa was pretty large. | 

VII. Buzzard (Falco buteo).—Of a young one taken from its nest on 
the 9th of June, when about a fortnight old, the bursa was globular and 
comparatively large, about ‘8 inch in diameter, non-plicated, and empty. 
This nestling weighed 5193 grs.; it was covered, except at the umbilicus, 
where bare, with plush-like yellow feathers, thick, very closely set, equal 
in weight to 647 grs. 

VIII. Sparrow-hawk (Falco nisus).—Of a young bird, examined on 
the 31st of July, just capable of flight, weighing 3686 grs., its sternum 
still cartilaginous, its humeri only partially filled with air, the bursa was 
small. In another, a male, apparently an old bird, shot on the 8th of 
March, no traces of bursa were found. It weighed 2836 gers. 

IX. Tawny Owl (Strix stridula).—Of a young one taken from its nest 
on the 21st of June, when well fledged, but its quill-feathers not fully formed, 
weight 4496 grs., the bursa was globular and comparatively large, *7 inch 


98 Dr. Davy on the Bursa Fabricii. [Apr. 19, 


in diameter. It contained a good deal of turbid urinary fluid abounding in 
lithate of ammonia. It had no air in any of its bones. 

In an old bird, the parent of the preceding, no bursa was found. 

X. Cuckoo (Cuculus canorus).—Of a young one shot on the 25th of 
August, weight 1310 grs. (judging from its plumage, a bird of this season), 
the bursa was very small. In another, a male*, an older bird, shot on the 
6th of June, weight 1768 grs., no traces could be found of a bursa. 

XI. Common Goose.—Of one hatched in the spring, examined when 
about six months old, the bursa, of an ovoid form, measured 1:2 by °7 inch. 
It was plicated, hike that of the common fowl. Of two others, one four 
months old, one of about eight menths, the bursa was about the same size 
as the preceding. | 

XII. Common Duck.—Of one, a male hatched in March, the bursa was 
of a cylindrical form, 1:6 inch long by 4 inch wide. Its lming membrane 
was without plicee ; the apertures of the mucous follicles were conspicuous, 
and arranged in parallel lines. It contained some dark fecal matter 
similar to that in the intestine. . 

Of another male, about three months old, the bursa was of a flask-like 
form, 26 inches in length, *6 inch in width where widest; in structure 
like the preceding. It contained a turbid greyish fluid, in which were 
suspended granules and small globules. It was coagulated by nitric acid. 

Of a female, about a month older, of the same brood, the bursa resem- 
bled the last. : 

Of another female, a little more than a year old, the bursa was very 
small; its cavity was not quite obliterated, nor was its opening into the 
cloaca closed. 

Of a male about two years old, no traces remained of a bursa. 

XIII. Water-hen (Gallinula chloropus).—Of a male shot in November, 
the bursa, of a flask-like form, was ‘6 inch by ‘4; its cavity was small and 
without plicee. 

XIV. Common Coot (Fulica atra).—In a male shot on the 8th of March 
no bursa was found. 

XV. Common Gull (Larus canus).—The same remark applies to one 
examined in January. 

XVI. Woodcock (Scolopax rusticola).—In two examined, one in De- 
cember, the other in February, no traces of a bursa were found. 

XVII. Rook (Corvus frugilegus).—Of this bird thirteen specimens have 
been examified. In eight no traces of a bursa were detected; from their 
appearance and the quality of their bones, it was inferred that they were a 
year or more old. In the remaining five a bursa was met with; three 
were examined in May, two in August; all had the marks of young birds. 
Of one, which weighed 6132 grs., caught when not quite capable of flight, 


* One testis weighed ‘7 gr., and measured ‘24 inch by ‘26; the other 1 gr., and mea- 
sured ‘28 by ‘20 inch; they were of a rich yellow colour, and contained sperm-cells-and 
spermatozoa, the latter of uniform thickness, about ‘002 inch in length, nowise spiral. 


1866. | Dr. Davy on the Bursa Fabricit. 99 


the bursa was nearly globular and about *7 by ‘6 inch; it was distended, 
as was also the cloaca, with a turbid fluid abounding in lithate of ammonia. 
Its inner surface was not plicated, but slightly pitted. Of the others, the 
bursa differed little from the last; it was somewhat smaller. In the bursa 
of one of these some flakes were found, consisting chiefly of lithate of 
ammonia. 

XVIII. Carrion-crow (C. corone).—Of a young male shot on the 21st 
of June the bursa was globular, very like that of the rook, about *7 inch 
in diameter; it contained some flakes of lithate of ammonia. 

Of another, shot on the 30th of June, weight 6163 grs., the bursa was 
somewhat different in form; it was broadest-at its base; 1¢ measured ‘9 
by ‘8 inch. 

Of one killed on the 16th of July, weight 5653 grs., the bursa was 
smaller ; it contained some flakes of lithate of ammonia. 

Of a fourth, killed in February, which, judging from the smallness of the 
oviduct, was not an old bird, the bursa, had it not been for its opening 
into the cloaca, might have escaped observation, not on account of its 
smallness, for it was little less than that of the preceding, but from the ex- 
treme thinness of its coats and adherence to the adjoining tissues. 

XIX. Jackdaw (C. monedula).—Three specimens have been examined. 
Two of these were old; in neither of them was there a bursa: one was 
young ; it was shot on the 11th of July, and was fully fledged ; its bursa was 
pretty large, similar to that of the rook, and empty. 

XX. Jay (C. glandarius).—Of one, judging from the state of its bones, 
hatched in spring, the bursa was comparatively large, heart-shaped, mea- 
suring *6 by ‘4 inch. Its cavity was small; its inner surface smooth, 
without plicee. 

XXI. Blackbird (Turdus merula).—Six different specimens have been 
examined, In an old bird shot in March, a male, no trace of a bursa was 
found. 

In an unfledged nestling, weighing 112 grs., found dead, the bursa was 
so thin as to be translucent ; it was proportionally large, and contained some 
flakes of lithate of ammonia. 

In the others, which were examined between the middle of June and 
the beginning of October, none of them, it was inferred, more than five 
months old, the bursa, nearly globular, was from about ‘4 to ‘5 inch in 
diameter; its lining membrane was smooth; its parietes proportionally 
thick. In each instance it was empty. 

XXII. Song-thrush (T. musicus).—In an old male examined on the 
28th of June no bursa was found. 

Of two young ones obtained on the 15th of the same month, the bursa 
was about the size of a large pea; one was empty, the other contained 
some lithate of ammonia. 

XXIII. Water-ousel (T. cinclus).—In one, a male, probably a young 
one, a small bursa was found. It was shot on the 11th of November. 


100 Dr. Davy on the Bursa Fabricii. [Apr. 19, 


In another, an older bird (judging from its appearance), shot at the same 
time, there was no trace of a bursa* ; and the same remark applies to a 
third examined in January. 

XXIV. Common Starling (Sturnus vulgaris).—Of a young one shot on 
the 29th of June, the bursa was about the size of that of the young thrush. In 
two old birds shot on the 7th of March, nota trace of the organ was found. 

XXV. Skylark (Alauda arvensis).—In two examined in January there 
was the like deficiency. 

XXXVI. Chiffchaff (Trochilus minor).—Of one, a young bird, exa- 
mined on the 14th of July, the bursa, of moderate size, contamed a little 
feecal matter. In another, an older bird, shot in March no bursa could 
be found. 

XXVII. Robin (Sylvia rubecula).—Of a young one found dead on the 
16th of June, still warm, weight 255 grs., the bursa was of moderate size. 

Of another, nearly fuily fledged, found dead on the 25th of June, weight 
285 grs., the bursa was comparatively large, exceeding a little in size that 
of the preceding. 

XXVIII. Yellow Ammer (Emberiza citrinella).—In one, a nies its testes 
abounding in spermatozoa, examined on the 16th of June, there was no 
trace of a bursa. 

XXIX. Blue Tit (Parus ceeruleus).—Of two young ones examined on 
the 8th of June, when just able to fly, one weighing 177°5 grs., the other 
162 grs., the bursa was comparatively large; in each it was empty. 

“XXX. Cole Tit (P. ater).—In one examined in February no trace of _ 
organ could be found. 

XXXI. Martin (Hirundo urbica).—Of three young ones taken from — 
the nest on the 10th of July, the bursa was comparatively large; in each 
it was empty. One nestling weighed 414 grs., another 398 ers., the third 
423°5 grs. The parent birds were both found of less weight; that of the 
male was 263 grs., of the female 287:4 grs. In the latter a distinct bursa 
was found, little less than that of the young birds. Search was made for 
spermatozoa, but none were found in it. Of the male, the pelvis was so in- 
jured by shot that it was useless for-examination. In a male shot on the 
‘Ist of August, the testes of which contained spermatozoa, no trace of a 
bursa was found. 

From the preceding results may not the following conclusions be 
drawn ?— 

Ist. That in some birds, as in the common fowl, and probably in all the 
gallinaceous family, and that of the Anatidze, the bursa increases in size 
and in completeness of organization up to a certain age, beyond which it 
gradually diminishes equally in both sexes, and eventually disappears. 

2nd. That in other birds, those of rapid growth, which take wing as 

* Jt was shot near the river Brathy, in which charr were then spawning. In its giz- 


zard and cesophagus nine ova of this fish were found; they were transparent when ex- 
tracted, but immersed in water they soon became opaque. 


1866.] Dr. Davy on the Bursa Fabricii. 101 


soon as they are capable of flight, the bursa is comparatively large whilst 
they are nestlings, does not increase conspicuously, if at all, with their 
growth, but rather diminishes, and after a certain age disappears, and pro- 
bably sooner than in the first mentioned. The buzzard and owl are ex- 
amples, and probably all birds of the same family, all of the Corvine, all 
of the thrush kind, and all the smaller birds, with the exception perhaps of 
the female martin. 

Of the uses of the organ, I venture to conjecture, founding my conjec- 
tures on what i have observed, that they may be provisional and various ; 
that in some birds, whilst nestlings, it may act the part of a urinary blad- 
der, as witnessed in the instance of the young owl, and in some of the young _ 
rooks, crows, and thrushes, thereby tending to prevent the fouling of the 
nests; that in others it may serve as a seminal reservoir at an early period, 
and in both male and female in the instances mentioned, in which it has 
been found most completely formed before the attainment of full size— 
in the male before the vasa deferentia are fully developed, in the female 
so long as the oviduct is still small and unexpanded; and that generally, 
as the organ is more or less amply supplied with mucous follicles, it may 
serve, by the secretion it yields, to lubricate the cloaca with which it is 
connected, and to aid in its functions. 

These conjectures, or inferences, if deserving of being so considered, might 
be supported by what we know of the structure of the part and its position 
in relation to the termination of the ureters, of the spermatic vessels, and 
of the oviduct; but I think it better to rest them on the facts observed— 
the urmary matter detected in the organ in some instances, the spermatozoa 
in others*, and the mucous fluid generally. 

But granting even that the bursa may be useful, and in the female as well 
as in the male, in aid of fecundation, as Fabricius supposed, yet his extreme 
view that that aid, in the stored-up spermatic fluid in the bursa of the hen 
bird, might suffice for a year, as stated in the subjoined passage, for which 
and for other extracts I am indebted to the kindness of Professor Sharpey, 
is both highly improbable, and is opposed by the fact of the decrease of the. 
bursa with the advancing age of the fowl, and the enlargement of the ovi- 


* As in no instance I have yet found unquestionable spermatozoa in the bursa of the 
young hen, I cannot fairly infer that the bursa in the female is a receptaculum seminis ; 
but as in two instances there were detected in it filaments which were very like these 
bodies, and in one a single pretty distinct spermatozoon, and further, as the bursa seems 
to diminish rapidly as the oviduct becomes developed and not till then, is it not probable 
that for a short time.it may perform the part assigned, as conjectured above? It need 
hardly be remarked that the mucous secretion of the bursa adds to the difficulty of de- 
moustrating the presence of spermatozoa. 

fT “Semen autem Galli ad podicem immittitur, et in vesica reponitur et conservatur, 
quousque pullus conformetur ; immo vero per totum integrum anni tempus inibi servatur, 
postea quam semel admisso Gallo, ova omnia per totum illud anni tempus foecunda red- 
duntur, tanquam vesica unicum ob id foramen habente, ut in concluso loco semen Galli 
diutius ut in proprio et congruo loco servetur.”—Opp. Omnia, Lugd. Bat. 1738, p. 21. 


162 Mr. Abel on Gun-cotton. [Apr. 19, 


duct and of the vasa deferentia. Harvey, who was opposed to the notion 
of Fabricius, expresses the opinion that an intercourse once or twice repeated 
might suffice to impregnate a whole bunch of yelks, he having found that 
an egg laid on the 20th day of seclusion of a hen produced achick*. This 
fact is an interesting one, however explained. It might be adduced in 
favour of the opinion of Fabricius ; but inasmuch 4s the passage of the 
fully-formed egg in the act of expulsion does not necessarily secure the 
expulsion of any spermatozoa previously received into the oviduct, it is of 
little value in the argument: and here I may mention that I have detected 
spermatozoa in the oviduct, even in that portion in which the egg was re- 
ceiving its calcareous incrustation. 


Ill. * Researches on Gun-ecotton.—-Memoir I. Manufacture and Com- 
position of Gun-cotton.”” By F. A. Aprr, F.R.S., V.P.C.S. 
Received April 10, 1866. . 


(Abstract. ) 


A review of the researches on the production, properties, and composition 
of gun-cotton hitherto published, and a brief examination into the pro- 
bable causes of the discrepancies exhibited between the results and con- 
clusions of different experimenters, are followed in this paper by a criti- 
cism of the several steps in the system of manufacture of gun-cotton, as 
prescribed by Baron vy. Lenk. 

The conclusions arrived at on this subject are founded upon carefully 
conducted laboratory-experiments, and upon extensive manufacturing 
operations carried on during the last three years at the Royal Gunpowder 
Works, Waltham Abbey. In some of these operations v. Lenk’s system 
of manufacture, as originally communicated to the English Government 
by that of Austria, was strictly followed ; in others, various modifications — 
were introduced in different stages of the manufacture—such as in the 
composition of the acids used, in the proportion borne by the cotton to 
the acids in which it remained immersed, in the duration of the treat- 
ment of cotton with the acids, and in the methods of purification to which 
the gun-cotton was submitted. 

Exception is taken to one or two points in the general system of manu- 
facture, and directions are indicated in which they may be advantageously 
modified ; but the general conclusion arrived at is that, although Baron 
v. Lenk cannot be said to have initiated any new principle as applied to 
the production of gun-cotton, he has succeeded in so greatly perfecting 
the process of converting cotton into the most explosive form of pyroxyline 
or gun-cotton, and also the methods of purification, as to render a simple 
attention to his clear and definite regulations alone necessary to ensure the 


* Opera Omnia, a Col. Med. Lond. ed. 1766, p. 206. 


-1866.] Mr. Abel on Gun-cotton. 108 


manufacture of very uniform products, which are unquestionably much 
more perfect in their nature than those obtained in the earlier days of the 
history of gun-cotton. Great stress is laid upon the fact that deviations 
from the prescribed process, which at first sight may appear trivial (such 
as a slight modification in the strength of the acids used, the neglect of 
proper cooling-arrangements), are certain to lead to variations in the pro- 
ducts of manufacture, affecting their explosive characters, or their perma- 
nence, or both. A considerable deviation from the normal composition, 
due evidently to some accidental irregularities in the course of manufac- 
ture pursued, has been exhibited occasionally by gun-cotton obtained 
from the manufactories at Hirtenberg and Stowmarket. 

The composition of gun-cotton has been made the subject of a very 
extensive series of experiments, both analytical and synthetical. The ma- 
terial employed in the analytical researches consisted of ordinary products 
of manufacture, prepared at Waltham Abbey, and obtained from Hirten- 
berg and Stowmarket. The general analytical results are as follows :— 

Air-dry gun-cotton contains very uniformly about two per cent. of 
water, which proportion it reabsorbs rapidly from the atmosphere after 
desiccation. If exposed to a moist confined atmosphere, it will gradually 
absorb as much as six per cent. of water; but it rarely retains more than 
two per cent. upon re-exposure to open air. 

The mineral constituents of gun-cotton vary according to the quality 
of the water employed in its purification. The average proportion of ash 
furnished by gun-cotton prepared at Waltham Abbey, where the water 
used is hard, amounts to one per cent. It should be observed that the 
process of “‘ silicating”’ the gun-cotton, which is prescribed by Von Lenk, 
but the value of which is not admitted, has been applied at Waltham 
Abbey only in special experimental operations. Its use naturally adds to 
the mineral constituents contained in the finished products. 

The proportions of matters soluble in alcohol alone, and in mixtures of 
alcohol and ether, were found to be remarkably uniform im products of 
manufacture obtained by strictly following Von Lenk’s directions. In the 
ordinary products from Waltham Abbey, the matter extractable by alcohol 
amounted to between 0°75 and 1 per cent., and consisted of a yellowish 
nitrogenized substance possessed of acid characters, and evidently produced 
from matters foreign to cellulose (which are retained by cotton fibre after 
its purification), and the products of oxidation which escape complete 
removal when the gun-cotton is submitted to purification in an alkaline 
bath. The average proportion of matter extractable by ether and alcohol 
after the alcoholic treatment is from 1 to 1°5 per cent. This consists of 
one or more of the lower products obtained by the action of nitric acid 
upon cotton-wool, the existence of which was established by Hadow. The 
causes of the invariable production of small proportions of these substances 
in the ordinary manufacturing operations, and of their existence in larger 
quantities in exceptional instances, have been carefully examined into, 

VOL. XV. K 


104 Mr. Abel on Gun-cotton. — [Apr. 19, 


Their absolute removal from specimens of gun-cotton, purified for analy- 
tical purposes, was found to be almost impossible. 

The methods employed for determining the proportions of cakboel hy- 
drogen, and nitrogen in gun-cotton, and the relative proportions of carbonic 
acid and nitrogen furnished by its combustion, have been very carefully tested. 
Four different methods of determining the carbon were employed, and 
forty-nine successful estimations of that element have been accomplished. 
in a variety of products of manufacture. A number of very concordant hy- 
drogen-determinations, and eighteen direct estimations of the volumes of 
nitrogen furnished by the complete oxidation of gun-cotton, have been 
made. The individual as well as the mean results obtained in these 
analytical experiments correspond much more closely to the require- 


ments of the formula ©, H, N, 0,,=€ | sND. bo 3 trinitro-cellulose, 


or €,, H,,9,, 3N, 9,, trinitric cellulose) than to the formula recently as- 
signed for gun-cotton by Pelouze and Maury, €,, H,,90,,,5N,9,;. The 
determinations of the comparative volumes of ceupes acid tt nitrogen 
have furnished results closely in accordance with those of the direct de- 
termination of nitrogen. 

Since the specimens of gun-cotton analyzed always retained small quan- 
tities of the products soluble in ether and alcohol, it was to be expected 
that the proportion of nitrogen found would be slightly below, and con- 
sequently that the carbon-results would be somewhat above, those which 
the chemically pure substance should furnish. The variations exhibited 
by the analytical results do not exceed such as are ascribable to the above 
cause. | 

- A number of experiments were instituted with Hadow’s method of de- 
termining the composition of gun-cotton, which consists m reducing the 
latter to cotton by means of potassic sulphydride. The results show that, 
although the method is useful for controlling the results obtained, by de- 
termining the increase of weight which cotton sustains by treatment with 
nitric acid, it does not afford sufficiently definite and trustworthy data to 
render it applicable as a method of ascertaining the degree of perfection of 
manufacturing products, 7. e. the extent of freedom of a specimen of the 
most explosive gun-cotton from admixture with the soluble varieties. 

The treatment of cotton with nitric and sulphuric acids has been varied 
in many ways in laboratory experiments, with the view to examine fully 
into the increase in weight sustained by the former, upon its conversion 
into the most explosive gun-cotton, and to determine what circumstances 
may exert an influence upon the amount of increase,—an acid mixture of 
uniform strength being employed throughout the experiments (3 parts 
by weight of sulphuric acid of spec. grav. 1°84, and 1 part of nitric acid 
of spec. grav. 1°52). The results arrived at may be briefly summed up 
as follows :— 


Finely carded and carefully purified cotton-wool will sustain an increase 


J 


cs Slee 


1866.] Mr. Abel on Gun-cotton. 105 


of weight varying between 81°8 and 82°5 upon 100 parts of cotton, if 
submitted for 24-48 hours to treatment with a very considerable excess 
(about 50 parts to 1 of cotton) of the acid mixture. Similar results may also 
be obtained by repeatedly treating the same sample of cotton for compara- 
tively brief periods with fresh quantities of acid, provided this treatment 
be not too greatly prolonged. Lower results (somewhat above or below 
78 upon 100 parts of cotton) are obtained if the cotton be submitted to 
treatment with a large excess of acid for only brief or for very protracted 
periods, or if it be left for about 24 hours in contact with a comparatively 
limited proportion of acid (10 or 15 to 1 of cotton). The increase of 
weight which 100 parts of pure cellulose should sustain by complete con- 
version into a substance of the formula ©, H, N, 9,,, is 83°3; if converted 
completely into a substance of the composition €,, H,,0,,, 5 N, O,, it 
should sustain an increase in weight of 77°78. 

There is strong evidence that the differences between the highest results 
furnished by carefully purified cotton-wool, and the number 83:3, are to 
be principally ascribed to the small proportions of foreign matter still ex- 
isting in the fibre at the time of its conversion. 

The maximum increase of weight sustained by cotton of ordinary quality, 
such as is used in gun-cotton-manufacture, is, as might have been antici- 
pated, below the result obtained, under similar conditions, with cotton of 
finer quality and more thoroughly purified. The highest numbers ob- 
tained by treatment of sach cotton, in small quantities, with a considerable 
excess of acid, were somewhat below 181, from 100 of cotton. The in- 
crease of weight which this quality of cotton sustains is, however, more 
generally about 78 per cent. 

Experiments are quoted which show that the attainment of lower results 
with cotton of ordinary quality is ascribable to the existence of higher 
proportions of foreign matters in the cotton under treatment. 

Some quantitative manufacturing experiments yielded results consider- 
ably below those obtained with some of the same cotton in laboratory 
operations (171 and 176 of gun-cotton having been produced from 100 of 
cotton). The causes of these differences are investigated and explained. 


The identity in their characters, and close resemblance in composition, of 
the most perfect results of laboratory experiments, and of the purified 
products of manufacture, the close approximation frequently exhibited by 
the weight of the former to the theoretical demands of the formula 
©, H, N, O,, (which may be expressed as 


H. 
€, { 3 NO, } 0,,0r ©, Lanes 3N,9;), 


and the satisfactory manner in which the unavoidable production of some- 
what lower results in the manufacturing operations admits of practical 


demonstration, appear to afford conclusive evidence of the correctness of 
K 2 


106 Mr. Dawkins on the Dentition of Rhinoceros leptorhinus. [Apr.26, 


either of the above formule, as representing the composition of the most 
explosive gun-cotton, and demonstrate satisfactorily that the material, pre- 
pared strictly according to the system of manufacture perfected by Von Lenk, 
consists uniformly of the substance now generally known as trinitro-cellu- 
lose, in a nearly pure condition. 


IV. “On the Mysteries of Numbers alluded to by Fermat.” By 
the Rt. Hon. Sir Frenericx Potiocx, Lord Chief Baron, 
F.R.S., &. Received March 19, 1866. [See page 115.] 


April 26, 1866. 
J. P. GASSIOT, Vice-President, in the Chair. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “On the Dentition of Rhinoceros leptorhinus (Owen).” By 
W. Boyp Dawkins, M.A., Oxon., F.G.S. | Communicated by 
Prof. J. Paitirps, F.R.S. Received March 28, 1866. 

(Abstract. ) 

The fossil remains of the genus Rhinoceros found in Pleistocene de- 
posits in Great Britain indicate four well-defined species. Of these the 
R. tichorhinus, or the common fossil species, ranged throughout France, 
Germany, and Northern Russia, and, like its congener the Mammoth, was 
defended from the intense winter cold by a thick clothing of hair and 
wool. Its southern limit in the Europzeo-Asiatic continent was a line 
passing through the Pyrenees, the Alps, the northern shore of the Caspian, 
and the Altai Mountains. It has not yet been proved to have existed in 
Europe anterior to the deposit of the Boulder Clay. The second species, 
the R. megarhinus of M. de Christol, characterized by its slender limbs 
and the absence of the ‘‘cloison,’’ has been determined by the author 
among remains from the brick-earths occupymg the lower part of the 
Thames valley, and from the Preglacial forest-bed of Cromer. The species 
ranged from the Norfolk shore southwards through Central France into 
Italy. In France and Italy it characterizes the Pliocene deposits, being 
found in the former country in association with Mastodon brevirostris and 
Halitherium Serresii, in the latter with M. Arvernensis. Frem its 
southern range we may infer that the megarhine species was fitted to in- 
habit the warm and temperate zones of Europe, just as the tichorhine was 
peculiarly fitted for the endurance of an Arctic winter. 

The third species is the R. etruscus of Dr. Falconer, confined to the 
forest-bed of the Norfolk shore, and, like the R. megarhinus, found in the 
Pliocenes of France and Italy ; it ranged across the Pyrenees as far as Ma- 
laga, and is the only species known to occur in Spain. 

The fourth, the R. leptorhinus of Professor Owen, is the equivalent of 


1866.] Mr. Wilde— Researches in Magnetism and Electricity. 107 


the R. hemiteechus of Dr. Falconer. It is defined as ‘‘R. a narines demi- 
cloisonnées,’’ and is probably not the same animal as the R. leptorhinus 
or “ R. & narines non-cloisonnées’’ of Baron Cuvier, the evidence as to 
the absence or presence of the cloison in the type of the species being of 
the most conflicting nature. In Central France it is identical with R. me- 
sotropus and R. velaunus of M. Aymard, the R. dymardi of M. Pomel, 
and the R. leptorhinus (du Puy) of M. Gervaise. Its dentition is charac- 
terized by the presence of the third costa in the upper molar series, 
coupled with the stoutness of the cingulum, the suppression of the anée- 
rior combing plate, the smoothness of the enamel, and the extent to which 
the upper molars overhang the lower, which causes the enamel on the 
outer side of the latter to be worn obliquely. The lower molars can be 
determined by the flattening of the anterior area, coupled with the fine 
sculpturing of the enamel-surface. In common with the other fossil 
British Rhinoceroses, it possessed a molar series of six only on either side, 
and was bicorn. It ranged through England, from the Hyzena-den of 
Kirkdale in Yorkshire in the north, as far south as the plains of Somer- 
setshire, and as far to the West as Pembrokeshire. It is very generally 
found in association with Elephas antiquus and Hippopotamus major, 
both species which lived in Pliocene times. The association in Wookey 
Hole Hyzena-den with Elephas primigenius and R. tichorhinus and other 
characteristic Postglacial mammals proves that it coexisted with the 
tichorhine species, to which it probably bore the same geographical rela- 
tion as the Elk does to the Reindeer in the high northern latitudes. The 
sum of the evidence proves that it was coeval with the Mammoth and 
tichorhine Rhinoceros, and does not characterize deposits of an earlier 
epoch in the Pleistocene. It has not as yet been found in Preglacial for- 
mations. The R. leptorhinus is more closely allied to the bicorn Rhino- 
ceros of Sumatra than to any other living species. 


If. “ Experimental Researches in Magnetism and Electricity.”— 
Part I. By H. Wipe, Esq. Communicated by Mr. Faraday. 
Received March 26, 1866. 


(Abstract. ) 


This paper is divided into two sections,—the first being on some new 
and paradoxical phenomena in electro-magnetic induction, and its relation to 
the principle of the conservation of physical force ; the second on a new and 
powerful generator of dynamic electricity. 

The author defines the principle of the conservation of force to be the 
definite quantitative relation existing between all phenomena whatsoever ; 
and in the particular application of the principle to the advancement of 
physical science and the mechanical arts, certain problems are pointed out 
which, in their solution, bring out results as surprising as they are para- 
doxical. Although, when rightly interpreted, the results obtained are in 


108 Mr. Wilde—Researches in Magnetism and Electricity. [Apr. 26, 


strict accordance with the principle of conservation, yet they are, at the 
same time, contrary to the inferences which are generally drawn from 
analogical reasonings, and to some of those maxims which philosophers 
propound for the “ipvasloration of others. 

The author directs attention to some new and paradoxical phenomena 
arising out of Faraday’s important discovery of magneto-electric induction, 
the close consideration of which has resulted in he discovery of a means of 
producing dynamic electricity im quantities unattainable by any apparatus 
hitherto constructed. He has found that an indefinitely small amount of 
magnetism, or of dynamic electricity, is capable of inducing an indefinitely 
large amount of magnetism, —and again, that an indefinitely small amount 
of dynamic electricity, or of magnetism, is capable of evolving an in- 
definitely large amount of dynamic electricity. 

The apparatus with which the experiments were made consisted of a 
compound hollow cylinder of brass and iron, termed by the author a 
magnet-cylinder, the internal diameter of which was 12 inch. On this 
cylinder could be placed, at pleasure, one or more permanent horseshoe 
magnets. Each of these permanent magnets weighed about | lb., and 
would sustain a weight of about 10 lbs. An armature was made to revolve 
rapidly in the interior of the cylinder, in close proximity to its sides, but 
without touching. Around this armature 163 feet of insulated copper 
wire was coiled, 0°03 of an inch in diameter, and the free ends of the wire 
were connected with a commutator fixed upon the armature-axis, for the 
purpose of taking the alternating waves of electricity from the machine in 
one direction only. The direct current of electricity was then transmitted 
through the coils of a tangent galvanometer ; and as each additional magnet 
was placed upon the magnet-cylinder, it was found that the quantity of 
electricity generated in the coils of the armature was very nearly in direct: 
proportion to the number of magnets on the cylinder. 

Experiments were then made for the purpose of ascertaining what rela- 
tion existed between the sustaining-power of the permanent magnets on the 
magnet-cylinder, and that of an electro-magnet excited by the electricity 
derived from the armature. 

When four permanent magnets capable of sustaining collectively a 
weight of 40 lbs. were placed upon the cylinder, and when the submagnet 
was placed in metallic contact with the poles of the electro-magnet, a 
weight of 178 lbs. was required to separate them. With a larger electro- 
magnet a weight of not less than 1080 lbs. was required to overcome the 
attractive force of the electro-magnet, or twenty-seven times the weight 
which the four permanent magnets used in exciting it were collectively 
able to sustain. It was further found that this great difference between 
the power of a permanent magnet and that of an electro- magnet excited 
through its agency might be mide atrcly increased. 

i perimcne were then made with electro-magnets of various sizes, for 
the purpose of ascertaining the cause of these paradoxical results. 


1866.] Mr. Wilde—Researches in Magnetism and Electricity. 109 


When the wires forming the polar terminals of the magneto-electric 
machine were connected for a short time with those of a very large electro- 
magnet, a bright spark could be obtained from the electro-helices twenty- 
five seconds after all connexion with the magneto-electric machine had 
been broken. Hence it is inferred that an electro-magnet possesses the 
power of accumulating and retaining a charge of electricity in a manner 
analogous to, but not identical with, that in which it is retained in in- 
sulated submarine cables, and in the Leyden jar. It was also found that 
the electro-helices offered a temporary resistance to the passage of the 
current from the magneto-electric machine. - When four magnets were 
placed on the cylinder, the current from the machine did not attain a per- 
manent degree of intensity until an interval of fifteen seconds had elapsed ; 
but when a more powerful machine was used for exciting the electro- 
helices, the current attained a permanent degree of intensity after an 
interval of four seconds had elapsed. 

The general conclusion which is drawn by the author from a considera- 
tion of these experiments is, that when an electro-magnet is excited through 
the agency of a permanent magnet, the large amount of magnetism mani- 
fested in the electro-magnet, simultaneously with the small amount mani- 
fested im the permanent magnet, is the constant accompaniment of a 
correlative amount of electricity evolved from the magneto-electric machine, 


either all at once, in a large quantity, or by a continuous succession of 


smail quantities,—the power which the metals (but more particularly iron) 
possess of accumulating and retaining a temporary charge of electricity, or 
of magnetism, or of both together (according to the mode in which these 
forces are viewed by physicists), giving rise to the paradoxical phenomena 
which form the subject of this part of the investigation. 

Having established the fact that a large amount of magnetism can be 
developed in an electro-magnet by means of a permanent magnet of much 
smaller power, it appeared reasonable to the author to suppose that a large 
electro-magnet excited by means of a small magneto-electric machine 
could, by suitable arrangements, be made instrumental in evolving a pro- 
portionately large amount of dynamic electricity. 

Two Sree leant were therefore made, having a bore of 24 inches, 
and a length of 124 inches or five times the aeeer of the bore. 

As eaten ue is made of the different-sized machines employed 
in these investigations, they are distinguished by the calibre, or bore of the 
magnet-cylinders, 

Bach cylinder was fitted with an armature, round mnie was coiled an 


- insulated strand of copper wire 67 feet in length, and 0°15 of an inch in 


diameter. Upon one of the magnet-cylinders sixteen permanent magnets 
were fixed, and to the sides of the other magnet-cylinder was bolted an electro- 
magnet formed of two rectangular pieces of boiler-plate enveloped with 


“coils of insulated copper wire. The armatures of the 24-inch magneto- 


electric and electro-magnetic machines were driven simultaneously at an 


110 Mr. Wilde—Researches in Magnetism and Electricity. [Apr. 26, 


equal velocity of 2500 revolutions per minute. When the electricity from 
the magneto-electric machine was transmitted through a piece of No. 20 
iron wire 0°04 of an inch in diameter, a length of 3 inches of this wire was 
made red-hot. When the direct current from the magneto-electric machine 
was transmitted through the coils of the electro-magnet of the electro- 
magnetic machine, the electricity from the latter melted 8 inches of the 
same-sized iron wire as was used in the preceding experiment, and a length 
of 24 inches was made red-hot. 

When the electro-magnet of a 5-inch machine was excited by the 24-inch 
magneto-electric machine, the electricity from the 5-inch electro-magnetic 
machine melted 15 inches of No. 15 iron wire 0:075 of an inch in diameter. 

The author having found that an increase in the dimensions of the 
machines was accompanied by a proportionate and satisfactory increase of 
the magnetic and electric forces, a 10-inch electro-magnetic machine was 
constructed: the weight of its electro-magnet is nearly 3 tons, and the 
total weight of the machine is about 4) tons. The machine is furnished 
with two armatures—one for the production of ‘‘intensity’-, and the other 
for the production of “ quantity’’-effects. 

The intensity armature is coiled with an insulated conductor consisting 
of a bundle of thirteen No. 11 copper wires, each 0°125 of an inch in dia- 
meter. The coil is 376 feet in length, and weighs 232 lbs. 

The quantity armature is enveloped with the folds of an insulated copper- 
plate conductor 67 feet in length, the weight of which is 344 lbs. These 
armatures are driven at a uniform velocity of 1500 revolutions per minute, 
by means of a broad leather belt of the strongest description. 

When the direct current from the 13-inch magneto-electric machine, 
having on its cylinder six permanent magnets, was transmitted through 
the coils of the electro-magnet of the 5-inch electro-magnetic machine, 
and when the direct current from the latter was simultaneously, and in like 
manner, transmitted through the coils of the electro-magnet of the 10-inch 
machine, an amount of magnetic force was developed in the large electro- 
magnet far exceeding anything which has hitherto been produced, accom- 
panied by the evolution of an amount of dynamic electricity from the 
quantity armature so enormous as to melt pieces of cylindrical iron rod 
15 inches in length, and fully one-quarter of an inch in diameter. With 
the same arrangement, the electricity from the quantity armature also 
melted 15 inches of No. 11 copper wire 0°125 of an inch in diameter. 

When the intensity armature was placed in the magnet cylinder, the 
electricity from it melted 7 feet of No. 16 iron wire 0:065 of an inch in 
diameter, and made a length of 21 feet of the same wire red-hot. 

The illuminating power of the electricity from the intensity armature is, 
as might be expected, of the most splendid description. When an electric 
lamp, furnished with rods of gas-carbon half an inch square, was placed at 
the top of a lofty building, the light evolved from it was sufficient to cast 
the shadows from the flames of the street-lamps a quarter of a mile distant 


1866.] Hztract of Letter from Mr. Chambers, Bombay. 111 


upon the neighbouring walls. When viewed from that distance, the rays 
proceeding from the reflector have all the rich effulgence of sunshine. 

A piece of the ordinary sensitized paper, such as is used for photographic 
printing, when exposed to the action of the light for twenty seconds, at a 
distance of 2 feet from the reflector, was darkened to the same degree as 
was a piece of the same sheet of paper when exposed for a period of one 
minute to the direct rays of the sun, at noon, on a very clear day in the 
- month of March. 

The extraordinary calorific and illuminating powers of the 10-inch 
machine are all the more remarkable from the fact that they have their 
origin in six small permanent magnets, weighing only 1 lb. each, and only 
capable, at most, of sustaining collectively a weight of 60 Ibs. ; while the 
electricity from the magneto-electric machine employed.in exciting the 
electro-magnet was of itself incapable of heating to redness the shortest 
length of iron wire of the smallest size manufactured. 

The production of so large an amount of electricity was only obtained 
(as might have been anticipated by the physicist) by a correspondingly 
large amount of mechanical force ; for it was found that the large electro- 
magnet could be excited to such a degree that the strong leather belt was 
scarcely able to drive the machine. 

When the electro-magnet of the 10-inch machine was excited by means 
of the 23-inch magneto-electrie machine alone, about two-thirds of the 
maximum amount of power from the 10-inch machine was obtained. 

From a consideration of the combined action of the magneto-electric 
and electro-magnetic machines, the author points out a remarkable analogy, 
subsisting between the operation of the static forces of magnetism and 
of cohesion in modifying dynamical phenomena, which eas additional 
light upon the nature of the magnetic force. 

On reviewing and comparing the whole of the analogous phenomena 
manifested in the operation of the magnetic and cohesive forces under the 
varied conditions to which the author invites attention, it appears to him 
that magnetism is a mode of the force of cohesion, or is, if the term be 
allowed, polar cohesion acting at: sensible distances, the equivalent of 
magnetic force being obtained at the expense of an equivalent of ordinary 
cohesive force (in an axial direction) so long as the iron continues to. be 
magnetized. 


III. “Extract of a Letter from Coartes Cuambers, Hsq., Acting 
Superintendent of the Bombay Magnetic Observatory, to the 
President. Dated March 28, 1866.” Communicated by the 
President. Received April 26, 1866. 


You will probably have heard from Mr. Stewart that the opportunity 
of applying usefully the experience which I acquired at Kew has been tem- 
VOL. XV. L 


H2 Extract of Letter from Mr. Chambers, Bombay. [Apr. 26, 


porarily accorded to me by the Bombay Government, by my appointment 
to the superintendence of this Observatory. The confirmation of my pre- 
sent appointment will probably depend upon the sanction of the scheme 
of improvements for the Observatory which I have just sent in for the 
consideration of Government. Meanwhile I have arranged the working 
power of the establishment so as to take up the reduction of the old obser- 
vations, and I am sure you will be interested to learn that there is a pro- 
bability of their turning out trustworthy and valuable. The separation of 
seven years of declination-disturbances has already been effected, with the 
results shown in the enclosed Tables and Curves; but as the whole series 
of observations (from 1845 to 1865) will include two complete cycles of 
the decennial period, and as the reductions have already been so long 
delayed, I propose completing the twenty-one years before discussing the 
connected questions and publishing the whole; it is, however, a little 
doubtful whether the opportunity of doing this will be afforded me, as 
the Indian Government, in sanctioning my appointment, have limited its 
duration to the end of next month; and though I am hopeful that, partly 
in consequence of a representation that I have made to the Government, of 
the wide scope for usefulness that is open to me here, and of what has 
been effected and has been engaged upon since my arrival six months 
ago, they may be induced to extend their approval of the appointment 
until the improvements suggested in my Report shall have been consi- 
dered, yet it seems right, as there are some interesting points about the 
results already arrived at, that I should inform you of them whilst I may, 
especially as in case of a second reference of the matter to the home 
Government, you will, I believe, consider them good grounds upon which 
to recommend the continuance of the reductions of the twenty-one con- 
secutive years of the Bombay observations. 

Referring to page 283 of your paper in the Philosophical Transactions, 
1863, it will be seen that these results supply the required knowledge of the 
laws of the disturbances at a station intermediate in longitude between Kew 
and Nertschinsk. The general characteristics of the westerly disturbance- 
diurnal-variation curve are the same as you describe for Pekin and Nerts- 
chinsk. The curve is remarkably regular, and the ordinates between 
8 p.m. and 4 a.m. have scarcely appreciable values, being in the latter 
respect like the westerly curve for Hobarton, and the easterly for Kew 
and St. Helena. The maximum occurs at 11 a.m., which corresponds 
to about 18" Kew astronomical time, implying, by comparison with the 
corresponding hours of maximum at the other two eastern stations (Pekin 
and Nertschinsk), a rather slow propagation of the disturbing action from 
north to south of the eastern part of the northern hemisphere. The other 

curve (of easterly disturbance) presents a less systematic appearance; and 


the ratios are at no part of the day smaller than 0°64, or greater than 
1°83. 


1866.| Eztract of Letter from Mr. Chambers, Bombay. 1138 


The Table of aggregate values of disturbance in the several years points 
very distinctly to a minimum as occurring early in 1864, thus adding 
another to the determinations of this turning-point in three former cycles 
given by you in the third volume of the ‘St. Helena Observations,’ and 
confirming the conclusions you arrived at as to the propriety of the appel- 
lation “ decennial ”’ to the period in question. The Table does not extend 
far enough backwards to fix the time of maximum distinctly, but it suf- 
fices to place it with probability in the year 1859. 

The principal requests that I have made in my Report are for a set 
of Kew magnetographs, and for a suitable room, and for a body of com- 
puters to work up the old observations. 

| Ratios of the aggregate values of | 


the declination - disturbances | 
exceeding 1'-4in amount at the | 


Astronomical hours. several hours in the seven 
years from 1859 to 1865 in- 
clusive. 

Kew Westerl Easter] 
ne (approximate). bistiaemness ciictnebaniece, 
12 | 7 05 ‘70 
13 8 a7 ‘68 
14 9 16 64 
15 10 14 84 
16 11 ‘18 69 
17 12 36 71 
18 13 ‘80 92 
19 14 ‘96 LB bee 
20 15 1-64 1:00 
21 16 2°35 1:08 
22 17 2-73 16] 
23 18 2°76 1:83 
0 19 2°84 1:68 
1 20 2:57 1:56 
2 21 1-86 1:29 
3 22 1°41 ‘99 
4 23 1-06 Ol 
5 0 ‘61 “85 
6 1 40 85 
7 2 ‘45 -80 
8 3 16 1:00 
9 4 11 ‘79 
10 5 16 ‘70 
11 6 08 “72 


| 


Aggregate values in the seven 
CHOP arith. hese sscereadadeula 2801:1 4538°7 
(Se ee 


— 


114 The Rev. Dr. Haughton on the Tides of the Arctic Seas. 


Ratios of disturbance in the 


Aggregate values of all disturb- several years from 1859 to 
ances exceeding 1'4 in the 1864 inclusive to the mean 
several years from 1859 to|| aoeregate disturbance in the 
1865 inclusive. six years taken as unity. 

Years. pee Years. Ratios. 
, 1859 1-43 
1859 1532-1 1860 ioe 
1860 1421-6 1861 0-89 
1861 951°8 1862 1:16 
1862 1240-5 1863 0:64. . 
1863 6911 ~ 1864 0°56 
1864 5959 J EE Ee 
1865 906°8 ~ || The ratio of the maximum in 
1859 to the minimum in 1864 
is as 2°6 to l. 


[V. “On the Tides of the Arctic Seas—Part III. On the Semi- 
diurnal Tides of Frederiksdal, near Cape Farewell, in Greenland. 
By the Rev. 8S. Haventon, F.R.S. Received April 12, 1866. 


(Abstract. ) 


The observations discussed in this paper by the Rev. Dr. Haughton 
were made for him (in 1863-64), at the request of Admiral Irminger of 
the Royal Danish Navy, by Missionary Asboe, at Frederiksdal, near Cape 
Farewell in Greenland. 

They proved amply sufficient for the complete discussion of the semi- 
diurnal tide of that interesting locality; and the following results were 
obtained :— 


1.; Heecentricity of lunar, orbit. 7-2 42 ee eos 0°06786 

2. Mass of earth as compared with mass of moon.... 64°638 

3. Depth of Atlantic deduced from heights ........ 10:03 miles. 

4. Depth of Atlantic deduced from times.......... 3°30 miles. 
~ 


ol XV. PL. DL 


Soc V 


Proc. Roy. 


N?l 


Diagram 
jon +1 


nu 


a 
=~ 


’ 
Ve ly. 


~ 
v 


Lh 


on 


» 
ine 


; ian rte elke 


het 


Y 


akin. 


 . ee 


Si nae Se PEt Aaa Crm apie ofa 
aes eee ote oe 
ie 


maf 


7 \7 
we, [ Al ; 
x Pe 7 
he} V WA 
° 
Z, 
FI / x 7 
& 
3 
PS 


¥v 
i 


ZU 
ize 


Sir F. Pollock on the “ Mysteries of Numbers.” 115 


“On the Mysteries of Numbers alluded to by Fermat.” By 
the Rt. Hon. Sir Freperick Pottock, Lord Chief Baron, 
F.R.S., &c.* 


- (Abstract.) 


This paper is presented as a continuation of one which appeared in the 
Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society for 1861, vol. cli. p. 409, 
and the object of it is to call attention to certain properties of odd numbers 
when placed in a square, according to an arrangement to be explained 

‘below. 

It appears to me probable that these properties are connected with (if, 
indeed, they be not actually some form of) the mysterious properties of 
numbers, to which Fermat alludes in the announcement of his theorem (as 
furnishing the proof of it); for in point of fact these properties give @ 

_ method by which every odd number can be divided into four square num- 
bers, and every number (odd or even) can be divided into not exceeding 
three triangular numbers. 

I am not prepared to say whether or not the method affords a demon- 
stration, and proves that it can always be done; but it always does it, and 
the cause of its success may be distinctly shown. The properties I allude 
to are scarcely less interesting and curious than the theorem itself, and pre- 
Sent results for which I can find no name more appropriate than the 
geometry of numbers, for relations appear to be established between various 
numbers in the square, which relations are not founded on any arithmetical 
connexion between them, but on the positions they respectively occupy in 
the square of which they form a part. 

The arrangement of the numbers is as shown in diagram No.1. Any 
odd number (which may be the subject of inquiry) is made the first term 
of a series, increasing from left to right by the numbers 4, 8, 12, 16,...(4 7) 
This series forms the horizontal line at the top ; each term of the series so 
formed is made the first term of a series, increasing downwards by the 
numbers 2, 6, 10, 14....(4n—2). A square of indefinite magnitude is 
thus formed, consisting of two sets of series, one set all horizontal, the 
other set all vertical. 161 is the first number in diagram No. 1. 

The result of the arrangement of the two series in the manner above 
mentioned is the formation of a third set of series, which may be found in 
the diagonal lines of the square. 


If from the first number in the square (161) a diagonal line be drawn 


towards the opposite corner, it will pass through the first terms of one por- 
tion of the third set of series; the second, third, and following terms are 
taken alternately from each side of the diagonal line. These series increase 


* Read April 19, (See p. 106.) 
VOL. XV. M 


116 Sir F. Pollock on the “ Mysteries of Numbers” [Apr.19, 


by 2, 4, 6, 8, &c....(2n), and with the exception of one term they are all 
in the diagonal lines (see diagram No. 1), in which the single red line 
passes through the first terms, and the double red line shows where the 
terms of the series (the second, third, &c.) belonging to ¢hat (as a first 
term) are to be found; the red ink numbers indicate their order. 

Ly Bee 8, A GAME IB. 7." 8 ; 

The Nos. 203, 205, 209, 215, 223, 233, 245, 259, &c., &c., compose 
the series ; the terms increase by 2, 4, 6, 8,10, &c....2n. Any number 
in the diagonal from 161 may be the first term of a similar series. 

The diagonal from 163 will give all the other first terms of the third set 
of series. 


In order to explain the indices which appear in the diagram No. 1, and 
to show in what manner the series are connected with, and pass into each 
other, it is necessary to point out the properties of the two series which 
compose the square, and of the third series, which is a necessary result. 

All of them have this property in common,—that if you can discover the 
roots of the squares which compose any term of the series with reference 
to the nature of the series, and the order in the series of that term, then 
you know the roots of every term in the series, both before and after that 
term. The first series increases by 4, 8,12, &c. The indices of the terms 
of a series so increasing I have made 1, 3, 5, 7, &c., and they are put at 
the top as being common to all the series that are horizontal. 

For this reason, if two numbers differ by 1, as x, n+ 1, and the larger 
be increased by 1, and the smaller be diminished by 1, and the process be 
continued, the result will be 


Ns; n+1, 
m—l1, n+2, 
n—2, n+3, 
nm—3, n+4, 


&e. &e. 
nu—(p—1) n+p. 


If these be treated as roots, the sums of the squares will be 


2n°+2n+]1, 
2n?+2n+5, 
2n? + 2n+ 18, 
Qn? + In -+25, 

&e. &e. 
2n* + 2n+2p?—2n+1. 


The sums of the squares increase by 4, 8, 12, &e. 


1866.] alluded to by Fermat, , 117 


If therefore the roots of the square, into which any odd number may be 
divided, be p, g, , »+1, and the number be increased by 4, 8, 12, &c. 
...(4n), the mth term in the series will be composed of squares whose 
roots will be p, g,n—(m—1), n+m; two of the roots will be constant, the 


others will vary, and their differences in the successive terms will be 1, 3, 


5, 7, &c. (2n—1); and if you discover the roots of any term in the series, 
you can find the roots of all the terms. 

The second series resembles the first in having two roots constant, and 
two variable ; the differences between the variable roots are, in the first 
term 0, in the second term 2, in the third term 4, &c., and the indices of 
the terms are therefore 0, 2, 4, 6, 8,10, &c., which are placed vertically 
by the side of the square. For if two numbers are equal, as n, m, and one 
of them be increased by 1, and the other diminished by 1, and the process 
be continued, the result will be 


n n (2n? 
n—1, n+1 | If these be treated as | 2n’+2 
n—2,n+2 > roots, the sums of< 2n°+8 
n—3,n+3 | their squares will be | 2n°+ 18 
&e. &e. J &e. &e. 


The sums of the squares increase by 2, 6,10, [4....(4n—2), and the suc- 
’ cessive differences of the variable roots are 0, 2, 4, 6, &c.; and if the roots 
of the squares into which any odd number may be divided be p, q, , n, 
and the number be increased by 2, 6, 10, &c., the roots of the mth term 
will be p, g, n—(m—1), n+(m—1), and if the roots of any one term be 
known, the roots of all the others may be found. 

The small figures in the upper right-hand corner of each division or 
small square are the indices of the third set of series. In this set all 
the roots are variable. The character of the first set of series is, that 
two roots in every term differ by an odd number; the character of 
the second set of series is, that two roots in every term differ by an 
even number; but in the third set of series, the algebraic sum of all the 
roots of the squares into which the successive terms may be divided is 
successively 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, &c. (an odd number): the sum of the roots of 
the squares into which an odd number can be divided cannot be an even 
number. ae Bin 

The following Table will explain in what manner the series is formed 
from the roots of the squares into which any odd number may be divided, 
so as to make the algebraic sum equal to 1. I have preferred to use 
figures instead of algebraic symbols, as being more readily understood and 
more easily dealt with; but the result is the same whatever figures or 
symbols may be used. ‘The series begins from the centre. 

Let—7,—3, 2, 9, which are the roots of the squares into which the 
odd number 143 may be divided, be placed in the centre, and let the posi- 
tive roots be increased downwards and decreased upwards, and the nega- 

. M 2 


118 Sir F. Pollock on the “ Mysteries of Numbers” {| Apr.19, 


tive roots increased upwards and decreased downwards, the result will be 
as in the Table below :— 4 


Order of |- Algebraic | Sums Order 
of Roots. sums of | of squares of 
terms. roots. of roots. terms. 
| 45 7 
2 —13—9—4 8 —23 279 12 
te. oar 
10 —12-—8-—3 4 —19 233 10 
ee oe 
8 —ll—7-—2 5 —15 199 8 
2upbetaie | 
6 —l]10—6—1 6 —11 173 6 
A Ole ag 
4 — 9—5 0 7 — 7 155 4 
Ai tee 
2 — 8-4 1 8 — 3 145 2 
eee ae | 
Centre 1 — 7-3 2 9 1 143 1 
4 5 
3 — 6-2 310 i) 149 3 
ES ee 
i) — 5—1 411 9 163 5 
4 7 
7 — 4 0 512 13 185 7 
4 5 
9 = 3 116013 17 215 9 
4 313) 
11 — 2 2 7 14 21 253 11 
cee amas 
13 —1—3 88415 29 299 13 


It will be observed that the terms of the series 143, 145, 149, 155, 
&c. increase by 2, 4, 6, 8, . . (2). In the column of the sums of the 
roots 1, 5, 9, 13, &c. increase by 4. . 

1,—3,—7,—11 decrease by 4; the differences of the roots, if arranged 
in the order of their numerical value, is always the same throughout the 
series. ; . 

Note.—In the remainder of this paper every odd number that becomes 
a term in any of the series is expressed by the roots the sum of whose 


squares form the number itself; 


2 BO 6ES | means that the number 


occupying that division or small square is 113=(2°+3°?+6°+8°); afigure 
(cr collection of figures) representing merely the arithmetical value is put 


© 


25°0; 0, 8 


into a circle, thus: 


1866. | alluded to by Fermat. 119 


Having explained the construction of the square and the indices which 
belong to the series of which it is composed, I propose to point out the 
properties which discover the roots of the squares into which the odd 
numbers (which are found in the different parts of the square) may be 
divided. | 

If the first odd number in the square be of the form (4 p+2).+1 (or 
2n+1,6+1, 10+1, 142+1, &e.), m being of any value whatever, 


the (n—p)th term will be | —(p+1),—p, n, n | ; these are the roots 


(the number itself would be 2 »?+2 p?+2p+1); and as the index of the 
nth term is x+(n—1), or 2n—1, the index of the (n—p)th will be 
2n—(2p-+1), and the algebraic sum of the roots may be made equal to 
the index ; it is therefore a term in a diagonal series [that the (n—p)th 
term is 2 n’+2 p*+2p-+1, will appear by finding in the usual way the 
(n—p)th term of a series whose first term is (4p+2).2+1, and the 
terms of which increase by 4, 8, 12, 16, &e. ... 4x]; but as two 
of the rovts are equal, 2, n, it is the first term of a vertical series descend- 
ing, thus: p+l, p, n, 

ptl, p, (n—1), n+1 

p+l, p, (n—2), n+2 

p+], p, (n—3), (n+3). 

I call this term (A)* and indicate it by that letter, and from this term 
the roots of many others may be derived (which are indicated by other 
letters connected with A in an invariable manner), whose squares will 
compose the number that belongs to that term. For example, counting 
2p-+ squares backwards from A is a term I have distinguished as W ; 
the roots of the number belonging to it are © 


ptl, p, (n—4 p+2), 


These roots may, of course, be either positive or negative; arranging 
them thus, —p+1, —p, n, —4p+2, n, we have the algebraic sum of their 
roots equal to 2 n»—6 p+3, which is the index of the square in which W 
is found going backwards from A, the index of which is 2n—2 p-+1 (as 
already stated) ; immediately adjoining W: are two squares which I have 
called M and N respectively. 

M is the term next before W, and is composed of the roots 


n—2 p+2, n—2 p+2, 3p+2, p+l1 


N is the term next after W, and consists of the roots 


n—2 p,n—2 p, 3 p+, ?| 
Each of these will traverse the square diagonally, the algebraic sums of 


* See Diagrams Nos. 2, 3, and 4. 


120 Sir F. Pollock on the “‘ Mysteries of Numbers”  [Apy. 19, 


their roots being equal to the index ; the roots of W may also be obtained 
from A by taking its roots down vertically, making , ~ successively — 
n—1, n+1, n—2, n+2, &., until the square is reached, in which the 
index is 2 +2 p+1, and 2 +2 p+1 being the arithmetical sum of all 
the roots of A; A here becomes a term in a series which moves diagonally, 
and on being carried up towards the left will give the roots of W. When 
the indices of the squares through which this vertical series passes equal 
2 n+1, by making p+1, p, one positive and the other negative, the term 
becomes a term in another series which moves diagonally upwards towards 
the left. This must occur both when the index equals 2 »—1 and when 
it equals 2 +1; and as the indices increase downwards uniformly by 2, 
it follows that 2 n—1 and 2 n+1 will be the indices of contiguous terms 
of the vertical series, and therefore two contiguous terms will become 
terms of series moving diagonally upwards to the left; and as these two 
series are contiguous to each other, their terms found in the first series 
(that is, the series in the top line) will also be contiguous. 

These two terms I have designated as AM and AN. AM comes 
from the term where the'index equals 2 +1, and AN from: the term 
where the index equals 2 n—1; the roots of AM are 


| 0,2 p+1, n—2 p+2, n, 


those of AN are 
| 0,2 p+1, n—2p, n, | 


and being arranged thus, 


—2p+1, 0, n—2 p+2, n, | —2p+1, 0, n—2 p, n, 


will move diagonally downwards to the left ; and as each of these have two 
roots that differ in one case by 2 p, in the other by 2 p+2, the terms 
in these series that are parallel to those terms in the first vertical series 
which have their external indices respectively 2 p and 2 p+2, the terms 
of AM and AN will (1 say) in these places become terms in series mov- 
iny vertically, and on being followed up to the series in the top row will 
be found to give the roots of Mand N. The roots of M and N may be 
obtained by another method as follows :—As the algebraic sum of the 
roots of A equals its index, therefore A is a term in a diagonal series 
moving downwards towards the left ; and as two of its roots, p, p+1, differ 
by 1, it follows that whenever the value of ~ has been so altered that 
2n+1 equals the index by making p+1, p, one positive and the other 
negative, the term becomes a term in another series, which series will move 
at right angles to the series last mentioned. Now taking the series which 
moves to the left of A, it is clear that this result will obtain in two places ; 
first, when the altered value of x makes 2 —1 equal the index, and 
secondly, when the altered value of ~ makes 2 »+1 equal the index. 


1866.] alluded to by Fermat. 121, 


The first of these going up gives the roots of N, the second gives those of 
M, and these roots are identical with those obtained from AM and AN. 


The index of A is 2 n—2 p+ 1, therefore when » in moving down- 
wards becomes n+1, n+2,2+3,.....-. 


2n—3 p+2, | 2n—3 p41 | § 


p+, p being two of the roots of each term in this series; by adding 
p-+1 to the first-mentioned root and p to the other, these two terms will 
be found to be terms in two horizontal series, of which the first terms 
are in the first vertical series, and these terms both of them make the 
diagonal index, and therefore are terms in a diagonal series which, rising 
towards the right, give the roots of W. 

A descends diagonally to the left, and on each side of the line which 
leads to W changes to cross diagonals which lead to M and N. W leads 
diagonally to the left to R and 8, and where it crosses AT changes and 
goes up to A. M goes down into R, and then diagonally to where it meets 
the horizontal series from T; its roots there correspond with the series 
from T; it returns to T and up to A. In like manner N goes down 
through S to the line from V, and so to V and up to A. Rand S goeach 
of them across to the vertical line from A, and so up to A: every term 
through which these lines pass has the four roots indicated whose squares 
would make the term. | 

The number of terms in bie whole square, whose four roots may be ex- 
pressed in term of p and 2, is very considerable; and it may be well now 
to present some skeleton diagrams of the many ways in which certain 
members of the square are invariably connected. 

I propose to exhibit several (to avoid confusion, which would arise from 
putting all in one diagram) ; these do not by any means include all the 
connexions that exist; but whatever may be the value of x or py, anumber 
of the form (49+2).2+1, whether it be 2x+1, 62+1, 10x41, &c., 
and whatever be the value of x, gives the following results. See dia- 
gram No. 2. At the (n—p)th term there will be A, which descends 
vertically till the index is 2n—1, then 2x+1, and from these rise up in 
diagonals AN and AM, as already mentioned. A then further descends 
till the index is equal to 2n+ 2p+1, when it rises in a diagonal to W. 

Diagram No. 3 shows certain connexions between AM and AN and 
other terms in the square. AM is always —2p+15 0; n—2 +2, 2, 
AN is always —2p+1, 0, n—2p, n 

If the series in which AM is a term be carried down diagonally till 0 
becomes 2p+1 (that is 2p+1 places), it becomes a term in a diagonal 
series that intesects it and rises to the top, then goes down to the hori- 
zontal series from R, where it becomes a term in that series and passes to 
where it is below M and rises vertically up to it. AN does the same with 
respect to the series from S, and rises up to N. | : 


122 Sir F. Pollock on the “ Mysteries of Numbers” [Apy. 19, 


If the term AM descends till n—2p+2 =2p-+1, it rises to the left in 
another diagonal series and goes on till it crosses M, where it is found that 
the roots are always the same as those which arise from M, descending by — 
means of its two equal roots. The term AN does the same with respect 
to N. 

If AM descend to the margin at am, and one step further into az, and 
AN descends to an, they will. be found to have the same roots, and they 
will be 

; from AM 
—2p+1, 1, n—2p+1, n 

from AN 
aft ts —1,n—2p+1, n 


The only difference being that in the one case 1 is positive, in the other it 
is negative ; but whatever be the value of p or ”, in this portion or term 
of the square 1 is always one of the roots. 

In crossing the two horizontal series from R and S§, it will always be 
found that at the points of intersection the roots of AM correspond with ~ 
the roots of the series fron: R, and the roots from AN correspond with 
those from 8S. 

Diagram No. 4 exhibits the way in which B, C, P, and Q are connected 
together. The roots of A at the (n—p)th square will always be —(p+1), 
—p,n,n, and p+1,p must be one of them odd, the other even; therefore, 
whether x be odd or even, an odd number will be formed by —(p+1), », 
or —p,7. ‘The series from A descending diagonally has the roots n, 
decreasing, but the negative roots increasing. The differences will con-' 
tinue the same; and when the series arrives under that index which cor- 
responds to the odd number —(p+1) n, or —p, n, it becomes a term in 
a horizontal series which goes to P, two terms of which are always 
p, p+ 1. W, in descending diagonally, has its index on reaching PB 1. 
When A has descended so as to reach the even number of the two, 
(—(p+1), », —p, }, it rises in a vertical series to Q; and the three 
series, WR, BP, CQ, always intersect in the same point or small 
square, H. : 

The paper then exhibits in a Diagram (No. 5) all the roots which 
arise from applying the method to the odd No. 161, and shows that the 
roots 


Of Av wouldubeaie os ued es la Dx 2s peal Ono ge 
OR NV ice si Reale arte atk ry Oy ten Obs Oa 
Ota ete A pas Soke ee 8! as ade By. Oy Ls aD 
pe IMi te: Ake awn, i, oe Meena yoo, aie oat 
GMA Mises "pit dre arceusys as Blac Dy AO se pels sae lla 
Oi AGN at 8 We abe sai oe ee eee oar Diy iwi MD fageil ey ay call 


Jt shows the roots of the squares marked B, C, P, Q, R, 5, and many 
others ; and, finally, it shows that 161 would be composed of the squares 


1866. | alluded to by Fermat. | 123 


of the following roots, either 3, 12, 2, 2, or 10, 0, 5, 6; but to set forth 
the roots of the numbers which are in Diagram No. 1, would require a 
diagram larger than could conveniently be put into a publication of the 
size of the Proceedings. The roots 10, 0, 5, 6, if arranged thus, —10, 0, 
5, 6, have 1 for their sum; but it was proved in the former paper (see 
p. 410, Trans. Roy. Soc. for 1861) that if the algebraic sum of the roots 
be 1, then the number is the double +1 of a number composed of 3 tri- 
angular numbers, 161=80 x 2+ 1, and 80 is composed of the 3 triangular 
numbers 55, 15, 10. If therefore any number be doubled, and 1 be added, 
an odd number will be obtained, to which the same process may be applied 
as is here applied to 161. 

_ I have stated that the cause of the success of “‘ the method”’ (though it 
does not at present amount to a demonstration) may be easily shown. | It 
arises, first, from “ the method” requiring every odd number that is a term 
in any of the series to be represented by the roots of the square numbers 
that compose it; and secondly, and more particularly, from every series 
being connected with at least six others of a different kind which intersect 
it, each of which is again connected with at least five others, so that when 
the whole network has been pursued, and the roots which in succession 
form every term have been recorded, it will be found that many different 
modes of dividing each term into four squares or less will be discovered, 
i. e. if the numbers be large. I propose to show the manner in which the 
series are apparently interwoven by an example from each kind. 

21 


23 
Dai A oa es) LAL 


Let the first term in a horizontal series be 22 with 22 as 


the index in the margin, and 21 and 23 being the indices of the diagonal 
series which pass through this square; for, except at the top line, two 
diagonal series pass through every square. 13 and 14 are the variable 
roots, which become 12, 15, | 11, 16, | 10, 17, | 9, 18, | &c. | im the suc- 
cessive terms; when in the second term 14 becomes 15 (15+7=22), 
and the roots are 3, 7, 12, 15, a term in the series which would come down 
from the second square; the roots in that square will therefore be 
3, 12, 4,4; when 15 becomes 19 the roots will be 3, 7, 8, 19, and the 
roots at the top will be 7, 8, 8, 8; so when 15 becomes 25 at the tenth 
term the roots are 3, 7, 2, 25; and as —3, 25=22, another series rises 
up with roots of the first term, 7, 2, 14, 14. 

13 diminishes to 0, and then increases, giving 2 more when it becomes 
15 or 19 ; but the series is also crossed by diagonal series ; and when the 

Zi 198 ho Pos Se. hy. 

23 25 27 29 31, &e. } aS? 
(the sum of all the roots), or 31 (the sum of the variable plus the dif- 
ference of the constant roots), or 17 (the sum of the variable roots minus 
the sum of the constant roots), or 23 (the sum of the constant roots minus 
the difference of the variable), a diagonal series arises. Here are no less 


index in the two rows from the first term { 


124 Sir F. Pollock on the “ Mysteries of Numbers”? [Apr. 19, 


than 10 other series by which this is crossed and associated and connected, 
and the number cannot in any case be less than 6. A series of the second 
kind gives rise to other series crossing it in the same manner mutates mu- 
tandis, which result is so obvious that it is not. necessary further to dwell 
upon it. A series of the third kind has all the differences of its roots the 


same in each term. Let | —7, 2, 4, 14 | be a term in a diagonal series at 
the top row of the system. _ RR eae : 
ul 13 ' 15 
9,2 10 
0 ee se —7, 2, 4, 14 6, 1D, eet 
hos? = eee = 
9 17 
spertg tes) 9.:. Pia 
2|—8, 1, 3,13 —§, 3,95, 15 


When it reaches to the left and to the right, the second piace, as 3—1=2 
and 5—3=2, it furnishes two vertical series ; at the tenth row it furnishes 
two more; at the twelfth row two more. When it gets into the column 
whose index is 11 and then 9, before it reaches the margin or outer edge, 
it furnishes two horizontal series; and after it has passed the margin at 9 and 
11 it furnishes two more, and at 21 it furnishes another. Here are six new 
vertical and five new horizontal series; besides which it furnishes at least 
two other diagonal series which cross it. 

Having stated the properties which belong to the square, if the first odd 
number in it be of the form (4p+2).n+1, and that whether it be 2n+1, 
6x2+1, 10n+1, &c., or whatever be the value of 2, certain squares may be 
found which I distinguish as A, B, C, H, P, Q, W, M, N, AM, AN, R,S, 
T, V, &c., which are connected together by a community of roots where 
the series cross each other in a manner that is invariable. 

The Diagram No. 3 is another example of the manner in which certain 
of the terms in the different series communicate with each other, by the 
roots being common to both, at the point where they cross. AM passes 
diagonally to am, down to an, and up to AN. AN, in like manner, goes 
down to an and up to am and AM. If the first term of the square be an 
odd number of the form (4p+2) n+1, the roots from AM are in an 
—(2p+1), 1, (n—2p+1), 2. The roots from AN are —(2p+1), —1, 
(n—2p+1),. The indices of the diagonal series are . 
and the algebraic sum of the roots is the one or the other, according as 1 
is + or —; but AM also passes to the series from R, and AN to the 
series from S, and go to R and S, and thus go up to W. AM also reaches 
the vertical line from M, and passes up to M, as AN does to N. Lastly, 
AM goes to N thus, and AN to W ina similar manner. Whatever be the 


1866.] | alluded to by Fermat. he aie 125 


values of p and n, these connexions occur, but the form of them yaries 
with the values of p and xz. 

I have pointed out some of the results of having as the first term in the 
square an odd number of the form (4p+ 2), ~+1; the forms will be 2n+1, 
6x2+1, 10n+1, 14n+1, &c., m which'p may be 0, 1, 2, 3, &. But 
there is another form which gives similar results, viz. 4pn+ (2p +1), which 
is in many respects the “ converse”’ of the other; the forms will be 4n+3, 
S8n+5, 12n+7, 16x+9, &c. These are the first terms to which this 


ee Bn) 


system gives rise. The (n—p—1)th term is always | PP, n,n+1 


the former system m produced the equal roots and p the unequal; here, p 
produces the equal and z the unequal roots, and I call the (n—p—1)th 
term A as in the other. This system has also W and M and N on each side 
of it, and other squares similar to the other, but the roots of which they 
are composed are differently formed. M and N come from below. W, 
instead of being = 


willbe 


—p+1,—p,n—4p+2,n, —3p, p, (n—2p), (n+1—2p), 


and other terms are similarly altered, but the general result is the same. 
A specimen ofa square of this form is given in Diagram No. 8, but which 
cannot be reduced to the size of the Proceedings, where p=3 andn=16; 


the first number is (199), and the square is completed so far as to show 


LS ag | 5 al ey cb 
that the roots of the 4 squares whose sum is (199)= —9, —3, 3, 10 
PTO 7a 7 


but neither in this Diagram nor in Diagram No. 5 is the whole square com- 
pleted (to avoid confusion); but if the series be traced in succession, the 
entire Diagram 6 would be filled up, and every term would disclose the 
roots whose squares compose it. In this manner every odd number in all the 
series is divided into the squares that compose it (not exceeding 4), the 
squares being indicated by their roots. 

The two systems of (49+2)xn+1 and 4 p.n+2p+1 include every 
possible odd number; 4n+43 includes every alternate odd number from © 
3; 8n+5 every fourth number from 5, and so on; 2n+1 includes every 
odd number; 6-+1 every third odd number. Many odd numbers belong 
to both systems, and to more than one in each. 151 is an example; it is 
either 10n+ 1 (n=15), oritis 12n+7 (n=12). The paper contains a Dia- 
gram (No. 9) exhibiting the odd number 151 as belonging to both systems ; 
but the Diagram cannot be reduced. The roots of the squares that com- 
pede fal are (10."1.o. 9); "or (3,9: 5,6). 


[Aprrao, 


»f Numbers ” 


1€8 O 


Sir F. Pollock on the “ Myster 


126 


"JATJV.GIU OUOIIq SOdIPUL 


OSOYM SUL} YIIM ANUIZWOD 07 FL SoTquita Mv] OWES oY} ‘arenbs 4S] oY} SayORaL SoLIOS OY} JO MYT OY} 07 SuIpPAo.N puB Sy 4e 
SUId9q Solas oY} Yonoyyye AoJ § W JO FYLSIL ayy UO aq Avot my “(Z+ dp) yuotoyZa00 oy} YIM poreduoo Tes SI w UA AY *aOUL 
OM} OVA UIVsY asoy} PUB ‘S1O]}JO OM} YStUIMF Yowa J pue ‘Ay ‘N 2 IY Wow JW ‘NY wos poawop oq Av NV { ojeues 
-jeue Loy} YOIyA YIM ‘soles 1ay30 Aq passodo SI ya] OY} 09 SprwmMuMop suissed UL osoy} Jo You  ‘wWoy} UseMjoq s[earoqUt 
oy} pus “ureytoo JY pue “AN “N ‘IWV ‘NY ‘VY sj001 yey d pue wu Jo sua} UL MOYS 0} poonporzUT st (g ON) WeaAseIg sty, 


‘p+qd— | JO TeAdozur ue 


‘sorenbs t—d 


‘u Z+tdz—u 
0. lhe 
KY 


0. ‘T+dz— 


T+dp—uz 


-sorenbs 7—d | 


JO [BALoQUL UB 


e+dp—uz 


°9 ‘ON Wreiserq 


\ 
otdZ—u | 
‘dg—u ‘u “Btdp—u | ‘Erdo—u | 
‘dz—u‘d | ‘d— ‘T+d 
Tete le che ‘ane — 
N M W | 
[+d9—ug . Gardo—uge C0 ue 


1866.] 


Diagram No. 7. 


There is an interval of n—3p +3 
squares from the lst term. 


sara 2n—6p+5 
'2n— bp + - 
R Sp +25 p 
n—2p+2, n—2Zpt | 
a 2n—6p +1 
2n—O6p+4 —3p+l1,p+l 
2 n—2p+1, n—2p 
There is here an interval of 
(p—1) squares from S to an. 
2n—4p+3 
oT 2In—4p+ 1 
2n —4p +2 
an -—2p+1, 1 
n—2p+1,n 


There is here an interval of 
(p—1) squares from an to T. 


2n—2p+2 “ives 
nv Dap a 1 
nm—l,n 
2n— 2p 2n—2p—1 
Ag P, P, 2, N+1 


alluded to by Fermat. 


127 


This Diagram (No. 7) 
shows in terms of x and p the 
roots of R, 8, an (which 
comes down diagonally from 


AN), T, and V, and the 


number of squares between 
them; the relative positions 
of these terms depend entirely 
on p, and are always the 
same for the same value of 


Terms similar to these in- 
crease indefinitely as » in- 
creases. The value of cer- 
tain roots is independent of 
n, and therefore is the same 
for every value of x. 


* [The numbers above the letters are the indices of the vertical series. | 


128 Colonel Sir Henry James on the Levelling [May 3, 


May 8, 1866. 


Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. — 


In conformity with the Statutes, the names of the Candidates re- 
commended for election into the Society were read from the Chair, as 
follows :— 


John Charles Buckuill, M.D. The Ven. John Henry Pratt, M.A. 


Rey. Frederick William Farrar. Capt. George Henry Richards, R.N. 
William Augustus Guy, M.B. Thomas Richardson, Esq., M.A. 
James Hector, M.D. William Henry Leighton Russell, 
John William Kaye, Esq. Esq. 

Hugo Miiller, Ph.D. Rey. William Selwyn, D.D. 
Charles Murchison, M.D. Rev. Richard Townsend, M.A. 
William Henry Perkin, Esq. Henry Watts, B.A. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. « Report on the Levelling from the Mediterranean to the Dead 
> Sea.” By Colonel Sir Henry Jamus, R.E., F.R.S. Received 
April 5, 1866. 7 


_ The instructions for levelling from the Mediterranean to the Dead Sea 
having been received after the party had arrived at Jerusalem, it was 
thought best to level in the first place from Jerusalem to the Dead Sea 
during the cool months, and to complete the line to the Mediterranean at 
Jaffa, when the party were on their way home. 

But in describing the line levelled, we may assume that it was made 
direct from Jaffa to the Dead Sea. 

The line selected was, that which runs across the maritime plain direct 
from Jaffa to Lydda, three miles beyond which, on the road to Beth Horon, 
the line turns to the right by Jimsu, Birfileeah, and Beit Sira; and from 
thence up the Wady Suleiman to El Jib, where it again joins the old 
Roman Road from Lydda, by Beth Horon to Jerusalem. But at about 
13 mile on the north road from the Damascus Gate, the line turns to the 
eastward over Mount Scopus, where it reached the altitude of 2724 feet, 
the height of the top of the large cairn on it. This was the highest point 
crossed between the Mediterranean and the Dead Sea. 

From Mount Scopus the line follows the high ground to the Mount 
of Olives, and thence takes the road down to Bethany, and, following 
the road by Khan Hadhur to near Jericho, the line turns to the right 
within about a mile of the latter place, and was carried thence across 
the plain bordering the Dead Sea to a point opposite a small island in the 
sea itself. 


1866.] 


from the Mediterranean to the Dead Sea. 


129 


Throughout the entire length of this line bench marks ( 4) have been 


cut at intervals, wherever it was practicable, on the fixed rocks, or on per- 
manent objects. | 
The following is a list of the bench marks, with the distances between 
them :— 


List of the Bench marks made in levelling the line from the Mediterranean 
to the Dead Sea in March, May, and June 1865. 


Altitude. 


SSS Oe Oe eee 


Distance, 
No. Place ls 
and 
Links 

Pe eRe He wct asc cteceseace 0 0 

Gl OE Oe 0 1490 

SE eS en eer eree 0 7972 

Se Ge CRE sacs 2h sd cone 1 5831 

SET a oe 1000 

6. |Bethdagon ............ 5 5843 

7. |Sephoneya ............ 7 3157 

8. pe ae 9 6495 

0 UE 1 CE ae ‘ll 5922 

eS in Mi dtawtedabiiteds «vss. 14 0358 
i 14 5194 
Bos. Sieh ccen I gobs cocked 15 1714 
Die BA Wada ated ceakins 15 6495 
oe eee 16 4284 
ME, PEs, desc ysscn capes 17 0548 
2 oer eee ee 18 0479 
POT Le catavkceseccy se 18 7527 
18. Bn Pik doctdowewweedit en 19 5196 
19. hy (RES SE eee eee 21 7893 
20. AE TE aR aN 25 7849 
21. BOWEL: soevew steeds seasa 26 5121 
oo. | USES Rayo eee ne ae 27 3392 
mre iy asa ay .| 30 3428 
24. F ”” Ae eercce seeee 30 7617 
6 aie 33 5560 
BMS CA ao cok ven evess 37 1670 


91-435 
126-540 
143°630 
164:770 
248°630 
411-605 
478°725 
549-000 
573035 
517-520 
650:075 
819-180 
747°865 
751:105 

1,157-530 
1,251-470 
1,423°015 


2.064-945 
9,258-250 


2419-505 
2681-915 


Where cut. Remarks. 

castle wall .........;On the wall, 3800 feet 
above level of the Me- 
diterranean. 

town wall ........ On gate at entrance to 
town. 

on fountain ...... On the fountain near 
Jaffa. 

Oma Wells VLak seek At west side of road. 

ana welle csoec86 At the east end of the 
village. 

ona welli yee At the west end of the 
village. 

ona wall “2.3 scsc0 In Sephoneya village, 
near lone tree. 

Ona; BRC. «Soccer On a lone tree on mari- 
time plain. 

garden wall......... At east end of Lydda 
village. 


west angle of well..|Half a mile west of 
Jimzu village. 


OIE TOCKEY Just vacwaecs In road at thrashing- 
floor, Jimzu. 

OHS EOCIOF eacavtcuoses On side of road, top of 

ge old 

GH FOCK Ve | ocee On road, top of hill. 

OR: ROCK sis. ccespps West side of road. 

OL KOCK: “Veeceasse ee Side of road, and junc- 
tion of Wady. 

ON TOCK is. uigscsse. At junction of road to} 
Birfilleya. 

Ol: FOCK Hy ck dnaecee es East side of road. 

ON ROK tc Aba thes On side of road. 

ON COCK sav anniniee'aia. In centre of road. 

OD TOK, Atay. fats ge On side of road. 

OH: TOCK 28 took Hanae On side of road. 

OE Welle were geseces Corner of garden ‘wall 

in Wady. — 

OD. TOE, +s. smanasthad South side of stream. 

OMe SUCK: sacs acss ays .{Entrance to Wady Su- 

lieman. 

OM OCR ky irs pee Hast: side of road. 

ON SOME vcnseceoese Near trigonometrical 
station, Jerusalem 


Survey. 


130 On the Levelling from the Mediterranean to the Dead Sea. [May 3, 


ee, 


99 
. {Mount Scopus 


. |Ascension 
IWetlamiy, 7, salechnendes. 40 2409 
Well of the Apostles.. 


. {Khan ede 


Old Aqueduct 


TABLE (continued). 


Distance, 
in Miles 
and 


Links. 


Place. 


ne eadeeadirck | 37 4078 


eecoee 


39 0236 


39 1721 
09 1731 
39 2794 


See ssasceee|40 4229 
Seats diocerinenl ice) LOIS 


41 6063 
. .| 42 2457 
” ...|43 1606 
~ ...| 44 003 
” ...|45 0375 


a ...| 47 0498 
[47 3127 
48 5296 


50 2545 
51 0706 
52 7866 
53 5174 
54 0339 
54 4465 


62 2514 


@eoore 


bh) @oeeve 
@accee 


Altitude. 


feet 
2,685:390 
2,648°545 
2,688°700 
2,715°795 
2,662°905 
2,603°875 


2,623°790 
2,662°500 


2,665:080 


2,643-220 
2,281°825 


2,208 °755 
2,018°350 


1,519°615 
1,351:845 
1,163-060 
1,039°145 

902-515 


654-190 
776°130 
870°590 


537010 
451°510 
89-715 
99-035 
209-890 
477-045 


1,273°215 


9 eo000e 62 9965 —1,292°135 


on rock 


OMCISUENM » <. eoes East side of road. 

Onanocltan. sacoecens Near Gustam Pole. 

On: pillar. 2. meesen On east side of road. 

OW SLOMC. acsshskalewes West side of road, near 
junction. 

on “walllts se ppeasewees West side of road. 

Omurock. is. taeaaeee Near summit of Mount 

Olivet. 

SUITACC. cans eaiescens At trigonometrical sta- 
tion. 

Om WOUSE sacs. erisce South side of road. 

On POE M..cusdnater Trigonometrical line, 
Bethany to Scorpion. 

On Hock rests «..-(Near well, Bethany yil- 
lage. . 

ON POCK, Boies eseewane North side of road at 
junction of fences. 

ON wall “xnceeus .«+-|Base of Bethany Hill. 

onmock ite cavesee South side of road. - 

On LOCK. Ay eee ee South side of road. 

Ol OCI (esse peer North side of road. 

On rocks i aewate Near junction of Nebi 
Musa. 

ON SLONE ../.....0ne0 Opposite trees in valley. 

Om TOCK “ivtwenersas At the top of the hill. 

Om TOCK  .ccseseaenee At entrance to cave op- 
posite Khan. 

ODL TOCK. sasuenceeen On side of road. 

OMSOCK Wick... aseeeee At top of hill. 

Om LOCK Sectscaseceee On side of road. 

on roekiys Zecaiheees On side of road. 

ON OCK. |. ccpnsstsec North side of road. 

on rock ........+..-[In centre of road oppo- 
site house. 

onstone joy Sunk on the beach o 

> the Dead Sea oppo- 
4 site island. ie 


Where cut. 


On stone ....s000. vad 


Cececceeeeons 


Remarks. 


In centre of road. 
In centre of road. 


Height of Dead Sea on 
the 12th March, 1865. 


At the distance of 34 miles beyond Khan Hadhur, on the road to Jericho, 


the level of the Mediterranean was crossed, and from thence towards the 
Dead Sea the levels are marked with the negative sign. 


On the 12th of March, 1865, the party reached the Dead Sea, when its 


level was found to be 1292 feet below the level of the Mediterranean ; but 
from an examination of the drift wood on the shore, it was ascertained that 
at some time of the year, probably after the winter freshets, the water rises 
2% feet higher, which would make the least depression 1289°5. 


1865.]. On the Amyl Compounds derived from Petroleum. — 181 


From inquiry amongst the Bedouins and European residents in Palestine, 
it was ascertained that during the early summer the level of the sea falls 
at least 6 feet below the level at which it stood on the day the levelling was 
taken, which would make the depression 1298 feet ; and we may conclude 
that the maximum depression at no time exceeds 1300 feet. Lieut. 
Symonds, R.E., in 1841, made the depression 1312°2 feet. 

The soundings in the Dead Sea by Lieut. Vignes of the French Navy, 
gave a maximum depth of 1148 feet, making the depression of the bottom 
of the Dead Sea 2446 feet below the level of the Mediterranean. The 
soundings in the Mediterranean, midway between Malta and Candia, by 
Captain Spratt, R.N., gave a depth of 13,020 feet, or a depression of the 
bottom five times greater than that of the bottom of the Dead Sea. 

The levelling was executed by two independent observers, and from a 
comparison of the two sets of levelling, it is certain that the levels -have 
been obtained with absolute accuracy to within 3 or 4 inches. 

The establishment of a chain of levels across the country with bench 
marks cut on so many points, cannot but prove of the utmost importance 
for any future investigations, or for any more extended surveys in Palestine, 
such as are contemplated by the Society which has been formed since this 
survey was made, ‘‘ for the accurate and systematic investigation of the 
archzeology, the topography, the geology, and physical geography, &c. of 
the Holy Land, for Biblical illustration.’ 

For the survey of Jerusalem itself, it was of the utmost importance, as 
it enabled us to connect all the levels in and about the city with the level 
of the Mediterranean, and to harmonize, so to speak, all the levels which 
have been taken. 


II. “Note on the Amyl-Compounds derived from Petroleum.” 
By C. ScoortEMMER. Communicated by Professor Roscor. 
Received April 26, 1866. 


In a former communication I have shown that the hydride of heptyl 
obtained from petroleum has a higher specific gravity than its isomers 
ethyl-amyl, and hydride of heptyl from azelaic acid. The same is the 
case with their derivatives, and some of these isomeric compounds also 
show considerable differences in their boiling-points*. I could not com- 
pare the different heptyl-compounds which I prepared with those of 
heptyl-alcohol formed by fermentation, as the latter substance is very little 
known, and I therefore considered it interesting to compare the amyl- 
compounds from fusel-oil with those obtained from petroleum. From the 
latter substance I prepared a considerable quantity of pure hydride of 
amyl, which boiled constantly at 33°-35° C.; and I did not succeed in 
lowering the boiling-point any further. From this hydride other amyl- 
compounds were obtained in exactly the same way as the heptyl-com- 

* Proc, Roy, Soc, vol. xiv. p. 464, 
VOL, XV, N 


182 Mr. Schorlemmer on a New Series of Hydrocarbons [May 3, 


pounds. Pure amyl-compounds from fusel-oil were also prepared with the 
greatest care, and their specific gravities and boiling-points compared, 
under exactly the same circumstances, with the compounds prepared from 
petroleum. The results of this investigation are contained in the follow- 
ing Table.:— 
. Amyl-Compounds. 
From fusel-otl. From petroleum. 
Boiling-point. Specific gravity. Boiling-point. Specific gravity. 


CM, ie we 34° C, 0:6263 at 17° 

C. jal Cl 101°C. 0°8750 at 20° 101° C. 0°8777 at 20° 

O iia O 140°C.* 0°8733 at 15°} 140°C. 0°8752 at 15° 
2 3 

C, H,, 0 132°C. 0°8148 at 14°} 132°C. 0'8199 at 149. 


It appears from this Table that the boiling-points of the same com- 
pounds agree perfectly, and that the specific gravities show only very small 
differences, those of the substances obtained from petroleum being a little 
higher. This is easily accounted for by an admixture of higher boiling 
compounds, which towards the end of the distillation raise the boiling- 
points a little, and which cannot be removed completely, even by long- 
continued rectifications. The amyl-compounds from petroleum and those 
from fusel-oil are therefore identical. 


ITI. “ On a New Series of Hydrocarbons derived from Coal-tar.” 
By C. ScuortemmMerR. Communicated by Professor Roscoz. 
Received April 26, 1866. ; 


The light oils obtained by the destructive distillation of Cannel-coal 
at_ a low temperature, contain, besides the hydrocarbons of the marsh-gas 
and benzol series, other substances, which are attacked by concentrated 
sulphuric acid. If the oil, which has been repeatedly shaken with 
this acid, be subjected to distillation, the hydrocarbons which are un- 
acted upon volatilize first, and a black tarry liquid, equal in bulk to 
about half the crude oil, remains behind+. On heating this residue more 
strongly, a brown oil, having an unpleasant smell, comes over at about 
200° C.; the temperature rises gradually up to 300°C., and at last a black 
pitchy mass is left in the retort. Even after repeated rectifications the 
oil always leaves a solid black residue behind, and it was only by con- 
tinued fractional distillations over solid caustic potash and metallic sodium, 
that I succeeded in isolating substances possessing nearly a constant 
boiling-point and volatilizing almost completely. The compounds which 
I thus obtained from Cannel-coal oil, boiling below 120°C., are hydrocarbons 
of the general formula (C,,H,,,_,),, as the following analyses and deter- 
minations of the vapour-densities show :— 

* The boiling-point of acetate of amyl is given very differently by different observers 
(Cahours found 125°, Landolt 133-134°; Pogg. Ann. vol. exxii. p. 554). My ob- 
servation agrees perfectly with that of Wanklyn (Chem. Soc, Journ. (2.) iii. p. 30). 

t Journ. Chem. Soe. vol. xy. p. 420. 


1866. | derived from Coal-tar. 133 


(1) C,, H,, boiling-point 210°C. 
(a) 0°262 substance gave 0°840 carbonic acid and 0°290 water. . 
(6) 0°1978 substance gave 0°635 carbonic acid and 0°2195 water. 


Calculated. Found. 
pay aan a. . 
(ob shantrage 144 87°8 87:44 87:55 
Eee en ke 20). 12-2 W230) $2252 
164 100:°0 99°74 99°87 
Globe with air.......... 5°547 
Temperature of air...... ly Se 
Globe with vapour...... 9°730 


Temperature on sealing.. 250°C. 
Capacity of globe ...... 65-0 cubic centims. 
Calculated. Found. 
6°68 6°98 
The residue in the globe had a brown colour, the oil not being completely 

volatile ; this accounts for the difference between the calculated and found 
- vapour-densities. 
(2) C,, H.,,, boiling-point 240°. 
0°107 substance gave 0°343 carbonic acid and 0°1195 water. 


Calculated. Found. 
Zig ele Loe 2 S70 87°42 
25 A a 2A 12*5 12°40 
192 100-0 99°82 
(a) Weight of globe........ 3°354 
Temperature of air...... Lof5:C; 


Globe with vapour...... 3°5745 
Temperature on sealing.. 280°C. 


Capacity of globe ...... 67°6 cub. centims. 
(6) Weight of globes: ......°3°286 

Temperatureiof air... 9. 7°C. 

Globe with vapour ...... 3°4665 


Temperature on sealing .. 270°C. 
Capacity of globe ...... 55°2 cub. centims. 


Found. 
Calculated. a b 


6°65 706 7:02 
The liquid remaining in the globe had also in both cases a brown colour. 
(3) C,, H,,, boiling-point 280° C. 
0°152 substance gave 0°4885 carbonic acid and 0:174 water. 


Calculated. Found. 

Oot. 49 ost 192 87:27 87°11 
Eg) av 28a aT 12°72 
220 100-00 99°83 


N 2 


184 Mr. Schorlemmer on a New Series of Hydrocarbons [May 3, 


These hydrocarbons are colourless, oily, strongly refracting liquids, 
lighter than water, and possessing a faint peculiar smell, resembling that of 
the roots of Daucus carota or Pastinaca sativa. I have obtained them 
in small quantities only, and could study their reactions therefore only 
incompletely. They combine with bromine with a hissing noise, and if 
the reaction is not moderated, the liquid blackens and hydrobromic acid 
is evolved; but by keeping the substance well cooled, and by adding 
the bromine very carefully, nearly colourless, heavy, oily, sweet-smelling 
bromine-compounds are obtained, without the formation of hydrobromic 
acid. These are very easily decomposed by heating; charry matter sepa- 
rates out, and hydrobromic acid is given off even below the boiling-point 
of water. From the hydrocarbon C,, H,, alone I obtained a sufficient 
quantity of the bromide for analysis. 

0°3715 substance gave 0°3605 bromide of silver and 0:0123 metallic silver. 


Calculated for Found. 
C14 Hog Bro. 
45°45 per cent. Br. 43-7 per cent. Br. 


As it was impossible to purify the small quantity of bromide, the dif- 
erence between the found and calculated quantities is easily accounted for. 

Concentrated nitric acid dissolves these hydrocarbons, much heat being 
evolved ; on diluting the acid solution with water, yellow, heavy, thick 
oily nitro-compounds separate, which have a faint but peculiarly unpleasant 
smell. By heating these nitro-compounds with tin and hydrochloric acid, 
a portion is converted into a black tarry mass, and the solution contains a 
considerable quantity of chloride of ammonium, and a small quantity of a 
hydrochlorate, which can be obtained as a crystalline deliquescent mass 
by evaporating iz vacuo. Onconcentrating the solution in the air, decom- 
position takes place, a violet substance being formed. By adding caustic 
potash to the solution‘of the hydrochlorate, a dark oily base separates, 
which quickly oxidizes into a black tarry mass. Platinie chloride produces 
at first no precipitate in the concentrated solution of the hydrochlorate, 
but after a few minutes a dark violet tar separates. 

I could not succeed in obtaining ‘crystallized double chlorides of tin or 
zinc, 

If these hydrocarbons are heated with a concentrated solution of bichro- 
mate of potassium and. sulphuric acid, carbonic acid is evolved, a strongly 
acid liquid, on which an oily: layer swims, distils over, a resinous sub- 
stance remaining in the retort. As I did not obtain any of the pure 
hydrocarbons in sufficient quantity to study their separate products of oxi- 
dation, I took all that remained, together with the intermediate distillates, 
and the oil boiling above 280° C., which had been previously well purified 
by rectification over sodium. After oxidation, the distillate was neutralized 
with carbonate of sodium, the oil being left undissolved. This neutral 
oil, which has an ethereal smell, and boils between 200° and 300° C., gave 
on analysis 84°9 per cent. C and 11-8 per cent. IL; it consists, therefore, 


1866. ] derwed from Coal-tar. 135 


of non-oxidized hydrocarbons, containing a small quantity of an oxygen- 
compound. The solution of the sodium-salt was evaporated on the water- 
bath, the residue distilled with diluted sulphuric acid, and the distillate 
rectified. It smelt strongly of acetic acid, and also slightly of butyric acid. 
By neutralization with carbonate of sodium, a crop of crystals of acetate of 
sodium was obtained, which were converted into the crystallized silver- 
salt. 
0°1335 of this salt gave 0°861 of silver. 


Calculated for Found. 
C, H, Ag Oo. 
64°67 per cent. Ag. 64°50 per cent.Ag. 


The syrupy mother-liquor of the sodium-salt gave, with nitrate of 
silver, a white precipitate, which, on boiling the liquid, decomposed with 
effervescence and separation of metallic silver, showing the presence of 
formic acid; from the filtered liquid small warty crystals of a silver-salt 
separated. 

0°1314 of this salt gave 0°842 of silver, or 64°1 per cent. Ag. 

The mother-liquor gave on evaporation again crystals of acetate of silver. 

0°2196 gave 0:1418 silver, or 64°56 per cent. 

The volatile acids produced by the oxidation of the hydrocarbons are 
therefore carbonic acid, acetic acid, formic acid, and perhaps a trace of an 
acid richer in carbon. 

The resinous substance left in the retort is an acid which dissolves in 
caustic potash, and is precipitated from this solution as a brown greasy 
substance, easily soluble in alcohol. The alcoholic solution, neutralized 
with ammonia, gave, with nitrate of silver, a white flocculent precipitate of 
a silver-salt, which dried into a brown resinous mass, not fit for analysis. 

As these hydrocarbons were obtained by the action of sulphuric acid on 
coal-tar oils boiling below 120°, and as they differ by C, H,, it appears to 
me almost certain that they are polymers of the hydrocarbons of the 
acetylene series, C, Ho,—-2, formed in the same way as diamylene is 
formed, by treating amylene with sulphuric acid. The products of oxida- 
tion are also in accordance with this view. 

In order to test this theory, I have made some experiments with the 
two isomers C, H,,, namely, diallyl and hexoylene. By acting with sul- 
phuric acid on these compounds, I obtained, besides large quantities of 
tarry matter, polymeric modifications boiling above 200°, having a smell 
similar to the hydrocarbons described above, giving also similar nitro- 
compounds; but the quantities which I got were not large enough for a 
more exact examination. 

The sulphuric acid which was used to purify the coal-tar oils contains 
an organic substance in solution, which can be isolated by neutralizing the 
acid liquid with carbonate of calcium, filtering, evaporating to dryness in 
the water-bath, extracting the residue with alcohol, and evaporating the 
alcoholic solution. It forms a yellow amorphous mass, which has a faint, 


136 Sir B. C, Brodie on the Caleulus of  —_—s [May 8, 


bitter, and astringent taste. A substance with exactly the same properties 
was obtained from the acid which was used to act upon the hydrocarbons 
CoH. , 

I am at present engaged upon experiments to isolate the hydrocarbons 
C, Hon—2 contained in coal-tar. 


IV. “The Calculus of Chemical Operations; being a Method for 
the Investigation, by means of Symbols, of the Laws of the 
Distribution of Weight in Chemical Change. Part I.—On 
the Construction of Chemical Symbols.” By Sir B. C. Broprz, 
Bart., F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry in the University of 
Oxford. Received April 25, 1866. 


(Abstract.) 


In chemical transformations the absolute weight of matter is unaltered, 
and every chemical change, as regards weight, is a change in its arrange- 
ment and distribution. Now this distribution of weight is subject to 
numerical laws, and the object of the present method is to facilitate the 
study of these laws, by the aid of symbolic processes. The data of the 
chemical calculus, as indeed of every other application of symbols to the 
investigation of natural phenomena, are supplied by observation and ex- 
periment; and its aim is simply to deduce from these data the various 
consequences which may be inferred from them. The province of such 
a method commences where that of experiment terminates. 

This part comprises the consideration of the fundamental principles of 
symbolic expression in chemistry, and also the application of the method 
to the solution of perhaps the most important of all chemical problems, 
namely, the question of the true composition, as regards weight, of the units 
of chemical substances. 

Section I. In the first section certain definitions are given of those weights 
and relations of weight, of which the symbols are subsequently considered. 
It may be regarded as containing an analysis of the subject of chemical 
investigation. The definitions are of “a chemical substance,” “‘a weight,”’ 
“‘a single weight,” ‘‘a group of weights,” “identical weights,” ‘‘a com- 
pound weight,” “a simple weight,” and “an integral compound weight.” 

The unit of a chemical substance is defined as that weight of the sub- 
stance which at 0° Centigrade, and 760 millims. pressure and in the con- 
dition of a perfect gas, occupies the volume of 1000 cubic centimetres. 
This volume is termed the unit of space. 

Section II. The second section treats of symbolic expression in chemistry. 
A “chemical operation” is-defined as an operation of which the result is a 
weight. These operations are symbolized by letters, x, y, &c. An inter- 
pretation is assigned to the symbols + and —, as the symbols of aggregation 
and segregation, that is, of the mental operations by which groups are formed. 
The symbol = is selected as the symbol of chemical identity; the symbol 


1866.] Chemical Operations, &c. 137 


0 as the symbol of the absence of a weight, this symbol being identical 
with e—z. The symbol (2#+2) is the symbol of two weights collectively 
considered, and as constituting a whole. 


The symbols zy and ~ are selected as the symbols of compound weights, 
Y 


and it is proved that with this interpretation these symbols are subject to 
the commutative and distributive laws, 


LY = YX; 
(yy JH ay + 2Y,; 
and also to the index law, 
Pot at, 

Section III. treats of the properties and interpretation of the chemical 
symbol 1, which is selected as the symbol of the subject of chemical opera- 
tions, namely, the unit of space. With this interpretation the chemical 
symbol 1 has the property of the numerical symbol 1 given in the equa- 
tion #l1=2. 

Section IV. Chemical symbols are here shown to be subject to a special 
symbolic law, given in the equation 

ey=at+y. 
This property, by which chemical symbols are distinguished from the 
symbols employed in other symbolic methods, 1s termed the “logarithmic ”’ 
property of these symbols. A consequence of this property is that O=1, 
and that any number of numerical symbols may be added to a chemical 
function without affecting its interpretation as regards weight. 

Section V. relates to the special properties of the symbols of simple 
weights, which are termed prime factors, from their analogy to the prime 
factors of numbers. These symbols differ, however, from these factors in 
that, like the numerical symbol 1, they are incapable of partition as well 
as of division, which is a consequence of the condition zy=a+y. 

The symbol of the unit of a chemical substance, expressed as a function 
of the simple weights of which it consists, is identical with the symbol of a 
whole number expressed by means of its prime factor, a”, 6", c%2.... A 
general method is given for discovering the prime factors of chemical 
symbols. 

Section VI. is on the construction of chemical equations from experi- 
mental data. 

Section VII. On the. expression of chemical symbols by means of 
prime factors in the actual system of chemical equations. The object of 
this section is to prove that the units of weight of chemical substances are 
integral compound weights, and to discover the simplest expression for the 
symbols which is consistent with this assumption. 

Such an expression cannot be effected unless some one symbol be de- 
termined from external considerations. The unit of hydrogen, therefore, 
is assumed to consist of one simple weight, its symbol being expressed by 
one prime factor, a, which is termed the modulus of the symbolic system. 


138 On the Calculus of Chemical Operations, &c. | May 38, 


This assertion is the expression of a hypothesis which may be proved or 
disproved by facts, and the consequences of which are here traced. 

The symbols of the elements are considered in three groups. 1. The 
symbols of the elements of which the density in the gaseous condition can 
be experimentally determined, and which form with one another gaseous 
combinations. 2. The symbols of carbon, boron, and silicon. 3. The 
symbols of other elements, which are determined with a certain probability 
by the aid of the law of Dulong. 

For the method of constructing these symbols, which depends upon the 
solution in whole numbers of certain simple indeterminate equations, we 
must refer to the memoir itself. 

The following symbols may serve as an ees of the general 
results :— 


Absolute . 
a re Relative 
Name of substance. Prime factor.| weight in weight. 
grammes. 
a 0:089 | 
4 0-715 8 
x 1:542 17:25 
v 0-581 6°5 
i) 1305 15 
K 0°536 6 
Symbol. 
dledvogen. s56 5.5 6G-0 G+ a thee a 0:089 | 
RHPER  Bigichpe cel! mse) ARG Dees Q0s% Pesan - é? 1-430 16 
i Soy Re BO ak 0-804 9 
SERN OMINO Jens tiece) > val 5 Bees dees pies ee ax? 3173 30°D 
diydrochlorc acid «2.4.2 422) 34 oss: ax 1-631 18-25 
adeoipehlorme Fie. ek axe 3°888 43°5 
iypocitoronsiacid 2.5 sh. vs ses tee: aye? 2-346 26°25 
Peroxide ior chiiorine, |)! 5) US. 9K). AS axré 5319 59:5 
Wilotous aiid geen... aed (hoe sd ocne | eae axe? 3062 34:25 
Ghieriowcd Fo.) .. 220s. ete. ae axe 3777 42-25 
COE DOLE, eS aAN ee oa SO ee rene 5. av? 1:251 14 
Ammonia... ... BOsi a, See | PRee pee a’y 0-760 85 
Protoxide of nitrogen. ee ere eens av? 1-966 22 
Patriot ammonium {2.2 5 ko? .. a®y7é 2-860 3o2 
Chloride of ammonium 22. .... ... sa. a’vy 2-391 26°75 
Phosphorus... Fe Sine ees ace a*g* 5-541 62 
Phosphide of hydrogen BEES kesttr e ths a a*o 1519 17 
Pentachloride of phosphorus... .. ... a’ px? 9°319 10425 
Terchloride of phosphorus... ... ... a’ox? 6145 68°75 
Oxychloride of a WS Pat oe: apy rs 6-869 76°75 
Carbon ... es, ae Ky 0-536+y 6+y 
FACET WACTIC. fant Tatse 1 ieineh eee, Bice EE LA) 28 aK? 1161 13 
LASS 2 a OL A Sara a | ark 0-704 8 
BAAIAE GF aro s5 aaah vest Ae eet MERAY «28h Na! a 2-056 23 
RBET has ut Cees EAE TARA hy oo ant 3308 37 
Acetic anhydride a ked hy ea aes ake 4-559 51 
Acetic acid Sem eet Peter tmae! toes Pi .c3 ane 2-682 30 
Trichloracetic acid ... 1. see wee eee a°y?k°é? | 6-146 68-75 
TRATOC VAIO AA Gre oss 4s one wns avK 1-207 13°5 
ASHI EAS Ec et pe tet bss Wes | wes, wes av?K? 2-324 26 


1866.] On the Motion of a Rigid Body, &e. 139 


Section VIII. Certain apparent exceptions are considered, in which it 


is not found possible to express the symbols of chemical substances by 
means of an integral number of prime factors, consistently with the as- 
sumption of the modulus a. 


The Society then adjourned to Thursday, May 17. 


May 17, 1866. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “On the Motion of a Rigid Body moving freely about a Fixed 
Point.” By J. J. Syivester, LL.D., F.R.S. Received April 


ao: haa (Abstract. ) 


The nature of the present brief memoir will be best conveyed by my 
giving a succinct account of the principal results which it embodies, in the 
order in which they occur. The direct solution, in its present form, of the 
important problem of the motion of a rigid body acted on by no external 
forces, originating in the admirable labours of Euler, has received the last 
degree of finish and completeness of which it is susceptible from the powerful 
analysis of Jacobi; in one sense, therefore, it may be said that the discussion 
is closed and the question at anend. Notwithstanding this, in the mode of 
conceiving and representing the general character of the motion, there are 
certain circumstances which merit attention, and which may be expressed 
without reference to the formule in which the analytical solution is con- 
tained. 

Poinsot’s method of representing the motion by means of his so-called 
“central ellipsoid’? has passed into the every-day language of geometers, 
and may be assumed to be familiar to all. The centre of this ellipsoid is 
supposed to be stationary at the point round which any given solid body 
is turning; its form is determined when the principal moments of inertia 
of that body are given, and it is supposed accurately to roll without sliding 
on a fixed plane whose position depends on the initial circumstances of the 
motion. ‘The associated free body is conceived as being carried along by 
the ellipsoid, so that its path im space, its continuous succession of changes 
of position, is thereby completely represented ; but no image is thus pre- 
sented to the mind of the time in which the change of position is effected. 
I show how this defect in the representation may be remedied, and the time, 
like the law of displacement, reduced to observation by a slight modification 
of the apparatus of the central ellipsoid or representative nucleus, as it will 
for the moment be more convenient to call it. To steady the ideas, imagine 
the fixed invariable plane of contact with the nucleus to be horizontal and 
situated under it ; now conceive a portion of its upper surface, say the upper 


140 Prof. J. J. Sylvester on the Motion of a Rigid Body [May 17, 


half, to be pared away until it assumes the form of a semiellipsoid confocal 
to the original surface, and that an indefinitely rough plate always remaining 
horizontal, but capable of turning in its own plane round a vertical axis, 
which, if produced, would pass through the centre of the ellipsoid, is 
placed in contact with this upper portion; as the nucleus is made to roll 
with the under part of its surface upon the fixed plane below, the friction 
between the upper surface and the plate will cause the latter to rotate 
round its axis, for the nucleus will not only roll upon the plate above, but 
at the same time have a swinging motion round the vertical, which will be 
communicated to the plate. I prove, by an easy application of the theory 
of confocal ellipsoids, that the time of the free body passing from one posi- 
tion to another will be in a constant ratio to this motion of rotation, which 
may be measured off upon an absolutely fixed dial face immediately over 
the rotating-plate ; and furthermore I show that the relation between the 
angular divisions of this dial and the time depends only upon the spinning 
force which may be supposed to set the free body originally in motion, so 
that it will hold the same, at whatever distance, by a preliminary adjustment, 
the rotating-plate may be supposed to be set from the fixed horizontal plane. 

Thus, then, we may realize a complete Ainematical image of all the cir- 
cumstances of the motion of a free rotating body, and reduce to a purely 
mechanical measurement the determination of an element hitherto unrepre- 
sented, but in reality the most important of all, viz. the time. 

I then proceed to point out a very singular and hitherto unnoticed 
dynamical relation between the free rotating body and the ellipsoidal top, as 
I shall now prefer to call Poinsot’s central ellipsoid, because I imagine it 
set spinning like a top upon the invariable plane in contact with it and 
left to roll of its own accord, the friction between it and the plane being 
supposed adequate to prevent all sliding. I start with supposing that the 
density of the top follows any law whatever, and call its principal moments 
of inertia A, B, C, its semiaxes a, 6, c, the relations between these six 
quantities being left arbitrary. 

It is easy to establish that, if a rotating body be acted on by any forces 
which always meet the axis about which it is at any instant turning, the 
vis viva will remain unaffected by their action; this will be the case in the 
present instance with the pressure and friction of the invariable plane, the 
only forces concerned, as we may either leave gravity out of account alto- 
gether or suppose the centre of gravity of the top to be at the centre of the 
ellipsoid, which will come to the same thing. By aid of this principle, 
conjoined with the two conditions to which the angular velocities of the 
associated free body are known to be subject, it is easy to infer that the 
velocities of this. body and its representative top will, throughout the 
motion, remain in a constant ratio, or, if we please, equal to one another, 
provided that 


1866. ] moving freely about a Fixed Point. 141 


where ) is an arbitrary constant. If, now, we revert to the natural supposi- 
tion of the top being of uniform density, it is well known that 
y A:B:C::@+0€:0€+@:a°+6’, 

and these ratios may be identified with those above (although this would 
not at the first blush be supposed to be the case) by giving a suitable value 
to the arbitrary constant X. 

Thus, then, Poinsot’s central ellipsoid supposed of uniform density and 
set spinning upon a roughened invariable plane will represent the motion 
of a free rotating solid, not in space only but also in time; the body and 
the top may be conceived as continually moving round the same axis and 
at the same rate at each moment of time*. 

The problem of the top is completed in the memoir by applying the 
general Eulerian equations to determine the friction and pressure, a process 
which involves some rather operose but successfully executed algebraical 
calculations. 

I next proceed to account analytically for the kinematical theory esta- 
blished at the outset of the memoir, and in doing so am necessarily led to 
give greater completeness to it, and at the same time an extension to the 
existing theory of confocal surfaces of the second order, by introducing the 
complementary motion of surfaces that I call contrafocal to one another : 
confocal ellipsoids are those the differences between the squares of whose 
corresponding principal arcs are all three the same ; contrafocal ellipsoids 
I define to be those the sums of the squares of whose corresponding ares 
are the same. Any two bodies whose central ellipsoids are either confocal 
or contrafocal I term related—correlated in the one case, contrarelated in 
the other, and I show that the kinematical construction in question is only 
another rendering of the first of the propositions herein subjoined concern- 
ing bodies so related. 

Ist. If two correlated bodies be placed with their principal axes respec- 
tively parallel and be set spinning by the same impulsive couple, they 
will move so that the corresponding axes of the one and the other body 
will continue always equally inclined to the axis of the couple, and their 
original parallelism at any instant may be restored by turning one of the 
bodies about this last-named axis through an angle proportional to the time 
elapsed since the commencement of the motion. Virtually, this amounts 
to saying that the difference between the displacement of two correlated 
bodies subject to the same initial impulse is equivalent to a simple uniform 
motion about the invariable line. 

2nd. So, in like manner, if the bodies be contrarelated, the swum of their 
displacements is equivalent to a simple uniform motion about such line. 

* Accordingly, if we conceive any body as lying wholly in the interior of the ellipeoidal 
top, which is its kinematical exponent, such body will move precisely as if it were free, 
and consequently its density may be uniformly increased or diminished in any ratio, or it 


may be entirely removed without affecting the law of the motion of the surrounding 
crust in relation to space or time. 


142 Prof. J. J. Sylvester on a Rigid Body [May 17, 


3rd. In either case alike, the difference between the squared angular 
velocities of the related bodies is constant throughout the motion. ~ 

From these propositions it follows that for all practical intents and pur- 
poses the motion of any body is sufficiently represented by the motion of 
any other one correlated or contrarelated to it. To a spectator on the in- 
variable plane the apparent motion of one rotating body may be made 
identical with that of any other related one by merely making the plane 
on which he stands turn uniformly round a perpendicular axis. It becomes 
natural, then, to ascertain whether there is not always some one or more 
simplest form or forms which may be selected out of the whole couple of 
infinite series of related bodies, which may conveniently be adopted as the 
exemplar or type of all the rest. Obviously, the best suited for such pur- 
pose will be a body reduced to only two dimensions, in other words an 
indefinitely flattened disk, provided that it be possible in all cases to find a 
disk correlated or contrarelated to any given solid*. 

The algebraical investigation for ascertaining the existence of such disk 
is the same whichever species of relation is made the subject of inquiry, and 
leads to the construction of three quadratic equations corresponding to the 
respective suppositions of the original body becoming indefinitely flattened 
in the direction of each of its three principal axes in turn; so that for a 
moment it might be supposed that the number of disks fulfilling the required 
condition could, according to circumstances, be zero, two, four, or six. 
But on closer examination, and bearing in mind that negative equally with 
imaginary moments of inertia are inadmissible, it turns out that there 
are always two such disks, and no more (except in the case of two of the mo- 
ments of inertia being equal when the solution becomes unique). Of these 
two disks, one will be correlated and the other contrarelated to the given 
body, and they will be respectively perpendicuiar to the axes of greatest and 
least moments of inertia. We have thus the choice between two methods of 
reduction to the type form, and this choice is not a matter of unimportance 
(in nature nothing exists in vain); for by means thereof the motion of 
any given body subject to any initial conditions can be made to depend 
upon either at will of the two comprehensive cases (Legendre’s Ist and 
3rd) to which the motion of a free rotating body is usually referred, so 
that the distinction between these two cases (corresponding to the two 
species of Polhodes on either side of the ‘‘ Dividing Polhode,” according 
to Poinsot’s method of exposition) is virtually abrogated. 

From the preceding theory, it follows (as also may be made to appear 
alike from an attentive synoptic view of the commonly received analytical 
formulze as from Poinsot’s theory of the associated “sliding and rolling 

* The peculiar feature in the absolute motion of a diskis, that whilst it is turning in 


its own plane with a variable velocity, the rate at which it turns about itself is constant, 
as will at once become evident from eliminating 7 between the two equations 


Ap* +Bq’ +(A+B)r* =M, 
A2p? + B2g?-+ (A+ B)22=L?, 


1866.] | moving freely about a Fixed Point. 143 


‘eone’’) that in the problem of the motion of a free body, of whatever form 
and subject to whatever initial conditions one pleases, there enter but two 
arbitrary parameters. Calling A, B, A+B the three moments of imertia 
of one or the other equivalent disks, L the magnitude of the impulsive 


AL BL , 
couple, M the wis viva, these two parameters (say p, g) will be M Me: if 


to them we add a quantity = say 7 (where ¢ is the terms reckoned, as it 


may be, from an inérinsic epoch as explained in the memoir), all other ele- 
ments of the motion, as the total or partial velocities and the angles, what- 
ever they may be, selected to determine the position of the rotating body 
become known functions of these three quantities, p, g, 7, and may be re- 
duced to tables of triple entry, or be graphically represented by a few 
charts of curves; and it should be noticed that p, the smaller of the two 
parameters p, q, will be always necessarily included between o and 1, and 
that the other parameter g may, bya due choice of the species of reduction 
adopted, be forcibly retained within the same limits. The five quantities 
0, p, q, 1, p+q will then form an ascending series of magnitudes subject 
only to the liability of the middle term g to become equal to 1 on the one 
hand, or to p on the other: qg becoming unity corresponds to the case of the 
so-called ‘Dividing Polhode,’’ Legendre’s 2nd case (‘‘cas trés re- 
marquable”’) ; and g becoming equal to p is of course the case of the body 
itself, or its “central ellipsoid,” becoming a figure of revolution, in which 
case the motion is practically the same as that of a uniform circular plate. 
Besides these two exceptional cases, the only singular cases properly so 
called, the quinary scale of magnitudes just exhibited serves to indicate all 
the more remarkable cases (requiring or inviting particular methods of 
treatment) which can present themselves in the theory. These may be dis- 
tinguished into special cases, which arise from any two consecutive terms 
becoming (to use Prof. De Morgan’s expressive term) subequal, 7. e. dif- 
fering from one another by a quantity whose square may be neglected, and 
double special cases, which arise when any three consecutive terms become 
subequal ; all of which, together with peculiar subcases appertaining to the 
double special class, perhaps deserve more thorough examination than may 
have been hitherto accorded tothem. I conclude the memoir with pointing 
out the place which this problem of Rotation appears to me to occupy in 
dynamical theory, as belonging to a natural and perfectly well defined group 
of questions, of which the motion of a body attracted to two fixed centres and 
the renowned problem of three bodies acted on by their mutual attractions 
are conspicuous instances. This group is characterized by the feature 
that, as regards them, equations of motion admit of being constructed, from 
which not only the element of time, as in ordinary mechanical problems, but 
also an element of absolute space is shut out; supposing the equations thus 
reduced by two in the number of the variables to have been integrated, 
Jacobi’s theory of the last multiplier serves to reduce both the excluded 


144. Mr. Gassiot on Appold’s Apparatus [May 17, 


elements to quadratures and thus to complete the solution. I notice that 
whilst the time may fairly be said to be eliminated, the space element 
may be more properly said to undergo the negative process, if it may be 
so called, of ab-limination; it is not introduced into and then expelled 
from, but prevented from ever making its appearance at all in the resolving 
system of differential equations. It is from the study of one of these allied 
but more difficult questions that the present memoir has taken its rise as a 
collateral inquiry and elucidatory digression. 


II. “On Appold’s Apparatus for regulating Temperature and keeping 
the Air in a Building at any desired degree of Moisture.” By 
J. P. Gassior, Esq., V.P.R.S. Received May 3, 1866. 


Those Fellows of the Royal Society who were acquainted with the late Mr. 
John George Appold, have often expressed their admiration at the various 
scientific arrangements which he from time to time adapted to his dwelling- 
house in Wilson Street, Finsbury Square. However intense might be the 
frost of winter or the heat of summer, or the brilliancy of the gas with 
which his rooms were lighted, when once under his hospitable roof you 
enjoyed a pure and refreshing atmosphere. Much of this was undoubtedly 
due to the steam-power he always had at command connected with his 
business premises immediately adjacent to his dwelling-house, by which he 
could at any time force a current of fresh air at a given temperature into 
any of his rooms; indeed Mr. Appold always contended that houses could 
not be made thoroughly comfortable as habitations without the aid of 
steam-power. But among the many of his arrangements to obtain equable 
temperature in rooms, there were also those that do not require the aid of 
steam-power, so seldom applicable in private dwellings, and which, being 
easy of adaptation, might be used in private houses with much advantage as 
regards the health and comfort of the inmates. TI allude to his Automatic 
Temperature regulator, and to his Automatic Hygrometer; and these in- 
struments, as originally constructed by her late husband, and used for 
many years in their house, but now repaired and placed in perfect working 
order by Mr. Browning, Mrs. Appold has requested me to offer in her name 
to the President and Council of the Royal Society. She desires me to 
express a hope that they will oblige her by retaining them among the other 
scientific apparatus belonging to the Royal Society, as a mark of respect to 
the memory of one who always highly esteemed the honour he received 
when he was elected into that body in June 1853. 

I annex a description and drawing of both instruments (Plate VII). 


Appold’s apparatus for regulating the temperature of buildings 
automatically. 


This instrument consists of a glass tube having bulbs at eachend. The 


APPOLDS AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE REGULATOR. 


APPOLDS AUTOMATIC HYGROMETER . 
J. Baste, tthe. 


1866.] _ for regulating Temperature, &c. 145 


tube is filled, as also about half of each bulb, with mercury; the lower 
bulb containing ether to the depth of half an inch, which floats on the 
mercury. ‘The tube is secured to a plate of boxwood, and supported on 
knife-edges, on which it turns freely. At the end of the plate, underneath 
the highest bulb, is a lever, to which a string is attached. This string is 
carried, by means of bell-cranks, to the supply-valve of a gas-stove, or the 
damper of a furnace. 

The instrument acts in the followmg manner :—Supposing the stove to 
be lighted and to have raised the temperature more than is required, the 
heat will convert a portion of the ether in the lower bulb into vapour. 
The expansion of this vapour drives a quantity of the mercury out of the 
bulb underneath it through the tube into the upper bulb. The end to 
which the mercury has been driven being thus rendered the heaviest falls, 
and motion being communicated by the lever to the string, this closes the 
supply-valve or damper of the stove or furnace. Of course, if this should 
be carried beyond the required extent the reverse action will take place. 

A weight in the centre of the plate, the position of which is regulated by 
a milled-head screw shown at the side, serves to alter the centre of gravity 
of the whole apparatus. The value of the motion of this weight being 
carefully ascertained, a scale is engraved upon it. By moving this weight, 
according to a scale engraved on it, the instrument may be set so as to 
maintain any desired temperature in the building in which it is fixed. 

The range of action of the instrument is from 54° to 66° Fahr., and 
with a change of temperature of one degree it has the power to raise one 
ounce three inches. 


Appolds automatic Hygrometer for keeping the Air in a Building at any 
desired degree of moisture. 


This instrument, both in principle and construction, is very similar to 
the automatic regulator just described. The acting portion consists also 
of a tube with a bulb at each end. This tube contains mercury to about 
half the height of each bulb, and a portion of ether floating on the mer- 
cury at each end. One half of the tube and one bulb is covered with 
bibulous paper, which is always kept wet, and the tube is suspended and 
turns freely on knife-edges placed just above the covered bulb. The action 
of the apparatus is as follows :— 

A. deficiency of moisture in the air increases the evaporation from the 
bibulous paper. This evaporation produces cold, which condenses the 
vapour of the ether in the covered bulb, and the mercury being pressed on 
by the vapour of the ether in the naked bulb is forced into the covered 
bulb. The uncovered bulb, being now much the lightest, rises, and raises 
a lever, which in its turn opens a valve at the end of a small tube. This 
tube communicates with a cistern kept full of water. The water which is 
thus admitted is suffered to trickle over heated pipes which are covered 


146 Mr. W. Huggins and Dr. W. A. Miller on the [May 17, 


with bibulous paper; upon the desired dew-point being attained, the 
action ceases. 

The range of the instrument is regulated by means of a spiral spring at 
one end of the tube, and an adjustable weight at the other. 

By means of a pencil attached to one of the levers, the instrument may 
be made self-registering. 

An ordinary Mason’s hygrometer is attached to the instrument for regu- 
lation and comparison. 

With a variation of one degree in the moisture of the atmosphere, the 
instrument is capable of supplying ten quarts of water per hour to the sur- 
face of the pipes from which it evaporated. 


III. “On the Spectrum of a New Star in Corona Borealis”*. By 
Witiram Hvueetns, F.R.S., and W. A. Mitizr, M.D., Treas. 
R.S. Received May 17, 1866. 


Yesterday, May the 16th, one of us received a note from Mr. John Bir- 
mingham of Tuam, stating that he had observed on the night of May 12 
a new star in the constellation of Corona Borealis. He describes the star 
as *‘very brilliant, of about the 2nd magnitude.’ Also Mr. Baxendell of 
Manchester wrote to one of us giving the observations which follow of the 
new star, as seen by him on the night of the 15th instant. 

«A new star has suddenly burst forth in Corona. It is somewhat less 
than a degree distant from ¢ of that constellation in a south-easterly direc- 
tion, and last night was fully equal in brilliancy to G Serpentis or vy Her- 
culis, both stars of about the 3rd magnitude.” 

Last night, May 16, we observed this remarkable object. - The star 
appeared to us considerably below the 3rd magnitude, but brighter than e 
Coronz. In the telescope it was surrounded with a faint nebulous haze, 
extending to a considerable distance, and gradually fading away at the 
boundary}. A comparative examination of neighbouring stars showed 


* The Astronomer Royal wrote to one of us on the 18th, “ Last night we got a meri- 
dian observation of it; on a rough reduction its elements are— 


eA. US ob, May 17 A. cs. sconcueaemenes 15® 53™ 56%-08, 

SAS BD kb Anes 9 A ae MS 8 UP 63° 41’ 53”, 
agreeing precisely with Argelander, No. 2765 of “‘ Bonner Sternverzeichniss,” declina- 
tion + 26°, magnitude 9:5.” Mr. Baxendell writes on the 21st, “It is probable 
that this star will turn out to be a variable of long or irregular period, and it may be 
conveniently at once designated T Coronex.” Sir John Herschel informs one of us that 
on June 9, 1842, he saw a star of the 6th magnitude in Corona very nearly in the 
place of this strange star. As Sir John Herschel’s position was laid down merely by 
naked eye allineations, the star seen by him may have been possibly a former tempo- 
rary outburst of light in this remarkable object. 

f¥ On the 17th this nebulosity was suspected only; on the 19th and 21st it was not 

seen. 


1866.] Spectrum of a New Star in Corona Borealis. 147 


that this nebulosity really existed about the star. When the spectroscope 
was placed on the telescope, the light of this new star formed a spectrum 
unlike that of any celestial body which we have hitherto examined. The 
light of the star is compound, and has emanated from two different sources. 
Fach light forms its own spectrum. In the instrument these spectra appear 
superposed. The principal spectrum is analogous to that of the sun, and is 
evidently formed by the light of an incandescent solid or liquid photosphere, 
which has suffered absorption by the vapours of an envelope cooler than 
itself. The second spectrum consists of a few bright lines, which indicate 
that the light by which itis formed was emitted by matter in the state of 
luminous gas*. These spectra are represented with considerable approxi- 
mative accuracy in a diagram which accompanies this paper. 


Spectrum of Absorption and Spectrum of Bright Lines forming the Compound 
Spectrum of a New Star near « Coronz Borealis. 


Description of the spectrum of absorption.—In the red a little more 
refrangible than Fraunhofer’s C are two strong dark lines. The interval 
between these and a line a little less refrangible than D is shaded by a num- 
ber of fine lines very near each other. A less strongly marked line is seen 
about the place of solar D. Between D and a portion of the spectrum 
about the place of 6 of the solar spectrum, the lines of absorption are 
numerous, but very thin and faint. A little beyond 6 commences a series 
of close groups of strong lines ; these follow each other at small intervals, as 
far as the spectrum can be traced. 

Description of the gaseous spectrum.—A bright line, much more bril- 
liant than the part of the continuous spectrum upon which it falls, occupies 
a position which several measures make to be coincident with Fraun- 
hofer’s F+. At rather more than one-fourth of the distance which 


* The position of the groups of dark lines shows that the light of the photosphere, 
after passing through the absorbent atmosphere, is yellow. ‘The light, however, of the 
green and blue bright lines makes up to some extent for the green and blue rays (of 
other refrangibilities) which have been stopped by absorption. ‘To the eye, therefore, 
the star appears nearly white. However, as the star flickers, there may be noticed an 
occasional preponderance of yellow or blue. Mr. Baxendell, without knowing the re- 
sults of prismatic analysis, describes the impression he received to be ‘‘ as if the yellow 
of the star were seen through an overlying film of a blue tint.” 

t On the 17th, the lines of hydrogen, produced by taking the induction-spark through 
the vapour of water, were compared in the instrument simultaneously with the bright 
ines of the star. The brightest line coincided with the middle of the expanded line of 
hydrogen which corresponds to Fraunhofer’s F. On account of the faintness of the red 

VOL. XV. . 


148 Mr. W. Huggins and Dr. W. A. Miller on the [May 17, 


separates F from G, a second and less brilliant line was seen. Both 
these lines were narrow and sharply defined. Beyond these lines, and 
at a distance a little more than one-third of that which separates the 
second bright line from the strongest bright one, a third bright line 
was observed. The appearance of this line suggested that it was either 
double or undefined at the edges. In the more refrangible part of 
the spectrum, probably not far from G of the solar spectrum, glimpses were 
obtained of a fourth and faint bright line. At the extreme end of the 
visible part of the less refrangible end of the spectrum, about C, appeared 
a line brighter than the normal relative brilfiancy of this part of the 
spectrum. The brightness of this line, however, was not nearly so marked 
in proportion to that of the part of the spectrum where it occurs, as 
was that of the lines in the green and blue *. 

General Conclusions.—It is difficult to imagine the present physical 
constitution of this remarkable object. There must be a photosphere of 
matter in the solid or liquid state emitting light of all refrangibilities. Sur- 
rounding this must exist also an atmosphere of cooler vapours, which give 
rise by absorption to the groups of dark lines. 

Besides this constitution, which it possesses in common with the sun and 
the stars, there must exist the source of the gaseous spectrum. That this 
is not produced by the faint nebulosity seen about the star is evident by 
the brightness of the lines, and the circumstance that they do not extend 
in the instrument beyond the boundaries of the continuous spectrum. The 
gaseous mass from which this light emanates must be at a much higher 
temperature than the photosphere of the star; otherwise it would appear 
impossible to explain the great brilliancy of the lines compared with the 
corresponding parts of the continuous spectrum of the photosphere. The 
position of. two of the bright lines suggests that this gas may consist 
chiefly of hydrogen. 

If, however, hydrogen be really the source of some of the bright lines, 

the conditions under which the gas emits the light must be different from 
those to which it has been submitted in terrestrial observations ; for it is 
well known that the line of hydrogen in the green is always fainter and 
more expanded than the brilliant red line which characterizes the spectrum 
of this gas. On the other hand, the strong absorption indicated by the 


end of the spectrum, when the amount of dispersion necessary for these observations was 
employed, the exact coincidence of the line in this part of the spectrum with the red line » 
of hydrogen, though extremely probable, was not determined with equal certainty. 

* The spectra of the star were observed again on the 17th, the 19th, the 21st, and the 
23rd. On these evenings no important alteration had taken place. On the 17th and suc- 
ceeding evenings, though the spectrum of the waning star was fainter than on the 16th, 
the red bright line appeared a little brighter relatively to the green and blue bright lines. 
On the 19th and 21st the absorption lines about 0 were stronger than on the 16th. From 
the 16th the continuous spectrum diminished in brightness more rapidly than the 
gaseous spectrum, so that on the 23rd, though the spectrum as a whole was faint, the 
‘bright lines were brilliant when compared with the continuous spectrum. 


1866.] Spectrum of a New Star in Corona Borealis. 149 


line-F of the solar spectrum, and the still stronger corresponding lines in 
some stars, would indicate that under suitable conditions hydrogen may 
emit a strong !uminous radiation of this refrangibility *. 

The character of the spectrum of this star, taken together with its sudden 
outburst in brilliancy and its rapid decline in brightness, suggest to us the 
rather bold speculation that, in consequence of some vast convulsion 
taking place in this object, large quantities of gas have been evolved from 
it, that the hydrogen present is burning by combination with some cther 
element and furnishes the light represented by the bright lines, also that 
the flaming gas has heated to vivid incandescence the solid matter of the 
photosphere. As the hydrogen becomes exhausted, all the phenomena di- 
minish in intensity, and the star rapidly wanes. 

In connexion with this star, the observations which we made upon the 
spectra of a Orionis and 6 Pegasi, that they contain no absorption lines of 
hydrogen, appear to have some new interest. The spectra of these stars 
agree in their general characters with the absorption spectrum of the new 
star. The whole class of white stars are distinguished by having hydrogen 
lines of extraordinary force. It may also be mentioned here that we have 
found that the spectra of several of the more remarkable of the variable 
stars, namely those distinguished by an orange or ruddy tint, possess a close 
general accordance with those of a Orionis, 3 Pegasi, and the absorption 
spectrum of the remarkable object described in this paper. The purely 
speculative idea presents itself from these observations, that hydrogen pro- 
bably plays an important part in the differences of physical constitution 
which apparently separate the stars into groups, and possibly also in the 
changes by which these differences may be brought aboutf. 


_* On the dependence of the relative characters of the bright lines of hydrogen upon 
conditions of pressure and temperature see Pliicker and Hittorf, Phil. Trans. 18c5, p. 21 
tT Mr. Baxendell sends us the following Table of magnitudes :— 


h m 
May 15 at 12 0G.M.T., T Coronz = 3°6 or 3°7 magnitude. 
» 16 ,, 10 30 ” ” = 4:2 
ie Binh de 0 ” ” = 49 
ES of 2h 2 oO a +9 == St 
te iksst det, LD oc on = Of, 
i lV Ais) 4 He == Oe 
» 21, 12 0 ” ” = 73 
59 22 ge WA NS a Be = i477 
Sion aes oO) os re = 
i 2Ad KO AD: 53 ‘5 oi! 


oO 2 


150 Rev. C. L. Dodgson on Condensation of Determinants. [May 17, 


IV. “Condensation of Determinants, being a new and brief Method 
for computing their arithmetical values.” By the Rey. C. L. 
Dopeson, M.A., Student of Christ Church, Oxford. Com- 
municated by the Rev. BARtHoLomMEw Pricz, M.A., F.R.S. 
Received May 15, 1866. 


If it be proposed to solve a set of simultaneous linear equations, not 
being all homogeneous, involving 2 unknowns, or to test their compatibility - 
when all are homogeneous, by the method of determinants, in these, as 
well as in other cases of common occurrence, it is necessary to compute 
the arithmetical values of one or more determinants—such, for example, as 


1, 3,—2 
2,1, 4 
| 3, 5,—1 


Now the ae method, so far as I am aware, that has been hitherto 
employed for such a purpose, is that of multiplying each term of the first 
row or column by the determinant of its complemental minor, and affecting 
the products with the signs + and — alternately, the determinants re- 
quired in the process being, in their turn, broken up in the same manner 
until determinants are finally arrived at sufficiently small for mental com- 


putation. 
This process, in the above instance, would run thus :— 
1, 3,—2 
pas ; 3, —2 | | 3,—2 | 
=1x | | es ? 3X ; 
: . : Doss | 9, —1 | es | 1; 4 | 


=—2] —14+42=7. 


But such a process, when the block consists of 16, 25, or more terms, is 
so tedious that the old method of elimination is much to be preferred for 
solving simultaneous equations; so that the new method, excepting for 
equations containing 2 or 3 unknowns, is practically useless. 

The new method of computation, which I now proceed to explain, and 
for which ‘‘ Condensation’’ appears to be an appropriate name, will be 
found, I believe, to be far shorter and simpler than any hitherto employed. 

In the following remarks I shall use the word “ Block ” to denote any 
number of terms arranged in rows and columns, and “interior of a block ” 
to denote the block which remains when the first and last rows and columns 
are erased. 

The process of ‘‘ Condensation ”’ is exhibited in the following rules, in 
which the given block is supposed to consist of m rows and ” columns :-— 

(1) Arrange the given block, if necessary, so that no ciphers occur in its 
interior. This may be done either by transposing rows or columns, or by 
adding to certain rows the several terms of other rows multiplied by 
eertain multipliers. 

(2) Compute the determinant of every minor consisting of four adjacent 


1866.] Rev. C. L. Dodgson on Condensation of Determinants. 151 


terms. These values will constitute a second block, consisting of n—1 
rows and n—1 columns. 
(3) Condense this second block in the same manner, dividing each term, 
when found, by the corresponding term in the interior of the first block. 
(4) Repeat this process as often as may be necessary (observing that in 
condensing any block of the series, the rth for example, the terms so found 
must be divided by the corresponding terms in the interior of the r— ith 
block), until the block is condensed to a single term, which will be the 
required value. 
As an instance of the foregoing rules, let us take the block 
se ait i i aa 
a oh By agg 
Sie og 
2 3 38), 
; 3&8 —1 2 
—l] —5 8 
] 1] —4 


8 ae | ; and this, by rule (4), into —8, 


; this, again, by 


By rule (2) this is condensed into 


rule (3), is condensed into 


which is the required value. 

The simplest method of working this rule appears to be to arrange the 
series of blocks one under another, as here exhibited ; it will then be found 
very easy to pick out the divisors required in rules (3) and (4). 


=e yd GA 
ieee iG 
eet bot aha 
jae i) SS 8 
si lodite 
—-l -5 8 
Ledwindin 24 
bali 
Bai 16 


This process cannot be continued when ciphers occur in the interior of 
any one of the blocks, since infinite values would be introduced by em- 
ploying them as divisors. When they occur in the given block itself, it 
may be rearranged as has been already mentioned ; but this cannot be done 
when they occur in any one of the derived blocks ; in such a case the 
given block must be rearranged as circumstances require, and the operation 
commenced anew. 

The best way of doing this is as follows :— 

Suppose a cipher to occur in the Ath row and Ath column of one of the 
derived blocks (reckoning both row and column from the nearesé corner 
of the block); find the term in the Ath row and Ath column of the given 


152 Rev. C. L. Dodgson on Condensation of Determinants. [May 17, 


block (reckoning from the corresponding corner), and transpose rows or 
columns cyclically until it is left in an outside row or column. When the 
necessary alterations have been made in the derived blocks, it will be found 
that the cipher now occurs in an outside row or column, and therefore 
need no longer be used as a divisor. 

The advantage of cyclical transposition is, that most of the terms in the 
new blocks will have been computed already, and need only be copied; in 
no case will it be necessary to compute more than one new row or column 
for each block of the series. 3 : 

In the following instance it will be seen that in the first series of blocks 
a cipher occurs in the interior of the third. We therefore abandon the 
process at that pot and begin again, rearranging the given block by 
transferring the top row to the bottom; and the cipher, when it occurs, is 
now found in an exterior row. It will be observed that in each block of 
the new series, there is only one new row to be computed; the other rows 
are simply copied from the work already done. 


2s Bop Wes 1 2° 7) ae 
ees 7 eh 1-1. 
fe eee 20) 2 
|2 fe a0 a (72, 
fe Oe aang (2, +152) er 
ey bo) 3: (3 5a 
ere 3, ere 
oe ee —5 —3 Se 
}-5 -—3 —1 —5| ee 
= 30 . bide 0 Oe 
TES 66 nae 
6 S60 ae 1 eet 
0. 
118 40 
36. 


The fact that, whenever ciphers occur in the interior of a derived block, 
it is necessary to recommence the operation, may be thought a great 
obstacle to the use of this method; but I believe it will be found in prac- 
tice that, even though this should occur several times in the course of one 
operation, the whole amount of labour will still be much less than that in- 
volved in the old process of computation. 


I now proceed to give a proof of the validity of this process, deduced 
from a well-known theorem in determinants ; and in doing so, I shall use 
the word ‘‘adjugate’’ in the following sense :—if there be a square block, 
and if a new block be formed, such that each of its terms is the determi- 
nant of the complemental minor of the corresponding term of the first 
block, the second block is said to be adjugate to the first. 


1866.] Rev. C. L. Dodgson on Condensation of Determinants. 158 


. The theorem referred to is the following :— 

‘If the determinant of a block =R, the determinant of any minor of 
the mth degree of the adjugate block is the product of R”-! and the 
ee which, in R, multiplies the determinant of the corresponding 


minor.’ 
Let us first taikee a block of 9 terms, 
Qi G2 Q,3 
a oo Gees R; 
~ as a3, a, 5 


and let a,, represent the determinant of the complemental minor of a,,,, 


and so on. 
If we ‘“condense”’ this, by the method already given, we get the block 


as eat , and, by the theorem above cited, the determinant of this, 


a, 3 a,, 1 
° a 
viz. 399 an =Rxa,, 
a, 3 
ae H.4 
. Bu. 
Hence R= ‘—» 11 , which proves the rule. 


: @>,9 
Secondly, let us take a block of 16 terms: 


a a 


IR? Fo VS Se 


See eee 
If we “‘condense”’ this, we get a block of 9 terms; let us denote it by 


Via 
‘ 7a 1a woe, oo) — 
LORRY 


If we ‘‘condense” this block again, we get a block of 4 terms, each 
of which, by the preceding paragraph, is the determinant of 9 terms 
of the original block; that is to say, we get the block J M4 ee ; 

Ora Ora 


wr | =— lx 6, ,; therefore 
4 1,1 | 


a,, 1 


21 


a 


but, by the theorem already quoted, 


: ao ean | ; that is, R may be obtained by “condensing” the block 
2,2 


| Os 4 Oa } 
W4 O11 
This proves the rule for a block of 16 terms; and similar proofs might 


be given for larger blocks. 


I shall conclude by showing how this process may be applied to the 
solution of simultaneons linear equations, 


154 Rev. C. L. Dodgson on Condensation of Determinants. [May 17, 


If we take a block consisting of m rows and x+1 columns, and “con- 
dense ”’ it, we reduce it at last to 2 terms, the first of which is the deter- 
minant of the first 2 columns, the other of the last 2 columns. 

Hence, if we take the m simultaneous equations, 


@4 a ‘ il He. BOT eee +, n4,=9, 
oe Py Ree ee +a, ie 
and if we condense the whole block of coefficients and constants, viz. 
Qype + Gynt 
3 
a, a, 


Uh Sotto nm, n+1 


we reduce it at last to 2 terms: let us denote them by S, T, so that 


Di ena, ‘ O1> <> - Ont 
s= : slat esto Weel eS : ‘ 
Qn,1 gq ann Anjores “An nty 


Now we know that 7,=(—)” = which may be written in the form 
(—)S.2,=T. 

Hence the 2 terms obtained by the process of condensation may be 
converted into an equation for x,, by multiplying the first of them by z,, 
affected with + or —, according as m is even or odd. The latter part of 
the rule may be simply expressed thus:—‘“ place the signs + and — 
alternately over the several columns, beginning with the last, and the sign 
which occurs over the column containing z, is the sign with which 2, is to 
be affected.” 

When the value of #, has been thus found, it may be substituted in the 
first n— 1 equations, and the same operation repeated on the new block, 
which will now consist of x—1 rows and x columns. But in calculating 
the second series of blocks, it will be found that most of the work has been 
already done; in fact, of the 2 determinants required in the new block, one 
has been already computed correctly, and the other so nearly so that it 
only requires the /as¢ column in each of the derived blocks to be corrected. 

In the example given opposite, after writing + and — alternately over 
the columns, beginning with the last, we first condense the whole block, and 
thus obtain the 2 terms 36 and — 72. Obserying that the 2-column has 
the sign — placed over it, we multiply the 36 by —2, and so form the 
equation —362 = — 72, which gives v=2. 

Hence the 2-terms in the first four equations become respectively 
2, 2,4, and 2; adding these values to the constant terms in the same equa- 
tions, we obtain a block of which we need only write down the last two 


2. 4. 
columns, viz. ride 
—l]—2 


2. 6 


1866.|] Rev. C. L. Dodgson on Condensation of Determinants. 155 


0 
0 
2 


We then condense these into the column 


3 
—1 
—5 


the second block of the first series the column 


3 0 
—1 0 
—5 2 


, and, supplying from 


» we obtain 


as the last two columns of the second block of the new series; 


and proceeding thus we ultimately obtain the two terms 12,12. Observing 
that the y-column has the sign + placed over it, we multiply the first 
12 by +y, and so form the equation 12y=12, which givesy=1. The 


values of z, uv, and v are similarly found. 


It will be seen that when once the given block has been successfully 
condensed, and the value of the first unknown obtained, there is no further 


danger of the operation being interrupted by the occurrence of ciphers. 
a Aaa eae img Bile 
z+2y + 2— u +2v +2 =0 
z—y -2z2-u—v--4=0 
2c +y — ze —2u — v -6 =0 
z—ly —2z2— uu +2v +4 =0 
2e — y +22 + uw —dv —8 =0 


Bp thad mie 21.7 2 4 Bieri (O 2 ga0- fo oii Veto 
r1] -—1 -2 —1 -1 -4 —1 -—2 —l —3 —l —1l —Qv=4 
2 = pe1—2 1 ~6 ies -1-1] j3° 3 | 
Petal, 2-4 2 6 ghitg ot Ligne genet | 
pee Ss te 8 BA Pena] dey Spe sr 4 
Eaoo 3 —6 aaihk O 16 6| 
8 3 3-1 2 LE reel CL Ea ep ee me eee ane! NI 
Bee oer ped Slo 1 EO 
ae eS 4 8 2 | 
ed GO.) 12 12: | 
ee ee cece cderebne 
—17 8 —4 6 
O4si2. 12 
| 13 40 —8 
| 36 —72 | 
nga MEN te i NORA ata eee icles desman: ba? oh ox (Oe ood Wc Med shaw wb xls, MEE 
ai htop Wee 
52 +2y —32 + 3 =0 
bz — y —2z2 + 7 =0 
2c +3y + 2 —12 =0 
mee 3.8 = a a eee al 
3-1 —2 7 SIMO Te ee Ne SU eo ss be Suen «aha oes 
ON GRE SEN 
esr —1d Pa Ty=—l4 Bo Po em Phe mea en ne cr esse nese nesssresseasas od 
_ ag aaa Wy 
| —22 22 | 
ON an ad RN GOL ENE AEP = EBA. MENS OO) ig ES a eT 


The Society then adjourned over the Whitsuntide Recess to Thursday, 


May 31. 


156 . © Dr.C.B. Radcliffe on Electroscopic §. [May3l,. 
May 31, 1866. 


Dr. WILLIAM ALLEN MILLER, Treasurer and Vice-President, 
in the Chair. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “An Account of Experiments in some of which Electroscopic 
Indications of Animal Electricity were detected for the first 
time by a new method of experimenting.” By Cuaries BLanp 
RavciirFe, M.D., Fellow of the Royal College of Physicians 
in ‘London, Physician to the Westminster Hospital and to the 
National Hospital for Paralysis and Epilepsy, &c. Communi- 
cated by Cuartes Brooke, M.A. Received March 15, 1866. 


Very soon after the discovery of animal electricity by Galvani, Hemmer 
ascertained that electroscopic indications of electricity might be obtained 
at the surface of the human body. The instruments used in these investi- 
gations were the electroscope of Saussure and the condenser of Volta: the 
broad result arrived at was—that the indications in question might be 
sometimes present and sometimes absent; that they pointed sometimes to 
positive electricity, and sometimes to negative; and that they did not 
. depend (except, perhaps, in a very small degree) upon the friction of the 
hair, or skin, or clothes, or carpet. 

Upwards of sixty years have passed since Hemmer published the account 
of his labours. During the first half of this period not a little good work 
was done in this branch of scientific inquiry, especially by Gardini in 
1792, by Ahrens in 1817, and by Nasse in 1834; and what was done is in 
the main confirmatory of the genuineness of the work done by Hemmer. 
During the last thirty years, on the contrary, little or nothing has been 
done*. It seems, indeed, as if the discovery of the galvanometer, now 
a little more than thirty years ago, had diverted attention from the elec- 
troscope: at any rate it is the fact that it has been the fashion since the 
discovery of the galvanometer to forget the static, and to think only of the 
~ current phenomena of animal electricity. Nor is this altogether to be 
wondered at; for it must be allowed that the facilities for detecting the 
current phenomena of animal electricity are far, very far greater than those 
for detecting the static phenomena of this agent. Be this as it may, how- 


ever, my own experience amounts to this—that I found-it difficult to | | 


* One exception to this statement must be made in favour of some recent investigations 
by Dr. Meissner, of which an account is given in an article entitled ‘‘ Ueber das elec- 
trische Verhalten der Oberflache des menschlichen Korpers,” in Henle and Pfeufer’s 
‘ Zeitschrift fir rationelle Medicin.’ Dritte Reihe, Band xii. 1861. These investiga- 
gations seem to be very deserving of careful study, and I much regret that my atten- 
tion was only for the first time directed to them in some remarks which followed the - 
reading of this paper at the Meeting of the Royal Society. 


1866.]° Indications of Animal Electricity. 157 


detect these latter phenomena easily and satisfactorily until I hit upon the 
method of investigation employed in the experiments about to be de- 
scribed—a method which dispenses with the use of the condenser, which 
appears to be as delicate as it is certain and simple, and which I now pro- 
ceed to describe without any further preamble. 


I. An account of the method of experimenting employed in the expe- 
riments which have to be related presently. 


In order to carry out this method of experimenting, the instruments 
necessary are two small electroscopes, two insulating stands upon which 
to fix these electroscopes, and a conducting rod with an insulating handle. 
Each electroscope is provided in the usual way with a pair of gold leaves, 
and with slips of tinfoil in the interior of the glass bell of the instrument, 
and it has, in addition, an opening underneath the wooden base, by which 
it may be screwed on the top of the insulating stand. ach insulating 
stand is a piece of glass rod 9 or 10 inches in length, fixed by its lower | 
end into a suitable foot, and having at the upper end a screw which fits 
into the opening underneath the wooden base of the electroscope. In one 
stand (for reasons which will appear presently) the glass stem is varnished ; 
in the other it is left unvarnished. The conducting rod may be of any 
form. For the rest, all that need now be said is that, in order to avoid the 
chance of electricity being developed by the friction of lackered surfaces, 
the caps of the electroscopes, and the end of the conducting rod which 
has to be brought into contact with the caps at certain times, are left 
unlackered, and that, in order to secure as good insulation as possible, the 
exterior of the electroscopes are well varnished whenever practicable. 

_ In preparing for an experiment, the electroscopes are screwed on the 
insulating stands, and then charged in a particular way with free electricity— 
the one with free positive electricity, the other with free negative electricity. 
This charge is obtained by gently rubbing the glass stem of the insulating | 
stands between the finger and thumb—the positive electricity from the 
unvarnished glass stem, the negative from that which is varnished. The 
electricity thus obtained is communicated, not to the cap, which is in 
direct communication with the gold leaves, but through the wooden base 
to the tinfoil slips which run halfway up the interior of the glass bell of 
the electroscope; and thus, instead of being charged directly, the gold 
leaves become charged inductively with the opposite kind of electricity to 
that which is communicated to the tinfoil slips. The result of doing this 
is that the gold leaves take up a given degree of divergence, and that they 
remain divergent so long as the tinfoil slips retain their charge of electricity. 
Charged in this manner, in fact, the gold leaves cannot be brought 
together by placing a conductor between the cap of the electroscope and 
the earth ; indeed, so far from this being possible, the effect of placing a 
conductor in this position, under these circumstances, is (as may easily be 
understood) to increase the divergence of the gold leaves. 


158 Dr. C. B. Radcliffe on Electroscopic [May 3], - 


Now what has to be done in preparing for an experiment is to get the 
gold leaves in that second position of divergence into which they pass when 
the discharging rod is applied to the cap of the charged electroscope. 
First of all, the gold leaves are made to diverge to a given degree by 
charging the electroscope in the manner which has been described; then 
the conducting rod is placed in position and the gold leaves are made to 
take up the full degree of divergence by so doing; and when this is done 
the electroscopes are ready for use. 

The electroscopes being “set”? in this manner, the experiment which 
has to be performed consists in bringing the body, whose electrical con- 
dition has to be examined, to the cap of each electroscope in turn, and in 
noting the movements of the gold leaves. The experiment is simple, and 
the results are these. When the body is electrified positively, it causes 
increased divergence of the gold leaves in the electroscope in which these 
leaves are electrified with positive electricity ; and vice versd, when the 
body is electrified negatively, it causes increased divergence of the gold 
leaves in the electroscope in which these leaves are electrified with negative 
electricity, and diminished divergence in the electroscope in which these 
leaves are electrified with positive electricity. These are, as will be easily 
understood, the movements of the gold leaves which must take place under 
these circumstances. Moreover the charge of electricity in the electroscope 
reacts upon the body which is brought to the cap of the instrument, and 
produces, in a way which is intelligible enough, a certain small amount of 
increased divergence of the gold leaves of doth electroscopes. Now this 
slightly increased divergence of the gold leaves in both electroscopes is of 
little or no moment when bodies electrified with comparatively large 
amounts of free electricity are made to act upon the caps of the instruments, 
but it is of great moment when these bodies are electrified with minute 
amounts of free electricity; for in this case the movements of the gold 
leaves arising from the action of the free electricity will be exaggerated or 
masked according as they happen to be in the same direction or in the 
opposite direction to the movements produced by the reaction of the 
charge in the electroscopes. Thus, if the degree of increased divergence 
in the gold leaves of both electroscopes arising from the reaction of the 
charge in the instruments be =2, and if the alteration in the divergence 
of the gold leaves produced by the action of free electricity be of the same 
value, that is =2, the result of this latter action will be, not increased 
divergence of the goid leaves =2 in one electroscope, and diminished 
divergence of these leaves =2 in the other instrument, but increased 
divergence —4, in the electroscope in which it causes increased divergence 
(for in this case it is the action of the free electricity plus that of the 
reaction of the charge in the instrument, 2-+-2=4), and no alteration of 
divergence in the electroscope in which it causes diminished divergence 
(for in this case it is the converging action of the free electricity minus that 
of the diverging action of the charge in the instrument, that is, 2—2=0), 


1866.] Indications of Animal Electricity. 159 


—and so also in similar cases, the movement of increased divergence of the 
gold leaves in both electroscopes arising from the reaction of the charge in 
the instrument being added to or subtracted from the movement of the 
gold leaves produced by the action of free electricity, according as these 
movements happen to be in the same or in opposite directions. 

These, then, being the facts, it is easy to see how, by using two 
electroscopes, it is possible to elimmate the reaction of the charge of 
electricity in the instruments upon the gold leaves, and to make this 
reaction tell in making more obvious the action of very minute quantities 
of electricity. Itis easy to eliminate the reaction of the charge of electricity 
in the electroscopes upon the divergence of the gold leaves ; for this reaction 
causes slightly increased divergence of these leaves in doth instruments. 
It is easy to make the reaction of the charge of electricity in the electro- 
scopes upon the divergence of the gold leaves tell in making more obvious 
the action of free electricity upon the divergence of these leaves ; for it is 
plain that in the electroscope in which the action of positive electricity 
causes increased divergence of the gold leaves, this movement will be aided 
by the increased divergence of these leaves arising from the reaction of the 
charge of electricity in the electroscopes, and, vice versd, that in the 
electroscope in which negative electricity causes increased divergence of 
the gold leaves this movement will be aided by the increased divergence 
of these leaves arising from the reaction of the electricity in the instrument. 
Nor does it follow that one of the electroscopes is in reality superfluous. 
A priori, indeed, it might be supposed that one electroscope would be 
sufficient. It might appear enough to take the movements of increased 
divergence of the gold leaves as evidence of the action of one kind of 
electricity, and the movements of diminished divergence as evidence of the 
other kind of electricity. But when dealing with minute quantities of 
electricity, it is found practically that the movements of diminished 
divergence are not so easily produced as those of increased divergence, 
and that there are impediments to free movement in this direction, arising 
from the clashing of the movement of diminished divergence due to the 
action of free electricity with the movement of increased divergence due to 
the reaction of the charge of electricity in the electroscope. In short, 
the plain truth appears to be, not only that the two electroscopes act as a 
check upon each other, and show the same thing from two different points 
of view, but that they furnish evidence which in itself is far more con- 
clusive, when dealing with minute quantities of electricity, than can be 
got from either instrument singly. 

In the description of the experiments upon which I am now about to 
enter, it is necessary to be able to distinguish the two electroscopes the 
one from the other; and I propose, therefore, to speak of the instrument 
in which the gold leaves are charged with positive electricity, and in which 
positive electricity causes increased divergence of these leaves, as the Posttive 
Electroscope, and of the instrument in which the gold leaves are charged 


160 Dr. C. B. Radcliffe on Electroscopic [May 81, 


with negative electricity, and in which negative electricity produces tones 
divergence of these leaves, as the Negative Electroscope. 


II. dn account of experiments in some of which electroscopie indications 
of animal electricity were detected by the method of experimenting which 
has just been described. 


In this account the degree of movement of the gold leaves is indicated 
by arbitrary figures. It is assumed also that the increased divergence of 
the gold leaves in doth electroscopes, which movement has been seen to 
arise from the reaction of the charge of electricity in the electroscope, is 
== 2; and in each experiment this figure is added to the movement pro- 
duced by the action of free electricity in the case where this action causes 
increased divergence of the gold leaves, and subtracted in the case where 
this action causes diminished divergence of these leaves. Thus, in the 
case where the movement of the gold leaves arising from the action of 
free electricity is =3, the actual movement of the gold leaves in the 
instrument in which there is increased divergence of these leaves will be 
=5, for 3+ 2=5, and in the instrument in which there is diminished 
divergence of these leaves will be =1, for 3—2=1. Or, in the case 
where the movement due to free electricity is =1, there will be a different 
degree of increased divergence of the gold leaves in both electroscopes ; 
for in the instrument in which the action of the free electricity causes 
increased divergence, the aetual movement of the gold leaves will be =3, 
for 1+2=3; and in the instrument in which this action tends to eause 
diminished divergence, this tendency will be overpowered by the increased 
divergence due to the reaction of the charge of electricity in the electro- 
scope, aud the actual movement which results will be one of increased 
divergence =1,; for the movement of increased divergence arising from 
the reaction of the charge in the electroscope, =2, minus the movement 
of diminished divergence, = 1, arising from the action of the free electricity, 
must be increased divergence =1, for 2—1=1. 

In the account of these experiments, also, certain abbreviations are 
made use of: thus 1. d. stands for increased divergence of the gold leaves, 
d.d. for diminished divergence of those leaves. 

For the rest, I have only to add that these experiments, which I leave 
to tell their own story, with the aid only of a few short comments at the 
end of each series, supply the first electroscopic indications of electricity in 
living blood and in living nerve-tissue, and that, to say the least, they 
clear up all uncertainty as to the presence in the living human body and 
in living muscular tissue of electricity capable of supplying like indications. 


First Series.—Experiments which furnish electroscopic indications of 3 
electricity in the living human body. 

In the first four of these experiments all that was done was to apply the 

palm of my hand or the tips of my fingers to the cap of each electroscope 


1866.] Indications of Animal Electricity. - 161 


in turn, and to note the movements of the gold leaves produced by so 
doing. In the fifth experiment, the part experimented upon was brought 
to the caps of the eleetroscopes by taking hold of a loop of silk braid which 
had been previously attached to it. 

Exp. 1.—In this case the result was d. re in the negative electroscope, 
and i. d.=8 in the positive electroscope,—a result showing, as has been 
already explained, that the electroscopes were acted upon by positive 
‘electricity =6. 

Exp. 2.—Here the movements of the gold leaves indicated the action of 
positive electricity =2, the facts being—no alteration of the divergence of 
the gold leaves in the negative electroscope, and i.d.=4 in the positive 
electroscope. 

Ep. 3.—In this case there was 1. d.=2 in both electroscopes—a state of 
things showing that the hand was electrically neutral at the time, seeing 
that the movements of the gold leaves were only those which were due to 
the reaction of the charge of electricity in the electroscopes. 

Exp. 4.—Here there was no alteration of the divergence of the gold leaves 
in the positive electroscope, and i.d.=4 in the negative electroscope—a 
state of things (the reverse of what happened in Exp. 2) signifying that 
the electroscopes were being acted upon by negative electricity =2. 

Exp. 5.—A part of a foot which had been removed by amputation from 
a patient in the Westminster Hospital twenty-four hours previously was 
the part experimented upon in this instance ; and the result was the same 
as in Exp. 3, namely, i.d.=2, in both electroscopes equally—the result 
which is brought about when a body which is electrically neutral is brought 
to the caps of the electroscopes. 

*.* T have performed experiments like the first four many hundred 
times, and I have repeatedly tested in the same way the electrical condi- 
tion of other persons. In the great majority of instances the electroscopic 
indications were those of positive electricity. Only now and then all elec- 
troscopic indications were absent. I have also on several occasions repeated 
the experiment on portions of the dead body, and always without finding 
any signs of electricity. More than once, on the same occasion, I have 
found strong indications of positive electricity in one person, and very 
feeble indications, or no indications whatever, in another person. More 
than once also I have been able to detect electricity in my own body, or in 
the bodies of other persons at an elevation of some feet above the ground, 
when it was impossible to do so on the ground itself. In fact I have 
obtained proof of the existence of great variations in the electricity of my- 
self and others at various times and under vzrious circumstances, and I 
have begun a systematic series of observations with a view to ascertain the 
electrical condition of the human body at different times and under differ- 
ent circumstances as to health and disease. I have already in this way 
arrived at some curious results, and I have certainly seen enough to make 
me hope that a knowledge of the electrical changes in human bodies may 


162 Dr. C. B. Radcliffe on Electroscopic [May 31, 


shed much light upon the changes which are continually taking place in 
the vital condition of the human body, especially when the electrical 
changes within the body are taken in connexion with electrical and other 
_ changes without the body. 


Second Series.—Experiments which furnish electroscopic indications of 
electricity in living blood. 

The blood used in this series of experiments was collected in a wide- 
mouthed glass bottle capable of holding about 2 0z. Immersed in the 
bluod and projecting to a convenient distance from the neck of the bottle, 
was a piece of platinum wire. The bottle was provided with a loop of silk 
braid, which loop was fastened in such a way as to allow the bottle to be 
lifted up by it without spilling the contents; and the necessary communi- 
cation with each electroseope in turn was made by taking hold of the loop 
and by bringing the platinum wire projecting from the mouth of the vessel 
into connexion with the cap of the instrument. 

Exp. 6.—In this case the blood used was from the internal jugular vein 
of a donkey, and the electroscopic indications obtained were those of negative 
electricity = 6,—the actual movements of the gold leaves being d. d.=4 in 
the positive electroscope, and i. d. = 8 in the negative electroscope. | 

Exp. 7.—Here the blood was from the internal carotid artery of the 
same donkey which had furnished the venous blood used in the last expe- 
riment ; and the result was also the same, namely, d.d. = 4 in the posi- 
tive electroscope, and 1. d. = 8 in the negative electroscope,—a result 
denoting the action of negative electricity = 6 upon the instruments. 

Exp. 8.—In this experiment blood from the carotid artery of a sheep 
was examined ; and the movements of the gold leaves were those of positive 
electricity = 2, there being no alteration of the divergence of the gold leaves 
in the negative electroscope, and 1. d. = 4 in the positive electroscope. 

Exp. 9.—Here the blood used was from the carotid artery of a dog. 
The examination was made without loss of time, and the animal seemed to 
be in good health ; but all signs of electricity in the blood were absent, the 
movements of the gold leaves being those of i. d. = 2 in both electroscopes 
equally. 

Exp. 10.—The blood experimented upon in this ease was that which 
had been already used in Exp. 6, an interval of an hour and a half having 
elapsed between the two experiments. In the former experiment the blood 
gave electroscopic indications of negative electricity = 6; in this instance 
these indications had disappeared altogether, for there was i. d. = 2 in 
both electroscopes equally. 

*.* T have repeated experiments like these many times upon the blood 
of various animals—oxen, sheep, dogs, rabbits, and so on—sometimes upon 
pure arterial blood, sometimes upon pure venous blood, mo:e frequently 
upon the mixed stream which follows the knife of the butcher in the 
ordinary process of slaughtering sheep and oxen. As a rule, I have found 


1866. } Indications of Animal Electricity. 163 


decided electroscopic indications of negative electricity indifferently in 
arterial, venous, or mixed blood; not unfrequently I have failed to find any 
such signs. Now and then I have found comparatively feeble signs of 
positive electricity. In every case also where I have examined blood after 
an interval of an hour or so from the time when it had flowed fresh from 
the vessel, I failed to detect any sign of electricity, negative or positive. 
These experiments no doubt leave much to be discovered in the same 
direction, but this at least they do,—they furnish the first electroscopic 
proof of the presence of electricity in living blood. Nay, it is perhaps not 
too much to say that they supply the first unequivocal proof of electricity 
in blood, for the current electricity recently obtained from blood by M. 
Scoutteten and Dr. Shettle may in reality be nothing more than the result 
of chemical and other changes produced by the blood upon the terminal 
wire of the galvanometer used in these experiments. 


Third Series.—Experiments which furnish electroscopic indications of 

electricity in living nerve-tissue. 

The plan adopted in this series of experiments was to tie a loop of silk 
braid to the part to be experimented on, and to use this loop as the means 
for bringing this part to the cap of each electroscope in turn. 

Hzp. 11.—The medulla oblongata of an ox obtained a few minutes after 
the animal had been killed in the ordinary way in the shambles, was the 
part used in this experiment. At one time the cut surface exposing the 
transverse section of the fibres and the mternal grey matter was brought to 
the caps of the electroscopes; at another time the uncut surface corre- 
sponding to the longitudinal surface of the fibres was treated in this man- 
ner; and in each case the movements of the gold leaves were indicative of 
the action of positive electricity = 6, or thereabouts, the only difference 
perceptible being a slight one of degree. The average movements obtained 
were those of d. d. = 4 in the negative electroscope, and i. d, = 8 in the 
positive electroscope. 

Lxp. 12.—The brachial enlargement of the spinal cord of an ox, 
taken out of the canal when the carcass was being split into two lateral 
halves at the usual time, that is, about half an hour from the moment 
when the animal had been felled with the pole-axe, was used in this 
experiment, and the result was d. d. = 4 in the negative electroscope, and 
i, d. = 8 in the positive electroscope. It was found also that this result 
was the same, except in some trifling difference in degree, in the case where 
the transverse sectional surface of the fibres was brought to the caps of 
the electroscopes, and in the case where the longitudinal surface of these 
fibres, natural or artificial, was examined in this manner. 

Exp. 13.—Here the part examined was the posterior lobe of the cere- 
brum of a sheep which had been killed in the usual way a few minutes 
previously in the shambles. No time was lost in making the necessary 
preparations, but not the slightest indications of electricity were obtainable, 

VOL. XV. P 


164: Dr. C. B. Radcliffe on Electroscopic [May 31, 


the movements being only those of i.d.=2 in both electroscopes 
equally. 

Exp. 14.—The cerebellum of a sheep was examined in this experiment, 
and the result was—no alteration in the divergence of the gold leaves in 
the negative electroscopes, and i. d. = 4 in the positive electroscopes, a 
state of things indicating the action of positive electricity = 2 upon the 
instruments. It was ascertained also that all parts of the cerebellum in- 
differently behaved in the same manner. 

Exp. 15.—In this experiment the brain of a donkey just killed by loss 
of blood was examined, and it was found that all parts of the surface indif- 
ferently, natural or artificial, gave similar indications of negative electricity 
= 4, there being d. d. = 2 in the positive electroscope, and i. d. = 6 in 
the negative electroscope. 

Exp. 16.—The brain of the donkey used in the last experiment was used 
also in this instance, an interval of an hour, or thereabouts, having elapsed 
between the two experiments. When first examined this organ gave indi- 
cations of negative electricity = 4; now it was found to have lost all traces 
of electrical activity everywhere, for the movements of the gold leaves were 
simply those of i. d. = 2 in Joth electroscopes equally. 

*,* These experiments, as I believe, bring to light a new fact, masmuch 
as they furnish the first electroscopic proof of the presence of electricity in 
living nerve-tissue. Judging from these and several other experiments of 
the same kind, in which dogs and rabbits, as well as oxen, sheep, and don- 
keys, were put under contribution, it would seem that living nerve-tissue, 
as a rule, furnishes electroscopic signs of electricity, sometimes positive and 
sometimes negative in character, and that these signs are always absent 
when the nerve-tissue may be supposed to have lost all traces of vitality. 
And this also would seem to be a conclusion deducible from the same 
evidence—that all parts of the nerve-tissue present signs of the same 
kind of electricity. It would seem, in. fact, as if these experiments sug- 
gested a conclusion which is at variance with a conclusion drawn by Pro- 
fessor Du Bois Reymond from some of his experiments. Watching the 
direction of the ‘‘nerve-current”’ which passes through the galvanometer 
between the longitudinal surface, natural or artificial, of the nerve-fibres, 
and the transverse sectional surface of these fibres, Professor Du Bois 
Reymond comes to the conclusion that these two surfaces are in oppo- 
site electrical conditions, the one being positive, the other negative. 
Because the current passes in a particular direction, he infers that these 
surfaces. must be electrified with different kinds of electricity. But 
it is plain that the current might pass between parts electrified with 
different degrees of the same electricity; and indeed M. Du Bois Rey- 
mond himself explains the current passing between two points of the same 
surface in this manner; and therefore, even on his own showing, there is 
no necessity to suppose that the longitudinal surface of the nerve-fibres is 
electrified with one kind of electricity and the transverse sectional surface 


1866. | Indications of Animal Electricity. 165 


of the fibres with the other kind. At any rate, the facts revealed by the 
electroscope do not appear to be of doubtful significance, and the only 
inference which I can deduce from them is that every part of the sur- 
face of living nerve-tissue, natural or artificial, furnishes signs of the same 
kind of electricity, and that the only electrical differences between one part 
and another are nothing more than differences of degree. 


Fourth Series.—LHaperiments which furnish electroscopic indications of 
electricity in living muscular tissue. 


In this series of experiments the mode of proceeding was the same as 
that adopted in the last series. 

Hap. 17.—The piece of muscle examined in this experiment was cut out 
of the sterno-mastoid of an ox a few moments after the animal had been 
killed in the shambles, and every part of the surface was tested in turn, 
and, except in some trifling difference in degree, the movements of the gold 
leaves were in all cases indicative of the action of positive electricity = 6, 
these movements being those of d. d. = 4 in the negative electroscope, and 
those of i. d. = 8 in the positive electroscope. 

Kap. 18.—Here the sterno-mastoid of a sheep just killed in the ordinary 
way in the shambles, furnished the material for experiment, and the result 
was—no alteration in the divergence of the gold leaves in the negative 
electroscope, and i. d. = 4 in the positive electroscope—a result showing 
the action of positive electricity = 2 upon the electroscopes. 

Hep. 19.—In this instance the portion of muscle examined was taken 
from the gluteus maximus of a donkey which had just been killed by 
hemorrhage, and it was found that all parts of the surface indifferently 
supplied indications of negative electricity = 1, the movements of the gold 
leaves being those of i. d. = | in the positive electroscope, andi. d.=3 
in the negative electroscope. 

Exp. 20.—A piece of the left ventricle of the heart of a dog just dead 
from heemorrhage was examined in this instance, and the only movements 
of the gold leaves were those which are produced by the action of a body 
electrically neutral, namely, i. d. = 2 in both electroscopes equally. 

Exp. 21.—Here the piece of muscle experimented upon was that used 
in Exp. 17. Twelve hours had elapsed between the two experiments, and 
rigor mortis had now fully set in, and the result showed that the positive 
electricity which was present formerly was no longer present, the move- 
ments of the gold leaves being simply those of i. d. = 2 in both electro- 
Scopes equally. 

*,.* With the exception of an experiment in which Professor Matteucci 
incidentally states that he obtained “ signes de tension avec un condensa- 
teur délicat’’ from one of his ‘muscular piles,” these experiments fur- 
nish, so far as I know, the only electroscopic indications of the presence of 
electricity in living muscular tissue—perhaps the very first really distinct 
proofs of this fact. I have repeated these experiments several times on 

p2 A 


166 On Electroscopic Indications of Animal Electricity. [May 31, 


the muscles, living and dead, of various animals, oxen, sheep, donkeys, 
dogs, and rabbits, and I have found in the great majority of instances that 
all parts of the surface of living muscle furnished indications of the same 
kind of electricity, that this electricity was sometimes positive, sometimes 
negative, and that these signs were invariably absent in muscle which had 
passed into the state of rigor mortis. These experiments, moreover, make 
it difficult to agree with Professor Du Bois Reymond in thinking that the 
longitudinal surface, natural or artificial, of the muscular fibres, and the 
transverse sectional surface of these fibres, are electrified with different hinds 
of electricity. With respect to the electricity of muscular tissue, indeed, it 
seems to be precisely as it is with respect to the electricity of nerve-tissue, 
namely this, that all parts of the surface are electrified with the same kind 
of electricity, positive or negative, as the case may be, the only difference 
between one part and another being one of degree; and the comments 
upon M. Du Bois Reymond’s conclusions, when speaking upon the condi- 
tion of nerve-tissue as to electricity, are equally applicable to the present 
case, if only the words muscular tissue and muscular current be substituted 
for nerve-tissue and nerve-current. 


In conclusion, it only remains for me to direct attention to one bearing 
of the facts recorded in this paper. These facts, one and all, exhibit ani- 
mal electricity, not in the form of a feeble nerve-current, or of a feeble 
muscular current, or of the still feebler currents of less definite character, 
but as endowed with a considerable amount of tension. They bring to 
light a property of animal electricity which is more intelligible on the sup- 
position that the primary condition of this electricity is not current but 
statical. It is easy to account for these phenomena of tension if the pri- 
mary condition of animal electricity be statical, for tension is the character- 
istic property of statical electricity ; it is by no means easy to account for 
these phenomena of tension if the primary condition of animal electricity 
be that of the current revealed by the galvanometer, for the currents so 
revealed are far too feeble to allow one to suppose that they can be endowed 
with an appreciable amount of tension. In a word, with the phenomena 
of tension to account for which are revealed in the experiments recorded 
in this paper, the natural inference, as it seems to me, is that the primary 
condition of animal electricity is, not current, but statical, and that the 
currents made known by the galvanometer to which so much attention 
has been paid of late—the muscular current, the nerve-current, and the 
rest—are secondary phenomena developed accidentally by placing the ends 
of the coil of the galvanometer so as to include points in which the elec- 
tricity is different in degree. Nay, it would seem that these currents may 
in reality be a retarded discharge of statical electricity, for it is a fact that 
they cannot be detected without a coil of which the wire is so long and so 
fine as to be capable of giving sufficient resistance to bridle a discharge 


1866. | Mr. Maxwell on the Dynamical Theory of Gases. 167 


into the quieter pace of ordinary currents*. Many important conse- 
quences in physiology and in pathology, as I think, result directly or 
indirectly from this view of the matter, of which some are set forth in 
some Lectures which I gave at the College of Physicians in London 
three years ago, and which have since appeared in print; but it is no 
part of my present task to consider these consequences. Indeed, what I 
proposed to do in this paper I have now done ; and this was simply to direct 
attention to certain facts as facts, and to offer certain passing comments 
suggested naturally by these facts. 


II. “On the Dynamical Theory of Gases.” By J. Crurxk Max- 
WELL, F'.R.S. L. & EH. Received May 16, 1866. 


(Abstract. ) 


Gases in this theory are supposed to consist of molecules in motion, act- 
ing on one another with forces which are insensible, except at distances 
which are small in comparison with the average distance of the molecules. 
The path of each molecule is therefore sensibly rectilinear, except when 
two molecules come within a certain distance of each other, in which case 
the direction of motion is rapidly changed, and the path becomes again 
sensibly rectilinear as soon as the molecules have separated beyond the dis- 
tance of mutual action. 

Each molecule is supposed to be a small body consisting in general of 
parts capable of being set into various kinds of motion relative to each 
other, such as rotation, oscillation, or vibration, the amount of energy 
existing in this form bearing a certain relation to that which exists in the 
form of the agitation of the molecules among each other. 

The mass of a molecule is different in different gases, but in the same 
gas all the molecules are equal. 

The pressure of the gas is on this theory due to the impact of the mole- 
cules on the sides of the vessel, and the temperature of the gas depends on 
the velocity of the molecules. 

The theory as thus stated is that which has been conceived, with various 
degrees of clearness, by D. Bernoulli, Le Sage and Prevost, Herapath, 
Joule, and Kronig, and which owes its principal developments to Professor 
Clausius. ‘The action of the molecules on each other has been generally 
assimilated to that of hard elastic bodies, and I have given some applica- 


* It is to be supposed that certain molecules in living animal bodies are, under cer- 
tain given conditions, a constant source of electricity—are so, perhaps, in the way in 
which certain molecules of the electrophorus are such a source. The idea is that this 
electricity is so supplied as to admit of a series of frequent discharges, or to keep up a 
constant current if these discharges are retarded sufficiently. At any rate, it does not 
follow that this constancy of the current of animal electricity detected by the galvano- 
meter is an objection in itself to the idea that the primary condition of animal electricity 
may be, not current, but statical. 


168 Mr. Maxwell on the Dynamical Theory of Gases. [May 31, 


tion of this form of the theory to the phenomena of viscosity, diffusion, and 
conduction of heat in the Philosophical Magazine for 1860. M. Clausius 
has since pointed out several errors in the part relating to conduction of 
heat, and the part relating to diffusion also contains errors. The dynami- 
cal theory of viscosity in this form has been reinvestigated by M. O. E. 
Meyer, whose experimental researches on the viscosity of fluids have been 
very extensive. 

In the present paper the action between the molecules is supposed to be 
that of bodies repelling each other at a distance, rather than of hard elastic 
bodies acting by impact ; and the law of force is deduced from experiments 
on the viscosity of gases to be that of the inverse fifth power of the dis- 
tance, any other law of force being at variance with the observed fact that 
the viscosity is proportional to the absolute temperature. In the mathe- 
matical application of the theory, it appears that the assumption of this 
law of force leads to a great simplification of the results, so that the whole 
subject can be treated in a more general way than has hitherto been done. 

I have therefore begun by considering, first, the mutual action of two 
molecules; next that of two systems of molecules, the motion of all the 
molecules in each system being originally the same. In this way I have 
determined the rate of variation of the mean values of the following func- 
tions of the velocity of molecules of the first system :— 

a, the resolved part of the velocity in a given direction. 
~ 6B, the square of this resolved velocity. 
y, the resolved velocity multiplied by the square of the whole velocity. 
It is afterwards shown that the velocity of translation of the gas depends 
on a, the pressure on 6, and the conduction of heat on y. 

The final distribution of velocities among the molecules is then con- 
sidered, and it is shown that they are distributed according to the same 
law as the errors are distributed among the observations in the theory of 
“‘ Least Squares ;’ and that if several systems of molecules act on one 
another, the average vis viva of each molecule is the same, whatever be the 
mass of the molecule. The demonstration is of a more strict kind than 
that which I formerly gave, and this is the more necessary, as the “ Law 
of Equivalent Volumes,”’ so important in the chemistry of gases, is deduced 
from it. 

The rate of variation of the quantities a, 3, y in an element of the gas 
is then considered, and the following conclusions are arrived at. 

(z) 1st. In a mixture of gases left to itself for a sufficient time under the 
action of gravity, the density of each gas at any point will be the same as 
if the other gases had not been present. 

2nd. When this condition is not fulfilled, the gases will pass through 
each other by diffusion. When the composition of the mixed gases varies 
slowly from one point to another, the velocity of each gas will be so small 
that the effects due to inertia may be neglected. In the quiet diffusion of 
two gases, the volume of either gas diffused through unit of area in unit 


1866. | Mr. Maxwell on the Dynamical Theory of Gases. 169 


of time is equal to the rate of diminution of pressure of that gas as we pass 
in the direction of the normal to the plane, multiplied by a certain coeffi- 
cient, called the coefficient of interdiffusion of these two gases. This co- 
efficient must be determined experimentally for each pair of gases. It 
varies directly as the square of the absolute temperature, and inversely as 
the total pressure of the mixture. Its value for carbonic acid and air, as 
deduced from experiments given by Mr. Graham in his paper on the 
Mobility of Gases, * is 
D=0:0235, 

the inch, the grain, and the second being units. Since, however, air is 
itself a mixture, this result cannot be considered as final, and we have no 
experiments from which the coefficient of interdiffusion of two pure gases 
can be found. 

3rd. When two gases are separated by a thin plate containing a small 
hole, the rate at which the composition of the mixture varies in and near 
the hole will depend on the thickness of the plate and the size of the hole. 
As the thickness of the plate and the diameter of the hole are diminished, 
the rate of variation will increase, and the effect of the mutual action of 
the molecules of the gases in impeding each other’s motion will diminish 
relatively to the moving force due to the variation of pressure. In the 
limit, when the dimensions of the hole are indefinitely small, the velocity 
of either gas will be the same as if the other gas were absent. Hence the 
volumes diffused under equal pressures will be inversely as the square roots 
of the specific gravities of the gases, as was first established by Graham7 ; 
and the quantity of a gas which passes through a thin plug into another 
gas will be nearly the same as that which passes into a vacuum in the same 
time. 

(@) By considering the variation of the total energy of motion of the 
molecules, it is shown that, 

Ist. In a mixture of two gases the mean energy of translation will be- 
come the same for a molecule of either gas. From this follows the law of 
Equivalent Volumes, discovered by Gay-Lussac from chemical considera- 
tions ; namely, that equal volumes of two gases at equal pressures and tem- 
peratures contain equal numbers of molecules. 

2nd. The law of cooling by expansion is determined. 

3rd. The specific heats at constant volume and at constant pressure are 
determined and compared. This is done merely to determine the value of 
a constant in the dynamical theory for the agreement between theory and 
experiment with respect to the values of the two specific heats, and their 
ratio is a consequence of the general theory of thermodynamics, and does 
not depend on the mechanical theory which we adopt. 

4th. In quiet diffusion the heat produced by the interpenetration of the 


- * Philosophical Transactions, 1863. 
tT “On the Law of the Diffusion of Gases,’ Transactions of the Royal Society of 
Edinburgh, vol. xii, (1831). 


170 = Mr. Maxwell on the Dynamical Theory of Gases. [May 31, 


gases is exactly neutralized by the cooling of each gas as it passes from a 
dense to a rare state in its progress through the mixture. 

5th. By considering the variation of the difference of pressures in dif- 
ferent directions, the coefficient of viscosity or internal friction is determined, 
and the equations of motion of the gas are formed. These are of the same 
form as those obtained by Poisson by conceiving an elastic solid the strain 
on which is continually relaxed at a rate proportional to the strain itself. 

As an illustration of this view of the theory, it is shown that any 
strain existing in air at rest would diminish according to the values of an 
exponential term the modulus of which is _)_-___- second, an exces- 
sively small time, so that the equations are applicable, even to the case of 
the most acute audible sounds, without any modification on account of the 
rapid change of motion. 

This relaxation is due to the mutual deflection of the oles from 
their paths. It is then shown that if the displacements are instantaneous, 
so that no time is allowed for the relaxation, the gas would have an elasti- 
city of form, or ‘rigidity,’ whose coefficient is equal to the pressure. 

It is also shown that if the molecules were mere points, not having any 
mutual action, there would be no such relaxation, and that the equations of 
motion would be those of an elastic solid, in which the coefficient of cubical 
and linear elasticity have the same ratio as that deduced by Poisson from 
the theory of molecules at rest acting by central forces on one another. 
This coincidence of the results of two theories so opposite in their assump- 
tions is remarkable. 

6th. The coefficient of viscosity of a mixture of two gases is then 
deduced from the viscosity of the pure gases, and the coefficient of inter- 
diffusion of the two gases. The latter quantity has not as yet been ascer- 
tained for any pair of pure gases, but it is shown that sufficiently probable 
values may be assumed, which being inserted in the formula agree very 
well with some of the most remarkable of Mr. Graham’s experiments on 
the Transpiration of Mixed Gases*. The remarkable experimental result 
that the viscosity is independent of the pressure and proportional to the 
absolute temperature is a necessary consequence of the theory. 

(y) The rate of conduction of heat is next determined, and it is shown 

Ist. That the final state of a quantity of gas in a vessel will be such 
that the temperature will increase according to a certain law from the bot- 
tom to the top. The atmosphere, as we know, is colder above. This state 
would be produced by winds alone, and is no doubt greatly increased by the 
effects of radiation. A perfectly calm and sunless atmosphere would he 
coldest below. 

2nd. The conductivity of a gas for heat is then deduced from its visco- 
sity, and found to be 


Gp Avia Dy 
3 y—1 2,9, : 
* Philosophical eee 1846. 


1866.] On increasing the Electricity of Induction-Machines. 171 


where y is the ratio of the two specific heats, py, the pressure, and p, the 
density of the standard gas at absolute temperature 0,. S the specific 
gravity of the gas in question, and y& its viscosity. The conductivity is, 
like the viscosity, independent of the pressure and proportional to the ab- 
solute temperature. Its value for air is about 3500 times less than that 
of wrought iron, as determined by Principal Forbes. Specific gravity is 
0069. 

For oxygen, nitrogen, and carbonic oxide, the theory gives the conduc- 
tivity equal to that of air. Hydrogen according to the theory should have 
a conductivity seven times that of air, and carbonic acid about 4 of air. 


III. ‘On the means of increasing the Quantity of Electricity given 
by Induction-Machines.” ~By the Rev. T. Romney Roxinson, 
D.D. Received May 10, 1866. 


Among the remarkable results obtained by studying the spectra of 
electric discharges, is the change exhibited by certain substances when the 
nature of the discharge is varied. In general the mere spark shows fewer 
and fainter lines than when a Leyden jar is in connexion, though the amount 
of electricity supplied by the machine is the same. In the latter case, 
however, the discharge passes almost instantaneously, and therefore its 
concentrated action will be more powerful. But, as far as I know, much 
has not been attempted towards increasing the power of the jar: this can- 
not be done by increasing its surface (unless indeed that be too small to 
condense all the electricity supplied) ; the supply itself must be increased. 

This may be done in three ways :— 

First, the power of the exciting battery may be increased. This, how- 
ever, is limited by the risk of destroying the acting surfaces of the rheo- 
tome; and by the decreasing rate at which the magnetism of the iron 
core increases with the primary current. In some investigations on the 
electromagnet (Trans. Irish Academy, vol. xxii. p. 529) I have shown that 
its lifting power L is approximately given by the equation 

pak 
B+ 
in which ¥ is the product of the current and number of spires, A the 
maximum lift of the magnet, and B the & which would excite it to half A. 


The rate of change = is therefore inversely as (B+‘)*. The results 


obtained with two of the magnets which I used will illustrate this. Their 
A’s are 781 lbs. and 278. The first 1000 of © make their lifts 576 and 
235 ; the second 1000 adds to these 87 and 19; the third 35 and 8; and 
the fourth only 19 and 3. With a primary of 180 spires, Y=4000 im- 
plies a current which can evolve in a voltameter 34°7 cubic inches of gases 
per minute, and of course has great deflagrating power. There is there- 
fore not much to be gained in this direction. 


172 Rev. T. R. Robinson on increasing the [May 31, 


Secondly, the secondary helix may be made of longer or thicker wire. 
It will be shown immediately that the length does not increase the quan- 
tity of the current at all, and that the effect of the thickness is limited. 

Thirdly, the analogy of the voltaic battery suggests the plan of combi- 
ning several helices collaterally, as is done when cells are arranged for 
quantity ; and this I think may avail to a very great extent. 

In spectral work, as i1 most other applications of the inductorium (as 
the Germans have named it), the breaking current alone is of importance : 
the other, though equal in quantity, is so much inferior in tension that it 
is stopped by a thin film of highly rarefied air*. This current proceeds 
from two causes. When the circuit is broken, the current in the primary 
ceases ; not instantaneously +, but in a time which is very small ; according 
to Edlund less than =4, of asecond. During its decline it induces a cur- 
rent in the secondary. But while it was passing it had magnetized the 
iron core of the apparatus: this magnetism now passes away, and in doing 
so it also induces a current in the secondary, which lasts longer and is more 
powerful than the other. I compared the two by measuring those given 
_ when the core was removed from a primary, and when it was in its place: 
they were as 1 : 8-62 when the rheotome made 17 discharges in a second ; 
so that in round numbers the electric induction was only a tenth of the 
whole effect. I shall therefore in what follows confine myself to the mag- 
netic induction. 

If y be the magnetism at any time ¢, M its maximum, P the potential of 
the magnet on the secondary helix, II the potential of that helix on itself, 
r the resistance of the secondary circuit, ¢ the secondary current at the 
time ¢, we have, as is well known, 

“ole dy Wl dé 

Gama eRe Deo Gee oe 
the last term being the counter current produced by the reaction of ¢ on 
the helix. If the inductive coefficient of electric action be different from — 
that of magnetic, II should be multiplied by a factor e, which im (0) will 
multiply in the exponent and denominator. I see no reason why they 
should differ unless some work be lost by molecular changes in the core 
when excited. The great difference between the two currents which I 
have just mentioned arises most probably from the different values of ¢ in 
the exponentials. 

To integrate (a) we must assume some relation between dy and dé. The 


* This is not quite correct. Mr. Gassiot showed from the reversed curvature of the 
strata in an exhausted tube that some of the closing current does pass when the action 
is powerful. The same conclusion follows from a fact which I observed last year with 
Mr. Atkinson’s magnificent Ruhmkorff. In general when a discharge is made between 
platinum points, the negative one only is ignited; in this case the positive one was so 
also, though to a far less degree and for half the length. 

+ As the tension at the opening of the rheotome decreases, so must also the velocity 
of discharge there; and time is required for the passage of the electricity from the 
centre of the circuit to its extremities. 


1866. | Electricity given by Induction-Machines. 173 


most probable is that the loss of magnetism is as the magnetism, which 


gives eee pdt, whence y=Me-?*. 
y : 


Putting b =<, and. supposing » to vanish with ¢, 


s=2 eM x wt ) th. , era 


The total current in the time ‘=©® el -|- ery and hence 


putting F for —— = (M—y) and c for ww “° obtain 


MS 
F be LCi, 
(()  — l — TK s e e ° e e e ° 

a4 bi fu, p— i (<) 


The expression for the current due to the electric induction will be 
similar to this, so far as having the factor F and the exponential. If, as 
is not unlikely, the relation of d TE to dt be the same as for the magnetism, 
they would only differ in the values of » and ec. 

The quantity F is the current which would be produced were it not for 
the inductive reaction of the current on itself. It is as P directly and r 
inversely. The first of these, P, is as » the number of spires in the helix * 
multiplied by a rather complex function of its length and diameter, which 
is constant when they are given. The second, 7, may be assumed propor- 
tional to the length and section of the wire of the helix, for in general the 
other resistances of the circuit are comparatively small. Hence it follows that 

If two equipotential helices equally excited be placed in series, the ten- 
sion will be doubled; but the current will be intermediate between that of 


2P 
each, for F= ae and if r=" it will not be changed. If they be used 


collaterally (their homonymous terminals connected), P remains unchanged, 
and therefore the currents of the helices are simply added. If there be an 
external resistance, allowance must be made for it. This may be extended 
to any number of helices ; for calling the external resistance p, we find. 

. PoP Ps 


re ro d Pee ee 


Ite(sta- ++ Itp(rea.-.- ta) 


The constant ¢ must be a small fraction, for in any ordinary work of the 
inductorium the residual magnetism of the core is very feeble. As 
it=e—"*, wt must be large; and as ¢ for wire cores does not exceed a few 
hundredths of a second+, » must be very large. 


(d) 


* Not as the mere length of wire, as is sometimes loosely stated. 

+ L have been informed that with the inductorium which Mr. Whitehouse constructed 
for the first Atiantic telegraph, the cores of which were massive iron cylinders, the 
discharge lasted some seconds. If it be still in existence, it would be interesting to 
examine the spectra which it would give. 


i 


174 Revi Robinson on increasing the [May 31, 


The potential II is as x? multiplied by another function of the length and 
diameters of the helix (see Maxwell’s valuable paper ‘‘ On the Electromag- 
netic Field,’ Phil. Trans. 1865); and the term 0 is always less than unity. 
When helices are consecutive their II’s are added, not when collateral. 


From this it follows that aaa may be neglected; that = is nearly 


unity ; and that the difference between F and ® increases as 6 diminishes. 

When equal helices are consecutive, 4 as well as F are unchanged ; there- 
fore so is ®. 

When they are collateral, each separate 6 remains unchanged (unless 
they be so close that they react on each other); and therefore, as with F, 
the resultant ® is the sum of its components. 

If the resistance of the wire be diminished by increasing its section with- 
out making much change in the dimensions of the helix, 6 is diminished, 
and therefore the coefficient of F. It is evident from the form of equation 
(c) that ® has a maximum for 7, and that beyond this there is actual loss 
of power in increasing the thickness of the wire. 

It remained to test these views by experiment, but the task has some 
difficulties. A single discharge of inductive electricity is usually deter- 
mined by the swing which it causes in a galvanometer needle; but it is 
scarcely possible to get two discharges exactly equal. The slightest varia- 
tion in the manner of breaking the circuit, the least oxidation or roughen- 
ing of the surfaces where the break is made, change the result; and there- 
fore it seemed best to take the actual working of the inductorium, in hopes 
that the average of some thousand discharges must be near the real value 
of the current. | 

The rheometer which I used is Weber’s (for the use of which I am in- 
debted to the kindness of Mr. Gassiot), and it showed an amount of fluc- 
tuation even greater than I expected. With every precaution as to the 
action of the rheotome, the mirror of the Weber never becomes stationary, 
and the oscillations are irregular; twelve of them were taken for each set, 
of course read at each end and reduced by the usual formula; yet the sets 
differ so much, that I only offer their results as tolerable approximations. 
Two facts illustrating this uncertainty may be mentioned. With a me- 
chanical rheotome driven at a uniform speed, and its acting surfaces plati- 
num, the ratios of the current were— 

When set so that the point rises but little from the anvil .. 1:0000 + 


Rise greater .....-. Seo eet eee ee 1°7894 
Rise still greater, pacen Ag spring ereater.. .; ~. sae eee 1°9685 
Rise still greater, tension further increased ........-..... 1°8371 4 


Here a slight change of the adjustment nearly doubles the action of the 
inductorium. 

Another cause of uncertainty is the variable speed of the rheotome. In 
general it is worked by the primary current, and therefore is affected by 
fluctuation of the battery and the extra current of the primary. The me- 


1866. | Electricity given by Induction-Machines. 175 


chanical rheotome which I have mentioned is driven by clockwork, and its 
speed can be exactly regulated. With it I obtained 


Ss 
Time of rheotome’s stroke =0°2865. Current =1:0000 


ile 
2 2 9 0°2020. 99 0:9298 
3 cB ”? 0°1862. 9 0:8741 
4, A ie 0°1381. a 0:°7235 
ae 55 a: Cel 21.9. is 0°5771 
6 > & 0°1201. . 0-5588 
/ 29 By) 0°0983. » 0°3788 
8. ey) ” 0:0883. 55 0°2823 
9. oy) »” 00671. ry) 0°2478 
10. 29 oy) 0:0476. 9 0:2007 
EL. ” ” 0:0278. ry) 0:1946 
12. 55 5 0:0196. 3 0:1273 
As. 5 7 0:0098. ss 0:0470 


No. 10 was taken with a mercurial rheotome; and the remaining three 
with a spring one, such as Mr. Ladd applies to his inductoria*. 

This decrease of power is due to the core requiring time to be mag- 
netized. Suppose the current =A+ Bé, A being that caused by the elec- 
tric induction, B by the magnetic, I get from the above by minimum 


B 
squares A=0°0802; B=4:1713; 4=908; which values represent the 
observations pretty fairly, the probable error being +0°0491. Three cells 


: ; B é 
were used here: on another trial with five I had Ant !29 confirming a 


previous remark that the electric induction increases faster than the mag- 
netic. Hence much power is lost by working at too high a speed. 

The inductorium which I use consists of a strong oak table, on which 
are fixed vertically four primary helices, their axes being 12 and 18 inches 
apart ; at which distance the mutual action of the secondary helices is 
scarcely sensible in the Weber. I denote these primaries by P’, P", &c. 
Their wire is No. 12; P! and P! are 12°5 inches long; they have, in four 
layers, the first 383 spires, the second 3437. Their cores of iron wire, 
No. 18, are 1:12 diameter. PP’! and P* are 13°5 inches long; they have 
each 181 spires in two layers, and their cores are 1°60 diameter. They are 
all insulated by strong glass jars, and their connectors are so arranged that 
the current can be sent through any one separately, or through all at once. 
The normal arrangement is that the battery-current passes through P!"’, 
then through P! and P" collateral, and lastly through P’. Thus the © or 
exciting power of each primary is nearly the same. On a shelf below 
stands a Fizeau’s condenser, each of whose coatings is 120 feet divided into 

* For the first nine of these the time was given by the clockwork of the rheotome ; 


for the rest by dropping sparks on a slip of prepared paper, which was made to travel 
at the rate of 12 inches per second. 


+ The difference arose from the cotton lapping being thicker in P”. 


176 Rey. T. R. Robinson on increasing the [May 31, 


five sections. This, though so potent in respect of sparks, does not affect 
the quantity, which with it I found as 1°0000, without it 0°9948, a differ- 
ence not worth noting. The case, however, would be different if there 
were a gaseous interval in the circuit*. Beside this shelf is a bracket which 
supports rheotomes of various kinds. 

Over the jars can be put any of the secondary helices, the constants of 
which are given in the following Table :— 

The potential P and resistance of the first one, which I take as a standard, 
are assumed = 1. 

Taste I. 


N Feet of | Diameter 
am 


Entire 3 Potential. | Resistance. 
wire. | of wire. Height. bE 


Layer.| Spires. 


diameter. r. 
2 | am, in. in. 

G:F, .dctssel 27,070 | 010092 73 113,655 6°84. 4°0 I"00000 I*00000 
Je Beare ts 17,070 | 00092 TR |asOS5q loos 4°0 100000 0°85270 
i ty 8,110 | O°0153 55 6,570 6°72 4°0 o'48114 0°10079 
Lies 8,110 | 070153 55 6,570 6°72 4°0 o°48114 0°10079 
cL Ra ee 8,130 | O'0192 25° 1°6,524.| 6's 6"0 0°47520 0°08073 
IN Sots 8,130 | o0192 29 | 6,524] 6°56 59 0°4.7520 0°08282 
Amey Saat 7,000 | O°O107 oem 6,189] 5°93 3°5 0°44673 “£1808 
MS eetons vac 9,200 | O°0107 Sei 8,135 5°93 4°0 0°60272 \ Pees 


The first six were made by Mr. Ladd, who also determined for me the 
length and number of layers. The thickness of the wires was measured 
by me with a fihlhebel which read to 0-0001: each is a mean of ten mea- 
sures at different places, for no wire that I have ever tried is quite uniform. - 
The two last are experimental, their wire not being lapped, but merely in- 
sulated by a varnish of wax and rosin, as proposed by the late Dr. Callan: 
this plan does well for quantity, but cannot be trusted for any high tension. 

The potentials were computed, supposing the helices at the middle of 
tke primary P!! (where they are a maximum). For G I computed them 
in four other positions, and had the curiosity also to measure the currents. 

Distance of G from centre =0, potential 1:0000, current 10000 


2? 29 L 99 0:9842, Py 0°9856 
9 29 2; 29 0:9790, 99 0:9746 
23 EF) ’ 2? 0°9488, 9 0:9488 


3 
9 29 4, 99 08798, 29 0°9181 
All but the last agree tolerably. For positions of M and N, which were 
not central, they were specially computed. 
The resistances were obtained by including in the circuit of a small Grove’s 
* Three of the combinations described in Table IT. have tensions nearly as 1, 2, and 


3. Their quantities, with a circuit entirely metallic, and with one in which there was 
an interval of + inch of air at 0:01 in. pressure, are as 


A ee cass Peas entire 1:0000, interval 1:0000 
G-+-H........ bstatee | “oy, © $0848; 215 dee 
VEEEIVS Sede cys daz ss » 09994, ,, 1:8844 


The first set are nearly equal; the second increase, though at a decreasing rate, with 
the tension. 


(1866. ] Electricity given by Induction-Machines. 177 


cell and a tangent rheometer of 950 spires, first the helix G, then that to 
be determined, and lastly the sum of it andG. Assuming G=1, we have 
three equations to determine—the r of the helix in question, the remaining 
r of the circuit, and the electromotive force of the cell. In deducing the 
currents, the term involving sin*@ was used with a coefficient obtained by 
integrating through the length and breadth of the rheometer’s coil; and 
as its mean diameter is 6°4 times the length of its needle, and 6 never 
passed 54°, I think the numbers of the Table are true to the last decimal. 

For brevity I symbolize the combinations, when in series, as a sum, 
G+H; when collateral, as a product G.H; and for a reason which will 
soon appear, when two are on the same primary I denote them by a new 
letter, as V=G-+I. At first I used I and Gon P!’; K and Hon P®. To 
prevent disruptive discharge, they were kept 1:5 inch asunder by disks of 
baked wood. ‘The results are given in 


Taste ITI. 
N be g Sum of 
ame, ®. E* | Spark. Sets. F’ | components TI. d 
in. 

Gsisiis Brew B'OaGGo)| 1'C000 |. 3°95 | sna | T7OCQOO. |. ewaes 1°00000 |1°00779 
LO eee Steel EoEOOO © /.23737 : Nh Ne soeese 1°00000 |0°985385 
G+H...... 1°0348 | r'0096+| ... Bie eTROBA QTR: Gis. 42s 2,,00000 |0°92306 
CECE Wi. csi: 1°9988 | 2°0223 isi 4 | 098837 2°0855 1*°00000 
eae cic sis nels = 2534.3 | 473635 523 ETL Orso uO gl Brerccge 0°23149 |046542 
oe Sesame D7OgA Ae5S5S..| B4O) ¢ 3 | O760969 | ..2... 0°46298 |0'44872 
(I-K) S| 3°0552|6°5756 | o80 | 4 | 046462 4°6220 
a Soesc @°9995|'5°3776 | 9°35.) 3.) C7256a7,° 7°... 2°46298 |0°83075 
ENG eases, 1°9434|2°7319 | 4°39 | I | o°71138 | 


F is computed with a correction for the place of the helix on the pri- 
mary, and with a resistance which includes that of the Weber =0:00779. 
The Weber must have a considerable [1 of its own; but as I did not know 
its constants, and as this II must vary with the deflection, I did not com- 
pute it. Possibly some of the discrepancies may be owing to this. The 
sparks show the difference of tension; they were taken with platinum 
poimts, and when the machine was excited by four Groves. The column, 
sum of components, gives for the collateral combinations the values which 
arise from adding the ® of each helix, taking into account the Weber’s re- 
sistance. 

1, It will be observed that G+ H with twice as many spires, and V+ V! 
with thrice as many as G, give the same current; so also that of 1+K is 
near that of I. 

2. On the other hand, G.H is twice G, and V. V! twice V+ V'. 

3. It is also manifest that the effect of I is not proportional to its di- 
minished. resistance : its F is 4°4 times greater than that of G, but its actual 

* These values of I should be multiplied by a factor representing the F of G, which 


must be greater than its ®, here assumed as unity, As, however, it belongs to all, its 
omission does not affect the comparison. 


178 Rev. T. R. Robinson on increasing the - [May 81, 


current is only 2°5. This is at once explained by its 6 being so much less. 
So also the ratio of the theoretic to the effective current is nearly unity 
in G+H, while it is only 0°73 in V+ V’, and for the same reason. In 
G.H.(1+K) the ratio is still smaller; but I shall recur to this. 

I now used the four primaries I+ K=L on PY”, single helices on the 
others. I had some doubt whether the difference of the cores might not 
influence the results, and tried this with P’, P’’, and one P’, whose core 
= 1-90 inch in diameter and 15-5 inches long. It has 349 spires of No. 15 
in two layers. G was put on each of them, and currents transmitted, 
which made their ®’s nearly equal. 


Taste ITI. 

Name. . a ss ®. Sets. | Spark. 5 os 
cite Sebewer I'0O POA TAT He" e oN 1169 
APA se dense ee 2°04, 1°0000 2° 3°2.37 1168 
PxRe ose 3°00 1°0054. a 2°662 1156 


It follows from this that the least of these cores is large enough for the 
excitation produced by four cells: the size does seem to increase the spark, 
though this increase may be owing to better insulation of the core-wires in 
P!! and Pv+. 

The following results were obtained with the mechanical rheotome worked 
at a uniform speed of 13 discharges per second. 


Taste IV. 
Se 
® Sum of 
2 | = ce components. a: B: 
Ce eseiian one TOOCO ©} T7OOOO ad) e521 SETOOCOO NN, sana : I°00000 =| £'00779 
1 — 1K...) 28832, |.) A 5206 ag FO Ady Sanh) eaten o'6-+ 0°34624.— 
GHL wee 1°3149 1°6143 DAVOS EAS TA ie cteewe 16+ 0°7 5002 — 
(Ce PSRs Z°04o2 | ) 573109) 11 +)O%%7150 2°8 324 
A MS hice «sis 1°4196 T°3579 4! 02a POs G ley aaa. ee 1700000 =| 0°85385 
C— AAs 4] FOSS2 || 2°OLI2 142°) Cr90855 | Tales 056286 +] 0°92704 
Mee eel eds ciens 2 cicaigiil  RATOO) | Net | OuyeO2 ly) ted sane 0°31646 | 0'27756 
Le Sa Se Ap 2°5580 || 473635 2, OG O02 G5) a adeareen 0°23149 | 0°46542 
Herre sscaccenns 26465 | 4-363 8 5° 0760051 a eaten 023149 | 046542 
KGS on oe as S°5558 1.5 2404.)| iT 0°47776 3°8594. 
Ce se De is 4°3179 | 65756 | 3 | 0765666 4°1799 
Cay Bp OR Shae §*1460 | 6°9400 | 3 |0°74153 4°6932 
G GC SHS.) 60758 4 82081 3 | 0°74030 670488 
M-EN...ccese. 2.°5207 5°4.586 2 |0°46179 Gores 0°63292 | 026862 
= Oe eae 1°7616 CAG SOSA O"Z22 75 NF oS ecene 0°73130 | 0°23248 
MEN | 6637 || ia 9644 Va '0°33614a oe 0°65810 | 028543 
gah Opee...ze 3°4596 | 995774 | 1 | 0°36124 3°4.996 
MON TK. ...| 8:1939. | 15°7398 | 1 |.0°52058 8°2736 


* 2:5 sets taken on the first day were very unsteady. The one taken on the second 
was close, and gave 1:0267. 

+ At the same time I tried two helices similar to A and B, except that their wire is 
varnished zron, which were given to me by Dr. Callan. Their @ is 0:6887, and their 
spark only 0°524in. The @ of A+B is 29138 times as great, a difference caused 
solely by the greater resistance of the iron. 


1866. | Electricity gwen by Induction- Machines. 179 


1. As before, two helices in series give no increase of ere ; M+N 
is the same as N, G+ L nearly the mean of G and L. 

2. The quantity of collateral helices is seen in column 6 (as in Table II.) 
to be the sum of the separate actions of each. The discrepancies are not 
greater than what can be explained by the uncertainties inherent in these 
measures, which I have already described. One apparent exception is a 
strong confirmation of this rule—the case of G.H (1+K). Its observed 
©=3°0552, while the sum =4:6220. Gand I being on the same primary 
are excited together; but in measuring either, as there is no current in the 
other (but merely a state of tension), their [1 is not changed. When, 
however, they are connected collaterally, the currents react on each other, 
their [I’s are increased: the ®’s are thus diminished, and therefore their 
resultant is the sum of quantities less than those used in the computation. 
The 4’s in this case become—for G 0°94289, for H 0°79885, and for I+ K 
0°34588, which are quite sufficient to account for the difference. 

3. As with I in Table II., so here it will be observed that N has less 
relative power than either I or K ; its actual power is even less, though its 
theoretical force exceeds theirs in the proportion of 5: 4. This is explained 
by its 6 being so much smaller; but it gives this important information, 
that, at least in helices of these dimensions, nothing is gained by using wire 
thicker than that of I, or 2: of an inch*. 

4. The effect of Lis far less than that of I+ K. In the first the helices 
are on the same primary, in the other on separate ones. In the former 
case the II is larger, for it is the sum of the I] of each on itself, and those 
of each on the other; 6 therefore is less. Besides, the potential of the 
core on the helices is less than when each of them is central on it. 

The difference is even more remarkable in O as compared to its elements 
M-+N, its effect being only 0-7 of the other, and 0°3 of the theoretic 
-power. ‘The same disparity of course prevails in their combinations ; O. L 
giving only 3-46, while the same four helices arranged on separate prima- 
ries give 8°19. The combinations G. H (I+ K) and G.L.H have the same 
helices ; but in the first two were on the same primaries. As, however, 
they were 1°5 inch instead of 0°5 apart, the [II was not so much increased 
as in the other cases, and therefore there is not quite so great a decrease 
of power. 

The following practical maxims may be deduced from the experiments 
and reasoning which I have related. 

The attention of instrument-makers has been chiefly directed towards 
mereasing the length of spark given by these machines, and in this they 
have succeeded to a surprising degree; but in doing so they have not 
added to the quantity of electricity which is produced by them. This, 
however, is by far the most important object; for in most applications of 


* This is between 27 and 28 of the Birmingham wire-gauge. I believe Ruhmkorff 
uses 28, 


VOL. XV. Q 


180 Rev. T. R. Robinson on increasing the [May 31, 


the inductorium all tension above what is necessary to force the necessary 
quantity of current through the circuit is useless, nay sometimes injurious*. 
I am inclined to think that a tension which gives sparks of 4 inches will 
be found quite sufficient in ordinary cases, and this will be given by about 
20,000 spires; all beyond only adding to the weight of the instrument, 
its cost, and the difficulty of insuring its insulation. It must be kept in 
mind that the mere quantity is independent of the length of wire: I 
actually found it the same for a flat spiral of 21 spires and for a helix of 
13,655: 

It is not, I believe, ascertained what is the best proportion of height 
and diameter for a secondary helix of a given number of spires. It is 
generally made as long as its primary, though perhaps not on any definite 
principle. The magnetic potential P is in this form a little greater than 
in that which I used, but so also is IT: = length of wire is less, which 
increases F, but also decreases 6; and a@ priori it is not easy to decide 
which way the balance inclines. The II is something less if the spires be 
in separate sections than if they be in one continuous coil. 

The dimensions of the core do not seem to be of importance as to quan- 
tity within the limits which I tried; their length seems to increase the 
tension. 

The quantity is greatly diminished when the rheotome works rapidly ; 
and in spectral work the probable limit of its slowness is that the im- 
pression on the eye shall be continuous. 

The quantity increases with the diameter of the wire up to a maximum, 
which is attained when this is about the sixty-fifth of an inch. 

Helices may be combined either for tension or quantity without much 
loss of these respective powers. 

If for the first, they are combined in series; the genera] tension is the 
sum of the individual ones, and in this way we can obtain sparks of a 
length limited only by the strength of the insulator which is interposed 
between the primary and secondary helices. If the latter be all of the 
same wire, the quantity remains unchanged ; if they differ in this respect, 
it will be intermediate between the weakest and strongest. 

If they are combined for quantity, they must be set collaterally, 2. e. 
all their positive terminals connected, and all their negative. The result- 
ing current will be the sum of all the separate ones, but the tension is 
not increased; the sparks seem even a few hundredths of an inch shorter, 
but are much denser, and in the higher combinations approach to the 
character of a jar discharge. Hence there is no risk to the apparatus by 
extending this mode of combination to any extent. 

It deserves notice that the helices need not be equal in tension or-re- 
sistance; thus the arrangement G. K gives little less than the sum of its 


* Tt has often been remarked that intense discharges will not show strata well in an 


exhausted tube. 
+ The connectors add some resistance and some counter-induction. 


1866. | Electricity given by Induction-Machines. 181 


components, though K has only half as many spires as G and but a tenth 
of its resistance. 

In combining these instruments, the primaries should not be consecutive 
if of large numbers, for so the action of their extra-current would be very 
destructive to the rheotome; with P’+ P!' containing 726 spires in series 
the spark in the mercurial one is almost explosive, but when they are 
collateral it works quietly. Were, however, ten or twelve to be so com- 
bined, it would require a battery of very large cells to maintain the cur- 
rent, and it is better to have a separate battery for each pair of primaries. 
In this I find no difficulty; the negative* poles of all the batteries are 
connected with the mercury of the rheotome; from its platinum point, 
separate wires go to the entering bind-screw of each primary, other wires 
go from their exit bind-screws to the positive poles of their respective bat- 
teries, and thus their action is perfectly simultaneous. Of course, if many 
batteries were used, the current in the rheotome might be too powerful, 
but then there would be no difficulty in having separate rheotomes worked 
by one electromagnet, and (at least with the mercurial form) adjusting 
them by a revolving mirror to perfect synchronism. 

In this way I feel sure that we can attain an amount of electric power 
which has not yet been approached by the inductorium, and which may 
be expected to be a most powerful means of research in those inquiries to 
which I referred at the commencement of this paper. At the head of 
these stands the palmary discovery of Mr. Huggins, that there are nebulee 
and comets whose matter possesses spectral attributes not corresponding 
to that of the sun, the stars, or our own earthly elements. Is that differ- 
ence an indication of some body sui generis, or a mere result of peculiar 
temperature or other molecular conditions? Is, for instance, the bright 
line, corresponding to one of nitrogen, which occurs, we may say, normally, 
produced by nitrogen as such? If so, what has blotted out the other 
bright lines of that magnificent spectrum? Is it due to an element of 
nitrogen, dissociated by some enormous temperature from other elements, 
perhaps from hydrogen, one line of which is also present? And the third 
line, elsewhere unknown—is it the herald of a new body, or merely a deri- 
vative from another spectrum? We cannot even hope for an answer to 
these questions till the spectra of at least those elements which seem cos- 
mical have been examined through a range of temperature extending from 
the lowest that developes in them luminous lines, to the highest that is 
excited by the most potent electric discharges which we can produce and 
control. Now, to obtain such a graduated range, the plan of combination 
which I have been describing seems well fitted. It, of course, cannot be 
expected to equal, under any extension, the wonderful voltaic battery of 
Mr. Gassiot (at least its arc-discharge) ; but how few can avail themselves 


* If the mercury be made positive, each discharge makes a sharp report and blows 
about the metal and alcohol in most unpleasant profusion. 


182 Mr. Tarn on the Stability of Domes. [May 3], 


of such an instrument as that! But if, as seems probable, we can without 
much difficulty increase the heating-power of the mduction-discharge an 
hundredfold, we shall have made a very great step, and by means which 
are everywhere accessible. Inductoria are common; there are few situa- 
tions where a physicist cannot obtain access to several, and combine them 
as Despretz did the voltaic batteries of Paris to make the experiments 
which have thrown such splendour on his name. 


IV. “On the Stability of Domes.” By E. Wynpnam Tarn, M.A. 
Communicated by Grorce Gopwin, Esq. Received May 5, 
1866. 


The few writers who have attempted to treat the subject of the Equili- 
brium of Domes mathematically, have entirely failed to obtain results that 
are of any practical use to the architect. Their failure has arisen from 
taking a too theoretical view of the subject, and endeavouring by mathe- 
matical reasoning to find the form which a dome ought to have in order 
that it might stand safely. Such a question is of no practical utility, as 
domes of various sizes and forms have been erected for centuries past, and 
the question for the architect is,—given a dome of certain form and size, 
what are the conditions which must obtain between it and the wall of the 
building it is intended to cover, in order that the whole structure may be 
* in a condition of stability ? 

The object, therefore, of this paper is to find a solution to the following 
problem :— 

Given a spherical dome, built of stone or brick, of any radius and thick- 
ness, and standing on a *‘drum” or walls of any height ; to find the thrust 
of the dome on the “ drum,” and the thickness that must be given to the wails 
in order to insure the stability of the structure. 

I take the case of the dome having a spherical section, as being the 
form most commonly used; but the same method of investigation will 
apply to domes of any form. 

In this investigation I shall consider the dome as made up of a large 
number of arched ribs, of which the bases resting on the top of the 
“drum” subtend a small angle (@) at the centre, and the vertices have no 
thickness; each rib having the form of a wedge cut out of the spherical 
shell hy two planes intersecting in a vertical line through the centre, and 
making the small angle ¢ with each other. I shall then consider that the 
two wedges thus formed on opposite sides of the dome, thrust against each 
other at the vertex, as in the case of an ordinary semicircular arch, and 
by this means keep each other in equilibrium. Of course no arch of 
this form if built alone could stand for a moment, as it would give way 
laterally ; but in the dome this is prevented by the parts on each side 
of the rib under consideration. 


OCT. 8. 1856, 


1866.] Mr. Tarn on the Stability of Domes. 183 


This method is adopted by Venturoli in treating on the equilibrium of 
domes. 7 
Fig. 1 represents a rib of the form above described cut out of the dome, 
and the corresponding part of the “drum” which sustains it. The arch 
will have a tendency to fall in at the crown C D, and open outwards at the 
haunches E F, causing the joint C D to open at D, and that at E F to open 
‘at F. ) 


LZ 


on the opposite side, acts at C. 

We shall now find the effect of the force N upon a given joint EF. Let 
P be the weight of the portion of rib above EF; x the perpendicular dis- 
tance from E of a vertical from the centre of gravity of P; y the vertical 
distance of CN from E. Then the moments of these forces about E are 
Pz and Ny; and in order that there may be equilibrium, we must have N 


equal to the greatest value of P.“. We have therefore to express P “in 

pa) 
terms of 6, the angle which FE makes with the vertical, aud find what value 
of 0 makes Pe a Maximum. 


Let + be the internal and R the external radius of the sphere, 6 the 
weight of a cubic foot of the material of which it is composed. Then the 
volume of any portion of the rib (pg7s CD) is 


Va \\ipvameier ee ON cigs 2 


: 5 
s0 that P=d . V=d.¢(1—cos ye = 


VOL. XV. R 


, taking limits from 06=0. 


184 Mr. Tarn on the Stability of Domes. [May 31, 
If g is the centre of gravity of the portion of the rib whose weight is P, 
and G its projection on OA; then if OG=z, we find the value of z from 
Mr .sin?@.cosg¢.dr. dd. do 


\\\r .sin6. dr. di .do 
\\r" 1 (1—cos 20) dr. dO 


\\ .sin@.dr. dé ; : a (B) 


And since ¢ is small, we may consider * = Tes 1, nearly ; in which case 


= mee 


3 Ri—r*@—4 sin 20 

8 R*—r*? 1—cosé 

Now @ is the perpendicular distance of gG from E; therefore 
=r sin 0—z, 


= 


3 
Therefore Pr=c . ¢ (1 —cos 6) ae 


me x {rin Roe 
8 R?—r*? 1—cos@ 


or 
ne ee (R?—r*) sin 6 (1—cos @)—3 (R*—r*) (0—3 sin 28) I. 
And since y=R—7r cos 8, and N=P” 7 


5g Sr (Rr) sin 0 Cl oes a5 a) Onan 0). 


Ver R—~r cos 6 


I will take ¢ as the circular measure of an angle of 2°, or p= =-0349066, 


in which case we have 
N=-0014543 1 


R—rcos@ 
=°001454 6x N’, say. 7 


We have now to find what value of 6 will make N’ a maximum, and as 
the ordinary rules for maxima will not apply to this expression, we must 
find it by calculating N’ for different values of 6. I have done this for 
the case when r=10, R=11, and find that N is greatest when 0=70°; 
thus 


B= 600 oe si IN — O00 00s 
B= 70? oa ccrntdinciie, IN-== 000241 
O=—ilie Bek stele 3428 N’=506:018. 


We have now to substitute in N the values of 6, sin 0, &c. when the aces 
is 70°, or when 0=35 507 F 22173» sin 0='93969, cos 0=-34202, sin 26 


This reduces the expression for N to 
__ .°0071927 (Re—7*) —:0039273 (R*—r*) 
his R—-34202r 3 > ee 
We can now transpose N and P to the point E; and in order to find the 


1866. ] Mr. Tarn on the Stability of Domes. 185 


thickness of the pier, we proceed to take their moments, together with 
those of the part of the rib below EF, and the pier itself, about the outer 
bottom edge S of the pier. 

If we call yS=4,the perpendicular distance from S of the direction of N, 
then 

Daa COBO) oie lee aie a ei) e Lie) ie a VCR) 
where H is the height RS of the pier or “drum.” 

Let Se=a, the distance from S of a vertical dropped from E; F=the 
weight of the portion of the rib below EF ; c=the perpendicular distance 
from S of a vertical from the centre of gravity of the lower portion of the 
rib whose weight is F; Q=the weight of the portion of the “drum” on 
which the rib stands, and g=the distance from S of a vertical from its 
centre of gravity ; we have then (in equilibrium) the equation 

NO OO Gal ste. nw ol rete) 
which I will call the Kquation for Equilibrium. From this equation we 
can find the thickness (¢) of the pier necessary to produce equilibrium. 

Tn order, however, that we may have stability in the structure, we must 
multiply Nd by the coefficient of stability, which we may take as 2. The 
equation from which to find the value of ¢ then becomes 

ZNO Ee Ge kal; 6 Se) ol ev nteh) 
which I will call the Hquation of Stability. 

I now proceed to find the values of P.a, Q.q, and F.c. 

The value of P was previously found to be 


P=0.¢ vtedsey 


73 


and if we substitute for ¢ and 6 their values, 
P=-007656 3(R3—7). 
Also a=Se=t+r(1—sin 0)=¢+-06031 7; so that we find for the value 
of P.a, 
Pa=:007656 6 (R?—7*) + °00046186.(R’—7*), . . . . (5) 
The value of F is found by means of the ae (A), taking the limits 


from 6=0 to O—- ; which gives us 


3 


ibaa 
F=3.¢ .cos 62 g 


= "00398 6 (R?—7°). 

Let z, be the distance from O on OA of the perpendicular dropped from 
the centre of gravity of the portion of the rib whose weight is F, Then 
the integral (B) gives us, by taking the same limits of 6 as for F, 

eye 
‘ 3 aa Se Min ca eh 
* 8 R87 cos 0 


R2 


186 Mr. Tarn on the Stability of Domes. [May 31, 


And if we substitute for 6 its value, 


pet 4a 
eon a, 


And e=OR—z,=t+7r—z,. 

Hence we find 
F . c= ‘00398 6 (R?’—7*) ¢+°00398 6 {r (R?—7*) —°7351 (Ré—7*)} . (6) 

We have now to find the moment about S of the weight of the pier. 

Let Q be the weight of the pier, 6, the weight of a cubic foot of its ma- 
terial; then 

Q=5¢ . 6, ((7+2)?—77) .H=49 6, (2r+4)¢.H 
="017453 5, (2r+2)¢. H. 

Let figure 2 represent the plan of the pier, g its centre of gravity, 

ST=¢ its thickness. Then by the integral ELAS we find 


_A(r+8)3 —7r sinig. t sin 39] 
TG Fy or, putting = 2 to 


aio ae _2(37+3rt+F), 
q=Sg=OS—Og=r+t—Og 
—3 (r+?) (2r+t)—2 (37? +3rt+?’) 
3 (2r+f) 
_ 8rt+ 
~ 3 (2r+t)’ 
We therefore obtain for the value of Qq, ‘ 

Qg="017453 5, (2r+t)t.H SS 


=°0058177 0, .@(8r+t) Hoey. 2.) =e 
We can now, by adding together the several quantities (5), (6), (7), 
and equating to the value of Nd as found from (1) and (2), form the 
equation for equilibriwm (3), which will be a cubic equation in respect of 
t. We shall thence find the value of ¢ necessary to produce equilibrium 
in the structure, and, by equating the same quantities to 2Né, form the 
equation for stability (4), from which we get the value of ¢ necessary to 
produce stability in the structure. 
The following examples will serve to show how readily these formule: can 
be applied, and the use which the practical architect may make of them. 


Example | :— 
Let r=10 ft., R=11 ft., 6=125 Ibs., 6,=150 lbs., H=50 ft. 
Prom). ee ON. 2 ON0 2s 
p(B) Pa 7) AB) eS ! 58-4202; 
therefore 
N6 =4915, 
and 


2Nb =9830. 


1866. } Mr. Tarn on the Stability of Domes. 187 


From (5). . . P.a= 316°767 ¢+191-06975; 
» (6). . . F.e= 16467254 — 50°54; 
» (7). - »« Q.g=1308'98 +4 43°63275 é. 
Hence the equation for equilibrium (3) is 
4915=43°63275 + 1308-98 2+ 481°4395.¢+ 140°52975, 
which reduces to 
2+ 302° + 11:03¢—109°42=0. 
We can solve this by means of Horner’s process, and find ¢=1°7 ft. for 
equilebrium. 
The equation for stability (4) becomes 
9830=43°63275# + 1308-982? + 481°4395¢+4 140°52975, 
which reduces to 
2+ 30é4+ 11:03£—222:069=0, 
from which we obtain, by Horner’s process, 
£=2°45 ft. for stability. 
Example 2 :— 
Let r=30 ft., R=33 ft.. H=80 ft., 6 and 0, as before. 
POL esti. YUN ==) 2483784: 
a ap ) et ae artes 90°2606 ; 
therefore 


NE = 224192°8, 


and 
2N6 =448385°6. 


From (5) 28) °Pla@== 8552-71). ¢ 415476:65 ; 
» (6). . . F.c= 4446:16 ¢£+ 4094:17; 
» (7). . « Q.g= 69°8124 24 6283-116 27. 
Adding and reducing, the equation for equilibrium becomes 
t°+ 902? + 186:2¢—3048'31 =0, 
whence ¢=4°83 ft. for equilibrium. 
And the equation for stability is 
H+ 90¢’ + 186°2¢—6159°7=0, 
whence £=7°07 ft. for stability. 


Example 3 :— 
I will apply the formule to the case of the dome of Sultan Mohammed’s 
tomb at Beejapore, described in Mr. Fergusson’s ‘ Handbook of Archi- 
tecture.’ One peculiarity of this structure is that the inner face of the 
dome is set 5 ft. 6 in. within the inner face of the wall on which it rests, 
as shown in fig. 3.; so that in calculating the values of a, &c., we must 
add 5:5 ft. to the thickness ¢; hence we shall get a yo a SE less 
value for ¢ from the resulting Seas: 
In this dome, r=62 ft., R=72 ft., H=116 ft. ; and we will suppose, as 
before, that 6=125 lbs., 3 =150 ie. 
BO 1) yo. eye Sorel sgh ON 
TON i gn Bk ull rea ae kg 


31132 ; 
137°20524 ; 


188 Mr. Tarn on the Stability of Domes. [June 7, 


therefore 
N6 =4271473°522, 
and 
2N6 =8542947:-044. 
From (5). . «. P.a==:957 (134920) (¢+5°5) +3°56745 (134920) 
=129118°44¢441191511°78; 
» (6). . « F.e=4975 (134920) (£+5°5)—-4975 (527854:4) 
=67122°7+ 106567°28 ; 
9 (7) « «QQ. 9101-22798 2+: 186 x 101-227982. 


Adding and reducing, the equation for equilibrium (3) becomes 
#?+ 186¢°+1938:6¢—29373°24=0, 
whence ¢=8:2 ft. for equilibrium. 
And the equation for stability (4) becomes 
7+ 186¢?+ 1938°6£—71570=0, 
whence ¢= 14°66 ft. for stability. 


In the construction of this particular dome, the values obtained above 
for ¢ will only apply to four points on the walls which carry the dome ; for 
instead of being built on a circular “ drum,” this drum is made to cover a 
square chamber by means of “ pendentives,”” which are so arranged as to — 
throw the thrust principally on the angles of the building, where the values 
of a and c will become very great, and it is only at the centre of each of 
the four sides that the above equations can be émployed to compare the 
thrust of the dome with the strength of the walls. At these four points 
the walls are about 11 ft. thick, so as to be considerably more than suf- — 
ficient to produce equilibrium; and the coefficient of stability at these 
points is 1°374 instead of 2. Had the dome therefore been built ona | 
circular drum of 11 feet thickness, in all probability the edifice would not 
have stood for any length of time. 

Much of the thrust of a dome may be counteracted by means of an iron 
belt placed round it at the point where the thrust is greatest. This point 
I have shown to be at 70° from the crown, or 20° from the springing. 


June 7, 1866. 
The Annual Meeting for the election of Fellows was held this day. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair, 
The Statutes relating to the Election of Fellows having been read, Pro- 


fessor Brayley and Mr. Toynbee were, with the consent of the Society, 
nominated Scrutators to assist the Secretaries in examining the Lists. 


1866.| Mr. Hulke on the Anatomy of the Fovea centralis. 189 


The votes of the Fellows present having been collected, the following 
Candidates were declared to be duly elected into the Society :— 


John Charles Buckuill, M.D. The Ven. John Henry Pratt, M.A. 


Rev. Frederick William Farrar. Capt. George Henry Richards, R.N. 
William Augustus Guy, M.B. Thomas Richardson, Esq., M.A. 
James Hector, M.D. , William Henry Leighton Russell, 
John William Kaye, Esq. Esq. 

Hugo Miiller, Ph.D. Rey. William Selwyn, D.D. 
Charles Murchison, M.D. Rev. Richard Townsend, M.A. 
William Henry Perkin, Esq. Henry Watts, B.A. 


June 14, 1866. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The Rev. F. W. Farrar, Dr. Charles Murchison, Captain Richards, R.N., 
Mr. W. H. L. Russell, and Mr. Henry Watts, were admitted into the 
Society. . 

Pursuant to notice given at the last Ordinary Meeting, Franz Cornelius 
Donders, George Friedrich Bernhard Riemann, and Gustav Rose, were 
balloted for and elected Foreign Members of the Society. 


The following papers were read :— 


I. “On the Anatomy of the Fovea centralis of the Human 
Retina.” By J.W. Huvrxz, F.R.C.S., Assistant Surgeon to the 
Middlesex and Royal London Ophthalmic Hospitals. Commu- 
nicated by Wm. Bowman, Esq. Received May 26, 1866. 


(Abstract). 


1. The Fovea centralis is a minute circular pit in the inner surface of 

the retina, made by the radial divergence of the cone-fibres from a central 
point, by the thinning and the outward curving of the inner retinal layers 

towards this point, and by the peripheral location of the outer granules 
belonging to the central cones. 

2. The inner surface of the retina declines in a rapid uniform curve from 
the edge to the centre of the fovea, and very gradually from the edge to- 
wards the ora retinz ; so that the edge of the fovea is the most raised part 
in the macula lutea, where the retina is thickest, and the centre of the . 
fovea the most depressed part in the macula, where the retina is thinnest. 

3. At the centre of the fovea, proceeding from the outer to the inner 
surface of the retina, we meet with the following structures in succession :— 
the bacillary layer and the outer limiting membrane, a small quantity of 
finely areolated connective tissue, the inner granule-layer and the ganglionic 
layer very attenuated, a thin granular band containing optic nerve-fibres,’ 
and the membrana limitans interna. 


190 Mr. Hulke on the Anatomy of the Fovea centralis. [June 14, 


4, The bacillary layer contains only cones in the fovea, but rods in ad- 
dition towards the periphery of the macula lutea. : 

5. The cones and rods in the macula are longer and more slender than 
at a distance from it. Although the greater slenderness is more apparent 
in the cones, yet the most slender cones are stouter than the rods. 

6. In both cones and rods an inner and an outer segment are discernible, 
and both segments consist of a sheathing membrane and contents. In the 
outer segment the contents do not exhibit any indication of structure. 
The inner segment, where its dimensions permit, contains an “ outer 
granule,’ and is always produced in the form of a fibre, which connects 
the cones and rods with the inner layers. These I have called the 
primitive cone- and rod-fibres, collectively primitive bacillary fibres. 

(Kolliker, in the last edition of his ‘Handbuch der Gewebelehre,’ re- 
stricts to these the term ‘‘ Miiller’s fibres,’ which was originally exclu- 
sively, and is still very generally given to the vertically radial connective- 
tissue fibres first described by H. Miller.) 

7. An outer granule is intercalated in each primitive bacillary fibre, Ist, 
where the inner bacillary segment is too slender to include the granule, 
and, 2nd, where the segment is associated with a distant granule. This 
kind of connexion always obtains with the rods, and with the cones at the 
centre of the fovea. 

The outer granules which belong to the rods are not distinguished from 
those which belong to the cones by any constant characters. . 

8. The primitive bacillary fibres run obliquely from the outer towards 
the inner surface of the retina, and radially from the centre of the fovea 
towards the periphery of the macula lutea. 

9. They form a very conspicuous obliquely fibrillated band, lying be- 
tween the outer and the inner granule-layers, in which the primitive fibres 
combine in bundles which have a plexiform arrangement. This band cor- 
responds to that band which in the chameleon’s retina I called the cone- 
fibre plexus. Miller and Kolliker call it the intergranule-layer. 

10. Between the inner surface of this layer and the inner granule-layer, 
there is a thin granular band of finely areolated connective tissue, through 
which the bacillary fibres pass into the inner granule-layer. It is in part 
derived from the terminal divisions of the vertically radial connective-tissue 
fibres, and it answers to the band which in the chameleon I termed the 
intergranule-layer. 

11. In the inner granule-layer two kinds of granules are distinguishable, 
nuclei and nucleated cells. Both are in connexion with the oblique bacil- 
lary fibres, which in this situation are exceedingly delicate, and require a 
high magnifying power and a good section for their demonstration. 

12. The connective-tissue fibres (generally known as Miiler’s radial 
fibres), which traverse the retina in a vertically radial direction from the 
membrana limitans interna towards the outer surface, are very conspicuous 
in the inner layers, where in sections transverse to the direction of the 


1866.] Mr. Hulke on the Anatomy of the Fovea centralis. 191 


optic nerve-fibres they are arranged in arcades, which contain the last- 
named fibres and the ganglion-cells imbedded in a granular matrix of 
finely woven connective tissue. They are less visible in the outer layers, 
apparently because many of their terminal divisions lose themselves in the 
(connective tissue) intergranule-layer; and hence the decussation of the ob- 
lique bacillary and the vertically radial connective-tissue fibres within the 
cone-fibre plexus, so conspicuous in the chameleon, is scarcely noticeable in 
the human retina. 
Deductions. 

1. Since the total of the effects of light upon living tissue will be greater 
as the extent of tissue traversed by it is greater, and since the relative 
common sensitiveness of a surface varies with the number of distinct sen- 
tient elements it contains, it follows that the greater length of the cones 
and rods, and their greater slenderness, which allows a larger number of 
them to the superficial unit, are in harmony with the greater sensitiveness 
of the retina at the macula lutea. Inasmuch, however, as the foveal cones 
are stouter than the rods, a superficial unit at the centre of the fovea con- 
tains fewer sentient (7.e. percipient) elements than the same unit near the 
periphery of the macula lutea; and on this ground the sensitiveness of the 
retina at the fovea should be less than that of the retina near the periphery 
of the macula. On the other hand, the extreme thinness of the inner 
layers of the retina at the centre of the fovea, places the bacillary layer 
here most favourably for receiving incident light. 

2. The division of the rods and cones into an outer and an inner seg- 
ment is natural. The facts in support of this are, the presence of the di- 
vision in perfectly fresh specimens; its sharpness and constant occurrence 
at a definite place; the constantly rectilinear figure of the outer, and the 
curvilinear figure of the inner segment; the different refractive powers of 
the segments; and their different behaviour towards staining and chemical 
solutions. 

3. From these struetural differences it is a fair inference that the seg- 
ments have different physiological meanings. 

The higher refractive power, straight sides, and slender cylindrical or 
prismatic figure of the outer segment may be adaptations for confining 
within the segment light incident upon its ends, and for preventing the 
lateral escape of light through the sides of the segment into neighbouring 
cones and rods. These considerations incline me to adopt the opinion 
that this segment has an optical function, an opinion which derives further 
support from the fact that, in those animals in which the segment is so 
wide a cylinder that a ray might be incident upon the inner surface of its 
sides at a small enough angle not to be reflected but to pass out, the seg- 
ment is insulated by a sheath of black pigment. 

The inner segments of the cones and rods are the specially modified 
peripheral terminations of the optic nerve-fibres ; and at their junction with 


192 Mr. A. J. Ellis on Plane Stigmaties. [June 14, 


the outer segment the conversion of light into nerve-foree may take 
place. 

4. The outer granules being the nuclei of the inner cone- and rod-seg- 
ments, probably maintain the integrity of these as living tissues, and are 
not directly concerned in their specific functions as organs of perception. 

5. The primitive bacillary fibres are the link by which the cones and 
rods communicate through the inner praliaiee and ganglion-cells with the 
optic nerve-fibres. 

6. The smaller inner granules are nuclei of the oldie bacillary fibres 
in the inner granule-layer ; or they may be small bipolar ganglion-cells, and 
act specifically on the forces transmitted through the oblique fibres from 
the cones and rods. The larger inner granules not being distinguishable 
by any definite structural characters from the smaller cells of the ganglionic 
layer, may agree with these latter cells in function. : 

7. Since the ganglion-cells (of the ganglionic layer) are fewer than the 
inner granules, and much fewer than the cones and rods, and since it is 
probable that these latter communicate with the optic nerve-fibres only 
through the ganglion-cells, it follows that one ganglion-cell probably is in 
correspondence with more than one inner granule and with several cones 
and rods. From this it is not an improbable conjecture that the cones and 
rods are disposed in groups, each of which is represented by one or more 
ganglion-cells thef unction of which is to connect or coordinate the indi- 
vidual action of the separate bacillary elements in their groups in a manner 
analogous to that attributed to the ganglion-cells of the spinal cord by Van 
der Kolk*. 


8. There is a close general resemblance between the human fovea and 
that of the chameleon tf. 


II. Second Memoir “On Plane Stigmatics.” By AtzexanperR J. 
Exuis, F.R.S., F.C.P.8. Received May 26, 1866. 


(Abstract. ) 


Let there be two groups of points upon a plane, termed, for distinction, 
indices and stigmata respectively, bearing such relations to each other 
that any one index determines the position of » stigmata, and any one 
stigma determines the position of m indices. The theory of these rela- 
tions between indices and stigmata constitutes plane stigmatics. Each 
related pair of index X and stigma Y constitutes a stigmatic point, hence- 
forth written “‘the s. point (vy).”” The straight lines joing any index 
with each of its corresponding stigmata are termed ordinates. If, when 

* T have an impression that I have seen this in a German author, but have not been 
able to find the passage again. 


t H. Miller, “ Ueber flag Auge des Chamaleon,” Wurzb. vaturw. Zeitschr. Bd. iii. 
8. 36. 


1866. | | Mr. A. J. Ellis on Plane Stigmaties. 193 


the index moves upon a straight line, the ordinate remains parallel to. some 
other straight line, the relation between index and stigma is that expressed 
by the relation between abscissa and ordinate in the coordinate geometry of 
Descartes. When only one index’ corresponds to one stigma and con- 
versely, and both indices and stigmata lie always on one and the same. 
straight line, or the indices upon one and the stigmata upon another, the 
relations between indices and stigmata are those between homologous points 
in the homographie geometry of Chasles. 

The general expression of the stigmatic relation is obtained by a gene- 
ralization of Chasles’s fundamental lemma in his theory of characteristics 
(Comptes Rendus, June 27, 1864, vol. lvili. p. 1175), clinants being sub- 
stituted for scalars*. It results that in certain forms of the law of coordi- 
nation, which “‘ coordinates’ the stigmata with the indices, there may be 
solitary indices which have no corresponding stigmata, and solitary stig- 
mata which have no corresponding indices, and also double points in which 
the index coincides with its stigma (76)7. The particular case in which 
one index corresponds to one stigma and conversely, and no solitary index 
or stigma occurs, is termed a stzgmatie line (henceforth written “s. line’’), 
because the Cartesian case is that of a Cartesian straight line in ordinary 
coordinate geometry, but in the general s. line the figures described by 
index and stigma may be any directly similar plane figures (77). The 
investigation of this particular case occupies almost the whole of the Jn- 
troductory Memoir. When one index corresponds to one stigma and 
conversely, but there is one solitary index and one solitary stigma, we have 
s. homography, provided the solitary index is distinct from the solitary 
stigma (79), and s. zxvolution when the solitary index coincides with the 
solitary stigma (78), so called because they generalize the relations treated f 
of under these names by Chasles. | 

When the relations between index and stigma are expressed by an equa- 
tion of the second order, the s. curves are termed s. conics, because they 
include Cartesian conics asa particular case (80). Generally two stigmata 
correspond to each index, and two indices to each stigma, and there is no 
solitary index or stigma. : 

Two s. curves ixtersect when they have a common ordinate, and there- 


* If OI be any fixed axis of reference, and AB any line upon a fixed plane passing 
through OI, we may consider that a line equal in magnitude and direction to AB can 
be formed from OI by the operation of turning OI through the Z (OI, AB), and altering 
its length in the ratio of the length of OI to that of AB. When all such lines AB lie 
upon the same plane, this operation is termed a clinant and represented by aé to distin- 
guish it from the line AB. If the lines AB lay on different planes, the operation would 
be in general a guaternion. But if AB is parallel to OI, whatever be the plane on 
which it lies, the operation ad is termed a scalar. Clinants and scalars obey the laws 
of ordinary commutative algebra. Quaternions do not. 

+ The figures in parentheses refer to the articles of this “ Second Memoir,” which are 
numbered consecutively to those in the Jntroductory Memoir (Proceedings, April 6, 
1865, vol. xiv. p. 176). 


194 Mr. A. J. Ellis on Plane Stigmatics. [June 14, 


fore a common s. point. They touch when a slight alteration in the con- 
stants of one equation will make one of their common s. points into several, 
having their stigmata very near. When they have no common ordinate 
or s. point, they are parallel or asymptotic, according as the distances 
between the stigmata corresponding to a common index remain unchanged 
or, under certain circumstances, diminish infinitely (81). 

It has been shown in the Introductory Memoir that as. line can be 
determined by two stigmata corresponding to known indices, or by two 
points called the direction-point and original stugma*. Taking either the 
two first-named or the two last-named points as the index and stigma in 
a stigmatic relation, we are able to make its expression denote a linear rela- 
tion, which leads to the conception of enveloped s. curves, and therefore of 
classes of s. curves (82, 83). ; 

In the above relations two ordinary geometrical points (“ g. points’’) in 
a plane form the index and stigma. If we now take two s. points (that is, 
two relations of index to stigma), terming one primary and the other secon- 
dary, we are able, by means of two equations, to express a relation between 
these s. points, so that one primary shall correspond to m secondaries, and 
one secondary to m primaries. This is the bipunctual relation (84), and 
includes the whole subject of related s. curves, of which related Cartesian 
eurves form a particular case. The most important and elementary cases 
are, first, those in which the related s. points lie respectively on known s. 
lines, s. involutions, s. homographies, or s. circles, and there is a stigmatic 
relation between the stigmata considered as forming two groups, one of 
indices and one of stigmata; and secondly, those in which one primary s. 
point corresponds to one secondary and conversely. In the latter case the 
relations between one index and stigma may be inferred from known rela- 
tions between another index and stigma, or from the same index and a new 
stigma, or, asis most usual, from the same stigma and anew index. Hence 
follows the general theory of change of coordination (85). Homographic 
and homologic s. figures (86) are another example, in which one primary 
corresponds to one secondary s. point and conversely ; but there is gene- 
rally one solitary s. line in each s. figure such that no s. point taken upon 
it will have any corresponding s. point in the other figure. 

Corresponding to the bipunctual relation there is a bzlinear relation 
(87) in which one primary s. line corresponds to several secondary s. lines, 
and one secondary to several primaries, by means of the elements chosen 
to represent linear relations. To this belongs the d¢radial relation (87 6), 
where two pencils of s. rays, being drawn from known s. points, are deter- 
mined generally by s. points having a bipunctual relation, and exceptionally 

* The original stigma is the stigma of which the origin is the index. If through the 
s. point (i) (that is, as. point of which both index and stigma are the point I at the 
further extremity of the axis of reference OI) a s. line be drawn s. parallel to any 
given s. line, the original stigma of this parallel s. line is the direction-point of the given 
s. line. Direction-points are of great use in explaining “imaginary” lines and “ imagi- 


nary” angles. 


1866. ] Mr. A.J. Ellis on Plane Stigmatics. 195 


by their direction-points only, so that the relation between the rays can be 
expressed by a stigmatic relation between the direction-points considered 
as indices and stigmata. When this s. relation between the direction- 
points is a s. homography, we have pencils of homographic s. rays. The 
reciprocal relation, in which a s. point corresponds to several s. lines, and 
a s. lme to several s. points, follows immediately (88). 

Finally, the multindicial relation (89) shows how several indices may 
be made to correspond as one group to a single stigma or a group of stig- 
mata, and thus leads to the geometrical expression of the algebraical theo- 
ries of several independent variables. The means by which a theory of 
‘solid stigmatics, where the indices and stigmata are taken anywhere in space, 
may be expressed by quaternion equations is briefly pointed out (89 e). 

The systematic explanation and precise expression for all these relations, 
together with some convenient notations relating especially to s. angles * 
(90), and to anharmonic ratios (91), occupy the first part of the present 
memoir. The remaining two divisions are devoted to a somewhat fuller 
consideration of s. homography (including s. volution) and s. conics. 

It results (92) from the conception of s. involution, already given, 
that if S be the coincident solitary index and solitary stigma, and X, Y a 
corresponding pair of index and stigma, that is, if (vy) is a s. point on the 
s. involution, there will be two points, E, F (called double stigmata), in the 
same straight line with S, m which index and stigma coincide, forming the 
double points (ee), (ff), and then se’°=sf?=sw.sy, which implies that 
ZXSE= ZESY, and ZXSF= ZFSY, and also that each of the lengths 
of SE, SF is a mean proportional between the lengths of SX and SY. It 
is readily shown that the two cases of involution of points in a line, usualiy 
acknowledged, are but the particular cases of XY lying on the lme EF, or 
on a line through S perpendicular to EF. In the former case the doub'e 
points lying on the line containing XY were readily found, and hence 
termed ‘‘real;”*’ in the latter, as the method of investigation did not suf- 
fice to determine the double points, they were termed “imaginary.” IfA, 
B, C, D be any four indices, and A’, B’, C’, D’ their corresponding stig- 
mata in a s. involution, then 

ab.cd ab'.cd' OU. CO PMO CE 
adc dd .00? ad eb = de. 
that is, the anharmonic ratiot of any four indices is the same as that of 
oa—ob 


* If A,B be the direction-points of two s. lines, and O the origin, then Tl gane is 


defined to be the s. tangent of the s. angle between these s. lines, and written tan aid. 

+ The equality of anharmonic ratios is here taken to imply, not only the same relation 
of magnitude which would be included in the termif the four points A, B, C, D lay upon 
one straight line, and their corresponding points A’, B’, C’, D’ upon another straight line, 
but also an angular relation which is expressed by the notation of clinants, and which in 
the first of these equations is 7 BAD+- ZDCB=ZB’A'D/+ZD’'C'B’._ It is readily seen 
that this relation reduces to the usual relation of direction when the points lie on 
straight lines. 


196 Mr. A. J. Ellis on Plane Stigmatics. [June 14, 


their corresponding four stigmata, and the anharmonic ratio of any three 
indices and stigma is the same as that of the corresponding three stigmata 
and index ina s. involution. Ifthe index move on the characteristic cirele 
whose centre is S and radius SE, the corresponding stigma moves in the 
opposite segment of the same circle, and in an opposite direction of rotation. 
Generally if the index move on any circle passing through E, F, the stigma 
moves on the segment of the same circle lying on the other side of EF, and 
in the opposite direction of rotation. If the index moves on a straight 
line passing through S, the stigma moves on another straight line also pass- 
ing through S. If the index move on a straight line not passing through 
S, the stigma moves on a circle passing through S and conversely. If the 
index moves ona circle not passing through 8, the stigma moves on another 
circle also not passing through S, and in an opposite direction of rotation. 

If the whole group of stigmata be removed without disturbing their 
mutual relations, and so that the solitary index S no longer corresponds 
with the solitary stigma Z’', a s. homography results (93), im which the 
relations of index and stigma may be deduced from those in as. involution. 
These relations are expressed by the equation sz . z2'y=sa .z'a', where (zy), 
(aa') are s. points in the s. homography. When three s. points are given, 
the solitary index S, and solitary stigma Z’, and double stigmata E, F can 
be determined by an elementary geometrical construction in all cases. 
These double stigmata possess important angular properties with respect 
to the indices and stigmata of the system (94). Let (aa'), (40’), (ec’) be 
any three s. points in as. homography. Then if ABC, A’B'C’ are straight 
lines (in which case the former contains §, and the latter Z’), 

tan AEA’ =tan BEB’; 

that is, 2f two intersecting straight lines KA, KA’ revolve atoms their point 
of intersection EK, and cut two given str aight lines AB, A'B', determining 
an index A upon one, and a stigma A' upon the other, so that the ordinate 
AA’ is seen under an angle whose tangent is constant*, the s. points will 
form part of a s. homography, of which the given point EK ts one double 
stigma, the solitary index S lying upon the index line AB, and the solitary 
stigma Z' upon the stigma line A'B'. If O be the middle point of SZ’ and 
F the other double stigma, FO=OK. If the two lines AB, A'B’ coalesce, 
then the two points HE, F, from which the ordinates AA', BB’, CC’ of three 
or more s. points, of which both indices and stigmata lie upon one straight 
line, are seen under an angle whose tangent is constant, are the double 
stigmata of the s. homography determined by these three s. points. ‘This 
shows the nature of the points named in G. 8. 171 7, and completes it, so 
far as ‘‘real rays” are concerned. Itis further generalized hereafter. The 


* It is customary, but erroneous, to say in such cases that the angles are equal and in 
the same direction. Itis evident that one angle may be the supplement of another mea- 
sured in the opposite direction. 

+ Chasles’s Géométrie Supérieure and Sections Coniquee are referred to by the letters 
G. S. and S. C., followed by the number of the article. 


1866. ] Mr. A.J. Ellis on Plane Stigmatics. 197 


two lines AB, A'B’ may be so placed that the s. homography has only one 

double stigma O coinciding with the middle point of SZ’, and O will then» 
be the centre of a circle of which AB, A’B' are tangents ; the ordinates of 
the s. points in the s. homography (each of which contains an index and 
a stigma) will then be tangents to the circle of which the centre (being a 
double stigma) will also contain an index and stigma. Hence is imme- — 
diately obtained the relation in G. 8. 664, and an explanation of the remark 
there made, that “le centre du cercle tient lieu en quelque sorte d'une 
tangente.” 

The tangent of the angle subtended by an ordinate at the double stigma 
may be constantly zero, that is, the ordinates may converge to the double 
stigma. Then, if through any point EK two straight lines be drawn, and 
through any other point F rays be drawn intersecting the first line in a 
series of indices A, B, C, and the second in a series of stigmata A’, B’, C’ 
respectively, the resulting s. points (aa'), (bb'), (cc') will form part of a 
s. homography of which E, F are the double stigmata. This shows the 
nature of the points of issue and intersection in the fundamental proposition 
of.anharmonic ratios, G. 8. 14, and completes it so far as ‘‘real”’ rays are 
concerced. It will be further generalized hereafter. 

Hence ABB’A’ is a quadrilateral, of which E, F are the intersections of 
opposite sides. Consequently 7f A, B’ and A’, B are opposite vertices of 
a quadrilateral, and E, F the intersections of the opposite sides {ab'), (a'b), 
(ef ) are s. points in a s. involution. This completes G. 8S. 350, for “real” 
rays *. 

The above considerations determine all the relations of s. homography, 
but do not suffice to give an explanation of those “imaginary ”’ rays which 
play so important a part in Chasles’s geometry. The requisite theory is 
very simply obtained by considering the direction-points of two sets of 
{primary and secondary) s. rays as indices and stigmata in a s. homo- 
graphy or s. involution (95). In particular it is shown that if the s. tan- 
gent of the s. angle between two primary s. rays is equal to that between 
the two corresponding secondary s. rays, there are two pairs of parallel 
s. rays, which are parallel to the asymptotes of a s. circle; and all the 
other relations for pencils of ordinary homographic rays are similarly gene- 
ralized. In this case, if the direction-points of all the rays lie upon the 
same straight line passing through the origin, the s. rays correspond to 
those usually termed “real ;”’ and if any do not, the s. rays belong to the 
class usually termed “imaginary,’’ and were supposed not to have any , 
geometrical existence. * 

When the two s. points of issue of the two pencils are distinct, there 
will be generally two primary rays which are parallel to their secondaries ; 

* Some of these results of s. involution and s. homography have been previously ob- 
tained by Mobius (cited in the Introductory Memoir, 59 ¢); but his method and con- 
ception are perfectly different, and do not admit of the extension which the present pro- 


positions immediately receive, to include the case of “imaginary” rays, a subject never 
previously treated as strictly geometrical. 


198 Mr. A. J. Ellis on Plane Stigmatics. [June 14, — 


and if the two s. points of issue coincide (96), these parallel rays will 
become double rays. Both are found by finding the double points of the 
homography of direction-points. When the double rays are s. perpen- 
_ dicular*, the sum or difference of the s. tangents of the two s. angles made 
by the primary and its corresponding secondary with the double rays will 
be zero. Ifthe direction-points form a s. involution, the s. rays form 
an involution, and there will be always two s. rays s. perpendicular and 
easily constructed. 

The stigmata of the s. points in which the primary and secondary s. rays 
of two pencils, making the s. tangent of the s. angle between such rays 
constant, intersect two given s. lines, are indices and stigmata respectively 
of s. points in as. homography, of which the stigma of the point of issue 
ts a double stigma (97). Whence it follows that, in any s. homography, if 
the indices be considered as the stigmata of s. points on a known s. line, - 
and the stigmata as the stigmata of s. points on some other known s. line, 
and a second index be given to one of the double stigmata so as to form a 
s. point which shall lie upon neither of those given s. lines, and pairs of s. 
rays be drawn from the s. point thus formed to pairs of corresponding s. 
points in the two s. lines, the s. tangent of the s. angle between any two 
corresponding rays will be constant. 

Supposing each primary s. ray to coincide with its secondary, and OI to 
be the axis of reference (98), the stigma of the s. point of issue of a pencil 
of s. rays, and the stigmata of the intersection of these s. rays with a given 
s. line, form the indices, and the extremity 1 of the axis of reference OI, and 
the direction-points of the same s. rays, respectively form the stigmata of a 
series of s. points ina s. homography. Whence it follows that the anhar- 
monic ratio of any four stigmata of intersection is the same as that of the four 
corresponding direction-points. This completely generalizes the fundamental 
proposition of anharmonic ratios, including the case where all the lines are 
‘“‘imaginary,” and can be made the starting-point of a series of propositions 
precisely analogous to those in G. S., but with a much wider signification. 
Thus the property of the complete quadrilateral shows, on being generalized, 
that if E, A, B, C, D, E’, A’, B! be any eight points upon a plane, and two 
other points C', D' be assumed so that the triangles K'A'C’, E'B'D' shall be 
directly similar to the triangles EAC, EBD respectively, and then two 
additional points F', F be determined so that the triangles F'A'B', F'C’D’ 
shall be directly similar to the triangles FAB, FCD, the point F will be 
constant, if the first five points E, A, B, C, D remain unchanged, whatever 
the next three, E', A’, B', may be, and will lie so that if SM be drawn bisect- 
ing the angles ASD, BSC and in length a mean proportional between the 
lengths of SA, SD, and also of SB, SC, then SM will also biseet the 
angle ESF, and be in length a mean proportional between SE and SF. 


* If A and B are the direction-points of two s. lines, the latter are stigmatically per- 
pendicular when oa.0/=1, and the direction-points are then harmonically situate with 
respect to I, I’, where OI’=I0. 


1866.] Mr. A.J. Ellis on Plane Stigmatics. 199 


_ When pairs of separate s. rays cutting one s. line are considered, it is 
shown (99) that if from any point pairs of ordinary rays be drawn which 
are the two limbs of a constant angle cutting any straight line in points 
forming the indices and stigmata of s. points in a s. homography of which 
the point of issue is a double stigma, and we furnish all the points lying on 
the given straight line, and the point of issue, with Cartesian indices, and 
hence consider all the s. rays as Cartesian, they will form part of an homo- 
graphy of s. rays, of which the double rays drawn from the Cartesian point 
of issue will be two non-Cartesian s. lines parallel to the asymptotes of a s. 
circle, and therefore independent of the magnitude of the constant angle. 
This furnishes a complete Sine explanation of G.S. 171, 172, 181, 
651, 8. C. 293, &e. 

Generally the whole of the propositions in G. S. respecting the homo- 
graphy of ordinary points and rays may be transferred to the homography 
of the stigmata of s. points and of s. rays, forming a series of propositions 
of much greater generality, in which all the s. points and g. rays will be 
perfectly real, and can be constructed by means of elementary geometry. 

The last division of this memoir is devoted to s. conics, which embrace 
the ordinary Cartesian conics as particular cases, together with all their 
so-called ‘“‘imaginary”’ points and lines. The general equation is assumed 
(100) in the form 

0a . 0% + 208.0” .oy+oy.oy?+200.0%+20e.oytof=0; . (a) 
and it is shown that if 06°=0a.oy the equation may represent a single 
s. line, or two parallel s. lines, or as. acentric, which, by changing the 
origin and index, may be made to depend on the equation 2'y’=4s'o'. o'2’; 
but if 06? is not =oa. oy, the equation may represent two intersecting s. 
lines, or a s. centric—that is, a s. curve which when cut by any s. line passing 
through a given s. point (the s. cenfre) has the index and stigma of that 
Ss. point in the middle of the lines joining the two indices and two stigmata 
of thes. points of intersection respectively. It is also shown that if the 
origin and index are changed, the s. centric may be represented by the 
equations 

ow fiers ru RE OU et Oa ik wii Comite 0) 

oe? LO? 
in which case the s. lines o’z’ =0, z'y=0 are indeterminate, but form pazrs 
of s. rays in involution, which are all conjugate diametrics*, with the 
exception of the double rays o'z''=0, x”y=0, which are asymptotes. In 
the particular case that o2=0, the general equation can, by changing ori- 
gin and index, be made to depend on the equation o’a’?—2'y’=o0'e*. Such 
curves are called s. cyclics. In the cyclic proper, the values of 06, oy may 
be any whatever; in the s. circle 0f+oy=0, in which case all the con- 
jugate diametrics are s. perpendicular, and the direction-points of the asy 


* A diametric is a s. line passing through the s. centre and intersecting the s. curve in 
two s. points. A diameter is the straight line joining the two stigmata of these last s. 
points. A-radius is half adiameter. These distinctions are important. 

VOL. KV. Ss 


200 Mr. A. J. Ellis on Plane Stigmatics. [June 14, 


ptotes are I, I’. But if both oa and oy become =0, the s. cyclic isas. 
homography or s. involution. 

The general homographic properties of all s. conics are then dedinadl 
(101). First, a s. cone is the locus of the s. points of intersection of 
the primary and secondary s. rays of two pencils of homographic s. rays 
with different s. points of issue, and passes through these points, which, 
with slight modifications, holds when a band of parallel s. lines is sub- 
stituted for either or both of the pencils. Secondly, the anharmonic ratio of 
four s. chords in a s. conic drawn from a variable s. point to four fired s. 
points, bears a constant ratio to the anharmonic ratio of the stigmata of 
those four fixed s. points ; and this constant ratio is one of equality when 
the s. conic is as. circle. In order to establish the latter part of this pro- 
position, itis shown that in a s. circle, the s. tangent of the s. angle formed 
by any two s. rays drawn from a variable s. point to any two fixed s. points 
in the s. circle is constant (which is a generalization of Euc. ii. 21), 
whence is deduced the condition that four s. points should lie upon as. 
circle. The classification of s. centrics is founded (102) on the first of the 
equations (6). After showing how the two stigmata can be generally found 
from the index, the name of the s. centric is made to depend on the name 
of the locus of the stigma when the index describes the principal diameter 
in whole or in part. This locus is called the characteristic curve. Accord- 
ing as o'e’o'g* is a negative scalar, —1, a positive scalar, +1, or any 
clinant, the s. centric is a s. ellipse, circle, hyperbola, equiradial (equila- 
teral hyperbola), or hyperellipse (for which the characteristic is a confocal 
ellipse and hyperbola). The mode of finding the two indices correspond- 
ing to each stigma is then given (103), and the circumstances under which 
as. line and as. centric may have common points investigated (104). The 
mode of determining s. points of intersection, when there is no intersection 
in Cartesian geometry (‘‘imaginary”’ intersections) is illustrated, and 
shown to lead to the same results as the homographic method. 

The radical axis (105) is shown to be the Cartesian portion of a s. line 
which is the common s. chord of a series of s. circles, so situated that the 
extremities of their principal diameters are the indices and stigmata of a 
s. involution, of which the “real” and ‘‘imaginary”’ circles of Chasles are 
two particular cases. 

The properties of asymptotes, and the nature of those in a s. ellipse, are 
then considered (106), and their geometrical properties examined. Conju- 
gate Diametrics and their relations to the asymptotes are next investigated, 
(107). In especial it is shown that if (u'e’), (v'g’) are two of the s. points 
in which two conjugate diametrics intersect a s. centric, and if the s. line 
drawn from (w'e') s. perpendicular to the diametric connecting (0'o') and 
(v'g') meet the latter in a 8. point whose stigma is D, we shall have 

OU, we +00. 0g =0,. .... ifs age ie ee 
ou’? +0'v?=0'e”, wu pai a: fs ESAs er 
whence»: 0'e?-bolg *=s0'e*bo! 975 ee he eons Ua ee 
and We). (Ov—tg=To'e. Og. 6 ee en | 


1866. | Mr. A. J. Ellis on Plane Stigmaties. | 201 


From these relations, which are much more general than any hitherto 
enunciated, the ordinary relations in Cartesian geometry respecting the 
lengths of conjugate diameters and the areas they contain are readily de- 
duced. 

By referring s. centrics to conjugate diametrics as new coordinate axes 
(108), a simple general method for constructing the intersections of a 
s. line with as. centric, and for drawing two s. tangents (109) from any 
s. point (except the s. centre) is obtained. This is illustrated by actual 
geometrical constructions corresponding to “imaginary ’’ cases in Carte- 
sian geometry. It is also shown how the chord of contact or polar may 
have a Cartesian portion when both the s. points of contact are non-Car- 
tesian and hence “imaginary.” 

It is now possible (110) to demonstrate the fundamental anharmonic 
properties of tangents and asymptotes to a s. centric. If through four 
S$. points in as. centric, four tangents be drawn, intersecting any fifth 
tangent, and also four s. chords meeting in any fifth s. point in the s. cen- 
tric, the anharmonic ratio of the four stigmata of the s. points of inter- 
section of the four tangents with the fifth will be equal to the anharmonic 
ratio of the four s. chords (which generalizes S. C. 2, 5, the demonstra- 
tion being here direct and therefore widely differing from Chasles’s), 
whence, if two fixed tangents are cut by a moveable tangent the stigmata 
of its s. points of intersection with them will be the indices and stigmata 
of s. points in a s. homography. It is now possible to generalize the whole 
of Chasles’s 8. C., and make the theories applicable, mutatis mutandis, 
to 8. conics. 

The s. foci of as. centric (111)are defined as the s. points of intersection 
of any two tangents which are parallel to the asymptotes of a s. circle. 
Hence it is shown that there are four s. foci to a s. centric; so that if 
o's*=0'e*+-0'9’=0'2", the two principal s. foci are (ss) (2z), and the two 
transverse 8. foci are (0's), (o'z). When the s. centric is Cartesian, the 
two principal s. foci are those usually recognized, and the only two recog- 
nized by Chasles, S. C. 275, 294. The other two transverse s. foci have, 
however, been recognized as ‘imaginary ” foci by Pliicker (System der a. 
Geometrie, p. 106, 1. 6), and by Salmon (Conies, 4th ed. p. 242). 

Besides the usual properties of the focal stigmata in Cartesian curves, the 
following entirely new correlative properties of the principal and transverse 
s. foci are demonstrated. Let there be two conjugate diametrics, and 
through any s. point in one draw as. line parallel to the other, and let 
the stigmata of the s. points of intersection of the conjugate diametrics 
_ and the chord, with the s. centric, be respectively E', F'; G', H'; Y,, Y,,. 
From ¥', F' draw straight lines PARALLEL to the bisectors of the angie 
Y¥,SY,, Y,ZY, respectively, forming two sides of a triangle of which 
EF’ is ihe Biba: Then the lengths of these sides will be mean propor- 
tionals between the lengths of SY,, SY,, and ZY,, ZY, respectively. This 


is a generalization of the usual pis hate that the sum or difference of the 
gs 2 


202 Mr. A. J. Ellis on Plane Stigmatics. [June 14, 


focal distances is the axis major in the ellipse or hyperbola. Preserving 
the same notation, take X' the middle point of Y,Y,, set off X'X,=X,X' 
=O'S, and make X,Y"=Y,X,, and X,Y'"=Y,X,. From the extremi- 
ties G',H' of the diameter CONJUGATE fo that used in the last propo- 
sition, draw straight lines PERPENDICULAR ¢o the bisectors of the angles 
Y''SY,,Y'"ZY, respectively, forming the two sides of a triangle of which 
G'H!’ is the base. Then the lengths of these sides will be mean propor- 
tionals between the lengths of SY", SY, and ZY", ZY, respectively. This 
is the correlative property of the transverse s. foci, which has no Cartesian 
analogue. The deduction and expression of these properties is extremely 
simple, and they are illustrated by a geometrical construction. Finally, the 
s. tangent of the s. angle which the s. rays drawn from any 8. point in as. 
centric to the two principal or the two transverse s. foci make with the s. 
normal at the s. point are equal and opposite, which is a generalization, for 
both pairs of s. foci, of the property from which the ordinary foci derived. 
their name. , 

The following problems are then solved (112). First. Given two con- 
jugate radit O'H', O'G! to find the principal and transverse axes of the 
Cartesian centric. The focal stigmata S, Z are found from (e) thus: from 
FE! draw E’M, E’M’ perpendicular to O'G’, and equal to it in length; 
join O'M, O'M’, bisect the angle MO'M! by O'S, O’Z, which are in length 
mean proportionals between O’M, O'M’. ‘Then there are three solutions, 
giving an ellipse or two hyperbolas, according as both or only one of the 
conjugate radii meet the characteristic curve of the Cartesian centric. 
Second. Given any three s. points representing the s. centre, and the s. 
points of intersection of two conjugate diametrics with the s. centric, to 
jind its principal and transverse axes. Third. Given three s. points, to 

jind the axis of as. circle passing through them. Fourth. Given any five 
_ &. points, to determine whether they lie on a s. centric ; and if so, to find its 
principal and transverse s. axes. 

Equation (e) is then applied (113) te obtain a more general conception 
of confocal s. centrics, and Carnot’s theory of transversals (as generalized 
in the Introductory Memoir) is applied to finding a new expression for the 
s. radius of curvature, applicable for any s. point of contact. The ordinary 
expression gives length and not direction, and applies only to Cartesian 
points. Similar investigations are very briefly given for s. acentrics 
(115-118). 

In these memoirs on Plane Stigmatics, the writer has endeavoured to ~ 
confine himself strictly to such a development of his theory as would suffice 
to establish, with geometrical severity, the following results, which he be- 
lieves to be entirely new, and of great scientific importance to mathematics. 

First. The problem of the geometrical signification of imaginaries in 
plane geometry is completely solved ; so that the terms “real” and “ ima- 
ginary”’ are no longer required, and an unbroken agreement exists between 
plane geometry and ordinary commutative algebra. 


1866.] Mr. A. J. Ellis on Plane Stigmatics. 208 


Tmaginaries arise whenever an algebra is used which is more general 
than the geometry to which it is referred. Ordinary commutative algebra 
is an algebra of clinants, which corresponds to a geometry where not only 
the relative lengths, but the relative angular positions of straight lines are 
regarded. Now the geometry hitherto associated with it has been scalar, 
that is, has considered relative lengths, but only identity or opposition of 
direction. Thus in Cartesian geometry the abscissee and ordinates were 
necessarily supposed to be parallel to given lines; and in homographic geo- 
metry, where the ordinates were not taken into account, their extremities 
were supposed to lie on one or two given lines. But the algebra employed 
in either case took no notice of these restrictions, and hence led to results 
which could not be interpreted—that is, “‘imaginaries.”” The solution of 
the problem of imaginaries has, therefore, consisted in that stigmatic con- 
ception which removes these restrictions, freely introduces relative angular 
position, and makes the geometry coextensive with the algebra. In the 
course of these memoirs every fundamental case in which imaginaries occur 
has been separately examined and shown to be fully explained by this con- 
ception. 

Second. The coordinate geometry of Descartes, and the homogr aphic 
geometry of Chasles, are only particular cases of the writer's stigmatic 
geometry, identical in nature, and expressible by identical equations ; 
for both Cartesian and homographic geometry consist in the relation of 
index to stigma with various restrictions, which may or may not be re- 
garded in stigmatic geometry. 

Third. The general theories of plane curves, as treated by or inca Yy co- 
ordinate geometry, by the systems of coordination introduced by Pliicker, 
or the modes of investigation more recently developed by Chasles, and all 
the theories derivable from these, hold, IN THEIR INTEGRITY, for stig- 
matic curves ALONE. 

For in all these theories clinant algebra is associated with scalar geome- 
try, for which the stigmatic conception enables us to substitute that clinant 
geometry which perfectly agrees with the algebra employed ; and the fun- 
damental propositions of these theories have been extended accordingly in 
the course of these memoirs. _ 

The instrument by which the writer has been enabled to bring these in- 
vestigations toa successful issue, has proved so serviceable and manageable, 
embracing old and new properties in a single equation, often rendering a 
general investigation more easy to conduct than the former special re- 
searches, and keeping the geometrical operations indicated clearly before 
the mind, that he would add as a subsidiary result of his theory :— 

Fourth. 4 calculus and a notation have been invented and developed, 
which enable magnitude and direction upon a plane to be expressed by a 
single symbol, obeying the laws of ordinary algebra, closely resembling in 
appearance (not in theory) the notation employed by Chasles to represent 
magnitude and direction upon a straight line, and as easy of manipulation. 


204 Prof. J. Pliicker on Fundamental Views [June 14, 


III. “Fundamental Views regarding Mechanics.” By Professor — 
Jutius PriscKer, of Bonn, For.Mem.R.S. Received May 29, 


1866. 
(Abstract. ) 


Being encouraged by the friendly interest expressed by English geome- 
tricians, I have resumed my former researches, which had been entirely 
abandoned by me since 1846. While the details had escaped from my 
memory, two leading questions have remained dormant in my mind. The 
first question was to introduce right lines as elements of space, instead of 
points and planes, hitherto employed; the second question, to connect, in 
mechanics, both translatory and rotatory movements by a principle in 
geometry analogous to that of reciprocity. 1 proposed a solution of the 
first question in the geometrical paper presented to the Royal Society. I 
met a solution of the second question, which in vain I sought for in 
Poinsot’s ingenious theory of coupled forces, by pursuing the geometrical — 
way. ‘The indications regarding complexes of forces, given at the end of 
the ‘‘Additional Notes,”’ involves it. F now take the liberty of presenting _ 
a new paper, intended to give to these indications the developments they 
demand, reserving for another communication a succinct abstract of the 
curious properties of complexes of right lines represented by equations of 
the second degree, and the simple analytical way of deriving them. 

1. We usually represent a force geometrically by a limited line, 7. e. by 
means of two points (a’, y’, 2’) and (a, y, 2), one of which (2’, y’, 2’) is the 
point acted upon by the force, while the right line passing through both 
points indicates its direction, and the distance between the points its inten- 
sity. We may regard the six quantities 

a—a’, y—y’, 2-2, ye'—y's, 2a'—s'a, avy —a'y .... (1) 
as the sia coordinates of the force. 'The six coordinates of a force repre- 
sent its three projections on the three axes of coordinates OX, OY, OZ, 
and its three moments with regard to the same axes. Accordingly we 
may, as far as we do not regard the point acted upon by the force, replace 
its coordinates by 


x, Ys.) Bg ig, OM NS (2) 
in admitting the equation of condition 
LX+MY-+NZ=0, . 265.00 Fag Pao (3) 


which indicates that the axis of the resulting moment is perpendicular to 
the direction of the force. In.making use of the primitive coordinates 
this condition is involved in the form given to them. 

When the last condition is not satisfied, the coordinates X, Y, Z, L, M, 
N represent no longer a mere force; they are the coordinates of what I 
proposed to call a dyname. 

In the general case such a dyname results when any numbers of given 
- forces act upon any given points. Here the six coordinates of the dyname 


1866. | regarding Mechanics. 205 


are the sums of the six coordinates of the given forces (2’, y’, 2’, a, y, 2). 
If between the six sums thus obtained, 
=(«—z’), z(y—y')s z(z—2'), } i (4) 
U(ye'—y'2), =(ea'—z'x), E(ay'—z'y),J 
an equation analogous to (3) takes place, there is a resulting force. In 
the case of equilibrium the six sums become equal to zero. 

2. In quite an analogous way as we have determined an ordinary force 
by means of two points in space, one of which is the point acted upon, we 
may represent a rotation, or the rotatory force producing it, by means of 
two planes, 

Jotwytuve=1, teatuytoe=1, 
the coordinates of which are ¢’, uw’, v’ and ¢, wu, v, one of the two planes 
(¢', wu’, v') being the plane acted upon.. The right line along which both 
planes meet is the axis of rotation. The plane acted upon may in a 
double way turn round the axis of rotation in order to coincide with the 
second plane (¢, u, v); but there is no ambiguity in admitting that during 
the rotation the rotating plane does not pass through the origin, and con- 
- sequently its coordinates do not become infinite. 
Let us regard the six quantities 

t—¢, u—w, v—v, w'—wv, vt’'—vt, tw—tu...... (5) 
as the six coordinates of the rotatory force. As far as we do not regard 
the plane acted upon, we may replace them by 


Bake: Siete Or ee ENG; eat ty Me eae (6) 
in admitting the equation of condition, 
SUA) ees Ne cna eo iy g Sc ahs ie et (7) 


(For the geometrical signification of these new coordinates I refer to the 
original paper.) . 

When the last equation of condition is not satisfied, the coordinates X, 
Y), 8, & Mt, Yt no longer represent a mere rotatory force; they are the six 
independent coordinates of what I called a rotatory dyname. 

In the general case, such a rotatory dyname results when any number of 
given rotatory forces acts on any given planes. Here the six coordinates 
of the resulting rotatory dyname are the six sums of the six coordinates of 
the given rotatory forces. 

z(t’), =Z(u—u’'), Z(v—v’), \ 
Baek veda Bh inege ie ae bs eal (8) 
Z(w'—w'v), LZ(vt'—v't), =(tu'—eu). 
If between these six coordinates the equation of condition subsists, there is 
a resulting rotatory force. In the case of equilibrium the six sums become 
equal to zero. 

Any movement whatever may be referred as well to ordinary as to 
rotatory forces; consequently an ordinary dyname and a rotatory dyname 
mean the same. 

3. From the notions developed we immediately obtain two general 


— 206 — Prof. J. Plucker on Fundamental Views [June 14, 


theorems constituting the base of statics. In a similar way as d’ Alembert’s 
principle is derived from the “principe des vitesses virtuelles,”’ both 
theorems may be transformed into fundamental theorems of mechanics. 

In starting from the coordinates of ordinary forces, = equations of 
equilibrium are 


B(e—w) =0, By-y) =0, Xe) =0, 1 cara 
X(ye’—y'z)=0, Tea’ —e’x)=0, Z(wxy'—a'y)=0, 

which, by replacing these forces by rotating ones, become 
Z(t—-t') =0, Ew—w) =0, E—v') =0, } Poe Say 
Z(uv’—u'v)=0, Z(vt'—v't) =0, Z(tu’—w'u) =0. 

We likewise may express the conditions of equilibrium by the following six 

equations— 


=(v—x')=0, =(y—y')=0, =(z—2')=0, 
=(¢—?’) =(), r(u—u’') =0, =(v—v')=0, } sect ee (11) 


three of which are taken amongst (9), three amongst (10)—and expand 
these equations in the analytical way, starting either from the consideration 
of ordinary or rotatory forces. The interpretation of these equations 
immediately gives the following two theorems. In the case of equilibrium— 

I. The centre of gravity of the points acted upon by the forces coincides 
with the centre of gravity of the second points, by means of which the 
forces are determined (No. 1). 

_ IL. The central plane of the planes acted upon by the rotatory forces 
coincides with the central plane of the second planes, by means of which 
the rotatory forces are determined (No. 2)*. 

If we introduce the notion of masses, both theorems hold good, only the 
definition of both kinds of forces and therefore their unity is changed. The 
points acted upon become centres of gravity corresponding to masses ; the 
planes acted upon, central planes corresponding to moments of inertia. 

If equilibrium does not exist, we get, in the general case, one resulting 
force, determined by the two centres of gravity, and one resulting rotatory 
force determined by the two central planes. We easily obtain the six 
differential equations of the movement produced. 

I shall think it suitable further to develope the principles merely indi- 
cated in the paper presented. A Treatise on Mechanics, reconstructed on 
them, will assume quite a new aspect. 

4. In making use, within a plane, of point- or line- coordinates, we repre- 
sent, by means of an equation between the two coordinates, a plane curve 
described by a point, or enveloped by a right line. In making use, in 
space, of point- or plane-coordinates, by means of an equation between the 
three coordinates, a surface is represented which may be regarded as a 


* The coordinates of the central plane are obtained in the same way by means of the 
coordinates of the given planes as the coordinates of the centre of gravity are obtained 
by means of the coordinates of the given points. 


1866. ] regarding Mechanics. 3 207 


locus of points, or an envelope by planes. In my geometrical paper I 
introduced the right line, depending on four constants, as the element of 
space. An equation between these constants, if regarded as variables, re- 
presents a complea of lines. Each line of the complex maybe regardedeither 
as a ray described by a point, or as an axis enveloped by planes. In order 
to render the developments symmetrical, I adopted as coordinates of the 
right line the same expressions (1) and (4) (connected by an equation of 
condition) made use of in the determination of ordinary and rotatory forces. 
At the same time, general equations between the six coordinates were re- 
placed by homogeneous ones. In doing so, A, B, C, D, BE, F denoting any 
six constants, 


A(e—a') + Biy—y') + Ce—2') + Dye'—y'2) } Seg (12) 
LE(ya’—y'x)+¥F (cy +2'y)=O=0, Jo 

A(uv' —u'v) + B(vt’—9't) + C(tu' — eu) | - 
+D(t—?#') + E(u—wv')+F—v') = 8=0 0 (ei a 0) a0 se ene. eve ( 3) 


represent the same linear complex of lines, which may be regarded as 
a complex of rays as well as a complex of axes. 

When general equations between the same six coordinates are admitted, 
the complex of rays becomes a complex of ordinary forces, the complex of 
axes a complex of rotations or rotatory forces, both ordinary and rotatory 
forces depending upon five constants. Here we meet a reciprocity be- 
tween both kind of forces corresponding to the reciprocity between point 
and plane. 

Finally, in omitting the equation of condition hitherto made use of, we 
pass from forces to dynames, depending upon the six independent constants 

aN a 2g OES IN S's tee corey eee (14) 
or eae a eta eos Gauge Gs la, ras Snob cual se (15) 


A complex of dynames is represented by an equation between six variables. 
Here again, as in the case of right lines, the same complex may be repre- 
sented in a double way by means of the two sets of coordinates. 

In order to complete these general considerations, we add the following. 
A dyname may be resolved into two variable forces, either ordinary or 
rotatory. These variable forces constitute a linear complex, either of ordi- 
nary or extraordinary forces. A homogeneous equation between the six 
independent coordinates (14) or (15) represents a complex of two coupled 
variable right lines. 

5. I will conclude by giving some details regarding complexes of the 
first degree. 

A linear complex of ordinary forces is represented by the linear equation 

O=1, 
which may be expanded thus: 
(A+ Fy'—Ez')x 
+ (B—Fa'—Dez')y : (16) 
+ (C+E2’—Dy')z (0° 
= Az’ + By'+Cz’. 


208 On Fundamental Views regarding Mechanics. [June 14, 


In putting wz’, y’, 2’ as constants, those forces of the complex are obtained 
which pass through the given point (’, y', 2’). In this supposition the 
equation of the complex becomes the equation of aplane. This plane is the 
locus of the second points, by means of which the forces of the complex are 
determined. Hence in a linear complex there are acting on each point of | 
space forces in all directions, the intensity of each force being the segment on 
its direction between the point acted upon and its corresponding plane (16). 

Hence we derive the following theorem :— 

In a complex of rotatory forces any given plane of space is acted upon 
by an infinite number of forces, each lime within the plane being an axis of 
rotation. ‘The rotations round all axes are determined by second planes 
passing through a fixed point, the position of which depends upon the 
given point. 

I showed in the geometrical paper the way of discussing linear complexes 
of right lines. The properties of linear complexes of forces, either es 
or rotatory, may be developed in a similar way. 

6. Right lines belonging simultaneously to two complexes constitute a - 
single congruency, and accordingly intersect two fixed lines; if belonging 
to three complexes, they constitute a double congruency, 2. e. one gene- 
ration of a hyperbolic or parabolic hyperboloid. Forces, either ordinary or 
rotatory, belonging simultaneously to two, three, four complexes, consti- 
tute a single, double, or threefold congruency of forces. In admitting 
these denominations, the following results are immediately obtained. 

In a linear congruency of ordinary or rotatory forces, the directions of all 
ordinary, or the axes of all rotatory forces, constitute a linear complex ef 
lines. All ordinary forces acting on any given point of space are confined 
within the same plane ; the intensity of each force is equal to the distance 
between the point acted upon and the poimt where its direction meets a 
fixed line within the mentioned plane. The axes of all rotatory forces, 
acting upon any given plane of space, meet in a fixed point within that 
plane. ‘There is a fixed line passing through the fixed point, round which 
the second planes of all forces turn when their axes turn round the fixed 
point in the given plane acted upon. 

In a double congruency of ordinary forces there is one force of given 
direction and intensity acting upon any point of space, as there is in a 
double congruency of rotatory forces one force acting upon any given plane. 

In a threefold congruency of ordinary forces the directions, in a three- 
fold congruency of rotatory forces the axes of all forces constitute one of 
the two generations of a hyperboloid. 

These few indications may be sufficient here; but before concluding I 
must, in referring to the original paper, makea last remark. Forces acting 
along a given right line may either be regarded as the same, whatever may 
be the point of the line acted upon, or ae may be regarded as varying in 
intensity according to the position of the point. There is an analogous 
distinction to be made with regard to rotatory forces. Accordingly two 
different kinds of complexes must be distinguished. 


1866. ] Contributions to Terrestrial Magnetism.  . 209 


IV. “ Contributions to Terrestrial Magnetism.—No. X.” By Lieut.- 
General Epwarp Sasine, R.A., President of the Royal Society. 
Received June 7, 1866. 


(Abstract. ) 


In this number of the Contributions to Terrestrial Magnetism the author 
resumes the discussion of the results obtained in the Magnetic Survey of 
the Southern Ocean by the Expedition under Sir James Clark Ross, R.N., 
and Captain Francis Rawdon Crozier, R.N., between the years 1839 and 
1843. The proceedings during the two first years of this Survey have 
been the subjects of two preceding numbers of the Contributions, viz. of 
Nos. V. and VI., in the Philosophical Transactions for 1843 and 1844. 
The present number contains a similarly detailed exposition of the 
operations of the third year of the Survey, comprehending the Southern 
Atlantic between Cape Horn and the Cape of: Good Hope, and completing 
the circumnavigation of the southern hemisphere, from the departure of 
the expedition from the Cape of Good Hope in March 1840, to the return 
to the same station in April 1843. In a subsequent memoir, which will 
be presented to the Royal Society early in the ensuing Session, the author 
proposes to connect and thoroughly coordinate the three portions of the 
Survey, and to supply from them the numerical data at equidistant points 
on each of the three parallels of 50°, 60°, and 70° of south latitude, of 
the three magnetic elements, which will be required for a revision of the 
‘ Allgemeine Theorie des Erdmagnetismus’ of M. Gauss—the 40th parallel 
having been the most southern available at the epoch of the publication of 
the original work. 

The instruments employed in this Survey, as well as the methods of 
employing them, and of eliminating the disturbing influence of the iron in 
the equipment of the vessels, having been in a great measure of a novel 
character, a discussion of considerable length bearing on all such points is 
prefixed to a full detail of the observations themselves, arranged in Tables, 
showing in every instance both the immediate results of the observations, 
and the corrections which have been applied in conformity with the prin- 
ciples contained in the preliminary discussion. Tabular abstracts are also 
furnished, exhibiting the results of the determinations of each day, with the 
appropriate geographical positions. 


June 21, 1866. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


Dr. Hugo Miller, Mr. Perkin, the Rev. Canon Selwyn, and the Rev. R. 
- Townsend, were admitted into the Society. 


210 H. Caro and J. A. Wanklyn on the relation of [June 21, 


I. “On the Relation of Rosaniline to Rosolie Acid.” By H. Cano, 
and J. ALFRED WANKLYN, Professor of Chemistry at the London 
Institution. Communicated by Dr. Franxianp. Received June 
atpalcs| 5) era ? 

At the Meeting of the British Association held in Bath in the year 1864, 


it was pointed out by one of us that rosaniline and rosolic acid might be 
represented as ethylene which had undergone substitution :— 


Type. Rosaniline. Rosolic Acid. 

H NC,H,H OC, H, 
ol pci NC Billoo (0G 
aaa 2 2)NC,H, H’ 2 | 0, EE 


H H OH 
Rosaniline and rosolic acid became members of the same family, the former 


being an ethylene containing N | CH in place of hydrogen, the latter also 


an ethylene, but containing OC, H; and OH in place of hydrogen. Some 
of the reasons for assigning these formule were given in the communica- 
tion made to the Bath Meeting. | 

The relationship between rosaniline and rosolic acid is very well brought 
out by the facts which will presently be brought forward. 

Griess has shown that aniline and nitrous acid yield water and diazobenzol :— 

Aniline. Diazobenzol. 
C,H,NH,+HNO, = C,H,N,+ 2H,0. 

Diazobenzol is a most remarkable compound, forming salts which are very 
explosive, and which undergo certain very interesting transformations under 
the influence of reagents. It is moreover the representative of a nume- 
rous class of compounds derived similarly by the action of nitrous acid on 
different bases, and for the most part resembling itself in the explosive 
character of the salts. One of the most remarkable reactions presented by 
diazobenzol is that with water, wherein the whole of the nitrogen of the 
diazobenzol is evolved, and its place supplied by an atom of water :— 

Nitrate of diazobenzol. Carbolic acid. 

C,H,N,HNO, + H,O = C,H,O + HNO,+N,. 

This elegant form of reaction appears to be characteristic of the class to 
which diazobenzol belongs; and Griess has resorted to a measurement of 
the quantity of nitrogen set free during the reaction, as a means of arriving 
at the composition of the azo-compounds. 

Hofmann showed, some years ago, that rosaniline, after treatment with 
nitrous acid, is capable of forming a platinum compound endowed with ex- 
plosive properties, but appears not to have followed the investigation further. 

Paraf has recently shown that rosaniline salts are converted by nitrous 
acid into a dye, which he considered to be rosolic acid. We have also 
investigated the action of nitrous acid on rosaniline, and arrive at the fol- 
lowing results :— 


1866. | Rosaniline to Rosolic Acid. 211 


When an acid solution of a salt of rosaniline is mixed with nitrous acid, 
it forms an azo-compound, which corresponds very closely in character to 
diazobenzol. Like diazobenzol this compound forms explosive salts; like 
diazobenzol it decomposes with evolution of nitrogen gas when it is boiled 
with acids. In adding the nitrous acid to the solution of rosaniline to 
form the compound, it is easy to observe the exact point at which the so- 
lution ceases to contain unaltered rosaniline. It thus becomes easy to 
determine the amount of nitrous acid consumed in the conversion of a given 
weight of rosaniline into the azo-compound. We have done this by the 
employment of a method which gives excellent results when applied to 
aniline and toluidine, and the details of which will shortly be published by 
one of us. We obtain as the result of our experiments, that one molecule 
of rosaniline consumes three equivalents of nitrous acid ; and the equation 
representing the reaction will be 

Rosaniline. Azo-compound. 


Oi NN. sdtN 0, == CL HN, ES OHO. 


On boiling this azo-compound with hydrochloric acid, there is evolution 
of nitrogen gas. The volume of nitrogen was measured. The result was 
that one molecule of rosaniline, after conversion into the azo-compound, 
yields six equivalents of nitrogen. 


Azo-compound. 
Ce H,, N, F 3H, O=C 20 H,, 0, “1 N,. 


These changes in composition are accompanied by striking physical 
effects. The deep-red solution of the salt of rosaniline becomes brown 
on the addition of excess of hydrochloric acid, then yellow as the nitrous 
acid is added; then there is much froth, and as the solution is boiled it 
gradually becomes red yellow, and a large quantity of a deep-coloured solid 
with cantharides-like lustre separates out. 

Seeing that this solid is produced by treating rosaniline with three equi- 
valents of nitrous acid, and that six equivalents of nitrogen are evolved, it 
must be a non-nitrogenous substance. A careful comparison of its pro- 
perties and reactions with those of the rosolic acid described by Kolbe 
and Schmitt, and now made largely as an article of commerce, leads to the 
conclusion that it is identical with rosolic acid. 

The following characters are common to it and to the rosolic acid of 
Kolbe and Schmitt. 

1. A yellowish-red solid with cantharides-like lustre, only sparingly 
soluble in water, soluble in ether and alcohol. 

2. Easily soluble in ammonia, and in alkalies generally, forming red 
solutions of very great colouring-power. Addition of acids to these solu- 
tions decolorizes them, precipitating the colouring-matter in the form of a 
yellowish precipitate, which varies much in tint. 

3. When boiled with aniline and a little benzoic acid, it forms a blue 
dye, there being no evolution of ammonia. The blue dye is very soluble 


212 H. Caro and J. A. Wanklyn on the relation of [June 21, 


in alcohol, not soluble in water ; it is the salt of a red-coloured base. It 
dissolves in strong sulphuric acid, giving a red solution. . 

4. Submitted to destructive distillation, it gives abundance of carbolic 
acid, leaving a carbonaceous residue. 

5. The deep-red solutions in alkalies are easily reduced on boiling them 
with zinc powder; so treated they lose their colour; but restoration of 
the colour takes place on adding ferricyanide of potassium. 

There is only one particular in which any difference could be detected 
between the product obtained from rosaniline and that obtained from 
carbolic acid by Kolbe and Schmitt’s process. 

The rosolic acid of Kolbe and Schmitt forms salts the solutions of 
which are darkened by ferricyanide of potassium. The product obtained 
from rosaniline does not darken, or darkens only very slightly, on the 
addition of ferricyanide. An explanation of this difference is afforded by 
the following experimental facts. The product from rosaniline after re- 
duction with zine becomes capable of being darkened by ferricyanide ; and 
if leucaniline, instead of rosaniline, be taken, there is obtained a cantharides- 
like product, which gives red solutions with alkalies, but is darkened by 
ferricyanide. Furthermore, if a solution of Kolbe and Schmitt’s rosolic 
acid be darkened with ferricyanide of potassium, and then precipitated by 
the addition of an acid, there results a colour-acid, which dissolves in 
alkalies, giving solutions of the exact tint of the rosaniline-product, and, 
like it, incapable of being deepened by ferricyanide. The interpretation 
of all this is, that the rosolic acid obtained from carbolic acid by the action 
of sulphuric and oxalic acid (Kolbe and Schmitt} contains more or less 
leuco-rosolic acid, produced probably by the reducing action of some sul- 
phurous acid. The rosolic acid got from leucaniline also contains more or 
less leuco-rosolic acid. ‘The rosolic acid obtained from rosaniline is free, 
or almost free, from leuco-rosolic acid. 

Be this, however, as it may, there can be no doubt that rosaniline and 
carbolic acid give essentially the same product when the former is treated. 
with nitrous acid in the manner we have described, and the latter with 
sulphuric and oxalic acids as in Kolbe and Schmitt’s process. 

Adopting the “Ethylene type,’ we have the clogs expressions for 
the reactions of rosaniline :— 


Rosaniline. Azo-rosaniline. 
NC,H,H HNO, N, C, H, 2H, O 
co JNGHH | OHNG@: > 4 JN,C0, ae 
2) NC,H,H HNO, 2) N,C,H 2H, O 
H 
Rosolic Acid 
N, C, H, H,0 OC, H, 
N,C,H HO OC,H 
Cie eeBy it. HO. i— 27 OU dawns 


1866. | Rosaniline to Rosolie Acid. 213 


On comparing the formula of rosolic acid given thus by Griess’s pro- 
cess applied to rosaniline, we find that it differs from the formula deduced 
from Kolbe and Schmitt’s analysis, viz. 


OC, H, 

OC, H, 
21 OC, H, 

|OH 


C 


by one atom of oxygen. 

We are inclined to think that this difficulty must be got over by cor- 
recting the formula deduced from Kolbe and Schmitt’s research. If {the 
numbers required by the formule C,, H,,O, and C,, H,,O, be calculated, 
it will be found that both of them fall sufficiently near the analytical 
results actually obtained to allow of the deduction of either from the 
analyses. : 

Taking the latter, viz. C,, H,, O,, all will become intelligible :— 


Rosolic Acid. Type. 
| fi C, H, (H 
OC, H, | H 
C., H,, 0, a C, au H, : cs i 
H | H 
\HO LH 


Thus rosolic acid appears as an ethyl-hydride, and its generation in the 
Griess process applied to rosaniline is obvious. To the formula 


which is derived from rosaniline by the straightforward action of nitrous 
acid and water, we have to add H, O, and we get 

OC, H, 

OC, H, 

OC, H, 
2) H 

H 

HO 


which is, as was said, a possible expression of the analyses of the rosolic 
acid obtained from carbolic acid. 


C 


214 Rev. S. Haughton on the Chemical and Mineralogical (June 21, 


JI. “On the Chemical and Mineralogical Composition of the 
Dhurmsalla Meteoric Stone.” By the Rev. Samurn Haveuton, 
M.D., F.R.S., Fellow of Trinity College, Dublin. Received June 
6, 1866. 


On the 14th July 1860, at 2.15 p.m., a remarkable meteoric stone fell 
at Dhurmsalla, in the Punjab; a small specimen of which was forwarded 
to the Geological Museum of Trinity College, which I have analyzed with 
the results contained in the following paper. 

The direction of the motion of the meteorite was ascertained to be from 
N.N.W. to 8.8.E. 

The cold of the fragments that fell was so intense as to benumb the 
hands of the coolies who picked them up but who were obliged, in conse- 
quence of their coldness, instantly to drop them. 

The specific gravity of the Trinity College specimen was found as 
follows :— . 


AVeteht aa Air cis sso. eel kcal Oe yk he ot 3335°4 gts. 
WWietelit Sua, water <o.\¢ O°. ait eae tte 230Acd a, 
Sei k Winnie agilata 3. wie Ais eee = 2o9g, 


The stone is grey, close-grained, and splintery in fracture, and presents 
fewer specks of metallic iron and magnetic pyrites than usual, and was 
coated with the ordinary black pellicle on its outer side. 

From 100 grs. acted on with iodine, which dissolved the alloy of iron 
and nickel, there were obtained, of peroxide of iron 9°85 grs., and of 
protoxide of nickel 1-96 gr. 

The portion insoluble in iodine was next acted on by dilute muriatic 
acid and evaporated to dryness at 212°, then moistened with muriatic 
acid and filtered, by which process it was divided into a soluble and 
insoluble portion; the portion left on the filter was boiled with carbonate 
of soda, so as to dissolve the free silica, which was found to be 18°95 grs. 
This was added to the portion originally soluble in muriatic acid, so as to 
give the following results :— 


ers. 
PSIG Rae se a ee ut, 18°95 
J RUETTN bc Ree eat lee OE AS Wee ian ge! 


Present originally ag 
Peroxide of iron ....+.+.1++. 14:114  protoxide and proto- 
sulphuret of iron. 


Carbonate of lime....... ios. One 
Pyrophosphate of magnesia.... 51°31 
Potash and soda chlorideg .... 0°30 


Platino-chloride of potassium .. 0°20 
Oxide of manganese (Mn,O,).. 0°66 


On treating another 100 grs, of the meteorite for sulphur, by boiling in 


1866. | Composition of the Dhurmsalla Meteoric Stone. 215 


muriatic acid, and conducting the sulphuretted hydrogen into an ammo- 
niacal solution of sulphate of copper, so as to form a black precipitate of 
sulphuret of copper, there were found by the usual methods 14°8 grs. of 
sulphate of barytes. 

There were left, after treatment with iodine, muriatic acid, and carbonate 
of soda, 38°3 grs. of the 100 grs. originally acted upon. 

From the foregoing facts, we readily obtain—from treatment with iodine 


and for sulphur— 


ers. ers. 
Peroxide of iron ...... 9°85 .... 6°88 iron 
Protoxide of nickel..... 1°96 ..... 1°54 nickel 
Sulphate of barytes.... 14°80 .... 5°61 protosulphuret of iron. 


Hence we find, as the primary analysis of the meteorite— 


I. Primary Analysis. 


Mee retal he OTD, dws ymin ore nn oo Se Se fete ae 6°88 
PREM TIC] . y o5 0s dale iM ees Sone ude 1°54 
SIOMICLIC. PHTIECS 6 ee ola wits 6 ono ov Eco dee oll owes 5°61 
aati taimeral (soluble)... 6 os... eve ns ele wee os 47°67 
as @agthy mineral (insoluble) 2.32 2 2 sp..0s.0 5 oe agers o's 38°30 

100-00 


The results of the analysis of the soluble portion (considering that 5°61 
of Fe S is equivalent to 5°10 of Fe, O,) give the following :— 


Il. Earthy Mineral (soluble). 


gers. per cent. Oxygen. 
Moist Fs POP A POOR eS Sook 6. 20°637 
Beeinmina obot hess. Oars ORO eB SOCORTBS 
Bmerotoxde of iron... 23. S10G WE. 1. 16°99 2. ye +. S768 
4, Protoxide of manganese 0°66 .... 1°38 .... 0°308 
PEN PAE. 1c Sc 5 a'os a os none ..... —— .... 
Gs Magnesia..........- TOS4e... MORAL I) -b) Lora 
GoMEOLAS A 5a 6 IT. ee OO 4eat (Os esse... OFOLO 
Sj bars (000 Elen aa Oslg0458 oc 3 0828 oT. BOM 
OL Togs saat ab a oe MESS) deh ee 1 Re aa 
f 47°67 100°00 40°309 
Adding together the oxygen of the protoxides, we find— 
RO 20s ess eee 19°537 
SUC, eee aware ee 20°637 } - 
20°772 
RTO Or RNa ora 04? 
From the preceding result, it is evident that the soluble mineral in this 


VOL. XV. T 


216 Rev. S. Haughton on the Chemical and Mineralogical {June 21, 


meteorite is chrysolith, or the silicate of magnesia and iron represented by 
the formula 

3 RO, S10, ; 
in which magnesia preponderates greatly over the iron. 

The 38:3 grs. of mineral, insoluble in muriatic acid and in carbonate of 
soda, were now divided into two equal portions, of which one was fluxed 
with carbonates of soda and potash, and the other with lime and chloride 
of ammonium—with the following results :— 


grs. 
UGA: 5s Pa she, ws opege ©. wane RG be etn ore ae 
ATMA CURSE Ae ae wetoe ee eae s ot tn spo Soe 0°23 
Peroxideof aon) 9304 GPs. SPE, Se aes 2°51 
Oxide of manganese (Mu,'O') 22.000. 2002. 0s Oe 
Oxide of chrome (Cr, O,). <2 ..5...228005 aoe 1°42 


Carbonate of lime 2. 0s). oss en « gs ie > se 
Pyrophosphate of eehestn eater 
Potash. and soda, chlorides .......2+ 0000+. enue eee 
Platino-chloride of potassium........ 0... 02.006 0°50 


Assuming the chrome to be present as chrome-iron, 


Fe O, Cr, O,, 


we find ers. 
Original Weveht se ws ws ss ese 00 hs 5 ogee 
CITOMTEATON Gini. «gales «+s ie vere op eee 2°08 


ee ee 


Karthy insoluble... 00 cs. oe ee Fe 


If we now omit the chrome-iron and make the necessary reductions in 
the foregoing results, we obtain— 


Ill. Harthy Mineral (insoluble.) 


grs. per cent. Oxygen. 
CH eS eee 10°85") .3.... 63°56.>.. aoe 
Paatine oS eS YS O 230 ieee P34 “wae 0°525 
Protoxide efi VOU who's 160s sani. 3 OF SK. gusts 2°078 
Protoxide of manganese 0°30 .... 1°75. hae oe 
AE es aes ta > mone ....0 —— .2.66.  —— 
Macmesia ...... €2. 4. AVE es 2 ok, Lo seein 9°666 
SOGa ec seas meee 6 O08 tres, Ue: Wy Mane 0°119 
Peta’ so. eet 0:09 oy ° 032-2 
Gant oe aes LOCI SS LO 

17°07 100-00 45'867 


The oxygen of the protoxides of the preceding analysis amounts to 
12°342 per cent., but it would be fallacious to form any opinion as to the 
composition of the whole, so long as we are not acquainted with the con- 
stituent minerals that compose it. 


1866.] . Composition of the Dhurmsalla Meteorie Stone. 217 


Collecting together into one view the preceding results, we find— 
IV. Mineralogical Composition of the Dhurmsalla Meteorite. 


: : Iron.. 6°88 
Fe Niekel-ironysp.onits t0g7. SPR, 2 8°42 { Metiel 1-54 
2. Protosulphuret of iron ...... 5°61 
= ppv (0) 07 1 70) i ae a 4°16 
4. Chrysolith (peridot or olivine) 47:67 
i) 


. Minerals insoluble in muriatic acid 34°14 


100-00 


I shall here add, for the purpose of comparison, the results of my ana- 
lysis of the meteoric stone that fell at Dundrum, co. Tipperary, at 7 p.m. 
of the 12th August, 1865. 


Dundrum Meteorite. 


Spiers ns 3:066 to 3°570. 


I. Mineralogical Composition. 


WP CKEITTOM oc vt ee ee ce ee 20°60 eu + 19°57 


Nickel 1:03 
Peru MIaC ONS. $5". fai sos aie i o> 4°05 
Fe A RAR OMBE-ITON 2680 Za loltc ls) sw 8 al nl eons 1°50 
ee EU SOMLNL 5 Sonik soro wm jonerd: « eereue ge hye 33°08 
5. Earthy minerals insoluble in mu- 
1ST VEG 0a il oh Ae oe 40°77 
100-00 


II. Chemical Composition of the Chrysolith. 


MTD cc tots bacidatas arab: el Sy SKA pis fee aes 38°86 
PAUNDRIBNUDA sateen aiyhh. Sp oop 
Protoxide of iron ...... TG3D Ds 5 Merk igte se bq RO 4 
Peotone of ianganese..., 0°10» oh.n.ece8 9) 
rey. . inhiera devel Ssh « OBA inser a chcls 0°72 
MVApMe SAN ashe aro tleziay vr) ROIS: cicds bem o's 36°85 
ERS NT car eh tual shot es bug Qed a3 ohass fo acels 0°47 
DOG 24 «ee toeaabphvatet «ititaial 2s 02 er a 0°22 
TOSS oa coe acer sutras va fos |G a ep 3°14 

100:00 100:00 


* The quantity of chrome found in this meteorite is unusually large, being repre- 
sented by 284 per cent. of Cr, O,, and by 4:16 per cent. of FeO, Cr, O,; yet it is not 
without precedent, for in the meteoric stone that fell at Nobleborough, Maine, U.S. A. 
on the 7th of August, 1823, Webster found 4 per cent. of Cr, O,. 

© 2 


218 Prof. J. A. Wanklyn and Mr. E. T. Chapman on the [June 21, 


III. Chemical Composition of the Earthy insoluble Minerals. 
SHCA, panded, mils os, aicheeneioategs a oes 


NU MVINUUIE eS ep hc ee cane Ge eee 1°72 

PrOt@xide Of 1FOWe. 4... 6 ss 6°06 

Protoxide of manganese...... 0°78 

Pame@uien a. =: Paes he ie eee’ 3°99 

Macitesia. 2... seise~ me cei oom 

"Soda boinc Get waemeke Eoin 1°38 
Potash nce at gerne as 0°83 

TOSS es. vie ics oat) ie ape onion ee ee ee 

100-00. 


III. “‘ On the Preparation of Ethylamine.” By J. ALFRep WankKLYN, 
and Ernest T. Cuapman. Communicated by Dr. Franxuanp. 
Received June 8, 1866. 


Having recently had occasion to prepare a considerable quantity of 
ethylamine, we have made the observation that this base may be obtained 
with much greater facility than is usually believed. 

We digested together equal volumes of iodide of ethyl, strong alcohol, 
and aqueous ammonia. The digestion was carried on at a very moderate 
temperature, certainly not exceeding 80°, but the tubes were constantly 
agitated. In this manner the reaction is completed in about half an hour. 
The mixed iodides thus obtained were evaporated to expel excess of am- 
monia, introduced into a retort ; enough potash was added to neutralize 4, 
of the iodine present, and the mixture was distilled into dilute hydrochloric 
acid. ‘The receiver was then changed, the same quantity of potash again 
added, and the products collected as before. Then six times as much 
potash was added, and the products collected. The remaining two-tenths 
of the potash were added separately. 

Portions of each of these fractions were converted into platinum salts, 
and the amount of platinum was determined by ignition. Each of the first 
four fractions corresponding to 3% of the total bases obtained, gave more 
platinum than corresponds even to pure ethylamine, and therefore con- 
tained ethylamine and ammonia. Only the last fraction, corresponding to 
zy of the entire bases, gave a lower percentage of platinum than corre- 
sponds to ethylamine, and therefore contained the di- and tri-bases. 

Subjoined are the platinum determinations in this last fraction :— 


I. 0°2133 grm. gave 0°0830 Platinum 
T.1053.990 \ oyvtirs3, 011382 
or, I. Platinum per cent. 38°91 
II. 4 ‘ele 38°50 
Pt Ci, N C,H, H, Cl contains 39°37 per cent. of Pt. 
Pt Cl, N (C, H,), H, Cl contains 35°42 


93 


bP) 33 


1866. | Preparation of Ethylamine. 219 


From which it will be seea that even the last tenth of the bases did not 
contain much di- and tri-bases. 

The former ;*, gave, as aforesaid, rather more platinum than ethylamine ~ 
salt yields, and therefore contained ammonia. 

In order to make out whether there was any di- and tri-base along with 
the ethylamine in these former fractions, we took No. 3 (corresponding 
to ;°;) and made a platinum-fractionation as follows :— 

No. 3 gave 40°62 and 40°13 per cent. of platinum. No. 3, after some 
pure chloride of ammonium had crystallized out (the crystals were analyzed 
and proved to be quite pure chloride of ammonium), was converted into a 
platinum-salt, and that platinum-salt fractionated so as to leave the portion 
richest in the high bases. This salt, which would be rich in the di- and 
tri-bases if any had been present in No. 3, gave this result :— 


*7666 grm. gave ‘3090 grm. of platinum= Pt per cent. 40-03. 


From which it is manifest that di- and tri-bases were absent. 

From the foregoing we concluded that all the higher bases were concen- 
trated in the last fraction, but that ammonia passed over during the whole 
distillation. The objection might therefore be made that mixtures of am- 
monia and di- and tri-ethylamines would give the same numbers. In 
order to deprive this objection of its force we made the following experi- 
ments. Iodide of ethyl, alcohol, and ammonia were digested as before, and 
the mixed iodides so obtained distilled from excess of potash, the vapour 
thus obtained absorbed by dilute sulphuric acid, care being taken that the 
acid was not in excess. The fluid so obtained was rendered very slightly 
acid with the same acid, and then evaporated on the water-bath. The 
semisolid residue was treated with strong alcohol, and allowed to stand one 
night. It was then filtered, the filtrate measured, and the amount of sul- 
phuric acid determined in a measured portion. Enough K HO was then 
added to the alcoholic liquid to liberate 58 of the bases present. The pot- 
ash was added in solution in water. ‘The liquid was then distilled, the 
distillate being received in dilute hydrochloric acid. A portion of this 
liquid was then evaporated to dryness and placed over sulphuric acid. Its 
percentage of chlorine was then determined : | 


°3826 of salt gave 6696 Ag Cl; 
*. 43°29 per cent. Cl. Theory 43°55. 


From these numbers it is obvious that the substance must have been pure 
ethylamine. It could have contained no ammonia, or at most only minute 
traces, and therefore the above objection is completely disposed of. 

A portion of this pure hydrochlorate of ethylamine was then treated 
with aqueous ammonia in insufficient quantity to combine with the whole 
of the hydrochloric acid present. We distilled this liquid into dilute 
hydrochloric acid, evaporated it to dryness, and determined the amount of 
chlorine present in the residue. The result was :— 


220 Mr. A. Matthiessen on the Expansion by [June 21, 


4528 of salt gave 1°3155 Ag Cl; .*. 59°94 per cent. Cl. 

Chloride of ammonium would give 66°33 me 

Chloride of ethylamine.......... 43°55 is 

From these numbers it appears that ammonia is capable of partially ex- 

pelling ethylamine from its compounds, and thus we have an explanation 
of the apparent anomaly of the appearance of ammonia with the ethylamine 
in the above-described experiments. It appears therefore that pure ethyl- 
amine may be readily obtained in the following manner. Equal volumes 
of iodide of ethyl, strong alcohol and ammonia are to be digested together 
for about half an hour, at a temperature somewhat below that of boiling 
water, with continual shaking; the product of this operation boiled to 
expel excess of ammonia, and then distilled from potash—the distillate 
being received into dilute sulphuric acid, the ammonia separated by means 
of alcohol, and the alcoholic solution of the mixed sulphates treated with 
sufficient potash to liberate about 5%, of the bases present. On distilling 
this mixture, pure ethylamine, accompanied with alcohol and water, are 
the sole products found in the distillate. 


IV. “On the Expansion by Heat of Metals and Alloys.” 
By A. MarrutessEen, F.R.S. Received June 14, 1866. 


(Abstract. ) 


In a paper “On the Expansion by Heat of Water and Mercury”*, a 
method of determining the expansion of bodies is described, by which 
good results can be obtained with comparatively small quantities of the 
substances to be experimented with. This method, that of weighing the 
body in water at different temperatures, has been employed for the present 
research. The results obtained are given in the following Tables :— 


Taste I.—Formule for the Correction of the Cubical Expansion by Heat 
of the Metals. 


Cadmium...... V,=V,(1+107* x 0°8078¢+ 107° x 0:14027) f. 
Zinc.......... Vz=V,(1+10-* x 082227 + 10-° x 0-07062”). 
CAG ees 23558 ne V.=V,(1+10-* x 0°8177¢+10-§ x 0-0222%). 
Rete eee V,=V,(1+10~* x 0-6100¢+10~° x 007892). 
Silver ........ Vs=V,(1+107* x 0°5426¢+4 10~° x 0-04052?). 
Copper: siuicce: V,=V,(1+10* x 0:4463¢+10~° x 0-0555#). 
Gold... >... .... Vi=V, (1+ 10“ x 0:407524- 10° x 0-0sa6r 
Bismuth *.. so V,=V,(1+10~* x 0:°3502¢+ 10-° x 0-04462). 
Palladium...... V,=V,(1+10-* x 0:3032¢+10-° x 0-02802). 
Antimony...... V.=V,(1+10~* x 0:2770t+10~° x 0:0397#). 
PlatnniM, «os «,-- V.=V,(1+10-* x 0:2554¢+ 10~° x 0-0104#?). 


* Phil. Trans. 1866, part 1. , 
+ I have employed this method of writing the formule to prevent mistakes in the 


1866. } . _ Heat of Metals and Alloys. 221 


-Tasre I1.—Formule for the Correction of the Linear Expansion by Heat - 
of the Metals. 


Cadmium...... L,=L, (1+ 10-* x 0:2693¢+4 10-* x 004667’). 
rae 8 L,=L, 1+10-* x 0:2741¢4+10~° x 0-0234+#?). 
Wedd sess cp L,=L, 1 +10~* x 0:2726¢+ 10-° x 0:0074#). 
| eS L,=L, (14+ 10-* x 0:2033¢+ 10-° x 0-0263#). 
LS i ee L,=L, (1+10-* x 0:1809¢410-° x 0:0135¢’). 
2 as L,=L, (1+10-* x 0:1481¢+ 107° x 0:01857). 
Peeled scithrocs «5 L,=L, (1+107* x 0:1858¢+ 107° x 0-0112#). 
Bismuth ...... L,=L, (1+107* x 0°1167¢+10~-° x 0:0149#). 
Palladium...... L=L, 1+10-* x 0:1011¢+4 10-° x 0-0093¢’). 
Antimony...... L,=L, (1-+10-! x 0:0923¢-410-® x 0-01322). 
Pham... .,. .,. L,=L, (1+10-* x 0:0850¢+4 10-° x 0-0035¢’), 


Taste III.—Formule for the Correction of the Cubical Expansion by 
| Heat of the Alloys. 


Sn, Pb : V,=V,(1+10-* x 0:6200¢+ 107° x 0:098827). 
Pb, Sn : V,=V, (1+10~* x 0:8087¢+ 10-* x 0:033227), 
Cd Pb : V,=V,(1+10~* x 0:9005¢+ 10-° x 0:0133¢?). 
Sn, Zn : V,=V, (1410 x 0-6377¢+ 10-* x 0:0807#°). 
Sn, Zn : V,=V,(1+10~* x 0°6236¢+ 10~° x 0:082277). 
Bi,, Sn : V.=V, (1 +107* x 0:3793¢+ 10-* x 0:0271¢). 
BiSn, : V,=V,(1+10~* x 0:4997¢+410-° x 0:0101¢?). 
Bi,, Pb: V.=V, (1+10~* x 0°3868¢+10~* x 0:02182). 
Bi Pb, : V,=V, (1+10~* x 0°8462¢4 107° x 0:01592). 
Cu+ Zn (71 p.c. Cu): V =V, (1+10~* x 0°5161¢+4 107° x 0:0558¢’). 
AuSn, V,=V,(1+10-* x 0:3944¢+10~* x 0:0289¢?). 
Au, Sn, V,=V, (1+10-? x 0:4165¢+ 10-* x 0:02632). 
Ag,Au V,=V,(1+10-* x 0°5166¢), 
AgAu V,=V,(1+10-* x 0-4916). 
AgAu, V,=V,(1+10-*x 0°3115 +10~° x 0-118577). 
Ag+ Pt: (66°6 p.c. Ag) V,=V, (1+ 10-* x 0:4246¢+ 10-° x 0:03222°), 
Au+ Cu (66°6 p.c. Au) V,=V, (1+10~* x 0:-4015¢+ 10-° x 0:064227). 
* Ag+ Au (36:1 p.c. Ag) V,=V,(1+10~* x 0:-4884¢+ 10° x 0:05527*). 
Ag+Au (71°6 p.c. Ag) V;=V, (1+10-* x 0°4413¢+4 10~° x 0-013802). 


number of the zeros. I have also preferred keeping the exponents constant, adding, 
instead of altering them, a zero after the decimal point when required. 


222 On the Expansion by Heat of Metals and Alloys. [June 21, 


' Taste [V.—Formule for the Correction of the Linear Expansion by 
Heat of the Alloys. | 


Sn, Pb L,=L, (1+107* x 0:2066¢+10-° x 0-0329#). 
Pb, Sn L,=L, (1 +107* x 0-2696¢+ 10-* x 0-0111#). 
Cd Pb L,=L,(1+10~* x 0°3002¢+10-° x 0-0044#?). 
Sn, Zn L,=L, (1+10~“* x 0:2126¢+ 10~ x 0:02691#). 
Sn, Zn L,=L, (14+107* x 0:2079¢+10-° x 0-0274#). 
Bi,, Su L,= L, (1+10~* x 0-:1264¢+ 10-* x 0-00902). 
BiSn, L,=L,(1+10~* x 0°1666¢+10~ x 0-0034#). 
Bi,, Pb L,= L, (1+10-* x 0:1293 +10-° x 0-:0073#). 
Bi Pb, L,=L, (1+107* x 0°:2821 +10-* x 0-:0053¢) 
Cu+ Zn (71 p.c. Cu) L,=L, (1 +107* x 0°1720¢+10~* x 000862). 
Au Sn, L,=L, (1+10~* x 0:1315¢+ 10-° x 0-0096#). 
Au, Sn, L,= L, (1+ 10~* x 0°1388¢+ 10~* x 0-0088¢*). 
AgAu L,=L,(1+10~* x 0:17222). ; 
Ag Au L,= L,(1+10-* x 0:1638¢). 
Ag Au, L,=L, (1+107* x 0:1038¢+4 10~* x 0:0395¢#*). 
Ag+ Pt (66°6 p.c. Ag) L,=L, (4+10-* x 0:1415¢4+10~° x 0-0107¢). 
Au+ Cu (66°6 p.c. Au) L,= L, (1+10~* x 0:1338¢+4 10-° x 0-0214#°). 
Ag+Cu (36:1 p.c. Ag) L,=L, (1+10~* x 0:1628¢4 10~° x 0-0182¢). 
Ag+Cu (71°6 p.c. Ag) L,=L, (1 4+107* x 0:1471¢+4 10~° x 0-0433#). 


From the above the following conclusion is drawn—namely, that just as 
it may be said that the specific gravity of an alloy is approximately equal 
to the mean specific gravities of the component metals, so also from the 
foregoing we may deduce that the volume which an alloy will occupy at 
any temperature between 0° and 100° is approximately equal to the mean of 
the volumes of the component metals at the same temperature, or, in other 
words, the cubical or linear coefficients of expansion by heat of an alloy 
between 0° and 100° are approximately equal to the mean of the cubical 
or linear coefficients of expansion by heat of the component metals. 


V. © On the Colouring and Extraction Matters of the Urme.—Part 
II.” By Epwarp Scuunck, F.R.S. Received June 20, 1866. 


See abstract, antea, p. 1. 


1866.] On the Absorption and Dialytic Separation of Gases. 223 


VI. “On the Absorption and Dialytic Separation of Gases by Colloid 
Septa.” By THomas Grauam, F.R.S., Master of the Mint. 
Received June 20, 1866. 


(Abstract. ) 


It appears that a thin film of caoutchouc, such as is furnished by var- 
nished silk or the transparent little balloons of india-rubber, has no poro- 
sity, and is really impervious to air as gas. But the same film is capable of 
liquefying the individual gases of which air is composed, while oxygen and 
nitrogen, in the liquid form, are capable of penetrating the substance of the 
membrane (as ether or naphtha do), and may again evaporate into a 
vacuum and appear as gases. ‘This penetrating power of air becomes. 
more interesting from the fact that the gases are unequally absorbed and 
condensed by rubber, oxygen 24 times more abundantly than nitrogen, and 
that they penetrate the rubber in the same proportion. Hence the rubber- 
film may be used as a dialytic sieve for atmospheric air, and allows very 
constantly 41-6 per cent. of oxygen to pass through, instead of the 21 per 
cent. usually present in air. The septum keeps back, in fact, one-half of 
the nitrogen, and allows the other half to pass through with all the oxygen. 
This dialysed air rekindles wood burning without flame, and is, in fact, 
exactly intermediate between air and pure oxygen gas in relation to com- 
bustion. 

One side of the rubber-film must be freely exposed to the atmosphere, 
and the other side be under the influence of a vacuum at the same time. 
The vacuum may be established within a bag of varnished silk, or in a 
little balloon, the sides being prevented from collapsing, by interposing 
a thickness of felted carpeting between the sides of the varnished cloth, 
and by filling the balloon with sifted sawdust. For commanding a 
vacuum in such experiments, the air-exhauster of Dr. Hermann Sprengel* 
is admirably adapted. It possesses the advantage that the gas drawn from 
the vacuum can also be delivered by the instrument into a gas-receiver 
placed over water or mercury. The “ fall-tube” has merely to be bent at 
the lower end. 

The surprising penetration of platinum and iron tubes by hydrogen gas, 
discovered by MM. H. Sainte-Claire Deville and Troost, appears to be con- 
nected with a power resident in the same and certain other metals, to 
liquefy and absorb hydrogen, possibly in its character as a metallic vapour. 
Platinum, in the form of wire or plate, at a low red heat may take up and 
hold 3:8 volumes of hydrogen, measured cold; but it is by palladium that 
the property in question appears to be possessed in the highest degree. 
Palladium foil from the hammered metal, condensed so much as 643 times 
its volume-of hydrogen, at a temperature under 100° C. The same metal 
had not the slightest absorbent power for either oxygen or nitrogen. The 
capacity of fused palladium (as also of fused platinum) is considerably 

* Chemical Society’s Journal, ser. 2, vol. iii. p. 9 (1865). 

VOL. XV. uU 


224, My. E. Nettleship on Tenia echinococcus. [June 21, 


reduced; but foil of fused palladium, for which I am indebted to Mr. G. 
Matthey, still absorbed 68 volumes of gas. A certain degree of porosity 
may be admitted to exist in these metals, and to the greatest extent in 
their hammered condition. It is believed that such metallic pores, and 
indeed all fine pores, are more accessible to liquids than to gases, and in 
particular to liquid hydrogen. Hence a peculiar dialytic action may reside 
in certain metallic septa, like a plate of pee, enabling them to sepa- 
rate hydrogen from other gases. 

In the form of sponge, platinum absorbed 1°48 times its volume of 
hydrogen and palladium 90 volumes. The former of these metals, in the 
peculiar condition of platinum-black, is already known to take up several 
hundred volumes of the same gas. The assumed liquefaction of hydrogen 
in such circumstances appears to be the primary condition of its oxidation 
at a low temperature. A repellent property possessed by gaseous mole- 
cules appears to resist chemical combination, as well as to establish a limit 
to their power to enter the minuter pores of solid bodies. 

Carbonic oxide is taken up more largely than hydrogen by soft iron. 
Such an occlusion of carbonic oxide by iron, at a low red heat, appears to 
be the first and a necessary step in the process of acieration. ‘The gas 
appears to abandon half its carbon to the iron, when the temperature is 
afterwards raised to a considerably higher degree. 

Silver has a similar relation to oxygen, of which metal the sponge, fritted 
but not fused, was found to hold in one case so much as 7°49 volumes of 
oxygen. A plate or wire of the fused metal retains the same property, but 
much reduced in intensity, as with plates of fused platinum and palladium 
in their relation to hydrogen. 


VII. “ Notes on the Rearing of Tenia echinococcus in the Dog, from 
Hydatids, with some Observations on the Anatomy of the 
Adult Worm.” By Epwarp Nerriesnip, Mem. Royal Agric. 
Coll. Communicated by T. Spencer Coszoip, M.D. Re- 
ceived May 24, 1866. 


On March 28th, 1866, I obtained from Clare Market the liver and 
lungs of a sheep containing numerous Echinococcus hydatids; mm some 
the outer cyst was partly calcified, but all the hydatids contained clear 
fluid, and great numbers of scolices attached to the endocyst. Within two 
hours of the death of the sheep to which the organs belonged, I gave two 
or three of the smaller hydatids to a young dog, about six months old; 
first puncturing the hydatid and administering the collapsed cyst, and then 
making him drink the ae of the cyst, in which some Echinococci were 
floating. 

The next day I gave him a second feeding of the remaining hydatids; 
this second batch he threw up within half an hour of the feeding,ibut he 
afterwards swallowed the broken membranes again, and did not afterwards 


1866. ] _ Mr.E. Nettleship on Tenia echinococcus. 225. 


vomit. I was careful to administer the hydatids from both calcified and 
non-calcified cysts. 

The animal remained perfectly healthy, and became very much fatter ; 
he was fed for the most part on cooked kitchen refuse, but I cannot be 
positive that he never obtained any raw food. 

On May 15th (the forty-seventh day after the first feeding) I killed 
the animal, and examined the intestines. In the first ten inches of bowel 
below the pylorus there were no Teenie ; at that distance a single Tenia 
echinococcus appeared, moving actively ; for the next two or three inches 
there were none, but at about fourteen inches below the pylorus several 
more appeared, and immediately after this they became so numerous as to 
present almost the appearance of distended lacteals; this continued for 
about a foot in extent, and then they gradually became less numerous, 
and ceased at about three feet from the pyloric orifice. 

There were also four specimens of 7’. marginata, varying from two to 
three feet in length, and two of T. cucumerina. 

The part of the intestine containing 7’, echinococeus was immediately 
put into dilute carbolic acid, and the worms not examined until two days 
subsequently ; after that interval they were still tolerably adherent to the 
mucous membrane, though a good many had fallen off. On detaching 
them with needles, or examining those which had fallen off, nearly all were 
found to be quite destitute of hooks; but one (from which the outline 
sketch, Plate VIII. fig. 1, was taken) had a tolerably complete double row ; 
in this specimen, however, the hooks and proboscis were inverted, while in 
most specimens the latter part was protruded. 3 

In fig. 2 is a single hook of 7’. echinococcus, probably from the pos- 
terior circlet, magnified more highly. 

Fig. 3 shows at a, a hook of the posterior circlet, and at 6, one from 
the anterior circlet of an Hcehinococcus-scolex from an ox. There seems 
very little difference between corresponding hooks of the scolex and of 
the adult tapeworm, unless the latter be rather stouter and have larger 
processes. 

On {th of a square inch, where the worms were thickest, I counted 
twenty-five of them ; by calculation there were about twenty-two square 
inches of intestine covered in this way, allowing for the more thinly scat- 
tered parts at each end of the infected part; this gives a total of 8800 
specimens of 7’. echinococcus in this dog’s bowel. 

I have examined carefully numerous specimens of these worms with 
the microscope, with especial reference to the arrangement of the sexual 
organs; the great majority are sexually mature, and contain a greater or 
less number of eggs. It is not easy to make-out accurately the arrange- 
ment and connexions of the ovary, yelk-forming glands, and uterus, as 
described by Leuckart*, but fig. 4 gives a tolerably correct representation, 
in the 3rd (immature) segment. 

* Vide Cobbold, ‘‘ Entozoa,” p. 256, 1864. 


226 Dr. W. H. Ransom on the Ovum of Osseous Fishes. [June 21, 


At a is the vagina, continued as an indistinct tube to 6, which I suppose 
to be the seminal vesicle; immediately beyond this is a dark mass (0) con- 
taining spherical, highly refractive bodies; this is the ovary. On either 
side and in front of this are the yelk-forming glands (e), two somewhat 
indefinite lobular organs apparently communicating with the vagina in 
front of the seminal vesicle. At cand d are the globular testicles; fis 
the rudimentary vas deferens. Running forwards from the vagina is another 
narrower tube g, which passes quite to the anterior end of the segment, 
where it becomes at first slightly dilated (fig. 5, uw’), and afterwards en- 
larged into the head of the uterus; a large spherical sae full of ova is 
readily seen with the naked eye in many sexually mature segments (fig. 
4, ut.). The greater part of the body of this tube also becomes enlarged 
into the uterus (u, fig. 5), but I think that the hinder part continues 
tubular, and probably constitutes the “ wide cavity”’ leading from vagina 
to uterus, described by Leuckart. In fig. 5 there is some appearance of 
this tube continued backwards from u (a, fig. 5), but I cannot follow it to 
any communication with the vagina (va.). The same is true in this specimen 
of the ovary (ov.) and seminal pouch (s. p.). The vitelligene glands (e, fig. 4) 
have disappeared in fig. 5, and the ovary has become less distinct, but the 
seminal pouch has developed somewhat, while in fig. 6, taken from a 
sexually mature segment, the latter organ is still plainer ; the canal of the 
vagina has elongated, and shows besides the semmal pouch a smaller dila- 
tation (a, fig. 6) nearer the orifice. In none of the mature segments 
have I been able to make out any communication between the vagina and 
uterus, either in front of or behind the seminal pouch. 

Although Dr. Cobbold has succeeded in rearing a variety of tapeworms 
from their respective larvee, the Tenia echinococcus has not hitherto been 
reared in this country. 

The importance of this creature in its pathological relations, and the 
desideratum of more information as to its anatomy, have induced me to 
place the foregoing facts on record. In conducting the investigation J 
have taken every precaution to prevent the escape and distribution of the 
ova and their contained proscolices. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE.—Fig. 5. 


va. Vagina. a. Tube (?) leading from uterus to vagina. 
ov. Ovarium. t. Testicles. 

s. p. Seminal pouch. v. d. Vas deferens, 

u, u'. Uterus partly developed. ¢. p. Cirrhus pouch. 


VIII. “ Observations on the Ovum of Osseous Fishes.” By W. H. 
Ransom, M.D. Communicated by Dr. Suarpry. Received 
June 21, 1866. 

(Abstract.) 
In this paper the author has communicated the details of observations 
of which the principal results were stated in a short paper published in the 


aie 
LL. 


yy 


i 
ue 


Sac. Vol XV. 


© 
y 


Roy 


a 
« f 


PH. 


2) 
/ 


Tenia Echinococcus. 


~ saith 


Fig. 6. 


Ww 


J Bastre. lithy 


1866.] Dr. W.H. Ransom on the Ovum of Osseous Fishes. 227 


Proceedings of the Royal Society in 1854, and of further researches on the 
structure and properties of the egg in several species of osseous fishes. 
The methods employed in determining the functions of the micropyle, 
and in conducting the various inquiries entered upon are described. The 
development of the ovarian ovum is traced in two species of Gasterosteus, 
and the yelk-sac is shown to- increase by interstitial growth, and not by 
apposition of layers on either surface. A minute description of the ger- 
minal vesicle and its contents is given, and the germinal spots are shown to 
be drops of a thick fluid substance, so apt to change their normally round 
form, and to vacuolate in their interior, that no perfectly indifferent medium 
was found in which to examine them. ‘The primitive yelk first formed 
around the germinal vesicle is shown to differ in some of its chemical and 
physical properties from that of the ripe ovum; it is solid, and does not 
consist of two distinguishable portions. On its surface a yelk-sac was found 
in very early ova, but in the smallest eggs examined it could not be sepa- 
rated. 

The reactions of a variety of albumen allied to myosin, which the author 
has found in variable proportions in the yelk of all the fishes, amphibia, 
and birds which he has examined, are Gescribed, the yelk of the salmon 
being selected for experiment. This substance, to which the name albumen 
C. is given provisionally, is remarkable, in addition to its being easily pre- 
cipitable by water in excess, for forming under certain conditions a solution 
in dilute nitric acid not coagulable by boiling. 

Some account is rendered of the reactions of an acid compound of phos- 
phoric acid with an organic substance also met with in the yelk of various 
animals. 

The phenomena which follow impregnation prior to the commencement 

of cleavage are described, and are shown to be chiefly due to the influence 
upon the yelk of water which has passed through the yelk-sac. 
_ Some variations which occur in this respect in different species of 
osseous fishes are described, and the ova of Gasterosteus are shown to be 
remarkable in having a viscid mucoid covering derived from the oviduct, 
which prevents the imbibition of water through the yelk-sac, so that it 
only then enters and forms a breathing-chamber after impregnation, when 
it passes through the aperture in the apex of the micropyle; whereas in 
the eggs of salmon and in those of most other fishes, unimpregnated ova 
rapidly absorb water by the whole surface of the yelk-sac, the yelk con- 
tracting at the same time to form tke breathing-chamber. 

The concentration of the formative yelk, originally forming a thin layer 
over the whole yelk-ball, at the germinal pole is also proved to be due to 
the action of water, of which it requires a free supply sufficient to distend 
the yelk-sac, and to be independent of fecundation. 

The contractions of the yelk are shown to be also independent of the 
action of the spermatozoids, and to be reactions following the entrance of 
water into the breathing-chamber ; and this not only as “ae the rhythmie 


228 Dr. W. H. Ransom on the Ovum of Osseous Fishes. [June 21, 


waves, which pass over the surface of the food-yelk, but also the fissile con- 
tractility of the formative yelk, by virtue of which it cleaves into irregular 
and unsymmetrical masses, and which the author conceives to be regu- 
lated only by the influence of the seminal particles. 

The cortical layer of the food-yelk or inner sac, which is shown to resist 
in a remarkable manner osmosis, is found to be the rhythmically contractile 
part, although requiring for its manifestation the presence of acid food- 
yelk upon its inner surface. 

Evidence is given to show that the contractile property of the yelk of 
both kinds requires, as an essential condition of its manifestation, the pre- 
sence of oxygen in the surrounding medium, and that the food-yelk, while 
the rhythmic waves are passing over it, consumes less than does the forma- 
tive yelk, while regularly cleaving after fecundation; also that some pro- 
duct of oxidation is formed during these movements, which itself tends to 
check them, but which the author failed to determine the nature of. 

Proofs are also: given that a certain moderate rise of temperature in- 
creases the activity of these contractions. Experiments are related which 
show the extreme limits the yelk will bear without destroying them, and the 
temperature at which commencing chemical change prevents further con- 
traction. 

The reactions of the substance of the yelk under the stimulus of gal- 
vanism are recorded, and evidence afforded that the food-yelk and the 
_ cortical layer alone are excited to contraction by it, attempts made to in- 
duce fissile or other contractions of the formative yelk resulting in elec- 
trolysis of that highly unstable substance. 

Experiments made to ascertain the effects produced by poisonous sub- 
stances on the contractions of the yelk are recorded, and the general fact 
ascertained of the extreme indifference to such agents of yelk protoplasm. 

Carbonic acid, however, is shown to destroy the contractility rapidly, 
and chloroform to arrest it for a time. 

The process of cleavage is described, and experiments are given which 
show that oxygen in the surrounding medium is an essential condition of 
its occurrence. The influence of heat in quickening it, and the comparative 
indifference which it shows to the action of a galvanic current and to most 
poisons, are proved by a series of experiments, in which also the remarkable 
and destructive activity of carbonic acid is evidenced. 

The author has considered the egg as a cell, its contents as a pro- 
toplasm, of which the firmer cortical*layer is the equivalent of the pri- 
mordial utricle, and the fluid food-yelk of the liquid contents, while the 
formative yelk is represented by the granular accumulation around the 
nucleus. Two stages or grades of development of protoplasm are con- 
ceived to be represented by the two forms of yelk, and a parallelism is 
attempted to be drawn between them and the stages of development 
through which many ameeboid organisms pass, and which the author 
believes to have a wide, if not a universal existence in the organic world ; 


1866.] Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 229 


the lower grade represented by the homogeneous food-yelk with a cortical 
layer, and possessed of rhythmic contractility, passing into the higher 
represented by the formative yelk of a granular structure, and possessed 
of a fissile contractile property only. 


IX. “Variations in Human Myology observed during the Winter 
Session of 1865-66 at King’s College, London.” By Joun 
Woop, F.R.C.S., Demonstrator of Anatomy. Communicated by 
Dr. SHarrey. Received May 3, 1866. 


In the present paper are given the results of observations, made with the 
greatest possible accuracy and care, of the muscular anatomy of thirty-four 
subjects, chiefly of the male sex, with an especial view to the study of the 
combinations of these abnormalities, and the directions in which they 
chiefly tend. To enable the reader more readily to comprehend these re- 
sults, the author has tabulated them in the sheet appended to the paper. 
In the Table the names of the muscles placed at the head of each column 
refer to those in which more than one variety has heen observed in the 
session. ‘They will be found to correspond very closely with those given — 
in the former papers by the author. In columns 4, 21, and 27 are placed 
those of which only one example has been met with. Some of these, how- 
ever, are of much importance. 

To explain the nature of the abnormality more precisely than could be 
done in the Table, a word or two will be necessary on such of the specimens 
as may be considered novel or typical. 

Four columns are occupied by variations of the head and neck, the ex- 
amples of which amount in the aggregate to twenty-two; some of the 
muscles in these may, however, strictly be considered as muscles also of 
the upper extremity, especially those in col. 3, which I have denominated 
cleido-occipital. 

Col. 1. Platysma myoides.—The first of the two varieties noted (in 
subject 20) was connected with the inner side of the lower end of the nor- 
mal muscle, the fibres passing in a broad band downwards and inwards, 
over the origin of the s¢erno-cleido-mastoid, the clavicle, and upper fibres 
of the pectoralis major to be inserted into the fascia covering the sternum 
as far down as the third costal cartilage. 

The second (subject 29) was connected internally with the sternal fascia 
between the second and third costal cartilages, and crossing obliquely out- 
wards and downwards over the lower fibres of the pectoralis major and 
axillary cavity, became attached to the tendon of the latissimus dorsi, ex- 
actly as we find its homologue, the panniculus carnosus, to do in the lower 
animals. This variety of the Platysma does not appear to have been pre- 
viously recorded. 

2. Digastric.—The two varieties of this muscle were found, as usual, 
in the anterior belly, which was double. In the first (No. 1) the redundant 
belly was attached by the median raphé to the one on the other side, and 


230 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [June 21, 


was implanted upon the tendon in the usual manner. The second decus- 
sated with its fellow on the opposite side, and each became attached to a 
part of the digastric fossa on the opposite half of the mandible, as given in 
the author’s first paper, and described by Henle and other anatomists. 

3. Cleido-occipital.—The author has ventured to bestow this name upon 
a muscle which proved, when looked after, to be so common that not less 
than eleven specimens were found out of the thirty-four subjects. It will 
be best understood by reference to fig. 7 a, in the subject of which it was 
found in conjunction with a sternoclavicular muscle. It is placed along 
the hinder border of the sterno-cleido-mastoideus, usually separated, how- 
ever, by a distinct areolar interval from both the sternal and clavicular . 
fibres of this muscle. It is attached below to the junction of the inner 
and middle thirds of the upper border of the clavicle, and above to the 
superior curved line of the occipital bone, close to the origin of the trapezius 
muscle. It is described by Meckel (Handbuch der mensch. Anatomie, 
1816, p. 474) as an accessory to the sterno-cleido-mastoid sometimes met 
with. It may be considered as a lateral extension and separation of part 
of the clavicular fibres of the sterno-cleido-mastoid, which, in the ncrmal ~- 
arrangement, are crossed and entirely covered at the upper part by the 
sternal portion, and do not extend at their insertion beyond the mastoid 
portion of the temporal bone. The author has found that in the Guinea- 
pig and some other Rodents it constitutes a separate muscle, entirely distinct 
from the sterno-mastoid, carrying with it the whole of the clavicular fibres 
of the sterno-cleido-mastoideus. In the Dog and Cat, and probably in the 
other Carnivora, it forms part of the long muscle, the cephalo-humeral. 
In these animals the cleido-mastoid is a distinct muscle, joing with 
the cephalo-humeral at the rudimentary clavicle. In the Hedgehog, on the 
other hand, the clezdo-mastoid is blended with the sterno-mastoid, while the 
cleido-occipital is placed as a distinct muscle behind it. In the Apes and 
Monkeys it is always present, but continuous with the hinder border of the 
true séerno-cleido-mastoid, with a more or less distinct intermuscular space*. 
The above peculiarities of its comparative anatomy, and the fact of its separate 
attachment to the occipital bone, instead of the mastoid portion of the tem- 
poral bone, have induced the author to propose the name here given to it. 

4, Of the single specimens in this column the levator elavicule was in 
most respects the counterpart to that given in the author’s last paper; 
but it was found only on the left side, arising from the three upper cervical 
transverse processes in front of the levator anguli scapule, and inserted 
into the outer half of the clavicle, behind the anterior fibres of the trape- 
zius. On the opposite side it was not found, but a very distinct cleido- 
occipital was present. This again was not found on the left side, but 
appeared to supply the place of the levator clavicule. The costo-fascialis 
cervicalis, of subject 28, was in every respect like those described in the 


* Meckel describes, in the Marmot, the Squirrel, and some other Rodents, and in 
some Marsupials, two clezdo-mastoids, of which the hinder corresponds entirely to the 
muscle here called clecdo-occzpital (Anatomie Compar. 1829-30, vol. vi. p. 163). 


1866. | Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 231 


author’s two last papers. The sternalis brutorum was a small development 
on the right side only, reaching from the third to the sixth costal cartilage. 
The rest of the muscles in this column scarcely need a more extended de- 
scription than is there found. 

No less than seventeen out of the twenty-seven columns denoting the 
different kinds of variety are occupied by those of the arm, of which there 
are seventy-one examples. 

5. Epigastric slips of the pectoralis major presented various degrees of 
development of the so-called chondro-epitrochlear muscle of the Apes and 
Monkeys, but reaching only as far as the insertion of the rest of that 
muscle into the bicipital ridge, and terminating distinctly from it. None 
of them were so complete in their development as those described in the 
-author’s first paper. One specimen is seen in fig. | a, in significant com- 
bination with the ape-like variation placed in the next column. 

6. The developments of the pectoralis minor given in this column are 
such as may easily be overlooked, but when closely sought for, as in the 
last session, have yielded no less than five specimens out of thirty-four 
subjects. The variety consists in the prolongation of the tendon of inser- 
tion as a flat tendinous slip, sometimes connected with a large portion of 
the muscular fibres, over the upper surface of the coracoid process, which 
is grooved distinctly for its reception. This tendon then joins that of the 
supraspinatus muscle, and blending with it and the capsular ligament, is 
implanted into the upper facet of the greater tuberosity of the humerus 
(see fig. 14). In the subject of the sketch (a female) another tendinous 
slip was directed upwards and outwards, and lost upon the coraco-acromial 
ligament. The insertion of the pectoralis minor into the shoulder-joint cap- 
sule is mentioned by Meckel (op. cit. p. 467), giving Gantzer as his au- 
thority*. This prolongation of the tendon to the humerus reaches to a 
greater extent in the Monkeys in proportion to the diminution in size of the 
coracoid process. In the Carnivora it is entirely inserted into the greater 
tuberosity, and blends more or less intimately with the pectoralis major. 
In subject 22 the upward direction of the insertion of the pectoralis minor 
becomes more marked as an insertion of the upper muscular fibres into the 
costo-coracoid membrane and the clavicle itself. The origin of the muscle 
was in this case higher than usual, reaching tothe first intercostal aponeurosis. 
This upward development of the pectoralis minor is an approximation to the 
condition of its insertion in the Rodents, and, as the author believes, is a for- 
mation identical with the sternoclavicular muscle, and found in subject 27, 
column 21 (fig. 7). 

7. In this column are given two opposite tendencies of development 
of the Jatissimus dorsi. Of the first are those not uncommon slips 
of communication between this muscle and the insertion of the pectoralis 
major, passing in front of the axillary vessels and nerves (see fig. 1 c), 
described by Meckel, Langer, and Gruber (dchselbogen). The author re- 


* De Souza describes a case in which the whole of the pectoralis minor was inserted 
into the capsule of the shoulder-joint (Gazette Médicale, 1855, No. 12). 


232 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [June 21, 


Fig. 1.—Subject No. 5. Fig. 2.—Subject No. 10. 


SY \ = 
SYA = : 
S ; WH Sos 


238 


Fig. 6.—Subject No. 32. 


Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 


1866.] 


—Subject No, 21. 


Fig. 4. 


Fig. 3.—Subject No. 32. 


=== 


TS UE = 


SF ROG 


Fig. 8.—Subject No. 7. 


234 Mr.J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [June 21, 


gards these as imperfect developments of the so-called dorsi-epitrochlear 

muscle of the lower animals. None have been found this session extensively 

developed, and these only in three subjects, of which the last (No. 32) 

was one remarkable for the number of its muscular abnormalities. 

The other varieties found were two specimens of the remarkable 
offset sent from the Jlatisst¢mus upwards towards the coracoid process, 
which the author described in his paper read two years ago to the 
Society, under the name of the chondro-coracoid muscle. It arises with 
the upper costal fibres of the /atissitmus from the ninth and tenth rib-carti- 
lages, ascending so as to cross the axillary cavity obliquely outwards. In 
the specimen figured in the author’s first series it was inserted with the 
pectoralis minor into the tip of the coracoid process. In subject 10 (fig. 2) 
it is inserted partly into the lower surface of that process (a), and partly 
into the capsular ligament of the shoulder with the tendon of the supra- 
spinatus (6). It will be observed to pass between the trunks of the axillary 
plexus, separating the posterior from the lateral cords. The latter and the 
vessels are cut to show the muscle. In subject 28 this muscle was con- 
nected with the origin of the coraco-brachialis, and passed with it to the 
tip of the coracoid. A similar slip of muscle, passing from the 5th, 6th, 
and 7th ribs to the muscles connected with the coracoid process, was ob- 
served by Theile (Jourdan’s Translation, p. 204). In all the specimens 
the unvarying origin of this curious slip, and its relation to the one 
which joins with the insertion of the pectoralts major, and to the chondro- 
epitrochlear muscle of the lower animals, show it to be the result of an 
upward displacement of the same typical structure, ranging from the in- 
sertion of the pectoralis major to that of the pectoralis minor. 

8. The increased number of the heads of the dcceps in the two subjects 
in this column were of the more usual kind described by Meckel and others, 
arising from the fibres of the brachialis anticus and from the greater tu- 
berosity of the humerus. 

9. In subjects 14 and 17 the érachialis anticus presented a continuity 
of a large portion of its outer fibres of origin into those of the supinator 
longus, which is not uncommon, although not, as far as the author is aware, 
previously noted in the human subject. It is a very common arrangement 
in the Apes and Monkeys, assisting them very materially in climbing and 
twisting the body while hanging by the anterior extremities. In subject 
30 there was a brachio-fascialis or quasi-third head of the dzceps, similar 
to that described in former papers. On the opposite arm was found a 
curious fusiform muscle, springing high up from the brachialis anticus, and 
connected below with the pronator radu teres towards its insertion. 

* 10. The flexor sublimis digitorum in subjects 5 and 13 gave off on the 
outer side of its coronoid origin a separate slender tendon, which becam 
the sole origin of a first lumbricalis muscle. In both, another first lum 
bricalis was given off from the usual place on the indicial tendon of th 
perforans. In No. 13 also a curious division of the abnormal lumbéricak 


* 


1866. ] Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Mypology. 235 


occurred, into two parts, of which the innermost was implanted upon the 
tendon of the perforatus, near its division within the sheath of the index 
finger ; while the outermost jomed the normal lumbricalis near its usual 
place of insertion. Higher up in the arm another muscular slip connected 
the redundant tendon from the sublimis with the indicial tendon of the 
profundus. In subject 9 was a muscular connexion of the flexor sublimis 
with the origin of the flexor longus pollicis, like that described in the last 
paper. 

11. The variations of the flewor profundus digitorum in three subjects 
consisted merely in a not uncommon distinct and superficial muscular 
origin from the coronoid process along with the fibres of the sublimis, such 
as is frequently met with in the lower animals. In subject 8 was found a 
tendon connecting the indicial part of the fleror profundus with the tendon 
of the flexor longus pollicis. In subject 20 this arrangement was reversed, 
the tendon going from the flexor pollicis above to the flexor profundus 
below. This variety is found in the next column. 

12. In addition to the variety just mentioned the flexor pollicis longus 
gives, in subject 2, a tendon to the first lumbricalis on both sides. 

13. The luméricales have been found irregular in three other subjects 
besides those just mentioned, in which the first was seen to arise from the 
flexor sublimis and flexor longus pollicis. In subject 5 the third lumbricalis 
on the right arm was bifurcated, one half going to the ulnar side of the 
middle finger and the other to the radial side of the ring finger. Both 
sides of the long finger were thus provided with this muscle, an arrangement 
which was repeated in both the hands of the 22nd subject. On the right arm 
of the 32nd subject the whole of the third lumbricalis (see fig. 3.¢) was in- 
serted into the inner side of the long finger, while the fourth was entirely 
absent. This was also the case with the left arm of subject 5. 

14. The name at the head of this column—fewor carpi radialis brevis 
—I have applied to a muscle which is given in fig. 3a, drawn from sub- 
ject 32. This subject was, from the number and character of its varieties, » 
the most remarkable of the whole. In this case the muscle arises from 
the middle third of the front surface of the radius, between the flexor longus 
pollicis above (d) and the pronator quadratus (c) below. Passing under 
the annular ligament as a distinct rounded tendon, close to the carpal 
bones, inside of and parallel with the sheath of the tendon of the 
flexor carpi radialis (f), it is inserted partly into the os magnum, but 
chiefly into the base of the middle metacarpal bone, where it gave attach- 
ment to some fibres of the flexor brevis pollicis muscle. It is evidently a 
flexor of the third metacarpal bone, corresponding to the flexor carpi radt- 
alis of the second metacarpal. During the last session a precisely similar . 
muscle was described by Dr. Norton, of St. Mary’s Hospital, and exhibited 
by him at a meeting of the Zoological Society. The subject of figure 3 is 
further remarkable for a distinct slip of tendon from the flexor carpi ulnaris 
(7) to the base of the fourth metacarpal bone (seen at 6). In this arm we 


236 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. ([June 21, 


have, therefore, a flexor for each of the metacarpal bones, reckoning the 
opponens as one. But further than this, the outer fibres of the extensor - 
ossis metacarpi pollicis in the same arm (see fig. 6 ¢) are separated from 
the rest by a cellular interval, and arise partly from the fascia covering the 
radial extensors and supinator longus. They are connected with a distinct 
tendon, which is implanted into the front part of the outer border of the 
base of the first metacarpal bone. ‘Traction upon this tendon showed that 
its action was rather of the nature of flexion with abduction than of exten- 
sion. This peculiarity of origin is noticed by Henle (Muskellehre). The 
arm from which figs. 3 and 6 were taken is now in the custody of the 
Curator of the Hunterian Museum. In fig. 3 is seen also the abnormal 
insertion of the third lumbricalis (c), the absence of the fourth, and at h 
the first palmar interosseus of the thumb, described by Henle. In fig. 6 
the additional special extensors of the third and fourth fingers are given. 

In subjects 13 and 31 were found muscles which are entirely homologous 
with the flexor carpi radialis brevis just described. They had exactly 
similar origins, were of the same shape and with like tendons, but were 
inserted into the inner side of the base of the second instead of the third 
metacarpal bones, one of them passing, with the tendon of the flexor carpi 
radialis, through the groove in the trapezium and annular ligament, but 
the other going outside of that sheath. 

In subject 6 was found a large fusiform muscle, having its origin from 
the radius outside of that of the fexor longus pollicis, and reaching as high 
up as the oblique line below the fleror sublimes. Ending im a distinct, 
strong, and rounded tendon, it was implanted into that deeper portion of 
the annular ligament which separates the groove for the fleror carpi radi- 
alis tendon, and with this into the trapezoid, magnum, and base of the 
middle metacarpal bones. A muscle precisely similar to this was described 
by the author in his last paper (subject 1). Its resemblance in appearance, 
position, connexions, and influence upon the carpus, have induced him to 
class it with the foregoing flexor carpi radialis brevis as a variation of the 
same type of muscle, the flexor of the middle metacarpal bone. 

15, The variations of the radial extensors found in this column are of two 
kinds, which appear to be closely allied. The first kind mentioned are the 
interchanging muscles frequently seen and recorded by anatomists. ‘These, 
arising with one of the twin muscles, pass as distinct tendons over to 
the other, and become inserted with it. Of these, three were found. In 
the absence of a name the author has ventured to distinguish this form of 
muscle by that of the extensor carpi radialis intermedius. Of the other 
kind is found only one example. It is the extensor carpi radialis acces- 
_sorius first recorded, named and described by the author in his former 
papers*. It has been chosen as the subject of fig. 4, taken from the right 
arm of subject No. 23, because of its coexistence with the intermediate form 
of the radial extensors, which was not the case in any of the specimens 


* This muscle seems to be present in about the proportion of 1 in 35 subjects. 


1866. | Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Mypology. 237 


before found. It arises from the condyloid ridge of the humerus, below 
the extensor carpi radialis longior (f), lies between that muscle and the 
extensor intermedius (c), which separates it from the extensor curpi radi- 
alis brevior (d). It has a distinct tendon of considerable size, which, 
crossing that of the longior, goes through the sheath of the extensors of 
the metacarpus and first phalanx of the thumb, and divides into two slips, 
one to be implanted into the base of the first metacarpal, and the other to 
give part origin to a double abductor pollicis (6). The tendon of the 
entermedius (c) can be seen to be implanted upon the second metacarpal 
with that of the dongior. In the left arm of the same subject only the 
intermediate form was found. The close relation of these two forms is 
well seen in the figure. The accessorius has an origin somewhat similar to 
the intermedius, while its insertion and connexion with the short abductor 
is precisely similar to that often found in the tendon of extensor ossis 
metacarpt pollicis, with which the radial extensors have usually so close a 
connexion at its origin, as before alluded to in describing the redundancy of 
that muscle in subject 32 (fig.6¢). If we suppose the germ of an extensor 
entermedius to become blended with that of the upper and outer portion of a 
double extensor ossis metacarpi pollicis, the result would be the extensor 
accessorius here described*. 

16. The extensor carpi ulnaris in two subjects sent, in both arms, ten- 
dinous slips to the little finger, which were blended with the common 
extensor aponeurosis (fig. 5 @). This variety is mentioned by Meckel. Henle 
considers it as homologous with that of the peroneus quinti in the foot. 
In both subjects the arrangement of the slip was strikingly similar 
to that of the last-named abnormality, but in neither of them was the 
peroneus quinti found in the foot. In the same arms the extensor minimi 
digiti (6) was found provided with two tendons, both inserted, with a slip 
from the common extensor, into the dorsal aponeurosis of the fifth digit (c). 


* On looking over Meckel’s description of the extensor ossis metacarpi pollicis, in 
reference to this subject, the author finds that he mentions the rare occurrence of a 
double-bellied long abductor of the thumb, arising from the outer condyle of the hume- 
rus, and inserted into the base of the first phalanx of the thumb (op. cz¢. Muskellehre, 
p. 517). This has evidently been the extensor carpi radialis accessorius of the author, 
passing entirely into the outer head of a double abductor pollicis brevis, without any 
insertion into the metacarpal bone, as found in one of the specimens figured in the 
author’s first series. 

In many of the lower animals, and occasionally in the human subject (Henle), the 
radial extensors are represented by one large muscle, which gives off two tendons to the 
second and third metacarpal bones respectively. This original connexion seems to be 
represented by the zntermediate form of muscle just described. In the Anteater is found 
a muscle arising from the humerus above the long supinator, and inserted either into 
the ensiform bone or into the muscular substance of the palm (Meckel, Anatomie 
Compar., 1829-30, pp. 327-8, vol. vi.). In the Echidna and Ornithorhyncus a small 
muscle is found under the common extensor of the 2nd and 3rd metacarpal bones, which 

‘is considered by Meckel (De Ornithorhynco) to be a supinator longus. 'These may 
probably be the homologues of this muscle. 


a 


238 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [June 21, 


17. In three other subjects, besides the two last mentioned, the extensor 
minimt digiti was found to have a double tendon. In one the muscle also 
was doubled. 

In subjects 5 and 32 the outermost of the tendons of this double muscle 
was inserted into the extensor aponeurosis of the ring finger, thus forming 
a special extensor of this digit (fig. 6 a), joming, before reaching it, with a 
slip from the common extensor, which directly afterwards again left it, 
carrying some of its fibres to join the little finger. This arrangement was 
described by the author in his first paper, and has been also noticed by 
Vesalius, Meckel, and Hallett in Man, and by Church in the Apes. 

18. In this column are found two specimens of that differentiation 
of the extensor indicis muscle which results in a proper extensor of the 
middle finger. In fig. 6 (taken from the extensor aspect of the same arm 
as fig. 3, subject 32) is seen a complete double set of extensor tendons for 
each of the five digits, mm addition to the interesting varieties found on 
the flexor side (including a whole set of flexors for the five metacarpal 
bones), and in other parts of the body. It was not found in’ the left 
arm. In subject 13, the extensor medi digiti was found in both arms, and, 
what is significant, it was associated in both with the flexor carpi ra- 
dialis brevis before described, showing a special tendency to development 
of the muscles of the middle digit. A similar tendency is shown in subject 
15, by a duplication of the tendon of the indicator, both tendons in this 
case being inserted into the first digit. 

19. Of the extensor brevis digitorum manus, described in the author’s 
last papers, fewer examples than usual have been found, none of them 
very complete. In subject 32a single slip to the middle finger is found 
associated with the proper extensor and a flexor of the metacarpal bone of 
that digit; a combination which was present also in the remarkable subject 
(1) described in the last paper, and, with the exception of the proper ex- 
tensor, in one other subject last session. It may be taken asa further proof 
of the specializing tendency in the middle finger in this subject. 

20. Of the interossei, five specimens of differentiation are noted, chiefly 
belonging to the first, or abductor indicis. Two specimens of a palmar 
interosseus of the thumb are found in Nos. 5 and 32, both presenting 
numerous other variations. | 

21. Among the miscellaneous muscles of the arm the most noteworthy 
specimen is that of a sternoclavicular muscle, similar to that described by 
Haller, and more recently by Mr. Berkeley Hill. This muscle (given in 
fig. 7 c, from subject 27) arises by a thin tendon from the front of the 
manubrium sterni, just below the origin of the sterno-mastoid. Spreading 
as a muscular layer upwards and outwards under the clavicular fibres of the 
pectoralis major (6 b', cut and turned up in the figure), it is inserted into 
the lower border of the clavicle, just in front of the subclavius muscle, 
from which it is separated by the costo-coracoid membrane (a), extending 
nearly as far outwards as the origin of the de/toid. 


1866.] Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 289 


- This muscle has been found in Birds, Bats, and Moles. The author has” 
also found it remarkably well-developed in the Guineapig and some 
others of the Rodentia. He believes it to be closely allied to the upward 
extension of the pectoralis minor, before alluded to, and to result from a 
differentiation of such an upward extension. In the subject of the sketch 
it was associated with a cleido-occipital (a), and with an increase in the 
number of tendons to the little finger. 

In subject 26 was a curious muscular slip extending behind the axillary 
vessels and nerves, from the insertion of the subscapular muscle to the 
fascia covering the long head of the triceps, and derived from the tendon of 
the Jatissimus dorsi. Apparently this is an imperfect form of development 
of a short coraco-brachialis muscle, such as that described in a former paper. 

In subject 13 was a high fascial origin of the abductor minimi digit, 
from the lower third of the forearm, like that described and figured in the 
author’s first series. This has been observed by Gtinther (Chirurgische 
Muskellehre, Taf. xx. Fig. V. 18). 

A double abductor pollicis brevis was found in three cases, besides that 
in which it was connected with a slip from the extensor carpi radialis acces- 
sorius (given in fig. 4). In subject 23, and also in 32, was a double extensor 
ossis metacarpt pollicis, the tendon of one being inserted entirely into the 
annular ligament and origin of the abductor pollicis. 

The rest of this column scarcely needs further description. 

The six remaining columns are occupied by abnormalities of the muscles 
of the leg, of which there are thirty-nine examples. 

22. Peroneus tertius.—Two out of five anomalies in this column result 
from the total absence of this characteristically human muscle, giving a 
very ape-like appearance to the foot. In No. 7 it was absent on the right 
side only (see fig. 8), in No. 16 on both sides. In subjects 11 and 32a 
distinct tendinous slip from it was implanted into the base of the fourth 
metatarsal. In another, the tendon was doubled, though both were in- 
serted into the fifth metatarsal, spreading towards the fourth. 

23. Peroneus quinti.—In three out of five specimens found, this ten- 
dinous slip from the peroneus brevis to the extensor aponeurosis of the 
little toe was perfect, as described and figured in the last paper. In the 
remaining two, the tendinous slip from the drevis, instead of reaching the 
toe, became implanted upon the upper border of its metatarsal bone, near 
the front end (fig. 8 a). In both cases this slip supplied the place of the 
peroneus tertius, which was totally wanting, except in the left foot of 
subject 7, in which both the slip and the muscle was present, though 
small. In the subject of the figure the peroneus brevis tendon gives also a 
slip of origin to a bundle of muscular fibres which join the abductor minimi 
digitt as a separate muscle (6) on the outer side. This is a somewhat 
similar arrangement to that of a specimen given in the author’s first series, 
in which the peroneus quinti was provided with a separate muscular beily 
on the outer border of the foot. 

VOL. XV. x 


240 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. — [June 21, 


24. The extensor longus primi internodii hallucis, described in the 
author’s first paper, was found in no less than ten out of the thirty-four 
subjects, in all, except one, in both legs. In seven the muscles and tendons 
were fully developed and distinct from the fibres of. the extensor proprius 
hallucis, generally arising above, but sometimes below this muscle. In 
the remaining three (Nos. 11, 19, and 21) the abnormal muscle was repre- 
sented by a tendon given from the extensor proprius near the ankle. In 
subject 21 this tendon was also, on the right side, contributed to by one 
from the extensor longus digitorum. In all the tendon was attached to the 
base of the first phalanx of the great toe, close to the joint, either distinct 
from or in union with that from the extensor brevis digitorum pedis. 

25. Flexor longus accessorius.—The high origin of this muscle, by an 
additional head from the lower third of the fibula, or from the fascia 
covering the flexor longus hallucis, has been observed in three cases. 
In all it was provided with a distinct tendon, which joined separately 
in the union of the long flexor tendons in the middle of the sole. In 
subject 26 the flexor accessorius was made up of four distinct heads. 
1. The long head as above described; 2, another tapering fleshy belly 
from the upper part of the os calcis and insertion of the plantaris ten- 
don, in front of the tendo Achillis, and ending in a distinct tendon; 
3, the usual ‘‘ massa carnea”’ from the hollow surface of the os calcis; 
and 4, the outer tendinous slip from the long plantar ligament. These 
all uniting, joined with a large slip from the tendon of the flexor longus 
pollicis, to form a distinct deep or third set of flexor tendons passing to 
the four outer toes. Each of these joined that of the perforans in the in- 
side of the sheath, about the first joint. 

26. Abductor ossis metatarsi quinti.—This muscle, as described and 
figured by the author in former papers, was found only in seven subjects 
this session, in all in both feet. This is much less than the proportion 
found last session. In two out of the five females dissected, they were 
found well developed, of a fusiform shape, arising from the outer tubercle 
of the os calcis, and inserted by a distinct rounded tendon into the 
base of the fifth metacarpal bone. In five males only, out of the twenty- 
nine dissected, were they found as muscles distinct from the fibres of the 
abductor minimi digit. 

In the previous session the proportion of female subjects to males was 
very much greater than in the last. The specimens of this muscle found 
were also much more numerous, so much so as to be estimated by the 
author at nearly half the number of subjects. Whether this remarkable 
difference depends upon the sex, or is accidental, must be decided by future 
observations. 

27. In the miscellaneous column we have nine single specimens, as com- 
pared with eleven or twelve in the arms, and six or seven in the head 
and neck. 

Tn a female (3]) was an areolar separation of the front fibres of the 


1866.] Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 241 


gluteus minimus forming a scansorius muscle, like that described in a 
former paper. In subject 30 the perforatus tendon of the little toe was 
derived from the flexor accessorius, as seen also last session. In subject 7, 
the same tendon is derived from the fifth tendon of the perforans, as found 
in the Apes and Monkeys. The two last appear to be, respectively, the 
imperfect or transitional, and the complete stages of this significant change. 
Two varieties, which I have not found’ recorded by any anatomical writer, 
were noticed in subjects 12 and 26. In the former the abductor hallucis, 
and in the latter the flexor brevis hallucis sent a considerable muscular 
slip to the base of the first phalanx of the second toe. In the former the 
slip passed deeper than the ¢ransversus pedis muscle, and in the latter 
superficial to it. 

In subject 25 the third lumbricalis took origin from the tendon of the 
perforatus instead of the perforans, presenting an analogue to the origin 
of the first Jumbricalis in the hand from a tendon of the flexor sublimis 
perforatus in subjects 5 and 13. 

In subject 2 the fourth plantar imterosseus arose from a slip of the tendon 
of the peroneus longus, as in the instance described and figured in the author’s 
last paper. In subject 16 was a curious double origin of the adductor 
longus femoris, the abnormal head arising with the fibres of the pectineus. 

In reference to the combinations of the above muscular variations an in- 
spection of the Table will show the following points :— 

First, that only in two subjects out of the thirty-four examined were no 
muscular abnormalities found; 2. ¢. no deviations from the ordinary type 
sufficiently striking to be recorded. It is, indeed, highly probable that 
variabilities of every kind are limited only by the possibilities of the per- 
mutations and combinations of the whole of the structures of the human 
body. It will be observed also that the great majority of the abnormalities 
were symmetrical; or found on both sides. 

Secondly, that of the total number of muscular variations, 132 (not 
reckoning both sides when alike), 71, or more than one half, are found in 
the arms. If we reckon with these those muscles which, though found in 
the neck, act chiefly upon the clavicle, a bone of the upper extremity, viz. 
the cleido-occipital and the levator clavicule, we shall have 12 more to add 
to the 71, increasing the proportion of the arm muscles, and diminishing 
those proper to the head and neck to 10. The number of abnormalities 
in the legs amount to 39, or rather more than half the number of those 
in the arms; while in the abdomen and lower part of the trunk not 
one is recorded, though, of course, some may have escaped observation. 

Thirdly. The greatest number of abnormalities combined in the same 
individual is 14 (in subject 32), a very muscular male, in whom the pro- 
portions are 10 in the muscles of the arms (including the cleido-occzpital) ; 
3 in those of the legs, and 1 only in the head and neck. The similarity 
between this subject and No. 1 of the last year’s paper isremarkable. In 
the latter the number of departures from the ordinary type was 16, of 

x 2 


242  Mr.J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology.  ([June21, 


which all except 7 were found in the arms (including the levator clavicule), 

5 in the legs, and 2 in the head and neck. With the exception of the le- 

vator clavicule, costo-fascralis,and supra-costalis, found in the last-mentioned 

subject, but not in No. 32, the correspondence (especially in the arms) 

between the different lines of abnormal departure also is sufficiently close 
to become significant, as the reader will have gathered in going through 
the preceding pages. In subject 4 of the Table, which presented the 
only specimen of the levator clavicule found this session, only one other 
abnormality was found, viz. the abductor of the fifth metatarsal bone. 

This was also found associated with it in last year’s subject, which pre- 

sents otherwise a marked contrast in the number of its abnormalities. 

In Nos. 5 and 7, the one a male end the other a female, there are 
nine variations respectively, of which, fu No. 5, there is but one which 
is not in the arm; and in No. 7, four in the legs and three in the arms. 
In No. 2 are eight abnormalities, of which six are in the arms and the 
rest in the legs. In No. 26 are found seven, of which three are in 
muscles belonging to the upper extremity, and four in the legs. In 
No. 13 are six, all in the arms. In thirteen subjects none were found 
in the legs; and in four they were found in the legs only, to the ex- 
tent, in one case, of four examples; and in all four subjects highly cha- 
racteristic. None were found in the head, neck, or trunk only*. 

The extent of correspondence in combination of varieties in the subjects ar- 
ranged in the Table(taken in the horizontal lines) cannot besaid to be striking. 
The variations seem to crop out here and there without much reference to 
each other. This may, however, be partly owing to the comparatively small 
number reviewed, and we should scarcely be safe indrawing deductions from 
it before a much greater number of subjects are treated in a similar way. 

The correspondence seems to be the greatest in the arm and hand, which 
here also assume a prominence over the rest of the frame. This, however, 
may be due to the greater number of instances found in the upper extremity. 

* In estimating the proportion of the abnormalities contained in the Table, the 
numbers and names at the head of the columns, together with those down the miscel- 
laneous columns, must be compared with the total number of the muscles in the cor- 
responding parts of the human body. Thus, taking the number of the voluntary 
muscles of the head, neck, trunk, and perineum, excluding those of the back, internal 
ear, larynx, and the intercostals (as subject to minor irregularities which have not been 
noted), we have about 72. Comparing these with the kinds of variety in the Table, 
viz. 10, we have a proportion of about 1 in 7. In the upper extremity we have 60 

-muscles; of lines of variation we have 26, or nearly half. In the lower extremity we 
have 61 muscles; of varieties 14, or not quite one-fourth. 

The varieties classed in the Table include the greater number of those that have been 
previously observed by the author and others. Zen only, which have been mentioned 
in former papers as being subject to other irregularities than duplication and de- 
ficiency, are absent from this list. 

This clearly shows that notable departures from the ordinary type of the muscular 
structures run in definite grooves or directions, which must be taken to indicate some 
unknown factor, of much importance to a comprehensive knowledge of general and 
scientific anatomy, 


; pee Ae it wes 


RP 


bts Rashi SBI: BOS 
Den gril i iets ' } “a Ve Beso 
Le ee cs 7 hon: 
Shee 4 fy f i 
" wailinth os 
get's 
b ohe pis pk 
n me “ P q 
ft e r $ 
} F; , 
4 i we 4 ‘ 
7 A, 1 o> % n ; 
Pr Me 
1 y 
. y ar 2 baR St | 1 
4 « ; i " ued 
os i 
é ths  AGhit Fal a ee fin Ca 6 
hehe td 5 a hy : os DER 4 ra Pore 
i ‘ ahaa LLY IL i ¢ f 
Bs ‘i é : 
a H 4 % ha Gh i 
be Wet Qué ors 3 WP Bae wy eye ty ae ors ayaa a st 
ot ee / 3 ae 
hn . Bs 
c «, ih a 
Pip a EAS Oy E ‘4 % 
. 7 ae { x 
} 7 
> ae haat omni yi 
Pe : 
i i, oi 
Ta TRA BL i 
a ig 
" * ag 
ee) « igi iN ee a eh 
; g Vo ae . cate i 
aw Ha he ‘ 7 : vk yf + 
* y 
‘ 
i i . 
- Site “4 ‘ ¥ 
a oth) ee es ‘ i" 
aor ities ee has) a Kt Re Pha Ok im 
o pan es | ‘ eee) ") . h} 
S, 5 : . 


a Sean 4 
i eh as wae Ga 


hes Goda temas 2 


q r ety iy ; P Hew x, ns q 
Pe ie 4 Re Abe 7 ‘ 

; Aye, Be ih io btd ae Dahan i 

Pe wea P, Cate :) 

hy Te a a 
Bee i Tren ee ; ‘ 
. sein A ee Obl cninainag er ; 
; ; ei i Mi c iP) mi 


at 


GO OO) 5 A 8 aaelee Soa in AF IES 


Sex.| Platysma. 


BF Sige & 


{To face p. 243.] 


ee rleee 


Digastrie. |- 


Cleido- 
occipital. 


* cl ee eg des 
Ms ste) eae ant, belies} “se. 71. 
DE Posie estan esate ue, Naa 
WSs ges awalees bis B. 
ML... kes? aaestcc ; RB. | 
BB et ans Seca lew guset ube pee 
AME ics) dae heals. ete cell sam [oee 
M. |. .(2ant.bell.m. 
Wests wong. ses fene askin aig tell aes Vita 
1 EM Saar eines 2 B. 
MEA .a) saath conte sede eelod 
ks raee Y kielebs omens skal lows lewd 
1 athe a ee hh pai 
Meche. Sus sat bende 4 
i) eae ees ee ee 
ME Tica Heese Soolkoa face! ech eee ee 
MS eas 3 eee hatte .| B. 
111 15S ee eerie (i .| B. 
1 ph ees alee Doe mre tes ie incon e 
Misihowos eaiatesl oe 
M. Pee hs 
ETI Bela io.) Sail Ce snag aac Mca 
MG) bite 2 alos: ead, salpeiae 
1 Ee See es ie Seaneeel bss 
gl Ea Me ua a Met 
Ms ducs. Tien xd adics 
21 ees ea PS Iam 
111 ES te emi ten B. 

SR sal aula B. 

L. to latiss. 

ORs VE KM tahes yah 


eee] eee 


Flexor 
longus 
pollicis. 


Flexor 
profundus. 


12. 


***! Tambrice.,c. 


eerlese eerlece 


Ceeltoe eeeleae 
eeclecs 
eorleoe 
wiajsi|siee |) \\e,eiwie,  wlelmiibinis 
eerlece 
eectsee eee ecerlese 
@oelere 


eeelsee coe eseelese 


Sealeae “ asic eeelec= ‘eee isisietielnre 


woalsoe 
eoelsoe eee eerlsee c2e eeclese 
woolece 
eerleee eee eesleoe 
@eslece e828 eeslose 
eesleoee 


@eslseo e080 seitleee 


Seoelson” see  ¢esleesn see «valese 


@eelsee see 888leee 


eerleee see *282]/008 +j$ss22 &#seejece 


vig: EE 


@eclese coe seelese 


TABLE OF VARIETIES 


e@eclece 


furcated. |**? 


Lumbri- 
cales. 


13. 


furcated. |"** 


e@eslece 


saerlece 


eeeleee 


eeslecs 


eerlee 


4th, abs. 
3rd to m.w’ 


1866.] Mr.J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 243 


The figures which are placed at the end of each line in the Table refer 
to the number of varieties recorded in each entire subject. Those at the 
bottom of each column refer to the number of each variety of muscular 


abnormality. seattle ia 


Of the Abbreviations and References in the Table. 


R. Indicates the right side of the body on which the abnormality was found. 
L. Indicates the left side of the body on which the abnormality was found. 
B. Indicates both sides of the body on which the abnormality was found. 
a. Detached muscular slip from 6th cartilage, with separate insertion into humerus. 
Also in No. 5. : 
Muscular slip from /atissiimus dorsi to insertion of pectoralis major. Also in Nos. 5 
and 32. 
e. Tendon from flexor longus pollicis, giving origin to first lumbricalis. 
d. Single muscle with two tendons, both inserted into little finger. Also in Nos. 9, 25, 
and 27. 
Palmaris longus, with belly of muscle below instead of above. 
Fourth plantar interosseus arising from tendon of peroneus longus. 
Extensor carpi radialis intermedius arising (muscular) with Jongior, and inserted ten- 
dinous with brevior, or vice versd. Alsoin No. 5, and the right side of No. 21. 
Pectoralis minor, giving tendinous slip to greater tuberosity of humerus; joining 
with the tendon of supraspinatus and capsular ligament. 
z. (Right side) third /vmbricalis bifurcated to opposed sides of middle and ring-finger. 
(Left side) no /umbricaiis to little finger. Also seen in No. 22. 
j- Extensor minimi digiti gave a tendon to the ring-finger on both sides. Also in No. 32. 
k. A first palmar interosseous (of Henle), under flexor brevis to pollex. 
l, Flexor carpi radialis brevis, vel profundus, as a fusiform muscle, arising from the 
oblique line of radius, and inserted into the annular ligament. 
m. Double anterior belly of digastric, decussating across the median line. 
2. Muscular slip from complexus to rectus capitis posticus major. 
0. Detached muscular slip from epitrochlea to olecranon over ulnar nerve. 
p. Tendinous slip from peroneus brevis to upper border of fifth metatarsal. 
g. Flexor longus accessorius muscular head arose from deep fascia covering flexor 
longus digiti. 
7. Perforatus tendon of fifth toe arose from tendon of perforans. 
s. Double stylo-pharyngeus, one behind the other. 
%. Detached slip of pectoralis major, arising from abdominal tendon at epigastrium, 
and inserted separately into tendon at humerus. Also in Nos. 9 and 32. 
uw, Tendinous slip prolonged from extensor carpi ulnaris to extensor tendon of little 
finger. Also seen in No. 27. 
v. Detached slip from Jatissimus dorsi at ninth rib, to coracoid process at insertion 
of pectoralis minor (chondro-coracoid). 
w. Extensor longus primi internodii hallucis, arising from fibula and interosseous 
ligament above extensor proprius hallucis. Also in Nos. 18, 24, 25, 26, and 30. 
zx. Tendinous slip of insertion of peroneus tertius to base of fourth metatarsal, as well 
as its usual insertion into the fifth. Also in No. 32. 
y. Extensor longus primi internodii hallucis tendon given off from that of eatensor 
proprius hallucis. Also in Nos. 19 and 21. 
2, Abductor hallucis sent a large slip to base of first phalanx of second toe. 
a’. Muscular slip from coronoid process to flexor profundus digitorum. Also in the 
two next notices in the same column. 
b'. A distinct and separate extensor of the middle digit: in the next notice in the same 
column the éndicator had two tendons, both inserted into the forefinger, 


= 


ay or SS a 9 


TABLE OF VARIETIES IN HUMAN MYOLOGY. 


Flexor Extensor | Extensor ae | 
Flexor - Extensor | Extensor | Extensor Sate brevis Sundries: | peroneus | Peroneus \Exten.long.! Flexor | Abd. | Sundries: ER 


Flexor Flexor lon, Lumbri- xP carpi carpi minimi Ms Interossei. | single : eres 1. intern lo . 
i gas radialis ‘Pt DE Pare and medii digit. . tertius. quinti, | PY. mtern, ngus jos.met.) single S 
radialis. ulnaris. digiti. digiti. eee specimens. hallucis. | aecessorius,) quinti. matinee 33 


Sundries + Blive of i Slips of Brachialis 
5 pectoralis Reores ee ot ors, DiceP* anticus, | sublimis. profundus. pollicis. cales, 


$3 
.| Platysma. Digastric. Be single major minor. | latissimus dorsi. Bevin: 


specimens. (detached). ai — / — SS | a =o — a * 
; ceeiiciee | 6. lee. | 7, 8 9. 10. Il. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24 25. 26. oy la 
oe . Yokel iy Seplna. veto cet Pee) foe WAG [GWM Sevslver eosee es ave 6 aan coh A Ree mrre hon chs her tence ered bo ecctes secd hed. seca? celia. “cep nde ene loecfanel Bexa|ssel tase, See{ SE 
Zant. bellies! ... |r eee B. condro- ..|B, to pectora 3 
ila apitroch. major, 0. B. to Ist |B. 3rd bi 'B. 2 ten- 5 B. Ist p. palm. long. 
i) pect ee ; pA Penn reomtees aricermmscse: aval <ccmutors| err lnasezas celts: aA AL RGEE EAN “| lumbric.,c.| fureated. po COO eae SEDO os BOS CT ile yb ye tee me MaDe Mabe Dipenuf-:s (finverted}e-|i65° PSs =i [5 9 pee as ree ees |Bs eas Boo... fener, 8 
'B. inter- ah 
a] Be Jess cee sealers Perce bo ser thileee eee tiles eee eeeleer nee eel Qoeding, gi}'*" : : 
R. ee ry lage ol be Remeron. as A a eee erg rian too crn otra CCC Daft. Fe) ote ‘ba Ba bs dhe “Gc é ci B orale 
a clavic. 4 eel | é . . 3 . 
5 ( Tat R. 3rd bif. B. inter: B. to ring 'B. palmar to} 
R, sternalis |, chondro-\B. to hume-|L. to pectoralis = SE > el Braton Tstal = see 7 wel PRS i str las sdius, foo wor ple ote epee ote lex, Z\:"* 
we rnfer oe eel | bpntorum. | epitroch,| rus, 4. major. lumbric. L.no 4th, 7. Fi eubs medus, finger, J polles, Bet) 
veri —ape ovslees ven: —eesleso}e senna pes) (ves\ ere | ann.ligt.,/.)""" Sie ere | SLs ie east [it eee ue al 
4 2 IR. epitr. to} B. to Sth f 
‘Teantbolla| . [Lecompl, m2 ePIBO |, oss sesloe are ane ef BBA ay H Ease ces rr Pe e bo foro 0, (absent |" etae,, prc ss | Befromfase, .. aon of} 9 
; 1B Yo Havin | ae ese fea vee Where oth Ee: bese ST ee cise cee ellie eee ceedlecat cee casslten vert cese|tene (oom) cren)scniliened Uaral ealitanailMens leceuiltcelMESs| calles) izes! cepeeo Welliens Ss aXOCOEA et 
LY as CI aC CD lA Neat rus, vs podlicis. Bi iittl aa] 3 
Rditelosy 1\Bopiaies| | meen | em emeeeeees |e ee | me: __ [Be to flexor A iM st © TB:Dtendons|.es, so: coslece cae soe[cex aoe Wand|tsol Gene. Gees|ses 0 esm) M=s=[eece | (upel fieu-/nerhlMaesilens| «salutes /mEnnalorciiire 
ili pharyng, a| tric, 4 voll pollicis. LOE Oks) s]ee ee el 6 
, 4 \B.aboye ext. 


L, to pectoralis Vom ceesee) evallsay tree weeval oak feest tars |snelutredtetrcs|y2s) ius clmealses i Milesel vas) snel cece mulecs| nn -eenamnes | Stem oS 
aesleae see andes eee rel minor, v, eee 8 ‘ 


dire cro boykce prop. w. ft cnfes sale ee ae 
B. to 4th 'B. from ext. 


Fig ypilramnetstaltesveces ech ead] surcauése) oxse|serh cots, <ore|see) reek asl¥ar ese lees cies laa 1 aac lia wee ceclecs cee ces|eae (resi ltesd|nest (casi) e==|e0) cess) a=sulawell Guan] lux metac., «,|B+ complete props ye) ct cet sefee ae ae 8 


Peer Weare ete ocdbn ae uate ice odba owe oilkes cos odio con AMIS} ootli@lil inal 2 


5 


= B. to hume-| B. to 1st |B. fr. Co- R. rad. to |B. ex. med. ‘L.abd. min. lucis, =. % 
PRati nas | Venere eeea| Mame iCa cers (8elleee os So iia) Vesincemteral cera|ian) [eed] on lcleras 44| St ym brigh|ron'dspria'lc) -co eo |fse | a maed| 2odmebac. ss) Ses oasis sss eal lie se ott] die te [Pt | toe alts | “css MB chiar ceeeel [po 0 Noemie eee aa a |e | | 6 
B, fosupina- IL. flex, br. 
Aerrisedyraieeres leeo EE are ‘\itorlong,dis2 eo Bg bevodie ec cabs coo colle op Calpe ce onto eo odb ooo onto oop apes a OPE oe lbo ay 9 
B. fr. Co- ‘ 
i Hee oo | Ee cll emistlapa fa, 22 Ox|jees oop Seals ere cogs cen cea er capa. con ...|B.2 tendons}... A os aie Pam Pee 
| Be lee PAC Ne Ils (peed coe eelbec cod ecadtock coo aren be: cos onboo, oop code. ea ee ERS een onybe. acco: Peo oS. contin onc Gren, G0 ..{B. absent. |B: te 5th Doub. add. 
rus. Hl metac, “| longus, 5 
B.tosupina- s 
EF ad erat tor long. |'"" : ae nee eelene nee teelees nee ceefene cee ceclece nee cecfene en an] 12 
stylo-glos- rr eC Fe Theo cen ceiibico- cco ced bec ct tedat|63 cor poet Bopimqaan bcd Beri feo we nee ead Bigdouble B. above 
coll Ppp dats CNPC Co bce cs ERO Or Fel beep AD ro Re cohoo cer|poo 06 fea) are) asslssss Teer (eesl aba pOle||i- etry [see's |llexbapropilis | amen te 3 
B. atornal B. to flexor P prop. 
Differen- |B. from ext, 


L. acces 
fhe. foc fclhre eb CeCe pectin aon Fa Pollnre cate ocAiba, voce cis) son, cpcbeenéedl a6 ecg ico | gorius, [tee sth cefes tes ceefiee nes serfeee ne sel tiatgg) fare tre ttelese ve serlete ans aan : 

B B. to clayi- B. fr. Co- B. 3rd b R. inter- IDXe)eh 
POMSHoervl| vmewnvy vs4|(ea alia cress ere trae ravi relict ozs nel tani tratretns geaslnen easdeais ond oass}icrie cer) #21 ronigidyprayy 7 sl “furcated, |@" *** -**|) medius, 


POMFRET ene mney | |T22T 77 | APMrvsce vars sche avece-avelsaers toes, ude|pobgeh Mowimivaremens| nal hcne’|taae ‘em, seaslsere (naz) ison[sus aay!” cogelice Gusntioees[narmaceniieit<*[emmmgaen \<sclors, Ides) inrsinzel eee aoe, ona -nodhies ono —oer|fon - 660 Ei Gotha 


B. doubl : 
ea esas? be on ccd COMIC fa vod llth 


..|B. complete}... 


_,|Blex. long. 


BRRER ERR? BREE EEE 


i hallue.,m', 
vise males. a i en ian rn a\HetGlotlirn cope edb ey odie cmp collas cn ellen sm dhs doo oditheanyllc 8rd lumbri- 
echeretel W/o | menceree ig cee 
3 | aDy [exh aver wvs|ave ar Wiley) vee caaa[eune wane aes caps DCRDOBH ss vse . subscap. oe eee 
I é BAhds|... Pal ire ope amped eG Lay nrc enipe RCO ERIE. coder Perse PEE 3 aviteunee| Re savefatess | eae eaubsca rae ..|B. complete'B, complete|R. from fib|,.. ...|E!e%, bre) 7 


po ad tebe Ss Talnaent 

B. to little B. Ist dors. allue,,o’, 
_[Pido ithe tp aendonslan) can cfs ee eal Ren T ee otDsGE Sayer ice et / cigs | eee St cues a 
4 


5 


DB, i 
H sore r, _[B double 


tia fiawe}iee sev aed( Beto coraco-bra=|.., sssfres cee seefees ne cesfene tue ceelece cee eeeleee nue 
f abd. pol. Poo acoten (ocU Pidpeciidies soc Bocsuccos, . ced pode aco corbin ecw 


chilis, 8’. 


B, to pron, 


dorsi, fre tr te] ee fee re ert ee foros, ties tt teers et teens nee seefise ate eefsee ee neslece cee ceslese ane selene ee tesfeee nee seefine pee cecftee nee cesdiss ase sedlene cee seelase ene seefeee ane eedfte see ee 0) 
mites “oy teal wales ai ced aro ocalbap pase cle @pprmtron ce ltune cel Brau cera seed BERD Bh on] Lone cone sacho booreicnoimiri] ROmicoum acd ha «coe os tces acca tol bom. Beco seed BSye / cca = cos] bebe ono istoed Hore ead wec|ves see eee(luecompletel.., <2. selves oe Re orf. off 2 

usa cll er rszvas|| cee RRMPeReWrees ayes ciageeeae|ivnborccQameCeal ERE sce ficoxdt aac fon Sle ee ae Ryrad.to 2a Bere 
Ped hry an ocdbre 96d vdbrer cp codhng cog ond IY et Cree tal i Se LR MCReT PURO COTES ceada co |e eccts . cuk> 2 B. IB. scan- 3 


seafene we» .s| B. [sploniua L. opigas- B. to poctoralis rain, ibs boa me < sorius, £ 
\ ve eB. to] tan, cots te of Geltan ass teehee ae aesfeee cee eof, 4th, abs,|Rirad.to3d)... ... «1... ... ...|B. toring. [R.ext. med./R. to mi 
colli, vf. trio. major. Csaara ull wich | arene aie, medi}R ee elseiders) Panos pete Ath’ |Bircomplete} 7. vedluse oe vas! Bu 


2 2 IDE) 6 6 5 5 2 3 3 4 2 4 4 4 


7 3 2 5 11 5 8 10 ellen 9 1152. 


is} 


1866.] Myr.J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 248 


The figures which are placed at the end of each line in the Table refer 
to the number of varieties recorded in each entire subject. Those at the 
bottom of each column refer to the number of each variety of muscular 
abnormality. | 

EXPLANATION 
Of the Abbreviations and References in the Table. 


. Indicates the right side of the body on which the abnormality was found. 
. Indicates the left side of the body on which the abnormality was found. 
. Indicates both sides of the body on which the abnormality was found. 
Detached muscular slip from 6th cartilage, with separate insertion into humerus. 
Also in No. 5. 
6. Muscular slip from datissimus dorsi to insertion of pectoralis major. Also in Nos. 5 
and 82. 
e. Tendon from flexor longus pollicis, giving origin to first lumbricalis. 
d. Single muscle with two tendons, both inserted into little finger. Also in Nos. 9, 25, 
and 27. 
Palmaris longus, with belly of muscle below instead of above. 
Fourth plantar interosseus arising from tendon of peroncus longus. 
Extensor carpi radialis intermedius arising (muscular) with /ongior, and inserted ten- 
dinous with drevior, or vice versd. Alsoin No. 5, and the right side of No. 21. 
Pectoralis minor, giving tendinous slip to greater tuberosity of humerus ; joining 
with the tendon of swpraspinatus and capsular ligament. 
z. (Right side) third 7wmbricalis bifurcated to opposed sides of middle and ring-finger. 
(Left side) no /umbricalis to little finger. Also seen in No. 22. 
Jj. Extensor minimi digiti gave a tendon to the ring-finger on both sides. Also in No. 32. 
k. A first palmar interosscous (of Henle), under flexor brevis to pollex. 
l, Flexor carpi radialis brevis, vel profundus, as a fusiform muscle, arising from the 
oblique line of radius, and inserted into the annular ligament. 
m. Double anterior belly of digastric, decussating across the median line. 
#. Muscular slip from complexus to rectus capitis posticus major. 
o. Detached muscular slip from epitrochlea to olecranon over ulnar nerve. 
p. Tendinous slip from peroneus brevis to upper border of fifth metatarsal. 
gq. Flexor longus accessorius muscular head arose from deep fascia covering flexor 
longus digiti. 
vr. Perforatus tendon of fifth toe arose from tendon of perforans, 
s. Double stylo-pharyngeus, one behind the other. 
zt. Detached slip of pectoralis major, arising from abdominal tendon at epigastrium, 
and inserted separately into tendon at humerus. Also in Nos. 9 and 32. 
w, Tendinous slip prolonged from extensor carpi ulnaris to extensor tendon of little 
finger. Also seen in No. 27. 
v. Detached slip from latissimus dorsi at ninth vib, to coracoid process at insertion 
of pectoralis minor (chondro-coracoid). 
w. Extensor longus primi internodii hallucis, arising from fibula and interosseous 
ligament above extensor proprius hallucis. Also in Nos. 18, 24, 25, 26, and 30. 
x. Tendinous slip of insertion of peroneus tertius to base of fourth metatarsal, as well 
as its usual insertion into the fifth. Also in No. 32. 
y. Extensor longus primi internodii hallucis tendon given off from that of extensor 
proprius hallucis. Also in Nos. 19 and 21. 
2, Abductor hallucis sent a large slip to base of first phalanx of second toe. 
- Muscular slip from coronoid process to flexor profundus digitorum. Also in the 
two next notices in the same column. 
b'. A distinct and separate extensor of the middle digit: in the next notice in the same 
column the indicator had two tendons, both inserted into the forefinger. 


8 OH bg 


~ Stes 


244, _ Dr. Pettigrew on the Muscular Fibres [June 21, 


e’. High origin of abductor minimi digitt from fascia of forearm. 

d'. Muscular slip connecting the drachialis anticus with the supinator longus, Also in 
the next notice in the same column. 

e'’. Superficial slip connecting the two portions of flexor brevis pollicis. 

f'. Origin of stylo-glossus from the angle of the lower jaw. 

g'. Subcutaneous slip from sternal fascia to cervical fascia. 

h'. Musculo-tendinous slip from flexor pollicis longus to indicial portion of profundus. 

a'. Flexor carpi radialis accessorius, a separate muscle connected with the origin of 
longior, to be inserted into the base of the metacarpal of pollea, giving a slip to 
abductor pollicis. 

k'. Slip of pectoralis minor inserted into costo-coracoid membrane and clavicle. 

. Double muscle, the lower inserted into annular ligament and origin of abductor 

pollicis. 

m’'. Flexor longus hallucis exchanged slips with flecor longus digitorum. 

n'. Third lumbricalis arose from flexor perforatus instead of perforans. 

0 

i2 


oS 


’. Flexor brevis hallucis sent a large slip to base of first phalanx of second toe. 
’. Muscular slip from insertion of subscapularis to the neck of the humerus and tendon 
of latissimus, an imperfect coraco-brachialis brevis. 

qg’. A distinct muscle from front of manubrium to lower border of clavicle, under fibres 
of pectoralis major (Sterno-clavicular). Subclavius also present. 

r', Distinct muscle arising from first rib with sterno-thyroid, and inserted into cervical 
fascia under sterno-cleido-mastoid (costo-fascialis cervicalis). 

s’. Muscular slip from Jatissimus dorsi to join coraco-brachialis just below coracoid 

: process, across the vessels of the axilla. 

t', On the left side a muscular slip from brachialis anticus to the fascia of the fore- 
arm; on the right side a fusiform muscle forming a high origin of the pronator 
rad. teres. 

u’. Perforatus tendon of little toe from flexor accessorius. 

v. Muscular slip from splenius colli to serratus magnus. 

w’. Third lumbricalis to inner side of middle finger. Fourth absent altogether. 

x’. First dorsal interosseus double. Also in 27. 

y’. Tendinous slip from flexor carpi ulnaris to base of fourth, as well as the fifth 

' metacarpal 
2’, Separation of anterior fibres of gluteus minimus, forming distinct muscle. 


Kon. the ineeaioe Arrangements of the Bladder and Prostate, 

~ and the manner in Sich the Ureters and Urethra are closed.” 
By James Bett Perticrew, M.D. Edin., Assistant in the 
Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons of England. Com- 
municated by Dr. SHarrey. Received June 21, 1866. 


(Abstract.) 


The present communication, which is based on an extensive series of dis- 
sections* and illustrated by photographs, is intended to show that the 
muscular fibres of the bladder, contrary to the received opinion, are spiral _ 
fibres, and with few exceptions form figure-of-8 loops. The loops are 
variously shaped, according as they are superficial or deep, the more super- 
ficial loops being attenuated or drawn out so as to resemble longitudinal or 


* Of these upwards of sixty are preserved in the Museum of the Royal College of - 
Surgeons of England. 7 


1866.] : of the Bladder and Prostate, 245 


vertical fibres, the deeper ones being flattened from above downwards, and 
resembling circular fibres. 

These loops are directed towards the apex and base, and are arranged in 
four sets; an anterior and a posterior set which are largely developed, and a 
right and left lateral set which are accessory and less fully developed. he 
bladder is consequently bilaterally symmetrical. 

The superficial loops are confined principally to the anterior, posterior or 
lateral aspects, but the deeper ones radiate and expand towards the apex 
and base, so that they come to embrace the entire circumference of the 
bladder in these directions. The expansion of the fibres is greatest towards 
the apex, and the aggregation of the terminal loops of the anterior and 
posterior fibres at the cervix (assisted by the lateral fibres) form a well- 
marked sphincter vesicee in this situation. The fibres pursue definite but 
varying courses, those which are longitudinal or vertical at one point be- 
coming slightly oblique at a second, oblique at a third, and very oblique or 
transverse at a fourth. The fibres consequently change their direction and 
position on the vesical parietes gradually and according to a fixed principle. 
The principle involved is readily explained. The most external and most 
internal fibres are always the most vertical and most feebly developed ; those 
which succeed or follow becoming more and more oblique and stronger and 
stronger. The fibres from this circumstance are divisible into two orders, . 
viz., an external and an internal, and these, as has been stated, are erouped 
in two principal and two subsidiary sets. The two principal sets occur on 
the anterior and posterior aspects of the viscus, and are so arranged that 
the terminal or transverse portions of the anterior set intersect the more 
vertical portions of the posterior set nearly at right angles and the reverse. 
Similar remarks apply to the subsidiary sets. Between what may be called 
the vertical or longitudinal and the circular or transverse fibres, other fibres 
having different degrees of obliquity occur. These consist for the most 
part of the deeper anterior and posterior spiral fibres, and of the subsidiary 
spiral fibres from the sides. There is consequently no part of the vesical 
parietes in which longitudinal, slightly oblique, oblique, and very oblique 
external and internal fibres may not be found. The additional strength 
‘secured by this arrangement cannot well be estimated. 

The external and internal fibres are similarly disposed on the anterior, 
posterior, and lateral aspects, and if the dissection be conducted from with- 
out inwards, the fibres first removed are the mesial, vertical, or longitudinal 
fibres ; then the slightly oblique fibres inclined on either side, and crossing 
at acute angles as in an attenuated figure of 8; then the oblique fibres, 
crossing at wider vertical angles as in the more perfect figure of 8. Lastly, 
the very oblique fibres, crossing at such obtuse angles as to have been, up 
to the present, regarded as circular fibres. The fibres which are still deeper 
and which constitute the proper internal fibres, have a precisely similar 
arrangement, but are rudimentary, and consequently not so readily traced. 
The external and internal fibres, as will be seen from this description, be- 


246 Dr. Pettigrew on the Muscular Fibres [June 21, 


come more and more oblique, both from without and from within, or in 
proportion as the centre of the vesical parietes is reached, the deepest or 
most oblique external and internal sets forming, by the blending of their ter- 
minal or transverse portions, what is commonly known as the central layer. 

The most external or superficial fibres are connected directly and in- 
directly with the slightly oblique external fibres, the slightly oblique with 
the oblique, and the oblique with the very oblique. The very oblique ex- 
ternal fibres, on the other hand, are connected with the oblique internal, 
these in their turn being connected with the slightly oblique internal, and 
the slightly oblique internal with the longitudinal or vertical internal. In 
some instances the longitudinal external are connected directly with the 
longitudinal internal, and so of the slightly oblique, oblique, and very oblique 
external and internal fibres. 

The apex and base of the bladder are similarly constructed, and resem- 
ble in their general configuration the other portions of the vesical walls ; 
z.€., they are composed of longitudinal or vertical, slightly oblique, oblique, 
and very oblique or circular fibres which cross in given directions on the 
external and internal surfaces. 

The four sets of longitudinal or vertical fibres have a crucial arrangement 
at the apex and base, and the slightly oblique fibres are drawn together at the 
urachus and cervix by the constrictions which in the embryo separate the 
bladder from the allantois and urethra. The slightly oblique fibres conse- 
quently converge towards the apex and base respectively ; and this arrange- 
ment at the cervix greatly assists in closing the urethra, as the fibres naturally 
come together to form an impervious funnel-shaped projection which is di- 
rected downwards and forwards. The closure of the urethra is completed by 
the contraction of the very oblique or circular fibres forming the sphincter, 
and by the prominence of the uvula vesicze (luette vesicale) and median ridge 
in the female, and the caput gallinaginis or verumontanum in the male. 

The longitudinal or vertical, slightly oblique, oblique, and very oblique 
external and internal fibres at the base are continued forward within the 
prostate to the membranous portion of the urethra, and the external and 
internal surfaces of the corpus spongiosum. 

The coats of the urethra are therefore to be regarded as the proper con- 
tinuation of the walls of the bladder in an anterior direction. 

The longitudinal or vertical, slightly oblique, oblique, and very oblique 
spiral fibres which form the tunics of the bladder and urethra are curiously 
enough repeated in the prostate of the male, and the analogous structure 

n the female, so that this gland would seem to be composed chiefly of 
fibrous offsets from the fibres in question. 

The relations existing between the prostate, urethra, and cervix of the 
bladder are best seen when vertical, horizontal, and antero-posterior or 
transverse sections of the bladder and prostate are made. 

In such sections the external longitudinal or vertical anterior, posterior, 
and lateral fibres are seen to pass forward on the external surface of the 


1866. | of the Bladder and Prostate. 94.7 


urethra; a certain proportion passing outwards to be inserted into the 
anterior, posterior, and lateral surfaces of the capsule of the prostate, others 
passing inwards or through the gland in a vertical or longitudinal and like- 
wise in a horizontal or transverse direction. ‘The crucial arrangement of the 
four sets of external fibres at the apex and base is thus clearly traceable in 
the prostate. Such of the external fibres as are not inserted into the capsule 
of the prostate are attached to the posterior surface of the pubis, the internal 
border of the aponeurosis of the levator ani, and the fascia covering Guthrie’s 
muscle. The external fibres investing the dorsal, ventral, and lateral 
aspects of the urethra and prostate are separated by a considerable interval, 
thus showing that, although the relations existing between the urethra and 
prostate are of the most intimate description, they may nevertheless be 
regarded as independent. What has been said of the external longitudinal 
fibres applies equally to the slightly oblique, oblique, and very oblique 
external and internal ones, these bifurcating and distributing themselves 
with considerable regularity to the walls of the urethra, and the substance 
of the prostate respectively. ‘The urethra and prostate are thus com- 
posed of fibres crossing in every direction as in the bladder itself. 

The very oblique external and internal fibres are interesting because of 
the very obtuse angles at which they intersect, and because they are prin- 
cipally concerned in forming the sphincter of the bladder, and the so-called 
circular layer of the prostate. The very oblique fibres, like the other fibres 
described, are arranged in an anterior and a posterior set, which are largely 
developed, and a right and left lateral set, which are developed less feebly. 
The anterior fibres, which are directed posteriorly, form the posterior half 
of the sphincter vesicee, and the posterior fibres, which have an opposite 
direction, the anterior. The sphincter is thus bilaterally symmetrical, and 
is somewhat oval in shape, the long axis being directed transversely, or 
from side to side. The two sets of lateral fibres, which also enter into the 
formation of the sphincter, intersect the angles formed by the crossing of 
the anterior and posterior fibres, and render its aperture more circular than 
it would otherwise be. This circumstance, taken in connexion with the 
fact that the fibres pursue a very oblique direction, has given rise to the 
belief that the fibres of the sphincter and neck of the bladder generally are 
circular fibres, which, as the author shows, is not the case. The fibres of 
the sphincter are best seen by inverting the bladder and dissecting from 
within, or by making transverse sections of the prostatic portion of the 
urethra in the direction of the fundus. They are most strongly pro- 
nounced at the cervix, but are continued forward on the urethra and 
backwards into the bladder. In the female they extend even to the 
meatus urinarius. The very oblique or circular fibres of the urethra are 
separated from the corresponding fibres of the prostate by the longitudinal, 
slightly oblique, and oblique fibres forming the outer half of the urethral 
wall and the inner portion of the prostate. The interval is particularly 
evident at the cervix, where the sphincter is most distinctly pronounced ; 


248 On the Muscular Fibres of the Bladder and Prostate. {June 21, 


and here the two sets of very oblique or circular fibres have different axes. 
Further forward, or towards the apex of the prostate, the space gradually 
diminishes, the circular fibres of the gland curving in an upward direction 
into the verumontauum or caput gallinaginis, and blending with the circular 
fibres of the urethra. While, therefore, the very oblique or circular fibres 
of the urethra are entirely distinct at one point, they are indissolubly united 
at another. ‘This is important, as it shows how the sphincter may act in- 
dependently of the prostate, aud the reverse. 

The longitudinal or vertical internal fibres posteriorly, connect the me- 
dian or central portion of the trigone (trigone vesical, trigonum vesice, 
Lieutaud) with the verumontanum in the male, and the uvula and median 
ridge in the female. The slightly oblique internal fibres bound the trigone 
laterally, and are continued into the verumontanum, where they cross 
slightly. The oblique fibres which assist in forming the base of the trigone, 
are likewise continued in a downward direction on the verumontanum, where 
they cross, and are mixed up with the continuations of the very oblique 
fibres which form the sphincter at the neck, and with the circular fibres 
of the prostate. The arrangement of the fibres in the trigone resembles 
that found at the cervix and fundus generally, and the author is of opinion 
that Sir Charles Bell was in error when he described the ‘‘ muscles of the 
ureters’ as separate structures. 

The ureters enter the vesical parietes at a very obtuse angle, and the angle 
increases according to the degree of distension of the bladder. These tubes 
_ Teceive accessions of fibres from the longitudinal, slightly oblique, oblique, 
and very oblique external and internal fibres of the bladder in their vicinity, 
and are continued upon each other within the bladder in the form of a 
strong transverse band. The transverse band which connects the ureters 
together within the bladder, or between the uretral orifices, is equal in vo- 
lume to the ureters themselves within the vesical parietes. The band in 
question is best seen when the base of the bladder is detached and held 
against the light, and seems to be formed by the obliteration of the uretral 
tubes between the uretral orifices. 

The uretral channels seek the internal surface of the bladder even more 
obliquely than the ureters, and the inner walls of the ureters become so 
thin, particularly towards the uretral orifices, that they act mechanically 
as moveable partitions or valves, as in the smaller veins*. The canals 
of the ureters are consequently closed, partly by the contractions of the 
muscular walls, and partly by the mechanical pressure exercised by the 
urine about to be expelled. 

From the foregoing description it will be evident that the various sets of 
external and internal fibres forming the bladder, urethra, and prostate are 
antagonistic, not only as regards themselves, but also as regards the territory 
or region they occupy; the loops formed by the anterior fibres crossing 


* “On the Relations, Structure, and Functions of the Valves of the Vascular System 
dn Vertebrata,” by the author, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin. p. 763. +) (c5 & ae 


1866.] Gen. Sabine—Results of Kew Magnetic Observations. 249 


each other at more or less acute angles according to their depths, the 
anterior fibres, as a whole, crossing the posterior or homologous fibres as 
a whole. While, therefore, the fibres, in virtue of their twisted looped 
arrangement, antagonize each other individually, the aggregation of the 
fibres in any one region check, antagonize, and coordinate a similar agere- 
gation of fibres at an opposite point; the anterior fibres, e.g., acting on 
the posterior, and the right lateral upon the left lateral. This arrange- 
ment, which is productive of great strength, ensures that the external and 
internal fibres shall act in unison or together, and fully explains the views 
of the older anatomists, who described the bladder as consisting of fibres 
crossing in every direction, and forming an intricate network. It likewise 
accords with the more modern opinion, that the fibres of the bladder may 
be divided into strata or layers. 

The fibres, when their points of attachment are taken into consideration, 
can only contract spirally from above downwards, and from without in- 
wards; they in fact converge, or close spirally in the direction of the 
cervix, which may be said to diverge or open in an opposite direction as 
the contraction proceeds. As a result of this twisting movement, the urine, 
like the blood, is projected spirally*. 

Finally, the fibres of the bladder, urethra, and prostate pursue at least 
seven well-marked directions ; the fibres crossing with remarkable precision 
at wider and wider angles, as the central portion of either is reached, as 
in the left ventricle of the vertebrate heart. In fact, the fibres of the 
bladder and heart have a strictly analogous arrangement, and the author 
is inclined to believe that functionally also they possess points of re- 
semblance. Very similar remarks may be made regarding the structure and 
functions of the stomach and uterus. 


XI. “ Results of the Magnetic Observations at the Kew Observatory. 
_—No. III. Lunar Diurnal Variation of the three Magnetic Ele- 
ments.” By Lieut.-General Epwarp Sapinz, P.R.S.  Re- 


ceived June 21, 1866. 
(Abstract. ) 


The subject of this paper is the lunar-diurnal variation of the magnetic 
declination and of the horizontal and vertical components of the magnetic 
force, derived from a seven years’ series of photographic records obtained 
at the Kew Observatory between January 1, 1858 and December 31, 1864. 

The discussion which it contains has for its objects—Ist, to exemplify 
the consistent and systematic character of the lunar-diurnal influence thus 
derived; and 2ndly, to serve both as a guide and as an encouragement to 
the several establishments at home and abroad which have adopted, or are 


¥ Op, cit. p. 794. 
Tt “On the arrangement of the Muscular Fibres in the Ventricles of the Vertebrate 
Heart,” by the author, Phil. Trans. part iii. 1864, p. 451. 


250 Dr. Davy on the Congelation of Animals. 


adopting the Kew methods of magnetic investigation. The completeness 
of the photographic process is shown by the fact, that of 175,344 hourly 
positions which should have been recorded in the interval under notice, 
there were only 1497 failures from all causes whatsoever; and even of 
these few a considerable portion is shown to be due to the employment of 
the instruments in other experimental investigations. The paper contains 
a full statement of the processes of tabulation from the photograms, and 
of the different stages of reduction through which the tabular results 
were passed, for the purpose of deriving from them the facts connected 
with the lunar influence on the terrestrial magnetic elements. A lunar- 
diurnal variation is shown to exist in each of these elements,—of very 
small amount, but having peculiar and well-marked systematic charac- 
teristics. It is further shown that these characteristics present a similarity 
and accordance, which it is impossible to regard as accidental, with the 
results obtained at several other and widely-separated localities in the 
middle latitudes of both hemispheres, as for example at Hobarton, Toronto, 
Philadelphia, Pekin, and the Cape of Good Hope. A magnetic variation 
shown to be thus obviously dependent upon the moon’s position relatively 
to the terrestrial meridian, and agreeing in its principal features in such 
various localities, is urged by the author as being ascribable with great 
probability to the direct magnetic action of the moon, made sensible at the 
surface of the earth through the production of phenomena which, in the 
present state of our knowledge as regards the magnetism both of the earth 
and of the moon, it is as yet difficult wholly to explain, but which are likely 
to lead to a considerable advance of our knowledge in both these respects. 

The further prosecution of the investigation, both at Kew and else- 
where, is recommended as highly deserving the attention of those who 
occupy themselves in the pursuits of inductive philosophy. 


COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVED SINCE THE END OF THE SESSION, 


I. “On the Congelation of Animals.” By Joun Davy, M.D., 
F.R.S., &c. Received July 19, 1866. 


In a very interesting and elaborate paper by M. Puget, entitled * Sur 
la Congélation des Animaux,” published in the ‘ Journal de l’ Anatomie et 
de la Physiologie,’ the Number for January and February of this year, he 
refers to a statement of mine, made many years ago*, that the leech may 
be.frozen without loss of life. The experiments which he has instituted, 
and which appear to have been conducted with great care, have led him to 
an opp osite conclusion, viz. that congelation is not only fatal to the leech, 
but to animals generally, without a single exception. He considers the 
cause of death, the vera causa, to use his own words, to be an altered con- 
dition of the blood. In consequence of this statement, I thought it right 

* Researches, Physiol. and Anat. ii. p. 121. 


Dr. Davy on the Congelation of Animals. 2a 


to repeat the experiments on the leech, and to extend them to some other 
animals. They were begun at Oxford in May, in the laboratory of Pro- 
fessor Rolleston, with the kind assistance of Mr. Edward Chapman and 
Mr. Robertson ; and since then, in the following month, they have been 
continued at home in Westmoreland. 

At Oxford the trials were made on leeches and frogs; at home, on 
these animals, and on the toad and some insects. The freezing mixture 
was made of pounded ice and common salt; the temperature by it was 
commonly reduced to below 10° Fahr., or at times so low as 2° or 3°. The 
results obtained were briefly the following :— 

1. A leech was exposed to the mixture in a small glass tube just large 
enough to hold it, using the tube for stirring the mixture. Taken out 
when perfectly rigid and hard, and gradually thawed, it showed when 
punctured a faint indication of irritability ; there was a just perceptible con- 
traction of the part punctured, the oral extremity, and nowhere else. It 
did not revive. 

2. Another leech was similarly exposed, but for a shorter time. When 
divided by an incision, it was found not frozen throughout. When punc- 
tured, it showed marks of irritability in a slight degree stronger than the 
preceding: it soon died. 

3. Two leeches were similarly treated at home, and for a somewhat 
longer time; the temperature reduced to 3°. These, when gradually 
thawed, one exposed to the air, the other left in the mixture, showed no 
marks of revival; but they retained a certain elasticity, so that when bent 
they shortly recovered their former attitude, after a manner somewhat re- 
sembling a vital movement ; but inasmuch as they did not respond by the 
slightest contraction to puncture, it may be inferred that the movement 
was not vital. They resisted putrefaction for many days. 

4. A frog in a thin glass vessel was kept in the mixture about a quarter 
of an hour. It was very rigid when taken out ; thawed, no part on punc- 
ture afforded any indications of life; watched two or three hours it proved 
to be dead. 

5. The heart of a frog, removed immediately after decapitation, whilst 
~ still pulsating, was subjected to the freezing mixture in a small glass tube. 
After having been frozen, on thawing it remained motionless, even when 
punctured. It had been kept in the mixture only a few minutes. 

6. The inferior extremities of a frog kept extended by a bandage and 
thus introduced into a glass tube, were submerged in the mixture, the body 
of the frog beig held in the warm hand ; taken out after some minutes 
they were quite hard and motionless, whilst the body and upper extre- 
mities did not appear to be affected. It moved about, dragging the lower 
extremities as if they were dead. In about four hours it recovered the use 
of its femoral muscles; on the following day the use of the muscles of the 
legs; the day after it was able to bend and extend these limbs; but there 
was no proof that its feet had recovered sensibility. On the fourth day it 
was found dead. 


252 Dr. Davy on the Congelation of Animals. 


7. The lower extremities of a large toad were immersed in direct contact 
with the mixture, the temperature falling to 3°. Gradually thawed, the 
parts showed no marks of life. This toad, which before the trial was in 
a dull state, afterward became almost torpid, and so continued until the fol- 
lowing morning, when it was apparently dead: opened, the auricles were 
found feebly acting, ceasing after a few seconds*. 

8. A similar experiment was made on the lower extremities of an active 
frog, and with a similar result, except that the vivacity of the animal was 
for a short time but little impaired: after four hours it was apparently 
dead; opened, its auricles contracted when punctured. It may be right 
to mention that, before exposing the toad and frog to the freezing mixture 
in direct contact, it was ascertained that the frog bore the immersion of its 
lower extremities in a saturated solution of common salt without any appa- 
rent loss of sensibility or motive powery. 

9. The lower extremities of an active frog of alarge size were wrapped in 
tin-foil, and together with one of its upper extremities not so wrapped, were 
kept in a freezing mixture about a quarter of an hour. The frozen parts in 
thawing showed no marks of life. The frog died in about three hours. 


* This toad was a female which had shed her ova; the oviduct was still large ; the 
stomach was distended with caterpillars, slugs, &c., seeming to show that there was no 
diseased state. It is noteworthy that the apertures of the cutaneous glands appeared 
to be closed; for when the animal was irritated there was no ejection of the acrid fluid, 
a circumstance I had before noticed in a female during the breeding-season, sug- 
gestive of a condition of surface favourable to the male in the generative act. When 
the tubercles were incised, they were found to contain the acrid fluid in plenty, and 
judging from its bitter taste, and the irritating effects of an extremely small portion 
applied to the tongue, not deficient in activity. The same state of the cuticular glands 
was found in another female toad killed by congelation, which had shed few of its ova, 
—this on the 28rd of June. It was of a lighter colour than usual. It was found like- 
wise in two examined in July, in which some ova remained. 

+ The effect of immersion of the lower extremities of a frog in a saturated solution 
of common salt varies, I find, according to the length of time; if for a very few 
minutes, it is inconsiderable; if for many, it is well marked; and if much pro- 
longed it is fatal. In one instance, after a quarter of an hour’s immersion, the limbs 
seemed paralyzed, the animal in a state approaching to torpor: after having been well 
washed in fresh water it slowly recovered its activity, and the limbs their motive © 
power and sensibility ; the motive power first, their sensibility later; indeed not until 
the following morning, judging from the effects of puncture. After a longer immersion, 
with a fatal result, the limbs had become rigid and somewhat hard, especially the 
feet, as if their juices had been extracted by osmotic action. Opened after three 
hours, even the auricles were motionless, and this when punctured. The muscles of 
the limbs no longer showed a striated structure, whilst those of the upper extremities 
displayed this structure distinctly. 

The toad with a thicker skin was found to bear the immersion of its extremities for 
a longer time; but the difference seemed to be only in degree; much longer con- 
tinued, the same effects were produced, viz. rigidity, with loss of motion and sensibility, 
which (the immersion not being too long) were slowly recovered after fresh water 
ablution. 

The blood-corpuscles, acted on by the same solution, underwent a change, contract- 
ing slightly, and acquiring a granular appearance, commencing in their nuclei. 


Dr. Davy on the Congelation of Animals. 258 


10. A cockroach, a flesh-fly, and a minute insect, an ichneumon * 
(Celineus niger’), confined together in a small glass tube, were kept some 
minutes in the mixture. Thawed, they were found all three dead. 

These results, so far as the particular instances are concerned, are suffi- 
ciently confirmatory of M. Puget’s, and on my mind they leave little 
doubt that his general proposition (his inference from his very numerous 
experiments) is correct, that congelation is fatal to animal life. It is 
hardly worth while to attempt to account for the different conclusion I 
had come to, that referred to by him relative to the leech, it being partly 
founded on the fact that leeches which had been enveloped in ice for many 
days were not thereby killed, and partly on witnessing some marks of 
vitality in leeches which were believed to have been artificially frozen, and 
which very soon after died. 

Whilst admitting that congelation, thorough congelation of an animal is 
incompatible with life, the cause of death from congelation seems open to 
question, and more especially that assigned by M. Puget as the vera causa, 
a change in the blood, and chiefly in its corpuscles. That these corpuscles 
are changed by freezing in form and condition seems to be certain. Before 
seeing M. Puget’s paper I had ascertained the fact, and not only that the 
corpuscles were changed, but also that the entire blood was to some extent 
altered, leading me at the time to ask whether some of the injurious 
effects of frost-bite may not be mainly owing to the freezing of the blood, 
and the changes in consequence in the corpuscles and in a less degree in the 
fibrin f ; and since, in examining the blood of the animals exposed to the 
freezing mixture, I have had this confirmed; but the change in these in- 
stances was comparatively slight ; even in those of the congealed limbs of 
the frogs and toad the majority of the corpuscles appeared little altered ; 
some few seemed ruptured, some corrugated, and more contracted. 

Judging from the effect of congelation on the heart of the frog in ex- 
periment No. 5, and from the effects of congelation partially produced, as 
in the extremities of the frog and toad, I would rather attribute the death 
to the freezing of the organs, not excluding the blood, than to the freezing 
of the blood alone; and I would ask, is not this view most in accordance 
with the pathology of the subject, with all that we know of frost-bite and 
its consequences in man, and with the results of Mr. Hunter’s experiments 
on the local effects of congelation in animals—those on the ear of the 
rabbit and wottle of the cock t ? and do not some even of M. Puget’s results 


* For the name of this insect I am indebted to Dr. Gray, F.R.S. It was selected on 
account of its minuteness: it weighed hardly 1, of a grain; it seemed probable, on 
account of the minuteness of its vessels, that its fluids might escape congelation after 
the manner of fluids in capillary tubes, which may be reduced many degrees in tempera- 
ture without being frozen, 

+ Physiological Researches, 1863, p. 371. See also Trans. Royal Society of Edin- 
burgh, 1865, vol. xxiv. p. 26. 


y Phil Trans. 1778, p, 34. 


254 Letter to the President from Col. Walker, B.E., F.R.S., 


give it support, such as the opacity of the crystalline lens, he admitting 
that, were it possible for an animal to revive after complete congelation, it 
would be blind from cataract? Now, if the crystalline lens, if the blood- 
corpuscles suffer and undergo an appreciable change from congelation, it 
would be very remarkable indeed did not the brain and nerves, and the 
organs generally suffer from the same cause, and experience changes in- 
compatible with life. In the instance of man, we know that a certain re- 
duction of his temperature merely, not reaching to congelation, suffices to 
extinguish life *, and that in the instances of other animals, especially the 
hybernating and insects, a moderate reduction occasions torpor, ending in 
deathif too prolonged. That the organs generally suffer from congelation 
M. Puget himself admits, as expressed in the subjoined paragraphy. I 
have found, too, that the muscles, after having been frozen, exhibit a 
marked change; thus, in one instance, that of a frog, in which, after de- 
capitation, an upper and lower extremity were frozen, the muscles of these 
limbs, when thawed, compared with those which had not been frozen, 
showed a well-marked difference under the microscope. Thus, whilst in 
the latter the striated structure was very distinct, in the former it was no 
longer visible; and after a few hours, viz. on the following morning, 
whilst the unfrozen muscles had undergone no perceptible alteration, those 
which had been frozen had become of increased tenderness, yielding to a 
slight rending force, and breaking short, asif the coherence of the particles 
forming the fasciculi was greatly diminished. 


II. “ Letter to the President from Lieut.-Colonel Watxer, R.E., 
F.R.S., Superintendent of the Trigonometrical Survey of India.” 


Dehra Doon wd Bombay, 3lst May, 1866. 

My pear GreneRAL,—Captain Basevi has just returned to my head 
quarters, on the close of the operations of his first field-season with the 
pendulums. 

You will be glad to hear that his progress has on the whole been very 
satisfactory. At the outset he met with numerous difficulties; the 
vacuum apparatus was very troublesome, the air-pump constantly getting 
out of order, and the receiver as constantly leaking. It is very easy for 
philosophers to suggest improvements and refinements in the modus 
operandi of such operations, but it is not so easy to carry them out prac- 
tically. Capt. Basevi has undergone a great amount of labour and 
anxiety, but he has successfully surmounted all his difficulties. 


* Tnstances have occurred in the Lake District of persons who have perished on the 
hills from prolonged exposure to strong wind and rain, storm-stricken, in the language of 
the country. 

t “... La congélation compléte a méme si profondément altéré les tissus de l’or- 
ganisme que quand ]’animal est tout 4 fait dégelé, son corps est flasque et mou, ses 
cristalling sont blanes et opaques, et souvent sa coloration est tout a fait altérée” (p. 24). 


Superintendent of the Trigonometrical Survey of India. — 255 


He has taken experiments at the following stations, which you will find 
in the chart at the end of Everest’s description of the measurement of the 
Indian Arc, Dehra Doon, Nojli, Kaliana, Dateri, and Usira. At Dehra 
Doon he took six sets of observations with each pendulum ; but finding 
he could advance more rapidly than the observatories could be got ready 
for him, at the subsequent stations he took ten sets of observations with 
each pendulum. Each set was carried over eight to nine hours, from 
9 a.m. to 53 p.M. The pendulum was set in motion in the morning, the 
coincidences were observed, and the thermometers and arc of vibration 
were read hourly, until the set terminated in the afternoon. The first and 
last coincidences will be used only for determining the number of vibrations ; 
but the whele of the intermediate temperatures and arcs will be employed 
for determining the corrections for temperature and arc. He was very 
fortunate in his transits, only losing four nights in sixty ; complete sets of 
observations were twice taken at Kaliana (the northern extremity of the 
Indian arc) in December, when the temperature was lowest, and again this 
month when it was highest ; the range was not so great as we had antici- 
pated, being 58° in the first instance, and 92° in the second, so that the 
results will scarcely be applicable to the observations at Kew, where, to the 
best of my recollection, the temperature was between 40° and 50°; but 
they will amply suffice for all the observations that are likely to be taken 
in India. He endeavoured to observe at a constant pressure, but the 
leaking of the cylinder prevented this; however, the whole range of 
pressure does not exceed 3 inches, and the average range is much less, the 
maximum being 5 inches and the minimum 2. He is about to commence 
a series of observations at Masoori, at an altitude of about 6800 feet above 
the sea. He hopes to complete these during June, before the rainy season 
sets in, when trausits will be impossible. 

During the rains he will be employed in completing the calculations 
connected with his experiments. By September I hope to be able to send 
you the final results. 

He has had so much to do in surmounting the difficulties arising from 
his new apparatus, that he could not manage to take any magnetic obser- 
vations. In future, however, he hopes to be able to take these observations 
regularly at each of his pendulum stations. 

I trust that you will be gratified with this account of his first year’s 
operations. No pains have been spared to secure results of the highest 
possible value, and to reward the confidence you reposed in us, when you 
suggested to the India Office that we should undertake these delicate and 
difficult operations. 

Believe me, yours sincerely, 
General Sabine, P.R.S. J. WALKER. 


VOL. XV. ¥ 


256 Mr. Lockyer :—Spectroscopic — [Nov. 15, 
November 15, 1866. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


In accordance with the Statutes, notice of the ensuing Anniversary 
Meeting for the Election of Council and Officers was given from the 
Chair. 

Dr. Gladstone, Mr. Huggins, Mr. Lassell, Sir John Lubbock, and 
Colonel Smythe, having been nominated by the President, were elected by 
ballot Auditors of the Treasurer’s accounts on the part of the Society. 

Dr, John Charles Bucknill, Dr. William Augustus Guy, and Mr. John 
William Kaye, were admitted into the Society. 


The following communications were read :-— 


I. “On the Congelation of Animals.” By Joun Davy, M.D., 
F.R.S., &c. Received July 19, 1866. (See page 250.) 


II. “Letter to the President from Lieut.-Colonel Watkzr, R.E., 
F.R.S., Superintendent of the Trigonometrical Survey of India.” 
(See page 254.) 


III. “Spectroscopic Observations of the Sun.” By J. Norman 
Lockyer, F.R.A.S. Communicated by Dr. SHarpry, Sec. 
R.S. Received October 11, 1866. 


(Abstract.) 


The two most recent theories dealing with the physical constitution of 
the sun are due to M. Faye and to Messrs. De la Rue, Balfour Stewart, 
and Loewy. The chief point of difference in these two theories is the 
explanation given by each of the phenomena of sun-spots. 

Thus, according to M. Faye*, the interior of the sun is a nebulous 
gaseous mass of feeble radiating-power, at a temperature of dissociation ; 
the photosphere is, on the other hand, of a high radiating-power, and at 
a temperature sufficiently low to permit of chemical action. In a sun- 
spot we see the interior nebulous mass through an opening in the photo- 
sphere, caused by an upward current, and the sun-spot is black, by 
reason of the feeble radiating-power of the nebulous mass. 

In the theory held by Messrs. De la Rue, Stewart, and Loewyt, the 
appearances connected with sun-spots are referred to the effects, cool- 
ing and absorptive, of an inrush, or descending current, of the sun’s at- 
mosphere, which is known to be colder than the photosphere. 

In June 1865 I communicated to the Royal Astronomical Society { 

* Comptes Rendus, vol. lx. pp. 89-138, abstracted in ‘The Reader,’ 4th February, 
1865. 


+ Researches on Solar Physics. Printed for private circulation. Taylor and 
Francis, 1865. 


{ Monthly Notices Roy. Ast. Soc. vol. xxv. p. 237. 


1866. | Observations of the Sun. 257 


some observations (referred to by the authors last named) which had led 
me independently to the same conclusion as the one announced by them. 
The observations indicated that, instead of a spot being caused by an up- 
ward current, it is caused by a downward one, and that the results, or, at 
all events, the concomitants of the downward current are a dimming and 
possible vaporization of the cloud-masses carried down. I was led to 
held that the current had a downward direction by the fact that one of 
the cloud-masses observed passed in succession, in the space of about two 
hours, through the various orders of brightness exhibited by facule, ge- 
neral surface, and penumére. 

On March 4th of the present year I commenced a spectroscopic ob- 
servation of sun-spots, with a view of endeavouring to test the two rival 
theories, and especially of following up the observations before alluded to. 

The method I adopted was to apply a direct-vision spectroscope to my 
63-inch equatoreal (by Messrs. Cooke and Sons) at some distance outside the 
eyepiece, with its axis coincident with the axis of the telescope prolonged. 
In front of the sht of the spectroscope was placed a screen on which the 
image of the sun was received; in this screen there was also a fine slit cor- 
responding to that of the spectroscope. 

By this method it is possible to observe at one time the spectra of the 
umbra of a spot and of the adjoining photosphere or penumbra; unfor- 
tunately, however, favourable conditions of spot (7. e. as to size, position 
on the disk, and absence “of cloudy stratum’’), atmosphere, and instru- 
ment are rarely coincident. The conditions were by no means all I could 
have desired when my first observations were made; and, owing to the 
recent absence of spots, I have had no opportunities of repeating my ob- 
servations. Hence I should have hesitated still longer to lay them before 
the Royal Society had not M. Faye again recently called attention to 
the subject. 

On turning the telescope and spectrum-apparatus, driven by clock-work, 
on to the suu at the date mentioned, in such a manner that the centre of 
the umbra of the small spot then visible fell on the middle of the slit in the 
sereen, which, like the corresponding one in the spectroscope, was longer 
than the diameter of the umbra, the solar spectrum was observed in the 
field of view of the spectroscope with its central portion (corresponding 
to the diameter of the umbra falling on the slit) greatly enfeebled in 
brilliancy. : 

All the absorption-bands, however, visible in the spectrum of the pho- 
tosphere, above and below, were visible in the spectrum of the spot; they, 
moreover, appeared thicker where they crossed the spot-spectrum. 

I was unable to detect the slightest indication of any bright bands, 
although the spectrum was sufficiently feeble, I think, to have rendered 
them unmistakeably visible had there been any. 

Should these observations be confirmed by observations of a larger spot 
free from “cloudy stratum,” it will follow, not only that the phenomena 

. ¥ 2 


258 Mr. Schunck on a Fatty Acid from Urine. [Nov. 15, 


presented by a sun-spot are not due to radiation from such a source as that 
indicated by M. Faye, but that we have in this absorption-hypothesis a 
complete or partial solution of the problem which has withstood so 
many attacks. 

The dispersive power of the spectroscope employed was not sufficient 
to enable me to determine whether the decreased brilliancy of the spot- 
spectrum was due in any measure to a greater number of bands of ab- 
sorption, nor could I prove whether the thickness of the bands in the 
spot-spectrum, as compared with their thickness in the photosphere- 
spectrum, was real or apparent only*. 

On these points, among others, I shall hope, if permitted, to lay the 
results of future observations before the Royal Society. Seeing that 
spectrum-analysis has already been applied to the stars with such success, 
it is not too much to think that an attentive and detailed spectroscopic 
examination of the sun’s surface may bring us much knowledge bearing 
on the physical constitution of that luminary. For instance, if the theory 
of absorption be true, we may suppose that in a deep spot rays might 
be absorbed which would escape absorption in the higher strata of the 
atmosphere; hence also the darkness of a line may depend somewhat on 
the depth of the absorbing atmosphere. May not also some of the vari- 
able lines visible in the solar spectrum be due to absorption in the region 
of spots? and may not the spectroscope afford us evidence of the existence 
of the ‘‘red flames” which total eclipses have revealed to us in the sun’s 
atmosphere; although they escape all other methods of observation at 
other times? and if so, may we not learn something from this of the 
recent outburst of the star in Corona? 


IV. “On a Crystalline Fatty Acid from Human Urine.” 
By E. Scuunck, F.R.S. Received September 21, 1866. 


(Abstract. ) 


After referring to the various forms in which fatty matter occurs in 
human urine, and to our extremely defective knowledge regarding its 
physical and chemical properties, the author proceeds to describe a process 
whereby he obtained from healthy urine a small quantity of a substance 
having the properties characteristic of the fatty acids which are solid at 
the ordinary temperature. The process consists in passing urine, after 
having been filtered in order to separate all insoluble matter which may 
have been deposited, through animal charcoal in an ordinary percolating 
apparatus. The urine is thereby completely decolorized and deodorized, 
a small quantity of charcoal producing this effect on a large quantity of 
urime. The charcoal, after being thoroughly washed with water, is treated 
with boiling alcohol, to which it communicates a bright yellow colour like 


* Trradiation would cause bands of the same thickness to appear thinnest in the 
more brilliant spectrum. 


1866.]_ Mr. Schunck on Oxalurate of Ammonia in Urine. 259 


that of urine itself. The filtered alcoholic liquid is evaporated, and the 
residue is treated with water, which leaves undissolved a quantity of 
brownish-yellow fatty matter. This, after being purified in the manner 
described by the author, is found to consist principally of a fatty acid, 
having the properties characteristic of the group to which palmitic and 
stearic acid belong. The acid is white, crystalline, has a pearly lustre, 
melts at 54°°3 C., volatilizes unchanged when heated, and is insoluble in 
water but easily soluble in alcohol and ether. It is soluble in caustic 
potash and soda-lye, in aqueous ammonia, and in solutions of carbonate of 
potash and carbonate of soda. The solutions froth on being boiled like 
ordinary soap and water. The potash compound is obtained from the 
watery solution in the form of small pearly scales, and from an alcoholic 
solution in prismatic crystals. The soda-compound separates from a 
boiling-hot solution on cooling as a thick, white, amorphous soap, a very 
small quantity of which is sufficient to cause the liquid to gelatinize. The 
watery solution of either of these compounds gives white curd-like preci- 
pitates with salts of barium, calcium, lead, and silver. The quantity of the 
acid obtained in the author’s experiments was too inconsiderable to enable 
him to determine its composition and atomic weight, and it therefore 
‘remains uncertain whether it is identical with any of the known fatty acids 
or not. The author inclines to the opinion that it is a mixture of stearic 
and palmitic acid, which according to modern investigations constitute 
together what was formerly called margaric acid. The author does not 
venture to assert that it forms a normal constituent of the healthy secretion, 
though the urine employed in his experiments in no case exhibited any- 
thing peculiar. ‘The experiments described do not throw any light on the 
question how this acid, which belongs to a class of substances almost inso- 
luble in water, comes to be dissolved in a liquid like urime, which is itself 
usually acid. 


V. On Oxalurate of Ammonia as a Constituent of Human Urine.” 


By E. Scuuncn, F.R.S. Received November 15, 1866. 
(Abstract.) 


When ordinary healthy urine is passed through animal charcoal in the 
manner described in the preceding paper, several organic substances are 
separated and absorbed by the charcoal in addition to the fatty acid there 
referred to. The liquid obtained by treating the charcoal with boiling 
alcohol having been evaporated, the residue is treated with water, which 
leaves the fatty acid undissolved. The filtered liquid yields on evapora- 
tion a quantity of crystals, which, after being purified in the manner 
described by the author, are found to have the properties and composition 
of oxalurate of ammonia. ‘The watery solution of the substance gives 
with acids a white crystalline precipitate of oxaluric acid; with nitrate of 
silver it produces a precipitate which dissolves without change in boiling 


< 


260 Mr. J. L. Clarke on the Structure [Nov. 15, 


water, the solution on cooling depositing white silky needles of oxalurate 
of silver, The lead compound produced by adding acetate of lead to the 
watery solution, forms well-defined prismatic crystals. With chloride of 
calcium the watery solution gives no precipitate, but on adding ammonia 
and boiling, there is an abundant precipitation of oxalate of lime. By 
treatment with strong acids the substance is decomposed, yielding oxalic 
acid and urea. Its composition was found to correspond with the formula 
C, H, N, O,, which is that of oxalurate of ammonia. 

The author’s experiments were not sufficiently numerous to decide the 
question whether this salt is a normal constituent of human urine or not. 
There is no doubt, however, that its presence, whether exceptional or not, 
affords an easy and satisfactory explanation of a phenomenon which has 
until now proved very puzzling, viz., the formation of oxalate of lime in 
urine long after its emission. It is doubtless owing to the decomposition 
of oxaluric acid, which takes up water and splits up into urea.and oxalic 
acid ; the latter then combines with lime, of which there is always a sufli- 
cient quantity present to saturate the acid. “There can be little doubt also 
that oxaluric acid is derived in the animal frame, as in the laboratory, from 
uric acid, the oxidation of which is its only known source. 


VI. “On the Structure of the Optic Lobes of the Cuttle-Fish.” By 
J. Lockuart Crarke, F.R.S. Received September 26, 1866. 


(Abstract.) 


The brain of the Cuttle-fish consists of several ganglia closely aggregated 
around the upper part of the cesophagus. The foremost or pharyngeal 
ganglion, which is much the smallest, is bilobed and somewhat quadran- 
gular. The next is a large bilobed ganglion which forms the roof of the 
canal for the cesophagus. Beneath the cesophagus is another large and 
broad mass, which is connected on each side with the supra-cesophageal 
masses by bands that complete the oesophageal ring. 

From each side of the cephalic masses springs a thick optic peduncle 
which ends in the optic lobe. Each optic lobe is larger than all the other 
cerebral masses taken together, and has a striking resemblance in shape to 
the human kidney. It is completely enveloped in a thick layer of optic 
nerves disposed in flattened bands which issue from all parts of its sub- 
stance and proceed to the back of the eye in a fan-like expansion, the 
upper and lower bands crossing each other in their course. The substance 
of each lobe consists of two distinct portions, which differ from each other 
entirely in appearance. The outer portion resembles a very thin rind or 
shell, is extremely delicate, and very easily torn from the central substance 
which it encloses. It consists of three concentric layers—an external 
dark layer, an internal dark layer, and a middle pale and broader layer 
containing thin and concentric bands of fibres. 

The first or outer. layer consists of a multitude of nuclei and a few smail 


1866. | of the Opiie Lobes of the Cuttle-Fish, 261 


nucleated cells, with which filaments of the optic nerves are connected. 
The second or middle layer is composed entirely of fine nerve-fibres which 
form two sets—one vertical, and the other horizontal. The vertical fibres 
issue at the under surface of the first layer from the network which its 
nuclei form with the fibres of the optic nerves. Some are continuous with 
the horizontal fibres, but the majority continue downward across them to 
the third or inner layer. At the junction of these two layers is a row of 
nucleated cells which send thin processes in different directions, and with 
which some of the nerve-fibres are connected. The third or inner layer is 
composed entirely of closely-aggregated nuclei, which are joined together 
in a network by the fibres which issue from the under surface of the middle 
layer. 

The cortical substance, consisting of these three layers, forms only a very 
small portion of the optic lobe. Out of the nuclear network of the inner 
layer fine nerve-fibres descend into the body of the lobe which it encloses. 
At first these fibres are vertical, parallel, and arranged in uniform series, 
with scattered nuclei between them; but as they descend to the centre of 
the lobe, they diverge more and more, and cross each other to form a 
plexus, first with oval and then with broader meshes, in which the nuclei 
and nucleated cells are collected into groups of corresponding shape and 
size. 

From the plexus at the inner side of the lobe bundles converge from all 
parts to form the lower half of the peduncle, the upper part of which 
consists of masses of small nuclei, and gives attachment, by a short pedicle, 
to a small tubercle. This tubercle consists of closely-aggregated nuclei 
connected by fibres which converge to its neck and escape into the peduncle 
of the optic lobe. | 

After concluding his description of the optic lobes, the author gives a 
short account of the structure and connexions of the remaining cerebral 
ganglia of the Cuttle-fish, with the view of determining their homologies. 

From the nature of the parts which it supplies, the foremost or pharyn- 
geal ganglion would seem to combine the function of the centres which give 
origin to the trigeminal, the olfactory, and the gustatory nerves in the 
vertebrata. ‘The second bilobed ganglion appears to correspond partly to 
the cerebral lobes and partly to the cerebellum of fishes. The posterior 
portion of the subcesophageal mass is the analogue of the medulla oblongata ; 
while the anterior portion may be regarded as the spinal cord concentrated 
below the cesophagus and in the neighbourhood of the feet, which derive 
all their nerves from that source. 


262 ~ Messrs. V. Harcourt and Esson on the [Nov. 22, 


November 22, 1866. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


In accordance with the Statutes, notice was given from the Chair of the 
ensuing Anniversary Meeting, and the list of Council and Officers nominated 
for election was read as follows :— ; 


President.—Lieut.-General Edward Sabine, R.A., D.C.L., LL.D. 
Treasurer.— William Allen Miller, M.D., LL.D. 


William Sharpey, M.D., LL.D. 
George Gabriel Stokes, Esq., M.A., D.C.L., LU.D. 


Foreign Secretary.—Professor William Hallows Miller, M.A., LL.D. 


Other Members of the Council._—Lionel Smith Beale, Esq., M.B.; Wil- 
liam Bowman, Esq.; Commander F. J. Owen Evans, R.N.; Edward Frank- 
land, Esq., Ph.D.; John Hall Gladstone, Esq., Ph.D.; William Robert 
Grove, Esq., M.A., @.C.; William Huggins, Esq. ; Thomas Henry Huxley, 
Kisq., LL.D. ; William Lassell, Esq. ; Professor Andrew Crombie Ramsay, 
LL.D. ; Colonel Wiliam James Smythe, R.A.; William Spottiswoode, 
Esq., M.A.; Thomas Thomson, M.D.; William Tite, Esq.; Vice-Chancellor 
Sir W. P. Wood, D.C.L.; The Lord Wrottesley, M.A., D.C.L. 


Secretaries.— | 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “ On the Laws of Connexion between the conditions of a Che- 
mical Change and its Amount.”’ No. II. “On the Reac- 
tion of Hydric Peroxide and Hydric Iodide.’ By A. Vernon 
Harcourt, M.A., and W. Esson, M.A. Communicated by 
Sir Bengamin Corzins Broprz, Bart. Received July 13, 
1866. 

(Abstract. ) 

In a former paper, of which an abstract appeared in the Royal Society’s 
Proceedings, vol. xiv. p. 470, the authors gave an account of their first 
experiments on this subject. 

The second chemical change chosen for investigation was that which 
occurs in a solution contaming hydric iodide (hydriodic acid) and hydric 
peroxide. In this case the amount of change stands in relation to the 
following conditions,—(1) the nature of the solution, that is to say, its - 
temperature, and the nature and quantity of the different ingredients which 
it contains in a unit of volume, (2) the quantity of the solution, or the 
number of such units of volume, (3) the time during which the change 
proceeds. ‘The relation of the amount of change to the second and third 
of these conditions is determinate: it varies directly with each; for the 
solution is homogeneous, and, if all other conditions are fixed, the rate of 
change is uniform. But the first condition comprises an almost indefinite 
number of particular conditions ; for not only may various iodides and per- 


1866. | Laws of Connexion, &c. 263 


oxides be used without, as far as we know, altering the nature of the re- 
action, but other substances may be introduced into the solution, and 
their influence upon the amount of change determined. 

The present paper contains an account of the methods employed for ob- 
serving this reaction, and of the results obtamed by varying two particular 
conditions, namely the amounts of peroxide and of iodide. 

If hydric peroxide and hydric iodide, or barytic peroxide, potassic 
iodide, and hydric chloride, be brought together in dilute solution at the 
ordinary temperature, a gradual development of iodine takes place. If a 
drop of a dilute solution of sodic hyposulphite be added to the mixture 
capable of reducing to iodide all the iodine which has been formed up to 
the time of its addition, but not all that will be formed in the course of the 
reaction, the liquid which had become yellow becomes colourless, remains 
colourless for a while, and then suddenly becomes yellow again. This 
yellow colour may be exchanged for a more intense blue colour by putting 
starch into the solution. It was found that in dilute solutions no direct 
oxidation of hyposulphite by peroxide took place; and that the quan- 
tity of hyposulphite required to reduce the iodine liberated by a measure 
of peroxide was the same, whether the hyposulphite were added little by 
little durimg the course of the reaction, or after the primary reaction had 
completed itself, and when no peroxide remained in the solution. 

The method of observation founded upon these facts was briefly as 
follows :— 

Measured quantities of all the standard solutions, except that of hydric 
peroxide, were introduced into a glass cylinder about 11 inches high by 3 
broad, and water was added till the upper surface of the liquid was 
level with a line drawn round the cylinder. This adjustment of volume 
was made through a hole in the bung, which closed the cylinder; two 
other holes admitted a thermometer and an inverted funnel-tube. A cur- 
rent of carbonic acid passing down the funnel-tube to the bottom of the 
cylinder, and rising in large bubbles from the mouth of the funnel, served 
at once to stir the liquid constantly, and to protect its upper surface from 
the air. When the volume and the temperature of the solution had been 
adjusted, a small measure of hyposulphite was first added, and then the 
pipetteful (10 cub. centims.) of peroxide. The cylinder was placed on a 
sheet of white paper in front of a clock beating seconds. By watching the 
" surface of the fluid and counting the seconds when the time of an observa- 
tion was near, it was possible to note accurately the moment at which the 
colour changed. A second small measure of hyposulphite was then intro- 
duced, and at the proper interval a second observation was made. Hach 
such addition of hyposulphite, with the observation preceding and following 
it, is spoken of as an experiment, and these experiments were continued 
until the reducing power of the last measure of hyposulphite being greater 


than the oxidizing power of the remaining peroxide the blue colour did not 
return, 


264 Messrs V. Harcourt and Esson on the [ Nov. 22, 


The small measures of hyposulphite consisted of single drops collected 
under circumstances favourable to their perfect uniformity. The peroxide 
employed was either an acidified solution of sodic peroxide, or dilute 
hydric peroxide obtained by the distillation of such a solution. In each 
set of experiments the value of the measures of hyposulphite and of the 
pipetteful of peroxide could be compared by determining what fraction of a 
measure of hyposulphite remained in the solution when the set of experi- 
ments had been brought to an end. These values could also be compared 
by determining each with a standard solution of potassic permanganate. 
In presence of an excess of potassic iodide, sodic hyposulphite may be esti- 
mated by this reagent exactly as it may by standard iodine solution. 

During each set of experiments, then, all the conditions of the-reaction 
are constant except two, which are progressively modified. One of these is 
immaterial, the accumulation of a small quantity of sodic tetrathionate ; the 
other is material, the gradual disappearance of the small quantity of per- 
oxide upon whose presence the reaction depends. 

The first point, therefore, requiring to be mvestigated was the law of con- 
nexion between the amount of change and the amount of peroxide. 

Since the amount of peroxide originally taken is known, and also the 
amount which corresponds to a measure of hyposulphite, the amount re- 
maining in the solution at the moment of each observation is also known. 
Thus the data supplied by each experiment are (1) the amount of peroxide 
present in the solution at a particular moment of time, (2) the time at 
which this amount is present, (3) the amount present at a subsequent 
moment of time, (4) the time at which this amount is present. Represent- 
ing these two amounts of peroxide by y and y! respectively, and the cor- 
responding moments of time by ¢ and ¢’, the result of each experiment is 
that an amount of chemical change y—y! has been accomplished in an in- 
terval ¢’/—¢. According to the hypothesis proposed in our former paper, 
namely that the amount of chemical change varies directly with that of 
each of the substances partaking in it, these quantities should exhibit 
throughout a set of experiments the constant relation 


os == po. (2) 
Y 

The numerical results obtained in various sets of experiments performed 
under different circumstances are compared with those ecaiculated from 
equations of this form, and the two are shown to agree within narrow 
limits of experimental error. It is inferred that in this case the amount of 
chemical change taking place at any moment is proportional to the 
amount of peroxide present at that moment in the solution. 

The constant a in the preceding equation represents the effect upon the 
amount of change of those conditions which do not vary in a set of experi- 
ments; and it is possible by varying one of these conditions in different 
sets of experiments, and determining the value of « in each, to inquire into 


~ 


1866. | Laws of Connexion, &c. 265 


the law of connexion between the condition thus varied and the amount of 
change. 

Accordingly a series of sets of experiments was made, in which, all else 
being kept constant, different quantities of potassic iodide were used in 
different sets. It is shown that the values of « derived from the different 
sets of experiments are proportional to the quantities of iodide used in each 
case. In this series hydric sulphate was an ingredient of the solutions; a 
second series was made, in which an equivalent quantity of hydric chloride 
was substituted. The result, as regards the effect of varying the amount of 
iodide, was the same as in the previous series. The rate of chemical change, 
that is to say the amount in a given time with a constant quantity of per- 
oxide, was found to be directly proportional to the amount of iodide in the 
solution. ‘Thus the law of connexion is the same in this case as in that 
already investigated of the variation of peroxide. 

The total amount of chemical change is a function of all the conditions 
of the system in which it occurs. If we call this amount 2, the volume of 
the solution v, its temperature f, the time during which the change pro- 
ceeds ¢, and the amounts of the various ingredients, peroxide, iodide, &e. 

in a unit of volume, p, z,a,6,c..., then 
; SMe a A Sa ee eae) ee et peat Seer 
The form of this function is determinate in the case of two of these condi- 


tions, viz. v, ¢, and has now been determined experimentally in the case of 
p and 2, so that the equation may be written in the form 
Bi pes. f(a, Ge ooh o2): 

The number of ingredients, represented by a, 4, c, &c., which may be in- 
troduced into the system and affect the amount only, and not the nature of 
the chemical change, and which may therefore be regarded as so many con- 
ditions of the reaction, is doubtless very large. The authors believe that 
the investigation of the influence of some of these may prove of interest, it 
being possible thus to compare various substances which may be sub- 
stituted one for another in the system by a new standard. They find, for 
example, that comparing equivalent quantities (in the ordinary chemical 
sense) of hydric sulphate and hydric chloride, the effect of the latter is 
nearly double that of the former. But the most important condition of 
the change whose influence is still undetermined is that of temperature, for 
this condition intervenes under all circumstances of the reaction, andindeed | 
in all chemical changes whatever. The authors have already made many 
experiments on both these points. The results of this investigation, which 


will complete the study of the reaction, may, they hope, form the subject 
of a subsequent communication. 


266 Mr. Tarn on the Stability of Domes. [Nov. 22, 


II. “On the Stability of Domes.”—Part I]. By EH. Wynpnam 
Tarn, M.A., Memb. Roy. Inst. Brit. Architects. Communicated 
by G. Gopwin, Esq. Received October 23, 1866. 


(Abstract. ) 


In a former paper on this subject which the author presented to the 
Royal Society, and which is published in the ‘ Proceedings’ (vol. xy. 
p- 182), he obtained formule for calculating the thrust of a spherical 
dome of uniform thickness, by supposing it to consist of a number of thin 
ribs, each of which is formed by two vertical planes intersecting at the axis 
of the dome, and making a small angle with each other ; and then treating 
each rib as forming, with the corresponding one of the opposite side, a 
complete arch. 

In the present paper the author applies the same method to domes of 
other forms than the spherical. The following are the kinds for which the 
formule are investigated :— 

A. The Gothic dome, of which that of the cathedral at Florence is a 
splendid example. This kind has for its section a pointed arch formed by 
two segments of circles, the centre from which each is struck being on the 
springing line, but not in the axis of the dome. The author denotes by 
a the angle between the vertical and a line drawn from this centre to the 
point, near the crown of the dome, where its axis is intersected by a circle 
drawn around that centre with a radius equal to the mean of the radii of 
the circles which generate the outer and inner surfaces of the dome, and 
reduces his results to numbers for three different values of the angle a. 

B. A dome whose inner surface is a paraboloid of revolution, the thick- 
ness of the shell being uniform throughout. 

C. The dome whose surface is formed by the revolution of an ellipse 
about its major axis. In the investigation, the two surfaces are supposed 
to be generated by the revolution of two concentric elliptic quadrants, 
whose major axes differ from one another by the same quantity as the 
minor axes, so that the thickness 1s very nearly uniform throughout. 

D. A form of dome commonly used in eastern countries, sometimes 
called the ogival dome, the surface of which is generated by the revolu- 
tion of a curve which has a point of contrary flexure. In the imvestiga- 
tion, the author takes for this curve the curve of sines, the equation of 


! 


which is y’=r sin—, where 2’, y' are the vertical and horizontal coordi- 
YH ‘ 


nates of a point in the generating curve, and supposes the outer and inner 
surfaces to be generated by the revolution of two such curves, differing only 
by the value of 7, the origin being the same. 

The following Table exhibits the principal results obtained from the 
author’s investigations. All the domes, except the last, are supposed to be 
of the uniform thickness throughout of 1 foot. In the last the thickness is 
1 foot at the springing, but gets rather less towards the top. The domes are 


1866. | Mr. Tarn on the Stability of Domes. 267 


supposed to be built of material weighing 125 lbs. to the cubic foot. The 
thrust is calculated for the 180th part of the whole dome, being the por- 
tion cut out by two planes which make an angle of 2° at the axis. 


Table showing the position of the weakest joint in domes of various forms, 
and the horizontal thrust at that joint. 


Position of the weakest eee ene : 
Form of Dome. Span. joint, or joint where CRA cEraee 
thrust is greatest. arenes APM 
ae i ee ae el 
. é Makes with springing line 9. 
Me UCMMSDNCLO, cies te se: evennse en 20 a aalbiok 20. 92°01 
- i ee Makes with springing line \ 
2 Gothic, ee dad, cee 90 an angle of 17°, = 88 7 
99 Makes with springing line 
BT Gothic, @= 294° ssesse. bo rf eae f 80-418 
ie Saas Makes with springing line ry, 
4 Gothic, a=30 see eeeecseesces 20 { an angle of 11°. 17 27 
5. | Parabolic ; height above 
springing equals the half | 0 At springing line ......... 79°6 
span. 
6. | Elliptical, major axis ver- One-third of semimajor 
tical; ratio of major to} | 99 axis above springing 90:867 
minor axis as 6: 5. a line. 
Ogival; contour, the ‘‘ curve < One-sixteenth of the span 62:5 
of sines.” I 20 above springing line. . 


In the preceding cases, except the last, the domes are assumed to be of 
uniform thickness. The author finally applies his formulze to the case of 
the spherical dome in which the thickness at the crown is one-half that at 
the springing, the inner surface being generated by the revolution of a 
circular quadrant whose centre is raised above the centre of that which 
generates the outer surface by half the difference of the radii. Assuming 
the outer and inner radii R, 7 to be respectively 11 feet and 10 feet, he 
finds that the ey point on a dome of this form appears to be ata 
height equal to =4; R above the springing line; and with the other nume- 
Beal values, ortae oe the same as before, he finds for the horizontal thrust 
at the weakest joint 55°78 lbs. 

For each kind of dome the author forms what he calls the equation of 
stability, giving, for an assumed value of the height of the pier, the least 
thickness ¢ which will permit of stability. The following are the results 
for each kind of dome, the height of the pier being taken at 50 feet :— 

Spherical dome (from former paper) . . . . =2°45 feet. 
Goathie dome, (a= 2255) ae feoiielowireds via tpl 222390455 
Parabaloidal dome’. \.\ «fie Wah Geiied wine sb A244 1 5, 
Mibpiie, dome, ‘ysiicaiy\ dhursmeiaw. cae etalidey slénb 244) ba 
Dayal dome». 0f ysis! seu ete hh ois heen ES ” 
Spherical dome (thinner at worn ke aehtyand 1 ae ie: PS eee hiss 


268 Anniversary Meeting. [ Nov. 30, 


The author considers what he has found as the weakest part of a dome 
to be the position in which an iron belt must be placed to produce the 
greatest effect in counteracting the thrust of the dome. If this be done, 
the thickness of the pier may be considerably diminished, and need not 
greatly exceed the strength necessary for supporting the superincumbent 
weight acting vertically downwards. 


III. “A Supplementary Memoir on Caustics.” 
By A. Cayzey, F.R.S. Received November 15, 1866. 


(Abstract. ) 


It is near the conclusion of my “ Memoir on Caustics,” Phil. Trans. 
vol. exlvii. (1857), pp. 273, 312, remarked that for the case of parallel rays 
refracted at a circle, the ordinary construction for the secondary caustic 
cannot be made use of (the entire curve would in fact pass off to an infinite 
distance), and that the simplest course is to measure off the distance GQ 
from a line through the centre of the refracting circle perpendicular to the 
direction of the incident rays. The particular secondary caustic, or ortho- 
gonal trajectory of the refracted rays, obtained on the above supposition 
was shown to be a curve of the order 8; and it was further shown by con- 
sideration of the case (wherein the distance GQ is measured off from an 
arbitrary line perpendicular to the incident rays), that the general secondary 
caustic or orthogonal trajectory of the refracted rays was a curve of the 
same order 8. The last-mentioned curve in the case of reflexion, or for 
p= —1, degenerates into a curve of the order 6; and I propose in the 
present supplementary memoir to discuss this sextic curve ; viz. the sextic 
curve which is the general secondary caustic or orthogonal trajectory of 
parallel rays reflected at a circle. 


November 30, 1866. 
ANNIVERSARY MEETING. 


Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


Dr. Gladstone, on the part of the Auditors of the Treasurer’s Accounts 
appointed by the Society, reported that the total receipts during the past 
year, including a balance of £15 9s. carried from the preceding year, 
amounted to £4295 16s. 1ld.; and that the total expenditure in the same 


1866.] 


Anniversary Meeting. 


269 


period amounted to £3629 15s. 5d., leaving a balance of £638 8s. 1d. 
at the Bankers, and of €27 13s. 5d. in the hands of the Treasurer. 
The thanks of the Society were voted to the Treasurer and Auditors. 


The Secretary read the following Lists :— 


Fellows deceased since the last Anniversary. 


. Royal. 
His Majesty Leopold, King of the Belgians, K.G. 


On the Home List. 


Benjamin Guy Babington, M.D. 

William Thomas Brande, D.C.L. 

Right Hon. Sir James Lewis Knight 
Bruce, Knt., D.C.L. 

Richard John Hely Hutchinson, 
Karl of Donoughmore. 

Sir Charles Locke Eastlake, D.C.L. 

Joseph Edye, Esq. 

G. W. Featherstonhaugh, Esq. 

Charles Lord Glenelg, D.C.L. 

Wilham Gravatt, Esq. 

John Seandret Harford, D.C.L. 

Charles James Hargreave, LL.D. 

William Henry Harvey, M.D. 

Robert Hunter, Esq. 

Percival Norton Johnson, Esq. 

Edward Kater, Esq. 

John Lee, LL.D. 


Rev. Samuel Roffy Maitland, D.D. 

Thomas Spring Rice, Lord Mon- 
teagle of Brandon. 

Francis Thornhill Baring, Baron 
Northbrook. 

Horatio William Walpole, Earl of 
Orford (in 1858). 

George Rennie, Esq. 

Henry Darwin Rogers, LL.D. 

Edward James Seymour, M.D. 

Samuel Reynolds Solly, Esq. 

Joseph Toynbee, Hsq. 

Lieut.-Col. Sir John 
Tylden, Knt. 

Rev. William Whewell, D.D. 

Right Hon. Sir James Wigram, 
Knt., M.A. 


Maxwell 


Nicholas Wood, Esq. 


On the Foreign List. 


Georg Friedrich Bernhard Riemann. 


Change of Name. 
Rey. Henry Christmas to Noel-Fearn. 


Defaulter. 
Colonel John Le Couteur, 


970 Anniversary Meeting. [ Nov. 80, 


Fellows elected since the last Anniversary. 


On the Home List. 


John Charles Bucknill, M.D. The Ven. John Henry Pratt, M.A. 
Rey. Frederic William Farrar. Capt. George Henry Richards, R.N. 
William Augustus Guy, M.B. Thomas Richardson, Esq., M.A. 
James Hector, M.D. Willam Henry Leighton Russell, 
John William Kaye, Hsq. Esq. 
Hugo Miller, Ph.D. Rey. William Selwyn, D.D. 
Charles Murchison, M.D. Rev. Richard Townsend, M.A. 
William Henry Perkin, Esq. Henry Watts, B.A. 

On the Foreign List. 
Franz Cornelius Donders. Gustav Rose. 
Georg Friedrich Bernhard Riemann. 

Readmitted. 


William Bird Herapath, M.D. 


The President then addressed the Society as follows :— 


GENTLEMEN, 

DurineG the autumnal recess, and in the absence of the President, the 
Treasurer, on learning that the Government had it in contemplation to 
assign the main building of Burlington House, now appropriated to the 
Royal, Chemical, and Linnean Societies, to the Royal Academy (together 
with ground in its rear for the erection of additional buildings), deemed it 
advisable in the interests of the Society, and after consultation with the 
Senior Secretary, to address a letter to the Karl of Derby. The officers of 
the Society were referred by his Lordship to the Chief Commissioner of 
Works, by whom they were informed in reply that due provision was to be 
made for the Societies, and that the Architects, Messrs. Banks and Barry, 
with whom the Office were to advise on the subject, were instructed to 

confer with the Council of the Royal Society. Those gentlemen having — 
accordingly communicated to the Council that they are directed to report 
to the Government on the accommodation that can be provided for the Royal 
and the other Societies in new buildings, to occupy part of the space between 
Burlington House and Piccadilly, the Council have appointed a Committee 
to consider the whole matter and to confer with the Architects thereupon. 
The Committee have had an interview with Mr. Banks, and have handed 
in a statement setting forth the nature and extent of accommodation that 
will be required for the Society in lieu of their present apartments. There, 
so far as we are informed, the matter rests for the present, but from the 
tenor of the communications which have passed, there seems every reason 
to feel confident that the Society will be suitably and amply provided for. 


I had the pleasure of announcing at the last Anniversary that the 


1866. | President’s Address. 3 o71 


printing of the Catalogue of Scientific Papers, in the preparation of 
which we have been so long engaged, was at length commenced. Twenty- 
eight quarto sheets are now printed and eight moreareintype. The work 
would now have been further advanced, had not the Superintending 
Commitee in the mean time obtained access to additional Periodical Works, 
containing Memoirs deserving to be included in the Catalogue, and too 
numerous to warrant their being postponed forasupplement. The printing 
has therefore been interrupted for a time in order to allow of the insertion 
of these additional titles in their proper places. Moreover, proofs of every 
sheet are supplied to several of the Members of the Library Committee who 
separately revise them ; and this mode of proceeding no doubt somewhat 
protracts the work, but it has the more than compensating advantage of 
securing the greatest attainable accuracy. 


The attention of your Council has been much occupied in the past year 
in complying with a request from Her Majesty’s Government for the advice 
and co-operation of the Royal Society in the re-organization of the Meteo- 
rological Department of the Board of Trade, and in preparing the prelimi- 
nary arrangements for the establishment of a system of British Land- 
Meteorology to be carried out under the authorization of that Board. 

Perhaps there is no branch of scientific research in which a greater 
amount of human labour has been expended than has been the case in 
Meteorology,—a natural consequence of its intimate connexion in so many 
ways with the interests and pursuits of man ; and it may perhaps be said 
with equal truth that there is no department of natural knowledge in which 
the labour bestowed has been of a more desultory character, or the value 
and importance of the conclusions less commensurate with the time and 
labour bestowed on their acquisition. 'The object to be desired, therefore, 
is scarcely so much to give a stronger impulse to the spirit of inquiry, as 
to aid in giving to that which exists a more systematic direction. This 
has been attempted in several of the continental States of Europe and 
America, by the establishment at the expense of the respective govern- 
ments, and under the supermtendence of men eminently qualified by 
theoretical and practical knowledge, of systematic climatological researches ; 
and, as regards the individual states themselves, it may be confidently said 
that the results have been very beneficial. 

For some time past it has been desired to establish a closer connexion 
between these independent and separate systems of observation, by effect- 
ing an assimilation of instrumental means, and of the modes and times of 
observation. It was chiefly in this view that the assemblage took place by 
special invitation, at the Cambridge Meeting of the British Association in 
1845, of the Directors of the principal meteorological (and magnetical) 
observatories in Europe and America; and that a second meeting took place 
at Brussels in 1853. The difficulty that impeded success on these two 
occasions cannot be better stated than in the words of Captain Maury, in 

VOL. XV, Z 


272 Anniversary Meeting. [Noy. 30, 


his Report to the Government of the United States, by whom he had been 
appointed to visit the principal Kuropean Meteorological Observatories for 
the express purpose of urging a uniformity of procedure. 

““T would recommend that the United States should abandon, for the 
time at least, that part of the ‘ Universal System’ which relates to the 
Land, and that we should direct our efforts mainly to the Sea, where there 
is such a rich harvest to be gathered for navigation and commerce. Iam 
inclined to make this recommendation in consequence of the evident reluct- 
ance with which Russia, Austria, Bavaria, Belgium, and other powers 
seem to regard any change in their systems of meteorological observations 
on shore. Each country seems to have adopted a system of its own, 
according to which its labourers have been accustomed to work, and to © 
which its meteorologists are more or less partial. Any proposition having in 
view for these systems a change so radical as to bring them into uniformity, 
and reduce them to one for all the world would, I have reason to believe, be 
regarded with more or less jealousy by many,—not so, however, with regard 
to the sea; that proposal meets with decided favour and warm support.” 

The most hopeful way of removing the difficulties which impeded the 
adoption of a system in which all might willingly unite was obviously the 
introduction of instruments which should be continuously self-recording, 
and which, after sufficient trial, should receive general approval. The 
importance of such a substitution had been recognized at the Observatory 
of the British Association at Kew at a very early date, even before the 
Cambridge Meeting of the British Association in 1845; and at that meet- 
ing the satisfactory performance was announced of a photometrically self- 
recording barometer, self-compensated also for temperature, devised by 
Mr. Francis Ronalds, the Honorary Director of the Kew Observatory, —the 
same to whose merits in regard to the instantaneous transmission of mes- 
sages by means of electricity, at the very early date of 1823, attention has 
been recently called in the public journals. Encouraged by this success in 
one instrument, the Directors of the Kew Observatory proceeded, as rapidly 
as the means at their disposal enabled them to do, towards the provision of 
self-recording instruments for the other meteorological elements (as well 
as for the magnetical elements), and were considerably advanced in their 
preparations when in 1854 the Board of Trade informed the President and 
Council that, in fulfilment of a previous earnest recommendation to that 
effect from the Royal Society, they were “about to submit to Parliament an 
estimate for an office for the discussion of observations on meteorclogy made 
at sea in all parts of the globe;” adding that, “as it may possibly happen 
that observations on Land upon an extensive scale may hereafter be made 
and discussed in the same office, it is desirable that the Royal Society should 
keep in view and provide for such a contingency.” 

The subject of a Government system of Meteorological Observations on 
Land was again brought under the consideration of the Royal Seciety in a 
letter from the Board of Trade in May 1865, and the President and 


1866.) President’s Address. | Bae 


Council were expressly requested to offer suggestions in reference to it. 
The suggestions which they offered in reply have been made known to the 
Society, in their leading outlines at least, in my Address of last year, and 
in No. 82 of our ‘ Proceedings.’ They have been submitted by the Board 
of Trade to a Committee appointed by itself, whose general approval they 
are understood to have received ; and the whole scheme is now under the 
consideration of Government in respect to its cost. 

The sea-observations, so hopefully spoken of by Captain Maury, were 
the subject cf a very full communication addressed by the President and 
Council of the Royal Society to the Board of Trade in February 1855, and 
the recommendations contained therein were made the basis of the instruc- 
tions given to the Meteorological Office of the Board of Trade at its first 
formation. The collection of what have since been comprehended under 
the general designation of ‘Ocean Statistics” proceeded for some time 
with much activity and success under the direction of our lamented Fellow 
the late Admiral FitzRoy. His exertions and those of his assistants were 
afterwards in great measure diverted to an object which, ifit could be—or, 
to speak more sanguinely, whenever it shall become—practically attain- 
able with a fair measure of scientific certainty, will assuredly both deserve 
and receive in the highest degree general favour and support. I mean 
the system popularly known by the appellation of ‘‘ storm-warnings.”’ 
Meanwhile, if the recommendations of the Royal Society and the inten- 
_ tions entertained by the Board of Trade shall now receive the hoped-for 
sanction of the general government, the collection of ocean statistics and 
their systematic combination will be resumed with fresh vigour, and with 
all the aids which experience and matured scientific consideration can 
afford; and at the same time, if our hopes respecting the proposed system 
of Land-Meteorology are realized, and if its fruits correspond in a fair 
degree to the expectations which we venture to form respecting them, we 
shall gradually obtain such a more complete knowledge of the laws which 
govern the changes of weather in the British Islands and their vicinity, as 
may enable the predictions of approaching storms or ‘‘ storm-warnings,” if 
now suspended, to be resumed hereafter, and at no very distant period, 
with far greater confidence and more assured advantage. 


At our last Anniversary I acquainted you that the Legislature of Victoria 
had voted the sum of £5000 for the construction of a large reflecting telescope 
to be erected at Melbourne and employed in a thorough survey of the Nebulse 
and multiple stars of the southern hemisphere. They also requested the 
cooperation of the President and Council of the Royal Society in arranging 
a contract for the work and superintending its execution. We selected 
for the task one of our Fellows, Mr. Grubb of Dublin, whose well-known 
optical and mechanical talents gave sure promise of success, and we obtained 
for him the advantage and assistance of a Superintending Committee, con- 
sisting of our late President the Earl of Rosse, Dr. Robinson, and Mr, Warren 

Z 2 


2 Anniversary Meeting. [Noy. 380, 


Dela Rue. The contract for the work was signed on the 19th of January ; 
the progress has been rapid, and I have great pleasure in informing you 
that, according to all appearance, the instrument will be ready for trial in 
the spring of 1867. All the large parts of it are ready for mounting, and 
the rest considerably advanced. The lattice-tube, the appearance of which 
is known to many of us from the photographs, is put together. Itis made 
of ribs of steel to combine lightness and strength ; they are rolled taper to 
effect this in the highest degree. The equilibrated systems of levers which 
support the great speculum, with their boxes, are of the same material and 
are also completed. Three specula have been cast on a plan differmg from 
that of Lord Rosse only by such modifications as were made necessary by 
their having central apertures. The first speculum came out sound from 
the annealing furnace, but had two blemishes on its surface which would 
have required a month to grind out, and Mr. Grubb broke it up without 
hesitation, though not many years ago such a disk would have been almost 
inestimable. The second cast has been successfully ground, and its surface 
is faultless. The third, a duplicate speculum, was cast on the 24th of 
October. The grinding has been performed by the polishing machine and 
steam-engine which belong to the telescope, and will accompany it to 
Melbourne. The trial-piers on which the instrument is to be set up for 
the examination of the Superintending Committee, are ready. 

At the request of the Board of Visitors of the Melbourne Observatory, 
and at the recommendation of the aforenamed Superintendmg Committee, 
I have appointed as Observer with this telescope Mr. Albert Le Sueur, a 
Graduate at Cambridge and a Wrangler in 1863. He is at present training 
himself in sidereal astronomy at the Cambridge Observatory under the 
guidance of Professor Adams, and will be present at the polishing of the 
specula. Mr. De la Rue has kindly promised to instruct him in the 
practice of celestial photography ; so that there is reason to hope that this 
magnificent instrument will be used with full imtelligence and zeal, and 
amply repay the munificent spirit that has guided the Legislature of this 
energetic and prosperous colony. 


The large appropriation made by the Colony of Victoria for the con- 
struction of this telescope and for its accompanying spectroscope, and for 
a suitable provision for its effective employment at Melbourne, have not 
been the only manifestation in the present year of the enlightened spirit 
which animates and guides the Legislature of that colony. A sum has 
been remitted and received in this country for the purchase of a com- 
plete equipment of self-recording magnetical instruments on the model of 
those at the Kew Observatory, to be located in the Government Reserve 
adjacent to the Melbourne Astronomical Observatory, and to be employed 
under the superintendence of its director, Mr. Ellery. The instruments 
have been made and verified under the immediate care of the Director of 
the Kew Observatory, and have been despatched to their destination. The 


1866. ] President’s Address. 275 


system of intended observation is modelled on that exemplified at the Kew 
Observatory. 

The intention, adverted to in my last year’s Address, of the Government 
of Mauritius to establish there a magnetic observatory, working with the 
instruments and adopting the methods exemplified at Kew, has been since 
matured. The necessary funds have been remitted, and the mstruments 
are made and are now under process of verification at Kew, where 
Professor Meldrum, the Director of the Mauritius Observatory, is daily ex- 
pected to arrive, with the view of making himself thoroughly acquainted 
with the instruments, and with the processes in which they are to be em- 
ployed. The geographical position of Mauritius is a very important one, 
both for magnetical and meteorological observations. Hitherto meteo- 
rology has been exclusively pursued there, and the researches of Professor 
Meldrum on the cyclonic storms which prevail in the vicinity of the 
Island are well known. 

Those of our Fellows who remember the assiduity and devotion to sci- 
entific pursuits manifested by Mr. Charles Chambers during his employ- 
ment as one of the assistants of the Kew Observatory, will be glad to lean 
that he has received from the Government of Bombay the temporary ap- 
pointment of Superintendent of the Bombay Magnetical and Meteoro- 
logical Observatory, and in that capacity has been required to submit a 
scheme for the reorganization of the observatory, with instruments and 
methods of research suitable to the advance which has been made in these 
respects in the last twenty-five years. Mr. Chambers’s report is understood 
to be on its way from the Government of Bombay to the India Office, with a 
view to its being submitted to the consideration of the President and Council 
of the Royal Society ; and should it be approved, it will probably lead to the 
permanent employment of Mr. Chambers in his present temporary position, 
and to the thorough utilization of the observations of past years, in addi- 
tion to the prospect of most efficient work at this observatory, under the 
best conditions, both personal and material, for the future. 

I have to add to the list of magnetic observatories established in the pre- 
sent year one at the Roman Catholic College at Stonyhurst, supplied with 
the Kew instruments, and pursuing the same methods of observation and 
reduction. I refer to this with the greater satisfaction, because in addition 
to the value to science of the actual work performed at the observatory, it 
may be expected to be, and is expressly designed by the authorities of the 
College to be a means, amongst others adopted by them, of fostering among 
the students a taste for scientific pursuits, which may remain with them in 
after life. For this latter purpose Stonyhurst has added to the more ordinary 
modes of instruction in natural knowledge that practical instruction which 
is only to be gained by working under proper tuition in observatories and 
laboratories directed to special scientific pursuits, among which magnetism, 
terrestrial and celestial, may now be considered to have taken its place. 

It was from the twofold motive of aiding the advancement of science by 


276 Anniversary Meeting. [Nov. 80, 


this additional observatory on the one hand, and on the other of contribu- 
ting to the dissemination of a taste for scientific pursuits among a large 
class of our gentry, that the Council of the Royal Society thought it right 
to allot last year from the parliamentary grant annually placed at their 
disposal, a sum sufficient to defray half the cost of a set of magnetical in- 
struments for Stonyhurst. . 


This is the fortieth year since Mr. Schwabe began at Dessau his series 
of observations on the Solar spots, which he has continued without inter- 
mission from 1826 to the present time. Impressed with the extreme de- 
sirableness of continuing beyond the limits of a single life a series already 
so valuable, the Committee of the Kew Observatory concerted with Mr. 
Schwabe for the commencement last year at Kew of a series which should 
run parallel with his for a time, and which afterwards, when the identity 
or proximate identity of the two should have been established, might, it 
was hoped, be prolonged indefinitely through future years. Mr.Schwabe’s 
observations and those at Kew have accordingly been proceeding con- 
temporaneously, and the comparison between their results during the ten 
months from January to October 1866 inclusive, gives reason to believe 
that the object will be satisfactorily attamed. 'The number of new groups 
of spots observed at the two stations in the ten months is identical, and 
very similar, if not always quite identical, in each single month; although, 
as might have been expected from the difference between the continental 
and insular climates, the number of days of observation at Kew is consider- 
ably less than at Dessau. 


The results of the first year’s experiments with the pendulums which 
were noticed in my last year’s Address as having been supplied to the 
Indian Trigonometrical Survey, have been received from Colonel Walker, 
R.A., F.R.S., Superintendent of the Survey. They were made by Captain 
Basevi at several stations where the triangulation is now proceeding. Ina 
letter to myself accompanying them, dated August 30 of the present year, 
Colonel Walker says, “‘ Already these experiments are beginning to throw 
light on the subject of Himalayan attraction ; for the observations clearly 
show that the force of gravity is less than it should be theoretically at 
the stations in the vicinity of the Himalayas, and that the difference between 
theory and practice diminishes the further the station is removed from the 
Himalayas. This seems a remarkable confirmation of the Astronomer 
Royal’s opinion, that the strata of the earth below mountains are less 
dense than the strata below plains and the bed of the sea. Combining 
these observations with those which were used by Mr. Baily, including, 


I believe, all your own, the value of the ellipticity will be = The 
general result obtained from the thirteen stations of my equatorial and — 


arctic voyages (1821-1823) was er That obtained by Mr. Baily from 


1866. | resident’s Address. 277 


Captain Foster’s experiments in his equatorial and antarctic voyage (1828- 
1830) was sagb" 

In our Transactions of the present year we have an elaborate and valuable 
memoir by Mr. Abel “On the Manufacture and Compositiou of Gun-cotton,” 
pointing out the causes of the difference in the analytical results obtained 
by many of the earlier inquirers into its nature, and confirming its compo- 
sition as determined by Crum and more fully proved by Hadow, and again 
stated by the Committee of Chemists who reported on Baron von Lenk’s 
Gun-cotton. In pursuing these analytical inquiries, Mr. Abel has tested 
the methods, both synthetical and analytical, formerly employed, and has 
devised some modes of analysis of his own. The multiplied and varied 
experiments which he has made leave no room to doubt the accuracy of 
his results, though they differ from those of M. Pelouze. 

With regard to the processes of manufacture, Mr. Abel has proved by 
experiments, both in the laboratory and on a manufacturing scale, that 
Baron von Lenk’s method, although it does not at first sight present any 
important features of novelty, yet unquestionably ensures the attamment of 
greater uniformity and purity of the product, though Mr. Abel has him- 
self suggested one or two modifications of importance. The most valuable 
practical result deduced by Mr. Abel from his experiments is, that the 
instability which has been observed in certain samples of gun-cotton, pro- 
ducing the gradual decomposition of such samples by prolonged keeping, is 
due to insufficient purification of the material employed, in consequence of 
which oxidized products of small quantities of resinous and other foreign 
substances are formed in the manufacture, and are still retained by the tu- 
bular fibre of the cotton. These undergo decomposition, and the change 
extends to the mass. Many of these impurities are removed by the action 
of the alkaline bath upon the cotton before treating it with the nitric and sul- 
phuric acids, and others may in great measure be dissolved by a final boil- 
ing with a weak alkaline solution. 

_ Mr. Abel’s paper is an important contribution towards a more complete 

knowledge than has hitherto obtained of the precautions which are required 
in the manufacture of gun-cotton in order to diminish still further both 
the risk of accidents, and the liability to injury of the material when not 
stored,—as it ought invariably to be when no paramount reason requires an 
exception,—either under water or ina state of moisture precluding ignition. 

Since my Address last year little has been done in regard to the success- 
ful application of gun-cotton to the large ordnance employed in the public 
service. The desideratum for this purpose may be stated to be a form of 
cartridge, which with the required velocity of the projectile on quitting the 
piece, shall have produced an approach to an equality of strain upon every 
point of the bore, from the instant of ignition to that of the discharge. 
{n the absence of a test of the degree to which this is accomplished, ex- 
periments on different forms of the cartridge are necessarily tentative, and 


278 Anniversary Meeting. [Nov. 80, 


the instruction derived from them of comparatively little value. The pro- 
duction of an apparatus by which the actual strain experienced in successive 
parts of the bore may be recorded, is in fact the first step in a scientific 
inquiry which should establish the proper relations between the form of 
the cartridge and the gun. But for the production of an efficient appara- 
tus for this purpose, a chronoscope of greater delicacy and perfection than 
any we have hitherto possessed in England is indispensable. A chrono- 
scope recently devised by Captain Schultz of the French Artillery appears, as 
far as can be judged previous to a practical trial, to correspond to these 
conditions, and to be likely to supply a means of surmounting the difficulty ; 
it is not improbable that it will be tried in the present year. 


I proceed to the award of the Medals. 

The Copley Medal has been awarded to Professor Julius Pliicker, Foreign 
Member of the Royal Scciety, for his researches in Analytical Geometry, 
Magnetism, and Spectral Analysis. 

To an audience not exclusively mathematical it is obviously impossible 
to enter into details of researches which deal with geometrical questions of 
no ordinary difficulty. Amongst these, however, may be indicated, as 
especially appreciated by those who are interested in the progress of ana- 
lytical geometry, his theory of the singularities of plane curves as developed 
in the “ Algebraische Curven,”’ with its six equations connecting them 
with the order of the curves: the papers on point and line coordinates and 
on the general use of symbols, may also be noticed as establishing his claim 
to a position in the department of abstract science which is attained by 
few even of those who give to it their undivided attention. But Professor © 
Plicker has high merits in two other widely different fields of research, 
viz. in Mapuietici and oe y: and to these I may more freely invite 
your attention. 

Shortly after Faraday’s aiveteioen of the sensibility of bodies generally to . 
the action of a magnet and of diamagnetism, Professor Plucker, in re- 
peating some of Faraday’s experiments, was led to the discovery of magne- 
cerystallic action,—that is, that a crystallized body behaves differently in the 
magnetic field according to the orientation of certain directions in the 
crystal. The crystals first examined were optically uniaxal, and it was 
found that the optic axis was driven into the equatorial position ; (that is, of 
course, assuming that the magnecrystallic action is not masked, in conse- 
quence of the external form of the body, by the paramagnetic or diamag- 
netic character of the substance). New facts, discovered both by Faraday 
and by Plucker himself, led him to a modification of this law, to the effect 
that the optic axis was impelled, according to the nature of the crystal, 
either into the equatorial or the axial position. This subject was after- 
wards followed out by Professor Pliicker into the more complicated cases 
in which the conditions of crystalline symmetry are such as to leave the 
crystal optically biaxal; and after having recognized the insufficiency of a 


1866. ] President’s Address. 279 


first empirical generalization of the law applicable to crystals of the rhom- 
bohedral or pyramidal system, and accordingly to uniaxal crystals, he was 
led to assimilate a crystal to an assemblage of small ellipsoids, capable of 
magnetic induction, having for their principal planes the planes of crystal- 
line symmetry where such exist ; and to apply Poisson’s theory. The re- 
sult of this investigation is contained in an elaborate paper read before the 
Royal Society in 1857, and published in the Philosophical Transactions for 
the following year. In this paper Professor Plucker has deduced from 
theory, and verified by careful experiments, the mathematical laws which 
regulate the magnecrystallic action. These laws have not necessarily in- 
volved in them the somewhat artificial hypothesis respecting the magnetic 
structure of a crystal from which they were deduced; and at the close of 
his memoir Professor Pliicker recognizes the theory of Professor Sir William 
Thomson, with which he then first became acquainted, as a sound basis on 
which they might be established. The laws, however, remain identically 
the same in whichever way they may he derived. 

Another subject to which Professor Pliicker has paid much attention is the 
curious action of powerful magnets on the luminous electric discharge in glass 
tubes containing highly rarefied gas. In this case the luminous discharge 
is found to be concentrated along certain curved lines or surfaces. He has 
succeeded in obtaining the mathematical definition of these curved lines or 
surfaces, by a simple application of the known laws of electromagnetic ac- 
tion, regarding an element of the discharge as the element of an electric 
current. With regard to the blue negative light, for instance, starting 
from a point in the negative electrode, he has shown that there are two 
totally distinct paths, one or other of which, according to circumstances, it 
may take, going either with the enclosed space along a line of magnetic 
force, or else along the surface of the glass in what he calls an “ epipolic 
curve,”’ which is the locus of a point in which the inner surface of the ves- 
sel is touched by the line of magnetic force passing through that point. 

Angstrém appears to have been the first to notice that the spectrum of 
the electric spark striking between metallic electrodes through air on an- 
other gas at ordinary pressures is a compound one, consisting of very bright 
lines varying with the metal, and others, usually less bright, depending only 
on the gas. Under the circumstances which presented themselves in his 
experiments, the latter can frequently be but ill observed ; and the diffused 
light of a rarefied gas in a wide tube is but faint, and does not form very 
definite spectra. But Pliicker found that by employing tubes which were 
capillary in one part, brilliant light and definite spectra were obtained in 
the narrow part. These spectra were observed by him with great care, 
and were found to be characteristic of the several gases and to indicate 
their chemical nature, though the gases might be present in such minute 
quantity as utterly to elude chemical research. It further appeared that 
compound gases of any kind were instantaneously, or almost instantaneously, 


280 Anniversary Meeting. [Nov. 30, 


decomposed; at least the spectra they offered were the spectra of their 
constituents. pages 

In a recent memoir, which has only just been published in the Philoso- 
phical Transactions, Professor Pliicker has investigated the two totally dif- 
ferent spectra frequently afforded by the same elementary substance accord- 
ing as it is submitted to the instantaneous discharge of a Leyden jar charged 
by an induction-coil, or rendered incandescent by the simple discharge of 
the coil, or else, in some cases, by ordinary flames. The two spectra show 
a remarkable difference in character, and are not merely different in the 
number and position of the lines which they show. Some phenomena 
which he had previously noticed receive their explanation by this twofold 
spectrum. 

This difference of spectra is attributed by Professor Plicker, with the 
greatest probability, to a difference in the temperature of the flowing gas 
when the two are respectively produced. The discovery opens up a new 
field of research, the exploration of which may throw much light on the 
correct interpretation of celestial phenomena, especially in relation to the 
physical condition of nebular and cometary matter. 


Proressor Miter, 


As we have not the pleasure of the presence of Professor Plicker, I 
must request you, as our Foreign Secretary, to transmit to him this 
Medal. He will see in it the strongest evidence of the high estimation in 
which his labours in various lines of scientific research are held in this 
country ; and I trust you will also express to him the great pleasure which 
this award gives to his numerous friends here, some of whom have been 
his fellow-labourers in the same researches. 


A Royal Medal has been awarded to Mr. William Huggins for his 
Researches on the Spectra of some of the Chemical Elements, and on the 
Spectra of certain of the Heavenly Bodies; and especially for his Re- 
searches on the Spectra of the Nebule, published in the Philosophical 
Transactions. 

The researches on the stellar spectra referred to in this award were made 
by Mr. Huggins conjointly with our highly valued Treasurer and senior 
Vice-President, Dr. William Allen Miller. The position of the latter as 
one of the officers of the Society and a member of its Council has forbidden 
the consideration of his claims to share in the honours which the Society 
can bestow; and in conformity with the spirit of this, our “self-denying 
ordinance,” it would be my duty to dwell seer on the merits of our 
Medallist, if, indeed, it were possible in this case to separate between the 
merits of the two authors of the conjoint research. This is scarcely 
possible, and I must be excused, therefore, if I sometimes speak of them 
together. 


1866. ] Presideni’s Address. . 281 


Fraunhofer, Lamont, and others have at various times attempted to ob- 
serve the spectra of the planets and fixed stars; yet, though provided with 
powerful instruments, they obtained no important results. 

Mr. Huggins and Dr. Miller devised a method of seeking in the spectra 
of the fixed stars that evidence of the existence in them of known elementary 
substanees which had been obtained in the case of the sun by Bunsen and 
Kirchhoff. A preliminary investigation of the spectra of the more im- 
portant of the terrestrial chemical elements, and their direct comparison 
with the lines in the spectrum of commen air, was undertaken by Mr. 
Huggins, with the view of providing a standard scale of comparison, which, 
unlike the solar spectrum, would be always at hand when stellar observa- 
tions are possible. This was in itself a work of enormous labour; and when 
completed, the spectra of the fixed stars, including those of some double 
stars of contrasted colours, were attacked by the two investigators; and 
by a happy adaptation of comparatively moderate instrumental means, and 
unwearied diligence in observing and determining by micrometrical mea- 
surements the positions of objects that ail but elude human vision, their 
researches have been rewarded by the most complete success. 

The spectra of the stars were compared by a method of simultaneous 
observation with the spectra of many of the terrestrial elements. It is 
upon this method of direct comparison that the trustworthiness of the 
results obtained chiefly depends, and in this respect these observations 
stand alone. . [In 1815 Fraunhofer recognized several of the solar lines in 
the spectra of the Moon, Venus, and five of the fixed stars. In 1862 
Donati published diagrams of three or four lines in fifteen stars. Re- 
cently Secchi, Rutherford, and the Astronomer Royal have given dia- 
grams of the positions, obtained by measurement only, of a few strong 
lines in several stars.] Eighteen stars have afforded spectra containing 
lines coinciding with the lines of many of the elementary substances. In 
thirty-seven more the spectra are full of lines which have not yet been 
fully compared. 

On extending these researches to the Nebule, Mr. Huggins made the 
most unexpected discovery that the spectra of certain of these bodies are 
discontinuous, consisting of bright lines only, whence he drew the conclu- 
sion that “in place of an incandescent solid or liquid body transmitting 
light of all refrangibilities through an atmosphere which intercepts by ab- 
sorption a certain number of them—such as our sun appears to be—we 
must probably regard these objects, or at least their photo-surfaces, as 
enormous masses of luminous gas or vapour. For it is alone from matter 
in a gaseous state that light consisting of certain definite refrangibilities 
only, as is the case with the light of these nebule, is known to be emitted.” 

During the last two years Mr. Huggins has examined the spectra of more 
than sixty nebule and clusters. This examination shows that these re- 
markable bodies may be divided into two great groups: viz. Ist, érue or 
gaseous nebule, which furnish a discontinuous spectrum, consisting of two 


282 Anniversary Meeting. [Nov. 30, 


or three bright lines only ; and 2nd, what we may distinguish as spurious 
nebule, or nebulous matter with clusters, which give a spectrum apparently 
continuous. Of the latter group a large proportion show signs of resol- 
vability into clusters by telescopes of high power. 

In the present year also Mr. Huggins has made a remarkable observa- 
tion upon the small comet, known as comet No. 1, 1866. He ascertained 
that the minute nucleus gave a gaseous or discontinuous spectrum ; whilst 
the spectrum of the coma, as though formed by suspended particles which ° 
reflected solar light, gave a continuous spectrum. 

Since the publication of these results by Mr. Huggins, our investigators 
have examined with great care the spectrum of the star which is either new 
or has greatly increased in brilliancy in Corona borealis, and have found 
that that star has a spectrum of absorption, and also a gaseous spectrum 
of which hydrogen is probably the source. They have also connected, in 
one instance at least, the change in a variable star with a variation in its 
spectrum. : 

Discoveries like these, which acquaint us not only with the constituents 
of the heavenly bodies but also with their state of aggregation, are of the 
nature of those which occur only once in the course of centuries,—like 
the discovery of the satellites of planets, of solar spots, or of double stars, 
—and have the strongest possible claim on the Royal Society for such 
honours as the Society has at its disposal. 


Mr. HvueGerns, 

It gives me the greatest pleasure to present you with this Medal: a 
testimonial of the very high estimation in which your successful labours 
(conjointly with Dr. Miller) are held by the Society, which has the satis- 
faction of regarding you as one of its most distinguished Members. You 
are at an age at which you may reasonably indulge in the prospect of 
having a long career before you; yet, however long, it will scarcely exhaust 
the noble field of research which you hare opened for yourself, and which 
is one in which you are quite sure to be accompanied by the sympathy of 
men of science throughout the world. 


A Royal Medal has been awarded to Mr. Wilham Kitchen Parker for 
his researches in Comparative Osteology, and more especially on the Ana- 
tomy of the Skull, as contained in papers published in the Transactions of 
the Zoological Society and the Philosophical Transactions. 

Mr. Parker has for several years past made investigations of great extent 
and distinguished merit among the Foraminifera, the results of which are 
embodied in Memoirs published by him from 1859 to 1865, in conjunc- 
tion with Professor Rupert Jones and with Dr. Carpenter in the Annals 
of Natural History, the publications of the Ray Society, and the Philo- 
sophical Transactions. 

The award of a Royal Medal to Mr. Parker has been based, however, 


1 866. | President’s Address. 283 


not so much on his work in this department of zoology as on his labours 
in a very different and much more difficult branch of anatomy, Vertebrate 
Osteology. , 

In 1860 Mr. Parker published a memoir “On the Osteology of Baleni- 
ceps Rex,” and in 1862 another “On the Osteology of the Gallinaceous 
Birds and Tinamous,” in the Transactions of the Zoological Society ; 
while a third still more important memoir, on the “Skull of the Ostrich 
Tribe,” was read before the the Royal Society in March 1865, and is now 
published in the Philosophical Transactions. In these elaborate and 
beautifully illustrated memoirs, Mr. Parker has not only displayed an ex- 
traordinary acquaintance with the details of Osteology, but has shown 
powers of anatomical investigation of a high order, and has made important 


contributions towards the establishment of the true theory of the vertebrate 
skull. 


Mr. WituiAM KircHen PARKER, 

I present you with this Medal in testimony of the high esteem in which 
your investigations are held by those of our body who are qualified to 
appreciate them, and who look at once with approval and with expectation 
at the increased and still increasing interest of the communications contri- 
buted by you to our Transactions. 


The Council have awarded the Rumford Medal to M. Armand Hippo- 
lyte Louis Fizeau for his Optical Researches, and especially for his Inves- 
tigations into the Effect of Heat on the Refractive Power of Transparent 
Bodies. . 

In 1849 M. Fizeau rose into celebrity as the experimenter who first 
succeeded in measuring the velocity of light by observations limited to 
objects on the surface of the earth. Ue noted the time required for the 
passage of light from the place of the observer to a mirror, normal to the 
path of the light, 8633 metres distant, and back again, by means of a 
wheel having 720 teeth revolving rapidly. When the wheel made 126 
revolutions in 10 seconds, the light that had passed through the notch 
between two teeth towards the mirror was stopped completely on its re- 
turn, after reflexion, by the second of the two teeth; showing that the light 
had travelled 17,266 metres while the wheel had revolved through half the 
angle subtended at its centre by the distance between the summits of two 
adjacent teeth, or ~;1,; second. 

In 1859 he wrote a remarkable memoir, “Sur une expérience qui parait 
démontrer que le mouvement des corps change la vitesse avec laquelle 
la lumiére se propage dans leur intérieur.”’ 

His ‘‘ Méthode propre a rechercher si l’azimuth de polarisation du 
rayon refracté est influencé par le mouvement du corps réfringent”’ (1860) 
involves such complicated arrangements that great hesitation was felt 
about accepting the results. But whoever has seen his experiments on the 


284 : Anniversary Meeting. [Nov. 30, 


expansion and the alteration of the refrangibility of bodies when heated, 
is not disposed to question any conclusions regarded by Fizeau himself as 
well founded. 

In 1862 he published ‘‘ Recherches sur les modifications que subit la 
vitesse de la lumiére dans le verre et plusieurs autre corps solides sous 
influence de la chaleur,”—the first of a series of memoirs on the change of 
dimensions and refractive powers of various kinds of glass, and many erys- 
tallized substances. 

On the 23rd of May, 1864, he read before the Institut ‘‘ Recherches 
_ sur la dilatation et la double refraction du cristal de roche échauffé ;”? and_ 
on the 21st and 28th of May, 1866, “Mémoires sur la dilatation des 
corps solides par la chaleur.” 

In these observations he has availed himself of the possibility of forming 
Newton’s rings with the monochromatic sodium light when one of the in- 
terfering rays is 52,205 waves in advance of the other, a fact which, con- 
jointly with M. Foucault, he announced in 1849. Using the length of a 
wave of sodium light (0:0005888 millimetre) as the standard of measure, 
the position of a ring being observable to within 54, of the distance be- 
tween two consecutive rings, the variation of the distance between two 
surfaces producing the Newton’s rings can be measured to within =;4,7 
millimetre. 

A plate of the substance to be experimented on (let us suppose it to be 
fluor), usually from 10 to 15 millimetres thick, bounded by parallel plane 
surfaces, rests upon the platform of a metal tripod (the metal was steel in 
the earlier observations, platinum with ;/, of iridium in the later). The 
feet of the tripod are screws of equal lengths venga tine above in obtuse 
poimts. On these points, at a distance of about =, millimetre above the 
upper surface of the fluor, rests a plate of glass. By counting the number 
of rings or bands that pass over a mark on the upper surface of the fluor 
during a given change of temperature, the corresponding variation of dis- 
tance between the lower surface of the glass and the upper surface of the 
fluor is given, and the expansion of the metal beg known by a similar 
process, the expansion of the fluor is found. 

The Newton’s rings formed between the two surfaces of the fluor depend 
upon its thickness and its refractive power. The number of rings that 
pass over the mark on the fluor during a given change of temperature being 
observed, and its expansion having been found by the preceding observa- 
tion, the change of its refractive power due to the change of temperature 
becomes known. 

in this way M. Fizeau obtained several very unexpected results. Of 
these a few may be noticed. 

The indices of refraction of most substances were found either to increase 
or to remain unaltered with an increase of temperature, but in fluor the 
index of refraction diminishes with an increase of temperature. Diamond, 
cuprite, and beryl have a maximum density, like water—diamond at 


1866. ] President’s Address. 285 


_ —42°°3 C., cuprite at —4°°3, and beryl at —4°-2. Beryl, when heated, 
unlike calcite, contracts in the direction of its axis, and expands in a 
direction making right angles with the axis. Quartz, rutile, cassiterite, 
spartalite, corundum, and hematite were found to expand in every direc- 
tion when heated; but in each case the expansion in the direction of the 
principal axis was different from the expansion in a direction at right angles 
to the principal axis. 

M. Fizeau is also the author of many other important Tecemehes en 
Moser’s images, on photography, on the automatic engraving of photogra- 
phic images on copper, on the interference of rays of heat, on electricity 
and the velocity of its propagation, and on the position of the plane of po- 
larization of light reflected from striated metallic surfaces. 


Prorressor Minuer, 

I have to request you to transmit this Medal to Monsieur Fizeau, in 
testimony of our interest in his researches and our high respect for his 
merits, which you have yourself been especially instrumental in placing in 
a clear light before the Council. 


On the motion of Vice-Chancellor Sir W. Page Wood, seconded by Mr. 
Hogg, it was resolved,—‘‘ That the thanks of the Society be returned to 
the President for his Address, and that he be requested to allow it to be 
printed.” 


The Statutes relating to the election of Council and Officers having been 
read, and Mr. Balfour Stewart and Mr. C. V. Walker having been, with 
the consent of the Society, nominated Scrutators, the votes of the Fellows 
present were collected ; and the following were declared duly elected as 
Council and Officers for the ensuing year :— 

President.—Lieut.-General Edward Sabine, R.A., D.C.L., LL.D. 
Treasurer.—William Allen Miller, M.D., LL.D. 

William Sharpey, M.D., LL.D. 

George Gabriel Stokes, Esq., M.A., D.C.L., LL.D. 
Foreign Secretary.—Professor William Hallows Miller, M.A., LL.D. 
Other Members of the Council.—Lionel Smith Beale, Esq., M.D.; Wil- 

liam Bowman, Esq. ; Commander F. J. Owen Evans, R.N.; Edward Frank- 

land, Esq., Ph.D.; John Hall Gladstone, Esq., Ph.D. ; William Robert 

Grove, Esq., M.A., Q.C. ; William Huggins, Esq.; Thomas Henry Huxley, 

Esq., LL.D. ; William Lassell, Esq.; Professor Andrew Crombie Ramsay, 

LL.D.; Colonel William James Smythe, R.A.; William Spottiswoode, Esq., 

MA.; Thomas Thomson, M.D. ; William Tite, Esq. ; Vice-Chancellor Sir 

_W. P. Wood, D.C.L.; The Lord Wrottesley, M.A., D.C.L. 


The thanks of the Society were voted to the Scrutators. 


Secretaries.— { 


0 eee eee 


‘pung [epeyy Sojdop puv uvroyeg—xyooyg -yuog aod $¢ mont “pg ‘8G CTCF . 
‘soNMUUYW YAV| popeprposuoy “PL “SGT 696'SF 
‘sonmuuy “yue) ted ¢ poonpey 000'F1F 
: ‘umnuue tad eF ‘suvtorskyg Jo oSoT[oH oyy WOIT TIIET Yoquiery ye oyes0 ue JO queda Teapo oY} JO YIYY-2uE 
‘unuus dod sp ETF Jot ‘xassng ‘semery] 1vou vay o9;T 
‘tanuue tod “pO sO OLIF (Ca TT “XS Vv FE) Xosolpprpy ‘Wo; ye oyeASq7 
‘umuue red “pO s0 9STF ‘(a ZAG ‘V GG) eamtysupooury ‘odaompetqeyy 9 oyeIS7 


‘spung ysiny, burpngour ‘hparoy yohoey ayp fo hzuadoug pun sagngssy 


[Nov. 30, 


“LOMNSDOA T. 
$ ‘AATIIN NATIV WVITTIM 
co —_—_—_——— 
= It 91 c6erF LL 9L SOCEF 
S 8 eT 8 Pein hears aatlger Eeeegerarsse<-> sumosoy yseC) Ayer. << 
RM 6 61 SI eer eeseee iui) 2) eines ogumaiag WOOD Hp onsojeyeg jo oourleg 
= TL 8 QQ ities sumer 9B eouRpeg 
‘8 G GI 669E 
= (0 61% (ysueg ssomvp 4g Jo 100g) oanqoory uetUOOID 
cy | Gi AO es Se laren ‘oINJoNT plmtpaey ‘surqqeyg “aq. “Aoy 
4 00 F “CCT eIngooyT UBMeye” ‘[omxXey, WTO “f 
6 LT 661 Oo CLR oT ei OR Eiger cee Petes “puny Tepe Loqdog 
0 G ce eS a eeeia ee  a O1UTANY | ULVYSULTPUT AA 
ee ee. Sn ee aay |S ol ge Bete ee ee 
G 6 €QF wee e cece ose eee eree (poutolqns OAT, god sv) sosuodxqy [etouey 0 e 96 eeese eee escescescece eeccce eevcere ye ees Ss quou Ledoy 
8 FI FECT DOW OU COO OCCA ORUOOOCOOTO ODOC Coon Aydeasouqry pue ‘OUIABLOUTL Z 0 ERE Soleis\e\sje/sinieisicie\s eaieisiaveisiais Pens, "Ox SSUTPIDIO. SUOTIOVSUB.LT, JO 9[BG 
‘Surpurg. ‘rodeg ‘sSutpooo0rg pue SUOTOVSUBIT, Ssuryutig 9 0 C25 po000 nodosnene d60500 eiagpfalelefsleleinietareiatetstcieiaiare GAboneoD ** spun qsnay, oI 
9 91 eee Peers ere ee reece seee cece ecce surpurg pue ArvIQuys out IOF syoog e OL TFSI Ceo r ese rsccrsvccesesseecesesesensacecece eee eesceeeasesene ~~ -Spueprarc. 
ie 12) UY) ee eee SHOR AD BGO OOO STN OOME seins ongorRye9 OYUN oT, 0 81 gee We squoyy 
OtEZTeeOt eee pies d mane sseerreereeserese TIOTSUOT PUB ‘sodBAA ‘SoLIvTE 0 9L L69L °“‘suortsodum0y pur ‘soa,7 uoIsstuIpy ‘suoydiosqnyg tenuuy 
OL L ¢@~ ccc sit teeeeereessestereererese gaguREr Of ONP OOUL[UT 06 Gl oc" vi etesereseetessevsessesstesesueeuecsrseeses “DUVTT HO SOOURTRT 
3s F ci) as arta 


286 


“OOST ‘og AOQUWALOAT PUD ‘COQT rT: waquiaoagy w20mgaq hyowoy qohioay ay} {oe squawmhng pun spdwooay 


287 


Ol 6 POSEF 


"LadNSDONT, 


‘HTN NATIV WVITTIM 


Pe eceeseoretees ore seesseses 


Ober sses ee eneececscce 9981 ‘Oe “AO NT 
4 LI LOOF sues IwoX oY} UI emmyipuedxy 10 ouO0UT JO ssooxm < 


Q 9 Fe vec eee eco ee nee erceee “S98 rey An0g pue ‘sponte g ‘aseysog ee a 

9 Cl 6 Cee Foe verses ececreecesceeeeces ceescece er encoee sec ccerree ° SUISTJIOAPW 

OL L OZ eet ee es eee eer eccese eee ae cose econe gee ae 2 ROBUEAC Xi, MRT 

Zbl woah ves Dip ate oe atten eave EN bstcaeas - SOXBT, 

022 Sreeeeeeeeseresereoesssses sTooYOR edroyjzolqe—: uoryeuoq 016 Fee “" gogT ‘Og ‘AON Surpuo avax oyg ut emppuodxgy 

9 TI 8 ete skd. .e tran Redvers. std. BOtEA ooueANSULT OL Ge hcoise: cee de aoly Suiine ncaa om moore neouona 

1 Z 6F seece ee cesevce eee ete secece Seem eee e cece rece a cecseceseee sosuodxq BOT, ae: 

6 9 OGL rsseesss “sdurggy-sey pue ‘Suyysry ‘jeop OL Gea eee "5" SBiQ— SOY SO81000 “99 

0 6 6e ee eecescece Cre ercascece eceeee em ececnce ecee sosuod xq SNOIULT[OOST IAL 0 8 7 sey ‘gay }TULUIOD WOYVUTLALXT [ROOT aspriqmeg 

5 8 8 QP OS Sia ala See eg suedoy pue ‘Suruveio ‘Kraqspoyd 9, Bilis Gee ere aoe fen altie asta lieaiaeiqus ostseew Gaennee sSurjoopy 

= b OL SG UU dydeasouyry pure Sumeasug a 73 Vinal qe sex ‘yoroog yeormdeaSoaxy 
= CEG ou fee “oqTp SuUIyOIYG pur Ssurpulg Qe pe Oj sete ee ee eeeee sosuodxm vay, ‘Ajoloog uvouUTT 
& G 91 82 ~" ssurpes001g puv suoyorsuedy, lof sodeg ¥ GI Gs 1c L OF cc sosuedxa vay, ‘Aoto0g JeorwmayyD 
Ss Seer Veei 0. Oe oy. es orks eee “* SNOSURT[SOSI IAL 0}41C Oe20: 200 eee “"" QQ-COQT ‘sdurpeas0rg tof ‘Ayot00g [vormeyD 
DM 6 FI O16 GN ee ease eee 98-8), “SON, ‘souTpoa00ag OIC Z(t CRG eee te eee “ony ‘SSULpea001g ‘suOTJORSUBA, jo o[eg 
= 6 ene Bilstein meee a Y98T “I qd G 9 FFG ee aise SAGES Siew qsonbeg tosuaAeig 0 6 
co ie | Se eee eee COsT IT Me suorjovsuery, suyuiag OTe 1662 = (spun ysnay, JO oArsnyoxe) yoo}g Uo spueprAtcy 
oe OO, ce Pe SO Was at 3 oqjtp Surpurey ee ty ee ee Tae ne Ua 
ss 0 Gc LEI Risisic ewe swepeccevecrercece OOOIOIOCIOOICINOICInC GiGi cs Axerquy eae 10 syooq 0 0 OIF oleielal eiwivlvielnlersiatslulefetsterereletaioreie Fcleeee pe eeceeverce a ececeecen suorpisodum0g 
is 9 LT SLT stegersleiefefoleteiafes=icis)a\efeletele oinivioie versie ereiarotere a cite ansoreyeg OYYUSLOG oy, 0 0 OLt SOM Gee ene es SonuiEephus GanoeDE pecan poocuoGad s00,] WOISSIUUpW 

Cai. “erro Yost pue Se8e Ay Sonepeg | O OL TIL eee suomduosqng penuiry 

Si = ps F 

"99ST “OG “aquianoyr buapua maz oyp bununp (spung greg, wo. indy) oinppuedag pun auoour fo yuawanrgy 
OL VI ler OL PL SLEeF 
| ee BLL QL itt Htreeeeeeeereeeeveeeceeeseies BO TODTATCT 

OL FL E1zG Ripe ease eC soured Ooi tate nelle tole vaternveeiwier anuocdodaas bone Sco000 seca eee enee suorjdiazosqng 

0 0 O9T SE ee ee eer kg g OL IT CO r cere reser rereesersceneeeeeseesenssace ee corres cece ees ececee oourleg 

i) ees Ds 

“40 8 LI Ga09F sd 


8 Jatt FACOG 7a uaa On cE 


sonmuuy ‘quey red ¢ mony ‘gggT Ame 07 dn syuouyseauT 


VOL. XV. 


‘pung foyaay oufiquoroy 


288 Financial Statement. [Nov. 80, 


The following Table shows the progress and present state of the Society 
with respect to the number of Fellows :— 


Patron Having | Paying | Paying 
and |Foreign., com- | £212s.| £4 | Total. 

Royal. pounded. | annually. | annually. 
November 30, 1865. 6 47 309 3 274 639 
Since, elected: -2 2 of et. +3 ay eee +9 +18 
Since reauwatted 2 2’) 5% 20 gah oease Met seen eee +1 +1] 
Sinee compounded.”.| .>-...42...... 41) hese —1 
Since deceased ....| —1 —1 | —14 }j......] —15 | —3l 
Sinceyderaulter?: <a. |2. 5. nome wos PO ee Bie eye —1 —] 


November 30, 1866. 3 267 626 


Or 
— 
Nes) 
© 
i=) 
bo 


yy 


Prt, 

Lae) 
4 
CxO 
>) 


Ne 


MN fe) i 


61, 


y 40% 


1866. ] My. T. G. Bunt on Tide-Observations. 289 


December 6, 1866. 
-Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The President announced that he had appointed the following Members 
of the Council to be Vice-Presidents :— 
The Treasurer, 
Mr. Bowman, 
Mr. Spottiswoode, 
Vice-Chancellor Sir W. Page Wood. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “ Discussion of Tide-Observations at Bristol’? By T. G. Bunt, 
Esq. Communicated by the Astronomer Royal. Received October 
24, 1866. 

(Abstract.) 


This Paper contains the results of a Discussion of about 19,000 obser- 
vations of Times and Heights of High Water at Bristol, for the purpose of 
obtaining the Empirical Laws of the Diurnal Inequalities of the Times and 
Heights, and of the Solar Inequality of the Times, of the tides at that port. 
Curves on Diagrams which accompany the Paper exhibit the results. 

The Observations were taken by a Self-registering Tide-Gauge, the 
Clock of which has from the first been regulated by transit observation. 

The Diurnal Inequalities of the tides at Bristol are not large, that of 
time averaging only 2 minutes (earlier or later), and that of height 23 
inches (greater or less). 

Although it was stated by Sir John W. Lubbock (a 1839) that the diurnal 
ee in time is too minute to be observed on our coasts, the slightest 
examination of the Diagram (No. 4) will be sufficient to ie that 
this remark is inapplicable to Bristol. On this diagram are laid down 
the times and heights of tide registered there during six months of the 
year 1865. In consequence of the tranquil state of the weather, the 
agreement of the observed with the predicted times was unusually close ; 
the average error in time, during the six months, being only 23 minutes, 
and for six weeks less than 1°9 minute. The diurnal inequality, of time 
as well as of height, is throughout the diagram most conspicuous; and 
the agreement of the calculated with the observed inequality close and 
satisfactory. 

For each of the Diurnal Inequalities, the residues, or errors, of the cal- 
culated Times and Heights were arranged for every half month, and for 
each of the twenty-four hours of Lunar transit, making (24 x 24=) 576 
Groups. The averages of these, laid down in Curves, are shown in Dia- 
grams No. | and 2. | 

Diagram No 3 shows the Solar Inequality of Time, obtained in a similar 
VOL, XV. 2B 


290 Messrs. Balfour Stewart and Tait on the Heating [Dee. 6, 


manner, together with curves of the separate effects of the Solar Parallax 
and Solar Declination. 

A sheet from the Tide-Gauge Cylinder has also been sent, as a specimen 
of the regularity of the registered Curves in tranquil weather. 


II. “On the Heating of a Disk by rapid Rotation in vacuo.” By 
Batrour Stewart, M.A., F.R.S., and P.G. Tarr, M.A. (Con- 
tinuation of a Paper read before the Royal Society on June 15, 
1865, and published -in the Blea *) Received October 
30, 1866. 


16. The apparatus and certain preliminary experiments having been 
described in the previous paper, the authors now proceed to relate what 
further experiments have been made. : 

In the preliminary experiments it was conclusively shown (art. 8) that 
the effect on the pile caused by rotation of the disk was due to radiant 
heat, and also (art. 9) that this effect was not due to the heating of the 
rock-salt, which in most of the experiments was placed before the mouth 
of the cone. 

it was also rendered probable that the effect was not due ee radiation 
from heated air, by the two following considerations :— 

(1) Because in order that nearly dry air of such a tenuity might give 
such a radiation it would require to be heated enormously. 

(2) Because when the lampblack was removed from the aluminium disk, 
leaying it a rough metallic surface, the indication afforded by the galvano- 
meter was reduced to about one-fourth of the amount with the blackened 
disk. 

The following observations tend to strengthen this proof: — 

(3) The heating effect is the same in hydrogen or in coal-gas as in air, 
although there is no question that the absorptive, and therefore the radia- 
tive power of coal-gas is much greater than that of air. This is shown by 
the following sets of experiments, which were made with the blackened 
aluminium disk insulated with ebonite, and with rock-salt in the cone. 


ls a iste | 2 8 &, 
7 =o mH Heat indication. BOO 
. S o a & ~ as =| 
@ lq pa 3 Z Lee inlay Nature | Tension |e — 4, a 
“ “of CS o- o eS ie | ee . a! eS we 
6S [fsa] o88 | SSB | Divi- of gos (ole 
= S28 ABS SS a sions Fahr ESS I 
VII. 2 30 22 22:5 H hydrogen| 0-6 95 
VIII. 3 3 22 23°3 Mie air 0-7 
EX yh 2 30 20 Ae 0°-95 {hydrogen} 05 97 
Ks 2 30 20 0°87 air 1-1 
XT. 3 30 20 0°85 |hydrogen} 0°25 98°5 
i 3 30 20 0°86 | coal-gas} 0:25 95 


may be objected to (2) that the greater heating effect from a 


1866.] of a Disk by rapid Rotation in vacuo. 291 


blackened aluminium disk than from an unblackened one does not prove 
that this heating effect may not be due to air, since the blackened surface 
may be imagined to lay hold of the air more than the metallic one. But 
the following sets of experiments prove that the heating effect of the alu- 
minium ne with both ‘sides blackened is the same as =e only one pide 
is blackened. 


z +3 = q a Oo oi 

8 (288/84 e lea ae 

bray O:-8 a ww «FO SBd4 - qo Ss (= pee 

[se S| Soe aisao! ASF | os 

o |OFS 238 SSH 8/280 | a's 

=. 5S a =) 

S 528 st Sos a moe RS) 

». 7 2 30 20 0:9 1-1 | Disk blackened on one side. 

KEELE: 3 30 20 0-8 0-4 | Disk blackened on both sides. 


Tt would therefore appear to be proved that in these experiments the 
heating effect is due to the increased temperature of the disk. 

17. Before proceeding further it may be advisable to detail some experi- 
ments made with an ebonite disk +4, inch thick. In these experiments 
care was taken that the ebonite should have the same temperature through- 
cut its thickness, so that there might be no flow of heat from the interior 
to the surface, or vice versa. 'The experiments were made with rock-salt 
in the cone. 


\ 1 1 a Q 
ES = Coa ae We o's 
3 2s a Bod ere BS Qik 
a5 aeaapo [aa ot Ss Tension |o 4 > 
Be 2a elo eo) mie eo 
4 a & Sr Zits gS a] “a |Nature off of gas,in|'3 8 |) 
3° OmGlo d0C/[S a4] wag : Towle. =) 
: -2 9/928] S| sss gas. { inches. [6 > 2 
° ° SLA ASO|owR Ss] 0-5-4 =x ROS 
7; a ey, Oo ee Ee Aa Se Se 
XIV. 3 30 20 32 air ist 
» 48 1 30 20 30 air 0:26 
XVI. if 30 20 31 air ta. 
XVII. 2 30 20 28°5 air 0°26 
XVIII. 2 30 20 28°5 air 0:25 
138 gays: 30 20 29 {hydrogen} 0-25 90 


From these experiments it may be taken for granted that the heat indi- 
cation given by an ebonite disk is, like that from an aluminium disk, inde- 
pendent both of the density and chemical constitution of the residual gas. 
It is also highly probable that the unknown cause of the heating effect is 
the same for both disks. 

18. To return now to the aluminium disk, it may be shown that the 
heating of this disk is not caused by revolution under the earth’s mag- 
netic force ; for (1) the following calculation, kindly furnished by Professor 
Maxwell, shows ‘Bet the heating effect due to this cause would, for the- 
aluminium disk =, of an mich in thickness, amount, under the circum- 
stances of idan, only to gph Of a degree Fahr., whereas the observed 
effect is more than half a degree. 


An ellipsoid, semiaxes a, 4, ec, revolves abot the axis c with velocity w, 
Dw 2 


292 Messrs. Balfour Stewart and Tait on the Heating {Dec. 6, 


in a uniform magnetic field. To find its electrical state at a given in- 
stant. At the given instant let the axes of 2, y, 2 coincide with a, 0, c; 
then using the notation in the paper on the Electromagnetic field *, 


dy dy . dw 
PS Oye Fg PP O— pOyy Gy deem —— he SY el a 
P QR electromotive force, ay magnetic intensity, W electric tension, 
#=coefficient of magnetic induction=1 for everything but iron, p, q,7 
electric currents, p=resistance of cubic unit of volume. 
The condition of the currents aie confined to the ellipsoid, is 


Eo al 
r+ at 25 
Solving, we get 
L afie aa _ pw ae} : oe ya by \e 
ae p @te *s Say pO +e? ee aes 74+ ¢ TRPLe _ 
wax Eby: 


v= Spwy (a +y°)— poe ay, 21 +5 4+ ¢? +C. 


This is the complete solution. The heat (measured as energy) pro- 
duced in unit of volume in unit of time is p(p?+¢ +7"). The whole heat 
produced in the aise’ in unit of time is 


Ar Eo aa [3°6? } 
00.2 sa - 
15 Al a a te Re 


2 


Tp ae 


oe 4 
If a=6, this is lp oe (a°+/°). 
If e is small compared with a, it becomes 


Ar 
is Katee(e +"). 


If the axis is horizontal, 
« +(°=H? sin’ 6+ V’, 
where H=horizontal magnetic force, and V=vertical magnetic force, and 
0=angle between the axis of rotation and the magnetic meridian, a=radius 
and ¢ half the thickness, w=2z7n, where denotes the revolutions per 
second; p=1; p is the resistance of unit length and unit section. 
Now, the resistance of 1 metre long and 1 millimetre diameter 


4 
=—§10°=0-0375 x 10° 


32 
3 


for aluminium in metrical units by Matthiessen, or == 
op is the same for metrical and for British measure. 
At Kew horizontal forcee=3°'81, dip 68°°10; @=90° in the experiments 
a’ + }°=104°8 British measure. 
The revolving body is not an ellipsoid but a cylinder, equally thick 
: 15 
throughout ; to correct for this we shall put 9 © fore. 
We get for the energy converted into heat by electrical action per 
second 12:91 in grain-foot-second measure. 
* Phil, Trans. 1865, p. 459. 


(1866.] of a Disk by rapid Rotation in vacuo. 293 


Now 772g=energy required to raise 1 grain of water 1° Fahr. 


The disk = — x22 grain of water, .*. energy corresponding to 1° 
32°2 
=e nie * 15400, 
12°91 12°91 


or rise of temperature per second= 575. 5400> 53716000 degree Fahr. © 


l : 
or about 61270 degree in 30 seconds. 


This is when the heat is uniformly distributed through the thickness of 
the disk, which it will be in less than thirty seconds. If there were no 
conduction, the rise of temperature at the surface would be about twice the 
value found above. 

(2) It would appear from the above formula that the heating effect due 
to this cause should increase with the thickness of the disk. The follow- 
ing experiments show that, on the contrary, the heating effect, as regards 
temperature, diminishes as the thickness of the disk increases. 


5 pe 5 =| s 2) ' So 
2/253). is oa 9 
Gey He oS Te ef SSS, ons On Ska 
“Ss |S85 Ea |\Sea Bs 80 [S55 
rh eH 7 oH” 
0 ee 30 20 0:8 0-4 | Aluminium disk 35 inch thick. 
>. De a 30 PALE 7 0-4 | Aluminium disk 4, inch thick. 


(3) The heat indication afforded by an ebonite disk is against the con- 
clusion that this effect is due to rotation under the earth’s magnetic force. 

It would therefore appear to be proved that in these experiments the 
increased temperature of the aluminium disk is not due to rotation under 
the earth’s magnetic force. 

19. It might perhaps be said that the heating of the disk may be due 
to heat conducted from the bearings into the disk and then distributed 
outwards ; and this conjecture will require to be examined, since the bear- 
ings are,no doubt, heated by friction during the motion. This heating 
effect on the bearings was measured by means of a very delicate thermo- 
meter, which was inserted into a small hole in the bush through which oil 
is supplied to the spindle, and made to be in metallic contact with the 
sides of this hole; the meanof three observations made the heating effect 
at the spindle due to rotation to be 4° Fahr. 

In the next place, the aluminium disk, separated from its metallic 
spindle by the ebonite washer, and in every respect the same as when 
made to rotate, had its spindle heated artificially by a mercury bath, gene- 
rally at least 40° Fahr. above the previous temperature. After the lapse of 
two minutes the effect upon the pile was hardly perceptible—not more 
than five divisions. 


1) It would appear from this experiment that the heating effect ob- 


294 ° Messrs. Balfour Stewart and Tait on the He coe) [Dec. 6 


served in rotation cannot be due to heat ‘conducted facia the bearings 
through the ebonite washer, since a temperature difference between the 
bearings and the disk ten times greater than that produced by rotation 
causes a heating effect at least six times less than that caused by rotation 
in a somewhat less time. 

(2) The ebonite washer used to prevent the heat of the bearings from 
reaching the aluminium disk, is a cylindrical disk, its thickness being two- 
tenths of an inch, and the area of one of its faces 3°15 square inches. It 
is shielded behind by a brass disk, of similar size, which brass disk being 
near the bearings, and metallically connected with them, we may suppose 
to have the same temperature as the bearings. Thus one face of the 
ebonite washer is in contact with brass, having the temperature of the 
bearings, while the other is in contact with the aluminium disk. Sup- 
posing that this washer, used to protect the aluminium disk from the heat 
of the bearings, was of iron instead of being of ebonite, we can calculate 
approximately from Principal Forbes’s determinations of the absolute 
conductivity of this metal, how much heat would be conducted across the 
washer during the experiment. According to these observations, if a cube 
of iron whose side is one foot, have one of its faces kept permanently at 
a temperature 1° C. higher than the opposite face, the quantity of heat 
conducted across in one minute will be ‘011 unit nearly, a unit denoting 
the amount of heat required to raise a cubic foot of water 1°C. Since 
in these observations both the temperature difference and the unit are 
expressed in the same thermometric degrees, we may, if we choose, sub- 
stitute degrees Fahr. for degrees Centigrade in the above expression for 
conductivity. Now, if we assume as an approximation that during the 
whole experiment of rotation the heat conducted across such a washer 
is the same as if for one minute the temperature difference between both 
sides of the washer were kept at 2° Fahr., and if we make allowance for 
the surface and for the thickness of the washer, we obtain the following 
expression as approximately representing the heat conducted across the 
washer during the experiment, 

Heat='011 x 2x ale = °028 unit nearly, 
144 °2 
where the first factor is on account of the double temperature difference, 
the second on account of the surface, and the third on account of the 
thickness. 

But a unit of heat in the above expression denotes the amount necessary 
to raise a cubic foot of water (or nearly 1000 ounces) 1° Fahr. Now the 
weight of the disk is 10°5 ounces, and its specific heat is0°22. Hence the 
above amount of heat will raise the disk 

1000. 1 
028 x —— 105 * +99 

Hence we see that if the material of the washer had been of the metal 

bismuth, of which the conductivity is 7 times less than that of iron, and if 


1866. | of a Disk by rapid Rotation in vacuo, 295 


we suppose the circumstances of the experiment to be equivalent to a tem- 
perature difference of 2° Fahr. between the two sides of the washer lasting 
for one minute, then the quantity of heat conducted across the washer will 
be a little greater than that observed. But the conductivity of ebonite is 
no doubt very much less than that of bismuth, and therefore on this 
account we cannot suppose that the heating effect observed is due to 
conduction. 

(3) In this investigation no account has been taken of the unequal dis- 
tribution of temperature from the centre to the circumference of the disk, 
the tendency of which would be to diminish the effect upon the pile (which 
was directed to the circumference of the disk) of the heat passing through 
the washer; and indeed, when this element is taken into account, it is not 
surprising to find, as was actually the case, that in some preliminary ex- 
periments, where the disk was metallically connected with the spindle, the 
effect was not greater than with the ebonite washer. 

(4) The short time in which the effect attains its maximum value is 
against the supposition that it is caused by conduction from the bearings. 

(5) The fact that (as we shall afterwards see) the temperature effect in 
three aluminium disks of different thicknesses is inversely proportional to 
the thickness, is also against this supposition. 

(6) And so is the fact that a heat-effect obeying apparently the 
same laws, holds for an ebonite disk in which there is but a very feeble 
conduction. ; 

On the whole, therefore, we cannot suppose this effect to be due to 
conduction, or at least we must conclude that the effect of conduction con- 
stitutes only an exceedingly small fraction of that observed. 

20. Itwas suggested to the authors by Professor Stokes and by Mr. Grove, 
that the effect might be due to vibrations of the disk, the energy of which, 
owing to the viscosity of the disk for such vibrations, might ultimately 
become converted into heat ; and it is necessary to examine this question. 

(1) The thickest aluminium disk was found to be out of truth not more 
than ‘015 inch on each side. Hence, the thickness of this disk being -05 
inch, when turned with moderate rapidity, its apparent thickness should be 


015 +°05+°015=08; 


and experiment showed that when turned very fast, its apparent thickness 
was no greater. ‘The greatest possible range of vibrations of the disk at 
its eircumference could not, therefore, be more than °015 inch on either 
side of the position of rest. 

Again, it was ascertained by means of the note given by this disk, that 
it vibrates about 250 times per second. 

Let us suppose the whole mass to have the same range of excursion 
(this will of course increase the result), the equation’ of vibration (nct 
allowing for loss by viscosity) is 


ar='015 cos ni 


296 Messrs. Balfour Stewart and Tait on the Heating [Dec. 6, 


and also time of vibration 


a 
n 50° 
Hence 
n= 500 x 3:14=1570, say, 
ly in. 3 : in. 
*. == —°015 x 1570 sin nt, .*. greatest velocity =23°55, 


or say 2 feet per second. 

Hence the energy of this motion in foot pounds, 
=weight of disk in pounds x = 
=weight of disk in pounds through +1, of a foot. 

But an approximate experiment performed by causing the disk to ring, 
and noticing how long the sound lasted, would seem to show that probably 
the energy of vibration of the disk diminishes at first, and therefore con- 
stantly (if it is maintained) at the rate of the whole in 3 seconds. Hence 
in 30 seconds it loses 10 times as much as the whole; that is to say, in 30 
seconds the heat produced cannot be greater than that due to the energy 
produced by the disk falling under gravity through 12 of a foot. Re- 
ducing this to its heat-equivalent, the greatest possible heat effect due to 
vibration during 30 seconds rapid et will be less than 


L0c..91 1 
16° 772°°-22 = agree 
which is a very small fraction of the effect observed. 

(2) The thin aluminium disk was out of truth about ‘02 inch on each 
side. Its note of vibration was as nearly as possible one octave lower 
than that of the thick disk, while its coefficient of viscosity was some- 
what greater, say in the proportion of 3 to 2, than that of the thick 
disk. On the supposition that the heat generated is due to vibration, if 
we call the heat generated during 30 seconds in the thick disk =], then 
that generated during the same time in the thin disk ought to be 


1x #* (a5) X2x$=4, 
where the first: factor is on account of difference of time of vibration, the 
second on account of difference of range, the third on account of difference 
of mass, and the fourth on account of difference of viscosity. 

But the heating effect (as far as quantity of heat 1s concerned) produced 
in the thin disk is as nearly as possible the same as that produced in the 
thick disk. 

This fact is therefore against the hypothesis that the heating effect is 
due to vibration. 

(3) In order to estimate the effect (if any) of want of truth in the disk, 
the thick aluminium disk was purposely put out of truth about 33 times 


S 


1866.] of a Disk by rapid Rotation in vacuo. 297 


its usual amount ; but the heating effect was as nearly as possible the 
same in both cases, being 32 divisions of the scale in both. 

On all these grounds it would appear that the heating effect cannot be 
due to vibration of the disk. 

21. It is hardly necessary to mention that the heating effect cannot be 
due to radiation and convection from the wheelwork, which is no doubt 
slightly heated during the experiment, for the mass of this metallic matter 
is so great, that we cannot imagine it to be heated more than 1° Fahr. 
Now the radiation from this against the back of the disk may certainly be 
neglected, while the convection must be very small, since in the experi- 
ments the pressure of the air was very small. Besides, the heating effect, 
as will be seen shortly, was found to be independent of the pressure. 

_22. It has thus been shown that the disk is heated during the experi- 
ment, and that this heating effect— 

(1) Is not due to rotation under the earth’s magnetic force ; 

(2) Is not due to conduction of heat from the bearings ; 

(3) Nor to radiation or convection from the wheelwork ; 

(4) Nor to vibrations of the disk. 

And in view of the large and constant nature of this heating effect it may 
be asserted that it cannot be sensibly due, either to one of these causes 
singly, or to their combined effect. 

23. It will now be shown that the heating effect is independent both 
of the density and chemical constitution of the residual air and vapour 
around the disk. 

In art. 16, if we compare together the 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th, 11th, and 
12th sets of experiments, we shall see that the heating effect was sensibly 
the same, whether the residual gas was atmospheric air, or hydrogen cr 
coal-gas. 

As hydrogen diffuses very quickly, it might perhaps be supposed that 
when heated by rotation it might find access to the pile through the rock- 
salt cover more easily than heated atmospheric air, so that while the whole 
effect might appear the same in hydrogen as in air, yet only part of that 
in hydrogen might be due to radiant heat, the remainder being due to 
heated gas which had obtained access to the pile. This was, however, dis- 
proved by an experiment, which showed that by blackening the interior 
of the cone, the effect upon the pile was just as much diminished in a 
hydrogen vacuum as in an air vacuum; and hence in both cases the whole 
effect is due to radiant heat. 

But, besides the residual gas, it may with truth be supposed that there 
is always more or less of aqueous vapour, and also a little of the vapour of 
oil, and perhaps of the vapour of mercury in the receiver. As regards the 
hygrometric state of the residual air and its influence on the disk, this would 
appear to be of the following nature :— 

(1) When the vacuum has just been made, there is generally a hygro- 
metric difference between the air and the surface of the disk, on account of 


298 On Heating of a Disk by rapid. Rotation in vacuo. [Dee. 6, 


which there is a strictly temporary effect, either in the direction of heat or - 
cold, at the surface of the disk, owing probably to condensation or evapora- 
_ tion of small quantities of aqueous vapour; but this effect disappears the 
moment the motion is stopped, leaving behind the permanent effect ap- 
parently unaltered. | 

(2) This temporary effect disappears when the disk has been left for 
some hours in the vacuum. 

Next, with regard to vapour of oil, we cannot suppose its effect to be so 
large or so different in character and constancy from that of aqueous vapour 
as to account for the effect observed. Add to this that the effect takes 
place with an uncoated metallic disk probably to the same extent as with 
acoated one. The same remark may be made with regard to vapour of 
mercury. The effect would therefore appear to be independent of the che- 
mical nature of the residual gas and vapour around the disk. ; 

In order to prove that this effect is also independent of the pressure of 
the residual gas, it is only necessary to refer to the whole body of experi- 
ments which have been described, to see that between 4 inches and 0°25 
inch there is no perceptible variation in the effect observed. 

24, The following generalization may now be made :— 

(1) If a perfectly true aluminium disk (without vibrations) be made to 
rotate in a vertical plane at the earth’s surface, after the manner herein 
described, there will be an increase of the temperature of the disk, which 
is not due to communication of heat from the bearings or machinery, nor 
to the earth’s magnetic force. 

(2) This heating effect is independent of the density and chemical con- 
stitution of the residual air and vapour which surround the disk. 

(3) Itis probable that the quantity of heat developed in disks of similar 
extent of surface and similar circumstances of motion is the same. For, 
in the first place, the quantity of heat developed in three aluminium disks, 
‘05, °0375, -025 of an inch in thickness respectively, would appear to be 
the same, the relative thermometric effect for these disks varying inversely 
as their thickness, and being in the following proportions, 30, 43, 60, as 
determined by one complete set of experiments. 

Again, the quantity of heat developed in the thick aluminium disk, with 
its surfaces both uncoated, was probably the same as when one surface was 
coated and one left bare, or as when both surfaces were coated. | 

25. The authors will not attempt here a further generalization, but 
_ they would desire to make one remark. In absence of definite know- 
ledge of the nature of that medium which transmits radiant light and 
heat, it might be supposed possible that when a radiant body is in rapid 
motion, the intensity of its radiation is somewhat increased. But if we 
bear in mind that in these experiments the effect was observed after 
bringing the disk to rest, and that the temporary effect during rotation 
sometimes observed can probably be otherwise accounted for, we are 
forced to conclude that, as far as we may judge from these experiments 


1866. ] Dr. John Davy on the Bones of Birds. 299 


(and they are of a very delicate nature), there is no perceptible effect of 
motion upon radiation. 

In conclusion the authors desire to say that they are much indebted to 
Mr. Beckley, who not only invented the apparatus, but assisted at all the 
experiments, and without whom they could not have been performed in a 
manner so satisfactory. They are also indebted to Mr. Atkinson for his 
kindness in lending them a large gasometer, and to Mr. Browning and 
Mr. Ladd for exceedingly true aluminium and ebonite disks. 


Ill. “ On the Bones of Birds at different Periods of their Growth.” 
By Joun Davy, M.D., F.R.S., &c. Received October 23, 
1866. 


In this paper I beg to submit to the Royal Society the results of some 
further observations on the bones of birds, and more especially on those 
bones which in the adult contain air. 

In offering them, F would wish them to be considered as a continuation 
of those communicated on a former occasion, and published in the Pro- 
ceedings of the Society™. 

In engaging in the inquiry I have had two objects chiefly in view: one 
to endeavour to determine whether at an early stage the bones, which at 
maturity contain air, differ essentially from those of birds which are then, 
and are permanently filied with marrow; another, to endeavour to ascer- 
tain in the instance of the former, the rate at which their early contents 
are absorbed, or an approximation to the time that air takes the place of 
the medulla. 

The birds of the first kind subjected to observation have been the follow- 
ing: the common fowl, duck, goose, turkey, pheasant, partridge, grouse, 
rook, common crow, owl, sparrow-hawk, buzzard, blue tit; of the second 
kind, the woodcock, blackbird, water-ouzel, marten, swift, greenfinch, tit- 
lark, sparrow, stonechat, blackcap, yellow ammer, little sandpipe, canary. 

I. Of the Common Fowl.—Of this bird I have examined the bones at 
different ages in a large number of instances. A few are selected as most 
characteristic :— 

1. Of a foetal chick taken from the egg on the fourteenth day of incu- 
bation, the bones of the extremities were much advanced, the inferior more 
than the superior. Their epiphyses were almost gelatinous ; but the shafts 
were partially ossified, and had already some firmness. In both the 
humeri and femora, medullary matter was found. It was of a red colour, 
and under the microscope exhibited the usual character of this tissue. 
Broken up, in each were seen numerous oil-globules, with which were 
mixed blood-corpuscles and other corpuscles of a smailer size, some circular, 
some of an irregular form. 


* Vol. xiv. 337, 440, 475. 


300 Dr. John Davy on the Bones of Birds. - [ Dec. 6, 


2. A chicken twenty-eight days old, reckoning from the time of hatching, 
was found dead on the 12th of January; during the preceding night there 
had been a severe frost. It weighed 10,275 grs.; one of its humeri in its 
moist state weighed 2°5 grs.; one of its femora 8grs. In each of them 
a soft red medullary matter was detected, which, like the preceding, was 
composed of oil-globules, blood-corpuscles, and smaller colourless corpuscles 
or cells. ‘The contents of the ulna and clavicular arch were similar, but 
in the latter the quantity of medullary matter was very minute. 

3. Of a pullet three months old, which had been hatched on the 6th of 
April, and weighed, when examined, two pounds, the humeri thoroughly 
ossified, sank in water. From one of them, opened under water, a few air- 
bubbles only escaped, which came from its superior extremity. The canal of 
the bone, excepting the small portion from which the air proceeded, was full 
of red marrow of the usual appearance of medullary tissue, and with similar 
contents. A communication was found to exist by the air-foramen between 
the cancellated structure towards the head of the bone and the lung, 
through the adjoiming air-sac. 

4. Of another pullet of the same brood, but of more advanced growth, 
which, though three days younger when examined, weighed two pounds 
and three-quarters, the humeri sank in water, but in sinking maintained a 
perpendicular position. One of them laid open was found to contain in its 
inferior portion, to the extent of *7 inch, marrow; in its superior, to the 
extent of 1°8 inch, air. ) 

5. Of a pullet three months and eleven days old, which had been 
hatched on the 28th of Mav, the humeri floated in water. In one of them, 
laid open, a small portion of marrow was found in the cancellated structure 
of its distal extremity ; and in this portion a conspicuous blood-vessel 
terminated, 

6. Of a cock five months old, which weighed five pounds, the testes 
large, and abounding in sperm-cells and spermatozoa, the humeri contained 
only air. 

II. Of the Partridge.—Of one shot on the Ist of September, which 
weighed 4136 grs., the humeri and femora sank in water; in sinking the 
distal extremity of the former reached the bottom first. From one of these, 
opened under water, a very little air escaped. The lining membrane was 
very vascular, and the lower one-fourth of the canal was full of blood of 
a dark colour, contained apparently in varicose vessels. Under the micro- 
scope, no oil-globules were distinguishable in the blood, only blood-cor- 
puscles; nor in any part of the cavity were there found any remains of 
marrow. 

2. Of another, shot on the same day, which weighed 5226 grs., the 
humeri swam in water, the femora sank. Air only was found in the 
former. On the lining membrane there were two or three delicate vessels 
containing florid blood. The femora were full of a reddish marrow. 

3. Of another, shot on the 19th of October, which weighed 5432 grs., 


1866. ] Dr. John Davy on the Bones of Birds. 301 


the state of the humeri and femora was very similar to that of the pre- 
ceding. The humeri contained only air, the femora only marrow; the 
lining membrane of the former was finely vascular; the medullary tissue 
of the latter abounded in oil-globules and corpuscles suggestive of blood- 
corpuscles altered. 

Ill. Of the Pheasant.—Of a female shot on the 9th of October, both 
the humeri and femora swam in water. Both contained air without any 
marrow. The former were perfectly white, and no vessels were visible in 
their lining membrane; the latter were of a reddish hue, and their lining 
membrane was beautifully vascular, the vessels delicately ramifying, of a 
bright florid hue, and anastomosing, and this throughout the whole of 
the circumference. 

2. Of another female, shot on the 17th of October, the humeri con- 
tained only air, the femora air with a trace of marrow*. The latter were 
redder than the former, and their lining membrane was very vascular. 

IV. Of the Goose.—Of one hatched in the spring, which, when ex- 
amined on the 26th June, weighed eight pounds, the humeri sank in 
water. They were full of marrow of a light bright-red colour. The 
quantity collected from one of them was about 82ers. It exhibited the 
usual character of medullary cellular structure, and was rich in oil, which 
in drying exuded copiously from it; but it contained comparatively few 
blood-corpuscles or blood-vessels, of which these corpuscles were the 
index. 

2. Of another hatched on the 22nd of April, which on the 7th of August 
weighed nine pounds and a half, a humerus dissected out weighed 56} grs., 
was 7°95 inches in length, and its shaft between °4 and ‘5 inch in width. 
It sank in water. Its upper third portion was of a darker hue than its 
inferior two-thirds. The latter was full of a light-red marrow, abounding 
in oil. It owed its reddish hue to blood-vessels in the medullary structure. 
The former, entirely without air, contained a collection of blood-vessels 
resting on a cancellated structure. These vessels had the appearance of 
veins, seemed largely varicose, and were full of dark blood, which (ex- 
amined whilst warm) was still fluid. Of the other wing, the humerus was 
somewhat different—the difference was in the superior portion. Although 
the bone sank in water, a little air was found in this portion, and the 
blood-vessels in it were less distended, and contained, instead of dark blood, 
aérated blood of a florid hue. The marrow, which occupied about two- 
thirds of the shaft, terminated abruptly superiorly, and there a pretty large 
blood-vessel united the two parts—the medullary and the varicose 
portions. 

3. Of another hatched in the spring, examined on the 31st of October, 
the humeri contained only air. The lining membrane of its cavity was 
rich in blood-vessels. 


* It was detected by washing out the cavity of the bone with a weak solution of salt. 
Oi\-globules were found suspended in the solution, 


302 Dr. John Davy on the Bones of Birds. [Dec. 6, 


4. Of the humerus of a.goose hatched in the spring, weighing on the 
2nd of November nine pounds, the canal was found full of air, with the 
exception of its inferior one-third ; this contained marrow rich in oil. In 
one of several portions of it submitted to the microscope, a red vessel was 
seen containing granules and oil-globules. In one direction it ended 
abruptly, as if torn ; in the other it was lost, as it were, by diffusion into, or 
blending with the cells of the medullary tissue. The upper portion of the 
marrow, it may be remarked, where it came in contact with the air, had, 
as in some other specimens, a ‘rounded well-defined surface. In this — 
instance no large blood-vessels were found in any part of the bone; and on 
the delicate membrane connecting the trabecule of the cancellated struc- 
ture, only a very few delicate vessels of a florid hue were to be seen. 

5. Of a fifth, also hatched in the spring, when examined on the 20th 
of November, the humeri, like those of the last but one, were found to 
contain only air. Their lining membrane was very vascular and partially 
varicose. 

V. Of the Common Duck.—Of a young drake hatched on the 26th of 
April, which when weighed on the 13th of August was four pounds, the 
humeri sank in water. They containad a light reddish marrow, and were 
entirely destitute of air. | 

2. Of two ducks of the same brood as the drake, the humeri, examined 
on the 15th of August, sank in water. Two-thirds of each were filled with 
marrow; one-third, the upper portion, with dark blood, seemingly in 
varicose vessels, which were connected with a light-coloured delicate mem- 
brane. 

3. Of a duck, little more then one year old, the humeri contaimed only 
air. 

VI. Of the Red Grouse.—Of one, which on the 12th of August was 
not fully fledged (it was shot for examination), the humeri contained air, 
the femora marrow. | 

2. Of another more advanced, shot on the 31st of August, weighing a 
pound and a quarter, the humeri contained air, the femora a little marrow, 
but more air, the former inferiorly. 

3. Of a third, shot on the 28th of August, which weighed 8770 grs., 
the humeri were hollow, the femora partially so, a little reddish marrow 
only remaining, and this in their inferior extremity. 

4. Of one shot on the 27th of August, which weighed 11,856 grs., and. 
which, judging from its plumage, was probably a spring bird, both the 
femora and humeri swam in water and were free from any trace of marrow. 
The lining membrane of the cavities of the femora was beautifully vascular, 
the vessels of a florid hue from the well-aérated blood which they contained. 
The lining membrane of the humeri was similarly vascular, but in a less 
strongly marked manner. 

VII. Of the Rook.—Of a young one not quite capable of flight, shot 
on the 11th of May, and which then weighed 6132 grs., the humeri sank 


1866. | Dr. John Davy on the Bones of Birds. 808 


in water; they contained no air, but a soft marrow, of a blood-red colour. 
The bones were very vascular, and were easily cut. 

2. Of another, shot on the 22nd of June, when capable of flight, 
though the quill-feathers of its wings were only partially hollow, its weight 
5113 grs., the humeri sank in water in a perpendicular position. Of one 
which was examined, its inferior two-thirds were found full of a reddish 
marrow, its superior one-third of air. The proportion of oil seemed 
greatest in the distal part of the marrow. The bones were less vascula 
than those of the preceding, and of greater firmness. 

3. Of a third, shot on the 23rd of June, then weighing 4982 grs., 
which, judging from the state of its feathers, its bursa Fabricii, ovary, and 
oviduct, had been hatched in the spring, the humeri were full of air 
without a vestige of marrow *. 

VIII. Common Crow.—Of one shot on the Ist of June, then weighing 
5402 ers., its quill-feathers not fully formed, the humeri sank in water, 
and contained only marrow. 

2. Of another shot on the 21st of June, weighing 6533 grs., capable of 
flight, the humeri contained air. The lining membrane was very vascular. 

IX. Of the Tawny Owl.—Of a young one, examined on the 2Ist of 
June, then weighing 4796 eyrs., its quill-feathers not fully formed, the 
humeri contained a very red marrow, and were entirely destitute of air. 

2. Of one of uncertain but mature age, judging from its general appear- 
ance, and which weighed on the 8th of April 5776 grs., the humeri were 
full of air. There was also air in the scapular arch, and partially in the 
furcula, its proximate portion. 

X. Of the Sparrow-hawk.—Of a young one, which on the 31st of 
July weighed 3686 grs., its sternum then only partially ossified, still 
flexible, the humeri were for the most part hollow; the little marrow they 
contained was confined to their distal portion. The same remark was 
applicable to the scapular arch. The femora contained even less marrow 
than the humeri; they were very nearly full of air. 

XI. Of the Buzzard.—Of a young one taken from its nest on the 
10th of June, when supposed to be about a fortnight old, then weighing 
5293 gis., the quill-feathers of wings only sprouting, the bones generally 
were very vascular; the humeri and femora sank in water. Their ossifi- 
cation was much advanced, but the sternum was still cartilaginous. After 
drying, all the bones floated in water. The humeri and femora, now laid 
open, were found to contain a red matter lining but not filling the cavities, 
suggestive of its having been, in its moist state, a fluid or a semifluid. In 
this, its dried state, it was of a firm consistence. After soaking in water and 
trituration, it formed an emulsion, which, as seen under the microscope, was 
found to contain oil-globules and particles of different kinds. Digested and 


* This bird, like most rooks, was infested with parasites, lice. They were plentiful 
even in the cavity of the wing quill-feathers. According to Dr. Gray, F.R.8., to whom 
I sent one, and who kindly gave me its name, it is a Decophorus (D. atratus). — 


304 Dr. John Davy on the Bones of Birds. [Dee. 6, 


heated in alcohol, it was partially dissolved, the solution becoming turbid on 
cooling. Evaporated, and as seen under the microscope, the residue, pro- 
portionally small, seemed to consist chiefly of fatty and oily matter (stearine 
and olein?), with some needle crystals. 

XII. Of the Blue Tit.—Of a young one taken from the nest on the 
31st of May, then weighing 28°5 grs., quite naked, except a few delicate 
fibre-like feathers on the head, some yolk still remaining in the abdominal 
cavity, the humeri were very small and pale, so small that no attempt was 
made to examine them, except by crushing. Comminuted with a few 
drops of solution of salt, and subjected to the microscope, there were seen 
mixed with the fragments of cartilage, blood-corpuscles and oil-like globules. 

2. Of a young one, nearly fully fledged, which on the 3rd of August 
weighed 142 grs., the humeri sank in water, maintaining a perpendicular 
position. They were completely formed and well ossified. Excepting 
towards their inferior extremity they were white, there to a small extent 
they were red. The white portion, at least nine-tenths of the entire 
length, contained air; the red, not exceeding one-tenth, marrow which, 
as seen under the microscope, had all the character of medullary tissue 
and abounded in oil. 

3. Of a third, shot in the same place as the preceding, and probably of 
the same brood, which on the 18th of August weighed 179°5 grs., the 
humeri floated in water, and were entirely full of air. ‘The feathers of the 
abdomen were not fully formed, and the bursa Fabricii was much smaller 
than that of the preceding. 


From these results, may not the following conclusions be drawn? 

First, that at an early stage, and up to a certain period of growth, 
marrow exists in the bones specified, of all the birds first named; and 
that about the time of hatching the medullary tissue abounds less in oil 
or fatty matter than at a later, the proportion varying in different in- 
stances; least probably in birds of prey, such as the buzzard and owl; 
most in birds, the food of which is mostly vegetable, such as the goose. 

Secondly, that the substitution of air for marrow in those bones which 
are eventually hollow, varies as to time in different species; is earlier in 
the rook, the crow, the grouse, the tit, than in the common fowl, 
duck, and goose, especially the latter; the exchange of one for the other 
having probably some relation to the time of taking wing and the use of 
the parts; and, in accordance, the humeri, except in the instance of the 
sparrow-hawk, seemed to have the marrow absorbed somewhat earlier than 
the femora. It may be conjectured that, like the residual yolk in the 
young bird, the marrow in the bones in question may serve in part as food, 
nourishing in the act of its removal. 


Relative to the structure of the hollow bones, I have but a few words to 
offer. 


1866. | Dr. John Davy on the Bones of Birds. 305 


In the humeri there is a peculiarity which may be deserving of mention. 
Towards the head of the bone, near the pneumatic foramen, the can- 
cellated structure, connected more or less by a delicate membrane, per- 
forms the part of a valve, as indicated by its permitting a free access 
of air in one direction, but preventing in the other, its exit. This is 
cleariy shown by the use of the blowpipe, and in no instance have I found 
an exception. 

In the humerus of the common: fowl, in three instances (a section of the 
bone having been made) the air has been found to enter from the pneu- 
matic foramen by a small bony canal contiguous to the side of the bone, 
in length about *6 inch, in diameter about :06 inch *. 

It is said that the trabeculee, or minute columnee in the cancellated struc- 
ture of the hollow bones, are also hollow. In some cf those of the hu- 
meri of the adult buzzard I have found a canal, but not in others; these 
were solid. Nor have I found them otherwise than solid in the humerus 
of the common fowl, goose, and turkey. 


As to the bones of those birds of the second kind, in which the marrow 
is persistent through life, I may briefly remark that in them, as in the 
former, at an early period the marrow seems to be comparatively poor in 
oily matter; and that the earlier, the nearer the embryo state, the less is 
its degree of consistence, the nearer it is to a liquid, and the larger is the 
proportion of blood-corpuseles and of albuminous matter, and the smaller 
the proportion of the adipose. 

When mature of growth, the bones of these birds appear to be richer m 
oily matter than those of the former permanently without air. Thus the 
tibia of the one kind in the dried state invariably sinks in water, whilst 
that of the first kind only partially sinks; the marrow in drying in the 
latter, from containing less oil, contracting more, and allowing of the 
entrance of air. In the radius and ulna the difference is less strongly 
marked ; these bones in their dried state commonly sinking in water, even 
when belonging to birds of the first kind. 

As regards the quality of marrow in the bones of different birds, the 
trials I have made have been very limited. I am disposed to infer from 
them that, besides differing, as in many instances it does in colour, it 
may differ also in composition, in the proportion of adipose matter and 
its kind, and in the proportion of albuminous matter; in some, as in the 
bones of the goose, oil most abounding ; in others, as in those of the rook 
and buzzard, albuminous matter and fat of the stearine kind. Even in the 
bones of birds of the second kind, such as their long bones, there is a 
difference in this respect ; of these, all that I have examined sink in water, 
with the exception of the femora, which only partially sink, the marrow 
in them being less rich in adipose matter, and consequently in drying 
contracting more, and, as before remarked, admitting more air. 


* In one instance the same kind of structure was found in the femur of a pheasant. 
VOL. XV. ac 


306 Mr. R. Moon on Porsson’s Solution, &c., [ Deesia, 


As to the marked difference of birds of the two kinds in relation to the 
condition of their bones, the rationale is not very obvious. Perhaps an 
approximation to the truth, or to the probable, may be made by com- 
paring the bones of birds of the two kinds, which are possessed of similar 
powers, the swift, for instance, and the buzzard, rivals in swiftness of 
flight and enduring power of wing. How different are their humeri! of © 
the former, very short, strong, and compact, provided with firm and large 
processes for the attachment of muscles; in the latter, long, hollow, and 
light, and comparatively brittle, yet sufficiently firm to bear without fracture 
the muscles which act on them. THere, have we not after a manner a kind 
of substitution of qualities? great strength and extended surface in small 
Space in the one, for lightness with greater length of leverage in the 
other. Further, the one kind of bone, that which contains marrow, being 
less brittle than that which contains air, and more yielding, may be 
less liable to fracture; a quality which, in the bird, before the ossification 
is complete, may be of essential service ; so that, teleologically considered, 
it may perhaps serve to account for the bones which are eventually 
hollow having primarily marrow in place of air. 


December 18, 1866. 
"WILLIAM BOWMAN, Esq., Vice-President, in the Chair. 


Among the Presents announced were two manuscript volumes, by 
Solomon Drach, Esq., F.R.A.S., containing various Tables in Pure Mathe- 
matics, presented by the author. 


The following communications were read :—~ 


I. “On Poisson’s Solution of the Accurate Equations applicable 
to the Transmission of Sound through a Cylindrical Tube ; 
and on the General Solution of Partial Differential Equa- 
tions.” By R. Moon, M.A., late Fellow of Queen’s College, 
Cambridge. Communicated by Prof. J. J. Syuvuster. Re- 
ceived November 14, 1866. 


(Abstract.) 
The pair of equations 
» Pp 
ai log 
—~@ S:fy 
v=${(vta)t—g}, | 
which constitute Poisson’s solution of the accurate equations applying to 


the transmission of sound through a cylindrical tube derived by La Grange’s 
method, have long attracted the attention of mathematicians. 


1866. | -and on Partial Differential Equations. 307 
For La Gage s equations we may substitute the following, viz.— 
dy, @ dp _ 0 
d Did): (A) 
do D dp _ e e . e e e se e 
dz p dt 
The first of these is obtained pe the aa of the Pine ye. Met. 
(Art. *Sound’’), by putting v for Y and ut for 2. 
dé p da 


The second results from a similar substitution in the analytical condition, 


mals ae :) 


Poisson’s solution has always been regarded as imperfect, and may 
easily be shown to be so. 

I was some time ago struck by finding that the above equations, while 
they yielded with facility the result of Poisson, notwithstanding their 
simplicity, baffled every effort to extract from them one more consonant to 
the general exigencies of the problem. 

I had at this time arrived at the conclusion that the law of pressure 
assumed in the received theory of Fluid Motion could not be generally 
true, and in a Paper* communicated to the Royal Society, had pointed 
out that, in a certain case of motion, the assumption of the truth of that 
law led to a contradiction ; while in another case of motion the expression 
for the pressure given by the received theory was palpably erroneous. 

It occurred to me, therefore, that the defective law of pressure of the 
received theory accounted for the defective solution which alone was ob- 
tainable from the equations of motion derived from it. If the law cf pres- 
sure of the received theory was not always true, if it held only when cer- 
tain conditions were satisfied, those conditions would obviously have the 
effect of dismissing from the complete solution of the problem obtained on 
a perfect theory at least one of the two arbitrary functions which it must 
necessarily involve. 

With a view to establishing this point, assume the solution of the equa- 
tions ef motion to be contained in the pair of equations, 

F(xytpv) = $1 f(eytpr)}; \ Sis CE 
F(aytpr)=Vf(aytor)y. J 

If these equations satisfy the equations (A), the latter will equally be 

satisfied by the pair of equations, 
F(aytpv) =2, 
E(cytp) = flay tpr)}. 

But it is shown in my Paper that these latter can only satisfy the equa- 

tions (A) on the supposition that F is of the form 
F=F(v+talog,p). 
Moreover, since we have in equations (B) the function F naa to an 


* On the True Theory of Pressure as applied to Elastic Fluids in Motion. 
2c2 


308 Mr. R. Moon on Poisson’s Solution, &c., [Dec. 13, 


arbitrary function of f, conversely we must have f equal to an arbitrary 
function of F. Hence, in exactly the same way in which it is proved that 
F must have the above form, we may equally prove that f, F, f must seve- 
rally have the same form. It clearly results, therefore, from the above 
assumed solution (B), that the equations (A) are insoluble, except on the 
assumption that the velocity may be expressed in terms of the density 
alone; 7. e. that we may assume 


v=fle). 
But substituting this os of v in equations (A), the latter become 
mm dp _ 
=0, 
SOF TH da 
; :, D dp 
J (p) = p ven ) 
whence we get ' Ee 
ee dp) _ ap “e) 
and eventually, D being the value of p when v=0, 
al, =loo , Lu 
adi key wa 


paola} 


which is,the most general solution of which the equations of motion are 
susceptible ; and which, making allowance for the difference of the ordi- 
nates employed in the two cases, y referring to the particle when in motion, 
and @ to its position of rest, is identical with that of Poisson. 

The failure of mathematicians to derive from the equations of motion of 
the received theory a solution containing two arbitrary functions has 
hitherto, I apprehend, been universally attributed to difficulties of integra- 
tion. So far is this view from being well founded, however, that in a 
postscript to my Paper it is shown that, assuming the pressure to follow 
any law whatever, a solution of the equations of motion can be obtained 
containing two arbitrary functions; a result, however, which requires that 
the expression for the pressure shall satisfy certain conditions, which con- 
ditions are violated when the pressure is assumed to vary with the den- 
sity alone. 

Whatever be the lar of pressure, it must always be capalte of being ex- 
pressed in terms of wand ¢. Moreover, the velocity and density are in 
hike manner severally capable of being expressed in terms of x and ¢; 
whence it follows that we may always express 2 in terms of p and », and 
equally that we can express ¢ in terms of p and v; so that, whatever be 
the law of pressure, we may assume it to be a function of p and v. 

Hence, assuming 


dp__dp i dv = Ry ye, 


dx dp dx dv. dz 


1866. ] and on Partial Differential Equations. 309 


where R and V are functions of p and v only, we |haye for our equations 
of motion the following, viz. 


_dv ,Rdp , V dv 
eae FR de Ddx 
dv , Ddp 


of which the following pair of equations constitute the solution, viz. 


Alpo)=o {2 TEV VaR o), 


V—VV?+4Rp | 
(0,0) = eee oe 
Floe=4{ 4) 
where f,(p,v)=const., and f,(p,v)=const. are the respective integrals of 
the ordinary differential equations, 
V—Vv ‘i 4Ro? ee 
2p 

V+V V+ 4Rp? "+ 4RRp’ ee, 

2p" 
which involve the variables v and p only. But this result is dependent on 
the fact of the following conditions being satisfied, viz., that we have 


K, - tee r= 


dv — 


dv — 


=0, 


= ae 


ae 


0, 


where 
K, =V— VV? +4Rp’, 
K,=V+ ¥V V?+4Ro’, 
which conditions cannot be satisfied if the law of pressure depends upon 
the density only (in which case V=0 and R contains p only), as may easily 
be shown. ; 
With regard to the theory of Partial Differential Equations, I conceive 
that the methods indicated in the Paper will serve to elicit every solution 
of a partial differential equation of the second order and first degree, save 
one, viz., an integral solution consisting of a simple relation between the 
variables 2, y, z, free from arbitrary functions, and which is not derivable 
from a solution containing arbitrary functions, by assigning particular 
values to the latter. 
If the equation 


0=RE + 


i! 


have a first integral consisting of the pair of equations 
F(vyzpq)=\S(2yPD 
Peryepy) =b i Seyepg)}; 


810 Mr. R. Moon on Poitsson’s Solution, &c. [Dee. 13, 


or consisting of the pair of equations 
F(ayepg)=0, | 
B(eyep =P seyry 
or of the single equation 
Bayepg) =o fleyeys: 
or of the single equation 
E(ayepg)=0, 
then im every one of these cases we must have 


0O=R.F(g)P—S P(g). FC p)+T.F(p)p 

0=R.F(e). P(g) +T.F(p).F@+{R-F@ -ptT-F(P). GPE) 

+V.F(p).F(q)*. 

It is also shown with more or less of generality, and it is capable of 
being shown generally, that if the given equation admit of a complete in- 
tegral solution containing two arbitrary functions, it will necessarily have 
two first integrals, each of which will be of the form 

— E@yep) =o ayy. 
It might have been added, that if the general equation of the second 
order and second degree be written 
O=P, +P. . P+ Py P+ Prost Poe ct + Pst .s 
+P,pr+Ps;.s+Pz +P; 
and it is satisfied by the equation 
B(ayep) = 9 {SeyPD $> 
then F and f must severally satisfy all three of the following equations, viz. 
| P'(p) — 1B (g) =, 
F'(2) + F'(z)p—mF (p)=0, 
F'(y) + F\(2)q— P(g) =0, 
where | | 
O==P, UP. P+ (Ps +P)? —Pps 0+ P,, 
0=P, m+ P,~mu-+ Pz n’—P,m— Pen+P, 
0=(2P,. —Prs. t+ Poe. P)m 
+(2P, 0 — Pye 0+ Pre) 
—(P;?—P,J+P,). 


above cases. 


1866.] On the Results of Comparisons of Standards of Length. 311 


II. “ Abstract of the Results of the Comparisons of the Standards 
of Length of England, France, Belgium, Prussia, Russia, 
India, Australia, made at the Ordnance Survey Office, South- 
ampton.” By Captain A. R. Cuarkz, R.E., F.R.S., &c., under 
the Direction of Colonel Sir Henry Jamus, R.E., F.R.S., &c., 
Director of the Ordnance Survey. Received November 15, 1866. 


(Abstract.) 


In the preface to this paper, Sir Henry James gives an account of the 
circumstances under which the work was undertaken, as follows. (A | 
- Table of results is appended, p. 313.) 

The principal triangulation of the United Kingdom was finished in 
1851; and the triangulations of France, Belgium, Prussia, and Russia 
were so far advanced in 1860, that, if connected, we should have a conti- 
nuous triangulation from the Island of Valentia on the south-west ex- 
tremity of Ireland, in north latitude 51° 55! 20"; and longitude 10°20! 40" 
west of Greenwich, to Orsk on the River Ural in Russia. 

It was therefore possible to measure the length of an are of parallel 
in latitude 52° of about 75°, and to determine, by the assistance of the 
electric telegraph, the exact difference of longitude between the extre- 
mities of this arc, and thus obtain a crucial test of the accuracy of the 
figure and dimensions of the earth, as derived from the measurement of 
ares of meridian, or the data for modifying the results previously ar- 
‘rived at. 

The Russian Government, therefore, at the instance of M. Otto Struve, 
Imperial Astronomer of Russia, invited (in 1860) the cooperation of the 
Governments of Prussia, Belgium, France, and England, to effect this 
most important object, and to their great honour they all consented, and 
granted the necessary funds for the execution of the work. 

The portion of the work which was assigned to me, was the connexion 
of the triangulation of England with that of France and Belgium, and I 
published the results of this operation in 1862*. But this work has been 
done in duplicate; for when application was made to the French Go- 
vernment to permit the necessary observations to be made in France, they 
not only consented to allow this, but at the same time volunteered to join 
in the labour and expense of the work itself. 

It would obviously have been wrong to mix up observations made with 
different kinds of instruments and on different principles, and therefore it 
was agreed that the work should, in fact, be made in duplicate, both the 
French and English geometricians using exactly the same stations. 

The results obtained by the French geometricians is published in the 


* Extension of the Triangulation of the Ordnance Survey into France and Bel- 
gium, London, 1863. 


312 Capt. A. R. Clarke ov the Results of the [Dec. 138, 


Supplement to vol. ix. of the ‘Mémorial du Dépét Général de la Guerre,’ 
1865, and the agreement with the results obtained by the English is truly 
surprising. 

But however accurately the trigonometrical observations might be per- 
formed, it is obvious that, without a knowledge of the exact relative 
lengths of the standards used as the units of measure in the triangulation 
of the several countries, it would be impossible accurately to express the 
length of the arc of parallel in terms of any one of the standards. 

It was therefore necessary that a comparison of the standards of length 
should be made, and as we had a building and apparatus expressly erected 
for the purpose of comparing standards at this Office, the English Govern- 
ment, on my recommendation, invited the Governments of the several 
countries named to send their standards here, and we have had the fol- 
lowing compared with the greatest accuracy :— 

1. Russian standard, double toise, P. 

2. Prussian standard toise. 

3. Belgium standard toise. 

4, Platinum metre of the Royal Society, compared with the standard 
metre of France by M. Arago. 

5. English standard yards, A, B, C, 29, 47, 51, 55, 58. 

6. Ordnance Survey 10-foot standard bar. 

7. Indian 10-foot standard bars, new and old. 

8. Australian 10-foot standard bar. 

9. In addition to the above, the 10-foot standard bar of the Cape of 
Good Hope was compared hee in 1844. 

We have invited the Governments of Austria, Spain, and the United 
States of America, also to send their standards, We have been promised 
that of Austria, and, but for the unfortunate war in which she has been 
lately engaged, we should have received it before this. 

I have entrusted the execution of the work of comparison and the 
drawing up of the results to Captain Alexander R. Clarke of the Royal 
Engineers, who designed the apparatus used. The numerous compari- 
sons to be made entailed a great amount of labour upon him and his 
assistants, Quartermaster Steel and Corporal Compton, of the Royal 
Engineers, 

Before the connexion of the triangulation of the several countries into 
one great network of triangles, extending across the entire breadth of 
Europe, and before the discovery of the electric telegraph and its exten- 
sion from Valentia to the Ural Mountains, it was not possible to execute 
so vast an undertaking as that which is now in progress. It is, in fact, 
a work which could not possibly have been executed at any earlier period 
in the history of the world. The exact determination of the figure and 
dimensions of the earth has been the great aim of astronomers for up- 
wards of two thousand years, and it is fortunate that we live in a time 
when men are so enlightened as to combine their labours to effect an ob- 


1866.] Comparisons of British and Foreign Standards of Length. 313 


00000-000T 00962-2FP CLPOLE-6E T1229€60-L POOH EPS STH HEHEHE EH HEHEHE HEHEHE HOGER SHH THEEHHEHEOHOH EEE SHTOTH HHS SHHesetesEseeee eens 0199 JN ou 
22980-GF6T 90000798 COPFEL.OL OLLIG IG Lig [Teteeetteeetetete cesses seeeeseeeeasaceneeseseessaneneeeseneseescssssssseneesssseessmegion JUL 
29660-8686 61766-4241 L8Z89F-8S1 SOLO0E9C-7 |e ue GZs19 ns . 4 d PIO], F[qnog uvissny 
06€20-6F6T €6866-£98 90EFEL-94 AOBOGIET:C. il sar ae oe 3-19 a 3 IL ‘ON estoy, urispag 
PVPEO-6F6I 11666-£98 8ZSFSL-9L ELCUSTSI-C 4/0 8) 2 66.19 3 Ee a OL ‘ON ASloy, UvIssnI gy 
¥ZE86-666 LG886-EhF 64L696-6¢ BYVO9GO0L ae ee SOE i .  sqtery & aayayy S,Ajatoog [eAoy 
OZPIT-000T Z99FE-EFP 826PLE-68 CUSPl/eG0l ait ce 2 3-19 ‘a “ . d1ZaT ULUPIO 
099L1-6F61 6190-498 G266€4-94 BCTOOIEl 6 | 63-19 > 3 ‘ 9sIOy, soULUPIO 
PF9L6-LF0E OLCST-TS8T 67 1000-021 ZvLeesss-e = 90-89 " = " TO Prepurjzg uerersny 
809F6-LF0E OSSF1-1Sé1 ¥96866-611 PGVOGESe: fase Ne she 0 0i00 2 " = "O paepuryg uererjsny 
09966-4408 LYOFT-ISST +€666-611 WEVVCCE Ge Ve Ee 00°89 - . 5s "] Iq 400j-OT ueIpuy 
80SST-8h0S C6PES-1SEL 281400-01 VECSCRERS yer sue er “O09 ie “4 3 TT aeg 400j-QT UeIpUuy 
887 S0-8F0E 99T8T-1SST 0SF200-021 BCLOrEsere  forseseseene S 00:29 st 5 SJ req 400j-OT ueipuy 
>8166-LF0¢ 6S39T-1SeL G¢/000-021 cepaceseee ae = 200-29 Fs f os "1O Jeg 400j-QT VouLUpIO 
919L6-L40 S9GST-ISEL 8E1000-021 LESS CCIC. ae tt egeerres or S001G0 "4 bs 'O Jeg yO0J-QT VduULUpIC 
0866L-F0€ EG91T-SEL 001000-21 PIOGSCES-O Ge Sg ee 10069 re ; a qoog prepueyy uripuy 
18964-70 T@SIT-Sel 286666-11 TOGERCEE On * ro" eee = 0029 é: 2 A 300] paepueyg soueUpIC 
EP16E-F16 909F€-S0F 986666-C€ 09666666-0 [TT 4 Q0-Z9 JO BANGLIId WAT, pIvpuLzg Sj 3B PALA 34} JO GG ‘ON Adog 
oalee- FIG 2Z9PE.COF 000009.9¢ Googng.t. | SP eur aneee a ree oe a eee per ll 
FOE | Mowry | -@ M—youy ‘@ 
=91,9WT]]I - 
os *OSIOT, *Sotourt “prez prepurys ReaTSeP IN 
*SOIJIMIT IPL 9} JO souly UL passordXxy aq} JO SULIOT, 


ul possaidxy | Url possaidxa UL passaldx 
irae ae Bee RR RS er Cane ae a eee ee ee ee ee eee eee Se: 


314 | Dr. E. Montgomery on the Formation of [Dec. 20, 


ject desired by all, and at the first moment when it was possible to exe- 
cute it. 

A full detailed account of the ‘Comparisons of the Standards of 
Length,’ with numerous plates, has just been published, and may be ob- 
tained from the agents for the sale of the publications of the Ordnance 
Survey. 


December 20, 1866. 


Dr. WILLIAM ALLEN MILUER, Treasurer and Vice-President, 
in the Chair. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “On the Formation of ‘Cells’ in Animal Bodies.” By HE. 
Monteomery, M.D. Communicated by J. Simon, Esq. 
Received November 8, 1866. 


(Abstract. ) 


I.— Observations. 


So called organic “ cells,’ chiefly those of various cancerous tumours, 
were seen, on the addition of water, to expand to several times their ori- 
ginal size, and at last to vanish altogether into the surrounding medium. 

The “nucleus”’ did not always participate in this change, but at times 
remained unaltered, whilst the outer constituents of the “ cell’? were un- 
. dergoing this process of expansion. 

This curious phenomenon of extreme dilatation is intelligible only on the 
supposition that the spherical bodies in question are in reality globules of a 
uniformly viscid material, which by imbibition swells out till at last its 
viscosity is overcome by the increasing liquefaction. 

In embryonic tissues and in various tumours, singie “nuclei” were seen, 
each surrounded by a shred of granular matter. On the addition of water 
there would bulge from one of the margins of the granular mass a seg- 
ment of a clear globule, which continued growing until it had become a 
full sphere, which ultimately detached itself, and was carried away by the 
currents. At other times no such separate globule would be emitted, but 
the entire granular shred would itself gradually assume the spherical shape, 
ultimately encompassing the “nucleus,’’ and constituting with the same 
the most perfect typical “ cell.” 

Not only single “nuclei” were found, each surrounded by a shred, 
but also clusters of two, four, and more were seen similarly enclosed 
by a proportionately large granular mass. Under these circumstances it 
sometimes occurred that, on the addition of water, the whole granular 


1866. | Cells in Animal Bodies. 315 


mass of such a cluster became transformed into a large sphere, containing 
two, four or more “nuclei.” The resulting body was to all appearance 
identical with shapes well known under the name of “ mother-cells.”’ In all 
these cases the granular shred must have partly consisted of a viscid ma- 
terial, which, on imbibition, naturally assumed the spherical shape. 

Primary globules were surrounded by a secondary globule, and thus the 
typical “cell”? was completed under the observer’s eye. 

In some instances the globules resulting from the transformation of the 
granular mass were at first bright and transparent, the granules having 
completely disappeared. They, however, gradually reformed, showing at 
first molecular motion, then crowding more and more, till at last the whole 
mass seemed to undergo coagulation. 

Alternate liquefaction and coaeelieae of the same material was found to 
play an important part in the develepinent of * cells.” 

Masses of certain viscid materials do not, on imbibition, expand uni- 
formly throughout their entire bulk, but globules of a definite size are 
emitted, as many as the mass will yield. 

The crystalline lens of many young animals affords, when treated with 
water, a beautiful illustration of this fact. Its homogeneous material is 
transformed, under the influence of imbibition, into a vast number of 
globules of nearly equal size. 

Hyaline embryonic tissues display, under similar conditions, the same 
phenomenon. 

Certain inferences lead one to suspect that this size-limiting property is 
due to the crystallizing propensity of some ingredient of these viscid 
substances. 

Blood-corpuscles, human blood corpuscles at least, are evidently tiny 
lumps of a uniformly viscid material. 

When broken up into fragments, each fragment assumes the spherical 
shape. 

On slow imbibition, they often emit a clear sphere, or a segment of one. 

In various specimens of feetal blood, each blood-corpuscle was seen to 
emit as many as two and even three equally sized globules, the original cor- 
puscle being at last no more distinguishable from its descendants. This 
is sufficient proof of the uniformly viscous nature of the blood-corpuscles. 

In many cancers the most recently formed part consists of mere fibres. 
These after a time become “ nucleated.”” The “nuclei” are at first very 
elongated, this being due to the lateral pressure of the still fibrous texture. 
But as the mass gradually softens, the ovals expand more and more into 
spheres, forming the primary globules, round which, as has already been 
shown, a secondary globule is often seen to shape itself. 

Chemical differentiation transforms first one portion of the fibrous mass 
into viscid material. This at once strives, by imbibition, to assume the 


316 Dr. EH. Montgomery on the Formation of —— [Dec. 20, 


globular shape. The remaining portion may or may not ultimately undergo 
similar transformation. 

Inflamed serous membranes become often densely “nucleated.” In the 
deeper layers, the “‘ nuclei’”’ are very elongated. At the surface they are 
perfectly globular, and are detached as minute opaque balls. These balls 
are the granulation- or the pus-corpuscles. On imbibition, one portion 
of their soft material swells out, encompassing the rest, which, when form- 
ing a single uniform globule, goes under the name of granulation-corpuscle ; 
when, on the other hand, broken up into several granules, constitutes the 
famous pus-“ cell.’ This is an example of a second mode of “cell ’’-for- 
mation. Here the secondary globule is shaped from a portion of the 
primary mass. | 

In some instances these “nuclei”? or balls will, when still enclosed 
within the surrounding texture, undergo the above-mentioned change on 
imbibition, and thus whole rows of granulation or pus-corpuscles are seen 
to form. 

This second mode of ‘‘cell ’’-formation is still more strikingly manifested 
in epithelial textures. In the mucous membrane of the nose, for instance, 
the faint oval “nuclei” of the large scales become during disintegration 
more and more distinct and globular. The surrounding material of the 
scale gradually liquefies, and the minute balls, thus liberated, expand by 
imbibition into mucus- or pus-corpuscles. It often succeeds to make them 
form in all perfection whilst they are still contained within the scale. 

In abscesses of the skin the pus-corpuscles are formed in exactly the 
same manner. They can often be watched, fully shaped, still enclosed 
within the scale. Here, it would seem, are “ cells,” not the result of life, 
but rather of death. 

The multiple ‘ nuclei” of pus-corpuscles are not the result of over- 
fecundity, but are simply due to the disintegration of the non-imbibing 
portion of those oval or spherical clear-cut bodies, which are themselves 
so well known under the name of “ nuclei.” 

The disintegration of this non-imbibing portion can be traced rr 
all possible stages, down to the cluster of most irregularly shaped gra- 
nules (which, notwithstanding, have been looked upon as the result of 
fissiparous division), and has been made to represent the crowning feature of 
the cell theory. 

The same minute balls found swimming in the serum of a blister were 
seen, when treated with water, to disclose single bright clear cut “ nuclei ;” 
when treated with acetic acid, to reveal the most typical multiple nuclei of 
pus-cells, 


1866. ] Cells in Animal Bodies. 317 


Il.—Laperimental Verijication. 


Tn all the above-cited observations the existence of a viscid, imbibing 
material was proved with almost conclusive evidence,—a viscid material 
which is capable cf forming globules of a definite size, and which in the 
living organism actually forms such globules; shapes, the nature of which 
has been hitherto mistaken. 

After a long search, the substance known under the name of myeline was 
found to be the desired material. 

When to myeline in its dry amorphous state water is added, slender 
tubes are seen to shoot forth from all free margins. These are sometimes 
wonderfully like nerve-tubes in appearance. They are most flexible and 
plastic. From this curious tendency of shooting forth in a rectilinear 
direction it was inferred that a crystallizing force must be at work. 

To counteract this tendency, and to oblige the substance to crystallize 
mto globules, it was intimately mixed with white of egg. The result 
was most perfect. Instead of tubes, splendid clear globules, layer after 
layer, were formed, resembling closely those of the crystalline lens formed | 
under similar conditions. 

Here was.actually found a viscid substance which, on imbibition, formed 
globules of a definite size. 

The remaining task was comparatively an easy one. By mixing the 
myeline with blood-serum, globules were obtained showing the most lively 
molecular motion. 

When the serum somewhat; preponderated, the whole globules seemed, 
after a while, to undergo coagulation, and appeared often as beautifully 
and finely granulated as any real “ cell.’’ 

When this mixture of myeline and serum was spread very thinly over 
the glass slide, there often started into existence, on the addition of water, 
small primary globules, round which an irregular mass of granular mate- 
rial became gradually detached from the glass slide. It at last shaped 
itself into a secondary globule, enclosing the primary one, and constituting 
with it, down to the minutest details, the most perfect typical ‘cell.’ In 
many instances the nucleolus did not fail, and the narrow white margin, 
so often mistaken for a cell-wall, was always present. Beautiful “‘ mother- 
cells’ were formed in the same manner. 

The next endeayour was to form “‘cells”’ according to the second mode. 

If the amorphous myeline be very thinly spread on the glass slide, in- 
stead of tubes there will form bodies looking like rings. They are actu- 
ally double globules, the inner globule being more transparent than’the 
outer. ‘They correspond to the inner and outer substance of the above- 
mentioned tubes. When these are left to dry, and then again acted upon 
with water, one portion will swell out into a clear globule, enclosing the 
rest as ‘‘nucleus.”’ These “nuclei” are either large and single, like those 


318 Lieut.-Col. Walker on the Results of [ Dec. 20, 


of granulation corpuscles, or they are multiple, exactly like those of pus- 
cells. Whole layers of perfect pus-corpuscles are thus formed. But, of 
course, more complicated shapes occur as well. Among these, for instance, 
many such pus-cell-like bodies enclosed within one large sphere. 

If, instead of water, serum be added to the thinly-spread myeline, bi- 
concave disks will form, only generally much larger than blood-corpuseles. 

“Cells” being thus merely the physical result of chemical changes, they 
can no longer afford a last retreat to those specific forces called vital. 
Physiology must aim at being something more than the study of the 
functions of a variety of ultimate organic units. And pathology will gain 
new hope in considering that it is not really condemned to be the inter- 
preter of the many abnormities to which the mysterious life of myriads of 
microscopical individuals seemed to be liable. 


Il. “Preliminary Notice of Results of Pendulum Experiments 
made in India.” By Lieut.-Col.Watxmr, F.R.S.: ma Letter 
' to the President. Received September 21, 1866. 


I have the pleasure to inclose a provisional abstract of the results of 
Capt. Basevi’s observations with his pendulums during the past field 
season. Though provisional, it will probably be found to agree very 
closely with the final results, which will be deduced as soon as the carrec- 
tions for buoyancy, temperature, &c. are finally known. 

Already these experiments are beginning to throw light on the subject 
of Himalayan attraction; for the observations clearly show that the force 
of gravity is less than it should be theoretically at the stations in the 
vicinity of the Himalayas, and that the difference between theory and 
practice diminishes the further the station is removed from the Himalayas. 

This is a remarkable confirmation of Airy’s opinion, that the strata of 
the earth below mountains are less dense than the strata below plains and 
the bed of the sea. 

Combining these observations with those that were used by Mr. Baily 
(including, I believe, all your own), the value of the ellipticity will be 
diminished from 51, to 5$5 (approx.), and wa therefore tend more 


2809 289 
closely to assimilate with Capt. Clarke’s nie =i; 


* The pendulum result is aed 7 ELS. 


Pendulum Experiments in India. 319 


’ 


e) 
=) 
|20 


o 
| 
Ae) 


|a 


[39 


[Spas 
ra[4 lod esi 
[20 


[20 


“MOTT 


TIM poredutoo 


111-CZO98 |168-GE098 |189-4 |G6L-S 
-|L88-82098 |F02-8G098 |TFG-8. |80F-8 
982-6Z098 |LL1-6Z098 /0GF-6 |189-6 
990-1098 |88%-1E098 |0L6-01 |G61- TT 
S| 
"2086 | 162 
‘Ayreq =| ‘ayaeo I 


"BAIS 


yore ‘41019 


-AiyJo Jo one A 


| “SYI[VATA ol] pue svkeyemrzy oy} usomzoq AoyyeA v UI poyeNys SI vAYyO x 


eeveceseosen eeercoesees 


"R1IS] JO SUII07 UI 


SUOTeIqIA poyndato0yD 


Il 
‘ATreg |‘oyaret 


coerce eeneee 


“Ayton yo 
dutsn ‘“edisq 
0} wOMonpery 


"69-69 snqe1odMey, UBITT 0} poonpery 


J60-06098 |ZL9-696¢8 |0G-02098 


696-7098 
66496098 


F86-9E098 |FGL-C1668 |EF8-9L098 


660-96098 


"SUvOTL 


“TEST “ON 


196-G0T98 |SLL- T1198 148-68 |289- 16 |L76-F1198 OTF-P9098 |E8F-G9T98 | (e)OT 8% Ig)" 


G8L-PL6E8 921-4098 
QOF-GL6E8 |G66-C2098 


169-GL6E8 |9GF-91098 


ON 


‘JOAQT-BAS TROT 
04 poonpet ‘onapa 


es] 

ZI8 L 189i B( BAIS 
B & 

GIL G FP Sg S| aye 
a5 4 

9Z8 GG 08 62/3 & | ~* euerEYy 
Sea) 

sg | 93 &¢ esa =" alow 

Fer foe iaage be ocr 

"10F La] ! e) 

[OAT 

-Bag 

uvoyy | “opnqiyey | ‘uorzV1G Jo oulVyy 

oAOqe 


ws Taatp rod suoty |JUSIOTT 


-BIQIA PoALos CO 


"99-CORI UOSvag PaLT ‘SsUOI}VALOsSqG WH[NpUog Jo s}[NseyY Jo yovs}sSqV [BUOISIA OIG 


The Society then adjourned over the Christmas recess, to Thursday, 


January 10. 


2D 


VOL, XV. 


320 On the Appendicular Skeleton of the Primates. [Jan. 10, 


January 10, 1867. | 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The following communication was read :— 


“On the Appendicular Skeleton of the Primates.” By Sr. GrorcE 
Mrvart, F.Z.S., Lecturer on Comparative Anatomy at St. Mary’s 
Hospital. Communicated by Prof. Huxtny. Received No- 
vember 22, 1866. . 

( Abstract.) 


The author began by mentioning the principal variations found in the 
order Primates, as to the absolute and relative length of the pectoral limb 
with and without the manus ; and then taking each bone separately, described 
the modifications undergone by each in all the genera of the order*; as 
also the relative size of the segments and bones of the limb compared to 
each other and to the spine. The pelvic limb was then similarly treated 
of, and, in addition, its segments and bones were compared with the homo- 
typal segments and bones of the pectoral limb. 

The author after this reconsidered the question as to the use of the 
terms “hand” and “foot,”? and the applicability of the term “ Quadru- 
manous”’ to Apes and Lemuroids. 

He controverted the position lately assumed by Dr. Lucaet, that both 
anatomically and physiologically the pes of apes is more like the human 
hand than the human foot. At the same time he recommended the use of 
unambiguous homological terms, such as ‘‘ manus”’ and “pes”? (already 
adopted by some) instead of “‘ hand” and “ foot,”’ in all treatises on com- 
parative anatomy. 

Tables of the dimensions and proportions of the limbs, their segments, 
and bones were then given, exhibiting the variations presented in these 
respects throughout the whole series of genera. 

The author then see as the more peculiar forms of the order, begin- 
ning with Man. 

The principal resemblances and differences in form, size, and proportion 
between the human appendicular skeleton and that of other primates were 
given in detail, followed by a list of those points in which man differs, as to 
the bony structure of his limbs, from all other primates. 

The limb-skeletons of the Orang, Marmoset, Indri, Slender Lemur, 
Tarsier, and Aye-aye were then similarly reviewed, and lists given of the 
absolute pecuharities found in each. 

The conclusion arrived at from these comparisons was, that Man differs 
less from the higher Apes than do certain primates below him from each 


* Except certain Lemuroids, of which no specimens exist in this country. 


t Abhandlungen von der Senckenbergischen Naturforschenden Gesellschaft. Frank- 
fort, 1865, vol. v. p. 275. 


1867. ] Actinometrical Observations among the Alps. 321 


other; and that he, thus judged, evidently takes his place amongst the 
members of the suborder Anthropoidea. 

A list of the principal osteological variations presented by the several 
groups and genera of the order, before unmentioned, was then given; and 
the author concluded by stating what he believed to be the degrees of affi- 
nity existing between the various forms, as far as could be ascertained from 
the consideration of the appendicular skeleton exclusively. 


January 17, 1867. 
WILLIAM SPOTTISWOODE, Esgq., Vice-President, in the Chair. 


The following communications were read :— 


I, “ Actinometrical Observations among the Alps, with the Descrip- 
tion of a new Actinometer.” By the Rev. Grorez C. HopeKin- 
son. Ina Letter to Professor Sroxss, Sec. R.S. Communicated 
by Professor Stoxzs. Received December 2, 1866. 


Str,—I have the honour to forward you an account of some actinome- 
trical observations made last summer on the summit of Mont Blanc and at 
Chamonix, and at the same time to thank the Committee of the Royal 
Society for the grant which they were so good as to vote me for that object. 

I reached Chamonix on the 7th of July, in bad weather, which had been 
prevailing for some time, but which ushered ina fine week very opportunely 
for my work. After allowing a few days for the weather to settle and for 
the snow to consolidate, I left Chamonix in the afternoon of Friday the 13th 
for the Grands Mulets, having previously arranged for a corresponding 
series of observations being taken the next morning in the valley. Leav- 
ing the Grands Mulets at about 24.4.m. on the 14th, [reached the summit 
of Mont Blanc about 8 a.m., and proceeded at once to work. 

I had brought with me from England two of Newman’s mountain-baro- 
meters, a thermobarometer of Casella, six small thermometers graduated on 
the stem (three for the dry-, and three for the wet-bulb observations), 
three of the tubes described in Appendix (A), with two of the actinometers 
ineach. I carried besides an aneroid by Cooke, which proved to be of 
excellent quality. The third set of apparatus was taken in some faint hope 
that I might be able to arrange for a third set of simultaneous readings at 
the Grands Mulets. In this I was disappointed. Notwithstanding the 
greatest care had been taken, one of the barometers was found on the Bre- 
vent on the 9th to be deranged, and one of the actinometers to be broken ; 
and on the 12th a second actinometer was broken at Chamonix by an acci- 
dent. I thought it best to leave the remaining barometer for the valley 
observations, and to depend upon the thermobarometer, as being more por- 
table and less liable to fracture, for the readings on the summit. I was 
eventually obliged to rest satisfied with a single observation of this ; and 
the downward range of the small thermometer unfortunately proved too 

2n2 


322 Rev. G. C. Hodgkinson’s Actinometrical = [Jan. 17, 


limited for the wet-bulb readings. Thus the meteorological observations 
at the upper station are of the scantiest. Neither above nor below were 
the actinometrical readings so continuous as I had wished to make them. I 
had no one with me on the summit capable of rendering me the smallest 
assistance ; but it is some consolation to think that, even had this been 
otherwise, the results could not, under the circumstances, have been mate- 
rially enhanced. 

There either did not exist, or I failed to detect, as the sun’s altitude 
increased, anything like a uniform progression of actinic power at either 
station during the limited time in which the observations were continued. 

The results do little more than determine the ratio of the average inten- 
sity at the two stations for a portion of the forenoon. This indeed was the 
main object which I had in view. For looking at the experience of Prin- 
cipal Forbes under easier conditions, when the continuance of the observa- 
tions, as long as the clearness of the sky might last, presented no difficulty, 
I did not at all anticipate being able to trace a dependence of the actinic 
power on the hygrometric state of the atmosphere. He thus remarks 
(Bakerian Lecture, Phil. Trans. part 2 for 1842, p. 253) of the experiments 
onthe Faulhorn and at Brienz, that ‘it cannot be affirmed they are suffi- 
cient to show the kind of dependence which the opacity has on the damp- 
ness, and that the values of the coefficient of extinction do not present any 
correspondence with the hygrometric variations ;”’ and again, p. 268, “It 
must be confessed that no evident relation to the hygrometric condition of 
the air appears in the individual observations.” 

From the experiments of the 14th of July the actinic ratio between the 
summit of Mont Blanc and Chamonix, from 9" 31™ to 10° 11™ apparent 
time, presents, with a single exception, a gradual decrease from 1°244 to 
1-206. The interest of a comparison of these results with those which 
Principal Forbes obtained between the Faulhorn and Brienz is unfortu- 
nately diminished by the fact that his actinometer was not furnished with 
an internal thermometer for ascertaining the temperature of the liquid 
employed. This was ammonio-sulphate of copper, which has a coefficient 
of dilatation varying from 1 at 60° F., to 2°562 at 32° F., and 0°626 at 
100° F. His recorded numbers for three hours before and three hours 
after apparent noon derived from his freehand curve,-are as follows :— 


Hour. Ratio 
wR RE eS PR is A 1°141 
isco ae sb ole whet «2's 1:214 
11% ORI BREE SS od 1°345 
evens “7 ss Mea bcie Rill sees 
1 ’ 1:078 

AE TEE IR 5, 3 RE ee 1°207 
“as, ay o's 6 eee sive Ee ge Bc 


At 10° on the Faulhorn the ratio seems to have been rapidly increasing ; 
on Mont Blane it was slowly diminishing. The actual amount of the 
ratio at 10" is almost exactly coincident in the two cases; but at 11" on the 


1867.] Observations among the Alps. 323 


Faulhorn it was 1°345, a value much higher than any which was obtained 
at any time on Mont Blanc, or seemed likely to have been obtained at that 
hour had the observations been continued solong. What share the greater 
depression of the lower station in the experiments of 1832, the more com- 
plete isolation of the upper station‘in those of 1866, or variable atmospheric 
conditions in both sets may severally have had in contributing to this effect, 
remains a matter for future investigation. The respective heights of the 
stations are as follows :— 


English ft. English ft. 
Faulhorn, eoeeeee 8799 \ = ~ 
68 
IBRICTIZ:, 10 Scie oes 2 1946 Dittexenee of 


Mont Blanc .... 15784 } : 
12 
Chg | Sao, Difference 12359 


Professor Forbes gives the numbers— 


ee ag) Bee 

The sky during the observations was not only cloudless, but, as seen from 
the summit, remarkably clear. 

The observations have all been reduced by means of Tables derived from 
Gmelin’s ‘ Chemistry,’ vol. i. p. 231, to what they would have been had 
the mean temperature of the liquid during each minute been 32° F, 

By a prolonged and careful comparison of actinometers (K) and (A), 
the factor for reducing the indications of (K) to the standard of (A) was 
found to be 1°29. 

Considerable practice is necessary to acquire expertness in the use of the 
actinometer employed. It is desirable, as nearly as may be, to work it at 
such a temperature that the rise in the sun may be equal to the fall in the 
shade. Ifthe mean of the two mean temperatures of the liquid, in taking 
the shade observations which precede and follow a given sun, differ much 
from the mean temperature of the liquid during that sun, a sensible error 
will be introduced. This, however, is to a great extent eliminated by taking 
the mean of three, and still more completely by taking the mean of five 
successive actinic results in column (1). 

The difficulty of using the instrument was overcome by the kind coope- 
ration of several friends for the Chamonix observations. To the good 
offices of my cousin, Mr. G. F. Hodgkinson, were added those of a lady, a 
worthy sister of one of the foremost mathematicians of his year, and her two 
nieces. Under her auspices an admirable arrangement of the work was 
made, by which each of the party was responsible for a precise and definite 
function, the adjustment and direction of the instrument, with the shading 
and unshading, the watch, the readings, and therecords. ‘To this friendly 
and efficient help I am greatly indebted for whatever success has been 
achieved. How small this is, no one can be more sensible than myself; 
yet I venture to hope that when the difficulty. of the undertaking is con- 
sidered, to those at least who are acquainted with the experience of Prin- 
cipal Forbes in 1832, 1841, and 1842, as given in his Bakerian Lecture, 


394, Rev. G. C. Hodgkinson’s Actinometrical [Jan. 17; 


the results will not appear either disappointing or discouraging. The 
season was extremely unfavourable for the further prosecution of the work. 
Looking to the imperfection of the instrument employed by Principal 
Forbes in his observations in 1832, it would seem to be highly desirable 
that his experiments on the column of air between the Faulhorn and 
Brienz should be repeated, and that other pairs of stations, intermediate 
in character to that and the Chamonix pair, should be essayed. I have 
selected, in the hope of future opportunities, the following among others :— 


English ft. English ft. 
Becca di Nona...... 10384 | pig SA 
1 
WGSta ee ee 1969 ifference 5 


and should the Piz Stella prove readily accessible, 


Piz Stella 2: sae. os. TABS 


Diff 6° 
Ghinneunascwen 22k ae ifference 985 


While simultaneous observations at several adjacent stations of progres- 
sive heights are much to be desired, it should not be forgotten how largely 
~ the condition of simultaneousness at even only two stations adds to the 
difficulty of the work. And the question arises, whether detached readings 
of the actinometer (with the accompanying meteorological facts) taken at 
various points, as opportunity offers, may not be encouraged with advan- 
tage. An accumulation of these, carefully reduced and tabulated, could 
hardly fail to be valuable; and they may be obtained with comparative 
facility. It would indeed only be prosecuting these observations as we do — 
those of atmospheric temperature and pressure. In process of time we 
might hope to obtain the mean actinic power at stations of various heights 
and circumstance for different altitudes of the sun. 

Since the scale of each actinometer is empirical, in order that observa- 
tions with different instruments may be comparable, a standard of reference 
is necessary. If such a standard were kept at Kew, and each instrument 
employed were marked with a factor of reduction, ascertained by careful 
comparison, a great encouragement would be afforded to actinometry ; 
nor can any material progress in that department of observation be looked 
for until some such arrangement is made. The actine-standard of Sir J. 
Herschel can hardly be said now to have been preserved ; to recover it, 
a careful set of observations. under a vertical sun would be necessary ; 
and. since an arbitrary standard, which may be assigned without any such 
trouble will answer every purpose, it seems best at once to resort to this. 

I would venture, in conclusion, to couple with my thanks to the Com- 
mittee for their kind encouragement, an earnest recommendation that mea- 
sures be taken to provide a standard actinometer accessible for comparison, 
under such regulations as may seem best to them. 

IT have the honour to be, Sir, 
Your obedient Servant, 


GrorRGE C. HODGKINSON. 
November 27, 1866. 


1867. | Observations among the Alps. 325 
Summit of Mont Blanc, July 14, 1866, Actinometer (K). 
a B. C. D. E. F, ei H. re 4 K. We 
eel Sua -| Solar Solar ctino- 
rentti oak Ter- ge | Change Tempe- 
cbcome| 03, [dita | mina Jin sun, mshade SCT leature of PECETE| ic) re. | AE 
ps a reading. “Ee = iuceds liquid. 39° F. ek ses. 
hm 
8 283 x 1732.| 1192 540 f 
'8 30 O 1172 | 1800 | 128 716 ol 708 913 
8 315 x 12388 602 636 
8 33 O 600 714} 114 738 50 730 942 
aoe) x |. 662.| 50 612 
9 6} x | 2098/1792] _ | 306 
9 8 O 1890 | 2272 | 382 718 50 raul 917 
9 92) x | 2200 | 1834 366 
ey O 1840 | 2284 | 394 772 50 764 986 955 
9123} x | 2200] 1810 390 
9 14 O 1882 | 2279 | 388 753 50 745 961 
9153|/ x | 2120 | 1780 340 
9 I9z x 1460 | 1198 262 
9 21 O 1300 | 1800 | 500 788 48 781 | 1007 
9 223 x 1852 | 15388 314 
9 24 O 1582 | 2032 | 450 775 48 768 991 995 
9 253 4 2026 | 1690 326 
9 27 O 1754 | 2178 | 424 772 49 764 985 994 
9291} x | 1760 | 1400 360 
9 3l O 1472 | 1898 | 496 789 49 781 =| 1007 993 
9 322| x | 1906) 1540 366 
9 33 O 1568 | 1974 | 406 765 49 (57 977 | 996 
9 354 x 1972 | 1620 352 
9 30 O 1692 | 2150 | 458 787 49 779 =| 1008 998 
9 381} x | 2146 | 1840 306 
9 39 O 1880 | 2358 | 478 789 49 781 |1007 | 1002 
9 412! yx | 2290 | 1974 316 
9 43° O 2068 | 2514 | 446 781 50 773 996 
9 442| y | 2454 | 2100 354 
9.513) x 1908 | 1580 328 
9 53 O 1558 | 1980 | 422 760 80 752 970 
9 542} x | 1894 | 1546 348 
9 56 O 1608 | 2042 | 434 788 50 780 | 1006 | 992 
9 573, x | 2022 | 1662 360 
9 59 O 1680 | 2094 | 414 783 50 775 | 1000 | 988 
10 03; x 2062 | 1684 378 
Lo: 'S. O 1788 | 2164 | 376 758 51 790 967 | 993 
10 33} x | 2126 | 1740 386 
10 5] O | 1820 | 2220 | 400 783 | 51 | 774 | 999) 994 
10 64, x | 2190} 1810 380 
10 8 O 1904 | 2290 | 386 776 51 768 991 | 1001 
SUMS 6 ee 2426 | 2026 400 
10 11 O 2060 | 2440 | 380 795 52 786 | 1014 
Oras) xX 2880 | 1950 430 
10) 192) «.. 1270 992 278 
10 21 bee 1086 | 1580 | 494 792 52 783 | 1010 
10 223 _ 1600 | 1282 318 
10 24 1A 1886 | 1828 | 442 778 52 769 992 
10 25a; ... | 1764 | 1410 354 


The recorded numbers denote tenths of the scale which is divided to 
millimetres, the last figure being assigned by estimation. 


826 Rev. G. C. Hodgkinson’s Actinometrical [Jan. 17, 
Chamonix, July 14, 1866, Actinometer (A). 


ie B, C. D. E. F. G. H. re Es 


Appa- 
renttime! Sun Solar Solar 
ofcom-| “o,* | Initial | Ter- | Change| Change! effect | Tempe-| effect | Ave- 


mencing| shade |reading minal |in sun, jinshade,| yyre. jrature of) »equeed rages. 
e 


each ob- ‘\reading.| +. —+ | duced. | liquid. |tq 39° F, 
serva- ‘ 

tion, 

hm j 

8 222} x | 1230] 780 450 E 

8 24 O 1160 | 1560 | 400 837 85 S11 

8 253 x 1514 | 1090 424 

8 27 -O 1140 | 1554 | 414 818 85 793 §12 
8 283 x 1484 | 1100 304 

8 30 O 1180 | 1640 | 460 857 85 831 799 
8 814) x | 1504 | 1094 410 

8 33 O 1204 | 1614 | 410 $30 85 804 | 794 
8 343 x 1330 900 430 

8 36 O 950 | 1804 | 354 779 $4 755 | 805 
8 374| x | 1214] 794 420 

8 09 O 890 | 1280 | 3890 814 84 789 803 
8 403 x 1230 $02 428 

8 42 O 842 | 13810 | 468 872 $4 $46 800 
8 434| x | 8112) 802 380 

8 45 O 812 | 1280 | 468 £48 S4 822 803 
8 463| x | 1202] S22 380 

8 48 O 940 | 13880 | 440 814 84 789 802 
8 493| »x~ | 1280] 912 368 

8 51 O 1040 | 1466 | 420 795 85 (GU ari 
8 523 4 1312 930 382 

8 54 O 1082 | 1462 | 430 806 $5 781 797 
8 553) xX 1350 980 370 

8 57 O 1082 | 1542 | 450 820 85 795 795 
8 583| x | 1452 | 1080 370 

9 0 O 1182 | 1660 | 478 878 85 851 | 807 
9 14| x |} 1744 | 1330 414 

9 3 O 1394 | 1780 | 386 801 86 716 

9 43} x | 1620 | 1204 416 

9 641 x | 1204] 800 404 

9 8 O 890 | 1324 | 434 84] 84 816 

9 93| x | 1230] 820 410 

9 11 O 950 | 1894 | 444 844 85 818 821 
9 123 SK 1264 $74 390 

9 14 O 1014 | 1480 | 466 856 85 8380 | 807 
9 155 x 1420 | 1630 390 

9 17 O 1124 | 1554 | 430 80S 85 783 800 
9 18+} x 1420 | 1054 3866 

9 20 O 1220 | 1670 | 450 $13 85 788 

9 212) x | 1560 | 1180 360 

§ 25 O 1310 | 1780 | 480 

Seis | xX 1554} 1294 260 

9 29 O 1414 | 1914 |} 500 | 820 86 794 

9 303| x | 1774 | 1394 380 

9 32 O 1560 | 2060 | 440 $20 86 794 798 
9 333 x 1870 | 1490 380 

9 35 O 1614 | 2100 | 486 $31 86 805 811 
9 363| xX 2024 | 1710 310 

9 38 O 1664 | 2210) 546 876 86 849.| 809 


1867. ] Observations among the Alps. 


A. B. G, 
Appa- | 

rent time) Sun. 

aes | 0, | Initial 
ca dE shee reading. 


hom 

9 392] «xX 2070 
9 4] O 1590 
9 Azl x 1990 
9 44 O 1580 
QeA52) 1X 1940 
9 47 O 1500 
g482| x 2040 
9 50 O 1854 
Simla) xX 2036 
10,42) x 1190 
ba 6h O 1094 
10 731 x 1494 
1: 9 O 1334 
10 103; x 1690 
10 12 O 1374 
10 1331 x 1750 
10 15 O 1490 
10 163) x 1960 
10 18 O 1810 
10 193) x 2270 
10.273) -X 1540 
10 29 O 1424 
10 304; x 1820 
10 32 O 1688 
10 334; x 2130 
10 35 O 1740 
10 363) xX 2182 


TABLE (continued). 


D. 


Ter- 


minal 
reading. 


1720 
2084 
1654 
2082 
1634 
2064 
1704 
2454 
1780 


830 
1584 
1120 


1820 


1344 
1880 
1384 
2050 
1670 
1404 
1950 


1234 
1934 
1504 
2224 
1820 
2300 
1882 


E. 


Change |} Change 
in sun, 


se - 


536 
560 


F. 


300 


G, 


Solar 
effect 


in shade,\ ynre- 


duced. 


H. 


Tempe- 
rature 


Solar 
effect 
reduced 


ofliquid.|,¢ 39° F. 


L. 


Ave- 


rages. 


ne Oe 


826 
841 
893 


814 


327 


The recorded numbers denote tenths of the scale which is divided to 
millimetres, the last figure being assigned by estimation. 
column L are the means of the five nearest numbers in the preceding 
column when not less than two observations precede and follow the one 
against which the average number is placed, otherwise the mean of the 


three nearest numbers. 


The numbers in 


{ 
328 Rey. G. C. Hodgkinson’s Actinometrical [Jan. 17, 


Comparison of Results, Summit of Mont Blanc and Chamonix. 


M. Blane. Ratio of Actinome- Ratio of | 
Actinome-|Chamonix.| actinome- ter (K) re- |Chamonix | actinome- | 
Apparent | ter (K) re-| actino me-|ters, Mont || Apparent -| duced to | actinome- | ters, Mont 
time. duced to} ter (A). | Blanc and time. actinome- | ter (A). | Blanc and | 
actinome- Chamonix. ter (A). Chamonix. 
ter (A). | 
hm hm 
8 27 812 9 34 996 
8 30 799 Bea) ical ARE sacs 811 c 
8 33 794 9 37 998 eon 
8 36 805 DSS aly. is Bag 809 . 
8 39 803 9 40 1002 ers 
8 42 800 Oe tes ua 822 L219 
8 45 803 9 44 et | ee $35 
8 48 802 eT a Pare 838 
8 51 791 9 56 992 
8 54 797 9 59 988 
8 57 795 10 2 993 
9 0 807 10 5 994 
9 Il 955 821 11638 10 8 1001 
914 807 10 Sock ae 826 1-212 
9 17 800 10 il 1014 
9 24 995 1012401 5 2e $41 1-206 
9 27 994 JO" 1Sea ee 853 
9 3l 993 1-244 10 21 1010 
9 32 798 7 10 24 992 
AD S20 ie 814 


Meteorological Observations on summit of Mont Blanc and at Chamonix, 
July 14, 1866. 


Mont Blane. Chamonix. 
Mean __| Apparent Barometer 
time. time. Gere Thermo- | Thermo-~ || corrected | Thermo- | Thermo- 
barometer meter meter and re- meter meter 
‘| (dry). (wet). duced to (dry). (wet). 
32°F. 
h m hm ey “a 
8 30 | 8 25 7 || 2690 | 69 F. | 57 F. 
8 40 8 35 16°86 | 22F. |Below 20) 
930 | 9 25 | Boiling- cae beiie 72 F. | 59F. 
, 9 45 9 40 ee F 22:5 F. |Below 20; 
10 45 | 10 40 ios (aii cai Pa ai | ihe 7a F. 58 F. 
11 )0.-| 10 5 24 ¥. 


2 9 PIB Dis: Resse A, BR dr | ea 82 F. 63 F. 


Appenpix (A). 
Description of the Actinometer. 
The actinometer employed consists of a thermometer with a spherical 
bulb one inch in diameter, and a tube, of which an inch and a half next the 


bulb is, for a reason which will presently be apparent, left unscaled. The 
succeeding ten inches is made to represent, as nearly as may be, the range 


1867.| Observations among the Alps. 829 


from 40° F, to 45° F. At eleven inches and a half from the bulb the tube 
is widened, so that the following inch and a half may represent the range 
from 45° F. to 115° F. The tube then finishes in a spheroidal chamber, of 
which the diameters are about an inch and half an inch. The widened 
portion of the tube may be dispensed with, as the correction which it serves 
to ascertain may be otherwise found by means of a Table experimentally 
constructed for each instrument. In that case the spheroidal chamber, in 
which the tube will then terminate at eleven and a half inches from the 
bulb, should be made somewhat larger. The fluid employed is alcohol 
coloured with a drop of pure aniline-blue. A considerable quantity of air 
is left in the chamber. As a running column has to be read at a particular 
instant, great plainness is the first requisite for the scale. On this account 
graduation on the tube has not been adopted; but at an inch and a half 
from the bulb is attached an ivory scale, nine-tenths of an inch broad and 
eleven and a half inches long (or somewhat less if the widened tube be dis- 
pensed with), its other extremity coinciding with the commencement of the 
spheroidal chamber. This scale is graduated throughout in millimetres. 
The number of millimetres corresponding to each degree Fahr. on the tube 
of narrow bore, and to every fifth degree from 45° to 115° on the widened 
tube, should be noted on the back of the scale. 

The ‘principle of the instrument is the same as that of Sir J. Herschel’s ; 
and it is to be worked according to the directions given by him in ‘The 
Manual of Scientific Enquiry.’ It was devised for mountain use, where the 
weight of the Herschel and the fragility of its internal thermometer are 
elements of difficulty. It has also the advantage of being less costly. The 
air-chamber is made to serve the purpose of the screw in the Herschel, viz. 
that of altering at will, according to circumstances, the range of the ther- 
mometer. ‘This is effected by throwing off into the chamber a greater or 
less quantity of fluid, retaining it there by holding the instrument with the 
chamber end somewhat lower than the bulb, and working with the remain- 
ingcolumn. As alcohol expands unequally between its freezing- and boiling- 
points, a small correction is necessary, depending on the temperature of the 
alcohol at the time of working, This temperature is ascertained by noting 
the point in the widened tube, at which the column stands, when the fluid 
is thrown off into the chamber. The excess of this temperature above 
45° F., the point from which the fluid is thrown off, has to be added to the 
temperature between 40° and 45° shown by the head of the working column, 
in order to have the true temperature. From the openness of the scale, 
and consequent small range of the instrument for any one adjustment, it is 
necessary to select for working a temperature not much removed from that 
at which the rise in the sun is equal to the fall in the shade. This tempe- 
rature, which may be called the temperature of equilibrium, will vary prac- 
tically, according to the solar intensity, from some 5° F. to 20° F. above 
the temperature of the surroundiug influences. By driving the fluid into 
the chamber until the temperature of equilibrium is represented at a point 


330 Prof, A. Cayley’s Eighth Memoir on Quantics. [Jan.17, 


near the middle of the tube, the readings will go on fora considerable time 
without altering the quantity of fluid in the chamber, and ten inches of 
graduation are found to be ample under all cireumstances. By thus taking 
_ all the readings, so to speak, on the balance, a uniformity of proceeding 
is secured, which is not without its value. The imstrument, constructed 
according to the dimensions here given, will denote the intensity of the 
noonday sun at the summer solstice near the sea-level in England by about 
100 divisions of the scale. 

Owing to the difficulty of shading satisfactorily, and anomalies found 
to occur in observing among the snow-fields on the high crests of the 
Alps, the following contrivance has been adopted :— 

A plain telescope-tube of bright metal, 18 inches long and 23 inches in 
diameter, open at both ends, is pierced in its central section with a circular 
hole 14 to 14 inch in diameter, from which springs a flanged shoulder 
projecting about 4 inch to receive a perforated split bung, which clasps the 
thermometer-stem and helds the bulb firmly in the centre of the axis of 
the tube. Two caps, fitted at the ends with clean plate-glass, are made 
to. slide off and on at the two ends to admit of the glasses being readily 
wiped. By protecting these with a little wadding, the tube serves as a 
case for two actinometers. In the central section of the tube, made by a 
plane perpendicular to its axis, and nearly 90° from the centre of the cir- 
cular hole, is a screw to attach the tube to an altitude and azimuth motion, 
by means of which it may be kept. constantly directed towards the sun. 
Below the joint is provided means of attachment to an alpenstock or ice- 
axe. The shading is effected by means of a loose-fitting cap, bottomed by 
a chamber with air-holes. The shadow of the large thermometer-bulb on 
the lower glass, or on a plane held beneath it, is a guide to a perfect ad- 
justment in the working of the instrument. 


II. “An Eighth Memoir on Quantics.” By Professor A. Caytzy, 
F.R.S. Received January 8, 1867. 


(Abstract. ) 


The present memoir relates mainly to the binary quintic, continuing the 
investigations in relation to this form contained in my Second, Third, and 
Fifth Memoirs on Quantics ; the investigations which it contains im relation 
to a quantic of any order are given with a view to their application to the 
quintic. All the invariants of a binary quintic (viz. those of the degrees 
4, 8, 12, and 18) are given in the memoirs above referred to, and also the 
covariants up to the degree 5; it was interesting to proceed one step 
further, viz. to the covariants of the degree 6 ; in fact, while for the degree 
5 we obtain three covariants and a single syzygy, for the degree 6 we ob- 
tain only two covariants, but as many as seven syzygies. One of these is, 
however, the syzygy of the degree 5 multiplied into the quintic itself, so 
that, excluding this derived syzygy, there remain (7—1=) six syzygies 


1867.] Prof. A. Cayley’s Eighth Memoir on Quantics. 331 


of the degree 6. The determination of the two covariants (Tables 83 and 
84 post.), and of the syzygies of the degree 6, occupies the commence- 
ment of the present memoir. The remainder of the memoir is in a great 
measure a reproduction (with various additions and developments) of re- 
searches contained in Prof. Sylvester's Trilogy, and in a recent memoir by 
M. Hermite*. In particular, I establish in a more general form (de- 
fining for that purpose the functions which I call “ Auxiliars ’’) the theory 
which is the basis of Prof. Sylvester’s criteria for the reality of the roots 
of a quintic equation, or, say, the theory of the determmation of the cha- 
racter of an equation of any order. By way of illustration, I first apply 
this to the quartic equation; and I then apply it to the quintic equation, 
following Prof. Sylvester’s track, but so as to dispense altogether with his 
amphigenous surface, making the investigation to depend solely on the 
discussion of the bicorn curve, which is a principal section of this surface. 
I explain the new form which M. Hermite has given to the Tschirnhausen 
transformation, leading to a transformed equation, the coefficients whereof 
are all invariants; and, in the case of the quintic, I identify with my 
Tables his cubicovariants ¢, (wv, 7) and 4, (#, y). And in the two new 
Tables, 85 and 86, I give the leading coefficients of the other two cubi- 
covariants ¢, (a, y) and ¢,(#,y). In the transformed equation the second 
term (or that in z*) vanishes, and the coefficient & of z* is obtained as a 
quadric function of four indeterminates. The discussion of this form led to 
criteria for the character of a quintic equation, expressed like those of 
Prof. Sylvester in terms of invariants, but of a different and less simple 
form ; two such sets of criteria are obtained, and the identification of these - 
and of a third set resulting from a separate investigation, with the criteria 
of Prof. Sylvester, is a point made out in the present memoir. The theory 
is also given of the canonical forms, which is the mechanism by which 
M. Hermite’s investigations were carried on. The memoir contains other in- 
vestigations and formule in relation to the binary quintic; and as part of 
the foregoing theory of the determination of the character of an equation, 
I was led to consider the question of the imaginary linear transformations 
which give rise to a real equation : this is discussed in the concluding arti- 
cles of the memoir, and in an annex I have given a somewhat singular 
analytical theorem arising thereout. 

* Sylvester “On the Real and Imaginary Roots of Algebraical Equations ; a Trilogy,” 


Phil. Trans. t. cliv. (1864) pp. 579-666; Hermite, “Sur Equation du 5° Degré,’ 
Comptes Rendus, t. lxi. (1866), and in a separate form, Paris, 1866. 


‘ 


332 Mr. C. W. Merrifield on a New Method of Calculating |Jan. 24, 


January 24, 1867. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “On a New Method of Calculating the Statical Stability of a 
Ship.” By C. W. Merrirretp, F.R.S., Principal of the Royal 
School of Naval Architecture. Received January 15, 1867. 


The time required for the calculations of the stability of ships has prac- 
tically restricted the ordinary draughtsman to the use of the metacentre. 
This implies that the locus of the centres of buoyancy cuts the transverse 
midship plane in a curve which may be treated as a circle; and this is © 
only true, in general, for very small limits of inclination. In some parti- 
cular cases it has been felt desirable to supplement this by computing the 
moment of stability at some definite angle of inclination, by means of the 
“ins and outs,’ or immersed and emersed wedges. But this has only 
been applied to one selected inclination, generally of 10° or 14°; and owing 
partly to this, and partly to the very scant time left available to the skilled 
draughtsman or calculator, this has never been a part of the ordinary work 
of the computation of a ship’s quantities. For this reason it becomes of 
great consequence to find some method of getting at the stability, with an 
amount of extra work, which should not exceed that of the ordinary sheet 
known as the “sheer-draught calculation”*. 

A method has occurred to me by which, as I think, this object may be 
attained. Upon conferring with some of my studentst, who have sug- 
gested and removed certain difficulties of detail, we think we see our way, 
by an easy calculation, to place the whole account of a ship’s statical 
stability in the hands of any person who understands simple equilibrium, 
either in an algebraical or geometrical form, as he may prefer. _ 

It will take some time, with my present occupations, to prepare detailed 
examples. But as the method is complete in respect of principle, I have 
thought it best to bring it at once before the Society. 

The fundamental assumption is, that the locus of the centres of buoyancy 
can be sufficiently represented by a conic. The stability is then measured 
by the perpendicular, from the centre of actual weight, on the normal due 
to the inclination. The chief step, therefore, is to find the conic, of which, 
I may remark, we already know the vertex, and the tangent and curvature 
at the vertex; for these are given by the ordinary calculation of the 
centre of buoyancy and the metacentre. Now I observe that the conic is 
completely determined if we can find the length of another radius of 
curvature corresponding to a known inclination. This is obtained by 
finding the moment of inertia about one of its principal axes (longitudinal) 


* See ‘Ship-building, Theoretical and Practical,’ by Watts, Rankine, Barnes, and 
Napier, p. 46, for the sheer-draught calculation commonly used in this country. 
Tt Messrs, Deadman, Edgar, John, and White. 


1867. | the Statical Stability of a Ship. 333 


of the plane of floatation at the inclination. This, divided by the 
unaltered displacement, gives the radius of curvature required. 

But the chief practical difficulty lay in finding the means of drawing an 
inclined water-line across the body plan, so as to give an unaltered dis- 
placement. This I have at length succeeded in overcoming, as follows. 

The sheer-draft calculation gives us, inter alia, the areas of the level 
sections, belonging to the upright position, as rectangles. Now, if we 
make one side of each of these equal to the length of the ship, their 
breadths form a series of ordinates for a curve of mean section; that is to 
say, the transverse section of a cylindrical body, of which the displace- 
ment at any level immersion will be the same as that of the ship. We 
then make out a scale of displacement for this section at various immer- 
sions, for a selected inclination, taking care to measure the immersions on 
the middle line of the original body plan. By this means the finding 
of any water-line at the selected inclination is reduced to a problem of plane 
geometry ; and it is obvious that the place of the water-line so found will 
be a very close approximation to that of the required plane of floatation in 
the ship. 

The calculations are as follows :— 

1. Take out the horizontal areas from the sheer-draught calculation, and 
divide each by the ship’s length. Set them off right and left from a 
vertical line at their present vertical interval, and draw a curve through 
their ends. 

2. Any practised draughtsman will have little difficulty in drawing, at 
sight, an inclined line of floatation which shall give an unaltered immersed 
area on this mean section. He can verify it by measuring the immersed 
and emersed triangles obtained by his first guess, and make the correction 
due to the difference, if they do not agree. 

3. In strictness, the more accurate course would be this,—through each 
of the vertical stations draw right lines at the selected angle. Thence, by 
Simpson’s rule, form a scale ae areas, ending at the hiohert inclined water- 
line. Use the vertical interval of the neon displacement, and neglect 
the cosine of the inclination. Then divide the upright displacement by 
the ship’ s length and by the cosine of the inclination, and find to what 
immersion this displacement corresponds in the scale of inclined areas. 


But this is needless, unless the calculations have to be made for different 
draughts of water. 


4. Use this immersion to draw the inclined plane of floatation in the 
body plan. 

5. Calculate the area, common moment, and moment of inertia of this 
plane, about the longitudinal axis formed by its intersection with the 
original plane of floatation, upright. 

6. Transfer this moment of inertia to the longitudinal axis passing 
through the centre of gravity of the inclined plane of floatation. 

7. Divide the moment so found by the displacement. This will give 


334: On the Statical Stability of a Ship. [Jan. 24, 


the radius of curvature of the locus of the centres of buoyancy, corre- 
sponding to the selected inclination. 

The conic is now implicitly determined. It remains to show what use 
is to be made of these data. 

Let p, be the radius of curvature, corresponding to the angle 6, made 


between the normal and axis of a conic; then 
a(1—e’) 


Gam 5 3» P =a(l—e’ 5 
°  (1—é? sin? 6)2 ; ) 
From these we obtain 
2 2 
9. 0, 3—p.3 
4 AE eal 9 ioe bee 8 sae’ + nls yar tin lel (a) 
Po? sin’ 0 
P)>—p,* cos? 
laa (2) 
Po® sin’ @ 
PoP? sin” 0 () 
ae > vince teqlle oben atin ike C 
Poe? — Pei cos’ 8 
2 2 
3—p 3 
a= PolPot Po") 5 RS nha st os pk ee eee (d) 


Po? —pps cos” 0 
and these afford the means of calculating all the elements of the conic. 
Now, let us take any other inclination ¢: we may calculate Ps from the 
foregoing value of e* by means of the formula 
oS ee eae aa os ee eco cess 6 ae anes 
Po (1—e’ sin? 9)? 


Now, if A be the distance of the centre of gravity of the ship below the 
metacentre of the upright position, and p the perpendicular from the 
centre of gravity on the normal of the conic in the inclined position, we 
shall have 


po® (Pg? —Po®) 
ai ee EE LO eosece ° e eecce wo kat 
Sin @ Po® + Pg? C08 p 


and p X D is the moment of stability, D being the displacement. 


Strictly, it is only necessary to use the formulee (a), (e), (f) in actual 
work. Formula (/) shows clearly how an alteration in the position of the 
weights affects the stability. If X be altered, the altered value of p is 
obtained (geometrically) by a very obvious construction. 

In Mr. Scott Russell’s treatise on ‘ Naval Architecture,’ p. 604, it is 
shown how the stability may be obtained by geometrical construction when 
the conic is known. 

It is worth while to remark that the condition that the conic should be 


1867. | Transformation of Aromatic Monamines. 335 


a hyperbola, a parabola, or an ellipse, is 
po<, =, or >p, . cos’ 0; 
and whether the ellipse is referred to its major axis, becomes a circle, or is 
referred to its minor axis, depends upon whether 
Po = OF Ps 
6 having any value whatever within the limits of continuity. 

It is to be observed that this method only applies on the supposition 
that there is no abrupt discontinuity. The immersion of the gunwale, for 
instance, would vitiate it. But in ordinary ships, experience leads to the 
conclusion that a conic would be a very accurate representation of the locus 
of centres of buoyancy within all reasonable limits. 

I have not waited to try the method throughout upon a specific example. 
But every step is separately well known; most of the steps familiarly so, 
within my own experience. My estimate of the extra amount of work is, 
that it would be rather less than would be involved in making an indepen- 
dent calculation of the ordinary sheer-draught work. I shall have an im- 
mediate opportunity of verifying this in my school; but I wished to announce 
the method publicly before beginning to teach it. 


II. “Transformation of the Aromatic Monamines into Acids richer in 
Carbon.” By A. W. Hormann, LL.D., F.R.S. Received 
January 21, 1867. 

In a previous communication®* to the Royal Society I have described 
the formation of methenyldiphenyldiamine, a substance which I obtained 
some years ago, by the action of chloroform on aniline, by means of a new 
method, namely, by treating a mixture of phenylformamide and aniline 
with trichloride of phosphorus. 

The continuation of these researches necessitated the preparation of 
phenylformamide, and later also of tolylformamide in greater quantities. I 
have repeatedly obtained these bodies by the action of formic ether on the 
corresponding monamine, but in consequence of the difficulties with which 
the preparation of formic acid in large quautities is still beset, I have of 
late returned to the old method, viz., distillation of the oxalate of the mon- 
amine, since I found that by employing the materials in the appropriate 
proportions, the formation of very large quantities of the formyl com- 
pounds may be readily accomplished. 

According to Gerhardt, the principal product of the distillation of the 
secondary aniline-oxalate is diphenyloxamide, phenylformamide being 
formed only as by-product. In fact, 1 molecule of oxalic acid and 2 mole- 
cules of aniline yield almost exclusively diphenyloxamide by the separation 
of 2 molecules of water from the secondary auiline-oxalate, thus :— 

(C O yt CC, H, 7 (C, Oy 
tO, + Ay N| = (CIE), FN, + 28,0. 
* Proceedings of the Royal Society, vol. xv, p. 55. 

VOL, XV. 2 


hy 


836 Prof. A. W. Hofmann on the Transformation of the [Jan. 24, 


But nothing is easier than to change the conditions of the experiment 
go as to give rise to the almost exclusive formation of phenylformamide. 
Act with 1 molecule of oxalic acid on 1 molecule of aniline (or even with 
3 molecules of oxalic acid on 2 molecules of aniline), taking care to give 
at once the highest possible temperature, and phenylformamide will be 
nearly the only product, 1 molecule of water and 1 molecule of carbonic 
acid separating from the primary aniline oxalate at first formed, 


C,H, C HO 
C9)" 0, 4 i by = OH, fs + H,O + 00,. 


The distillate is a fluid of peculiar odour, which, on the addition of a 
strong solution of caustic soda, immediately solidifies to the crystalline soda- 
compound of phenylformamide. This crude product always containing 
a quantity of aniline, is sufficiently pure for the preparation of metheny]- 
diphenyldiamine previously described by me. It is only necessary to 
treat the distillate with trichloride of phosphorus to obtain the methenyl- 
compound in abundance. 

The action of oxalic acid on aniline at a high temperature gives rise, 
however, to quite a series of other reactions subordinate to the principal 
changes, but affecting nevertheless a goodly quantity of material. Car- 
bonic oxide is observed to be evolved, together with carbonic acid, during 
the distillation. It is the result of two secondary processes. In the first 
place, phenylformamide already formed splits up, according to the analogous 
decomposition of formamide, into aniline and carbonic oxide, 

CHO C,H, 

C, H, |x = H bw + 00, 

H H 

and secondly, diphenyloxamide undergoes a transformation, previously 
pointed out by me, being changed into diphenylearbamide with separation 
of carbonic oxide, 
ON tcaaais UO)! 
cH} N, = Coa. b + CO. 

H, H, 

On this cecasion the formation of the latter body was once more satis- 
factorily proved by special experiment. During the distillation a consi- 
derable quantity of a crystalline substance saturated with oil had solidified 
in the neck of the retort. This substance was purified by washing with 
cold and recrystallizing a few times from hot alcohol; combustion showed 
that it was pure diphenylcarbamide. 

The crude oil obtained by the distillation of 1 molecule of aniline and 
1 molecule of oxalic acid contains, further, hydrocyanic acid, and it is not 
difficult to explain in a satisfactory manner the origin of this compound. 
When the distillate is heated to ebullition with concentrated hydrochloric 
acid, an oily body passes over with the steam. ‘This oil has a peculiar 


1867.| Aromatic Monamimes into Acids richer in Carbon. 307 


odour, recalling that of benzonitrile, and exhibits an inclination to crys- 
tallize; it is readily proved to be a mixture. If this substance be boiled 
for some time with a concentrated soda-solution in alcohol, it partly 
dissolves with evolution of ammonia. When the fluid is allowed to cool, 
after ammonia has ceased to be evolved and the alcohol distilled off, its 
surface is found to be covered with oily drops, which after a time become a 
crystalline solid. This solidification is instantly produced by treating the 
oil with a small quantity of concentrated hydrochloric acid. When a few 
drops of strong nitric acid are added to the hydrochloric fluid in which the 
erystals are floating, and the mixture is then gently heated, a deep blue 
colour is produced. ‘This reaction is characteristic of diphenylamine, with 
which the crystalline body perfectly accords in every respect. It cannot 
be doubted that diphenylamine is produced from phenylformamide as a 
product complementary to hydrocyanic acid; 1 molecule of phenylform- 
amide and 1 molecule of aniline contain the elements of 1 molecule of 
diphenylamine, 1 molecule of hydrocyanic acid, and 1 molecule of water. 


CHO C, H, C,H, 
GH, ‘Nt. H}N = C.H.\N + CHN + H,0; 
H H | ia 


It still remains to give an account of the fluid substance formed together 
with diphenylamine, which had disappeared with evolution of ammonia 
when the mixture was heated with soda-solution. Had not both its odour 
and its behaviour with soda pointed to benzonitrile, all doubt of the for- 
mation of this body would have been removed, when upon addition of 
hydrochloric acid to the filtered sodic liquid an abundant quantity of the 
purest benzoic acid was separated, the nature of which was, moreover, fixed 
by an analysis of the silver-salt. 

The formation of benzonitrile is easily explained. It is produced by a 
secondary transformation of phenylformamide, from which 1 molecule of 
water separates, 

CHO 
CoH {x =: C,H,N + H,0. 


The transition of phenylformamide into benzonitrile is only in part 
accomplished during the distillation of the mixture of aniline and oxalic 
acid. The greater portion of the nitrile is evidently formed during the 
treatment of the crude product of the distillation with hydrochloric acid. 

The conversion of aniline into benzoic acid, an acid richer in carbon than 
this base, claims some interest, inasmuch as the development of the 
manufacture of coal-tar colours places the aromatic monamines at our 
disposal in abundant quantity, and at the cheapest price. It was by no 
means improbable that some of the acids, already known, might in this 
manner be more easily prepared than heretofore, nor was it doubtful that 
the formation of many new compounds could be accomplished by this 
process, 


22 


338 Transformation of Aromatic Monamines. [Jan. 24, 


I have therefore, in the first place, endeavoured to establish the gene- 
rality of the reaction by treating toluidine in a similar manner. The 
phenomena observed when a mixture of 1 molecule of toluidine with 1 
molecule of oxalic acid is distilled, are perfectly analogous to those presented 
by the corresponding experiment with aniline. It was not necessary for 
the purposes of the investigation to trace step by step the several phases 
of the complicated processes. The crude distillate, which contained 
abundance of tolylformamide, was therefore immediately heated with 
strong hydrochloric acid and submitted to distillation. The oily substance 
which distilled over with the water, evolved ammonia on being boiled with — 
soda-solution, and the filtrate from the insoluble residue yielded, on addition 
of hydrochloric acid, a crystalline acid which combustion, as well as analysis 
of the silver-salt, proved to be tolylic acid. Here also tolylformamide gave 
rise to tolonitrile, from which tolylic acid subsequently was produced. 


niece CH, CHO 
( ape ho, ak ss N = hee N + i -+ CO,, 


CHO 
C,H, }N = 0,H,N + H,0, 
H 


C,H,N + 2H,0 = 0,H,0, + H,N. 


Several varieties of tolylic acid are known to exist, and it can scareely 
be doubted which of the isomeric modifications is formed in this case. As, 
however, I intend to follow this reaction somewhat further, I shall not for 
the present go deeper into the question. 

The experience collected in the phenyl- and tolyl-series, as might have 
been expected, has also been confirmed in the naphthyl-series. 

The investigation of the naphthaline group in this direction appeared 
more particularly interesting. ‘The idea naturally suggested itself of com- 
pleting this group by taking advantage of the new reaction for the forma- 
tion of a series of compounds, the existence of which had long been 
pointed out by theory, but the preparation of which as yet, notwithstanding 
repeated attempts, had not succeeded. 

Naphthaline, the most common product of the action of high tempera- 
tures on organic bodies, has, singularly enough, not as yet been traced to 
a simple reaction. It was not doubtful that the hydrocarbon would in 
time be met with as the result of the splitting up of an acid, holding to it 
a relation similar to that which obtains between benzoic acid and benzole. 

This acid, which is represented by the formula 


Oe Ay Os ; 
is in fact procurable by the action of oxalic acid on naphthylamine, the 


monamine of naphthyl-series. I propose to give a detailed account of this 
interesting compound and of its derivatives in a subsequent communication. 


1867.] Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. 339 


I cannot conclude this note without expressing my best thanks to Mr. 
Cornelius O’Sullivan for the assistance he has given me during the per- 
formance of the experiments which I have described, 


January 31, 1867. 
Dr. W. A. MILLER, Treasurer and Vice-President, in the Chair. 


The following communication was read :— 


“ On the Elimination of Nitrogen by the Kidneys and Intestines 
during Rest and Exercise, on a Diet without Nitrogen.” By 
K. A. Parkes, M.D., F.R.S. Received January 23, 1867. 

The experiments recorded in this paper were undertaken to test the 
results arrived at by Professors Fick and Wislicenus, with respect to the 
elimination of nitrogen during exercise on a non-nitrogenous diet, as 
recorded in the Philosophical Magazine for June 1866 (Supplement). 

Although these results are supported by the previous experiments of 
Dr. Speck, who has shown that if the ingress of nitrogen be restricted, 
bodily exercise causes no, or a very slight increase in the elimination of 
nitrogen by the urine, it appeared desirable to carefully repeat all the 
experiments, not only because the question is one of great importance, 
but because objections might be, and indeed have been, reasonably made 
to the experiments of Professors Fick and Wislicenus on the ground that 
no sufficient basis of comparison between periods of rest and exercise was 
given; that the periods were altogether too short, and that no attention 
was paid to the possible exit of nitrogen by the intestines. 

In making the experiments, I was fortunate in being permitted to use 
the services of two perfectly healthy soldiers belonging to the Army Hospital 
Corps, and doing duty at the Royal Victoria Hospital at Netley. When 
soldiers are steady and trustworthy, as these men were, they are good 
subjects for experiments of the kind, as they are accustomed to very regular 
diet and occupation, and moreover, from their habits of obedience, carry 
out all instructions with great precision. ‘The satisfactory results of my 
experiments, as shown by the almost perfect agreement in the effect on 
each man, is owing essentially to the very great care with which these 
two intelligent men carried out every rule which was laid down. 

One of these men, S.,is an admirable example of an average man; he is 
224 years old, 5 feet 8 inches in height, weighs close upon 150 lb., is 
strong, with large bones and firm muscles, with sufficient but not exces- 
sive fat; he is very temperate, and is no smoker. He has never been il] in 
his life. The second man, T., is also a perfectly healthy man, and has 
only been ill twice, once in China six years ago with tertian ague, and 
about three years ago with intermittent hemicrania. But he is in size and 
weight a good contrast to S. He is 36 years of age, very well propor- 
tioned and active, but is only 5 feet 4 inches in height, and weighs only 


340 Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. ; [Jan. 31, 


112 Ibs. His size is not owing to any imperfection in make or nutrition, 
but to the fact that he comes of a small race, his father being small, and 
his mother remarkably so. He has small bones, good firm muscles, but 
very little fat. In fact, he is a thin man. 

In the following experiments, the amounts of the total nitrogen of the 
urine (by soda-lime), of the urea, of the chloride of sodium, and on cer- 
tain occasions of the phosphoric and sulphuric acids, were determined. — 
The urea was determined by Liebig’s solution, the chlorine being first 
eliminated, the phosphoric acid by acetate of een the sulphuric acid 
by baryta and weighing. 

The urine was collected from 8 a.m. to 8 A.M., and great care was taken 
not to lose any, and to pass it at the exact time. 

The amount of water, solids, and nitrogen passed from the bowels were 
also determined on several occasions. 

All the ingesta were most carefully weighed and measured, and the amount 
of water in the crumb and crust of bread and in the meat was determined. 
The nitrogen in the bread was also determined, but the long time de- 
manded by the other processes prevented a complete analysis of the other 
food ; this was, however, a matter of no importance as regarded the imme- 
diate object of the inquiry. 

The experiments were commenced on December 6, 1866, and were con- 
tinued daily till December 23. 


First Period of ordinary regulated Diet and Occupation. 


_ The men were first kept under observation for six days, in order to 

determine the variations in weight and in the excreta, and to see if the 
metamorphosis of tissue appeared to be healthy. This was found to be 
the case; in fact, more completely healthy urinary and Be excreta 
could not be conceived. 

The weight of the body ranged nearly 1 lb. avoir., or 4 kilog. above 
‘and below the mean amount in each man. 

The daily average amount of food and drink was only slightly different 
in each man, and the quantity taken from day to day was very uniform. 

The men were not placed on any absolute quantity, but ate according 
to appetite within narrow limits. 

Average daily amount of food in ounces avoirdupois in this period :— 


s. Ig 


Gooleeel Ginette <4: . vecless ie abi, | Ra eee cars faa. a 7°625 7°625 
Be ee ere Ua pikes eM | 1 i ch ety 16°66 16°26 
Vegetables :—? potatoes, 7 cabbage.............. 13°87 13 
Butterne yaw eee sl aie (ae 2 2 ed 1 1 
Tea, including 3 oz. of milk, and 14 oz. sugar e . 20 20 
Coffee, including 3 oz. of milk, ail 14 oz. sugar... 20 - 20 
Beor: vi Sines awh Sis a8 a ae, ae By dnl D ay le 


Watersyie Hee titiee anaes he eet uneee Woe Jungbe8 2°33 


a 


1867. ] Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. B41 


S. teok about °5 oz. salt and T. about °33, exclusive of salt in food. 
Adding the water of the so-called solid food to the water taken as drink, 
the daily amount of food was, in grms.— 


s. uke 
Water-free solids, in grms. ........ 662°2 610°2 
NY Pr Ma PEWS cs sc wte vg css vrs +» 2334°5 2212°3 
Penal toad, maesta Te. ee 2996°7 2822°5 


The mean weight of this period was for 8. 67°7 kilogs. and for T. 50°6 
kilogs. The ingress of solid food per kilog. of body-weight was 9°78 and 
12 grms. respectively. The smaller man eat therefore absolutely rather 
less, but relatively more. 

During four days of this period the mean daily urinary excretion was, 
m grms. and cubic centimetres— 


Total 
Nitrogen| nitrogen 
in urea. | by soda- 

lime. 


Non- | Chloride 
ureal of 


Quantity.| Sp. gr. | Urea. 
nitrogen. | sodium. 


Be 5H.. 1226 | 1028:25) 385:001 | 16334 | 17-973 | 1639 | 14:28 


11°685 


Ped ces 1335 | 1020°5 | 25:°925 | 12:098 | 13-409 Tel, . 


The excretion of nitrogen was fairly constant from day to day, the range 
of the urea being, in the case of S., from 38°37 to 33°36 grms., or be- 
tween 2 and 3 grms, above and below the mean amount; and in the case 
of T. from 27°68 to 24:°906, or nearly 1 grm. above and below the mean 
amount. This shows the daily equality of diet and exercise. 

Calculated for body-weight, the amount per kilog. is— 


Uven. Nitrogen Total Non-ureal 
in urea, | nitrogen. | nitrogen. 
Bee sce te-uet ‘O17 ‘241 ‘265 ‘024 
DE acai. eye 512 ‘239 265 026 


The very close relation, indeed identity, as far as the total nitrogen is 
concerned, of the excretion per kilog. of body-weight in these two men 
comes out very clearly, and shows that there must be a real connexion 
between body-weight and urinary excretion. 

It is remarkable that while the heavier man passed 44 grms. more 
nitrogen daily from the kidneys than the smaller man, he did not eat any 
great excess of food. Unfortunately, as the nitrogen in the food was not 
perfectly determined, it is impossible to know precisely whether the 52 
grms. of excess of solid food taken by the larger man would contain 44 
grms. more nitrogen. As, however, the amount of meat was precisely the 


542 ‘Dr. Parkes on the Hlimination of Nitrogen. [Jan. 31, 


same, and as the smaller man only took 3 oz. cr 14 grms. less bread, and 
25 grms. less vegetables, this would seem to be unlikely, and, if so, some 
of the nitrogen taken by T’. must have passed off in other ways. 

The mean relation of the ureal to the total nitrogen was very close in 
each man, being, if the ureal nitrogen is taken as unity, as 1 to 1°1, and 
as 1 to 1°108 respectively. From day to day, however, the relation varied. 

The intestinal excretion was examined only on one day, the last but one 
of the series. . 

Composition of Intestinal Excretion of Twenty-four Hours. 


Total . 
weight, in| Solids. Water. Aiiaoges 
grammes. E ae gt aS 

a bein ee ariel 28:58 | 142-52 1-642 
Te es 198-47 | 29-916 | 168°55 1:98 


The smaller man passed rather more solids, water, and more nitrogen 
than the larger man, and through this channel some of the nitrogen 
unaccounted for by the urine must have escaped. Whether this would 
account for the whole of it cannot be stated, as the experiments in respect 
of the nitrogen in the food and in the intestinal excreta of the whole 
period were not sufficiently exact to determine this point. 

On the day when the intestinal excreta were analyzed, the total dis- 
charge of nitrogen by the kidneys and bowels was— 


S. Th. 
Urey 320% sineris A220; toa 13°410 
Bowels pci<5 ccc. 642 1°980 
Notaleo 2, 2Aeyvo7 15°390 


In S. nearly ~;th, and in T. nearly ith of the total nitrogen passed by the 
bowels. 

On the day when the intestinal excreta were analyzed, the balance of 
ingesta and egesta, atmospheric oxygen being disregarded, was as follows :— 


8. fT. 
Weight of body at commencement of \ 67-6 50°76 
period, in kilogrammes .......... 
Weight of body at close .............. 68° 50°89 
Gain or loss, in grammes.............. + 400 + 130 
Total ingesta by food and drink, in } 3033 2969 
SEATOMES . 25. Meo a er eae 
Urinary egesta KS AMigMEEs OE Ae 1619 1774'8 
Intestinal egesta se Res 28d J Wyiglieal 198°47 
Siimnvend time eresta t:!' 4 0 ea ey B03 4 866 — 


The tissue-changes in these two men are therefore very closely the 
same, and the men are quite comparable and well fitted for the experi- 
ments, T. has rather a larger excretion (chiefly of water) by the kidneys 


1867.] Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. 343 


and bowels, and rather less by the skin, but the difference in not great. 
He has also a larger excretion of nitrogen by the dowels than S. 


Second Period.—Non-nitrogenous Diet and Rest. 

On the day following the men were placed for two days on a non-nitro- 
genous diet consisting of arrowroot, sugar, and butter, from which the 
casein had been separated. The only nitrogenous substance taken was 
that contained in infusion of tea. I thought it better to allow the use of 
warm tea, without milk, both for the comfort of the men and because I 
was afraid of deranging the tissue-changes by too complete an alteration 
of diet. 

The arrowroot was made into cakes with butter and sugar, and was also 
taken as jelly. Butter and sugar were taken as desired. I put no re- 
striction on quantity, but left it to choice and appetite. 

The following was the total diet of two days, December 10th to 11th, 
and 11th to 12th, in grammes :—~ : 


8. ue 
Water-Tee AYTOWFOOL <2. .k os ess vine eam oe 480 382°7 
UTES TGS 2 a a on ere SOO A iw 29458 
Total dry carbohydrates ........ S79°AG HORS 
Diitee (Without cagem) .... 2.22... 05.5 124°7 844 


Total water-free foodintwodays.. 1004°4  761°9 
Proportion of fat to carbohydrates 1 to 7, 1 to 8. 
The dry starches and butter being assumed to be of their ordinary com- 
position, the daily amount of carbon would be, in grammes,— 


S. At 
Mararrowropt and sugars. fou. bo. bere ness 195°33 150°4 
Per ther SP ES OS. SE in Tt 49°25 32°83 
Mota iS k ute. thane oe >. 1)244°58"'-183:23 
grms. germs. 
The amount of water taken in the two days. . 4592 4542 


It is of no consequence to calculate the proportion to body-weight, as 
some starch and sugar passed off by the bowels. 

During these two days the men were kept in complete rest. They were 
allowed to get up for fear keeping in bed should make them feverish, but 
they sat quite still, or lay down on the bed, and did not leave the room 
during the time. 

The weight decreased in the case of S. from 67°7 to 66°5 kilogrammes, 
and in the case of T. from 50°6 to 49°8 kilogrammes. 

The Urinary Excretion was collected as usual on the first day, from 
8 A.M. to8 A.M.; but on the second day it was collected from 8 a.m. to 
8 p.M., and again from 8 p.m. to 8 a.m, so that the last twelve hours’ 
urine was secreted forty-eight to sixty hours after the Jast meal of nitro- 


_ genous food. 


és 


344, Dr, Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen, [Jan. 3], 


The ;ull details are given further on, and I will now merely state the 
mean results. 

On the mean of the two days the urea of twenty-four hours fell from 
35 grammes to 16°765, or, more than one-half in the case of S., and from 
26 to 15, or rather less than one-half in the case of T. . 

The amount of urea in the last twelve hours was only 5 and 4:2 grammes 
for the two men. The total nitrogen, or a mean of the two days, fell from 
17°97 and 13:4 to 8:176 and 7 grammes in the two men, while in the last 
twelve hours it was only 3:017 and 2°17 grammes, or at the rate of only 
6°034 and 4°34 grammes in twenty-four hours. 

Calculated according to body-weight, the results are per kilogramme :— 


U | Nitrogen Total Non-ureal. 

rea, ; ; d 

= In urea. nitrogen. nitrogen. 
Sia es ie iin oe ds 136 018 
AO. 5 Me ee ea tice ‘301 IZA 159 018 


A more satisfactory comparison may perhaps be made by taking the 
last day only as representing more complete nitrogenous manition. 


Per kilogramme of body-weight. 


U Nitrogen | - Total Non-ureal 
rea. : ‘ : 
- in urea. nitrogen. nitrogen. 
Sac «= pen aegaasenins "2034 0949 1054 "0105 
 ichoe Hen aartnie ciate 2040" ‘1180 “1420 0130 


Therefore during complete nitrogenous inanition the tissues of the 
smaller and older man furnished a slightly greater amount of nitrogen 
than those of the larger man, and this is evident both in the ureal and non- 
ureal nitrogen, so that it could scarcely be accidental. 

The piping acid and phosphoric acids were determined on the last 
day; the latter acid was in almost precisely the same absolute mean 
amount in each man, viz. °9533 and ‘941 gramme ; the larger man passed, 
however, one-third more sulphuric acid, viz. ‘633 as against °427 gramme. 

In the last twelve hours the chloride of sodium fell to 1 and °42 
gramme. : 
The Intestinal Excretion. 


This was examined on the last day. The composition was— 


Total weight, 
in grammes. 


Solids. Water. Nitrogen. 


ee | 


ee 


Gk OEE olin 49:53 66 35:93 ‘3875 


6:55 28:89 ‘5860 


1867. ] Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. 345 


The amount of solids was almost identical, but S. passed less nitrogen 
than T., as occurred also in the first period. The excreta were quite 
bilious, and had a greenish tint. : 

On the second day of nitrogenous inanition the balance of ingesta and 
egesta was as follows :— 


Weight of body at commencement of period, m 
SPAS AUOTIICS OF. she oles vo a tin sea a itle 66°89 50°1 
Weight of body at close of period ........ 66°19 49°6 

amorlogs; in STaMMES; 4.4/6 ee fe hues: — 680 — 500 
Total ingesta in food and drink, in grammes 2995 | 2907 
Wiamary esesta... 7.2.2 5... . : na ewe DAT Teo) 2306 
Intestinal egesta .......2.05 is (tra AotDs 35°44 
Skin and lung egesta ........ sn FEET AS 1065°5 


The considerable derangement of the usual balance is very evident ; it 
depended in part on the greater amount of water taken as compared with 
the former period, but not apparently altogether. 

The water of the kidneys and the insensible perspiration were increased, 
while the intestinal water was lessened. 

There was no sugar in the urine detectable by common tests. 

The effects of the diet in the two men being thus very similar, a satis- 
factory basis of comparison was obtained for the period of exercise. 


Third Period.—Ordinary Food and Occupation. 


The men then returned to their former regulated diet and usual occu- 
pation for four days. Very nearly the same amount of food was taken as 
in the first period. At the end of four days the weight of the body in 
each man had returned almost exactly to its former amount. 

The excretion of urea and the total nitrogen (which is given in more 
detail further on) followed a course very similar in each man. 

On the first day after the return to nitrogenous diet the urea was in round 
numbers 14 and 12 grammes respectively below the mean of the first 
period, that is to say, it was nearly the same as during the first day of non- 
nitrogenous feeding ; it then, in the case of S., increased day by day till it 
reached 29°67 grammes on the fourth day. In the case of T. it increased 
for two days, but fell a little on the fourth day; the total nitrogen, how- 
ever, increased regularly every day. 

The general result was that whereas in four days of the first period on a 
similar diet and exercise the excretion of nitrogen was 71°892 and 53°636 
grammes respectively, during these four days of the third period the 
excretion of nitrogen in the urine was only 51:952 and 44°38 grammes ; 
so that in the case of 8S. 19°94 and in the case of T. 9°256 grammes of 
nitrogen were retained in the body for the nutrition of the nitrogenous 


ce 
rs 


[Jan. 31, 


346 Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. 


tissues which had been brought into a state of nitrogenous inanition for 
two days by cutting off the supply of nitrogen. 

At the end of the four days it was ronsitlered that the tissues had re- 
covered their composition. 


Fourth Period.—Non-nitrogenous Diet and Exercise. 


Diet.—The diet during this period was of the same kind as in the second ~ 
period. The men were directed to eat what they pleased of arrowroot 
made into cakes, and jelly, sugar, and the oil of butter. 

They took in the two days of December 17-18, and 18-19, the follow- 
ing amounts :— 


Non-nitrogenous Fcod in two days, in grammes. 


8. d 
Water-free arrvowro0tes.!)...2.tc.cics teen 796-6 586°8 
Wiater-iree Subar . Citar: vincne eh nse tape ne 471°5 _ 360-0 
IPN SERENE peo ie 12181 | 9468 
Butter (withombcaseim) oc. ..0suestecesns 188°5 127-5 
Total water-free food............... 1306-6 10743 
Proportion of fat to starches ............... 1 to 6-46 |. 1 to 7-42 
_ The daily proportion of carbon was— 
8. f 
ImstaRehes is. . sce. Ss ugeamsbages g.eeeeber 270-400 | 210-189 
Uta WOWGGET 3 sits ccniaesingo oes ehecie «chris ca saa ae 74-478 50°395 
Metals swaaisdeath bad cal naiseuets: 344-878 | 260-584 | 
The amount of water drank in the two days was. . 5159°5 4762°6. 


Both men eat more during this period, partly because they felt more 
hungry, partly because the arrowroot-cakes were better made. T. espe- 
cially took more butter, to which he felt a distaste previously. 

The diet satisfied hunger; there was no sinking or craving for other 
kind of food, but it was monotonous, and neither man wished to con- 
tinue it. 

Exercise.—During these two days the men took the following amount 
of walking-exercise, on level ground. On the first day the exercise com- 
menced at 9 a.m., and lasted till 7.45 p.m. with intervals. On the second 
day it commenced at 9 a.m., and lasted till9 p.m. The men then went to 
bed. 

First day.—23°76 miles=38:23 kilometres. 

The work done was calculated according to Professor Haughton’s for- 


1867. ] Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. 347 


mula, that walking on a level surface is equal to lifting J;th of the weight 
through the distance walked. 

S., weight with clothes, 73°68 kilogrammes. Work done = 140839 
kilogramme-metres, or 453°6 tons lifted a foot. 

T., weight with clothes, 56°33 kilogrammes. Work done = 107655 
kilogrammes-metres, or 346°74 tons lifted a foot. 

Second day.— Distance walked 32°78 miles =52:74 kilometres. 


Work done. 


S.=194294 kilogramme-metres. 
= 625°8 tons lifted a foot. 
T.=147515 kilogramme-metres. 
= 478 tons lifted a foot. 


The first day’s walking was done pretty well by both men. On the 
second day both men did the first 20 miles well, but felt very much 
fatigued during the last 13 miles. During the last 4 miles each man felt 
pain in the smallof his back. Both men could, however, have marched on 
the following day if necessary. 

With regard to the amount of fatigue as compared with other occasions, 
T. would give no opinion, as he said he had no fair basis of comparison. 
S., however, was clear that he was much more fatigued than on other food. 
In 1865 in Ireland he marched 26 miles on one day and 20 on the following, 
carrying his rifle, accoutrements, and forty rounds of ball-cartridge (an 
additional weight equal to 18 1b. nearly), and yet he did not feel fatigued at 
all; while on the present occasion, marching without weight except his 
clothes, he felt much exhausted. 

Both men felt hungry; the food satisfied them; neither had any per- 
ceptible action of the skin ; the days were fine and rather warm. During 
these two days S. lost almost precisely 2 kilogrammes in weight, and T. 
lost 2 of a kilogramme. 

The Urinary Excretion.—The urine was collected as usual from 8 A.M. 
to 8 a.m. on the first day, and from 8 a.m. to 8 p.M., and from @ p.M. to 
8 A.M. on the second day. In order to compare this, I have placed to- 
gether the chief urinary constituents in the two periods of rest and exercise, 


Amount of Urine, in cubic centimetres. 


8. _ Ts 


| Rest. Exercise. Rest. Exercise. 
First 24 hours ...c.cccscccsesseess 2230 2550 2120 1650 
First 12 hours of second day 1550 1210 1690 1000 
aay arine) foo ee ii er : 
Second 12 hours of second 910 1020 600 650 


day (night urine) ............ 


. 


348 Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. _[Jan. 81, 


Excretion of Nitrogen, in grammes, in Urine. 


S. AW 
Total nitrogen Total nitrogen 
Urea. by soda-lime. Urea. by solace 
Rest. ae Rest. | !2*"-| Rest, | M2") Best, | oe 


cise. cise. cise. 


ber 17-18, first 
Hegre pe ye a 20°00 | 19°125) 9°33 | 10-048) 17:3. | 16-005) 8-765) 7-994 


December 18, first 


12 (day) hours of }| 8:525) 7-865) 4:005| 4533] 845 | 8-000} 4-912) 4522 

second day ......... 
December 18-19, last 

12 (night) hours of f 5:005} 7-140! 3:017| 3:360) 42 | 5-200} 2-170) 3:553 

second day ......... j 


| 


Total in two days...) 83°530| 34:130) 16:352) 17-942) 30-030) 29-205) 15-847] 16:069 


The excretion of the urea was very parallel in the two men, and followed 
this course. In each man in the first twenty-four hours nearly 1 gramme 
less was excreted by each man in the period of exercise as compared with 
that of rest; the larger man excreted nearly 3 grammes more urea than the 
smaller one. 

In the next twelve hours each man excreted very nearly 4a gramme less” 
in the period of exercise as compared with rest. The absolute quantity was 
almost precisely the same in each man; in other words, the bulk of the 
larger man now had no effect in the urea. 

In the last twelve hours (chiefly rest during night) the urea increased in 
each man in the period of exercise, as compared with that of rest, the abso- 
lute increase in S. being 2 grammes, and in T. 1 gramme. 

Taking the whole period,— | 

Excretion of urea in two days in the period 8. T. 
of exercise as compared with rest...... } +0°60 —°825 

The results, when the total nitrogen is considered, are as follows :— 


Slightly more nitrogen was excreted by 8. in the period of exercise 
throughout ; the excess being,— | 


germ 
In the first°24 Wours . 6 isc ach eae Coa cee os ot aay 
La the next: 2 %hoursse. sone a Sasa: ahactehenae 0°528 


In the Jast 12 hours eee oe 


Total excess of nitrogen during exercise period. 1°589 
In the case of T. the total nitrogen during exercise was like the urea 
below the period of rest in the first 36 hours, but in the last 12 hours the 
excess of nitrogen in the period of exercise was so considerable as to 
cause the nitrogen of the two days of exercise to exceed that of rest by 
0°223 gramme. 


1867.] Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. - 849 


I draw the conclusion, therefore, that in both these men there was in 
the first 36 hours a decrease in the amount of urea; but in the last 12 
or rest-hours of the 48 hours of the period of exercise, an increase. 

That in the case of S. the total nitrogen was increased throughout the 
whole period of exercise, the total mecrease being 1°589 gramme, or 
24°5 grains of nitrogen, while in the case of T. the total nitrogen, like the 
urea, was lower in the first 36 hours of the period of exercise, but increased 
greatly in the last 12 hours. 

It may, indeed, be said that the difference between the amounts in the 
two periods is after all so inconsiderable as to be explained by the necessary 
errors of observation. But the constancy of the results in the two men, 
and in the case of T., the amount on the first day after the work-period, as 
given further on, seem to me to show the excess to be real. 

On the same diet the heavier man excreted rather more urea and total 
nitrogen throughout than the smaller man, except in the first 12 hours of the 
second active day, when the urea was a trifle less. 

The excretion of nitrogen in the urea, as compared with the total 
nitrogen, was (the ureal nitrogen being taken as unity) as follows :— 


8. ut 
Period of rest ...... Cosa bh tOL Uae Vto ls 
Period of exercise ...... 1 to-1:126 1 to 1178 


In both cases there appears to have been a greater relative excretion of the 
nitrogenous substances other than ureal. Is it not probable that the 
creatinine was increased ? 


The Phosphoric Acid. 


s. ui 
Rest Exercise. Rest Exercise. 
ira period of 24 hours ...- 0.3.) 22.0% LcV ic ged LEAR ret 1144 
First 12 hours of second period ..| °4930 395 5102 5305 
Second 12 hours of second period ‘4603 “749 "4308 "3978 
Total in last 24 hours .......... 9533 1-144 9410 9283 


On a non-nitrogenous diet the amount of phosphoric acid is not increased 
in a period of exercise as compared with a like period of rest. The imma- 
terial increase in 8. is counterbalanced by as slight a decrease in T. 


The Sulphuric Acid. 


| | g, th 
| | Rest. Exercise. Rest. Exercise. 
ee os hstond dy ay). a ee | ae ae 
Second 12 hours of second day (night) ‘261 3084 195 ‘3011 
otal aneeeand Gay ,; «+. ie sneer 17688 | 686 427 “4555 


i i RE ER RD tr 


350 Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. [Jan. 81, 


The sulphuric acid was slightly increased in each man, but the increase 
was not great, and is perhaps within the limits of error. 
Chloride of Sodium. 


As no chloride of sodium was taken with the non-nitrogenous diet, the 
amounts excreted represent on the second day the mere waste of the tissues. 


8. T. 
Rest. | Exercise. | Rest. | Exercise. 
Hrs, hous yo. Vos eet, ages 6914 | 3280 - 49 1-866 
First 12 hours of second day (day time) .| 281 673 1:88 1-094 
Last 12 hours of second day (night time).| 1-01 “119 “42 "150 
Total of Yast day "671.26... 60 sen aise 3°82 0-892 2:30 1-244 


As the results agree in both men, it appears that on a diet free from 
common salt much more chloride of sodium passes with the urine during 
rest than exercise; it is to be inferred that in the latter case chloride of 
sodium passes off by the skin. 

No sugar was detected in the urine by the ordinary tests of liquor 
potassee and Fehling’s copper solution. 


; Intestinal Excretion. 
This was examined on the last day, and was as follows :— 


«ht. | 
Total weight, Solids. Water. Nitrogen. 
in grammes. 
Sars 100-5 5°63 94:87 5318 
Ate 120-7 11-012 119-688 5739 


If these numbers are compared with those of the corresponding period 
of rest, it appears that the total intestinal excretion was larger, but this 
arose in one man from an excess of water; in the other the solids were 
increased. In both men the nitrogen was in excess in the period of exer- 
cise, but the difference was not great, and may probably be disregarded. 


Balance of Ingesta and Egesta. 


On the second day of the non-nitrogenous diet and exercise, the balance 
of ingesta and egesta was as follows :— 


8. VT; 
Weight of body at commencement of period, in kilogrammes .| 66°66 50:1 
Weight of body iat close of period 2). <i). ier wleles asses J oe es eal) COT ee ea 
Gaintor loss, mm erammics 2. ....5 «os eee. 5 AS ARIS ORO oA —930 |—230 
Total ingesta in food and drink, in grammes ..........000- 0639 3124 
Obie ig 3272) (2 Wy tia ok ee SPRL eA are Sra cn Aa BA G0 2247 1667 
Titec sete faiei eis ere. 5 a wa deere Bete bice cE to Se ee 100-5 120°7 
Skin andehwmp"egestaly sic. ¢. .. od caue tite teenies erate ae --| 2221°5 | 15563 


If these numbers are compared with those given in the corresponding 


TSo7: 7. Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. 301 
period of rest, it will be seen that in both men the skin and lung egesta 
were very greatly increased (nearly 100 and 50 per cent. respectively) ;, 
the intestinal egesta were also much larger; the urinary smaller, especially - 
in the case of T., who passed nearly 800 cub. centims. less of urine, though 
he took more fluid as drink. 


Neither of the men were conscious of any perspiration. 


Fifth Period.— Ordinary Diet and Exercise. 


The men were now again placed on their weighed diet, and took their 
ordinary exercise for four days, except that on the day following the walk 
of 33 miles they were tired and rested a good deal. 

This period has now to be compared with the third period, which fol- 
lowed that of rest. As the amount of diet is very important, I give the 
mean amount in each of the four days of the third and fifth period, in 
English ounces. 


8. ee 
. Third, | Fifth, || Third, | Fifth, 
Daily amount, in ounces (437°5 grains). or after | or after || or after | or after 
rest- work- rest- work- 
period. | period. || period. | period 
Pag MRC At. “Ff tcis ae enalldvis ote Gea esas sina noedon 8:5 9°81 6°625 787 
250580, 15 6) 2 a soeeRe EL oe 17 16:18 || 16:25 16°75 
Vegetables—$ potatoes, } cabbage............055 13°68 | 1462 || 13-5 14:37 
PEST ake. ak.S, osalep end dda hate’ 1 1 1 | 
Tea, with 1} oz. of milk, 14 0z. of sugar ..... 20 20 20 20 
Coffee, with same amount of sugar and milk .| 20 20 20 20 
Deena OMEGA cine sca. dhancttudethse Seebonw ees 21 20 18 20 
Salt uncertain 


OF eRe eee ree sess tereeseseese Fee SEH ereser 


In the fifth period each man took rather more than an ounce more 
meat; S. took 58, oz. less bread, and T. 3 an ounce more; each man took 
? of an ounce more vegetables, and 1 and 2 ounces more water. It is to 
be regretted that the diet was not precisely the same ; but the differences 
are not very great, and it was thought desirable to allow the men to satisfy 
their appetites. ‘They were more hungry after the work-period than after 
the rest-period. 

The weight increased in this period. In two days S. gained 13 kilo- 
gramme and T. 13 kilogramme, each man nearly getting his proper weight. 


The Urinary Excretion. 
The quantity of Urine. 


S. r. 
After rest- |After work) After rest- |After work- 
period. period. period. period. 
Merbetdadayes 1. i2uts| so U1300. WV Pigkees |, 100. |. 149By 
VOL. XV. 2F 


352 Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. [Jan. 31, 


There was scarcely any difference in T., and ouly 10 per cent. difference 


in S. 
The Nitrogen. 


S. ve 


After rest- After work- After rest- | After work- 
period. period. period. period. 
Total ss Total Total Total 
nitro- nitro- nitro- nitro- 
Urea. | gen by| Urea. | gen by|| Urea. | gen by| Urea. | gen by 
soda- soda- | soda- soda- 
lime. lime. lime. lime. 
Bist Gaye feeds snetistemans 20°67 | 9°703) 20:8 | 10:237|| 14:40 | 7-441) 23-00 | 11:58 
Secomd Gay ca. css soe oe: 25°68 | 12°304| 26:364| 13-065)| 23-00 | 11-480) 24-36 | 13-00 
Minded ayy... stses.she sens 26:29 | 13°704| 28:32 | 14-590) 25:20 | 12-209) 24-57 
Hourth Gay... <-eenient ss: 29-67 | 14-260) 30°10 | 15-555)| 22:99 | 13-231) 21-36 | 10-395 
ere ee 25-555) 12-988) 26-396| 13-361] 21-397] 11-095| 23-322! 11-658] 
Mean 
of 3 
days. 


Unfortunately, on the third day, in the case of T., the determination of 
‘the nitrogen by soda-lime was not satisfactory, and as some time elapsed 
before it could be again done, the amount has been omitted. But sup- 
posing there was the same relative excess over the ureal nitrogen as in the 
other days, the total nitrogen would have been 13°97 grms. Adopting 
this number, the following are the results :— ; 


S. ie 
Excess of urea in four days in after work-period.................eee0e+ 3-364 7°700 
Excess of total nitrogen in four days in after work-period....... woeee| 1-492] 4-560 


The question now arises, was this excess of nitrogen excreted during 
the after work-period the result of the elimination of the products of 
destroyed muscle during the work-period, or was it the consequence of an 
excess of nitrogenous food in the four days following the exercise ? 

S. took 1°31 oz. avoirdupois more meat cooked and 2 oz. vegetables in 
the fifth than in the third period. The percentage of water in the meat 
was 57°49, and if the nitrogen be taken at 2:955 per cent., there would 
be in 1:31 oz. of cooked meat 1:1 grm. of nitrogen. In the vegetable 
there would be about 0:04 grm. of nitrogen. But from this amount must 
be deducted °325 grm. of nitrogen not taken in the bread, making the 
total daily excess of nitrogen taken in the fifth period -815 grm.; the 
daily excess of nitrogen in the urine was, however, only °375 grm. ; there- 
fore, in the case of S., it cannot be affirmed that any excess of nitrogen 
was derived from disintegration of muscle during the exercise. In the 
case of T., the daily excess of nitrogen was larger, amounting daily to 


1867.] Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. 353, 


1°14 grm., but as the man took 1-°245 oz. more meat, 4 oz. more bread, 
and almost an ounce more vegetable (in all 1-2 grm. of nitrogen), it is 
evident that here also the excess of nitrogen in the urine might have been 
derived from the food. However, it is really probable that some of the 
very large excess of urea on the first day of this period, in the case of T., 
was really owing to augmented elimination from the work. No such ex- 
cess is observable in the case of S., who had, however, a larger elimination 
than T. in the previous twelve hours. 


The Chloride of Sodium. 
The chloride of sodium rapidly returned to its previous amount. 


8. As 
Hirst day, ......0.:100. 1-444) 1-614 
Second day ......... 6-169] 4-905 
Mawes day, jac. <c uses 3 10:25 | 8-513 
Fourth day ......... 8:117| 6-446 


It will be remembered that T. always took less salt than S. The third 
period is not comparable with the fifth, as the men took by mistake a 
great deal of salt on the second day. 


The Phosphoric Acid. 


S. T 
Tone as Pa 1565 | 2-158 
Second day ......... 2-413 | 2-273 
Third day: ices. sieves 2:548 | 2-533 
Fourth day ......... 2-408 | 2-065 


As the phosphoric acid was not determined in the third period, no com- 
parison is possible, but the above Table shows that no excess passed off in 


the after-period. : 
The sulphuric acid was not determined in this period. 


The Intestinal Excreta, in grammes. 


8. Ts 
Total Nitro- || Total : Nitro- 
weight, Solids.|Water. gen. _|lweight. Solids.| Water. 5 
Dee O20 5 first Cael 298) 1 sexsi abe odes: | cobain. 127-5 
Beg, 20-2; second day.| VOU-7< |} wees | oaneos | edess2 213 
Dec. 21-22; third day...| 184-9 | 21-86 |113-02| 1:264/| 71 11:8 | 59-2 | -7188 
Weces2—29; fourth day.| UPL eect! | otecee |) Sense 191°7 


———_—— 


The large intestinal excretion on the first day, in the case of S., was 
owing to a little looseness of the bowels; there were two stools on that 
day, being the only instance of irregularity in either man. Otherwise, as 


854 ——<Drr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. [Jan. 31 ; 


compared with the first period, there is no evidence in either case of any 
increased excretion ; on the third day, indeed, the nitrogen was below that — 
of the first period in each ease. 

The balance of ingesta and egesta was as follows on the ‘third red of 
this period :— 


S. fy 
Weight of body at commencement...) 67:1 50:07 
Weight of body at close ............... 67-08 50°08 
Gain or loss, in grammes ............ —20 10 
Food and drink ingesta .............. 2891°7 | 2877-5 
Uminary ‘egestia i2..dete.jcvtne seam ss scree 1808-7 | 1922°5 
Intestinal egesta 0.0.1. iistecsnsecserae 134:9 71 
Skin and lungs egesta.............0006 968°1 894 


These numbers are fairly accordant with those of the first period, 
except that the intestinal excretion in T. was slightly less, and the urine 
rather more. 

The conclusions which can be drawn from the above experiments are 
not altogether accordant with those of Professors Fick and Wislicenus. 

The decrease in the urea during the first thirty-six hours of the exer- 
cise-period, as compared with the rest-period, on a diet without nitrogen, 
which occurred in these two men, is, I think, conformable with the results 
obtained by the two experimenters mentioned ; but this is not the case with 
the increase in the urea which I found in the last twelve hours. Yet that 
this increase is real is shown, I believe, by the accordant results in the 
two men, and by the increase of the total nitrogen of the exercise-period 
as determined by soda-lime. 

The relative greater increase in my experiments of the non-ureal nitro- 
gen (which makes me believe that an excess of nitrogenous compound 
other than urea, and possibly creatinine especially, was produced by 
the exercise) is not perceptible in their experiments, yet I cannot but be- 
lieve that the fact was so, as it comes out with great clearness in the two 
men. The following Table shows this. 


Relation of ureal to non-ureal nitrogen, the former being taken as unity. 


S. T. 
Before rest-wertod «.(;. 0.7.0... 1 tot") 1 to 1°108 
VeStPEMOO a eet eo wncale 1 to 1:042 1 to 1:13 
PVIten LESt-eTIOM isis jist ace - < o 1 to 1:009 1 to 1°116 
MMOEKEDCTION (0 5 Tas. ere), ce 1 to 1°126 1 to 1°178 
After work-period.......... oe tol 08 1 to 1:06 (?) 


(three days). 
The reason which makes me believe the results are real, is the fact that 
the individual relation of the ureal and non-ureal nitrogen is preserved ; 
that is to say, in T. the non-ureal nitrogen is, under normal circumstances, 
a little in excess as compared with §.; the same relative excess is also 
- found in the work-period. 


1867. | Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. 355 


The reason of these differences between Professors Fick and Wislicenus 
and myself is probably to be found in the short period of time during 
which their observations were carried on, and also because the urea was 
not determined by them in the night of the 30th to 31st of August. 

But their conclusion is certainly borne out, that on a non-nitrogenous diet 
exercise produces no notable increase in the nitrogen of the urime—although, 
when the whole period is considered, it does produce a slight increase. 

It may now also be said that, under similar conditions, exercise pro- 
duces no increase in the excretion of nitrogen by the bowels. 
~ The diminution in thé amount of urea during the actual period of work, 
as compared with the rest-period, which, if I am not mistaken, is obvious 
in both our experiments, is a very curious circumstance. It shows, not 
that on a non-nitrogenous diet the nerves and muscles are totally unaffected 
by exercise, but that changes go on which either retain nitrogen in the 
body or eliminate it by another channel. 

Is it possible that, when the excess of nitrogen is restricted, the ex- 
hausted muscle will take nitrogen from the products given off from 
another portion of decomposing muscle, and thus the nitrogen may be 
used over and over again? or, after all, is nitrogen really given off in some 
form by the skin during exercise, as formerly supposed ? 

Although it is thus certain that very severe exercise can be performed 
on non-nitrogenous diet for a short time, it does not follow that nitrogen 
is unnecessary. The largest experience shows, not only that nitrogen 
must be supplied if work is to be done, but that the amount must aug- 
ment with the work. For a short period the well-fed body possesses 
sufficient nitrogen to permit muscular exertion to go on for some time with- 
out a fresh supply ; but the destruction of nitrogenous tissues in these two 
men is shown by the way in which, when nitrogen was again supplied, 
a large amount was retained in the body to compensate for the previous 
deprivation. 

I believe also that in these two men the great exhaustion of the second 
day showed that their muscles and nerves were becoming structurally im- 
paired, and that, if the experiments had been continued, there would have 
been on the third day a large diminution in the amount of work. 

I have found that the period when a restricted supply of nitrogen 
begins to tell on the work differs in different men. In one experiment 
I reduced the nitrogen in the food to one-half its normal quantity in two 
men: in one, no effect was produced on exercise in seven days ; in the other, 
a lessening of active bodily work was produced in five days. Doubtless the 
previous nutrition of the muscle would influence the time. 

Finally, it may be questioned whether the relation of elimination of 
nitrogen to exercise can be properly determined in this manner, 7. e. by 
cutting off the supply of nitrogen. The true method would probably be 
to supply nitrogen in certain definite amount, so that the acting muscle 
might appropriate at once what it required. 

VOL. XV. 2G 


356 Mr. J. P. Harrison on the Relation of [Feb. 7, 14, 


February 7, 1867. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The following communication was read :— 


“Account of Experiments on Torsion and Flexure for the Deter- 
mination of Rigidities.” By J. D. Evererr, D.C.L., Assistant 
to the Professor of Mathematics in the University of Glasgow. 
Communicated by Sir Witt1am Tuomson. Received January 25, 
1867, 


(Abstract. ) 


These experiments are‘a continuation of those described in a paper read 
February 22, 1866, with some modifications in the apparatus employed 
which render the comparison between torsion and flexure more direct. 
The amount of torsion or flexure produced by subjecting a cylindrical rod 
to a uniform couple throughout its whole length, is measured by means of 
two mirrors clamped to the rod near its ends, in which, by the aid of two 
telescopes, the reflexions of a scale overhead are seen and the displace- 
ments read off. One end of the rod is fixed, and a couple (of torsion and 
flexure alternately) is applied to the other end. 

Three rods, of glass, brass, and steel, were experimented on, and the re- 
sults obtained were as follows—M, n, and & denoting the resistances (in 
kilogrammes per square millimetre) to linear extension, shearing, and 
cubical compression respectively, and ¢ denoting the ratio of lateral con- 
traction to longitudinal extension :— 


Glass. Brass, Steel. 

Value of M...,.. 5851 10948 21793 
99 Nig ebxtee) (2OnU 3729 8341 

se Te is aoe 57007 18756 

AA (see Bos A °229 "469 °310 


February 14, 1867. 
Lieut.-General SABINKE, President, in the Chair, 


? s e e 
The following communications were read :— 


Y. “On the Relation of Insolation to Atmospheric Humidity.” By 
J. Park Harrison, M.A. Communicated by the President, 
‘Received January 30, 1867, 


The occurrence of the maxima of insolation on days of great relative 
humidity which was noticed by Herr vy. Schlagintweit in India*, receives 


* Procecdings of the Royal Society, 1865, vol. xiv, p. 111. 


1867.1 Insolation to Atmospheric Humidity. > a 


confirmation from the fact that the post-solstitial periods of maximum 
solar radiation in autumn, and also the diurnal maxima, coincide with 
monthly and daily periods of maximum humidity. 

It is proposed to show the extent to which this is the case in England 
by means of Tables of monthly results of radiation and vapour. 

The first Table exhibits the mean monthly values of solar radiation and 
vapour-tension for the five months from May to September, at Greenwich, 
in 1860-64 *, 

TaB_e I, 
Monthly Means of Radiation and Vapour at Greenwich (1860-64). 


Solar Tension of Weight of 
meen | radiation. vapour. vapour. 
| ° 
ee | OFeR. 0-314 in. 3°5 ers. 
PMG. conc: 103:2 0°364 4°} 
Tnbyint say, | +108-2 +0°393 +44 
August......) |-+107°5 | +0°397 44:4 
September... 97°5 0°361 40 


| 
‘The plus signs (+-) indicate first and second maxima. 

The maxima, both of radiation and vapour, occur in July and August, 
The excess of insolation in July is 5°, and the excess in August 4°°3 above 
the mean in June. The excess of vapour-tension in the two months is ‘030, 

To obtain results more exactly comparable, the monthly mean tension 
of vapour for each of the five months was next deduced at the hours of 
noon, 2 p.M., and 4 p.M., for the years 1842-47, during which two-hourly 
observations were made at the Royal Observatory. 

In Table II., which contains the monthly means, maximum results again 
appear principally in July and August. 


Tasxe II. 
Monthly Means of Tension of Vapour at Greenwich at 0", 2", and 4", 


| 
Year. May. Junet. July. August. | September. 
1842. 0-358 0-473 0-436 | 0-545 0-449 
1843. 0°390(a) | 0-414 0:501(2)} 0-509 0°474(c) 
1844. 0°365 0°429 0°466 0°430 0:450 
1845. 0°331 0°495 0°463 0:443 0-402 
1846, 0°379 0°483 0-484 0°496 0-471 
1847, 0°376 0°391 0-484 0°497 0-403 
| 

(a) Mean amount of cloud 8°0. (4) Cloud 8°5. (e) Cloud 4°5. 


* The vacuum-thermometer was used at Greenwich first in 1860, 1864 is the date 
of the last published observations. The means of radiation were derived from the 
daily maxima of the yacuum-thermometer ; the means of vapour from the usual num- 
ber of diurnal observations. It is believed that the observations for the five years are 
homogeneous. T See note *, p. 358. 


2e 2 


358 Mr. J. P. Harrison on the Relation of  [Feb. 14, 


And the monthly maxima of solar radiation (in the next Table) accord 
with the higher mean tensions of vapour in almost every instance. 


Taste III. 
Monthly Mean Maxima of Solar. Radiation. 


Year. May. June*. July. August. | September. 
oO re) ° ro) Cc 

1842. 82:1 98-9 92°4 102°2 81°7 
1843. 80°9(a) 85:1 90-9(d) 93°0 92°6(c) 
1844. 87°5 95:0 SE ale, 87'°2 87°0 
1845. 75°0 93°1 90°3 (91°7)F 81-3 
1846. 87°1 103°1 97°4 93°3 90°3 
1847. 86°3 85°7 93°0 89:0 77°6 


(az) Mean amount of cloud 8-0. (5) Cloud 8°5. (c) Cloud 4:5. 


In those cases where the values of radiation and vapour do not agree, the 
exceptions will, it is believed, be sufficiently accounted for; thus the oc- 
currence of the second maximum of solar radiation in September 1843 in 
place of July, though tension was higher in the latter month, is explained 
by the obscuration of the sun, and the unusual quantity of rain in July. 
The tension of vapour in September was ‘06 higher than in Junef. 

Heat and Vapour in Canada.—The dependence of the maximum tem- 
perature in the day on the quantity of moisture in the air, in winter, at To- 
ronto, though not directly connected with the present inquiry, is closely 
allied to it, and may be referred to with advantage in the absence of ob- 
servations of solar radiation, to show the effects of slight variations of va- 
pour in that country. 

General (at that time Colonel) Sabine, in a paper in the Transactions of 
the Royal Society ‘On the Periodic and Non-Periodic Variations of Tem- 
perature at Toronto”’§, pointed out the fact that the period of mmimum 
heat in the year, both hourly and daily, at that station occurs between 
the 7th and 17th days of February, on the days when vapour is also at its 
minimum. The means of temperature and tension on the ten days 


* Tn June the maxima of radiation are, as a rule, found to be accompanied by less 
vapour than in August and September. Thus it will be seen in Tables II. and III. 
that the difference between the mean tensions in June and August 1846 is ‘013; the 
excess is in favour of August ; but the maximum solar radiation isin June. In 1843 
tension was at its maximum in July—but not radiation, in consequence of the abnormal 
. quantity of cloud and rain in that month. 

tT Six observations only. 

¢ A-still more remarkable instance of monthly maximum solar radiation in Sep- 
tember occurred in 1865, when the excess over the mean of the five preceding Sep- 
tembers was 21°-7, and the increase of contemporaneous vapour-tension ‘086. ‘This 
appears to be accounted for by the rainfall in August ; the weather in September 1865 
was, in fact, very like that which follows the rainy season in India. The tension of vapour 
was ‘084 higher than in June. 

§ Anno 1853, p. 148. 


1867. | Insolation to Atmospheric Humidity. B59 


alluded to are respectively 21°°7 and °098, as deduced from the hourly ob- 
servations which were taken in 1842-48 at the Ordnance Office. 

The mean readings of the standard thermometer at 2 p.m. (the warmest 
hour in the winter at Toronto) and the contemporaneous mean tensions 
of yapour, in January and February, are exhibited in Table IV. 


TABLE IV. 
Monthly Mean Results at Toronto at 2* p.m. (1842-48)*, 


Month | Maximum | Wet-bulb | Tension of 
; temperature thermometer.| vapour. 
= 3 a rae eee 
| January de-(fy 28°6 26°7 0-129 
[Pebruary...| 28-3. = | 29°9 0-117 
{ | 


At 2" on the 7th to the 17th days of February the temperature was 26°°4, 
and the mean tension of vapour *111. 

Postmeridian maxima of solar radiation —Though, it is well known at 
observatories, the hour of mean maximum solar heat occurs in this country 
after midday, there is no numerical proof of the fact available, excepting the 
results of six days’ observations by Professor Daniell. From experiments 
made by him in June (1822) at every hour between 9° 30™ a.m. and 
7" 30” p.m., the mean highest readings of a black-bulb thermometer were 
obtained between 1? 30™ and 2". The following are the means for five 


days :— 
he. mm B 
AG IO Ses. cs, .46 
BOR SUS, cae an Oo 
{| Sg) wage pe 
Zz SU 63 + 


It may be assumed, then, that on days when the sun is shining both in the 
morning and afternoon, solar radiation is of highest apparent force after 0" +. 

Daily maxima of vapour.—The means of vapour-tension have been de- 
duced at 10" A.m., noon, and 2" from the bi-horary observations at Greenwich 
in 1842-47; the following Table, which contains the monthly results for 
each of these hours, shows that the means at 2" are higher than those at 
10" a.M., or at noon, in every month from March to September :— 


* From Tables LY., LVIII., and LX., Toronto Observations, vol. ii. The maxima 
of heat and vapour occur at Toronto in July and August, vapour-tension at 2" in July 
being ‘069 higher, and in August ‘108 higher than in June. 

t Daniell’s ‘Meteorology,’ vol. i. p. 113. 

¢ Ibid. pp. 114-118. On another favourable day in June, Professor Daniell obtained 
the following results with a solar thermometer covered with black wool :—at 10" a.m. 111°; 
at noon 129°; at 2" p.m. 148°; at 2"30™ p.m. 138°. Since this paper was in type, I 
find these results are confirmed by observations made in March 1858 by Mr. H. S. Eaton. 


360 Mr. J. P. Harrison on the Relation of [Feb. 14, 


TABLE V. 


Monthly Means of Vapour-Tension at Greenwich at 22", 0°, and 2® 
(1842-47). 


Hour. | March. | April. | May. June. July. | August®.| Sept. 


| 
se | ne | fl 


h 
22 *236 0-284 0°357 0°437 0°462 0°473 0°427 
0 246 0°294 0°365 0°446 0°469 0°483 0°441 


2 +:249 | +0°297 | +0°368 | +0°449 | +0°475 | +0°486 | +0°444 


The mean increase of vapour from 10* to noon is ‘010; and the mean 
increase from noon to 2" is ‘0034. In six of the months the mean increase 
is in each case ‘0037. 

The results accord with the assumed date of maximum radiation. 

Actinometer-observations.—The observations of the actinometer made by 
Mr. Nash at the Royal Observatory in 1864 supply further evidence of the 
fact that the maxima of radiation occur in the autumn, and after 0". 

I have extracted the mean results of the several groups of observations 
which were taken at or near the same elevation of the sun, in the months 
of August and September in autumn, and in the months of March and 
April in spring, and find that the value of the mean increase of the scale- 
readings in the autumn is about 100 per cent. greater than in the 
spring t. 

The mean increase of the scale-readings in March and April is 19:4. 

The mean increase of the scale-readings in August and September is 39°6. 

The difference is 20°2, at the same mean altitude of the sun. 

The means of the contemporaneous observations of the vacuum-thermo- 
meter on the grass were as follows :— 


In March and April ....... 70°3 F. 
In August and September... 84°7 F. 


The difference is 14°4. 
And the mean tension of vapour for the four months is, in March and 
April +23, and in August and September °34. 


* August is the only monthin which the mean tension of vapour is higher at 45 p.at. 
than at 25 p.m. . . 

t+ With the exception of July (when there is the minimum difference of ‘007 between 
the results at 10 a.m. and noon) and of September (when there is the maximum difference 
‘014), the mean increase in tension at noon in the several months is also remarkably 
regular. 

t See ‘Greenwich Meteorological Results,’ 1864, p. xxviii. 


1867. ] 7 Insolation to Atmospheric Humidity. 361 


| TABLE VI. 


Mean Results of Actinometer-observations at Greenwich, March and 
April 1864. 


Mean results . 
agen and ae solar | ae ee a Altitude of State of sky. 
ay. ime. istotis: sun. 
h m | a : d 
March 23. 2 29 18°7 30 Light cirri. 
15. 22 23 14:2 32 Cloudless. 
18. 2 9 74 al 32 Clear. 
18. 0 36 20°4 36 Clear. 
24, 1 32 17°0 36 Clear. 
15. 23 51 19°1 37 Clear. Light cloud. 
April 15. 2 26 27'1 37 Clear. 
20. 2 28 25°5 38 Light cirri prevalent. 
March 24. 0 49 14:3 39 Clear. 
Meansg 5) )) sesess 19°4 35 Clear. 
Tasie VII. 


Mean Results of Actinometer-observations at Greenwich, August and 
September 1864. 


Month and | Mean solar Mean results Altitude of 


dav: ima in scale-di- Sits State of sky. 
visions. : 
ae A 
August 30.) 3 26 41°6 30 { Cloudless (thunder 
: in evening). 

September 14.) 22 8 43°3 34 Sun free.from cloud. 

14.) 22 12 34°7 35 Light cirri over sun. 

August 26. 3.0 38°3 35 Sun free from cloud. 

26. 2 55 32°4 36 Sun free from cloud. 

Clear (amount of 

Zu. 2 39 40-1 36 cloud in afternoon 9, 

cirrocumuli, cirrus). 

5. 3 3 41°7 39 Cloudless. 
Cloud genera __Ire- 


Means socaek | 39°6 35 sent. 


Of the very few observations in May and July which were available for 
comparison, the scale-readings in July were found to reach far higher values 
than in May*. 


* The observations at altitudes between 24° and 29° in March and October showed 
similar results. Below 24° and above 60° there were no observations that were com- 
parable. 


362 Mr. J. P. Harrison on the Relation of [Feb, 14, 


TaB.e VIII. 
Results of Actinometer-observations in May and July 1864. 


Mean results ; 
Month and Mean solar FPR Pou id Altitude of State annie 
day. time. aaa sun. . 
h m : is 
May 16. 217 28°3 47 Cloudless*. 
16. 0 28 21°4 56 | Cloudless. 
16. 0 14 od, 57 Cloudiess. 
July 11. 2 19 46°7 50 Clear about sun. 
5. Mey, 36°6 58 Clear. 
Se 23 18 39°3 58 Cloudless. 


The mean tension of vapour in May was ‘30, in July °38. 

The last Table contains, in parts of scale, the results of groups of obser- 
vations near midday and 2 p.m., on three days, in March, May, and July. 
The maximum in each case occurs at the later hour. 


TABLE IX. 


Actinometer-observations at 0" and 2". 


Mean result ; 
Month and | Mean solar Sih : Altitude of ; 
day. time. so eye sun. State of sky. 
hm i 
March 24. 0 49 14:3 39 Clear throughout. 
24. ip 3 17:0 36 Clear. 
May 16. 0 28 21°4 56 Cloudless. 
16. 2 alii 28°3 47 Cloudless. 
July 14. | > 23 37 48°6 59 Cloudless. 


14, 213 57°6 50 Cloudless. 


The great accordance between the foregoing results renders it unnecessary 
to adduce further evidence of the occurrence of maximum insolation some 
considerable time after the summer solstice and after 5°. 

Increased solar radiation supposed to be due to the action of aqueous 
vapour.—Herr von Schlagintweit, applying Professor Tyndall’s discovery 
of the absorptive properties of aqueous vapour to the phenomenon of inso- 
lation, attributed the high readings of his solar thermometer, in certain 
parts of India, to the fact that air, when highly charged with moisture, 
impedes free radiation; that is to say, the air restores to the instrument 
some portion of the heat which has been radiated off from it. 

A like cause has been recently assigned for the variations in temperature 
which take place on clear nights in Madras under different tensions of va- 


* Compare observations on the same day at 0b 28™ and Oh 14™. 


1867.) Insolation to Atmospheric Humidity. 3638 


pour, those nights being considered clear in which the percentage of cloud 
did not exceed *10. It was found, on a careful tabulation of hourly obser- 

- vations, that the fallin temperature was decidedly greater when the quantity 
of. vapour was relatively small*. 

Cloud, haze, and opalescence t of the atmosphere more probably the 
principal cause of the phenomenon.—It appeared of much importance to 
ascertain whether the presence of cloud, and the imperfect state of trans- 
parency in the sky which usually accompanies it, may not have materi- 
ally assisted in producing the results alluded to in the last paragraph, and, 
a fortiori, account for the increased insolation noticed in cloudy weather in 
various parts of India—e. g. ‘“‘on days in the rainy season when the clouds 
are temporarily broken,”’ and, as in Sikkim, ‘‘ when a break in the clouds 
of an hour or two had to be watched for to obtain observations of solar ra- 
diation ”’ (Schlagintweit, ‘ Meteorology of India,’ pp. 49 & 51). 

To test this point, the results of the observations for the four years end- 
ing 1844, over which the inquiry at Madras extended, were divided into 
groups of contemporaneous observations of temperature, vapour-tension, and 
percentage of clear sky, when the mean numerical results showed that a 
progressive fall of about 1° F. for every ‘10 of vapour-tension was accom- 
panied by a proportionate increase in the percentage of clear sky,—a result 
which is the more significant when it 1s considered that the infusion of 
visible cloud was limited to :10. 

To prevent mistake, the fall in temperature on the nights of maximum 
clearness was compared with the fall cn nights of minimum clearness 
within the limits above stated. There were twenty-five nights which were 
estimated to be perfectly clear, and twenty-two nights when the per. 
centage of clear sky ranged from °90 to °93, the average being °915 (1°000 
representing an entirely clear sky). The results were as follows :— 

The mean fall of temperature at an estimated clearness of sky denoted 
by 1-000 was 8°°3 F. 

The mean fall of temperature at an estimated clearness denoted by 915 
was §° F. 

The difference is 2°°3. The contemporaneous mean tensions of vapour 
were ‘08 and °83 respectively. ‘ 

It is probable then, as cloud accompanies humidity, that tension of vapour 
gives some indication of the state of dransparenc y of the sky, whilst afford- 
Ing a measure of the quantity of invisible vapour in the air. 

In any case it is sufficiently clear, both from the results at Madras and 
from the shght increase in the tension at 2" p.m., that the amount of 
aqueous vapour alone is not sufficient to account for increased or diminished 
solar radiation. 

* Phil. Mag. October 1866; where see Tables and method of deduction. 

+ This term was first used by Professor Roscoe. It here represents the state of the 


atmosphere at the moment vapour is in process of condensation previously to its forma- 
tion into cloud, 


364 Mr. J. P. Harrison on the Relation of [Feb. 14, 


The explanation of the phenomenon of the maxima of insolation oc- 
curring on days of great relative humidity in India, however, which has been 
already alluded to, applies with increased force to the absorptive properties 
of visible moisture ; and the known action of even the lightest form of cloud 
in radiating heat to the earth, would point to this as the principal cause of 
the phenomenon, though it cannot be doubted that some of the effect is 
due to the action of invisible vapour, whether as warmed directly the 
solar rays, or by heat derived from a secondary source. 

The dependence of terrestrial heat on vapour and cloud. ee was to 
increased or diminished radiation under a clear or clouded sky that the 
inflections of the curves of mean temperature, which I communicated to 
the Royal Society in May 1865, were ascribed*. The effects produced 
were on that occasion considered to be principally due to radiation at night ¢; 
but an examination of the daily means proved that a similar action occurred 
also by day +,—the phenomenon in fact depending, as in the case of solar ra- 
diation, on the quantity of moisture in the air. 

The precise values of heat resulting from the action and es of solar 
radiation and vapour cannot be ascertained until mean numerical values have 
been deduced from a sufficient number of hourly observations to afford 
trustworthy data for determination. ‘The present paper merely helps to 
establish a relation between solar radiation and humidity, and suggests an 
additional cause for the effects which appear to follow from it. 


* It has since been found that the value of the difference of temperature for fifty 
years at Greenwich, due to terrestrial radiation, was very much understated by me, 
principally from the fact that the mean temperatures for the greater part of the entire 
period had been corrected by quantities in the Philosophical Transactions which were 
afterwards found to be erroneous, and have been disused at Greenwich for several years. 
All the conclusions which were’ based specially on the results for fifty years must there- 
fore be considered as withdrawn. 

The results derived from the more perfect means for periods of seven and eight years 
are confirmed by the Oxford thermographs, and by almost identical results which I 
find were obtained by Dr. Madler from fifteen years’ observations at Berlin nearly 
thirty years ago. 

tT See also ‘ Lectures on Scientific Subjects,’ by Sir John Herschel, 1866, p. 149 (10 

¢ British Association Reports, 1859, p. 198. 


1867. ] _ _Insolation to Atmospheric Humidity. 365 
APPENDIX. 
No. 1. 
Monthly Mean Maximum Solar Radiation at Greenwich (1860-64). 


Year. May. June. July. August. ee, 
a ice ae ee ae rs ree ee ce 
1860. 103-7 101-0 105°6 103°5 97 
1861. 96:7 108°6 1145 116°5 106:9 
1862. 99°6 103*1 109-4 TO", 99°8 
1863. 95°7 104:1 107:2 106°5 92:9 
1864. 93°1 99°3 103°7 100°1 90°7 
Means* | 978 | 1032 | 1082 | 1075 97:5 
No. 2. 


Monthly Mean Tension of Vapour at Greenwich (1860-64). 


Year. May. June. July. August. | September. 
1860. 0°312 0°357 0°393 0°396 0:364 
1861. 0-284. 0-404 0:413 0-436 | 0:369 
1862. 0°365 0°352 0-394 0-410 0396 
1863. 0-302 0:364 0°384 0-412 0-320 
1864. 0°306 0:344 0-382 0°333 0°357 


Means* | 0-314 0:364 0-398 0:397 0-361 


No. 3. 
Monthly Mean Weight of Cubic Foot of Air at Greenwich (1860-64). 


Year. May. June. July. | August. | September. 
Ep TS. ers. grs. ers. 
1860. | “35 "4-0 44 44 41 
1861. 32 46 46 4:9 4-1 
1862. 4:0 4:0 4:5 46 4:4 
1863. 34 4°] 43 4:5 36 
1864. 35 39 4-2 o7 4:0 
Means * 3'5 4] 4-4 4:4 4:0 


* Extracted from Greenwich Observations. 


366 Relation of Insolation to Atmospheric Humidity. [Feb. 14, 


No, 4° 7 
Vapour-Tension at 10° a.m. at Greenwich (1842-47). 


Year. | March. | April. | May. | June. | July. | August. 


1842. 0-263 | 0:255 0:354 0-453 0:425 0:527 

1843. 0-260 0:502 0°383 0-400 0-467 | 0-498 
1844. 0:238 0:320 0352 0-412 0-452 0-423 
1845. 0-187 0:282 | 0:323 0-467 | 0-459 0-432 
1846. 0-261 0:298 0-361 0:516 0-491 0-494 
1847. 0:210 0:248 0-372 0:377 0-481 0-465 


Sums 1-419 1-705 | 2145 | 2°625 2775 | 2839 


Means*| 0236 | 0284 | O857 | 0437 | 0462 | 0-473 


No. 5. 
Vapour-Tension at noon at Greenwich (1842-47). 


Year. | March. | April. | May. June. July. | August. | Sept. Oct. 


1842. 0:280 0-270 0°358 0-470 | 0-437 0°546 0-447 | 0315 
1843. 0:27] 0°309 0:390 | 0-407 0:493 0-499 0-478 | 0324 
1844. 0:250 0:337 0°358 0-423 0459 0:429 0-456 03438 
1845. 07190 | 0:295 0-331 0-488 0:462 0:445 0:397 | 0-354 
1846. 0:266 | 0-305 0:377 0:498 0-489 0-491 0-470 | 0:356 
1847. 0:219 0:247 0°375 0-388 0-476 0-491 0396 | 0:389 


Sums 1-47 A 1763 | 2:189 | 2:67 4 2816 | 2-901 2644 | 2:081 


Means*| 0:246 0:294 | 0365 | 0:446 0-469 | 0483 | 0-441 | 0-347 


No. 6. 
Vapour-Tension at 2" p.m. at Greenwich (1842-47). 


Year. | March. | April. | May. | June. July. | August. | Sept. Oct. 


1842, 0:284 | 0:269 0:355 0:472 0°435 0546 0-447 0:317 
1843. 0-273 | 0318 0393 | 0-419 0-501 0508 0-476 0324 
1844. 0°253 0346 0-370 0:432 0-470 0-431 0-453 0346 
1845. 0-197 | 0-292 0°333 0-496 0-469 0:445 0:408 0346 
1846. 0-271 0-311 0379 | 0-485 0488 0-491 0:473 0357 
1847. 0-218 0:245 0°381 0392 0-486 0-496 0-407 0°381 


Sums 1-496 ere 81. 2-211 2°696 2:849 2917 | 2664 | 2:071 


Meane*| 0-249 | 0:297 | 0368 | 0-449 | 0-475 


0-486 | 0-444 | 0-345 


* The means are inserted in Table Y. 


18567. ] Conversion of Dynamical into Electrical Force. 367 


Fall of temperature at Madras, by nights :— 


I. 2. 
Entirely clear sky (1-000). Partially clouded sky (‘915). 
—-25 nights. 22 nights. 
0 Percentage of 
£5 a clear sky. 
i 4:8 900 
9) v6 
; 6:2 
(igi 
, 59 
ee 8-4 
11:2 
9°5 j 46 ‘910 
9:5 5:0 
9-1 7D 
69 7:6 
9:6 5D 
9-6 5-4. 
12-2 08 
81 8:5 
oe: 3:6 920 
66 : 
82 7h 2 
a 76 
4:9 
6 ~ 5:0 
IO 6°7 
8:7 nies 
8-2 5:7 930 
75 4:2 
10-6 6-4 
9:4 4:9 
6°5 63 
25 ) 207-6 | 22 ) 182-6 
8:3 | 6:0 ‘915 Mean. 


At Fort Franklin, Sir John Richardson found that the maximum of solar 
radiation was obtained in the spring and at noon. Mr. Forbes accounted 
for this by the fact that the sun’s rays were reflected from the snow, and 
thus the bulb of the thermometers reccived reflected as well as direct rays 
of sunshine. 


II. “On the Conversion of Dynamical into Electrical Force with- 
out the aid of Permanent Magnetism.” By C. W. Siemens, 


F.R.S. Received February 4, 1867. 


Since the great discovery of magnetic electricity by Faraday in 1830, 
electricians have had recourse to mechanical ‘force for the production of 
their most powerful effects ; but the power of the magneto-electrical ma- 
chine seems to depend in an equal measure upon the force expended on the 
one hand, and upon permanent magnetism on the other. 

An experiment, however, has been lately suggested to me by my brother, 
Dr. Werner Siemens of Berlin, which proves that permanent magnetism is 


368 Conversion of Dynamical into Electrical Force. [¥Fcb. 14, 


not requisite in order to convert mechanical into electrical force; and the 
result obtained by this experiment is remarkable, not only because it de- 
monstrates this hitherto unrecognized fact, but also because it provides a 
simple means of producing very powerful electrical effects. 

The apparatus employed in this experiment is an electro-magnetic machine 
consisting of one or more horseshoes of soft iron surrounded with insulated 
wire in the usual manner, of a rotating keeper of soft iron surrounded 
also with an insulated wire, and of a commutator connecting the respective 
coils in the manner of a magneto-electrical machine. If a galvanic battery 
were connected with this arrangement, rotation of the keeper in a given 
direction would ensue. If the battery were excluded from the circuit and 
rotation imparted to the keeper in the opposite direction to that resulting 
from the galvanic current, there would be no electrical effect produced, 
supposing the electro-magnets were absolutely free of magnetism; but by 
inserting a battery of asingle cell in the circuit, a certain magnetic condition 
would be set up, causing similar electro-magnetic poles to be forcibly ap- 
proached to each other, and dissimilar poles to be forcibly severed, alter- 
nately, the rotation being contrary in direction to that which would be pro- 
duced by the exciting current. 

Each forcible approach of similar poles must augment the magnetic ten— 
sion and increase consequently the power of the circulating current ; the 
resistance of the keeper to the rotation must also increase at every step 
until it reaches a maximum, imposed by the available force and the con- 
ductivity of the wires employed. 

The cooperation of the battery is only necessary for a moment of time 
after the rotation has commenced, in order to introduce the magnetic action, 
which will thereupon continue to accumulate without its aid. 

With the rotation the current ceases; and if, upon restarting the machine, 
the battery is connected with the circuit for a moment of time with its 
poles reversed, then the direction of the continuous current produced by 
the machine will also be the reverse of what it was before. 

Instead of employing a battery to commence the accumulative action of 
the machine, it suffices to touch the soft iron bars employed with a perma- 
nent magnet, or to dip the former into a position parallel to the magnetic 
axis of the earth, in order to produce the same p)ienomenon as before, 
Practically it is not even necessary to give any external impulse upon re- 
starting the machine, the residuary magnetism of the electro-magnetic 
arrangements employed being found sufficient for that purpose. : 

The mechanical arrangement best suited for the production of these cur- 
rents is that originally proposed by Dr. Werner Siemens in 1857* consist- 
ing of a cylindrical keeper hollowed at two sides for the reception of insu- 
lated wire wound longitudinally, which is made to rotate between the poles 
of a series of permanent magnets, which latter are at present replaced by- 


* See Du Moncel ‘ Sur ]’Electricité, 1862, page 248. 


1867.| Augmentation of the Power of a Magnet by reaction. 369 


electro-magnets. On imparting rotation to the armature of such an arrange- 
ment, the mechanical resistance is found to increase rapidly, to such an 
extent that either the driving-strap commences to slip or the insulated 
wires constituting the coils are heated to the extent of igniting their insu- 
lating silk covering. ) 

It is thus possible to produce mechanically the most powerful electrical 
or calorific effects without the aid of steel magnets, which latter are open to 
the practical objection of losing their permanent magnetism in use. 


III. * On the Augmentation of the Power of a Magnet by the reaction 
thereon of Currents induced by the Magnet itself.” By Cuartzs 
Wuearstone, F.R.S. Received February 14, 1867. 


The magneto-electric machines which have been hitherto described are 
actuated either by a permanent magnet or by an electro-magnet deriving 
its power from a rheomotor placed in the circuit of its coil. Inthe present 
note I intend to show that an electro-magnet, if it possess at the commence- 
ment the slightest polarity, may become a powerful magnet by the gradu- 
ally augmenting currents which itself originates. 

The following is a description of the form and dimensions of the electro- 
magnet I have employed. The construction, it will be seen, is the same as 
that of the electro-magnetic part of Mr. Wilde’s machine, 

The core of the electro-magnet is formed of a plate of soft iron 15 inches 
in length and 4 an inch in breadth, bent at the middle of its length into a 
horseshoe form. Round it is coiled in the direction of its breadth, 640 
feet of insulated copper wire 4, of an inch in diameter. The armature, 
which is according to Siemens’s ingenious construction, consists of a rota- 
ting cylinder of soft iron 83 inches in length, grooved at two opposite sides 
so as to allow the wire to be coiled upon it longitudinally ; the length of 
the wire thus coiled is 80 feet, and its diameter is the same as that of the 
electro-magnet coil. 

When this electro-magnet is excited by any rheomotor the current from 
which is in a constant direction, during the rotation of the armature cur- 
rents are generated in its coil during each semirevolution, which are alter- 
nately in opposite directions; these alternate currents may be transmitted 
unchanged to another part of the circuit, or by means of a rheotrope be 
converted to the same direction. 

If now, while the circuit of the armature remains completed, the rheomo- 
tor be removed from the electro-magnet, on causing the armature to revolve, 
however rapidly, it will be found by the interposition of a galvanometer, or 
any other test, that but very slight effects take place. Though these 
effects become stronger in proportion to the residual magnetism left in the 
electro-magnet from the previous action of a current, they never attain any 
considerable amount. 

But if the wires of the two circuits be so joined ag to form a single cir- 


370 Mr. Wheatstone on the Augmentation [Web. 14, 


cuit, in which the currents generated by the armature, after being changed 
to the same direction, act so as to increase the existing polarity of the elec- 
tro-magnet, very different results will be obtained. The force required to 
move the machine will be far greater, showing a great increase of magnetic 
power in the horseshoe; and the existence of an energetic current in the 
wire is shown by its action on a galvanometer, by its heating 4 inches of 
platinum wire ‘0067 in diameter, by its making a powerful electro-magnet, 
by its decomposing water, and by other tests. 

The explanation of these effects is as follows :—The electro-magnet — 
always retains a slight residual magnetism, and is therefore in the condition 
of a weak permanent magnet; the motion of the armature occasions feeble 
currents in alternate directions in the coils thereof, which, after being re- 
duced to the same direction, pass into the coil of the electro-magnet in 
such manner as to increase the magnetism of the iron core; the magnet 
having thus received an accession of strength, produces in its turn more 
energetic currents in the coil of the armature; and these alternate actions 
continue until a maximum is attained, depending on the rapidity of the 
motion and the capacity of the electro-magnet. 

If the two coils be connected in such manner that the rectified current 
from the coil of the armature passes into the coil of the electro-magnet in 
the direction which would impart a contrary magnetism to the iron core, 
no current is produced, and consequently there is no augmentation of mag- 
netism. | 

It is easy to prove that the residual magnetism of the electro-magnet is 
the determining cause of these powerful effects. For this purpose it is 
sufficient to pass a current from a voltaic battery, a magneto-electric ma- 
chine, or any other rheomotor, into the coil of the electro-magnet in either 
direction, and it will invariably be found that the direction of the current, 
however powerful it may eventually become, is in accordance with the po- 
larity of the magnetism impressed on the iron core. 

If, instead of the currents in the coil of the rotating armature being re-< 
duced to the same uniform direction, they retain their alternations, no effects, 
or at most very small differential ones, are produced, as no accumulation of 
magnetism then takes place. 

I will now call attention to the fact that stronger effects are produced at 
the first moment of completing the combined circuit than afterwards. 
The machine having been put in motion, at the first moment of completing 
the circuit 4 inches of platina wire were made red-hot, but immediately 
afterwards the glow disappeared, and only about one inch of the wire could 
be nesaeinenitly: kept at a red heat. This diminution of effect was accom- 
panied by a great increase of the resistance of the machine. The cause of 
the momentary strong effect was, that the machine from its acquired mo- 
mentum continued its motion for a few seconds, though it required a 
stronger force than could be applied to maintain that motion. Each time 
the circuit is broken and recompleted the same effect recurs. 


% 


1867. ] of the Power of a Magnet by reaction. Ban 


On bringing the primary coil of an inductorium (Ruhmkorff’s coil) ito 
the circuit formed by connecting the coils of the electro-magnet and rota- 
ting armature, no spark occurs in the secondary coil. On account of the 
ereat resistance of the circuit, which now also includes the primary coil of 
the inductorium, the current is not in sufficient quantity to produce any 
noticeable inductive effect. 

A very remarkable increase of all the effects, accompanied by a diminu- 
tion in the resistance of the machine, is observed when a cross wire is 
placed so as to divert a great portion of the current from the electro- 
magnet. The four inches of platinum wire, instead of flashing into redness 
and then disappearing, remains permanently ignited. The inductorium, 
which before gave no spark, now gave one a quarter of an inch in length; 
water was more abundantly decomposed ; and all the other effects were 
similarly increased. 

I account for this augmentation of the effects in the following way :— 

Though so much of the current is diverted from the electro-magnet by 
the cross wire, the magnetic effect still continues to accumulate, though 
not to so high a degree; but the current generated by the armature, passing 
through the short circuit formed by the armature-branch and cross wire, 
experiences a far less resistance than if it had passed through the armature 
and electro-magnet branches; and though the electromotive force is less, 
the resistance having been rendered less in a much greater proportion, the 
resultant effect is greater. 

I must observe that a certain amount of resistance in the cross wire is 
necessary to produce the maximum effect. If the resistance be too small, 

_the electro-magnet does not acquire sufficient magnetism ; and if it be too 
great, though the magnetism becomes stronger, the increase of resistance 
more than counterbalances its effect. 

But the effects already described are far inferior to those obtained by 
causing them to take place in the cross wire itself. With the same appli- 
cation of force, 7 inches of platinum wire were made red-hot, and sparks were 
elicited in the inductorium 2} inches in length. 

The force of two men was employed in these, as well as in the other ex- 
periments. When the interrupter of the primary coil was fixed, the ma- 
chine was much easier to move than when it acted. For when the inter- 
rupter acted, at each moment of interruption the cross wire being, as it 
were, removed, the whole of the current passed through the electro-magnet, 
and. consequently a greater amount of magnetic energy was excited, while 
in the intervals during which. the cross wire was complete the current 
passed mainly ihnouebs the primary coil. 

The effects are much less influenced by a resistance in the electro-mag- 
net branch than in either of the other branches. 

To reduce the length of the spark in the inductorium (the primary coil 
of which was placed in the cross wire) to ? of an inch, it required the re- 

VOL, XY. 2H 


372 Dr.J. J. Bigsby’s Brief Account of the [Feb. 21 


sistance of 51 inches of the fine platinum wire in the cross wire, 5 inches in 
the armature-branch, and 4 feet in the electro-magnet branch. 

When there was no extra resistance in either of the branches, the length 
of the cross wire being only about a few feet, the intensity of the current 
in the electro-magnet branch, compared with that in the cross wire, was as 
1:60; and when the resistance of the primary coil of the inductorium was 
‘interposed in the cross wire, the relative intensities were as 1 : 42. 

In conclusion I will mention that there is an evident analogy between 
the augmentation of the power of a weak magnet by means of an inductive 
action produced by itself, and that accumulation of power shown in the 
‘static electric machines of Holtz and others which have recently excited 
considerable attention, in which a very small quantity of electricity directly 
excited is, by a series of inductive actions, augmented so as to equal, and 
even exceed, the effects of the most powerful machines of the ordinary con- 
struction. ou 


February 21, 1867. 
Dr. W. A. MILLER, Treasurer and Vice-President, in the Chair. 


The following communication was read :— 


“A brief Account of the ‘Thesaurus Siluricus,’ with a few facts and 
inferences.” By J. J. Brassy, M.D. Communicated by Sir 
‘R. I. Murcuison, Bart. Received January 28, 1867. 


I have been led to attempt the preparation of a general view of Silurian 
life, as far as now known, by my own frequent want of such a record or 
muster-roll of the constituent members of this great initiatory division of 
paleozoic zoology,—a task which has been made pleasant by some personal 
knowledge of two countries rich in the earlier formations. 

I have been further encouraged by the great accumulations of the last 
few years, through the establishment in North America and elsewhere of 
numerous colleges, each of them having become the centre of more or less 

field-work. Far more aid still has been derived from many public surveys 
on a tolerably liberal scale. Nor can we forget the highly meritorious and 
successful labours which have been, and still are, carried on by private 
individuals in almost every part of Europe and North America. 

As this undertaking required an exactitude and a critical skill in deter- 
mining species and genera according to late improvements in classification, 
much beyond an ordinary acquaintance with Silurian life, after my mate- 
rials were put together, I obtained the very valuable aid of Mr. J. W. 
Salter, late Paleeontologist at the London Museum of Practical Geology. 

I was then, through the kindness of Sir Roderick I. Murchison, Bart., 
allowed to submit my manuscript to Robert Etheridge, Esq., F.R.S.E., 


1867. | ; Thesaurus Siluricus.’ 379 


the present Paleeontologist to the Institution over which Sir Roderick 
presides. 

To the careful superintendence of these two eminent naturalists I am 
indebted for corrections and suggestions of the greatest importance, and 
particularly as relates to Britain and to Europe generally. 

My matter has been principally found in the voluminous and truly 
priceless writings of Murchison, Sedgwick, Barrande, Sowerby, De Verneuil, 
James Hall, M°Coy, Salter, Billings, Angelin, Eichwald, Shumard, and 
Davidson—together with those of other authors, some of whom are scarcely 
of inferior merit*. 

I have been favoured with many unpublished contributions from my 
friends Mr. Billings (the learned Paleeontologist of the Canadian Survey) 
and Principal Dawson, F.R.S., of M°Gill College, Montreal,—also, through 
the kindness of Mr. Salter, from the Himalayas (Colonel Strachey, R.E.), 
from West Tasmania (Dr. Milligan), from South Wales (Henry Hicks, 
Esq.), and from the late Mr. Wyatt-Edgell. 

I propose to give to this effort the name of “ Thesaurus Siluricus.” 
Besides its use for general reference in the closet and in the quarry, the 
© Thesaurus’ provides a high station from which the student may obtain a 
broad survey of the Silurian populations of the whole earth. It will 
assist in tracing the extent, shape, and varying depths of areas, in dis- 
covering regional affinities, differences, and those great zoological -seve- 
rances which we call breaks. By its aid we may compare horizons 
remote from each other, and, moreover, note the frequent changes of 
many kinds which take place while the epoch is working out its long 
history. It will place under our examination numberless communities of 
life, their constituents, habits, rise, and decline. 

The ‘Thesaurus’ points to the universality (as defined) at times proximate 
everywhere, brings into prominence the riches, magnitude, and wide diffu- 
sion of the Primordial stage; illustrates the power of locality over life, 
and opens out the wonderful march of geographic dispersion through ob- 
stacles innumerable. : 

For a long period naturalists have been arranging the life of the globe 
into species, genera, orders, &c., with a view to the establishment of types 
as standards of comparison. It is from such data, well considered and 
generally acknowledged, that this ‘ Thesaurus’ has been compiled. 

As long as an individual mollusk remains unregistered it is deprived of 
its full usefulness ; but even then it may reveal an important fact—as the 
trilobite speaks of the Paleozoic period, and a nummulite of the Tertiary. 


* Agassiz, Beyrich, Bronn, Brongniart, Conrad, Dalman, D’Orbigny, Vicomte 
d’Archiac, Dawson, Emmerich, Emmons, Fischer, E. Forbes, Goldfuss, Green, Hark- 
ness, Hisinger, Haime, Honeyman, Rupert Jones, Ketley, Kutorga, Lawrow, Linnzus, 
Lovén, Lonsdale, M°*Chesney, Meek, Meneghini, Milne-Edwards, Morris, Owen, 
Pander, Phillips, Portlock, Remer, Rouault, Sars, Sharpe, Safford, Swallow, Triger, 
Vanuxem, Von Buch, Volborth, Wahlenberg, Winchell, &c. &e. 

2) HZ 


374 Dr. J.J. Bigsby’s Brief Account of the [Feb. 21, 


- Until some such record as the present is available, the labours of many 
living investigators (whose names rise to the lips spontaneously) will rest 
comparatively fruitless. It has hitherto not been possible to consider 
widely scattered existences in an aggregate form. Facts (many) have been 
stored up separately ; but generalized truths have been rarely attained. 
This has not yet been done in a satisfactory manner, not even by Bronn or 
_ Goldfuss for any one epoch, and scarcely for the cretaceous period by the 
American geologist Mr. Gabb, although he has done well. 

This ‘ Thesaurus’ contains 7553 species, and therefore gives abundant 
scope for profitable study ; but probably it does not give the tithe of the 
whole Silurian life yet lying buried in the wilds of the Arctic Circle, of 
Hudson’s Bay, Labrador, the two Americas, Scandinavia, Australia, India, 
&c. &c. The more accessible countries frequently, to this day, yield new 
forms, although the search for them is capriciously and idly conducted, 
and is dependent often on the accident of a new public work or the pre- 
sence of a competent observer. Many undescribed species are lying in 
local museums, still more in the great collection at Prague in the posses- 
sion of a high Kcclesiastic in that city. Owing to the enlightened perse- 
verance of M. Barrande, a few small parishes close to Prague have yielded 
nearly one-third of the whole earth’s Silurian remains within present 
knowledge; and the greater part of these are not met with elsewhere. 
How wonderfully rich must be the universal Silurian fauna! What a 
splendid promise to the future explorer! 

The ‘ Thesaurus’ isin the form of a Table. After mentioning the genus 
(taken alphabetically), its author, and the date of its establishment, the 
species are successively named, and treated of under four or more heads, 
along one and the same ruled line. First comes the part of the stage in 
which it occurs, then, in a given order, its author and locality, or localities, 
in the column indicative of its proper stage. 

More information is thus conveyed, it is believed, than by any other 
form of Table. The summary which is appended to each order shows some 
of the organic relations of the Silurian system in Europe and in America 
to each other ; it shows, too, how very little we know as yet of this epoch in 
Asia and Africa; and, among other things, it tells us the numerical strength 
of the genera. 

Permit me now to lay hefore the Society a few facts drawn from the 
“mere surface of the ‘ Thesatirus,’ and only im the way of summary or brief 
remark, in order to suit the purpose of this evening. Much more than 
this the careful registration of more than 50,000 facts has prevented me 
from doing. 

The Table A (page 375) gives the numerical amount of the Silurian flora 
and fauna as known in the years 1856 and 1866 respectively. 


1867. ] ‘ Thesaurus Siluricus’ 375 


Taste A.—Comparative number of species known in 1856 and 1866. 


¢|¢ a|% g|e ¢| 4/4 a 
Sal eri eee ee 3) 81le 513 aelSeje 5 
@) || oS So} . | &.| | 8 | 2) a] S|] m] al & 5 
= a § = 1ol e o 2 ~ ° ° B ° ro] 
Ge emeae pm ions) Seis per bee | ee Me. Bh Se lin 7 | 3 
See scl ea e oll Sed Sle Se ips | ol oS les} 205 | Total: 
Saori hac eiicee trre | sort so. a le cet Se lbs reo Inn 
& | i) S&S 125] oo 8 oO >] S BS a>) iS 3 5 2 3 
ete neces ea Ome et ee Ie ie Oo Saar Oo 
Prize Essay PSE HOLGAL a « 10 | 63 76 108 | 93 | 425 8} 579) 113 14] 151 | 209) 10 g* | 1995 


Thesaurus...| 76 |125 | 25 1132 |241 [ss9 [496 


479 11400 247 |1408] 446 136,721 |1199] 34 6 | 78 


This Table, taken from Bronn’s Prize Essay published in 1856, and from 
the ‘ Thesaurus Siluricus,’ shows that within the last ten years the number 
of known species has more than trebled. 


Universality. 

In the spirit of the following definition, it would appear that the 
Silurian system is universal—that is, it overspreads the whole earth more 
or less completely,—and that its component parts were Jaid down in a 
proximate time,—statements approved by M. Barrande, Bull. n. s. xii. 361. 
Definition :—‘‘4 formation may be considered to be universal when it occu- 
pies large and small areas in very many parts of the earth, often remote 
from and even antipodal to each other, when it is always of like strati- 
graphical relations, 1s composed of like materials, and contains numerous 
genera in common, together with some representative and some identical 
species.” 

In support of our application of this definition to the Silurian system, the 
‘Thesaurus’ exhibits the widest possible distribution of its fauna—a fauna, 
it must be remembered, which is pure from admixture with that of any 
other epoch which might possibly have been progressing at the same time. 

The ‘Thesaurns’ contains many examples of the same species being in 
twenty to twenty-five different countries, large and far apart—the same 
creature or creatures marking the route from land to land. 

Table B, drawn up under the inspection of Mr. Salter, presents 195 
species commor to regions very remote from each other, some of them 
being antipodal—a fact which tells the more forcibly from the tenacity with 
which a large part of Silurian life clings to locality as well as to horizon. 
179 species are common to Europe and America. Sixty Silurian genera 
have been brought from South Australia by Mr. Selwyn, the chief Geolo- 
gical Surveyor of that colony; and Professor M¢Coy has met with in that 
country a Siphonotreta, a Phacops, and eighteen species of Graptolites ab- 
solutely identical with those of North America and of Europe. The Pro- 
fessor loudly expresses his surprise and delight. According to M. Bar- 
rande, Orthoceras bullatum (Sowerby) is at Melbourne (Australia) and 
in Ireland, Bohemia, Germany, and Russia. Conocoryphe depressa is both 
in Wales and Texas, one of the American States. Western Tasmania, the 


* Morris, Catal. p. 362. 


376 Dr. J.J. Bigsby’s Brief Account of the [Feb. 21, 


Himalayas, Russia, North and South America, and many other regions 
offer ample fossil evidence of the general presence of the constituents of 
this period. | 

TABLE B. 


America| America, | America | Europe 
Kingdom or Order.| No.of | and {Hurope,and} and and Total. 
Species. | Hurope. | Australia. | Australia. | Australia. 


Helamibee ieee. seer Neel eh 74 

Amorphozoa......... 120 Dh Ah vga de ead, Vall ke ake ae 5) 
Foraminifera ...... 25 

Acme day gis. ens ee 132 teres |) Wl eethee te 4 
Hetero-Pteropoda 23 16 Virose Yo) 4 hue Sele 16 
(Bey OZOA cee sect 383 6 5) 6 9) 20 
TAOO| OVA Seo54n0 dos 432 LO Ns Shee i 18 
Crinodea ee ameter er mmO ream KEN NC inf 
Cystidea : A Soar ale 456 ee aaron rr ot, 1 
Asteriada ce, ES, 1 
Pri wie ei. sesee ee th ELS 21 22) Vly sapgde lel nee 23 
Entomostraca ...... 242 ey pore as A S55. 1 
Brachiopoda......... 1372 BE Sieben cy i caRaee en 64 
Monomyaria......... 123 BON OR a dedek ian! 1) ekg i er 2 
Dama Ward Been ir oet er 43 D6 Ny ce ctisk ofS sel ea, 9 
Gasteropoda......... 715 Qo weeks Oy kee. 9 
Cephalopoda......... 955 15 tase!) SO) VS ee 15 


MPISCES Mans areas weeaee Ee Ree OMe UA enh Ld ene tI Mi 5 


The Silurian beds, it must be borne in mind, are usually visible in mere 
shreds and remainders, met with in any one place only as a stage or a 
part of a stage, the other portion being covered for perhaps thousands of 
square miles by more recent deposits, or removed by denudation ; or it may 
be that certam stages have never existed, as we see in Arctic America 
with respect to the Lower Stage; while in the South, as in Sardinia, 
France, and Spain, it is the Upper Stage that is wanting, or very nearly so. 

But the visible geographical spread of these strata is often very great. 
So extensive are the Silurian areas of North America (2000 miles across) 
that it only needs a short and easy step to induce a belief in a former uni- 
versal prevalence and domination of this system. 

Sufficient territory resting on Silurian rocks has been spared from 
oscillatory action to enable us to trace it im one or other of its parts over 
a large part of the earth. We follow it circuitously from England to 
Australia, or to America—the interspaces being filled up either by sea, by 
newer rocks, or by kindred palzeozoic strata, which themselves irresistibly 
bespeak its frequent continuous existence near at hand. 

This is only a fragment of the argument in favour of the doctrine of 
Universality of epochs, as just defined. 


Locality. 
The ‘Thesaurus’ brings conspicuously into view the great influence of 


1867.] * Thesaurus Silurteus.’ 377 


locality on the nature and amount of life, in the same way as we observe 
at the present time. As each region yields up its fauna to the collector, 
much of that fauna is found to be new, the bond of connexion with other 
Silurian districts being in great measure generic. | 

The physical conditions of sea and land being necessarily local, pro- 
duced as they are from time to time by agencies limited in space, the 
dwellers among these conditions must in a certain measure be local too, 
and typical—subject at any moment to removal. ‘The first. occupants of 
any spot who shall point out ? 

The maximum of life, meaning by that expression the largest combina- 
tion of abundance, variety, and rank, is local. It may take place at the 
beginning of a stage, or of an epoch, in the middle, or at the end, being 
governed principally by the nature of the sediment. The rich Primordial 
beds of Western Newfoundland and of Quebec, the crowded Pleta beds of 
Russia aud of Esthonia, the Trenton Limestone of America, the Mid-Silu- 
rian rocks of Bohemia* (Z.e. 1, 2), some of those of Wales, the Lower 
Helderberg group of New York, are conspicuous examples of this. Parts 
of the Llandovery stage of Wales and of New York (U.S.A.) present a 
great dearth of life, and for a well-known reason. How barren are the 
vast accumulations of Lower Silurian in Bolivia, as at present believed! 
The Potsdam Sandstone of the valleys of the St. Lawrence and the Missis- 
sippi shows no signs of life for hundreds (and perhaps thousands) of square 
miles, save in small oases peopled chiefly by Lingulz in incalculable mil- 
lions of individuals. 

Nearly equal areas of Central North-east America (N. latitudes 50°-32°) 
and Europe may have received about the same attention; but the latter, 
so far, has proved the richer by above a thousand species, as we see in the 
subjoined Table C. 


TasLe C.—Known species of America and Hurope compared. 


Orders. Species. Orders. Species. 
America. TEEane! America.|Europe. 
Plante. (kingd.) ....c00«. 56 20 Carried forward...| 964 931 
AMOrpPhoz04..\.....-.n00000 58 Gee Asher dee | icacisteeicrnndn vat 29 29 
POCAMTMCEA ie ontecisscel sono ee 25 @iniae Mrilubites!..... 396 | 1008 
MNtimeliday 2) ele icsulaen 3 98 || “"US* | Entomostraca...| 75 | 170 
Hetero-Pteropeda ...... 96 | 144 || Brachiopeda................ 678 721 
Polyzoa (Bryozoa) ...... 208) | NF 1) Monomiyariah 1. .0..50.-ew. 78 56 
Coelenterata (Zoophyt.) | 262 | 245 || Dimyaria ............06 181 241 
Crimoids, \).sasmeceiadiaaese- 193 93 || Gasteropoda, «....-.-nsecees 421 274. 
DSU CG | ota side citys towis ee- 36 Ga - | Cephalopoda .....0..). ssn 0 o21 { 86! 
Sedis incertze ............ as Dee Pisces” LAG ce aera 2? ot 
964 | 931 : 3145 | 4325 


* The extraordinary abundance of Trilobites, Cephalopoda, &c. here is accounted for 
by the beds being calcareous and overlain by trappose masses, in place of the sand and 
gravel more commonly seen. 


378 Dri. Bigsby’s Brief Account of the [Feb. 21, 


The Cephalopoda, Crustacea, Brachiopoda, and Annelida of Europe ap- 
pear to largely exceed in number of species those of North America, while 
in nine Orders (see Table C) the two hemispheres hold nearly equal quan- 
tities. America greatly surpasses Europe in the number of its Crinoids, 
and to a smaller extent in Plante and Gasteropoda. Iam not prepared 
with any inference from these facts. We know that the mineral constitu- 
tion, and the past external influences in these several parts of the earth 
are different—not that the first is as influential as has been supposed. 

Many species are marked as undefined in the ‘ Thesaurus,’ because they 
are often only known by simple fragments. 

About a thousand species have never been seen but in one locality. At 
least 200 Cyrtocerata are huddled together in the two contiguous parishes 
of Lockhoy and Kozorz, near Prague, and, with other mollusks there, are 
unknown elsewhere. Other instances of this might be cited. 

The two Silurian districts of Sardinia, with not a few fossils in common 
with Spain, although tolerably well examined by La Marmora and Mene- 
ghini, have not hitherto produced a Trilobite; nor has Spain given up a 
Pentamerus, as far as can be learnt. Out of our sixty species of dsaphus 
only one is known in Bohemia. Silurian fish are only mentioned as exist- 
ing in Britain, Bohemia, and Russia; but doubtless they are in other Silu- 
rian areas. 

_ The Trilobite genus Dikelocephalus of D. D. Owen contains thirty 
species. Only three are found in two places. Twelve species are near 
Quebec, and there only. Nine others are Minnesotan, on the Upper 
Mississippi; while the States of Texas and Vermont, on Lake Champlain, 
have each one, and Wales three—all distinct species. Western New- 
foundland, although primordial, is thought to be without this remarkable 
genus. 

Each of the twenty-seven known species of the Heteropod Maclurea is 
confined to one spot ; twenty are American ; and of these, eleven are con- 
fined to Newfoundland West. 

Of the forty-five species of the genus Trochoceras (Cephalopoda), forty- 
three are restricted to the vicinity of Prague; and of these twenty-seven 
inhabited the very small space of 4—6 square miles, in company with many 
other mollusks. The Brachiopoda of Bohemia are mostly in the Fauna 
F, and in the two small districts of Konieprus and Mnienian. 

Out of 270 species of Orthis only two are believed to be in Nova Scotia, 
and of the 109 species of the Gasteropod Murchisonia, again, two, but 
not one of the elsewhere most abundant genus Pleurotomaria. 

On the other hand, Nova Scotia holds one-half of all our Cleidophora ; 
and Tasmania is singularly rich in Palearca, while the Point Levi shales 
are crowded with the Graptolite family, of extreme beauty, and rarely found 
in other countries. We further observe that, as it is with the horizontal 
disposition of Silurian life, so it is with the vertical: only twelve per cent. 
leave their native horizon, as we shall see. 


1867.] ‘Thesaurus Siluricus” 379 


These few facts have been selected from many, to show the strong ten- 

dency to localization inherent in the Silurian fauna. 
Primordial Stage. 

The ‘ Thesaurus’ amply manifests the great extent of this stage, and the 
high significance of its teachings; but we shall here only speak of a few 
leading facts relating to Canada, extracted from the ‘Thesaurus’ itself. 

While waiting for the results of field-work now in progress, Mr. Billings 
has treated this subject with his usual great ability in the first volume of 
the work entitled ‘ The Paleeozoic Fossils of Canada.’ 

The Primordial stage of Barrande (Taconic of Emmons) is truly Silu- 
rian, and forms the base of that epoch. 

In the valley of the St. Lawrence it may average 8600 feet in thickness. 

Resting horizontally in America on the inclined Laurentian rocks, the 
lower break is complete in every respect; while the upper break is very 
nearly so, although purely organic. 

It divides naturally into Lower and Upper Primordial,—Potsdam sand- 
stone constituting the former, and calciferous sandstone, with the enig- 
matical Quebec group, the latter, with a few layers of chazy limestone 
superadded. ) 

The whole flora and fauna of the Primordial stage, American and Eu- 
ropean, amount to 919 species, while those of the St. Lawrence Valley 
alone are 560. ‘The western, therefore, seems to be the richer of the two 
hemispheres ; and this comes out still more distinctly in stating the fact 
that the Primordial genera at present known in America are 134, and those 
of all Kurope 83. 

Table D (below) has been constructed from the ‘Thesaurus.’ It exhibits 
numerically the zoological contents and the zoological relations of the 
several parts of the Primordial stage; and we sce that the differences are 
great. 


Taste D.—The American Flora and Fauna of the Primordial Stage 
(principally Canadian). 


{Sie i! 3 (818) e1S/-S1 se) a) 2! 8 [a 
d EE S/S Ss /5/8)218 1213 lela | _, 
|S ES |S (Sel e\slele Slelale [S/8|= 
S |sle\o HIZB LSSlelSi a) os lal2\6 
Ali GIN OOS Siaold ialaia 
Quebee Group .......|... 4\21|19|44) 2 5|...157/42'34| 96) 3]...1327 
Uprrr ; 
Calciferous Sandst....; 6 | 5) 3] 5...) 1]...)...[... 1 39) 6/19) 6) 2) 2} 98 
Lower Potsdam Sandstone ...|16?| 2) 4) 2) 1]...1... 1 Biol 7A! 6|.../140 
Dotaluaws. wee 22 ae Sil ee elke _../99/79|53/176111 ... 560 


Great interest attaches to every part of this stage, but especially to the 


880 Dr. J.J. Bigsby’s Brief Account of the [Feber 


Quebec group and its ill-understood connexion with the immediately con- 
tiguous strata. 

An intimate acquaintance with this group near Quebec leads me to 
believe that there, at least, it is a displaced, crumpled, and fractured mass 
of schist, with thin beds of limestone and calcareous conglomerate inter- 
leaved, the last crowded with molluscan and crustacean life. 

It is above the Potsdam Sandstone, and on or near the horizon of 
Calciferous sandstone and the lower layers of Chazy Limestone (Logan 
and Billings, Report, 1863). Into these (with a distinct tendency still 
higher) in other parts of North America, the Quebec group probably be- 
comes fused, and assumes their horizontal position, mineral character, and 
many of their organic contents. 

The fauna of the Quebec group, consisting of 327 species at Pomt Levi 
(Quebec) and in Western Newfoundland, is peculiar, and, of course, is 
only found there, with the exception of thirteen species found elsewhere in 
Calciferous sandstone, and eight in Chazy Limestone. They are one-six- 
teenth of the whole, and are as follows :— 

Calciferous Sandstone :—LZingule Mantelii, L. acuminata, L. Irene, 
Cameralla calcifera, Helicotoma gorgonia, H. uniangulata, H. perstriata, 
Pleurotomaria calcifera, P. postumia, Holopea dilucula’?, Keculiomphalus 
Canadensis, Murchisonia Anna, Piloceras Canadense (Billings). 

Chazy Limestone :—Lcculiomphalus Atlanticus, Maciurea Atlantica, 
Stromatopora compacta (running into B+ BL), Climacograptus antenna- 
rius, Ptilodictya fenestrata’?, Leperditia any Slane Camerella varians, 
Cheirurus prolificus (Billmgs). : 

This group contains, besides the thirteen species just enmmeaaad 174* 
allied to those of the Calciferous Sandstone of Central North America, or 
more or less westward of Montreal. It is this which connects it closely 
with the sandstone. However, 140 remain typical. 

The fossils of Chazy Limestone met with in the Quebec group only be- 
long to a few of the basement beds of the former, because these almost 
immediately, upwards, [change into a compact mass of crushed Crinoids, 
Cephalopoda, Gasteropoda, &c. (143 species)—all quite new, and alien 
from the life below. 

The Calciferous Sandstone, always ay primordial, has in the Canadas 
and the United States of America 375 species, overspreading vast areas. 
They may be separated into three sets :— 

1. Thirteen enter the Quebee group. 

2. One hundred and seventy-four are the allies of that group. 

3. One hundred and eighty-eight are foreign to it, and for the most part 
‘typical. 

Like its two sister groups, the Calciferous Sandstone is shown, in the 
middle line of Table D, to display a remarkable tendency to abound in 
complex and powerful existences, and to paucity in the simple species, in- 

* These numbers are for the present only approximate, and may be altered. _ 


© Thesaurus Siluricus. 


1867.] 


*Baloedg yeord 47, 


uo ‘quad Jaq 


108|"""| € |GT] 6Z1|"""| @ eziee] G FFE] FSET TE] AP PIT 
8G eeelree ee g eae ioe eee G I TI . Net ed peek Oy toes . e oe 
99 efor er lerelele ble orl eg fet ee of 
6 eee ee ry 6 . ORG weooleeelene pL eolese welt elece 
B [rrcleesleeed ge feseferefereeesfereferstere] ge foeefoeefonefeeefoeefeeet * 
og eeolcce G its ge yd ° I I ral . I eeelins oe 
OE ce) pp fede tet e| et cal Jere] Bl ahs 
Te (oe e slr lp feels er fete | Cal et eo ee ee 
1G eee eo G OL eee ee I 8 . {I 9 6G . ee ee - . e 
Qt ere reltitie belle |e bee ae dle: al Ale 
¥6 '1""19] GL 1°] S/ 9/6] LIP ET FG ran lel i 
og flthe| es bellerebelele | s Sen Se ee e 
og bolt le bebelels belele | 2 gee ee | ee 
te tela] e belle lal te | az hide. eee | ae eaten 
TL eolete| go febel tie betel le. bok ale lee: 
OP 1618) Ze i etic. @ et 6o) Seley [Seer e 
meee ral | ee alee a le We Re: 
(e ee eleer|oes| cee eleerleealee eat I soelee elec © oe . T 
96 febeel yp belelgle beeen | er Sloat eae ae 
TZ eeclecvlece G ° ee Zw ZL . fe) eT 08 I eee silid bie)|imt@u83| etal e:|in . ee 
6g eeelseelsoe i coleoes “19 T 716 Wi sere ee fi oe eeleeetee . 
Be fobetel eg feletede felg t | ae fel: sealebel ae. al 
BL bell elt Pefelple te eet a a 
Bq beleree| see escleodte yg lope ee 
Bo feesceel p fefeeeferefeedterele lB g ae Ble 
ge /9/F/¢ GIGiFiSlsisiFle| @ iGiPFleiziciFieiz 
g S) “SUOZTIO FT *SUOZIIO FL “SUOZILO FL “*SUOZILO FL “SUOZIIO FL 
‘UBLIMyTIg “UBLINIIG ‘URI ‘zedd gq, ee MOly 
soddq OTPPLIL TOMO TT aoe 


* 


‘quormnoery soroedg 


‘MOZIIOF 90 Jo [vord4q soroedg 


[erpi0 wT 


1699 FGF | F86 

Ic& | 866 | 69 COL | TTL &T “" |r"* soroadg aoyyo [Te 

60P | HE | G6 96 | SGI GG ee cee 8 COU 

GIE | €0& | gE GGG | 9¢ L |= Seeies0 aA 

G8 SL 9T 8c | FF ite " | sereooyduioy, : yoydag 

686 | 098 | TST | €G | TAT | OG | G_ |" setedg soyj0 Te 

G6I | 90L | 0G It | 9g SI T |"""" Blaeurojomney 

GOL | 8 96 9 LE CT |" eroostypoIny, + 497809 

9GF | 69E | LET GS | Ilé G T reresersesessesss grace AULT 

IZ1 ZOL OL G 1Z Sud . rereessecceeee ar teAUIOUOTL 

6¢L | G99 | 66G | 08 | 916 | OF | OF [°° Seredg azeyjo Te 

Og? ai. Go = ot 6 | 6B fe oye euatmoqdoayg 

JBOSS 4p 4 GB | 0G T se fess erreuoyoudyyy 

hE | 906 | 9g GL | SIT LT 8 | stqyIQ : npodoryonsg | 

cOG | P6L | SIT F cG 6 Tp. (Oo eoeaqsomopunp 

IێT | G8IT | #96 hb | see GOL | SAL oS egqoy Ey, 

TG OG 1Z P ¥G it eee . eereeeveseree epritajsy 

LOL 86 1g G +9 T eee . eevee rreeesspaptishs 

LOG Ita GEL OL 66 soe ° see ee eer eseseseece VOPlOULID 

b8E | STE | GAT cg | 16 G BS ae soreeeess* BYVI9} WOT) 

G66 | F6G | $9 9 6FT Tg Vole ee ge COCNOn 

GIG | CLL | 8s 6 | 86 | 8 ft epodoseygq-o.1939 

66 G8 9G 8 te L OL Ce eprpouuy 

OLT 86 GS yi 9G 9 $ Og OBO ataternretets vozoydioury 

G8 eL, G AT. Le see FI ee . BVUV] T 
‘redd gq | ‘tomo 

[e107, C or d £4) vee bet pits 

Beet ech reali SNC en ‘UeLIMyIg 


‘QIUILINIOY AO osuUVY [VOIAIA 0} doUIaAazaa [eIoods GIA ‘oji'y uvLAN[Ig Jo Mata [eordouds W—'y TIAV, 


382 Dr. J.J. Bigsby’s Brief Account of the [Feb. 21, 


dividuals, nevertheless, being prodigiously numerous. ‘Trilobites are here 
very few. 

Potsdam Sandstone is rich ‘in Trilobites, Brachiopoda, and Fucoids, but 
in every other form is very poor; and yet it possesses a Cystid. 

In the Primordial group, therefore, we find numerous representatives of 
nearly every marine Invertebrate ; and we have a startling example of the 
sudden development in very early times of the highest types of molluscan 
life, Nautili, Lituites, Trilobites, Protichnites, &c., dwelling, even then, in 
well adjusted communities. ; 

Most of these facts are taken from the ‘ Thesaurus ;’ but this interesting 
portion of the ‘Thesaurus’ itself is the gift of Barrande, Emmons, Hall, 
Logan, and Billings *, and is the fruit of their unwearied study in the city, 
and of their toil in the field. 

Recurrence. 

A few words on the subject of recurrence, or the vertical range of Silu- 
rian life. 

What ‘can be more unexpected, or more wonderful, than the upward 
passage by a filial succession, through stages and epochs, of a mollusk 
during centuries inconceivably numerous! What an almost mterminable 
series of posterities must have followed the first ancestor! The doctrine 
of limited duration in species must have its exceptions. 

The ‘Thesaurus’ enumerates 803 recurrents, or 12 per cent. of the 
whole known life of the epoch—a very notable proportion, —still leaving 
6200 species faithful to one horizon. 

The synoptical Table E, compiled from the ‘ Thesaurus,’ exhibits many 
details, and may be trusted approximately, although about 400 species 
have been passed by for want of sufficient information. It numbers sepa- 
rately the species typical of one horizon, and the species frequenting more 
than one horizon (being recurrent). It also introduces some of the greater 
genera, such as Orthis, Murchisonia, &c. 

The species are arranged under the heads “ Primordial,’ Lower,” 
*‘ Middle,” and “ Upper Silurian ;” and in the case of the recurrents the 
number of horizons occupied by them is shown by the figures 2, 3, 4, 5. 
Thus we find that 69 Lower Silurian Trilobites occupy two horizons, 15 
three, and 2 five horizons. 

The percentage is stated in the last column, next to that contaming the 
total recurrence of each order. 


The Primordial stage only gives 2°7 per cent. of recurrency. 


The Lower Silurian ........ 16 aA 
a he Widdles:’.*. ii aen Pers 20 Bs 
Mew pper ey, st eee 2 Lat BS 53 


* Jt is well to note that, under Sir William E. Logan’s able superintendence, we owe 
the splendid Primordial harvest gathered in Newfoundland and Anticosti, to the dili- 
gence and skill of Mr. Richardson, an explorer in the employ ‘of the Canadian Geo- 
logical Commission. 


1867. | | ‘ Thesaurus Siluricus? 383 — 


The orders vary greatly in respect to recurrency. There is none among 
fossil fish. In Cystidea it is only 3 per cent., in Gomphoceras 5 per cent., 
and is greatest in Strophomena, 31 per cent. 

Although a considerable number of inferences have been prepared, I 
shall only venture now to introduce a few. 

1. Recurrence is universal, both as to time and place. 

2. Recurrences seem to be most numerous in the lower stages of the 
epoch ; but further research may teach otherwise. 

3. Species do not often change their horizon, not even when placed in 
countries far apart. 

4, The same species may be typical of a single horizon in one country 
and recurrent in another. 

5. Recurrency shows that a mollusk is not necessarily confined to any 
one community, but may find a home and flourish in several successively. 

6. The number of recurrents measures the amount of change in con- 
ditions. 2 

7. Communities, genera, and species disappear sporadically, except in 
the rare case of a catastrophe. 

8. Recurrency is a measure of viability. 


Exira-epochal Recurrence. 


Few things demonstrate more plainly the sterner discipline now pres 
vailig than the reduction by Mr. Salter to 133 of the 439 paleeozoic spe- 
cies which I had tabulated as extra-epochal, although they had the sanc- 
tion of the best paleontologists of the last fifteen or twenty years. 

My Table, as originally made out, deals with the five paleeozoic epochs, 
but in this place only with the forty-two Silurian species which leave for 
the higher periods. To these, recently, several interesting additions have 
been made. 

I. These recurrents are mostly distinct from the intra-epochal, owing to 
their first appearance being in the Upper Silurian stage. 

IJ. With the exception of Chonetes sarcinulata, they all stop within the 
Devonian Period. 

Ill. The greater part of these recurrents are of low rank; 20 are 
Brachiopoda; 11 Zoophytes, 1 an Amorphozoa; 7 are Gasteropoda; 3 
Cephalopoda; and 1 Trilobite. Manon deforme and Orthis rugosa, Lower 
Silurian fossils, reappear in Devonian, but not in Upper Silurian, where 
they are ‘‘ presumably ””—to use an expression of Mr. Etheridge. 

IV. These species are very migratory—few being found in two epochs 
in the same country, but in different countries. 

V. Opportunities of escape into a new epoch have been common; but 
the ways and means are frequently concealed by denudations, &c. 

VI. Acclimatization must have been necessary. 

VII. The length of individual life in proportion to specific extra- 
epochal life is almost as a unit to infinity. 


384. Brief Account of the ‘Thesaurus Siluricus?  [Feb. 21, 


Taste F.—Geographical Summary of Silurian Life. 


E 
: 'S.  Sets 
et ae Mh Be Sh a a ha 
Orders. B 5 E < 2 : = 
= = = | 4 x oS S) 
~/R TAH l};al/ayaRy,]o 
Ae letaize a eee c eee eye tc Lp he Oe ie bas i| eae] ses 3) 6 etna 
Amorphozoa .............- 624) 63) 4" i | Ll) 6 | To America and Europe. 
TURE O MOA ois} cas ngice none Se == 20? ... | ... | Not definitely accepted. 
Celenteratay ens. -s.c:2---- 262 |24 1 2| 1 | 27 | To America and Europe. 
3 § ( Orinoidea ......... 193 | 93 2 6 ” » 
a 4 Cystadea ......... 56 | 53 20 3 29 » 
Ss E | Asteriada ......... 29 | 29 1 : _ 
| 
AMMEN Baie cesnacas-s Sf 408 al 2a. 1 7 %9 %» 
Cet ae fare) yt a 396 (998 | 10 11 30 | Various. 
P 8 Phyllopoda - 9 
© [| Ostracoda | ee y 2 
Groly zie cakes ee ices ts 203 |177 | 2 20 23 | Various. 
‘BrachiOpodals.....5...+-¢5- 678 \721 | 22 19 65 | Various. 
Monomyaria ..............- 78 | 56 2 5 | To Anierica and Europe. , 
J DETER eT grt he ag RSE a pe 18] 241 | 3 8 | 19 | 12 9 » 
Pteropoda & Heteropoda 103 |145 | 1 af Lats 33 fs 
Gasteropodauce.bs-c.<c 421 |274 | 9 9; 13 | 10 +3 = 
Cephalopotlage. en... 321 861 | 5 se pel 55 
UASCES erences settee tae ver | Oe ; SNe 
ilincerice Sedisre ns sce. h se. 4, 2 eG 
3156/4805} 57 | ... |100 | 43 [231 


3156+43805=7461 species. 
Geographical Distribution of Silurian Life, 

The ‘ Thesaurus’ tends to show that North America, east of the Rocky 
Mountains, may probably be divided into two areas,—the one to the north 
of 57° (or of Lake Superior) being chiefly Upper Silurian, resting on erys- 
talline rocks, the one to the south of that line, down to the Gulf of 
‘Mexico, on the contrary, being fully developed in some part of this great 
space. 

It exhibits the regrettable fact that Asia, Africa, and Australia, taken 
together, have hitherto yielded only 200 species of Silurian remains; but 
this arises from the absence of exploration. 

I have not yet had opportunity to bring together, harmonize, and com- 
pare the Silurian life of the several countries of Europe. The accom- 
plishment of such a task might produce some definite truths, and many 
more probabilities. Either this vast region would prove to be one great 
Silurian area, with barriers here and there, and with certain channels of 
communication, and to be the result of many operations throughout a 
long interval of time; or it might turn out that the Silurian deposits and 
their fossils occupy three separate areas :—(1) the Britanno-Scandinavian, 

which has all the three stages, and the Primordial; (2) the Bohemian, at 


1867. | On a Transit-Instrument and a Zenith Sector. 885 


present of peculiar interest ; and (3) the middle and southern area, found 
in France, Spain, and Sardinia, almost wholly Lower and Mid-Silurian. 

Under this head of geographical distribution we have to deal with some 
curious phenomena—such as concern birthplace or first appearance, 
generic and specific, the duration of life, tolerance of conditions, wineral 
habitats. Migration possesses great interest, with its marks, causes, and 
modes, with its power, direction, and rate of progress, &e. 

The transport or removal of dead organic matter from place to place, 
the “‘ remaniement” of French geologists, is an important agency under 
several aspects, especially in the formation of extensive sheets of rock. 

It now has become proper to bring to a close these few observations, or 
rather this enumeration of heads of Natural-History subjects, by express. 
ing a confident hope that this compilation will find many and well qualified 
interpreters, and will be useful to geologists in general. 


February 28, 1867. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “On a Transit-Instrument and a Zenith Sector, to be used on 
the Great Trigonometrical Survey of India for the determination, 
respectively, of Longitude and Latitude.” By Lieut.-Colonel A. 
STRANGE, F.R.S. Received February 16, 1867. 


In 1862 the Secretary of State for India in Council sanctioned the pro- 
vision of an extensive equipment of geodesical and astronomical instruments 
of the first order for the use of the Great Trigonometrical Survey of India ; 
and he did me the honour to entrust to me the task of designing and super- 
intending their construction. After several modifications, the following list 
was adopted :— 

One Great THEODOLITE, witha 3-feet Horizontal Circle. By Messrs. 
Troughton and Simms. 

Two ZenirH Sectors. By Messrs. Troughton and Simms. 

Two 5-reeT Transit-InsrruMENts. By Messrs. T. Cooke and Sons, 
York. 

Two Smatier Transit-Instruments (German form). By Messrs. 
T. Cooke and Sons, York. 

Two 12-1ncu Verticat Circies (German form). By Messrs. Repsold, 
Hamburg. 

Two Gatvanic Curonoerarus for registering Transit-Observations. 
By MM. Secretan and Hardy, Paris. 

Three AstronomicaL Crockxs. By Mr. Charles Frodsham. 

The whole of these are nearly ready, and I take the opportunity of now 
submitting two of them (a 5-feet transit-instrument by Messrs. Cooke, and 


386 On a Transit-Instrument and a Zenith Sector. [Feb. 28, 


a zenith sector by Messrs. Troughton and Simms) to the inspection of the 
Royal Society. Both instruments present peculiarities. 

The 5-feet Transit-Instrument.—This has a very powerful telescope of 
5 inches clear aperture (a large diameter in proportion to its focal length). 
The axis is of aluminium bronze, cast in one piece, hollow, and turned both 
inside and out. The two halves of the telescope are easily separable from 
the axis for portability. — | 

It is provided with four levels for rendering the axis horizontal; these 
are mounted on a plan suggested and devised by Mr. Cooke. He remarks 
that the ordinary striding level usually applied to such instruments watches 
the pivots only, whereas the observer wishes to be informed whether or not 
the telescope itself describes a true plane. This it will not do if the flexure 
of the axis differs, as it may do, in different altitudes. Mr. Cooke there- 
fore attaches the levels to the telescope. His mode of doing this, and of 
providing for their due adjustment, will, in the absence of drawings, be best 
understood by inspecting the instrument. 

The means of adjusting the axis vertically and azimuthally are also pe- 
culiar. The bearings.on which the pivots turn are carried by strong three- 
armed pieces, similar in form to the tribrach of an ordinary theodolite. On 
one side the tribrach is raised or lowered by means of the three vertical 
screws which form its feet, and the axis is thus made horizontal; on the 
other side the tribrach is pushed laterally by two horizontal screws, and 
the telescope is thus brought into the meridian. Three principal objects 
are sought in these arrangements—to exclude shake, to obviate strain, 
and to cause the expansions to take place from the centre outwards. 
I have been well satisfied with the trials I have made of them. I find 
these adjustments to be exceedingly delicate in their action, and very 
stable. 

The Zenith Sector.—This is quite unlike any instrument of the same de- 
nomination. My endeavour in designing it was to combine maximum 
power with minimum weight. 

A solid steel vertical axis revolves within a hollow wide-based conical 
cast-iron pillar. Across the vertical axis is placed a frame, in which are 
formed bearings for the reception of a transverse horizontal axis. This 

-axis carries outside the frame a telescope of 4 feet focal length and 4 inches 
clear aperture, and a portion of a circle comprising two opposite sectors, 
each containing about 45°. The telescope being vertical for the observa- 
tion of stars near the zenith, the sectors are horizontal—that is, transverse 
to the telescope. The frame which supports the horizontal axis carries 
also four micrometer-microscopes for reading the sectors. These micro- 
scopes are arranged conically, so that all four are illuminated by a single 
light, in the manner adopted by the Astronomer Royal for the Great Green- 
wich Transit-Circle. The telescope and sectors revolve together, the micro- 
scopes being fixed. When packed for carriage, the telescope and sectors 
can be made to lie in the same direction, and so take up much less room 


1867.| On the Orders and Genera of Ternary Quadratic Forms, 387 


than if they retained their transversal positions. Two levels are fixed to 
the horizontal-axis frame. The instrument is duly counterpoised. | 

The general arrangement of the instrament may be best conceived by 
supposing an equatoreal of the German form to be adjusted as it would be 
at the pole, when its polar axis would represent the vertical axis of the 
zenith sector, and its declination axis the horizontal axis. 

The instrument has been too short a time in my hands to admit of my 
forming an opinion as toits probable success. I anticipate some advantage 
from the arrangement of the sectors, which, being in identical cireum- 
stances, should be liable to no inequalities of either flexure or temperature. 

Both of the principal axes of the instruments are provided with inde- 
pendent adjustments, the action of which appears to be very satisfactory. 

Tn concluding this brief and imperfect notice, I beg to state that I hope 
to draw up hereafter a full and detailed description of all the instruments 
given in the foregoing list. At present my time is absorbed by the trials 
and experiments to which it is necessary that I should subject them before 
their despatch to India; and I trust the Royal Society will accept this 
explanation as an excuse for the meagreness of the present account. 


II. “ On the Orders and Genera of Ternary Quadratic Forms.” 
By Henry J. Stepuen Suitu, M.A., F.R.S., Savilian Professor 
of Geometry in the University of Oxford. Received February 21, 


1867. 
(Abstract. ) 


The object of this Paper is to supply demonstrations of the undemon- 
strated results, relating to Ternary Quadratic Forms, which are contained 
in an important memoir of Eisenstein’s (‘‘ Neue Theoreme der hoheren 
Arithmetik,” Crelle’s Journal, vol. xxxv. p. 117),—and, at the same time, 
to extend those results to the cases not considered by him in that Memoir. 
The following are the principal points in which the theory of Eisenstein 
has been thus further developed :— 

1. In Eisenstein’s Memoir forms of an even discriminant only are con- 
sidered. Such forms, and their contravariants, are always properly primi- 
tive ; they have particular generic characters with respect to uneven primes 
dividing the discriminant, but have no supplementary characters (7. e. cha- 
racters with respect to 4 or 8). The case of forms of an even discriminant 
is more complicated. Besides the properly primitive order, there may 
exist, in this case, an improperly primitive order, i which the forms 
themselves are improperly primitive, and their contravariants properly 
primitive,—or, again, an improperly primitive order, in which the forms 
themselves are properly primitive, and their contravariants improperly pri- 
mitive. Further, forms of an even discriminant may have characters with 
respect to 4 or 8; and a complete enumeration of these supplementary 
characters requires a careful distinction of cases. To facilitate this enu- 


VOL. XV. 21 


388 Prof. H. J. S. Smith on the Orders and Genera of [Feb. 28, 


meration, a Table is given in the Paper for finding the supplementary 
characters of any proposed form. 

2. A Table is also given for forming the complete generic character of 
any proposed form. ‘This Table is intended to serve the same purposes, 
in the theory of ternary quadratic forms, for which the Table of Lejeune 
Dirichlet is available in the binary theory (Crelle, vol. xix. p. 338). The 
Table, like that of Lejeune Dirichlet, distinguishes between the possible 
and impossible generic characters; and the Paper contains a complete 
demonstration of the criterion by which they are distinguished. 

3. Besides the particular characters relating to uneven primes dividing 
the discriminant, it is convenient, in those cases in which there is no sup- 
plementary character, to consider a certain particular generic character 
which does not appear to have been regarded as such by Hisenstem. This 
character is termed in the Paper the simultaneous character of the form 
and its contravariant : its existence is demonstrated ; and its introduction 
as an element of the complete generic character is justified by its use in 
the distinction of possible and impossible genera. 

4. It has been proposed to define a genus of forms as consisting of all 
those forms which can be transformed into one another by substitutions 
of which the coefficients are rational and the determinant a unit. It is 
desirable (in the case of quadratic forms) to add to this definition the 
limitation that the denominators of the fractional coefficients are to be 
uneven, and prime to the discriminant. And it is shown, in this Paper, 
that two ternary quadratic forms are or are not transformable mto one 
another by such substitutions, according as their complete generic cha- 
racters do or do not coincide. 

5. The preceding observations apply equally to the cases of definite and 
indefinite forms. These two cases are included in the same analysis by 
means of a convention as to the signs of the two numbers defined by 
Eisenstein, and termed in this Paper the arithmetical invariants of the 
ternary form. The first invariant of a form is the greatest common 
divisor of the first minors of the matrix of the form; the second invariant 
is the quotient obtained by dividing the discriminant by the square of the 
first invariant. According to the convention adopted in the Paper, the 
second invariant has the same sign as the discriminant; and the first 
invariant has or has not the same sign as the second, according as the 
form is definite or indefinite. 

6. The latter part of the Paper is occupied exclusively with the theory 
of definite and positive forms. In the case of these forms, the weight (or, 
as Hisenstein has termed it, the density) of a class is the reciprocal of the 
number of automorphics (of determinant +1) of any form of the class; 
the weight of a representation of a number by a form is the weight of the 
form, 7..e. the weight of the class containing the form; the weight of a 
genus or order is the sum of the weights of the classes comprised in the 
genus or order. In his Memoir, Eisenstein has given (but without demon- 


1867. | Ternary Quadratic Furms. 389 


stration) the formule which assign the weight of a given genus or order 
of forms of an uneven discriminant. These formule are demonstrated in 
the present Paper, and, with them, the corresponding formule relating to 
the cases in which the discriminant is even. The demonstration is obtained 
by a method similar to that employed by Gauss and Dirichlet for the de- 
termination of the number of binary classes of a given determinant. The 
sum of the weights of the representations, by a system of forms represent- 
ing the classes of any proposed genus, of all the numbers contained in 
certain arithmetical progressions, and not surpassing a given number, is in 
a finite ratio to the sesquiplicate power of the given number when that 
number is supposed to increase without limit. Of this limiting ratio, two 
distinct determinations are obtained; ef which the first contains, as a 
factor, the weight of the proposed genus; and an expression for that 
weight is cbtained by a comparison of the two determinations. Of these 
determinations, the first is obtained immediately by an elementary applica- 
tion of the integral calculus; the second depends on an arithmetical 
theorem, which is deduced in the Paper from the analysis employed by 
Gauss in arts. 279-284 of the ‘ Disquisitiones Arithmeticee,’ and which may 
be expressed as follows :— 

_ © The sum of the weights of the representations of a given number 
(contained in one of certain Arithmetical Progressions) by a system of 
forms representing the classes of a ternary genus, is equal to the weight of 
a genus of binary forms, of which the determinant is the product, taken 
negatively, of the given number by the second invariant of the ternary 
forms.” 

By this proposition the determination of the limiting ratio is made to 
depend on an approximate determination of the weight (or, which is here 
the same thing, the number) of the binary classes of certain series of nega- 
tive determinants. Two methods are given in the Paper for effecting this 
approximate determination. The first method presupposes Lagrange’s 
definition of a reduced form, and depends ultimately on the evaluation of 
the definite integral 


z—y°) de dy dz=", 
SIF (e2—-y) de dy dam" 
of which the limits are given by the inequalities 

gaa yay 220, U2, 2y sa, 


The second method employs the expression obtained by Lejeune Dirichlet 
in the form of an infinite series for the number of binary classes of a given 
determinant, and is thus independent of the definition of a reduced form. 
The same result is obtained by both methods; but the second is more 
easily extended to the case of quadratic forms containing more than three 
indetérminates. 


VoL. XV, Wie 


[March 7, 


March 7, 1867. 
WILLIAM BOWMAN, Esg., Vice-President, in the Chair. 


- In accordance with the Statutes, the names of the Candidates for 
election into the Society were read, as follows :— 


Patrick Adie, Esq. 

Alexander Armstrong, M.D. 
William Baird, M.D. 

John Ball, Esq.: 

Henry Charlton Bastian, M.D. 
Samuel Brown, Esq. 

Francis T. Buckland, Hsq. 


Lieut.-Colonel John Cameron, R.E, » 


Frederick Le Gros Clark, Esq. 


Professor Robert Bellamy Clifton. 


Joseph Barnard Davis, M.D. 
W. Boyd Dawkins, Esq. 
Henry Dircks, Esq. 

Baldwin Francis Duppa, Esq. 
Wilham Ksson, Ksq. 
Alexander Fleming, M.D. 
Peter Le Neve Foster, Esq. 
Sir Charles Fox. 


Edward Headlam Greenhow, M.D. 


Albert C. L. G. Gtinther, M.D. 
Julius Haast, Esq., Ph.D. 


Captain Robert Wolseley Haig, R.A. 


Daniel Hanbury, Esq. 


Augustus GeorgeVernon Harcourt, © 


Esq. 
Edmund Thomas Higgins, Ksq. 
Jabez Hogg, Ksq., 

John Whitaker Hulke, Esq. 
Edward Hull, Esq. 

James Jago, M.D. 

Professor Thomas Hayter Lewis. 
Edward Joseph Lowe, Esq. 


David Macloughlin, M.D. 
Professor Nevil Story Maskelyne. 
John Matthew, Esq. 

George Matthey, Esq. 7 
James Robert Napier, Esq. 
Thomas Nunneley, Esq. 

Admiral Erasmus Ommaney. 
James Bell Pettigrew, M.D. 


.Charles Bland Radcliffe, M.D. 


John Russell Reynolds, M.D. 

Benjamin Ward Richardson, M.D. 

J. 8S. Burdon Sanderson, M.D. 

Edward Henry Sieveking, M.D. 

Henry T. Stainton, Esq. 

James Startin, Esq. 

John Stewart, Esq. 

Major James Francis Tennant, R.E. 

Colonel Henry Edward Landor 
Thuillier, R.A. 

Charles Tomlinson, Ksq. 

Rev. Henry Baker. Tristram. - 

Cromwell Fleetwood Varley, Esq. 

William Sandys Wright Vaux, Ksq. 

Edward Walker, sq. 

Professor J. Alfred Wanklyn. 

Edward John Waring, M.D. 

Henry Wilde, Esq. 

Samuel Wilks, M.D. 

Professor William Parkinson 
Wilson. 

James Young, Hsq: 

Colonel Henry Yule, R.E. 


1867.] Dr. J. Burdon Sanderson—Croonian Lecture. 391 


“On the Influence exerted by the Movements of Respiration on 
the Circulation of the Blood.” Being the Croonian Lecture 
for 1867, delivered by Dr. J. Burpon SanpERson. 


(Abstract). 

The purpose of the lecture was to show that the explanation usually given 
by physiologists of the mode in which the respiratory movements of the 
thorax influence the force and frequency of the contractions of the heart 
can no longer be entertained. 

The doctrine usually taught in this and other countries is stated as fol- 
lows in one of the most recent texi-books :—“ During the act of expiration 
the frequency of the pulse is considerably augmented, whilst the line of 
mean pressure rapidly rises, indicating increased tension in the arterial 
Wllsheitees-) 3 During the act of inspiration, on the contrary, the pulsation 
becomes slower, the curves much bolder, and the line of mean pressure 
gradually falis; for then the blood readily enters the thorax, and, as a con- 
sequence, the great yeins, capillaries, and arterial walls become compara- 
tively flaccid’? (Carpenter’s ‘ Physiology,’ 1864, p. 345). Statements to 
the same effect are to be found in Budge’s ‘Lehrbuch der Physiologie,’ 
1862, p. 350; in Kirke’s ‘Handbook of Physiology,’ 1863, p. 129; in 
Ludwig’s ‘Lehrbuch,’ 1857, vol. ii. pp. 161, 162. 

From numerous experiments, in which the respiratory movements and 
the variation of pressure in the arteries in the dog were recorded simulta- 
neously by mechanical means, the author had arrived at an opposite con- 
clusion, viz. that in natural breathing each expansion of the chest is fol- 
lowed by increase of arterial tension and shortening of the diastolic inter- 
val; in other words, that the immediate effect of inspiration is to increase 
both the force and frequency of the contractions of the heart. 

The experimental method was as follows :—-For the purpose of recording 
the movement of air in and out of the chest, the animal is caused to breathe 
through a T-shaped tube, one arm of which is connected with the trachea, 
while the other remains open. By the stem it communicates with a disk- 
shaped bag of thin cacutchouc. The resistance afforded to the ingress and 
egress of air by the tube, although very inconsiderable, is yet sufficient to 
produce alternate movements of expansion and collapse of the bag. The 
variations of arterial pressure are measured by a mercurial manometer, 
differing from that of Poiseuille, in that the attached arm, which is the 
longer of the two, is of much smaller diameter than the other, the area of 
the latter being twelve times as great as that of the former. For the pur- 
pose of recording the movements of the dynamometer and of the caout- 
choue bag, two light wooden levers of the third kind, each 25 inches in 
length, are used. These work on steel axes, the bearings of which are so 
contrived that the axis of the arterial lever is directly above that of the 
respiratory lever, and that both oscillate in the same vertical plane: bx 
yertical rods they are connected, the upper or arterial lever with a cork float 


2K 2 


\ 
392 Dr. J. Burdon Sanderson—Croonian Lecture. [March 7, 


which rests on the surface of the mercury in the wide arm of the dynamo- 
meter, the lower with the upper surface of the caoutchouc bag. At their 
extremities they carry fine sable brushes, by which their movements are 
inscribed on a roll of paper, to which a horizontal movement is communi- 
cated by clockwork. By amechanical arrangement, which need not be here 
described, synchronical poiuts can from time to time be marked in the two 
tracings inscribed simultaneously on the paper by the momentary with- 
drawal of both brushes. The experiments were of the following nature, 
dogs being employed throughout. 

1. Experiments as to normal respiration.—In these experiments (eleven 
in number) the dynamometer was connected with the femoral artery, while 
the breathing-tube was connected with the respiratory cavity, either by 
the trachea, or by means of a mask fixed over the snout. The principal 
results were as follows :— | . 

Experiment 1.—Respirations per minute, 9; pulsations, 108. Mean 
arterial pressure 6°2 inches. ‘The tracings show that each respiratory act is 
divisible into two parts; two-fifths being occupied by thoracic movements, 
the remainder by the pause. Of the former, two-thirds correspond to in- 
spiration, one-third to expiration. During the pause the arterial pressure 
gradually sinks, the commencement of inspiration being immediately fol- 
lowed by an increase of pressure, which becomes still more marked during 
expiration, but again subsides at its completion. ‘The interval between | 
each two succeeding contractions of the heart is seen to be three times as 
great in those pulsations which immediately fol/ow expiration as in those 
which precede it. 

The other experiments of the series were of a similarnature. In some 
the relative length of the respiratory intervals and the regularity of the pul- 
sations rendered it more easy to judge of the precise relation between the two 
tracings than in others, but in all the results were in complete accordance with 
those above stated. Even when the frequency of breathing was such that 
three pulsations corresponded to one respiration (experiment 4), it was ob- 
served that the diastolic interval which immediately followed expiration was 
twice as long as either of the other two. In one case the respiratory tra- 
cing showed that the mode of breathing was peculiar: inspiration was sepa- 
rated from expiration by a pause of considerable duration, during which 
the arterial pressure declined and the pulse was retarded. 

2. Experiments for the purpose of determining whether the resistance 
afforded by the T-tube to the passage of air in and out of the chest exer- 
cise any modifying influence on the results.—It was obvious that this end 
could be best attained by observing the effect of increasing the resistance ; 
for by so doing, any modifying influence exercised by it would become more 
obvious. With this view a series of observations were made on the same 
animal (under the influence of morphia), in which the resistance was gra- 
dually increased by inserting plugs of various sizes into the aperture of the 
T-tube. The tracings showed that even when the aperture was so diminished 


1867. | On the Influence of Respiration on Circulation. 393 


as to produce marked dyspneea, and great exaggeration of the movements of 
respiration, it was observed as Tish as before that the increase of force 
and frequency of the pulse were increased by the prolonged inspiratory 
efforts of the animal. 

3. Experiments showing that when the respiratory cavity is completely 
closed (as by plugging the trachea), the relation between the respiratory 
movements of the chest and the arterial pressure is reversed.—The pro- 
cess of death by apncea may be divided into two stages; the first extend- 
ing from the moment of occlusion to the cessation of the struggles of 
the animal and the supervention of apparent insensibility, the second ter- 
minating with the extinction of the circulation. In order to observe the 
characters of the respiratory movements and those of the heart during these 
two stages, it was necessary to substitute a mercurial manometer for the 
caoutchouc bag. It was then seen that at first the respiratory movements 
increase in amplitude without altering in character ; but towards the. end 
of the first minute, when the animal begins to struggle, they become irre- 
gular, and each struggle 1 is accompanied by strong expulsive efforts, during 
eee the mercury in the dynamometer oscillates violently and rises to an 
encrmous height. At the commencement of the second stage, when the 
animal becomes tranquil, the respiratory movements assume a different 
character, become almost exclusively inspiratory (gasping), and much more 
regular. They occur, however, at longer and longer intervals, until they 
finally cease. As regards the relation between the oscillations of the two 
manometers, the tracings show distinctly that throughout the whole pro- 
cess they are strictly coincident, both as to the time of their occurrence and 
their extent. Hence it may be concluded that the extraordinary elevation 
of arterial pressure which has been long known to occur during the second 
minute in death by apnoea, is not due, as was supposed by Dr. Alison and 
Dr. John Reid, to obstruction of the capillary vessels, either pulmonary or 
systemic, but to the violence of the respiratory efforts. The cavity of the 
chest bemg closed, the force exercised by the respiratory muscles expresses 
itself in variations of tension of the enclosed air, which are communicated 
through the intra-thoracic arteries to those outside of the chest, pro- 
ducing those violent oscillations of the dynamometer which have been re- 
ferred to. 

In support of this inference, it was shown that in an animal under the in- 
fluence of woorara (when all respiratory movement ceases, while those of 
the heart are unaffected), the process of apncea is not only of greater dura- 
tion, but is not attended with any of those peculiar disturbances of the cir- 
culation which have been hitherto attributed to capillary obstruction. The 
gradual extinction of the force of the contraction of the heart is indicated 
by a slow and uninterrupted subsidence of the arterial pressure. 

4. Experiments for the purpose of ascertaining in how far the influence 
exercised by the respiratory movements on the heart in ordinary breathing 
are chemical.—For this purpose observations were made on animals which 


t 


394 Dr. J. Burdon Sanderson—Croonian Lecture. [March 7, 


had been allowed to respire a limited quantity of air (50-100 cubic inches) for 
a sufficiently long time to ensure the complete cessation of all appreciable 
reaction of its oxygen on the circulating blood. In this form of apneea in- 
sensibility is not produced until from ten to fifteen mmutes after the expe- 
riment. As in ordinary suffocation, it is associated with a marked change 
in the mode of breathing. All expiratory efforts cease, and the animal re- 
spires by gasps, each of whichis separated from its successor by a pause of 
variable duration. Under these circumstances, when unquestionably all 
chemical reaction is out of the question, the effect observed is of the same 
mature as in ordinary breathing, the only difference being that, in conse- 
quence of the length of the intervals and the absence of expiratory effort, it 
is much more obvious. The moment after mspiration commences, the mer- 
curial column is jerked up by a succession of forcible contractions of the 
heart. 

5. Haperiments showing that in artificial respiration, when the mechanism 
as reversed, the chemical conditions remaining the same, the mechanical 
effect is correspondingly modified; and that if the blood ts venous, a 
chemical effect 1s produced by each injection of air into the lungs, which, 
although of the same nature, requires a much longer time for its produc- 
tion.—If, in an animal under the influence of woorara, artificial respiration 
be discontinued until the arterial pressure sinks several inches, and then 
air is injected, even in small quantity, no immediate effect is observed 
excepting a momentary increase of arterial pressure coincident in time with 
the expansion of the lungs; but after the lapse of six or seven seconds, the 
heart begins to beat with extreme frequency, rapidly raismg the mercurial 
column until a pressure is attained equal or superior to that originally 
existing. The length of the time which intervenes between this event and 
its antecedent is in itself sufficient to show that the relation between the 
two cannot be mechanical. This is proved by the observation that, if 
hydrogen be substituted for air in the experiments, no effect is produced. 

6. Experiments showing the relation between the thoracic movements and 
the arterial pressure after section of the pneumogastric nerves.—Section 
of the pneumogastric nerves in the neck, besides its well-known effect in 
retarding the breathing and accelerating the contractions of the heart, alters 
the mode of the respiratory movements. The chest is unnaturally dilated 
even during the pause. Inspiration is performed slowly and with effort, 
and terminates in a sudden expiratory collapse. The heart not only con- 
tracts more frequently, but. more forcibly, the arterial pressure rising 
several inches of mercury. Under these conditions it is observed (1) that 
the arterial pressure tends to imcrease during the slow inspiration, and to 
decline during the pause, and (2) that a more rapid increase of tension 
occurs simultaneously with expiration. But (3) no variation is observed 
of the frequency of the pulsations; and (4) all the effects are much less 
marked than in the.normal animal. These peculiarities are to be attri- 
buted to the extreme rapidity of the heart’s action, to the permanent 


1867.] On the Influence of Respiration on Circulation. 395 


distension of the thoracic veins, and to the violence of the expiratory 
“movements. Tua f 

Theoretical exposition of the mechanical influence of the respiratory 
movements on the circulation.—(1) It has been demonstrated by Donders 
that the elastic contents of the chest have at all times a tendency to shrink 
to a smaller bulk than that of the cavity m which they are contained, so 
that the viscera within the thorax are constantly distended in a degree 
which varies according to its ever-varying capacity. As, however, they 
are not equally elastic, they yield to this distension unequally. When the 
chest enlarges, the lungs yield most, the veins and heart, in a state cf 
relaxation, next; the contracting heart and the arteries scarcely expand at 
all. (2) If the veins contained air and communicated with the atmo- 
sphere, they would fill asrapidly as the lungs ; actually their expansion is 
much slower. Hence the first effect of inspiration is to increase the pro- 
portion of thoracic space occupied by the lungs, by which they become 
relatively more distended than the other organs. So soon, however, as the 
veins and auricles have time to fill, equilibrium is more or less restored. 
(3) Hence it follows (a) that the dilatation of the chest in inspiration 
aids the expansion of the heart during diastole and of the thoracic veins ; 
and (6) that these events cannot occur simultaneously with their cause, 
but must follow at an interval varying according to the condition of the 
circulation. (4) Other things being equal, the force and frequency of the 
contractions of the heart are increased by whatever causes accelerate its 
diastolic impletion. The more rapidly the cavities fill the shorter must 
be its period of relaxation, the more vigorous its systole, and consequently 
the greater the arterial pressure. (5) The effect of thoracic expansion on 
the intra-thoracic veins varies both as regards its degree and the time of 
its occurrence. Both kinds of variation depend on the velocity of the 
circulation and the pressure existing im the veins outside of the chest. 
When the systemic veins are distended, the circulation rapid, and the 
arterial resistance in consequence diminished, the heart almost empties 
itself at each contraction, and the expansion of the chest fills the thoracic 
veins and the relaxed heart with great rapidity. In the opposite case, 
when the systemic veins are comparatively empty, the cavities of the heart 
fill slowly, and discharge themselves imperfectly on account of the excessive 
arterial resistance. (6) Hence the effect of inspiration in facilitating the 
diastolic impletion of the auricles, and consequently im increasing the 
Srequency and force of the heart’s action, varies directly as the velocity 
of the circulation, inversely as the arterial pressure. 

Conclusions.—1. In natural breathing the influence exercised by the 
thoracic movements on the heart is entirely mechanical. So long as the 
respiration is tranquil, variations of air-pressure in the bronchial tubes and 
vesicles of the lungs do not materially affect the arterial pressure ; but 
violent expiratory movements are accompanied by simultaneous increase of 
vascular tension. 


396 Dr. Rankine on the Statical Stability of a Ship. [March 14, 


2. When the respiratory orifices are closed, the variations of blood- 
pressure in the arteries are synchronical with those of air-pressure in the 
respiratory cavity, and take place in the same direction. 

3. The increased action of the heart which results from chemical 
changes produced in the circulating fluid by exposure to air, is of the 
same nature as the mechanical effect of inspiration, both being indicated 
by increased arterial tension and acceleration of the pulse. The former 
may be distinguished from the latter (a) by the length of time required 
for the production of the effect, and (2) by its dependence on a previous 
venous condition of the blood. 

4. Hence the influence of the thoracic movements on those of the heart 
may be either directly mechanical, as in suffocation, indirectly mechanical, 
as in ordinary breathing, or chemical. 


March 14, 1867. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The following communications were read :— 


J. “Note on Mr. Merrifield’s New Method of calculating the Statical 
Stability of a Ship.” By W. J. Macquorn Rankine, C.E,, 
LL.D., F.R.S. Received February 22, 1867. 


On the 24th of January, 1867, a paper was read to the Royal Society by 
Mr. C. W. Merrifield, F.R.S., Principal of the Royal School of Naval Ar- 
chitecture, showing how, by determining the radii of curvature of the locus 
of the centre of buoyancy or “ metacentric involute”’ of a ship in an up- 
right position and at one given angle of inclination, a formula may be ob- 
tained for calculating to a close approximation her moment of stability at 
any given angle of inclination, on the assumption that the metacentric invo- 
lute can be sufficiently represented by a conic. 

It has occurred to me that the latter part of the calculation in Mr. Mer- 
rifield’s method might be simplified by assuming for the approximate form 
of the metacentric involute, not a conic, but the involute of the involute of 
a circle; the locus of its centres of curvature, or ‘‘metacentric evolute,” 
being assumed to be the involute ofa circle. 

The involute of the mvolute of a circle is distinguished by the following 
property. Let 7 be the radius of the circle, p, that radius of curvature of 
the involute of the involute which touches the involute at its cusp, and p 
another radius of curvature of the same curve making the angle 6 with the | 
radius p,; then 

no 


Having found, then, the radii of curvature of the metacentric involute in 


p=Ppyt 


1867.) On the Maintenance of Electric Currents. | OOF 


an upright position, and at a given angle of inclination @,, let p, and p, be 
those radii respectively ; then make 


This will be the radius of the required circle ; and its positive or negative 
sign will show whether it is to be laid off downwards or upwards from the 
metacentre. For any given angle of inclination the radius of curvature of 
the metacentric involute will be given by equation (1),which may also be put 
_ in the following form : 


62 
P=, +(p,—?P) ES OE aces OOO Op (3) 
1 


Let 6 be the depth of the ship’s centre of gravity below her metacentre, 
and p the perpendicular let fall from that centre of gravity upon the radius 
of curvature of the metacentric involute at any given angle of inclination 6 ; 
then 

B—(O— Aen Ort 70 yo te ole se ber (a) 
and the moment of stability is 
px displacement. +) 51/51 oa! Gee tance noe (al): 


It is obvious that the condition of isochronous rolling is that 6—7r=0 ; 
that is to say, that the centre of the circle which is the evolute of the meta- 
centric evolute shall coincide with the ship’s centre of gravity ; a proposi- 
tion already demonstrated by mein a paper read to the Institution of Naval 
Architects in 1864, and published in their Transactions, vol. v. p. 35. 


[ Postscript.—Received March 11, 1867. 

Since the above was written, I have been informed by Mr. Merrifield, to 
whom I had communicated my proposed modification of his method, that 
it has been tried at the Royal School of Naval Architecture and found to 
answer well, 


II. “On the Theory of the Maintenance of Electric Currents by 
Mechanical Work without the use of Permanent Magnets.” By 
J. Currk Maxwewt, F.R.S. Received February 28, 1867. 


The machines lately brought before the Royal Society by Mr. Siemens 
and Professor Wheatstone consist essentially of a fixed and a moveable 
electromagnet, the coils of which are put in connexion by means of a com- 
mutator. 

The electromagnets in the actual machines have cores of soft iron, which 
greatly increase the magnetic effects due to the coils; but, in order to 
simplify the expression of the theory as much as possible, I shall begin by 


8398 Mr. Clerk Maxwell on the Maintenance of Hlectric [March 14, 


supposing the coils to have no cores, and, to fix our ideas, we may suppose 
them in the form of rings, the smaller revolving within the larger on a com- 
mon diameter. : 

The equations of the currents in PH neighbouring circuits are given in 
my paper ‘‘ On the Electromagnetic Field’ *, and are there numbered (4) 
and (5), 

roRo+ “ (Le+My), 


: n=8YT ¢ (Mc+Ny), 


where w and y are the currents, £ and 7 the electromotive forces, and R 
and S the resistances in the two cireuits respectively. L and N are the 
coefficients of self-imduction of the two circuits, that is, their potentials on 
themselves when the current is unity, and M is their cocttiannt of mutual 
induction, which depends on their relative position. In the electromag- 
netic system of measurement, L, M, and N are of the nature of lines; and 
R and S are velocities. IL may be metaphorically called. the “electric 
inertia’’ of the first circuit, N that of the second, and L+2M-+WN that of 
the combined cireuit. 

Let us first take the case of the twe circuits thrown into one, and the two 
coils relatively at rest, so that M is constant. Then 


(R+S)2+ © (L4+2M+N)e=0, . cies 6) 
whence 


f=27,e Le2M+N , eee sl 


where x, is the initial value of the current. This expression shows that the 
current, if left to itself in a closed circuit, will gradually decay. 


If we put 
L+2M+N __ 3) 
REST Lempert KEY e e e e e 2 e 4 
then 


Bame Fy ea se 


The value of the time 7 depends on the nature of the coils. In coils of 
similar outward form, 7 varies as the square of the linear dimension, and _ 
inversely as the resistance of unit of length of a wire whose section is the 
sum of the sections of the wires passing through unit of section of the coil. 

In the large experimental coil used in determining the B.A. unit of re- 
sistance in 1864, 7 was about °Q1 second. In the coils of electromagnets 
7 is much greater, and when an iron core is inserted there is a still greater 
increase. 


* Phil, Trans, 1865, p. 469. 


1867.] Currents by Mechanical Work. iu. 399 


_ Let us next ascertain the effect of a sudden change of position in the se- 
eondary coil, which alters the value of M from M, to M, ina time ¢,—4, 
during which the current changes from #, to w,. Integrating equation (1) 
with respect to ¢, we get 


(R+8) { ? ad6-+(L+ IM, + N)2,—(L+-2M,-+N)z,=0. . (3) 
al 


If we suppose the time so short that we may neglect the first term in com- 
parison with the others, we find, as the effect of a sudden change of position, 


Gi2 OM EN), = (UGoMe Nar Re NG) 


This equation may be interpreted in the language of the dynamical theory, 
by saying that the electromagnetic momentum of the circuit remains the 
same after a sudden change of position. To ascertain the effect of the com- 
mutator, let us suppose that, at a given imstant, currents # and y exist in 
the two coils, that the two coils are then made into one circuit, and that a’ 
is the current in the circuit the instant after completion; then the same 
equation (1) gives 


(L+2M+N)s'=(L4+M)e+(N+M)y. .°. 2. °@) 


This equation shows that the electromagnetic momentum of the com- 
pleted cirenit.is equal to the .sum of the electromagnetic momenta of the 
separate coils just before completion. 

The commutator may belong to one of four different varieties, according 
to the order in which the contacts are made and broken. If A, B be the 
ends of the first coil, and C, D those of the second, and if we enclose in’ 
brackets the parts in electric connexion, we may express the four varieties 
as in the following Table :— 


(A0) (BD) (AC) (BD) (AC) (BD) (Ac) (BD) 
(ABCD) (ABC) (D)  ~=(A) (BCD) ~—s (A) (B) (C) DZ) 
(AD) (BC) (ABCD) (ABCD) (AD) (BC) 


(AD) (BC) (AD) (BC) 
In the first kind the circuit of both coils remains uninterrupted ; and 


when the operation is complete, two equal currents in opposite directions 
are combined into one. In this case, therefore, y= —vw, and 
(a-2M- N)a’—=(B—N) at) es ss ye 8) 
When there are iron cores in the coils, or metallic circuits in which inde- 
pendent currents can be excited, the electrical equations are much more 
complicated, and contain as many independent variables as there can be in- 
dependent electromagnetic quantities. I shall therefore, for the sake of 
preserving simplicity, avoid the consideration of the iron cores, except in 
so far as they simply increase the values of L, M, and N. 
I shall also suppose that the secondary coil is at first in a position in 


400 Mr. Clerk Maxwell on the Maintenance of Electric [March 14, 


which M=0, and that it turns into a position in which M=—M, which 
will increase the current in the ratio of L+N to L—2M+N. 

The commutator is then reversed. This will diminish the current in a 
ratio depending on the kind of commutater. 

The secondary coil is then moved so that M changes from M to 0, which 
will increase the current in the ratio of L+2M-+N to L+N. 

During the whole motion the current has also been decaying at a rate 
which varies according to the value of L+2M-+N;; but since M varies 
from + M to —M, we may, in a rough theory, suppose that in the expres- 
sion for the decay of the current M=0. 

If the secondary coil makes a semirevolution in time T, then the ratio of 
the current x,, after a semirevolution to the current x, before the semirevo- 
lution, will be 


where 


and 7 is a ratio aependms © on the kind of commutator. 


For the first kind, 
= mee Ps (10 
Loon °° ) 
By increasing the speed, T may be indefinitely diminished, so that the 
question of the maintenance of the current depends ultimately on whether 
7 is greater or less than unity. When, is greater than 1 or less than —1, 
the current may be maintained by giving a sufficient speed to the machine ; 
it will be always in one direction in the first case, and it will be a reciproca- 
ting current in the second. 
When 7 lies between +1 and —1, no current can be maintained. 
Let there be p windings of wire in the first coil and q¢ windings in the 
second, then we may write 


L=lp’, M=mpq, N=nq, . 7 atlas) 


where J, m, n are quantities depending on the shape and relative position of 
the coils, Since L—2M-+N must always be a positive quantity, being the 
coefficient of self-induction of the whole circuit, Je—m’*, and therefore 
LN—M must be positive. When the commutator is of the first kind, the 
ratio 7 is greater than unity, provided pm is greater than gn; and when 


=2(1+4/i-™} 


a(R" site ania aa 


ln 


which is the maximum value of 7. 


1867.] Currents by Mechanical Work. AQ] . 


When the ratio of p to q lies between that of m to m and that of m to J, 
x lies between +1 and —1, and the current must decay; but when pi is 
less than gm, a reciprocating current may be kept up, and will increase 
most rapidly when 


and 
2\—3 
Fag ai, ° ° e e e e e e e - (13) 


When the commutator is of the second kind, the first step is to close both 
circuits, so as to render the currents in them independent. The second 
circuit is then broken, and the current in itis thusstopped. This produces 
an effect on the first circuit by induction determined by the equation 


Ease Mig Wa - May AG 
In this case M=—M,, y=2, and y'=0, so that 
GSN esa 0 OE OGL B) 


where wis the original, and 2’ the new value of the current. 
The next step is to throw the circuits into one, M being now positive. 
If z" be the current after this operation, 


Gi Wi (a 2 Naa. se CLO) 
The whole effect of this commutator is therefore to multiply the current 
by the ratio 
L’—M?’ 
L(L+2M+N) 
The whole effect of the semirotation is to multiply the current by the ratio 


L+2M+N _ 
L—~2M+N° 
The total effect of a semirevolution supposed instantaneous is to multiply - 
the current by the ratio 
L?>—M 


o> i =2N-E Ny, 


If p and q be the number of windings in the first and second coils respec- 
tively, the ratio becomes 


Py — m9 
~ ie? —2mpqt+nq’)’ 
which is greater than 1, provided 2/mp is greater than (/n+m’)q. When 


ae m ere pA) 428s ae -3"%, 


402 On the Maintenance of Electric Currents. [March 14» 


we have for the maximum value of 7, 


In the experiment of Professor Wheatstone, in which the ends of the 
primary coil were put in permanent connexion by a short wire, the equa- 
tions are more complicated, as we have three currents instead of two to 
consider. The equations are 


Ree £ (Le+ My) =8y +4 (Ma+Ny)=Qe + {ks ae 


ety Pee ia tee celle) ek oils 5 en 


where Q, K, and 2 are the resistance, self-induction, and current in the 
short wire. The resultant equations are of the second degree; but as they 
are only true when the magnetism of the cores is considered rigidly con- 
nected with the currents in the coils, an elaborate discussion of them would 
be out of place in what professes to be only a rough explanation of the 
theory of the experiments. , 

Such a rough explanation appears to me to be as follows :— 

‘Without the shunt, the current in the secondary coil is always in rigid 
connexion with that in the primary coil, except when the commutator is 
changing. With the shunt, the two currents are in some degree indepen- 
dent; and the secondary coil, whose electric inertia is small compared with 
that of the primary, can have its current reversed and varied without being 
clogged by the sluggish primary coil. 

On the other hand, the primary coil loses that part of the total current 
which passes through the shunt; but we know that an iron core, when 
highly magnetized, requires a great increase of current to increase its mag- 
netism, whereas its magnetism can be maintained at a considerable value by 
a current much less powerful. ‘In this way the diminution in resistance 
and self-induction due to the shunt may more than counterbalance the di- 
minution of strength in the primary magnet. 

Also, since the self-induction of the shunt is very small, all instantaneous 
currents will run through it rather than through the electromagnetic coils, 
and therefore it will receive more of the heating effect of variable currents 
than a comparison of the resistances alone would lead us to expect. 


1867.| Mr. C. F. Varley on Magneto-electric Machines. 403 


III. “On certain Points in the Theory of the Magneto-electric Ma- 
chines of Wilde, Wheatstone, and Siemens.” By C.F.Variny, 
Esq. In a Letter to Professor Stoxus, Sec. R.S. Received 
February 26, 1867. | 

Fleetwood House, Beckenham, S.E., 
February 23, 1867. 

My pEAR S1r,—Professor Wheatstone showed that a shunt put into 
the circuit of the electromagnet increased the power greatly, but the expla- 
nation that it increased the power by equalizing the resistance of the arma- 
ture and that of the electromagnet is either wholly incorrect, or very 
nearly so. 

Yesterday I had an opportunity afforded me by Mr. C. Siemens of expe- 
rimenting with his machine, in which the electromagnets have each a resist- 
ance of about 250 Ohms = 500 Ohms, the armature 400 Ohms. 

On adding a shunt to the electromagnet the flame was greatly increased. 

The two electromagnets when connected in series had a resistance of 
about 500 Ohms. I then connected them in a double circuit, the resist- 
ance in this case being about 125 Ohms. SBy this means the same result 
as regards resistance could be obtained as by a shunt, with the difference 
that the power expended in the shunt is lost in heat; while reducing the 
resistance by the double circuit caused the whole force to be expended on 
the electromagnet. 

The results of the experiment were— 

Ist. The shunt invariably increased the power. 

2ndly. When the magnets were joined im double circuit the power was 
greatly reduced. 

The explanation is to me obvious. In a Ruhmkorff’s coil, where the 
ivon core is divided into fine wire, so that the dying magnetism cannot set 
up currents in the iron core to prolong its existence, the magnetism is very 
rapidly lost, and the make-and-break hammer works very rapidly, some- 
times as fast as sixty beats per second. 

_ If the secondary circuit be closed so that the currents can flow, the re! 

and-break hammer works very slowly,’ indeed one or two beats per second ; 

and in 1856 I published a description of electromagnets whose action was 
very slow, and which were rendered sluggish by a copper cylinder around 
them. 

- Wilde’s armature, when revolving, sends intermittent currents around 

the electromagnet, whose circuit is broken at every half revolution of the 

armature. 

Were the magnets composed of fine iron wire, the magnetism would die 
away rapidly, producing a violent current by its efforts to maintain itself, 
as in the Ruhmkorff’s coils. (This current is called by foreigners the 
extra-current. ) 

The shunt which Wheatstone inserted carries this current across, and so 
maintains the magnetism of the electromagnets until the armature gives a 


- AOA Mr. W. Ladd on a Magneto-electric Machine. {March 14, 


second impulse. The current in this shunt will be found to travel in alter- 
nate directions; not so that on the electromagnet. 

When the armature is discharging its current into the electromagnets, 
the current in the shunt is in the direction it would have if the shunt 
were in circuit solely with the armature. 

‘When the armature is changing poles and is disconnected, the secondary 
current is in full play, and the current in the shunt is in the direction of 
the current prolonged in the electromagnet, that is, of the extra current. 

The force expended in the shunt is wasted in heat ; but a secondary wire 
on the electromagnet or a copper cylinder would very greatly add to the 
power by maintaining the magnetism, and not consume uselessly the force 
now wasted in the shunt. ; 

The overlapping of the armature and the solid mass of the electromag- 
nets tends to maintain imperfectly the magnetism during the intervals of 
no current from the armature; and but for this the machines, whether they 
be Wilde’s, Wheatstone’s, or Siemens’s, would none of them work. 

In 1860 I published a description of two machines I had constructed, 
and in 1862, at the Universal Exhibition, I exhibited a machine for adding 
mechanical force to static electricity without friction. A. machine similar 
in principle, but a little different in construction, has been exhibited recently 
under the name of Holtz. 

One of my machines bears to the other precisely the same relation that 
Siemens’s or Wheatstone’s does to Wilde’s. 

If these be of sufficient interest to the Royal Society, I shall be happy 
to exhibit them. 

I am, my dear Sir, 
Very truly yours, 
C. F. VaRLeEy. 


IV. “On a Magneto-electric Machine.” By Wuitiu1am Lapp, 
F.R.M.S. . Communicated by Professor Stoxzs, Sec. B.S. 
Received March 14, 1867. 


In June 1864 I received from Mr. Wilde a small magneto-electric ma- 
chine, consisting of a Siemens’s armature and six magnets. This I endea- 
voured to improve upon, my object being to get a cheap machine for blast- 
ing with Abel’s fusees. This was done by making one of circular magnets, 
and a Siemens’s armature revolving directly between the poles, the arma- 
ture forming the circles; with this I could send a very considerable power 
into an electro-magnet, &c. It was then suggested to me by my assistant, 
that if the armature had two wires instead of one, the current from one 
being sent through a wire surrounding the magnets, their power would be 
augmented, and a considerable current might be obtained from the other 
wire available for external work; or there might be two armatures, one to 


1867.] On the Lengths of Waves of Light. 405 


exalt the power of the magnets, and the other made available for blasting 
or other purposes. Want of time prevented me carrying this out until 
now; but since the interesting papers of C. W. Siemens, F.R.S., and Pro- 
fessor Wheatstone, F.R.S., were read last month, I have carried out the 
idea as follows :—Two bars of soft iron, measuring 7} in. X 23 in. X 3 in., are 
each wound, round the centre portions, with about thirty yards of No. 10 
copper wire; and shoes of soft iron are so attached at each end, that when 
the bars are placed one above the other there will be a space left between 
the opposite shoes in which a Siemens’s armature can rotate: on each of 
the armatures is wound about ten yards of No. 14 copper wire cotton- 
covered. The current generated in one of the armatures is always in con- 
nexion with the electro-magnets; and the current from the second arma- 
ture, being perfectly free, can be used for any purpose for which it may be 
required. The machine is altogether rudely constructed, and is only in- 
tended to illustrate the principle; but with this small machine three inches 
of platinum wire ‘01 can be made incandescent. 


March 21, 1867. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


Dr. Thomas Sterry Hunt and Dr. Thomas Richardson were admitted 
into the Society. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “Computation of the Lengths of the Waves of Light corre- 
sponding to the Lines in the Dispersion-Spectrum measured 
by Kirchhoff.’ By Georcz Bippett Atry, F.R.S., Astronomer 
Royal. Received March 2, 1867. 


(Abstract.-) 


The author, after adverting to the excellence and importance of the 
spectral measures made by Professor Kirchhoff, points out that these 
measures are not available for physical inquiry until we have deduced from 
them the length of the light-wave corresponding to each line. The author 
therefore undertook the work of computing the lengths of the light-waves. 
For this purpose, he referred to Fraunhofer’s direct measures of the lengths 
of the waves corresponding to certain lines, and, ascertaining the numerical 
measures in Kirchhoff’s scale corresponding to the same lines, he expressed 
Fraunhofer’s wave-lengths by an algebraical formula, in which the variable 
quantity was Kirchhoff’s measure. This formula was applied to each of 
the lines (about 1600 in number). The wave-lengths were at first ob- 
tained in parts of the Paris inch; but all were ultimately converted into 
parts of the millimetre. 

VOL. XV. 2L 


406 Mr. E. Wilson on a remarkable Alteration March 21, 


The author then adverts to the suspicion of inaccuracy in some parts of 
these results, arising from the circumstance that Kirchhoff’s apparatus 
was not always in precisely the same state of adjustment. After expressing 
his own @ priori belief that the error, if any, must be extremely small, he 
adverts to the comparison which he was now enabled to make between 
direct measures of wave-length by Angstrém and Ditscheiner, and his own 
computations. Admitting the systematic errors of Fraunhofer which the 
later philosophers have indicated, and the errors incidental to interpolation 
and extrapolation, the remaining discrepance is very small. Its progress is 
so easy that there is no difficulty in interpolating its value for any one 
line; and thus, using the computed wave-lengths of this memoir, the 
wave-length for any line may be found as it would have been measured by 
Angstrom or Ditscheiner. 

In the tabular part of the communication, the principal Table contains 
Kirchhoff’s measures and symbols, extracted from the Berlin Memoirs 
1861 and 1862, with the addition throughout of one column containing the 
author’s computed wave-lengths expressed in parts of the millimetre. This 
is followed by a special Table, in the same form, for the lines produced by 
certain metals not included.in the general Table. There is then given a 
Table of the wave-lengths corresponding to the lines produced by different 
metals, extracted by the author from the general Table. And finally there 
are given two Tables containing respectively the comparisons of Angstrém’s 
and Ditscheiner’s direct measures of wave-lengths with the wave-lengths 
computed by the author. 


II. “On a remarkable Alteration of Appearance and Structure of 
the Human Hair.’ By Erasmus Witson, F.R.S. Received 
March 12, 1867. 


I have the honour of submitting to the Royal Society a specimen of 
human hair of very remarkable appearance. Every hair is brown and 
white in alternate bands, looking as if encircled with rings; and this 
change of aspect extends throughout the whole length of the hair, and 
gives to the general mass a curiously speckled character. The brown 
segment of the hair, which represents its normal colour, measures about 
s'; of an inch in length, or something less than a quarter of a line; the 
white, or abnormal segment about half that length, namely ~3, of an 
inch ; and the two together about =4 of an inch, or one-third of a line. 

The hair was taken from a lad aged seven years and a half, a gentle- 
man’s son; he is reported as being “an active, healthy boy, quick and 
intelligent.” He was delicate up to the age of four, having suffered in © 
quick succession the diseases of childhood, a severe attack of croup, and 
several attacks of convulsions. The change in the appearance of the hair 
was first noticed when he was between two and three years old, and has 


1867. ] of Appearance and Structure of the Human Hair. 407 


increased perceptibly during the last two years. There is no similar 
alteration of structure of the eyebrows and eyelashes. His complexion is 
dark, while that of a younger brother is fair; and the latter is free from 
any alteration of the hair. 

Examination of the hair with a lens shows that the cylinder of the hair 
is perfeetly uniform, that the white portion is contained within the cuticle 
and occupies the whole breadth of the cylinder; whilst it frequently 
presents a rounded cone at the central extremity, and breaks up into fibres 
_ at the opposite or distal end ; and in some instances this fibrous structure 

is apparent at both ends of the white segment. Moreover, by transmitted 
light, the white segment is found to be opake, and consequently presents 
a dark shade, while the intermediate or brown portion has the transparency 
of normal hair. 

When the transparency of the hair is increased by immersion in Canada 
balsam slightly diluted with spirits of turpentine, the white and opake 
segment is reduced in dimensions, and is rendered more or less transparent 
by imbibition of the volatile fluid ; moreover it is clearly demonstrated by 
this process that the opacity of the segment its whiteness when seen by re- 
flected light, and its darkness by transmitted light, are all due to the presence, 
in the fibrous portion of the hair, of spaces filled with air-globules. The 
air-spaces are necessarily very numerous and assembled closely together ; 
while at the ends of the white segment they have more or less of a linear 
arrangement, and give a fibrous appearance to the opake mass. More- 
over the partial transparency of the hair caused by the balsam demon- 
strates that, besides the air-spaces, large and small, contained in the opake 
portion, minute air-spaces, sometimes arranged in linear order, and some- 
times communicating and forming short irregular canals, are also met 
with in the transparent part of the hair. And, in addition to the minute 
air-spaces of the plates of the fibrous portion of the hair, an accumulation 
of air-globules is also very apparent in the cells of the medulla. 

It is evident from this examination of the hairs, that they are imperfect 
in structure and development, and that their imperfection indicates a weak 
producing organ, and probably a weakly constitution of the individual; that 
the cells of which the fibrous portion of the hair is composed, instead of 
being filled with a horny plasma, are tinged with aqueous fluid, and the 
desiccation of this fluid leaves behind it vacuities which in the subsequent 
growth of the shaft become filled with air. The most remarkable pheno- 
menon in connexion with the case, however, is the alternation of imperfect 
and perfect cells, the period of continuance of the two processes (sup- 
posing them to be equally active in point of time) being twice as long for 
the perfect as for the imperfect structure. 

Since the publication of the observations of Berthold in Miiller’s ‘Archiv’ 
for 1850, it is generally believed that the hair grows faster during the day 
than during the night; hence the first suggestion that occurred to me in 
connexion with the present case, seeing that the white or opake segment. 

2L2 


408 Mr. C. Brooke on the Nature _ [March 21, 


was shorter by one-half than the brown, was that the former represented 
the slower growth by night, and the latter the quicker growth by day—the 
white and the brown together representing an entire day of twenty-four 
hours. But other observations by myself have given, as the average 
growth of the hair of the head in persons who had been shaved, 4 of an 
inch for the week, and consequently =. of an inch for the twenty-four 
hours. Now the length of hair comprehended by the white and the 
brown in the present case is = of. an inch, and consequently a much 
more active growth than is normally met with—corresponding, in fact, in 
a similar ratio, with thirty-seven hours instead of twenty-four. 

I therefore refrain from speculating upon the cause of alternation of the 
healthy and morbid structure presented by this case, and restrict myself to 
the narration of the fact that during a certain space of time, amounting 
to a day or more, the hair is produced of normal structure, while during 
another space of time of undetermined extent the hair is produced un- 
healthily,—that the periods of healthy formation correspond pretty accu- 
rately in extent, as do those of unhealthy formation, while the latter, in 
measurement, are only half as extensive as the former,—moreover, that the 
differences of the pathological operation are, the production of a horny 
plasma in the normal process, and of serous and watery cell-contents im 
the abnormal process. 

I may further observe that it is by no means improbable that the 
“dead” and faded hair which is met with after some illnesses and in 
instances of debilitated health may be due toa similar pathological process, 
although wanting in the periodicity and alternation which render the 
present case so remarkable. 


III. “Remarks on the Nature of Electric Energy, and on the 
Means by which it is transmitted.” By Cuarzes Brooke, 
M.A., F.R.S., P.M.S., &c. Received March 19, 1867. 


The writer has clearly shown the interchange of thermic and dynamic 
energy at the point of junction of the bars of a thermo-electric element of 
antimony and bismuth*, and he has also pointed out+ that the dynamic 
nature of electric energy is not less clearly indicated by the long-known 
fact that an ordinary voltaic current always commences with a rush, as it 
were, the instant that the circuit is closed. The dynamic cause of this 
is clearly pomted out by an experiment due to the genius of Prof. 
Wheatstone. Ifa tuning-fork, the tail of which is inserted longitudinally 
into a wooden handle, like a file or chisel, be made to vibrate, and the end 
of the handle rested obliquely on a table, the resonance of the table will 
instantly be heard; but on moving the diapason parallel to itself in any 


* Phil. Mag. Nov. 1866.. t Ibid. Dec. 1866. 


13867. | . of Electric Energy. 409 


direction on the table, the resonance ceases, from the perpetual interference 
of the successive planes of vibration with each other. But now comes the 
illustration :—On arresting the motion of translation, the resonance imme- 
diately recommences, but with a rush or momentary increase of sound: 
this must unquestionably arise from the resistance offered by the inertia 
of the molecules of wood to the reeommencement of wave-motion ; and the 
parallel phenomenon in electricity may undoubtedly be similarly accounted 
for. And the reflex momentary current (the terminal extra-current of 
Faraday), which is well known to take place at the instant of opening the 
circuit, is equally susceptible of a dynamic interpretation: it is the ana- 
logue of the wave reflected from the fixed end of a stretched cord, after 
having been imparted by the hand to the free end. 

The dynamic nature of electric energy is clearly indicated by the dy- 
namo-electric* machine of Holtz, in which dynamic is directly converted 
into electric energy,—and by the cognate machines of Wilde, Wheatstone, 
Siemens, and Ladd, in all of which alike there is an intervening conver- 
sion of dynamic into magnetic energy. ‘The enormous amount of current- 
energy evolved in Mr. Wilde’s machine when the power of a steam-engine 
is employed to rotate the armatures may be judged of by the fact that a 
long piece of platinum wire 0:2 inch in thickness was seen to be disinte- 
grated and partially fused. It is difficult to conceive that in these 
instances dynamic energy can be converted into magnetic “ fluid,” and 
that again into thermic energy: the conversion of motion into matter, 
and the subsequent reconversion of matter into motion, are obviously im- 
possible. 

Some further consideration of the effects of electric energy may serve 
to indicate the probable nature of the wave-motion. ‘The facts of electric 
and magnetic polarity imply and necessitate a polarity or directionality in 
the motion itself, which has no analogue in the waves of sound, light, or 
heat. This requirement is fully met by the hypothesis of a circular spiral 
wave, the motion of which is direct or positive if viewed from one end, 
and retrograde or negative if from the other; and this suffices to explain 
the well-known polarity of electric and magnetic induction. 

Thus far the spiral hypothesis is merely inferential; but in regard to 
magnetic wave-motion some strong presumptive evidence may be adduced. 
It appears from the experiments of Mr. Joule, made more than twenty 
years ago, that if a suspended mass of copper be, by twisting the suspen- 
sion, made to rotate between the poles of an unexcited electro-magnet, the 


* The writer has elsewhere applied (Elements of Natural Philosophy, p. 550, note) 
a definite and intelligible meaning to the construction of those compound terms which 
must be constantly employed in relation to the conversions of energy. This may be 
accomplished by taking the first section of the term to mean the acting cause, the 
second, the resulting effect: thus a dynamo-electric machine will be one in which 
dynamic energy is employed to produce an electric current ; and an electro-dynamic 
engine, one in which a current is employed to evolve dynamic energy. 


410 Mr. C. Brooke on the Nature {March 21, 


rotation of the mass is arrested the instant the magnet is excited; and 
furthermore, if the mass be forcibly rotated, heat is developed in it. And 
it has since been ascertained that if two cylindrical magnets be so placed 
that their axes lie in the same straight line, their contrary poles being 
opposed to each other, then, if a cylinder of copper be made to rotate on 
its own axis, coinciding with the common axis of the magnets, no heat will 
be evolved by its rotation. 

Now these phenomena must alike be the necessary consequences of the 
assumed dynamical theory; for if the copper molecules be thrown into 
spiral-wave motion, analogous to that of a pencil of circularly polarized 
light, then the motion of all the disturbed particles will be one of revolu- 
tion in planes to which the lines of magnetic force are normals: and the 
inertia or energy of rotation (as it has been variously termed), the 
resistance offered by each revolving particle to any change in the direction 
of its axis of revolution (as exemplified by the gyroscope), will resist the 
rotation of the mass in any direction perpendicular to that of the axes of 
molecular revolution, and arrest its motion. And conversely, if the mass 
be forcibly rotated in the above direction, or in any other direction at 
right angles to the lines of magnetic force, heat will be freely developed, 
doubtless by internal friction arising from the perpetual displacement of 
the planes of molecular revolution. But in the second case, the axis of 
rotation of the mass coincides in direction with those of the axes of 
molecular revolution; hence there is no displacement of the molecular 
orbits, and consequently no internal friction, and very little if any heat is 
generated. 

The rotatory character of the magnetic wave is further confirmed by 
the known fact that, if a plane-polarized beam pass through a transparent 
solid in the direction of the lines of force of a powerful electro-magnet, the 
plane of polarization will be rotated the instant that the magnet is excited. 
The truth of a theory can be established only by the verification of its 
necessary consequences ; and it may not be too much to assume that in 
the present case the evidence already adduced by the writer is, in the 
entire absence of all contradictory evidence, strongly presumptive of the 
reality of the hypothesis. 

It has been authoritatively stated that ordinary electric and magnetic 
waves cannot both be assumed to be spirals, because each of these forms 
of energy notoriously evolves the other in a direction perpendicular to its 
course ; and the question is not without grave dynamical difficulties ; but 
they may perhaps not be insuperable. It may possibly be that, from some 
unknown constraining condition or property inherent in magnetic bodies, 
a spiral wave, on being constrained into a spiral course, may lose its 
original spirality, and become a secondary spiral, having molecular motion 
in a direction perpendicular to that of the primary spiral. 

The relations between electric energy and some of its observed physical 
results having thus been inferred, the question next arises as to the nature 


1867.] | Of Electric Energy. 411 


of the media by which the several modes of motion are transmitted. It is 
unquestionable that sound-waves are transmissible by all kinds of matter ; 
but can any valid reason be assigned in favour of the still prevalent opinion 
that other modes of wave-motion are incapable of transmission by ordinary 
matter ?—this incapacity being implied in the adoption of the self-contra- 
dictory hypothesis of an imaginary medium, not cognizable by any known 
means of perception. 

It is a remarkable fact that in all the superseded crude notions of physical 
causation, each phase of physical energy has been presented in the garb 
either of impalpable, imponderable (in fact zmmaterial) matter itself, or of 
the vibrations thereof; and to some of these hypotheses have been suc- 
cessively added some violent supplementary hypothesis, in order ade- 
quately to meet the requirements of advancing knowledge. 

To begin with chemical action :—What are now universally recognized 
as simple metals were once supposed to consist of some earthy matter (their 
oxides) combined with ‘‘ Phlogiston,’—the material principle of brilliancy. 
But, unfortunately for the theory, it was soon found that the metals, on 
parting with their share of phlogiston (7.e. becoming oxidated), not only 
did not Jose any, but actually acquired weight; therefore phlogiston 
was assumed to be not only zmponderable, but hyper-imponderable— 
i.e. endowed with the property of absolute levity, or negative weight ! 

In the next place, the Newtonian theory of light assumed light to 
consist of molecules (of course imponderable) emanating from the source 
of light, and impinging on the perceptive organs of vision. But this 
hypothesis would not fit the phenomena of diffraction and interference ; 
and to suit these physical facts the molecules must either be thrown into 
periodical “ fits”’ of transmission or reflection, or the ray must be a row 
of egg-shaped molecules perpetually making isoperiodic somersaults, and 
plunging into a medium if they come on their heads, or bounding off if 
they fall against it sideways. Then, again, heat was supposed to consist of 
material particles emanating from the source of heat; and as a ball of ice 
placed in one focus of a concave mirror was found to lower the temperature 
of a thermometer placed in the conjugate focus, there were assumed to be 
particles of cold, as wellas of heat: it is needless to add how completely the 
theory of exchanges accounts for these facts. At length these wild speeula- 
tions were superseded, and light and heat were admitted into the category 
of wave-motion ; but electricity and magnetism were still supposed to be 
either single or dual forms of “‘ fluid”’ matter; and 


(*‘ Saxa etiam molli dura teruntur aqua ”) 


these “fluids” are probably still ranning in the deep channels they have 
worn in some philosophic minds. 

But the principle of admitting imponderability into the category of 
legitimate physical hypotheses had become tacitly accepted; and the 
conclusion was at once jumped at by the authors of the undulatory theory 


412 On the Nature of Electric Energy. [March 21, 


that the wave-motions of light and heat take place in an imponderable 
highly elastic fluid medium, pervading all space, and all matter, deno- 
minated ‘“‘sether:’? and this theory, with all its inconsistencies and incon- 
sequences, is still in all probability generally entertained. 

That some highly elastic and attenuated medium pervades infinite space, 
as the medium of transmission of the energies of light and heat (the very 
main-springs of organic existence) from the centre of each solar system to 
its dependent satellites, is a necessary consequence of the undulatory 
theory : its existence is, in fact, demonstrated by the periodic retardation 
of Encke’s Comet. But the remainder of the hypothesis, namely that all 
palpable matter is pervaded by eether for the purpose of transmitting 
light- and heat-waves, is by no means equally necessary, or even tenable ; 
for not-a shadow of evidence of the inadequacy of all matter to transmit 
these motions has ever been produced, and in default of such evidence, the 
contrary hypothesis is at least equally tenable: and moreover the intersti- 
tial-ether theory (in common with all preceding physical theories involving 
imponderability) is burdened with grave inconsistencies. In the first place 
the well-known phenomena of single and double refraction and polarization, 
whether of light or heat, necessitate the somewhat violent hypothesis that 
the elasticity of the supposed transmitting medium, ether, is not, as itis in 
all cognizable fluids, a fixed and certain quality capable of numerical esti- 
mation, but an ever-varying quality, depending quantitatively on the elas- 
ticity of adjacent matter, and even varying in ¢wo or three directions within 
the same body : it would be not more repugnant to reason to assume that the 
elasticity of a gas is one thing in a glass bottle and another in one of brass, 
or that the specific gravity of silver is a function of the moon’s age, or the 
melting-point of gold dependent on the sun’s zenith-distance. Secondly, 
the fundamental ideas of inertia, energy, and ‘‘ work” are inseparably | 
associated with gravitation ; and it seems to imply a contradiction of terms, 
to impute either inertia or energy (é.e. the capability of domg work) to an 
imponderable particle, which is consequently destitute of attraction for any 
other particle in the universe. 

The known enormous velocity (of probably not less than 250,000 miles 
in a second) at which electricity travels through a copper conductor is 
complete evidence that ordinary matter is capable of transmitting some- 
thing (whether matter or motion it signifies nothing for the present 
argument) at a considerably greater velocity than the waves of light and 
heat ; why should not appropriate kinds of matter be assumed capable of 
transmitting these also? And if so, the need of the interstitial presence of 
eether ceases altogether ; andit may with great advantage be excluded from 
the domains of ponderable palpable matter by the very mild hypothesis 
that it is not miscible with air, any more than oil, or palpable ether, with 
water, but that it floats above the boundary surface of our atmosphere. 
This hypothesis is not repugnant to reason, nor adverse to physical expe- 
rience. On this supposition it is no longer needed to impute to ether 


1867. ] On the Barographs at Oxford and at Kew. 413 


imponderability ; it will then be competent to fulfil its divine mission of 
transmitting light and heat, without doing any violence to some of the 
most fundamental notions of dynamics; and thus imponderability may 
cease to be reckoned amongst the physical attributes of matter. 


March 28, 1867. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The followmg communications were read :— 


I. “A Comparison between some of the simultaneous Records of 
the Barographs at Oxford and at Kew.” By Batrour STEWART, ° 
LL.D., F.R.S., Superintendent of the Kew Observatory. Re- 
ceived March 4, 1867. 


Through the kindness of the Rev. Robert Main, director of the Rad- 
cliffe Observatory, Oxford, certain marked features of the curves produced 
by the barographs at Oxford and at Kew were compared together on four 
separate occasions in the year 1863. 

These comparisons are the more interesting that they were all made 
during squalls or storms ; for on such occasions it is found that the baro- 
graph curves exhibiting the height of the barometer from moment to 
moment present curious characteristic points, without which indeed no 
such comparisons could be made. 

The result for these four occasions in 1863 was as follows :— 


Nature of disturbance. Perera of Kew. aii sekc 
Sudden increase of pressure 
during squall of 30th Oc- 
MOWER MNOUO 1. ke ee as 2.30 P.M. 3.9 p.m.? 39 minutes 
Sudden increase of pressure (probably). 
during squall of 21st No- 
wember P8G3 51) ioe. Li. 4.0 P.M. 4.45 p.m. 45 minutes. 


Peculiar points in the curves 
of December 3, 1863 (a 2.40 a.m. 3.35 A.M. 55 minutes. 
Seomimy day). 2...) . 6.50 a.m. 7.40 a.m. 50 minutes. 


Mr. Main has kindly called my attention to a well-marked minimum in 
the Oxford curve for February 6, 1867, which was also a stormy day. 
This minimum occurred at Oxford at 2.20 a.m. of that day, while at Kew — 
it did not occur until 3.15 a.m. Oxford was thus on this occasion 55 
minutes before Kew. 

The peculiarity of this last occasion is the singular likeness between the 
two curves. I have not compared together any other features of these 
curves, nor perhaps could this be done with exactness; but the general 

VOL. XV. PS an 


414 M. Neumayer on the Lunar-diurnal Variation [March 28, 


impression is that the changes of pressure at Oxford were — by 
similar changes at Kew, only nearly an hour later. 

It is premature (until we obtain more information) to enter into a 
discussion of the rate of progress of storms; but we are quite justified in 
considering the barograph an instrument extremely well adapted to ex- 
tend our knowledge of atmospheric disturbances. 

We see that on those very occasions when this knowledge is most 
interesting the barograph comes forward to our assistance, and presents us 
with results which could not possibly be obtained otherwise than hy a 
system of continuous registration. It does not, however, follow that, while 
a continuous record is by far the best, other records are of no value; for 
should an observer be placed beside an ordmary barometer during the 
crisis of a storm, observations made in rapid succession and accurately 
timed would be of very great assistance. Such an observer would in fact 
produce approximately a record similar in kind to that of a barograph, 
although inferior in value. 

It ought here to be noticed that two stations are not Hr sh to enable 
us to determine either the direction iu which an atmospheric disturbance 
is propagated or the rate of propagation. It is only on the improbable 
supposition that all such disturbances travel in a direct line from Oxford 
to Kew that barographs at these two places might be deemed enough. In 
order to obtain the greatest amount of information which such instruments 
are capable of affording, it is evidently necessary to multiply our stations 
and to distribute them judiciously over the surface of the country. Nor is 
it desirable to confine ourselves to one meteorological element, but the 
barograph should be accompanied by a thermograph and a self-registering 
anemometer. As this is the system about to be pursued by the Board of 
Trade in their chief meteorological stations in the British Isles, we may 
reasonably hope that before long we may by this means receive a large 
accession to our knowledge of the laws which regulate atmospheric dis- 
turbances. 


IY. “On the Lunar-diurnal Variation of the Magnetic Declination, 
with special regard to the Moon’s Declination.” By G. Nev- 
MAYER. Communicated by the President. Received March 11, 
1867. 

(Abstract.) — 

The hourly records of the magnetic declination systematically kept at 
the Flagstaff Observatory at Meluatene Victoria, during the period from 
the Ist of May 1858 to the 28th of February 1863, have been discussed 
by the author, with a view to determine the lunar-diurnal variation to which 
that magnetic element is subject. The results arrived at in the course of 
this discussion elicit, he believes, facts hitherto unnoticed, to which it 
seems desirable that the attention of scientific men should be directed. 


1867. | of the Magnetic Declination. 415 


The process employed in reducing the observations was identical with 
that generally adopted in such cases. The disturbed observations were 
first eliminated, by rejecting all that differed from the final normal belong- 
ing to the same solar hour by more than a certain separating value, which 
was taken at 3°61 minutes of arc. The elimination of the larger disturb- 
ances having been thus effected, from every remaining reading (R) of the 
magnet’s direction the final normal (N) belonging to that solar hour was 
subtracted, so that the residue R—N is devoid of the influence of the solar- 
diurnal variation. This residue is positive when the north end of the 
needle is to the east of its mean position, and negative in the contrary case. 
The number of observations at command amounted to 38,194, of which 
4178 single observations were excluded from the discussion as bemg beyond 
the assumed limit used for separating the greater magnetic disturbances, 
leaving 34,016 available for the purpose of determining the lunar-diurnal 
variation. 

The treatment of the residues with a view to classification according to 
lunar hours presented no particular novelty. It may be mentioned, how- 
ever, that before entering on any general discussion, every month’s result 
was calculated separately. The values for the various months were after- 
wards arranged, irrespectively of the year, in two groups, viz. Sun South 
(October to March) and Sun North (April to September). Thus the mean 
lunar-diurnal variation was obtained separately for each half of the year, as 
well as for the whole year. On examining the results, irregularities in the 
lunar-diurnal variation presented themselves which seemed to show that 
that variation depended in some degree on the moon’s position with refer- 
ence to the equator, on the circumstance whether her declination were 
north or south. 

Accordingly the whole series of observations were rearranged in groups, 
“Declination of the Moon South ” and “ Declination of the Moon North,” 
so as to cause her declination to be divided between the hours of the day, 
all those days being rejected on which the moon was close to the equator. 
The 118 groups of lunar-diurnal variation thus formed were subsequently 
classified according to whether the sun’s declination was south or north. 

A Table was thus formed giving for each lunar hour the lunar-diurnal 
variation of the magnetic declination separately under each of nine condi- 
tions formed by combining each of the three conditions, Sun South and 
North, Sun South, Sun North, with each of the three Moon South and 
North, Moon South, Moon North. The results given numerically in the 
Table were also laid down graphically in curves. 

A glance at the curves shows that the lunar-diurnal variation must be 
regarded as being influenced by both the sun and the moon; for it is seen 
that in case the declinations of the two bodies are of the same name, the 
curves show greater regularity than in the contrary case. 

The question whether during the winter season any lunar-diurnal varia- 
tion can be traced at all can, the author conceives, no longer be entertained 


416 Lunar-diurnal Variation of the Magnetic Declination. [March 28, 


if we pay due attention to the facts which may be gleaned from the Table. 
Indeed it is afterwards shown, in discussing the individual years of observa- 
tion, that in some cases the lunar-diurnal variation manifests.itself in a very 
striking manner during the winter months. 

On examining the results of the inquiry for the several years of observa- 
tion, obvious differences are recognized on comparison. This was espe- 
cially remarkable as regards the year 1861, which was the more striking as 
the, year 1860 did not exhibit any such extraordinary deviations from the 
mean values. At first some error was suspected in the deduction of the 
results; but a perfectly independent and fresh discussion gave results 
agreeing in the main points with those previously arrived at. 

In the course of the year 1861 the instruments previously in use were 
replaced by fresh ones obtained from Munich, which came into use for re- 
gular registration at the beginning of June. Though every care was taken 
to ensure uniformity of registration, it was deemed satisfactory to repeat the 
discussion, including that part only of 1861 in which the old instruments 
were employed; and accordingly the lunar-diurnal variation was discussed, 
with special regard to the moon’s declination, for the year May 1860 to 
April 1861, and likewise for the year May 1858 to April 1859 ; but it was 
still found that towards the latter part of the former period the anomalies 
above pointed out made themselves clearly felt. 

‘The results for the years 1860 and 1861. were given numerically in a 
special Table, and delineated in curves. 

In conclusion, the author expressed a hope that the few facts he had 
brought forward might operate as an inducement to those who are engaged 
in similar pursuits, to enter upon such a laborious task as that of classifying 
magnetic observations for the purpose of examining into the law and nature 
of the lunar-diurnal variation, according to the moon’s position north or 
south of the equator. 


4 


1367.1 Mr. F. A. Abel on the Stability of Gun-cotton. 417 


April 4, 1867. 
Lieutenant-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “ Researches on Gun-cotton.—Second Memoir. On the Stability 
of Gun-cotton.” By F. A. Asst, F.R.S., V.P.C.S. Received 
March 9, 1867. 

(Abstract.) 

The results of the many observations which had been instituted prior 
to 1860 upon the behaviour of gun-cotton when exposed to diffused or 
strong daylight, or to heat, although they agree generally with those of 
the most recent investigations on the subject, as far as relates to the nature 
of the products obtained at different stages of its decomposition, cannot be 
regarded as having a direct bearing upon the question of the stability of 
gun-cotton produced by strictly pursuing the system of manufacture 
prescribed by von Lenk, inasmuch as it has been shown that the products 
formerly experimented upon by different chemists varied very considerably 
in composition. 

The investigations recently published by Pélouze and Maury*, into the 
composition of gun-cotton, and the influence exerted by light and heat upon 
its stability, are described as having been conducted with gun-cotton pre- 
pared according to von Lenk’s system. The general conclusion arrived at by 
those chemists with reference to the latter branch of the subject was to the 
effect that the material is susceptible of spontaneous decomposition, under 
conditions which may possibly be fulfilled in its storage and application to 
technical and warlike purposes ; and the inference is drawn, partly from the 
results of earlier investigators, and partly from the exceptional behaviour of 
one or two specimens, that gun-cotton is liable to explode spontaneously at 
very low temperatures when stored in considerable quantities. 

It has been shown, in the memoir on the Manufacture and Composition 
of Gun-cotton, published last year+, that modifications in the processes of 
conversion and purifig¢ation, which appear at first sight of very trifling 
nature, exert most important influences upon the composition and purity of 
the product. Gun-cotton of quite exceptional character has been discovered, 
in several instances, amoug samples received from Hirtenberg and among 
the first supplies obtained from Stowmarket; other exceptional products 
have also been produced by purposely modifying, in several ways, the sys- 
tem of manufacture as pursued at Waltham Abbey. The very consider- 
able difference exhibited between some of these and the ordinary products 
in their behaviour under equal conditions of exposure to heat and light, 
affords good grounds for the belief that the attainment of certain excep- 
tional results, upon which the conclusions of Pélouze and Maury’s report, 


* Comptes Rendus. + Trans. Royal Society. 
VOL. Xv. 2N 


418 Mr. F. A. Abel on the Stability of Gun-cotton. —_ [April 4, 


condemnatory of gun-cotton, have been principally founded, are to be as- 
cribed to such variations in the nature of the material operated upon. 

Very numerous and extensive experiments and observations have been 
carried on during the last four years at Woolwich, both with small and large 
quantities of gun-cotton, for the purpose of completely investigating the . 
conditions by which the stability of this substance, when under the influ- 
ence of light and heat, may be modified, and with the view of ascertaining 
whether results recently arrived at in nas apply to gun-cotton as manu- 
factured in this country. 

The principal points which have been established by the results arrived 
at in these investigations may be summed up as follows :— 

1. Gun-cotton produced from properly purified cotton, according to the 
directions given by von Lenk, may be exposed to diffused daylight, either 
in the open air or in closed vessels, for very long periods without undergoing 
any change. The preservation of the material for 35 years pia those 
santiiens has been perfect. 

2. Long-continued exposure of the substance in a condition of alaane 
dryness to strong daylight and sunlight produces a very gradual change in 
gun-cotton of the description defined above; and therefore the statements 
' which have been published regarding the very rapid decomposition of 
gun-cotton when exposed to the sunlight do not apply to the nearly pure 
trinitrocellulose obtained by strictly following the system of manufacture 
now adopted. 

3. If gun-cotton in closed vessels is left for protracted periods exposed 
to strong daylight or sunlight in a damp or moist condition, it is affected 
to a somewhat greater extent; but even under these circumstances the 
change produced in the gun-cotton by several months’ exposure is of a very 
trifling nature. 

4. Gun-cotton which is exposed to sunlight until a faint acid reaction 
has®become developed, and is then immediately afterwards packed into 
boxes which are tightly closed, does not undergo any change during subse- 
quent storage for long periods. (The present experience on this head ex- 
tends over 33 years. “ 

5. Gun-cotton prepared and manged according to the prescribed system, 
and stored in the ordinary dry condition, does not furnish any indication of 
alteration, beyond the development, shortly after it is first packed, of a slight 
peculiar odour and the power of gradually imparting to litmus, when packed 
with it, a pinkish tinge. 

6. The influence exercised upon the stability of gun-cotton of average 
quality, as obtained by strict adherence to von Lenk’s system of manufac- 
ture, by prolonged exposure to temperatures considerably exceeding those 
which are experienced in tropical climates is very trifling in comparison 
with the results recently published by Continental experimenters relating to 
the effects of heat upon gun-cotton ; and it may be so perfectly counteracted 
by very simple means which in no way interfere with the essential qualities 


S 


1867. | Mr. F. A. Abel on the Stability of Gun-cotton. 419 


of the material, that the storage and transport of gun-cotton presents no 
greater danger, and is, uuder some circumstances, attended with much less 
risk of accident than is the case with gunpowder. 

7. Perfectly pure gun-cotton, or trinitrocellulose, resists to a remarkable 
extent the destructive effects of prolonged exposure to temperatures even 
approaching 100° C.; and the lower nitro- products of cellulose (soluble 
gun-cotton) are at any rate not more prone to alteration when pure. The 
incomplete conversion of cotton into the most explosive products does, 
therefore, not of necessity result in the production of a less perfectly per- 
fectly permanent compound than that obtained by the most perfect action 
of the acid mixture. 

8. But all ordinary products of manufacture contain small proportions of 
organic (nitrogenized) impurities of comparatively unstable properties, 
which have been formed by the action of nitric acid upon foreign matters 
retained by the cotton fibre, and which are not completely separated by the 
ordinary, or even a more searching process of purification. 

It is the presence of this class of impurity in gun-cotton which first gives 
rise to the development of free acid when the substance is exposed to the 
action of heat; and it is the acid thus generated which eventually exerts 
a destructive action upon the cellulose-products, and thus establishes de- 
composition which heat materially accelerates. If this small quantity of 
acid developed from the impurity in question be neutralized as it becomes 
nascent, no injurious action upon the gun-cotton results, and a great pro- 
moting cause of the decomposition of gun-cotton by heat is removed. This 
result is readily obtained by uniformly distributing through gun-cotton a 
small proportion of a carbonate,—the sodic carbonate, applied in the form 
of solution, being best adapted to this purpose*. 

9. The introduction into the finished gun-cotton of 1 per cent. of sodic 
carbonate affords to the material the power of resisting any serious change, 
even when exposed to such eleyated temperatures as would induce some 
decomposition in the perfectly pure cellulose-products. That proportion 
affords, therefore, security to gun-cotton against any destructive effects of 
the highest temperatures to which it is likely to be exposed even under very 
exceptional climatic conditions. The only influences which the addition of 
that amount of carbonate to gun-cotton might exert upon its properties as 
an explosive would consist in a trifling addition to the small amount of 
smoke attending its combustion, and ina slight retardation of its explosion, 
neither of which could be regarded as results detrimental to the probable 
value of the material. 

* The deposition of calcic and magnesian carbonates upon the fibre of gun-cotton, 
either by its long-continued immersion in flowing spring water, or by its subjection to 
the so-called ‘“silicating” process adopted by von Lenk, produces a similar protective 
effect, which, however, is necessarily very variable in its extent, as the amount of car- 
bonate thus introduced into a mass of gun-cotton is uncertain; moreover, as it is only 


loosely deposited between the fibres, the proportion is liable to be diminished by any 
manipulation to which the gun-cotton may be subjected. 


2N2 


420 Mr. F. A, Abel on the Stability of Gun-cotton. — [April 4, 


10. Water acts as a most perfect protection to gun-cotton (except when 
it is exposed for long periods to sunlight), even under extremely severe 
conditions of exposure to heat. An atmosphere saturated with aqueous 
vapour suffices to protect it from change at elevated temperatures ; and wet 
or damp gun-cotton may be exposed for long periods in confined spaces to 
100° C. without sustaining any change. 

Actual immersion in water is not necessary for the most perfect preserva- 
tion of gun-cotton ; the material, if only damp to. the touch, sustains not 
the smallest change, even if closely packed in large quantities. The organic 
impurities which doubtless give rise to the very slight development of acid 
observed when gun-cotton is closely packed in the dry condition, appear to 
be equally protected by the water; for damp or wet gun-cotton, which has 
been preserved for three years, has not exhibited the faintest acidity. If 
as much water as possible be expelled from wet gun-cotton by the centri- 
fugal extractor, it is obtained in a condition in which, though only damp 
to the touch, it is perfectly non-explosive ; the water thus left in the mate- 
rial is sufficient to act as a perfect protection, and consequently also to 
guard against all risk of accident. It is therefore in this condition that 
all reserved stores of the substance should be preserved, or that it should 
be transported in large quantities to very distant places. If the proper 
proportion of sodic carbonate be dissolved in the water with which the 
gun-cotton is originally saturated for the purpose of obtaining it in this 
non-explosive form, the material, whenever it is dried for conversion into 
cartridges, or employment in other ways, will contain the alkaline matter 
required for its safe storage and use in the dry condition in all climates. 


Although some experiments, bearing upon the diiferent branches of in- 
quiry included in this memoir, are still in progress with a view to the 
attainment of additional knowledge of the conditions which regulate the 
stability of gun-cotton, it is contidently believed that the results arrived at 
amply demonstrate that the objections which have been of late revived, 
especially in France, against the employment of gun-cotton, on the ground of 
its instability, apply only in a comparatively slight degree to the material 
produced by strictly pursuing the system of manufacture perfected by von 
Lenk—that, as far as they do exist, they have been definitely traced to certain 
difficulties in the manufacture of pure gun-cotton which further experi- 
mental research may, and most probably will, overcome—but that, in the 
meantime, these objections are entirely set aside by the adoption of two 
very simple measures, against the employment of which no practical diffi- 
eulties can be raised, and which there is every reason to believe must secure 
for this material the perfect confidence of those who desire to avail them- 
selves of the special advantages which it presents as an explosive agent. 

The nature of the decomposition of gun-cotton when exploded under 
different conditions is now under investigation by me; and the results 
arrived at will, I trust, be communicated before long to the Royal Society. 


1867.] Observations of Temperature during two Eclipses. 421 


II. “Observations of Temperature during two Eclipses of the Sun (in 
1858 and 1867).” By Joun Puituirs, M.A., LL.D., D.C.L., 
F.R.S., Professor of Geology in the University of Oxford. Re- 
ceived April 3, 1867. 


On the 15th of March 1858, occurred an annular eclipse of the sun, whose 
central line of shadow passed near the village of Steepie Aston, a few miles 
north of Oxford. Ample preparations were made for observing it by resi- 
dents in Oxford, and they were met on the ground by many persons from 
a distance; Mr. Lassell being one of the party, there was no lack of tele- 
scopic power. The day was unfavourable—cold and cloudy, with some 
occasional feeble and delusive gleams, scarcely permitting a sight of the 
progress of the eclipse, which, however, was obvious enough by the grow- 
ing and diminishing darkness. Under these circumstances I devoted my 
principal attention to three thermometers, carefully selected and compared 
beforehand—one mercurial with blackened bulb, another mercurial with 
clear bulb (these were placed in an open space exposed to the sun); the third, 
a minimum- spirit thermometer, tint red, was placed in a shaded situation. 
The observations began at 11° 30™ and lasted till 2" 30™, thus including 
the whole period of the eclipse, which began at 11" 35™, reached the maxi- 
mum of obscuration at 0° 54™, and ended at 2"11™. The apparent semi- 
diameters of the sun and moon were so nearly equal that the eclipse was 


almost total ( 997 


1000 5)" The observations were recorded as follows :— 


Clear Dark 
thermo- | thermo- 
meter in | meter in 

sun. sun. 


Thermo- 
Hour. | meter in 
shade. 


Remarks. 


fo) [o) fe) 
11 30 49:0 516 58:0 | Gleams. 
35 | Beginning of eclipse. 
45 49:0 50:0 55:0 | Gleams. 
12,0 48°5 49-5 54:5 
15 48°5 49:0 52:0 
30 43:1 485 50°0 
45 48:1 48°5 49-2 
54 | This was the moment of greatest obscuration. 
Line 47-5 475 47-5 | Lowest temperature. 
15 475 475 48:0 
| 30 | 476 | 480 | 488 
45 48:0 49-4 51:0 
| 20 | 483 | 498 | 517 
11 | End of eclipse. 
15 49 0 50:5 53:1 | Rain began. 
30 48:0 49-5 51-2 | Rain continued. 


Mean ...| 48:3 496 51:5 


Max. ...|. 49:0 51:6 58:0 
Min. ...| 47°53 47-5 476 


Range ... 15 4-1 10-4 


422 Prof. Phillips’s Observations of Temperature [April 4, 


During the late partial eclipse of the sun on the 6th of March 1867, 
observations of the ingress of the moon were favoured at Oxford by bril- 
liant weather ; within five minutes after the moment of maximum obscura- 


tion ( i) clouds appeared ; and from this time till the end of the eclipse 


they never wholly disappeared, but did not prevent the progress of the 
moon and the degrees of obscuration from being correctly marked. At 
the very end it was only just possible to observe the egress by a momentary — 
attenuation of the clouds; the remainder of the day was cold, cloudy, and 
finally snowy. The observations began at 8> and ended at 10° 50™, thus 
including the whole period of the eclipse, which began at 8" 12™ 15%, reached 
the greatest obscuration at 9" 26", and ceased at 10° 45™ 8°. At the mo- 
ment of greatest obscuration the light-giving area was reduced to one-third 
of the solar disk. | 

The observations comprised— 

Q) Temperature in the shade, by the mean of one mercurial and one 
spirit thermometer very nearly agreeing throughout. 

(2) Temperature in the sunlight, by a clear mercurial bulb. 

(3) Temperature in the sunlight, by a dark mercurial bulb. 

(4) Temperature in the sunlight, by a dark mercurial bulb enclosed in 
a glass tube exhausted of air. 

The observations were recorded at intervals according to convenience 
(3™ to 20™), the shorter intervals being purposely chosen about the time of 
maximum obscuration. The results are in the following Table :— 


Dark 
Thermo-| Clear Dark lb in 


Hour. | meter in} bulb in | bulb in Remarks. 


| shade. sun. sun. es 
h m ° je) fe} te) 
8 0 35'5 39°5 41:0 540 [Sky always clear till the 
12 | Beginning of eclipse. middle of the eclipse. 


25 36°2 44-0 48:0 58'8 
45 36'7 44-0 46°5 57°8 
9 O 36°7 43:6 46°5 52:0 
18 36'7 41:5 43:0 46°5 
25 36°7 40°5 43:0 43°5 
26 | This was the moment of greatest obscuration. 
32 36°7 41°5 43°2 42-9 |Clouds gathered at 95 


35 36°7 38:0 38:0 41-0 30™ and continued 
| HO) wilwersce he: 40:0 40°5 42-0 to the end of the 
LODO! Beye. cas 40:0 41:0 43°3 eclipse. 

15 ah 42°5 44-5 46'8 . 

35 ALT 44-0 49-9 


50 | 388 | 420 | 430 | 50:0 

Mean...|. 372 | 415 | 432 | 48-4 
Max....| 388 |. 440 | 480 | 588. 
Min....| 355 | 380 | 380 | 41-0 

| Range.| 33 | 60 | 100 | 178. | 


YE) BAIS (* : 
| 


| | a “L981 | | S 
eon : : 


00h — 


x‘ 
x 
“ 
B S Se 
XN 


i Kpnats A. SEONG SS | 


EN ems 


% % I 


XT WAX 19N 908 Koy 9047 


1867.]  auring two Eclipses of the Sun (in 1858 and 1867). 423 


On considering the columns of figures with attention, it will be perceived 
that on each occasion all the thermometers in the sunshine sank as the 
eclipse advanced, so as to reach the greatest depression not at, but after the 
epoch of greatest obscuration, and from this point rose again as the obscu- 
ration diminished, but in neither case arrived at the same elevation as in 
the beginning of the eclipse. In each case the eclipse began with fair 
prospects, but was followed by rain or snow. 

In the annular (almost total) eclipse three thermometers, two in the 
sunshine and one in the shade, reached the very same point (47°°5), that 
being the lowest observed ; in the partial eclipse, three thermometers cor- 
fe pandine to the above reached nearly the same point (36°°7, 38°, 38°), 

the lowest observed. The lowest point was not reached on either occasion by 

these instruments till some minutes after the moment of greatest obscura- 
tion (6 minutes in the annular and 9 minutes in the partial eclipse) ; while 
the thermometer enclosed in a tube did not sink below 41° at the same time. 
The later occurrence of the extreme depression in the partial eclipse was 
occasioned by the additioual cooling influence of the clouds which gathered 
five minutes after the epoch of greatest obscuration. 

By representing the observations in curves with ordinates proportioned 
to the depressions at the successive epochs, the circumstances which have 
been referred to are clearly seen,—the convergence of all the lines beyond 
the time-point of greatest obscuration—the exactitude of this convergence 
in the uniformly clouded sky of 1858, and the comparative confusion of 
the lines in the suddenly altered sky of 1867, where the effect of the access 
of cloud is 1°-9 on the enclosed thermometer, 3°°5 on the clear exposed 
bulb, and 5°2 on the black exposed bulb (see Plate IX.). 

The effect of the cloud on the instruments employed in the latter half of 
the eclipse is to reduce the temperatures at the end of the eclipse, as com- 
pared with the beginning, more than 8° in the enclosed thermometer, 5° in 
the dark-bulb exposed, and 2° in the clear-bulb ; but in the shaded instru- 
ments the effect is contrary, for they gained 2°°6 between beginning and end. 

Finally, if the areas of obscuration be calculated for the several epochs of 
observation (in 1867), and the proportions be represented by a curve 
adapted to the scale used for temperature, the fact of the postponement of 
the radiation-effect will appear, as well as the conformity with which the 
temperatures follow the curve, in the bright half of the eclipse, and fall 
away from it, but still proportionately, in the clouded half. 


REFERENCE TO PLATE IX. 


In the diagram for 1858, the temperatures observed at the several epochs are marked 
by the crossing of the lines SS for shade, W W for clear bulb, and B B for black bulb. 
The central time of the eclipse is marked CC. 

In that for 1867, similar letters mark similar observations; and, in addition, V V 
shows the temperatures of the black bulb zz vacuo, and O O the curve of relative oheau- 
ration at the several epochs of observed SSL LE. 


424 Mr. A. Claudet on Binocular Vision. [April 11, 


April 11, 1867. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Caair. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “A new fact relating to Binocular Vision.” By A. Ciauper, 
F.R.S. Received March 20, 1867. 


The persistence of the impression made by light on the retina is demon- 
strated by many experiments; but one of the most convincing, which is also 
very easy to try, is that which is known under the name of the thaumatrope. 

Let us write the letters composing a word of eight letters, say “‘ Victoria,” 
on the two sides of a small card, in such a manner that one surface shall 
contain the Ist, 3rd, 5th, and 7th letters, and the other surface the 2nd, 
Ath, 6th, and 8th, with a space between them sufficient to complete the 
word on each surface, which blank spaces are in fact to appear filled up 
during the experiment by an artificial means to be explained. 

Fig. 1 shows the arrangement on the two sides of the card (section view). 


Fig. 2 shows the plan of the card. The white letters are those written 
on one surface, and the dotted lines those written on the other. 


Now by means of two strings fixed on the two sides A, B the card may 
be made to revolve on its axis by turning the string between the thumb 
and finger of each hand. By this means a very rapid motion may be com- 
municated to the card, and while it is revolving both surfaces are alter- 
nately seen in quick succession, and the perception of the two is so simulta- 
neous that the two sets of letters appear as one, and the whole word is read 
as distinctly as if it were written on one surface only. 

This is easily explained. It is known that the persisting action of light 
on the retina has a duration of about one-eighth of a second; so that if 
the card makes at least eight revolutions in a second (it may make consi- 
derably more), before one impression has vanished another produces its 
effect on the next part of the retina, in such a way that they are intermixed 
and simultaneously visible, producing an uninterrupted sensation. 


1867.] Mr. A. Claudet on Binoeular Vision. 425 


The means by which this illusion is produced has been called the “ thau- 
matrope,” from two Greek words meaning “wonder”? and “turn.” It 
is difficult to trace the history of this discovery ; but it is certain that it 
las been the result of a very old, simple, and well-known experiment. 

From time immemorial schoolboys have amused themselves by holding a 
coin between two pins and making it revolve rapidly by blowing upon it, 
when to their surprise the coin showed the head mixed with the device on the 
other side. I have been told that as Sir John Herschel was one day making 
this experiment to amuse his children, in the presence of the late Dr. Paris, 
this gentleman was struck with the idea that if, instead of a coin, a white 
card was employed on each side of which one part of a design was properly 
arranged, the two might complete the subject during the revolution. Ac- 
cordingly he made ‘the experiment, which succeeded perfectly well. If the 
story is true, certainly Dr. Paris may be regarded as the inventor of the 
thaumatrope, which he has so well and so fully elucidated in his very in- 
teresting and instructive work entitled ‘ Philosophy in Sport made Science 
in earnest.’ 

This philosophical toy may be employed to show another effect of the 
persistence of the retinal image. If complementary colours are fixed on 
the two opposite sides of the card, they will become superposed during the 
revolution, and white light will be the result. By the same means, other 
curious effects of the mixture of various colours might be tried. 

All these experiments present no difference, whether they are made look- 
ing with the two eyes or only with a single eye: the effect is the same in 
both cases. Therefore the illusion is equally monocular and binocular. 

But I was not a little surprised to find that the thaumatrope is capable 
of producing another phenomenon, elucidating very forcibly the principies 
by which binocular vision is the only real and effective means of showing 
the distances of objects, which are determined by the degree of the angle 
of convergence of the optic axes and by one of its corollaries, the sensation 
of double images for all the poimts which are not exactly on the plane of 
vision. 

The thaumatrope is capable of showing that binocular vision can detect 
to a degree hardly conceivable the most minute difference in the distances 
of objects, such as the distance between the planes of the two surfaces of 
a card, which distance is nothing more than the thickness of the card. 
Therefore, supposing that the thickness of the card is <1; of an inch and the 
distance from the eyes 15 in, there is not a difference greater than the saoy 
part of the whole distance from the eves to the two planes of the card; and 
still the difference of the degree of convergence for two planes so near each 
other is sufficient to excite the action of binocular vision, and by it to enable 
us to detect that infinitesimal difference in their distances. But that such 
an effect of binocular vision could possibly be displayed while looking at 
two planes so nearly intermixed as the surfaces of a card revolving upon 
its axis with such a. wonderful velocity is the very extraordinary pheno- 


426 Mr. A. Claudet on Binocular Vision. [April 11, 


menon I have discovered, and which I am about to describe and endeavour 
to explain. 
If the thickness of the card is A B, fig. 3, and if the two ends of each 


Fig. 3. 


string, passing through the holes C and D inthe card, are brought together 
and turned between the thumb and finger, the card will whirl exactly on 
its axis, and during the revolution the two surfaces A and B will be at the 
same distance from the eyes. 

But if the two strings are drawn so that one of tiie knots is as in fig. 4, 


Fig. 4. 


the surface B will revolve round the plane of the surface A corresponding 
with the axis of the string, and, during the revolution, every time that it is 
made visible to the eyes it will appear as if it were nearer than the sur- 
face A. 

By reversing the position of the knots, as in fig. 5, instead of the surface 


Fig. 5. 


B revolving round the plane of A, it will be A that will revolve round the 
plane of B. 

These three different positions of the strings will produce three different 
effects. 

In the position of fig. 3 the effect will be normal ; that is to say, the two 
surfaces coming alternately at the same distance, we shall see the whole 
word as if the letters were on the same surface. 

In the position of figs. 4 and 5 we have a very strange illusion. One 
half of the letters composing the word will appear before or behind the 
other half, according to the surface upon which they are written and the 
position of the knots upon that or the other surface. 

In fig. 4 the letters written on the surface B will appear before the letters 
on the surface A; and in fig. 5 the letters on the surface. A will appear 
before the letters on the surface B. 

The cause of the anomaly resulting from the two different experiments 
is entirely and positively due toa sensation of binocular vision ; and we may 


1867. | Mr. A. Claudet on Binocular Vision. 427 


easily satisfy ourselves that it is so; for, looking with a single eye in both 
cases, all the letters appear on the same plane, notwithstanding the differ- 
ent distances of the two surfaces given by the position of the knots: and 
we may add another convincing proof, which is that the pseudoscope in- 
verts the distances of the surfaces. 

At first it is rather difficult to understand how the phenomenon can take 
place; for as the perception of the two surfaces is simultaneous, how is it 
possible that during such a rapid revolution the optic axes can be made 
to converge alternately on each surface while it is passing so quickly, and 
that they should be made suddenly to converge on the other in its turn ? 

However, there cannot be any question that in reality the phenomenon 
takes place, and that it is decidedly an effect of binocular vision; therefore 
it only remains to be explained how it can be produced. In endeavouring 
to arrive at the true cause of the phenomenon, we shall have to bring to 
mind various physiological sensations which concur in producing the effect. 
One is the effort we make to obtain distinct vision, and the other the 
effort we make to obtain single vision. ‘These two efforts act in unison; 
for it is impossible not to admit that the two muscular processes by which 
both the angle of convergence is directed to the object and the focus of 
the eyes is adapted to its distance, for the double purpose of having at 
once single and distinct vision of every object, are two actions neces- 
sarily simultaneous and inseparably connected. They are therefore both, 
each in its way, criteria of the distances of objects; but they give rise to 
certain indirect and additional criteria for other distances, in two ways: one, 
the most important, is the double images of the objects situated before and 
behind the point of convergence; and the other, but only in a subsidiary 
way, the degree of confusion of the objects situated before and behind the 
point of convergence and which are not in focus. 

The comparison of two points, one of which is in focus and well defined, and 
the other out of focus and confused, helps considerably in forming a judgment 
that they are on different planes. But ina question of binocular vision, per- 
haps we ought not strictly to take into account this last criterion, which be- 
longs equally to monocular and binocular vision ; and if we allude to it, it 
is only because, although it does not produce the real stereoscopic effect, still 
it contributes to give that sort of illusion of relief which by various means 
may be evinced by monocular vision. ‘Therefore it is particularly the sen- 
sation of double images, the degree of their separation, and their respective 
positions either outside or inside from the centres of the two retinge, which 
indicate more powerfully the exact distance of the object from the point 
of single vision either before or behind. 

When we look fixedly on a point of one surface of the revolving card, 
that point appears single, and we see at the same time another point on 
the other surface which appears double, although we hardly feel that we 
notice its doubleness; and from the position or distribution of the double 
images, either on the right or on the left of the central poiut, we have at 


428 Mr. A. Claudet on Binccular Vision. [April 11, 


the same glance the perception of the respective distances. Therefore, to 
judge of the distances of certain objects in the direction of the line of vision, 
we are not absolutely obliged to alter constantly the angle of convergence. 
This is proved by our perception of the two distances of the surfaces of the 
card while it is revolving ; for it would be impossible that we should alter 
the angle of convergence to adapt it alternately to the two surfaces iy 
they are turning so rapidly. 

The same angle of convergence kept on one or the other surface is no 
impediment to our seeing both in a sufficiently distinct manner. 

The whole phenomenon may be better understood by the illustration 
given in fig. 6. 


Fig. 6. 


When we converge the optic axes on B, this point, being represented 
on the centre of both retine at B’ B", is single, but A being nearer is re- 
presented on the left of the centre of the left retina at A’, and on the right 
of the centre of the right retina at A"; therefore it appears double. 

For the same reason, converging on A, this point is single, but 
B is double, with this difference—that one image is on the right of 
the left retina, and the other on the left of the right retina; so that 

the double images of nearer objects situated at A are represented out- 
side the centres of the two retinee, and those of further objects situated at 
B are represented inside the centres of the retinee, and each of these two 
different sensations brings to our mind the perception of the distance 
which has produced it. During the revolution of the card we may ~ 
adapt the convergence either to one or to the other surface and keep it so; 
but in every case the letters on that surface will appear single and a little 
better defined; and this, with the sensation of double images of the letters 
on the other surface, will be an indication of their respective distances. 

As Iam not aware that the illusion I have described in this paper has 
ever been noticed before, it has appeared to me that. its publication would 
excite the interest of all those who look for any new fact capable of illus- 
trating the principles of binocular vision, and showing the wonderful pro- 


1867. ] On the Numerical Value of Kuler’s Constant. 429 


perty of the angle of convergence, by which the most minute differences 
in the distances of objects and the slightest relief on their surfaces can be 
detected, and by which also in the abnormal conversion introduced in its 
action by the pseudoscope all our sensations are reversed. ‘Therefore the 
pseudoscope is the great test of the phenomena of binocular vision ; for 
by reversing certain sensations which by constant habit we may hardly 
notice, it renders them more conspicuous by the comparison of the abnor- 
mal state brought out by its action, and proves the theory of binocular 
vision in the most effective manner. 

A truth is never better established than when it can be shown that the 
same principles are capable of producing contrary effects when they are 
applied in a contrary way. 

Professor Wheatstone, by adding the pseudoscope to the stereoscope, has 
thus in the most scientific and ingenious manner completed his splendid 
discovery, and left very little (we might almost venture to say that he has 
left nothing) for further investigations in the physiology of binocular 
vision. 


II. “ On the Calculation of the Numerical Value of Euler’s Constant, 
which Professor Price, of Oxford, calls E.’ By Wuti1am 
SHANKS, Hsq., Houghton-le-Spring, Durham. Communicated 
by the Rev. B. Price, F.R.S. Received March 28, 1867. 


In the year 1853 Dr. Rutherford, of the Royal Military Academy, Wool- 
wich, sent a paper on the Computation of the value of 7 to the Royal 
Society, and the paper was published in the ‘ Proceedings’ of that learned 
body*. The value of 7 is there given to 607 decimals, the first 440 being 
the joint production of Dr. Rutherford and the author of this paper, and 
the remaining 167 decimals having been calculated by the present writer, 
for the accuracy of which he alone is responsible. Subsequently, the 
Astronomer Royal, G. B. Airy, Esq., kindly presented the author’s paper 
on the Calculation of the value of e, the base of Napier’s logarithms, to 
upwards of 200 decimals ; the aforesaid paper also contained the Napierian 
logarithms of 2, 3, and 5, as well as the modulus of the common system, 
all to upwards of 200 places of decimals. This paper was not, however, 
published, but deposited in the Archives of the Royal Society ; but an abs- 
tract, containing the numerical results, was printed in the ‘ Proceedings’. 
In a paper sent by the author to the Astronomer Royal, and forwarded by 
him to the Royal Society, will, the author believes, be found the reciprocal 
of the prime number 17389, consisting of a circulating period of no less 
than 17388 decimals, the largest on record. Some few remarks are also 
given touching circulates generally, and the easiest modes of obtaining them. 
The writer now desires to supplement what he then did, by giving the 


* Vol. vi. p. 273. t Vol. vi. p, 397. 


430 Mr. W. Shanks on the Calculation of [April 11, 


numerical value of Huler’s constant, which is largely employed in “ Infi- © 
nitesimal Calculus,’ to a greater extent than has hitherto been found, and 
free from error. 

In Crelle’s Journal for 1860, vol. lx. p. 375, M. Oettinger has contri- 
buted an article on Kuler’s constant, and especially on “ certain discre- 
pancies”’ in the value given by former mathematical writers. Adopting 
the formula there employed, as being well adapted for the purpose, the 
writer of this paper has both corrected and extended what has been pre- 
viously done; and as very great care has been bestowed upon the calcu- 
lations, so as to exclude error, he confidently believes that his results are, 
as far as they go, absolutely correct. He may remark that, since the 
separate values of in the formula (which, see below) produce identical 
results as far as they go, and the higher the value of » the more nearly 
we can approximate to the value of the constant, we thus have sufficient 
proof afforded of the correctness of the value found when 7 is 10, 20, 50, 
or 100. If the writer can command sufficient leisure, he may resume the 
calculation by and by, and, making 7 1000, he may thus verify, as well as 
extend, the value of Euler’s constant given in this paper. The numbers 
10, 20, 50, 100, 200, and 1000, especially 10 and its integral powers, are 
more easily handled than others, particularly in those terms of the formula 
which contain Bernoulli’s numbers. The harmonic progression is here 
“summed” much further than was requisite for finding E to 50 or 55 de- 
‘cimals ; but this was of some importance in ensuring correctness in the 
decimal expression of each of the higher terms of 8,,, and S,,,. It may 
be observed that the numbers of decimal places in E, obtained from n being 


10, 20, 50, 100, and 200, are nearly proportional to 10°, 203, 503, 1003 


and 2002—a rather curious coincidence. 
The formula for Euler’s constant, employed by M. Oettinger, as above 
stated, is— 
1 B B. oe Beeb 
Constant =Sn—login—5 + aos —qat én? Bins +....&c., where 


Sna=14+3+34+ 74+1+4+.. =, and B,, B,, B,, &c. are Bernoulli’s numbers. 


14 3+44.... p= 2928968253 


122414)... .2;=359773 96571 43681 91148 37690 68908 388779 38367 
10245 37897 60291 30827 89243 77995 58542 59259 | 
83201 52499 71906 381865 55446 61736 61220 10084 


858388 20720 04363 026038 48526 602. 


1434....... 3 =3'81595 81777 53506 86913 48136 76474 73449 06181 
89635 55401 83780 86220 32609 11027 77063 20242 
32778 03544 32662 95332 52228 09675 62970 52433 
81377 45056 57669 24455 54624 85197 30818 82894 
77830 46585 03877 77968 87905 92007 71409 68243 
+ (circulating period consists of 1584 decimal places). 


1867. ] the Numerical Value of Euler’s Constant. 4:31 


T+i+.......), =4:49920 53383 29425 05756 04717 92964 76909 19706 
01823 96745 38296 58902 43217 68318 06557 86735 
78157 82663 88484 12900 97472 82033 55398 82042 

63084 20093 94581 03200 90115 18091 15572 24477 

64889 95794 59834 14243 62248 23530 45299 19591 

+ (circulating period consists of 1,275,120 decimal places). 


1444 qtp =O 873aT 75176 39620 26080 51176 75658 25315 79089 
72126 70845 16531 76533 95658 72195 57532 55049 
66056 87768 92312 04135 49921 06986 97779 79182 
73403 18617 00828 94825 42444 49096 57618 56974 
16326 13467 07313 21114 47132 49733 09103 51089 
+ (circulating period consists of 39,419,059,680 decimal 
places). 
1444...... og =0'87803 09481 21444 47605 73863 97130 86163 68374 
00246 53027 30844 64971 94472 28783 30029 84018 
15499 64301 86679 89238 37326 83211 85439 05911 
76542 77855 27568 86559 30203 06049 25715 75389 
92954 75748 47845 75246 64079 54805 61627 08837 
+ (circulating period consists of 
2,498,236, 128,143,832,017,541,600 decimal places). 
The following value of Euler’s constant has been found from the re- 
spective sums given above, of the 10, 20, 50, 100, and 200 first terms of 


the Harmonic Progression :— 
B 
E or Kul. const.= 57721 56649 01532 86060 6 (Iast term employed is— gr iq): 


B 
E=°57721 56649 01532 86060 65120 900 (last term is — 24.20%): 


E=°57721 56649 01532 86060 65120 90082 40243 1042 (last 


term is-++ sate ar 


EK='57721 56649 01532 86060 65120 90082 40243 10421 
‘ : ote Bi | 

59335 9 (last term is 34.100%)" 
H='57721 56649 01532 86060 65120 90082 40243 1042] 59335 


B, 
93995 35989 (ast term is-++ 565 56.5005)" 


Certainly 50 decimals are correct, and probably 55, in the value last 


given. 
March 2, 1867. 


Supplementary Paper to that of March 2, 1867, “On the Calculation of 
the Numerical Value of Euler’s Constant.” By Witi1am Suanks, 
Hsq., Houghton-le-Spring, Durham. Received April 9, 1867. 
When n=500, we have : 

144344..... 7§7=6°79282 34299 90524 60298 92871 45367 97369 48198 


13814 39680 91166 43088 89685 43566 23790 55049 
24576 49403 73586 56039+ 


432 On the Numerical Value of Euler’s Constant. [April 11, 


E=-57721 56849 01532 86060 65120 90082 40243 10421 
59335 93993 35988 05771 63865 48677 (last “as 


og Lee 
98.5002)" 


- When »=1000, we have. 


142414. .43,=7-48547 08605 50344 91265 65182 04833 90017 65216 
79169 70883 36657 73626 74995 76993 49165 20244 


09599 34437 41184 50815+ 
E=‘57721 56649 01532 86060 65120 90082 40245 10421 


593835 93995 35988 05772 02455 61942 00508 15825 
i bsae 
(last term + ee 


Hence we see that 54 decimal places are correct in the value of E (x being 
200) last given in the paper dated March 2, 1867,—also that 59 decimals 
are correct in the value of E when »=500. When x=1000, probably 65 
decimals in the value of E are correct. 


B 
When n=1, we readily find E=-57 (last term —+). 


» =2, - H="577/21 (last term sh); 
8.2 
3 ae B 
» =dI; 99 B=°57721 56649 015 (Inst term +3545) 
When 2= 1, E consists of 2 decimals. 
ry) = 10, 99 21 decimals. 
ee $3 46 decimals. 
sci == O00, ie 65 decimals, probably. 
i Ds Or ess ee 5 decimals. 
9 20, 3 28 decimals. 
>» 200, ue 54 decimals. 
9 W119; 5, 13 decimals. 
Py 20, Be 39 decimals. 
% 500, se 59 decimals. 


From the above we may fairly infer that when 7 is increased in a geome- 
trical ratio, the corresponding number of decimals obtained in the value 
of E increases only in something like an arithmetical one, and that pro- 
bably from 50,000 to 100,000 terms in the Harmonic Progression would 
require to be summed in order to obtain 100 places of decimals in the value 
of E, Euler’s constant. 


1867.] Mr. H. C. Sorby on the Spectrum Microscope. 433 


III. “On a Definite Method of Qualitative Analysis of Animal and 
Vegetable Colouring-matters by means of the Spectrum Micro- 
scope.” By H.C. Sorsy, F.R.S., &. Received April 10, 1867. 


CONTENTS. 

PAGE PAGE 
1. History of the subject . . . . 433 | 15. Action of Sulphite of Soda . . 447 
2. Description of the Apparatus . 433 | 16. Groups A, B,andC .. . . 448 
3. Scale of Measurement . . . . 434 | 17. Reagentsused. . . . . . . 449 
4. Symbols used to describe Spectra 436 | 18. Separation of Colours into 
5. General Remarks on Absorp- GUOUPR CkC yy a ay Tact on au AO 

tion, &e. . . . . . . 438 | 19. Order of the Experiments. . . 450 

6. Methods of Research . . . . 439 | 20. Division into Sub-Groups. . . 451 
7. Preparation of Vegetable Colours 439 | 21. Individual Colours. . . . . 452 
8. Examination of the Colours . . 440 | 22. Mixed Colours . . fist EDO 
9. Reagentsused. . . . . . . 440 | 23. Spectra with no Absorption: 
10. Solvents. aaeell bands. . 5 6 a GS) 
iicnanot Acidsand Alkalies. . 441 | 24, Yellow Colours... .. ..-. . 454 
12. General Absorption. . . . . 441 | 25. FadingofGroupC. .. . . 455 
13. Fading of Solutions. . . . . 443 | 26. Conclusion. . . SF OO 
14. Absorption-bands ... . . 444 

1. Mistory. 


My attention was first directed to this subject by reading a report of 
Professor Stokes’s very excellent lecture at the Royal Institution, Friday, 
March 4th, 1864. It immediately occurred to me that a spectroscope 
might be combined with a microscope, and employed to distinguish coloured 
minerals in thin sections of recks and meteorites. I was soon led to exa- 
mine many other coloured substances, and found that the instrument is 
more useful in connexion with qualitative analysis, when only very small 
quantities of material can be obtained. At first I employed the imperfect 
apparatus described in my Paper in the ‘ Quarterly Journal of Science’ *, 
but afterwards, along with Mr. Browning, I constructed that described in 
my Paper in the ‘ Popular Science Review’ +. For general purposes I do 
not think this could be much improved; but for chemical testing it is 
much less fatiguing to use a binocular instrument. There were many 
difficulties to contend with, but at length I constructed one which tp 
pears to answer all the requirements of the case. 


2. Apparatus. 

I have an ordinary large binocular microscope, and use an object-glass 
of about three inches focal length, corrected for looking through glass an 
inch thick ; the lenses being at the top, so as to be as far as possible from 
the slit. This is placed at the focus, and between it and the lenses, at 
a distance of about half an inch from them, is a compound prism, composed 
of a rectangular prism of flint-glass, and two of crown-glass of about 61°, 
one at each end. This arrangement gives direct vision and a spectrum of 
the size most suitable for these inquiries, since a wide dispersion often 
makes the absorption-bands far too indistinct. In order to be able to 
compare two spectra side by side, a small rectangular prism is fixed over 

* April 1865, vol. ii. p. 198. T Vol. v. p. 66. 

VOL. XV. 2 0 


434 Mr. H.C. Sorby on Analysis of Animal and Vegetable | Apr. 11, 


half the slit, and with the acute angle parallel to and just passing be- 
yond it. This gives an admirable result, the only defect being that, 
when the spectra are in focus, their line of junction is some distance within 
it; and therefore to correct this I use a cylindrical lens of about two feet 
focal length, with its axis in the line of the slit, which can easily be fixed 
at such a distance between the slit and the prisms, as to bring the spectra 
and their line of contact to the same focus. In front of the slit, close to 
the small rectangular prism, is a stop with a circular opening, to shut 
out iateral light, and a small achromatic lens of about half an inch focal 
length, which gives a better field, and counteracts the effect of the concave 
surface of the liquid in the tubes used in the experiments, if they are not 
quite full. These are cut from barometer-tubes, having an internal diameter 
cf about one-seventh of an inch, and an external. diameter of about three- 
sevenths of an inch. They are made half an inch long, ground flat at each 
end, and fixed with Canada balsam on slips of glass two inches long and about 
six-tenths of an inch wide, so that the centre of the tube is about one-fourth 
of an inch from one edge. By this arrangement the liquid may be examined 
through the length of the tube by laying the slip of glass flat on the stage 
of the microscope, or through the side of the tube, by placing the slip 
vertical and the tube horizontal. Cells of this size can be turned upside 
down and deposits removed without any liquid being lost; and the upper 
surface of the liquid is sufficiently flat, even when inclined at a considerable 
angle. If requisite, small bits of thin glass can be laid on the top, which 
are held on by capillary attraction, or may be fastened with gold-size, if it 
be desirable to keep the solution for a longer time. When the depth of 
colour is too great in the line of the length of the cell, we can at once see 
what would be the effect of about one-fourth of the colour by turning it 
sideways; and thus we can save much time, and quickly ascertain what 
strength of solution would give the best result. Very frequently we ob- 
tain an excellent spectrum in one direction with one reagent, and in the 
other with another, without further trouble. I have constructed a small 
stage, too complicated to describe in writing, which enables me at once to 
examine solutions in two such tubes, either endways or sideways, and com- 
pare their spectra side by side, or to use test-tubes, or to fix the small 
apparatus which I have contrived for accurately measuring the spectra. 
This is of such great importance in these inquiries that I must describe it 
in some detail. 
3. Seale of Measurement. 

It consists of two small Nicol’s prisms, and an intermediate plate of 
quartz. If white light, passing through two such prisms, without the 
plate of quartz, be examined with the spectrum-microscope, it of course 
gives an ordinary ‘continuous spectrum; but if we place between the 
prisms.a thick plate of quartz or selenite, with its axis at 45° to the plane 
of polarization, though no difference can be seen in the light with the naked 
eye, the spectrum is entirely changed. The light is still white, but it is 


1867.] Colouring-matters by the Spectrum Microscope. 435 


made up of alternate black and coloured bands, evenly distributed over the 
whole spectrum. The number of these depends on the thickness of the 
depolarizing plate, so that we may have, if we please, almost innumerabie 
fine black lines, or fewer, broader bands, black in the centre and shaded off 
at each side. These facts are of course easily explained by the interference 
of waves. It would, I think, be impossible to have a more convenient or 
suitable scale for measuring the spectra of coloured solids and liquids. If 
we use a micrometer in the eyepiece, an alteration in the width of the slit 
modifies the readings, and the least movement of the apparatus may lead 
to error, whereas this scale is not open to either objection. Besides this, 
the unequal dispersion of the spectrum makes the blue end too broad, so 
that a given width, as measured with a micrometer in the eyepiece, is not 
of the same optical value as the same width in the red. The divisions in 
the interference-spectrum bear, on the contrary, the same relation to the 
length of the waves of light im all parts of the spectrum, and no want of 
adjustment in the instrument alters their position. As will be seen from 
the drawing (fig. 1), the unequal dispersion makes the distance betweeen 
the bands in the blue about twice as great asin the red. The perfection 
of a spectrum would be one in which they were all at equal intervals; but 
possibly no such uniform dispersion could be produced. By having a 
direct-vision prism, composed of one of flint-glass of 60°, and two of 
crown-glass of suitable angle, we can place it over the eyepiece, and may 
diminish the dispersion at the blue end, or increase that at the red 
end, by turning it in one position or the other, and thus see either 
end to the greatest advantage. It is, of course, very easy to draw 
spectra on this principle, and give all parts equal prominence, and not an 
unduly compressed red, and an unduly expanded blue end. Thus drawn, 
the spectra are far more uniform in many of their characters, and some 
general laws are at once apparent that otherwise might have been entirely 
overlooked ; and on this account I shall adopt this system in those figured 
in this paper. It is, in fact, merely representing the actual measurements 
by drawings, without being at the trouble of distorting them, so as to be 
like naturally distorted spectra. 

Since the number of divisions depends on the thickness of the interfer- 
ence-plate, it became necessary to decide what number should be adopted. 
At first I thought that ten would be most suitable; but, on trying, it 
appeared to me too few for practical work. Twenty is too many, since it 
then becomes extremely difficult to count them. Twelve is as many as 
can be easily counted ; it is a number easily remembered, gives sufficient 
accuracy, and has a variety of other advantages. With twelve divisions 
the sodium-line D comes very accurately at 3}; and thus, by adjusting 
the plate so that a bright sodium-line is hid in the centre of the band, 
when the Nicol’s prisms are crossed, it is accurately at 33, when they are 
arranged parallel, so as to give a wider field. The general character of the 
scale will be best understood from the following figure, in which I haye 

202 


436 Mr. H.C. Sorby on Analysis of Animal and Vegetable [Apr. 11, 


numbered the bands, and given below the principal Fraunhofer lines. 


: Blue end. 
| 


The centre of the bands is black, and they are shaded off gradually at each 
side, so that the shaded part is about equal to the intermediate bright 
spaces. Taking, then, the centres of the black bands as 1, 2, 3, &., the 
centres of the bright spaces are 14, 23, 33, &c., the lower edges of each 2, 
13, &c., and the upper 17, 27, &c. We can easily divide these quarters 
into eighths by the eye; and this is as near as is required in the subject 
before us, and corresponds as nearly as possible to ,4, part of the whole 
spectrum, visible under ordinary circumstances by gaslight and daylight. 
Absorption-bands at the red end are best seen by lamplight, and those at 
the blue end by daylight. 
On this scale the position of some of the principal lines of the solar 

spectrum is about as follows :— 

SNA aeons By isl cee apes Die tee 

Lyi pad BR Ohne tive Once urk cmap ema Gales 


At first I used plates of selenite, which are easily prepared, because they 
can be split to nearly the requisite thickness with parallel faces; but I found 
that its depolarizing power varies so much with the temperature, that even 
the ordinary atmospheric changes alter the position of the bands. Quartz 
cut parallel to the principal axis of the erystal is so slightly affected in this 
manner, as not to be open to this objection, but is prepared with far greater 
difficulty. The sides should be perfectly parallel, and the thickness about 
043 inch, and gradually polished down with rouge until the sodium-line 
is seen in its proper place. This must be done carefully, since a difference 
of ~p)cq inch in thickness would make it decidedly incorrect. I have 
prepared such plates, corresponding to my.own, and placed them in the 
hands of Mr. Browning and of Messrs. Becks, so that any one wishing to 
adopt a similar scale may be able to do so more accurately. 

The two Nicol’s prisms and the intervening plate are mounted in a tube 
and attached to a piece of brass in such a manner that the centre of the 
aperture exactly corresponds to the centre of any of the cells used in the 
experiments, which are all made to correspond in such a-manner that any 
of them, or this apparatus, may be placed on the stage and be in the proper 
place without further adjustment, which, of course, saves much time and 
trouble. ; 

4. Symbols used to describe Spectra. 

In order to describe spectra in my note-book or in print, I have devised 

a simple notation, employing types in constant use. Instead of writing an 


1867.] Colouring-matters by the Spectrum Microscope. 437 


account of this system, I here give a printed illustration, which will show 
that by this means it is easy to give in a single line all the essential parti- 
culars which would otherwise require a long and tedious description, or a 
number of drawings and woodcuts. Without some such method of measu- 
rig and recording spectra it would be almost impossible to carry on 
extensive inquiries. 

The intensity of the absorption is expressed by the following types :— 


Not at all shaded Blank space. 
Very slightly shaded . . - Dots with wide spaces. 
Decidedly shaded ..+ Dots closer together. 
More shaded .. Very close dots. 
Strongly shaded, but so that a trace 
of colour is still seen | ~~ ‘Three hyphens close. 
Still darker — Single dash. 
Nearly black — Double dash. 
Except when specially requisite, only the symbols ... --- — are em- 


ployed for the sake of simplicity, and then as signs of the relative, rather 
tnan of the absolute, amount of absorption ; and it is assumed that there 
is a gradual shading off from one tint to the other, unless the contrary is 
expressed. This is done by means of a small vertical line over the figure 
(see No. 11), which shows that there is a well-marked division between 
them. Definite narrow absorption-bands are indicated by * printed over 
their centre. This will be better understood by a description of the spec- 
trum of deoxidized heematin. 


rg bo 
= . aee| 
; = 3 a: 
g. qi = £h 
rs Ss ae] nae) 
BS . = io} oo 
68 = <3 8 es 
= a I ad 
a? Q a ; =| nw 
To PH o ® =| 
o a 3 Z 2 eas 

= = 
em ES wb = & SHS 
4 iS H =I c= Rae het 
3 Po e S) 3S S 
a a) x 5 = a 
S) > oS) =| S) & 

kK K 

41 — 5 5} ... 63 9. .10--- 11 — 


The following examples will show how simple or more complicated 
spectra may thus readily be printed and compared. I have chosen solu- 
tions of similar tint, in order to show that the spectra of those of nearly 
the same colour may be very ‘different, or, if analogous, may differ in 
details easily expressed by the symbols. The colour of each is given after 
the name. Nos. 1, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13 can be kept for a long time 
sealed up in tubes, and the rest are easily prepared. I have in all cases 
chosen that strength of solution which gives either the most characteristic 
spectra, or those best suited for comparison with other allied colours. 


1. Cudbear in alum (Pink) ea ae 8 11. — 

2. Colour of Elder berries many t iil eas Her iloy cage uk 
citric acid. (Red Pink) + 

3. Brazil-wood, with bicarbonate * 
of ammonia. (Pink) 43 — DF... 8 

4, Logwood, with bicarbonate of * 


ammonia. (Pink) 38 


438 Mr. H.C.Sorby on Analysis of Animal and Vegetable [Apr. 11, 


The next four are spectra of blood, produced by the successive addition 
of the various reagents, as in detecting fresh stains. 


*K % 


5. Fresh Blood. (Pale Scarlet) 3g — 42 , 4$ — 53 13. Brean 
6. Citric Acid then added. * : 
(Pale Brown) Wier coy 4... Saye 
7. Ammonia then added. * * 
(Pale Brown) 38... 48 42... See eee 
8. Deoxidized hematin, from blood- \ * * 
stain 2 years old. (Pink) 45—5 5}...68 9 922 10= th 


With these may be compared the two spectra which more nearly resemble 
those produced by blood than any I have yet seen. 
* * 
9. Cochineal in alum. (Pink) 33—4$...51---63...73 
% 7 


43 Bas 8, 5 oe 


4 


10. Alkanet-rootin alum. (Pink) 33 


8 


The following spectra of compounds derived from chlorophyll are as 
complicated as any I have met with. 


11. Normal reine ae 
in alcohol 
Shep Gren) | BA Beh BET 


12. Ditto, as decompos- \ 
ed by acids, or as Xx 2 
found in some leaves. oy Oa..38 44...54-. 59). 62 eee 
( Olive Green) ) 
13. Ditto, as decompos- 
ed by caustic potash, 
and then by hydro- 
chloric acid. ~ 12 
(Red- Green, Neutral 
Tint) ) 


«K *K *K 
€ AY sae Leas 
—lg 4zg—28 4635s 


5. General Remarks on Absorption, &e. 


It appears to me that in adopting the undulatory theory of light it 
greatly simplifies the subject before us if we, to some extent, make use of 
the phraseology of acoustics. And thus, for example, I shall speak of two 
absorption-bands that occur, one nearer the ved, and the other nearer the 
blue, end of the spectrum, as being relatively lower and higher. In a 
similar manner, if the addition of some reagent cause the absorption to im- 
crease towards the blue, and decrease towards the red, end, I shall describe 
it as raising the position of the absorption. We may also make some facts 
more intelligible by comparing them with the analogous phenomena of 
sound, and thus, for instance, may suppose that very narrow absorption- 
bands indicate that the ultimate particles of the substance will only take 
up vibrations of light of nearly one particular velocity, and that broad 
absorption-bands show that the particles have a much less definite rate of 
movement. Analogy would also lead us to infer that, when two spectra 
differ very decidedly, they must be due to different substances, or to the 


1867.] _ Colouring-matters by the Spectrum Microscope. - 439 


same in a different condition; whereas, if two spectra agree, they may be 
the same substance, or two distinct substances, whose different actions are 
made equal by particular circumstances. As an illustration, we may refer 
to a short string, which may give the same note as a longer whose tension 
is greater. For this reason we should be careful not to rely too much on 
one spectrum. If, however, we can produce some great physical change 
in both substances, and still their spectra remain the same under equal 
conditions, and if this occur uniformly in several different changes, we 
may conclude that they are identical. Hence the value of the various 
reagents named below. Many excellent illustrations of these principles 
could easily be given. 


6. General Method of Experiments. 


Since the spectrum-microscope enables us to use very small quantities, 
it appeared desirable to adopt such a method of research as would enable 
us to take full advantage of this circumstance, and to avoid as much as 
possible previous chemical manipulations. On this account I shall say 
nothing about modified chemical methods, which may, of course, be also 
employed when sufficient material is at command. My aim has been to 
contrive a special system of qualitative analysis of coloured substances 
applicable to minute quantities, and as independent of general chemistry as 
the blowpipe method is in the case of minerals. I may here say that in some 
very important practical applications to the detection of blood-stains 
not above ;1, of a grain was at disposal, and yet perfectly satisfactory 
results were obtained. 

I was led to study the colouring-matters of flowers, leaves, fruits, woods, 
and roots, because it appeared a most admirable field of inquiry to teach 
the general principles of the subject. The colours being so various, and 
occurring under such complicated conditions, I thought that if methods 
could be devised to distinguish those that are dissimilar and to prove the 
identity of those that are alike, even when mixed with coloured impurities, 
such principles could easily be applied to other inquiries. If the question 
were merely to distinguish or compare absolutely pure colouring-matters, 
there would be little or no difficulty ; but it appeared to me that one great 
value of the method would be to be able to apply it at once to very impure 
and mixed materials. In such cases mere colour is of very secondary im- 
portance, since that may be totally changed by a very small amount of 
impurity. 

7. Preparation of Colours. 


If the petals, leaves, &c. of plants be crushed in water, it very com- 
monly happens that the colour is rapidly decomposed and no clear 
solution can be obtaimed; but if crushed in a moderate quantity of 
spirits of wine, and the solution squeezed out, filtered, and evaporated to 
dryness at a gentle heat, the colouring-matter does not decompose, even 


440 Mr. H.C. Sorby on Analysis of Animal and Vegetable [Apr. 11, 


when redissolved in water and filtered to remove anything not soluble 
in that liquid. This clear solution should then be evaporated to dryness 
at a gentle heat ina small saucer, and kept dry; for then the colours often 
undergo no important change in the course of many months, whereas, when 
kept dissolved in water or alcohol, they may quickly decompose. I have 
thus prepared the colouring-matter of above a hundred different vegetable 
substances, some of which have become entirely changed, but a large 
number are apparently still unaltered. I have also kept a number of 
colours, sealed up in glass tubes, ready for direct examination, dissolved 
in alcohol, in strong syrup, or in alum. Many have decomposed, but 
many have kept perfectly well, or have merely faded, and still give excel- 
lent spectra after above a year. I have also prepared and kept im the 
same manner some animal colouring-matters, but comparatively few. 


8. Method of examination. 


The coloured substances are examined, when dissolved in water, alcohol, 
or other solvent, in the small glass cells already described, and the various 
reagents are added and mixed by means of a moderately stout platmum 
wire, flattened at one end and turned up square, like a little hoe. I have 
made many experiments in order to ascertain what reagents are most ser- 
viceable in developing characteristic spectra, and have at length concluded 
that for general purposes the following are the most convenient. Those 
which are solid are best kept in small bottles as coarse powder, and added 
to the small cells in a solid state, so that the quantity used may be more 
readily known. 

9. Reagents. 


Hydrochloric acid. 

Citric acid. 

Benzoie acid. 

Boracie acid. 

Bicarbonate of ammonia. 
Carbonate of soda. 

Diluted solution of ammonia. 
Caustic potash. 

Sulphite of soda. 

Sulphate of protoxide of iron. 
Alum. 

Iodine dissolved in alcohol. 
Bromine dissolved in water. 
Solution of hypochlorite of soda. 
Permanganate of potash. 


This list might of course be very much extended, if we were to include 
such reagents as may be used in separating or decomposing colours by the 
ordinary chemical methods. In describing the effect of those named in 


1867.] Colouring-matters by the Spectrum Microscope. 44] 


this list, I feel that I could not avoid mentioning some well-known facts 
without breaking the thread of my argument; and therefore | trust it may 
not be thought out of place if I give a general account of the whole from the 
particular point of view required by the subject more especially before us. 

The action of many reagents is so intimately related to different parts of 
the spectrum, as to show that there must be some connexion between so- 
called chemical reactions and optical phenomena. Not that their effect is 
absolutely the same in the case of all coloured substances, but generally 
only the extent differs, whilst the character of the change is uniform ; un- 
less, indeed, decomposition take place; and even then it has a tendency to 
conform to a general law. 

10. Solvents. 

Water and alcohol are the most useful solvents, and the spectra of the 
two solutions of the same substance often differ most strikingly ; in fact 
they often behave in other respects as if they were solutions of different 
substances. Sometimes the spectra are absolutely identical, but often well- 
marked narrow absorption-bands are seen in the alcoholic solution, where 
they are almost, or quite, invisible in the aqueous. Very commonly the 
same bands are seen in both, but not exactly in the same place, alcohol some- 
times raising them to a higher part of the spectrum, and sometimes de- 
pressing them. Occasionally the spectrum of the dry material is like that 
of the alcoholic solution, and unlike that of the aqueous, as if the dif- 
ference were due to the presence of water, but in other cases it is unlike 
both. At all events the facts clearly show that a solvent has a most im- 
portant action on the ultimate particles of the substance in solution, since 
it may produce a greater change in optical phenomena than even chemical 
combination. Undistilled hard water may act like a weak alkali. 


ll. Acids and Alkalies. 


As far as optical phenomena are concerned, there is no absolute divi- 
sion between acids and alkalies; for we have every connecting link from 
the strongest acids to the strongest alkalies. In order to understand their 
action, it is most essential to distinguish between what may be called 
** general absorption” and “local absorption-bands.”? There may, per- 
haps, be no absolute line of division, but when seen to advantage they 
are affected in such a different manner that it is desirable to treat of each 
separately. 

12. General Absorption. 

As a good example of simple general absorption, we may take the crim- 
son colouring-matter of the common Wallflower (Cheitranthus Chetri), which 
is soluble in water, and, along with a yellow only soluble in alcohol, gives 
rise to the varied colours of the flowers. 

When neutral, it is crimson.... Daned al O ore kara 
With ammonia, fine green .... 132—41.., 
With citric acid, deep pink .... 33.-44 —6-..83 11... 


442 Mr. H.C.Sorby on Analysis of Animal and Vegetable [Apr. 11, 


These facts will be better understood by means of the following draw- 
ing :-— 


Red end. Fig. 2. Blue end. 


il, CH HL 


2. Neutral. 


3. Ammonia. 


i 


Whence it will be seen that citric acid raises and greatly increases the cen- 
tral absorption, and ammonia lowers and also increases it. At the same 
time the absorption at the extreme blue end of the spectrum is raised by 
the acid almost to beyond the range of vision, but lowered to the centre 
of the spectrum by ammonia, Acids and alkalies of intermediate character, 
as, for example, boracic acid and bicarbonate of ammonia, produce inter- 
mediate effects. These well-known phenomena may be looked upon as 
typical of acids and alkalies, but the extent of their action varies for each 
particular colouring-matter, so that in some cases it is slight, and some- 
times neither acids nor alkalies produce any effect. Their relative action 
on the central and upper absorption also varies very greatly in different 
colours. If there is no general absorption in the centre of the spectrum, 
when the colour is neutral, but only an absorption at the blue end, acids 
and alkalies act on it in precisely the same manner as on the absorption at 
the blue end in the case just described, raising or lowering it to an extent 
varying greatly according to the substance ; and the same may be said of 
any general absorption at the red end. ‘The reverse certainly occurs when 
au acid is added to chromate of potash, or excess of ammonia to a salt of 
copper; and, according to Stokes (Phil. Trans. 1862, p. 609), alkaloid 
bases usually show this reverse action. It may depend on the different 
properties of two distinct compounds, which does not appear to be the 
cause of the phenomena now under consideration. In the case of all the 
vegetable colouring-matters which I have examined, the tendency of acids 
is to raise, and of alkalies to depress, the general absorption in each part 
of the spectrum; the extent of this action depending on the strength and 
quantity of the reagents, and on the nature of each colouring-matter ; and 
thus we have a general rule, and not several, as commonly adopted by 
chemists, each of very limited application ; for instance, that vegetable 
blues are turned red by acids, and green by alkalies; and that vegetable 
yellows are reddened by alkalies. I may here remark that some colours 


1867. ] Colouring-matters by the Spectrum Microscope. 44.3 


‘would appear to be exceptions, if we did not remember that waves of 
light, or waves analogous to them, exist beyond the visible spectrum. 
Thus, for example, when alkalies are added to the yellow solution of Brazil- 
wood (Cesalpinia crista), it is changed to pink, the absorption being so 
much lowered that the blues are transmitted ; this clear space correspond- 
ing to what was probably a clear space beyond the blues visible under 
ordinary circumstances, but which would perhaps be seen, if examined in the 
manner described by Stokes in his paper on the long spectrum of electric 
light*, 
13. Fading of Solutions. 

One striking peculiarity in the action of acids on the solutions of many 
vegetable colours is, that, when they are in a particular state of acidity, 
they fade to nearly or quite colourless, without there bemg any decompo- 
sition. This is especially the case with pink colours dissolved in alcohol. 
It occurs slightly with blue colours, and little, if at all, with yellows. The 
aqueous solutions change much more slowly, but more and more rapidly 
the more they are diluted; and frequently attain a permanent depth of 
colour, which is dark or pale according as the solution is strong or dilute. 
Of course I here allude to the effect of the same total amount of colour, 
and not to the different effect of the same quantity of a strong or dilute 
solution. 'The alcoholic solutions obtained direct from the flowers often 
fade so rapidly, and become so nearly colourless, that any one might easily 
fancy that all the colour was lost by decomposition; and an evaporating 
dish containing it, might appear merely filled with brownish alcohol, and 
yet on evaporation the whole dish might be covered with a fine deep colour. 
The same change may occur over and over again, the deep-coloured solu- 
tion first obtained soon fading, and the colour being restored by subsequent 
evaporation. 

_ When such a colour is dissolved in a little water and added to alcohol in 
an experiment tube, the colour may at first be very deep, but may fade so 
rapidly that there is scarcely time to observe the spectrum before it passes 
into that molecular state which does not absorb any of the rays of light. 
The colouring-matter of the flowers of the red Salvia (8. splendens) is an 
excellent example. Neutral solutions do not undergo this rapid change ; 
a different condition of acidity is requisite for different colouring-mat- 
ters; and some do not change at all. A large excess of citric acid very 
often restores the intensity of the colour ; and usually the absorption-bands 
are seen to the greatest advantage when the solution is in that state which 
rapidly fades ; and by adding too much colour and watching whilst it fades, 
they may be seen and measured when at their best. This fading of a dark- 
coloured solution must not be confounded with the change which takes 
place on diluting some salts, as described by Dr. Gladstone in bis paper on 
that subject’. 


* Phil. Trans. 1862, p. 599. 
t Quart. Journ, Chem. Soe. vol. xi. p. 36. 


444, Mr. H.C. Sorby on Analysis of Animal and Vegetable | Apr. 11, 


14. Absorption-bands. 

Though acids and alkalies thus, to a greater or less extent, alter the 
position of the general absorption, they act very differently on the special, 
local Magne to which it is very convenient to restrict the term ‘‘ absorp- 
tion-bands.”” Since I shall often have to speak of their being at equal in- 
tervals, it would be well to say that I have found it convenient to construct 
a wedge-shaped piece of quartz, cut parallel to the axis of the crystal, and 
to use it along with two Nicol’s prisms in such a manner that the spectrum 
may be divided into any requisite number of equal portions, by inter- 
ference-bands situated in any requisite position. This of course avoids 
the errors which so often happen when we compare together measure- 
ments that cannot be made with very great accuracy. 

As an excellent illustration I select the colouring-matter of Alkanet-root 
(Anchusa tinctoria). It is insoluble in water, but is easily dissolved by 
alcohol, even when much diluted with water, and gives a clear pink solu- 
tion. The spectrum is nearly the same when the colour is dissolved in 
absolute alcohol, as when much water is present, only each of the absorp- 
tion-bands is situated rather higher. Thus, taking the centres of the bands, 
we have— 


b. C. d. 
Absolute alcohol i. those. Penne ae 54 i= 
Very dilute at atic Ge seam SB eee ta 4} 53 ix 


The general spectrum of the solution in dilute aleobal wil be best un- 
derstood from the following figure, No. 1 :— 


Red end. a 46 c d Blue end. 


1. Neutral or somewhat acid. 


2. A little carbonate of soda. 


3. More carbonate of soda. E 


Acids produce no important change, and the effect of alkalies is best 
seen by gradually adding carbonate of soda. This alters the colour to a 
more and more blue-purple, and the spectrum is changed in the mamner 
shown in fig. 3. The three bands seen in the neutral solution may be 
referred to as 0, c, and d, and their centres occur at equal intervals of 
about 14. When enough carbonate of soda has been added to make it 
slightly purple, a fourth band, a, makes its appearance, separated from b by 
the same equal interval of 14, whilst the other bands remain in the same 


1867. | Colouring-matters by the Spectrum Microscope. 445 


position as at first, only modified in intensity. The band @ becomes 
darker and darker as more carbonate is added, until, when the solution is 
a fine purple, it is as dark as the others (see No. 2); and on adding more 
carbonate it becomes still darker, and the bands ¢ and d more faint, until 
the solution is a purple-blue ; and the spectrum has only the two well- 
marked bands a and 0, shown by No. 3. 

The bright blue colouring-matter of the flowers of Lobelia speciosa 
gives, when neutral, almost exactly the same spectrum as that of 
Alkanet-root when alkaline, No. 3, having two well-marked absorption- 
bands, whose centres are at 23? and 44; and on adding carbonate of soda, 
the upper one is gradually removed, and the centre of the lower is de- 
pressed to near 25. More or less similar results occur in the case of many 
other blue colouring-matters ; and on adding a slight excess of acid the 
general absorption is raised, and other bands may be developed higher up,, 
at equal intervals; but when a large excess has been added, they are lost 
in a strong general absorption. ‘Too strong an alkali may also destroy 
narrow bands in a similar manner, as is well seen in the case of Brazil- 
wood, The neutral aqueous solution shows an absorption-band, made far 
more distinct by the addition of bicarbonate of ammonia, which makes it 
pink and very fluorescent. The spectrum is then 


* 


42__52..... Hie 

but on adding excess of ammonia the solution ceases to be fluorescent, the 
narrow absorption-band is lost, and the spectrum becomes 

Ue Age sa Se 
Ammonia does not produce this effect when the colour is dissolved in 
alcohol, the solution remaining fluorescent and still giving the narrow 
band; and, as a general rule, that solvent greatly impedes or entirely pre- 
vents such changes, and on this account almost invariably shows absorp- 
tion-bands to the greatest advantage. 

We therefore see from the above examples that the absorption follows 
the general rule, and is raised by acids, and depressed by alkalies; but this 
only applies to the absorption when viewed as a whole, and not to the 
separate bands ; for those reagents change their intensity, but not their 
position. In some cases, indeed, their position is slightly altered, so that 
perhaps it would be more correct to say that acids and alkalies may raise 
and depress the general absorption to an extent equal to a considerable 
fraction of its own great breadth; whereas they either do not change the 
position of narrow absorption-bands, or merely raise and depress them by 
a fraction of their own narrow width. It is their very definite position 
that makes them so useful in this method of analysis. 

Unfortunately [ have not hitherto been able to find a sufficient number 
of colourmg-matters giving rise to three or more well-marked absorption- 
bands, to warrant a general conclusion ; and therefore it is perhaps prema- 
ture to conclude that their centres always occur at equal intervals. At 


446 Mr. H.C.Sorby on Analysis of Animal and Vegetable { Apr. 11, 


the same time it is certainly a very common fact. When the maximum 
point of transparancy occurs between the different bands, there may be, as 
it were, a double interval; but then, sometimes, even this missing band 
may be seen under favourable conditions. A difference in the general ab- 
sorption may also somewhat alter the apparent position of a band, if it is 
strongly shaded on one side, and not on the other; and the presence of 
impurities may also modify the results, so that absolute accuracy cannot 
be expected in all cases; and occasionally very narrow bands occur which 
appear to belong to a second system. It must be borne in mind that the 
bands are equidistant, only when measured by means of the interference- 
spectrum. Thus, in the case of Alkanet-root, when measured with a mi- 
crometer, instead of the intervals a to 6 and ¢ to d being equal, they are related 
to one another about as 14 and 2, and thus the general law is entirely ob- 
scured. If subsequent research should prove that the bands are normally 
at equal intervals, it will be a fact of great value in deciding whether cer- 
tain spectra are or are not due to a mixture of colours; since, if a band 
occurred at a perfectly unequal interval, it would show that there must be 
at least two substances. Even in the present state of our knowledge, any 
inequality should make us carefully search for some satisfactory reason for 
such a divergence from a common rule. My meaning will be better 
understood from the following examples. 

If a little of the colour of Brazil-wood be added to the solution of Alkanet- 
root, the bands are not altered, and are seen at 47, 53, and 73; but a 
little bicarbonate of ammonia developes a well-marked band, whose centre is 
at 54, and therefore at an interval of 1, instead of 1. The same is also 
well seen in the case of a mixed solution of Brazil-wood and blue Lodelia. 
I therefore argue that if an unknown substance gave rise to similar spectra, 
with bands at unequal intervals, we ought strongly to suspect that it was 
either naturally composite, or that some new compound had been formed 
by decomposition. As a very good illustration I may refer to the product 
of the action of acids on chlorophyll. The band in the red is not at an 
equal interval ; but, on careful examination, it is seen to be made up of two 
bands, the upper of which is at an equal interval. I was not aware that 
these were due to two different substances, but was led to think it very pro- 
bable ; and Professor Stokes informs me that he has proved it to be the case. 
As an illustration of another kind of exception, I refer to the colouring- 
matter of the pink Steck (Matthiola annua). The aqueous solution shows 
two bands, whose centres are at about 32 and 57; and on adding ammonia 
the upper is removed, and the lower depressed to 37. In spirit of wine 
they are at 4 and 53, and ammonia developes a third at 3, which are not 
equal intervals. However, if absolute alcohol be used, the bands are at 22, 
4+, and 53, which are equal intervals ; and thus we see that the abnormal 
inequality is due to the presence of water, which causes the spectrum to 
be as if due to a mixture of two colours, when in reality it is the same 
colour dissolved in two solvents. 


1867.] Colouring-matters by the Spectrum Microscope. 4.4.7 


In spectra showing one absorption-band, there is very commonly a general 
absorption, extending from it towards the blue end; whereas it so seldom 
extends towards the red end that it is doubtful if it ever occurs in sub- 
stances, undoubtedly not a mixture of two colours. It can, however, so 
easily oceur in mixed colours, that any substance giving rise to such a 
spectrum is probably a mixture. Many illustrations might be given, but I 
will select Brazil-wood, and the same artificially mixed with the colour of 
beet-root. Adding bicarbonate of ammonia to both, we have— 


* 
Brazil-wood alone ...... 43—52...7 
Brazil-wood and beet-root 33...42—52..... 8 


Here, then, the shading below the absorption-band from 33 to 43 is evidence 
of the second colour, and if such a mixture had occurred naturally its 
mixed character might easily have been overlooked. I have found many 
cases similar to this, and had proved that they were mixtures, before I was 
aware that the spectra indicated it. If these very common facts turn out 
to be general laws, we might thus detect at once the presence of as many 
as three different substances, or at all events might learn what further ex- 
amination was desirable. 


15. Sulphite of Soda. 


Sulphite of soda is a most valuable reagent, and its action very remark- 
able. It enables us to divide colours into three groups, according as it 
produces a change in an ammoniacal, or acid solution, or in neither. The 
action is related in a very simple manner to the spectra. Having added an 
excess of ammonia, there may be a well-marked broad absorption over more 
or less of the red, orange, yellow, and upper green; and above this a 
clear transparent space, limited by a variable amount of absorption, ex- 
tending downwards from the extreme blue. Fig. 2 will illustrate my 
meaning. In the case of one group of colours, the addition of sulphite of 
soda almost immediately removes the detached, broad absorption in the 
lower part of the spectrum, but leaves that at the blue end quite unchanged, 
or only slightly modified by the solution being made more alkaline. If, 
then, as in the case of magenta, there is no absorption at the blue end, 
sulphite of soda makes the solution quite colourless ; whereas if the blues 
are absorbed, as in the case of the ammoniacal solutions of the colour of red 
roses, and some species of Dianthus, it changes the colour from green to 
yellow. If the absorption extends continuously down from the extreme 
blue to the orange, as often happens when ammonia is added to yellow 
colours, sulphite of soda produces no change. It is only when there is a 
more or less perfect diviszon between the upper and lower absorption, that 
it has any effect ; and then it simply and entirely removes the lower absorp- 
tion. Some colours are changed immediately, even when a very small 
quantity of sulphite is added; but others require more and change 
gradually, though still very soon. 


448 Mr. H.C. Sorby on Analysis of Animal and Vegetable [Apr. 11, 


16. Groups A, B, and C. 


Colours which are thus altered when the solution is ammoniacal, consti- 
tute my group A. Frequently, however, sulphite of soda does not remove 
the detached absorption when excess of ammonia is present, but does so 
when there is an excess of citric acid. These constitute my group B. As 
in the other group, any absorption which extends continuously from the 
extreme blue end isnot altered, but the detached absorption in the green 
is almost immediately removed ; and therefore a deep pink or red solution 
may at once become quite colourless, or only a very pale yellow; and in 
many cases this residual colour is due to some yellow colourimg-matter 
mixed with the other. I have never seen a colour which was changed by 
sulphite when alkaline, and not when acid; and thus citric acid never 
restores the colour when it is added to the changed ammoniacal solution. 
Excess of ammonia usually restores the faded acid solution to nearly the 
original colour, and it is therefore not a case of actual decomposition, but 
merely the result of some remarkable molecular change. A third group of 
colours consists of those which are not almost immediately changed by 
sulphite of soda, when either alkaline or acid ; and these I call group C. 
Some of them may fade on keeping several hours, and some do not fade 
even in several days, but they cannot thus be divided into two definite groups. 
When thus faded, ammonia does not restore the colour; and therefore it 
is evidently the effect of decomposition, and not like the mere molecular 
change met with in group B. 

On the whole, the groups A, B, and C are remarkably distinct. There 
are, indeed, a few cases where the change takes place somewhat slowly ; 
and a few scarlet colours do not show very distinctly the characteristic p 
culiarities of either B or C; but there are other very strong reasons for 
believing that some of these are really mixtures of different groups. Even 
if it should be found that perfectly simple colouring-matters may have, as 
it were, intermediate characters, such appear to be so rare that practically 
they may be classed with mixtures, until some reason be found for classing 
them together as exceptions. 

These reactions of sulphite of soda are so much interfered with by the 
presence of alcohol, that it should never be employed as a solvent, unless 
the substance is insoluble in water; and then it should be diluted as much 
as possible, since the ordinary spirit of wine with an equal quantity of 
water is the extreme strength admissible, and even that very much delays 
the reaction. The effect of various other reagents is also sometimes very 
different, according to the nature of the solvent. 

The three groups A, B, and C differ in other particulars. It is easy 
to change A or B into C by various reagents which produce decomposi- 
tion, but I do not. know a case where C can be changed into A or B. Caustic 
alkalies usually soon decompose colours belonging to group A, when dis- 
solved in water, but act slowly on those of groups B and C. Usually 
colours of group C are far more permanent than those of groups A and B, 


1867. ] Colouring-matters by the Spectrum Microscope. 449 


and to it belong most of the vegetable colours used in dyeing, and nearly 
all yellows. 
17. Other Reagents. 


Boracic Acid.—The chief value of this reagent is that it gives nearly 
the same spectrum as that of a neutral solution when added after the 
addition of a slight excess of ammonia. It should therefore be well fused 
in a platinum crucible and recrystallized, so as to be quite free from any 
stronger acid. 

Sulphate of Iron.—Sulphate of the protoxide of iron is chiefly useful as 
a deoxidizing agent, in the case of blood and a few analogous substances, 
taking care to have citric acid present to prevent the precipitation of the 
oxide by ammonia *. 

Alum.—Alum has a remarkable influence on some colours, and it has 
the property of gradually restoring many after they have passed into the 
faded modification. Many colours also may be kept for a long time dis- 
solved in a strong solution, sealed up in tubes; and it is occasionally an 
excellent solvent for substances insoluble in either water or alcohol. The 
chief objection to it as a reagent is that the spectra are so much influenced 
by the presence of ammonia, even when neutralized by an acid, that it is 
almost impossible to compare together different substances under exactly 
the same conditions. 

Iodine and Bromine.—Iodine dissolved in alcohol, and bromine in water, 
are useful in producing decompositions, which may differ very considerably 
in colours which are otherwise very similar; as, for example, the yellow 
colouring-matters of the root of rhubarb and of turmeric. The iodine or 
hromine should be added in sufficient quantity, and then ammonia used to 
remove the excess, and thus avoid the effect of their own colour. The 
solution may then be made acid with citric acid, and should in both cases 
be compared with another tube to which no iodine or bromine has been 
added. 

Hypochlorite of Soda——This reagent, with or without the addition of 
citric acid, is sometimes useful, as for instance in detecting the adulteration 
of rhubarb with turmeric ; but generally its action is too powerful and too 
uniform. 

Permanganate of Potash.—This also usually acts too powerfully on 
colouring-matters. The excess can easily be removed by sulphite of soda, 
which makes an alkaline solution pale yellow, but an acid solution quite 
colourless. 

18. Grouping of Colours. 


Having now considered some of the chief peculiarities of the most useful 
reagents, I proceed to describe what appears to me to be the most con- 
venient method of dividing colouring-matters into groups and subgroups, 
so as to enable us to ascertain the nature of any particular substance under 


* See Stokes’s Paper, Proceed. Roy. Soe. vol. xiii. (1864) p. 355. 
VOL. XV. rie 


450. Mr. H.C. Sorby on Analysis of Animal and Vegetable [Apr. 11, 


examination. The number of distinct coloured compounds met with in 
different plants is so great, that some such classification is imperative. In 
the first place, we cannot do better than divide them according as they are 
soluble in water or alcohol. This may be looked upon as a chemical divi- 
sion, and is very useful in practice. Thus— 


Soluble in water and not precipitated by alcohol... .. Division 1. 


Soluble in water and precipitated by alcohol ...... pa Tt eaee 
Insoluble in water but soluble in alcohol .......... sate toe 
Insoluble both in water and alcohol .............. ast 


Of course cases occur which cannot be unhesitatingly classed with any one 
of these; but they often form good practical divisions, and necessarily 
modify the methods requisite for further examination. 


19. Method and Order of Experiment. 


_ Ifa colour belongs to division 1, a small quantity, sufficient for three 
or four experiments, should be exposed to the vapour of ammonia in a 
watch-glass, until there is certainly no longer any jree acid, and then 
gently evaporated, so that all excess of ammonia may be lost. If not thus 
made neutral we might be entirely misled ; for some pink colours are bluex 
reddened by an acid. A small quantity should then be dissolved in water 
in one of the small experiment-tubes and the spectrum observed. If too 
little colour has been added to give the characteristic spectrum, more 
should be introduced ; but if any part is entirely absorbed, the cell should 
be turned sideways, in order to see whether or no some narrow absorption- 
band occurs there; and then it may be desirable to remove some of the 
solution, and fill up the cell with water. As a general rule, so much colour 
should be added as to make the darkest part of the spectrum decidedly 
shaded, but yet not so black as to hide any narrow bands; and if any 
occur, the solution should be made of such a strength as to show them to 
the greatest advantage. This can easily be done, after a little practice, 
and is made much easier by being able to turn the tubes sideways. Having 
noted the spectrum of the neutral solution, a very small quantity of am- 
monia should be added, and then a decided excess, the spectra being 
examined to see if there be any difference ; for this is very often the case 
and very important facts may be everlooked if too great an excess be added 
at first. The addition of a small bit of sulphite of soda then shows at . 
once whether or no a colour belonging to group A is present; and on 
adding excess of citric acid we may also determine whether it chiefly 
belongs to groups B or C. Ammonia should then be added in excess, 
which may or may not restore it to the same state as before the addition 
of the acid. To another portion of colour carbonate of soda should be 
added, and then excess of citric acid, both spectra being carefully observed ; 
and finally sulphite of soda, which definitely shows whether or no there 
is any other colour than one belonging to group C. Combining the results 


1867.| = Colouring-matters by the Spectrum Microscope. 451 


of the two sets of experiments, we may decide whether it belongs to groups 
A, B, or C, or is a mixture of any of them. If the substance is insoluble 
in water but soluble in alcohol, the same experiments should be made, only 
we must add the colour dissolved in alcohol to as much water as can be used 
without making the solution turbid, and must remember how much the 
presence of alcohol may interfere with the action of some of the reagents. 

Another portion of the neutral colour should then be dissolved in as 
strong alcohol as will give a clear solution, and ammonia, benzoic acid, a 
little citric acid, and much of it added one after the other; and all the 
spectra carefully observed, as well as any other facts which may present 
themselves. 

By thus using three separate quantities of colour, and adding reagents 
one after the other, we may obtain about a dozen spectra, which may differ 
from one another in important particulars, or in some few cases may be all 
alike. The experiments are so easily made, that the whole series of twelve 
spectra may be seen in the space of five minutes; and the total quantity of 
material need not in some cases be more than ;;45, of a grain. The facts 
thus learned may show that for particular practical purposes some different 
method could be employed with advantage, and that only one or two simple 
experiments are needed. For example, suspected blood-stains should’ be 
treated in an entirely different manner, as described in my Paper on that 
subject * ; and in examining dark-coloured wines, in order to form some 
opinion of their age from the relative quantity of the colour belonging to 
group C, gradually formed by the alteration of the original colouring- 
matter of the grape belonging to group B, it is only requisite to observe — 
the effect of sulphite of soda after the addition of citric acid. It would, 
however, extend this Paper beyond the limits I have prescribed to myself, 
if I were to enter into practical applications, and I shall therefore merely 
give a description of a convenient method of grouping the various colours. 


20. Subgroups. 


Since the narrow absorption-bands are decidedly the most important 
means of identification, it appears to me that we cannot do better than 
adopt subdivisions founded on their number. We may thus divide each 
group A, B, and C into subgroups, in which the neutral aqueous solu- 
tions exhibit 0, 1, 2, 3, &c. decided absorption-bands. Sometimes one of 
them may be so obscure that we may hesitate whether it should be counted 
or not; but practically this is no very serious objection, if we decide to 
reckon only distinct bands, and to look on the fainter as important merely 
in identifying individual colours. If no absorption-band can be seen in 
the neutral solution, we may take mto account those seen when more or 
less ammonia is added ; and if none occur in either case, we may make use 
of those seen in the alcoholic solution when neutral, and after the addition 
of ammonia. Whenever in this order of experiments the solution gives 


* Quarterly Journal of Science, vol. ii. p. 205. 


2P2 


452 Mr. H.C.Sorby on Analysis of Animal and Vegetable [Apr. 11, 


any decided absorption-band the subgroup is determined; and it is only 
when none has been produced that the process must be carried further. _ 
- The general connexion of the subgroups will be best seen from the 


following Table :— am, 
( a2, am, 
aim, al, am,, &c. 
es a | al,, &c. 
Ls Av sia: am,, &¢. 
Ago, SC. 


The same system is applicable to each division, 1, 2, and 3, and to each 
group «A,B, and C. We can easily express the subgroups by using one 
or more of the signs ag, am, al, am, with a figure to mdicate the number 
of bands in the first term that contains any ; those before it being given to 
show the facts more clearly. 

Each colour can be indicated by writing after the subgroup the charac- 
teristic spectrum, or, for the sake of simplicity, merely the position of the 
centres of the bands, when they are seen as independent as possible ot 
general absorption. If the centres of the bands are in different positions 
the colours cannot be the same; but if they agree it does not necessarily 
follow that they are the same. It is probable, but must be further proved 
by the correspondence of other spectra. As examples J give a few well- 
marked cases. 


Purple Bansy i 6: sie Salers yO a ie 1, A, ag, am, (4). 
Crimson Mose, Gse ie.) 1) Mi aieteue iets er pe 1, A, ag, am, al, am, (23). 
Blue Lobelia (L. speciosa) ...........-1, B, ag, (22, 42). 

Pink Stock (Matthiola annua) ........ I, 1G, 295 (Gea 

Several blue species of Campanula...... 1, B, ag, 23, 45a 
Brazil-wood (Cesalpinia crista) ........ 1 Cag) (ae 


Logwood (Hematoxylum campechianum) 1, C, aq, (42). 
Sandalwood (Pterocarpus santalinus) ..3, C, aq, (6, 73). 
Alkanet-root (Anchusa tinctoria) ...... 3, C,'ag, (44, 52, 74). 


21. Individual Colours. 

Having then ascertained to which subgroup any particular colour be- 
longs, it is in the next place requisite to determine what particular sub- 
stance it is. When it gives rise to well-marked absorption-bands, this may 
be more or less definitely decided by their exact position and character ; 
since they may of course occur in different situations, or vary much in ab- 
solute and relative breadth and in intensity. Thus, choosing closely re- 
lated spectra, we have, for example, — 


1, B, aq, 2* * 
Blue Lobelia speciosa.......... 24—37...33—43 Ca 
Pink Matthiola annua ........  23---43...43---53...8 10..11— 
1, C, aq, 


Logwood (Hematoxylum campechianum) 33 —54...7--8— 


* 
Brazil-wood (Cesalpinia crista) ...... 45—5?.. 7--8— 


1867.]  Colouring-matters by the Spectrum Microscope. 453 


Such spectra are at once seen to differ most decidedly when compared side 
by side; and that the colouring-matters are entirely different is proved by 
other facts. If the absorption-bands agree very closely, we ought to com- 
pare other spectra before concluding that the substances are the same. 


22. Mized Colours. 


Of course, if any impurity is present which absorbs that part of the 
spectrum where the characteristic bands occur, it may be difficult, or even 
impossible, to determine the nature of the substance; but the rest of the 
spectrum may be obscured, and the general colour entirely changed, without 
the least difficulty being thereby produced. Thus, for example, on adding 
a solution of Saffron (Crocus sativus) to that of the blue Loédelza, the 
colour is changed from blue to a curious olive, and the spectrum be- 
comes— 


Sg ¥ 
Lobelia and Saffron........ 23—33...382—48 7 
* *% 
MODEM ek oa s 27—3j...383 48 11 
12 APETTETAESS bie ce sta a o  e 63..7-— 


If we did not know it, we might thus infer that they were the same sub- 
stance, and only differed because one contained a yellow colour; and this 
conclusion would be borne out by adding to each citric acid and sulphite of 
soda, which make the Lodelia colourless, and leave the residual yellow 
colour, 63 ..7-—, in the case of the mixture. The petals of very many 
flowers do really contain more or less of such a yellow, which appears to 
be that developed to a much greater extent in the stamens, &c.; and 
though this often modifies the general colour and the spectra, its presence 
may be recognized in a similar manner. Different species of Dianthus, 
various kinds of Roses, and Digitalis purpurea are good examples of one 
general colouring-matter modified in this manner. Its normal charac- 
ter 1s 


* 
1, A, aq, am, al, am, (12--23...44 11..). 


In studying mixed colours, so much depends on their special characters, 
that it would be difficult to give any other general rules ; and particular 
cases do not form part of the plan of the present paper. 


23. Spectra with no Bands. 


The principal difficulty to be contended with in this method of qualita- 
tive analysis, is in the case of the subgroups where no decided absorption- 
bands can be developed by any of the reagents. They can be easily 
divided into the groups A, B, and C, but the difficulty is to distinguish the 
separate colours, if we are not sure that they are pure and simple. Some- 
times special facts may be of use; but, as a general rule, we are compelled 


454. Mr. H.C. Sorby on Analysis of Animal and Vegetable [Apr. 11, 


to have recourse to the position and character of the general absorption. This 
requires a good deal of care, since a difference in the state of the solution 
may make the same colour differ more than two quite distinct colours. 
After trying a number of experiments, I find that the best spectra for com- 
parison are those obtained by adding first a moderate excess of carbonate 
of soda, and then a considerable excess of citric acid. Both of these solu- 
tions change very slowly, and give well-marked spectra; whereas ammonia 
often causes decomposition, and weaker alkalies or acids give much more 
faint spectra, or such as rapidly fade. Closely related colours should be 
compared together, and made as nearly equal as possible after the addition 
of the carbonate, and then citric acid added in considerable, and nearly 
equal, excess. We thus can compare two different spectra; and even if 
the position of the absorption is the same in both cases, the relative inten- 
sity may vary considerably. Very closely allied colours may often be 
easily distinguished in this manner, and the only great difficulty is when 
coloured impurities are present. As an example, I give some colours be- 
longing to subgroup 1, B, aq, am, al, am,. 


, Carbonate of soda. Citric acid. 
Petals of Wallflower(Chet- | 51 mis 3 
ranthus Cheiri)...... jb. ee orig sano 
Dark jerapesy)ijs.yecle bs 4 21..--52...9  10..11-- AF sia Sb 84 
vent gr Lees Tee ne TY Ea AG east 
bucus nigra) ........ 


The first differs entirely from the latter two, but they are so similar that it 
requires great care to be sure that they differ essentially. Ifit were quite 
certain that such colours were pure, it would not be difficult to distinguish 
them with confidence; but since they may contain coloured impurities, 
we must occasionally be content with results somewhat doubtful in ques- 
tions of minute detail, which might not be of the least importance in some 
practical investigations. 


24. Yellow Colours. 


One of the best general methods of distinguishing yellow colours be- 
longing to subgroup C, aq, am,al,am,, or those with bands which are 
much alike, is to make them as nearly as possible of the same tint when 
neutral, and then to add excess of ammonia, which may make them very 
unequal. For example— 


Neutral. Ammonia. 
Yellow Dahlia (D. variabilis) ........ 8..9--l0—  3...4--453— 
Yellow Calceolaria (C. aurea-floribunda) 7...9--11—  63..63--7— 
Sattron, (Crocus satevus) 00)... 2). ee 7..8--l1— 7..8--11— 


The action of ammonia thus shows that they differ very much, but at the 
same time the Calceolaria might be a mixture of the other two, and this ~ 
would have to be decided by other facts. 


1867.] Colourzng-matters by the Spectrum Microscope. 4.55 


25. Fading of Group C. 

Sometimes in examining colours of group C, advantage may be taken of 
the different rate at which their acid solutions decompose and fade, when 
a considerable quantity of sulphite of soda has been added to an acid solu- 
tion. ‘The two solutions should be made as nearly equal as possible in all 
respects, and then the rate of fading may prove that they are very different, 
or may show that one is a mixture. After fading, the addition of excess 
of ammonia may show valuable facts. For example, the colour of the root 
of the red beet (Beta vulgaris) is pink, but that of the leaves is red, the 
spectrum differing from that of the root merely in having the blue end ~ 
much absorbed. On keeping acid solutions of both to which sulphite of 
soda has been added, that of the root becomes colourless, and that of the 
leaves yellow; and thus, considering that acid solutions of colours be- 
longing to group C are very rarely pink, it is almost certain that the 
colour of the leaves is the same as that of the root, but modified by the 
yellow colour so common in leaves. 


26. Conclusion. 


Such, then, is a general outline of the method which I have hitherto found 
the most convenient in studying different colouring-matters, and for de- 
termining to what individual species any particular colour may belong. I 
need hardly say that it is just the sort of qualitative analysis to employ 
in detecting adulterations in many substances met with in commerce, as well 
as in inquiries where very small quantities of material are at command. 
By this method we might be able in a few minutes to form a very satisfac- 
tory opinion, or at least one that might meet all practical requirements, and 
even under unfavourable circumstances we might narrow the inquiry to a 
surprising extent; and if this can be said even now, surely further research 
cannot fail to make it most useful in cases where ordinary chemical 
analysis would be of little or no use. 


The Society then adjourned over the Easter recess to Thursday, May 2. 


May 2, 1867. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


In conformity with the Statutes, the names of the Candidates recom- 
mended for election into the Society were read from the Chair, as follows :— 


William Baird, M.D. Edward Hull, Esq. 

W. Boyd Dawkins, Esq. Edward Joseph Lowe, Esq. 
Baldwin Francis Duppa, Esq. James Robert Napier, Esq. 
Albert C. L. G. Giinther, M.D. Benjamin Ward Richardson, M.D. 
Julius Haast, Ksq., Ph.D. J.S. Burdon Sanderson, M.D. 
Captain Robert Wolseley Haig, R.A. Henry T. Stainton, Esq. 

Daniel Hanbury, Esq. Charles Tomlinson, Esq. 


John Whitaker Hulke, Esq. 
VOL. KV. 2Q 


456 Mr. Claudet on a Focus-Equalizer for Photography. [May 2, 


A letter from the Foreign Office, addressed to the President, was read, 
communicating the following paragraph from the ‘ Moniteur,’ transmitted 
by H. M. Ambassador at Paris :— 

. ‘¢ Paris, le 27 Mars. 

“‘T’Empereur, dans sa sollicitude pour tout ce qui intéresse la science 
et les relations commerciales, a décidé que des officiers de la marine et des 
ingénieurs hydrographes seraient envoyés sur différents points du globe, 
dans le but de déterminer par des observations astronomiques un certain 
nombre de méridiens fondamentaux qui serviront a assurer la position 
géographique des lieux intermédiaires. | 

“Ce travail important permettra de corriger la Table des latitudes et 
longitudes insérée dans la Connaissance des temps, et dont les erreurs ont 
été signalées dans un rapport addressé au ministre de l’instruction pub- 
lique par le président du Bureau des longitudes.” 


The following communications were read :— 

I. “Optics of Photography.—On a Self-acting Focus-Equalizer,- or 
the means of producing the Differential Movement of the two 
Lenses of a Photographie Optical Combination, which is capable, 
during the exposure, of bringing consecutively all the Planes 
of a Solid Figure into Focus, without altering the size of the 
various images superposed.” By A. Craupnt, F.R.S. Re- 
ceived April 8, 1867. 


When a solid figure is brought too near the object-glass of a camera 
obscura, the difference of focus for its various planes is comparatively so 
great, that it is impossible that all the images should-be equally well de- 
fined. Hence, in the case of photographic portraiture, there is a want of 
harmony in the representation of the various parts; some are too sharply 
delineated, and some others are confused in proportion as they are more 
and more distant from the plane in focus. But there is another defect which 
is the consequence of the difference of distance of the various planes bear- 
ing too great a proportion to the distance of the whole, which is that 
the nearest parts of the figure are too much enlarged, and the furthest too 
much reduced. 

In a paper I read at the British Association at Nottingham in 1866, I 
proposed a plan to obviate these defects, which consisted in bringing all 
the planes consecutively into focus, by moving, during the exposure, the 
tube of the lens or the back frame of the camera ; the consequence of which 
was, of course, that the planes were also during that movement brought 
out of focus; so that a sharp image of every plane was impressed upon 
a confused image; but they were all in the same degree in that mixed 
state, and the result was an equality of effect producing harmony in the 
whole, and that kind of softness in the picture so much approved by 
artists, as resembling, more than the sharpest photographs, the effect that 
they aim at producing. | 


1867.] Mr. Claudet on a Focus-Equahzer for Photography. 457 


The original simple idea of equalizing the focus of the various planes by 
moving either the frame holding the plate, or the tube of the lens, during 
the exposure had, it appears, occurred to several persons engaged in photo- 
graphic pursuits (of which I was not aware before reading my paper}; but 
itis certain that the plan had never been practically and generally adopted, 
and that, at all events, no specimens of the process had at any time been 
exhibited in public, probably because it presented several difficulties which 
could not be easily overcome. The greatest of these difficulties I soon 
found durmg my investigations, which was that, in changing the focal 
distances merely by moving the frame or the tube, the size of the various 
superposed images was unavoidably reduced or increased according to the 
alteration of focus during the movement applied. 

Therefore I turned my attention to the means which might be found 
capable of avoiding this defect, and a fortunate idea presented itself, by 
which I found that it was possible to preserve the size of the various 
images during the adaptation of the focus to the different planes of the 
figure. 

The desideratum was, when changing the focus, to increase the power of 
the double lens for the planes the most distant and to reduce it for the 
nearest planes. At first this seemed to be an impossibility. But in con- 
sidering the subject attentively, I was suddenly struck with the fact that 
the power of any double combination of lenses being proportionate to the 
distance which separates the two lenses greater when they are more sepa- 
rated, and smaller when they are less separated, it was possible to alter the 
power of the combination by changing the distance between the two lenses. 

Therefore, if, instead of moving the whole tube containing the two lenses, 
we move only the back lens nearer the plate, when we want to focus for 
more distant planes, we increase at the same time the power of the double 
combination, and consequently the size of the image; and if we move the 
lens further from the plate, when we want to focus for the nearest planes, 
in doing so, by reducing the separation of the two lenses, we reduce the 
power of the combination, and consequently also the size of the image. 
This is a most fortunate property ; for by this means it is possible not only 
to equalize the definition of the various planes, but at the same time to 
equalize the size of their images, and consequently to avoid the exaggeration 
of perspective by which the nearest planes are inereased, and the furthest 
disproportionately reduced, a defect which is so detrimental to the ap- 
pearance of large photographs. 

I submitted my plan to M. Voigtlander, the celebrated optician, and I 
had the satisfaction to meet with his entire approbation. He found that 
I had solved the problem in a way which was perfectly correct and suf- 
ficient in practice. But wishing to investigate the question from a higher 
mathematical point of view, and being unable from indisposition to go 
himself into the subject, he charged his step-son, Dr. Sommer, Professor of 
Mathematics at the Carolinian College of Brunswick, well versed in al] the 


2Q2 


458 Mr. Claudet on a Focus Equalizer for Photography. (May 2, 


questions of optical photography, to calculate the result of the gradual 
increase and reduction of the power of the double combination, in con- 
junction with the alteration of focus. Dr. Sommer entered thoroughly 
into the subject, and soon sent me a series of elaborate formule, showing 
that, although for all practical purposes in photography the movement of 
one of the two lenses, as I had proposed, fulfilled the object I had in view, 
still he found that a more scientific consideration of the subject called 
for a modification in my plan; which was that, instead of moving only one 
of the lenses, the same degree of their separation should be imparted by 
moving the two lenses in contrary directions from the fixed centre of the 
combination, and in different proportions, according to the distance of the 
object. These differential proportions were indicated in a table calculated 
by Dr. Sommer which he sent me. 

This presented another difficult and unexpected problem, the solution 
of which was indeed most perplexing. But I did not like that it should be 
said that my plan was not completely in accordance with the mathematical 
laws of optics ; and I set to work at finding a mechanical means by which I 
could avail myself of the scientific calculations of Dr. Sommer. 

I have found such means ; and it turns out indeed that by my mechanical 
construction the differential movement can be effected, not only as readily 
and easily, but with a greater command and steadiness than by moving 
only one lens. The following is a description of the arrangement :— 


Description of the Focus-Equalizer. 


The tube, containing at each end the lenses A and B, is divided into 
two parts, sliding in the principal tube SSSS fixed in the front of the 
camera at V V’. 

Each tube has a strong pin, L and L’. These two pins are intended to push 
the tubes to and fro from the centre of the combination on the line P P’ 
by means of the mechanical piece NN’N” in the shape of a sextant, 
having two slits, M M and M’' M’, cut at an angle of 36°. Now the sextant, 
being mounted on a sliding bar q q’, fixed in a socket holding to the tube 
SSSS at PP’, can be made to move to and fro on the line P P’ by means 
of a rack and pimion moved by a handle V on the axis R. While the 
sextant moves in the line P P’, the two slits will act on the two pins, and 
gradually increase the separation of the tubes ; and on making the sextant 
move back from P’ to P, the slits will bring the two pins nearer each other, 
and decrease the separation of the tubes. - 

It will thus be easily understood how we can increase and reduce the 
separation of the two lenses from the centre of the combination; but 
we have now to explain how we can produce the differential movement 
according to the mathematical formule calculated by Dr. Sommer. 

The arc of the sextant is divided into 100 parts, in two rows one against 
the other. The divisions on the outer limb have their zero on the left, 


1867.] Mr. Claudet on a Focus Equalizer for Photography. 459 


and the 100 division on the right ; on the inside limb the divisions are in 
a contrary direction. 


By means of the endless screw X acting on the toothed edge of the 
sextant, it can be moved on its horizontal axis, so that any of its divisions 
may be brought under the index fixed on the middle bar qq’. 

Now, supposing that by the table of Dr. Sommer the lens A for a 
certain distance of the object should move 0-235, and the lens B 0-765 of 
the whole space by which the lenses require to be separated or approxi- 
mated, we turn the endless screw until the index is on the 234 division of 
the inside scale, and of course on the 764 division of the outside scale. 

In that position of the sextant the slits M M and M’ M’, by means of the 
pins attached to the tubes of the lens A and of the lens B, will make them 
A in the proportion of 0°235, and B in the proportion 
of 0°765 of the whole space. 

If for another distance the lens A should have to move 0°333, and the 
lens B 0-666, Behting both limbs of the sextant to these divisions, the lens 
A will move 3, and the lens B % of the whole space. ; 

If we wanted to move the two lenses in the same proportion, the sextant 
should be set so that the 50th division of both scales should be under the 


index. 
And, finally, if, for the sake of comparative experiments, it were wanted 


to move only the lens A or the lens B, the slit of the pin for either 
and the zero of the scale should be placed under the index, by which that 
lens would be completely stationary, and the whole motion imparted to 
the other. 


460 Dr. Duncan on the Genera Heterophyllia, &c. [May 2, 


II. “On the Genera Heterophyllia, Battersbyia, Paleocyclus, and 
Asterosmilia; the Anatomy of their Species, and their Position 
in the classification of the Sclerodermic Zoantharia.”” By Dr. 
P. M. Duncan, Sec. G.S. Communicated by Prof. Huxuey. 
Received March 30, 1867. 


(Abstract). 


Although the practical and natural classification of the Madreporaria 
(Sclerodermic Zoantharia) which has been submitted by MM. Milne- 
Edwards and Jules Haime is very generally admitted to be the best, still 
there are great gaps in the succession of the genera, and, moreover, some 
genera cannot be placed. 

The ‘‘ break ”’ between the Turbinolides and the Astreeides is so great as 
to render the classification rather artificial ; but Dr. Duncan’s discovery of 
a genus Asterosmilia, comprising several species, unites these great 
divisions. ‘The new genus has the peculiarities of the Trochocyathi, but in 
addition it is furnished with an endotheca. The species are described. 

The genera Heterophyllia, M°Coy, and Battersbyia, Milne-Edwards and 
Jules Haime, are amongst those incerte sedis. The discovery of several 
new species of Heterophyllia enables Dr. Duncan to determine the anatomy 
of the genus, to offer for consideration the most extraordinary coral form 
he has ever seen, and to ally the genus with Battersbyia, which he proves 
had no cenenchyma. The species of both of the genera are described 
shortly, and the development and reproduction of B. gemmans also. The 
genera are placed amongst the Astreeidze. 

The genus Paleocyclus, M.-K. & J. H., supposed to be one of the 
Fungidee, is proved to be a vesiculo-tubulate coral genus, and to be one of 
the Cyathophyllidze. : 

One Mesozoic family is therefore removed from the Paleozoic coral-fauna, 
and two genera of a Mesozoic division are introduced. They foreshadow 
the Thecosmilize of the Trias. 


III. “Contribution to the Anatomy of Hatteria (Rhynchocephalus, 
Owen).” By Aubert Gtnruer, M.A., Ph.D.. M.D. Commu- 
nicated by Prof. Owen. Received April 4, 1867. 


(Abstract. ) 


The skull of Hatteria is distinguished by the following characters :-— 

1. Persistence of the sutures, especially of those between the lateral 
nalves of the skull, combined with great development of its ossified parts, 
as it appears in the expanse of the bones forming the upper surface of the 
facial portion, in the completeness of an orbital ring with a temporal and 
zygomatic bar (Crocodilia), in the much expanded columella, in the nearly 
completely osseous bottom of the orbit, and roof of the palate. 


1867.] . Dr. Giinther on the Anatomy of Hatteria. 461 


2. Sutural union of the tympanic with the skull; firm and solid union 
of the bones of the palate with the tympanic, as shown by the sutural con- 
nexion of tympanic and pterygoid, broad sutural connexion of the colu- 
mella with tympanic and pterygoid, immoveable pterygo-sphenoid joint, 
firm and extensive attachment of pterygoid to ectopterygoid. 

3. This restriction of the mobility of the bones named is compensated 
by an increased and modified mobility of the lower jaw, the mandibles 
being united by ligament, and provided with a much elongate articula 
surface. | 

4, Displacement of the palatine bones, which are separated by the pter- 
ygoids, and replace a palatal portion of the maxillaries. 

5. Perforation of the tympanic ; extremely short postarticular process of 
the mandible. 

The vertebral column and the remainder of the skeleton show the fol- 
lowing peculiarities :— 

1. Vertebree amphiccelian ; caudal vertebrz vertically divided into two 
equal halves. Points of minor importance are the uniform development 
of strong neural spines, and the direction of the caudal pleurapophyses 
which point forwards. 

2. The costal heemapophyses are modified, first, into a series of ap- 
pendages identical in position with the uncinate processes of birds; and 
secondly, into a double terminal series connecting the ribs with the tho- 
racic and abdominal sterna, the distal pieces being much dilated and 
forming the base of a system of muscles (retractors of the abdominal ribs). 

3. The development of a system of abdominal ribs, standing in intimate 
and functional relation to the ventral integuments. 

4. Continuity of the ossification of the coracoid ; presence of an acro- 
mial tuberosity of the scapula ; subvertical direction of the os ilium. 

5. The arrangement of the bones of the limbs and their muscles does 
not show any deviation from the Lacertian type. 

The dentition of Hatteria is unique. That of young examples differs 
scarcely from the dentition of other acrodont lizards. In adult examples 
the intermaxillaries are armed with a pair of large cutting-teeth ; a part of 
the lateral teeth are lost, and the alveolar edges of the jaws are cutting and 
highly polished, performing the function of teeth. A series of palatine 
teeth is in close proximity and parallel to the maxillary series, both series 
receiving between them in a groove the similarly serrated edge of the 
mandible. : 

As regards the organs of sense, the absence of the pecten of the eye and 
of the tympanic cavity, the commencement of a spiral turn of the cochlea, 
and the attachment of the hyoid bone to the terminal cartilage of the 
stapes—are to be noticed. 

The structure of the heart and of the organs of respiration and circu- 
lation are of the Lacertian type. 

The absence of a copulatory organ is a character by which Hatteria is 


462 Prof. Cayley on the Curves [May 2, 


distinguished from all other Saurians. Thus Hatteria presents a strange 
combination of elements of high and low organization, and must be re- 
garded as the type of a distinct group. Its affinities and systematic 
position may be indicated in the following synopsis of RECENT REP- 
TILIA :-— 


I. SQ@uaMATA. 
First order. Ophidia. 
Second order. Lacertilia. 
Suborder A. Amphisbenoidea. 
Suborder B. Cionocrania. 
Suborder C. Chameleonoidea. 
Suborder D. Nyctisaura. 
Third order. Rhynchocephalia. 
II. Loricata. 

Fourth order. Crocodilia. 
III. CaTarHracta. 

Fifth order. Chelonia. 


IV. “On the Curves which satisfy given conditions.” By Prof. Cayiey, 
F.R.S. Received April 18, 1867. 


(Abstract.) 


The present memoir relates to portions only of the subject of the curves 
which satisfy given conditions; but any other title would be too narrow : 
the question chiefly considered is that of finding the number of the 
curves which satisfy given conditions ; the curves are either curves of a 
determinate order 7 (and in this case the conditions chiefly considered are 
conditions of contact with a given curve), or else the curves are conics ; and 
here (although the conditions chiefly considered are conditions of contact 
with a given curve or curves) it is necessary to consider more than in the 
former case the theory of conditions of any kind whatever. As regards 
the theory of conics, the memoir is based upon the researches of Chasles 
and Zeuthen, as regards that of the curves of the order r, upon the re- 
searches of De Jonquicres: the notion of the quasi-geometrical represen- 
tation of conditions by means of lociin hyper-space is employed by Salmon 
in his researches relating to the quadric surfaces which satisfy given con- 
ditions. The papers containing the researches referred to are included in 
a list subjoined. I reserve for a separate second memoir the application 
to the present question, of the Principle of Correspondence. 


L867.) which satisfy given conditions. 463 


V. “Second Memoir on the Curves which satisfy given conditions ; 
the Principle of Correspondence.”” By Professor Cayuey, F.R.S. 


Received April 18, 1867. 
(Abstract. ) 


In the present memoir I reproduce with additional developments the 
theory established in my paper ‘‘ On the Correspondence of two points on 
a Curve”? (London Math. Society, No. VII., April 1866); and I en- 
deavour to apply it to the determination of the number of the conics which 
satisfy given conditions; these are conditions of contact with a given 
curve, or they may include arbitrary conditions Z, 2Z, &c. If, for a mo- 
ment, we consider the more general question where the Principle is to be 
applied to finding the number of the curves C’ of the order 7, which satisfy 
given conditions of contact with a given curve, there are here two kinds 
of special solutions ; viz., we may have proper curves C” touching (spe- 
cially) the given curve at a cusp or cusps thereof, and we may have im- 
proper curves, that is, curves which break up into two or more curves of 
inferior orders. In the case where the curves C’ are lines, there is only 
the first kind of special solution, where the sought for lines touch at a 
cusp or cusps. But in the case to which the memoir chiefly relates, 
where the curves C’ are conics, we have the two kinds of special solutions, 
viZ., proper conics touching at a cusp or cusps, and conics which are line- 
pairs or point-pairs. In the application of the Principle to determining 
the number of the conics which satisfy any given conditions, I introduce 
into the equation a term called the ‘‘ Supplement ”’ (denoted by the abbre- 
viation ““Supp.’’), to include the special solutions of both kinds. The 
expression of the Supplement should in every case be furnished by the 
theory ; and this being known, we should then have an equation leading to 
the number of the conics which properly satisfy the prescribed conditions ; 
but in thus finding the expression of the Supplements, there are difficulties 
which I am unable to overcome; and I have contented myself with the 
reverse course, viz., knowing in each case the number of the proper solu- 
tions, I use these results to determine @ posteriori in each case the expres- 
sion of the Supplement ; the expression so obtained can in some cases be 
accounted for readily enough, and the knowledge of the whole series of 
them will be a convenient basis for ulterior investigations. 


May 9, 1867. 
Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 


Pursuant to notice given at the last Meeting, Mr. Webster proposed, and 
Mr. Heywood seconded, the Right Hon. Sir William Bovill, Lord Chief 
Justice of the Common Pleas, for election and immediate ballot. 

The ballot having been taken, the Lord Chief Justice Bovill was de- 
clared duly elected a Fellow of the Society. | 


464, Mr. W. H. Flower on the Development [May 9, 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “On the Development and Succession of the Teeth in the Mar- 
supialia.” By Wittiam Henry Fiownr, F.R.S., F.R.CS., 
&c., Conservator of the Museum of the Royal College of Sur- 


geons of England. 
(Abstract. ) 


Although the dentition of adult individuals of all the animals which con- 
stitute the remarkable Order or, rather, Subclass Marsupialia, has been 
repeatedly subjected to examination, and described with exhaustive minute- 
ness of detail, it is a singular circumstance that most of those peculiarities 
in the succession of their teeth which distinguish them from other mammals 
appear hitherto to have escaped observation. To supply this blank is the 
object of the present communication. Fortunately the materials at my 
disposal, although not quite so complete as might be desired, are yet 
amply sufficient to illustrate the main aspects of the question, and to 
supply a result as interesting as it was unexpected. 

Descriptions are given in the paper, accompanied by drawings, of several 
stages of the dentition of members of each of the six natural families into 
which the order is divided. ; 

1. Macropodide.—The dentition of the Kangaroo (genus Macropus), 
from the completely edentulous foetus to adult age, is described in detail. 
Contrary to what has been specially stated with regard to this genus, there 
are no deciduous or milk-incisors, the teeth of this group which are first 
formed and calcified in both jaws being those which are retained throughout 
the life of the animal. The rudimentary canine and first premolar have 
also no deciduous predecessors. The second tooth of the molar series (a true 
molar in form) is vertically displaced by a premolar. The four true molars 
have, as has long been known, no deciduous predecessors. There is thus 
but one tooth on each side of each jaw in which the phenomenon of diphyo- 
dont succession occurs. The period at which this takes place varies in 
different species of the family. In some forms of Hypsiprymnus, the suc- 
cessional premolar is not cut until after the last true molar is in place and 
use,—this probably having relation to the extraordinary size of the tooth, 
and the time consequently required for its development. A special charac- 
teristic of this family is the tendency to lose the canine and one or both 
premolars at a comparatively early period of life. 

.2. Phalangistide.—Several early stages of the dentition of Phalangista 
vulpina are described and figured. In a young specimen in which no teeth 
had cut the gum, the crowns of the permanent incisors, canine, and first 
two molars were found to be calcified, and the germ of the permanent pre- 
molar was already formed beneath the milk- or deciduous molar, which, as 
in Macropus, is the only tooth which is shed and replaced -by a successor. 
The change takes place at an earlier period than in the last family. 

3. Peramelide.—No very early stages of Perameles were examined ; but 


1867. ] and Succession of the Teeth in the Marsupialia. 465 


adolescent specimens of this genus and of Cheropus show that a very 
minute, compressed, molariform tooth is replaced by the triangular, pointed, 
third or posterior premolar. No other signs of vertical displacement and 
succession were observed. 

4. Didelphide.—In the American genus Didelphys, the observations are 
complete from the earliest stage, and show that, as in the Australian Ma- 
cropodide and Phalangistide, none of the teeth of the permanent series 
have predecessors except the compressed pointed last premolar, which 
replaces a tooth having the broad multicuspidate crown of a true molar. 

This change does not occur until the animal approaches the adult age. 

5. Dasyuride.—In a foetal Thylacinus, in which no teeth had cut the 
gum, the crowns of the permanent incisors, canines, premolars, and ante- 
rior true molars were partially calcified, and necessarily much crowded 
together in the jaw. A very minute rudimentary molar was situated just 
beneath the alveolar mucous membrane, superficially to the apex of the 
hindermost premolar, and was evidently its milk-predecessor. 

6. Phascolomyide.—This family is placed last because the observations 
regarding it are less complete than in the case of any of the others. The 
youngest Wombat available presented no evidence of succession of any of 
the teeth; but it is probable that the single premolar is preceded by a 
milk-molar, at a still earlier period than any examined. 

From the foregoing observations it may be concluded with tolerable 
safety that the animals of the Order Marsupialia present a peculiar condi- 
tion of dental succession, uniform throughout the order, and distinct from 
that of all other mammals. This peculiarity may be thus briefly ex- 
pressed. The teeth of Marsupials do not vertically displace and succeed 
other teeth, with the exception of a single tooth on each side of each jaw. 
The tooth in which a vertical succession takes place is always the corre- 
sponding or homologous tooth, being the hindermost of the premolar series*, 
which is preceded by a tooth having the characters, more or less strongly 
expressed, of a true molar. 

It has been usual to divide the class Mammalia, in regard to the mode of 
formation and succession of their teeth, into two groups—the Monophyodonts, 
or those that generate a single set of teeth, and the Diphyodonts, or those 
that generate two sets of teeth; but even in the most typical diphyodonts 
the successional process does not extend to the whole of the teeth, always 
stopping short of those situated most posteriorly in each series. The 
Marsupials occupy an intermediate position, presenting as it were a rudi- 
mentary diphyodont condition, the successional process being confined to a 
single tooth on each side of each jaw. ‘This position, however, is by no 
means without analogy among the mammals of the placental series. In 
the Dugong and the existing Elephants the successional process is limited 

* The convenient distinction between false molars or premolars and true molars, is 


always well marked in the form of the crown, especially in the upper jaw, in the 
Marsupials. 


4.66 Mr. W. H. Flower on the Development | May 9, 


to the incisor teeth. It is questionable whether the first premolar of those 
animals of this group which have four premolar teeth, as the Hog, Dog (man- 
dible), &c., ever has a deciduous predecessor, at all events so far advanced 
as to have reached the calcified stage. But the closest analogy with the 
marsupial mode of succession is found among the Rodents. Here the incisors 
appear to have no deciduous predecessors ; and in the Beaver, Porcupine, 
and others, which have but four teeth of the molar series, 7. e. three true 
molars and one premolar, the latter is, exactly as in the Marsupials, the 
only tooth which succeeds a deciduous tooth. The analogy, however, does 
not holdin those Rodents which have more than one premolar, as the Hare ; 
for in this case each of these teeth has its deciduous predecessor. 

In the preceding account I have used the term “permanent ”’ for those 
teeth which remain in use throughout the animal’s life, or, if they fall out 
(as do the rudimentary canines and the premolars of the Macropodide), 
do not give place to successional teeth ; and I have therefore assumed that 
the milk or temporary dentition of the typical diphyodont mammals is re- 
presented in the Marsupials only by the deciduous molars. It may be held, 
on the other hand, that the large majority of the teeth of the Marsupials are 
the homologues of the milk or first teeth of the diphyodonts, and that it is 
the permanent or second dentition which is so feebly represented by the 
four successional premolars. This view is supported by many general 
analogies in animal organization and development, such as the fact that the 
permanent state of organs of lower animals often represents the immature 
or transitional condition of the same parts in beings of higher organization. 

Looking only to the period of development of the different teeth in some 
of the marsupial genera, we might certainly be disposed to place the suc- 
cessional premolar in a series by itself, although, indeed, all its morphological 
characters point out its congruity with the row of teeth among which it 
ultimately takes its place, the reverse being the case with its predecessor. 
It is, however, almost impossible, after examining the teeth of the young 
Thylacine described and figured in the paper, to resist the conclusion 
originally suggested. The unbroken series of incisors, canines, premolars, 
and anterior true molars of nearly the same phase of development, with 
posterior molars gradually added as age advances, form a striking contrast 
to the temporary molar, so rudimental in size, and transient in duration. 
I can scarcely doubt that the true molars of this animal would be iden- 
tified by every one as homologous with the true molars of the diphyodonts, 
which are generally regarded as belonging to the permanent series, although 
they never have deciduous predecessors. Now, if the homology between 
the true molars of the Thylacine and those of a Dog, for instance, be 
granted, and if the anterior teeth (incisors, canines, and premolars) of the 
Thylacine be of the same series as its own true molars, they must also be 
homologous with the corresponding permanent teeth of the Dog. 

It may be objected to this argument, that the true molars of the diphyo- 
donts, not being successional teeth, ought to be regarded as members of the 


1867.] and Succession of the Teeth in the Marsupiala. 4.67 


first or milk- series; but, in truth, the fact that they have themselves no 
predecessors does not make them serially homologous with the prede- 
cessors of the other teeth, while their morphological characters, as well as 

their habitual persistence throughout life, range them with the second or 
_ permanent series. 

We have been so long accustomed to look upon the second set of teeth as 
an after-development or derivative from the first, that it appears almost 
paradoxical to suggest that the milk- or deciduous teeth may rather be a 
set superadded to supply the temporary needs of mammals of more complex 
dental organization. But it should be remembered that, instead of there 
being any such relation: between the permanent and the milk-teeth as that 
expressed by the terms “‘progeny”’ and “‘ parent’”’ (sometimes applied to 
them), they are both (if all recent researches into their earlier development 
can be trusted) formed side by side from independent portions of the pri- 
mitive dental groove, and may rather be compared to twin brothers, one of 
which, destined for early functional activity, proceeds rapidly in its develop- 
ment, while the other makes little progress until the time approaches when 
it is calied upon to take the place of its more precocious locum tenens. 

Many facts appear to poit to the milk-teeth as being the less constant 
and important of the two sets developed in diphyodont dentition. Among 
these the most striking is the frequent occurrence of this set in a rudimen- 
tary and functionless or, as it were, partially developed state. The milk- 
premolars of some Rodents (as the Guinea-pig), shed while the animal is 
in utero, the simple structure and evanescent nature of the milk-teeth of 
the Bats, Insectivores, and Seals, the diminutive first incisors of the 
Dugongs and Elephants, all appear to be cases in point. On the other 
hand, examples of the commencing or sketching out, as it were, of the 
successors to a well-formed, regular, and functional first set of teeth, are 
rarely, if ever, met with. Occasional instances of the habitual early deca- 
dence, or, perhaps, absence of some of the second or so-called permanent 
teeth occur in certain animals ; but these are rather examples of the disap- 
pearance or suppression of organs of which there is no need in the economy, 
and chiefly occur in isolated and highly modified members of groups in 
the other members of which the same phenomenon does not occur, as in 
Cheiromys among the Lemurs, Trichechus among the Seals, and the 
recent Elephants (as regards the premolars) among the Proboscideans. 
They form no parallel to the cases mentioned above of the rudimentary 
formation of an entire series of teeth of the temporary or milk-set. 

To return to the marsupials :—If this view be correct, I should be quite 
prepared to find, in phases of development earlier than those yet examined, 
some traces either of the papillary, follicular, or saccular stages of milk- 
predecessors to other of the teeth besides those determinate four in which, 
for some reason at present unexplained, they arrive at a more mature 
growth*, Such proof as this would alone decide the truth of these specu- 

* It may be remarked that the milk-tooth, which alone is developed in the Marsu- 


468 Prof. W. J. M. Rankine on a Property of Curves. [May 9, 


lations; and I have not at present either the requisite leisure or materials 
for following out so delicate an investigation. I trust that the facts already 
elicited are sufficiently novel and important to justify my bringing them, as 
they now stand, before the Society. 


II. “On a Property of Curves which fulfil the condition 


2 
ae = Wy =0.” By W. J. Macquorn Ranxine, C.EH., LL.D., 
dx® " dy? 


F.R.SS.L. & E. Received April 9, 1867. 


1. Ina paper “‘ On Stream-Lines,”’ published in the Philosophical Ma- 
gazine for October 1864, I stated, and, in a Supplement to the same paper, 
published in the Philosophical Magazine for January 1865, I proved the 
proposition that “all waves in which molecular rotation is null begin to 
break when the two slopes of the crest meet at right angles.” 

2. I have now to state the purely geometrical proposition of which that 
mechanical pinpesiaam, is aconsequence. Jf a plane eurve which fulfils 


the condition oo + ane cuts itself in a double point, it does so at 


right angles. 

3. The following is the demonstration. It is well known that the ineli- 
nation of any plane curve to the axes at an ordinary point is given by the 
equation 


do do 
m7} “Tt dy—): 
oe ae ries 0; 


also that at a double point = = and - both vanish, so that the inclinations 


of the two branches to the axes are given by the two roots of the quadratic 
equation 


a*¢ do URI one aA. 
°F ax? ee a =) 5 


whence it follows that the product of the two values of 4 5 “¥, which are the 
P 


d*p 
dx? in 


two values of the tangent of the inclination to the axis of x, is = oe 


d 2 
acurve which fulfils the before-mentioned condition, the value of fh pro- 
duct is —1; and when such is the case with the product of the tangents of 
two angles, the difference of those angles is a right angle; therefore the 
two branches cut each other at right angles. Q.E.D. 

4, The proposition just demonstrated is so simple and so obvious, that 


pials, corresponds homologically with that which, as a general rule, is most persistent 
in the typical diphyodonts, including Man, viz. the posterior milk-molar, replaced by 
the posterior permanent premolar. 


1867.] Prof. W. J. M. Rankine on a Property of Curves. 469 


I was at first disposed to think it must have been known and published 
previously ; and had I not been assured by several eminent mathematicians 
that it-had not been previously published to their knowledge, I should not 
have ventured to put it forth as new. 


Supplement to the preceding Paper. Received April 23, 1867. 


Professor Stokes, D.C.L., has pointed out to me an extension of the pre- 
ceding theorem, viz. Pat at ee multiple point in a plane curve which 


ome ny ian =0, the branches make equal angles with 


each other; so that, ., deci if x branches cut each other at a multiple 
point, they make with each other 2n equal angles of =. 
n 


The following appears to me to be the simplest demonstration of the ex- 
tended theorem. At a point where z branches cut each other the follow- 
ing equation is fulfilled by all curves : 


(es, te al o=0. 
Let 6 be the angle made by any branch with the axis of 2; then 


(cos 0 7, i == ino) g=0. 


But in a curve which fulfils the equation “t+¢ at =(), we have 


whence it follows that in such a curve the equation of a multiple point of 
branches is 


—_—  , d #5 
| (cos 8+ ¥ —1.sin 0) = o=0. 


Choose for the axis of x a tangent to one of the branches at the multiple 
point. Then it is evident that the preceding equation is satisfied by the 2x 
values of 6 corresponding to the 2th roots of unity, that is to say, by 


e=0, % ag Se ee 
nm n n 


therefore the z branches make with each other 27 equal angles of . Q.E.D. 


470 Mr. S$. E. Hoskins on a Tabular Form of Analysis. [May 9, 


III. “A Tabular Form of Analysis, to aid in tracing the Possible In- 
fluence of Past and Present upon future states of Weather.” By 
S. Evurotr Hoskins, F.R.S., &. Received March 28, 1867. 


The data upon which the present communication is founded are derived 
from the ‘Greenwich Reports,’ from Mr. Glaisher’s papers in the Philo- 
sophical Transactions, and from my own observations at Guernsey. The 
latter were commenced in the autumn of 1842, in accordance with the re- 
commendations of the Committee of Physics of the Royal Society, and 
were taken at the request of Professor Daniell, by whom the imstruments 
employed were selected. These instruments, made by Newman, were after 
a time replaced by others, at the suggestion of Mr. Glaisher, by whom 
they were compared with the standards at the Royal Observatory. 

For my own guidance im the first instance, I sought to arrange the re- 
sults thus obtained in such a manner as to discover, if possible, whether 
any month or class of months stood to each other in the relation of cause 
and effect ; in other words, whether the atmospheric conditions of autumn - 
exercised any distinguishable influence upon the fruitful or unfruitful 
character of ensuing seasons. 

In order to attain this object, the principle seemed to be that of con- 
densing within narrow limits, by means of intelligible symbols, as many 
elements of weather, in the popular acceptation of the word, as might be 
required. But the ordinary curvilinear form of diagram could not be so 
modified as to answer this purpose, and I therefore availed myself of a plan 
suggested by Mr. Galton :—that of converting the records of observations 
into appropriate signs, and placing them compactly in a series of squares. 

Upon this principle the annexed diagrams* are constructed, comprising 
those elements of weather which more directly affect vegetation; viz. heat, — 
cold, dryness, moisture, and their combinations. The same kind of pre- 
paratory steps were taken for the compilation of the Greenwich as for the 
Guernsey diagram, so as to render the results comparable—less, perhaps, 
for the sake of mere comparison, than for the purpose of testing the value 
of the latter by means of an accredited standard. 

The first process consisted in copying out the degrees of monthly mean 
temperature, the number of rainy days, and the days of wind, from four 
directions, intermediate to the cardinal points. These several copies being 
verified, the monthly average of each of the above elements for twenty 
years, from 1843 to 1862, was taken. 

The next step was to obtain the difference between the adopted average 
and the mean of each month in every year. By prefixing the plus and 
minus signs to the resulting figures, the excess and defect of each element 
is shown. 

The third process was to separate the above-mentioned series of years 


* [The diagrams are not published, but are preserved for reference in the Archives 
of the Society. | 


Tas 


[To face p. 470. 


ays in Excess and Defect of an average of Twenty Years, 
at Guernsey. 


o 
ate T Sia Rime la OU eet On aoe Ore -fAsn| —ee 
® 9 ee eA Ola stn le Ove Bay Bi lB 
Se a ee a cere) ere) fateh Nl ay 
SMe tee rc ee Es Se 5: ere) bo AR) eR ees © 
f&t2} +6;/—3/ —-4/—-3}/+1/—2] -1/+4 
6 air ese LON |e iat 2e al ge eg og ee eo 
3 SMa eee i le ccs Se aia | Pil tote) al eeapor Qe Oa tad 
9 a= SH 6 Se, S22 —= i | — © +4 Be 
BE = 4 = =6) = = © == = 
Months { 6 ie Sie te Seat Rei ba ae, ae 41.08 
“2 ey re ae pa ee | 
G3 4 7 5 Gi) mG 5 5 Gil Gz 
ey 6 3 5 4 4 5 5 4] 58 
‘s Sn SG 4+2/;—2/+3m|+1 =o semen 
g -8 eet ute 2A Se eR eA ee a 
Sama geen aE aes PSB A Belk Fags ih epg 
ae aie sae Soria ai Bo) She 2 Wee ee a3 |. 6 
ro V5 —=—2 |— 2) —6 |— of ++-4/+ 1 Or | aaa 
8 |+3 SBT NES) pig an A er ee ea et + 3 
2 CMM si Shh eS) car ct hate Ole Sak h | eda 
| I SECS) Ne is 0 Wal = I ok oa ee 
Es —7 |} + 3;/ +8 | — 1 l-+4]/— 8} +7°| — 6 
2 wes SSG SET a Bea + 2 
monte 5 5 c 8 2 5 8 4 | 66 
Degi 3 5 5 5 2 8 5 2 6} 54 
Oe 
7 ai +4 alls Ae Ae he ae +1 = 4 
) ee RON aes FeO Nh Oe EN OE TOG a ae 4 
(i SS eel As lerelegi Wee TO. becte 2 2 | 7 
He 2 +3 —I —3 +2 +16 | —I0 +1 + 1 


Taste I.—Monthly Mean Temperature in Excess and Defect of an average of Twenty Years, 
at Guernsey. } [Zo face p. 470. 


Tasre IT.—Number of rainy days in Excess and Defect 
| Jan. | Feb. |Marcb.| April.| May. TE July. | Aug. | Sept. | Oct. | Noy. DES | y ny at Guernsey. ~ ct of an average of Twenty Years, 
f 20 - ; - 4 . 5 - i 7 J | 
ee. se } 43'5| 42°5| 43'7| 47:2] 519] 56:7] 6075] 607] 584) s4-2} 483) 4574 Jan. | Feb. [March,| April. | May. | June. | July, | Aug. | Sept. | Oct. | Nov. | Dec, 
1843.|+ o8 ie zol|+ col+ ri|— o2|— 1°7\|+ 03]/+ 09|+ 3:1] —o'2 |4+ 1°3\+ 2" Average of 20 2 } 
( Pelee 23\— o6|+ r7|+ 46|+ rol+ 22\/4+ 03|— o7|4+ 18|+o2 |+ 10\— 7G years ...... 18 13 5 3 an ro fj om 1 ma} x8 | 37 | 437 
3 | 45\— o4|— 26|— 45|— 03|/— 03|+ 24)— 05|— 1°3|— 0'9| —orx |+ 25 |+ 14 SS ——| a St 
3 46.)+ 31+ 45|+ 29/4 17|+ 2°9|+ 65 )/4+ 2°6|+ 24/+ 33) +07 |+ 13 )— 37 1843) +3 |) +5)—4] +7] +9 | +7] -2|—o/—6/+6] +4/—1 
Ct 47.)— 14|— 174|— 0°3)/— 06|+ 2'7/+ 073/+ 3:0/+ Vo|— o2]|-+o'9 |+ 31/+ 18 44 —2 | +12} + 6] +9 —7)}—4/ -o;+3}/—o}/ +1] —1]/—8 
Sy 48l— 28|+ 33/4 23\+ zojt 58/4 o1|+ o4|— r2|+ o9|+o:r |— o4/+ 28 | 45| —2 1— 6] +2) 43] —r ]—al ta} — 0] + 3] — 91) —o | ty 
a 494+ 22|+ 44lt v8|— r1|+ 16/4 22\/+ vol+ 21/+ 05) +02 |+ 1°3/— 09 3 46) +2 |/—3/+ 5] +3 | +1] —2] +1] +5/—0]/ +7] -4]—0 
& 50.\— 4'o|+ 3:6|— 03|+ o7|— 06 |+ 1°9|+ 0:7 |— oF |— or | —3°7 J+ 1°5/+ 08 3 Cale ome! +3] — Fea $6 f= 3h] al gh ea 
5rj+ 32)+ wxrj+ 18)+ o1!— o4|+ 19)+ 4°5 + 21|+ o4| tor |— 38|— os = 48. a +11} +11 in BY +10 fs +13 i 3 i 5] +2 a ° 
4 *1]— O'5|/— 0'9|— 0'3]— 1° A "2|— a8 | —3: . 6 a 49. 2) = son — Fee r |— 7 2/-7 a 2] -o 5 
Gee 2) ee 2 Eu 3 SB )pe Sane OF = AD ae A ue Ss i 50.) —o | + 3 sa +9 +5 |) — 4] +a tba] m2 Oo} +4 ST. 
Warm) 6 6 6 6 5 8 9 6 6 6 8 6 78 sr) +3 | —6}) +3] 42] —3 |} — 5] -o}—2]/—5]— 0] +4] — 
Months { Qyta 4 4 4 4 5 2 I 4 4 4 2 as 42 z K 524) <7 | —3)|—11} +6 ae EZ, | SS Som es | ery tr tees 
+1375 |+18°0 | 11°5 | +102 |+14°0|+17°5 +162 |+ 87 |)+10's| +32 |+15°7|+3143 | +1533 =e | aaa cae =) es oe 
Degrees ||" 783 |" Gel selo vole wale alee peti roll th o:|| aca) | an gill lecea Dry 5 5 5 3 4 7 5 Gi} 36 5 
86 56 |— 2°9|— 18|— 3 5|— 33 7° |= 42|— 97|— 55 Months { tay : RS amar ae sarin 
- Se ore 
853.4 2° f q 07 |= 14 |— 2:2 |— 2°5|— 21 2'5|—o'8 |— 02 |— 43 ] x ] re ] = aa 
; sack ae — oe + a + o8|— 12|— 4:0|— 1'99|— 0°3/+4+ or] —0'7 r8|/+ ro (-853)/) bea] chez) | ob 35] rae _ usa = + H + d a} + ‘ 
& 55./— 3°4|— 6o|— 2°3/— 28|/— 3:1/— 2°9/— 13/— o72|— 0199] —o'5 22\— 25 a Sse Sulicoae oe ¢ +7 a ah cege is : Sawer 5 | 5, | aan 
8 56/+ os|+ x5|— 15|— 05 |— 2°6|— 14 |— 16)-4+ o19|— 21) 07 |— o8|4+ m2 3 > =o man pee 7 a = ee a fey | SE 
eS] 57.\— o8|— o8|— or |— 13 )— o2|+ r2]+ r2|+ 19+ 24) +16 [+ 26|+ 3:2 2 SE litiee S| es ¥ = pes See, | ta | tes ti] hea ee 
3 58..— o8|— 15 |— o7|+ r2|— r9]+ 1r7|\— 2°8|— o6|+ 17] +04 |— 2°6|+ 8 S ao at =e ow # —3 | orl 0 | — a) | — a ar es 
s | 59(+ r6|+ gxi+ 2°6|+ rol— 13)+ o2/+ 46)+ 22|/— 04) +03 |+ o2\— 21 z oa eer =) ia Rr a | RE Korean tect x 
BI (Goll area] = BES ns hed | me 20)| ted G8 oe A Aa) | eg | Salleee + =o | -+ a | ppelebo | err | —3 |] eran pet) —3 | cae 
Me 61.J\— 47|+ r2\+ 16 ro/— 10 14 2'8 o4|/— o8| +33 |— r7|— o1 a eee ; selfs a ial |e Jog |) ee fe wea | — 8 | oetaml liee 
Gail — sora O79 | 372 tae NCL 0S | Gal = 4 oa | eos | ba | ex | ceil eee — a |. tacay lice eam Vara 
2 2 3 3 | 6 2 5 42 oe tne hal ane Ta oe ar Gil era | est ee 66 
LPs tear oi ai al 7 7) sh aieal oe Monthe{PH] S| 8] 4) 17) 5 | SAGE ett ts ae ee ae 
+ s9/+ G7|+ 63/+ 34/+ 22|4+ 31|— 58/+ S:0/+ 3:9 +63 |+ 28\+ 92) + 601 5 esi es cae _ aie 
Degrees 10°§|— 17:3 |—11°3 |— 109 |—12"7 |—18'5 20'6 |—10'4 |—11°6 | —371 |—14°0 |—12"1 | —153'0 ”q in in 7 = 
e Ss a. He & + -7 +2) + 5/41 aed bcm 
7 "el 2153] 32 | Sie a ee 
1863.)-+ r4[+ 24|4+ 174 |+ o6/— 17|— 26|— 13)— 04|— 3'8|—ro |+ O3/— 22 ee ae <5 | —aie|| eesti rails Ih edhe esta ano ryt latte tel eos 7 
64J— r8{— g2|+ rxlt r1|[+ 14|— 24|— 174|— 2:0|— 017) —o'9 |— O19 |— 2°5 Ge a6. | eae | steal MCReaia le ee lem Vesa pena UectaG |sG) that ats 
65.(— r7|— v7 |— 47|+ 27/4 o7|+ O8|+ o5|— 03) 44 +22 |+ 12\+ 04 Gy ihe | 
| 66, a7 \+ ax i— r4|+ o5|— 20|+ o4|— 21|— 22|— 26) +07 |+ 13/4 26 
67..— 3°5|— ae = = = = = is = = a 


December. 


6 


November. 


—3\|\— o|— 6| +6] —o||+12 
—O||— O}— 4) 42) 42 |= 
3 || 3\—— 4) 20) eae 


=I 


October. 


— 1/+2/)|+2 


September. 


Se) Seth l= Cl 32) a So 


SH lise gi —Ol== 4 =O |= ©) =e 2) sea 


—2\|+ 6|—4/— 1|—1 


ol 


—3) +4 3)-ti— 5) br — 4/45) 2) —3 |= Ol 4) 44) gee ee 


+2 


of Twenty Years, at Guernsey. 


ugust. 


OR fo} ee Ind aA SHH [ mote 
| + Pt ++++i4+4+t}] 1 +44) 
1 00 NFO HH FAMNDNM TMH A te + 
li+ bl tr+tttirt+] | te tti 
Ps oa) Be et Spat enema orn 
celled! Psst see sole hse 
er CO Salis aos ge Stags <b ah) MM AO 
le pfedienwell Valk Spel bead les Lae lh ail [erteatee lee 
+¢+0 +O, ARO MMNMEMMO mo0 + 
oP lleclealelleae sels seseseae tk aise alle 
me tom + Fatt a NH ONS wooadnr 
be Se se lar Lied Th Sse ese ar ll qpaell 
Spb) elec) oes ++ a 00 roo TOO Wolo) 
Sear bell sel (eae altel alee listen 
mama aA + ROO NO FRE OF See te Se wvraoOot 
este tbeeillis eed ear Woeae bash ar laele i | 
Hera mM OS mr OFrhrON ANS mMoOdRn 
ar il tell tell sel) sear) seer sear ae ae | 
owrnanom eta Mee OO Ha mt O00 
lara dhe | festa steel leleeleate alee elc 
+ +H AawmtomMmMtrO HO O + 
Ve eb Peet eee a 
oa fe + Ado NM NHA MO A SiO 7060 
fod de ode ALT IE sea ce] t+i+1 
cel ro} Smee Ommow MO a 
eae EL hae Peete ey poe: 
eta MO mea MANCO tT AO can O 
saa lee ted ol sec oie Asst sie | | Seeds 
cn ora mnt tees wn a 
ne eee ee ie eee 
DA++ronNH SO SO OS CO O20 ile) OO) 
(abe Gee Lorie ite bie Alia 
as OaxHH OOF AHH MO MOH ST eeane 
flats tt Pitter ei tt ] | tp sy 
wo KunMmOnR mo tH HOWOO +H Reommino 
(Rist alee lat Walestes| lal al ape! ay ef] 
= aa w ON + a 9 Fas 


cond decade.—1853 to 1862. 


DWNOUN YANO? 4 


at ef ro ; Warm. Cold. 
Bm] ei ie | ee 8 
a | 3 Pee So een Me Shullee Dry.|Wet.| Dry.|Wet. | 
5 so ,° =) o | "O Db (5) 
ieee |e ls | 6 8 Pri eeepc Ae 
S/F |/a)/al/o|/4sa are bo} 4, al = 
( 1843. B D d Cc d d Cc c (e) I 5 6 
poe De | ¢ | a |\@c.| d | b Bee lie Ua ad ete a 
Peewee Ch dh elec ib dal e@. |e ed, MH ig tek a] a) 
Boe De Ard a bl id (acd ex |b Pe ie ‘iy 4 "We 8 
47.| C Betis: Ot ke Dh 6) ae line OF Sahn 3 5 
4 48.| C | Bie c DD) aiesianiele:c b 3 2 Te ERG: 
Boeri Alay | at s| dol bi | ala Siegel ace 5 eat Qo). i/Elg' 
peer Bie | dil di.) «|e | d SALE Tall lead at 
eon i v id |e .\ a@ | a | d. |} e Bol 20 ae Seg 
eB Ald |e.) d |b | ¢ | b Be Wael gal 
ead A) 1 | 4/2 | 2 I Z| Malo a EDR 21 
arm —_ is (Pe, ae 42 
Wet B 5 210 I 2 3 fe) 4 21 
(Dry Chie). x 3 6 I 2a 6 3 45 
ol —_|_ as see PN ae Mars 
eeO Gow sis |x) 6 | 2 | 2+ 2 33 
AE VE I EES BS a le se Ee SN 
October. November. December. Total. 


1. [Warm. Cold. |Warm.| Cold. |Warm.| Cold. |Warm.} Cold. 


—S = 
—_ —_} ——. 


a, “her 
First decade. A 6 4 8 2 6 4 78 42 
6 4 2 8 5 5 42 78 


Second _,, al 


Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. 


5 5 5 5 6 4 Oe Ye 
Cte hee 8 2 * 6 66 | 54 


First decade. <A 
Second _,, a 


a+b 


| 


Tasur ILI.—Direction of Wind. Number of Days in Excess and Defect of an average of Twenty Years, at Guernsey. 


| January. February. March. April. May. June. July. August. September. October. November. December, 
| 
| | 
4 : 
= le | |g Blt Ele SIF IES IA IEE lala Ele lala lelela PIlE/G IA IEE lA IA lE IE lala le 

SIEIE HIS BIE IS IS CIES IEE IGlSIe elal@lelelalalelelalalelala@lalalelalalele lala lela la lale le le 
@lolel7is|s)slalrlol7|sixolol7i4i2|si7i4i 8] 9] 2] 3] 8 |r] | 2 i 6 | 3} zo] 2 |) 8 | | 3 6 | 9 |e] s 7 | ce] 7 | 6 | 7 8 (a0 
| Basic) ace ses ta ee Bese aca eel || ss (Co [28 
1843.| — 1|— —3|—4} 4+2||+ 2!—5|—0} +3]/— 6 +3] +3]/—ol— 5) +2] +1] +3]/+ 5] -ol— 2)/—3|| 6] +4]+ 2) +2] +2] —3)— 3] +4) 3) +2|— 5) +3]\— 4) +5] +2) —3||— o|— 31) +4] —3]— ol— sl 4a 
Pel galeeel og |e al as| eal cel aloz|tal| mele s| 42 |—al—al-eral —s =6}—4||— 1} —xr]+ 1] +1]] 0] +4/— 3] —1]] 1} +1 SQ(EAIEL Gene qealle aaj de qtéladiieg— As 
45.) —5| —o| +2] +3]) +3] +3] —6 o|/+ 6|—o 21—4|/+ 3] —2| —1 Ol elaea Ol ailhe Ol Cll 2 —o|—5|+ 5] —o|] —o| +2) —1}]—1 4 1) +1|— of —2}/— 4) +5] —1 —o||— ol— al +2] +42/— 64 6 46 
46|—a| +3] 42] 1) —3| 43 —1| 43 /— 2] +4] +5|—2||— 1] +2] —0]—1||— of +2] +3]—4 [+32] 4 |= 5|—3]]—3|—2]+ 2] +2] 44) 2) sa} —r/4 3)—ol— 3) —ol— of +2) +x} —3/+ 3|— 4/42] —a)4 64 ol —¢ 
47.|+4|—4] —3| +31] +2] +1} —1| —2\|+ 3] —3| —2] +2||— 8] +7] +3] —2||— 7] -0| 44] 43|/+ 3) >2)— oot +5|+2|— 6-1] +4| +4) —6|—21— 9) +9)+ 3] —4\|+ 3) —4|—0} +3]/— 5]+ 41-3] +4]|— 3/4 3|—3 
48.| +7] —o| —5| —2 || —6| +3] +7] —3/— 7) +8] +1] —2]|— 0} —1| +2) —1||+10) —3| —5 —2||— 3} —2}/+ 7|/—al| +2|—2/+ 3) —1]) -—5)—1] +7) —1 11+ 4) —2|— 4] 4+2]|+ 2) —2| +4| —4||— 3]+ 8] —1 =4\= o— 3144 
43! —2| +4] +3|—sl]—s| +4] +3] —2||+ 2] +1] —4]-+1]|— 3] +3) —n]42|/+ 3] +1] —1|—3||+ 7) +6/—10| —3]) +r) —o|— 1) 0 =3| +8] —5|—ol+ 4|—4|— 2|-+2]1+ 4|—4) +2|—2||— 3|— 1) +4|—oll+ 3l4 i]—a 
50.) +6} —2| —2| —2 ] —5} +2] +5] —2]|+ 5] —1|—3]—1||— 3] —4] +5) +2)/— 1) +2 —2|+1|/+ 3} —o|— 2|—1]] —1] +2]/— of —1]] —4| +3) +3] —2 11+ 5] -3|— 1) —-1]|+ 1] +4] —2] —3]/— 2/— 0] +6] —4}\— g/— y|_-y 
7} —6|—31 +5] +4|| +4] —3| —4| +3 |— 9] +3] +7) —2]]+ 3] +2] +2] —4]/— 2) +3|—1|—ol]/+ 1/—1/+ 3) —3]] —3) +3|= 9) —0 +3 | 2] —0) =r 7] —2/— 3) —2)1-+ 4) —1) —0] —3 ||— 2/10] —3] —§||-brx|— a| —3 
52. 6] —4| +6|+4||—2] +7] —2| —2||-+12] —8| —5| +1]/ +14] -9] —5|—o + 4] —3|—2) +1]]— 8) —7|+13) +2 |] +6) —2)— 6] +2} =r] —5| +7) —1|— 5) +6|— 3) +2+ 6 —0| —3|}—3)/— 4i— 3) +4} +3]/— 7i— 3] +8 
| } + 3} —4]—o|+1]/— 8] +9) —2) +1]/+ 2] +2] —2] —2|/— 2) +1/+ 2)—1 —7|—6|+12| +1 || +6] —3} —3] —o}j— 5} 4+3/+ 3] —1||— 2) —2] -1 +5|+ 6— 4]—4] +2||+10\— 1| 5 
‘i + 2/2] —o| —oll+10| —2] —6] —2 ]— 5] —3| +7) +1 ||— of —2|+ 1) +2|) +3] —2|+ 1] —2]) +5] +1] —6)—o)/+ 4)—4)— a) +1 /!— of +5] —4] —1]|— of + 4) —2] —2]!— 9] 37) —4 
: + 3)—4|+4|—3\|+ 4] +2] —2| —4]|— 1] -0| —o| +1]|— 1)+2|— 1)-o|[ -3] +1]+ of +2) +4) —9) +4) +2 |/+ 6) —2|— 3) —1||— 6) +4) +2) —ol+ 6|— 2/4) —oll-+ a+ 4|—6 
Pilih 3 +14|—5| —7| —2||— of —3| —2| +5]]— 7/0] +4] +34 1] +4|/— 3] —2|| -2| +4|— 2] 0] +3] 4] —1/ +2 \|— 5] +3]+ 2)—ol|+ 7) 6) —5| +4]\— 1+ 8) 4) —3]/— git 4) —1 
' Me — 1|—4| +3) +2\\— 5] +1) +2) +2 1+ 5|—2]—4| +1 |/+ 2] —4|— 3] +4]] -3] —1/+ 2) +2 +6|—6) —r}-+r}/— 6) —5|+ 8) +3]/— 3) 3) —1)+7]+ 4|— 7] —2] +5]|— 4i— si +4 
| ‘| i a + 31|+3/—6| 4+2\|— 1] 3] —1|+4+5||— 2] —2{ +6] —2]/— of +5|— 5] —ol] —4] +7|— 2|—1]) 1] +8] —6] —4||— 3] —ai+ 4)+3||+ 5] -4| —1| —ol|-+r0]— 8] —5| +3}/— 2|— 3/43 
y — 9 +5] +6] —2||— 5] —1| +6) —olf/+ 8} —1] —5| —2|/+ 2} +2/— 6)+2)]/ +5) —2|— 6) —3 || +2] +1 =6/+3)/— 8) +4)+ 4] —ol]+ 1] 0] —3)+2\|— s|— 4)+3|+4]/4+ 3\— al 4y 
i — 846) +3]—x\|+ 5] —1] —2|—2||— 4] —3] +8) —1|/— 7] +2/+ 6) —1|| +2] +6/— 6] —2 —6|—2)+8|—o]/— 4)+1]+ 2|—1]/— 3/41] —o] +2]4+ 6/— 6/3) +3]— a|+ 3|-3 
| P—"Slaes | +4] —rx||+ 8] —2] —6]—o]|— 3] +9] —4| —2]|— 0] +2]— 2] —o|/ —6) —3|+ 6) +3 —4|—3| +4] +3 ||—10] +1/+ 6) +3]/+ 6-6} —5}+5]/— 4l— of +7) 3/4 gl+ 3} 4 
i ; | = Oo —$) Fe ht3}i— 2) —2| +3) +1\\— 4) +2] +3] —1||— 6 +7|/— 0} —1|) -7] —o]+ 5) +2)) +1) —1) —1 +1}|— o] —1/+ 1) —o}|— 2) —o| 41 oe GS Ye SO | Gar Gat 
— 8} +6/+3)—1]/— 6) +9] —1|—2]/+ 1] +3) —2}—2}}— 5) +31]+ 3) +2 | +5] —1/— 5)/+1]/—4] —5| +8) +1 —13) +5)4+ 6 —o}/— 2) —4/ +3] +3]/— 4/— 5/+6]+3]/— 5i+ 6) +2 
= 2/—2)-+3|+1])-+ 4) 0] —4|—ol/+ 2]+4]—3| —3}|— 6) +4|+ 4] —2 | +3] —3]— 0] —ol] +5) —1/—3| —1 |— 8) —o|+ 9] —1|-+10] —6| —4| —ol/-+ 2|— o] —o| —oll-+ 5/— 4) —4 
2|-+5|—3]/—ol/+ 7] —7| —4|+4]/— 5|—4] +4] +5 + 6) +2|/— 7] —1 |] —7| +4|— of +3]| —2] —4] +4] —2 |— 9] =2|— 2] +4]|— 0] —0| —o} —o]/— o/— 2)-+2} —o}/+ 2/— 5] —1 
+r) riz — a —5] +5) +r i+ rx] 1}—31i— of —2)— 1-43 | +2] —1/— 1) ol] —3 41] —0| +2 |—10) —2/+10) +2]/+ 8)—4] —6/ +2|!— 4i+ 31)/-+7| —4}i— 6+ 11 +4 


2cond decade.—1853 to 1862. 


i . “ : Warm. | Cold. 
PO he Pr eee | eee eee 
= gi 7 ais S | Dry.|Wet.| Dry.|Wet. So 
s | sie] o&/ et sie] sg — a -+ 
Sake clas) 24S 1 aol Dae eon a 
peeez EB | Did | esl d |} di| ¢ |cc | OP pe sb cersa 6 I 
44.| A Exes ane .l-ds |b VA ARN Mie teed 4 
ees | Chast ele bh ds | ee One Ose aie 2 ° 
eee ARGS pb bd |} ae| ce | b FMF tea ing Sea: 5 
si Misael C eens 1 Dp| ae pee Ba eae ae cae i 
ete eC Bie | ¢ | b l-a | e¢ | b Sc 2c aole oe 5 
Pee Als | al d |} b | aja De ie 4a lan alan 9 
eee) Bic | d | d | «|e |.d OR 2a. ee Sas lees 2 
eee Did |e.) d |.a | d.-| ec Bee aie Sa lel al 3 
Meee | Ald icc.) a | b | ¢-| b aN an NF ae 6 
— Se fo te — a — 
: Dry Aj 1 4 2 
Warm Se ies ee, Z Bae : 42 
Wet Bo 5 | 210 | r+ | 2 re oy pay. 21 
(Dry Cl 4) | 1| 6 6 
| meee 2 | 5 : 
Wet D) o | 3 5 Bye SO! bec ln el 23h lay 
October. November. December. Total. 
L Warm.| Cold. ;Warm.| Cold. |Warm.| Cold. Warm, Cold. 
First decade. A. ge: wee 8 2 6 x 4 a 78 42 
Second _,, a) 6 4 2 8 5 5 42 78 
. | Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet 
a | ———————_— — _ — | | | 
First decade. A. 5 | 5 5 5 6 4 62 58 
Second ,, a Seer ate | 8 2 4 6 66 54. 


First decade.—1843 to 1852, 


Tasux LY. 


—Analytical (Guernsey), 


Second decade.—1853 to 1862. 


a H Palle sp Warm, | Cold. 
: 3 5/8 ikon : ; ; Warm, | Cold. 
7 z dls 5 5 {4 FI g 4 a Dry.|Wet.|Dry.|Wet, q 5 e E mie 2/3 3 se ; 
5 3 EI |B 5 = fp af £ 8 ——_]—_|___ go A S/els la els ihe z & 2/8 g ‘Dry.|Wet.|Dry./Wet. Zo lee 
Sle lal/al/a)é Pit ja@lolzis A|B/O|D Ealed 2/2 3) é $s) 2/2 2 Ble 2 2 Realdenlon eal ast 
| Rar oeaay a — ——| ea ee | ee | | | 
Et i D 3 i ik R ‘A D 3 a A Fi 3 3 © |e Sues eH I cl al Oe ell a diiitomil| dil dll|Nenling Sy re a G Ta lexd 
siclolpleo ClAlDicinic/4/& 2 ye ye 9) 3 SAS talea fai aiicla fs |S at 95 gb sell A Ila 4] 8 
apa eee faa te tae hs B| A G AW TB Ig 3] 9 POlolatoalalohaialea kala | & ofall sila & [xe 
to} D C|DIBIAl A AD ik wat a | 2 | 3 |e AMS or GV leteialialla Wal mle alelb 213/413 s|7 
47: C seplecaleeelen A Bip ie A |B Fai a ty 7 | 5 57) d |e leldlela lia a/ibj/biala Se 25) Salles i 5 
na AIA/ID/IBIAlR A D/A 3} 6} 1) 2 9 | 3 GWE Ole la loale tie | a bilale!|»b 3523) 7a lt 
ae. C B/C;}B/D/A/BID C aha? AI 3] ©. fee Hol 2 le PS Bh Geb le fs | ae ae te dl 5|}4]o] 3 9} 3 
a Dae ee eel eral ek Ae da BAe | & le Aho AP Le tata i blakc lalate loys G}edells 2 | 10 
x A 3/2 I 9} 3 6r} ec | bi ble e}|}didj/ec cL rT} 2 
2) Bi AC} | DI Di asAlDicaiaie 31313 i 4 6] 6 AoVealpis | playa es elarele aaa eee eae? 
Dry Aj 1 4 2 I 2 7 5 5 5 | a 5 3 42 fia AM z —]—_|—__]_ — 
Warm [ — ——| pee | 78 Warm | y 3 3} oO] 2 We Aah eB) a | 21 a 
| Wee AS Tee og | ai elals Ia 45) Bue 36 WEBS S el Qe [alee |. 2 ies om |i 21 
(Dry GC} 4 | 1 See 2 2 | OM On er esa ea ee 3 20 Dry C] 4 6 6 
Cold — Ap Cola Leo Se S43 ig = | 2 3 45 EF 
Wet Dj o | 3 I AW yy eh dh oe 3 3 ai | x 22 Wet D) 2 | x SS Sh CaN Sf eo ts 33 
Warm and Gold Months. 
January. February. March. April, May. June. July. August. September. October. Noyember. December. Total. 
Warm,} Cold. |Warm.| Cold. Warm.| Cold. |Warm.| Cold. |Warm. Cold. |Warm.| Cold. |Warm, Cold. |Warm.| Cold. |Warm, Cold. |Warm,| Cold. |Warm.| Cold. Warm.| Cold. |Warm.,| Cold. 
First decade. A+Band C+D] 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 5 5 8 2 9 I 6 4 6 4 6 a 8 2 6 4 78 42 
Second ,, atb and c+d| 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 Zz 8 3 7 z 8 3 7 3 7 6 4 2 8 5 5 42 78 
Dry and Wet Months. 
Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. Dry. | Wek. | Dry. | Wet. | Dx 'y- | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. | Dry. Viele 
r DI [ a ine: inne. 6 4 62 58 
First decade. A-+C and B+D, 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 7 4 6 7 3 5 5 6 4 6 4 5 5 5 5 
Second ,, ate and b+d| 5 5 8 Zz 4 6 7 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 8 2 Z 8 5 & 8 2 4 6 66 54 


ge of Twenty Years, 


Number of Days with rain in Excess and Defect of an avera 


at Greenwich. 


| 

| #5 oo 
| | | | 
(3) stRH MO Ww +HtAOCO WH ea) oO A Me Ommaete, Oo + 
A | Be Te rae | ee eel | Tee 
| a, een ee a OHO bO KE MOH +t | CF CoH te 
z | Deen | biti rit i+ li + 
ee < Re ere tee oo | arc FRO HA iSeIe) PSI Oat Mes xe ON mM 
oO baal a 
é | = [++ 14444111 | titi iei ii | ey 
4 | _ | Samar aono Vom ve) Htntomd¢tan lor EV SaXStN) 
| fr rtittei 4 bi iti it++i | ee 
wo | wn | MOO A EN Hm to | eo iS) ER CAA Maat a caer ae mH 06O + 
4 | Sf 4+ttttitit| te ice IB yt a 
| we | ta oan ada (Soil as Ce Cn | ooat 
| steht eae ter tiiii+t| ee 
3 | = | amamdtacnno | nm Onto toc oat | Nem eK O00 
2 | eee Vitti tit++| fy) i 
| | omamnannaoc | wn ES NETS ORO Te: te ttre H 
eS + 
eles \ | btititi ii] ae 
en | me nononwman! ., eee o Gucvionminn ool ionimeona toon 
Be tite 1 | Hilititiid| Phe 
| ro ee a Eee re a a ma mA 
S| een hal | PN es } ae eB 
a | a [ee eee ek se ae ee MA AL 
fe | Beles ii sete | eT tet [+141 
al es l AGRO aN axa Olas mNOmmno toa | +O H+tRHA 
SS eae lela qe 


DN) 
62 
Wet. 


| Cold. 


Total. 


65 
53 


pro! ™ a 
q+e antOo0tROanKRKR ro) 
ULAR AA, i oo 
| ———x«~ 
RS 
-| SP lolmandanavaa AF 
ne} |} [s 
= . 
S| | | co 
a (2) mow +O RH $F MOS = 
=) | 
= 
si Ble | annnconnam on 
Sots ieee = 
Se es 
= 5 2 OW MMO FOO Hw ++ Vay 
A S = 
‘dequisdeagg] | ONMoaessdoesd | + | ce a 
; ee | 
19q ULIAO NT SSeS eg Oe oO ™~ a 


“L9G 0}IVO, | eSaseOlnssodgog a 


‘daqureydeg 


osadaasuaa | » 


ynsny| coos aeaeaeatdao 


Second deeade.—1853 to 1862. 


amp | ww aoeoeode 


“oun? SS © So  &) ae fone) 


3 
5 


Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. | Dry. 


a 


December. 
5 


I 
9 


November. 


9 


I 


6 
2; 
6 
3 


3 


October. 


4 
8 


Dry. | Wet. 
4 
7 


| 


5 
4 


Wet. 


.| Cold. |\Warm.} Cold. |Warm.| Cold. Warm. Cold. |Warm. 


= 


lember. 


— 


ein Excess and Defect of an average of Twenty Years, 


Taste V.—Monthly Mean Temperatur 
at Greenwich. 
Taste Vi.—Number of Days with rain in Excess and Defect of an average of Twenty y, 
ears, 


} | Jan. | Feb. /Mareh,| April. May. | June. | July. | Aug. | Sept. | Oct. | Noy. Dec. at Greenwich. 
; are / | a] \. nee 
| | ; 
Pearleeegiieswol Gx9|| 6x3 Pal 508 | At Jan. | Feb. |March.| April.| May. | June. | July. | Aug. | Sept. | Oct. | Noy. | 
: | faa, | —— SS es pee e 0 lec, 
: lat =a Average of 20 asta ea | | 
rast U3j— 27 (+ V3/+ O7|— OS |— 27 )— ro|+ o8|+ 25 — 2'8|\+ o8|+ 3'9 ae eer tS 42: 3 13 ey 13 13 13 13 17 
| =f E Sey SS 35 Ss ee I+ 593 |+ O72) 1°7)— 05 |— 3°6|— of |— 13/4 1'0|— 7'0 He 14 14 
8 Ss SS AOS esd ee + x7l— 21|— 4ol— 3:4/— 06 + 2°8\+ 17 1843. — oe =I | re | a 
[od] dele sls sale wale n/t bolt eae a6]y tale atl exit gel, 7 4] pee ere) | 3] 270/45] PaaS ee 
; 22 OSs ee) ae ie o6|— ri l-+ F7\— volt 3:5|4+ o8|— 27/-+ 21\+ 3:9|/+ 28 eer 2 || Se. eoneea Te 3. | se 25|) em || 1 eae 
: FEDS eS FSGS Gas gid Baa fu he be am 28|— 172/4+ o'8|+ 08 |+ 474 =| 46|—o}] —o | +8 | + 6} — ae ape ee Oise a ey ar |) 3 | 
RZ at cy ie) oD z2ib r3i(— writ o2|+ 1'6)4+ 1°83 \+ o3/+ 11\— 09 3 47) 5 +43 +1 41 OO are see BY aes = ae 
oy pies eS eS i a 06 — 38+ 3'5|+ 076 oy peed ee ts ee ee | eee [ae | Gere ea 
: sult a3jt ralt rol— 17|— r8)— or /— r8/+ re )— ot |+ 18\— s1|-+ of All Pelee & || dee Bea euler +o)/+5) +16) +21] 4+ 9] +5 | + 
; s2)t 34 (+ 24|— 03|— 0'5|— 12|— 29/4 q7|+ o8|- 02 /— 29|+ So[t 7% | so] eels | aes = pag le Se au 
; fcaee — —|—-|—_ i| = st = Pec.) = 
tet cet get slike el glare Gi i ee) iw 5) | Wem meee | ee ae |e ee Brel 25 
: oe as Neg NAc: of 5 6 5 4 7 6 i 3° les Neel ee = =f || = 2) se] = Oilar =O} = @] shy | se 
Degrees) fim JRxOr Fagg | 7T|troo trae bars |r F Go |+ 74 \+ 510 \+22'8|-+21'4| 157'5 Dry 5 F a == — feaeses | re | | 
ms|—12°7 Sent ae 66 |— 8-2 |— 83 /— 58|—11°5|— 83 /—11'7|— 571 |—15°0 6:3 Monthis{ Wot 5 3 5) 3 5 3 5 5 4 A ———|—__| 
; ae 5 7 5 7 8 5 6 & 2 sf 
; - = ARESE I 
1853/4 3°8|— sa|— g2— r2[— o7|— o8|— 16|— 13|— ; : 5 
j ] eS i 7 o'8 16 14 17|+ o1|— o'9|— 60 le SS 
= 541 Qa he o8 + 22/4 vol— r8\— 33\— 16\— o4|+ wr|+ 14 )— ae + 13 (es at 2 set a Te Olea dip Opel ar 7 |) —3 |) 6 : 
3 STE OSes ae a Re ae ae 6 7 | ee 4g i —6)/+3}/—1}/+2]/—1]/—4)]—6] —r ] 4. ; 
aa ere eS 20a Ota res Chae o8|+ 23 /— 18|+ o'99|/— 2°3|+ 02 El Bales 4) =e || = 9 2 4 B4=al—7is si) 4] = 
= memes ae eter eet Selb aa( oalt galt vo oI Alar 5 9 q ie PhS Oy SOS Oar at 2) a mt 
} é Hire Sale Bel Oe — 02|— vol+ 5:9/— 12/+ o'7|-+ 3°3|— O1|— 374 |+ 10 ae 9 4 4|—2]— os x 
5] sojt r8|+ 44/t+ 48/4 o2/+ o4|+ 24/4 62/+ 22|— pale exe SS a | Sap 20 | OY Ge Oa Be oe ge 23 
60.+ 11|/— z0|— o : z 3 9 59: a) =o |) = - 5 3 a) = | 
; erie | = Ames city) ila 8h EN eM eh he Malic Gl a 3 Sls cl ese Nery deers a || —e a 
pale eel pecqlseac taarole o8|-4+ o1|— rol|+ 19|-+ o1|-+ gx)— 22/4 10 cera 2 || sla peel eae ch ee ie ements ell || 9 A 
& ba 4) Beg a) era te ee es | 28 |e tO | ao rail 3s = a see ake ie uA al ae a) S27 || ae ies 
Warm 6 6 5 aa Tl aeaaera| a — ae 2 4/—1]/—2]/—1]—o0] — 
Months { Bey eaceiie eg a1 fallen aa aS pers bala 
| [Bs Ro abeeeeln re a Oe ele el Sales Months {|Meat of | 2) 2) ae lee Py ey reat are 
|Deg i ; Mele os 55 [4x12 |+ giol-+124|-+ 8'o|-+r1o'r|+ 2:8 |-+ 86] 108 2 3 2 4 3 I 3 
Minul24-6|ae8|104|~ 83 [rar4|r136|—293|— 71|— 74|— 03 [39's |—257| ta84 : i ae 
= z MELE) sie 26 |) 2} —3/- = 
1863.|+ 3°2/+ A io) (eA ees A ar 4/ +1] -1o} +1 reff cts te |] = 
RCE SR SIS cele 7 alc 7” alae I a a le aloe oa “he SSG Sales me Togl| ae = . 
65.|— 2°3|— 21|— s:0/+ 5° ‘ lime se See Moai tee Us - 66 iL = 2 4] —12] +2] +4] - 
s9|+ 374 |+ r2|+ r9)/— 14|+ 6 . ; Hae || ae |) see | ar = = 4 4 
66.\+ es Bales H 9 4 g|+ or}+ r2\-+ 2 br 77 1]/+41 4|+ Bl = ae 
ete. ener n) Pelb rol o9(- 19|— o6lt os (+ ra lt 29 oH az ; i Tal ae : 
: 


p+o O M00'0 ACO MO NM a 
poo | * g 2 
q+ AaAn+FOO FAaARK 00 
ULIB AA = 9 
ES e 
° o INO = 
~=_ ee ee 
+3 Yo) 5 
: Ble | masaanacaa Re = 5 ees i 
aS = S | © in A 
ne = | ia 
=) H () mmo +O RH $+ MO ok =e 
Sl ee 
= i Ls = 6 
45 Pal A oO Ln 
¢ Ble an~~connan| oe Ss S S 
peerless les! gs fea oie 
Sale Sf - | 
5 ie See ae ee S| z | BS |. 
S eS 
= | | 
a : . 
6 ro wd} 
2 Ge) tel ween Dlwoa 
pe “19q ULI00(T cpoaaesuen|+|~| a © r 'S) = 
¢ Oe ae ; : A 
5 | e | ¢ << | 
ais “MIGUIBAON | OC OTO RSOVOTDO m fo) Nm | a = oe u oe) 
| ae A 
5 *Laq 0: a : 
2 10009 | 2s 2aconene a] | ° a me 
ns} fi Sl | ko w & || & 
3) 
2 saaquiaydeg | os SU a aeDUUOR | | H | nm | 2 oO & 
rs i : 
s : Sle E| 
= qsncny | ooa aaa adao © | 0 o| @ | woo Sl Se Ss 
° Ie A 
2 = ie male or ee 
oD) amp |S aoe 6a su 6 oo] +| « Sealaeet 53 || 
eoo0008 8 STO | om ~|+| & 
se SaaS = = J Se ast poe 
2 = 
S S) | 
= Spee 


r 


First decade.—1843 to 1852. 


Taste VII.—Analytical (Greenwich). 


Second decade.—1853 to 1862. 


5 af iB S Warm. } =] a = 7 ; 
é 2 fe F Z Z z B | lee z | alte g | Warm. — Cold. | 
2 E 2 = ealecialincalics SI 2/8 B Dry.| Wet. et. Ger) | z E eo fee Eihes | 3 E 8 z = | de 
& | |. St EL GEE | iss Ss | 6/8 (an aed = Sania a | 8) 8) 8 i | P| Ep QV) 128 73 
Se i a SE ON eS 2/6 l= (2/3 lejelelelelela| stat 
1843.) A | D|A|B/D|D|D | | | ie eee las Se ee oo 
ldo plole alee 5 lie Oa eS AWS bjdjec}a} ec}/djcole};bio|ec | ofal7| 3] 2} 10 
45|D/C)/C}D|D\IBIDID\|DicliBis Bl evaliaalne Di a By) ah gS Gy e}dile}alaleo|b| 6lr}3}a 7| 5 
AGIA | Wie ap a os ap his | aay AAG ° 3 3 6 349 d e c c e a a a b atoll 3) 2 6} 32 1 4 8 
aiD|D|D|D\BID/|aAlBIpIBiBla (@ AL ve Il ve 10 | 2 bjaicj|a efojaldjaleol|a sirl4-a 6| 6 
] 4,/0/B/B|/B/A|D|D|D|p|iBlales 2) 4 |0] 6 6| 6 djajajad &/ajaltajalala wy}o}o}] sa} 10] 2 
49}B)/B/AIDIB/O/A)AlBilB]AlD PY Oye | 4 A 3 Calcul ecalliec wlejalalo|lcja} Fi eR PSM Le es 
o/C/BiC|}/B\/D\/A\/BIDIcloa 4/5|r}2 913 a}|af|a] a [Realinawbear td: | belveelad a eal ee a sles 
5°. A | B all || & || a 6| 6 bi]djdjc dicidldljojfora [exch aie } a] 10 
es B Bs of |) OF 1) PH) aod} AN |) oy |) AA) GW) AN 4]2] 4] 2 6| 6 co} a jb} o } bjdjajbjaja a | lero (ey Pe rd ie 
Nese C;/C|D/AIB/\C|C|]B/B Ay ek ll GW x 6] 6 blalbia dalelelajlate a} a lasal sale AES 
pa | en | | | | | | \ nat ua po _ ie 
vom es Ie? LS 3 8 8 8) 2 | ela | a ay } es Warm oe : 2 2 pce PE feat N 
Wek 8 BL GHSypay2reit avg} ei gi) Gla 36 Wet b ° ° | Seales | o |x | ? | 
eae Oye oleate |e} ol gi gis | 2 ae fee 2 3 4|3 } r}2[7 2 38 1| G 
| =| German ‘oe 55 fl lesan sca ee baa (Gaal eae is 
Woe gre gislalslalaiaglels Wet d| 2 3 | ripe | o | 2] 3 | 24 || 
Warm and Cold Months. 
January. February. March. May. June, September. | October. | Noyember. | December. Total. 
Cold. |Warm.| Cold. |Warm.| Cold. |Warm. Cold. |Warm.) Cold. |Warm. Cold. Warm, Cold. Warm, Cold. ‘Warm Cold. Warm, Cold, 
First decade. A-+B and C+D) 4 6 4 5 5 4 6 7 4 6 9 5 I j ia 5 65 55 
Second ,, a+b and e+d 4 6 4 Bel s 2 4 6 4 8 2 I 9 5 | 58 62 
Dry and Wet Months. 
Wet. | Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. Wet. | Dry. | Wet. | Dry. Wot. | Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. | Dry. | Wet. 
First decade. A-+C and B+D) 5 3 7 5 5 3 5 5 5 ei is PRE Kot Ih 9G go [ozs 
Second ,, a+e and b+d 6 8 2 7. 3 8 4 Gi 3 Y 3 8 2 6 37 


83 


1867.]| Mr. S.E. Hoskins on a Tabular Form of Analysis. 47] 


into two decennial periods or decades, and then to compute, not only the 
number of months above and below the average, but also the degrees of 
temperature. (See Tables I., If., I[I., V. and VI. in the Appendix.) ; 

Lastly, the numerals thence derived were converted into simple and 
familiar signs, which were then delineated upon a sheet of sectional paper, 
accurately engraved according to scale. A square space was allotted to each 
of the months, and they were laid down as abscissas, with the years for 
ordinates. (See Diagrams I. and II. (Archives).) 

The light squares in the diagrams denote warmth, the degrees being 
expressed by a modification of the plus sign, in red ink; the dark, or 
shaded squares indicate cold, and the degrees are marked in black ink 
with the minus sign. Black dots indicate the number of rainy days above 
the average, and red dots the number below it. The diagonal lines from 
the centre of each square show the direction and days of predominant 
wind, one-sixteenth of an inch being equivalent to five days beyond the 
mean; the red lines are associated with dryness, and the black with 
moisture. It may be necessary to explain that, as regards rainfall, frequency, 
rather than quantity, was selected as acriterion. Thatis to say, the number 
of days on which rain fell rather than the number of inches collected by 
the pluviometer ; for it not unfrequently happens that a few heavy showers 
yield a greater amount of water than many days of gentle rain of long 
continuance. 

The combined signs in the above arrangement are intended to represent 
four different states of weather, viz. warm+dry ; warm+wet; cold+dry ; 
and cold-+ wet. 

If the sectional paper be large enough to admit of blank spaces being 
left, the signs of the weather may be delineated therein as each month 
elapses ; and thus the diagram becomes a sort of register, and an ever-ready 
table of reference. 

For instance, by running the eye along the vertical columns of the 
Guernsey diagram, to which I must confine myself for the present, the 
existing state of the weather can easily be compared with that of corre- 
sponding months, up to 1843; and by following each horizontal line of 
squares the character of each year may as readily be ascertained. Thus 
we shall find, on comparing the September of 1865 with that of preceding 
years, that it was the hottest and the driest of the whole series. . On look- 
ing along the ordinate corresponding to 1846, it will be seen that during 
eleven months of that year the temperature was uniformly above the 
adopted average. 

On taking a general view of this diagram, after its completion, a very 
cursory glance sufficed to show me that a striking difference existed in the 
distribution of light and shade. On closer inspection, it became manifest 
that the number of light squares in the one decade exactly counter- 
balanced the dark squares in the other; so that the warm months of the 
first period were in direct ratio to the cold months of the second. 

VOL. XV. 28 


A72 Mr.S. E. Hoskins on a Tabular Form of Analysis. [May 9, 


These contrasts, quite unlooked for by me, were all the more surprising, 
as the data employed had been taken as they came, and not selected for 
the purpose of supporting any preconceived notion. It seemed to me, 
therefore, that this kind of diagram, besides serving as a convenient table 
of reference, was a collection of materials prepared and classified for further 
analysis. Under this impression I proceeded to decompose it, and to re- 
arrange the products in a tabular form*—converting into letters of the 
alphabet the combined signs in the squares, so as to designate the four 
states of weather, before mentioned, as follows:—A=warm-+dry; B= 
warm-+ wet; C=cold+dry, and D=ccld+ wet. 

These letters were then placed in columns under the heads of months 
and years; the number of times in which each letter recurred was noted, 
and these numerals, which may be termed coefficients of the sums of the 
letters, were collected -in lines and columns, those of the months at the 
foot, and those of the years at the sides of a table of analysis. See Table LV. 

When the coefficients of the whole series were thus placed in juxtapo- 
sition, it was satisfactory to find that the general contrasts, noticed m the 
diagram, were borne out numerically ; and still more satisfactory to ascer- 
tain that there was a close agreement between the ratio of the months and 
that of the degrees of temperature, plus and minus. 


Months. Degrees. 
Ca = Ss Vie aN 
First decade. 78 warm to 42 cold. 153°°5 plus to 55°-2 minus. } Guaperigs 
Second decade. 78 cold to 42 warm. 153°-0 minus to 60°:0 plus. y- 


The columns at the sides of the Tables of analysis, that of Greenwich as 
well as Guernsey, indicate that there was the intrusion of one cold year 
(1845) in the warm period, and of two warm years (1857 and 1859) in 
the cold period. A similar kind of intercalation was pointed out by Mr. 
Howard, in his ‘Cycle of the Seasons,’ from 1824 to 1841, namely, the 
intrusion of one cold year in the warm, and one warm year in the cold 
cycle. 

On examining the coefficients more in detail, in the hope of being able 
to detect some group of months which seemed to bear a peculiar relation 
to the rest, I met with a frequent recurrence of an exact inverse order 
between the warm months of the two decades; and often a direct ratio 
between the wet and dry. 

During the first decade, the ratio between warm and cold, in the groups 
of January, February, March, April, August, September, October, and 
December, is invariably 6 to 4. It is one of greater inequality in the Junes 
and Novembers, being 8 to 2 in both cases; warm Mays are equal to the 
cold, but warm Julys preponderate in the proportion of 9 to 1. 

In the second decade, the warm Novembers are to the cold the exact 
reverse of what they were in the first, being 2 to 8; and the ratios of Ja- 


* T am indebted. to Dr. Guy’s Croonian Lectures for an insight into this method. 


1867,] Mr.8. E. Hoskins on a Tabular Form of Analysis. 473 


nuary, February, March, and April are also reversed, being 4 to 6, instead 
of 6 to 4, 

When one decade is compared with the other, the last-named months 
are found to stand in exact inverse order, viz. 6 to 4 in the first, and 4 to 
6 in the second. 

The wet and dry groups seem, on the whole, to be more evenly balanced 
than the warm and cold; but the Novembers of the second decade are 
remarkable for dryness. The connexion between the predominant winds 
and the other states of weather has not as yet been traced systematically ; 
but the diagram shows great excess of north-east wind in the spring of 
1852, and a long continuance of cold weather setting in early in the fol- 
lowing year. It is also evident that wind from south-east was more pre- 
valent during the second than the first decade. 

From the foregoing comparison of the different months, the group of 
Novembers seems to be the most exceptional ; it may therefore be worth 
while to recapitulate the peculiarities that have been noticed. 

Ist. The ratio between the coefficients of this group in different decades 
is invariably one of considerable inequality. 

2nd. Two cold Novembers only occur in the warm cycle, and only two 
warm ones in the cold cycle. 

3rd. In the second decade the proportion of warm to cold Novembers 
is 8 to 2, and of dry and wet 2 to 8; but in the warm period warm and 
wet months were prettily evenly distributed. 

4th. Novembers of comparatively low temperature, such for instance as 
those of 1851, 1853, 1854, 1855, 1856, 1860, 1861, and 1862, were in 
each year succeeding those enumerated, followed by Mays or Junes of a 
similar character. The following résumé shows the relations between the 


Novembers and the Junes. 
Months. 


ee 


fee ete Ee Terese RR ALT ECT SiN 
Novembers. Junes. 
po 


RE oN 
G lst decade. 8 warm to2 cold. 8 warm to 2 cold. 
uernsey: | Ind decade. 8 cold to2 warm. 7 cold to 3 warm. 


Degrees. 
er ie 
Novembers. Junes. 
aa aa aa TS 

1st deeade. 15°-7 plus to 4°2 minus. 17°:5 plus to 3°-0 minus. 
nosey. Ex decade. 14°-0 minus to 2°8 plus. 18°-5 minus to 3°1 plus. 


These contrasts and analogies seem to justify the surmise that the at- 
mospheric conditions of the former months may haye exercised some in- 
fluence upon those of the latter. Whether such be the case generally is 
not to be determined until a much longer series of results at Guernsey can 
be compared. 

The peculiarities with respect to the Novembers may be purely acci- 
dental, or confined to the period under consideration; but that they are 


D Bie 


47 4: Coumbra Monthly Magnetic Determinations. [May 9, 


not restricted to locality is proved by the Greenwich Tables, in which 
these groups stand out still more prominently (see Table VII.) ; the ratios 
between warm and cold being 9 to 1 in the first decade, and 1 to 9 in the 
second. It is difficult therefore to avoid the conclusion that, during the 
twenty years in question, the Novembers were exceptional months at both 
places; although at Guernsey they were more frequently followed by un- 
favourable Junes. 

The Greenwich diagram (Diagram II. Archives), to which I must now 
briefly advert, does not exhibit so striking a contrast of light and shade as 
was observable at first sight in the other diagram. But on further exami- 
nation it will be found that the warm months of the first decade correspond 
nearly in number with the cold months of the second, although not so 
exactly as at Guernsey. 


Months. Degrees. 
—A. ——. 


— a — —— 
nro 


Greenwich. { Qna‘deende. 62 cold to 38 warm, 148-4 imus to 116° pls. 

On comparing the above abstract with that in a previous page, it will be 
perceived that the disparity between the general results, from both places, 
is not very considerable ; a similarity all the more remarkable, when we — 
consider the great difference in position and latitude of the inland and the 
insular stations. See Diagram III. 

It would be superfluous to enter into any further discussion of the 
various alternations which the coefficients are susceptible of, in a paper 
which is merely intended to direct attention to the accompanying diagrams 
and analytical tables. My motive for venturing to bring them under notice 
is a desire to place them in the hands of those better qualified than I am 
for conducting processes of induction ; and as the modified plan I have 
adopted is based upon long recognized principles, which are applicable to 
the investigation of atmospheric phenomena in any locality, I trust that it 
may be deemed worthy of consideration. 


IV. “Monthly Magnetic Determinations, from June, to November 
1866 inclusive, made at the Observatory at Coimbra,” by Professor 
J. A. DE Souza, Director of the Observatory. Communicated 
(with a Note) by the President. Received May 8, 1867. 


[Nore.—These observations contain the record of the commencement 
of the absolute magnetic determinations at the Coimbra Observatory, with 
instruments procured by M. de Souza at Kew, and on the system of 
observation and reduction adopted at the Kew Observatory. The employ- 
ment of the photographic continuously self-recording instruments at 
Coimbra has hitherto been delayed by the works required for the introduc- 
tion of gas into the Observatory ; but this has now been accomplished ; and 
a letter, dated April 20, 1867, from the Director states that the photo- 


1867.] Coimbra Monthly Magnetic Determinations. : 475 


graphic records were at that date on the point of commencing. The lati- 
tude and longitude of the Observatory are 40° 12'5 N., and 8° 23’ W.— 
ES. 


Observations of Deflection, Vibration, and Dip taken at the Coimbra 
Observatory, 1566. 


The horizontal, vertical, and total forces are calculated to English 
measure. 

The vertical and total forces are obtained from the absolute measures of 
horizontal force and dip. 

The value of log x* K determined at the Kew Observatory is=1°64829 
at temp. 62° Fahr. 

The value of log p is =6°30487. 

The values of the coefficients q and q’ are respectively 0°000128, 
0:00000030. The temperature correction was obtained from the formula 
gq (¢,—38) +¢q' (¢,—38)°. The correction for error of graduation of the 
deflection-bar at 1°06 foot is =—0-°00006, at 1:3 is =—0-00024. The 
time of one vibration has been obtained from the mean of twenty-four de- 
terminations of the time of 100 vibrations. 

The angles of deflection are each the mean of two determinations. The 
difference between the angles of every pair was found always less than 40”. 

In deducing from these chservations the ratio and product of the mag- 
netic moment m of the magnet, and of the earth’s horizontal magnetic in- 
tensity X, no correction has been required for the rate of the chronometer, 
or for the initial and terminal semiares of vibration, the former having been 
always less than 2*:0, and the latter less than 70’ at commencement, and 
30' at end. 

But the induction and temperature corrections have always been applied, 
and the observed time of vibration has been corrected for the effect of tor- 
sion of the suspending thread. 

The torsion for 90° was found no less than 5':18, and no greater than 
6,07. 


In the calculations of the ratio x the third and subsequent terms of the 


series ]- Bee &e. have been omitted. The value of the constant P 
Be a 


was found to be = —0°0022317, by the mean of thirty-one determinations 
cbtained each from two pairs of deflection cbservations at distances 1-0 and 
1:3 foot. 

The horizontal force for each day is the mean of those calculated for 
each pair of deflections at distances 1:0 and 1°3 foot. | 


[May 9, 


Zi0NS. 


tra 


e Determ 


i 


Montily Magnet 


mora 


Co 


476 


4206.8 
zvgt.or |6€16.3 


9965.8 


9£65.98 


“OOLOFTVIOT| "A 


£988. 


6438. 


te fee h WZ 


rerl.v 


jo son[v A 


L1SL.9 |V66L.¥ Igf Sit 19 


gv €1 19 
bS vr 19 
7 Om D0 


(ote) 


Ly +1 19} 


Oy fay 10) 


ge Sa 10 
Vo ae 


1) / ° 


“did 


seins? SUBD TET 


66 


(ft 


66 


“digg oyeuse yy 


Zo II gz 


I7@ 


It I @I 


*soqnULUt 
pue 
“moy ‘Aeq 


gt Liz.v 


L6917.V 


*u0T} 
-CAQIA 30 
JO OuLy, 


S.bL 


g.vL 


0.9L 


ICT 
‘ornqeieduay, 


6S Ir 0% 


DCT TT 


(Cy, (oe) it 


*sognUlUt 
pue 
‘moy ‘Aq 


g1170.6 


£170.6 


of£17Z0,6 


1$170.6 


966£0.6 
0960.6 


$9S79.6 


ZLSV¥o.6 


Lae Bos 
C10 ceca 
Kaeo) Tice) 
Lp Qe ese aL 
Uy eg Tears) 
Neves eager 
IZ1e gv S$ 
asia rent 

W U fe) 

*MOT}DOYO(T 


ital, 


1.VL 


€.99 


"YT 
‘sinjerodua yj, 


*sooUvqSTC, 


efSIaed Cag 
9 9 O% 
oe It IT 
said (oy 2a 
ep Fo 
*SOPN UOT 
pur 
‘moy ‘Arq 


"iL 'H JO oansvowm oMosge LOZ UOTPWAGIA PUL WOMDIGo™ JO SUOT}VAIESYO 


6166£.0 
ZL1S.0 
6166£.0 
z166£.0 
Z¢1S.0 
Z166£.0 
£Sggf.0 
9915.0 
£598f.0 
ofz6L£.0 
of£2S.0 
ofz6%.0 
5 
i] 
= "XW Soy 
Ss 
‘VUCHLOD 


‘OOST oUnL 


(ens tn pe AAS SE SC RE 


= Ear ane ee Se se 
a b61£.01 |Sgbo.6 |£196.7 |rS Sx r9)"*""'*** SURO | 
So £1 19 : id L3g6f.0 | Shiva LOODO mtn ex Ori Cal 
ofzb.or |cov1.6 |L600.$ Rg €£$ 11 9zgl6v.0 So6zz.b |V.gZ oS 11 Sz GG ry oer Sz 
a or SI 19g I 62996£.0 SELOG eek Ze Tt O.1 
S 
S ge vr Ig zt 1696£.0 zoL66.g |Z.85 9 § €.1 
= Srrv.0or \0971.6 |Vr10.$ x ££ 0 12\9L6V.0 BUOY cOgiiW Os 10 7.6L ey Oe fohre 
s 6€ zr 19g I 1696£.0 VAGOOQI a ow cet O.1 
5 
% Of 61 16 (4 glg6E.0 LeLooR Zor 6 § Dab 
| SEEv.o14 \9751.6 |6200.5 cu g$ ot £1/LL6¥.0 video lo.gLiso I a1 g.LL Youle ea 
2 6€ Lr 19 i LL96£.0 52L66.8 loo m2 It O.1 
S 
a4 
S £€ gt 19 z g066L.0 LL0z0.6 |z.9¥ gz S 50) 
= - |$rZr.or |1076.g jogeg.b 8 II g |gz1S.0 LLL NCSA Noe Oe 29 BZL be 0. 
oS gt 19 I 3066£.0 gg0zo,6 \$.71 r ZI O.1 
> 
r 
3 at ie) C4 9166£.0 £60z0.6 jo.S$ gz $ wat 
= bLSr.01 |8£06.9 |Egoe.b ‘WeW LY 11 @ |\gz1S.0 ip Pooirae WOMAN ed (oP at g.cl lo ct 
~ ve (om tO I 9166£.0 §Lozo.6 |v.b 1 ZI O.I 
3 es AER u y op § Oar |) Uhm ee) ° | goq;/m Y Pp 
So ee end — — | | ate oe peepee —— | — me SE i —— 
& <j pa eel le) 
3 a *soqnurUt ae ony rE *SOyMULU x bi % | *soqynurur 
DIMLOJ[VIOT,| A "xX ‘dig ‘yynunzy | B pue oe "xu ory | -vacia ou0 | & pur oad ‘uonoapod | ES | & pue 
@ | ‘inoy ‘Arq a jo ouILy, st “moy ‘keg : : z 8 ‘moy ‘Avq 
jo sonra ‘dig s0uSe yl “IL ‘EH JO oamsvout oynjosqe toy UOTywaqrA PUL UOTZIIGOC JO SUOIZwALOSGO 


"VUINLOD “99ST A[nE 


1867.] 


> 


[May 9, 


Coimbra Monthly Magnetic Determinations. 


A78 


$z+1.6 \VSo00.$ |g$ Lr rg/"*"""""** suLOTT 


6z7v.01 

6gzVv.01 |tL71.6 |\v600.S 
gzzv.or |26£1.6 |g0r0.$ 
6rgv.o1 |£207.6 6910.5 
zbyy.or |b£91.6 |fr10.$ 
ELg£.01 |9060.6 9616.0 
¥96£.01 |Z111.6 |zg00.S 
‘QOLOF [UIOL| De 

so some 


gz 
Iv 


oh 1g 
ae) 
8I 19 
€I 19 
ZZ 19 
bz 19g 
oz% 19 
61 19 
a a) 
$1 19 
Br 19] 
1b) 
“dig 


66 


ce 


“se 


ce 


ce 


‘TW 


YNUUIZy 


*I[PION 


“dig oyousezy 


CS at 2h 
Ziv O) ie 
hy Ce) (9) 
bls Ca eM 
hota G) 
3G ©) 7 
Ww Yt p 
*SOIMUITM 
pur 
‘moy ‘Ae 


L6¥.0 


£L6V.0 


og6t,0 


§L6¥.0 


2705.0 


1967.0 


“ul JO ONTeA 


6496.0 
6V96£.0 


Lt96£.0 
Lv96£.0 


63L6£.0 
6gL6£.0 


glg6£.o 


gLlg6£.0 


°LL6£.0 
VLL6£.0 


1g96l.0 
1g96£.0 


"Xiu Soy 


0g67z.r 


g9677.1 


1volz.v 


2L67z.V 


67S 22.¥ 


7967.0 


04 
-VAQIA JO 
jo owty, 


g.gZ 


6.$L 


al 
iz 
nN 


8-18 


“lye 
‘smnyviedwa y, 


LE 0 Sz 
e) toys (ole, 
$$ o Si 
ty o o1 
4 © 
5 ae a 
wm Yy p 
*SoPNUITa 
pur 

‘moy ‘Aeq 


9166.8 


49966.8 


7$966.g 


£g966.9 
+41966.8 
09966.8 
16966.8 
5 9966.9 
66£00.6 


| Sov00.6 


03166. 
0gL66.9 


ope (On 15 
I.gL 
G.7I IZ II 

Olu SG 
9.SL 

o.$€ 12 II 

CS a hea 
1.96 

0.0 QI IT 

Ca OG 
8.64 

Gigik = Tera Gen 

(oe EE) 
1.08 

Oyors 7A iti 

v.ve 6 § 
L.3L 

Gel. COLL 
VW / (o} fo) 
Po 
‘uoHsyod | 2a 
aoe 
& 


“SOOULIST CG 


“i ‘H JO dinsvowl oynposqe A0J UOTVVAGIA PUL UOTJEBIq JO SUOT}CALOSYO 


‘VUCNIOQ “OORT ysnony 


GSE o Sz 
[lire (8). oye 
ovo G1 
ZI O Ol 
oo § 
f-Il dt 
he ip 
*“soqnUrUt 
pue 
‘moy ‘Aeq 


bSSv.01 |gzZ1.6 joL10.$ [$1 6r Tg\"**""** SULIT 
= 
= 
Picasa Zz 1$S6£.0 POISE Koss =/5 Sait 
6rZ$.o1 |S10£.6igrzo.$ | | VS 0 gz/Lv6¥.0 OzIez.y |b.b9 |LE Oo Sz Z.99 SS ey G4 
(exe (Oi 5iG) I 1$S6£.0 7££66.9 |4.€4 Lr 11 0.1 
a GT 1G) ale V196£.0 o£S66.¢ |z.g g S Cat 
= Q8IV.01 \g1£1.6 \vgI0.S s 4 1 1Zz/£96¥.0 HEoEz. |7.EL zz oO 0% Seal g$ 11 07% 
Ss GS Si 1G I V196£.0 16$66.9 \V.6£ 61 11 O.1 
= oS g1 19 Gi £z96£.0 9$$66.9 |9.01 g § Car 
S Vgvv.o1 |$Sg1.6 |€g10.$ os GI I 9g1/v96¥.0 SLofz.v |v.SL\¥2 o SI 1.92 (Gro aeoek 
= fb 5 1G) i? $z96£.0 oS66.g |£.g1 61 11 O.1 
Q 
‘Ss Lo OL 16 oes 6z96£.0 95566.9 |z.11 gS Gat 
= Ogzv.o1 |€zbr.6 log10.$ "TA TL vz o 11/$g96¥.0 gvotz.y |z.GL£\f% I OF 6.0L vy o ol| 
> Toot ne I 6z96£.0 L$$66.g |z.g& 61 11 O.1 | 
= B2p2 08 ap 6996£.0 OCOCOWS 10:5 1a Ger 
= ouneGb— | eoseoP sina (on) BognRe spaced ne lStHLO Z10bz.y |jo.0g|e 1 S 0.64 ip 
= ee ee 6996£.0 §1966.9 (2.1 oO II O.I 
S 
Ss 
= of fr 16 Zz +596£.0 z¥966.9 jo.0ov g S tar 
= g60v.01 |6271.6 |g £10. WWW LE 11 Z |0L6¥.0 S1ofz.¥ |6.9/ |6¥ o 1 ELL LEo I 
a) eS She iy I +bS96£.0 go966.g 0. oz II 0.1 
Ss 5 WE. 0) uw yp s Oa 1y By LS Te © | qo03/um Yq op 
Ses See eres seen = ge Se ee eee | SO Bee es eee 
iS) 
ee} 4 
s : B| & 
4 *soqnurUt = ‘uo jE | +soqnuTUt x nS 2 | ssomurut 
“QIADJ CIOL) =A “Xx ‘dig ‘eynuizy |B pue = "yw Soy | -vaqra ouo | & pur ae 307 ‘uoqoopegd | SS} s pur 
| @ |‘moy‘deq, joowry, | ~ & | ‘moy ‘deq “] 3 | moy ‘deq 
=o ‘ K 
<e) 
cS jo son{vA ‘diqg WeuSe yi “iL 'H JO oinsvaw oRN[Osqe LO UOTIVAGIA PU UOTJIHEq Jo suoTeAIOSqO 


‘VHINIOJ “99ST Toquieydeg 


[May 9, 


Coimbra Monthly Magnetic Determinations. 


480 


VEES.or |PLEz.6 jgzgo.S EV gk Ig|"'"'**** SUBOTT 
Lo Se 1G t g1S6£.0 wggG.g ic.1S ax - S Ca | 
EclS.or |v$Ez.6 |zfgo.$ gv 0 92 9067.0 Ovex iW.0b |, a oz 1.42 Ik Oo og 
ve gf 19 I L1S6£.0 GEgROe IE. Le Sar O.1 
gz VI IG 4 ozS6£.0 | coLg6.g Iz.ge ze S £.1 
S$zS.0L |96zz.6 |96S0.$ ae GI 0 gror6h.0 CViVEZY ete io St 6.69 ivy 0. S12 
gv LI 19 I 07$6£.0 06986. |z.g£ g 11 O.I 
tects es voS6£.0 ¥$996.9 (2 (4S €.1 
cent verses 11S 90.6 seen sees \ROO1.0 LISocey IO.OL19) 1 OF z.69 Br OF Or 
sees oe +05 6£.0 6696.8 |v7.67 9 11 0.1 | 
St gi 190 z o1$6£.0 SOOO NW hea aS st 
LrES.o1 |¢Z££z.6 |2eS0.$ @ gv 0 9g |606%.0 TASER? NOnUh Wine te) 1.69 Peo 
ve gi 1g I o1$6£.0 £0lg6.g jo.o$ g 11 O.L 
8 gt 19 Zz | ¥oS6£.0 GeiQb-e lo.Ston SG €.1 
1vyS.o1 |L£bz.6 |}3$90.5 WW vy o @ }t06v.0 eivizcdy |S.0L Ge Eb 1 £.69 Ivo 1 
OI gt 19 I ToOS6£.0 07996.g |9.S€ S tr 0.1 
Yi 2 w Yy p s oF ary p per eeea ° | joo; | YG p 
< 2 a s) 
4) ssomura | = “104 tS | -soqnurut x rs | -seqnurat | 
aoTog ego! >. ¢ ‘dig ‘yynunzy | & pue be *xw Sor | -eaqua ouo| 58 pur = 307] ‘uoysopog | S98) & pue 
@ | ‘anoy ‘Avg By jo owry, | - Ss ‘anoy ‘Avg ee 8 Es 2 | ‘mmoy ‘éeq 
= I x " 
$ Xe 
jo sonyea ‘dig, o0use yy “WH JO oansvowl oynjosqe Loy UOTeAGIA PUY LOTPEPAC Jo SUOTyVAIESgO | 
“VAENIO) “99ST 10q0}0G—) 


431 


Z6zS.01 joShz.6 |o6$o.$ |EF gi rg}? suveTy 
2 iz TO 3 
ggoS.or |LLLz.6 |4190.$ ‘WW $$ 0 gzjr96b.0 
: c $< xo I 
iva 
= 
‘S oz £1 19 cA 
3 ZvzS.o1 |Poz7z.6 |06S0.$ Oo of ZI I 172/So06¥.0 
‘Ss fz of 19 I 
= 
~ 
S 
> S€ vx 19 Zz 
Q SzzS.o1 |£8tz.6 |Sogo.$ ‘WW gh 1 g1S0S+.0 
2 gS Sa i9 I 
~~ 
iS) 
2 
D 1f gt 19 t 
S og£S.o1 |z£¥z.6 |g9S0.5 o Sg Zz 0 71\906+.0 
gf 1% 19 I 
=> 
3 WS te I z 
S Sv6¥.01 |zgSz.6 |rZSo0,$ of gz f= Oo @ |g06t.0 
aS Lb gi 1 Tes 
3 MV ' ° ! fe) Ww q Pp 
= =|] — sees 
sS | 
aS S 
3 a *soqNUnu = 
[2020F CIOL, A x ‘dq | ‘wnumy| & pur NS 
© | ‘moy ‘Acq eS 
s 
jo sonir,A “dig oyouseyy 


1867] 


‘VUANIOD 


8566.0 
LS¥66.0 


gLt6£.o 
gLv6£.0 


Lgv6£.o 
ggv6£.o 


99%6£.0 
99V6£.0 


E9b6£.0 


Eet6S.0 


‘xu SoT 


6£vEzh |z.z79g I I 


zSvizr 


brSfz.v 


L6vez.r 


LEvezy 


‘u01} 
=tIQtA aU0 
JO SULT, 


6.59 


9.69 


0.99 


1.59 


° 


thal 
‘aimjerodway, 


Sz 
ibe jh (ove 
6 2yrooSa, 
MS) OM 
it (o) a 
w yp 
*sognULUL 
pue 
‘moy ‘Arq 


£0986.g |z.11 z S 
$6536.g 19. 9 4 
SSog6.g jL.eez S 
zL9g6.8 |S.L$ 9 «II 
SS9g6.9 |2.f1 2 § 
gfgg6.g |2.€ g «1 
9g9g6.g |S.2€ z S 
96986. ee L at 
$1136 8 |\6.9¢ < S 
06936. |jg.or Z 11 

u / ° 
307 *UOTJIIPIL 


2 
Ww 
»2) 


*1YCT 
‘ginqrvioduia,f, 


O.I 


*SOOUTISIC] 


obo Sz 
LS o of 
ob o Su 
9% 0 OF 
or oO of 


*soqNUTU | 
pur 
‘moy ‘Avg 


“iL “H Jo oansvour aqnposqe 10j UolyVAgIA pues UODayeEC Jo suoyrartasgg 


‘99ST toques 


| 
| 


482 - Prof. G. G. Stokes on the Internal [May 16, 
May 16, 1867. 


WILLIAM BOWMAN, Esq., V.P., in the Chair. 


The Right Honourable Lord Chief. Justice Bovill was admitted into the 
Society. 


The following communications were read :— 


I. “On the Internal Distribution of Matter which shall pronnee 
a given Potential at the Surface of a Gravitating Mass.” By 
G.G. Stokes, M.A., Sec.R.S., Lucasian Professor of Mathematics 
in the University if Cambudee. Received April 18, 1867. 


It is known that if either the potential of the attraction of a mass 
attracting according to the law of the inverse square of the distance, 
or the normal component of the attraction, be given all over the surface 
of the mass, or any surface enclosing it (which latter case may be 
included in the former by regarding the internal density as null between 
the assumed enclosing surface and the actual surface), the potential and 
consequently the attraction at all pomts external to the surface and at the 
surface itself is determinate. This proposition leads to results of particular 
interest when applied to the Earth, as [ showed in two papers published 
in 1849*, where among other things I proved that if the surface be 
assumed to be, in accordance with observation, of the form of an ellipsoid 
of revolution, Clairaut’s Theorem follows independently of the adoption of 
the hypothesis of original fluidity, or even of that of an internal arrange- 
ment in nearly spherical strata of equal density. 

But though the law of the variation of gravity which was: care 
obtained as a consequence of the hypothesis of primitive fluidity, and was 
afterwards found by Laplace to hold good, on the condition that the 
surface be an ellipsoid of revolution as well as a surface of equilibrium, pro- 
vided only the mass be arranged in nearly spherical strata of equal density, 
be thus proved to be true whatever be the internal distribution, the question 
may naturally be asked, Does not the condition that the potential at the sur- 
face shall have its actual value require that the internal distribution shall be 
compatible with that ofa fluid mass, or at anyrate shall be such that the whole 
mass shall be arranged in nearly spherical strata of equal density? Such a 
question was in fact asked me by an eminent mathematician at the time to 
which I have alluded. Ireplied by referring to the well-known property of 
a sphere, according to which a central mass may be distributed uniformly 
over its surface without affecting the external attraction, by applying which 
proposition to a mass such as the Earth we may evidentiy, without 
affecting the external attraction, leave a large excentrically situated cavity 

* “On Attractions, and on Clairaut’s Theorem,” Cambridge and Dublin Mathe- 


matical Journal, vol. iv. p. 194; and “On the Variation of Gravity at the Surface of 
the Earth,” Cambridge Philosophical Transactions, vol. vill. p. 672. 


1867. | Distribution of Matter, &c. 483 


absolutely vacuous, the matter previously within it having been distributed 
outside it. It is known further that the mass of a particle may be 
distributed over any surface whatsoever enclosing the particle without 
affecting the external attraction, and in this way we see at once that we 
may leave any internal space we please, however excentrically situated, 
wholly vacuous; nor is it necessary in doing so to introduce an infinite 
density, by distributing the whole mass previously within that space over 
its surface, since that mass may be conceived to be divided into an infinite 
number of infinitely small parts, which are respectively distributed over 
an infinite number of surfaces surrounding the space in question. These 
considerations, however, though they readily show that the internal 
distribution may be widely different from any that is compatible with the 
hypothesis of primitive fluidity, do not lead to the general expression for 
the internal density. Circumstances have recently recalled my attention 
to the subject, and I can now indicate the mode of obtaining the general 
expression required in the case of any given surface. 

Let the mass be referred to the rectangular axes of 2, y, 2, and let p be 
the density, V be the potential of the attraction. Then for any internal 
point V satisfies, as is well known, the partial differential equation 

2 27 2X7 
= r= —Anp, et ese wer ht so boaat oie Cl 
@ y z 


or as it may be written for brevity VV=0. This equation may be ex- 
tended to all space by imagining the body continued infinitely, but 
having a density which is null outside the limits of the actual body; and 
by adopting this convention we need not trouble ourselves about those 
limits. Conversely, if V be a continuously varying function of 2, y, ¢, 
which vanishes at an infinite distance, and satisfies the partial differential 
equation (1), V is the potential of the attraction of the mass whose density 
at the point (2, y, 2) 1s p; or, in other words, 


van (((E ae ay ae, SEAN ae ARS HO) 


where 7 is the distance between the points (a, y, z) and (w’, ’, 2’), p’ the 
density at (a’, y’, <'), and the limits are —« to +o, is the complete 
integral of (1) subject to the condition that V shall vanish at an in- 
finite distance. 

This may be proved in different ways; most directly perhaps by taking 
the expression for the potential (U suppose) which forms the right-hand 


° . jee ° ] ! t i 
member of (2), substituting for p' its equivalent ae VV', V’ being the 


same function of 2’, y', ’ that V is of a, y, z, and transforming the integral 
in the manner done by Green*, when we readily find U=V. 

* Hssay on the Application of Mathematical Analysis to the Theories of Electricity 
aac Nottingham, 1828, Art. 3; or the reprint in Crelle’s /ournal, vol. xliv. 
p. 360. 


484, Prof. G, G. Stokes on the Internal [May 16, 


Suppose now that we have a given closed surface S containing within it 
all the attracting matter, and that the potential has a given, in general 
variable, value V, at the surface. For the portion of space external to 
S, V is to be determined by the general equation VV=0, subject to the 
conditions V=V, at the surface, and V=0 at an infinite distance. We 
know that the problem of determining V under these circumstances admits 
of one and but one solution, though it is only for a very limited number of 
forms of the surface S that the solution can actually be effected. Conceive 


~ 


I 


the problem, however, solved, and from the solution let the value of aie 


at the surface be found, » being measured outwards along the normal. 
Now complete V for infinite space by assigning to the space within S any 
arbitrary but continuous* function we please, subject to the two conditions, 
Ist, that at the surface it is equal to the given function V,; 2ndly, that it 
gives for the value of S at the surface that already got from the solution 
of the problem referred to in this paragraph. ‘This of course may be done 
in an infinite number of ways, just as we may in an infinite number of ways 
join two points in a plane by a continuous curve starting from the two 
points respectively in given directions, which curve may be either expressed 
by some algebraical or transcendental equation, or conceived as drawn 
liberd manu, and thought of independently of any idea of algebraical ex- 
pression. The function V having been thus assigned to the space internal 
to 8, the equation (1) gives, according to what we have seen, the most 
general expression for the density of the internal matter. 

There is, however, no distinction made in this between positive and 
negative matter, and if we wish to avoid introducing negative matter we 
must restrict the function V for the space internal to S to satisfy the 
imparity 

@V dV  @Vv 0 
iP ap de 


It is easy from the general expression to show, what is already known, 
that the matter may be distributed in an infinitely thin, and consequently 
infinitely dense stratum over the surface 8, and that such a distribution is 


{ 


determinate. 
We know that there exists one and but one continuous function applying 


to the space within S which satisfies the equation VV=0, and is equal to 


* To avoid prolixity, I include in “continuous” the requirement that the differential 
coefficients of the function, to any order required, shall vary continuously. What that 
order may be it is perfectly easy in any case to see. We may of course imagine distri- _ 
butions in which the density becomes infinite at one or more points, lines, or sur/aces, 
but so that a finite volume contains only a finite mass. But such distributions may 
be regarded as limiting, and therefore particular, cases of a distribution in which the 
density is finite; and therefore the supposition that ¢ is finite, does not in effect limit the 
generality of our results. . 


1867.] Distribution of Matter, §c. 485 
V, at the surface. Call this function V,. It is to be remarked that the 


dv, aVv 
value of = at the surface is not the same as that of » V being the ex- 


ternal potential, though V,and V are there each equal to a The argument, 
it is to be observed, does not assume that the two are different; it merely 
avoids assuming that they are the same; the result will prove that they 
cannot be the same all over S unless the density, and consequently the po- 
tential, be everywhere null, and therefore V,=0. Now attribute to the 
interior of S a function V which is equal to V, except over a narrow stra- 
tum adjacent to S, the thickness of which will in the end be supposed to 
vanish, within which V is made to deviate from V, in such a manner as 


oe dV ba 
to render the variation of ae continuous and rapid instead of abrupt. 


On applying equation (1), we see that the density is everywhere null 
except within this stratum, in which it is very great, and in the limit 
infinite. For the total quantity of matter contained in any portion of the 
stratum, we have from (1) 


yt ae 
—at\} Vdadydz, 


the integration extending over that portion. Let the portion in question be 
that corresponding to a very small area A of the surface S; we may sup- 
pose it bounded laterally by the ultimately cylindrical surface generated by 
a normal to S which travels round the perimeter of A. Taking now 
rectangular coordinates \, , 7, of which the last is parallel to the normal 
at one point of A, since V is not changed in form by referring it to a new 
set of rectangular axes, we have for the mass required 


[ar ee a 
n drdud 
tlh Far a 95 pis 


Of the differential coefficients within brackets, the last alone becomes infinite 
when the thickness of the stratum, and consequently the range of integra- 
tion relatively to A, becomes infinitely small. We have in the limit 
eV dV avy, 

dy=—__— 


5) 
Ve yp de dv 


both differential ke ere having their values belonging to the surface. 
Hence we have ultimately for the mass 


A /dV, -=). 
ral dy dy 


Hence, if @ be the superficial density, defined as the limit of the mass 
ecrresponding to any small portion of the surface divided by the arca of 


that portion, . 
aV, a&V 
w=7(“ — me 7) ° ° . 2 a ° e (3) 


which is the known expression, 


A86 Mr. R. Moon on the Integrability of certain [May 16, 


In assigning arbitrarily a function V to the interior of S, ia order to get 
the internal density by the application of the formula (1), we may if we 
please discard the second of the conditions which V had to satisfy at the 

dV, dV Hy 
surface, namely, that ray but in that case to the mass, of finite 
density, determined by (1) must be added an infinitely dense and infinitely 
thin stratum extending over the suriace, the finite superficial density of 
this stratum being given by (3). 

We have seen that the determination of the most general imiemal 
arrangement requires the solution of the problem, To determine the poten- 
tial for space external to S, supposed free from attracting matter, in terms 
of the given potential at the surface ; and the determination of that parti- 
cular arrangement in which the matter is wholly distributed over the sur- 
face, requires further the solution of the same problem for space internal 
to S. If, however, instead of having merely the potential given at the 
surface S we had given a particular arrangement of matter within S, and 
sought the most general rearrangement which should not alter the potential 
at S, there would have been no preliminary problem to solve, since V, and 
therefore its differential coefficients, are known for space generally, and 
therefore for the surface 8, being expressed by triple integrals. 

Instead of having the attracting matter contained within a closed surface 
S, and the attraction considered for space external to S, it might have been 
the reverse, and the same methods would still have been applicable. The 
problem in this form is more interesting with reterence to electricity than 
gravitation. 


II. “On the Integrability of certain Partial Differential Equations 
proposed by Mr. Airy.” By R. Moon, M.A., late Fellow of 
Queen’s College, Cambridge. Communicated by Professor J. J. 
SyLVESTER. Received April 30, 1867. 


(Abstract. ) 
The equation 
ORGS ey Oe ors Ole 
Pies Ae re ees ME se (le) 
where #, (3, y are functions of w, includes two equations recently proposed 
for solution by Mr. Airy, and affords a good illustration of the ordinary in- 
capacity of partial differential equations of the second order for solutions 
involving arbitrary functions. 
If the above equation admit of an integral solution containing one or 
more arbitrary functions, it must be capable of being derived from an equa- 
tion of the form | 


E(ayz)= 617 (yz )he 0) 6 0) ol 2 RD 


1867. ] : Partial Differential Equations. 487 


where F and fare definite, and ¢ is arbitrary. From this last we get 


P(@)+P)p=o (SiS (+S ph, 
PY +E (2)g=9 SII M+ OG 
and eliminating @' between these, we shall arrive at an equation between 
«yzpy which is the only partial differential equation of the first order free 
from arbitrary functions which is obtainable from (2) without assigning to 
¢ a definite form. | 
Hence (1) must be derivable from an equation of the form 


Sxyepy) =9, 
C=O CCUM, crete ts ciety crt. Ale te eeeret aan a) 
where f is definite. TEAL we have 
0= Fa OAS MAS Paap 


Ap i 2 d*z 
0= Ha) sO Oa AC) ee 


or of the form 


Multiplying the second equation by A (where A is any function of xyzpq) 
and adding, we get 


(O= Fats (pts £5. gt (pS tf tM) | 


+ (q+ Ap) ie 
If (1) admits of a solution of the form (2), (1) must be identical with 
(4), or be capable of becoming so by virtue of (3). Hence 


O=A+f(p), —a=Af'(p); 
Pp+yz=f'(y)+Af'(@)+(ApSfyf@). «+ © (3) 
From the two first we get 
Vic?) =a ea 
Hence f must satisfy both the equations 
J (p=, | } ee (6) 
O=f'(y) af (w)—(fEap)f'(e)—(ep + 2)- 
The first gives us 


(4) 


f=E (aye) 1 ap, 
where F is arbitrary. Substituting this value in (6), observing that 
f@=F@)tr%, fW=F). FO=FO, 
we get 
Ade 
0=F'(y) Fak (o)—(E£2ap)F @)-(B+4 7 ptyz) + @) 


VOL. XV. 28 


4.88 Integrability of Partial Differential Equations. [May 16, 
But F contains only yz; hence, in order that this last equation may hold, 
the coefficient of p must =0, 7. e. we must have ; 
i= +20 ()+(B+eo) ee 
ax 
in which case (7) reduces to ib 8, 
O=F (y)4-aF'(2z)—F.FP'G@)—ye. oa ee 
_ F must satisfy both (8) and (9). 
By integration of (8) we get | 
1 /p jda\ 
FF (zy) + al= + a) * 
Substituting this in (9), observing that 
pe ee di 
F(@)=F@)E 5 < (E+ S)-s 


PF y= Fs in 
we get 


: Ly a d 
O=F (vy) LaF’ (2)+ 5 a 414 i 


nape he jd 


But, since F, contains 2 and y only, in order that this may hold we must 
have the coefficient in it of <=0, 7. e. 
pe a 5(2+%)— 1 ene 
dx 2 
in which ease (10) becomes 


Deeg IG oe 5(E+%), B; 


whence by integration we get 


Ip B 1 do t 
ss Gi (5 fe dx (vt (2), 


where @ 1s arbitrary. 
Hence we get for the first integral of (1) when (10) ts satisfied, 


Bde 
O=q+apz - (E+ Tet Va. Jo _ (vt (2) 


whence by ordinary integraticn we obtain the complete integral of the form, 


i = 


Eales f) 6 $9 


1867.| © On the Lunar Atmospheric Tide at Melbourne. 489 


We have above a very simple example of a general principle, viz. that in 
order that a partial differential equation of the second order, or a pair of. 
simultaneous partial diiferential equations of the first order, may admit of 
a solution containing arbitrary functions, the coefficients must satisfy a cer- 
tain equation of condition ; from which it follows that, except in the sim- 
_ plest instances (in which the terms of the equation of condition vanish), 
there is a moral certainty that such a differential equation or pair of equa- 
tions which have not been specially selected for the purpose, and whose co- 
efficients do not involve a disposable quantity by which the equation of con- 
dition may be satisfied, will not admit of a solution involving arbitrary 
functions. 

The equations applicable to the motion of an elastic fluid along the axis 
of a tube afford a remarkable illustration of the scope of these remarks. 

Those equations consist of a pair of partial differential equations of the 
first order involving five variables, viz. y, ¢, p, v, 3; and it may be shown 
a priori, that when derived upon a true theory they must be capable of a 
solution containing ¢wo arbitrary functions ; from which it follows that a 
third equation will require to be satisfied. For this purpose we have p, the 
pressure, ready to our hands. 

From the fact of the existence of the equation of condition not having 
been suspected by the founders of the theory of fluid-motion, at the same 
time that it was absolutely necessary for them to assign a form to p, they 
had recourse for that purpose to an empirical method; thus, on the one 
hand, depriving us of the power of satisfying the requirements of the pro- 
blem, and on the other, abandoning the means for the determination of p 
which the analysis furnishes. 

It cannot be matter of surprise that the law of pressure suggested under 
these circumstances should be entirely erroneous, as (by two other inde- 
pendent methods, one founded upon purely physical, the other upon purely 
analytical considerations) I have elsewhere shown. 


Wil. * On the Lunar Atmospheric Tide at Melbourne.” By Dr. G. 
Neumayer, late Director of the Flagstaff Observatory, Mem. 
Acad. Leop. Communicated by Licut.-Gen. Sanrnu, President. 
Received April 10, 1867. 


Anxious to assist the development of so interesting a branch of know- 
ledge on the connexion of forces in nature as the influence our satellite 
exerts upon the earth’s atmosphere, I had made it a point to include 
investigations, tending to facilitate studies in this direction, in the plan of 
discussion of the observations made at the Flagstaff Observatory about to 
be published. Fully aware that a geographical position, such as that of Mel- 
bourne (37° 48! 45" south lat. and 9" 39™ 53° east long.), affords but very 
few chances for arriving forthwith at a result which might be regarded as 


final, I thought it nevertheless of the highest importance to decide how 
232 


490 3 Dr. G. Neumayer on the Lunar [May 16, 


far and to what an extent such small oscillations as those in question, and 
which for lower latitudes have already been proved to exist, would make 
themselves manifest, in spite of the great atmospheric disturbances of 
higher latitudes. The volume of discussions above referred to contains 
consequently the results of the reduction and classification of upwards of 
43,500 hourly observations on pressure of air, registered during the period - 
from the Ist of March 1858 to the 28th of February 1863; and in pub- 
lishing these results I was chiefly guided by the conviction that it would 
hardly be compatible with the scope of such a work to enter upon a full 
discussion of the phenomena connected with the lunar influence on the 
barometer ; while a complete reduction and classification would make the 
observations apt to be taken up by any one interested in this matter for 
the purpose of being subjected to a rigorous examination and discussion. 
While engaged upon this task, I could not fail, however, to be struck by 
some very interesting facts which, though they are far from being reducible 
to definite laws, may serve to furnish some connecting links with respect to 
atmospheric tides, and to give evidence as to the possibility of proving 
their existence even in as high a latitude as that of Melbourne. A successful 
attempt at a complete solution of the problem may only be hoped for when 
a larger number of discussions on barometrical observations, collected at 
ectropical stations, will be at our command. 

Prior to entering upon the task proposed, it appears desirable to give a 
few particulars, requisite for a full understanding of the subjoined results. 
The geographical position of the Flagstaff Observatory was already men- 
tioned, and it remains only to ke added that the standard barometer was 
one of Newman’s construction, 0°400 inch in diameter, its cistern being 
120°7 feet above the mean level of the sea. A few facts respecting the 
oceanic tides gleaned from ‘the Sailing Directions for Port Phillip,’ by 
Capt. Ferguson (1861), may also find a place here. 


High water at full and change. Vertical mse 


and fall. 
Spring.| Neap. 
hm | gue 
On the beach at Pt. Lonsdale............ Ils 25 Fi 4 
In the midchannel between Pt. Lonsdale and 
Pe NicGa ee eet eerie hae bites Ne 1 50 
At the Lightship, West channel .......... jes |) 4 7 
At the East end of South channel ........ BRD 4 3 
At the Bird rock, Geelong) .2jo152..0)-Aart. 2 teh) 3°5 2:5 
At Pt. Gellibrand and mouth of River Yarra epee UJ A°5 aE, 


There is no necessity for entering more fully into a description of the 
method employed in freeing the barometrical observations from the regular 
diurnal fluctuation and arranging the remainders 6—6 according to lunar 
time, inasmuch as this method is quite identical with the one employed 
by all who haye directed their attention to this subject, as General Sabine, 


1867.) Atmospheric Tide at Melbourne. 49] 


Professor Kreil, and others. This much may be stated, however, that the 
reading of the barometer (6), after being reduced to 32°, was invariably 
increased by 1 inch, in order that it may always exceed the mean pressure 
for the respective hour (6), thereby avoiding negative results. This has 
certainly the disadvantage of not exhibiting at a glance the excess or defect 
of atmospheric pressure at any time; on the other hand, there is no doubt 
that a mistake with regard to the algebraic sign of the remainders is not 
likely to occur. In the subsequent Tables it was made a rule to reduce the 
values 3—6 to their mean value for a month, year, or whatever other 
period of time they may refer to. 

The remainders —é were derived, in the manner just ered out, for 
every month throughout the period of five years for which the observa- 
tions were continued. Then the means for every month and hour were 
taken, thus obtaining normal values for the several months; a general 
mean for every month formed the basis to which those normal values were 
referred. The subjoined Table shows the result of this proceeding. 

The values of the above Table have been thrown into curves, and Plate I. 
shows the results. The actual mean values are indicated by dots; a full- 
drawn curve is made to pass through and between them in such a manner 
as to eliminate the greater irregularities. Some of those irregularities are 
so large as to cause the respective dots to be disconnected with the series to ~ 
which they belong, and it became therefore necessary to indicate this con- 
nexion by slight dotted lines. 

On glancing over this series of curves we caunct fail to observe a great 
regularity, pointing at some cause common to all; and as the remainders 
b—b have been arranged according to the moon’s hour-angle, we may 
justly look to the moon as the primary cause. But it is nevertheless true | 
that those curves apparently point to some other influence, most likely due 
to the combined action of the sun and moon. The monthly curves for the 
several years of observation have also been drawn, though we refrain from 
adding the results here; and the fact that they correspond in the main 
points with those shown on Plate I., seems to justify our attaching parti- 
cular weight to the evidence of the moon’s influence on our atmosphere, as 
conveyed to our minds by the above Tables. But prior to entering fully 
upon the various points bearing on the question at issue, we need to form 
of the monthly results quarterly and semiannual groups. If we call March, » 
April, May the first, June, July, August the second, September, October, 
November the third, and December, January, ebruary the fourth quarter, 
we obtain the quarterly means inserted in the following Table. It was 
furthermore considered serviceable to the purpose to group together those 
quarters in which the epochs of solstices and equinoxes respectively occur, 
under the collective names ‘solstitial and equinoctial quarters.” The semi- 
annual periods comprise, as usually, the months from April to September, 
and those froma October to March. The mean of all the various hourly 
values represents the mean lunar-diurnal variation in pressure of air for the 
year. 


[May 16, 


Dr. G. Neumayer on the Lunar 


492 


"(E9-8G8T) ‘oovssed sorsezut oy} 07 rorsedns oy} Worg—‘gavd 49° 


ggto0.o— | Prz00.0— | gz000.0+ | z6700,0-- | z££00.0— | t1000.0+4 | og000.0— | gz£00.0— | g£000.0— | 9g000.0-+ 91000.0+ | 9%700.0— |" yoauyy 
£6009.0+ | $zz00.0+ | $gz00,0+ | $¥zo0.0+ | ££¥00.04 | EL¥00.04 | £9£00.04 | $Lzo0.0-+ | 10000.0— | Zzzo0.0— | Litoo.o— | 11400.0— Arenage i | 
b6£00.0+ | gt100.0+ | z6£00.0— | gS£00.0+4+ | zrzco0.0+ | g£100.0— | govoo.o— g£100.0-+4 | ovzZ00.0+ | ovbvo0.0+ | 66£00.04 | zgo00.0+ |::: Arenue fp 
fv110.0+ | £6300.0-++ | 6z000.0— | bo100.0— | 6700.04 | Ev100.0+ | 1b£00.0— | 10bv00.0— | SoLoo.o— | Looro.o— | ESt00.0— | £1060.0— Taq uedE 
ZIOI0.0— | t£o10.0— | o1600,0— | ggzo0.o— | o¥100.0— | ov£00.0-- | 0$z00,0+ | 00$00.0+ | gg000.0+ | bgzo0.0+ | zrvoo.0+ | ozloo.o-+ Taq UlIaAo NY 
£0900.0— | LS000.0+ | £010.04 | £z100.0— | Loooc.o— | 6¥z00.0+4 | £go00.0— | LLro0.0+ | rg100.0+ | £bz00.0+ | 1g000.0— | 6L100.0— |" redone 
'07500,0-+ | 06200.0— | 06z00.0— | zo$o00.0— | zglo0.o— | ¥gz00.0— | goooo.c+ | z6000.0+ | z1000.0— | 06100.04+ | gS000.04 | g0000.0-+4+ Joqutezdeg | 
S£000.0-++ | £go00.0— | £gf00.0+ | 60$00.04 | 6z100.04+ | LL£00.0— | rg100.0— | L£100.0—.| 60000.0-+ | 60z00.0 — | 1££00.0— | $0z00.0— qsnsny 
¥3700.0+ | zz$00.0+ | VLooo.0c+ | g4z00.0— | 00£00.0— | zg100.0— | PvO00.0— | gro00.0+ | voroo.o+ | P£100.0— | $9£00.0— | zLooo,0— Jt Ane 
vrgoo.o+ | z£L00.0+ | g£109.0-+ | tg100.0+ | gg100.0-L | gizoo.o+ | zoroco.o— | gvzo0.04 | z1100.0— | zg400.0+ | zzzo0.0-+ | 9£100,04 [+++ oun 
6£600.0+4 | Eoroo.o— | LgLoo.o— | rvvo0o.0o— | 1gz00.0— | Evvoo.0— | 1££00.0— | 6z£00.0— 10000.0+ | 11£00.0+ | LSto00.0+ | ££000.0— |-*:*:: Kew 
of100.0+ | vrv00.0— | 96z00.0— | ov£00.0— | 7g000.0— | 96000.04 | z$z00,0+ | 46000.04 | o£z00.0+ | g£100,04- | goroo.o+ ZQ1OO.0-+ |****"* Tady 
"Ul “UL "UL “UL "UL “UL "UL “UL “UL “UL “UL “UL 
yet Wee “yIZ “Ou “61 "aS qed Poi Feel ‘GVI qot “ye “STUOTT 
(€9-8¢8T) ‘goessvd rorzodns oyy 04 LOLLOFUL out wor1g— aed PUG : 
Zg000.0— | goro0.o— | 9£S$00.0-+ | bzl00.0+ | 99600.0+4 | g1$00.04+ | 9$100.04+ | bz100.0+4 | vzoo0.0-+- | 06z00.0— | ofvo0.0— | zobvoo.o— |:"' YOrRyAy 
£$z00.0— | SLE00.0— | LSo000.0+ | $zzo0.0— | Lzzo0.0— | S¥100.0— | E£000.0— | £6100.04 | Sto00,0+ | Scoc0,.o— | £L000.0-+ | § g¥00.0 — | Avenir 
zS100,0+ | gz£00.0-- | V¥Q00.0— | ZQ100.0+4 | g1000.0-+ | 9z700,.0— | Vz£o0.0+| gS100.0+ | ggd00.0— | or£00.0— | g9gS00.0— | gZro0.0— | fawn p 
1z£00.0-+ | 6¥o00.0+ | Ego10.0o— | Lozoo.o— | €$%00.0— | 1$z00.0+ | 1100.04 | 1g£00.0-+ |'10z00.04 | LS¢o00,0+ | L$zoo.0-+ | LL£00.0+ | requicoaq: 
goLoo.o+ | g£100.0+ | gzLoo.o+ | ogfoo0.0+ | gzo00.0— | zgzoo.o+ | g6900.0+ | govoo.0— | bv¥100,04 | or z00.0— | z1900.0— | 9Lg00.0— | TOC{ULOAO NT 
$9z00.0+ | 6£100.0-4 | 6$000.0— | £ofoo.0+ | L1100.0+4 | 6g9100.0-+ | Lyoo0.0— | 1$z00.0— | $6$00.0— | L6vo0.0— | Szo00.0— | £ovo0.0— |*** 1aq0}0Q 
0£z00.0— | 0$000.0+ | zh£00.0— | zvo00.0-++ | Zo000.0+ | zS100.0— | z$So00.0+ | g6t%00.0+ | g£100.0+ | ozo00,0-+ | t1z00.0-+ | Z4oo.0+ | taquiaydeg 
LLzo0.0o— | r££00.0— | L¥too.0— | 1v100.0-- | $£000.0+4 | LE100.0+ | £$£00.0+4 | $zzo0.0+ | L6000.0— | £ozo0o.0o— | LEvo0.0+ | ErL00.0+ qsnsny 
v1000.0— | VzLo0.0+ | gtloo.o+ | 7z$00.0+ | oL100.0-+ | g£000.0+ | ggtoo.o— | z100.0— | 06S00.0— | 9£$00.0— | oz£00.0 — | BIZOO,O- | Ayn ep 
bzz00.0+ | 9z00.0— | gL£00.0— | 96900.0— | z1goo.o— | z6S00.0— | gogoo.o— | z£vo0.0— | g6z00.0— | z$000.0— | ggtoo.o+ | goSo0.0+ |**:""° oun 
L6000.0-+ | 1$$00.0-+ | 11000.0— | LL£00,0— | 1£000.0-4 | 61z00.0-+ | 1zzoo.0o— | 1$000.0— | ££z00.04+ | Srr00.0— | £Lg00,0+ | $9000.04 |:*° ACT 
g£000.0+ | glo00.0+4 | z6000.0— | t$100.0+ | ¥z100.0-+ | of000.0+ | o£ 100.04 | g1000.0— | ¥gz00.0— | of 100.0— | 06%00.0— | Or z00,0+4 |-**""° Tady 
“UL “Ul “Ul ar | “UL “UT “UL “UL “UL “UL “Ue Ura 
oC (Ot - 6 “48 a “49 a aay ae “uz al 0 | “SyQUOyT 


| 


ae) rm Be Ga ae eee a al asa BS ae Fy va 
BS | 600200.0+ vv£oo0.0+) 1£9000.0—) 116090.0— | z1$000.0—| 1$4000.0— | vz$000.0— | 6z£000.0+4 | 2£1000,0—| $1000.04 | 060000.0—| 610000.0— "888" aKa | 
¥19000.0 —| 7g0000.0-+} go0000.0 —| 7$£000.0—| 9Zg000.0+] z£gco0.0+) 1£7000.0—| 699000.0+| ~z¥000.0 — | 10£000.0—| g07000.0—| 770000.0— | “ART 01 -49Q_, 
0z91700.0-+| 065000.0+-| L9z100.0— | ogb100.0—| £16100.0—| LgS100.0—| 0£9000.0—| £z0000.0—| Lg£000.0+) L6L100.0+ | €10000.0+| Looco0.0—| *}dag 07 “dy | 
SSgvo00.0+ | 1vov00.0+} 2zZlo00.0+| pL4¥100.0+| 199100.0-+ 85 7000.0} ZQIT100.0—| 167000.0-++| zgl000.0 — 665009.0—| 18Z100.0 — ZI13000.0 — SE (TPNSTOS 
989100.0—| 06££00.0—| ELozo0.0—| L¥E£00.u— | L£Lz00.0 —| o1z100.0—| ¥90000.0+4 | L1£000.0+| £g9000.0+4) zg0z00.0+ | Lrb100.0+} £zLo00.04+ #2 V-s0umbay 
ot v$00.0-+| 6orb00.0+) LESo000.0—| 6zg100.0+| 6z££00.0+4] EgS100.0+| vof100.0—| 6¥1000.0+| o4$ 100.0—| +99z00.0—| b$z100.0—| LS1100.0—| 21 
£gSto0.0—| Egrv00.0—| LS$o000.0—| LSo£00.0—| L60£00.0—| 0$z100.0—| 0$9000.0+) £9$z00.0+] 06L000.0+ | 06£z00.04+| L6z100.0+| ofg1o0.0+) “TIL! 
62g£00.0-+| 2£6£00.0+| 6£6100.0+) g1£100.0-++ | g00000.0—| gg0100.0—| 1z0100.0— | z£4000.0-++| $00000.0+) Sgt100.0+| goLI00.0—| ggvoo0.o—| Tr 
7L2z00.0-++| $£$z00.0—| ghv£o0.0—| $LS£00.0—| S1£z00.0—| go1100.0—| 19¥000.0—| gggio0.o—| $+g000.0-++| $34100.04+) 66$100.0+| 77£000.0—! Jayren?) ‘T 
a Ul “UL “UL “UL “UL “UL “ul “UL “Ul “UL “UL “or | 
3 ee qe ic Oe OIL “ZI | abl! *yQI “all aril | pea “ol | 
= | | | : rs = | aw | ; 
D : 
= (€9-8¢81) 
3 ‘acvssud rorzedns oy} 04 LoLeyut oy} tHorg “yaed pug 
& 
2 $6£000.0+| 176000.0-+-| 9$Lo00.0—| 6£S000.0-+| zt0000.0—| -y¥bo000.0-+ 96£000.0-+ | yro000.0-+}| 1£6000.0—| 69$100.0—| g£000.0 — 16£000.0+, 2 aes VAX 
5 673 109.0+| 26$000.0+| ¥LL000.0—| 96g100.0+/| z$g000.0+| z1b100.0+-| 6ho100.0+} z££000.0+! t14000.0—| zb100.0—| b£1rz00.0—| 116z00.0—| ‘xRyT 0} 399 
=~ £Lz000.0—| LLz100.0-+-| 0$Lo00.0 —| o£ g000.0 —| 0$ Loo0.0 —| LES000.0—| o£ 2000.0 —| L1£000.0—| ogh100.0—| LzL100.0—| o£v100.0+| ogg£o0.0+) qdegq 0} -ady 
m* | §¥z000.0-+) 711100.0—| 66£7200.0—| 7g6000.0—| Lz1z00.0—| 906000.0—| 61£000.0 — 1g1000.0+) 6¥£100.0—| 6gor100.0—| rLo000.0+| £z6100.04+ |s2 (peNNSTOR | 
5 06z100:0+| ¥¥6z00.0+| LEz100.0+| 010700.0+| 066100.0+] t¥L100.0+) tg0100.0+| $0z000.0—| £95000.0—| o01z00.0— 990000.0— | 9zz100.0—|7 5 Usoumbayp 
SS g1£000.0-++| ¥z$z00.0—| ¥g$S00.0—| L16000.0—| #£zz00.0—| L1000.0 —| gf b100.0+| Ezbzo0.0+) 9£S000.0-++ g$¥000.0-+| 01 g000.0 — | o£ g000.0— | - “At 
XQ oLvzo0.0-+| L1zv00.0+| o60100.0+ | L14¥z00.04+) £o0£000.0+| £66000.04+) 010700.0+| o£$000.0—| £40100.0 —| 067z00.0-~| or vr00.0 — Liozoo.o—| ‘TH 
1ZZ000.0-++/ g62000.0++] $10000.0—| g0100.0—| 1z0z00.0—| $6£100.0—| $Loz00.0—| 190700.0— | $Lz£00.0 --| §£9z00.0—| $6000.04 vzLvo0.0+} “ “Ti 
z£1000.0-+ | Z£L100.0-++ | S¥h100.0+ | $ggro0.0+| 6£L£00.0+| 2$$z00.0+| 61z000.0+| S$gro00.o+) 120090.0—| gtg100.0—| $$1000.0—| §S$£000.0—| royaent) *y 
“UL “Ul “Ul "UL “UL “UL “UL. "UI “ul “Ul “UL avis 
sn 401 “6 48 ‘ql “19 “aS “yb al “az al “40 | 
(-e9-8¢8T) 


‘aSessed Jorreyut oy} 07 cortodus 04} Wor “javd 4ST 


a a aa i aa 


4.94 Dr. G. Neumayer on the Lunar [May 16, 


The curves derived from the results of this Table are stown on Plate XI., 
with the exception of the semiannual and annual curves which may be 
studied on Plate X. 

Glancing at the various curves thus resulting, we are first struck by the 
great conformity of some of them, whilst others present irregularities 
apparently quite irreconcileable with what we feel inclined to adopt as the 
law. There is, however, in all cases manifested a progressive change, 
evidently depending on the moon’s hour-angle in the first instance, calling 
for a rigorous examination. The semiannual curves of the lunar-diurnal 
variation of atmospheric pressure may be taken as representing the prin- 
cipal types of the various monthly curves. During the sun’s absence from 
the hemisphere (in our case, when the sun’s declination is north), from 
April to September, the lunar variation reaches its maximum at about 23"15™, 
or 45™ prior to the moon’s upper transit, its minimum value occurring at 
19 and a secondary one at 2", with a range of 000653 inch. The curves 
for the single months appertaining to this semiannual period exhibit, 
generally speaking, the same characteristics, though somewhat irregular, and 
showing, in some instances, deviations of considerable extent; so, for in- 
stance, the curves for August and September. The summer semiannual 
curve (while the sun’s declination is south) exhibits an essentially different 
character, there being no strongly expressed maximum noticeable, whilst a 
decided minimum occurs at 0" 30™ or 30™ past the moon’s upper passage, 
the maximal pressure taking place at 6", and a secondary one between 18" 
and 19". The amplitude of oscillation amounts to 0:00432 inch. But mm 
this period of the year we notice a great difference in the lunar-diurnal 
variation of the barometer, when we examine the single months somewhat 
more closely ; thus, for instance, the curve for the month of December shows 
such characteristics as to cause it to be more like the curves for the winter 
period, and, on the other hand, we perceive that the curve for the 
month of November is exactly of the opposite character as that for De- 
cember. The remaining four months show more or less irregularity, and 
make a greater or smaller approach towards the general type for the class 
under consideration. . 

Although there is undoubtedly in all of these cases strong evidence of an 
influence of the moon on our atmosphere, I could not rest satisfied, con- 
sidering that this evidence is seemingly of a somewhat conflicting nature. 
As already explained, the monthly values have, for the purpose of further 
inquiry, been combined into quarters, and the results for these quarters 
were again united in mean values, arranging the two quarters in which 
epochs of solstice occur, and the remaining two, comprising the equinoxes, 
respectively, in two groups. Thus we obtain six monthly mean values of 
the lunar-diurnal variation for the “solstitial and the equincctial quarters.” 
I was prompted to adopt this course because of the great similarity of the 
curves for December and June in the one case, and of March and Septem- 
ber in the other, though in by far less a degree. This similarity may best 


mw a 


© Opper Fransit. 


Proc. Roy. Soc. VoLXV. Pu_X. 


One part= 0 - 01 ch 


ih agh gages gee a7” gh igh 
ie Sear ee ond 


i 


ibe 2g 23% oh ite at giv 
| 


| 


| 


MN ST IE Oe TP a” 
ae 


if 

| 
| 
Je 
> 


ee 


—T 


i 
| 
i} 
| 
M 
| 
| 


Ics ae el a 
lrener| | 


iy 


Jemmary —— — 


4.- —s 


February. 


= 


Re 
aid Ns Hee 
b— | 


SWhry ||} | | 
| | ? 


| 
| = 
i 
+= Es 


aes is ee ee 


i] 


fe | 
Year. (ees staal 
lea 


Pie pobre merece sh. ve 
| | | { i | 
Ke et Itiaueat | 
to Sepp poe ie fDi to 
canna Sina aseie 
ee re Re ah | | 
| 
| ate i | | 
Octob. to Mir p— | > aaa es 
Lo MOSS ail auetege | | 


) es ee eee 


| 


12% 13% qalv qgle age qe 


ee 


© Upper Transit. 


es 


78'v 7g 20% oft gah agh QW qh oh 3h gh sh gh 7h gh gh ygh qq qh 


J Basie Fv. 


. 
7 
: 
4 


til ee et Oe . % 


“ 


Proc. Roy. doc. VoluXV. PU XT 


aff ry 0b 46 yf yh 


(2a =e aarerae 


yd mae yl ye yb al 


a 


ISUDAT addy) ») 


(eee 


MO ee alee be ye ot se yhl Wt Ft ae afel 


nel a he 8 ae ae 
“YOULL 0. - 0 =9.40d. aug 


49 mG ub 


Tie onal Shoe. 


gsupy todd) ) 


=—— eS 
Boe a ee 
me net eee —— 


a i en 


ea 


EC r42E mpl ryOL r4GE BL rgb Gb ySL rgb EL met 


x ? 


Jdaguiadas 
YO AT 


Py 
AUN 


LQuuaaacy 


Aa. tOVg) AI 
~ 40) IT 


nns7r4s I] 


— AFLG | 


TPONLAS/O8 
q 
§ 


qonsoumb 7) & 


a 
Pes 


Ss 


1867. ] Atmospheric Tide at Melbourne. 495 


be judged by the mean values for the respective two months, representing, 
as they do, in both cases a distinct oscillation with an amplitude of 0"-01722 
for the solstices, and of 061041 for the equinoxes. I may be allowed to 
refrain from adding here these mean values, suffice it to refer to the 
respective curves at the bottom of Plate II. For December and June we 
observe the maximum to occur at 23", the minimum at or shortly after 8", 
while for September and March the maximum in the lunar-diurnal varia- 
tion of pressure of air takes place at 7" and the minimum at 19". The 
mean for the quarters (each embracing six months) show the same charac- 
teristics, though by far less in extent, the amplitude for the solstitial 
quarters being 0”°007454, and that for the equinoctial quarters 0":006334, 

There is another fact which requires to be pointed out, in order to throw 

further light upon the character of these oscillations; namely, that they 
eem to bear a great resemblance for both hemispheres durmg the same 
semiannual period, if we are permitted to arrive at this conclusion by re- 
ferring to Prof. Kreil’s discussions of his observations at Prague (Versuch 
den Kinfluss des Mondes auf den atmospherischen Zustand unserer Erde 
aus einjahrigen Beobachtungen zu erkennen, 1841). The semiannual 
curves of the lunar-diurnal variation of the barometer at Prague and Mel- 
bourne closely correspond during the months from April to September, and 
from October to March, which seems to point to some cause common to 
the whole globe in a similar manner, as we know it to be with respect to 
the extent of the rise of the oceanic tides at the time of the solstices and 
equinoxes. It would be premature to enter now upon any speculation 
with a view to bring the results of our observations in accordance with 
theory, there being still by far too few discussions on atmospheric tidal 
observations at our command. 

The yearly curve of the lunar-diurnal variation presents some peculiarly 
interesting features, differing in some respects from the results of similar 
inquiries instituted by General Sabine and Capt. C. M. Elliot with special 
regard to the lunar atmospheric tides at St. Helena and Singapore, al- 
though the plan of discussion was the same. The lunar horary variation 
of the barometer is as follows, ‘if we arrange the results in such manner 
that the hours are combined in which the moon is similarly situated in 
respect to the meridian”’ (Sabine’s paper “On the Lunar Tides at St. 
Helena ’’) :— 


[May 16, 


Dr. G. Neumayer on the Lunar 


496 


a 


Yq 


“ULI PLLOUt 
OY WOLF 
a0URISIp 

§ WOOT 


Ejgee. -- 
Svooo. + 


1g000. + 


©0900, 
£Looo. + 


Iz100, -+- 


0g000.0-+ 


“ul 


“UBITAL 


€f£100, + 
6oz00o. + 


L£g000,0-+ | 


“Ur 


‘asessed 
URIPLIOUl oy 
Sutpeooard 
soy oxy 
4B SUOTVAAS 
-qo oy} WOT 


brooo, + 
£000. + 


£L000.0-+- 


“UL 


‘osessed 
URIPLoUL 
OY} SULMOTIOF. 
simoy ory 
qv SUOTYRALOS 
-qO oly} ULO.F 


Sooo. — gi 

00000, | Hoos 7 
1S000. — 61 

GEOR s [yosos, =) 
as 16000. — o% 
Bi Roem, 4b ap 
£go0o. — 1% 

ie ae fee — 6 
b£ooo. + zz 

VgOCO) <-t- V6000. + of 
f1ozoo. + £72 

ghiep.<r \6f000, + 21 
So z0000. — ZI 
Se ar. 6£000.0+ 0 
“ul “Ul tf 


‘ooussed URTpIaoUt 
oy} Surpooead sanoy oy 4V 


woes LIVIOTT 


[ Stooo, — gt 

00000, oeaceans 
on ae. "Z§O06,. > LT 
eae ovooo, 44 ¢ 
£000. + gt 

GOR aT Aor soog + 4 
£10900. — SI 

aOR. Fe reece nee 
dpoma S$Looo. + v1 
LINCO. —— (z 

_ f6occo, — £1 

bs okey | $€000. — 1 
79000, — ZI 

Booger 6£000.0+ o 
“UL “UL U 


oovssed UPIpLIeUt 
Ol} SUIMOTLOF Sanoy ott} FV 


‘ganssord OLugouLOueg JO SUOTIBIAB A 


I I I 


“URIPLIOUT 
ol} WOT 
soURISIP 
S UOOT[ 


1867. | Atmospheric Tide at Melbourne. AQT . 


In both cases, at the hours following, and at those preceding the meri- 
dian passage, the minimum is decidedly at the 3rd hour, while the 
maximun in the first series occurs at the Oth, and in the second at the Ist 
hour. At Singapore and St. Helena, both within the tropics, the lunar- 
diurnal variation shows a maximum At the Oth and a minimum at the 6th 
hour. The discussions, based on observations made at Prague, and already 
referred to above, exhibit a greater conformity in respect to the lunar 
tides at Melbourne than any of the tropical stations. ‘This conformity is 
especially clearly expressed in the series for “the hours following the 
meridian passage’ (which series seems to present in each respective case 
the greatest reliability), and we observe that the minimum occurs at the 
3rd and 4th, and the maximum at the 6th hour. But in turning Prof. 
Kreil’s labours in this direction to account, we must remember that they 
refer to a period of only one year, and cannot be considered as present- 
Ing great guarantees for decisive results, especially when considering that 
so high a latitude as 50° 8’ N. would rather have required a longer period 
of observation than is necessary to prove the existence and character of 
the lunar atmospheric tides within the tropics. So very few discussions on 
this topic being at our command, it is nevertheless of considerable interest 
to compare the results for Prague with those at St. Helena, Singapore, and 
Melbourne, as done in the following little Table :— 


| \Mean of three) Mean of two | Mean of five |} Mean of one | 

| years at years at years at year at | 

| Singapore St. Helena | Melbourne Prague | 

| iin 9). (25 57 yo 3g. 28 1 C50" 8 jo 

fo th in. in. in. in. ie: 
fo) +- 0°00570 +0°00355 +o-occ8o O°0CO00 | fe) 
I aT ROOK TS + 00336 + ‘ooI21 + *00043 I 

| 2 + *00330 + °00275 + *0c073 + ‘00080 | 2 
3 + -00280 + -00158 ooeco + °00039 | 3 
4 + "00145 + -co1rlro + -ooc61 + 00005 | 4 

| 5 + *00035 + -cco046 + *00045 - "60032 "| 5 
6 "0C000 | “eocoo | + ‘00062 + :00078 | 6 

Mean...... + *co2z621/} + ‘co1843} + o'00631} + 000396 Mean. 


The decrease in extent of oscillation, as we recede from the equator, is 
clearly illustrated by the mean values of this Table. 

Speaking of the extent of the oscillations, it is of importance to add a 
few facts relative to the amplitude, as resulting from the monthly curves. 
We have seen, in the course of this exposition, that the amplitude for the 
semiannual periods from April to September, and from October to March, 
is respectively 000653 and 0'-00432, which result will be materially 
altered in case we consider only the single months ; for inasmuch as the 
sense of oscillation varies considerably in the single months, constituting a 
semiannual period, chiefly durmg summer, the combination of the hourly 
values of six months in one group must necessarily tend to diminish, or 


4.98 Dr. G: Neumayer on the Lunar 


even abolish in some cases, the lunar-diurnal variation. 
tude of the lunar-diurnal variation of atmospheric pressure for the several 
months, as represented by the means of five years, is as follows :-— 


April 0-0069 

Oct. ‘0091 

Means for two months equi- | 0080 
distant from the equinox f 


July 0°0131 
Jan. °*0108 


May 0:0171 
Noy. 0°:0311 


0241 
Aug. 0°0109 
Feb. 0093 
0101 


[May 16, 


The mean ampli- 


June 0-01 65 
Dee: 0222 


"0194 


Sept. 0°0133 
Mar. °0139 


0136 


Means for two months ee ‘0199 
distant from the equinox 


The semiannual means are, for the six winter months (when the sun’s 
declination is north), 0”:0129, and for the summer months (when the sun’s 
declination is south) 0/0161, and therefore the mean amplitude in lunar- 
diurnal variation of the barometer is 0':0145. 

There is evidently a great conformity in the change in extent of oscilla- 
tion observable, when we.examine the semiannual values of the above 
series. In April and October the amplitude reaches a minimum value, 
whilst in the months immediately following a maximum occurs. For 
both the equinoctial months the value in question is nearly alike, making 
at the same time the nearest approach to the annual mean. The months 
following the equinoxes exhibit the smallest range in lunar-diurnal variation 
of atmospheric pressure, whilst those months preceding the solstices are to 
be considered as maxima with respect to the value at issue. 

With a view to ascertain whether the difference in the extent of the 
lunar atmospheric tide at the epochs of apogee and perigee may be proved 
to be perceptible in as high a latitude as 37° 48’, I followed a course dif- 
fering in some respects from the one proposed by General Sabine in his 
discussions of the St. Helena observations. We have seen that in the case 
under consideration the hours of the extremes in pressure are not marked — 
in a like distinct manner as for places near the equator, and I thought it 
on this account preferable to abandon the adherence to certain hours of the 
lunar day in determining the range in the value —4, simply adopting this 
range for the lunar day near the apogee or perigee, irrespective of any 
hour of maximum or minimum. In order to increase the number of 
comparisons, this range was determined in addition to the days of apogee 
and perigee for the day preceding and that following those epochs. The 
difference in the lunar-diurnal range in atmospheric pressure at the epochs 
of perigee (R”) and apogee (R*) was consequently in each case derived from 
six days’ observation.. Thus we obtained the following values for R?— R*, 
which, however, cannot be immediately compared, in respect to the amount, 
with the corresponding values of the discussion on the St. Helena observa- 
tions just referred to and arrived at by a different process. 


1867.] Atmospheric Tide at Melbourne. - 499 


| Lunar-diurnal range in Perigee minus lunar-diurnal range in 


| Apogee. 
| Months. S 
| -. | Mean for 
| 1858-59. | 18 59-60. | 1860-61.| 1861-62. | 1862-63. 1858-63. 
| in. | in. |) “a | in. in. in. 
April .............555.-;- 00775 |+0°1793 |+o719gr0 |—0'0984 |+o'r1010 |+0'09018 
May .........s00--e0:/-- "1146 |— °2270 |+ ‘0220 |+ +0676 fe "1363, | — °03182 | 
| June =qmoz5© 9) — 0376) |-- e960 |-- -o380 |— -0837 |— 7co248 
T= ge eee — 1279 |+ 0786 |— ‘0020 |= ‘0044 |— *0370 |— *01246 
August .............:,— "0148 + *0217 |— *0750 |+ "1044 |+ "0587 |+ ‘org04 
September ............,— “0128 |+ °o144 |+ *1070 |-+ ‘o180 |— "0417 |+ 01968 
October. ...............,-+ ‘1004 jt "1506 |+ ‘o4co |+ ‘2006 |+ +1820 |+ °15477 
November ............|-+ °0287 |-+ °0320 [+ ‘o160 |+ *0360 |— *0870 |+ ‘00514 
December ............;+ °1439 |— ‘0296 |+ ‘0760 |— ‘I000 |+ ‘0020 |+ *01846 
(ee eee }+ °0097 |— “0083 {+ ‘0805 |+ *0177 |— “0270 |+ ‘01452 
HWebeuary ©... 22.4... + *0815 |+ "0570 |— *ooIo |+ *0727 |4+ 0510 |+ °05224 
_ March Se eee [+ °0053 |+ “1217 |— *c486 |— ‘o4ro |+ *o06o i+ *00868 
(ne ee | a 
iE ee + *04418 + °02747 | *03605 |+ *02808)+ ‘oo195 + *02746 
Vi . sa af | 2 ee | © 
pee ce Perigee.. 13 | 13 14 | 13 13 66 Sum. 
: oC } Y } | 2 S 
‘epochs of Apogee...| 14 | 13 | 13 | 13 14. 67 Sum. 
| | - | - 


The mean value of +°02746 was derived with due regard to the number 
of epochs of apogee and perigee occurring in the whole period of observa- 
tion, the total number of barometrical readings from which it was derived 
being 720. 

There can hardly exist a doubt, after having examined the above re- 
sults, that the lunar-diurnal range in pressure of air at the time of the 
perigee exceeds the one at the apogee, a fact which is also in strict accord- 
ance with theory. But it ought to be pointed out that during the months 
of May, June, and July the reverse seems to take place, as is manifested in 
every one of the five years of observation. Whether this bears any refer- 
ence to the time of aphelion on the 3rd of July, and the time of the peri- 
helion on the 2nd of January, we do not pretend to decide now; suffice it 
to have directed the attention of those more immediately interested in in- 
quiries of this nature to a matter replete with so much interest, but as yet, 
comparatively speaking, scantily examined. The mean range for the 
epochs of perigee and apogee is respectively 016327 and 0'°13581, re- 
sulting a general mean range of 0"°149540. 

A similar plan to that just described was pursued, in order to ascer- 
tain whether there existed any perceptible difference in atmospheric 
pressure in the periods of syzygy and quadrature. The range of the 
atmospheric pressure during a lunar day was determined for days of full 
and change, and also for each of the epochs of quadrature separately, 
and furthermore for the day preceding and following each of the several 
epochs. Subsequently a mean value was derived by combining the daily 


500 Dr. G. Neumayer on the Lunar [May 16, 


range of the epochs of syzygy (R*) and that for the epochs of quadra- 
ture (R*). is 


Tunar-diurnal range in pressure of air. 

| er Phin! 

| Mean for the Difference, 
‘ s__ Raq 
Months. Full | New First Last epochs of Rs R e 

moon. | moon. | quarter. | quarter. 
| Quadra- 
SY2YBy- ture. | 
in. in. in. in. in. in. in. 

EU ices O'1507 | 01632 | 01728 | 071224 | 0°15695 | 0'14760 |+0°00935 
Mee cd onc cea PE QTD 417-40 "1669 "1399 | ‘15210 | °15340 |— *00130 
OG .aeig,s Hs TLE25 "1463 1557 "1282. | "12940 | "14195 |— *01255 
Rule ste det "1656 *3 318 "1451 "1145 "14835 | *12980 |+ *01855 
August ...;.. "1.532 "1585 "10G5 "O72 "15585 | 14835 |+ "00750 
| September...) °2103 "1667 "1497 "2071 "18850 | °17840 |+ ‘o1010 
October ....:. "1597 *2038 "1797 "1557 "18175 | °16770 |-+ *o1405 
November ...| °1318 "1582 "1648 ‘2208 "14500 | ‘19280 |— ‘04780 
December ...| °1907 "2191 "1226 "1800 | "20490 | *15130 |+ °05360 
January ...... "1729 "1287 "1518 "2059 "15080 | °17885 |— °02805 
February ...|..°1073 "0662 "1246 "1154 | °08675 | "12000 |— °03325 
Manel ois. .2.. "1262 "1509 SEIS 5 "1448 "13855 | "13015 |+ ‘oo0840 
Means... 20: "150K | 15547] 14656! *16016/ °153242| *153360/— ‘ooo118 


The last column of this Table shows the difference R*— R‘, so that plus 
denotes an excess of the lunar-diurnal range at the periods of syzygy, and 
minus an excess at the periods of quadrature. 

According to the above there is a decided minimum in the lunar-diurnal 
range at the time of the first quarter, while the last quarter seems to be 
the maximum, the time of the syzygy showing intermediate values. The 
general mean would indicate an excess, though very small, in favour of the 
epochs of the quadrature. On examining, however, the difference for the 
single months, we notice that the algebraic sign denotes for seven months 
an excess of the epochs of syzygy, and for five only the contrary ; 
further, that the greatest irregularity in respect to the signs and values 
prevails durings the months from November to February, when hot winds 
are most frequent, and the sudden changes in temperature, connected with 
these phenomena, cause the oscillations of the barometer to be much dis- 
turbed. The magnitude of the values during this period ought to induce 
us to receive them with caution, and to consider the eight remaining 
months separately. The general mean difference for the eight months, 
from March to October, both inclusive, represents an excess in favour of 
the epochs of syzygy of 0:006762 inch, a value which most probably makes 
a near approach to truth. 

If we derive mean values cf the iunar-diurnal range for the several years 
of observation at the respective phases of the moon, we have—— 


1867.] ; Atmospheric Tide at Melbourne. . 501 


Lunar-diurnal range in pressure of air. 


— 


ee oe; 


| j lee 
| Mean for the 
ea | f s_ Rd 
Years. | Full | New | First | Last | epoch of | Rs— Ri’. 
| | moon. | moon. | quarter. | quarter. ' 
| 

| Quadra- 

| | Syzyay- ture, 
‘in, in. in. in. in. in. 
| 1858-59. (O° Pee lo "14492 | 0°14627 | 0°17259 | 0715506 | 0°15943 |—0°00437 
| 1859-60. | "13682 | MAA72 | ESOT 7 | Pe Sgea | $°FZO77 ‘| SPeGSS = 01608 
| 1860-61. "14017 | *16672 | *12792 | *14953 | °15344 | 13872 |+ ‘01472 
| 1861-62. | "12969 | °15270 | *14664 | *19473 | “14119 | °17068 |— ‘02949 
| 1862-63. | "18316 | °17752 | “14802 | "13102 | *18034 | °13952 |+ *o4o82 
| | ae 


Means ...... "151022, 156916 "145404 "160282 153969) "152843/+ *oor126 | 


The final result of this Table shows an average excess of 0'°001126 in 
favour of the epochs of syzygy, but an analysis of this value shows that for 
three years the excess is in favour of the epochs of quadrature, while but 
two years seem to confirm what we feel inclined to regard as the rule. So 
much we are able to assert, however, that the lunar-diurnal range in pres- 
sure of air at the time of the first quarter shows a minimum, and that near 
the last quarter and new moon a maximum in this range seems to make 
itself manifest. Although the evidence adduced in the case is not of 
such a positive nature as that produced when treating on the question of 
the increased pressure of air near the perigee, we feel nevertheless inclined 
to believe some similar relation to exist between the atmospheric tides and 
the moon’s phases, as we know to be the case with respect to the oceanic 
tides, and that a more rigorous inquiry into this question than we are able 
on the present occasion to institute, will ultimately yield a result in strict 
accordance with the theory of gravitation. 

Before concluding these researches I may be allowed to point out a fact 
corroborative of the result arrived at when speaking of the difference of 
atmospheric pressure near the epochs of syzygy and quadrature. The mean 
diurnal range resulting from the last inquiry amounts to 0'°153301; but 
on the former occasion we found this range to be 0'"14954. The excess 
of 0°-00576, of which the lunar-diurnal range of the atmospheric pressure 
is larger, when derived from the epochs af the moon’s phases, than when 
obtaining it by the periods of perigee and apogee, must be attributed to 
the fact that in the latter case sixty-six periods of perigee were com- 
bined with sixty-seven periods of apogee, giving a fair average result ; 
while in the former forty-three epochs of perigee and but thirty-five of 
apogee happened to coincide with the several phases of the moon, tending 
in this way to raise the mean value of the lunar-diurnal range of the pron 
meter above that average. 


502 Occlusion of Hydrogen Gas by Meteoric Iron. [May 16, 


IV. “On the Occlusion of Hydrogen Gas by Meteoric Iron.” By 
Tuomas Grauam, F.R.S. Received May 16, 1867. 


Some light may possibly be thrown upon the history of such metals 
found in nature as are of a soft colloid description, particularly native 
iron, platinum, and gold, by an investigation of the gases which they 
hold occluded, such gases being borrowed from the atmosphere in 
which the metallic mass last found itself in a state of ignition. The 
meteoric iron of Lenarto appeared to be well adapted for a trial. This 
well-known iron is free from any stony admixture, and is remarkably 
pure and malleable. It was found by Wehrle to be of specific grayity 
7°79, and to consist of — 


ALTA C16 I SSR RROS ER | meee ince 90°883 
Nickel sp secch. 0 eee 8450 
Covalt 2 Sao c. wees 0°665 
COBDEN eux: gacpsceees oe 0-002 


From a larger mass a strip of the Lenarto iron 50 millimetres by 13 and 
10 millimetres, was cut by aclean chisel. It weighed 45:2 grammes, and 
had the bulk of 5°78 cubic centimetres. The strip was well washed by 
hot solution of potassa, and then repeatedly by hot distilled water, 
and dried. Such treatment of iron, it had been previously found, 
conduces in no way to the evolution of hydrogen gas when the metal - 
is subsequently heated The Lenarto iron was enclosed im a new 
porcelain tube, and the latter being attached to a Sprengel aspirator, 
a good vacuum was obtained in the cold. The tube being placed in a 
trough combustion furnace, was heated to redness by ignited charcoal. 
Gas came off rather freely, namely — 


In js8b main ahess iii iik BPM. seis ee ee ee -5°28 cub. centims. 
in 100 minutes cet ee ee 9°52 a 
‘T2220 animes 4 “et ae Tc oye ae 1°63 . 
In 2thours’so mum utes 12. Bok ee 16°53 " 


The first portion of gas collected had a slight odour, but much less 
than that of the natural gases occluded by ordinary malleable iron. 
The gas burned like hydrogen. It did not contain a trace of carbonic 
acid, nor any hydrocarbon vapour absorbable by fuming sulphuric acid. 
The second portion of gas collected, consisting of 9°52 cub. centims., 
gave by analysis—- 


PIV ALOSEM) Ly.4 ene etree ences 8-26 cub. centims ...... 85°68 
Car PoniCOmle co tcisse al. Le 0°43 iiss, deta ee 4°46 
NGOS. yb: deh ree cg n18s ces 0:95 io 98°6 

9°64 100-00 


39 
The Lenarto iron appears, therefore, to yield 2:85 times its volume 
of gas, of which 86 per cent. nearly is hydrogen. The proportion of 
carbonic oxide is so low as 43 per cent. 


1867, ] On the Structure and Affinities of Kozoon Canadense. 503 


The gas occluded by iron, from a carbonaceous fire, is very different, 
the prevailing gas then being carbonic oxide. For comparison a 
quantity of clean horseshoe nails was submitted to a similar distillation. 
The gas collected from 23°5 grammes of metal (3°01 cub. centims.) was— 


Hr) exOMmImUbes "2 eee 5°40 cub, centims. 
JV 24 ()) Sonu GT eC2% ea a OE 2°58 if 
PabAghomrseau.minutes... 0.002.502 0.. 6600. 7:98 


99 

The metal has given 2°66 times its volume of gas. The first portion 
collected appeared to contain of hydrogen 35 per cent., of carbonic 
oxide 50°3, of carbonic acid 7°7, and of nitrogen 7 per cent. The 
latter portion collected gave more carbonic oxide (58 per cent.) with 
less hydrogen (21 per cent.), no carbonic acid, the remainder nitrogen. 
The predominance of carbonic oxide in its occluded gases appears to 
attest the telluric origin of iron. 

Hydrogen has been recognized in the spectrum-analysis of the lght 
of the fixed stars, by Messrs. Huggins and Miller. The same gas con- 
stitutes, according to the wide researches of Father Secchi, the principal 
element of a numerous class of stars, of which a Lyre is the type. 
The iron of Lenarto has no doubt come from such an atmosphere, in 
which hydrogen greatly prevailed. This meteorite may be looked upon as 
holding imprisoned within it, and bearing to us hydrogen of the stars. 

It has been found difficult, on trial, to impregnate malleable iron 
with more than an equal volume of hydrogen, under the pressure of our 
atmosphere. Now the meteoric iron gave up about three times that 
amount, without being fully exhausted. ‘The inference is that the 
meteorite has been extruded from a dense atmosphere of hydrogen gas, 
for which we must look beyond the light cometary matter floating 
about within the limits of the solar system. 


VY. “ Further Observations on the Structure and Affinities of Hozoon 
Canadense.” Ina Letter to the President. By Wituiam B. Car- 
penter, M.D., F.K.S., F.L.S8., F.G.S. Received May 9, 1867. 


University of London, May 9th, 1867. 

When, on the 14th of December 1864, I addressed you on the. 
subject of the remarkable discovery which had been recently made in 
Canada, and submitted by Sir William Logan to myself for. verifica- 
tion, of a fossil belonging to the Foraminiferal type, occurring in large 
masses in the Serpentine-limestones intercalated among Gneissic and 
other rocks in the Lower Laurentian formation, and therefore long 
anterior in Geological time to the earliest traces of life previously 
observed, no doubts had been expressed as to the organic nature of this 
body, which had received the designation Hozoon Canadense. 

The announcement was soon afterwards made, that the Serpentine 
Marble of Connemara, employed as an ornamental marble by builders 

VOL, XV. ae 


504 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Rha Structure [May 16, 


under the name of “Irish Green,’ presented structural characters 
sufficiently allied to those of the Laurentian Serpentines of Canada, — 
to justify its being referred to the same origin. An examination of 
numerous decalcified specimens of this rock led me to the conclusion, 
that although the evidences of its organic origin were by no means such 
as to justify, or even to suggest, such a doctrine, if the structure of the 
Canadian Eozoon had not been previously elucidated, yet that the very 
exact correspondence in size and mode of aggregation between the 
Serpentine-granules of the Connemara Marble and those of the ‘ acervu- 
line’ portion of the Canadian, was sufficient to justify in behalf of the 
one the claim which had been freely conceded in regard to the other. 

In the following summer, however, it was announced in the ‘ Reader’ 
(June 10, 1865) by Professors King and Rowney of Queen’s College, 
Galway, that having applied themselves to the study of the Serpentine 
Marble of Connemara with a full belief in its organic origin, they had 
been gradually led to the conviction that its structure was the result of 
chemical and physical agencies alone, and that the same explanation 
was applicable to the supposed Hozoon Canadense of the Laurentian 
Serpentines. This view was afterwards fully set forth in a Paper “ On 
the so-called Eozoonal Rock,’ read at the Geological Society on the 
10th of January 1866, and published (with additions) in the Quarterly 
Journal of the Geological Society for August 1866. The following is 
their own Summary of their conclusions (p. 215) :—“ It has been seen 
(1) that the ‘ chamber-casts’ or granules of serpentine are more or less 
simulated by chondrodite, coccolite, pargasite, &c., also by the botry- 
oidal configurations common in Commie t heer Limestone; (2) 
that the ‘intermediate skeleton’ is closely represented, both in ete 
composition and other conditions, by the matrix of the above and other 
minerals ; (8) that the ‘proper wall’ is structurally identical with the 
asbestiform layer which frequently invests the grains of chondrodite— 
that, instead of belonging to the skeleton, as must be the case on the 
eozoonal view, it is altogether independent of that part, and forms, on 
the contrary, an integral portion of the serpentine constituting the 
‘chamber-casts,’ under the allomorphic form of chrysotile, and that 
perfectly genuine specimens of it, completely simulating casts of sepa- 
rated nummuline tubules, occur in true fissures of the serpentine- 
granules; (4) that the ‘canal-system’ is analogous to the imbedded 
erystallizations of native silver and other similarly conditioned minerals, 
also to the coralloids imbedded in Permian Magnesian Limestone; 
that its typical Grenville form occurs as metaxite, a chemically 
identical mineral imbedded in pa od calcite ; (5) that the type 
examples of ‘ casts of stolon-passages’ are isolated ee apparently 
of pyrosclerite. Furthermore, considering that there has been a complete 
failure to explain the characters of the so-called internal casts of the 
‘pseudopodial tubules’ and other ‘passages’ on the hypothesis of 


1867.] and Affinities of Hozoon Canadense. 505 


ordinary mechanical or chemical infiltration, also bearing in mind the 
significant fact that the ‘intermediate skeleton, in Irish and other 
varieties of eozoonal rock, contains modified examples of the ‘definite 
shapes’ more or less ne the crystalline aggregations and pris- 
matic lumps in primary saccharoidal marbles—that eozoonal structure 
is only found in metamorphic rocks belonging to widely separated 
geological systems, never in their unaltered sedimentary deposits,— 
taking all these points into consideration, also the arguments and 
other evidences contained in the present memoir, we feel the conclusion 
to be ee established, that every one of the specialities which have 
been diagnosed for Hozoon Canadense is solely and purely of crystalline 
origin: in short, we hold, without the least reservation, that from every 
available standing poit—foraminiferal, mineralogical, chemical, and 
geological—the opposite view has been shown to be utterly untenable.” 


Considering that the Foraminiferal characters of Hozoon Canadense 
had been unhesitatingly accepted by all those zoologists, Continental 
as well as British, whose special acquaintance with the group gave 
weight to their opinion, it might have been prudent, as well as becoming, 
on the part of the Galway Professors, to express themselves somewhat 
less confidently in regard to its purely mineral origin. The case they 
made out would not have lost any of its real strength, if they had 
simply put forward their facts as affording valid grounds for questioning 
the received doctrine. Anda way of escape would have been left for 
them, if the progress of research should happen to bring to light con- 
clusive evidence on the other side. 

Although such conclusive evidence is now producible, it may be well 
for me briefly to point out what I regard as the fundamental fallacies 
in the argument of Professors King and Rowney. 

in the first place, the Serpentine-Marble of Connemara, on which 
their investigations had been chiefly conducted, is admitted by every 
one who has examined it to have undergone a considerable amount 
of metamorphic change. ‘Lo myself, as well as to Professors King and 
Rowney, the evidence which it presents of the operation of chemical 
and physical agencies is most obvious and conclusive; whilst the evi- 
dence of its organic origin rests entirely on its ore analogy to the 
eozoonal rock of eae Hence an entire surrender might be made of 
the organic hypothesis as regards the Connemara marble, without in 
the least degree invalidating the claim of the eozoonal rock of Canada 
to an organie origin. But, on the other hand, if the latter claim can 
be sustained, it may be fairly extended to the “Irish Green,” should 
the evidence of similarity be found sufficient to justify such an ex- 
tension ; since it must be admitted by every Petrologist, that no amount 
of purely mineral arrangement in a Lae opine. Sate can disprove 
its claim to Organic origin, if that claim can be shown to be justified 


272 


506 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on the Structure [May 16, 


by distinct traces, in other parts of the same formation, of organisms 
adequate to its production. The Carboniferous Limestone, various mem- 
bers of the Oolitic and Cretaceous formations, and the Hippurite and 
Nummulitic Limestones, all exhibit in parts an entire absence of organic 
structure, which is yet so distinct elsewhere, as to justify the generali- 
zation that their materials have been originally separated from the 
ocean-waters by animal agency. And it is well known to those who 
have studied the changes which recent Coral-formations have undergone 
when upraised above the sea-level, that a complete conversion of a mass 
of Coral into a sub-crystalline Limestone not distinguishable from 
ordinary Carboniferous Limestone, may take place under circumstances 
in no way extraordinary. 

It is, therefore, upon the character of the Serpentine-Limestone of 
Canada, not upon the nature of the Connemara Marble, that the ques- 
tion of organic origin entirely turns; and, as I have elsewhere shown 
in detail*, the hypothesis of Professors King and Rowney altogether 
fails to account for the combination of phenomena which the former 
presents, whilst the accordance of that combination with the idea of its 
Organic origin (a very moderate allowance being made for the effects of 
metamorphic change) is such as to establish the same kind of pro- 
bability in its fayour, as that which we derive in the case of the Human 
origin of the “ flint implements ”’ from the cumulative evidence of their 
succession of fractured surfaces, or in the case of the chemical compo- 
sition of the sun from the precise correspondence between certain dark 
lines in the solar spectrum and groups of bright lines produced in a dark 
spectrum by the combustion of certain known metals. 

I may stop to point out, however, that Professors King and Rowney 
do not attempt to offer any feasible explanation of the fundamental. fact 
of the regular alternation of lamelle of Calcareous and Siliceous minerals, 
often amounting to fifty or more of each kind, extending through a 
great range of area; nor of the fact that not only is this arrangement the 
same, though the siliceous mineral may be Serpentine in one place, 
Pyroxene in another, or Loganite in another, whilst the calcareous may 
be Calcite in one part, and Dolomite in another,—but that these varia- 
tions may occur in one and the same specimen, the structural arrange- 
ment being continuous throughout. 

And in what they state of the peculiar lamella forming the proper 
wall of the chambers, which I have designated the “ nummuline layer,” 
they have fallen into errors of fact so remarkable, that I can only ae- 
count for them by the belief that when their paper was written they 
knew this layer only by decalcified specimens, and had never seen it in 
thin transparent sections. or they describe it as composed of parallel 
fibres of chrysotile packed together without any intermediate sub- 
stance; whereas I have distinctly proved that the siliceous fibres are im- 

* Quarterly Journalof the Geological Society, August, 1866, 


1867.] and Affinities of Eozoon Canadense. 507 


bedded in a calcareous matrix; which I therefore feel justified in re- 
garding as a finely tubulated Nummuline shell, of which the tubuli that 
were originally occupied by pseudopodia have been permeated by sili- 
ceous infiltration. 

So, again, while asserting that by no conceivable process could the 
animal substance originally occupying these tubuli have been replaced 
by siliceous minerals, they have entirely ignored the fact stated by me, 
that this very replacement has taken place in recent specimens in my 
possession,—a fact on the basis of which the reconstruction of the animal 
of Eozoon proposed by Dr, Dawson and myself securely rests, 


The question may now, I believe, be regarded as conclusively settled by 
the recent discovery, in a sedimentary limestone of the Lower Lauren- 
tian formation at Tudor in Canada, of a specimen of Hozoon presenting . 
characters that cannot, in the opinion of the most experienced Palson- 
tologists and Mineralogists, be accounted for on any other hypothesis 
than that of its organic origin. For in the first place, the occurrence 
of a calcareous framework or skeleton in a matrix of sedimentary lime- 
stone, which also fills up its interspaces, altogether excludes the hypothe- 
sis that this framework might be the product of any kind of pseudo- 
morphic arrangement produced by the separation of calcareous and 
siliceous minerals from a solution containing both. And, secondly, this 
specimen exhibits that which had not previously been distinctly seen in 
any other, viz., a distinctly limited contour, formed by the curving 
downwards and closing-in of the septa, in a manner as perfect and 
characteristic as the closing-in of the successive chambers of any poly- 
thalamous shell. I believe that no Paleontologist familiar with Paleozoic 
fossils would have hesitated to pronounce this specimen a Fossil Coral 
allied to Stromatopora, if it had occurred in a Silurian Limestone. 

That this specimen, though differing greatly in appearance from the 
ordinary serpentinous Hozoon, really represents that organism, is shown 
not merely by the general arrangement of the calcareous lamelle, but by 
their minute structure. This, it is true, is far less characteristically seen 
in thin sections microscopically examined, than it is in the specimens 
whose cavities have been filled up by Serpentine ; the texture of which 
is often so marvellously little changed, as to have all the appearance of 
recent shell-substance. But the alteration which the shelly layers have 
undergone in this specimen, is precisely paralleled by that which I have 
been accustomed to find in the best-preserved specimens of other 
organic structures contained in the more ancient Limestones. And 
there are still distinctly-recognizable traces of the canal-system imper- 
fectly injected with black substance, which correspond with those of 
the ordinary Serpentinous Kozoon. 

For the imperfection of the specimen in this respect, however, full 
compensation is made in the perfect preservation of the canal-system in 
a small fragment of Hozoon long since observed by Dr, Dawson in a 


508 On the Structure and Affinities of Hozoon Canadense. [May 16, 


crystalline limestone at Madoc. This specimen having been placed in 
my hands by Sir William Logan, with permission to treat it in any way 
that should enable me to make a thorough examination of it, [have suc- 
ceeded in finding in it most complete and beautiful examples of the canal- 
system, presenting varieties of sizeand distribution exactly parallel tothose 
with which I am familiar in the Serpentine-specimens. Nowas there is 
not in the Madoc, any more than in the Tudor specimen, any such com- 
bination of different minerals as has been supposed by Professors King 
and Rowney to have given origin to the arborescent forms of the canal- 
system of Kozoon (which they have likened to moss-agate or erystallized 
silver), there can be no longer any reasonable ground for disputing the 
essential similarity of this canal-system to that first described by myself 
in Calcarina, with which it was originally compared by Dr. Dawson*. 

_ The extension of the inquiry into the character of the Serpentine 
limestones intercalated among the Gneissic and other rocks of Lauren- 
tian age in various parts of Europe, has brought to light such numerous 
examples of eozoonal structure, more or less distinctly preserved, as to 
afford strong grounds for the conclusion that this organism was very 
generally diffused at that epoch, and performed much the same part in 
raising up solid structures in the waters of the ocean, that the Coral- 
forming Zoophytes perform at the present time. Ihad myself exammed 
before the close of 1865 specimens of Ophicalcite from Cesha Lipa in 
Bohemia and from the neighbourhood of Moldau, in which an eozoonal 
_ structure was distinctly traceable; and early in 1866 a more extended 
series was transmitted to me through Sir C. Lyell from Dr. Giimbel, the 
Government Geologist of Bavaria, in which I was able to trace a con- 
tinuous gradation from specimens in which the eozoonal structure was . 
distinct, to others in which, if it ever existed, it had been completely 
obscured by subsequent metamorphism. The results of a very careful 
and complete examination of the Ophicalcites of Bavaria by Dr. Gumbel. 
himself has been communicated to the Royal Academy of Munichy. 

Appearances of the same character are presented by a series of speci- 
mens of the Serpentinous Limestones from the Primitive Gneiss of 
Scandinavia, kindly transmitted to me by Prof Lovén. 


Tventure to hope that the foregoing résumé of the present aspect of this 
subject will be of interest to the Hellows of the Royal Society. I say 
the present aspect, because I am strongly convinced that we are at 
present only at the beginning of our knowledge of this and other ancient 
types of Foraminiferal structure; and.that careful search in promising 
localities will bring to light many wonders now lying unsuspected in 
the vast ageregate of pre-Silurian strata. 

* A full description of these specimens by Dr. Dawson, with a notice of their strati- 


graphical position by Sir William Logan, has been read at the Geological Society on the 
Sth of May, 1867. 


+ “Ueber das Vorkommen von Hozoon im ostbayerischen Urgebirge,” aus d. Sitzungs- 
ber. d. k, Acad. d. W. in Munchen, 1866. i, 1. 


1867. ] On the Intimate Structure of the Brain. 509 


May 23, 1867. 


Lieut.-General SABINE, President, in the Chair. 
The following communications were read :— 


I. “On the Intimate Structure of the Brain.”—Second Series. 
By J. Lockuart Cuarke, Esq., F.R.S. Received May 1, 


1867, 
(Abstract.) 


Abstracts of a considerable portion of this paper have been already 
published in the Proceedings of the Royal Society for June 18, 1857, 
and June 20, 1861, under the title of “Notes of Researches on the 
Intimate Structure of the Brain.” 

After adding several new facts, and giving further explanations on 
the subject of the medulla oblongata, the author gives a full description 
of the morphological changes by which the auditory and other centres 
are developed out of elements of the spinal cord. The auditory centres 
consist of an outer and an inner nucleus. The outer nucleus is deve- 
loped from the grey substance of the posterior pyramid and restiform 
body of the medulla. The inner nucleus arises between the posterior 
pyramid and the nucleus of the eighth cerebral nerve. From both 
these nuclei the posterior division of the auditory nerve takes its origin. 
The anterior division consists of two portions. The principal portion 
penetrates the medulla beneath the restiform body, and running along 
the outer side of the caput cornu, or grey tubercle, enters both the 
outer and inner nucleus. The other portion of the nerve runs back- 
ward along the upper border of the restiform body, which it accompanies 
over the superior peduncle of the cerebellum to the inferior vermiform 
process. The outer auditory nucleus, consisting of the grey substance 
of the posterior pyramid and restiform body, is ultimately thrown back- 
ward into the cerebellum, part of it arching over the fourth ventricle to 
the opposite side, while the rest extends outward to the corpus den- 
tatum of the cerebellum. 

It would not be possible to give an abstract of the numerous details 
of structure and the complicated connexions of different parts described 
in the paper. The following facts, however, may be mentioned. 

The roots of the facial nerve are shown to have a very remarkable 
course and very complicated connexions with surrounding parts. On 
reaching the fasciculus teres they bend downward in the form of a loop, 
the lower arm of which is connected with the motor nucleus of the 
trigeminus and with the upper olivary body, as well as with their own 
special nuclei. The longitudinal portion of this loop forms the column 
which Stilling mistook for what he calls the “constant root of the trige- 
minus,’ and which Schroeder van der Kolk mistook for one of the strie 


510 Dr. J. H. Gladstone on Pyrophosphoric Acid [May 28, 


medullares. The upper olivary bodies (which were first pointed out by 
the author in 1857, and subsequently described by Schroeder van der 
Kolk) and the trapezium are further investigated in a comparison 
between those of man, the orang outang, and different orders of mam- 
mals. The structure of the entire medulla oblongata in the monkey 
is likewise compared with that of man. The paper concludes with the 
physiological and pathological application of its contents. 


II. “On Pyrophosphoric Acid with the Pyro- and Tetra-phos- 
phoric Amides.” By J. H. Gurapsronz, Ph.D., F.R.S. Re- 
ceived May 9, 1867. 


From time to time I have communicated to the Chemical Society 
descriptions of certain bodies which are best viewed as amides of pyro- 
phosphorie acid; and in pursuing the inquiry I have recently obtained 
some fresh results, anda new class of compounds. I propose continuing 
to send the details to the Chemical Society, but I may be permitted to 
submit to the Royal Society a condensed account of the main facts 
arrived at in the whole investigation, and a- theory of the formation of 
these substances. 

Pyrophosphoric acid ‘is, in the notation now generally adopted, 
P,H,0O,. In an examination of its ferric compounds, I found evidence 
of the existence, in solution, of the double salt P, Na, fe,O,*. A more 
remarkable fact is that the complete ferric salt, and several other pyro- 
phosphates, can exist in an allotropic condition. Thus pure P, fe, O,, 
prepared by double decomposition, dissolves readily in dilute sulphuric 
acid; but on heating the solution it separates in a form which is almost 
insoluble in the acid. When these allotropic salts are decomposed, the 
acid produced appears to have the ordinary properties. It is a pyro- 
phosphate which is formed, when oxychloride of phosphorus is attacked 
by a strong aqueous solution of an alkali. 

Pyrophosphorie acid exhibits a great tendency to form acid amides. 
It is only necessary to neutralize it with ammonia to get a body which, 
when treated with a metallic salt not in excess, gives more or less of a 
pyrophosphamate of the metal, thus :— 


P, H, 0O,+4NH,+8fe Cl=P, (NH,) fe,0,+H,0+3NH, Cl. 
Pyrophosphamie acid, P, (NH,)H,0O,, may be also prepared by 


breaking down the higher amides. It is similar in most of its proper- 
ties to pyrophosphoric acid, but is tribasic. Its ferric salt has also an 
allotropic modification; when heated with an acid it becomes far less 
soluble in sulphuric acid, ferric chloride, or pyrophosphate of sodium. 
Pyrophospho-diamic acid, P, (NH,), H, O,, is produced in a variety of 
* In order to avoid great complexity of formule, Williamson’s Ferricum, fe=18°66, 
has been adopted, 


~ 


1867.] with the Pyro- and Tetra-phosphoric Amides. 511 


ways, of which the most noteworthy are the action of ammonia on phos- 
phoric anhydride, of ammonia and water on oxychloride of phosphorus, 
of alcohol or soluble bases on chlorophosphuret of nitrogen, as well as 
the breaking down of amides of more complicated structure. Jt is bi- 
basic, and forms salts which are generally very soluble, like itself, in 
water and alcohol. 

Pyrophospho-triamie acid, P, (NH,), HO,, is formed when oxychloride 
of phosphorus is saturated with ammonia at about 100° C., and the 
resulting mass is treated with water, or when tetraphospho-pentazotic 
acid is exposed to the action of water for some time. It is nearly inso- 
luble in water, and so are its combinations, even those with the alkaline 
metals. It readily decomposes most soluble salts, giving rise to com- 
pounds in which 1, 2, 3, or 4 atoms of hydrogen are replaced. With 
slightly acid nitrate of silver it gives a white salt, P, (NH,), Ag O,; 
with the ammoniacal nitrate a bright yellow salt, P, N, H, Ag, O,. 

By the action of water on the compounds of ammonia with oxychloride 
of phosphorus, there are also produced some acid amides that belong to 
a higher series. Great difficulty was experienced in being certain of 
the purity of any specimen, of these compounds ; hence some doubt may 
still rest on their ultimate composition. 

Tetraphospho-tetramic acid, P, (NH,), H, O,, isa solid stable body, inso- 
luble in alcohol, but soluble in water, and combining readily with bases, 
the amount of hydrogen replaced appearing to vary from 1 to 6 atoms. 

Terammoniated Tetraphospho-diamic acid, P, (NH,), N, H,, O,,.—This 
is a viscid liquid, insoluble in alcohol, but very soluble in water. It 
forms a liquid combination with ammonia; but metallic salts appear to 
break it up into a variety of compounds. By the action of heat, boiling 
water, strong acids, or alkaline carbonates, tetraphospho-tetramic acid 
may be produced from it. Among the bodies formed when it is heated 
per se is a white substance, insoluble, or nearly so, in cold water, having 
the ultimate composition PNH,O,. This is at once transformed into 
pyrophospho-diamie acid by hot water, or dilute acids. 

Tetraphospho-pentazotic acid, P, N, H, O,, is formed when oxychloride 
of phosphorus is fully saturated with ammonia, and the resulting mass 
is heated at about 230° C., and washed with cold water. It is an 


‘insoluble body, capable of decomposing metallic salts. One atom of 


hydrogen is replaceable by potassium or ammonium. When treated 
with slightly acidulated nitrate of silver, it gives a tetrazotic salt, 
P,N,H, Az, O,, which, when decomposed by mineral acids, yields tetra- 
phospho-tetramie acid and other compounds. 

Amidated Oxychlorides of Phosphorus.—The oxychloride will absorb 
either 2 or 4 molecules of ammonia; and there can be little doubt that 
the resulting white solids consist of chloride of ammonium mixed with 
P(NH,) Cl, O in the one case, and P(NH,), ClO in the other, but I 
have neyer succeeded in separating them in a condition fit for analysis, 


512 Dr. J. H. Gladstone on Pyrophosphoric Acid | May 23, 


If either of these compounds be strongly heated, hydrochloric acid, or 
chloride of ammonium, is given off, and there remains phosphonitryle, 
PNO. 

By the action of heat on the substances already described, other com- 
pounds may also be prepared, thus :— 

Pyrophospho-nitrylic acid—Ilf pyrophospho-triamate of potassium be 
heated at a dull redness, it loses two-thirds of its nitrogen as ammonia, 
leaving a fused mass, which is insoluble in water, but oss we. 
when treated with silver or copper salts. These have the composition 
of pyrophospho-nitrylates, P, NAgO,. If pyrophospho-triamie acid 
itself be similarly heated, it parts with one molecule of ammonia, and 
gives a body, P, N, H, O,, isomeric with pyrophospho-nitrylate of 
ammonium, which is speedily resolved by damp air into pyrophosphamic 
acid and other compounds. 

The process adopted for the analysis of these acid amides was that of 
boiling them with strong hydrochloric acid. ‘his converts them all mto 
ammonia and ordinary hospbome acid, W ve were determined in the 
usual manner. 

Theoretical Constitution. 

A difficulty in understanding the formation of the bodies above 
described from oxychloride of phosphorus arises from the fact that they 
contain P,... or P,..., while the original phosphorus compcund contains 
but one atom of that element. The following considerations may fur- 
nish a probable explanation and reveal their true constitution. 

When a chloride and water act on one another, three different course 
are open, each giving hydrochloric acid as one of the results. In the 
first case the chlorine combines with one of the atoms of hydrogen, 
while the remaining hydroxyl, HO, takes its place in the original ecm- 
pound, thus :— 

POC),+3H,O=3H Cl+ PH, O, (phosphorous acid). 
Tn the second case two atoms of chlorine simultaneously attack the two 


atoms of hydrogen, and the liberated single atom of oxygen takes their 
place, thus :— 
PCL+H, 0=2HCl+P Cl, O (oxychloride of phosphorus). 
In each of these cases we may consider the new compound as formed 
on the same type as the original chloride, only the chlorine 1s differently 


replaced. 
Cl FLO 


In the one case PCl becomes PHO, 
Cl HO 
Cl Cl Cl 
and in the other P Cl al becomes P ClO. 
Cl Cl 


1867. ] with the Pyro- and Tetra-phosphoric Amides. 513 


But there is a third case in which the two atoms of hydrogen in 
water are attacked simultaneously by two atoms of the chloride, and 
he result is that the oxygen is left in combination with two molecules 
of the substance originally combined with the chlorine. Here it is 
simplest to consider that it is the water type which is preserved. 

i is this third mode of action which explains the production-of the 
compounds containing P,... and P..... 

If we act on oxychloride of phosphorus with water, a slow replace- 
ment of the chlorine takes place, each atom decomposing a molecule of 
water, and the result is—- | 


“Cl H Io 
PCLO+3,, } O=3H C1+PHOO, 
Cl ILO 


which is PH, 0O,, tribasic or ortho-phosphoric acid. If, however, we 
employ strong solutions of potash or ammonia, the result is totally dif- 
ferent. We now obtain salts of an acid formed not on the type of the 
oxychloride, but on the type of the alkaline hydrate, or water. To ex- 
plain this the reaction must be broken up into two stages, though it is 
not improbable that these may occur simultaneously in nature. These 
stages are—— 


Boe PC1,0}) 
2PClLO+ a fO= KCHH +s oof 


PCI,O K) a PLO) a 
2 -Oo= 2 
ee eae AKT po), 0 | 


which is P, H, O,, pyrophosphoric acid. 

There still remains another mode of action, the replacement of 2:Cl 
in the oxychloride by O, and this may be expressed in the two following 
stages, 


O, 


K 


P Cl, o+127 | O=2K C14 P C104, 


PClOO+ al O= KC14+P(K0) 00, 


which is P K-O,, metaphosphate of potassium. And this is actually pro- 
duced when the oxychloride is dropped on oxide of potassium, and a 
similar reaction takes place with dry sesquicarbonate of ammonium. 
- a : } O be its rational 
formula, it is casy enough to understand that amides are readily formed, 
and to see how upon neutralizing it with ammonia, one molecule of 
P(N H,)(N H, 0) 0 0 
PAO), 0 } 
P(N ELO),'0 
P(N H,0),0 


Reverting to pyrophosphoric acid, if 


HO is apt to be replaced by N H,, givmg 


the pyrophosphamate, instead of } O, the pyrophosphate 


of ammonium. 
Nor is it difficult to understand the formation of pyrophosphodiamie 


514: Dr. J. H. Gladstone on Pyrophosphorie Acid [May 23, 


acid, when we start not with the oxychloride, but with the amidated 
oxychloride of phosphorus. ‘The two stages, analogous to those given 
above for the formation of pyrophosphoric acid, will be 
EY ibs P(N H,) ClO } 
2P(NH,) CLO+ hl O=2H O45 NEY CLO 
apis one ; Noe 
P(N H) Clos Ot? ns O78 OD a Gee 
which is P, (N H,), H, O,, pyrophospho-diamic acid. 

The symmetry of this reaction would be lost were pyrophosphamic 
acid produced, and, indeed, it seems never to occur among the sub- 
stances actually formed. 

But the pyro-diamic acid may be equally produced, if we start with 
the higher amidated oxychloride formed at a low temperature. In this 
case it 1s necessary to suppose that while two molecules of the phos- 
phorus compound attack one molecule of water, two other molecules of 
water give rise to the usual replacement of H O for NH,. The two 
stages are precisely analogous to those given above, but are probably 
simultaneous, the reaction being favoured by the affinity of the hydro- 
chloric acid for the ammonia, 


2P (NH), ClO+ at O=2H Cl+ 


P(N H,),0 2 i ere NE eee ee 
P(N ea O+27} O=2N H+» (N Hoe 
which, as before, is P,(N H,), H, O,, pyrophospho-diamie acid. 

The formation of pyrophospho-triamie acid is dependent on some 
alteration in the amidated oxychloride, when produced at a high tempe- 
rature. As the nature of this change is unknown, it may be better not 
to speculate on the intermediate stages, but the result of the action on 


water would seem to be fs 2p ») O, or P(N Hy, Oe 

If this be the true explanation of the manner in which the pyrophos- 
phoric amides are formed, it will equally explain the formation of the 
tetraphosphoric compounds. It does not follow that when two mole- 
cules of the amidated oxychloride have attacked one of water to form 
a 5 or oH O, that is, P, (NH), Cl, O,, the remaining chlorine 
should be replaced by HO. The process of attacking both atoms of 
hydrogen in water may be repeated, thus— } 

(N H,), ClO, 7} 
2P, (N H,), Cl, 0,4 At O=2H Clty Oaesir:. 

which, when acted on by water in the usual way, gives 

P, (N H,), Cl O, } H } —oH PCN 23) (0) } 

P,(NH), O10, J 9 77H OPE +B av), GO) 0, J 
which is P, (N H,), H, O,, tetraphospho-tetramic acid. And this com- 


P (NH,),0) 
P(NH).of 


1867. | with the Pyro- and Tetra-phosphoric Amides. 515 


pound, like the pyro-diamic acid, may be prepared from the higher 
amidated oxychloride, and the process is capable of the same expla- 
nation. The three stages, probably simultaneous, are as follows :— 


2P(NH,), ClO+ a O=2H Cl eo O or P,(NH,),0,, 


P(NH,).0 
é H — Iss (N H,), ae 
2P, (NH), 0,+ = O=2N Byte? nay’ of | 


£, (N EH), O, } . H i pa lee CGN eb) (H O) O, } 
0 eset nadine eas eB O NCO ke i 
which is P, (N H,), H, 0,, tetraphospho-tetramie acid. 

The tetraphosphoric acid, of which this is the fourth amide, must be 
P,H, O,,, a substance already known, at least in its salts, for it is 
Fleitmann and Henneberg’s phosphoric acid. 

On the view given above the rational formule of the four phosphoric 
acids may be thus expressed :— 


Ortho-phosphoric acid......... P (HO), O. 
Meta-phosphoric acid ......... P | 2 i } O. 
: bE ibe P(HO),O } 
Pyro-phosphoric acid ......... P (0), O O. 
P(ELO),.O } 0 
Tetra-phosphoric acid ......... P(HO) O O 
P (HH Ojg0 } Ohi. 
P(HO) O 
It is more difficult to assign satisfactory rational formule to the two 
compounds containing P,N,.... The fact that the atoms of nitrogen 


are uneven in number destroys the symmetry, and seems to point to 
their being products of decomposition of substances containing P, N,.... 
That they both belong to the tetraphosphoriec series is evidenced by 
their giving rise easily to tetraphospho-tetramic acid. 

The reactions of the liquid P, N,H,,O,, indicate that it is an acid 
ammonium salt, or is readily transformable into such. Hence I have 
called it terammoniated tetraphospho-diamic acid, and its formula will be 


P(N H,) (NH, 0) at 


P (NH, 0) O 
P(NH) (HO) 0 O, or P,(NH,), (NH,),HO,,. 
P (NH, 0) 0 


The formation of a tetraphospho-tetramate from a salt of this structure 
would be analogous to the ready passage of pyrophosphate of ammonium 
into a pyrophosphamate. 

The acid P, N,H, O., to which has been given the provisional name 
tetraphospho-pentazotic acid, is perhaps derived from the decomposition 
of tetraphospho-hexamide, P, (N H,),O,, which is the complete amide 
of tetraphosphoric acid, and is a very likely substance to be formed by 


516 | Mr. W. B. Dawkins on Ovibos moschatus.. [May 28, 


the action of water on P(N H,), ClO that had been exposed to heat, 

and probably converted into P, (N H,),Cl,O,. If this hexamide really. 
exist, it is at once broken en by the freed hydrochloric acid, or by 
aie of potassium, thus— 


P, (N H,), 0,+H Cl=N H, Cl+P,N,H, 0, 


giving rise naturally to a monobasic acid. 

If we regard the compound resulting from the action of nitrate of 
silver on this acid as containing imidogen NH, instead of amidogen 
NH, it gives a formula of great symmetry of structure— 


H) Ag 
FOUD. AGO 6 


PND Oh | 
P (NH) AgO | Pa ec memes cakes DPE 2 
P(NH) 0 , 


and the salt would bear the name of tetraphospho-tetrimate of silver. 


III. “ Ovibos moschatus (Blainville).’? By W. Boyp Dawkins, 
M.A., F.G.S. Communicated by Prof. Huxtey. Received May 
Q. 1867. 
(Abstract. ) 


Ovibos moschatus, more commonly known as the musk-ox, has been 
described under different names by naturalists as their opinions fluc- 
tuated concerning its affinities with the ox, buffalo, or sheep. It is 
called the musk-ox by all the arctic explorers, Bos moschatus by Schre- 
ber, Zimmermann, Pennant, and Cuvier, musk-buffalo allied to the 
Bubalus Caffir of South Afriea by Professor Owen, Ovibos moschatus 
by De Blainville, Desmarest, Richardson, and M. Lartet. That the 
latter four naturalists are right in the place they assign to it in the 
zoological scale, intermediate between Ovis and Bos, is proved both by 
the natural history and the osteology of the animal. The absence of a 
muffle and dewlap, the hairiness of the nostrils, the shortness of tail and — 
smallness of ear, and the possession of two teats only, separate the 
animal from Bos and connect it with Ovis, while the large size and long 
gestation of nine months differentiate it from the latter animal. Precisely 
the same evidence is afforded by its skeleton. In the skull, the taper- 
ing of the anterior portion, the prominence of the orbit, tine verticality 
of ae facial plate of the eee the presence of a ne the square- 
ness of the basisphenoid, the presence of the occipito-parietal suture on 
_ the coronal surface ; in the dentition, the sharpness of the coste 1,2, and 3, 
and the absence of the accessory column from the inner interspace of 
the lobes of the upper teeth are among the chief ovine characters, and 
throughout the skeleton the same ovine tendency is manifested. With 
the exception of the great deyelopment of horns, there is no point in 


1867.] Mr. W. B. Dawkins on Ovibos moschatus.. 517 


common between it and Bubalus Caffir. The encroachment of horn- 
cores or parietals differentiate it from the sheep. 

The animal ranges at the present day from Fort Churchill, lat. 60°, 
northwards as far as the arctic sea, and eastwards as far as Cape 
Bathurst, lat. 71°, living for the most part on the “ barren grounds,”’ 
and never penetrating far into the woods. In geological times, 
however, it had a far greater range eastwards and southwards. In 
the pleistocene river-gravels lyimg on the solid ice in Eschscholtz Bay, 
im Russian America, it is found associated with the elk, reindeer, 
bison, horse, and mammoth. Traces of the animal ranging further 
to the east are afforded by the skull found on the banks of the Yena, 
in lat. 70°, long. 135°. Dr. Pallas’s discovery of two skulls on the 
banks of the Obi brings the animal still closer to the borders of 
Europe. All three skulls were found in the “Tundas,” or treeless 
“barren grounds” of Siberia, in the same series of gravels which afford 
such vast stores of fossil ivory. In Germany it has been found in three 
localities ; and in France; in the valley of the Oise, it is associated with 
flint implements of the St. Acheul type, and with the mammoth and 
Hlephas antiquus. thas also been found in the remdeer caves of Peri- 
gord, under circumstances that prove beyond doubt that the animal 
was eaten by the reindeer folk. In England it has been found in three 
sravel-beds of late pleistocene age, near Maidenhead, at Freshford near 
Bath, and at Greenstreet-green near Bromley. In 1866 the author dug 
it out of the lower brickearth of Crayford in Kent, where it was as- 
sociated with Rhinoceros Megarhinus, R. leptorhinus (Owen), and. 
Elephas antiquus. The skull in this latter case belonged to a re- 
markably fine old male. Thus its present limited range in space con- 
trasts most strongly with its wide range in pleistocene times through 
North Siberia and central Europe, north of a line passing through the 
Alps and Pyrenees. Its association with animals of a temperate or 
else southern zone is to be accounted for by its having been driven 
from its usual haunts by an unusually severe winter. The rarity of its 
remains proves that it was not so abundant as those animals which are 
associated with it in France, Germany, and Britain. 

Professor Leidy figures and describes two fossil skulls most closely 
allied to Ovibos moschatus, from Arkansas and Ohio, under the name of 
Bootherum cavifrons and B. bombifrons; they are, however, most probably 
the male and female of the same species. ‘They differ from Ovibos mos- 
chatus only in the direction of their horn-cores, and in their bases meeting 
and becoming fused on the coronal surface of the male skull. The 
horn-cores are supported both by the frontals and parietals. In other 
respects they present the same ovine affinities as Ovibos, and certainly 
belong to the same genus. 


518 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [May 28, 


IV. “ Variations in Human Myology observed during the Winter 
Session of 1866-67 at King’s College, London.” By Jounn 
Woop, F.R.C.S., Demonstrator of Anatomy (with a Table and 
Seven Drawings). Communicated by Dr. Sharpey. Re- 
ceived May 9, 1867. 


A largely increased number of abnormalities has been the result of 
a systematic observation of thirty-six subjects during the past winter 
session. This has been owing partly to the comprehension of one or 
two irregularities which are commonly referred to in systematic works 
on anatomy,—such as the coronoid origin of the flexor pollicis longus and 
the insertion of the extensor ossis metacarpi pollicis, partly to the more 
productive results of a vigilant superintendence, an increased efficiency 
in the dissections. For much of this the author’s thanks are due to the 
able help of his assistants, Messrs. Perrin and Amsden, and the intelli- 
gent zeal of many of the anatomical class. Mainly, no doubt, the 
increase 18 owing to an absolutely larger number of abnormalities. ‘The 
value of the observations to the author is, of course, much increased by 
his having personally and thoroughly examined every specimen before 
noting it down, and, if possessing sufficient interest or novelty, sketch- 
ing it from the subject. The exact numerical results thus arrived at 
have, in almost all important particulars, confirmed, but in some modi- 
fied, the conclusions as to frequency and coincidence given in the 
author’s former papers. What the author has termed the limes of 
variation, i.e. the particular muscles which are by far most commonly 
affected, are nearly identical with those of last year, as will be found by 
comparing the columns of the appended Table with those of the former. 
Only a few different will be found in the columns occupied by the 
sundry specimens. 

Out of the total number of 295 abnormalities of muscles in 34 sub- 
jects showing abnormalities (as compared with 132 in 32 subjects of 
last year), we have in the head and neck 11 muscles affected with va- 
rieties, as compared with 10 of last year. In the arm we have 30 lines 
of muscular variation as compared with 26; while in the leg we have 20 
as compared with 14 in last year’s subjects. 

The increase will be seen to be disproportionately greater in the leg. 
In this part also is the absolute number of the specimens increased ; for 
while those in the head and neck proper (acting only on the parts or 
bones of the head, neck, and spine) are 15 as compared with 10, and 
those of the arm 157 as compared with 83, those of the leg are increased 
to 106 as compared with 39. This raises the proportion of abnorma- 
lities in the leg to two-thirds of those in the arms, as compared with 
rather less than one-half found last year. This seems to have some 
significance in being coincident with an increase in the number of female 
subjects to 12, as compared with 4 in last year’s list. The author has 


1867.) Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Mypology. 519 


remarked in former papers upon the apparent greater frequency of one 
variety in the foot, viz. “the abductor ossis metatarsi quinti” in the 
female subject. This increase is clearly maintained in the results of the 
present investigation, and apparently extends to some other muscles also. 

To economize time, space, and the difficulties of tabulation, the expla- 
nations necessary to understand the adjoined Table are taken, as before, 
in the order of the columns therein given. 

The first three are appropriated to the muscular varieties of the Head 
and Neck, numbering 31 instances, viz. 24 in the 22 males, and 7 in the 
12 females, affecting 15 different muscles. Of these, the cleido-occipital, 
trapezius, occipito-scapular, and levator anguli scapule, amounting to 
16 instances, are to be considered as belonging quite as much to the 
upper extremity. This leaves 15 specimens affecting 11 muscles of the 
head and neck exclusively. 

1. Cleido-occipital.—By this name is signified a muscle usually about 
three-quarters of an inch wide, which, arising from the border of the 
clavicle outside the cleido-mastoid portion of the sterno-cleido-mastoi- 
deus, is placed parallel to the posterior border of the latter, and separated 
from it by a more or less wide areolar interval. It is distinguished 
from the cleido-mastoid proper by its insertion into the superior curved 
line of the occipital bone on the same plane as the fibres of the sterno- 
mastoid. It joims close up to the trapezius, with which its upper 
fibres are sometimes united. The true cletdo-mastoid, on the other 
hand, is inserted deeper than the fibres of the sterno-mastoid into the 
mastoid portion of the temporal bone. It has been recognized as an 
occasional accessory portion of the sterno-cleido-mastoideus, by Meckel, 
Kelch, Semmerring,and Henle. In animals it forms an important part 
of the muscle called the Cephalo-humeral. 'There were in the 34 subjects 
examined no less than 12 specimens, all on both sides. In subject 21 it 
was very large, broad, and double, with a superficial slip of communi- 
cation with the cleido-mastoid. Last session the proportion of specimens 
was strikingly similar, viz. one-third of the whole number of subjects. 

2. Omohyoid.— One of the five specimens of abnormality in this muscle 
was found in the hinder belly arising from the whole length of the 
middle third of the clavicle covering the subclavian artery (No.17). In 
the four others the anterior belly was implicated. In No. 6 it received a 
muscular slip from the sterno-hyoid. In No. 19 it contributed a large 
slip to the same muscle, the latter being double also at its origin, and 
giving off a muscular bundle to its fellow on the opposite side across the 
median line. In No. 20 the anterior belly was double, the posterior 
portion being attached by fascia to the stylo-hyoid muscle, which did 
not reach the hyoid bone. In No. 27 the anterior belly was triple, the 
middle portion becoming the normal insertion, the front one being in- 
serted into the cervical fascia, and the hinder one implanted into the 
upper horn of the thyroid cartilage. 

VOL. XV. : 2U 


520 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. {May 28, 


3. In one of the subjects (No. 8) the whole of the fibres of origin of 
the Splenius colli were placed superficial to, instead of deeper than, those 
of the serratus posticus superior, which thus intervened between those 
of the lower parts of splenius capitis and colli, the origins of these latter 
being in other respects normal. 

In No. 28 was found a muscle which presents what is possibly a fur- 
ther development of this displacement. The muscle was flat and riband- 
like, three-quarters of an inch wide, attached above to the transverse 
process of the atlas behind the levator anguli scapule, and between it 
and the splenius colli. Passing down and inwards for about 6 inches, it 
ended at the spimous process of the first dorsal vertebra in a short flat 
tendon with diverging fibres, which passing beneath the rhomboideus 
minor, became blended with the deep surface of the upper fibres of 
origin of the rhomboideus major half an inch from their attachment. 
Some of the fibres were lost on the tendon of the serratus posticus 
superior algo. 

A muscle closely similar to this has been described by Mr. Macalister, 
of the Royal College of Surgeons of Dublin, in a paper published in the 
‘ Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy’ (April 1866, vol. ix. pl. v.) 
under the name of the rhomba-axoid (by misprint for atloid). In his case 
the muscle was connected, however, with the rhomboideus minor on its 
deep surface. In both instances the splenius colli was coexistent. 

A still more striking muscular anomaly, and possibly a further de- 
velopment of the same tendency, was seen in subject 20 (fig. 1). A 
distinct riband-shaped muscle, three-quarters of an inch wide, a quarter 
of an inch thick, and 10 inches long (a), was attached to the occipital 
bone, on a level with the splenius capitis (6), directly under the line of 
junction of the trapezius (¢) with the cleido-occipital muscle (d), which 
was also present. Passing down and outwards, superficial to and ob- 
liquely across the splenii and covered by the trapezius, it was inserted by 
short tendinous fibres posterior and superficial to the insertions of the 
rhomboideus minor (e) and major (ff) muscles into the border of the 
scapula opposite to the spine and upper part of the infraspinous fossa. 
Its fibres of insertion were more or less blended with those of the 
rhomboids. 

The author has named this muscle the Occipito-scapular. It may be 
considered as a slip of connection from the origin of the trapezius (c) 
with the insertion of the levator anguli scapule (g), in the same 
manner as the levator clavicule may be considered as a muscle connect- 
ing the origin of the latter muscle with the insertion of the former, 
thus falling among a numerous class of abnormal human muscles as 
arranged by the author in his first paper upon the subject. Its action 
would evidently be to approximate the scapula to the occiput, assisting 
the levator anguli; and to raise the head backwards, assisting“the com- 
plexus, splenius, and trapezius. The author has not met with any 


1867.) Mr.J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 521 


mention of such a muscle in the authorities he has consulted. He has 
found the exact similitude of this muscle in the tame Rabbit. In this 


\ \\ \ \\ Vii)\ 
\ N aveh N . 
\ si) ile \ 


i »\ 
ww) 
WY, 


} iN 
\ 
A \ \, 
\ s N 4} Y Aa 
AWS \\\' | | BPA } 
WHY 4li/Bal 
WHT i AHH 
WG) | f \\ 
Hi) WM) /) \ WY i Z 
/ff Yf | y) HH} \\\ \ 
j WTA IAW 
y }| WAY \ \ 
y \ 


animal it is of like shape and proportionate size, and has an origin, 
insertion, and relations almost exactly the same. It is attached to the 
occiput close to the mas- Fig. 2. 
toido-occipital suture, oppo- 
site the interval between the 
cleido-mastoid and trapezius, 
and is connected below with 
the insertions of the rhom- 
boids into the scapula. 

This curious concurrence 
is rendered the more re- 


—— a 


Se 


EE 


522 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [May 28, 


markable by the additional presence in the fore leg of the same animal of 
a somewhat fan-shaped muscle, connecting the epitrochlea and the ole- 
cranon. As far as the author is aware, this is also unrecorded hitherto. 
It is entirely distinct from the inner head of the triceps, from which it is © 
separated by the ulnar nerve. Across the nerve this small muscle is 
placed superficially. The same muscle was found by the author in a 
human male subject (No. 7 of the Table of last year’s series) as a distinct 
muscular slip, arising from the back part of the epitrochlea, bridging 
over the ulnar nerve, and separated by it from the triceps above, and by 
a distinct areolar interval from the fascial arch which gives origin to 
the flexor carpi ulnaris muscle below. A sketch of this muscle is given 
in fig. 2 (a). It may be called the “ Anconeus epitrochlearis.” 

In two subjects were found abnormalities of the Trapezius (Nos. 4 & 
13). The first was one of deficiency, the fibres of origin of the right 
muscle reaching only as low as the tenth dorsal spine, and those of the 
left only to the eighth. In the other the insertion of the muscle op- 
posite to the scapular spine gave off a strong aponeurotic slip down and 
outwards to the lower angle of the scapula. 

In a very muscular subject with many irregularities (No. 11) was a 
curious arrangement connected with the fibres of the Platysma just 
below the chin. A superficial band of muscular fibres, an inch and a 
half wide, arose on both sides from the mastoid process and parotid 
fascia, and passed down and forwards, slightly narrowing and thickening, 
to unite with its fellow just below the point of the chin. It crossed the 
imsertion of the masseter, the angle of the lower jaw, and the facial 
artery, superficial to the “risortus Santorini,” which was normal. 
Kelch has described this variety (as seen in two subjects) by the name 
of the Musculus menti accessorius (Beitriige, xx. 8.80). 

In one subject (No.5) the anterior belly of the Digastric was double, 
the inner abnormal one being attached to the median raphe, but not 
decussating with its fellow. 

In a female (No. 17) was found the curious muscular slip given in 
fig. 8 (a), on the left side only. It is ealled by the author the Mylo- 
glossus muscle. It arose tendinous from the inner border of the angle 
of the lower jaw, behind and below the internal pterygoid, spreading 
out down, inwards, and forwards, to be inserted into the fibres of the 
tongue, between the stylo- and hyo-glossus muscles (6 & e), joing 
especially the latter. The facial artery passed deeper than the muscle, 
and the border of the submaxillary gland overlapped it. Henle saw a 
cylindrical muscle arising from the same place and joining the posterior 
belly of the digastric (Muskellehre, 8.112). This is the nearest ap- 
proach to the above muscle the author has found mentioned. 

The Stylo-pharyngeus was in one subject (No. 19) found doubled on 
the right side. In another (No. 26) the Scalenus medius arose by a 
thick band of fibres covering the intertransversalis from the transverse 


1867. | Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 523 


process of the atlas. In third (No. 27) the Scalenus anticus received 
a large slip across the subclavian artery from the medius. In No. 380 
the Levator anguli scapule sent a large slip of its fibres to join the inser- 
tion of the scalenus medius. 


Fig. 3. 


These interchanges have been frequently observed in these muscles. 
In No. 32 was a well-marked specimen of the muscle named by the 
author in his previous papers the Supra-costal. It was attached below 
to the third rib in front of the serratus magnus, and above to the first 
rib and cervical fascia. In No. 83 it was a very distinct duplication of 
the Rectus capitis posticus major, like that described by Albinus and San- 
difort, and by Douglas both in Man and the Dog. 

Twenty-one columns of the accompanying Table are occupied by the 
muscles of the upper extremity only. ‘Twenty-six muscles are concerned. 
The instances number 158, viz. 117 in the 22 males, and 41 in the 12 
females. 

4. Pectoralis major.—The number and kind of abnormalities of this 
muscle, as well as of the pectoralis minor, coincide almost exactly with 
those of last year in nearly an equal number of subjects. In one (No.5) 
was a detached slip arising separately from the abdominal aponeurosis 
opposite the seventh costal cartilage, and crossing the axilla to be in- 
serted into the tendon of, and fascia covering, the coraco-brachialis about 
an inch below the coracoid process. In another (No. 6) a similar slip 
arose from the fifth rib connected with the lower fibres of the pectoralis 
major, and was inserted with the pectoralis minor into the coracoid pro- 
cess joining on to the coraco-brachialis. In No. 20 aseparate slip arose 
from the abdominal aponeurosis at some distance from the rest of the 
muscle, and was inserted into the deep surface of its tendon at the upper 


524 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [May 23, 


border, connected with the “frenum suspensorium.” Such slips of the 
pectoralis major were noticed long ago by Sir Charles Bell (Anatomy, 
p- 802, 1829). In No82a band of fibres, about an inch broad, detached 
themseives from the lower border of the pectoralis major, and, curving 
gradually away from the rest down the arm, were inserted into a long 
roundish tendon about three-eighths of an inch wide, which crossed the 
brachial vessels and nerves obliquely down and inwards, and joined the 
internal brachial ligament about 2 inches above the inner condyle. A\l- 
together this was a fair specimen of the Chondro-epitrochlear muscle de- 
scribed and figured by the author in former papers as presenting a close 
resemblance to the muscle so called in the Monkeys. It has been de- 
scribed also by Semmerring, Caldani, Theile, Gruber, Cruveilhier, Henle, 
Hallett, Macwhinnie, and Macalister. In another subject (No. 33) the 
clavicular fibres of the pectoralis major were uninterruptedly continuous 
with those of the deltoid, the cephalic vein passing through a foramen 
low down. Otto seems to have met with this peculiarity, which he de- 
scribes as absence of the clavicular fibres of the deltoid (Path. Anatom. 
1830, S. 249). 

5. Pectoralis minor.—Four subjects were found (Nos. 6, 8, 10, & 13) 
to present an insertion of this muscle into the greater tuberosity of the 
humerus by a flat tendon usually uniting with that of the supra-spina- 
tus, but in one case separately inserted, and grooving the upper surface 
of the coracoid process, where it was provided with a bursa. This ar- 
rangement was described in the author’s last paper as resembling the 
arrangement in the Mammalia. It has been noticed by Meckel, Har- 
rison (Dissector, 1. p. 79), by Benson (Cycl. Anat. & Phys. i. p. 359), 
and by Macalister (Journ. Anat. & Phys. No. ii. May 1867, p. 317). 
In another (No. 9) the upper fibres of the left pectoralis minor were in- 
serted into a strong costo-coracoid membrane. Those on the right side 
had become developed into a separate slip of muscle nearly an inch wide, 
which was inserted into the lower border of the clavicle itself. This 
slip was connected below with the second rib, constituting an approach 
towards the formation of a Sterno-clavicular muscle, as deena in the 
author’s last paper. My 

6. Latissimus dorsi.—F ive subjects were affected with vatican in the 
insertion of this muscle. In two females (Nos. 17 & 24) the abnorma- 
lity assumed the more common form of “ Achselbogen,” viz. a short slip 
across the vessels and nerves to the insertion of the pectoralis major. 
In a male subject (No. 8) the slip on the right side was connected in a 
peculiar way with the pectoralis minor, but, on the left, in the common 
form with the pectoralis major. The former consisted of a flat, vertically 
placed, muscular slip 1 inch broad, attached below to the upper edge of 
the tendon of the latissimus dorsi, and above to the lower border of the 
pectoralis minor about am inch from the coracoid process, covering partly 
the axillary vessels and nerves. In Nos. 20 & 28 the tendon of the 


1867. | Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 525 


latissimus gave attachment to a strong, thick muscular slip, which, pas- 
sing separately down the upper fourth of the arm, finally joined to long 
head of the triceps, presenting the most 
marked approximation (especially in the 
last subject) to the Dorso-epitrochlear 
muscle in the Orang and other Simiade 
which the author has hitherto found in 
the human subject. Both the subjects 
were males, presenting respectively 16 
and 11 muscular variations. 

7. Biceps.—F¥ive variations were pre- 
sented by the origins of this muscle. Two, 
one male and one female (Nos. 7 & 24), 
showed on the left side the more common 
third head, arising from the humerus be- 
tween the coraco-brachialis and brachialis 
anticus. This was also present in the 
right arm of another male (No. 27). On 
the right arm of No.7, and the left of 
No. 27, the third head arose as a detached 
slip from the coracoid process, and, in 
one, from the capsular ligament also, form- 
ing a fusiform belly which joined the ten- 
don of insertion separately at the part 
which gives off the semilunar fascia. In 
two others, both males (Nos. 8 &18), the 
varieties were found connected with the 
imsertions of the muscle. In the first it 
was found in the left arm only, and pre- 
sented a most complicated arrangement 
(fig. 4). The origin of the muscle was 
normal. Just below the junction of the 
two heads, about the middle of the upper 
arm, the muscle divided into three fusi- 
form bellies. The outer, which is largest 
(2), presents the normal insertions into 
the radius and semilunar fascia (cut at 0). 
The middle one (¢), the smallest, ends in a 
small rounded tendon, which, passing ob- 
liquely down and inwards between the 
semilunar fascia and the radial insertion, 
becomes lost on the suwpinator fascia and 
the bursa of the radial tuberosity (d). 
The inner division (e), constituting the larger of the abnormal bellies, 
ends in a strong tendon which, at the elbow, divides into three slips, the 


526 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [May 23, 


outer joining the coronoid insertion of the brachialis anticus at its inner 
border (g); the middle once is implanted upon the deep or coronoid 
origin of the pronator radii teres (f), and the inner, connected under 
the superficial muscles with the coronoid origin of the flexor digito- 
rum sublimis. We have thus in this complicated arrangement four in- 
sertions in addition to the usual two. These are, moreover, connected 
with four other muscles, viz. the brachialis anticus, the pronator radi 
teres, the flexor sublimis digitorum, and the supinator brevis. 

In another subject also (No. 13), the biceps sent a slip to join the 
coronoid origin of the pronator radii teres. It was detached from the 
middle of the inner border of the muscle, as a band of muscular fibres 
provided with a separate tendon. In the right arm thisjoined with the 
semilunar fascia, and on the left with the pronator. , 

8. Coraco-brachialis.—In four instances this muscle presented a com- 
plete interval between its lower fibres implanted into the internal inter- 
muscular septum and brachial ligament, and its upper fibres, inserted 
into the humerus. In one (No. 27) its highest fibres were inserted into 
a fibrous band, constituting an upward prolongation of the internal 
brachial hgament across the tendon of the latissimus dorsi and teres 
major, as described by Henle. In all, the musculo-cutaneous nerve 
passed between the two portions. In No. 380 the muscle was inserted 
into the intermuscular septum at quite the lower third of the arm. 

9. Brachialis anticus—In two subjects a slip of the outer fibres of 
this muscle was continued into those of the supinator longus. In one 
right arm (No. 26) it sent off over the brachial vessels and median nerve 
aslip of fascia to join the semlunar. In one (No. 81) it was deeply di- 
vided down the middle, the outer part sending some fibres into the 
supinator longus, and others into the bicipital semilunar fascia. The 
first-mentioned peculiarity has been before described by the author, and 
the last has been noticed by Hildebrandt, Scmmerring, Theile, and 
Meckel, and was compared by the last-named anatomist to the arrange- 
ment in Birds. 

10. Flexor subtimis digitorum v. perforatus—Out of nine instances 
of irregularities in this muscle two were specimens of deficiency. In 
one (No. 5) the radial origin was entirely absent, in another (No. 18) 
the tendon to the little finger was wanting. This has been noticed by 
Meckel, Theile, and Henle. In No. 9, a muscular slip from the middle 
of the pronator radi teres joined the radial fibres of the sublimis. This 
has been noticed by Otto. In four subjects (Nos. 6, 8, 21, & 31) the 
origin of the flexor sublimis was variously differentiated. In the right 
arm of No. 6, a separate muscle arising from the inner border of the 
coronoid process gave off the perforatus tendon of the index. 

A separate coronoid or middle head is described in many text-books 
as a normal arrangement for the fleror sublimis digitorum. 

In almost every subject, however, the author has found that the fibres 


1867.) Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 527 


composing the superficial or condyloid head are continued uninterrup- 
tedly along the internal lateral ligament to the inner margin of the 
coronoid process, which they occupy along nearly its whole length, and 
are frequently connected there with the coronoid tendon of the prona- 
tor radii teres. This part usually gives rise to the indicial tendon of 
the muscle. In the subject above mentioned it constituted a separate 
muscle. In addition to this, the most common coronoid attachment, 
however, there sometimes exists a strong flat tendon arising from the 
outer and lower border of the coronoid process and jeining, not the 
condyloid, but the radial origin of the muscle. 

In the sketches of the muscular anatomy of the limbs of an adult 
female Orang-utan dissected by the author, he finds that in this animal 
this flat coronoid tendon gives attachment not only to some of the fibres 
of the radial origin of the sublimis, but also to the flexor carpi radialis, 
which arises both from it and from the oblique line and outer border of 
the radius by a common aponeurosis with the sublimis. This arrange- 
ment has been observed by Mr. Macalister in the human arm (op. evt. 
p- 12). In the Orang, the four tendons of the flexor sublimis are 
attached to separate muscles, the areolar intervals between which are 
very readily separable. That to the index lies deepest, and arises from 
the upper coronoid origin and lateral ligament. Those to the second and 
third fingers both arise from the oblique line and border of the radius, 
the latter being superficial and attached also to the condyle of the hume- 
rus, while the former is connected chiefly with the lower coronoid ten- 
don, but having a separate slip also from the internal lateral ligament ; 
while the muscle to the little finger arises superficially from the condyle 
of the humerus. 

in one of the above-mentioned varieties of the flexor sublimis (No. 8) 
was a separate fusiform muscle to the little finger, arising from a tendi- 
nous intersection springing from the condyle of the humerus. In 
another (No. 21) the tendons of the left index and little fingers both 
were connected with a digastric muscle with a tendinous intersection 
in the middle, arising from the condyle, internal lateral ligament and 
upper coronoid origin. This has been observed by Macalister in a fe- 
male subject, with many other irregularities. Such a digastric portion 
has been recorded also by Meckel (Muskellehre, 8. 536). The same 
author describes a similar intersection in the Loris (Anat. Comp. 6. 
p. 340). In No. 31 all the tendons were provided with separate mus- 
cles, the first arising with a digastric formation from the condyle, inter- 
nal lateral ligament and coronoid process; the second from the radius 
and lower coronoid tendon ; the third from the condyle and internal 
lateral ligament; and the fourth from the condyle only. In No. 10 
was a tendinous slip from the superficial surface of the sublimis to the 
annular ligament, the palmaris longus being normal. 

11. Flexor digitorum profundus v. perforans.—In four subjects (Nos. 


528 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [May 28, 


3, 9, 26, & 34) some of the indicial fibres of this muscle arose from the 
inner part of the front surface of the radius. In one (No. 9) these were 
inserted into the side of the long tendon of a fusiform muscle, which 
(arising with the coronoid origin of the flexor sublimis in connection 
with a similar one passing to the flexor longus pollicis) passed under the 
annular higament and divided into two, one to jom the tendon of the 
flexor longus pollicis, and the other (larger) that of the index perforans. 
This arrangement, somewhat dissimilar to those formerly described by 
authors, is yet formed on the same plan or type of the connection be- 
tween the flexors of the thumb and index and the flexor sublimis. It 
forms a coalescence of the “ Accessorius ad flexorem pollicis longum,” 
with the “ Accessorius ad flexorem digitorum profundum ”’ of Gantzer. 

In No. 26 one half of the muscular fibres of the flewor longus pollicis 

were implanted upon the tendon of the index perforans. In the left 
arm of No. 6 was found a detached muscular slip from the outer part of 
the profundus, ending in a tendon which joined that of the sublimis per- 
foratus of the index in the palm. It was in the right arm of the same 
subject that the detached perforatus muscle of the index before described 
was found. In three (Nos. 10, 28, & 33) were found detached mus- 
culo-tendinous slips of the profwndus in the fore arm of a liketype. In 
No. 10 it was single, and gave part origin to the fourth lumbricalis. 
In No. 28 it was lost on the synovial sheath of the tendons in the palm, - 
and in No. 33 it was connected both with this and with the first lwmbri- 
calis. This has been noticed by Scemmerring, Theile, and Henle. In 
six subjects were found a coronozd origin of the flexor profundus, arising 
in common with the fibres of the flexor sublimis as a fusiform tapering 
muscle ending in a rounded tendon. In four (Nos. 7, 9, 13, & 20) this 
tendon joined the perforating tendon of the index finger; in one (No. 
25) that of the middle finger: and in another (No. 81) those of the 
ring- and little fingers. This muscle is mentioned by Meckel, Sem- 
merring, Theile, Henle, and by Cowper and Macwhinnie. It was named 
by Gantzer the “ Musculus accessorius ad flexorem profundum digito- 
rum.” In No. 9, as before described, it received muscular fibres also 
from the radius. 

12. Flexor pollicis longus.—In twelve subjects this muscle also de- 
rived a separate fusiform musculo-tendinous origin from the coronoid 
process of the ulna. This has been noticed by Albinus, Otto, Seemmer- 
ring, and Meckel, and was called by Gantzer the “ Accessorius ad flexo- 
rem pollicis longum.” It is usually alluded to by text-book writers as 
an occasional origin, described by some from the outer, and by others 
from the inner side of the coronoid process. The proportion of its oc- 
currence in thirty-six subjects is one-third. In only three was the origin 
at all separate from the coronoid fibres of the sublimis. It usually 
assumes the form of a tapering muscle, detaching itself from the indicial 
fibres of the sublimis, often in connection with the similar contribution 


1867. ] Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 529 


to the flexor profundus, and ending in a tendon more or less long, which 
joins that of the flewor pollicis longus. In three instances the junction 
took place below the middle of the arm. In a former paper the author 
described a remarkable development and amalgamation of these acces- 
_ sory origins of the flewor longus pollicis and profundus digitorum in a 
Negro, resulting in a complete set of tendons to each of the fingers 
placed intermediate to those of the sublimis and profundus. 

In the Dog, the coronoid origins constitute the chief bulk of the united 
flexors. Inthe Cat, Hedgehog, Guinea-pig, Rabbit, and many other ani- 
mals they form a great part of them. 

In No. 7 was a muscular, and in Nos. 8, 20, & 38 a tendinous connec- 
tion of the tendons of the Flexor longus pollicis and Index perforans, con- 
stituting a more decided tendency to the complete union of these muscles 
found in the lower animals than even in the instances above-mentioned 
of the radial origin of the flexor profundus. This connection exists more or 
less completely in all the Apes and Monkeys, reaching its most peculiar de- 
velopment by the entire substitution of the flexor longus pollicis by a 
separated and entire flewor mdicis in the Orang-utan. It is evidently 
the homologous representative of the tendon of connection between the 
flexor longus hallucis and flexor longus digitorwm in the foot. 

13. LInmbricales.—In two subjects (Nos. 8 & 5) the fourth lumbri- 
calis on the right side was inserted into the extensor aponeurosis on 
the ulnar side of the ring-finger (which was thus provided with two, 
acting in different directions), instead of the little finger, which was 
destitute. In Nos. 11 & 34, in the right hand, and in No. 32 in both 
hands, the third lumbricalis was bifurcated, one being inserted into 
the ulnar side of the middle digit (which was thus provided with 
one on each side), while the other was inserted into the usual place. In 
the left hand of No. 33 both the third and fourth lumbricalis were bi- 
furcated, the middle and ring-fingers both having a lumbricalis on each 
side. These abnormalities have been described by Meckel, Theile, and 
Froment. According to the last-named author, the lumbricales are 
irregular in nearly half the number of subjects, the third being the most 
frequently bifurcated, and next, the fourth. In half, the author has 
found the irregularities on both sides; when single, he has found the 
right and left to be in about equal proportions irregular. 

14. Flexor carpi radialis brevis v. profundus—aIn only two subjects 
has the author found this year the muscle described by him in previous 
papers under this name. Both were imperfect specimens, arising in a 
penniform way from the radius outside the flexor longus pollicis, and 
inserted by a rounded tendon, which in one subject (No. 32) was as large 
as that of the flexor pollicis itself, into that deep portion of the annular 
ligament which is attached to the trapezoid and base of the middle me- 
tacarpal bone, secluding the sheath of the flexor carpi radialis tendon. 
In one (No. 20) the palmaris longus was normal. In the other it was 


530 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [May 23, 


represented by a small slip from the superficial surface of the flewor 
carpt radialis. Mr. Macalister of Dublin has communicated to the 
author the description of a complete specimen of this muscle inserted 
into the base of the middle metacarpal bone. It existed in the right 
arm only, and had its origin from the radius internal, instead of exter- 
nal, to the flexor pollicis longus. He has also met with an instance of 
an incomplete muscle of this kind inserted into the deep portion of the 
annular ligament, also on the right arm. A palmaris longus was present 
in one of these cases, but not in the other. 

It is somewhat remakable that in these two cases, as in all the eight 


cases observed by the author, this muscle has been found in the right - 


arm only. It offers the best homologue in the arm to the tibialis posti- 
cus in the leg. 

15. Palmaris longus.—In three subjects (Nos. 5, 24, & 32) the normal 
palmaris was absent in both arms. It was also wanting in the right 
arm of No. 28, and in the left of No. 27. In three (5, 27, & 32) there 
was a feeble slip of tendon from the superficial muscular fibres of the 
flexor carpi radialis to the superficial surface of the middle portion of the 
palmar fascia, which seemed to supply its place. This relation between 
thetwo muscles is interesting in connection with the occurrence ofa flexor 
carpi radialis. brevis in one of these subjects (82). In the left arm of 
one subject (No. 28) both the tendon and muscular portions of the pal- 
maris were doubled, the supernumerary one being smaller and placed 
internal and posterior to the other, and arising with the condyloid 
portion of the sublimis. Its tendon was spread out and lost on the 
fascia at the wrist, a little above the annular ligament. In the right arm 
of another (No. 34) the tendon of an otherwise normal palmaris was 
doubled, both portions being inserted into the annular ligament and 
palmar fascia. In a third.(No. 8, the subject of fig. 4) the belly of this 
muscle was inverted (2) and placed just above the wrist. 

16. Hatensores carpi radiales——In no less than fifteen subjects these 
muscles presented the intervening muscle and tendon, named by the 
author the extensor carpi radialis intermedius. In six this muscle arose 
fleshy with the lJongior, and was inserted by a long tendon with, but 
distinct from, the brevior into the base of the third metacarpal bone. 
In four it arose with the belly of the brevior, and its tendon was di- 
stinctly inserted with that of the longior into the second metacarpal. In 
one subject it was arranged in the first way on the left arm, and in the 
second on the right; while in the remaining four it was double, e. g. 
there were two additional muscular bellies intervening between the 
longior and brevior, with long tendons crossing in exchange in opposite 
directions. In one, these tendons were united and more or less blended 
as they crossed each other. Such an arrangement has been recorded 
by Maealister (op. cit. p. 18). In another (No. 26) the left arm was 
provided with a single-bellied intermedius with two tendons, one going 


1867.] Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 531 


to that of the longior, and the other to the insertion of the brevior. In 
another (No. 14) the Jongior was, in addition, provided with two tendons 
by division. In two subjects (Nos. 30 & 31) the tendon of the 
extensor carpi radialis brevior was inserted into the inner corner of the 
base of the second metacarpal bone as well as into the third. This was 
the case also in two of those which were provided with an extensor 
intermedius (Nos. 29 & 32). It is interesting as showing how an ‘in- 
termediate tendon and muscle may be formed by simple fission of the 
brevior. 

17. Extensor carpi ulnaris—In two subjects (Nos. 7 & 21) this 
muscle gave off a slip of its lower tendon to the extensor aponeurosis 
of the little finger. In one (No. 11) the abductor minini digitt arose 
partly from the tendon, and was further provided with two other di- 
stinct origins—one from the pisiform bone, and the other from the upper 
border of the posterior annular ligament, evincing a tendency to the 
high origin described and figured in the author’s former papers, and 
previously recorded by Ginther, Milde, and Scemmerring. 

18. Supinator longus.—In three out of the four varieties found in 
this muscle, the tendon of insertion was double. In one (No 8, fig. 4, 2) 
the lower insertion was the larger and normal one at the base of the 
radial styloid process, while the upper one was attached to the outer 
border of the radius three inches above, the radial nerve passing between 
them to the back of the hand. In No. 34 the same arrangement was 
present in both arms. In another (No. 21) the radial nerve passed 
higher than both tendons. In one subject (No. 28) the tendon was 
divided into three portions, the lowest and largest being inserted into 
the usual place, the upper one near the middle of the radius, and the 
intermediate one opposite the upper border of the pronator quadratus. 
The radial nerve passed between the two latter. 

19. Extensor communis digitorwn.—In two subjects (Nos. 8 & 28) 
the tendons of this muscle on the back of the hand were doubled; in 
the first for each digit, and in the last for the middle and ring- 
fingers only. In one (No. 29) the tendon of the index only was 
doubled, one being connected by a lateral slip with that of the middle 
finger, as the latter was to that of the ring-finger, and this,—with that 
of the little finger. It so resulted that all the tendons were thus joined 
together, except one of the two tendons of the dex. The indicator 
was normal, but the extensor minimi digiti gave a tendon to the ring- 
finger. By means of these special tendons, the individual play of each 
finger was kept free. In one subject (No. 21) there was found, in the 
left hand, a single fleshy slip of the muscle first described by the author 
as the Hxtensor brevis digitorum manis, arising from the dorsal surface 
of the os magnum and unciforme, and passing to the extensor aponeurosis 
on the radial side of the middle digit. In another (No. 23) there were 
found, in both hands, two slips passing from the same bones and from 


532 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [May 23, 


the posterior carpal ligament, to the ulnar side of the middle and ring- 
Jingers, joining the extensor aponeurosis by separate, slender, flat tendons. 

20. Extensor minima digitt.—In nearly half the number of subjects 
was the tendon of this muscle doubled (fig. 5,c). In one (No. 8) 
there were, further, two distinct muscular bellies. In two subjects 
(Nos. 29 & 84) the additional tendon was inserted with the common 
extensor tendon into the ring-finger, as in the Orang, Apes, Monkeys, 
Rabbit, Hedgehog, &c. In the Cat and Dog the third and second digits 
also are supplied by it. 

21. Hatensor indicis and Extensor medi digiti—In two subjects 
(Nos. 8 & 27) the indicator was provided with a double tendon, showing 
the first tendency to the formation of a special extensor of the middle 
finger, such as that found as a distinct muscle in the remarkable ar- 
rangement seen in fig. 5 (a). Both these are constant muscles in the 
Apes and Monkeys. 

22. Hxtensor ossis metacarpi pollicis—An increase in the number of 
tendons of this muscle was seen in 16 subjects out of 36, 2. e., nearly half. 
In four the tendon was simply doubled, both being inserted into the 
base of the first metacarpalbone. In four others one of the two tendons 
was inserted into the trapezium. In one (No. 25) the tendon was triple, 
two being inserted into the metacarpal, and one into the trapezium. 
In seven instances the tendon sent off a slip which gave part origin to 
the fibres of the abductor pollicis brevis. These sometimes formed a 
separate muscle. In four of these there were two tendons only, one 
inserted into the base of the metacarpal bone, and the other going to the 
abductor. In two (Nos. 20 & 31) there were three tendons, one to 
the metacarpal bone, another to the trapezium, and the third to the 
abductor pollicis. Such an arrangement has been recorded by Maca- 
lister (op. cit. p. 18). In one (No. 11) there were no less than four 
tendons, three of which were inserted into the middle of the shaft and 
base of the metacarpal bone, and one went to the abductor. In the 
last subject the extensor primi internodi pollicis was entirely absent, 
increasing the similarity in the arrangement of these muscles to that 
found in the Chimpanzee and Orang, In two other subjects (Nos. 6 & 
21) the muscular part of the extensor primi was entirely blended with 
that of the extensor ossis metacarpi, though the tendon was separate 
and its insertion distinct, into the base of the first phalanx of the 
thumb. 

23. Interossei mants.—Three specimens of the “ Palmar mterosseus of 
the thumb” of Henle were found. In two subjects (Nos. 4 & 20) the 
first interosseous space was occupied by two muscles, one, the “ Abductor 
indicis ”’ of Albinus and the older anatomists, and the other the “ In- 
terosseus prior indicis”’ of that author (the “Extensor terti internodi 
indicis ’’ of Douglas (Myograph. Comp. p. 181). 

24. Among the miscellaneous specimens in the upper extremity were 


—_——_ a= ee 


Pe ra ay Se ee ee ee ee ee 


1867.] Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 5383 


found, in a female subject (No. 3), the muscle described by the author 
as the Extensor pollicis et indicis (fig. 5, 6). Arising by a distinct pen- 
niform belly from the hinder surface of the ulna, interosseous ligament 
and intermuscular septa between the extensor secundi internodii pollicis 


SW 


and the extensor indicis, it ended in a strong rounded tendon, which, 
passing under those of the extensor communis, parallel with and out- 
side those of the indicator and extensor medii digiti, divided in the groove 
of the annular hgament into two tendons. The outer of these joined 
that of the extensor secundi on the middle of the first phalanx of the 


534 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [May 28, 


thumb, to be inserted with it into the extreme phalanx, and the inner, 
smaller, was inserted separately into the base of the first phalanx of the 
index, outside of, and distinct from, the tendons of the common extensor 
and indicator proper. ‘The author has found the same arrangement in 
the Vampire Bat, Dog, Cat, Hedgehog, and Rabbit. Meckel found it in 
the Bear, Coati, and Beaver. 

In its insertion, this specimen differs from those formerly deseribed 
by the author by joining the tendon of the extensor secundi internodit 
pollicis. In the others it joined or substituted that of the ewtensor primi 
internodit which was present and normal in the subject of the woodcut 
(fig. 5). This arm presents an extraordinary instance of multiplication of 
these special extensor muscles of the hand. In a specimen of the above 
muscle described by Macalister (p. 4), the indicial tendon jomed that 
of the indicator, and was inserted into the second and third phalanges 
of the index. 

In one subject (No. 11) the Hxtensor primi internodii pollicis was 
altogether wanting on both sides. A small tendinous looking ligament 
was attached to the styloid process of the radius and passed to the base 
of the first phalanx of the thumb, which seemed to represent the lower 
part of its tendon on both sides. It indicated an arrest of development 
in the muscular germ above, and was unattended by any evidence of 
diseased action, or any peculiarity in the muscular part of the extensor 
ossis metacarpi pollicis, usually so closely connected with this muscle. 
The occasional total absence of this muscle was noticed by Semmerring 
and Meckel. In one subject (No. 21) the extensor primi internodit 
pollicis was entirely blended at its muscular portion with the ewtensor 
ossis metacarpi, its tendon becoming free at the styloid process of the 
radius. This has been observed by Theile. In two subjects (Nos. 20 
& 84) the tendon of the same muscle sent a large portion (in the last 
the chief portion) of its fibres to join that of the extensor secundi at 
the base of the ungual phalanx. Scemmerring has observed this pecu- 
liarity. Macalister found once in about nine subjects an opposite ar- 
rangement to this, viz., the tendon of the extensor secundi giving a slip 
to the base of the first phalanx. This has been also seen by the author 
in cases of absence of the extensor primi internodu. 

In one female subject (No. 17) was found a large slip of the spinal 
fibres of the Infraspinatus passing superficially to the rest of the 
muscle and to the teres minor, to be inserted into the lowest part of the 
hinder border of the greater tuberosity. 

In a male subject (No. 14) was found, in the right arm, a fine speci- 
men of the detached portion of the subscapularis, which has been de- 
scribed by Professor Haughton under the name of Infraspinatus se- 
cundus, and by Macalister under that of Subscapulo-humeral or capsular. 
It was quite detached from the subscapularis, arising from the border 
of the scapular as a flat muscular band, 1 inch wide, crossed the long 


a ee a EE ee 


1867.] Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 535 


head of the triceps, and became inserted into the neck of the humerus at 
the same place as the capsular ligament, overlapped a little by the tendon 
of the latissimus dorsi. This muscle has been found by Haughton in the 
Macacus nemestrinus and other Quadrumana, and by Macalister in the 
Horse, Seal, and other Mammalia. In No. 24 was found a Zransversus 
mantis, entirely separate from the bulk of the fibres of the abductor 
pollicis, and arising chiefly from the neck of the third metacarpal bone 
and transverse ligament. 

The remaining ten columns in the Table are occupied by abnorma- 
lities of the lower extremity, affecting 23 muscles, and comprising 106 
instances, viz. 74 in the 22 males, and 32 in the 12 females. 

25. Peroneus tertius—This muscle presented varieties in no less 
than 14 subjects. In no less than five it was absent; in three, on both 
sides, viz. two males (Nos. 24 & 28) and one female (No. 16). In two 
other females (Nos. 10 & 24) it was totally absent on one side only, 
in one in the right, and in the other in the left leg, the representative 
in the other leg being in each case so small as to be of little account. 
In one, indeed, it was a mere slender band of fibrous tissue attached to 
the lower fibres of the extensor communis digitorum. It may be said, 
then, that in one-fourth of the 12 female subjects it was wanting, and 
in two only out of the 22 males. In two males (Nos. 20 & 27) its tendon 
was doubled. In two other males (Nos. 30 & 32) its tendon was in- 
serted into the base of the fourth as well as the fifth metatarsal bone. 
In four (Nos. 3, 8, 11, & 29) it sent forward a slip to join the extensor 
aponeurosis of the little toe, in the way of the peroneus quinti from the 
brevis. In all these four, except on the right leg of No. 8, the true pe- 
roneus guinti from the brevis was coexistent. Both these varieties have 
been well known to anatomists since Meckel. In one (No. 7) the slip 
was lost on the fascia covering the last dorsal interosseus, and did not 
reach the toe. 

26. Peroneus quinti.—In 12 subjects (or one-third of the whole) was 
found a representative tendon of this animal muscle more or less com- 
plete, connected with the tendon of the peroneus brevis, and leaving it 
just below the malleolus. In three (Nos. 2, 16, & 26) the slip was at- 
tached to the front end of the fifth mefatarsal bone, and more or less 
blended with the dorsal interosseous fascia—an arrangement which was 
noticed by Meckel in some subjects unprovided with a peroneus tertius. 
In all the nine other instances the tendon was more fully developed, 
and joined in forming the extensor aponeurosis of the little toe. In one 
subject only (No. 17) was it confined to one side. Three were found 
in the 12 female subjects, and nine in the 22 males, showing a larger 
proportion in the latter. 

27. Extensor primi internodii hallucis longus.—In no less than 19 


subjects, or more than one half, was found, in both legs, a long tendon . 


attached to the inner part of the base of the first phalanx of the great 
VOL, XV. . 25 


536 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [May 23, 


toe distinct from that of the ewtensor brevis digitorum. -In three subjects 
(Nos. 9,17, & 31) this tendon was provided with a well-developed and 
distinct penniform muscular belly, arising from the fibula and inter- 
osseous ligament, and separated by an areolar interval from that of the 
extensor longus or proprius hallucis. ..In a male subject (No. 9) this 
muscle lay at first outside the extensor proprius, and was provided with 
two tendons, the outer one joining the great-toe tendon of the extensor 
brevis, and the inner, crossing under that of the extensor proprius, was 
inserted into the usual place on the inner border of the base of the 
Jirst phalanx. Ina female (No. 17) the muscle lay to the inner side of 
the extensor proprius, its tendon subdividing in the same way, and going 
to the same destinations as the last specimen, but the outer one cross- 
ing in this case under the extensor proprius. In another female 
(No. 31) the right leg was provided with a distinct muscle of this kind, 
with a single tendon joining that of the extensor brevis. In the left 
lee it was represented only by a slip of tendon given from that of the 
extensor proprius at the ankle, and lying inside it along the foot to the 
first phalanx, where it was inserted in the usual way. In the 14 other 
subjects, the latter was the arrangement in both lees, the muscular 
fibres, together with the upper part of the tendon, being united more 
or less with those of the extensor proprius.” Meckel remarks that the 
above abnormality is homologous to the extensor primi internodii pol- 
licis in the hand. It is also mentioned by Scemmerring, Theile, and 
Henle. : 

In a male subject (No. 23) this tendon to the base of the first 
phalanx of the hallux was given off from the outer side of that of 
the tibialis anticus. This anomaly had been previously found by the 
author in two subjects (also males), which were described and figured in 
his first paper on the subject. He is not aware that it has been’ ob- 
served by any other anatomist. It is not to be confounded with the 
common insertion of a slip of the tibialis tendon into the base of the 
first metatarsal bone. During the last “Session a fine example of this 
formation was seen in a still-born male fcetus, which was not found to 
present any other muscular variety. In another adult male (No. 33) 
it was found in the right leg, with the addition of a second slip of 
tendon from the extensor proprius; while in the left leg, two*slips came 
from that of the latter muscle, the outer joining the tendon of the ex- 
tensor brevis digitorum, and the inner inserted separately into the base 
of the first phalanx of the hallux, as before seen in those (Nos. 9 & 
17) with complete muscular bellies. The forward prolongation from 
the tendon of the tibialis anticus to the hallux presents: a curious pa- 
rallel on the inside to that of the guwinti from the peroneus brevis on 
the outside of the foot. A blending of the tibialisZanticus with the 
long extensor of the great toe is said by Meckel to be found in the Por- 
cupine. Six out of the nineteen subjects possessing a separate tendon 


1867. ] Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 537 


to the base of the hallux were females (one half of the whole number 
of subjects of this sex). These comprised two out of the three com- 
plete specimens. 

28. Hextensor longus digitorum pedis.—In one subject (No. 6) the in- 
nermost tendon of this muscle detached a separate slip to be inserted 
into the base of the jirst phalanx of the second toe, producing an exact 
analogy to the arrangement in the great toe last described, and which 
also coexisted in the same subject. It is mentioned by Meckel as ho- 
mologous to the indicator in man, and as also found in the Pig and Por- 
cupine (Anat. Comp. vi. pp. 429 & 482). In another (No. 9) a connect- 
ing slip from the innermost tendon of the long common extensor joined 
at the base of the metatarsals with that of the extensor proprius hallucis. 
A similar arrangement is said by Meckel to be found in the Kangaroo 
andin the Ruminants. In one (No. 11) the tendons of the second, third, 
and fourth toes arose by a separate muscular belly from the outer tube- 
rosity of the tibia and head fibula; that to the fifth toe coming from the 
fibres of the peroneus tertius. Thisis found, according to Meckel, in the 
Hyena, Bear, and other Carnivora, and also in the Kangaroo and some 
Rodents. In one subject (No. 19) two small slips of tendon, from those 
of the two outermost toes, were inserted into the shafts of the fourth and 
fifth metatarsals respectively. This is similar to the arrangement found 
in the Sloths and Reptiles. In No. 23 there was a reduplication of the 
extensor tendon of the little toe. In No. 26 the outermost tendon of the 
extensor longus was connected with that of the extensor brevis by a 
long slip arising from the former above the annular ligament, and join- 
ing the latter on the dorsum of the foot. In two (Nos. 32 & 33) the 
tendons of the long extensor were each provided with a separate mus- 
cular belly. In the former there was also a double tendon to the 
second toe. 

29. Hatensor brevis digitorum pedis.—In one subject (No. 9) a tendi- 
nous slip from the second tendon of this muscle joined that of the first 
dorsal interosseus ; and another from the ¢hird tendon, that of the 
second dorsal interosseus. In No. 11 this connection existed with the 
Jivst dorsal interosseus only. This evidence of connection between 
these muscles is interesting in relation to the occasional formation of an 
extensor brevis digitorum in the hand, which the author has in former 
papers explained by posterior displacement and separation of the super- 
ficial fibres of the dorsal interosser. In two (Nos. 238 & 26) the 
tendons to the second toe were doubled. 

30. Hlexor longus digitorum and Flexor accessorius——In one sub- 
ject (a female) the first tendon of the former muscle was entirely 
wanting, its place being supplied to the second toe by one from the 
_ flexor hallucis, approaching the formation in some of the Apes. In 
No. 14 was found a fully developed specimen of the jlewor longus ae- 
cessorius, arising from the lower third of the hinder surface of the 

2x2 


538 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. {May 28, 


fibula and the adjacent aponeurosis, as a distinct muscle ending in a 
stout tendon, which passed under the annular ligament outside the 
vessels, and was joined by the muscular fibres of the “ massa carnea 
Sylvu,”’ and by the tendons of the perforans in the middle of the sole. 
The fibres of its tendon passed exclusively to the three outer toes. In 
No. 15 the “massa carnea’’ was replaced by a thick tendon attached 
to the inner border of the tuber calcis.. At its junction with the outer 
tendon of origin, a small flat muscular belly was developed upon it. In 
the right foot of No. 24, a tendon from the outer head of an otherwise 
normal accessorius was joined to the superficial or perforated tendon of 
the middle toe, forming decussating fibres with others from the opposite 
side of the latter in the usual way. Three out of the four abnormali- 
ties in these muscles were found in female subjects. The complete flexor 
accessorius longus was seen, however, in a male subject, as in the three 
instances described last year. ) 

31. Lumbricales pedis—All the abnormalities im these muscles re- 
sulted from deficiency. In two the fourth was absent, one on the 
right side and one on the left. In one the second was wanted on both 
sides. All were male subjects. 

32. Flexor brevis digitorwm.—All the varieties of this muscle were 
also from deficiency. In all the seven subjects affected, the tendon to 
the little toe was absent, and, in six out of seven, on both sides. In 
one (No. 3) its place was supplied by a small fusiform slip of muscle, 
arising from the outermost tendon of the flexor longus perforans. In 
another (No. 4) the supplementary muscle arose by two slender fusi- 
form bellies, one from the long flexor tendon, and the other from the 
inner tubercle of the calcis, deeper than the fibres of the flexor brevis di- 
eitorum. This, which the author looks upon as a transitional form to 
the arrangement found in No. 3, and in the Apes and Monkeys, was 
precisely like that given in the author’s paper of 1865. In the rest of 
the subjects no substitute to the missing tendon was found, though pos- 
sibly a feeble development may have escaped observation in some of 
them. Meckel has remarked on the frequent deficiency of this tendon 
in the human foot, and also that it is not always supplemented by the 
flexor perforans, comparing it to the usual deficiency of the flexor 
brevis in the Monkeys, and its total disappearance in other Mammalia. 

33. Abductor ossis metatarst quintt.—No less than 17 specimens of 
this muscle, arising separately from the outer tubercle of the calca- 
neum, and inserted into the tubercular base of the fifth metatarsal 
bone, were found in the 36 subjects (very nearly one half). In three 
subjects it was found on the right foot only, and in two, on the left 
only. In the other 12 it existed on both sides. Ten of the spe- 
cimens were found in the 24 males, and seven in the 12 females, giving 
a preponderance of frequency in the latter sex. This preponderance m 
the female sex is still more striking, if the cases given in the author’s 


1867.) | Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 539 


last paper are included in the estimate; 8 having been found in the 
16 females (or one half), while only 16 were found in the 54 males 
(not one-third). If this be established by future observation, as well 
as the more frequent deficiency of the peroneus tertius in the same 
sex before alluded to, its bearing upon the relative structural inferiority 
of the sex will be curious, since both are animal peculiarities. 

Mr. Macalister states that he has found the abductor of the fifth meta- 
tarsal bone existing as a distinct muscle in nine out of every twelve sub- 
jects. In No.5 of the Table the muscle was peculiar in arising from the 
inner tubercle of the calcaneum by a large, distinct, and triangular fleshy 
belly, and in being inserted by a long tendon into the neck or anterior 
part of the shaft, instead of the tubercle of the fifth metatarsal bone. 

34. Out of 18 sundry specimens of abnormalities in the lower extre- 
mity, two were peculiarities of the tendon of the Flexor longus hallucis. 
In one, a female (No. 3), the usual slip of union with the flexor longus 
digitorum was wanting. In another female (No. 6) the flexor longus hal- 
lucis first received a long slip from the flewor communis, and then gave 
two separate tendons to the second and third toes. That to the second 
constituted the only perforating tendon, the one from the common 
flexor being wanting, while that to the third toe joined at the base of 
the digit with a smaller one from the common flexor. In two male 
subjects (Nos. 5 & 21) the Plantaris muscle and tendon were both ap- 
parently blended with the outer head of the gastrocnemius. In No. 30 
the Superior gemelius was wanting. In the right foot of No. 8, a male 
subject remarkable for the number of its abnormalities, a considerable 
portion of the outer fibres of the Flexor brevis hallucis were detached 
from the rest, and inserted into the inner tubercle on the base of the 
first phalanx of the second toe. In the left foot of the same subject a 
still larger slip from the fibres of the Adductor hallucis was detached to 
the same destination. This was also found as a less developed spe- 
cimen in the left foot of No. 13, also a male. Two specimens of these 
abnormalities, also in male subjects (one of each kind), were described 
by the author in his paper of last year. They do not seem to have been 
before recorded by any anatomist, though apparently recurring in the 
proportion of about once in 18 or 20 subjects. 

A male subject (No. 9) was remarkable for the presence of the muscle 
described by Otto as the Peroneus quartus (Neue seltene Beobacht. S. 40), 
arising from the lower fourth of the outer surface of the fibula below 
the peroneus brevis, and inserted by a distinct tendon into the outer 
side of the caleaneum, upon the tubercle between the peroneal grooves. 
Theile mentions that this muscle sometimes replaces the peroneus brevis 
itself. In the case just described, both the peroneus longus and brevis 
were coexistent. A variety of the same character, but inserted into the 
outer border of the cuboid, is recorded by Macalister (op. cit.) in a subject 
haying no peroneus tertius. One of the peronei muscles is, according to 


540 - Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [May 23, © 


Meckel, inserted into the cuboid in the Kangaroo. In a male subject 
(No. 14), the right Peroneus longus had a double tendon, one inserted 
into the internal cuneiform, and the other into the base of the first me- 
tatarsal. In a female (No. 15) the tendon of this muscle gave origin 
in the sole to the flexor and opponens minimi digiti, as well as to the 
third plantar interosseus, as in the variety figured in the author’s paper 
of 1865. In another female (No. 16) the Peroneus brevis was, in both 
legs, provided with a double tendon, both inserted into the usual place. 
The peroneus tertius in the same subject was totally absent. In the left 
leg of a male (No. 20) a slip of tendon was detached from the outer 
border of the Zibialis anticus muscle to be implanted into the inner 
border of the anterior annular ligament and dorsal fascia. In both legs 
of another male (No. 29) a more decided development in this direction 
had resulted in a distinct, flat, spreading muscle, 3 inches long, arising 
from the outer surface of the tibia below and distinct from the fibres 
of the tibialis, and ending in a round tendon which was inserted mto 
the annular ligament and dorsal fascia below the malleolus. Such a 
muscle was described by the author in his paper of 1864 under the 
name of the Tensor fascie dorsalis pedis, occurring on both sides im a 
female subject. , 

In two subjects (Nos. 22 & 384) a considerable portion of the inner 
fibres of the Pectineus were found to pass across the front of the deep 
femoral artery to become inserted with the upper fibres of the Adductor 
longus, an irregularity which does not seem to have been hitherto 
noted. A similar extension of the origin of the adductor longus is seen 
in the Marmot among the Rodents, in the Ratel of the Carnivora, and 
in the Magot and Chimpanzee among the Quadrumana. 

No. 24 was found to possess a remarkable development in both feet 
of an Opponens or flexor ossis metacarpt minima digitt. 

In the right lee of a muscular female subject (No. 25), the Biceps 
flexor cruris was provided with a third head. This consisted of an. 
elongated, rounded, and fusiform muscle (fig. 6, a), 8 inches long and 
three-quarters of an inch wide, connected above by a rounded tendon, 
2 inches long, with the strong fascia which covered the deep surface of 
gluteus maximus (6 6, cut and turned aside in the figure). Below, it 
was united by a tendon, 1 inch long, with the ischial or long head (¢), 
just above its junction with the femoral head (d) at the lower third of 
the thigh. An additional head to this muscle, though not at all eom- 
mon, yet has been recorded by various writers, viz. by Meckel, from 
the upper part of the “linea aspera;” by Gruber, from the internal 
condyloid ridge of the femur; by Henle, from the fascia lata near the 
upper end of the linea aspera; and by Seemmerring and Gantzer, aris- 
ing from the tuber ischii. Of these, the three former joined the femo- 
ral or short head, while in the instances given by the two last-named 
authors, the abnormal head joined the ischial or long head. All haying a 


1867.| Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Mycology. 541 


closely or identically similar origin to those heads of the muscle with 
which they afterwards respectively united, may be considered as exten- 
sions and separations of a portion of the fibres of those heads of origin. 
Mr. Macalister mentions that in a male subject he found in both legs a 
continuation of the tendinous ischial origins of this muscle over the 
surface of the great sacro-sciatic ligament to the side of the sacrum, but it 
does not appear that this constituted any approach to a distinct head. 
But in the specimen under consideration, the abnormality is constituted 
by a distinct muscular bundle, with an upper and a lower tendon, the 
fibres of the former capable of being traced in those of the deep gluteal 
fascia for a considerable distance. In the Dog the author has found the 
almost exact counterpart of this third head of the beceps flexor cruris. 
It is a deeply placed slender band of muscular fibres, arising from the 
surface of the great sacro-sciatic ligament. It hes under the ischial 
origin, and becomes inserted into the fascia on the outside of the leg 
below the main bulk of the widely-spread biceps proper. It is there con- 
nected also with a fibrous sheath which invests the tendon of the plan- 
taris. In this animal this musclar slip seems to represent the caudal 
and sacral origin of the biceps in the Rodents, and other Mammalia. 
The homology between the abnormal third heads in the human subject 
and the caudal origin in animals was pointed out by Theile. 

In a muscular male subject was found an abnormality, in many 
points resembling that described by Gantzer as the “ Accessorius ad 
calcaneum.” It was, however, very different in its origin to those 
described by that author, although identical in its form and insertion 
(fig. 7, a). A long slender tendon, very much resembling that of the 
plantaris in its texture and appearance, was placed along the inner side 
of it, so as to present the appearance of a double plantaris. This ten- 
don was attached above to the upper third of the hinder surface of the 
fibula, below the origin of the soleus (6), and crossed obliquely the pos- 
terior tibial vessels, muscles, and aponeurosis, towards the inner mal- 
leolus. At the lower third of the leg, a flat, ovoid, tapering, muscular 
belly, 3 inches long and 1 inch wide, was developed upon it, and 
became implanted by a short-spreading tendon upon the calcaneum, in 
front and to the inner side of the tendo-achillis, about three-quarters 
of an inch distant from it. Irom the lower part of its outer border the 
muscle sent off a tendinous slip, which joined the plantaris tendon in 
amass of fibro-fatty tissue placed above the bursa of the tendo-achillis. 
Hyrtl has mentioned the occasional occurrence of a muscle some- 
what resembling this, as arising from the popliteal (?) fascia, or lower 
part of the fibula, and inserted into the calcis. This Henle seems to 
consider as an abnormal plantaris. In the case just described, however, 
the size, shape, and position of the muscular. belly, and the insertion of 
the lower tendon so much resemble the muscle described by Gantzer, 
and also that figured by the author in his paper of 1864, that he has no 


542 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. \[May 23, 


hesitation in referring it to the same class, with a somewhat higher 
origin, obtained by differentiation of the more vertical fibres of the 
posterior tibial aponeurosis. It constitutes probably, however, a link 
with the plantaris, similar to that which the muscle of the arm, which 
he has called the flexor carpi radialis brevis, in some specimens forms 
with the palmaris longus. From this point of view, this abnormal 
muscle in the leg has a similar relation to the tibialis posticus that 
the incomplete muscle in the arm has to a complete flexor of the middle 
metacarpal bone, its homologue; and it occupies a like intermediate 
relation to the soleus as the one in the arm does to the flewor subliumis. 
We shall find herein the most probable solution of some of the dif_i- 
culties of the homologies of these post-tibial muscles. 

In addition to the foregoing subjects, the author has had the advan- 
tage of descriptions and sketches of muscular abnormalities affecting 
three subjects out of eight, from his friend and former assistant Mr. 
Bellamy, demonstrator im anatomy at Charing Cross Hospital. In 
one muscular male were found four abnormalities, viz. mn the right 
arm, a double palmaris longus. The irregular one was placed internal 
to the other, with its muscular fibres commencing just above the mid- 
dle of the arm, and continued down to the annular ligament, into which 
and the palmar fascia it was inserted. In the same arm was found a 
well-developed extensor carpi radialis intermedius, arising distinctly 
between the longior and brevior by a fusiform belly, and inserted by a 
long tendon into the posterior annular ligament, close to the sheath for 
the outer extensors of the thumb. This the author looks upon as a 
formation intermediate to complete development of an extensor carpi 
radialis accessorius. A little further extension forwards and outwards 
would have brought the insertion of this muscle into relation with the 
origin of the abductor pollicis brevis and the base of the first meta- 
carpal. 

On the left arm of the same subject was a development in the same 
direction in the lower part of the arm. A separate muscle was formed 
of those upper fibres of the ewtensor ossis metacarpi pollicis, which so 
frequently give off a slip of tendon to the origin of the abductor 
pollicis. The muscle arose from the radius and interosseous ligament, 
quite distinctly from the extensor ossis metacarpi, and was provided with a 
separate tendon, which, passing in the same sheath with that of the latter, 
subdivided into two tendons, one to be inserted into the base of the 
first metacarpal, and the other to join the outer fibres of origin of the 
abductor pollicis brevis. 

If both the tendencies evinced in this interesting concurrence had 
been combined in the same arm, the result might have been the pro- 
duction of an entire extensor carpi radialis accessorius, like that described 
by the author in former papers. In the left leg of the same subject 
was found a large and well-marked specimen of the accessorius ad cal- 


1867.] Mr. J. Wood on Variations in aan Myology. 543 


caneum of Gantzer, arising by a flat, bipenniform, muscular belly from 
the posterior tibial fascia below the tibial origin of the soleus, and 
inserted by a flat spreading tendon, which crossed obliquely the post- 
malleolar tendons into the os calcis in front of the tendo-achillis. From 
its outer border was given off a spreading aponeurosis, which was 
attached to the hinder border of the outer malleolus, almost hke that 
seen in figure 7. In the left leg of a female subject was found the 
perforatus tendon of the little toe, arising from a separate triangular- 
shaped muscle, which was attached to both the tubercles of the cal- 
caneum between the superficial muscles and the accessorius, like that 
described in the author’s former papers. 

In the left arm of another muscular male subject two abnormalities 
were found, viz. a third head of the pronator radi teres, arising with 
the fibres of the brachialis anticus at the junction of the middle and 
lower thirds of the humerus. The median nerve and ulnar vessels 
passed between the abnormal and condyloid heads, and the radial 
artery came off high in the upper arm. No supra-condyloid process 
was found on the bone (as described by Gruber in such a case), although 
earefully looked for. The other abnormality was a high muscular 
origin of the abductor minimi digiti, arising from the fascia covering the 
inner flexor muscles of the fore arm by a single penniform head, and 
joining partly with the normal abductor, and partly inserted by a sepa- 
rate tendon into the base of the first phalanx of the little finger. 

The author is indebted also to Mr. J. Galton, of the Dreadnought 
Hospital, for some clever sketches of three abnormalities, one of a detached 
slip of the pectoralis major, arising from the anterior end of the fifth rib, 
and inserted -behind the sternal fibres into the fascia covering the coraco- 
brachialis, an inch or so below the coracoid process; another, of an 
“accessorius ad flexorem pollicis longum’ of Gantzer, the tendon of , 
which, after being first connected by a broad aponeurosis with the 
muscular belly of the flexor longus pollicis, was then divided into two 
slips, one of which joined the tendon of the last-named muscle, and the 
other the indicial tendon of the flexor profundus digitorum (as in sub- 
ject 9 previously described). The third was a small fusiform muscular 
slip, found on the deep surface of the flewor brevis hallucis, arising by a 
pointed tendon from internal cuneiform bone, and inserted by another 
round tendon into the abductor and inner head of the flexor brevis 
hallucis, close to the sesamoid bone. It seems to represent the “znter- 
osseus hee volaris”’ of the hand. 

Out of 36 subjects dissected at King’s College during the Session, 34 
have been found to present muscular abnormalities worthy of note. 
Four of these had also noteworthy abnormalities of some of the arteries ; 
viz. No. 3, having 10 muscular varieties in the head and arm, had also 
an irregularity of the third part of the subclavian, whence a common 
trunk was given off for the posterior and suprascapular arteries. The 


VOL. XV. Y 


544, Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. [May 23, 


internal mammary also gave off an accessory inferior thyroid. No. 7, 
having 10 muscular abnormalities, of which 7 were in the head and 
arm, presented that remarkable irregularity—the right subclavian given 
off from the descending aorta below the left—while the two earotids 
came off from a common trunk*. No. 20, having 16 muscular abnor- 
malities, 12 being found in the arm, had also a high origin of the radial 
artery. No. 27, having 12 muscular abnormalities, of which 9 were in 
the arm, presented the left vertebral arising from the aortic arch, and 
the posterior- and supra-scapular coming by a common trunk from the 
second part of the subclavian. 

From the 34 cases contained in the adjoined Table, wie were all 
examined and noted with the utmost care and accuracy, a fair approxi- 
mative idea may be deduced of the relative frequency of certain special 
instances in the two sexes; on both sides of the body, or on one side 
only. 

The total number of muscular abnormalities noted in 36 subjects is 
295 (reckoning both sides as one), of which 221, or about two-thirds, 
were found on both sides, and 74, or about one-third, on one side only ; 
the proportion on the right side only being 39, and those on the left 
side only 35, or nearly equal on either side. 

The individual abnormalities which exceed the above proportion on both 
sides are—the cleido-occipital; those of the pectoralis minor, coraco- 
brachialis, brachialis anticus, extensor carpi ulnaris, and the interossei ; 
and the extensor medii digiti in the upper extremity; and the extensor 
longus primi internodii hallucis, and those of the extensor breyis digi- 
torum pedis in the lower limb, all of which were found represented on 
both sides; while the proportion of the abnormalities of the latissimus 
dorsi, the peroneus quinti, and the abductor ossis metatarsi quinti found 
on both sides was also greater than that above given. 

Those instances of which the proportion on one side only was greater 
than the average, were found in the flexor sublimis and profundus 
digitorum and lumbricales, and the more rare abnormality, the flexor 
carpi radialis brevis vel profundus, a/Z of which last were found in the 
right arm. Of the biceps flexor cubiti and the flexor longus accessorius 
digitorum pedis nearly as many were found on one side only as on both. 

The total number of abnormalities found in the 24 males was 215, and 
in the 12 females 81, showing a greater proportionate frequency in the 
male sex of almost as many more. Of this number, 15 are confined to 
the head, neck, and thorax; 4 of which are in females, or rather less 
than the foregoing average. 

No less than 174 are connected with, and acting chiefly upon, the bones 
of the upper limb, 130 of which are in males, and 44 in females. This 
also is proportionately less in the female than the general average. 


* For an account of the formation of this abnormality, see a paper by the author in 
the Transactions of the Pathological Society of London, vol. x. p. 119. 


1867.] Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 545 


Of the remaining 106 found in the lower limb 74 were in male, and 32 
in female subjects, proportionately a considerably greater average on 
the side of the female. So far as these go, abnormalities of muscles 
appear to preponderate in the male, in the head, neck, thorax, and arm, 
and, in the female, in the leg. 

In a much greater proportion than this on the male side were the 
special abnormalities of the cleido-occipital, pectoralis major, biceps, 
coraco-brachialis, brachialis anticus, flexor longus pollicis, lumbricales 
and interossei mantis, flexor carpi radialis profundus, palmaris longus, 
supinator longus, extensor communis and brevis digitorum mants, and 
extensor carpi ulnaris in the upper limb; and the peroneus quinti, ex- 
tensor longus and brevis digitorum, and lumbricales pedis in the lower. 
On the female side the most tangible preponderance is found in the 
frequency of absence of the peroneus tertius, and of the presence of the 
abductor ossis metatarsi quinti, the extensor carpi radialis HUTTE ES, 
and of the extensor longus primi internodii hallucis. 

The Table shows as decidedly as that of last year, the general absence 
of correspondence in combination of the muscular abnormalities. 

Of the 14 subjects in which there are more than 10 variations, three 
only are females. One subject has 17 muscular abnormalities, of which 
15 are connected with the arms, and 2 only with the legs. Two have 
16 abnormalities; in one of them 11 are connected with the arms 
Gneluding the cleido-occipital and the occipito-scapular given in fig. 1), 
1 with the head, and 4 with the legs; the other has 5 in the legs and 1 
in the head and neck. Two males have each 13 abnormalities ; in one 
10 are connected with the arms, and 3 with the legs; and in the other, 
1 is found on the ribs, and 4 in the legs. Three subjects (one of them 
a female) have 12 abnormalities, of which 7 belong to the arms. One 
male has 11, of which 8 belong to the arms. ‘Two females have each 11, 
of which 6 in one, and 5 in the other, belong to the arms ; and 4 in one, 
and 5 in the other, to the legs. Three subjects have 10 abnormalities, 
of which 4, 6, and 7 respectively are found in the arms; one of these, a 
male, and another a female, have each 5 belonging to the ie In 18 sub- 
jects no abnormalities are found in the head and neck. In7 more, those 
which were found there acted equally on the bones of the upper limb. 
This leaves 14 in which the muscles of the head, neck, and thorax only 
were concerned. In 1 subject only, a female, were no abnormalities 
found in the arms, the only abnormal muscle discovered being the ab- 
ductor ossis metatarsi quinti. In a male (No. 4) 2 only were found in 
the arms, and 4 in the legs. In 5 subjects one variation only is found 
in the legs, the others being found chiefly in the arms. 

No levator clavicule, extensor carpi radialis accessorius, or sternalis 
muscles have this year been found. With the exception of these and 
five others, ail that were recorded last year have been found also this 
year, with the addition of abnormalities in 10 other muscles. 


546 Mr. J. Wood on Variations in Human Myology. 


In the Table the figures which are placed at the end of the lines 
record the number of variations in each subject. Those at the bottom 
of each column express the number of variations in each muscle or 
muscles, the names of which are found at the head of the columns. 


The ordinary Meetings of the Society were adjourned over Ascension 
Day and the Whitsuntide recess to Thursday, June 20. 


32. 
Flexor 
Fiongus digit.. Lumbr. Flexor | 
Bd ao cess: pedis. brevis digit. 


ee es cc 


ee ie Ce Ce Cr ee ee a ir ard 


B. 4th perfo- 
ratus. 

B. 4th perfo- 
ratus. 

B. 4th tend. 

absent. . 


Ce er 
Cs 


B. 1st tend. 
absent. etal teat claticielaicileisini nis allaivitcelele 


R. 4th 
absent. 


Pinielatelsielaeejemnti@ le iw or 7 | ka w.6 0 \wele..< e.eieis 


Cs ce Ce Cr i rary 


i ee Cs ce i a ey 
ee ee ie Ce i ar a | 


sO ec cy 


B. 4th tend. 
absent. 


ee  e ? 


B. ith tend. 
absent. 


L. tend. ir. 
os calcis. 


i de cy 
es ee Ce a | 
Ce a) 
es se ee 


L. 4th absent 


wee eee ee ee wee fais SUT ADSCHIL). cee ee ee ee ae 


es Cs ee 


Ce ee tC cy 


en 


R. access. to 
soph due dpe ee Seek ben) oecemh eacac: 


ee 


Cs ec 


Ce ee Ce ce ec 


B. 4th tend. 
absent. 
L. 4th tend. 

absent. 


cs ee | 
i ee ee ee 
ee sO i ee a | 
es es ee 


33. 


Abduct. ossis 
metatarsi 
quinti. 


[Lo face p. 546. | 


Sundry 
specimens. 


ee eee ee 


ete eee ee 


see etter 


a 


Se 


ee a) 


eaeeteee 


sere tees 


oe ee 


see ewe ee eene 


seme we ewww ne 


ee 


eer e reece eece 


a ees 


ee ry 


a rary 


B. flex. long. 
hallucis. 


B. plantaris 
absent. 

B. flex. long. 
hallucis. 


ay 


ad. hall. 


4tus. 


L. add. hall. 

to 2nd toe. 
‘R. per. long. 
2 tendons. 


. |R. per. long. 


B. per. brev. 
2 tendons. 


Se cry 


L. tib. ant. 


|L. plantaris 
| absent. 


seer ee ere tees 
i ee 


re 


B. tib.-fase. 


B. sup. gem. 


absent. 


eC ee 


ad. cale. 
B. pect. to 


18 


SS 


TABLE OF VARIETIES IN HUMAN MYOLOGY. 


[Lo face p. 546.] 


L 2, 3. 4. 5. 6. 7 8. 9. 10. le 12. 13. 14 155 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21, 29, 23, 4. Qs. a 


Extens. 
comm. and 
brevis digit. 


Extens._|Extens ossis 
indicis and | metacarpi |  1nter- Sundry | Peron, Peron, 
medii digit! pollicis osseus. | specimens. tert, quints 


Bxtens 
Tongua 
pr inter, 
hallucis, 


S i F api | Palmnris | Ext.radial.| §; Supi 
i Omo- Sundr Pect, Rect. Latiss, q Coraco- Brach. Flex. Flex. | Flex. long. | Lumbr. | Flex. capi radi sxtens. upin, 
besa hyoitl spectaiens. |) cmagjors |) oainor dorsi Biceps. brach. antic. sublim. | profund. pollic. mands. | rad. brevis. | longi. | and interm, | carpi ulnar.| longus. 


Flexor 
Yongus digit Dumbr | Blexor  {Abduct oxsin 


‘and access | Peis, | brevis digit marae 


Tail Hlvececeterees <o 20SEC Hore ERCRe PE PG RCO RCE KCREEROR IA OT Oe et eee eee tee ulteees: fee ere 
B. coronoid 
ale |eveesee b aa E cécspsbare] bertece Beene pce eaeeeeeo eneceesaes Syeainteanl | eet | {Sia 
B. splenius B. radial Rathtoring-| |. col! , |B, double Bvaxetaal sense wet | oesectesedee ee 
A hescesebcce aaa | (ps f [ b 


| 2 atl heeccseesor | Puc cCo =| collie Bapeenenonca Bepnenionioseal senior 


finger. 


Seeeeefeveecseeseee] Ge nollicls, B. to sth too |B... |e 


B. yolaris, 
recfeeseeeceeeesl Regie foseens 


o B. flex. long, 
Be seeseeee! attucig 2} 2 
B, ith porfo-! B. 


Allie, ero poms ste B. trapezius |..... trans teen al Peace Seer hea llae 


|B. absent 


B. to supin. 


Rath toring- 


< zi K Tats, 
5.|M.| .-.-.-. |B. digastric. |B. to corac..|..... PERSIE) Bacc USOC longus. EE oe ceeeeleeceeececn ee finger rales fr. flex rad, yr en ns ene ios anergy cae be canes a eects freoccane Hesscc waysaltenes een | MA cae ales B 
. fr. 0 L. tendon to Bl Beexsinters | ode |. united to ‘abaont.. [Br vseeeeae 
6.|F. J Pacaiers bosbi@aaracs B, to corac.. sublim. eet 5 S55 | Mexia int: [esses as |e sereafissesssssesabiscensceesae[Be fs ox pr [Pe ty, TE at some : 
L, coronoid |R, to flexor |B. ex. inter, |B» to little B. to head 5 absent. aufeusasccanesefeasavanernen 
7.| a. nee WBeaheads..|.2....-.-+--|eee- peepee hence Fs |louaiat Sait + |" finger. trcteeescses esersetecece lee eseseceee peesereessafeecereeeecce [ML Volttie cee fiscereee eee Pee Tt cca cerenens reer a ai Rseth 
R, to P. mi ‘ B, to supin. |R. sep. B. to flexor Re cretial B. double |B. ext. com. |B. double |B. ext. indie |B. double 5 abagnt, fst etseeesfescee secre 

8, | M. »)|B: toyhumer: tir reo narnia 104 longus. to sth dig. profunds |poonsnscc <2] Rea maemo tool” Gnsert. doub. tend.| tendon. doub.tend.| tendon, —|:-"** R. to Sth toe |, Ke bel keee’ POPS (scree NG Aca bey 2. & 

woe i [cote pron |Lcoronoid&|E-coronoid | | Tole 229] | ecpecoReee| OER EDR ORE ae ee Fee zl eee eee B. distinet |R. to ox. pr. {B. to 2nd ani Srovonc De ssesensee] ace lsala ( 

PA tel enceten Rea foasod Tide ae eseennces lioeen seuss iitolelnvicw |-seeeseveveale rad. teres. ora origin. B. double Mertens : is sels ssaxtovnad] Annes 3] hnetteet Be LCA CATO ica tts eee | ee } peroneus | 9 

LSociecsacnnn bose ecocnon Br ,to humer,|svcsessesyeeliamy...-n+=-|-»+ ih ees boactensce Leccoccoctee| besedeoonacd| fponecoascod| boso4 be inter. brcoene coor Rees ahs hive ceneeees teers |Raobaenbizwossccqcnnaes| (acess neead tenenane Ra lencee 
10. |B evcseeesereafeereres see lumb. : seesfireeseee A evecrenteuleessaeesenee B 5 
R, to ann. B. 3rd inser, B. double B. 4 tendons, Baexts pre ne A, ti 

u B. platysma |...2.-..00.2 [oes Tooedv | ete eeremeny Ca heads]. =». tees sansa EPG csonccctre Ube eo a Ree va ol voto] Praaren) € 8th oe} o.oo, Ax pr pent TA re ae tas SllGparere 16 
ey 2 \aepecnceond| hescceas B8eu|boantonococd Locococe-c-.. |< RRBBBED| HOBBBeseece| HBoececesIaco Loonsdes0905 ea fp9| hesecseBdocs| hacbeaseosee| poodded 62°F CESATET lh socaqccngs| hoccnabonded| pacrunnisnioa) booceccoecc Trae oseg fabephign: = [*oxssoteenees| ieeemtesleted [cecuacesse as less eit cretet [tees eeeetees | eae eee eee 5 Joviheaoca eR cca ee 
13 L. trapezius |.....,.....- |B. to humers|isseeesesees | ey puree focceeeeseree|tccesecsctae|ea ces rete originyy | forte st oe  oeae secre sealeoees Goeenen BOOS S0ors booones FAGs| bRRIOGS: More] Pacer dg neonalhewtcrs oneal | Cece ea cee ae] CONE ws cl Nee ee A wed | scan Weanvae|rowseceverse|ishaceenecs | Grneetae wace[tven eevee jxoul B, ath tend. ns eee 1D, add, halle o 

beepend 2-c! T.doub. tend: > BM nase absent. absent, to dnd toe! 
iy AT CHT Oda bhonpasdencd| Pnqnasnap sacl hsouceassndd| broacacooece| baacconsote) seaeeneeeees doub.long,|t1s1sereees [sree eeees 585) Foudboucabedl hoseessonstice inaereemeees tabi assesses Himecatia soeseaaesys tarysnnacees|Bufeexenn RaEetncce | te teed nerrAliiacccc llth Heels a 
lan i 'B. doubt - i, ¥ ™ “a He 
| A le ara Hic abe = ll oe Baexeatiterss eects | eyieer sated leader ed neciee [pheweenes on eeeaenenenas | intieneton. a eeterecoee) Weanree es .{B. fr. ex. pr a Tetons tn | JB atetends |p eerie ; 
}15.| FB. |eeeeeecns sea jreeere B. double ‘ E oscaloia, Peel absent Ie esenvess Ee ni sae 
Renee s 1 Shih, |[pooacadeeoas bene a rGodrel basessscoeel bobSS sab awal cette cate CREE « eel [ 8 a |B. . to motat. |... Peericis: ec iee . por. brev. 

16.) Bj eveeee Bac peso | sae osoose0 ponccetaeafaSSSa022%° one, ben i csovcurena|iectonns on leaeetecseced emt 4 
| Br clavic, |. mylo- Batonecty : BNexanter: senses Beau el ee ere paeatt Pecrneesceti| Msseereeei (poate tel eeyestey ee 
[27 en | hier origin, glossus, fo Noes Ca insertion, spinatus. THUACIO. ‘ hexcnarstave|svasegsuacns|tayavesvuvenliscsseauacad (nel tine Cons [ie 
\i8.|F. AGRCACG seeleecreneetere|peseeecensen testes seeweeleeeecerereee eres CHIE] | SOC CSOOST MK |Proreorses9|poupacounand oO sseeenceelienecesseees[ieveneserest[tereceseteesleeseennen Pert eeeE rire ec eOReN| ener acct IN pocccc ced toncreces ofhatewr reseed. cr r 
R. to stern, |R. stylo- 


‘1B. to ath and} 


ORIN. .c= eB etoublokee|svatsrenee Sescceeectea|\ pence Laaed Retecrack st] vaesey cates eeteenecoe ee cbc tiv asing open ereeeetiecees coos [Bete ex, pre Reretote L. 
19, | BM |.-- 0 so)" hyoid. pharyng. [so eal IL. coronoid |L. cor. ori R. to annul ; R. doubl i pe eA || emake : if 
ryn : , cor. orig. . to annul. . double R.Ginsert. |B, double 
Nealhere on Bsdodble ss | Bacceniteg Baseparats B, to triceps.|...2.....-+ origin, | toflex. profij'**77"-+7"** ligam. ieee: ae ak eae cea | tendon, pr=2= "1 Ttombspolh| Ystdor, [iss oses sees Dy ft OX. Ph Jos ccieeerraterenres L, ath absent fo L, tib, ant. | 16 
Fecal bea ies serene ant. belly, | scapular. | slip. Bxeoronsid’ |e es le ee |e Weal pWectinter: L. double |L. ext. brevis)B. double 1B. doubstend| ‘B.ex. pr.poll. Senter tart 
Jor. | af. | B.double..|..-- ese -eee]-+ = seeeteeee|enereee vase po [esas sss origin ee Siok [fees Gesces insert. to drddig.| tendon. jrs-st0*7"** Ato mbypolli|:***<+++ +++ | with osmet|'**** seveceee [By fits Ox. pr ercecrerierelirrreneees Pre ere cevvne es [2s plantaria | yg 
21.| M.| B.double..|.- Fi Be acubls ‘absent. 
| Ls aonoaevdseal hSacedaboocs |B. ex. inter. |.... Ksoseaaaneed TART Ree poaccctored Fexcch BREE Pnceinogreai:|| eacca coach conetrcncon th ate Bi oxtiecs rented celtic B. poets to | 9 
O2.| My |..ccceceeeee|errr rece 4 B. ext. brevis) B.doub,tend, B. a tendons |i}. 9 tondo add, tong. 
re | PRR Ksonbonaecon| Bolscnecceaso) Sebseaeaekion Hperondsosss baceceosed eesertasctieesececneees|ewesesnewes| “togrd&dth[ ot ttt |eeeesseeseesl) eoabpollif = t on 1B, fe. tid. ANE) eo Sth too. TO Mn toh|iveesseesevelorseeveenvslienesacasensansenenrwanfen 6 
jas. | ot. Lecoronoid L. double L, double TL, tranav. © ]T nocens. to: 
(eal WG heads --|\-0222 a eendan ee ils Aue fesseeseveeefBs fee oxo pe ivscesecssesferersareeg TUMOR LOT Na ssasesarseffle vusssers 1a 
zeal 'B. coronoid |B. coronoid B. double B, triple | 
ese ie 6co|Koo - ore t origin. _ yee. tendon. — frreeresessseficessseccnen lens cet eeee seo fB, fi ex. ph fee ee vatines evneesesaeut linvecasdacadliasoosaxsiay (Lun thvusveh th 
B. brachio- . radial R. coronoit ul - double B.ext.preand B, to oxtons |B. 2 tendo ‘> 
FEF NGl aoscooncasa|} coo mevbees Bisco ene eat peveeneeesee (Le @heads..[seee--++ eee. fascialis. |-°77°777777* origin. origin: | ex. inter. [-*7"7°7* op oa puckenipccce) baunae Gees tendon, fse-=ere steeeeee Aeesclls 1B, absont «|B, to motat. |...........] 4h RO MDUcton | Caves ssn |i Oia eer ekexguscsvan Cees Penessae OTS 
26,| M.|..-eeecreeee : medius. ae hadosnidtl | realtone Ream | oe ee! | ORE _...._/Bs ext: indie jE, double B.tondon |, Bik 
a B B. triple ant). scalenus 5 ie eeeeeess+-|Bi 3 heads. . |B, double .. : origin. rp. rad. reas ; ssss**) doub. tend.) tendon. double, eee ee ee LB, fit, OX: Pl |rcee ne ee sees ne eeateastesliensseenaves svaverenavesfeeeseeeveeee! 1D 
27.| M.| B. ...+- +o! Helly. anticus. a R. sep. slip. |B. coronoid L. doulile. a B.triple |B. ext. com. Eye 
B, atlo- Weeterea copes veces BACOIEMOEDE} gatos xs B, double .-|.-+-+-+-+2++|eceeeenee =! ‘to syn, 5 origin. ete ees sfreseseerere IR absent, [iocecrte ts |pesteetees “+! insert. doub. tend,|)**** "= treralicesereneeenlrnenen J ADNONE os [ees ee nese es B. fr. ox. pry jyeo-oee peered | Batt 
LA ELC 2b aiscana93) hoon omerto | rhomb. 1B. coronoid B. double B. ext. com. |B. tendon to L. double DB, ath tend, 
ere oe ll eee Betssc storie pesseeseceee|ieeeceeeeees|ecseeeceeree| Vee inter, [poestststestssreseeeo"-! tendjoined.| ring-fing. [tttc**"*| inmert. fasecssecscs|eececeeeenns (Ie tO Sthitoo|D, ves “ petsveeraves War tirnt te 1D, tib.fase, | 10 
eh B, Coronoid Bla otts wt |eeeeatenece | pecouules Ds. ati tons T, sup, gem, 
| pedals ae: Fete f origin feceessteseefeeeeeeeees Fopooay rol) fetheree | cencaracans| Hadras At Rae boot st hci one Defra Pi |snseaa eset ral daar ral{earke rasan (gabyet toe late ‘bapa a 
30. B. to fasc. &|B. separate |B. coronoid |B. coronoid B.brev.to | * ce veceee ese. {2+ double DB. dixtinot 
1. | 8. eeoansned alhesaoqns0e albpaneciénoas. | sasequs9003) b>: -SSEREREO Bee ease00503 sup. long.| muscles. | origin: origins) | : 2nd met. tendon. ‘ =i imayelee hesesvenseenlersrers hesersveceeshversenavess| 9) 
31,2. ED R. Srddouble/R. to annul. restinterals A B. double B, to ath and} Df 1, much 
a B supra R. to condyle)... 2s-s0ecefeeeeoere ete tteeeeceleeee esses Bool bopeceosecse! pacocedGrood sees set |eeer eee eees insertion. | ligame frificearad, tendonee |v wsenseeas pereeeeeeeoel ‘Sth metate (Be ceeeeeee (Bs fre ox pre yividod, frrcttrseetes[ecreseeeeerlicessrreecesfeeecseeseesfessrrreeseseltrrsecereses| 19 
$2.) BM, | Be. sesece}ereesee se") costal. eet B. slip. to lst}B. to flexor |L.srd&ath | 2. ele - Peeps on 8) Bl. aoe B. to 4th and 1B. fr. Gb. ane) Bs miteh ny 1k, neconsor, 
B, rect. cap.|B, joined to | |. sssseeeeeefeeeesettrees|eeeeeeeeeeee ties eeteacce bseseaaoce anaes Drofunde | doubsinwer[sscscs+eeesfeeersserees reaceMpal Bececob peceereceeeel th metatsfoeeese eet nil en pet ividede [streets iiesssseseslteecssscvsefeersececses|De csreesss| ade gator, | 10 
EER 10 Podoisseer 40) posiosnontose post. maj. |/ deltoid: R. radial B, 3rd double! R. double B.double | _, |B. tendon to B. 2 tendons, B.ext. pr.and B, pects to 
ae Oe hocllleaae oe eee mS ies Pe Pe erp sti t mobugsodd Nogebesesss:|boncadoccap origins [o- onniooes SRD |permpacodene tend fa tS Fingefing, to0ctsos7* Htoubspolll|'=s-s2*2+++{ geo, polls, fectterscess [teers sreres|seessesscetienrane peneeseeeveeliovrccnecverltesusnenersalbestneeeseaalrnesess envi 
| = = ee ee ee 
—|— ‘ 3 4 5 1 
sa A 14 5 5 IL 5 7 5 4 8 | 13 16 6 2 7 7 i 4 3 17 4 8 14 rp) 


INDEX to VOL. XV. 


TALBERT A.) researches on gun-cotton :— 
Memoir I. Manufacture and composi- 
tion of gun-cotton, 102, 277; Memoir 
IT. On the stability of gun-cotton, 417. 

Acids of the lactic series, researches on 
(Niow1.),,25. 

Actinometer, description of a new, 328. 

Actinometrical observations among the 
Alps, 321. 

Airy (G. B.), computation of the lengths 
of the waves of light corresponding to 
the lines in the dispersion-spectrum 
measured by Kirchhoff, 405. 

Amyl-compounds derived from _petro- 
leum, 131. 

Analysis, a tabular form of, to aid in 
tracing the possible influence of past 
and present upon future states of 
weather, 470. 

Analysis of animal and vegetable colour- 
ing-matters by means of the spectrum- 
microscope, 433. 

Anniversary Meeting, November 30, 1866, 
268. 

Annual Meeting for election of Fellows, 
June 7, 1866, 188. 

Appendicular skeleton of the primates, 
320 


Appold (J. G.), obituary notice of, i. 

"3 apparatus for regulating tem- 
perature and moisture, 144. 

Asterosmilia, on the species of, 460. 

Atmospheric humidity, on the relation of 
insolation to, 356. 

Auditors, election of, 256. 

Axis of the earth’s crust, on a possible 
geological cause of changes in the posi- 
tion of, 46. 


Bakerian lecture, February 8, 1866, on 
the viscosity or internal friction of air 
and other gases, 14. 

—, April 4, 1867, researches on gun- 
cotton: Second Memoir. On the sta- 
bility of gun-cotton, 417. 

Barographs at Oxford and Kew, com- 
parison between some of the simul- 
taneous records of, 413. 

Battersbyia, on the genera of, 460. 

Baxendell (J.) and Roscoe (H. E.), note 
on the relative chemical intensities of 


VOL. XV. 


direct sunlight and diffuse daylight at 
different altitudes of the sun, 20. 

Bench marks, from the Mediterranean to 
the Dead Sea, 129. 

Benzyldiphenyldiamine, 61. 

Bigsby (J. J.), a brief account of the ‘ The- 
saurus Siluricus,’ with a few facts and 
inferences, 372. 

Binocular vision,a new fact relating to,424. 

Birds, on the bones of, at different periods 
of their growth, 299. 

Bladder and prostate, on the muscular 
arrangements of the, 244. 

Blood, circulation of, influence of move- 
ments of respiration on, 391. 

Bombay magnetic observatory, 275. 

Bones of birds at different periods of their 
growth, 299. 

Boole (G.), obituary notice of, vi. 

Boron, graphitoidal, on the forms of, 12. 


Bovill (Sir W.) elected, 463; admitted, 
- 482. 


Brain, on the intimate structure of, second 
series, 509. 

Bristol, tide observations at, 289. 

Brodie (Sir B. C., Bart.), the calculus of 
chemical operations, being a method for 
the investigation, by means of symbols, 
of the laws of the distribution of weight 
in chemical change: Part I. On the 
construction of chemical symbols, 136. 

Brooke (C.), remarks on the nature of 
electric energy, and on the means by 
which it is transmitted, 408. 

Bucknill (Dr. J. C.) admitted, 256. 

Bunt (T. G.), discussion of tide-observa- 
tions at Bristol, 289. 

Burlington House, notice of change in the 
occupation of, 270. 

Bursa Fabricii, on the, 94; conjectures on 
the uses of, 101. 

Board of Trade, reorganization of the me- 
teorological department of, 271. 


Calculus of chemical operations, &e., 136. 
Canada, heat and vapour in, 358. 
Candidates for election, list of, March 1, 
1866, 25. 

, March 7, 1867, 390. 
— selected, list of, May 3, 1866, 128. 
——, -——, May 2, 1867, 455. 

22 


SS, 


548 


Caro (H.) and Wanklyn (J. A.), rosani- 
line, on the relation of, to rosolic acid, 
210. 

Carpenter (W. B.), further observations 
on the structure and affinities of Kozoon 
Canadense, in a letter to the President, 
505. : 


Caustics, a supplementary memoir on, 
268. 


Cayley (A.), a supplementary memoir on 
caustics, 268. 
, an eighth memoir on quantics, 


——-, on the curves which satisfy given 
conditions, 462. 

, second memoir on the curves which 
satisfy given conditions; the principle 
of correspondence, 463. 

Cells, on the formation of, in animal 
bodies, 314. 

Chambers (C.), on the Bombay magnetic 
observations, 111. 

Chapman (E. T.), ethylamine, on the pre- 
paration of, 218. 

Chemical change, investigation of laws of, 

_ by means of symbols, 136. 

, on the laws of connexion between 
the conditions of, and its amount 
(No. II.), 262. 

poner symbols, on the construction of, 
36. 

Christie (S. H.), obituary notice of, xi. 

Clarke (Capt. A. R.), abstract of the re- 
sults of the comparisons of standards of 
length of England, France, Belgium, 
Prussia, Russia, India, Australia, made 
at the Ordnance Survey Office, South- 
ampton, SLI. 

Clarke (J. L.), on the structure of the 
optic lobes of the cuttle-fish, 260. 

, on the intimate structure of the 
brain ; second series, 509. 

Claudet (A.), a new fact relating to bino- 
cular vision, 424. 

——-, optics of photography.—On a self- 
acting focus-equalizer, or the means of 
producing the differential movement of 
the two lenses of a photographic optical 
combination, which is capable, during 
the exposure, of bringing consecutively 
all the planes of a solid figure into 
focus, without altering the size of the 
various images superposed, 456. 

Coal-tar, on a new series of hydrocarbons 
derived from, 1382. 

Coimbra, monthly magnetic determina- 
tions made at, 474. 

Colloid septa, on the absorption and dia- 
lytic separation of gases by, 223. 

Comet 1, 1866, on the spectrum of, 5. 

Compasses, on the action of the, in iron 
ships, 38. 

Congelation of animals, on, 250, 256. 


INDEX. 


Copley medal awarded to Prof. J. Plucker, 
278. ; 

Corona Borealis, spectrum of a new star 
in, 146 

Correspondence on meteorological obser- 
vations, 29. 

Correspondence, the principle of, 463. 


Council, list of, 262. 


Croonian Lecture.—On the influence ex- 
erted by the movements of respiration 
on the circulation of the blood, 391. 

Currents, tidal, of the west coast of Scot- 
land, 48. 

Curves, on a property of, 468. 

Curves which satisfy given conditions, on 
the, 462, 463. f 

Cuttle-fish, on the structure of the optie 
lobes of the, 260. 


Davy (J.) on the Bursa Fabricii, 94. 
on the congelation of animals,250,256. 
on the bones of birds at different 
periods of their growth, 299. 

Dawkins (W. Boyd) on the dentition of 
Rhinoceros leptorhinus (Owen), 106. 

Ovibos moschatus (Blainville), 516. 

Daylight, note on the relative chemical 
intensity of, at different altitudes of the 
sun, 20. 

Dead Sea, level of, 128. 

De Souza (J. A.), monthly magnetic deter- 
minations, from June to November 
1866 inclusive, made at the observatory 
at Coimbra, 474. 

Determinants, on the condensation of, 
150. 

Dhurmsalla meteoric stone, on the compo- 
sition of, 214. 

Diet, non-nitrogenous, effects of, 345. 

Disk, on the heating of a, by rapid rota- 
tion iz vacuo, 290. 

Dispersion-spectrum, measured by Kirch- 
hoff, computation of the lengths of the 
waves of light corresponding to the 
lines in, 405. 

Dodgson (Rev. C. L.), condensation of de- 
terminants, being a new and brief me- 
thod for computing their arithmetical 
values, 150. 

Domes, on the stability of, 182; Part IL, 
266. 

Donders (F. C.) elected foreign member, 
189 


Drach (S.), two MS. volumes of tables in 
pure mathematics, presented by, 306. 
Duncan (P. M.), on the genera Hezero- 
phyllia, Battersbyia, Paleocyclus, and 
Asterosmilia; the anatomy of their spe- 
cies, and their position in the classifi- 
cation of the Sclerodermic Zoantharia, 

460. 
Dynamical force, conversion of, into elec- 
trical force, 367. 


INDEX. 


Hlectric currents,on the theory of the main- 
tenance of, by mechanical work, with- 
out the use of permanent magnets, 397. 

Hlectric energy, remarks on the nature of, 
and on the means by which it is trans- 
mitted, 408. 

Hlectrical force, on the conversion of dyna- 
mical into, without the aid of permanent 
magnetism, 367. 

Hlectricity, experimental researches in 
(Part 1.), 107. 

, animal, electroscopic indications of, 
156. 

—-—, indications of, in the living human 
body, 160. 

, on the means of increasing the quan- 
tity of, by induction machines, 171. 

Ellis (A. J.), second memoir ‘‘On Plane 
Stigmaties,” 192. 

Encke (J. F.), obituary notice of, xliv. 

Hozoon Canadense, further observations on 
the structure and affinities of, 503. 

Kthenyl, 57. 

EKthenylethyldiphenyldiamine, 59. 

Kuler’s constant, on the calculation of the 
numerical value of, 429 ; supplement,431. 

Evans (J.) on a possible geological cause 
of changes in the position of the axis of 
the earth’s crust, 46. 

Everett (J. D.), account of experiments on 
the flexural and torsional rigidity of a 
glass rod, leading to the determination 
of the rigidity of glass, 19. 

, account of experiments on torsion 

and flexure for the determination of ri- 

gidities, 356. 


Falconer (H.), obituary notice of, xiv. 
Farrar (Rev. F. W.) admitted, 189. 
Fellows deceased, list of, 269. 

elected, list of, 188, 270. 

Fishes, observations on the ovum of os- 
seous, 226. 

FitzRoy (Vice-Admiral R.), obituary no- 
tice of, xxi. 

Fizeau (H. L.), Rumford medal awarded 
to, 283. 

Flexure, experiments on, 356. 

Flower (W. H.) on the development and 
succession of the teeth in the Marsu- 
piaha, 464. 

Fluorescence, on the increase of, in animal 
textures after taking quinine, 80. 

Focus-equalizer, on a self-acting, 456 ; de- 
scription of, 458. 

Foreign members elected :—F. C. Donders, 
G. F. B. Riemann, G. Rose, 189. 

Foyea centralis of the human retina, ana- 
tomy of, 189. 

Frankland (E.) and Duppa (B. F.), re- 
searches on acids of the lactic series: 
No. I. Synthesis of acids of the lactic 
series, 25. 


549 


Frederiksdal, on the semidiurnal tides 
of, 114. 

French government-expedition to deter- 
mine geographical positions, 456. 


Gases, on the dynamical theory of, 167. 

, on the dialytic separation of, 223. 

Gassiot (J. P.) on Appold’s apparatus 
for regulating temperature and keeping 
the air in a building at any desired de- 
gree of moisture, 144. 

Geikie (A.) admitted, 29. 

Gladstone (J. H.) on pyrophosphoric acid 
with the pyro- and tetra-phosphoric 
amides, 510. 

Glass, rigidity of, determined by experi- 
ments on the flexural and torsional ri- 
gidity of a glass rod, 19. 

Gompertz (B.), obituary notice of, xxiii. 

Graham (T.) on the absorption and dia- 
lytic separation of gases by colloid septa : 
Part [Action ofa septum of caoutchouc ; 
Part II. Action of metallic septa at a 
red heat, 223. 

on the occlusion of hydrogen gas by 
meteoric iron, 502. 

Gun-cotton, manufacture and composition 
of, 102, 277. 

, researches on: Second Memoir, On 
the stability of gun-cotton, 417. 

Gunther (A.), contribution to the ana- 
tomy of Hatteria (Rhynchocephalus, 
Owen), 460. 

Guy (Dr. W. A.), admitted, 256. 


Hair, human, on a remarkable alteration 
of appearance and structure of, 406. 

Harcourt (A. V.) and Hsson (W.) on the 
laws of connexion between the conditions 
of a chemical change and its amount: 
No. Il. On the reaction of hydric 
peroxide and hydric iodide, 262. 

Harrison (J. P.) on the relation of inso- 
lation to atmospheric humidity, 356. 

Hatteria, contribution to the anatomy of, 
460. 

Haughton (Rey. 8.) on the tides of the 
Arctic seas: Part III. On the semi- 
diurnal tides of Frederiksdal, near 
Cape Farewell, in Greenland, 114. 

on the chemical and mineralogical 
composition of the Dhurmsalla meteoric 
stone, 214. 

Heat, expansion of metals and alloys by, 

20. 

Heating of a disk by rapid rotation én 
vacuo, 290. 

Herapath (Dr. W. B.), readmission of, 
4, 8.2. 

Heterophyltia, on the genus of, 460. 

Heywood (Sir B.), obituary notice of, 
XXiv. 

Hodgkinson (Rev. G. C.), actinometrical 


590 


observations among the Alps, with the 
description of a new actinometer, 321. 

Hofmann (A. W.) on the action of tri- 
chloride of phosphorus on the salts of 
the aromatic monamines, 55. 

on the transformation of the aroma- 
tic monamines into acids richer in 
carbon, 335. 

Hooker (Sir W. J.), obituary notice of, 


XXV. 

Hoskins (S. E.), a tabular form of ana- 
lysis, to aid in tracing the possible in- 
fluence of past and present upon future 
states of weather, 470. 

Huggins (W.) on the spectrum of comet 
1, 1866, 5. 

, further observations on the spectra 
of some of the nebule, with a mode of 
determining the brightness of these 
bodies, 17. 

Huggins (W.) and Miller (W. A.) on the 
spectrum of a new star in Corona Bo- 
realis, 146. : 

Huggins (W.),royal medal awarded to,280. 

Hulke (J. W.) on the anatomy of the 
Fovea centralis of the human retina, 
189. 

Human myology, variations in, 229, 518. 

Hunt (T. 8.) admitted, 405. 

Hydatids, on the rearing of Tenia echino- 
coccus from, 224. 

Hydric peroxide and hydric iodide, on the 
reaction of, 262. 

Hydrocarbons, new series of, derived from 
coal-tar, 132. 

Hydrogen gas, on the occlusion of, by 
meteoric iron, 502. 

Hygrometer, Appold’s automatic, 145. 


India, pendulum observations in, 254, 
256, 276. 

Tnsolation, on the relation of, to atmo- 
spheric humidity, 356. 

Intimate structure of the brain, on the, 
second series, 509. 

Tron ships, on the action of the compasses 
in, 


James (Sir Henry), report on the levelling 
from the Mediterranean to the Dead 
Sea, 128. 

Jones (H. Bence) and Dupré (A.) on a 
fluorescent substance, resembling qui- 
nine, in animals ; and on the rate of pas- 
sage of quinine into the vascular and 
non-vascular textures of the body, 73. 


Kaye (J. W.) admitted, 256. 

Kew observatory, results of magnetic ob- 
servations at: No. III. Lunar-diurnal 
variation of the three magnetic elements, 
249. 

Kupffer (A. T. von), obituary notice of, xlvi. 


INDEX. 


Ladd (W.) on a magneto-electric ma- 
chine, 404. 

Levelling from the Mediterranean to the 
Dead Sea, report on, 128. 

Light, computation of the lengths of the 
waves of, corresponding to the lines in 
the dispersion-spectrum measured by 
Kirchhoff, 405. 

Lilley (J.) on the action of compasses in 
iron ships, 38. 

Lindley (J.), obituary notice of, xxx. 

Lockyer (J. N.), spectroscopic observations 
of the sun, 256. 

Lubbock (Sir J. W.), obituary notice of, 
XXXii. 

Lunar atmospheric tide at Melbourne, 


Magnet, on the augmentation of the power 
of, 369. 

Magnetic currents, on the augmentation of 
the power of a magnet by the reaction of, 
369. 

—— declination, on the lunar-diurnal 
variation of, 414. 

determinations, monthly, made at 

Coimbra, June to Noy. 1866, 474. 

dip, on the secular change of, as re- 

corded at Kew Observatory, 8. 

observations at Bombay, on the, 

i 

observations ; lunar-diurnal varia- 

tion of the three magnetic elements, 

(No. TIT.), 249. 

observatory to be established at Mel- 
bourne, Mauritius, Bombay, and Stony- 
hurst, 274, 275. 

Magnetism, experimental researches in, 
(Part I.), 107. 

, terrestrial, contributions to (No. X.), 
209. 

Magneto-electric machine, on a, 404. 

machines of Wilde, Wheatstone, 
and Siemens, on certain points in the 
theory of, 403. 

Mammoth, account of the discovery of, in 
Arctic Siberia, 98. 

Marsupialia, on the development and suc- 
cession of the teeth in the, 464. 

Matter, on the internal distribution of, 
which shall produce a given potential at 
the surface of a gravitating mass, 482. 

Matthiessen (A.) on the expansion by heat 
of metals and alloys, 220. 

Mauritius magnetic observatory, 274. 
Maxwell (J. C.) on the viscosity or inter- 
nal friction of air and other gases, 14. 
on the dynamical theory of gases, 

167. 

on the theory of the maintenance of 

electric currents by mechanical work 

without the use of permanent magnets, 

397. 


INDEX. 


Mechanics, fundamental views regarding, 
204. 


Melbourne, lunar atmospheric tide at, 
489. 

magnetic observatory, 274. 

Mercury, on the specific gravity of, 10. 

Merrifield (C. W.) on a new method of 
calculating the statical stability of a 
ship, 332; note on, 396. 

Metals and alloys, on the expansion of, by 
heat, 220. 

Meteoric iron, on the ocelusion of hydro- 
gen gas by, 502. 

stone, composition of the Dhurm- 
salla, 214. 

Meteorological department of Board of 
Trade, on reorganization of, 271. 

observations by sea and land, note on 
a correspondence on, between Her 
Majesty’s Government and the Presi- 
dent and Council of the Royal Society, 
29. 

Methenyldiphenyldiamine, 61. 

Miller (W. H.) on the forms of graphi- 
toidal silicon and graphitoidal boron, 
EE 

Mivart (St. George) on the appendicular 
skeleton of the primates, 320. 

Moisture, on Appold’s apparatus for re- 
gulating, 145. 

Monamines, aromatic, action of trichloride 
of phosphorus on the salts of, 55. 

: , transformation of, into acids 
richer in carbon, 335. 

Montgomery (E.) on the formation of 
* cells” in animal bodies, 314. 

Moon (R.) on Poisson’s solution of the 
accurate equations applicable to the 
transmission of sound through a cylin- 
drical tube, and on the general solution 
of partial differential equations, 306. 

—— on the integrability of certain par- 
tial differential equations proposed by 
Mr. Airy, 486. 

Motion of a rigid body moving freely 
about a fixed point, on the, 139. 

Miller (Dr. H.) admitted, 209. 

Murchison (Dr. C.) admitted, 189. 

Muscles, table of varieties in the, 243, 546. 

Muscular arrangements of the bladder and 
prostate, 244. 

Myology, variations in human, 229, 518. 

Mysteries of numbers, on, 115. 


Nebulz, further observations on the spectra 
of the, and mode of determining their 
brightness, 17. 

Nettleship (E.), notes on the rearing of 
Tenia echinococcus in the dog, from 
hydatids, with some observations on the 
anatomy of the adult worm, 224. 

Neumayer (G.) on the lunar-diurnal va- 
riation of the magnetic declination, with 


551 
special regard to the moon’s declination, 
414, 


Neumayer (G.) on the lunar atmospheric 
tide at Melbourne, 489 

Nitrogen, elimination of, by the kidneys 
and intestines, 339. 

Numbers, on the mysteries of, alluded to 
by Fermat, 106, 115. 


Obituary Notices of Fellows deceased :— 
John George Appold, i. 
George Boole, vi. 
Samuel Hunter Christie, xi. 
Hugh Falconer, xiv. 
Vice-Admiral Robert FitzRoy, xxi. 
Benjamin Gompertz, xxiii. 
Sir Benjamin Heywood, xxiv. 
Sir William Jackson Hooker, xxv. 
John Lindley, xxx. 
Sir John William Lubbock, xxxii. 
Sir John Richardson, xxxvil. 
Admiral William Henry Smyth, xii. 
Johann Franz Encke, lxiv. 
Adolf Theodor von Kupffer, xlvi. 
Optics of photography, 456. 
Ovibos moschatus, 516. 


Palgzocyclus, on the genus, 460. 

Parker (W. K.), royal medal awarded to, 
283. 

Parkes (E. A.) on the elimination of ni- 
trogen by the kidneys and intestines 
during rest and exercise, on a diet with- 
out nitrogen, 339. 

Partial differential equations, on the ge- 
neral solution of, 306. 

, on the integrability of certain, pro- 
posed by Mr. Airy, 486. 

Pendulum experiments in India, preli- 
minary notice of results of, 318. 

observations in India, 254, 256. 

Perkin (W. H.) admitted, 209. 

Petroleum, note on the amyl-compounds 
derived from, 131. 

Pettigrew (J. B.) on the muscular arrange- 
ments of the bladder and prostate, and 
the manner in which the ureters and 
urethra are closed, 244. 

Phillips (J.), notice of a zone of spots on 
the sun, 63. 

, observations of temperature during 
two eclipses of the sun (in 1858 and 
1867), 421. 

Phosphorus, on the action of trichloride 
of, on the salts of the aromatic mon- 
amines, 9d. 

Photography, optics of, 456. 

Plucker (J.), fundamental views regarding 
mechanics, 204. 

, Copley medal awarded to, 278. 

Pollock (Sir F.) on the mysteries of num- 
bers alluded to by Fermat, 115. 


Ree INDEX. 


Primates, on the appendicular skeleton of, . 
20 


Pyrophosphoric acid, on, 510. 
amides, on the, 509. 


Quantics, eighth memoir on, 330. 

Quinine, on a fluorescent substance resem- 
bling, in animals, 73. 

, on the rate of passage of, into the 
vascular and non-vascular textures of 
the body, 87. 

Quintenyldiphenyldiamine, 60. 


Radcliffe (C. B.), an account of experi- 
ments in some of which electroscopic in- 
dications of animal electricity were de- 
tected for the first time by a new method 
of experimenting, 156. 

Radiation and absorption, sixth memoir 
on, 5. 

Rankine (W. J. M.), note on Mr. Merri- 
field’s new method of calculating the 
statical stability of a ship, 396. 

, on a property of curves which fulfil 


2 L8G dep. 
the condition in Tapes 468, 


7D 

Ransom (W.H.), observations on the ovum 
of osseous fishes, 226. 

Respiration, influence of, on the circula- 
tion of the blood, 391. 

Rest and exercise, effect of, on the elimina- 
tion of nitrogen by the kidneys and in- 
testines, 339. 

Retina, human, anatomy of the Fovea cen- 
tralis of, 189. 

Rhinoceros leptorhinus, on the dentition 
of, 106. 

Rhynchocephalus, 460. 

Richards (Capt.) admitted, 189. 

Richardson (T.) admitted, 405. 

Richardson (Sir J.), obituary notice of, 
XXXVil. 

Riemann (G. F. B,) elected foreign mem- 
ber, 189. 

Rigid body, on the motion of a, about a 
fixed point, 139. 

Rigidities, experiments on torsion and 
flexure for the determination of, 356. 


Robinson (Rey. T. R.) on the means of in- 


creasing the quantity of electricity given 
by induction-machines, 171. 

Rose (G.) elected foreign member, 189. 

Rotation, on uniform, 71. 

Royal medal awarded to W. Huggins, 
280; to W. K. Parker, 282. 

Rumford medal awarded to A. H. L. 
Fizeau, 283. 

Russell (W. H. L.) admitted, 189. 


Sabine (Lieut.-Gen. E.), note on a corre- 
spondence between Her Majesty’s Go- 
vernment and the President and Coun- 


cil of the Royal Society regarding me- 
teorological observations to be made by 
sea and land, 29. 


Sabine (Lieut.-Gen. E.), contributions to 


terrestrial magnetism (No. X.), 209. 

, results of the magnetic observations 

at the Kew Observatory : No. III. Lunar 

diurnal variation of the three magnetic 

elements, 249. 

, note on Prof. de Souza’s paper, 474. 

Sanderson (J. B.) on the influence exerted 
by the movements of respiration on the 
circulation of the blood, 391. 

Schorlemmer (C.), note on the amyl-com- 
pounds derived from petroleum, 131. 

on anew series of hydrocarbons de- 
rived from coal-tar, 132. 

Schunck (E.) on the colouring and extrac- 
tive matters of urine: Part I., 1; Part 
IT, 222. 

on a crystalline fatty acid from hu- 

man urine, 258. 

on oxalurate of ammonia as a con- 
stituent of human urine, 259. 

Selwyn (Rev. Canon) admitted, 209. 

Shanks (W.) on the calculation of the nu- 
merical value of Euler’s constant, which 
Professor Price, of Oxford, calls E, 429. 

Ship, new method of calculating the sta- 
tical stability of a, 332 ; note on, 396. 

Siemens (C. W.) on uniform rotation, 71. 

on the conversion of dynamical into 
electrical force without the aid of per- 
manent magnetism, 367. 

Silicon, graphitoidal, on the forms of, 11. 

Silurian life, geographical distribution of, 
384. 

Smith (A.) on the tidal currents on the 
west coast of Scotland, 42. 

Smith (H. J. 8.) on the orders and genera 
of ternary quadratic forms, 387. 

Smyth (Admiral W. H.), obituary notice 
of, xliii. 

Sorby (H. C.) on a definite method of 
qualitative analysis of animal and vege- 
table colouring-matters by means of the 
spectrum-microscope, 433. 

Sound, transmission of, through a cylin- 
drical tube, on Poisson’s solution of the 
accurate equations applicable to, 306. 

Southern telescope, notice of, 273. 

Spectra of the nebule, further observa- 
tions on, 17. 

Spectroscopic observations of the sun, 
256. 

Spectrum of comet 1, 1866, 5. 

of a new star in Corona Borealis, 

146. 

microscope, on a definite method of 
qualitative analysis of animal and yege- 
table colouring-matters by means of 
the, 433. 

Standards of length of England, France, 


INDEX. 


Belgium, Prussia, Russia, India, and 
Australia, abstract of the results of the 
comparison of, 311. 

_ Statical stability of a ship, new method of 
calculating, 332; note on, 396. 

Stewart (B.), note on the secular change 
of magnetic dip, as recorded at the Kew 
Observatory, 8. 

, on the specific gravity of mercury, 


and Tait (P. G.) on the heating of a 

disk by rapid rotation 7m vacuo, 290. 

, @ comparison between some of the 
simultaneous records of the barographs 
at Oxford and at Kew, 413. 

Stigmatics, plane, second memoir on, 192. 

Stokes (G. G.) on the internal distribution 
of matter which shall produce a given 
potential at the surface of a gravitating 
mass, 482. 

Stonyhurst magnetic observatory, 275. 

Strange (A.) on a transit-instrument and 
a zenith sector, to be used on the Great 
Trigonometrical Survey of India for the 
determination, respectively, of longitude 
and latitude, 385. 

Sulphite of soda, its utility in microspectro 
researches, 447. 

Sun, notice of a zone of spots on the, 63. 

——, luminosity of the, 68. 

, spectroscopic observations of, 256. 

, eclipses of, observations of tempera- 
ture during, 421. 

Sunlight, note on the relative chemical in- 
tensity of, 20. 

Sunspots, observation of, at Dessau and 
Kew, 276. 

Sylvester (J. J.) on the motion of a rigid 
body moving freely about a fixed point, 
139. 


Tenia echinococcus, notes on the rearing 
of, in the dog, from hydatids, 224. 

Tarn (HE. W.) on the stability of domes, 
Part I., 182; Part IT., 266. 

Teeth, succession and development of, in 
the marsupialia, 464. 

Temperature, on Appold’s apparatus for 
regulating, 144. 

, observations of, during two eclipses 
of the sun (in 1858 and 1867), 421. 

Ternary quadratic forms, on the orders 
and genera of, 387. 

Tetraphosphoric amides, on the, 509. 

Thesaurus Siluricus, a brief account of 
the, 372. 

Tidal currents of the west coast of Scot- 
land, on the, 42. 

Tide observations at Bristol, discussion of, 


289, 


553 


Tides of the arctic seas, on the (Part III.), 
114. 

Torsion and flexure, experiments on, for 
the determination of rigidities, 356. 

Townsend (Rey. R.) admitted, 209. 

Transit-instrument, description of, 385. 

Tyndall (J.), sixth memoir on radiation 
and absorption, 9. 


Urine, on the colouring and extractive 
matters of, Part I., 1 ; Part IT., 222. 
, human, on a crystalline fatty acid 


from, 258. 


Varley (C. F.) on certain points in the 
theory of the magneto-electric machines 
of Wilde, Wheatstone, and Siemens, 
403. 

Vice-Presidents appointed, 289. 

Vision, binocular, a new fact relating to, 
424. 

Von Baer (Carl Ernst), account of the 
discovery of the body of a mammoth in 
Arctic Siberia, 93. 


Walker (J., Lieut.-Col.), Letter on Capt. 
Basevi’s pendulum observations in In- 
dia, 254. 

, preliminary notice of results of pen- 
dulum experiments made in India, 318. 

Wanklyn (J. A.), rosaniline, on the rela- 
tion of, to rosolic acid, 210. 

and Chapman (EH. T.), ethylamine, 
on the preparation of, 218. 

Watts (H.) admitted, 189. 

Weather, influence of past and present on 
future states of, 470. 

Wheatstone (C.) on the augmentation of 
the power of a magnet by the reaction 
thereon of currents induced by the 
magnet itself, 369. 

Wilde (H.), experimental researches in 
BE ne and electricity (Part I.), 

Pfc 

Wilson (E.) on a remarkable alteration 
of appearance and structure of the hu- 
man hair, 406. 

Wood (J.), variations in human myology 
observed during the winter session of 
Sra at King’s College, London, 

29. 

, yariations in human myology ob- 

served during the winter session of 

iad at King’s College, London, 

518. 


Zenith sector, description of, 385. 


END OF THE FIFTEENTH VOLUME, 


PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCTS, 
RED LION COUNT, FLEET STREET. . 9 |) 


Pia natll 


OBITUARY NOTICES OF FELLOWS DECEASED 
Between 30TH Nov. 1864 ann 30TH Nov. 1865. 


JouNnN Grorce Appoip died August 31, 1865. Mr. Appold was 
greatly distinguished as an amateur engineer, and for his success in the 
general application of chemical, physical, and mechanical principles for the 
purposes of mankind. . 

He was born on the 14th of April, 1800, at the factory of his father, 
Christian Appold, in Wilson Street, Finsbury. He was educated at an in- 
different school in the vicinity, and at an early age was taken from his 
studies to assist his father, who was a fur-skin dyer of much celebrity. At 
the age of 22 his father gave him the business, when his far-seeng mind at 
once perceived that the power of steam might be advantageously introduced 
into his factory, and that if he was to hold the first place in his department 
of manufacture, he must rely upon a knowledge of chemistry and physics. 
For years he devoted himself to his factory with such success that he im- 
proved his art, and in some cases was the sole possessor of a knowledge of 
the means by which he carried out difficult processes. Through this 
superior skill he amassed in a few years a handsome fortune, by industry 
and talent alone, without resorting to speculation of any kind. 

From about the year 1844 he bestowed less time on his business, and 
was thus enabled to apply the knowledge which he had obtained therefrom 
to a wider range of subjects, whereby he gained the confidence and esteem 
of the leading engineers of the age. 

Mr. Appold was exceedingly modest and distrustful of his own powers, 
till he found that men of the highest reputation listened to him with re- 
spect and commendation, when, fortunately for the public, he became more 
confident in enforcing his own inventions. He was somewhat irritable in 
manner, especially when wrongfully contradicted ; but was greatly beloved 
by his men, not only from the kindness of his heart, but from the con- 
fidence with which he inspired them when difficulties had to be overcome. 

He was married at the age of 25 to Miss Maria Illmann, who during the 
whole of his life sympathized with his train of thought, calmed his irrita- 
bility, took the liveliest interest in all his projects, and by a devotion to 
his comfort and happiness contributed in no small degree to further the in- 
ventions which he has given to the world. 

Mr. Appold was not a man of extensive reading, and indeed he used 
books but little; but he was a careful observer of facts, and his mind was 
well stored with accurate and exact data available for use. His inventions 
and processes were the result of pure thought. They were but little de- 
rived from the analogy of other methods in actual use, but were in great 
measure creations of his own mind. 

Mr. Appold’s chemical inventions were confined to his own business ; 
none of them have ever been published, some are still in the possession of 

VOL, XV. b 


il 


the present proprietors of the factory, but others doubtless will be for ever 


lost. 
In applied electricity Mr. Appold pointed out difficulties in the use of 


that agent as a motive power for clocks, and attempted to prevent irregu-- 


larity in their performance, but without, however, attaining the degree of 


perfection which his exact mind alone could tolerate. His great work in. 


connexion with electricity is of a purely mechanical nature, as he devised 
a most efficient break to regulate the speed of laying electric cables at the 
bottom of the sea. From the great value of this apparatus the name of 
Appold will be ever associated with this department of engineering, as the 
successful laying of the Atlantic and other cables has in no small degree 
depended upon this invention, although others have subsequently made 
improvements upon it. This contrivance is an adaptation of a labour- 
regulating machine, invented and patented by him some time previously, 
for use at prisons, so that the labour which every prisoner performs may 
be exactly appor tioned to his strength. 

Hydraulic science was a particularly favourite subject with Mr. Appold. 
His centrifugal pump stands boldly forward as an invaluable instrument for 
raising large quantities of water to a moderate height. The construction of 
this pump was a special instance of an invention arrived at by thoughtful 
Investigation. The experiments were made at considerable costto himself in 
his factory, and after accurately watching the results, he applied his mind 
to a right consideration of their bearing, and thus produced a pump which 
for its particular purposes surpasses every invention which preceded it. In 
the Great Exhibition of 1851 a centrifugal pump was exhibited, the merits 
of which are fully described in the Reports of the Jurors, and in the Exhi- 
bition of 1862 a much larger one was shown. The Appold centrifugal 
pump is largely used in Egypt and in the West Indies for the purposes 
of irrigation. It is also beneficially used for draining tracts of ground 
lying below the level of the natural outfall; and Whittlesea Mere, and a 
great portion of the Bridgwater marshes were drained. by: its instrumen- 
tality. 

Mr. Appold also devised a pump for raising the thick viscid printing ink 
used for the ‘Times’ newspaper, which apparatus has been employed for 
some time, and well illustrates his success in ss his contrivances to 
the requirements of the case. 

His wonderful power of intelligent observation was well displayed during 
the attempts to launch the Great Eastern steamship at Blackwall by means 
of hydraulic pumps, when his skilled eye detected that the labourers were 
working irregularly, and sometimes the labour which they apparently gave 
was amere sham. He immediately communicated with Mr. Brunel, who 
gave him leave to fix a test upon each pump to show the work performed. 
This was highly appreciated by the great engineer. 

Mr. Appold was peculiarly happy in devising valves in connexion with 
large pumps, and many such now in use at the large waterworks were 


Hl 


contrived by him. He also mvented a valve for equalizing the flow of. 
water, and thus ensuring the safety of persons using hydraulic lifts by a 
proper regulation of the speed, irrespective of variation of the weight by 
ee in the number of persons employimg them. This valve is in 
common use at all the large hotels. 

A very pretty contrivance was invented by him for throwing air into 
water-pipes under great pressure. At the waterworks of the South Essex 
Company water is pumped 12 miles and raised 400 feet by the direct action 
of the engine. Under these circumstances the air in the air-vessel was ab- 
sorbed by the water, and the use of an air-pump caused great heat from the 
compression of the air. On consideration of all the facts, he immediately 
contrived an injector, by which a suitable quantity of air was thrown into 
the air-vessel without the aid of any pump. 

He also devised a simple method to avoid the bursting of water-pipes in 
houses when the water is suddenly shut off at high pressures, and also to 
prevent the unpleasant noise which occurs under these circumstances. His 
contrivance consists in soldering a feot of pipe, closed at one end and full 
of air, vertically near the tap. This acts as an air-vessel, and perfectly 
prevents the noise or the risk of fracture of the pipe. 

The Appold overfiow for cisterns is an ingenious application of scientific 
principles, by which cisterns can be filled with safety to a very short 
distance of their top. The overflow consists of a funnel-shaped pipe, con- 
tracted at the bottom and very large at the top. This is covered with an 
inverted metallic saucer, so that when the water flows fast the whole pipe 
is filled, and with the covering constitutes a siphon which powerfully sucks 
down the water. 

Mr. Appold also warmly advocated the use of siphons to carry water 
over an embankment instead of haying culverts through the bank. For 
this purpose he recommended that one valve only should be used, and that 
it should be placed at the upper part of the siphon, so that facility of exa- 
mination may be secured. Mr. Appold also suggested to Messrs. Kaston 
and Amos the arrangement of air-pumps which are employed for the ex- 
haustion of the siphons at Kings Lynn. 

Great as Mr. Appold was in his knowledge of hydraulic principles and 
in his application of them, he was no less fortunate in his successful appre- 
ciation of pneumatic science. He was a thorough master of ventilation, 
and that at a time when the principles of the art were but imperfectly 
known; his own house was for years regarded as a model of perfection 
in that way, as fresh air of regulated temperature and moisture, and 
thoroughly screened from all impurities, was abundantly supplied by a 
series of most ingenious self-acting contrivances. The Appold motor- 
hygrometer which Mrs. Appold presented to the Royal Society, whereby 
a self-acting motive power was obtained under any desired condition of 
hygrometric moisture, is a very remarkable example of the skill with 

b 2 


1V 


which Mr. Appold devised the most delicate apparatus to meet any want. 
By the use of this instrument the flow of a small stream of water over a 
warm stove was regulated, and by this means one uniform hygrometric 
state of the atmosphere was ensured throughout the building. The bel- 
lows he applied to prevent the jar of slamming doors is an ingenious and 
effective apparatus; and the Appold Pneumatic Valve, for preventing 
down draughts with very feeble currents, acts perfectly. 

Mr. Appold’s mechanical contrivances were innumerable, and many of 
them distinguished by their extreme originality. Perhaps the most re- 
markable is the scrubber, devised to remove deposits from the inside of the 
water-pipes of a town. This has been used with perfect success at Torquay, 
but it is to be regretted that he never himself knew that his design answered 
its expectations. It was a question whether the main pipes of Torquay 
would not have to be removed, but the action of the scrubber was so per- 
fect, that. the deposit was entirely disintegrated and carried away with the 
flow of water. In his factory many remarkable devices existed. Pumps 
were curiously arranged to throw on and off as they were required ; and air 
was supplied to the steam-engine fire by self-regulating apparatus. 

Besides his more important contrivances he made some for mere amuse- 
ment; and every part of his house bore testimony to the fertility of his ima- 
gination and power of invention. Doors were made to open on approach, 
and to shut after the person had passed through ; others locked themselves 
afterwards. He had contrivances also by which all the shutters of a room 
closed by the touch of a spring, and thus, when associated with the regu- 
lator of a gas-lamp, caused a change from daylight to gaslight, to the no 
small amusement of his visitors. All his numerous contrivances acted 
perfectly, even to the unimportant matter of his self-acting stable-gates, 
which when once adjusted, were so exact in their mechanism that they 
remained in use for years without requiring attention. 

Shortly before his death he was constructing an apparatus for measuring 
accurately the pitching and rolling of vessels at sea. 

Mr. Appold showed a knowledge of the laws of heat by constructing a 
thermometer of extreme delicacy fora range of a few degrees. It consisted 
of a thin plate of zinc and steel rivetted together, and suspended on a knife- 
edge, so that its bar was unequally balanced. This form of thermometer 
is difficult to manufacture, otherwise it would doubtless be in general use 
for sitting-rooms and greenhouses, as it indicates distinctly a variation of a 
tenth of a degree, which can be read across the room. He also constructed 
a motor thermometer to regulate the supply of gas to a stove according to 
the temperature of an apartment at a considerable distance, and this acted 
in the most efficient manner. 

One very curious application of physiological experiment Mr. Appold has 
left us in connexion with the Daguerreotype. In the early days of stereo- 
scopic photography he conceived the idea that from the superposition in - 


V 


Wheatstone’s stereoscope of two images of the human countenance, one 
laughing and the other extremely serious, a normal state of countenance 
would be produced. Accordingly he had two such pictures made of him- 
self, and the effect which is produced by regarding the two images through 
the stereoscope is so good, that his family and friends consider that it is 
by far the best likeness which remains, and expresses most accurately his 
natural condition of countenance. 

With but very slight knowledge of the use of figures, Mr. Appold 
had very considerable power of mental calculation. He made curious and 
extensive mental calculations which approximated very closely to the truth. 
In this way he astonished Stephenson and other engineers by suddenly 
stating how much he could by his own strength deflect the colossal bridge 
over the Menai Straits. Upon accurate measurement it was found that 
he really deflected it more than he stated, but then he said he used all his 
strength, and had been afraid of overstating his case. His mode of calcu- 
- lating appeared to be by a geometric series, continually halving or doubling, 
as the case required, from a known unit. 

During the last twenty years of his life he was always present when any 
sreat engineering work was being carried out. He was ever watchful and 
suggestive when difficulties arose, and contributed his share to the success 
of the undertaking. In this manner he exercised an important influence, 
and his loss will be keenly felt wherever new and difficult mechanical 
operations are attempted. 

We thus find that Mr. Appold was the author of inventions of great 
originality in various departments of practical science. It is interest- 
ing to know the manner in which he applied his mind for that purpose 
It was his habit when a difficulty arose, carefully to consider the exac t 
result he required, and having satisfied himself upon that point, he would 
direct his attention to the simplest mode by which the end could be at- 
tained. With that view he would during the day bring together in his mind 
all the facts and principles relating to the case, and the solution of the problem 
usually occurred to him in the early morning after sleep. If the matter 
was difficult, he would be restless and uneasy during the night; but after 
repose, when the brain had recovered from fatigue, and when in the quiet 
of the early morning no external influences distracted his attention, the 
resultant of all known scientific principles bearing upon the question pre- 
sented itself to his mind. 

Mr. Appold’s inventions were essentially practical. They were not mere 
proposals or paper inventions; and he ever showed that he was a man of 
action in bringing into successful operation his various designs. Great, 
however, as were his powers of thoughtful invention he was not distinguished 
in the study of the higher relations of the physical forces, and he left to 
others the task of propounding those noble generalizations of modern days 
which have done so much to simplify and dignify human knowledge ; but 


Vl 


he affords a conspicuous example, in his own line, of the benefits that may 
be conferred on mankind by rightly directed thought, even when unaided 
by acquired learning. He followed the religion of his country, without 
associating himself with theological controversies ; and his numercus acts 
of charity and benevolence were bestowed with the utmost care that the 
giver should remain unknown. 

Mr. Appold was afflicted with a painful disease for the last few years of 
his life, which he bore with heroic fortitude. He was suddenly, however, 
seized with internal heemorrhage at Clifton, when he met his death with 
that calm resignation which marks the true philosopher. To the honour 
of the inhabitants of the parish in which he lived, a monument has been 
erected by them to his memory in the Church of St. Leonard, Shoreditch. 

His election into the Royal Society took place on the 2nd of June, 1853. 


Grorce Boots, by whose death mathematical science has suffered a 
great loss, was born at Lincoln on the 2nd of November, 1815. His father 
was a tradesman of very limited means, but held in high esteem by those 
who knew him. Having nothing to support his family but his daily toil, 
it was not to be expected that He could expend much on the education of 
his children; yet they were not neglected. Being himself a man of 
thoughtful and studious habits, possessed of an active and ingenious mind, 
and attached to the pursuit of science, particularly of mathematics, he 
sought to imbue his children with a love of learning, and employed his 
leisure hours in imparting to them the elements of education. His son 
George was sent first to the National School, and afterwards to a private 
Commercial School, conducted by the late Mr. Thomas Bainbridge, 
Lincoln. From his father he received his principal instruction in the 
rudiments of mathematics, and from him also he inherited a taste for the 
construction and adaptation of optical instruments. It was not, however, 
until a comparatively late period of his earlier studies that his special apti- 
tude for mathematical investigations developed itself. His earlier ambition 
seems to have pointed to the attainment of proficiency in the ancient 
classical languages; but his father being unable to assist him im over- 
coming the first difficulties of this course of study, he was indebted to a 
neighbouring bookseller (Mr. William Brooke) for instruction in the ele- 
ments of Latin grammar. To the study of Latin he soon added that of 
Greek, without any external assistance, and for some years he devoured 
every Greek and Latin author that came within his reach. 

At the age of sixteen he became an assistant in a school at Doncaster ; 
subsequently he cccupied a similar post at Waddington, a village about 
four miles from Lincoln. In these situations, besides prosecuting his 
studies in the ancient classics, he cultivated an acquaintance with the best 
English authors, and began to read the German, French, and Italian 
languages, in all of which he ultimately attained singular proficiency. 


vu 


Two of his latest mathematical essays were written, one in German, and 
the other in French. As he had at this time a great wish to take orders 
in the church, he applied himself for two years to the study of patristic 
literature by way of preparation for the regular theological course. But 
the circumstances of his parents and some other difficulties hindered the 
accomplishment of this design. In his twentieth year he decided on open- 
ing a school on his own account in his native city. Henceforward mathe- 
matics became his special study. 

His earliest papers, written, as he himself incidentally mentions, toward 
the close of the year 1838, were prepared during his perusal of the 
‘Mécanique Analytique,’ in the form of ‘* Notes on Lagrange.” From these 
notes in the following year he made selections, and wrote out what 
appears to have been his first paper (though not the first published), 
entitled ‘ On certain Theorems in the Calculus of Variations,’ wherein he 
proposed various improvements on methods of investigation employed by 
the illustrious French analyst. About the same time his attention was 
attracted to the transformation of homogeneous functions by linear sub- 
stitutions, a problem which occupies a very conspicuous place in the 
writings of Lagrange, and which had also employed the powers of Laplace, 
Lebesque, Jacobi, and other distinguished continental mathematicians. 
The mauner in which Boole dealt with this important problem showed him 
at once to be a man of most original and independent thought, and in the 
course of his investigations he was led to discoveries which may be regarded 
as the foundation of what has been called the Modern Higher Algebra. 
His first published paper relates to this subject ; and although he after- 
wards greatly improved and extended his method of analysis, yet his 
original memoir, entitled “ Researches on the Theory of Analytical Trans- 
formations, with a Special Application to the Reduction of the General 
Equation of the Second Order,” is interesting as showing how the subject 
first struck his mind. This memoir he communicated in 1839 to the 
Cambridge Mathematical Journal. Other papers in rapid succession 
followed. The generous assistance of the editor, the late Mr. Duncan F. 
Gregory, in correcting the imperfections of style which naturally resulted 
from his want of proper early training, Boole remembered with pleasure 
and. thankfulness to the end of his life. His rising reputation led his friends 
to wish that he should enter himself at Cambridge. This project also 
he abandoned, and he continued to work amidst the imterruptions and 
anxieties incident to the occupation of a schoolmaster. While applying 
the doctrine of the separation of symbols to the solution of differential 
equations with variable coefficients, Mr. Boole was led to devise a general 
method in analysis. The work was too elaborate and weighty for the 
mathematical journal; and he therefore, by the advice of Mr. Gregory, 
communicated a paper on the subject to this Society. For this paper, 
which was printed in the Transactions for 1844, he received the Royal Medal. 


vil 


In the course of these speculations, and others of a like nature which 
grew out of them, Mr. Boole was led to consider the possibility of con- 
structing a calculus of deductive reasoning. The severe discipline of his 
efforts to extend the powers of the analysis had given him not only a com- 
plete mastery over its mechanical processes, but also, what was of far 
greater advantage, a profound insight into its logical principles. In tracing 
out those principles he discovered that they admitted of an application to 
other objects of thought than number and quantity ; he found, in fact, 
that logical symbols im general conform to the same fundamental laws 
which govern the symbols of algebra in particular, while they are subject 
also to a certain special law. This discovery suggested a variety of in- 
quiries which he seems at different periods to have pursued, but without 
any intention of publishing his views on the subject. In the spring of the 
year 1847, however, his attention was drawn to the question then moved be- 
tween Sir W. Hamilton of Edinburgh and Professor De Morgan, and he “was 
induced by the interest which it inspired, to resume the almost forgotten 
thread of former inquiries.” His views were embodied in a remarkable essay, 
entitled “‘ The Mathematical Analysis of Logic,’? which in the autumn of 
the year was put on sale in Cambridge and London. Early in the follow- 
ing year (1848) he communicated to the Cambridge and Dublin Mathe- 
matical Journal a paper on the ‘Calculus of Logic,’ in which, after 
premising the notation and fundamental positions of his essay, he gave 
some further developments of his system. From this time forward he 
applied himself diligently to a course of study and reflection on psycholo- 
gical subjects, with a view to the production of a much more elaborate and 
exhaustive work than either of those above named. He felt that the 
inquiry was one of great importance, and that in labouring to perfect his 
theory he was rendering essential service to science. He meditated deeply 
on the nature and constitution of the human intellect. The most eminent 
authorities, both ancient and modern, were consulted; opinions differmg 
widely from each other, and often wholly opposed to his own, were care- 
fully considered ; and whatever was likely to help him in the great work 
which he had undertaken, was eagerly sought. Mental science became 
his study ; mathematics were his recreation. So he bas been heard to 
say ; and yet it isa remarkable fact, and one which serves to show the 
great power and genius of the man, that his most valuable and important 
mathematical works were produced after he had commenced his psycho- 
logical investigations. 

In 1849 he was appointed to the Mathematical Chair in the newly formed 
Queen’s College at Cork; and when the Queen’s Colleges of Belfast, 
Galway, and Cork were united so as to form the Queen’s University of 
Treland, he was chosen one of the public examiners for degrees. These 


offices he filled with the highest reputation. In 1852 the University of — 


Dublin conferred upon him the honorary title of LL.D., in company with 


ee 


1X 


the late Judge Hargreave, “‘in consideration of their eminent services in 
the advancement of mathematical science.’ Late in the year 1853 Dr. 
Boole brought to its close a labour on which he had bestowed a vast 
amount of profound and patient thought. His ‘‘ Mathematical Analysis 
of Logic” was written hastily, and on this account he afterwards regretted 
its publication ; but the work which he now gave to the world must be 
regarded as the most carefully matured of all his productions. It is 
entitled ‘An Investigation of the Laws of Thought, on which are founded 
the Mathematical Theories of Logic and Probabilities.’ The principle en 
which the investigation proceeds is essentially the same as that enunciated 
by the author in his earlier logical essays; but, as he himself remarks, “ its 
methods are more general, and its range of applications far wider.’ This 
great work was published in 1854. 

During the remaining ten years of his life he contributed to various 
scientific journals papers on Probabilites, on Partial Differential Kquations, 
on the Comparison of Transcendents, and on other high mathematical sub- 
jects. He also produced two text-books, one on ‘ Differential Equations,’ 
and one on ‘ Finite Differences’—works which display a vast amount of 
original research as well as an extensive acquaintance with the writings of 
others. These have become class-books at Cambridge. 

In 1855 Dr. Boole was married to Miss Mary Everest, daughter of the 
late Rev. T. R. Everest, Rector of Wickwar, Gloucestershire, and niece of 
Colonel Sir George Everest, F.R.S., lately deceased, as also of Dr. Ryall, 
the Vice-President and Professor of Greek in Queen’s College, Cork. 
The union was one of great mutual happiness, and was blessed with a 
family of five daughters. 

In 1857 Dr. Boole communicated to the Royal Society of Edinburgh a 
memoir “On the Application of the Theory of Probabilities to the Ques- 
tion of the Combination of Testimonies or Judgments.’* For this purpose 
there was awarded to him the Keith Medal, the highest honour in the 
shape of prize which that Society has at its disposal. In June of the same 
year he was elected a Fellow of this Society. At the Oxford Commemo- 
ration in 1859 he received the honorary degree of D.C.L. 

Soon after the publication of his Treatise on Differential Equations, 
Professor Boole resolved that if a new edition of the work should be called 
for he would reconstruct it on a more extended seale. For several suc- 
ceeding years his studies and researches were largely inspired and directed 
by this object, which, however, he did not live to accomplish. The trea- 
tise had been for some time out of print, and he was engaged in preparing 
a new and enlarged edition when he was suddenly struck by the hand of 
death. 

We had walked from his residence at Ballintemple to the College in 
Cork, a distance of little more than two miles, in a drenching rain, and 
lectured in his wet clothes. The result was a feverish cold, which soon 


x 


fell upon his lungs and terminated fatally. He died on the 8th of Decem- 
ber, 1864. 

Dr. Boole was a man of great goodness of heart. By those who knew 
him intimately he was regarded with a feeling akin to reverence. ‘‘ Apart 
from his intellectual superiority,” says one of his colleagues, ‘‘ there was 
shed around him an atmosphere of purity and moral elevation, which was 
felt by all who were admitted with its influence. And over all his gifts 


and graces there was thrown the charm of a true humility, and an apparent 


total unconsciousness of his own worth and wisdom.” 

Many illustrations might be given of the versatility of Boole’s talent, his 
love of poetry and music, his fine appreciation of the beauties of external 
nature, his profound reverence for truth, especially religious truth, and 
many other qualities of his intellect and heart which have not been so much 
as touched upon; but the limits within which it is proper that this sketch 
should be contained forbid any elaborate estimate of his character. 

Boole’s mathematical researches have exercised a very considerable in- 
fluence upon the study of the higher branches of the analysis, especially 
in this-country. They have stimulated and directed the efforts of other 
Investigators to an extent that is not perhaps generally known. Out of 
his theory of linear transformations has grown the more general theory of 
covariants (due to Professor Cayley), with all its important geometrical and 
other applications. By his invention of an algebra of non-commutative 
symbols, a great impulse has been given to the cultivation of the calculus 
of operations. His general method in analysis is the most powerful in- 
strument which we possess for the integration of differential equations, 
whether total or partial. To Sir John Herschel is due the high praise of 
having first applied the method of the separation of symbols to the solution 
of linear differential equations with constant coefficients. But it was re- 
served for Duncan F. Gregory and Boole to set the logical principles of that 
method in a clear and satisfactory light; and to Boole alone belongs the 
honour of having extended the theory to the solution of equations with 
variable coefficients. His principal discoveries in this department will be 
found in his ‘Differential Equations,’ and the Supplementary volume 
(edited by Mr. Isaac Todhunter), works which though primarily intended 
for elementary instruction, may be read with advantage by the advanced 
mathematical student. Other original investigations will be found in the 
same volumes, and more especially in those parts which relate to Riccati’s 
equation, to integrating factors, to singular solutions, to the inverse pro- 
blems of geometry and optics, to partial differential equations, and to 
the projection of a surface on a plane. 

The calculus of logic, upon the invention of which Boole’s fame as a 
philosophical mathematician may be permitted to rest, is most fully deve- 
loped in his ‘Investigation of the Laws of Thought.’ The design of this 
work is—to use the author’s own words—“ to investigate the fundamental 


yo < o 


Xl 


laws of those operations of the mind by which reasoning is performed; to 
give expression to them in the symbolical language of a Calculus, and upon 
this foundation to establish the science of logic, and construct its method; 
to make that method itself the basis of a general method for the applica- 
tion of the mathematical doctrine of Probabilities; and, finally, to collect 
from the various elements of truth, brought to view in the course of these 
Inquiries, some probable intimations concerning the nature and constitution 
of the human mind.” 

Boole has left behind him a considerable quantity of logical manu- 
scripts; these will perhaps be published either in a separate form or in 
a new edition of the ‘ Laws of Thought.’ His works are his noblest mo- 
nument, but his friends and admirers have raised other memorials... Of 
these we may mention in particular, a memorial window in the Cathedral 
at Lincoln, and another in the College Hall at Cork. 

The following is a list of Professor Boole’s papers printed in the Philo- 
sophical Transactions. ‘On a General Method in Analysis,” 1844, pp. 
225-282. ‘On the Comparison of Transcendents, with certain applica- 
tions to the Theory of Definite Integrals,’ 1857, pp. 745-803. ‘«On the 
Theory of Probabilities,’ 1862, pp. 225-252. ‘On Simultaneous Dif- 
_ ferential Equations of the First Order in which the Number of the Variables 
exceeds by more than one the Number of the Equations,’ 1862, pp. 437- 
454. ‘Qn the Differential Equations of Dynamics. A Sequel to a paper 
on Simultaneous Differential Equations,” 1863, pp. 485-501. ‘On the 
Differential Equations which determine the form of the Roots of Algebraic 
Equations,” 1864, pp. 733-755. 


SamuEL Hunter Curistic was born in London on the 22nd of 
March, 1784, and at a very early age showed the talent for mathematical 
pursuits which afterwards so highly distinguished him. He was entered 
at Trinity College, Cambridge, in 1801, and, in his third year, obtained 
a scholarship. In 1805 he took his degree of Bachelor of Arts as Second 
Wrangler, having a severe struggle with Turton (afterwards Bishop of 
Ely) for the “ Blue Riband” of the University, and being bracketed with 
him as Smith’s-prizeman. In 1806 Mr. Christie was appointed Third 
Mathematical Master at the Royal Military Academy at Woolwich, and 
immediately devoted himself to the improvement of the mathematical 
studies at that College, and persevered in the work with much success, 
during his lengthened career of forty-eight years in the public service. 
In 1812 he established the system of competitive examinations, but was 
unable fully to carry out his views in this and in other respects until his 
advancement to the post of Professor of Mathematics in 1838. It is not 
too much to say that no two educational institutions could present a 
stronger contrast than the Royal Military Academy in 1806, and the same 
College in 1854 when Mr. Christie resigned the Professor’s Chair ; and this 


NL 


change was in great measure due to his unflagging advocacy of an 
improved system. 

It is, however, in Mr. Christie’s labours as one of our more distinguished 
Fellows that the Society is principally interested. Our Transactions are 
enriched with a number of papers from his hand, and he took an important 
share in promoting the great advance in both theoretical and experimental 
knowledge of magnetical science, which received its impulse from the obser- 
vations made during the Arctic voyages in 1818 and 1819. The leading 
idea which runs through Mr. Christie’s theoretical discussions of his 
various experimental results, he first stated as an hypothetical law in a 
paper published in the Cambridge Philosophical Transactions for 1820. 
In a paper read before the Royal Society in June 1824, he gave an ac- 
count of some of his experiments for the determination of the effects 
of temperature upon magnetic forces, and established a correction for 
temperature in the experimental determination of the magnetic inten- 
sity, which had been previously overlooked. Mr. Christie was the first 
to observe the effect of the slow rotation of iron in producing magnetic 
polarity, and, at his suggestion, the very interesting series of experiments 
which he originated, and which are given in detail in a paper published 
in the Philosophical Transactions for 1825, were repeated by Lieutenant 
Foster, R.N., during the expedition to the north-west coast of America in 
1824, under Captain Parry, with results even more striking than his own, 
owing to the diminished horizontal component of the magnetic force. 

In 1833 a paper by Mr. Christie upon the magneto-electric conduction 
of various metals was selected by the Council of the Royal Society as the 
Bakerian Lecture for the year. In this paper he shows, both experimentally 
and theoretically, that the conducting power of the several metals varies 
inversely as the length, and directly as the square of the diameter of the 
conducting wire, thus obeying the same law as that previously discovered 
by Sir Humphry Davy and Professor Cumming, in the cases of voltaic and 
thermo-electricity ; although his conclusion as to a difference in the order 
of their conducting powers could not now be maintained His impor- 
tant remark in this paper—that magneto-electricity cannot be developed 
at the same instant in every part of a system, and that the action 
on the remote parts of the wire cannot be absolutely simultaneous with 
that on the parts in the immediate neighbourhood of the magnet— 
appears to have been almost prophetic, now that we are able to submit 


this vast velocity to a definite measurement, by timing the transmission of * 


effect through a journey of three thousand miles. 

The effect of the solarrays upon the magnetic needle very early engaged Mr. 
Christie’s attention, and he showed, by a series of experiments detailed in 
papers published in the Philosophical Transactions for 1826 and 1828, that 
the direct effect of the solar rays is definite and not due to any mere calorific in- 
fluence. He then also threw out the suggestion that terrestrial magnetism is 


_ 


——— 


Xl 


probably derived from solar influence. On thisidea he instituted a series of 
experiments to determine whether a source of heat applied to two substances 
of different conducting powers in uniform contact, like the earth and the 
atmosphere, would produce phenomena corresponding ‘to the diurnal 
variation, as the source of heat was applied successively to different parts of 
the combined system. The results he obtained were in accordance with 
this supposition, but of course their validity as evidence is subject to the 
question of how far the actual conditions of the earth were truly repre- 
sented in the ingenious experimental combination which he adopted. 

Mr. Christie appears to have been the first to make use of a torsion 
balance for the determination of the equivalents of magnetic forces ; he also 
devoted himself to the improvement of the construction of both the hori- 
zontal needle and the dipping-needle; and he served constantly upon the 
“Compass Committee’ formed to assist the Admiralty in bringing the 
Compasses of the Royal Navy into some accordance with the advanced 
knowledge of the day. 

In the Report of the British Association for 1833, the portion which 
refers to the then state of knowledge of the magnetism of the earth was 
drawn up by Mr. Christie, and he therein again maintained that not only the 
daily variation, but also the quasi-polarity of the earth is most probably 
due to the excitation by the solar heat, of electric currents at right angles, or 
nearly so, to the meridian; and he suggests that the direction of these 
currents must be influenced by the form, extent, and direction of the 
continents and seas over which they pass, and also by the height, direction, 
and geological structure of chains of mountains. 

The Letter of Baron Humboldt in 1835 to H.R.H. the Duke of Sussex, 
P.R.S., on the establishment of permanent magnetic observatories at widely 
separated stations within the British territories, was referred by H.R.H. 
the President, to Mr. Christie and Mr. Airy to report upon. Their report 
was read to the Royal Society in November 1836; and upon a further 
report to the same effect from the joint Committee of Physics and Meteor- 
ology in 1838, the President and Council made a representation in favour 
of the measure to Her Majesty’s Government which was successful. 

In connexion with Mr. Christie’s career as a teacher, it may be mentioned 
that he was the author of an ‘ Lilementary Course of Mathematics’ for 
use in the Royal Military Academy. In 1837 Mr. Christie succeeded Mr. 
Children as one of the Secretaries of the Royal Society, and retained that 
office until 1854, when he went to reside at Lausanne upon his retirement 
from the post of Professor of Mathematics at the Royal Military Academy. 
He was one of the Visitors of the Royal Observatory at Greeuwich ; a Vice- 
President of the Royal Astronomical Society ; a Corresponding Member of 
the Academy of Sciences of Palermo, and a member of the Société Phi- 
lomathique of Paris. He died at Twickenham, where he had resided for 
some years, on the 24th of January, 1865, having nearly completed his 


XiV 


eighty-first year. ‘The date of his election into the Society is January 12, 
1826. ; | 


The science of Paleontology has sustained a great loss in the death of 
Hueu Fatconer, M.D. Born at Forres, in the north of Scotland, on 
the 29th of February, 1808, he received his early education at the Gram- 
mar school of that town, and afterwards studied Arts at the University 
of King’s College, Aberdeen, and Medicine at the University of Kdinburgh. 
From the former University he received the degree of A.M.; and from 
the latter, in 1829, the degree of M.D. 

As a boy, he exhibited a decided taste for the study of natural objects, 
which he eagerly followed up in Edinburgh under the systematic tuition of 
Professors Graham and Jameson. On visiting London in 1829, he availed 
himself of the opportunity to assist the late Dr. Nathaniel Wallich in the 
distribution of his great Indian herbarium, and to study the collection of 
Indian fossil mammalia from the banks of the Irrawaddi, formed by Mr. 
John Crawfurd during his mission to Ava, and presented by him to the 
Geological Society. Both occupations proved of material service in his 
subsequent career, and in the latter instance it determined the labours to 
which he afterwards so zealously devoted himself. 

In 1830 Dr. Falconer proceeded to India as an Assistant-Surgeon in the 
H.H.1.C. Service, and arrived in Caleutta in September of that year. 
Here he at once undertook an examination of fossil bones from Ava, in 
the possession of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, and published a deserip- 
tion of them, which at once gave him a recognized position in the roll of 
cultivators of science in India, and led to his being appointed in 1832 to 
succeed Dr. Royle as Superintendent of the pee nic Gardens of Suha- 
runpoor, in the North-western Provinces. 

In the same year (1832) he made an excursion to the Sub- -Himalayan 
range, and from the indication of a specimen in the collection of his friend 
and colleague, Captain, now Sir Proby T. Cautley, the real nature of 
which had been previously overlooked, he was led to discover vertebrate 
fossil remains zn situ im the tertiary strata of the Sewalik Hills, The 
search was speedily followed up with characteristic energy by Captain 
Cautley in the Kalowala Pass, by means of blasting, and resulted in the 
discovery of more perfect remains, including miocene mammalian genera. 
The finding, therefore, of the fossil fauna of the Sewalik Hills was not 
fortuitous, but a result led up to by researches suggested by previous 
special study, and followed out with a definite aim. Early in 1834 Dr. 
Falconer gave a brief account of the Sewalik Hills, describing their phy- 
sical features and geological structure, and showing their relation to the 
Himalayahs (Journ. Asiat. Soc. of Bengal, vol. iii. p. 182). The name 
*‘Sewalik”’? had been vaguely applied before then by Rennell and others 
to the outer ridges of the true Himalayahs, and the lower elevations towards 


> a SS bet 


XV 


the plains. Dr. Falconer restricted the term definitely to the flanking 
tertiary range, which is commonly separated from the Himalayahs by valleys 
or Doons. The proposed name was not favourably received at the time 
by geographical authorities in India; but it is now universally adopted in 
geography and geology as a convenient and well-founded designation. On 
his first visit to the Sewalik Hills, Dr. Falconer concluded that they did 
not belong to the ‘“‘ New Red Sandstone,” to which they had been referred 
by Captain Herbert, but that they were of a tertiary age, and analogous to 
the Molasse of Switzerlaiud. Thirty years of subsequent investigation by 
other geologists have not altered that determination, although our exact 
knowledge of the formation has been greatly extended. 

The researches thus begun were followed about the end of 1834 by the 
discovery by Lieutenants Baker and Durand of the great ossiferous deposit 
of the Sewaliks, near the valley of the Markunda, westward of the Jumna, 
and below Nahun. Captain Cautley and Dr. Falconer were immediately 
in the field, and by the joint labours of these four officers a subtropical 
mammalian fossil fauna was brought to light, unexampled for richness and 
extent in any other region then known. It included the earliest discovered 
fossil Quadrumana*, an extraordinary number of Proboscidia belonging 
to Mastodon, Stegodon, and Elephas ; several extinct species of Riinoceros ; 
Chalicotherium ; two new subgenera of Hippopotamus, viz. Hexaprotodon 
and Merycopotamus ; several species of Sus and Hippohyus, and of Lquus 
and Hippotherium ; the colossal ruminant Sivatherium, together with fossil 
species of Camel, Giraffe, Cervus, Antilope, Capra, and new types of 
Bovide ; Carnivora belonging to the new genera Sivalarctos and Enhy- 
driodon, and also Machairodus, Felis, Hyena, Canis, Gulo, Lutra, &e. ; 
among the dves, species of Ostrich, Cranes, &. Among the Reptilia, 
Monitors, and Crocodiles, of living and extinct species, the enormous 
tortoise, Colossochelys Atlas, with numerous species of Emys and Trionyz ; 
and among fossil Fish, Cyprintde and Siluride. The general facies of 
the extinct fauna exhibited a congregation of forms participating in Euro- 
pean, African, and Asiatic types. ‘Thrown suddenly upon such rich mate- 
rials, the ordinary means resorted to by men of science for determining 
them by comparison were wanting. Of paleontological works or osteo- 
logical collections in that remote quarter of India there were none. But 
Falconer was not the man to be baffled by such discouragements. He 
appealed to the living forms abounding in the surrounding forests, rivers, 
and swamps to supply the want. Skeletons of all kinds were prepared ; 
the extinct forms were compared with their nearest living analogues, and 
a series of memoirs by Dr. Falconer and Captain Cautley, descriptive of 

* Dr. Falconer’s first published memoir on the Quadrumana of the Sewalik Hills 
was dated November 24th, 1836, and it was not until January 16th, 1837, that M. 


Lartet’s memoir on the discovery cf the jaw of an Ape in the tertiary freshwater forma- 
tion of Simorre was presented to the French Academy of Sciences. 


Xv 


the most remarkable of the newly discovered forms, appeared in the 
‘Asiatic Researches,’ the ‘Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal,’ and 
in the * Geological Transactions.” The Sewalik explorations soon attracted 
notice in Europe, and in 1837 the Wollaston Medal, in duplicate, was 
awarded for their discoveries to Dr. Falconer and Capt. Cautley by the 
Geological Society. 

In 1834 a Commission was appointed by the Bengal Government to 
inquire into and report on the fitness of India for the growth of the tea- 
plant of China. Acting on the information and advice supplied by Dr. 
Falconer (Journ. Asiat. Soc. of Bengal, 1834, ii. p. 182), the Commission 
recommended a trial. The Government adopted the recommendation ; 
the plants were imported from China, and the experimental researches 
were placed under Falconer’s superintendence in sites selected by him. 
Tea culture has since then greatly extended in India, and the tea of 
Bengal bids fair to become one of the most important commercial exports 
from India, as Falconer long ago predicted. 

In 1837 Dr. Falconer was ordered to accompany Burnes’s second 
mission to Caubul, which preceded the Affghan war. Proceeding first 
westward to Kohat and the lower part of the valley of Bunguish, he ex- 
amined the Trans-Indus portion of the Salt-range, and then made for 
Cashmeer, where he passed the winter and spring in examining the natnral 
history of the valley, and in maxing extensive botanical collections. The 
following summer (1838) he crossed the mountains to Iskardo, in Bulkis- 
tan, and traced the Shiggar branch of the Indus to its source in the 
glacier, on the southern fiank of the Mooztagh range. Having examined 
the great glaciers of Arindoh and of the Brahldoh valley, he then returned 
to India wd Cashmeer and the Punjab, towards the close of 1838, to re- 
sume charge of his duties at Suharunpoor. His report of this expedition 
was at the time one of great interest ana importance. 

Tn this, as in many other scientific expeditions, Falconer’s health suffered 
greatly from the results of incessant exposure; and in 1842 he was com- 
pelled to return to Europe on sick leave, bringing with him the natural 
history collections amassed by him during ten years of exploration of the 
Himalayahs, of the plains of India, and of the valley of Cashmeer. They 
amounted to eighty cases of dried plants, and about fifty large cases of 
fossil bones, together with geological specimens, illustrative of the Hima- 
layan formations from the Indus to the Gogra, and from the plains of the 
Punjab across the mountains north to the Mooztagh range. This exten- 
sive collection of Indian fossils, together with the still larger collection 
presented by Capt. Cautley, now forms one of the distinguishing charac- 
teristics in the Paleeontological Gallery of the British Museum. 

From 1843 to 1847 Falconer remained in England. THe cceupied this 
time in publishing numerous memoirs on the geology and fossil remains of 
the Sewalik Hills, which appeared in the Transactions of the Geological 


2 


XV1l 


Society, and in the Proceedings of the Zoological Society, and of the 
Royal Asiatic Society. He also communicated several important papers 
on botanical subjects to the Linnean Society, of which may be specially 
mentioned that on Aucklandia Costus, the Cashmeer plant which yields 
the Kostos of the ancients; and that on Narthex Assafectide, which was 
the first determination of the plant, long contested among botanists, which 
yields the assafoetida of commerce. He had found it growing wild in the 
valley of Astore, one of the affluents of the Indus. 

But his main work at this time was the determination and illustration of 
the Indian Fossil collection presented by Captain Cautley and himself to 
the British Museum and to the Hast India Company. The bulk of the 
specimens were still imbedded in matrix. Sir Robert Peel’s Government 
gave a liberal grant to prepare the materials in the national museum for 
exhibition in the Palzeontological Gallery. Falconer was entrusted with the 
superintendence of the work, and rooms were assigned to him by the 
trustees in the British Museum. At his instance and under his superin- 
tendence a series of casts of the most remarkable of the Sewalik fossils was 
prepared and presented by the Court of Directors of the East India Com- 
pany to the principal museums in Europe. Under the patronage of the 
Government and of the East India House an illustrated work was also 
brought out, entitled “ Fauna Antiqua Sivalensis.”’ In less than three years 
there appeared nine parts of this work, each containing twelve folio plates, 
executed in a style rarely equalled and never surpassed. No. fewer than 
1123 specimens are figured in these plates; and of many specimens three, 
four, or five different views are given. ‘Besides the Sewalik fossils proper, 
the ‘Fauna Antiqua’ includes illustrations of a very valuable and important 
series of mammalian remains from the pliocene deposits of the valley of the 
Nerbudda, together with illustrations of the miocene fauna of the Irrawaddi, 
and of Perim Island in the Gulf of Cambay. The letter-press of the work 
did not keep progress with the plates; and at the close of 1847, before the 
arrears could be brought up, Dr. Falconer was unfortunately compelled, by 
the expiration of his leave, to return to India, where he found it impossible 
to continue the work by correspondence at a distance from the specimens. 
It is hoped, however, that the manuscript notes and memoirs which he has 
left behind will form a complete key to this great work on Indian Palz- 
ontology. 

On his return to India in 1848, Dr. Falconer was appointed Superin- 
tendent of the Calcutta Botanic Garden, and Professor of Botany in the 
Medical College. In 1850 he was deputed to the Tenasserim Provinces to 
examine the teak forests, which were threatened with exhaustion from reck- 
less felling and neglected conservation. His report, suggesting remedial 
measures, was published by the Bengal Government. In 1852 he published 
a memoir recommending the introduction into India of the quinine-yielding 
Cinchonas, and indicating the hilly regions in Bengal andthe Neilgherries 
in Southern India as the most promising situations for experimental nur- 

VOL, XV. e 


XV 


series. Some years afterwards the Cinchona was introduced from South 

America, and it is now thriving in India. In 1854, assisted by his friend 

the late Mr. Henry Walker, he undertook a ‘ Descriptive Catalogue of the 

Fossil Collections in the Museum of the Asiatic Society of Bengal,’ which 

was published as a distinct workin 1859. In the spring of 1855 he retired 
from the Indian service. 

On his return to England he resumed his paleeontological researches, and 
in 1857 he communicated to the Geological Society two memoirs “ On the 
Species of Mastodon and Elephant occurring in the Fossil state in England.” 
Besides attempting to discriminate with precision the three British fossil 
elephants, till then confounded under the name of Hlephas primigenius, Dr. 
Falconer produced for the first time a Synoptical Table, showing the serial 
affinities of all the species of Proboscidia, fossil and living, then known, of 
the former of which a large number had been either discovered or deter- 
mined by himself. In the same year he published an account of the remark- 
able Purbeck mammalian genus ‘Plagiaulax,’ discovered by Mr. Beckles 
near Swanage. In 1860 he communicated a memoir to the Geological Society 
“On the Ossiferous Caves of Gower,” explored or discovered by his friend 
Lieut.-Col. Wood. The existence of Elephas antiquus and Rhinoceros hemi- 
teechus as members of the cave-fauna was then for the first time established, 
and the age of that fauna precisely defined as posterior to the boulder-clay, 
or period of the glacial submergence of England. In 1862 Dr. Falconer 
communicated to the British Association at Cambridge an account of H/e- 
phas melitensis, the pigmy fossil elephant of Malta, discovered, with other 
extinct mammals, by his friend Captain Spratt, C.B., in the ossiferous cave 
of Zebbug. ‘This unexpected form presented the Proboscidia in a new 
light to naturalists. Further researches on the general questions concern- 
ing the same family appeared in a memoir published in the ‘ Natural His- 
tory Review’ in 1863. Among many notes and papers which never ap- 
peared during his life-time may be mentioned a most important memoir 
“On the European Pliocene and Post-pliocene species of Rhinoceros,” 
which, it is hoped, will shortly be published. In this memoir it is shown 
that there are four distinct pliocene and post-pliocene species of Rhinoceros, 
three of which have long been confounded by Cuvier and other paleeonto- 
logists under the name of R. leptorhinus. One of these, R. leptorhinus 
(R. megarhinus of Christol.) has no bony nasal septum ; two, R. Hiruscus 
(Falc.) and R. hemitechus (Fale.), or R. lepéorhinus (Owen), have a partial 
bony nasal septum; while the fourth, R. antiquitatis (Blumb.) or R. 
tichorhinus (Cuv. & Fisch.), has a complete bony nasal septum. 

While exploring the Himalayahs in his early days, Falconer’s attention 
had been closely directed to the physical features which distinguished them 
from mountain-ranges in temperate regions, and more especially to the 
general absence from their southern valleys of the great lakes so common 
in corresponding situations in the Alps. When the hypothesis of the ex- 
cavation of lake-basins by glacial action was brought forward, he took a 


X1X 


share in the discussion, and combated the view by an appeal to the contra- 
dictory evidence furnished by the Himalayahs, the lakes of Lombardy, and 
the Dead Sea. 

For nearly thirty years Dr. Falconer had been engaged more or less with 
the investigation of a subject which has lately occupied much of the atten- 
tion both of men of science and of the educated classes generally, viz. the 
proofs of the remote antiquity of the human race. In 1833, fossil bones 
procured from a great depth in the ancient alluvium of the valley of the 
Ganges in Hindostan were erroneously figured and published as human. 
The subject attracted much attention at the time in India. It was in 1835, 
while the interest was still fresh, that Dr. Falconer and Captain Cautley 
discovered the remains of the gigantic miocene fossil tortoise of India, which 
by its colossal size realized the mythological conception of the tortoise 
which sustained the elephant and the world together on its back (Geol. 
Trans. 2nd ser. vol. v. 1837, p. 499). In the same formations as the 
Colossochelys the remains were discovered of a smaller tortoise, identical 
with the existing Lmys tectum. About the same time also several species 
of fossil Quadrumana were discovered in the Sewalik Hills, one of which 
was thought to have exceeded the Ourang-outang, while another was hardly 
distinguishable from the living ‘‘ Hoonuman”’ monkey of the Hindoos. 
Coupling these facts with the occurrence of the camel, giraffe, horse, croco- 
diles, &c. in the Sewalik fauna, and with the further important fact that 
the plains of the valley of the Ganges had undergone no late submergence, 
and passed through no stage of glacial refrigeration, to interrupt the pre- 
vious tranquil order of physical conditions, Dr. Falconer was so impressed 
with the conviction that the human race might have been early inhabitants 
of India, that he was constantly on the look out for the upturning of the 
relics of man, or of his works, from the miocene strata of the Sewalik Hills. 
In April 1844 he wrote thus to his friend Captain Cautley :—‘“‘ Joining the 
indication given by the Hindoo mythology with the determined fact of the 
little Hmys tectum having survived from the fossil period down to the pre- 
sent day, I have put forward the opinion that the large tortoise may have 
survived also, and only become extinct within the human period. This ts 
a most important matter in reference to the history of man.’ The same 
view was publicly announced at the Zoological Society and the British 
Association in 1844. 

Ten years later Dr. Falconer resumed the subject in India, while investi- 
gating the fossil remains of the Jumna. In May 1858, having the same 
inquiry in view, he communicated a letter to the Council of the Geological 
Society, which suggested and led to the exploration of the Brixham cave, 
and the discovery in it of flint-implements of great antiquity associated with 
the bones of extinct animals. In conjunction with Professor Ramsay and 
Mr. Pengelly he drew up a report on the subject, which, communicated in 
the same year to the Councils of the Royal and Geological Societies, excited 
the interest of men of science in the case. Following up the same object, 

Ca 


XX 


he immediately afterwards proceeded to Sicily to examine the ossiferous 
caves of that island, and there discovered the ‘‘ Grotta di Maccagnone,” in 
which flint-implements of great antiquity were found adhering to the roof- 
matrix, mingled with remains of hyzenas now extinct in Europe. (Quart. 
Journ. Geol. Soc. 1859.) Thus in 1859 the subject of the antiquity of 
the human race, which had previously been generally discredited by men 
of science, was launched upon fresh evidence. Since then it has been 
actively followed up by numerous inquirers, and Dr. Falconer himself was 
contemplating, and had indeed actually commenced, a work ‘ On Primeval 
Man.’ In 1863 he took an active share in the singularly perplexed dis- 
cussion concerning the human jaw of Moulin-Quignon; and in the confer- 
ence of English and French men of science held in France, he expressed 
doubts as to the authenticity of the specimen, but in that guarded and 
cautious manner which was characteristic of him. In the spring of 1864 
he published a notice on the remarkable works of art by ‘‘ primeval man,” 
discovered by Messrs. Lartet and Henry Christy in the ossiferous caves of 
the Dordogne; and in September he accompanied his friend Mr. Busk to 
Gibraltar, to examine caves in which marvellously well-preserved remains 
of man and mammals of great antiquity had been discovered. A joint 
report of this expedition by himself and Mr. Busk was afterwards published. 

But his valuable life was drawing to a close. In January 1865 he was 
seized with a severe attack of acute rheumatism, from which he had formerly 
suffered in Cashmeer, and which on the 31st of the same month termi- 
nated fatally. 

At the time of his death Dr. Falconer was a Vice-President of the Royal 
Society, and Foreign Secretary of the Geological Society ; and as a proof of 
the high esteem in which he was held by his many friends, it may be men- 
tioned that the sum of nearly two thousand pounds has been collected for 
founding a Fellowship in Natural Science in the University of Edinburgh, 
to be called “The Falconer Fellowship,’ and for the execution of a marble 
bust which has been presented to the Royal Society. 

From what has been said, it is obvious that Falconer did enough during 
his life-time to render his name as a paleontologist immortal in science ; 
but the work which he published was only a fraction of what he accom- 
plished. The amount of scientific knowledge which perished with him was 
very great, for he was cautious to a fault; he always feared to commit 
himself to an opinion until he was sure that he was right; and he died in 
the prime of life and in the fulness of his power. Lovers of science and 
those who knew him well can best appreciate his fearlessness of opposition 
when truth was to be evolved, his originality of observation and depth of. 
thought, his penetrating and discriminating judgment, his extraordinary 
memory, the scrupulous care with which he ascribed to every man his due, 
and his honest and powerful advocacy of that cause which his strong intel- 
lect led him to adopt: they also have occasion to deplore the death of a 
staid adviser, a genial companion, and a hearty friend. 


ee 


XX1 


Vice-Admiral Rozertr FirzRoy, born at Ampton Hall, Suffolk, July 
5, 1805, was youngest son of General Lord Charles FitzRoy by his second 
wife, Frances Anne, eldest daughter of the first Marquis of Londonderry. 
He entered the Royal Naval College at Portsmouth in 1818; and from 
1819 to 1828 served on board the Owen Glendower, Hind, Thetis, and 
Ganges in the Mediterranean and on the coasts of South America, and 
became flag-lieutenant at Rio Janeiro. 

In the year last mentioned, on the decease of Captain Stokes, who, under 
Captain King, had been employed in surveying the shores of Patagonia and 
Tierra del Fuego, Lieutenant FitzRoy was selected by the commander-in- 
chief on the station, for the command of the Beagle, one of the two ves- 
sels engaged in the survey. He entered on his new duties with the zeal 
and conscientiousness which through life characterized his professional and 
official services. Of the importance of the task even a non-professional 
reader may judge by a comparison of the charts of the South American 
coasts published since 1826, with those previously existing. Of the greater 
portion of the shores, from the La Plata on the east to the north of Perv. 
on the west. especially the broken and intricate outlines of the lower lati- 
tudes, little was known, and that was imperfectly laid down on early charts 
im away which has been aptly described as “confused.” The Chonos 
Archipelago was completely omitted, and the Spanish charts of Chiloe 
were twenty-five miles in error. 

In the winter of 1829, while surveying the tortuous channels which 
ramify so bewilderingly in the rugged region to the rear of the Land of 
Desolation, Lieutenant FitzRoy discovered two large inland seas (Otway 
Water and Skyring Water) connected by a channel twelve miles in length, 
to which Captain King gave the name of FitzRoy Passage. During this 
exploration, Lieutenant FitzRoy with two boats was away from the ship 
thirty-two days, exposed to the rigours of a severe and stormy climate, 
yet no opportunity was lost of making observations and taking notes of 
remarkable objects. At the end of 1830 the two vessels returned to Eng- 
land, ‘‘ having added charts of the south-western and southern shores of 
Tierra del Fuego, besides those of a multitude of interior sounds and pas- 
sages,’ to the results of the first two years of the survey. Among his 
specimens of natural history, Lieutenant FitzRoy brought four native Fue- 
gians, and expended largely from his private resources in endeavouring to 
improve their condition. 

At the end of 1831, the Beagle having been thoroughly re-equipped, 
was again commissioned with Lieutenant FitzRoy as commander to renew 
the survey. On the voyage out a partial examination was made of the 
Abrolhos Bank, of which a brief account was read before the Royal Geo- 
graphical Society and published in their Journal. Other papers from his 
pen are printed in the same periodical, in one of which he sums up in few 
words the results of the additional survey, accomplished with not less spirit 
and intelligence than the former. ‘“‘ Beginuing,’’ he remarks, ‘ with the 


XXll 


right or southern bank of the wide river Plata, every mile of the coast 
thence to Cape Horn was closely surveyed, and laid down on a large seale. 
Each harbour and anchorage was planned ; thirty miles of the river Negro, 
and two hundred of the Santa Cruz, were examined and laid down, anda ° 
chart was made of the Falkland Islands .... Westward of Cape Horn, as far 
as the parallel of 47° S., little has been added to the results of the Bea- 
gle’s first voyage, because nearly enough was then done for the wants of 
vessels in those dreary regions. But between 47° and the river Guayaquil, 
the whole coasts of Chile and Peru have been surveyed; no port or road- - 
stead has been omitted.” 

During this survey (in 1834) Lieutenant FitzRoy was promoted to the 
rank of Captain. In 1835, while he lay at Valdivia, the great earthquake 
took place, of which he has given a circumstantial and interesting account. 
The Beagle afterwards sailed for an examination of the Galapagos, and 
thence for England, touching at fourteen stations from Tahiti to the Azores 
to measure meridian distances, for which purpose a large number of ehro- 
nometers had been placed on board. The vessel arrived at Greenwich in 
November 1836, having, in the course of her lengthened cruise, cireum- 
navigated the globe. 

Captain FitzRoy’s anxiety to make his work as complete as possible, led 
him to hire two vessels and purchase a third at his own cost to fill up the 
details of the survey, and include the Falkland Islands. This outlay, how- 
ever, involved him in embarrassments which hampered him for many years. 
The Royal Geographical Society hastened to recognize his merits by award- 
ing him their Gold Medal for 1836, ‘for the zeal, energy, and liberality 
shown by him in the conduct of the survey; and, ‘‘ acknowledging the 
importance of the mass of information’? which he brought home, declared 
it to have been “perhaps not exceeded by any expedition since the time 
of Cook and of Flinders.” When we remember that Mr. Charles 
Darwin was on board the Beagle during the whole of her voyage, and 
there gathered the materials for his ‘ Journal and Remarks,’ and geologi- 
eal works since published, the expedition may, indeed, be regarded as me- 
morable. A full account thereof, written by Captain FitzRoy, was published 
in three volumes in 1839. 

Tn 1839 Captain FitzRoy was chosen an Elder Brother of the Trinity 
House; in 1841 he sat in the House of Commons as Member for North ~ 
ietenae in 1842 he was appointed Acting Conservator of the Mersey ; 
and in the following year he went out to New Zealand as Governor, which 
post he held for three years. He was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society 
in 1851; in 1854 he was placed at the head of the Meteorological Depart- 
ment of the Board of Trade; in 1857 he became Rear-Admiral, Vice-Ad- 
miral in 1863, and in 1864 the Academy of Sciences of the Institute, Paris, 
elected him a Corresponding Member of their Section of Geography and 
Navigation. 

In carrying out the duties of his appointment at the Board of Trade, 


. XXI11 


Admiral FitzRoy displayed the earnestness which had always distinguished 
him. Indeed the severe attention he bestowed on the details of his func- 
tion, the originating of storm-signals, the publication of ‘ Reports’ and the 
‘ Weather Book,’ brought on a severe mental strain which eventually occa- 
sioned his death on the 30th of April, 1865. The manner of his death was 
a shock felt far beyond the circle of his friends, and to them exceedingly 
painful. But they remember him as a man of kindly nature, courteous | 
and considerate in no common degree, inspiring those who knew him best 
with affectionate attachment. 


The life of BensAmMIN GoMPERTZz is given at length in the ‘ Assurance 
Magazine’ for April 1866, a journal in which original investigations on a 
branch of mathematical application make their first appearance, and 
which, therefore, must remain accessible to the scientific world. He was 
of a Dutch Jewish family, of which the original name was Cohen, and his 
father was a diamond merchant, whose means left several sons in affluence. 
He was born March 5, 1779. He had an early turn for mathematics, and 
at the age of eighteen became a member of the old Mathematical Society 
of Spitalfields, of which he was President when it merged in the Astro- 
nomical Society. The ordinary biographical details of his life are very 
simple. He married (in 1810) the sister of Sir Moses Montefiore, so well 
known for his benevolent exertions: he had previously started in life on 
the Stock Exchange. The loss of his only son (in 1823) occasioned his 
retirement from this pursuit, and produced a depression which made his 
friends anxious that he should divert his mind by engaging again in 
business. They persuaded him to take the Actuaryship of the Alliance 
- Office; and common rumour stated that the office itself was founded by 
his friends to procure him employment. On his retirement in 1848 he 
continued to apply himself to mathematical subjects, even long after he had 
fallen into a state of bodily debility. He died on the 14th of July, 1866. 

Mr. Gompertz’s writings, especially those on imaginary quantities and 
on mortality, show decided inventive power, and that strong aspiration 
after rigour which characterizes the old English school. Of this school 
he may be called the last. We do not except Lord Brougham, an older 
man and an older mathematician, who is still left to us: his early writings 
are of the mixed type; they show that combination of the old English and 
the Continental which was made in Scotland before it was made in 
England. Mr. Gompertz was the genuine disciple of the ‘ Ladies’ Diary,’ 
the ‘Mathematical Companion,’ and that tribe of periodicals supported by 
all grades, from the man of business to the artisan, which were read and 
written in by many mathematicians of power to whom the Philosophical 
Transactions were unknown. Mr. Gompertz contracted some marked 
peculiarities. He was the last of the fuwionists: to the day of his death 
he used the notation of Newton, and he held that respect for Newton’s 
memory demanded this adherence, while at the same time he maintained 


XXIV 


the superiority of the system. He never would permit himself the abbre- 
viations log a, sin w, &c.; it was always logarithm of a, sine of a, &e. 
This, and some other consequences of isolated thought, in the mind of a 
man who, was not thrown among his equals in power until he was an old 
student, will be looked at with interest. 

The thing by which Mr. Gompertz will always be remembered, is the 
discovery of the function which so nearly gives the law of human life, 
published in our ‘Transactions.’ His recent developments of his own law 
are as yet sub judice, but they show the continuance of youthful energy to 
a very late period. Those who know the state of the writer when his last 
papers were published, wiil wonder at the vigour of mind which remained 
untouched by bodily weakness. The law above mentioned stands alone as 
capable of physiological enunciation: tell a mathematician that it is “the 
power to oppose decay loses equal proportions in equal times,’ add that 
the constants undergo nearly sudden changes, and he will be able to re- 
establish the whole theory. ; 

In the memoir to which we have alluded will be found a full account of 
Mr. Gompertz’s connexion with the Royal Astronomical Society and other 
Associations. He became a Fellow of this Society in 1819. i 

Sir BenyAmMiIn Heywoop, Bart., born the 12th of December, 1793, of an 
ancient Lancashire family, was the eldest son of Nathaniel Heywood, 
banker in Manchester. His mother was the daughter of Thomas Percival, 
M.D., elected in 1765, at the age of twenty-five, a Fellow of the Royal 
Society, and the author of ‘ Medical Ethics.’ 

After receiving a good school education, Benjamin Heywood completed 
his studies in the University of Glasgow, where he distinguished himself 
in the Logic Class of Professor Jardine, as well as inthe Moral Philosophy 
Class of Professor Mylne. In 1811 he entered on his. hereditary calling 
the bank at Manchester. He married in 1816 the daughter of the late 
Thomas Robinson, Esq. Of this marriage, six sons and two daughters 
survive him. 

The Manchester Mechanics’ Institution was founded in 1824 by the 
active exertions of Mr. Heywood, who for twenty years held the office of 
President, and on his retirement from the presidential chair, the Directors, 
impressed with the suggestive and practical character of his addresses, 
collected and published them. 

Scientific pursuits were always encouraged in the Institution by Mr. 
Heywood. In 1838, after a conversation with Mr. Leonard Horner, F.R.S., 
he recommended certificates of proficiency to be granted to meritorious stu- 
dents when they had completed an allotted course of study. This plan 
was subsequently adopted with benefit to the Institution. 

In 1831 a large majority of the inhabitants of Lancashire were greatly 
nterested in the Reform Bill, which conferred on many of their towns the 
right of representation in parliament. At the general election of that 


XXV 


year, Mr. Heywood was chosen without opposition one of the members 
for the county of Lancaster to support the government measure of reform. 
His courtesy, integrity, and determined adherence to principle, gained for 
him general confidence, but parliamentary life did not suit his health, and 
on the dissolution of parliament, after the passing of the Reform Act in 1832, 
he retired from the arduous duties of a public career. 

Statistics were always an interesting science to Mr. Heywood. He 
earnestly supported the formation of the Manchester Statistical Society, 
conducted a valuable inquiry into the condition of the working classes in 
Manchester, and as one of the officers of the Statistical Section, presented 
the results of this investigation (in 1834) at the Edinburgh Meeting of the 
British Association for the Advancement of Science. 

In 1838, at the accession of Her Majesty Queen Victoria, Lord Mel- 
bourne being Prime Minister, Mr. Heywood was created a baronet. In 
1843 he was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society, and twice held the 
office of a Vice-President of the British Assoeiation, on the successive 
visits of that body to Manchester. He died on the 11th of August, 1865. 


Str WititiAm Jackson Hooxer was born at Norwich on the 6th of 
July, 1785. He was descended of a family which aforetime had given birth 
to men of eminence, and among them the author of the ‘ Ecclesiastical 
Polity.’ Born to affluence, and educated at a school of reputation, he as a 
young man was enabled to devote his life to science, without the need of 
following a special calling. Circumstances brought him early into relation 
with some distinguished naturalists, and among the rest Sir James Ed- 
ward Smith, the most eminent British botanist of his day; and the influ- 
ence of this acquaintanceship combining with his own taste, no doubt, helped 
to decide his choice of a pursuit. In 1809, through the encouragement 
of Sir Joseph Banks, to whom he had become known, young Hooker 
visited Iceland, which he extensively explored, making large collections in 
all branches of Natural History ; but these, together with all his notes and 
drawings, were totally lost on his way home, through the burning of the 
ship in which he was returning. His escape, by the opportune arrival of 
another vessel in mid-ocean, was almost miraculous. An account of it will 
be found in the modest narrative called ‘ Recollections of Iceland.’ 

In 1810-11 he made preparations for accompanying Sir Robert Brown- 
rige, who had been appointed Governor of Ceylon, to that island, then but 
little known to naturalists. With this design, he disposed of his estates, 
and invested the proceeds in securities, which were unfortunately ill- 
chosen, and afterwards much decreased in value. As an illustration of the 
zeal with which he prepared for his enterprise, the fact is recorded that he 
made pen-and-ink copies of the plates and descriptions of the entire manu- 
script series of Roxburgh’s Indian plants, preserved in the India House. 
His plans, however, were frustrated by the intestine troubles in the island 
followed by the Candian war which soon afterwards broke out. 


XXV1 


In 1814 he made a botanizing expedition into France, Switzerland, and 


the north of Italy, which extended over a period of nine months, and in 


the course of which he became acquainted, at Paris and elsewhere, with the 
principal botanists of Europe; thus laying the foundation of a scientific 
intercourse and correspondence which lasted until his death. 

In 1815 he married the eldest daughter of Mr. Dawson Turner, a banker 
in Yarmouth, and settled at Halesworth, in Suffolk, where his house at 
once became the rendezvous of British and foreign botanists, and where 
he commenced the formation of that great Herbarium which is now the 
finest in the world. 

His first botanical work was that on the British Jungermanniz, which 
was completed in 1816. This, which is a model of skilful microscopic 
dissection and accurate description, is illustrated by engravings after draw- 
ings by his own exquisite pencil. The ‘ Muscologia Britannica’ was pub- 
lished in conjunction with Dr. Taylor, in 1817, and was followed by the 
‘Musci Exotici.” These and other works, added to an increasing home 
and foreign correspondence, fully occupied his time for the next five 
years of his life. Meanwhile his property had been rapidly deteriorating, 
and with an increasing family he found it necessary to look out for seme 
remunerative scientific employment. He therefore accepted the Regius 
Professorship of Botany in the University of Glasgow, at that time vacant, 
and removed to that city in 1820. 

His life at Glasgow was entirely devoted to botany; he rose early, and 
went late to bed; he visited but little, and devoted the whole powers of 
his mind and his pencil to his favourite science. He was a most popular 
lecturer, his class being sometimes attended by as many volunteers as 
collegians ; he encouraged his students in the pursuit, by taking them on 
excursions, by giving them rare plants from his duplicates, and by furnish- 
ing them with letters of introduction to all parts of the world when they 
went abroad. He kept up a close connexion with the authorities of the 
Admiralty, Treasury, Foreign, and Colonial Offices; and it was mainly 
through his exertions that botanists were so frequently appointed to the 
various Government expeditions of that period. 

During the twenty years he resided at Glasgow he published his ‘ Flora 
Scotica,’ in which the plants of a great part of the British Isles were for 
the first time arranged according to the natural method; the ‘ Flora Exo- 
tica,’ and (in conjunction with Dr. Greville) the ‘ Icones Filicum ;’ also 
the ‘ Botanical Miscellany,’ the ‘ Journal of Botany,’ the ‘Icones Planta- 
rum,’ the ‘ British Flora,’ the ‘Botany of Ross’s, Parry’s, Franklin’s, 
Back’s, and other Arctic Expeditions;’ the ‘ Flora Boreali-Americana,’ 
and (in conjunction with Dr. Walker Arnott) the ‘ Botany of Beechey’s 
Voyage,’ and various other works of standard authority. In 1826 he 
commenced the authorship of the ‘ Botanical Magazine,’ which he carried 
on for nearly forty years. His Herbarium in the meantime was constantly 
receiving accessions, mainly owing to the indefatigable correspondence he 


XXVIl 


kept up with all parts of the world, and to the number of trained Scotch 
medical students who, when seeking their fortunes in foreign countries, 
continued to send him plants, even up to the day of his death. 

During his residence in Glasgow he was twice offered knighthood, 
which he accepted from William the Fourth in the year 1836; this honour 
being bestowed on him in consideration of his scientific labours, and the 
great services he had rendered to botany. His connexion with Scotland as 
a Professor terminated in 1841, when he was appointed to the Director- 
ship of the Royal Gardens at Kew. 

It is worthy of being recorded that Sir William Hooker, who from the 
commencement of his botanical career felt a strong interest in Kew, had 
never abandoned the secret idea that the time might come when these Gar- 
dens should be-made over to the nation, and become the head-quarters of 
botanical science for England, as well as its colonies and dependencies in 
all parts of the world, and that it might be his fortune to be a chief 
instrument in bringing about this end, and in rendering Kew an establish- 
ment worthy of the country. The idea of devoting the Gardens at Kew to 
this great national and scientific purpose had been keenly cherished by 
John Duke of Bedford, himself an ardent horticulturist. With that 
nobleman Sir William Hooker was on terms of friendship and correspond- 
ence; and the Duke did not fail to urge upon those in political power the 
fulfilment of what was with Sir William himself a favourite project. Upon 
the Duke’s death, his son, the late Duke of Bedford, zealously carried out 
his father’s wishes; but it was upon the present Earl Russell, then Lord 
John, that the chief weight of the transaction fell; and it is to him that 
the nation owes these magnificent gardens. 

In 1841 Mr. Aiton, for fifty years the Director of the Royal Gardens, 
resigned his post at Kew, and was succeeded by Sir William Hooker, who 
entered upon his duties in command of resources for the development of 
the Gardens, such as had never been combined in any other person. Single 
of purpose and straightforward in action, by his honest zeal, and singular 
tact in making his plans clear and obviously advantageous to the public, 
he at once won the confidence of that branch of the Government under 
which he worked. Another means which he at once brought to bear on 
the work in hand, was his extensive foreign and colonial correspondence, 
especially that with students whom he had imbued with a love of botany, 
and who, scattered over the most remote countries of the globe, gladly 
availed themselves of their opportunities of contributing to the scientific 
resources of the establishment. His views were further greatly facilitated 
by his friendly intercourse with the Foreign and Colonial Offices, the Ad- 
miralty, and the East India Company; to all of whom he had been the 
means of rendering service, by his judicious recommendation of former 
pupils to posts in their employment, and by publishing the botanical re- 
sults of the expeditions they sent out. Nor can we omit to mention here 
the late curator of the Royal Gardens, Mr. John Smith, an officer of un- 


On 


usual botanical and horticultural knowledge, by whom he was zealously 
seconded in all his plans. / 

To describe the various improvements which have resulted in the pre- 
sent establishment,—including, as it does, a botanic garden of 75 acres, and 
a pleasure-ground or arboretum of 270 acres, three museums, stored with 
many thousand specimens of vegetable products, and a magnificent Library 
and Herbarium (for the greater part the private property of Sir William), 
placed in the late King of Hanover’s house on one side of Kew Green, and 
adjoining the Gardens,—would rather be to give a history of the Gardens 
than to sketch the life of their Director; it will suffice, therefore, to 
record the following dates of the more interesting events which have 
marked their progress. 

The first step was the opening of the Gardens to the public on week- 
days, which followed immediately upon Sir William entering upon the 
Directorship. Rather more than 9000 persons visited them during the 
first year of their being thrown open, and the number has steadily in- 
ereased. In 1864 the number of visitors amounted to 473,307. 

About 1843 the Queen granted from the contiguous pleasure-ground an 
addition of 47 acres, including a piece of water, by the side of which the 
Palm stove was afterwards erected. 2 

In 1846 the Royal Kitchen and Forcing Gardens, which ran along the 
side of the Richmond-road, were added. Upon this piece of ground stood 
an old fruit-house, since memorable as the origin of the first Museum of 
Economic Botany that ever existed. Sir William requested that thi 
building might not be pulled down, but that it might be fitted up to receiv 
specimens of vegetable products illustrative of the nature and uses of 
plants, and the whole thrown open to the public. Through the exertions 
of the indefatigable Director, aided by Mr. Smith, the Economic Collection 
has now become important and well known. 

In 1861 was commenced the large Temperate House in the pleasure- 
grounds, often called the Winter Garden; the last building wanting to 
complete the establishment as representing horticulture. This beautiful 
building, which is not yet completed, was designed by Mr. Decimus Burton, 
and is admirably adapted to its purpose; the interior arrangement of the 
beds, and of the plants in them, which have been so much admired, is, 
however, wholly due to Sir William’s judgment and taste. 

It might be supposed that the twenty-four years spent at Kew in con- 
triving and directing these public improvements, added to the daily cor- 
respondence and superintendence of the Gardens, would have left but little 
time and energy for scientific pursuits; such, however, was far from being 
the case. By keeping up the active habits of his early life, Sir William was 
enabled to get through a greater amount of scientific work than any other 
botanist of his age. The ‘ British Flora,’ which has now reached the 12th 
edition, he made over to his successor in the Glasgow chair, Dr. Walker 
Arnott ; but his monthly ‘Journal of Botany’ was recommenced ; first ap- 


XXV1il 


XXi1X 


pearing as the ‘London,’ and afterwards as the ‘ Kew Journal of Botany ;’ 
which together extended to seventeen annual volumes, and was enriched with 
papers of his own; with letters from his correspondents in all parts of the 
world; with reviews of botanical works; with contributions on physiolo- 
gical, structural, and systematic botany ; and with notices of the progress 
of the science everywhere. With the exception of carrying on the ‘ Bo- 
tanical Magazine,’ for the last fifteen years of his life most of his leisure 
was devoted to the study of Ferns, and on this subject he published two 
works of standard value, the fruit of great labour—the ‘Genera Filicum,’ 
with illustrations by the late Mr. Francis Bauer, and the ‘Species Filicum,’ 
commenced in the year i846, and finished only last year. This work, 
which is in five volumes, and contains the only complete systematic de- 
scription of the vast tribe of plants to which it is devoted, would of itself 
have been sufiicient to establish a botanical reputation, and is regarded as 
a standard authority upon the subject. During the last few years of his 
life, he also published his ‘ Garden Ferns,’ ‘ Exotic Ferns,’ and ‘ British 
Ferns ;’ all beautifully illustrated, and with descriptions from his own pen. 
At the date of his death he was engaged upon a ‘ Synopsis Filicum,’ of 
which one number only has appeared. 

In connexion with the scientific labours of Sir William Hooker, there 
are two names which should be prominently mentioned. The one is that 
of Lady Hooker, who for forty years was his able amanuensis and assistant 
in literary work, and the other that of Mr. Walter Fitch, now one of the 
most distinguished botanical artists in Kurope. Up to about 1835, Sir 
William made the drawings for his works with his own hand; but about 
that time he was fortunate in having the skill of this artist brought before 
him, whose talents he encouraged, and whose services he eventually secured 
for the illustration of his works. Most faithfully has Mr. Fitch seconded 
his early patron and friend in his labours. Of their extent some idea may 
be formed from the fact that Mr. Fitch has executed in the last thirty 
years upwards of 4000 drawings of plants, all of which have been published 
by Sir William. 

Of Sir William Hooker it mav be said, that an almost unbounded libera- 
lity was one of his most prominent features; and scientific Botany is more 
indebted to him than to any individual since Sir Joseph Banks, for the 
progress it has made within the last halfcentury. In his dealings with the 
nation his conduct was as liberal as it was towards his fellow-botanists. For 
the first twelve years of his residence at Kew, his Herbarium and Library 
were not only kept up at his own expense for the use and benefit of the Royal 
Gardens, but were open to every botanist who applied at his house to make 
use of them. To him we are indebted for the appointment not only of 
botanists but naturalists to the majority of the Government expeditions of 
discovery, survey, and research, which have been sent out during the last 
thirty years; and it has been mainly through his energy that funds have 
been forthcoming from Government to meet the after expenses of publishing 


—" 


their results. To young botanists he was especially kind and helpful ; 
indeed there are few cultivators of this science in Europe or America who 
have not borne cordial testimony to his generosity and encouragement. 
Amongst his latest efforts has been the inducing of the Home and Colonial 
Governments to grant the necessary funds for the publication of the Fleras 
of their possessions ; and within the two last years of his life he prevailed 
upon Sir Charles Wood, the President of the Indian Board, in like manner 
to support the publication of the Flora of British India; while, through 
the influence of his steady friend Karl Russell, he has also procured a grant 
for the publication of the Flora of tropical Africa. 

Sir William was in person tall, athletic, and active; in features remark- 
ably good-looking, animated, and cheerful ; his conversation had the charm 
of intellectual cultivation and refinement, and he had a ready power of 
conveying clear information. As a scientific correspondent he was unri- 
valled; promptly answering every letter with his own hand; encouraging 
those who first addressed him, and stimulating those who flagged. Indeed 
he was wont to attribute his success in the creation of the National Gardens 
and the accompanying Museums to his habit of thanking every contributor 
at once, answering all their questions at whatever trouble, naming the 
plants they sent, and applying personally to residents in every part of the 
world for such plants or their products as he desired to have in the Gar- 
dens. 

He was an LL.D. of Glasgow, D.C.L. of Oxford; a Fellow of the Royal 
Societies of London and Edinburgh, the Linnean, Antiquarian, Geogra- 
phical, and other Societies; a Knight of Hanover, Companion of the 
Legion of Honour, a Correspondent of the Academy of France, and a 
member of almost every other learned Academy in Kurope and America. 
The date of his election into the Royal Society was January 9, 1812. 

He died at Kew on the 12th of August, 1865, in the 81st year of his age, 
after a very short illness, of a complaint in the throat, then epidemic at 
that place. 

He leaves a widow, two married daughters, and one son, Dr. Joseph 
Dalton Hooker, F.R.S., now Director of the Royal Gardens. 


XXX 


Joun Linpiry was the son of a nurseryman of considerable ability, 
who was the author of a manual of horticulture. He was born at Catton, 
near Norwich, on the 5th of February, 1799, and was educated at the 
Grammar School of Norwich under Dr. Valpy. He left school at the age 
of sixteen, and was employed for three or four years in his father’s nursery, 
devoting all his leisure time to the study of botany and horticulture with 
that remarkable energy and untiring perseverance which characterized his 
whole life. His father failing in business shortly before he came of age, 
young Lindley was thrown on his own resources, not only for his own sup- 
port, but for the discharge of his father’s debts, which he took upon him- 
self. Proceeding to London in 1819, he obtained from Sir Joseph Banks 


XXX1 


_ (to whom he was introduced by Sir William (then Mr.) Hooker, his earliest 
scientific friend) the position of his assistant librarian, and at this early age 
began the long series of works with which his name will be for ever iden- 
tified by the publication of a translation of Richard’s ‘ Analyse du Fruit,’ 
made at Mr. Hooker’s house at Halesworth in Suffolk at one sitting, which, 
however, lasted two days and three nights. 

In 1822 Lindley became Garden Assistant Secretary to the Horticul- 
tural Society, an appointment which influenced his whole career, as he re- 
mained connected with that Society, in one capacity or other, throughout 
his whole working life. The gardens at Chiswick were at that time in 
process of formation, and to their development he devoted all his energy. 
In 1826 he became sole Assistant Secretary, conducting, under the Hono- 
rary Secretaries Joseph Sabine, Bentham, Henderson, Gowen, and Royle, all 
the proceedings of that active Society, which has for go long a time takena 
prominent part in advancing horticulture to the position it now holds in 
this country both as a science and an art. 

Not satisfied with these laborious duties, which would have tasked all 
the energies of a man of ordinary capacity for work, Lindley became in 
1829 Professor of Botany in University College, an appointment which he 
held for upwards of thirty years. He was a remarkably exact, clear and im- 
pressive lecturer, possessed an admirable faculty of lucid exposition, and 
was most copious in illustration. He never read his lectures, but they were 
always carefully studied beforehand. | 

Nor were these various occupations enough for his ever active mind. 
Thoroughly versed in the literature of Botany and its kindred sciences, he 
found time to prepare a series of general works on almost every branch of 
the science, all of great value, and many of them still standard books of 
reference in the hands of students. Beginning his career as a naturalist at 
the time when the natural system of Botany was acquiring its highest de- 
velopment in France, though known only to a few in England, where the 
Linnean system was still universally taught, Lindley brought all the weight 
of his teaching and all the force of his controversial powers to the support 
of the new system, and was, if not the leader, at least the most prominent 
advocate of a change now universal. His ‘Synopsis of the British Flora,’ 
published in 1829, was followed by an ‘ Introduction to the Natural System 
of Botany’ in 1830, which passed through a second edition in 1836, and 
took the form of ‘The Vegetable Kingdom,’ probably the best known of 
all his works, in 1846. To Medical Botany he contributed an excellent 
Flora Medica, to Paleontology the well-known Fossil Flora, in which 
Mr. Hutton was his coadjutor, and to Horticultural Science a work on the 
Theory and Practice of Horticulture, which he himself regarded as perhaps 
his most important work, probably because it contained the greatest amount 
of original matter. 

To these general works must be added a long series of monographs and 
isolated descriptions of plants in a great many periodicals. From his posi- 


XXX 


tion at the Horticultural Society he had the earliest opportunity of Seeing _ 
novelties, and made it his business to describe all that came before him. 

He edited for a long series of years the ‘ Botanical Register,’ a periodical 
devoted to iigures and descriptions of new or rare plants of general interest, 

and contributed a large portion of many other serial works. His earliest 
monograph was that on Roses, published in 1820 in his -twenty-first year. 
This was followed in 1821 by ‘Collectanea Botanica,’ an illustrated work 
published at the expense of Mr. Cattley, an eminent amateur cultivator. 

Soon after he became connected with the Horticultural Society he began 
to devote himself specially to the study of Orchidez, a family the investi- 
gation of which is extremely difficult unless from living plants, and which 
from the multiplicity of its forms and the minuteness and intricacy of its 
flowers, tasks to the utmost the powers of observation of the naturalist. 

With this family his name will be for ever associated, not only as the de- 
scriber of a very great number of new genera and species, but as the author 
of a series of general works, the last of which, ‘ Folia Orchidacea,’ to the 
regret of all naturalists, was left unfinished at his death. It was with spe- 
cial reference to the important service he rendered to seience by these great 
- works that the Royal Medal of the Society was awarded to him in 1857, 
though the value of his other labours was also duly recognized. 

Till he was past fifty, Dr. Lindley was wont to say that he never knew 
what it was to feel tired either in body or mind. His first illness was 
the result of his arduous duties as a juror of the Great Exhibition of 1851, 
but a few months’ rest seemed to restore him to his usual health. Unfor- 
tunately, much against the wish of his family, he undertook the charge of 
the Colonial Department of the Exhibition of 1862, and though constantly 
ailing he refused to abandon his post, and carried its duties successfully to 
aclose. The effort was too great. His mental and physical powers re- 
ceived a shock from which they never recovered. He was compelled to 
relinquish all active employment, though his bodily health remained good 
till the 1st of November in 1865, when he was carried off by apoplexy 
in his sixty-seventh year. The date of his election into the Royal Society 
is January 17, 1828. 


JoHN WiLL1AmM Luseock was born March 26, 1803. His father, the 
second baronet of his name, was at the head of the banking and mercantile 
firm of Lubbock and Co. The son, though of a tender constitution, was 
partly educated at Hton, and was then placed under the care of Dr. (after- 
wards Bishop) Maltby. Here he might have made progress in the classics, 
but his turn had been towards exact science from his earliest years. His 
father had intended him for Oxford, but, at his own earnest request, he 
was placed at Trinity College, Cambridge, in 1821. The continental ma- 
thematics had been recently introduced into general study, and Mr. Lub- 
bock, perceiving their superior power as means of investigation, spent his 
first long vacation at Paris, and became a confirmed folie of that 


XXX1it 


school. Even in his own path, his reading was very much directed to the 
subjects of his subsequent career; and he had no motive to seek univer- 
sity honours as a means of success in life. Accordingly, in the Tripos of 
1825, he obtained no higher place than that of first of the senior Optimes, 
though his power and reading as a mathematician were well known *. 
This commencement was of a character which lasted. Sir John Lubbock 
was throughout life engaged in following up a special scientific pursuit, 
which was his main business as an investigator, as it had been his main 
study at the University. 

On leaving college he spent a short time in travelling, and on his return 
commenced a life of business asa partner in his father’s house, and a life 
of scientific inquiry. He joined the Astronomical Society in 1828, and our 
Society in 1829. In this year he was also a member of the committee for 
the Diffusion of Useful Knowledge, on which he worked for many years. 
The establishment of the ‘ British Almanac’ in 1827 owed much to his 
superintendence ; and this work stimulated his attention to the theory of 
the tides. In the ‘Companion’ for 1830 appears his first scientific writ- 
ing, a descriptive memoir on the tides. It is the most precise account of 
the existing state of the subject; its history has dates, and its explana- 
tions have formule. Mr. Lubbock was the colleague of Whewell and 
others in calling attention to the necessity of observation of the tides. In 
1834 the Royal Medal was awarded to him for his researches on the subject. 

In 1833 he married a daughter of Lieut.-Col. Hotham. He was the 
first Vice-Chancellor of the University of London, a Treasurer of the Great 
Exhibition of 1851, a Visitor of the Greenwich Observatory, and a member 
of various scientific commissions. He was Treasurer and Vice-President 
of the Royal Society from 1830 to 1835, and again from 1838 to 
1845. ‘At his father’s death he was left the only working partner; and 
his reign of sole management included the panics of 1847 and 1857. 
His entrance into the house was marked by the panic of 1825, in which 
the firm weathered with honour a run of unprecedented severity; the 
severest competitive examination, says one of the journals, which a bank 
ever stood. Sir J. Lubbock never liked business, but he attended to it 
with perfect regularity. His early mornings and evenings were devoted 
to science, but not without exciting remark. In the day which has 
gone by, a man of business, or a professional man, was required to abstain 
from ever ything useful in private life or ornamental in society. He might 
spend leisure in sporting, in cards, in smoking, in eating and drinking, or 
in talking politics; but not in promoting science, nor in any unselfish 
addition to social pleasure. He might listen to music, but woe to the banker 
or the physician who should sing or play the violin in company. Sir J. 
Lubbock is one of an eminent band who have driven this paltry prejudice 

* Jt is necessary to explain to those who are not connected with Cambridge that 


this triple superlative, First Senior Optime, means the head of the second elise of 
university honours, 


VOL, X¥. ad 


XXXIV 


out of society. There is extant a letter of his (Oct. 30, 1840) to a busi- 
ness associate, who had remonstrated in the usual way. ‘There is,” he 
says, “one circumstance which gave me much pain in a letter you wrote to 
my late father some time since. You alluded to my position as Treasurer 
and Vice-President of the Royal Society . . . But if by rising early and 
late taking rest, or if in hours which others devote to society or sports 
of the field, I choose to investigate questions in astronomy, or in any 
other science, I do not consider that any of the correspondents of the 
house are warranted in addressing to me any reproach. I submit these 
remarks to your friendly consideration.” 

After his father’s death he withdrew almost entirely from society, and 
resided at High Elms, in Kent. Here he showed that there was time left 
from the wants both of business and of science. He was a farmer, and 
his southdowns and shorthorns (in which Lord Althorp himself did not 
take more pride than he) carried off many prizes. He planted choice 
shrubs and trees, especially conifers ; he kept up three village schools ; and 
he instructed his own children in mathematics. The old man of (nothing 
but) business might shake his head and say, Ah! that house will never stand 
what it stood under old Sir John: but, nevertheless, it kept up both eredit 
and confidence, and joined another old bank in 1860. The firm of Ro- 
barts, Lubbock, and Co. has fully answered all expectations. By this junc- 
tion Sir J. Lubbock had intended to give himself comparative leisure ; for 
fifteen years he had never been away from business for three consecutive 
days. The leisure was gained, but the power of using it was gone; the 
work of two lives was a run upon the strength of one which ended in 
failure. He became a sufferer from gout, and the last five years of his 
life were marked by increasing debility. He died January 20, 1865, the 
immediate cause being valvular disease in the heart. He often said he had 
done his work and was quite ready to go. He leaves behind him the memory 
of an upright and benevolent man, utterly free from selfseeking, and devoted 
to high pursuits by high moral motives and strong intellectual impulses. 

Sir J. Lubbock’s researches in the lunar and planetary theories date 
from the year 1832 ; his separate work, ‘ On the Theory of theMoon and on 
the Perturbations of the Planets,’ was published, the principal portion, dur- 
ing the years 1834 to 1838, but there are supplementary parts up to 1850. 

In the lunar theory, as originally established by Clairaut, the true longi- 
tude of the moon is taken as the independent variable; and Laplace was 
of opinion that, on account of the magnitude of the lunar inequalities, this 
was, in fact, the only safe course; it was accordingly adopted by him in 
his own researches, and also in Damoiseau’s memoir, in the unpublished 
memoir of Carlini and Plana, and in Plana’s great work on the lunar 
theory. The time or mean longitude of the moon, and the radius vector 
and latitude, are in the first instance obtained im terms of the true longi- 
tude of the moon, and then by reversion of series, the true longitude, 
the radius vector, and the latitude are expressed in terms of the time. 


XXKV 


But in the theories of Laplace and Damoiseau, the coefficients of the 
several inequalities are presented in an unreduced form, involving denomi- 
nators and auxiliary quantities, which it is assumed are to be calculated 
numerically, and by means of them the final numerical values of the coefii- 
cients are obtained. In Plana’s work, on the contrary, the coefficients are 
presented completely developed in powers and products of e, e’, y, m (the 
excentricities of the two orbits, the tangent of the inclination, and the ratio 
of the mean motions) with coefficients, which are, of course, absolutely 
determinate numbers. 

The results so presented constitute, to the degree of approximation 
preserved, a complete algebraical solution of the problem ; they are deter- 
minate results, in no wise dependent for their truth on the convergency of 
the series, and they are of course absolutely independent of the particular 
process made use of for obtaining them. They are consequently results 
obtainable by the adoption of the time as the independent variable; and 
this is, in fact, the course followed by Lubbock—viz., taking the time as 
the independent variable, he obtains directly the expressions of the true lon- 
gitude, latitude, and radius vector in terms of the time ; expressions strictly 
comparable with those of Plana, and which, but for the different significa- 
tions of the e and y in the two theories, would be identical therewith. The 
advantage of Lubbock’s method is its directness; the expressions for the 
solar coordinates are in both theories given in the first instance by the 
elliptical theory in terms of the time, and in Lubbock’s theory they are 
used in that form ; whereas, in the theory of Clairaut, they have to be 
transformed into functions of the true longitude of the moon, and the so 
transformed expressions are used in the calculation of the time and the 
radius vector and latitude of the moon in terms of the true longitude; and 
there is, finally, the laborious reversion of series whereby the co-ordinates 
of the moon are expressed in terms of the time. 

The researches on the tides are not easily described. They consist in the 
main of the application of the existing theory to masses of observation. 
Sir J. Lubbock was the first who introduced to the fullest extent the plan 
of consolidating the results of all the observations: Laplace took chiefly 
those made at the times when the irregularity under investigation was near 
its maximum. A clear account of Lubbock’s mode of proceeding is given 
by Mr. Airy in his article on the tides (§ 489-491) in the ‘ Encyclo- 
peedia Metropolitana.’ We may mention that the man of business was in 
this matter a valuable colleague of the man of science. Mr. Lubbock’s 
relations with the late Mr. Solly, Chairman of the London Dock Com- 
pany, procured him access to the observations made at the docks through 
a golden number of years (1808-1826). We should rather say, procured. 
him the knowledge of the existence of the observations. Mr. Solly, we 
are sure from knowledge, would gladly have communicated his information 
to any inquirer ; and the Board would have given hearty assent, But 

d 2 


XXXVI 


many investigators might have passed a life in the subject without arriving 
at the fact that the observations existed. | 

In a separate work on the heat of vapours and on refraction (1840), 
the assumption is that the absolute heat of a gas may be represented by 
A + B x (temperature). <A relation between pressure and temperature 
is then deduced, the constants of which can be determined by joint obser- 
vations of pressure and temperature. The observations of Arago and 
Dulong (Mém. Inst. x. 231), and of Ure (Phil. Trans. 1818), are thus 
satisfied. Employing the observations of Gay-Lussac (Conn. des Temps, 
1841), he deduces a formula for the calculation of heights by barometrical 
observation, and then proceeds to the subject of refraction. In this 
matter, to a great extent, he follows Ivory. The investigation is never- 
theless new and peculiar, and the conclusions are remarkable. The results 
of Lubbock’s theory and Bessel’s Tables are almost identical. Down to 65° 
of zenith distance the difference is not 0:01; nor from thence to 87° does 
it ever amount to 1"°0; at 88° it is 4"°0. It would require a very large 
number of observations to discriminate between them. It appears there- 
fore that, from the assumption that the differences of absolute heat in a gas 
are directly proportional to the difference of temperature, Lubbock has built 
up a theory agreeing with observation, all his constants, with the exception 
of one, being determined independently of astronomical observations. His 
theory also gives a value of the horizontal refraction agreeing closely with 
the best determinations of that quantity. His atmosphere is a limited one 
of about twenty-two miles. 

About the year 1830 Mr. Lubbock, jointly with Mr. Drinkwater 
(Bethune), wrote a tract of thirty-two pages on ‘ Probability’ in the Library 
of Useful Knowledge. This most excellent little work ranks as the 
earliest, and, its size considered, the best of the modern English introduc- 
tions to the subject. Of late years it has become almost a rule, in citing 
this work, to insist on the authorship. A binder put Mr. De Morgan’s 
name on the outside of a large issue; and though for more than fifteen 
years every channel of publicity, from the ‘Times’ newspaper downwards, 
has been employed to correct the mistake, entire success has not yet been 
obtained. ‘This work, though perfectly elementary, has that taste of the 
higher methods which those who are familiar with them can infuse into 
common algebra. Mr. Lubbock showed his familiarity with Laplace, 
before any one in Britain, by two papers in the Cambridge Transactions 
(vol. iii. part 1), on the calculation of annuities, and on comparison of 
tables. At the time of publication there was no actuary, except Mr. 
Benjamin Gompertz, who could have read them: the state of things is 
now different, and the papers have been reprinted in the Assurance 
Magazine (vol. ix.). In the same volume is an illustration of the way in 
which the doctrine of probability applies in every subject. It is a paper 
contributed by Sir J. Lubbock, on the clearing of the London bankers. 


XXXVI 


By observation it was ascertained that the daily difference at the clearing- 
house, the money actually wanted to balance the demands of those who 
are to receive and those who are to pay, is only, one day with another, 
£29,000. To meet daily contingencies, the banks keep in the Bank of 
England balances which amount to from 23 to 3 millions. Sir J. Lubbock 
recommends that the clearmg balance should be paid out of a common 
fund, which would put the banks so far in the position of being one con- 
cern, and would enable them to employ a large part of the sums they 
must now leave idle. The goodness of the advice is manifest. This 
paper, the last we believe of Sir J. Lubbock’s writings, begins with 

Atque equidem, extremo ni jam sub fine laborum 

Vela traham, et terris festinem advertere proram, &c. &c., 
and ends with a similar prediction in English. For some years he had 
begun to feel that his end was approaching; and though it turned out 
that his life was to be preserved to his family and his friends for a few 
years longer, the prophecy was but too weli founded as to his scientific 
career, 


JoHN RicHARDSON was born on the 5thof Noyember,1787, in Dumfries, 
of which town his father, Gabriel Richardson, was an influential and highly 
respected inhabitant. This gentleman was a Magistrate of the county and 
several times Provost of Dumfries. 

A great philosophical poet has said, 


‘“‘ The child is father of the man.’’ 


The sentiment, judging from what is recorded of young Richardson, is 
peculiarly appropriate to him. 

The influences by which he was surrounded in infancy were all of a 
happy kind, and well adapted to the development of those qualities for 
which in his varied and adventurous life he was distinguished. Some of 
these may be briefly adverted to. 

The rough sports and exercises of schoolboys tending to invigorate the 
frame, and in which he was preeminent for activity and enterprise, may 
have conduced to that bodily strength and power of endurance which served. 
him so well in manhood,—so well, indeed, that even beyond the middle 
term of life he had been known to say he scarcely knew fatigue. 

Of the higher influences, those affecting the mind, the moral character, 
the chief, no doubt, were such as were exercised over him by his nearest 
relations: of these, his mother and maternal grandmother, women of 
notable worth and ability, may deserve the first mention, they being his 
earliest instructors. The latter lived at a charming spot, Rosebank, in 
the neighbourhood of the town. There as a schoolboy he was always glad 
to go on a holiday; and there his love of the beautiful im nature appears 
to have been formed. Early he had been heard to express a hope that 
there, where he had so much enjoyment, he might, if spared, be able to 
retire and end his days. 


XXXVI 


A great living example of high and fervid intellect cannot but affect 
the mind of youth. Such was Burns to him: Burns was often at Mr. 
Richardson’s house, a welcome guest, both whilst he lived in Nithsdale 
and later in Dumfries, till his death in 1796. It happened that his 
eldest son, Robert, a boy of great intellectual promise, and young Richard- 
son, both of the same age, were entered at the grammar school on the 
same day, and it is remembered that the Poet on that occasion said play- 
fully, ‘‘I wonder which of the two will be the greatest man.” It was 
during his school-period that young Richardson first read the ‘ Faerie 
Queene,’ and it was of Burns that he borrowed the book. Half a century 
later he was present at the National Festival held in honour of the Poet 
in Edinburgh in 1859 ; and he then expressed the great pleasure he had 
in his recollections of him, particularizing how on one of the Sunday even- 
ings Burns, when at his father’s house, called his attention to some of the 
paraphrases in his Bible which he most admired, two of which he re- 
quested the boy to get by heart and repeat to him: of these, one was for- 
gotten, the other was the 66th, beginning ‘‘ How bright these glorious 
spirits shine.” 

Early he gave proof of a quick and precocious mind. He could read 
well, it is reported, at the age of four. He was then placed at a prepara- 
tory school, and two years later at the grammar school, taught by Mr. 
Gray, better known afterwards as a man of letters in Edinburgh, and one 
of the Masters there of the High School. This was in 1793. In 1801, 
when only fourteen, he was sent to the University of Edinburgh, where 
thus early he began his Medical Studies, which were continued during two 
years, and then, when only sixteen, he received the appointment of House 
Surgeon in the Infirmary of his native town, the duties of which he per- 
formed for nearly two years. He now returned to Edinburgh, and shortly 
after passed an examination before the College of Surgeons and received 
the diploma of Surgeon. In the following year, having just reached his 
eighteenth year, he entered the Royal Navy as Assistant Surgeon. The 
war at that time was raging in all its intensity, and promotion then rapidly 
rewarded merit. Ina year he was advanced to a Surgeoncy. This was after 
he had been employed in a boat night attack, for which he had volunteered, 
on a French brig of war in the Tagus. During the remainder of the war 
his services were various—in the Baltic in the second expedition against 
Copenhagen, on the western coast of Africa, in the Mediterranean, on the 
western coast of Spain, in the North Sea, and again in the Baltic, on the 
coast of America, on the Canadian Lakes; and lastly, during the short 
war with the United States in 1814, he was present, attached to a marine 
battalion, at the taking of Cumberland Island and the town of St. Mary’s 
in Georgia. 

Shortly after the peace he retired on half-pay, and engaged in private 
practice at Leith, where (in 1818) he married the second daughter of W. 
Stiven, Esq., of that town. The leisure he had there, and the vicmity of 


XXXI1X 


Leith to Edinburgh, enabled him to continue his medical and other allied 
studies, of which Botany was especially a favourite. In 1817 he passed 
his examinations and took the degree of M.D. Two years later, when an 
expedition was fitted out by Government to explore by land the northern 
coast of America, under the command of Lieut. Franklin, R.N., he volun- 
teered his services, and received the appointment of Surgeon and Naturalist 
to the party. 

This was the beginning of that career in which he so distinguished him- 
self; and it was also the beginning of that friendship with Sir John Frank- 
lin, of which, twenty-nine years afterwards, he gave such a chivalrous proof 
in taking the command, at his own reauest, of the overland expedition, at 
that time fitted out by the Government, to go in quest of the ‘ Erebus’ 
and ‘Terror,’ the melancholy history of which ships, of their gallant crews, 
and heroical commander can never be forgotten. 

The account of the first Expedition, under the title of “Narrative of a 
Journey to the Polar Sea in the years 1819, 1820, 1821, 1822,”’ by Franklin, 
amply shows what an important part Richardson took in it: and the indebt- 
edness of its commander to him for the manner in which he performed his 
duties and afforded his Chief assistance is most amply acknowledged. Apart 
_ from the varied, valuable, and curious information collected relative to. 
regions and tribes of people before little known, much of the narrative, 
especially that pathetic portion descriptive of privations and sufferings, and 
that part contributed by Richardson relative to the stern duty of depriving 
a fellow creature of life, who, there was the strongest proof, had forfeited 
it by the murder of an officer of the party, with a further design on the 
lives of others, cannot be read without a feeling of emotion blended with 
admiration for what was endured and done. 

During the remainder of his long period of service as a Naval Medical 
Officer, terminating in his retirement in 1855, he never was employed 
afloat. He had first charge of the Melville Hospital at Chatham, and 
afterwards, when promoted to the rank of Inspector of Naval Hospitals and 
Fleets, that of Haslar Hospital. His position now was peculiarly favour- 
able ; first, in affording facilities for proseenting his studies—he was always 
a student—especially in natural history ; and secondly, as contributing to 
his comfort, and probably health; for he was the victim of sea-sickness, a 
malady from which he had increase of suffering with advancing age, lat- 
terly even to the endangering of life. Always remarkable for industry and 
power of application, these qualities were strikingly displayed whilst in 
medical charge of each of those hospitals. His special duties were not a 
little onerous, yet by making the most of his time, he was able to contri- 
bute largely to the advancement of science in its natural history and geo- 
graphical departments, of which his successive publications afford the best 
proof—those publications for which a Royal Medal was awarded him by the 
Council of this Society in 1856, ten years after he had received the honour 
of Knighthood conferred on him by the Queen in acknowledgment of his 


ily 


distinguished service; he had previously, viz.,in 1851, had the honour 
conferred on him of Commander of the Bath. It would be out of place 
here to dilate on his professional attamments ; but it should not be passed 
over, as showing how he blended science and medicine, that to him chiefly 
the Medical Department of the Navy is indebted for the Museum which 
is established at Haslar, and to which he largely contributed. 

If fortunate in his position, he was not less so in the estimation in which 
he was held by the authorities in power. Hence, when Sir John Franklin 
had to prepare for his second expedition to the shores of the Polar Sea, he 
again received the appointment which he had in the first. In consequence 
moreover of the great confidence placed in him, he was entrusted with a sepa- 
rate and important charge, that of exploring the coast between the Mac- 
kenzie and Copper Mine rivers, and later, with the sole command of the party 
sent to the same region in quest of his friend on the occasion of Sir John 
Franklin’s last and fatal exploring enterprise. A just appreciation of what 
he accomplished in both instances can be formed only by the perusal of the 
two works in which these Expeditions are described ; one, ‘“‘ The Narrative 
of a second Expedition to the Shores of the Polar Sea in the years 1825, 
1826, and 1827;” the other entitled ‘‘ Arctic Searching Expedition: A 
Journal of a boat’s voyage through Rupert’s Land and the Arctic Sea in 
search of the Discovery Ships under the command of Sir John Franklin, 
with an Appendix on the Physical Geography of North America.” Both 
which works, one by Franklin, the other by Richardson, were published 
by authority. 

This second expedition, under the command of Sir John Franklin, 
affords a remarkable contrast to the first,—that so disastrous in its results 
as regards human suffering and loss of life, this so successful, at least in 
these relations and the amount of information obtained,—mainly owing to 
the better arrangements made for the provisioning and conveyance of the 
party, forewarned by the experience gained in the first; during the whole 
time not a life was lost, nor was there any amount of privation experienced 
even temporarily endangering health*. 

In his last expedition in quest of his friend, in which greater difficulties 
and dangers were encountered than in the preceding, the same good 
fortune as to the preservation of health and life was experienced. The 
engaging in this undertaking by Richardson was, indeed, as before said, a 
chivalrous act and the strongest proof that could be given of devoted 
friendship. It should be remembered that he was then entering his sixty- 
first year, that he separated himself from a happy home and from children 
he tenderly loved, and this, let it not be forgotten, with the entire sanction of 
his wife, she fully entering into and appreciating his noble sense of duty. 
That the Government should have accepted his offered services was what 
might be expected; for whom could they have selected for zeal and knowledge 


* After Franklin had left his party, on his return he was informed of the death of 
one man belonging to it from accident, and of another from pulmonary consumption. 


ahi 


better qualified for the search ?—resting on the belief they had come to, 
that Franklin, according to his instructions, would, as was afterwards proved 
(proved by the relics discovered, and as~ Richardson was confident), 
attempt the North-west Passage by Lancaster Sound—that passage which, 
after Franklin, was more happily accomplished first by Sir Robert M‘Clure, 
and then by Sir Leopold M‘Clintock—this the crowning reward of the vast 
efforts which for a series of years and at an enormous cost had been so 
heroically made, to the enduring credit of our country, for determining the 
great geographical problem of the Northwest Passage. 

The account of this search, as published in two volumes in 1851, is, in 
accordance with its title of Journal, minute in details, and, from its minute- 
ness, very instructive and deserving of study, abounding, as it does, in 
varied information in relation to the geology of the country passed through, 
its natural productions and inhabitants—a model, in brief, of the journal of 
a scientific traveller well trained by laborious experience, and of which the 
value must increase as the regions it treats of, especially the Lake Districts 
of Canada and the territory of the old Hudson’s Bay Company, become, as 
they deserve, more resorted to and colonized. 

On his return from this expedition he resumed his duties at Haslar Hos- 
pital, where he continued until he tendered his resignation in 1855. He 
then retired with his family to the Lake District of Westmoreland, where, 
at Lancrigg, in Easedale, in the neighbourhood of Grasmere,—a spot sur- 
passing even in beauty the longed for retreat, Rosebank, the aspiration of 
his boyish days,—he passed the remaining years of his life, which, when 
he was apparently in perfect health, was suddenly terminated, by what was 
inferred to have been apoplexy, on the 6th of June, 1865, in his 77th year. 
He was buried in Grasmere churchyard, the burying-place of the greatest 
of the Lake Poets, Wordsworth. 

This period of his retirement, the complement of his distinguished career, 
was one of almost unchequered enjoyment, and would have been com- 
pletely so, but for the loss of one of his children, his eldest daugh- 
ter. Active as ever with unimpaired faculties, whilst he recreated himself 
with gardening, he devoted much of his time to his favourite pursuits, 
natural history, and latterly philology, for which he had always a pre- 
dilection. Here he edited Yarrell’s ‘ British Fishes,’ the last edition, 
which he enriched with many additions ; and here he wrote his history of 
Arctic and Antarctic research, bearing the title of “‘The Polar Regions,” 
a work especially remarkable for erudition, candour, and mastery of the 
subject, and for undertaking which he was so eminently prepared and 
qualified by the experience he had gained in his three exploring ex- 
peditions. Though so occupied, he seemed always to have leisure and 
time at command ; he was always ready to give his professional aid to any 
of the poor people in the neighbourhood wanting medical advice; and 
having been appointed a magistrate of the county, he performed the re- 
quired duties in his habitual conscientious and zealous manner. 


“xiii 

If one quality more than another predominated in the well-balanced 
faculties of this excellent man, it was his modesty with freedom from pre- 
tension. This is strikingly displayed in words of his own, written down, 
but never spoken, on the occasion of his receiving the Royal Medal 
awarded him, as already mentioned, in 1856. We give them with the 
hope that they may serve as an incitement to others, who think humbly 
of themselves, to follow his example. . : 

«« More than the usual period allotted to one generation has long passed — 
away-since, through the circumstance of my being appointed Surgeon to 
a small body of ‘Arctic explorers, I had to travel over a country reaching 
from the great American lakes to the islands of the Arctic Sea, and embra- 
cing more than the fourth of the distance from the equator to the pole, 
which had never before been visited by a professed naturalist. I perceived at 
once the magnitude of the field, and comprehended at a glance that it was 
far beyond my grasp. The only previous training I had was the little 
natural science that I had learnt at my northern Alma Mater as a colla- 
teral branch of my medical education, but I thought that I could at least 
record what I saw; and I determined so to do as intelligently as I could 
and without exaggeration, hoping in this way to furnish facts on which the 
leaders of science might reason, and thus promote the progress of Natural 
History to the extent of my-limited ability. This was the rule I followed 
during the eight years that I passed in those countries actually engaged in 
the several expeditions.” His concluding words, too, we are tempted to 
give, distinctive as they are of a quality of his illustrious friend, Sir John 
Franklin, which, with other gracious ones, gained him the regard of all 
who had the happiness of serving under him. 

«TI cannot forbear adding one word to my thanks for the very high 
honour which I have appeared before you to receive—it is an expression 
of mournful regret that your late member, my old and dear friend and 
commanding officer in the Expeditions of Discovery, does not survive to wit- 
ness this day. He would have rejoiced with unmixed satisfaction at your 
appreciation of my labours. From him I received every assistance in col- 
lecting specimens that was in his power to give; his sympathy encouraged 
me, and his claims which, as commanding officer, he might have to the 
reputation of whatever was done by one of his subordinates, he honourably 
and cheerfully ceded to him who did the work, in my case as in others. So 
that contributions were made to science, no personal interests were allowed 
to interfere.” 

Besides the works already mentioned, he was the author of the ‘ Fauna 
Boreali-Americana,’ of Zoological Appendices to the Voyages of Parry, 
Ross, and Back, of Zoological Reports and Contributions to the British 
Association for the Advancement of Science, of which Association he was 
an old member and a regular attendant at its meetings, and the article 
“Ichthyology” in the last edition of the Encyclopeedia Britannica. 

He was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society in 1825; he received the 


xliti 


honorary degree of Doctor of Civil Law from the University of Dublin at 
the time of the Meeting of the British Association in that city in 1857; 
he was an honorary Fellow of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, and he 
belonged to many foreign Societies, European and American. 

He was three times married, first, as already related, to the daughter of 
Wn. Stiven, Esq., who died in 1831; secondly, to the only daughter of 
John Booth, Esg,, the niece of Sir John Franklin; she died in 1845, 
leaving him five children, of whom three are surviving, a daughter, married 
since his decease to Charles Reynolds, Esq., and two sons, one, the eldest, 
a Captain in the Royal Artillery, the other a Lieutenant in the Royal En- 
gineers; thirdly, to the youngest daughter of Archibald Fletcher, Hsq., 
Advocate, of Edinburgh, in 1847, his surviving widow, to whom the place 
of his retirement belonged, and where she still resides. 


The life of Admiral W1111aAm Henry Smyrn comprises such a field of 
arduous labour and successful result, that we must confine ourselves to the 
merest synopsis. Forty years a member of our Society (from June 15, 
1826), and all that time engaged in works which brought high reputation, 
his connexion with the Society was confined for the most part to personal 
exertion on the Council. The benefits which he conferred on the naval 
service, on astronomy, on geography, and on archeology, must be recorded 
in detail in more appropriate places than this record. 

He was born January 21, 1788. His father was an American loyalist, 
and a descendant of Captain John Smith, the colonizer of Virginia. He 
entered the Navy in 1805, and was actively engaged until 1815 in the 
Indian seas, and on the coasts of Spain and Italy. Here he had his full 
share of adventure and of danger; and it was during this first period that 
his love of surveying developed itself, and atvtacted the notice of the 
Admiralty. From 1817 to 1824 he was engaged in that great survey of 
the Mediterranean—the greatest scientific survey ever planned and com- 
pleted by one individual—which is now recorded in two hundred charts, 
and_is the admiration of the naval world. By this unexampled result of 
intelligence and industry he won high reputation and the approbation of 
the Government, shown by grant of permission to accept a foreign order. 
This was the only public acknowledgement which he ever received, so far 
as we can learn. 

His naval career ended in 1824 ; but for many years he was employed 
in the completion of his charts. In 1828 he settled at Bedford, and from 
thence until 1842, either at Bedford or Cardiff, he varied his pursuits by 
close attention to the astronomy of double stars and other extra-meridional 
pursuits. His well-known “Cycle” has done much to quicken a taste for 
astronomy among naval men. 

The last years of his life were rated near Aylesbury. THis friend the 
late Dr. Lee had purchased his instruments, and had attached a small ob- 
servatory to Hartwell House. Admiral Smyth’s residence, St. John’s 


xliv 


Lodge, was within a short walk of this observatory ; and to the end of his 
life (September 9, 1865) he was engaged in occasional observation. His 
long list of scientific titles might be supported by as long a list of published 
works, independently of scientific memoirs. His books on Sicily and Sar- 
dinia, his life of Captain Beaver, his accounts of his own cabinet of Roman 
coins and of that of the Duke of Northumberland, his works on the anti- 
quities of Hartwell, his account of the Mediterranean, and others, are read 
with pleasure and profit. But perhaps the most remarkable, as the most 
professional and the most characteristic, is the long series of articles which 
he contributed to the United Service Journal. In this series, running over 
more than twenty years, he has discussed almost every possible nautical 
subject. He was eminently a collector; and a Nautical Dictionary, of a 
very wide character, is now in the press under the care of a lady who was 
for fifty years his scientific colleague as well as his devoted wife. 

An extended account contained in the last annual report of the Royal 
Astronomical Society will render further detail unnecessary. We give a 
few words to the personal qualities of our subject. Admiral Smyth was 
one of those men who are the cement of all the associations to which they 
belong. His genial manners, and the full reliance which all placed on his 
good faith, his kindness, and his activity, did much to promote unity and, 
when such a thing arose, to prevent misunderstanding from becoming 
serious disagreement. ‘The compound of the jolly seaman—no other word 
will do—the educated scholar, and the kind-hearted gentleman, which ap- 
peared in Admiral Smyth is far beyond any character-painting but that of 
the dramatist or the novelist. A man is known by his associates ; and 
when persons of the most different dispositions and temperaments are united 
through life in pursuit of good objects, there must be a something which 
keeps them together; and that something must contain benevolence of 
feeling in large measure. If the world were searched, it would hardly he 
possible to produce four specimens of mankind so very different as Francis 
Baily, Richard Sheepshanks, John Lee, and William Henry Smyth, and it 
would be as difficult to produce four men who lived in more cordial inti- 
macy and friendship broken only by death. 


JOHANN Franz Encxs, For. Memb. R.S., was born on the 23rd of Sep- 
tember, 1791, at Hamburg, where his father was pastor of St. James’s 
Church. After passing through the Gymnasium of Hamburg, he entered 
the University of Gottingen in the autumn of 1811. Here he remained 
pursuing his studies under the direction of Gauss till the spring of 1813, 
when his patriotism impelled him to take part in the war. He served in 
Hamburg till the place fell, and afterwards in Mecklenburg, as Sergeant- 
Major in the Horse Artillery of the Hanseatic Legion, in which he remained 
till June 1814. He then resumed kis studies in Gottingen, but was again 
called away by the events of 1815. He now entered the Prussian service, 
holding a commision as Second Lieutenant in the Artillery, and during the 


xlv 


greater part of the time he remained in it was stationed in the fortress of 
Thorn. He quitted the Prussian service in March 1816, and in the follow- 
ing July became assistant to von Lindenau in the Observatory of Seeberg. 

He was appointed Vice-Director of the Observatory in 1820, and Director 
on the retirement of von Lindenau in July 1822. His works on the 
transits of Venus of 1761 and 1769 were published in 1822 and 1824 
respectively. A supplement to the latter, rendered necessary by the dis- 
covery made by von Littrow, that Hell had tampered with the original ob- 
servations made by himself at Wardhus, appeared in the Transactions of 
the Berlin Academy for 1835. In 1819 he published his identification of 
the comets observed by Mechain and Messier on the17th of January, 1786, 
by Miss Herschel on the 17th November, 1795, by Pons on the 20th of 
October, 1805, and again by Pons on the 26th of November, 1818. This 
comet, to which Encke’s name has been given, having a periodic time of 
about 1207 days, was observed on the 3rd of June, 1822, at Paramatta by 
Rumker. The discussion of all the observations led Encke to the conclu- 
sion that the only way of reconciling them was by the supposition of a 
resisting medium by which the times of its revolutions are successively 
lessened. One of the Royal Medals of the Society for the year 1828 was 
awarded to him for this investigation. He had already (in 1825) been 
elected a Foreign Member. 

In 1825 he was called to Berlin as Professor of Astronomy in the Uni- 
versity and Director of the Observatory. In his hands the Berlin Ephemeris 
received many improvements, of which he gave an account in the Trans- 
actions of the Berlin Academy for 1827. He superintended the publication 
of this work from the volume for 1830 to that for 1852, when he was 
assisted by- Professor Wolfers till the publication of the volume for 1863, 
after which the latter became sole editor. The volumes contain numerous 
supplements by Encke on the perturbations of planets, the method of least 
squares, mechanical quadratures, the solution of numerical equations, the 
form and dimensions of the earth, and many papers on the correction of 
the errors of astronomical instruments. 

The Observatory, a tower dating from 1711, being unsuitable for the 
reception of fixed instruments, and in a bad situation, at von Humboldt’s 
. suggestion a new Observatory was erected on a plan approved of by Encke ; 
and on the 11th of October, 1835, he observed the position of Halley’ s 
comet with the large equatoreal mounted in its place i in the new Observatory. 
The observations mee here were published in four quarto volumes between 
the years1840 and 1857. He is the author of upwards of one hundred 
separate works and memoirs dating from 1812 to 1860. The latter are 
contained chiefly in the ‘ Zeitschrift’ of von Lindenau and Bohnenberger, 
von Zach’s ‘Correspondance Astronomique,’ Bode’s and Encke’s ‘ Jahr- 
biicher,’ the ‘Astronomische Nachrichten,’ and the ‘ Sitzungsberichte ’ 
and ‘ Abhandlungen’ of the Berlin Academy. 

In 1859 he suffered from an apoplectic attack, brought on, it is supposed, 


xlvi 


by excessive mental exertion. He obtained leave of absence from the 
Observatory in the spring of 1863, and resigned his post as Director early 
in 1864. He passed the remainder of his life in the midst of his family 
at Spandau. His judgment and memory remained unimpaired till within 
a few weeks of his end. He died on the 26th of August, 1865. 


ApboLF THEODOR von KupPrFreR, For. Memb. R.S., was born at Mitau, 
in Courland, where his father was a merchant, on the 6th of January (Old 
Style), 1799. At the age of sixteen he entered the University of Dorpat as 
a medical student, but remained there only a few months. In 1816 he 
entered the University of Berlin, also as a medical student, but the study 
of medicine becoming distasteful to him, he applied himself to the ma- 
thematical and physical sciences, and to mineralogy, under the direction 
of Weiss. In 1819 he went to the University of Gottingen, and in 1820 to 
Paris, where he attended Haiiy’s lectures on Mineralogy. He established 
himself in St. Petersburg, where he lectured on mineralogy in the winter of 
1821-1822. In the spring of 1822 he was appointed Professor of Physics, 
Chemistry and Mineralogy in the University of Kasan, and at the same 
time commissioned to visit Paris for the purpose of procuring a collection 
of physical instruments. While there he competed successfully for a prize 
proposed by the Academy of Berlin for an essay on the measurement of the 
angles of crystals. In concert with Arago he planned a series of observa- 
tions on the daily variation of the magnetic declination, and the disturb- 
ances of the declination, at Kasan. He entered upon the duties of his 
Professorship in June 1823, devoting the time not occupied in teaching to 
crystallography and magnetism. In April 1828 he was sent on a scientific 
mission to the Ural, the results of which were published in 1834. They 
consist mainly of geological observations, the discovery of new localities of 
some scarce minerals, and of many determinations of the temperature of the 
soil, made conjointly with Adolf Erman. 

Having been elected a member of the Imperial Academy of Sciences, he 
went to reside in St. Petersburg in August 1828. Early in 1829 he suggested 
to the Academy the erection of a small magnetic observatory. The project 
was warmly supported by von Humboldt, who happened to be in St. Pe- 
tersburg on his way to the Ural and Altai. It was approved of by the _ 
Academy, and the building commenced before the end of the year. In the 
summer of 1829 he was placed at the head of a scientific party engaged 
in exploring a part of the Caucasus near Mount Elbrus, into which no 
European had ever penetrated before, and where, for the protection of the 
travellers against the native tribes, they were accompanied by a strong 
escort of troops under the command of General Immanuel, the General in 
command of the Caucasus, who had planned the expedition. 

At this period he lectured at the School of Civil Engineering, the Pida- 
gozische Institut, and the Academy for Naval Officers, and was engaged 
in writing his ‘ Handbuch der rechuenden Krystallometrie,’ which appeared 


xlyi 


in 1831. In 1835, Count Cancrien, the Minister of Finance, at Kupffer’s 
suggestion, consented to the establishment of small magnetic observatories 
at Catherinenburg, Barnaul, Nertschinsk, Sitka, and Helsingfors, subse- 
quently at Tiflis and Moscow, and lastly at Pekin. The observations for 
the years 1835-1846 were published in the ‘ Annuaire magnétique et 
météorologique du corps des Ingénieurs des mines de Russie.’ All these 
observatories were placed in 1843 under the direction of a central institu- 
tion, the Physical Observatory of St. Petersburg, where the various obser- 
vations were reduced and edited, and magnetical and meteorological instru- 
ments were kept for the use of members of scientific expeditions. Kupffer 
was placed at the head of this establishment, and ceased to lecture, in 
order that he might devote all his energies to the duties of his new office. 
The collected observations for the years 1847-1858 have been published in 
the ‘ Annales de Observatoire physique central de Russie.’ During the 
latter years of his life he was actively engaged in establishing telegraphic 
communication with foreign observatories, for the purpose of giving storm- 
signals at stations on the coasts of the Russian empire. 

In 1841 he edited an account of the labours of a Commission, of which 
he was a member, appointed to fix the standards of measure and weight of 
the Russian empire. Besides comparing the standards of Russia with those 
of many other countries, the commissioners redetermined the weight of a 
given volume of water, one of the most important constants of nature, with 
a precision, in all probability, hitherto unequalled. : 

The first volume of his researches on the elasticity of metals (Etude 
expérimentale de la flexion et des oscillations transversales des lames élas- 
tiques) was published in 1860. The second volume, containing experi- 
ments on metals produced in the Russian furnaces, and the third, on the 
elasticity of torsion and rotatory oscillation, are, it is believed, still un- 
published. He was elected a Foreign Member of the Royal Society in 
1846. 

A chill, caused by exposure to cold while superintending the erection of 
a self-recording anemometer on the roof of the Physical Observatory, 
brought on an attack of typhoid fever, of which he died on the 4th of June 
1865. 


ar 


" 


on 


de 


ie $81 31 ae, 


1866. ] Secular. Change of Magnetic Dip at Kew. 2 


During the years from 1856 to 1859 inclusive, monthly observations 
were made with a circle known as the Kew circle, two needles being 
always used, and the mean of the two results taken as the true value of 
the dip. 

From this circle we have the following results :— 


Year. Mean dip. Yearly secular change. 
1856. 68 27-67 

1837. . 24°36 3°31 

1858. 22°80 1°56 

1859. 20°73 2°07 


_If we take the mean of these three values of yearly secular change, and 
also include that between 1854 and 1855, we have a mean value of yearly 
secular change, for the period between 1854 and 1859, amounting to 
2'-29, and this value will not be sensibly altered if we omit the observa- 
tions between 1854 and 1855. 

In 1859 it was resolved to substitute another circle for the Kew circle, 
as the action of the latter was not considered to be quite satisfactory ; and 
accordingly since this date Barrow’s circle No. 33 has been employed, 
and monthly observations have been made with it, generally in the after- 
noon—two needles being used, as before. 

From this circle we have the following results : — 


Year. Mean dip. Yearly secular change. 
1860. 68 20-21 

1861. 18°21 2°00 

1862. 15°58 2°63 

1863. 12°66 2°92 

1864. 9°88 2°78 


exhibiting between 1860 and 1864 a mean secular change of 2'-58. 

It will be noticed from this, that the mean yearly secular change of 
dip at Kew appears to be greater from 1860 to 1864, a period of increasing 
disturbances, than from 1854 to 1859, a period of decreasing disturbances. 
Possibly the yearly decrement of dip has again begun to diminish, since 
the change from 1864 to 1865 is only 1°32. It is, however, premature 
to assert that this is the case, and it can only be decided by continuing 
the monthly observations. At all events the Kew observations agree with 
those at Toronto in indicating that the yearly change of dip contains the 
combined result of two things—namely, the true secular change and the 
change due to disturbance; and this ought to be borne in mind by future 
observers of this magnetic element. 


One 


£ Va feb 


Superintendent of the Trigonometrical Survey of India. — 255 


He has taken experiments at the following stations, which you will find 
in the chart at the end of Everest’s description of the measurement of the 
Indian Arc, Dehra Doon, Nojli, Kaliana, Dateri, and Usira. At Dehra 
_ Doon he took six sets of observations with each pendulum; but finding 

he could advance more rapidly than the observatories could be got ready 
for him, at the subsequent stations he took ten sets of observations with 
each pendulum.- Each set was carried over eight to nine hours, from 
9 a.m. to 53 p.m. The pendulum was set in motion in the morning, the 
coincidences were observed, and the thermometers and are of vibration 
were read hourly, until the set terminated in the afternoon. ‘The first and 
last coincidences will be used only for determining the number of vibrations ; 
but the whole of the intermediate temperatures and arcs will be employed 
for determining the corrections for temperature and arc. He was very 
fortunate in his transits, only losing four nights in sixty ; compiete sets of 
observations were twice taken at Kaliana (the northern extremity of the 
Indian arc) in December, when the temperature was lowest, and again this 
month when it was highest ; the range was not so great as we had antici- 
pated, being 58° in the first instance, and 92° in the second, so that the 
results will scarcely be applicable to the observations at Kew, where, to the 
best of my recollection, the temperature was between 40° and 50°; but 
they will amply suffice for all the observations that are likely to be taken 
in India. He endeavoured to observe at a constant pressure, but the 
leaking of the cylinder prevented this; however, the whole range of 
pressure does not exceed 3 inches, and the average range is much less, the 
maximum being 5 inches and the minimum 2. He is about to commence 
a series of observations at Masoori, at an altitude of about 6800 feet above 
the sea. He hopes to complete these during June, before the r.iny season 
sets in, when transits will be impossible. 

During the rains he will be employed in completing the calculations 
connected with his experiments. By September I hope to be able to send 
you the final results. 

He has had so much to do in surmounting the difficulties arising from 
his new apparatus, that he could not manage to take any magnetic obser- 
vations. In future, however, he hopes to be able to take these observations 
regularly at each of his pendulum stations. 

I trust that you will be gratified with this account of his first year’s 
operations. No pains have been spared to secure results of the highest 
possible value, and to reward the confidence you reposed in us, when you 
suggested to the India Office that we should undertake these delicate and 
difficult operations. 

Believe me, yours sincerely, 
General Sabine, P.R.S. J. WALKuR. 


VOL. XV. Xi 


ey 
bet ; 


a A Bata 
Soe 


319 


a. 


ts in Ind 


Pendulum Eaperimen 


1866.] 


‘SYIPVAI oy} puv svkepemtpy oy} Usemyoq AdT[VA B UI poyeNyts St vIYAT x 


I — i 


I 
QTE | 9E6 
T T 
GEE) S6T 
t ut 
LEE) 68T 
T L 
GPE) TLT 
ie iE 
“MOST | ‘RIIS A, 


YIM poreduroo 
yore ‘4410714 
-diyjo Jo onze A 


LLL-SEO9S 
1E8-8Z098 
9g¢. 


GO98 
\990- 16098 


‘Apieg, 


"RIIS(] JO SUUIOY UT 
suoTyeIqrA poyndutog 


1496-60198 |8LL-T L198 |118:68 |G89-16 |276-FI 198 


eeeeee 


“"** 1960.02098 


168-€G098 |189-G |G6L-4 |696-76098 


F0"-8G098 |1FG-8 |80F-8 |664-96098 


LLL-6C098 |O67-6 |189-6 |F8z6-9G098 

886: 16098 |046-01 cae 660-9G098 
"166 

1 T 

‘OYILLTO 


‘Oy ALTD 


“Aqrorydiypo ey 


SUIS “BAIS 
0} mOTjONpey 


O1F-F9098 
619-696°8 
CBL-FLGSS 
99F-C1608 | 


68P-S9T98 
069-0L098 
991-2098 
666-EL098 


6 
1€9-¢L698 


‘T68T ON 


&F8-9L098 
96F-9L098 


= ‘ON 


"[9A9T-BOS TROT 
0} psonpoa ‘onava 


ur THeIp tod st0Ty 
-BAIQIA POALOSGQ 


6866 
"qooy 


[OAT 
-vag 
UveTL 
aAOge 
WSOP 


)OL 83 1g 
Le 9c 
G tr & 
GG O€ 6Z 
83 &° 6z 
0 96 OS 

‘opnqnyey 


teereereereees Moy 
ie] 
a TD (Cog BAIR 1] 
o 2 
ene | “ee TOAUCT 
DE ; 
g ae eULTT ey 
(=am 
© 
oO 
3 i apeeery 1TloN 
P| eeeee ereeeoe PITOT 


“HOTIEFY JO oUle Ny 


QO-COBT Uosues Pll 


"69-969 oAnqeroduiay, UBoT, 0} poonpory © 


"SUONVALOSYO WN[Npusg JO s}[Msoy JO JoVAISQ YW [VUOIS!AoIg 


adjourned over the Christmas recess, to Thursday, 


The Society then 


January 10. 


es a ae 


3 


1867. | Dr. Parkes on the Elimination of Nitrogen. 355 


The reason of these differences between Professors Fick and Wislicenus 
and myself, is probably to be found in the short period of time during 
which their observations were carried on, and also because the urea was 
not determined by them in the night of the 30th to 31st of August. 

But their conclusion is certainly borne out, that on a non-nitrogenous 
diet exercise produces no notable increase in the nitrogen of the urine, 
although, when the whole period is considered, it does produce a slight 
increase. 

It may now also be said that, under similar conditions, exercise pro- 
duces no increase in the excretion of nitrogen by the bowels. 

The diminution in the amount of urea during the actual period of work, 
as compared with the rest-period, which, if I am not mistaken, is obvious 
in both our experiments, is a very curious circumstance. It shows, not 
that on a non-nitrogenous diet the nerves and muscles are totally unaffected 
by exercise, but that changes go on which either retain nitrogen in the 
body or eliminate it by another channel. 

Is it possible that when the excess of nitrogen is restricted, the ex- 
hausted muscle will take nitrogen from the products given off from 
another portion of decomposing muscle, and thus the nitrogen may be 
used over and over again? or, after all, is nitrogen really given off in some 
form by the skin during exercise, as formerly supposed? 

Although it is thus certain that very severe exercise can be performed 
on non-nitrogenous diet for a short time, it does not follow that nitrogen 
is unnecessary. The largest experience shows not only that nitrogen 
must be supplied if work is to be done, but that the amount must aug- 
ment with the work. But for a short period the well-fed body possesses 
sufficient nitrogen to permit muscular exertion to go on for some time with- 
out fresh supply. But the destruction of nitrogenous tissues in these two 
men is shown by the way in which, when nitrogen was again supplied, 
a large amount was retained in the body to compensate for the previous 
deprivation. 

I believe also that in these two men the great exhaustion of the second 
day showed that their muscles and nerves were becoming structurally im- 
paired, and that if the experiments had been continued there would have 
been on the third day a large diminution in the amount of work. 

I have found that the period when a restricted supply of nitrogen 
begins to tell on the work differs in different men; in one experiment 
I reduced the nitrogen in the food to one half its normal quantity in two 
men ; in one no effect was produced on exercise in seven days, in the other 
a lessening of active bodily work was produced in five days ; doubtless the 
previous nutrition of the muscle would influence the time. 

Finally, it may be questioned whether the relation of elimination of 
nitrogen to exercise can be properly determined in this manner, 7. e. by 
cutting off the supply of nitrogen. The true method would probably be 
to supply nitrogen in certain definite amount, so that the acting muscle 
might appropriute at once what it required. 


1867.] Ternary Quadratic Forms. 389 


stration) the formule which assign the weight of a given genus or order 
of forms of an uneven discriminant. These formule: are demonstrated in 
the present Paper, and, with them, the corresponding formule relating to 
the cases in which the discriminant is even. The demonstration is obtamed 
by a method similar to that employed by Gauss and Dirichlet for the de- 
termination of the number of binary classes of a given determinant. The 
sum of the weights of the representations, by a system of forms represent- 
ing the classes of any proposed genus, of all the numbers contained in 
certain arithmetical progressions, and not surpassing a given number, is in 
a finite ratio to the sesquiplicate power of the given number when that 
number is supposed to increase without limit. Of this limiting ratio, two 
distinct determinations are obtained; of which the first contains, as a 
factor, the weight of the proposed genus; and an expression for that 
weight is obtained by a comparison of the two determinations. Of these 
determinations, the first is obtained immediately by an elementary applica- 
tion of the integral calculus; the second depends on an arithmetical 
theorem, which is deduced in the Paper from the analysis employed by 
Gauss in arts. 279-284 of the ‘ Disquisitiones Arithmetic,’ and which may 
be expressed as follows :— 

«The sum of the weights of the representations of a given number 
(contained in one of certain Arithmetical Progressions) by a system of 
forms representing the classes of a ternary genus, is equal to the weight of 
a genus of binary forms, of which the determinant is the product, taken 
negatively, of the given number by the second invariant of the ternary 
forms.” 

By this proposition the determination of the limiting ratio is made to 
depend on an approximate determination of the weight (or, which is here 
the same thing, the number) of the binary classes of certain series of nega- 
tive determinants. Two methods are given in the Paper for effecting this 
approximate determination. The first method presupposes Lagrange’s 
definition of a reduced form, and depends ultimately on the evaluation of 
the definite integral 


IS (we—y") dx dy dze=™, 
J 
of which the limits are given by the inequalities 
“AO, y20, 2270) eneZ,) 2yieee 


The second method employs the expression obtained by Lejeune Dirichlet 
in the form of an infinite series for the number of binary classes of a given 
determinant, and is thus independent of the definition of a reduced form. 
The same result is obtained by both methods; but the second is more 
easily extended to the case of quadratic forms containing more than three 
indeterminates. ge 


TRE 1h 


. seer a ae beeps hain adh a 1 Wes is me we ape 


re x 


Rs 


es deh eld Rive dae ti Aas 2k ia wath 
ae Ue x ‘ “A 
Li i = t i 4 
ROE WHIRL ee TOP ye LETRA Oe ny Seas tat I ba iby 
TRULY WARE yt ii (a4 eh aoe ; Bey re ee ied jk 

i f 2 A/S) Biel? 


Oreey ap Vist Flere i AS its be te tre ee . 


‘ i< ae k rf ; rare” rie hee: 
$e 8 Shs Leese ce 3 
Sv. fat. PvE ES | ee a AG | h ; , sie PPA ETT arnt 
j P q P Tg 
‘ _ 5 i 
4 ' é Pu 3 oo H ayes ey 
— 
te 4 
¢ re ee be. 
. 1 e 
2 
an a r Lf 
& 
t © y . a i r 
2 f 
¢ 
BY) eS - i g 
? 
ae = : 
, 
+ < 
' 
-: 
. i - 
. 
‘ 
« - ‘ 
‘ 
one 
¢ 
Ay o 
ee - 
‘ —— - Bo 
‘ « « f . 
’ : 7 : =) Fo 2 
J: 
‘ : ‘ ch ox é 
, \ - , ay. “ 
é , ae 
’ B; 
i Fa . 
> * 7 . Hi iia 
se FB 
: te fy ee 
s ‘ pa ' 4 , 
t 
; : § . ‘ 
) ¢ { ' & a 
ak ‘ és i Lbae : pa fo. cei a ae ee a 13> - 
= 4 
/ 
&. } # 
on } 
“ ’ % 
é 


1867.| Coloursng-matters by the Spectrum Microscope. 455 


25. Fading of Group C. 


Sometimes in examining colours of group C, advantage may be taken of 
the different rate at which their acid solutions decompose and fade, when 
a considerable quantity of sulphite of soda has been added to an acid solu- 
tion, The two solutions should be made as nearly equal as possible in all 
respects, and then the rate of fading may prove that they are very different, 
or may show that one is a mixture. After fading, the addition of excess 
of ammonia may show valuable facts. For example, the colour of the root 
of the red beet (Beta vulgaris) is pink, but that of the leaves is red; the 
spectrum differmg from that of the root merely in having the blue end 
much absorbed. On keeping acid solutions of both to which sulphite of 
soda has been added, that of the root becomes colourless, and that of the 
leaves yellow; and thus, considering that acid solutions of colours be- 
longing to group C are very rarely pink, it is almost certain that the 
colour of the leaves is the same as that of the root, but modified by the 
yellow colour so common in leaves. 


26. Conclusion. 


Such, then, is a general outline of the method which I have hitherto found 
the most convenient in studying different colouring-matters, and for de- 
termining to what individual species any particular colour may belong. I 
need hardly say that it is just the sort of qualitative analysis to employ 
in detecting adulterations in many substances met with in commerce, as well 
as in inquiries where very small quantities of material are at command. 
By this method we might be able in a few minutes to form a very satisfac- 
tory opinion, or at least one that might meet all practical requirements, and 
even under unfavourable circumstances we might narrow the inquiry to a 
surprising extent; and if this can be said even now, surely further research 
cannot fail to make it most useful in cases where ordinary chemical 
analysis would be of little or no use. 


The Society then adjourned over the Kaster Recess to Thursday, May 2. 


% ™ 


en a Bit 40 eh 


PROCEEDINGS OF 


THE ROYAL SOCIETY. 


VOL. XV. No. 80. 


- CONTENTS. 


Bee: January 11, 1866. 
‘1 : PAGE 


On the Colouring and Extractive Matters of Urine.—Part I. By Epwarp 
IN RR rei el gh gs GO ap ge. ah eae teem tae pe eine 


é 


January 18, 1866. 


I. Sixth Memoir on Radiation and oe By Professor J. TYNDALL, 


_ II. On the Spectrum of Comet-1, 1866. By Witu1am Hueatns,F.R.S. . . ib. 


January 25, 1866. 


Note on the Secular Change of Magnetic Dip, as recorded at the Kew Ob- 


. servatory. By Batrour Stewart, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., Superintendent 
hs me dtiad OUseryatory a Pee ay, eee 


« The Table of Contents and Index to Vol. XIV. are herewith sent, to be bound up 
with that Volume, 


TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREBRT. 


See oF 


PROCEEDINGS OF 


THE ROYAL SOCIETY. 


VOL. XV. No. 81. 


Se ee - CONTENTS. 


February 1, 1866. 


PAGE. 


I. On the Specific Gravity of Mercury. By Batrour Stewart, M.A., LL.D., 
F.R.S., Superintendent of the Kew Observatory 


II. On the Forms of Graphitoidal Silicon and Graphitoidal Boron. By W. 
HH. Mitter, M.A., For. Sec. R.S., and Professor of ee in the 
University of Canbridee ; Ree agn a My Scie 3 aye ar ia 


February 8, 1866. 


On the Viscosity or Internal Friction of Air and other Gases, Heing the 
BAKERIAN LECTURE, delivered by James CheRK Maxwett, M.A., F.R.S. 


February 15, 1866. 


Further Observations on the Spectra of some of the Nebule, with a Mode of 
ote the Brightness of these Bodies. By Wititiam Hua@ains, 
EB, Li Ss. . e e °. ° ° . « . s . 


February 22, 1866. 


I. Account of Experiments on the Flexural and Torsional Rigidity of a Glass 
Rod, leading to the determination of the Rigidity of Glass. By JosrEpH D. 
Everett, D.C.L., Assistant to the Professor of Mathematics in the Uni- 
versity of Glasgow it o> sae 


II. Note on the relative Chemical Intensities of direct Sunlight and diffuse Day- 
light at different Altitudes of the Sun. By Henny E. rome E.R.S., and 
J OSEPH BAXENDELL, F.R.A.S. (Plate I.) . Ave 


TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET, 


10 


11 


14 


17 


wag 


PROCEEDINGS OF 


THE ROYAL SOCIETY, 


VOL. XV. , | No. 82. 
Ps Te 
é aN CONTENTS. 


March 1, 1866. 
PAGE. 


Researches on Acids of the Lactic Series.—No. I. Synthesis of Acids of the 
Lactic Series. By H. FRanKianp, F.R.S., and B. F. Duppa, Esq. . . . 26 


March 8, 1866. 


I. Note ona Correspondence between Her Majesty’s Government and the Presi- 
dent and Council of the Royal Society regarding Meteorological Observa- 
tions to be made by Seaand Land. By Lieutenant-General Sabine, P.R.S. 29 


II. On the Action of Compasses in Iron Ships. By Mr. Jonn Littzry . . . 38 


III. On the Tidal Currents on the West Coast of Scotland. By ARCHIBALD 
Maren MLAS HORS. S48 ee a8 St Fleets, Ca otaee Oa ay ania ae 


March 15, 1866. 


On a possible dateenan Cause of Changes in the Position of the Axis of the 
Earth’s Crust. By Joun Evans, F.R.S.,Sec.G:S.. . . . . - . . 46 


March 22, 1866. 


I. On the Action of Trichloride of Phosphorus on the Salts of the Aromatic 
Monamines. By A. W. Hormany, LL.D., F.RS.,& . . . . . . 55 


Il. Notice of a Zone of Spots on the Sun. By Jonn Puitiies, M.A., LL.D., 
E.RB.S., Professor of Geology in the University of Oxford. . . . . . . 68. 


TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. 


' 
' ae 


» 
-~  +PROCEEDINGS OF 


THE ROYAL SOCIETY. 


e -VOL. Xv. No. 83. 


> 3 
KS 
ae / CONTENTS. 
% A. ayy 
ie Tt ae 
_ gail April 12, 1866. 
A PAGE 
FE. On Uniform Rotation. By C. W. Siemens, F.RS. . . 2. . 2... G1 


It. On a Fluorescent Substance, resembling Quinine, in Animals; and on the 
Rate of Passage of Quinine into the Vascular and Non-vascular Textures of 

the Boer pe: H. BENCE JONES, M.D., F.R.S., and A. big sete Ph.D., 
PS. 73 


April 19, 1866. 


I. Account of the Discovery of the Body of a Mammoth, in Arctic Siberia, in 
a Letter from Dr. Cart ERNstT von Bakr, of St. Petersburgh, For. Mem. 


ena : . 93 

IT. On the Bursa Fabricii By a OHN ie M. D, r R. s., eS Sent gh 
Til. Researches on Gun-cotton.—Memoir I. ae and Pi eae of 

Gun-cotton. By F. A. ABEt, F.R.S., V.P.C.S...0 2... - 102 


a TY. On the Mysteries of Numbers alluded to by Ronis By the Rt. Hoe 
Sir FREDERICK Pottocr, Lord Chief Baron, F.R.S., &e. 


[This Paper will be given in the next Number. | 


April 26, 1866. 
I. On the Dentition of Rhinoceros ects rey. BY iW: Boyp Daw: 


gins, M.A. Oxon, F.G.8. . . . 106 
Il. Experimental Researches in Magnetism a Beet ne L By H. 
Werepe, Msg. —..... . 107 
Ill. Extract of a Letter from ee Cees Raq: a5 Aas Superintendent 
of the Bombay Magnetic Observatory, to the President . . RED 
IV. On the Tides of the Arctic Seas.—Part III. On the Semidiumal Tides of 
Frederiksdal, near le Farewell, in Greenland. a the Rey. 8. Haugu- 
Og 94S: eee . 114 
ERRATA. 


Page 25, last line (and throughout the same paper), for oraly/ read oxatyl. 
» 27, fifteenth line from bottom, for alcohol hydrogen read alcohol radical. 


~ 


TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. 


PAGE 


“ On the Niysteries of Numbers alluded to by Fontat BY the Rt. Hon. 


ahs , May 3, 1866. 
ae on “the iercting from the Mediterranean to the Dead Sea. By 


I. No on the Amyl-Compounds derived ear Petroleum. By C. Siccies i 


Bee . 


IL. On a New Series of Hydrocarbons derived from Coal-tar. By C.Scuor- 
- INMMER . .. . DR Se eer BP ee On ee ot weve eke 
‘The Calculus of Chemical | ee ee a ‘Methoa for the Siestiaation : 
_ by means of Symbols, of the Laws of the Distribution of Weight in- 
- Chemical Change. Part I—On the Construction of Chemical Symbols. 
_ By Sir B. C. Bropts, Bart., F. R. oy Professor of Chemistry in the Uni- 
"sg Senta ee Bh ee wee OS br eral, te, DS 


oe . | . May 17, 1866. as 
ua 1 On the Motion “7 a ‘Rigid Bade moving fly about a Fixed Point. By 


or regulating Denese’ a ae the Air in 
d ye te of Moisture. By J. P. Gassior, Hsq., 


of | a Names ‘ai in Goes ee By via Oe 


1 of Determiasate, being a vew and brief Method for computing 
Faso ed re 2 Je i i a * fer Student. of 


A ae “May 81, 1866. 
i of i péchaante in some of w 


imal Electricity were detected be the 
_ ‘By Cuarzes Buayp R, 


ectroscopic: Tidicnatne of 
time oe a new method of. 


Sir FREDERICK Pottoox, Lord Chief Baron, FIRS. &e.. . . 5. i oe 


alonel Sir Henry James; R.H.; PRS. : : 128 


ee es FES, ae We, ike Pir neaa eye tg Shae. oe 


and W. A. Mirren, M.D., V.-P.and Treas. B.S. Seige eS, 


2 
4 
4 
; 
¥ 
J 
é 


PROCEEDINGS OF 


THE ROYAL SOCIETY. 


cea. TORT. No. 85. 


We. <8 «CONTENTS. 
aia PAGE 
TY. On the Stability of Domes. By E. WynpHAmM Taryn, M.A. ... . . 188 
June 7, 1866. 


I. On the Anatomy of the Fovea centralis of the Human Retina. By J. W. 
Huixe, F.R.C.S., Assistant Siege to the Middlesex and Royal London 


Ophthalmic Hospitals . ‘ . = E89 

II. Second Memoir “On Plane Stiematics.” By AExanpEr J. “ELIS, ERS., 
(ld D7) a ee 2 EE en Oe eb oe 

III. Fundamental Views regarding Mechanics. " By Professor J uLIUS PLUCKER, 
of Bonn, For. Mem. B.S. . . 204 

IV. Contributions to Terrestrial Magnetism. Nola "By Lieut. “General | Ep-. 
WARD SaBine, R.A., President of the Royal Society. . . . 209 


June 21, 1866. 
I. On the Relation of Rosaniline to Rosolic Acid. By H. Caro, and J. ALFRED 
WaANELYN, Professor of Chemistry at the London Institution . . . 210 
II. On the Chemical and Mineralogical Composition ofthe Dhurmsalla Meteoric 
Stone. By the Rev. Samvren Haveuton, M.D., F.R.S., Fellow of Trinity 


College, Dublin . . . 214 
III. On the Preparation of Ethylamine. By J. ALFRED WANELYN and ERNEST 

T. CHAPMAN. Se kU ean et ay Oe EO 
IV. On the Expansion by Heat of Metals and Alloys. By A. bens ia age 

E.RS. . . 220 


VY. On the Colouring and Extractive Matters of the Urine.—Part Le By Ep- 
WARD ScHuNncoxk, F.R.S. (See. anted, p.1.) 


The following Communications, read on the 21st of June, will appear in No. 86, to 
be published on the first Thursday of August. 


. On the Absorption and Dialytic Separation of Gases by Colloid Septa.— 
Part I. Action of a Septum of Caoutchouc.—Part II. Action of Metallic 
Septa at a Red Heat. By THomas Granaw, F.R.S., Master of the Mint. 

Results of the Magnetic Observations at the Kew Observatory. —No. III. 

' Lunar Diurnal Variation of the three Magnetic Elements, By Lieut.- 
General Epwarp Sainz, P.R.S. 

Variations in Human Myology observed during the Winter Session of 1865-66 
at King’s College, London. By J. Woop, Esq. 

On the Rearing of Tenia echinococcus in the Dog, from Hydatids, with some 
Observations on the Anatomy of the adult Worm. By Epwarp Nertisz- 
SHIP, Es 

On fie Weusgalae Arrangements of the Bladder, and the manner in which the 
Ureters and Urethra are closed. ByJ. B. Petriasprw,; M.D. 

Observations on the Ovum of Osseous Fishes. By W. H. “RANSOM, M.D. 


ERRATA. 

Page 169, fifth line from bottom, after dynamical theory insert comma, 
— 169, fourth line from bottom, after specific heats omit comma. 
— 17 ik sixth line from top, omit specific gravity is ‘0069 

. 


TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, -FLEET STREET. 


PROCEEDINGS OF 
THE ROYAL SOCIETY. 


VOL. xv y ee. No. 86. 


— CONTENTS. 


PAGE 
VI. On the Absorption and Dialytic Separation of Gases by Colloid Septa.— 
Part I. Action of a Septum of Caoutchouc.—Part TI. Action of Metallic 
Septa at a Red Heat. By Tuomas Granam, F.R.S., Master of the 
MR Sirah w-) a oh) SE wc ae diets ah, Oh Ae at as ee OS 
VII. Notes on the Rearing of Tenia echinococcus in the Dog, from Hydatids, with 
some Observations on the Anatomy of the adult Worm. By Epwarp 
PurriEsHip, Mem. Royal Agric. Coll... ek i wo 


VIII. Observations on the Ovum of Osseous Fishes. By W.H.Ransom,M.D. . 226 


TX. Variations in Human Myology observed during the Winter Session of 
1865-66 at King’s College, London. By Jonn Woop, F.R.C.S. . . 229 


X. On the Muscular Arrangements of the Bladder and Prostate, and the 
manner in which the Ureters and Urethra are closed. ee B. PETTI- 
RaW MINERS POPPER hr She fe ake ge) ca eR at ya oe eel 


XI. Results of the Magnetic Observations at the Kew Observatory.—No. III. 
Lunar Diurnal Variation of the three Magnetic Elements. By Lieut.- 
PeenuedE HINWARD SABING. F190 0s es hee ee a suet eee BAO 


COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVED SINCE THE END OF THE SESSION. 


I. On the Congelation of Animals. By Joun Davy, M.D., F.RS., &. . . 250 
II. Letter to the President from Lieut.-Colonel WALKER, R.E., ERS. Riga 
intendent of the Trigonometrical Survey of India . . . . 254 
om 
ERRATA, 
R373 
Page 184, line 12 aye tread ae 


— 185, ,, 24, for ¢ ioe 0) read  (1—cos 8). 

— — ,, 29, for (R?—r*). read (R?—r’) .1r. 

— 196, thirteenth line from top, omit and in an opposite direction of rotation. 

— 199, last line, for asy read asym. 

— 200, top line, for oy read oy. 

— 200, third line from bottom, for o’e’? read o’e?. 

— 200, bottom line, for o’v read o’v’. 

— 222, line 3 from bottom, for Extraction Matters of the Urine read Extractive 
Matters of Urine. 


TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STRERT. 


ee PROCEEDINGS OF 


THE ROYAL SOCIETY. 


VOL. XV. No. 


CONTENTS. 


87. 


PAGE 


November 15, 1866. 


I. &II. Papers received since the end of the Session, ee reported in the 


Perneecdinas ye ek es Co eee ebay soe 
TT. Spectroscopic Observations ofthe Sun. By J. Nonman Lockyer, F.R.A.S. 256 
TV. Ona Crystalline Fatty Acid from Human Urine. By HE. Scuuncr, F.R.S. 258 

VY. On Oxalurate of Ammonia as a Constituent of Human Urine. By EH. 
BeHMUNGE, HRS. eo. ne y45)) 

VI. On the Structure of the Optic Lobes of the Cuttle-Fish. oo LOCKHART 
CrarkE, F.R.S. mer wisikis Sie rae meeen ei race aes ere ies Seo 

November 22, 1866. 

I. On the Laws of Connexion between the conditions of a Chemical Change 

and its Amount.—No. II. On the Reactionof Hydric Peroxide and 

Hydric Iodide. By A. VeRNoN Harcourt, M.A., and W. Esson, 
PRE ERY en ee a gy ah ways Aen eek ate nes see ene « BOR 

II. On the Stability of Domes.—Part II. By E. Wynpuam Tary, M.A., 
Memb. Roy. Inst. Brit. Architects Catal nl eens cir ena bere Shs 
III. A Supplementary Memoir on Caustics. By A. Caytey, F.R.S. 268 

November 80, 1866. 
ANNIVERSARY MEETING. 

Report of Auditors : Sai aera Wa Se ate ARN re ae . 265 
List of Fellows deceased, &e. . . . . ath AG athe ea ar eRe Ser . 269 
elected since last tuoreirs See eae! She Sees . 270 
Addressofthe President .... . 270 
Presentation of the Medals ....+ 2. « » - . 278 


mre ure and Ofmcers . 0 6. SB ee ee ee 
Financial Statement . . . . SN aL apa CR hae cme - 286 & 287 
Changes and present state of the danribee of Fellows ur 


TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. 


. 285 


. 288 


oes PROCEEDINGS OF 
me 60S Sir THE: «ROYAL SOCIETY. 


VOL. Xv. . No. 88. 


, CONTENTS. 

PAGE 
December 6, 1866. 
I. Discussion of Tide-Observations at Bristol. By T.G. Bunt, Esq. . . 289 


II. On the Heating of a Disk by rapid Rotation in vacuo. By BaLFour 
Stewart, M.A., F.R.S., and P. G. Tarr, M.A. (Continuation of a. 
Paper read before the Royal Society on June 15, 1865, and ear 
in the ‘ Proceedings’) Pee ae cogil aa, oie Aes meee oa eo 


III. On the Bones of Birds at different Periods of their Growth. By JOHN 
eee WED RS, GCs ge : Spee 


December 13, 1866. 

I. On Poisson’s Solution of the Accurate Equations applicable to the Trans- 
mission of Sound through a Cylindrical Tube; and on the General 
Solution of Partial Differential Equations. By R. Moon, M.A., late 
Fellow of Queen’s College, Cambridge . . ...... ~~. ~. . 806 


II. Abstract of the Results of the Comparisons of the Standards of Length of 
England, France, Belgium, Prussia, Russia, India, Australia, made at 
the Ordnance Survey Office, Southampton. By Capt. A. R. CuaRxe, 
R.E., F.R.S., &c., under the Direction of Colonel Sir Henry Jamus, 
R.E., F.R.S., &c., Director of the Ordnance Survey. . . ... . dll 


December 20, 1866. 
I. On the Formation of “ Cells” in Animal Bodies. By E. MontGomeEry, 
Rt a eS fe ha Reet oh eb tra Vee sialetes scl lt ae 


II. Preliminary Notice of Results of Pendulum Experiments made in India. 
ypmnedt.-COMW AKERS HORS. 02. fe el goo el el ten) ee sae hel 4 oh eps 


xe Obituary Notices of Fellows Deceased : 


Perea ni RO CEM APOE go 5, oli ete a pale Seles Catt oleae lag al asa i 
MTR ee SOTA ee tie give ty rate om pen’) of Roubhee den suet oaeremea deat aie cm vi 
MAMee EU NTER CHRISTIN so :) eel es et ee ON el eke anes Xi 
Hues Fatconer .. . sy ge a a tage LTA RNC Opa 2 ca eo xiv 


Vice-Admiral ROBERT moreBor ° ° ° ° ° ° e ° ° e e ° ° ° XX 
RR MANUM COME RIVE Ze oie ail eM ers alte Meigs Wve oi lcatt gare 


ee EE ee ee ee ee ee ae ae ae eee 
= : . < : “he i D> ee ee yet 


DEG NAMEN ELV WOOD Gov gir ok eh ea eh tle. Cas ciehhT eat beeen ae tou a ae 
meh) LULIAN JACKSON FLOOKER 9) ( Sii'e' fol dene fe ha arte ee ies Siete ee 
JoHN LINDLEY. . . Stic mee Mie olire. Maine Doe aMag see Sh) S ln Quy go Me il XXX 
Sir Jonn WILLIAM LupBock Sr Tice coisa Ee ORE MONEE Mn Uiary eR tbo. 501" 
Min JOU WIC AHBEON Mion se si Coe lits ms eae mt eects: ek ow ean acer 


Admiral WiLLIAM HENRY Siren Arey ancls We Li wane ek ee) cara tis: lh” gi a ie ahs See 
La tO OW Je gh Da (ONS ae dene ie Cube ao cage hie RUMOR eka wer ie Pere IU aa uP Kee iP 
BOLE DHEODOW VOR MUPERER Asti e wk pote tes oes gk cele co eelaa Serie SES 


a ee a 


‘TAYLOR AND FRAN CIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. 


‘se 


LS Cae or eda? 


PROCEEDINGS OF 


VOL. xv. No. 89. 
4 AQhtsy. 3 
-_ J ¢ wy : 
on eg sans CONTENTS. 
4 x ? if oi 
{ 2 eh Cte January 10, 1867. | 
a PAGE 
4 On the Appendicular Skeleton of the Primates. By S81. GkoreE Mivakt, F.Z.S8. 320 
: . January 17, 1867. 
4 I, Actinometrical Observations among the Alps, with the Description of a New _ 
q Actinometer. By the Rev. Gzoraz C. Hop@Kinson. . ..... . 822 
a II. An Eighth Memoir on Quantics. By Professor ARTHUR Caytey, F.B.S. . 330 


January 24, 1867. 


q I, On a New Method of Calculating the Statical Stability of a Ship. By C. 
W. MEgRIFIELD, F.R.S., Principal of the Royal School of Naval Archi- 
COIS So te 2M RS Cl a er Ae a ab ch . 332 


II. Transformation of the Aromatic Monamines into Acids richerin Carbon. By 
Aveustus W. Hormann, LL.D., F.R.S., &. . . . Be eis . . 385 


4 January 31, 1867. 

; On the Elimination of Nitrogen by the Kidneys and Intestines during Rest 

4 and Exercise, on a Diet without Nitrogen. By E. A. PARKES, M.D., F.R.S. 339 
4 TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. 

; 4 


Ce 
is : 


4 
nei 2 


ies eM ad Pw ve at : f wy » 
mee Ste 
. <u . 
. 3 - - 
. . iil om 
on ’ 


PROCEEDINGS OF 


THE ROYAL SOCIETY. 


. No. 90. | 
4 CONTENTS. 
4 February 7, 1867. 
PAGE 
Account of Experiments on Torsion and Flexure for the Determination of 
dpiditaes: “By J.D. Everett, D.C.L. . 3 ee ee B08 


February 14, 1867. 


I. On the Relation of Insolation to Atmospheric Humidity. By J. Park 
EGA TOPEN OND 2 Soy ge gy oe Cea ge gE SIT na yy ee eit ae aa RD 


Il. On the Conversion of Dynamical into Electrical Force without the aid of 
oe Permanent Magnetism. By C. W. Stemens, F.RS.. . 2. 2. 1... . 367 


q IIT. On the Augmentation of the Power of a Magnet by the reaction thereon of 
4 Currents induced by the Magnet itself. By Cxartes WHEaTSTONE, F.R.S. 369 


February 21, 1867. 


A brief Account of the ‘ Thesaurus Siluricus,’ with a few facts and inferences. 
Dedede Miesevy, MI) ols nope ee. Eat he Boat eee Bae 


February 28, 1867. 


I. On a Transit-Instrument and a Zenith Sector, to be used on the Great Tri- 
gonometrical Survey of India for the determination, respectively, of Longi- 
tude and Latitude. By Lieut.-Colonel A. Straner, F.R.S. . . . . . 385. 


II. On the Orders and Genera of Ternary Quadratic Forms, By Hzyry J. 
STEPHEN SMERMS WEA Grey Gin. coe Soe. ot cas Gan al ethos Oe ie Oe 


TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STRERT. 


rays Bik zit wed | 


rae a eT 


en be rs i 


pare 
eS: 


PROCEEDINGS OF 


THE ROYAL SOCIETY. 


VOL. xv...” . No. 91. 


| CONTENTS. 
SPapgst ry 7 March 7, 1867. 


——— 


PAGE 

On the Influence exerted by the Movements of Respiration on the Circulation — 
of the Blood. Being the Croonzan Lecture for 1867, delivered by. 
Pele URDON SANDERCON ss 6 ee) 6 8 ee we wo hee s OO 


March 14, 1867. 


I, Note on Mr. Merrifield’s New Method of calculating the Statical Stability of 
a Ship. By W. J. Macquorn Ranxrne, C.E., LL.D., RS, . . . 396 


II. On the Theory of the Maintenance of Electric Currents by Mechanical 
Work without the Use of Permanent ae By J. CueRK Max- 
i AE SLE SIL ALS Als Co iat Am alr ea eS ee iep hin) eR ten OR 


III. On certain Points in the Theory of the Magneto-electric Machines of Wilde, 
Wheatstone, and Siemens. By C.F. Varizy, Esq. In a Letter to Pro- 
cnet MOSSE, 1N,8d 6) so) 9 ee bh) em he ei hoe + 40m 


IV, On a Magneto-electric Machine. By Wiuriam Lapp, F.R.M.S, . . . . 404 


March 21, 1867. 


I, Computation of the Lengths of the Waves of Light corresponding to the : 
Lines in the Dispersion-Spectrum measured by Kirchhofi. By Grorae 
BrppEtt Ary, F.R.S., Astronomer Royal. . , 405 
II. On a remarkable Alteration of Appearance and Structure. of the Human 
Hair. By Hrasmus Witson, F.R.S. . . . 406 
TII, Remarks on the Nature of Wieeiric Energy, and on ia Moshe by ehh if is 
transmitted. By Cuaries BRooxcE, M.A., F,R.S., P.M.S., &. . . . 408 


March 28, 1867, 


I, A Comparison between some of the simultaneous Records of the Barographs 

at Oxford and at Kew. By Batrour Srewart, LL.D., F.R.S., Super- 
intendent of the Kew Observatory. . pe Aho 

IJ, On the Lunar-diurnal Variation of the Magnetic Declination, ‘with special 
regard to the Moon’s Declination. By G.NEUMAYER. ..... . 414 


TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. 


re flag Chic 


. : 


PROCEEDINGS OF 


THE ROYAL SOCIETY. 


VOL. XV. ) No. 92. 


aos 
oe, >< 
reat : é "e 
{ { ae SN 
a 
\ yo wa } 
\ A ee 
\ xg 
MT 4 rt Ws 
Pypie J 
eee, gs 


CONTENTS. 


April 4, 1867. 
PAGE 
I. Researches on Gun-cotton.—Second Memoir. On the Stability of Gun- 


Paton soy. Ao ABuE, PRS Vib .C.Gr Goenka a ok wer ale ele Ge 


4 II. Observations of Temperature during two Eclipses of the Sun (in 1858 and 
, 1867). By Joun Purtiies, M.A., LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S., Professor of 
Geology in the University of Oxford . .:. 2. «1 we se wt AB) 


April 11, 1867. 
I. A new fact relating to Binocular Vision. By A. CuaupET, F.R.S. . . . 424 
II. On the Calculation of the Numerical Value of Euler’s Constant, which Pro- 


F fessor Price, of Oxford, calls E. By Wittiam SHanks, Esq., Houghton- 
Beene: WuChany 5 270%. est em eter Corea net Sha ekirele oft om Cent a tng ame 


III. On a Definite Method of Qualitative Analysis of Animal and Vegetable 
Colouring-matters by means of the Spectrum-Microscope. By H. C. 
MOD Ms Mol CUCh Cems! siren e saa sy brs an cihita ai ata at Mien. nips saigenemles 


TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. 


PROCEEDINGS OF 
THE ROYAL SOCIETY. 


ELE 


No. 93. 


CONTENTS. 


May 2, 1867. mores 


. Optics of Photography.—On a Self-acting Focus-Equalizer, or the means of 


producing the Differential Movement of the two Lenses of a Photographic 
Optical Combination, which is capable, during the exposure, of bringing 
consecutively all the Planes of a Solid Figure into Focus, without altering 
the size of the various images superposed. By A. CuaupET, F.R.S. . . 456 


. On the Genera Heterophyllia, Battersbyia, Paleocyclus, and Asterosmilia ; 


the Anatomy of their Species, and their Position in the classification of the 
Sclerodermic Zoantharia. By Dr. P. M. Duncan, Sec. G.S . . 460 


. Contribution to the Anatomy of Hatteria Piynclpiahs ua By 


ALBERT GUNTHER, M.A., Ph.D., M.D. ; i 460 


. On the Curves which satisfy given conditions. By Prof. CaYLEy, F.R.S. 462 
. Second Memoir on the Curves which satisfy given conditions ; the Principle 


of Correspondence. By Professor CayuEy, F.R.S. . . . . . . . . 468 
May 9, 1867. 


. On the Development and Succession of the Teeth in the Marsupialia. By 


Wit11am Henry Fiower, F.R.S., F.R.C.S., &c., Conservator of the Mu- 
seum of the Royal College of Surgeons of England is . 464 


. On a Property of Curves which fulfil the condition 5 = Pee T= By W. 


J. Macauorn Rankine, C.E., LU.D., F.R. SS.L. & B. . 468 
A Tabular Form of Analysis, to aid in tracing the Possible Influence of 

Past and Present upon future states of Weather. By S. Exziorr Hoskins, 

ORS. fe... 470 


. Monthly Magnetic Determinations, from June to November 1866 inclusive, 


made at the Observatory at Coimbra, by Professor J. A. DE She Director 
of the Observatory. With a Note by the President. . . . oa Se 


May 16, 1867. 


. On the Internal Distribution of Matter which shall produce a given Potential 


at the Surface of a Gravitating Mass. By G. G. Stoxxs, M.A., Sec. R.S. 482 


. On the Integrability of certain Partial Differential Equations proposed by 


Mr, Airy. By R. Moon, M.A., late Fellow of Queen’s College, Cambridge. 486 


. On the Lunar Atmospheric Tide at Melbourne. By Dr. G. NrumMayER. . 489 
. On the Occlusion of eee Gas by Meteoric Iron. By THomas Gra- 


HAM, F.R.S. . . 502 
Further Givenvations on ae Simard and Affinities Ae orcs OTe ee 

In a Letter to the President. ‘By Witiiam B. CagPEntsER, M.D., F.R.S., 
Pe,.83, F.GSS oo os Sens hale ade aes Gey ect of oan k cent an hE 


May 23, 1867. 


. On the Intimate Structure ofthe Brain.—Second Series. By J. Locknarr 


CLARKE, Hsq., F.R.S. . 509 


. On Pyrophosphoric Acid with the Pyro- and ‘Tetra-phosphoric ‘Amides. ‘By 


J. H. Guapstone, Ph.D., F.R.S. . Serna), 


. Ovibos moschatus (Blainville). By W. “Borp DAWwKINs, M. Me co GS, oi SLG 
. Variations in Human Myology observed during the ‘Winter Session of 


1866-67 at King’s cares London. By JoHN Woop, F,R.C.S., Demon- 
strator of Anatomy. . . oi tiigd Sie NARI R Se ie roo step ies NEN SE 


TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. 


| 
‘ 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES 


LU 


3 9088 01305 9738